HONI SOIT QVI MAL Y PENSE royal blazon or coat of arms SEMPER EADEM JOHN HVIGHEN VAN LINSCHOTEN. his Discourse of Voyages into the east & West Indies. Divided into Four Books Printed at London by JOHN WOLF Printer to the Honourable City of LONDON Willms Rogers civis Londinensis Inventor et sculptor. IW To the Right Worshipful JULIUS CAESAR Doctor of the Laws, judge of the High Court of Admiralty, Master of Requests to the Queen's Majesty, and Master of Saint Katherine's. RIGHT WORSHIPFUL: The manifold Courtesies, which it hath pleased you from time to time to multiply upon me, have made me so greatly beholden unto you, that they can never die, but remain fresh in my remembrance during my Life: So that I must enforce myself with all my best Endeavours openly to acknowledge the same, and by all the means that possibly I can, to be thankful for them; otherwise I might justly be noted with the black spot of Ingratitude, the most odious vice that can reign amongst men: which vice to avoid, I have studied earnestly to find out some way, whereby I might make known unto your Worship that dutiful reverence and affection, which I own unto you in that respect. But having hitherto had no fit opportunity or good occasion to declare the same, I have been constrained to remain in this debt, until now at last it hath pleased God to offer me a mean which I hope will not be displeasing unto you. About a Twelvemonth ago, a learned Gentleman brought unto me the Voyages and Navigation of John Huyghen van Linschoten into the Indies written in the dutch Tongue, which he wished might be translated into our Language, because he thought it would be not only delightful, but also very commodious for our English Nation. Upon this commendation and opinion, I procured the Translation thereof accordingly, and so thought good to publish the same in Print, to the end it might be made common and known to every body. And calling to mind the usual custom of Writers and Printers in these days, who do commonly shelter and shroud their works under the credit of some such as are able to Patronise the same, your Worship represented itself before me, and did (as it were of right) challenge the Patronage hereof, as being a Matter that appertaineth to your jurisdiction. For this Dutchman arriving here in England after his long travel and Navigation, and bringing rare Intelligences with him from Foreign parts, good reason it is that he should be examined by such as are in place and Authority appointed for such purposes. And to whom can he be directed better than to yourself, whom it hath pleased her most excellent Majesty to authorize for judge in Sea matters and Admiral causes. And therefore I have brought him unto you, with earnest request, that you will be pleased to examine him accordingly, and if you shall find him any way beneficial to our Country and Country men, vouchsafe him your good countenance, and give him such entertainment as he shall deserve. Thus am I bold with your worship to acknowledge my duty after this homely manner, having none other mean to show myself thankful, but by presenting you with this slender fruit of my ability & faculty, which I beseech you to accept in good part, and I shall not cease to pray to God, that he will bless you with long life, and prosperous health, to the great comfort of many her majesties Subjects and Suppliants that are daily to be relieved by your good means. Your Worships ever most bounden. JOHN WOLF. TO THE READER. LVcian in one of his Dialogues entitled 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉, or surveyors, writeth of Charon the old Ferrieman of Hell, that upon a great desire which he had conceived to view this world and the Actions of men therein, he begged leave of Pluto, that he might have a playing day, and be absent from his boat, to the end he might satisfy his thirsty humour, that troubled him so eagerly. Meeting with Mercury his fellow Boatswain, (for he also conducteth Souls in Charon's Barge) they too concluded together, like the two Sons of Alcëus, to clap the Mountain Pelius upon Mount Ossa, and when they found that they were not high enough to take the survey, they added Mount OEta unto them, and Parn●us over them all. Upon the top whereof, having settled themselves, they did at leisure and pleasure take a view not only of the Seas, and Mountains, and Cities of the world: but also of the Inhabitants thereof, together with their Speeches, Actions and Manners. The same Author in another Dialogue called Icaro-Menippus discourseth of the Cinike Menippus, who being troubled with the same humour took unto him the right wing of an Eagle, and the left wing of a Vulture, and having fastened them to his body with strong and sturdy thongs, mounted up first to the Acropolis or Capitol of Athens, and then from Hymettus by the Gerania to Acro-Corinthus, and so to Pholoë, and Erymanthus, & Taygetus, and at last to Olympus: where he grew somewhat more brag and audacious, then before he was, and soared higher upwards till he had reached the Moon, and then the Sun, and from thence the Habitation of jupiter and the rest of the Gods: a sufficient flight (as he saith) for a well trussed Eagle to perform in a day. There he rested himself, and discovered all the world and every particularity thereof, to the end he might the more freely & like a Scoggan taunt & scoff at the Actions of men in their several kinds. But to leave these Poetical Fictions, and vain Fables, which do but declare the Nature of Man to be desirous of Novelties, and curious to know those things whereof he is ignorant; let us come to those that being neither conjured out of hell, nor rapt into the heavens, but of their own honourable disposition and instinct of Nature, have not only compassed Sea and Land in their own persons to learn and behold Nations, Realms, Peoples & Country's unknown, for the augmentation of their own private skill and cunning, but also have committed their knowledge and labours to writing for the propagation of the service and glory of God in Pagan and Heathen places, and the great pleasure, profit & commodity of their Countrymen. Of this kind and sort of famous men, there hath been great store in all ages, but specially at the first, Homer, Anaximander, Hecataeus, Democritus, Eudoxus, Timaeus, Eratosthenes, Polybius, Possidonius, Dionysius, Strabo, Solinus, Pomponius Mela, Maximus Tyrius, Ptolomée, & an infinite number of other ancient Authors, that have employed their wits & industries in this behalf to the singular benefit of our later times, wherein there have been most excellent and exquisite followers of them, as Munster's, Mercators', Thevets, Belonies, Ortelies', Villamonts, & many more, that by the light and good means of those their Predecessors, have run beyond them many degrees, and discovered such New worlds as were never known to our Fathers & Forefathers; and therefore do deserve the greater commendation. No doubt, it is very troublesome and laborious to journey by land for the attaining to this knowledge: but to travel by Sea, is not only most dangerous, but also in a manner almost a desperate estate, considering especially the great perils whereunto it is hourly subject, as namely, Rocks, Flats, Sands, Gulfs, Storms, Tempests, besides the continual Watching and care in observing the Poles Arctike, and Antarctike, the Equinoctial Line, the Altitude and Degrees of the Meridian, the Circle of the Zodiac, the Horizon, the Tropikes, the Longitude and Latitude of Heaven and earth, the Parallels, the Hemisphere, the Zenith, the Centre, and a Rabblement of such curiosities, that are able to break the brains of the soundest man alive. To these if you will add the intolerable pains, and infinite diseases that do spend their bodies, you must needs say, that they are the most miserable Creatures of the world: So that you cannot choose but be of the opinion of Anacharsis that Noble Philosopher, who being demanded whether Number was the greater, that of the dead or that of the Living, did redemaund again, In which Number do you reckon those that travel on the Sea? Signifiyng thereby, that such as travel upon the Sea are in so great danger of death, that they do continually die living, and live dying. And therefore well said Bias (one of the seven Sages) that Sailors upon the Sea were always within two inches of their death: & true it is, which the Latyn Lyrike Poet writeth, That Man had a Hart of Oak, and was fenced with a triple corselet of Brass, that first adventured to commit a slender Boat to the raging Sea. A Type and Pattern of all which miseries, together with the cunning and skilful Art of Navigation, is comprised in this Volume which we have in hand, being a most perfect description of the East and West Indies, or (as they are commonly called) the Portugal and Spanish Indies: A Work assuredly very profitable, and commodious for all such as are desirous & curious lovers of Novelties. Of these Indies, though not in distinguished terms of East and West, sundry Historiographers and Authors of the old World have made an honourable Mention, & left an exceeding commendation thereof, for the wonderful and rare matters, that were discovered by the several Travels & Navigation of divers famous Captains: as namely, Alexander the great, Seleucus', Antiochus, Patrocles, and Onesicritus, who had been all in the said Indies, insomuch as one of them held them to be the Third part of all the Land that is inhabited, in regard of the great Provinces, puissant Cities, and unmeasurable islands that are found therein: all very fruitful, and yielding such treasure and rich Merchandise, as none other place of the whole world can afford. And although the curiosity and labour of these ancients was very great, yet greater hath been the travel and industry of those which of late time, and in our age hath been employed therein. For the ancient travelers had in deed a certain kind of knowledge of this Country and People; but it was very uncertain and unperfect: Whereas we in our times are thoroughly learned and instructed by our own experience, in the Provinces, Cities, Rivers, Havens and traffics of them all: So that now it is become known to the whole world. First the Portingalls (being great Merchants by reason of their skill in Navigation, which in our days is grown to a more full perfection, than ever it hath been in times past:) they I say first discovered the Waste and Desert Part of the Indies, caused their King to be entertained & honoured among the People, increased and enhanced their credit and Name exceedingly, and the sundry commodities of their several fruits and spices have dispersed & communicated not only to their own Countrymen, but also to all Nations under the Sun. But here the Matter stayed not: For than came the English (a People that in the Art of Navigation giveth place to none other) and they were incited to take this Indian Voyage in hand, and to make it generally known unto their Island: & thereupon Sir Francis Drake, & Master Thomas Candish did not only sail into the said Indies, but also traveled round about the world, with a most happy and famous success. Whose examples divers honourable Gentlemen and valiant Captains of England have followed, to their unspeakable praise and commendation, & the exceeding glory of their Country: as namely the Right Honourable Earl of Cumberland, the Lord Thomas Howard, Sir Francis Drake, Sir Martin Frobisher, Sir Richard Greenefield, Sir john Hawkins, and Sir Walter Raleigh, with divers others named and mentioned in this Book, And last of all, the People of the Lowe-countreys' being instructed by the diligent search and travel of the English Nation, fell to the like traffic into ●he Indies, and have performed many Honourable and profitable Voyages. Among whom the Author of this B●oke, john-hugh Linschote of Harlem was one, that continued in India for the most part of nine years, and had good opportunity of sure and certain intelligences by reason of his service under Vincentius da Fonseca, a Friar Dominican, & by K. Philip created Archbishop of all India. This Man Hugh Linschote behaved himself so honestly and warily during the time of his abode there, that he was not only in high favour of his Lord and Master, but he was also singularly and generally beloved of all the Inhabitants of the places where he was most resiant. He did most diligently and considerately observe and collect together all occurrents and accidents that happened in his memory & knowledge, and the same hath committed to writing in the Dutch Tongue with all faithfulness, to his own everlasting praise, and to the benefit of his Country, together with the several Maps and descriptions of the Countries, Cities and Towns, & all the commodities thereunto belonging. Which Book being commended, by Master Richard Hackluyt, a man that laboureth greatly to advance our English Name and Nation, the Printer thought good to cause the same to be translated into the English Tongue. The Volume containeth in it four several Treatises: The First is, The First Book. The Voyage or journey by Sea of the said Hugh Linschote the Author, into the East or Portugal Indies, together with all the Seacoasts, Havens, Rivers and Cre●kes of the same, their Customs and Religion, their Policy and Government, their Merchandises, Drugs, spices, Herbs, & Plants, the virtues whereof are explained by the Annotations of Doctor Paludanus, the learned Physician of En●khuysen: And last of all, a Memorial of such Accidents as fallen out during the Author's abode in India. The Second Treatise is, The Second Book. The Description of Guinea, Manicongo, Angola, Monomotapa, etc. with a discovery of the great Island of Madagascar, and all the Shallows, Cliffs and Islands of the Indian Seas: The most part whereof was collected before by one Pigafetta from the mouth of Edward Lopez, and published in English the last year. The Third Treatise is, The Thi●● Book. The Navigation of the Portugese's into the East Indies: & from thence to Malacca, China, japon, java and Sunda: And from China to the Western or Spanish Indies, and all the Coast of Brasilia, etc. The Fourth and last Treatise is, The Fourth Book. A most true & exact Summarie of all the Rents, Demaynes, Tolles, Taxes, Imposts, Tributes, Tenths, Third-pennies, and generally all the Revenues of the King of Spain, arising out of all his Kingdoms, Lands, Provinces and Lordships, as well of Portugal as of Spain, collected out of the Original Registers of his several Chambers of Accounts: together with a brief description of the government and Pedigree of the Kings of Portugal. I do not doubt, but yet I do most heartily pray and wish, that this poor Translation may work in our English Nation a further desire and increase of Honour over all Countries of the World, and as it hath hitherto mightily advanced the Credit of the Realm by defending the same with our Wooden Walls (as Themistocles called the Ships of Athens·s) So it would employ the same in foreign parts, aswell for the dispersing and planting true Religion and Civil Conversation therein: As also for the further benefit and commodity of this Land by exportation of such things wherein we do abound, and importation of those Necessities whereof we stand in Need: as Hercules did, when he fetched away the Golden Apples out of the Garden of the Hesperides; & jason, when with his lusty troop of courageous Argonauts he achieved the Golden Fleece in Colchos. Farewell. THE FIRST BOOK. CHAPTER. I. The Voyage and travails of john Hugen van Linschoten into the East or Portugese's Indies: Setting down a brief discourse of the said Lands, and sea coasts, with the principal Havens, Rivers, Creeks, and other places of the same, as yet not known nor discovered by the Portugese's: Describing withal not only the manner of apparel of the Portugese's inhabiting therein, but also of the natural borne Indians, their Temples, Idols, houses, trees, Fruits, Herbs, Spices, and such like: Together with the customs of those countries, as well for their manner of Idolatrous religion and worshipping of Images, as also for their policy and government of their houses, their trade, and traffic in Merchandise, how and from whence their wares are sold, & brought thither: With a collection of the most memorable and worthiest things happened in the time of his being in the same countries, very profitable and pleasant to all such as are well-willers, or desirous to hear and read of strange things. Being young, and living idlelye in my native Country, sometimes applying myself to the reading of Histories, and strange adventures, wherein I took no small delight, I found my mind so much addicted to see & travail into strange Countries, thereby to seek some adventure, that in the end to satisfy myself I determined, & was fully resolved, for a time to leave my Native Country, and my friends (although it grieved me) yet the hope I had to accomplish my desire, together with the resolution, taken in the end overcame my affection and put me in good comfort, to take the matter upon me, trusting in God that he would further my intent. Which done, being resolved, thereupon I took leave of my Parents, who as then dwelled at Enckhuysen, and being ready to embark myself, I went to a Fleet of ships that as then lay before the Tassel, staying the wind to sail for Spain, and Portugal, where I embarked myself in a ship that was bound for S. Lucas de Barameda, being determined to travail unto Seville, where as then I had two brethren that had continued there certain years before: so to help myself the better, & by their means to know the manner and custom of those Countries, as also to learn the Spanish tongue. And the 6. of December, in the year of our Lord 1576 we put out of the Tassel, Anno 1576 the 6. of December we sailed from the Tassel. (being in all about 80. ships) & set our course for Spain, and the ninth of the same month, we passed between Dover and Calais, & within three days after we had the sight of the Cape of Finisterra, and the fifteen of the same month we saw the land of Sintra, otherwise called the Cape Roexent, from whence the river Tegio, or Tagus, runneth into the main Sea, upon the which river lieth the famous city of Lisbon, where some of our Fleet put in, and left us. The 17. day we saw the Cape S. Vincent, & upon Christmas day after we entered into the river of S. Lucas de Barameda, where I stayed two or three days, and then travailed to Seville, & the first day of januarie following, I entered into the city, where I found one of my brethren, but the other was newly ridden to the Court, lying as then in Madrill. And although I had a special desire presently to travail further, yet for want of the Spanish tongue, without the which men can hardly pass the country, I was constrained to stay there to learn some part of their language: mean time it chanced that Don Henry (the last King of Portugal) died: by which means a great contention and debate happened as then in Portugal, by reason that the said King by his Will and Testament, made Philip King of Spain, his Sister's Son, lawful Heir unto the Crown of Portugal. Notwithstanding the Portugeses (always deadly enemies to the Spaniards,) were wholly against it, and elected for their king, Don Antonio, Prior de Ocrato, brother's Son to the King that died before Don Henry: which the King of Spain hearing, presently prepared himself in person to go into Portugal to receive the Crown, sending before him the Duke of Alva, with a troop of men to cease their strife, and pacify the matter: so that in the end, partly by force, and partly by money, he brought the Country under his subjection. Whereupon divers men went out of Seville and other places into Portugal, as it is commonly seen that men are often addicted to changes and new alterations, among the which my Brother by other men's counsels was one: First traveling to the borders of Spain, being a city called Badaios, standing in the frontiers of Portugal, where they hoped to find some better means, and they were no sooner arrived there, but they heard news that all was quiet in Portugal, and that Don Antonio was driven out of the country, and Philip by consent of the Land received for King. Whereupon my Brother presently changed his mind of traveling for Portugal, and entered into service with an Ambassador, that on the King's behalf was to go into Italy, with whom he road: and arriving in Salamanca he fell sick of a disease called Tavardilha, which at that time reigned throughout the whole Country of Spain, whereof many thousands died: and among the rest my Brother was one. This sickness being very contagious, reigned not only in Spain, Annotatio D. Pa●l. but also in Italy, Germany, and almost throughout all Christendom, whereof I myself was sick being as then in Italy, and by them it was called Coccolucio, because such as were troubled therewith, were no otherwise troubled then in the throat, like unto Hens which have the pip, after the which followed many pestilent fevers, with divers strange fits, which continued not above four days. Not long before, the plague was so great in Portugal, that in two years space there died in Lisbon to the number of 80. thousand people: after the which plague the said disease ensued, which wrought great destruction throughout the whole Country of Spain. The fift day of August in the same year, having some understanding in the Spanish tongue, I placed myself with a Dutch gentleman, who determined to travail into Portugal, to see the country, and with him stayed to take a more convenient time for my pretended voyage. Upon the first of September following we departed from Seville, & passing through divers Towns and Villages, within eight days after we arrived at Badaios, This was a twin of my forenamed brother deceased. where I found my other Brother following the Court. At the same time died Anne de Austria Queen of Spain, (Sister to the Emperor Rodulphus, and Daughter to the Emperor Maximilian) the King's fourth and last wife, for whom great sorrow was made through all Spain: her body was conveyed from Badaios to the Cloister of Saint Laurence in Escurial, where with great solemnity it was buried. We having stayed certain days in Badaios, departed from thence, and passed through a Town called Eluas about two or three miles off, being the first town in the kingdom of Portugal, for that between it and Badaios, the borders of Spain and Portugal are limited: from thence we travailed into divers other places of Portugal, and at the last arrived at Lisbon, about the twenty of September following, where at that time we found the Duke of Alva being Governor there for the King of Spain, the whole City making great preparation for the Coronation of the King, according to the custom of their country. We being in Lisbon, through the change of air, and corruption of the country I fell sick, and during my sickness was seven times let blood, yet by God's help I escaped: and being recovered, not having much preferment under the gentleman, I left his service, and placed myself with a Merchant until I might attain to better means. About the same time the plague not long before newly begun, began again to cease, for the which cause the King till then had deferred his entrance into Lisbon, which wholly ceased upon the first day of May, Anno 1581. 1581. he entered with great triumph and magnificence into the city of Lisbon, where above all others the Dutchmen had the best and greatest commendation for beautiful shows, which was a Gate & a Bridge that stood upon the river side where the King must first pass as he went out of his Galley to enter into the city, being beautified and adorned with many costly and excellent things most pleasant to behold, every street and place within the city being hanged with rich clothes of tapistry and Arras, where they made great triumphs, as the manner is at all Prince's Coronations. The same year the twelfth of December, the Duke of Alva died in Lisbon in the king's palace, being high steward of Spain, who during his sickness for the space of fourteen days, received no sustenance but only women's milk: his body being seared and spicen was conveyed into his country of Alva. The same month (the King being yet at Lisbon) died Don Diego Prince of Spain and Portugal, the king's eldest son: his body being inbalmed, was conveyed to Madril, after whose death the king had but one Son named Don Philip, and two Daughters living. About the same time there arrived at Lisbon the king's sister, widow to the deceased Emperor Maximilian, and with her one of her daughters who being lame was after placed in a Monastery of Nuns, they with great triumph were likewise received into the city. After the death of Don Diego the king's eldest son, all the Lords and States of Spain and Portugal, as well spiritual as temporal assembled at Lisbon, and there in the king's presence (according to the ancient custom and manner of the country) took their oaths of faith and allegiance unto Don Philip the young Prince of Spain, and next heir and lawful successor of the lung his Father, in his dominions of Spain, Portugal, and other lands and countries. 1582. The next year Anno 1582. a great navy of ships was prepared in Lisbon, whose general was the marquess de sancta Cruse, accompanied with the principal gentlemen and captains both of Spain and Portugal: who at their own costs and charges therein to show the great affection and desire they had to serve their Prince, sailed with the said Navy to the Flemish Islands, to fight with Don Antonio that lay about those Isles with a Fleet of frenchmen, whose General was one Philip Strozzi: These two Fléets meeting together, fought most cruelly to the great loss of both parts, yet in the end Don Antonio with his French men was overthrown, and many of them taken prisoners: among the which were divers gentlemen of great account in France; who by the Marquis commandment were all beheaded in the Island of Saint michael's. The rest being brought into Spain, were put into the Galleys, Don Antonio himself escaped in a small ship and the General Strozzi also, who being hurt in the battle died of the same wound. By this victory the Spaniards were so proud, that in Lisbon great triumph was holden for the same, and the Marquis de Sancta Crus, received therein with great joy: which done and all things being pacified in Portugal, the King left his Sister's son Don Albertus' Cardinal of Austria Governor of Lisbon, and the whole Country; and with the said Cardinal's mother returned, and kept Court at Madrill in Spain. The 2. Chapter. The beginning of my voyage into the East or Portugal Indies. STaying at Lisbon, the trade of Merchandise there not being great, by reason of the new & fresh disagreeing of the Spaniards and Portugese's, occasion being offered to accomplish my desire, there was at the same time in Lisbon a Monk of S. Dominicks order, named Donfrey Vincente de Fonseca, of a noble house: who by reason of his great learning, had of long time been Chaplain unto Sebastian King of Portugal, who being with him in the battle of Barbari●, where King Sebastian was slain, was taken prisoner, and from thence ransomed, whose learning and good behaviour being known to the King of Spain, he made great account of him, placing him in his own Chapel, and desiring to prefer him, the archbishopric of all the Indies being void, with confirmation of the Pope he invested him therewith, although he refused to accept it, fearing the long and tedious travail he had to make thither, but in the end through the King's persuasion, he took it upon him, with promise within four or five years at the furthest to recall him home again, and to give him a better place in Portugal, with the which promise he took the voyage upon him. I thinking upon my affairs, used all means I could to get into his service, and with him to travail the voyage which I so much desired, which fell out as I would wish: for that my Brother that followed the Court, had desired his Master (being one of his majesties secretaries) to make him purser in one of the ships that the same year should sail unto the East Indies, which pleased me well, in so much that his said Master was a great friend and acquaintance of the Archbishops, by which means, with small entreaty I was entertained in the Bishop's service, and amongst the rest my name was written down, we being in all forty persons, & because my Brother had his choice which ship he would be in, he chose the ship wherein the Archbishop sailed, the better to help each other, and in this manner we prepared ourselves to make our voyage, being in all five ships of the burden of fourteen or sixteen hundredth Tons each ship, their names were the Admiral S. Philip: the Advise Admiral S. jacob. These were two new ships, one bearing the name of the King, the other of his son, the other three, S, Laurence, S. Francisco, and our ship S. salvator. 1583. Upon the eight of April, being good Friday in the year of our Lord 1583. which commonly is the time when their ships set sail within four or five days under, or over, we altogether issued out of the River of Lisbon and put to sea, setting our course for the islands of Madera, and so putting our trust in God, without whose favour & help we can do nothing, and all our actions are but vain, we sailed forwards. Chapter 3. The manner and order used in the ships in their Indian Voyages. THe ships are commonly charged with four or five hundred men at the least, sometimes more, sometimes less, as there are soldiers and sailors to be found. When they go out they are but lightly laden, only with certain pipes of wine & oil, and some small quantity of Merchandise other thing have they not in, but ballast, & victuals for the company, for that the most and greatest ware that is commonly sent into India, are rials of eight, because the principal Factors for pepper do every year send a great quantity of money, therewith to buy pepper, as also divers particular Merchants, as being the least ware that men can carry into India: for that in these rials of eight they gain at the least forty per cento: when the ships are out of the river, and enter into the sea, all their men are mustered, as well sailors, as soldiers, and such as are found absent and left on land, being registered in the books, are marked by the purser, that at their return they may talk with their sureties, (for that every man putteth in sureties,) and the goods of such as are absent, being found in the ship are presently brought forth and prised, and an Inventory thereof being made, it is left to be disposed at the captains pleasure. The like is done with their goods that die in the ship, but little of it cometh to the owner's hands, being imbeseled and privily made away. The Master and Pilot have for their whole voyage forth and home again, each man 120. Millreyes, every Millreyes being worth in Dutch money seven guilders, and because the reckoning of Portugal money is only in one sort of money called Reyes, which is the smallest money to be found in that country, and although it be never so great a sum you do receive, yet it is always reckoned by Reyes, whereof 160. is as much as a Keysers' gilderne, or four rials of silver: so that two reyes are four pence, and one reye two pence of Holland money▪ I have thought good to set it down, the better to show and make you understand the accounts they use by reyes in the country of Portugal. But returning to our matter, I say the Master and the Pilot do receive before hand, each man twenty four millreyes, besides that they have chambers both under in the ship, and cabins above the hatches, as also primage, & certain tons fraught. The like have all the other officers in the ship according to their degrees, and although they receive money in hand, yet it costeth them more in gifts before they get their places, which are given by favour and good will of the Proveador, which is the chief officer of the Admiralty, and yet there is no certain ordinance for their pays, for that it is daily altered: but let us reckon the pay, which is commonly given according to the ordinance and manner of our ship for that year. The chief Boteswain hath for his whole pay 50. Millreyes, and receiveth ten in ready money: The Guardian, that is the quarter master hath 1400. reyes the month, and for fraught 2800. and receiveth seven Millreyes in ready money: The Seto Piloto, which is the Master's mate, hath 1200. reyes, which is three ducats the month, and as much fraught as the quarter Master: two Carpenters, & two Callafaren which help them, have each man four ducats a month and 3900. Millreyes' fraught. The Steward that giveth out their meat and drink, and the Merinho, which is he that imprisoneth men aboard, and hath charge of all the munition and powder, with the delivering forth of the same, have each man a Millreyes the month, and 2340. reyes fraught, besides their chambers and freedom of custom, as also all other officers, sailors, pikemen, shot, etc. have every man after the rate, and every one that serveth in the ship. The Cooper hath three ducats a month, and 3900 reyes fraught: Two Strinceros, those are they which hoist up the main yard by a wheel, and let it down again with a wheel as néediss, have each man one Millreyes the month, and 2800. reyes fraught: Thirty three sailors have each man one Millreyes the month, and 2800. reyes fraught, 37. rowers, have each man 660. reyes the month, and 1860. reyes fraught, four pagiens which are boys, have with their fraught 443. reyes the month, one Master gunner, and eight under him, have each man a different pay, some more, some less: The surgeon likewise hath no certain pay: The factor and the purser have no pay but only their chambers, that is below under hatches, a chamber of twenty pipes, for each man ten pipes, and above hatches each man his cabin to sleep in, whereof they make great profit. These are all the officers and other persons which sail in the ship, which have for their portion every day in victuals, each man a like, as well the greatest as the least, a pound and three quarters of Biscuit, half a Can of Wine, a Can of water, an Arroba which is 32. pound of salt flesh the month, some dried fish, onions and garlic are eaten in the beginning of the voyage, as being of small value, other provisions, as Sugar, Honey, Reasons, Prunes, Rise, & such like, are kept for those which are sick: yet they get but little thereof, for that the officers keep it for themselves, and spend it at their pleasures, not letting much go out of their fingers: as for the dressing of their meat, wood, pots, and pans, every man must make his own provision: besides all this there is a Clerk and steward for the King's soldiers that have their parts by themselves, as the sailors have. This is the order and manner of their voyage when they sail unto the Indies, but when they return again, they have no more but each man a portion of Biscuit and water until they come to the Cape de Bona Esperance, and from thence home they must make their own provisions. The soldiers that are passengers, have nothing else but free passage, that is room for a chest under hatches, and a place for their bed in the or loop, and may not come away without the viceroys passport, and yet they must have been five years soldiers in the Indies before they can have licence, but the slaves must pay fraught for their bodies, & custom to the King, as in our voyage home again we will at large declare. The 15. of April we espied the Island of Madera and Porto Sancto, where the ships use to separate themselves, each ship keeping on his course, that they may get before each other into India for their most commodities, and to dispatch the sooner; whereby in the night, and by tides they leave each others company, each following his own way. The 24. of April we fell upon the coast of Guinea which beginneth at nine degrees, and stretcheth until we come under the Equinoctial, where we have much thunder, lightning▪ and many showers of rain, with storms of wind, which pass swiftly over, & yet fall with such force, that at every shower we are forced to strike sail, & let the main yard fall to the middle of the mast, & many times clean down, sometimes ten or twelve times everyday: there we find a most extreme heat, so that all the water in the ship stinketh, whereby men are forced to stop their noses when they drink, but when we are passed the Equinoctial it is good again, & the nearer we are unto the land, the more it stormeth, raineth, thundereth and calmeth: so that most commonly the ships are at the least two months before they can pass the line: Then they find a wind which they name the general wind, and it is a South east wind, but it is a side wind, and we must always lie side ways in the wind almost until we come to the cape de Bona Speranza, and because that upon the coast of Brasillia about 18. degrees, on the south side lieth great slakes or shallows, which the Portugese's call Abra●hos, that reach 70. miles into the sea on the right side, to pass them, the ships hold up most unto the coast of Guinea, and so pass the said Flattes, otherwise if they fall too low and keep inwards, they are constrained to turn again unto Portugal, and many times in danger to be lost, as it happened to our Admiral Saint Philip, which in the year 1582. 1582. fell by night upon the Flats, and was in great danger to be lost, yet recovered again, & sailed back to Portugal, and now this year to shun the Flats she kept so near the coast of Guinea, that by means of the great calms and rains, she was forced to drive up and down two months together, before she could pass the line, & came two months after the other ships into India: Therefore men must take heed, and keep themselves from coming too near the coast, to shun the calms and storms, and also not to hold too far of thereby to pass the Flats & shallows, wherein consisteth the whole Indian Voyage. The 15. of May being about fifty miles beyond the Equinoctial line Northwards, we espied a French ship, which put us all in great fear, by reason that most of our men were sick, as it commonly happeneth in those countries through the exceeding heat: & further they are for the most part such as never have been at Sea before that time, so that they are not able to do much, yet we discharged certain great shot at him, wherewith he left us, (after he had played with us for a small time) and presently lost the sight of him, wherewith our men were in better comfort. The same day about evening, we descried a great ship●, which we judged to be of our Fleet, as after we perceived, for it made towards us to speak with us, and it was the Saint Francisco, wherewith we were glad. The ●6. of May, we passed the Equinoctial line which runneth through the middle of the Island of Saint Thomas, by the coast of Guinea, and then we began to see the south star, and to lose the north star, and found the sun at twelve of the clock at noon to be in the north, and after that we had a south east wind, called a general wind, which in those parts bloweth all the year through. The 29. of May being Whitsonday, the ships of an ancient custom, do use to choose an Emperor among themselves, and to change all the officers in the ship, and to hold a great feast, which continueth three or four days together, which we observing chose an Emperor, and being at our banquet, by means of certain words that passed out of some of their mouths, there fell great strife and contention among us, which proceeded so far, that the tables were thrown down and lay on the ground, and at the least a hundred rapiers drawn, without respecting the Captain or any other for he lay under foot, and they trod upon him, and had killed each other, and thereby had cast the ship away, if the Archbishop had not come out of his chamber among them, willing them to cease, wherewith they stayed their hands, who presently commanded every man on pain of death, that all their Rapiers, Poynyardes, and other weapons should be brought into his chamber, which was done, whereby all things were pacified, the first and principal beginners being punished & laid in irons, by which means they were quiet. The 12. of june we passed beyond the afore said Flats and shallows of Brasillia, whereof all our men were exceeding glad, for thereby we were assured that we should not for that time put back to Portugal again, as many do, and then the general wind served us, until we came to the river of Rio de Plata, where we got before the wind to the cape de Bona Speranza. The 20. of the same month, the S. Fransiscus that so long had kept us company▪ was again out of sight: and the eleventh of july after, our Master judged us to be about 5●. miles from the cape de Bona Speranza: wherefore he was desired by the Archbishop to keep in with the land, that we might see the Cape. It was then misty weather, so that as we had made with the land about one hour or more, we perceived land right before us, and were within two miles thereof, which by reason of the dark and misty weather we could no sooner perceive, which put us in great fear, for our judgement was clean contrary, but the weather beginning to clear up, we knew the land, for it was a part or bank of the point called Cabo Falso, which is about fifteen miles on this side the cape de Bona Speranza, towards Mossambique the cape de Bona Speranza lieth under 34. degrees southward, there we had a calm and fair weather, which continuing about half a day, in the mean time with our lines we got great store of fishes upon the same land at ten or twelve fathoms water, it is an excellent fish much like to Haddocks, the Portugese's call them Pescados. The twenty of the same month we met again with Saint Francisco, and spoke with her, and so kept company together till the 24. of june, when we lost her again. The same day we struck all our sails, because we had a contrary wind, and lay two days still driving up and down, not to lose any way, mean time we were against the high land of Tarradona●al, which beginneth in 32. degrees, and endeth in 30. and is distant from Capo de Bona Speranza 150. miles, in this place they commonly use to tak● counsel of all the officers of the ship, whether it is best for them to sail through within the land of S. Laurenso, or without it, for that within the land they sail to Mossambique, and from thence to Goa, and sailing without it they cannot come at Goa, by reason they fall down by means of the stream, and so must sail unto Cochin, which lieth 100 miles lower than Goa, and as the ships leave the cape, than it is not good to make towards Mossambique, because they cannot come in time to Goa, by reason of the great calms that are within the land, but they that pass the Cape in the month of july, may well go to Mossambique, because they have time enough there to refresh themselves, and to take in fresh water and other victuals, and so to lie at anchor ten or twelve days together, but such as pass the cape in the month of August, do come too late, and must sail about towards Cochin, thereby to lose no time, yet it is dangerous & much more cumbersome, for that commonly they are sick of swollen legs, sore bellies, and other diseases. The 30. of july, we were against the point of the cape called Das Corentes, which are 130. miles distant from Terra Donatal, and lieth under 24. degrees southward, there they begin to pass between the islands. The Isle Madagascar, otherwise called Saint Laurence. map of Madagascar (The Island of S. Laurenso, is by Marcus Paulus named the great Island of Magastar, by Andrea Thevet it is called Madagascar, and is the greatest of all the East Islands, for it is greater in compass then either of the Kingdoms of Castille or Portugal, and lieth on the other side of Africa as we pass the cape de Bona Speranza, it containeth in length (as Thevet describeth) 72 degrees, and in breadth eleven degrees, and is in compass (as some hold opinion) 3000 Italian miles, and as some writ 4000 which should be six or eight hundred Dutch miles. This Island is judged to be very temperate, and therefore well peopled, but believe in Mahomet. Marcus Paulus sayeth, that the Island is governed by four ancient men, it is full of wild beasts and strange fowls, whereof he writeth many fables, not worthy the rehearsal. This Island hath Elephants & all kind of beasts which have but one horn, whereof one is called an Indian ass, with whole feet uncloven, an other is called Orix, with cloven feet: it hath many snakes, efftes, & great store of woods of red Sandale, which are there little esteemed for the great abundance, there the Sea yieldeth much Amber: it aboundeth also in Rice, Barley, Oranges, Lemons, Citrons, & Million, which are so great that a man can hardly gripe them, both red, white, & yellow, and better than ours, and much ginger which they eat green, Honey & Sugar in such abundance, that they know not whether to send it, Saffron, many medicinable herbs, and Indian nuts. It likewise yieldeth Silver, and hath many Rivers, beautiful Fountains, and divers Havens, whether many Saracens & Moors do bring their Merchandise, as clothes of gold & Silver, Linen made of cotton, wool, and such like.) From S. Laurenso to Mossambique, which lieth from the firm land of Das Corentes 120. miles, and is an Island of 220. miles long, stretching north & south, and in breadth 70. miles, beginning from the first point, until you come at the cape in 26. degrees, and endeth in the North in 11. degrees. The people of the Island are black like those of Mossambique, and go naked, but the hair of their heads is not so much curled as theirs of Mossambique, and not full so black. The Portugese's have no special traffic there, because there is not much to be had, for as yet it is not very well known. The 1. of August we passed the flats called os Baixos de judea, that is, the Flats of the jews, which are distant from the cape das Corentes, 30. miles, and lie between the Island of S. Laurence & the firm land, that is from the Island fifty miles, and from the firm land seventy miles, which Flats begin under 22. degrees and a half, and continue to twenty one degrees: there is great care to be taken lest men fall upon them, for they are very dangerous, and many ships have been lost there, and of late in Anno 1585. 1585. a ship coming from Portugal called S. jago being Admiral of the Fleet, and was the same that the first voyage went with us from Lisbon for vice Admiral, as in another place we shall declare. The fourth of August we descried the land of Mossambique, which is distant from the Flattes of the jews ninety miles under fifteen degrees southwards. The next day we entered into the road of Mossambique, and as we entered we espied the foresaid ship called S. jago which entered with us, and it was not above one hour after we had descried it, being the first time we had seen it since it left us at the Island of Madera, where we separated ourselves. There we found likewise two more of our ships, Saint Laure●zo and Saint Francisco, which the day before were come thither with a small ship that was to sail to Malacca, which commonly setteth out of Portugal, a month before any of the ships do set sail for India, only because they have a longer voyage to make, yet do they ordinarily sail to Mossambique to take in sweet water & fresh victuals as their voyage falleth out, or their victuals scanteth: If they go not thither, them they sail about on the back side of the Island of saint Laurenso, not setting their course for Mossambique. Being at Mossambique we were four of our Fleet in company together, only wanting the Saint Philip, which had holden her course so near the coast of Guinea, (the better to shun the Flats of Bracillia that are called Abrollios', whereon the year before she had once fallen,) that she was so much becalmed that she could not pass the Equinoctial line in long time after us, neither yet the cape de Bona Speranza without great storms & foul weather, as it ordinarily happeneth to such as come late thither, whereby she was compelled to compass about & came unto Cochin about two months after we were all arrived at Goa, having passed and endured much misery and foul weather, with sickness and diseases, as swellings of the legs, and the scorbuicke, and pain in their bellies etc. The 4. Chapter. The description of Mossambique, which lieth under 15. degrees on the South side of the Equinoctial line upon the coast of Melinde, otherwise called Abex or Abexim. MOssambique is a Town in the Island of Prasio with a safe, (although a small) haven, on the right side towards the cape: they have the golden mines called Sofala, on the left side the rich town of Quiloa: and by reason of the foggy mists incident to the same, the place is both barren & unwholesome, yet the people are rich by reason of the situation. In time past it was inhabited by people that believed in Mahoomet, being overcome & kept in subjection by the tyrant of Quiloa, & his lieutenant (which the Arabians called Zequen) that governed them. Mossambique is a little Island, distant about half a mile from the firm land, in a corner of the said firm land, for that the firm land on the north side stretcheth further into the sea than it doth, & before it there lie two small islands named S. George & S. jacob, which are even which the corner of the firm land, and between those two islands not inhabited, & the firm land the ships do sail to Mossambique leaving the islands southward, on the left hand, and the firm land ●n the north, and so without a Pilot compass about a mile into the sea to Mossambique, for it is deep enough, and men may easily shun the sands that lie upon the firm land, because they are openly seen. The ships harbour so near to the Island and the fortress of Mossambique, that they may throw a stone out of their ship upon the land, and sometimes farther, and lie between the Island and the firm land, which are distant half a mile from each other, so that the ships lie there as safely as in a river or haven. The Island of Mossambique is about half a mile in compass, flat land, and bordered about with a white sand: Therein grow many Indian palms or nut trees, & some Orange, Apple, lemon, Citron, and Indian Fig trees: but other kinds of fruit which are common in India are there very scarce. Corn and other grain with Rice and such necessary merchandises are brought thither out of India, but for beasts and foul, as O●en, sheep, Goats, Swine, Hens, etc. there are great abundance and very good and cheap. In the same Island are found sheep of five quarters in quantity, for that their tails are so broad and thick, that there is as much flesh upon them, as upon a quarter of their body, and they are so fat that men can hardly brook them. There are certain Hens that are so black both of feathers, flesh, and bones, that being sodden they seem as black as ink: yet of very sweet taste, and are accounted better than the other: whereof some are likewise found in India, but not so many as in Mossambique. Pork is there a very costly dish, and excellent fair and sweet flesh, and as by experience it is found, it far surpasseth all other flesh: so that the sick are forbidden to eat any kind of flesh but only Pork, because of the excellency thereof. MOssambique signifieth two places, one which is a whole kingdom lying in Africa, behind the cape of Bona Speranza, between Monomotapa & Quiloa, the other certain islands hereafter drawn and described, lying on the south side of the Equinoctial line under 14. degrees and a half, whereof the greatest is called Mossambique, the other two Saint jacob and Saint George. These islands lie almost in the mouth of a river which in Africa is called Moghincats. About Mossambique is a very great & a safe haven, fit to receive and harbour all ships that come and go both to & from Portugal & the Indies, and although both the Kingdom and the Island are not very great, yet are they very rich and abundant in all kind of things, as appeareth in the description of the same. Mossambique the chief & greatest of them is inhabited by two manner of people, Christians and mahometans, the Christians are Portugese's, or of the Portugese's race, there is also a castle wherein the Portugese's keep garrison, from whence also all other castles and forts thereabouts are supplied with their necessaries, specially Sofala, where the rich mine of Gold lieth: there the Portugal ships do use to harbour in winter time, when of wind or by means of foul weather, they cannot accomplish their voyage. The Indian ships do likewise in that place take in new victuals and fresh water. This Island being first discovered by the Portugese's, was the only means that they found the Indies: for that from thence they used to take Pilots, which taught them the way: touching the manner and customs of these people, read the Author's description at large, they are good shooters in musket and caliver, and expert Fishermen. Sailing along further by the coast towards the Indies you pass by Quiloa (which in times past was called Rapta) not great but very fair by reason of the great trees that grow there, which are always fresh and green, as also for the diversities of victuals, & it is also an Island lying about the mouth of the great River Coavo, which hath her head or spring out of the same lake from whence Nilus doth issue. This Island is inhabited by Mahometans, and they are all most white appareled in silk and clothes of cotton wool: their women wear bracelets of gold and precious stones about their necks and arms: they have great quantity of silver works, & are not so brown as the men, & well membered: their houses are commonly made of stone, chalk, and wood, with pleasant gardens of all kind of fruit and sweet flowers: from this Island the kingdom taketh his name. This point asketh a larger discourse, which you shall find in the leaf following. They have no sweet water in this Island to drink, but they fetch it from the firm land, out of a place called by the Portugese's Cabaser, and they use in their houses great pots which come out of India, to keep their water in. The Portugese's have therein a very fair and strong castle which now about 10. or 12. years past was fully finished, and standeth right against the first of the unhabited little islands, where the ships must come in, and is one of the best and strongest built of all the Castles throughout the whole Indies, yet have they but small store of ordinance or munition, as also not any soldiers more than the Captain and his men that dwell therein. But when occasion serveth, the married Portugese's that dwell in the Island, which are about 40. or 50. at the most, are all bound to keep the Castle, for that the Island hath no other defence then only that Castle, the rest lieth open and is a flat sand. Round about within the Castle are certain wholly accustomed thereunto as if they were Horses, Moils, or Asses. I have spoken with men that came from thence, and have seen them, and affirm it for a truth. But returning to our matter of the governmement and usage of the Portugese's and their Captain, I say that the Captain maketh the commodity of his place within three years space that he remaineth there, which amounteth to the value of 300. thousand Ducats, that is nine tons of gold: as while we remained there, the Captain named Nuno Velio Perena himself showed us, and it is most in gold that cometh from Sofala & Monomotapa as I said before, from Mossambique they carry into India Gold, Ambergris, Eben wood, and ivory, and many slaves both men and women which are carried thither, because they are the strongest Moors in all the East countries, to do their filthiest and hardest labour, wherein they only use them: They sail from thence into India but once every year, in the month of August till half September, because that throughout the whole countries of India they must sail with Monssoyns, that is with the tides of the year, which they name by the winds, which blow certain months in the year, whereby they make their account to go and come from the one place to the other, & the time that men may commonly sail between Mossambique and India, is 30. days little more or less, and then they stay in India till the month of April, when the wind or Monssoyn cometh again to serve them for Mossambique, so that every year once, there goeth and cometh one ship for the Captain that carrieth and bringeth his merchandise, and no man may traffic from thence into India, but only those that dwell and are married in Mossambique, for that such as are unmarried may not stay there by special privilege from the King of Portugal granted unto those that inhabit there, to the end the Island should be peopled, and thereby kept and maintained. Behind Mossambique lieth the country of Prester john, which is called by them the country of Abexines, whereupon the coast of Mossambique unto the red sea is commonly called the coast of Abex, and divers men of Prester john's land do send men of that country, some being slaves, and others tree into India, which serve for Sailors in the Portugal's ships, that traffic in those countries from place to place, whose pictures & counterfeits, as also their religion, manner of living, and customs doth hereafter follow in the pictures of India. This coast of Abex is also by the Portugal's called the coast of Melinde, because that upon the same coast lieth a town and a Kingdom of that name, which was the first town and Kingdom that in the Portugeses first discovery of those countries, did receive them peaceably without treason or deceit, and so to this day doth yet continue. We stayed at Mossambique for the space of 15. days, to provide fresh water and victuals for the supplying of our wants, in the which time divers of our men fell sick and died, by reason of the unaccustomed air of the place, which of itself is an unwholesome land, and an evil air by means of the great and unmeasurable heat. The 20. of August we set sail with all our company, that is, our four ships of one fleet that came from Portugal, and a ship of the Captains of Mossambique, whose three years were then finished, his name was Don Pedro de Castro, in whose place the aforesaid Nuno Velio Pereira, was then come. The said Captain Don Pedro returned with his wife & family again into India, for that the kings commandment and ordinance is, that after the expiration of their three years office, they must yet stay three years more in India at the commandment of the Vice Roy of India, in the king's service, at their own charges, before they must return into Portugal, unless they bring a special patent from the King, that after they have continued three years in their office, they may return into Portugal again, which is very seldom seen, unless it be by special favour, and likewise no man may travel out of India unless he have the Vice Royes' Passport, and without it they are not suffered to pass, for it is very narrowly looked into. The 24. of August in the morning we descried two Islands, which are called Insula de Comora, and Insula de Don jan de Castro. The Island Comora lieth distant from Mossambique 60. miles, Northwards under 11. degrees on the South side is a very high land, so high that in a whole days sail with a good wind we could not lose the sight thereof, the same day the ships separated themselves again, according to the ancient manner, for the occasions aforesaid. The third of September we once again passed the Equinoctial line, which runneth between Melinde and Brava, towns lying upon the coast of Abex, and the line is from Mossambique Northwards 230. miles, and from the line to the Cape de Quardafum are 190. miles, and lieth under 12. degrees on the North side of the Equinoctial, upon this coast between Mossambique, and the Cape de Guardafum, lieth these towns, Quiloa, in time passed called Rapta Mombassa, which is a town situate in a little Island of the same name, which showeth a far off to be high sandy downs, and hath a haven with two forts to defend it, Melinde, Pate, Brava, and Magadoxo, each being a kingdom of itself, holding the law of Mahomet: the people are somewhat of a sallower colour than those of Mossambique, with shining hair, governing their Cities after the manner of the Arabians, and other mahometans. This corner or Cape of Guardafum is the end of the coast of Abex or Melinde, and by this cape East Northeast 20. miles within the Sea lieth the rich Island called Socotora, where they find Aloes, which taketh the name of the Island being called Aloe Socotorina, and is the very best, being close and fast, and from thence is it carried and conveyed into all places. By this corner and Island beginneth the mouth or entrance of the ●streito de Mecka, for that within the same upon the coast of Arabia lieth the city of Mecka, where the body of Mahomet hangeth in the air in an iron chest, under a sky made of Adamant stone, which is greatly sought unto, & visited by many Turks and Arabians. This entry is also called the red sea, not that the water is red, but only because there are certain red hills lying about the same, that yield red marble stones: and because the sand in some places is red, it is the same sea which Moses with the children of Israel passed through on dry land. From the hook or cape de Guardafum, which lesseneth, and is narrow inwards towards Sues, in time passed called Arsinoe, (which is the uttermost town where the narrowness or strait endeth) are 360. miles, and from thence over land to the Mediterranean sea in Italy are 90. miles, the strait or narrowness is in the entrance, & also within the broadest place 40. miles, and in some places narrower: it hath also divers Islands, and on the one side inward by Sues Northward Arabia deserta, on the other side south ward Egypt, where the river Nilus hath her course, and somewhat lower towards the Indian seas Arabia Felix: and on the other side right against it, the country of Abexynes, or Prester john's land, upon the hook or corner of Arabia Felix, the Portugeses in time passed held a fort called Aden, but now they have none, whereby at this present the Turks come out of the strait or mouth of the red sea, with Galleys that are made in Sues, and do much hurt and injury upon the coast of Abex or Melinde, as when time serveth we shall declare. Having again passed the line, we had the sight of the North Star, whereof upon the coast of Guinea, from the Island of S. Thomas until this time, we had lost the fight. The 4. of September we espied a ship of our own fleet, and spoke with him: it was the S. Francisco, which sailed with us till the 7. day, and then left us. The 13. of September we saw an other ship which was the S. jacob, which sailed out of sight again and spoke not to us. The 20. of September we perceived many Snakes swimming in the sea, being as great as Eels, and other things like the scales of fish, which the Portugeses call Vintijns, which are half Rials of silver, Portugal money, because they are like unto it: these swim and drive upon the sea in great quantities, which is a certain sign & token of the Indian coast. Not long after with great joy we descried land, and found ground at 47. fathom deep, being the land of Bards, which is the uttermost end and corner of the entry of the River Goa, of being about three miles from the City: it is a high land where the ships of India do anchor and unlade, and from thence by boats their wares are carried to the town. That day we ankered without in the sea about three miles from the land, because it was calm, and the flood was passed; yet it is not without danger, and hath round about a fair and fast land to anchor in, for as than it began in those places to be summer. The 21. being the next day, there came unto us divers boats called Almadias', which boarded us, bringing with them all manner of fresh victuals from the land, as fresh bread & fruit, some of them were Indians that are christened: there came likewise a Galley to fetch the Archbishop, and brought him to a place called Pangijn, which is in the middle way, between Goa and the road of Bards, and lieth upon the same River: Here he was welcomed and visited by the Vice Roy of India, named Don Francisco Mascarenias, and by all the Lords and Gentlemen of the country, as well spiritual as temporal: The Magistrates of the town desired him to stay there ten or twelve days, while preparation might be made to receive him with triumph into the city, as their manner is, which he granted them. The same day in the afternoon we entered the River, into the road under the land of Bards, being the 21. of September Anno 1583. being five months and 13. days after our putting forth of the River of Lisbon, (having stayed 15. days at Mosambique (which was one of the spéediest and shortest voyages that in many years before and since that time was ever performed: There we found the ship named Saint Laurence, which arrived there a day before us: The 22. day the S. jacob came thither, and the next day after arrived the S. Francis. There died in our ship 30. persons, among the which, some of them were slaves, and one high Dutchman, that had been one of the King of Spain's guard: every man had been sick once or twice and let blood. This is commonly the number of men that ordinarily died in the ships, sometimes more sometimes less. About ten or twelve years since it chanced that a Vice Roy for the King, named Ruy Lorenzo Detavora sailed for India, that had in his ship 1100. men, and there happened a sickness among them, so that there died thereof to the number of 900. and all thrown over board into the sea, before they came to Mosambique the Vice Roy himself being one. Which was an extraordinary sickness, and it is to be thought that the great number of men in the ship were the cause of breeding the same: therefore in these days the ships take no more so many men into them, for that with the number they carry, they have stinking air, and filth enough to cleanse within the ship. The 30. of September the Archbishop my master with great triumph was brought into the town of Goa, and by the Gentlemen and Rulers of the country, led unto the cathedral Church, singing Te Deum laudamus, and after many ceremonies and ancient customs, they conveyed him to his palace, which is close by the Church. The 20. of November our Admiral S. Philip arrived at Cochin without staying to land in any place, having endured much misery by the means before rehearsed, having been seven months and twelve days under sail. The last of the same month of November the ships sailed from Goa to the coast of Malabar, and Cochin, there to receive their lading of Pepper and other spices: some take in their lading on the coast of Malabar, as at Onor, Mangator, Cananor, etc. and some at Cochin, which can always lad two ships with Pepper. Cochin lieth from Goa southward about 90. miles: The ships unlade all their Portugal commodities in Goa, where the Merchants, and Factors are resident, and from thence the ships do sail along the coast to take in their lading in Pepper, and to Cochin as it is said before. Each ship doth commonly lad eight thousand Quintales of Pepper, little more or less Portugal weight: every Quintale is 128. pound. Then they come to Cochin, whither the Factors also do travel and lad in them Cloves, Cinnamon, and other Indian wares, as in my voyage homeward I will particularly declare, together with the manner of the same. In the months of january and February Anno 1584. 1584. the ships with their lading returned from Cochin, some before, some after, towards Portugal, with whom my brother went, because of his office in the ship, and I stayed with my master in India certain years, to see and learn the manners and customs of the said lands, people, fruits, wares, and merchandises, with other things, which when time serveth, I will in truth set down, as I myself for the most part have seen it with mine eyes, and of credible persons, both Indians, and other inhabiters in those Country's learned and required to know, as also the report and fame thereof is now sufficiently spread abroad throughout the world by divers of our neighbour countries and lands which traffic and deal with them, namely our country, the East Countries, England, France, etc. which likewise are found and known by the Portugal's themselves, which daily traffic thither. But before I begin to describe Goa, and the Indies, concerning their manners, traffics, fruits, wares, and other things, the better to understand the situation of the Country, and of the coasts lying on the East side, to the last and highest part of the borders of China, which the Portugese's have traveled and discovered, together with their Islands, I will first set down a brief note of the Oriental coasts, beginning at the red, or the Arabian sea, from the town of Aden to Chinae and then the description of the coasts before named. Chapter 5. The description of the coast of Arabia Felix, or the red Sea, to the Island and fortress of Ormus. ADen is the strongest and fairest town of Arabia Felix, Annotatio D. Pall. situate in a valley, compassed about upon the one side with strong mines, on the other side with high mountains, there are in it five Castles laden with Ordinance, and a continual Garrison kept therein, because of the great number of ships that sail before it, the Town hath about 6000. houses in it, where the Indians, Persians, Aethiopians, and Turks do traffic: and because the Sun is so extreme hot in the day time, they make most of their bargains by night. About a stones cast from the town there is a hill with a great Castle standing thereon wherein the Governor dwelleth. In times past this town stood upon the firm land, but now by the labour & industry of man, they have made it an Island. Aden lieth on the North side, at the entry of the red Sea on the coast of Arabia Felix, or fruitful Arabia, and reacheth 60. miles more inwards than the corner or Cape de Guardafum the farthest part or corner of Abex, or Melinde as I said before: but the coast of Arabia, which taketh the beginning from Aden, is much more inward. Aden lieth under 13. degrees on the North side, and from thence the coast lieth North-east and by East till you come to Cape de Rosalgate, which lieth under 22. degrees, and is the further corner of the land of Arabia Felix, lying on the Indian Sea, which is distant from Aden 240. miles: the town of Aden standeth by the hill called Darsira, which men affirm to be only Cliffs of hard stones, and red Marble, where it never raineth. The people of this coast of Arabia, are tawny of colour, almost like those of the coast of Abex or Melinde, from that Country they bring great numbers of good horses into India, and also Frankincense, Myrrh, Balsam, Balsam wood, and fruit, and some Manna, with other sweet wares and Spices: they hold the law of Mahomet after the Persians manner. From the Cape of Rosalgate inwards, following the coast Northwest to the Cape de Moncado, in times past named Albora are 70. miles. This point lieth right against the Island Ormus under 26. degrees. There beginneth the entrance of the straits of Persia, called Sinus Persicus, and the Island Ormus lieth between them both, having on the one side Arabia, and on the other side Northward the Country of Persia, and is in breadth 20. miles. From the Cape de Moncadon, coasting the Arabian shore inwards to the Island of Barem, are 80. miles, and lieth under 26. degrees & a half. There the Captain of Ormus being a Portugal, hath a factor for the King, and there they fish for the best Pearls in all the East Indies, and are the right oriental Pearl. Coasting along this shore from Barem inwards to the farthest and outermost corner of Persia, or Sinus Persicus, lieth the town of Balsora, which are 60. miles: this Town lieth under 30. degrees, and a little about it the two rivers Tigris and Euphrates do meet and join in one, and run by Bassora into the aforesaid Sinus Persicus. Thereabout do● yet appear the decayed buildings, and ancient Ruins of old Babylon, and as many learned men are of opinion, thereabout stood the earthly Paradise. From the town of Balsora the coast runneth again Northward towards Ormus, which is under the Dominion of the Persian, this Sinus Persicus is about 40. miles broad, not much more nor much less, and hath divers islands, and in the mouth thereof lieth the rich Island Ormus, where the Portugese's have a Fort, and dwell altogether in the isle among the natural borne countrymen, and have a Captain and other officers every three years, as they of Mossambique. Chapter 6. Of the Island and Town of Ormus. ORmus lieth upon the Island Geru, in times past called Ogyris, and it is an Island and a kingdom which the Portugese's have brought under their subjection, whereas yet their King hath his residence, that is to say, without the town where the Portugese's inhabit. These people observe Mahomet's law, and are white like the Persians. And there they have a common custom, that he which is King doth presently cause all his brethren and his kinsmen of the Male kind to have their eyes put forth, which done they are all richly kept and maintained during their lives, for that there is a law in Ormus, that no blind man may be their King nor Governor over them. Therefore the King causeth them all to have their eyes put out, so to be more secure in their governments, as also to avoid all strife and contention, that might arise, and to hold and maintain their country in peace. The Island is about three miles great, very full of cliffs and rocks, and altogether unfruitful. It hath neither green leaf nor herb in it, nor any sweet water, but only rocks of salt stones, whereof the walls of their houses are made: it hath nothing of itself, but only what it fetcheth from the firm land on both sides, as well out of Persia as from Arabia, and from the Town of Bassora, but because of the situation, and pleasantness of the Island there is all things therein to be had in great abundance, and great traffic for that in it is the staple for all India, Persia, Arabia and Turkey, and of all the places and Countries about the same, & commonly it is full of Persians, Armenians, Turks and all nations, as also Venetians, which lie there to buy Spices and precious stones, that in great abundance are brought thither out of all parts of India, and from thence are sent over land to Venice, and also carried throughout all Turkey, Armenia, Arabia, Persia and every way. There are likewise brought thither all manner of merchandises from those Countries that is from Persia: out of the Country named Coracone and D●a●, and other places, great store of rich Tapestry & Coverlets, which are called Alcatiff●s: out of Turkey all manner of Chamlets: out of Arabia divers sorts of Drugs for Pothecaries, as Sanguis draconis, Manna, Mirre, Frankincense & such like, divers goodly horses, that are excellent for breeding, all manner of most excellent Oriental Pearls out of Mascatte a Haven lying between the Cape of Roselgate and Moncadon, upon the coast of Arabia, divers sorts of Dates, and Marmelades, which from Ormus is carried into India, and all places are served therewith: likewise the money called Larynen, (which hath as it were two legs, stretching out like a piece of silver wide that is beaten flat, printed about with certain small Characters, which is coined in Persia at a place called Lary, being fine Silver) is brought thither in great quantities, whereby there is as great dealing with them, as with other merchandises, because of the great gain that is gotten by them and in India they go very high. Now to know the cause of so great traffic, and concourse of people in this Island of Ormus, you must understand that every year twice there cometh a great company of people over land which are called Caffiles or Car●anes, which come from Aleppo, out of the Country of Surie three days journey from Tripoli which lieth upon the coast of the Mediterranean Sea, this company of people, or Caffila observe this order, that is, every year twice in the months of April and September. There is a Captain and certain hundreths of ●annisaries, which convey the said Caffila until they come to the Town of Bassora, from whence they travail by water unto Ormus. The merchants know the times when the Caruana or Caffila will come, so that against that time they make and prepare their merchandises in a readiness, and then are brought thither divers Camels, Dromedaries, Moils and horses every man his troup, which are there likewise to be sold, so that there are assembled at the least five or six thousand persons all together, and ride all in order like a battle that marcheth in the field two and two upon a Camel, or else ware hanging on both sides of the Camel, as you shall see in the Picture that followeth. With a good guard of ●anisaries, because they are often times set upon by the Arabians which are great thieves, and come to rob them, for they must travail in the woods at the least forty days together, where in every three or four days they find wells or pits, from whence they provide themselves of water which they carry with them in beasts skins tanned, whereof they make Flasks and Bottles. The people now of late years have left off their robbing and stealing in the hiph ways, but long before the birth of Christ, they used it, as the Prophet jeremy doth witness saying in his third Chapter and second verse, Lift up your eyes, and behold what fornication you commit in every place, you sit in the streets, and stay for your companions like the Arabian in the woods etc. I remember that we fell among many thousand of these people, which in great poverty dwell within the woods, and sandy downs, that are altogether barren, where they live, in the heat of the suns lying with their Camels, getting their living only by robbing and stealing, their meat and best bread are Cakes which they bake under camels dung dried in the Sun, which the Sand maketh hot, and camels Milk and flesh, with such like unprofitable meat, to conclude they live like miserable men, as in truth they are. Likewise there are certain victuallers that follow this company, which carry all kind of things with them▪ as Honey, Dates, Sheep Goats, Hens, Eggs etc. and all other sorts of victuals and provision, so that for money they may have what they will, every night they lie still and have their Tents, wherein they sleep, keeping good watch, in this manner they travail to the Town of Bassora, and pass through Babylon now called Bagedet, and through other places. Being at Bassora, they stay their certain days, where again they assemble themselves, to return home, and travail in the like sort back again unto Aleppo, whereby all manner of merchandises, out of all places are brought thither in great abundance, by great numbers of traveling Merchants, of all nations whatsoever, except Spaniards, Portugeses, and the King of Spain's subjects, which are narrowly looked unto, although divers times many of them pass among the rest, under the names of French men, English men, or Venetians, which nations have their factors and servants continually resident in Aleppo, as also in Tripoli, where their daily traffic is from Venice, Marseilles and London and in Tripoli they unlade their wares, and there the ships take in their lading, and from thence they send their merchandises by land to and from Aleppo, where they use great traffic, and have many privileges and freedoms granted them by the great Turk. And for that we are now speaking of Turks, I must not forget to show you how, and in what sort the great Turk hath every day news and letters from all his kingdoms & Countries that are so great, wild, waist, and spread so far abroad one from the other. You must understand, that throughout the whole Country of Turkey, they use Doves or Pigeons, which are brought up & accustomed thereunto, having rings about their legs. These Doves or Pigeons, are borne from Bassora, and Babylon, unto Aleppo and Constantinople, and so from thence back again, and when there is any great occasion of importance to be advertised or sent, they make the letter fast unto the ring, that is about the Pigeons feet, and so let them fly, whereby the letter with the Dove is brought unto the place whither it should go, and they fly sometimes a thousand miles, which men would think impossible, but yet it is most true, and affirmed by such as come from thence: I have seen of the Doves in India, that a Venetian my good friend showed me, which for the strangeness thereof had brought of them with him into India. But let us now return unto our matter of the isle of Ormus, which lieth under 27. degrees, and in Summer time is so unreasonable and intolerable hot, that they are forced to lie and sleep in wooden cisterns made for the purpose full of water, and all naked both men and women, lying clean under water saving only their heads: all their houses are flat above, and in the tops thereof they make holes to let the air come in, like those of Cayro, and they use certain instruments like Waggins with bellows, to bear the people in, and together wind to cool them withal, which they call Cat●auentos. Cayrus hath very high houses, with broad peint-houses, to yield shadow, Annotatio D. Pall. thereby to avoid the heat of the Sun: in the middle of these houses are great Pipes of ten cubits long at the least, which stand Northward, to convey and spread the cold air into their houses, specially to cool the lowest rooms. In winter time it is as cold with them as it is in Portugal, the water that they drink is brought from the firm land, which they keep in great pots, (as the Tinaios in Spain) and in cisterns, whereof they have very great ones within the fortress, which water for a year, or a year and a half, against they shall need, like those of Mossambique. They fetch water by the Island of barren, in the Sea, from under the salt water, with instruments four or five fathom deep, which is very good and excellent sweet water, as good as any fountain water. There is in Ormus a sickness or common Plague of Worms, which grow in their legs, it is thought that they proceed of the water that they drink. These worms are like unto Lute strings, and about two or three fathoms long, which they must pluck out and wind them▪ about a Straw or a Pin, every day some part thereof, as long as they feel them creep: and when they hold still, letting it rest in that sort till the next day, they bind it fast and anoint the hole, and the swelling from whence it cometh forth, with fresh Butter, and so in ten or twelve days, they wind them out without any let, in the mean time they must sit still with their legs, for if it should break, they should not without great pain get it out of their leg, as I have seen some men do. Of these worms Alsaharanius in his practice in the 11. Chapter writeth thus▪ In some places there grow certain Worms between the skin and the flesh, Annotatio. D. Pall. which sickness is named the Oxen pain, because the Oxen are many times grieved therewith, which stretch themselves in great length, & creep under the skin, so long till that they pierce it, the healing thereof consisteth in purging the body of corrup phlegm, etc. Read further. In my master the Archbishop's house we had one of his servants borne in Ormus newly come from thence which drew three or The 8. Chapter. Of the town, fortress and Island of Diu, in times past called Alambater. THe Town and Island of Diu lieth distant from the river Indo 70. miles under 21. degrees, close to the firm land: in times past it belonged to the King of Cambaia, in whose land and coast it lieth, where the Portugeses by negligence of the King, have built a fortress, & in process of time have brought the Town and the whole Island under their subjection, and have made it very strong, & in a manner invincible, which fortress hath been twice besieged by soldiers of Cambaia and their assistants, first in Anno 1539. 1539. and secondly in Anno 1546. 1546. and hath always been valiantly defended by the Portugeses, as their Chronicles rehearse. This Town hath a very great Haven, and great traffic, although it hath very little or nothing at all of itself, more than the situation of the place, for that it lieth between Sinde and Cambaia, which Countries are abundant in all kind of things, whereby Diu is always full of strange nations, as Turks, Persians, Arabians, Armenians, and other country people: and it is the best & the most profitable revenue the King hath throughout all India, for that the Banianen, Gusaratten, Rumos and Persians, which traffic in Cambaia, & from thence to Mecca, or the red Sea, do commonly discharge their wares, and take in their lading in Diu, by reason of the situation thereof, for that it lieth in the entrance of Cambaia, and from Diu it is shipped and sent to Cambaia, and so brought back again to Diu. The Town of Diu is inhabited by Portugeses, together with the natural borne Countrymen, like Ormus and all the towns & places holden by the Portugeses in India, yet they keep their fortress strong unto themselves. This Island aboundeth, and is very fruitful of all kind of victuals, as Oxen Kine, Hogs, Sheep, Hens, Butter, Milk, Onions, Garlic, Pease, beans, and such like, whereof there is great plenty, and that very good, and such as better cannot be made in all these Low-countries, but that the Fuel is not so well dressed: they have likewise Chéeses, but they are very dry and salt, much Fish which they salt, and it is almost like unto salt Ling, or Cod, and of other sorts they make hanged flesh which is very good, and will continue for a whole Voyage: of all these victuals, and necessary provisions they have so great quantity that they supply the want of all the places round about them, especially Goa, and Cochin, for they have neither Butter, Onions, Garlic, Pease, Oil nor grain, as Beans, Wheat, or any seed: they must all be brought from other places thither, as in the orderly description of the coast as it lieth, I will show you, what wares, goods, merchandises, victuals, fruits and other things each land, Province or Country yieldeth and affordeth. From Diu sailing along by the coast about fifteen or sixteen miles, beginneth the mouth of the water that runneth to Cambaia, which is at the entry, and all along the said water about 18. miles broad, and 40. miles long, and runneth in northeast and by North, and at the farther end of the water is the Town of Cambaia, whereof the whole Country beareth the name, and lieth under twenty three degrees, there the King or Solden holdeth his Court. The 9 Chapter. Of the kingdom and land of Cambaia. THe land of Cambaia is the fruitfullest Country in all India, and from thence provision of necessaries is made for all places round about it: whereby there is a great traffic in the Town, as well of the inhabitants, as other Indians and neighbours, as also of Portugeses, Persians, Arabians, Armenians etc. The King observeth the law of Mahomet, but most part of the people that are dwellers and natural borne Countrymen, called Gusarates and Baneanem, observe Pythagoras' law, & are the subtlest and pollitiquest Merchants of all India, whose counterfeits and shapes are placed in this book by those of India, with a description of their living, ceremonies & customs, as in time and place shall be showed. This land of Cambaia aboundeth in all kind of victuals, as Corn, Rice and such like grain, also of Butter and Oil, wherewith they furnish all the Countries round about them. There is made great store of Cotton Linen of divers sorts, which are called Cannequins, Boffetas, jorims, Chau●ares and Cotonias, which are like Canvas, thereof do make sails and such like things, and many other sorts that are very good and cheap. They make some thereof so fine, that you can not perceive the threads, so that for fineness it surpasseth any Holland cloth, they make likewise many Carpets, called Alcatiffas', but they are neither so fine nor so good as those that are brought to Ormus out of Persia, and an other sort of course Carpets, that are called Banquays, which are much like the striped Coverlits that are made in Scotland, serving to lay upon chests & cupboards: They make also fair coverlits, which they call Godoriins Colchas, which are very fair and pleasant to the eye, stitched with silk, and also of Cotton of all colours and stitchinges: pavilions of divers sorts and colours; Persintoes that are strings or bands, wherewith the Indians bind and make fast their bedsheddes, thereon to lay their beds: all kind of bedstead, stools for Indian women, and other such like stuffs, costly wrought and covered with stuffs of all colours: also fine playing tables, and Chessebordes of ivory, and shields of Torteux shells, wrought and inlaid very workemanlike, many fair signets, rings, and other curious work of ivory, and sea horse teeth, as also of Amber, whereof there is great quantity: They have likewise a kind of mountain Crystal, whereof they make many signets, buttons, beads and divers other devices. They have divers sorts of precious stones, as Espinellen, Rubies Granadis, jasnites, Amatistes, Chrysolites, Olhos de gato, which are cats eyes, or agates, much jasper stone, which is called blood and milk stone, and other kinds of stones: also many kinds of Drognes, as Amfion, or Opium, Camfora, Bangue, and Sandale wood, whereof when time serveth, I will particularly discourse, in setting down the spices and fruits of India, Alluijn, Cane Sugar, and other merchandises, which I cannot remember, and it would be over long and tedious to rehearse them all: Annell or Indigo groweth only in Cambaia, and is there prepared and made ready, and from thence carried throughout the whole world, whereof hereafter I will say more: but this shall suffice for the description of Cambaia, and now I will proceed. At the end of the country of Cambaia beginneth India & the lands of Decam, and Cuncam, the coast that is the inward part thereof on the Indian side stretcheth from Cambaia to the coast of India, where the said inward part hath the beginning, which coast stretcheth Westwards, Southwest, and by South to the Island lying on the coast or entry of the said place, called Insula das Vaquas, being under 20. degrees, upon the which corner and country, on the firm land standeth the town and fortress of Daman which is inhabited by the Portugal's▪ and under their subjection, distant from the Town of Diu East and by South forty miles. The 10. Chapter. Of the coast of India, and the havens and places lying upon the same. THe coast of India hath the beginning at the entry or turning of the land of Cambaia from the Island called Das Vaguas, as it is said before, which is the right coast, that in all the East Countries is called India: but they have other particular names, as Mosambique, Melinde, Ormus, Cambaia, Choramandel, Bengala, Pegu, Malacca, etc. as when time serveth shall be showed, whereof a part hath already been described. Now you must understand that this coast of India beginneth at Daman, or the Island Das Vaguas, and stretcheth South and by East, to the Cape of Comoriin, where it endeth, and is in all 180. miles, upon the which coast lie the towns and havens hereafter following which the Portugeses have under their subjections, and strong forts therein: first Daman from thence fifteen miles upwards under 19 degrees and a half the town of Basaiin, from Basaiin ten miles upwards under 19 degrees the Town and fort of Chaul, from Chaul to Dabul are ten miles, and lieth under 18. degrees: from Dabul to the town and Island of Goa are 30. miles, which lieth under 15. degrees and a half: all these Towns and forts aforesaid are inhabited by the Portugal's, except Dabul which they had, and long since lost it again: The coast from Goa to Daman, or the turning into Cambaia, is called by those of Goa the Northern coast, and from Goa to the Cape de Comoriin, it is called the southern coast, but commonly the coast of Malabar. Concerning the town of Goa and the situation thereof, as also the description of Decam & Cuncam, as touching their kings and progenies we will in another place particularly declare, with many other memorable things, as well of the Portugal's, as of the natural countrymen. Wherefore for this time we will pass them over, and speak of the other principal towns and havens, following along the coast. You must understand that all the towns aforesaid, Daman, Basaiin and Chaul, have good havens, where great traffic is done throughout all India: all these towns and countries are very fruitful of Rice, Pease, and other grains, Butter, and oil of Indian Nuts: but oil of Olives is not to be found in all the East Indies, only what is brought out of Portugal, and other such like provisions is there very plentiful: they make also some Cotton linen, but very little. The town of Chaul hath great traffic to Ormus, Cambaia, to the red sea, to Sinde Masquate, Bengala, etc. & hath many rich Merchants, and ships: there is a place by Chaul, which is the old town of the natural borne countrymen, where divers kinds of silks are woven, of all sorts and colours, as Grogeran, Satin, Taffeta, Sarscenet, and such like stuffs, in so great abundance▪ that India and all other places bordering the same▪ are served therewith: whereby the inhabitants of Chaul have a great commodity, by bringing the raw silk out of China, spinning and weaving it there; and again being woven, to carry and distribute it throughout all India. There are likewise made many and excellent fair desks, bedstead, stools for women, covered with stuffs of all colours, and such like merchandises, whereby they have great traffic: There is likewise great store of Ginger, as also all the coast along, but little esteemed there: This land called the North part, hath a very wholesome and temperate air, and is thought to be the soundest & healthsomest part of all India, for the town of Diu, and the coast of Malabar is very unwholesome. These Indians, as also those of Cambaia which are called Benianen, and Gusarrates, and those of the land that lieth inwards from Decam, which dwell upon the hill, called Ballagatte, which are named Decaniins, and Canaras, are altogether of yellow colour, and some of them somewhat whiter, others somewhat browner, but those that dwell on the sea coast, are different and much blacker, their statures▪ visages and limbs are altogether like men of Europa, and those of the coast of Malabar, which stretcheth and beginneth 12. miles from Goa Southward, and reacheth to the cape de Comoriin, whose natural borne people are called Malabaren, which are those that dwell upon the sea coast, are as black as pitch, with very black and smooth hair, yet of bodies, limbs and visages, in all things proportioned like men of Europa: These are the best soldiers in all India, and the principal enemies that the Portugal's have, and which trouble them continually. But the better to know the situation of the country, you must understand that all the coast severed from India, is the low land lying 8. or 10. miles upon the coast, which is that whereof we speak, and is called Cuncam, and then there is a high or hilly Country, which reacheth almost unto the skies, and stretcheth from the one end unto the other, beginning at Daman or Cambaia to the Cape de Comoriin, and the uttermost corner of India, and all that followeth again on the other coast called Ghoramandel. This high land on the top is very flat and good to build upon, called Ballagatte, and Decan, and is inhabited and divided among divers Kings and governors. The inhabitants and natural borne countrymen, are commonly called Decaniins, and Canaras, as in the description of Goa and the territories thereof shallbe particularly showed, with the shapes, fashions and counterfeits of their bodies, Churches, houses, trees, plants, and fruits, etc. The 11. Chapter. Of the coast of India, that is from Goa to the cape de Comoriin, and the furthest corner of the land, which is called the coast of Malabar. THe coast of Malabar beginneth from Cape de Ramos, which lieth from Goa Southwards ten miles, and endeth at the Cape de Comoriin, in time passed called Corii, which is 100 and 7. or 8. miles, whereon lie the places hereafter following, which are inhabited by the Portugeses, and kept with fortresses: first from the said Cape de Ramos to the fortress of Onor are ten miles, lying full under 14. degrees, and is inhabited by the Portugal's. There is great quantity of Pepper, for that they are able every year to lad a ship with 7. or 8. thousand Quintalles of Pepper, Portugal weight, & it is the best and fullest berries in all Malabar or India. This land belongeth to a Queen named Batycola, which is a town not far from thence inwards wherein she keepeth her Court: it is she that selleth the Pepper, and delivereth it unto the merchants Factors, that lie in Onor, but they must always deliver their money six months before they receive their Pepper, otherwise they get it not: then she delivereth the Pepper, which by one of the Factors is received and laid up within the fortress, till the ships of Portugal come thither to take in their lading of Pepper: There is likewise much Rice. This fortress is not much frequented, but only in the time of lading of their Pepper. which within few years hath been used to be laden there, for before they used not to lad any in that place. From Onor to the town of Barselor are 15. miles, and lieth under 13. degrees: it is also inhabited by Portugal's as Onor is: there is great store of Rice & Pepper: from Barselo● to Mangalor are 9 miles, and lieth under twelve degrees, and a half, which also is a fortress inhabited as the others are by Portugeses, and hath great store of Pepper and Ryce. From Mangalor to Cananor are 15. miles, which lieth right under 11. degrees and a half. This is the best fortress that the Portugal's have in all Malabar, and there is much Pepper: The Malabars without the fortress have a village, with many houses therein, built after their manner; wherein there is a market holden every day, in the which all kinds of victuals are to be had, which is wonderful, altogether like the Hollanders markets. There you find Hens, Eggs, Butter, Hony, Indian Oil, and Indian figs, that are brought from Cananor, which are very great, and without exception the best in all India: of the which sorts of victuals, with other such like they have great quantities: also very fair and long masts for ships, such as better cannot be found in all Norway, and that in so great numbers, that they furnish all the countries round about them. It is a very green and pleasant land to behold, full of fair high trees, and fruitful of all things, so is the whole coast from Malabar all along the shore. Among these Malabars the white Moors do inhabit that believe in Mahomet, and their greatest traffic is unto the red sea, although they may not do it, neither any other Indian without the Portugal's passport, otherwise the Portugeses army (which yearly saileth along the coasts, to keep them clear from sea rovers) for the safety of their merchants, finding them or any other Indian or nation whatsoever, at sea without a passport, would take them for a prize, as oftentimes it happeneth that they bring ships from Cambaia, Malabar, or from the isle of Sumatra, and other places that traffic to the red sea. These Moors of Cananor keep friendship with the Portugal's, because of the fortress which holdeth them in subjection, yet covertly are their deadly enemies, and secretly contribute and pay great sums of money to the other Malabars, to the end that they should mischief and trouble the Portugal's, by all the means they can devise, whose form and images do follow after those of Goa and Malabar. From Cananor to calicut are 8. miles, which lieth full under 11. degrees: This town of calicut hath in times past been the most famous Town in all Malabar or India, and it was the chief town of Malabar where the Samoriin, which is the Emperor, holdeth his Court, but because the Portugal's at their first coming and discovering of India, were oftentimes deceived by him, they resorted to the King of Cochin, who as then was subject to the Samoriin, being of small power. But when the Portugeses began to prosper in their enterprise, and to get possession in the country, and so became masters of the sea, calicut began to decay, and to lose both name and traffic, and now at this time it is one of the towns of least account in all Malabar and Cochin to the contrary, their King being very rich, and richer than the Samoriin, so that now he careth no for him, by means of the favour and help he findeth at the hands of the Portugal's. From calicut to Cranganor are ten miles, and lieth under ten degrees and a half: there the Portugal's have a Fortress. From Cranganor to Cochin are ten miles, and lieth not full under ten degrees. The town of Cochin is inhabited by Portugeses, and natural borne Indians, as Malabars and other Indians that are christened: it is almost as great as Goa, very populous, and well built with fair houses, Churches, and cloisters, and a fair and most pleasant River, with a good channel, and a haven: a little beyond the town towards the land runneth a small river or water, where sometimes men may pass over dry footed: on the further side whereof lieth a place called Cochin Dacyma, and it is above Cochin, which is in the jurisdiction of the Malabars, who as yet continue in their own religion: there the King keepeth his Court: It is very full and well built with houses after the Indian manner, and hath likewise a market every day, where all kind of things are to be bought, as in Cananor, but in greater quantities. The land of Cochin is an Island, and it is in many places compassed about, and through the Isle with small Rivers. Right over against Cochin Northward lieth an other Island called Vaypiin, which is likewise compassed about with water, like the fortress of Cranganor, all these lands and Countries are low and flat land like the Country of Holland, but have no ditches nor downs but only the flat shore upon the Sea side, and within the shore & the Strand of the river, nor without any high ground or shelters, and so it still continueth. The Country is very great and pleasant to behold▪ full of woods and trees, it hath also woods of Cinnamon trees, which are called Canella de Ma●es, that is wild Cinnamon, which is not so good as the Cinnamon of Seylo●, for when the Cinnamon of Seylo● is worth 100L. Parda●ē or collars that Cinnamon is worth but 5▪ or 3●. Parda●wen, and is likewise forbidden ●o be carried into Portugal, notwithstanding: There is every year great quantity thereof shipped, but it is entered in the Custom books for Cinnamon of Seylon, whereby they pay the King his full Custom for the best, Cochin hath also much Pepper, and can every year lad two ships full, other ships lad along the coast, at the fortress aforesaid, & use to come unto Cochin, after they have discharged all their Portugal wares and Merchandises, at Goa, and thither also come the Factors and Merchants and lad their wares, as in my Voyage homewards I will declare. Without Cochin, among the Malabares, there dwelleth also divers Moors that believe in Mahomet, and many jews, that are very rich, and there live freely without being hindered or impeached for their religion, as also the Mahometans, with their churches which they call Mesquiten, the Bramanes likewise (which are the Spirituality of the Malabares & Indians) have their Idols and houses of Devils, which they call Pagodes. These three nations do severally hold & maintain their laws and ceremonies by themselves, and live friendly and quietly together keeping good policy and justice, each nation being of the kings counsel, with his Naires which are his gentlemen and nobility: so that when any occasion of importance is offered, than all those three nations assemble themselves together, wherein the King putteth his trust: of the which King and his Naires, Malabare▪ and Ba●amenes etc. with their manners, customs, apparel, Idols, pagodes, and ceremonies, in an other place I will show you more at large, together with their pictures & counterfetes: and for this time I cease to speak thereof, & will proceed in the description of the coasts, which I have already begun. From Cochin to Coulon are 12. miles, and lieth under 9 degrees: it is also a fortress of the Portugeses, where likewise every year they lad a ship with pepper: from Cou●on to the cape de Comori, are 20. miles: this corner lieth full under 7. degrees & a half, which is the end of the coast of Malabar & of India. The 12. Chapter. The description of the kings, the division of the land and coast of Malabar, and their original. TO understand the government and divisions of the land of Malabar, you must know that in times past, (but long sithence) the whole land of M●labar was ruled by one King, being then but one kingdom, where now are many, and as the Malabares say, the last king that ruled the whole country alone, was named Sarama Perimal, in whose time the Arabian mahometans much frequented the country of Malabar, because of the great traffic of Spices, which as then were sent from thence to the red sea, and so conveyed into all places of the world. Those Arabians by their subtleties dealt in such manner with the King, that they persuaded him and many of his country to believe in the law of Mahomet, as they did almost throughout whole India, and other oriental countries and islands, which is one of the principalest occasions why they can hardly be brought to believe in Christ, but rather seek by all means to overthrow the Christians, and to fight against the Portugese's in those countries, as in the Portugal Chronicles and Histories of the first discovery and conquest of the Indies▪ is at large described. But returning to our matter, this King Sarama was so deeply rooted in his new sect of Mahomates law, that he determined in himself to leave his kingdom, and go on pilgrimage to Mecca, to see Mahomet's grave and there to end his life in so holy an exercise, thinking thereby to be saved, which in the end he brought to effect. And because he had neither children nor heirs to possess his kingdom, he divided the same among his chiefest & best servants & friends, giving to one Cochin, to an other Cananor, to the third Chale, to the fourth Coulon etc. and so he dealt with all the other places of his dominions, making every one of those places a kingdom: The town of Calicut he gave to one of his best beloved servants together with the title of Samoriin, which is as much to say as Emperor and chief of all the rest, and commanded that they should all acknowledge him as their Sovereign; and they his vassals, and at his commandment: whereby, even until this time, the King of Calicut holdeth the name of Samoriin, with the commandment and authority over the other kings throughout the whole country of Malabar, by such means as you have heard before, which done the king went on pilgrimage to Mecca, where he ended his days: and the Samoriin with the other kings, continued each man in his new kingdom, whose successors until this day do continue, and govern the said kingdoms, only the Samoriin is somewhat embased, and the king of Cochin exalted, since the Portugeses arrived in the Indies, as it is said before. These Malabares are excellent good soldiers, and go naked, both men and women, only their privy members covered, and are the principallest enemies that the Portugeses have, and which do them most hurt: and although commonly they have peace with the Samoriin, and hold so many forts upon the land, as you have heard before, yet the Malabares have their havens, as Chale, Calicut, Cunhale, Panane, and others, from whence with boats they make roads into the sea, and do great mischief, making many a poor merchant. The Samoriin likewise, when the toy taketh him in the head, breaketh the peace, & that by the counsel of the mahometans, who in all things are enemies to the Christians, & seek to do them mischief: and because of the Malabares invasions, the Portugal fleet is forced every year to put forth of Goa in the summertime, to keep the coast, and to preserve the merchants that travail those countries from the Malabars, for that the most traffic in India, is in Foists like galleys, wherein they traffic from the one place to the other, which is their daily living & occupations, as it shallbe showed at large: and yet there are continual piracies committed on the sea, what order soever they take, whereby poor merchants are taken prisoners, & rob of all they have. The land throughout is very fruitful, green and pleasant to behold, but hath a very noisome and pestiferous air for such as are not borne in the country, and yet pepper doth only grow on this coast, although some groweth by Mallacca in certane parts of the land, but not so much, for from hence is it laden and conveyed throughout the whole world. The 13. Chapter. Of the islands called Maldyva, otherwise Maldyva. RIght over against the cape of Comoriin 60. miles into the sea westward, the islands called Maldyva do begin, and from this cape on the North side they lie under 7. degrees, & so reach south south east, till they come under 3. degrees on the south side, which is 140. miles. Some say there are 11000. islands, but it is not certainly known, yet it is most true, they are so many, that they can not be numbered. The Inhabitants are like the Malabares: some of these islands are inhabited, and some not inhabited, for they are very low ground, like the country of Cochin, Cranganor. etc. and some of them are so low, that they are commonly covered with the sea: the Malabares say, that those Islands in time past did join fast unto the firm land of Malabar, & were part of the same land, and that the Sea in process of time hath eaten them away, & so separated them from the firm land. There is no merchandise to be had in them, but only coquen, which are Indian nuts, and cayro, which are the shells of the same nuts, & that is the Indian hemp, whereof they make ropes, cables, and other such like commodities: those are there to be found in so great abundance, that with them they serve the whole country of India, and all the oriental coast: of the wood of the same trees they make themselves boats after their manner, with all things to them belonging: of the leaves they make sails, sowed together with strings made of the nutshelles, without any iron nails, and so being laden with the nuts and other parts of the said trees, they come and traffic with those of the firm land, their victuals in the ship being the fruit of the same tree: so that to conclude, the boat with all her furnitures, their merchandises and their victuals is all of this palm tree, and that maintaineth all the inhabitants of the islands of Maldyva, and therewith they traffic throughout India: there are some of these nuts in the said Island that are more esteemed than all the nuts in India, for that they are good against all poison, which are very fair and great, and blackish: I saw some that were presented unto the vice roy of India, as great as a vessel of 2. tons Indian measure, and cost above 300. Pardawen, which were to send unto the King of Spain▪ Of this tree and her fruits, together with the usage thereof, I will discourse more at large in the declaring of the Indian trees & fruits, mean time I will return to the description of the coasts with their situations. From the cape of Comoriin the coast beginneth North east to turn inwards again, till you come to the Cape of Negapatan, which lies under 11. degrees, and is 60. miles distant from the cape of Comoriin. From the cape of Comoriin South east & by South about 40 miles into the sea, lieth the furthest corner of the great Island of Seylon, and so reacheth North and by east, until you come right over against the cape of Negapatan, being distant from the firm land & the same cape 10. miles, and between the firm land and that Island there lieth some dry grounds or little islands, whereby it is many times dangerous for the Ships that sail unto Bengala and the coast of Cho●amandel, which commonly pass through that way. The Island of Seylon is in length 60. miles, and in breadth 40. miles, from the first and uttermost corner North & by east, about 18. miles under 7. degrees and an half, lieth a fort belonging to the Portugeses, called Columbo, which by mere force & great charges is holden and maintained, for that they have no other place or piece of ground, no not one foot, but that in all the Island: it is but a small fort, yet very strong and well guarded: The soldiers that are therein, are commonly such as are banished for some offence by them committed, or such as have deserved death: and some dishonest women, for some evil fact, are put in there to bear them company. They fetch all their necessaries out of India, and are often times assailed by their enemies, the Inhabitants of the Island, and often times besieged, but always valiantly defend themselves. The 14. Chapter. Of the Island of Seylon. THe Island of Seylon is said to be one of the best islands that in our time hath been discovered, and the fruitfullest under the heavens, well built with houses, and inhabited with people, called Cingalas, and are almost of shape and manners like to those of Malabar, with long wide ears, but not so black of colour: they go naked, only their members covered: they were wont to have but one King, but having murdered their king, they divided their country into many kingdoms, and not long since, a simple barber murdered their chief king, & with great tyranny brought the kingdom under his subjection, driving the other kings out of the country, whereof one that was a Christian, fled into India, and dwelleth at Goa, where he is kept & maintained at the king's charge. This barber, as it is said, hath made himself king, and the whole Island under his subjection, his name was Raju, he liveth very warily, and is very subtle, a good soldier, but trusting no man: the Chingalans are not his good friends, & yet they live in obedience under him, more through force and fear, then for love or good will: for that he causeth them with great tyranny to be executed, so that no man dareth stir against him: he is likewise a deadly enemy to the Portugal, and about a year before I came from India, he had besieged the fort of Columbo with a great number of Elephants, and men, but by means of the Portugeses that came thither out of India, he was constrained to break up his siege before the fortress. The Island is full of hills, and there is one hill so high that it is reported to be the highest hill in all India, and is called Picode Adam, The Indians hold for certain that Paradise was in that place, and that Adam was created therein, saying that yet until this day, there are some of his footsteps found upon that hill, which are within the stones, as if they were engraven, and never go out. The Island is full of all sorts of Indian fruits and of all kind of wild beasts, as hearts, hinds, wild bores, hairs, coneys, and such like in great abundance, of all sorts of fowls, as peacocks, hens, doves and such like: and for oranges, lemons, and citrons, it hath not only the best in all India, but better than any are found either in Spain or Portugal, to conclude, it hath many and almost all things that are found in India through all the several provinces and places thereof: it hath also many Indian palm trees, or nut trees, which are called cocken: and certain credible persons do affirm, which told it me, that in the same Island are nutmegs, Cloves, and Pepper trees, although there is no certainty thereof, for that as yet they have not been brought, or uttered to sell among the Christians, but the best Cinnamon in all the east countries is there to be had, where it groweth in whole woods, and from thence is dispersed into all places of the world. The Captain that keepeth the fort is forced by stealth in the night time to issue forth & fetch this Cinnamon into his fort, whereof he maketh his principal profit, for much more profit hath he not. This Island hath likewise all kinds of precious stones, except Diamonds, but sapphires, Rubies, Topas●es, Sp●nelen, ●ranaden, Rob●ssen. etc. the best in all the East: it hath likewise a fishing for Pearls, but yet they are not so good as those that are at Bareiin by Ormus: it hath likewise mines of Gold, silver, and other metals. The Kings of the Island will not dig it forth, but keep it for a great state & honour, I think rather it is but Latte●, because no man ventureth for it: it hath also iron, Flax, Brimstone, and such like ware, also many ivory banes, and divers Elephants, which are accounted for the best in all India, and it is by daily experience found to be true, that the Elephants of all other places and countries being brought before them, they honour and reverence those Elephants: the natural borne people or Chingalas are very cunning workmen in Gold, Silver, ivory, Iron, and all kinds of metal, that it is wonderful: they are much esteemed for the same through all India, and bear the name and praise above all the rest of the Indians: they make the fairest barrels for pieces that may be found in any place, which shine as bright as if they were Silver. My master the Archbishop had a crucifix of ivory of an elle long, presented unto him, by one of the inhabitants of the isle, & made by him so cunningly & ●rkmanly wrought, that in the hair, beard, and face, it seemed to be alive, & in all other parts so neatly wrought and proportioned in limbs, that the like can not be done in all Europe: Whereupon my master caused it to be put into a case, and sent unto the king of Spain, as a thing to be wondered at, and worthy of so great a Lord, to be kept among his costliest jewels. In such things they are very expert and wonderful, and marvelous nimble and expert in juggling, as well men as women, and travel throughout the country of India, to get money, carrying hobby-horses with them, very strange to behold. And this shall suffice at this present for the description of the isle of Seylon, & now I will proceed to show you of the coast of Choramandel, where we left before, being at the cape of Negapatan. The 15. Chapter. Of the coast of Choramandel and the kingdom of Narsinga or Bisnagar. THe coast of Choramandel beginneth from the cape of Negapatan, and so stretcheth North & by East, unto a place called Musulepatan, which is 90. miles, and lieth under 16. degrees and a half. Between these two places, upon the same coast, lieth a place called S. Thomas, under 13. degrees & an half, and is 40. miles distant from Negapatan. This place and Negapatan are inhabited by the Portugese's, and in all the other places along the coast, they have traffic and deali●▪ The aforesaid place called S. Thomas was in time past a town of great traffic, and as then called by the name of Meliapor, and belonged to the kingdom of Narsinga, whose king is now commonly called king of Bisnagar, which is the name of his chief City where he keepeth his court. This Town lieth within the land, and is now the chief● city of Narsinga and of the coast of Choramandel. The natural countrymen, are for manners, customs & ceremonies, like those of Ballagate, decamin● & Canaras, for they are all one people, but only separate by several places & kingdoms: and the better to understand wherefore this place was named S. Thomas, the Indians say, that in the time, when the Apostles were sent & spread abroad to preach the Gospel of our saviour Christ throughout the whole world, that S. Thomas the apostle came into that kingdom of Narsinga, after he had been in divers places of India teaching & preaching the word of God unto those Indians and unbelieving people, but little profited therein, for so say the Christians that are come of those same Countrymen, which S. Thomas converted and baptized in the faith of Christ, whom the Portugeses found there at such time as they entered into the country and yet find many of them observing the ceremonies of the Greek Church in the Chaldean tongue, that by no means will join with the Portugese's in their ceremonies: but not long sithence at the time of my being in India, there was one of their Bishops, that by land traveled to Rome, and there submitted himself to the Romish Church, yet observing and holding their ancient ceremonies and customs, which by the Pope was still permitted unto them: and when my Lord the Archbishop held a provincial counsel within the city of Goa, where his suffragans were assembled, that is to say, the bishops of Cochin, Malacca, and China, to authorize the same, the aforesaid Bishop was likewise called thither, who as then was newly come from Rome, being made an Archbishop, and was personally in the counsel, but would not in any sort consent unto the altering or changing of any points of his Religion, or ceremonies from the suffragans & from his Christians, which were commonly called S. Thomas Christians. But returning to our matter, they say that when S. Thomas had long preached, and taught in the kingdom of Narsinga, From Musulepatan the coast runneth again North-east and by East, to the kingdom of Bengalen, which is 120. miles, and it is the land and kingdom of Orixa, which stretcheth along the same coast unto the River of Ganges, the beginning of the kingdom of Bengalen. This coast of Narsinga, Bisnagar and Orixa, are by the Portugal's commonly called (as also the coast of Negapatan and Saint Thomas) Choramandel, until you come to Bengalen, where the Portugal's have great traffic, for that it is a very rich and plentiful Country of all things, as Ryce and all manner of fowls, and beasts in great abundance. It is also a wholesome country and a good air for strange nations, for that the Portugeses and other countrymen can better brook it then other places in India: From these coasts they use great traffic unto Bengala, Pegu, Sian, & Malacca, and also to India: there is excellent fair linen of Cotton made in Negapatan, Saint Thomas, and Musulepatan, of all colours, and woven with divers sorts of loom works and figures, very fine and cunningly wrought, which is much worn in India, and better esteemed than silk, for that it is higher prised than silk, because of the fineness & cunning workmanship: they are called Rechatas & Cheylas, whereof the Christians & Portugeses in India do commonly make breeches. They likewise make clothes thereof for women to put about them from their navelles downward, bound about their bodies, which they wear within the house, very finely made, the best sort are named clothes of Sarasso, some being mingled with threads of gold and silver, and such like stuff of a thousand sorts, very beautiful to behold, wherewith they cloth themselves in very comely manner. In this coast grow the great and thick reeds, which are used in India to make the Pallankins, wherein they carry the women, as in the Indian figures you shall see, which are so thick, that a man can hardly gripe them with both his hands, very fair to look upon, and very high, being of divers colours, as black, red, etc. Whereof in an other place I will say more. The 16. Chapter. Of the Kingdom of Bengalen, and the river Ganges. AT the end of the Kingdom of Orixa and the ●ast of ●horamandel beginneth the River Ganges in the kingdom of Bengalen: This is one of the most famous Rivers in all the world, and it is not known from whence it springeth. Some are of opinion that it cometh out of the earthly paradise because of an old speech of the Bengalers, which is, that in time past a certain King of Bengalen was desirous to know from whence the river Ganges hath her beginning, to the which end he caused certain people to be brought up and nourished with nothing but raw fish, and such like food, A fable of the people of Bengalen concerning the head or spring of the river Ganges. thereby to make them the apt to accomplish his desire, which people (having made boats fit for the purpose) he sent up the river, who were certain months upon the water, so long till they came where they felt a most pleasant and sweet savour, and found a very clear and most temperate sky, with still and pleasant water, that it seemed unto them to be an earthly paradise, and being desirous to row further upwards they could not, so that they were compelled (seeing no remedy) to return again the same way that they came, and being returned, certified the King what they had seen. They that will not credit this are hard of belief, for my part I leave it to the reader's judgement. This River hath Crocodiles in it, like the river of Nilus in Egypt, the mouth or entry thereof lieth under 22. degrees, and the coast runneth East and by South; to the Kingdom of Aracan, which is about 80. miles: it is an uneven coast full of Islands, shoals, hooks, and créekes, for the land of Bengalen lieth inwards of the gulf, which is called Bengala, for that from Aracan, the coast beginneth again to run South and East outwardly towards Malacca, and to the uttermost hook which is called Singapura: But returning to Bengala and the River Ganges, you must understand that this river is holden and accounted of all the Indians to be a holy and a blessed water, The supersttious opinions of the Indians concerning the River of Ganges. and they do certainly believe, that such as wash and bathe themselves therein (be they never so great sinners) all their sins are clean forgiven them, and that from thenceforth they are so clean and pure from sin, as if they were new borne again, and also that he which washeth not himself therein cannot be saved, for the which cause there is a most great and incredible resort unto the same, from all the parts of India & the East countries, in great troops, where they use divers strange ceremonies, and superstitions, most horrible to hear, for they do most steadfastly believe that they shall thereby merit eternal life. From th● River Eastward 50. miles lieth the town of Chatigan, which is the chief town of Bengala: The natural borne people of Bengala are in a manner like those of Seylon, but somewhat whiter than the Chingalas: they are a most subtle and wicked people, The 〈…〉 Beng●ns. and are esteemed the worst slaves of all India, for that they are all thieves, and the women whores, although this fault is common throughout all India, no place excepted. They have a custom that they never dress or seeth meat twice in one pot, but have every time a new pot. The Beng●lians ●aw for adultery. Whensoever they are found in adultery, they have their noses cut off, and from that time forward they must leave each others company, which is most narrowly looked unto by their law. The country is most plentiful of necessary victuals specially Rice, for that there is more of it in that country then in all the cast countries, for they do yearly lad divers ships therewith, which come thither from all places, and there is never any want thereof▪ and all other things in like sort, and so good cheap that it were incredible to declare; for that an O●e or a Cow is there to be bought for one Lari●n, which is as much as half a Gilderne, Sheep, Hens, and other things after the like rate, a Candit of Ryce, Victuals good cheap in Bengala. which is as much, little more or less as fourteen bushels of Flemish measure, is sold there for half a Gilderne, and for half a Doller: Sugar and other ware accordingly, whereby you may well conceive what plenty they have. The Portugal's deal & traffic thither, and some places are inhabited by them, as the havens which they call Porto grand, and Porto pequeno, that is, the great haven and the little haven, but there they have no Forts, nor any government, nor policy as in India they have, but live in a manner like wild men, and untamed horses, for that every man doth there what he will, and every man is Lord and master, neither esteem they any thing of justice, whether there be any or none, and in this manner do certain Portugal's dwell among them, some here, some there scattered abroad, and are for the most part such as dare not stay in India for some wickedness by them committed: notwithstanding there is great traffic used in those parts by divers ships and merchants, which all the year divers times both go come to and from all the Oriental parts. Besides their Rice, much Cotton linen is made there which is very fine, and much esteemed in India, and not only spread abroad and carried into India and all the East parts, but also into Portugal, and other places: this linen is of divers sorts, and is called Sarampuras, Cassas, Comsas, Beatillias', Satopassas, and a thousand such like names: They have likewise other linen excellently wrought of a herb, which they spin like yearn: this yearn is to be s●ene at the house of Paludanus: it is yealowish, and is called the herb of Bengalen, wherewith they do most cunningly stitch their coverlits, pavilions, pillows, carpets, and mantles, therein to christian children, as women in childbed with us use to do, and make them with flowers and branches, and personages, that it is wonderful to see, and so finely done with cunning workmanship, that it cannot be mended throughout Europe: likewise they make whole pieces or webs of this herb, sometimes mixed and woven with silk, although those of the herb itself are dearer and more esteemed, and is much fairer than the silk. These webs are named Sarrijn, and it is much used and worn in India, as well for men's breeches, as doublets, and it may be washed like linen, and being washed it showeth and continueth as fair as if it were new. From Bengala cometh much Algallia, or Civet, but by the subtlety and villainy of the Bengalians it is falsified, & mixed with filth, as salt, oil, and such like stuff, whereby it is not much esteemed. Also in Bengala are found great numbers of the beasts, which in Latin are called Rhinocerotes, and of the Portugal's Abadas, whose horn, teeth, flesh, blood, claws, and whatsoever he hath, both without and within his body, is good against poison, and is much accounted of throughout all India, as in an other place shall be showed more at large. There groweth likewise marble coloured reeds, whereof you may see many sorts in the custody of Paludanus, which the Portugal's call Canas de Bengala, that is, reeds of Bengala: within they are full of pith, and are about the thickness of Spanish reeds, but somewhat thinner, and when they are green they bow and bend like Willow twigs: they are outwardly of divers colours and speckled as if they were painted. They use them in Portugal for old women to bear in their hands when they go abroad or upon the stones. There is another sort of the same reeds which they call Rota: these are thin like twigs of Willow for baskets, whereof Paludanus can show you great numbers, with the which in India they make many fair baskets, and a thousand other curious devices, Sugar, Butter, and such like ware they have in great quantity as I said before: but this shall suffice for Bengala, whereof we leave to speak, and return to the description of the coast as it lieth along the shore. The 17. Chapter. Of the coasts and lands of Aracan, Pegu and Sian, to the Cape of Singapura, & the town and fortress of Malacca. BEyond the kingdom of Bengala, beginneth the kingdoms of Aracan & Pegu, which coast stretcheth from Bengala south and by East to the town and haven of Martavan, in the land of Pegu, and is 70. miles: Martavan lieth under 16. degrees, from whence beginneth the kingdom or land of Sian: these kingdoms of Aracan and Pegu are very rich & fruitful of all things, besides Gold and precious stones, as Rubies, Espinels, Saffires, jacinthes, Emeralds, Granates, and such like, as it is well known by the great numbers that are daily brought out of those countries into all places. Likewise they make hard ware, which is carried throughout the world: There are greater number of Elephants in those countries, then in any other place of India, or the Oriental countries; & the Portugal's that traffic there, affirm that the king of Pegu hath a white Elephant which he prayeth unto, and holdeth it to be holy. The Peguans have a custom, that when any stranger cometh into their land to deal and traffic with them, Strange customs of the Peguans. of what nation soever he be: they ask him how long he meaneth to stay there, and having told them, they bring him many maids, that of them he may take his choice, and make contract and agree with the parents of the maid that liketh him best, for the use of her during his continuance there: which done he bringeth her to his lodging, and she serveth him about all his affairs, both by day & by night, like his slave or his wife, but he must take heed that in the mean time he keepeth not company with other women, for thereby he may incur great danger, and stand in peril of his life. When the time of his residence is ended, he payeth the friends or parents of the maid as much as he agreed for with them, which done he departeth quietly away, and the maid returneth with credit home again unto her friends, and is as well esteemed of as ever she was before: and if after that the same maid chance to marry, were it with the principallest of the Country, and that the aforesaid stranger should come to traffic in the same place again, he may again demand his woman, and he shall have her without resistance of her husband, or any shame unto him, and she remaineth by the stranger as long as he abideth there, and he traveling from thence, she goeth home again unto her husband, which among them is holden for a most sure and inviolable law. Likewise when any gentleman or noble man will marry with a maid, he goeth to seek one of his friends, or a stranger, and entreateth him to lie with his bride the first night of their marriage, and to take her maidenhead from her, which he esteemeth as a great pleasure & honour done unto him, that another man would take upon him to ease him of so much pain: This custom is not only used among the Gentlemen and chief nobility of the land, but by the King himself. Also divers of the Peguans wear a bell upon their yard, and some two, as big as an acorn, which is made fast between the flesh and the skin. Of the like Bells Paludanus can show you one, which I brought out of India, and gave it him; which bells have a very sweet sound: This custom of wearing Bells was ordained by them, because the Peguans in time past were great Sodomites, and using this custom of bells, it would be a mean to let them from the same. The women go altogether naked, only with a cloth before their privy members, which (as they go) openeth & uncovereth, showing all they have, which is by them ordained, to the end that by such means it should tempt men to lust after women, and to avoid that most abominable & accursed sin of Sodomy. There are likewise some among them that do sow up the privy member of their female children as soon as they are borne, leaving them but a little hole to avoid their water; and when she marrieth the husband cutteth it open, and maketh it as great or as little as he will, which they with a certain ointment or salve can quickly heal. I saw one of those women in Goa whom the Surgeon of my Master the Archbishop's house did cut open: men would judge all these things to be fables, yet they are most true, for I do not only know it by the daily trafficking of the Portugal's out of India thither, but also by the Peguans themselves, whereof many dwell in India, some of them being Christians, which tell it and confess it for a truth, as also the nearness of place and neighbourhood maketh it sufficiently known. The people of Aracan, Pegu, and Sian are in form, manner, and visage, much like those of China, only one difference they have, which is, that they are somewhat whiter than the Bengalon, and somewhat browner than the men of China: The pictures songs after their manner whereby they are wondered at, which maketh them proud, and he that dwelleth in India, and can not speak the Malayans speech, will hardly with us learn the French tongue, their form and figures are here set down, together with those of the islands of java, whereof hereafter we will speak more. The 19 Chapter. Of the Island of Sumatra, in times past called Taprobana. SUMATRA INSULA map of Sumatra RIght over against Malacca, Southeast about 20. miles from the firm land by Malacca, where the strait is at the narrowest, lieth the ●amous Island of Taprobana, now called Sumatra, by some Historiographers named Chersone●o Aurea, others affirm it to be Ophir, from whence Solomon had his Gold, as the Scripture rehearseth, and say that in times past it was firm land, and joined unto the Country of Malacca. The Island beginneth from the first point which lieth right against the Gulf of Bengala under five degrees, on the North side, and stretcheth also before Malacca, South Southeast, until it passeth by the Island called java Maior, where it endeth under 6. degrees on the South side, and is in length 170 miles, and in breadth 60. miles. The Portugeses dwell not therein in any place, but deal and traffic in some places thereof, yet very few, for that the inhabitants themselves do bring many of their commodities unto Malacca. Malachae incolae sermone et moribus quam reliqui Indi cultioribus et magis comes. In wonders van Mallacka welcke all andere Indianen in taele courtosije en amoreushcÿt te boven gaen. Insulanus e java gens durae cervicis. E'en cÿlander with ●ava welcks volck is hart: neckich en opstinaet. The Island is very rich of mines of Gold, Silver, Brass, (whereof they make great Ordinance) precious stones, and other metal: of all kind of Spices, sweet wood, roots, and other medicinable Herbs and Drugs: it hath a hill of Brimstone that burneth continually, and they say, there is a fountain which runneth pure & simple Balsam, it hath likewise great store of Silk. At the last besieging and troubles of Malacca, the King of Acheijn sent a piece of Ordinance, such as for greatness length and workmanship, the like is hardly to be found in all Christendom, which he gave in marriage with his daughter to the King of jor, a town lying by Malacca, upon the coast of Sian, but this piece with his daughter were taken upon the way by the Portugeses, and brought into Malacca, which piece was after laden in the Ship that saileth every year from Malacca to Portugal, and sent unto the King for a present, being so heavy that they were forced to lay it in the Ballast of the ship. The same piece lieth at this present in the isle of Tarcera, because the said ship stayed there, being in our company as I returned out of India, also the Town of jor upon the same occasion was by the Portugeses besieged, and at the last won and by them razed to the ground, and for ever made waist, wherein they found about 150. Brass pieces small & great, some of them being no greater than a Musket, and some greater, and so of all sorts, very cunningly wrought with Flowers and personages, which I have purposely set down to let you know that they have other kinds of Metals, and know how to handle them. But returning to our matter, There are some places in this Island where the Portugese's do traffic, which are those that use to traffic to Malacca, as a Town called Pedir, which lieth 20. miles from Achejin, upon the coast right over against Malacca, from whence cometh much Pepper and Gold, & from an other place called Campar, which lieth almost under the Equinoctial line, upon the corner on the South side, on the same side on the West coast of the Island lieth a place called Manancabo, where they make Poinyards, which in India are called Cryses, which are very well accounted and esteemed of, and is thought the best weapon in all the Orient, whereof those of java & Malacca do make great provision for themselves. The 20. Chapter. Of the Island of java Maior, with their wares, Merchandises, and trades, weights, mints, and prices thereof with other particularities. JAVA MAYOR map of Java SOuth Southeast right over against the last point or corner of the isle of Sumatra, on the south side of the Equinoctial line lieth the Island called java Maior, or great java, where there is a strait or narrow passage between Sumatra and java, called the strait of Sunda, of a place so called, lying not far from thence within the isle of java: this Island beginneth under ● degrees on the south side, and runneth east and by south 150 miles long, but touching the breadth, it is not found, because as yet it is not discovered, nor by the Inhabitants themselves well known. Some think it to be firm land, and parcel of the country called Terra incognita, which being so, should reach from that place to the Cape de Bona sperance, but as yet it is not certainly known, & therefore it is accounted for an Island: the inhabitants say that within the land there is a River, wherein if any wood doth fall, it turneth into stone. Through this strait or narrow passage Thomas Candish an english captain passed with his Ship, as he came out of the south parts, from Nova Spaigne. This Island aboundeth with Rice, and all manner of victuals, as oxen, kine, hogs, sheep and hens, etc. also Onions, Garlic, Indian nuts and with all kind of Spices, as cloves, Nutmegs, and mace, which they carry unto Malacca. The principal haven in the Island is Sunda Calapa, whereof the strait beareth the name: in this place of Sunda there is much Pepper, and it is better than that of India or Malabar, whereof there is so great quantity, that they could lad yearly from thence 4 or 5 thousand kintales Portugal weight: it hath likewise much frankincense, Beniom of Bonien called Folly, Camphora, as also Diamantes, to which place men might very well traffic, without any impeachment for that the Portugese's come not thither, because great numbers of java come themselves unto Malacca to sell their wares. And although it be beside the matter, yet do I not esteem it unnecessary in brief to show, in what sort they use to buy, sell, and deal with ware, money and weight seeing we are now in hand with the said Island of java. You must understand that in Sunda there is no other kind of money then certain copper mint called Caixa, of the bigness of a Hollandes doit, but not half so thick, in the middle whereof is a hole to hang it on a string, for that commonly they put two hundredth or a thousand upon one string, wherewith they know how to make their accounts, which is as followeth▪ 200 Caixas is a Sata, and ● Satas are 1000 Caixas, which is as much as a Crusado Portugal money, or 3 Keysars guilders, Netherlandish money, Pepper of Sunda is sold by the sack, and each sack weigheth 45 Catten weight of China: every Cat is as much as 20 Portugal ounces, and every sack is worth, as it is sold there, 5000 Caixas, and when it is at the highest, 6 or 7 thousand Caixas, Mace, Cloves, nutmegs, white and bla●k Benjamin, & Camphora, are sold by the Bhar, each Bhar of Sunda weigheth 330 Catten of China. Mace that is good is commonly worth 100 or 120 thousand Caixas, and good Cloves after the rate, but bad or foul Cloves of Baston are worth 70 or 80 thousand Caixas the Bhar. Nutmegs are commonly worth 20 or 25 thousand Caixas the Bhar: white and black Benjoin is worth 150 and 180 thousand Caixas & 200 thousand the Bhar. The wares that are there by them desired in barter for their spices, are as hereafter followeth, divers and different sorts and colours of cotton linen, which come out of Cambaia, Choramandel and Bengala, as Sarasles de G●ba●es, and painted Tapen from S. Thomas, of five else the piece: they are clothes so called out of Bengala, white Cotton linen, viz Sarampuras, Cassas, Sateposas, & black Satopasen, and some brown unbleached linen: out of Cambaia black Cannequiins red Turiaes', which are all clothes of cotton linen red Beyramen great and little▪ which is very like unto Cambric: and I am persuaded, if Cloth of Holland were there to be sold, it would be more esteemed than Cotton linen out of India. These javens are of a very fretful and obstinate Nature, of colour much like the Malayers, brown, and not much unlike the men of Brasilla, strong and well set, big limmed, flat faces, broad thick cheeks, great eyebrows, small eyes, little beard, not past 3 or 4 hairs upon the upper lip & the chin: the hair on their heads very thine and short, yet as black as pitch whose picture is to be seen by the picture of the M●layen of Malacca, because they dwell & traffic much together. Returning again unto the coast, East & by south about 25 miles beyond java Maior, beginneth the Island of java Minor or little java, and somewhat further the Island T●or, (where sanders groweth in great abundance) and a thousand other islands bordering all about, which I can not particularly set down, yet are they all inhabited, and full of people, and are like the javer. From Malacca they travel to the Islands of Molucca, Banda & Amboyna, where the Portugese's have both sorts & captains and traffic with them: their way is from Malacca south east and by south, above 100 miles, between many islands and through many shallows, so that they must anchor every night, to avoid danger of sands, which continueth almost all the way to Mol●cca, and having in that sort passed those hundredth miles, they set their course eastward, and east and by north, 250 miles, to the Island called Banda, which lieth under 5 degrees on the south side. In this Island the Portugese's do traffic, for in it are the best Nutmegs & Flowers. There likewise they do preserve nutmegs, and make oil thereof, which is brought to Malacca, and from thence into all other places: the traffic there consisteth most in bartering, as it doth in Sunda & java, but they are not to be trusted, you must keep good watch, and go not on land, but stay aboard the ship, whether the Islanders bring their merchandises, and deal with men as I said before, for it happeneth divers times that they deceive the Portugese's, which trust them over much, for that one of my acquaintance and my friend being there, for captain in a ship, the ship being cast away upon that coast, was with all his men taken & put in prison, where for the space of two years he endured a most miserable life, and in the end was ransomed. All these voyages to Banda, Moluca, & those islands, and also any other way whatsoever in India, may no man make, without licence and special favour of the King of Portugal, and their offices are given them in recompense of their service in the Indies, as also all other offices, as in an other place shall be declared. About 20 miles beyond Banda North west, lieth the Island called Amboyna, where the Portugese's have a small for't: this Island hath not much spice, but the ships that sail from Malacca to Maluco, do stay there, and take in fresh water. From this Island Northward 70 miles, lieth the Island Tydor, under one degree ●th, and i● the first Island of the Moluca● ●xe miles northward lieth Malaco, & not far thence Tarnate, and the islands of Cloves. The 21. Chapter. Of the Island of Maluc●. THe Islands of Maluco are five, viz. Maluco, Tarnate, Tydor, Geloulo, and an other where the Portugese's have 2 forts, that is in Tarnate and Tydor, which long since were discovered and won, where they traffic from Malacca & out of India. The Spaniards have sought divers means to have traffic there, and came from thence out of Nova spain, into the Island called Tarnate, where in a storm they lost their ship, and so could not get from thence again, whereby they were by the Portugese's most of them slain, and the rest taken and sent prisoners into Portugal, whereupon the King of Spain and Portugal had a long quarrel and contention, touching the division of their Conquests, and discovery of the seas, which by the Pope's means at the last was ended, in such sort▪ that at this present only the Portugal trafickes to those islands. These islands have no other spice than cloves, but in so great abundance, that as it appeareth, by them the whole world is filled therewith. In this Island are found ●ie hills, they are very dry & burnt land, they have nothing else but victuals of flesh and fish, but for Rice, Corn, Onions, Garlic, and such like, and all other necessaries, some are brought from Portugal, and some from other places thereabout, which they take and barter for cloves. The bread which they have there of their own baking is of wood or roots like the men of Brasillia, and their clothes are of woven straw or herbs, fair to the eye: in these islands only is found the bird, which the Portugese's call passaros de Sol, that is Fowl of the Sun, the Italians call it Manu codiatas, & the Latinists, Paradiseas, & by us called Paradise birds, for the beauty of their feathers which pass all other birds: these birds are never seen alive, but being dead they are found upon the Island: they fly, as it is said, always into the Sun, and keep themselves continually in the air, without lighting on the earth, for they have neither feet nor wings, but only head and body, and the most part tail, as appeareth by the birds that are brought from thence into India, and some from thence hither but not many, for they are costly. I brought two of them with me, for Doctor Paludanus, which were male and female, which I gave unto him, for his chamber. These islands lie among divers other islands, and because there is no special notice of them, by reason of the small conversation with them: I let them pass, and turn again unto the coast of Malacca, which I left at the Cape of Singapura, and so will show the Coast along. The 22. Chapter. From the Cape Singapura to the town of Sian, and the coast of Cambaia, and Cauchinchina, and the Isles of Borneo, Lusons', Manillios' or Philippinas. FRom the Cape of Singapura to the hook named Sinosura eastward, are 18 miles, 6 or 7 miles from thence lieth a cliff in the sea called Pedra bianque, or white Rock, where the ships that come and go to and from China, do oftentimes pass in great danger and some are left upon it, whereby the Pilots when they come thither are in great fear, for that other way then this they have not. From this hook Sinosura East & by South 40. miles beginneth the first corner of the Island Borneo, under one degree in the North, and stretcheth 120. miles North east till you be under 7. degrees, the breadth as yet is not known nor discovered. This Isle is full of trees from whence Camfora is taken, and is the best in all the East countries. From Sinosura the coast reacheth North 30. miles to the town of Pan, which lieth under three degrees and a half: ten miles further by the same coarse the coast runneth again North Northwest for 50. miles, where the town of Patane lieth under 7. degrees and a half: These two towns Pan and Patane are kingdoms, but contributary to Sian: From these places comes the wood called Pala Dagula, and the costly sweet wood called Calamba, which being good, is weighed against Silver and Gold: they also have Camphora, but not so good as that of the Island Borneo. There is found some gold, and the stone called Bezoar's stone, which is very costly and proved to be good against poison. There are likewise some Diamonds, and also Nutmegs and flowers, and the wood Sapon, whereof also much is brought from Sian, it is like Brasill to die withal. From Patane 120. miles North, the coast runneth back again unto Sian, which lieth under 14. degrees and a half from Sian, from the turning in South west 15. miles: The coast runneth again south east 70. miles to the town of Cambaia: this town lieth under 10. degrees. From thence the coast runneth again North-east 60. miles, and 60. miles Northwest: from whence it runneth West North west to the furthest part inward of the creek of Cuchinchina: This coast of Cambaia is also called the coast of Champaa, this land hath much of the sweet wood Calamba: Through this kingdom runneth the river Mecom into the sea, which the Indians name Captain of all the Rivers, for it hath so much water in the Summer, that it covereth and watereth all the country, as the river Nilus doth the country of Egypt. The people of Cambaia believe that all creatures both men and beasts of what sort soever they be, do here receive reward for their work whether it be good or bad. Upwards in the land behind Cambaia and Sian are many several nations, as Laos, which are a great and a mighty people, others named Auas and Bramas, which dwell by the hills: others that dwell upon the hills called Gueos, which live like wild men, and eat man's flesh, and mark all their bodies with hot iron, which they esteem a freedom: These countrymen are such as are known, besides divers others that are unknown. From the coast of Cambaia or Champaa East or to seaward about 100 miles little more or less lie the Islands called the Lussons or Lussones, which were first discovered by the Spaniards out of new spain, in an▪ 1564. and were called also 'las Manillas or Philippinas, because the principallest Haven and Town is called Manillia, and of others Lusson, whereof also they are named the L●ssons▪ and the Spaniards gave them the name of the King of Spain, calling them the Philippinas. This town of Lusson or Manillia lieth under 14 degrees, by this town and Island of Lusson lie a great number of islands, which are all called the Manillians, Lussons or Philippinas, and are all at the commandment of the Spaniards, whose Governor or Captain lieth in the town of Manillia or Lusson, who was sent thither out of Nova spain in the behalf of the king of Spain, and also a Bishop, as head over all the rest. All these islands have in time passed been under the crown of China, and upon some occasion left it, whereby there was no policy nor government among the Inhabitants of the same, for that he that was the richest and of most power amongst them was master, and lived together like beasts, whereby the Spaniards had 〈◊〉 small labour to subdue them, whereof many they baptized, and made them Christians, which every day increased: it is a very fruitful land, and hath much corn and all sorts of wild beasts, as hearts, hinds, & such like: also cattle, as buffels, oxen, kine, hogs, goats etc. they have many musk cats, all kind of fruits, as in China, abundance of honey and fish: it is said also that there is all kinds of spices, but as yet there is no certainty thereof, but only that the Spaniards give it forth so: but you must think they do it because they will extol and set forth their things above all others, as their manner is. Those of China traffic with these islands, and bring thither all sorts of commodities out of their country, as all silks, cottons, porselynes, powder for shot, sulphur, brimstone, iron, steel, quick silver, and other metals, copper, meal nuts, chasnuttes, bisquit, dates, all sorts of linen cloth, desks, and such like, and of all curious things that may be found, & there cometh from China thither every year at least 20 ships, and from thence is their merchandise by the Spaniards shipped and sent into new Spain, & to Mexico, which country of Spain. The land by means of the good air and temperateness thereof is foe fruitful, that all things are there to be had in great abundance, as Corn, Rice, and other such like grain or seeds, and is both sown and mowed continually all the year long. Within the land there are some Elephants, Lions, Tigers, and such cruel beasts. There are also many beasts of Moseliaet, that is to say, Musk Cats, which are of the bigness and likeness of a little Dog, which they kill and bury for certain days, and being rotten, and well bruised with blows, whereby the flesh and blood are mixed together, they make many round Balls of the same flesh & blood so mixed, each Ball of an ounce weight, by the Portugeses called Papo, which they carry into all places. There are also in that land many Cats of Algallia, or Ci●et Cats, and some Amber. They have also horses, but smaller than the horses in Europe. Geese, Hens, Ducks and such like, are there in great abundance, river, and sea Fish are likewise plentiful, and all kind of necessaries whatsoever. The country hath many mines of Gold and Silver, but the King letteth it not commonly be carried out of the country, but keepeth it in his house for treasure, therefore they seek and procure all things to be brought into the land: notwithstanding they have great riches in their houses, of Gold, Silver, and other common jewels, they esteem more of Silver then of Gold, because the Gold is of many values and prices, and the Silver is always of one price. It hath also many Pearls and Alioffar, which come out of the Island and Province of Aynao, also much Quicksilver, Copper, Iron, Steele, Blick, Tin, Lead, Brimstone and other such like mettales, and Amber, besides all these riches, and innumerable rents that the King of China hath, it is said that he hath in every chief shire or Province town a great and unknown treasury. It is a common custom in that country to wear, as we do here, course and common cloth and linen, as also Silk▪ Satin and Brocado, which is cloth of Gold and Silver, with fair works and borders, down to their shoes, which they commonly use, because of the great quantity of Silk, that is within the country, for it is affirmed for a truth, that only from the town of Canton there is yearly carried into India, above three thousand Quintals of Silk, which are sold by weight, besides the Silks that are yearly carried to the islands of Iapa●, Lucon, or Phillippinas', and to the land of Si●n, and other countries bordering about the same: and yet there stayeth so much within the country, that therewith might be laden whole Fleets of ships, and would not be miss: there is also much Flax and Cotton, and so good cheap, that it is almost incredible: the earthen Pots, Cups and vessels that are made there, are not to be numbered, which are yearly carried into India, Portugal, Nova Spaignia, & other ways, but the finest sort may not be carried out of the land upon pain of death, but serve only for the Lords and Governors of the country: which are so fine that Crystal is not comparable unto it. These Pots and Cups are made inwards in the land, of a certain earth that is very hard, which is beaten small and then laid to steep in cisterns of stone full of water, made for the purpose, and when it is well steeped and often stirred, (as we do milk to make Butter) of the finest thereof which driveth or swimmeth on the top they make the finest work, and use the courser accordingly▪ whereof some they paint, and then they are dried and baked in Ovens. The manner to make Earthen Pots and Cups (called Porcelleyn-Cuppes) by Scaliger is set down in his Book of Subtleties in this manner. In the 92. Exercise. The Cups and earthen Pots that are called Porceleynes, whereof also the Earth hath her name, are first beaten to small Powder, which they steep in water, and then form their Pots, Cups and vessels out of the same, which done they burn them under the earth, and having lain in the earth 100, years, being then full baked and made, they are digged forth and sold, some say, that not the Cups etc. but the stuff is buried, although john Huyghens opinion seemeth to be true and according to their manner, saying, that they are made of Earth, as other Pots and Cans are made in our country. The land also aboundeth in Honey, Sugar and Wax, of all sorts of Spices, roots and plants as also fruits, and much more than in Spain: and other kinds of fruits also which are not known here: there are Oranges that are sweeter than Sugar: there is a kind of fruit called Lechyas, which are like Plums, but of another taste, and are very good & much esteemed, whereof I have eaten, to conclude it hath of all things that man can wish or desire. The rents and revenues of the King of China are so great, that it is incredible, for he hath only in custom out of a river in the Province of Canton, for Salt that is made there, yearly a million and a half of Gold, whereby men may esteem the rest accordingly. All the Towns in that Country are walled about with stone walls, and have Ditches of water round about them for their security, they use no fortress nor Castles, but only upon every Gate of the Town they have strong Towers, wherein they place their Ordinance for defence of the town. They use all kind of arms, as Calivers, Bows, Pikes of divers sorts, Rapiers, like Falceons, Cortlasses and Targets. The soldiers when they go to war, wear Coats down to their knees, lined with Cotton, so that the thrust of a Pike or a Rapier will not readily enter, such as are soldiers are paid by the King, which are known by wearing a red or a yellow Hat, whereof there are so many, that the number is not known, they have Captains of 10. of 100 of 1000 10000 20000. etc. Which Captains may be known by certain tokens, one from the other, whereby they know how many men he hath under him. Every month they Muster and are paid with Silver money, for they have no other Coin, and they are pieces of cut Silver, in which sort they pay & receive all their money, for the which purpose they do always carry about them a pair of Balance with an instrument to cut the Silver. A soldier hath every month, the value of a Ryall and a half of Spanish money in silver, which is more in that country (as the value and price of all things goeth there) then four Ducats or twelve Guilders with us. For Religion and ceremonies they are Heathens, without any spark or point of Mahomet's law, or of any other sects. The men of ●hina pray the Devil In many places they pray to the Devil, only because he should not hurt them. When any man lieth on his death bed, they set the picture of the Devil before him, with the Sun in his left hand, and a poniard in the right hand, which Devil is painted with a very fierce look: and therefore they desire the patiented or sick man to look well upon him, that he may be his friend in the world to come, and that year he may not hurt him. They pray to the Sun and the Moon, which they think, are man and wife, and when any Eclipse happeneth, they make great sacrifices, fearing that God will take their lives from them, and clean overthrow them, whereby they are in great fear. They do all believe the immortality of the soul, and that after their deaths, they shall receive either good or evil reward in the world to come according to their works. Wherefore they use fair and costly Graves, and believe that in the world to come men shall never more die, but live for ever, there are also in this land many and divers fair Universities, and Schools for learning, where they study Philosophy, and the laws of the land, for that not any man in China is esteemed or accounted of, for his birth, family or riches, but only for his learning and knowledge, such are they that serve in every Town, and have the government of the same, being served and honoured with great solemnities, and worthiness, living in great pleasure and esteemed as gods. They are called Lo●ias, and Mandorijns, and are always borne in the streets, sitting in Chariots which are hanged about with Curtains of Silk, covered with Clothes of Gold and Silver, and are much given to banqueting, eating, drinking & making good cheer, as also the whole land of China. No man may rule, govern, or use any Office of justice in the Town or place where he was borne, which they say, the King doth, because their friends or parents should not move or persuade them to do any thing contrary to justice, or to the hindrance of the King's service. When any of the aforesaid governors or rulers die in China, they kill divers of their servants and wives, and cause all kind of victuals and necessaries with divers jewels to be put into the Grave with them, whereby they think themselves well provided, and to have good company with them, to live withal in the other world. The Country is very temperate & good air, for it beginneth under 19 degrees, and is in some places higher than 50. degrees, whereby it is to be presumed, that it must of force be fruitful, a great help thereunto is the earnest and continual labour the countrymen and inhabitants take, to build houses in their land, whereby there is not one foot of land lost, or that lieth waste, for even to the very mountains, it is both ploughed & planted, because there are so many people in the Country. It is not in man's memory, that ever there was plague in that Country, and they have a law which is very straightly holden, that no man may go or departed out of the Country without licence, nor yet that any stranger may come into the land without leave upon pain of death. Likewise no man may travail through the Country to beg, whereof they have a great care, and look nearly unto it. The people are well form, and commonly fat and well liking of body, broad and round faces, small eyes, great eyebrows, broad foreheads, small and flat noses, little beards, seven or eight hairs above their lips and under their chins, and very black hair, which they esteem very much, & have great care in the keming thereof, and in keeping it clean, as well men as women, and wear it as long as it will grow, and then bind it in a knot on the top of their heads, and upon it they put a piece of Silk netting. Those that dwell on the Sea side, with whom the Portugeses traffic, that is in Machau and Canton, are a people of a brownish colour, like the white Moors in Africa and Barbaria, and part of the Spaniards, but those that dwell within the land, are for colour like Netherlanders & high Duchess. There are many among them that are clean black, which have great eyes and much beard, but very few of them, as it may well be thought, and as the men of China themselves report. Their offspring was out of ●artaria, or from other of their neighbours of strange Countries, at such time when they had licence to travail into those Countries, and to have conversation with them by trade of merchandise, which now they may not do, as it is said before. They use to wear the nails of their left hands very long, and on the right hand short, which they hold for an ancient ceremony of their law and belief. Their apparel (as I said before) is most of Silk of all colours, that is such as are of wealth, & indifferent rich, others & such as are poor, do wear apparel of Cotton linen, & of black and coloured Says, and such like stuff: Cloth made of Wool nor Velvet they can not make in all China, although there wanteth no wool, and they have many sheep: notwithstanding, they know not how to use it, and wonder much at it when the Portugal's bring it thither. The women go very richly appareled, with long and wide Gowns, they wear many jewels on their heads, within their hair, and also upon their bodies, they do commonly hold their hands covered, they are but little seen abroad, but sit most part within the house, and esteem it for a great beautifying unto them to have small feet, to the which end they use to bind their feet so fast when they are young, that they cannot grow to the full, whereby they can hardly go, but in a manner half lame. Which custom the men have brought up, to let them from much going, for that they are very jealous, and unmeasurable lecherous and unchaste, yet is it esteemed a beautifying and comeliness for the women. Those that are of any wealth or estate, are born in chairs through the streets, hanged and covered with Silk, Satin, and Damask Curtains, woven with silver and gold threads, and have small holes to look through, so that they may see and not be seen. The 24. Chapter. Of the Provinces, Towns, and other things worthy of memory in the kingdom of China. THe kingdom of China is divided into 15 provinces, every one being as great (as it is reported & found written) as the best kingdom in Europe, and are governed by a Viceroy or Governor, which by the Chinaes' is called Cochin. Two of the said Provinces are ruled by the King himself and his Council, which are Tolanchia and Paguia, where the King is always resident. The other Provinces are called Foquiem, Olam, Sinsay, Xansay, Oquiam, Aucheo, Hona, Canton, Quicheo, Chequeam, Saxi, Aynaon, Sus●an. Most of these Provinces have rivers and waters running through them, & have conference and familiarity by buying and selling with each other both by water and by land. It is recorded by the Chinaes' themselves in their Chronicles, that in these fifteen Provinces there are 591. chief Cities 1593. other Cities, besides villages: whereof some are so great as Cities: whereby you may consider the greatness of the land. Most of the Towns are built upon rivers and running streams, and closed about with broad ditches, and thick stone walls, Without the Walls between them and the Ditches, is a walk, where six men on Horse back may ride in rank, and the like within, which space is made to mend and repair the Walls when need requireth, whereof they are very careful, and look warily unto them. The high ways and foot paths throughout the whole kingdom, are fairly paved, and all along even and smooth till you come to the hills, and the entrance or Frontespicio of the Cities, very costly and workmanly built with three or four Gates one by the other, all stricken over full of Iron, and the streets within the Cities and Villages very fairly paved, and plained as strait as a line, and even in breadth, so that if you stand at the end of a street, you may see to the other end, by reason of the straightness be it never so long. At the end of every street, are certain Vaults made, wherein are wares and merchandises of all costly things, and prices that man can wish or desire. Over every street there are divers Arches made of stone, very finely and cunningly Painted, which are set in the streets, because that all their feasts, p●ayes and spiritual ceremonies are done by night, and then those Arches are placed full of lights and Torches, which maketh a goodly show. The houses commonly have three doors to go in at, whereof that in the middle is the greatest, the other somewhat less, they are commonly low without Sellers under ground but within very large and broad, with great rooms and fair Gardens, full of all pleasure and delight. The town where the King is resident, is called Xuntien or Taybjin which some men call Quinzay, this name Xuntien is as much to say in Chinish speech, as heavenly City, and lieth in the Province of Paguia: of the greatness whereof they writ wonders, for they affirm that within the walls the Town is as long, from the one end to the other as a man on horseback may ride upon a day, with a thousand other wonders, which for brevity I omit. In this town the King hath his Palace, with all pleasures that may or can be devised, both for himself, his wives, and his Court. His wives little or never go abroad, so that they are seldom or never seen, thereby to maintain their authority, as also fearing that any mischief should happen unto them, there are not in all the country any Noble men of name or title, as Earls, Dukes, Viscounts or such like, nor that have any vassals, commandments, jurisdictions, or proprieties to themselves, other than such as are given by the King, and when they die, it returneth against unto the King, and if he will, he may take it from the children, but commonly he letteth them have it, so they be fit for the place, and that with a new gi●● and bond to serve the King. In all the principal towns where the Viceroys or Governors hold their states, there hangeth a picture of the King, covered with a Curtain of cloth of Gold, whereunto all Officers, Commanders, Loi●as, Mandorijns etc. daily resort and do it all reverence and honour, such as belongeth to a King of such estate, as if the King himself were there in person▪ the Kings title is, King and Lord of the world, and Son of heaven. No man throughout all China may bear any weapons, nor yet have them in his house but such as are appointed thereunto, and receive the Kings pay, as soldiers, whose children succeed their fathers in their places. The men of China are great and cunning workmen, as may well be seen by the workmanship that cometh from thence. They make and use wagons or Cartes with sails (like Boats) and with wheels so subtly made, that being in the field they go and are driven forwards by the wind, as if they were in the water, they are very witty in buying and selling. All the traders that keep shops, have a Table hanging at their doors wherein is written every kind of ware they have to sell. All Officers or handicrafts men have either of them a street alone, and dwell by themselves, and their children must use the like trade after their Father's deaths, whether they were soldiers, justices or Governors. When any man is very rich, he is licensed not to work notwithstanding he must keep workmen, and keep open shop, the money that is used throughout all China is Gold and Silver unstamped, but cut in small pieces to the value of a penny, and so received by weight, and in like sort paid. Also all wares, of what sort soever they be, not so much as Hens, Geese, Fish, and such like, but are bought and sold by weight. They have one wife which they call their lawful wife, and as many other as they can well maintain, the son of the lawful wife inheriteth most part of their goods, and that which remaineth is equally divided among the other children, they marry with whom they will, except it be with their Sisters, or their uncles children. The Bridegroom before he fetcheth the Bride home to his house, must endow her with certain goods, which he giveth to the Bride herself, and she giveth them unto her Father or mother in recompense of their charges for bringing her up in her youth, which done she goeth home with the Bridegroom, and the parents may do what they will with that which they have so received for their daughter's dowry, and spend it as they think good, and what remaineth thereof after the parents are dead, returneth again unto the daughter, whose husband gave the same for his wife, so that he which hath most daughters, is the richest, as it is reported, by the Pictures hereafter following you may see the form and manner of those of C●, as well men as women, as also of the Mandorijns and mighty men or Governors, as they are carried in the streets, and go to sport upon the rivers, where they refresh themselves with all kinds of dainties. The men of China have many speeches, but in writing they understand each other in every place for they writ every thing with figures and characters, whereof their alphabets are sundry and innumerable: these figures with their paper of divers colours, as also pen and ink, you may see at D. Paludanus house, so that men had need of a good memory, and long exercise, before they can understand them all, and read what it is, which is the cause that among them such as are learned are so much esteemed. Their paper is like that of Auro●a, but not so white, but thinner and smother: they make also of all colours, which is very saire, they writ with pens of Reeds, wherein there sticketh a pencil, such as Painters use. Printing, painting & gunpowder, with the furniture thereto belonging, have been used in China many hundredth years past, and very common, so that it is with them out of memory when they first began. Their Chronicles show that their first king, being a great Necromancer, who reigned many thousand years past, did first invent great ordinance with all things belonging thereunto: Printing is likewise very ancient with them, for that there are books found in those countries of China, which were printed at the least five or six hundredth years before printing was in use with us in Europe, so that it is not found when it first began there. And there are many books in China, for that they are very curious and desirous to write and register all things, as well that which is done in their kingdom, or which belongeth thereunto, as also other memorable things, cunning and fine devices, laws and ordinances, all policies & governments in their towns, wherein they much resemble and surpass the ancient Grecians and Romans. The manner of their banquet and feasts are thus, as many persons as are invited, so many tables are prepared and made ready, although they be a hundredth: the tables are very fair and finely painted▪ with all kind of imagery and flowers, most pleasant to behold, so that they use no table-clothes, but round about the edges of the table there hangeth a cloth down to the ground, of silk, damask, gold or silver, every one according to his estate, and at the corners of the tables there hang divers fair baskets full of all sorts of sweet flowers, with ma●c●paine stuff of all forms and fashions, gilded & very cunningly made. In the middle of the tables they place the meats, very costly and well dressed, and in good order, all in dishes of fine earth, or else silver. The meat both fish and flesh, or whatsoever it is, is all cut in pieces, the bones and sinews clean taken forth, which they never touch with their fingers, but only use to take it up with two little pieces of black wood made round, whereof you may see some at D. Paludanus ●o●se, that I gave him: and these they use in stead of corks, which with them is so ready, that there falleth not one bit or crumb upon the table, whereby they use no napkins to wipe their hands, for they need them not, neither do the● soul either hand or mouth. Their drink is wine made of Rice, and brewed as we brew beer. They drink often, but very little at a time, and will drink at the least 20. times in one small cup before it be empty: when they are at their Feasts and banquets they have much music. They have likewise many manners & customs of courtesies, which are these: The common people as they meet together, they shut their left hand, and cover it with their right hand, and so hold them together on their breast, with much bowing & stooping with their heads downwards, thereby to show that they love each other, and are as fast bound and united together in love, as their hands are fast knit together, and that with all their hearts, wherewith they use many courteous speeches. Among the Nobles or Mandoriins, when they meet together, they presently shut both hands, and lay their fingers each upon the other, and so with their arms make a hoop or bow, and so stand still stooping and bowing their heads and bodies with great courtesy, making choice who shall first go by, with many other ceremonies used among the Nobles, which were over long to rehearse. Wherefore at this present I will leave them; and cease to write any further of their ceremonies, and other customs, as necessity requireth, for that if I should describe them all at large, it would be over tedious, and a hundredth quires of paper would not suffice: yet if any man be desirous to see more hereof, let him read the book made by a Spanish Friar named Fray ivan Gonsales de Mendosa, of the description of China, which book is translated out of Spanish into Latin, although there are some faults, by wrong information given unto the Author: notwithstanding it containeth many particular things worthy the reading. The 25. Chapter. Of the town and Island of Machau in China, where the Portugese's have their residence, and traffic with their merchandises, wares, and some prices thereof, and the weight, measure, and money as well of China, as of Malacea, which continually come thither. Habitus e China regno pretiosae elegantiae et rerum omnium affluentissimum Lectuli, et ratio, quibus Chinae proceres primarij▪ Mandorinos' vocant gestantur, cumbaeque quibus ad oblectationem per fluvios vehuntur▪ Maniere als haer die Mandoryns van China welcke het princepael government hebben latin draegen en op die revieren vermeyen vaeren. Naves e China et java velis ex arundine contextis et anchoris ligneis. Schepen van China en java met rietten seysen en houten anckers The merchandise or ware that they carry from Makau to japen, are silks, & from japen they return nothing but silver, whereby they do greatly profit. And seeing we are in hand with their traffics, from Makau, I think it not impertinent to rehearse some of the ware which the Portugeses use commonly to buy there▪ and to traffic withal, together with the ordinary prices thereof, as also the weight and moneys, as well of China as of Malacca, because of the nearness and common traffic that they daily use with each other, more than any other places of ●ndia, which I set down in this place, because this weight and reckoning differeth from that of Portugal and India. It is to be understood that in China there are three sorts of Silks, that is, one sort called Lankijn which is esteemed for the best. The second called Fulcan, which is good also. The third and worst Silk is called Lankam, besides these there are other sorts of Silk, as Silk unspunne, called raw Silk, and Silk that is spun and made in threads, which the Portugeses call Retret The white unspunne Silk of Lankijn is worth the Pico (which is a certain weight) which hereafter I will show you about 1●5 or 150. Rials of eight, or Rikes Dollars accounted after the rate of that money. The white unspunne Silk of Fulcan is worth the Pico, 140. or 145. Rials of eight, the unspunne Silk of Lankam, is worth the Pico 75. or 80. Rials of eight, the Retres white Silk of Lankij is worth the Pico 150. or 170. Rials of eight, the Retres white, and other Silk of Fulcam and Susuam, is worth the Pico 130. or 135. Rials of eight, the Retres white of Canton is worth the Pico 50, or 55. Rials of eight, the wrought Silk of all colours at the same price, the unspunne Canton Silk in colours is worth the Pico 50. or 60. Rials of eight, white Lamparden Silk of 14. Else the piece are commonly worth one year with the other, 50. or 55. Rials of eight. The hundred, the Mosseliat or Musk is commonly worth one year with the other the Caete, which is 20. ounces, six or seven Rials of eight, other fine wares and merchandises of China, have their different prices accordingly, as the time serveth, and are not so common as these Silks, for that with the Silks aforesaid is the Portugal's trade, and the principallest riches, that are brought out of C●ina to the countries bordering about it. As touching the weight and money of China and Malacca, you must understand, that the weight which in Malacca is called a Bha●, is three Picos, and every Pico is 66 ● Caetes, so that ●. Picos which is a Bhar, are 200. Caetes, as well great as small weight, a Bhar of China is 300. Caetes, which weigh as much as 200. Caetes at Malacca small weight: for that three Caetes of China, are in Malacca, two Caetes small weight: a Caete of China is 16. Taeys' Chinish weight, which are 14. Taeys in Malacca which is as much as 20. Ounces ● Portugal weight. They use likewise a weight which they call a Haunt, every Haunt is twelve Caetes small weight and every Caete is 22. Taeyes, and 16. Hantes and 8. Caetes, are just 200. Caetes which is a Bhar of small weight, so likewise a Tael of Malacca is 16. Mases, and 10. Mases and ¼▪ is an Ounce of Portugal weight, and an Ounce and a half is just 16. Mases, and the eight part of a Maze, by these Mases they sell the Bezoar's stones, for every Maze two or three Ducats, according to their greatness and goodness. In Malacca are two sorts of weights, great and small, which hereafter follow. A Bhar great weight, is 200. Cates, and one Cates 26. Taeys, and one Taey is one Ounce ½▪ hard weight of Portugal, the small weight is a Bhar, which is also 200. Caetes, and one Caetes is 22. Taeys, and a ●ael is a full Ounce and a half Portugal weight. With their great weight they weigh P●per, Cloves, Nutmegs, Folio, red & white Sanders, Indigo, Alum, Sanguis, draconis, Palo Dauguila, Siet, and Sapon. With the small weight they weigh Quicksilver, Vermilion▪ Coper▪ Blie, ivory bones, Silk, Musk, Amber, Calamba, or Lignum Aloes, Tin, Led, Lancua, Oil of Nutmegs, and of flowers, Verdette, Rosamallia, Besoun▪ and Camphora etc. The merchandises that the Portugeses carry to China, whereof they make most profit is Rials of eight, which in China are worth above six testons, not for that they had rather have it then other Silver, but for that it is all Silver▪ for it is presently cut in pieces, to pay it out after their manner as it is showed before, they carry likewise some Wines both Portugal and Indian Wine, and some Oils of Olives, which are there desired. Velvet, Cloth of Scarlet, whereof they have none, nor yet can make any, although they have both sheep and wool enough. Looking glasses, ivory bones, and all kind of Crystal and Glass, are well sold there. But this shall suffice for that which concerneth the land of China, now I will proceed to the description of the Island of japan, which is the farthest Voyage and last Oriental place by the Portugeses discovered or at this day known. The 26. Chapter. Of the Island of japan. THe Island or the land of japan is many islands one by the other, and are separated and divided only by certain small creeks and rivers, it is a great land, although as yet the circuit thereof is not known, because as yet it is not discovered▪ nor by the Portugal's sought into, it beginneth under 30. degrees, and runneth till you come to 38 degrees, it lieth East from the firm land of China, about 80. miles, and from Maccau by the way that the Portugal's travail North-east ward, is about 300. miles, and the Haven where commonly the Portugeses use to traffic, is called Nangasache. They have likewise other places where they traffic and deal. The country is cold, proceeding of much rain, Snow and Ice▪ that falleth therein, it hath some Corn land, but their common Corn is Ryce. In some places the land is very hilly and unfruitful, they eat no flesh but the flesh of wild beasts, and such as is hunted, wherein they are very expert, although there are Oxen, Cows, Sheep, and such like cattle good store, yet they use them to other things about their labours, and because it is tame flesh, which they cannot brook, they refuse it as we do horse flesh, they do likewise refuse to eat Milk, as we do blood, saying that Milk although it is white, yet it is very blood. They have much Fish, whereof they are very desirous, as also all kinds of fruits, as in China. Their houses are commonly covered with wood, and with straw, they are 〈◊〉 and workmanlike built, specially the rich men's houses, they have their Chambers hanged and flowered with Mats, which is their best hangings. The japens are not so curious nor so cleanly as the men of China, but are content with a mean, yet for the most part they go very well appareled in Silk, almost like the Chinos. The country hath some mines of silver, which from thence is by the Portugeses yearly brought unto China, and there bartered for Silk, and other Chinish wares, which the japeans have need of. The countrymen are very skilful to search for Silver, and to sell their wares. They have among them very good handicrafts men, and cunning workmen in all kind of handy works, they are sharp witted, and quickly learn any thing they see, as by experience it is found in those parts which the Portugese's have discovered. The common people of the land are much different from other nations, for that they have among them as great courtesy and good policy, as if they had lived continually in the Court, they are very expert in their weapons as need requireth, although they have little cause to use them, for that if any of them beginneth to brawl or to draw his sword, he is put to death, they have not any prisons, for that who soever deserveth to be imprisoned, is presently punished, or banished the country. When they mean to lay hold upon a man, they must do it by stealth and by deceit, for otherwise he would resist and do much mischief. If it be any Gentleman or man of great authority, they beset his house about with men, and whether he chance to slay himself or not, they enter the house by force, and kill all they find therein. Which to avoid, he suffereth himself often times to be killed by his servants. And it is often seen that they rip their own bellies open, which often times is likewise done by their servants for the love of their Masters, therein to show their Masters the love they bear unto them, so little esteeming their own lives, to pleasure and serve them. The like do young Boys in presence of their parents, only for grief or some small anger. They are in all their actions very patiented and humble, for that in their youths they learn to endure hunger, cold, and all manner of labour, to go bare headed, with few clothes, as well in Winter as in Summer, and not only the common people, but the principal Gentlemen and Nobles of the country. They account it for great beauty to have no hair, which with great care they do pluck out, only keep a bunch of hair on the crown of their heads, which they tie together. Touching their traffic, manners, speech, and all their ceremonies, concerning life and courtesy, they are clean contrary unto all other nations, specially from those of China, and till this day observe the same as an infallible law, which groweth upon this occasion. A long time since, there was in China a great & mighty family, which together with all their friends and acquaintance secretly conspired and agreed to rise up against the King of China, to drive him out of his kingdom and to kill him, and having so done, to place themselves therein: but it could not so secretly be contrived and wrought, but in the end it was known: whereupon the king punished them most grievously, and caused divers of the principal conspirators to be put to death, and all others he found to be consenting thereunto should have felt the like pain, which grieved the Counsel and other Noble men of the country, for that divers of their nearest kinsmen were of that conspiracy, so that with humble and long petition to the King, they besought him to let them live, and to punish them with some easier punishment than death: but that which they sought & desired at the king, all things considered, was little better than death, which was that he would banish them and all their posterity for ever out of the country, into the islands of japen, which as then were not inhabited, and this as they desired was done: whereby there is so great envy and hatred between them and the men of China, that they hate each other to the death, and do all the mischief one unto the other that they can imagine or devise, even until this time. The men of japen have done much mischief unto the men of China, and many times fallen upon their coasts, and put all to fire and sword, and now at this present have not any conversation with them, but only they traffic with the Portugese's, and to show themselves wholly their deadly enemies, in all their actions they are clean contrary unto the men of China, and to the same end have changed all their customs, ceremonies and manners of courtesy from the men of China. To recite the particulars would be over long, yet I will in brief set down some few examples of the customs and manners therein. One is where the China useth the courtesy of salutation to a man with the head and hand, when they meet together: the japens to the contrary put off their shoes, whereby they show them reverence, and as the Chinaes' stand up when they mind to receive any man▪ and to do him reverence, they to the contrary set themselves down, accounting it a very unseemly thing to receive or bid a man welcome standing on their feet: and as we put on our cloaks when we mean to go abroad into the town or country, they put them off when they go forth, putting on great wide breeches, and coming home they put them off again, and cast their cloaks upon their shoulders: and as among other nations it is a good sight to see men with white and yellow hair and white teeth, with them it is esteemed the filthiest thing in the world, and seek by all means they may to make their hair and teeth black, for that the white causeth their grief, and the black maketh them glad. The like custom is among the women, for as they go abroad they have their daughters & maids before them, and their men servants come behind, which in spain is clean contrary, and when they are great with child, they tie their girdles so hard about them, that men would think they should burst, and when they are not with Child, they wear their girdles so slack, that you would think they would fall from their bodies, saying that by experience they do find, if they should not do so, they should have evil luck with their fruit, and presently as soon as they are delivered of their children, in steed of cherishing both the mother and the child with some comfortable meat, they presently wash the child in cold water, and for a time give the mother very little to eat, and that of no great substance. Their manner of eating and drinking is: Every man hath a table alone, without table clothes or napkins, and eateth with two pieces of wood, like the men of China: they drink wine of Rice, wherewith they drink themselves drunk, and after their meat they use a certain drink, which is a pot with hot water, which they drink as hot as ever they may endure, whether it be Winter or Summer. Anoint. D. Pall. The Turks hold almost the same manner of drinking of their Chaona, which they make of certain fruit, which is like unto the Bakelaer, and by the Egyptians called Bon or Ban: they take of this fruit one pound and a half, and roast them a little in the fire, and then sith them in twenty pounds of water, till the half be consumed away: this drink they take every morning fasting in their chambers, ●ut of an earthen pot, being very hot, as we do here drink aquacomposita in the morning: and they say that it strengtheneth and maketh them warm, breaketh wind, and openeth any stopping. The manner of dressing their meat is altogether contrary unto other nations: the aforesaid warm water is made with the powder of a certain herb called Chaa, which is much esteemed, and is well accounted of among them, and all such as are of any countenance or ability have the said water kept for them in a secret place, and the gentlemen make it themselves, and when they will entertain any of their friends, they give him some of that warm water to drink: for the pots wherein they sith it, and wherein the herb is kept, with the earthen cups which they drink it in, they esteem as much of them, as we do of Diamonds, Rubies and other precious stones, and they are not esteemed for their newness, but for their oldness, and for that they were made by a good workman: and to know and keep such by themselves, they take great and special care, as also of such as are the valewers of them, and are skilful in them, as with us the goldsmith prizeth and valueth silver and gold, and the jewellers all kinds of precious stones: so if their pots & cups be of an old & excellent workman's making, they are worth 4 or 5 thousand ducats or more the piece. The King of Bungo did give for such a pot, having three feet, 14 thousand ducats, and a japan being a Christian in the town of Sacay, gave for such a pot 1400 ducats, and yet it had 3 pieces upon it. They do likewise esteem much of any picture or table, wherein is painted a black tree, or a black bird, and when they know it is made of wood, and by an ancient & cunning master, they give whatsoever you will ask for it. It happeneth some times that such a picture is sold for 3 or 4 thousand ducats and more. They also esteem much of a good rapier, made by an old and cunning master, such a one many times costeth 3 or 4 thousand Crowns the piece. These things do they kéeepe and esteem for their jewels, as we esteem our jewels & precious stones▪ And when we ask them why they esteem them so much, they ask us again, why we esteem so well of our precious stones & jewels, whereby there is not any profit to be had, and serve to no other use, then only for a show, & that their things serve to some end. Their justice and government is as followeth: Their kings are called jacatay, and are absolutely Lords of the land, notwithstanding they keep for themselves as much as is necessary for them and their estate, and the rest of their land they divide among others, which are called Cunixus, which are like our Earls and Dukes: these are appointed by the King, and he causeth them to govern & rule the land as it pleaseth him: they are bound to serve the King as well in peace, as in wars, at their own cost & charges, according to their estate, and the ancient laws of japan. These Cunixus have others under them called Tovis, which are like our Lords and Lieutenants, with whom likewise they divide and part the land by the king given unto them. And these Toms do yet divide their parts among their friends & such are their soldiers, and take an oath to be ready at the commandment of their heads and chief governors, as well in peace as in war at their own proper costs & charges: & every one must maintain himself, and be content with that part which is allotted unto him: wherewith every one of them according to his estate and quality may live well, and every one of them hath so much power and authority over those that are under him, that he may punish, banish, and put them to death, and do with them, if they offend, as it best pleaseth him, be it with right or with wrong, without any appeal or answering before any man: this power is not given only to the Governors, Captains and Officers over their subjects, Vassals and Soldiers under their charges, governments and offices (as I said before) but also to masters of houses and fathers over their children, servants & family: so that they may kill, beat, ●acke & hew them as they think good, and at their pleasures, without any resistance or correction for the same. The rents and revenues belonging to the King are very small, and are nothing else but rice, which is their living: he hath every year only 500 thousand packs or sacks of Rice, and not any other customs, rents and revenues, whereof he giveth to 10 or 12 Cunixu● each man 30 or 40 thousand sacks, the rest is for his own costs and charges, to the maintenance of his estate, and the Cunixus must distribute of their parts among the Toms, and the Toms among the soldiers, wherewith they maintain themselves, every man in his estate. Their speech is different from the Chinish, so that they understand not each other, but in writing they differ not, for that they use all the self same figures and characters: they use likewise many kinds of vowels, and in their writing many courteous speeches, to every man according to his estate & calling, with several titles & words: whereby their speech is hardly to be learned by a stranger. Their religion is much like unto those of China: they have their Idols and their ministers, which they call Bonses, and hold them in great estimation: but since the time of the jesuits being among them, there have been divers baptised and become Christians, which daily do increase, among the which were 3 Kings, that is the king of Bungo, which is one of the principallest kings of japan, although there are many in the country, wherewith the Portugese's, as yet have had no conference: the second the King of Arryma: the third, the King of Omura▪ Those three Kings sent their sons and Nephews with the jesuits into India, from thence to travel into Portugal, and so to Rome, to submit themselves unto the Pope, and departing out of japan, in anno 1582. 15●2 they arrived in India, in the city of Goa An. 1583. 158● the same year that I arrived in India, so that we found them yet in Goa, and the next year after they sailed unto Portugal, & from thence to Madril, where by the king & nobles of Spain, they were with great triumph & honour welcomed and received, and presented with many gifts. From thence they traveled to Rome unto the Pope, who likewise did them great honour, and bestowed many presents upon them, as also all the Cardinals and Lords of Italy, for that they traveled throughout all Italy to Florence, Venice, Ferrara, etc. which being done, they returned again unto Madril, with letters from Pope Sixtus, and some holy relics of the cross that Christ died upon, to present the same unto the Christian Kings of japan, as an holy present: in the end they arrived in India again, during my being there, which was in anno 1587., 158● being with great joy received, and so set sail unto japan, where they arrived again with great admiration of all the men of japan: which the jesuits did, to the end (as they said) the better to move the japans to be christened, and to make them know the magnificence of the country of Europa, because they would not believe it being showed them: but the principallest cause and intent of the jesuits was, thereby to reap great profit, and to get much praise and commendation, for that most of the gifts which the princes of japan had given them, fell to their shares: they likewise obtained of the Pope and the king of Spain, that no man might dwell in japan, either Portugal or Christian, without their licence and consent, so that in all japan there are no other orders of monks, Friars, Priests, nor any other religious persons remaining or resident there, but jesuits alone. They have only among them certain handy craft's men, by them brought out of India, with whom they have to do, but for other men, as merchants and others, they may but go and come, and not stay there, without the jesuits licence. They have almost all the country under their subjection, such I mean as are converted to the faith of Christ, as well spiritual as temporal, making the japans believe what they list, whereby they are honoured like gods, for that the japans make so great account of them, that they do almost pray unto them, as if they were Saints. They had obtained so much favour of the Pope, that he granted them a Bishop of their order, (which is contrary to their profession) who came out of Portugal to be Bishop in japon, but died in the way, between Portugal and India: Since that they have procured an other, so that to conclude, they have all the pray under their claws. As likewise they do enjoy and possess the principallest places of Religion in all India, where they build most princely houses, which no man dareth withstand or refuse them, neither any of the Religious orders, have the means or wealth to do the like. This they know full well how to bring to pass, for that there is not any thing, from whence they will not suck or draw out some profit or advantage, or else they have the slight, and cunning how to get it as well from the King, and from other Noblemen and estates as also from the common people, it seemeth in a manner that they bewitch men with their subtle practices and devices, and are so well practised and experimented in trade of merchandises, that they surpass all worldly men. To conclude, there is not any commodity to be had or reaped throughout all India, but they have their part therein, so that the other orders and Religious persons, as also the common people, do much murmur thereat, and seem to dislike of their covetous humours. A little beyond japon under 34. and 35. degrees, not far from the coast of China, lieth an other great Island, called Insula de Core, whereof as yet there is no certain knowledge, neither of the greatness of the country, people, nor wares that are there to be found. From Makau East Northeast, distant above 90. miles lie certain Islands, called Lequeo Pequeno, or little Lequeo, and lie about 20. miles distant from the firm land of China, and 90. miles farther in the same course, lie other islands, called Lequeo Maior, or great Lequeo. All these Islands are traveled unto, and inhabited by those of China, whereof we will now cease to speak, till an other time, (having particularly made a brief discourse in an other place, of all their manners, customs, wares, and merchandises, according to the truest instructions I could find) and so will return again to the description of Goa, together with the places bordering about the same. The 27. Chapter. A short relation of the land lying behind Goa: in the jurisdiction whereof lieth the said town of Goa, and of the Original of their Kings and Governors, with their names, by true information given by the inhabitants themselves, together with their Histories. BEfore I begin to write of the town and Island of Goa, with the coasts, superstitions, and other customs of the country, lying behind and round about Goa, as well where the Portugese's inhabit, as where the native country men are resident, I thought it convenient to begin with the same somewhat further off, then at the present time, the better to understand the original of the people, together with the principal causes of the divisions of the same countries and nations, as also their King's names and surnames. Then you must understand that about 300. years past, there was a mighty King of the country of Deli, which lieth within the land behind Goa on the Northside, and bordereth upon the land of Coracone, belonging to the King of Persia, wherein are made the rich Coverlets and hangings, by the Portugese's called Alcatyffas, which land of Deli is very cold, and hath Snow and Ice in it like the Netherlands. This king of Deli brought under his subjection, all the countries bordering about him, among the which were Decam, Cuncam, Ballagate, and the land of Goa. At the same time the country of Cambaia, which is distant from Goa about 100 miles Northward, was overrun and taken forcibly by the Moors, & Mahometans, and brought the natural countrymen, called Reysbutos' being heathens, with great tyranny under their subjection. The land of Ballagate, and Decam was before inhabited by heathens, that were very mighty and of great power, whose successors are now called Venesares, and others that yet dwell within the country called Colles: which Colles, Venesares, and Reysbutos of Cambaia do yet live by robbing and stealing, and those of Cambaia pay tribute to the said Reysbutos, because they should not rob and spoil them, but suffer them to live in peace. The Colles and Venesares also receive tribute of the men of Decam and Ballagate: for that the Kings could never as yet overcome them, although they make no show thereof, but still dissemble with them, for that of what soever they rob and steal, they have their parts. After this King of Deli had brought all these kingdoms and countries under his subjection: then came the Tartarians, which the Indians call Mogoren, and overcame most part of the country of Deli. At the same time there dwelled in the kingdom of Bengalen a Noble Gentleman, whose brother the King of Bengallen had wrongfully put to death, whereby this Gentleman sought and devised all the means he could to be revenged, and did not only bring it to pass by bereaving the King of his life, but also took the whole kingdom from him, and brought it under his subjection, and being in this sort become absolute Lord and King of Bengalla, was not therewith content, but desiring to augment his kingdom, and thereby to win great fame, did invade the country of Deli, (bordering upon him) with a great army of men, and by force drove the Tartarians or Mogoros out of the country, and so conquered both that land and all the countries bordering thereabouts, as Decam, Ballagate, and Cuncam, as far as to the kingdom of Cambaia, and for a time was the greatest Prince in all those quarters. For the Indians affirm that he had in Compass under his subjection above 800. miles of land. This King reigning for a time over all these lands and countries, in the end desiring to live quietly, and to return unto his kingdom of Bengala, thinking it too troublesome for him to rule so great a country, did invest one of his cousins, with the countries of Decam, Ballagate, and Cuncam, with the land of Goa, and the countries bordering about the same, which done, he returned into his land of Bengala, leaving his said cousin King and commander of the aforesaid countries. This man was always a great friend and well-willer to strange nations, as Arabians, Turks, Ruins, and Corasones, & parted his countries among Governors and Captains, to on whereof being called Idalham, whom the Portugese's call Hidalcam, he gave the Government of Angedina, which lieth 12. miles from Goa Southwards, stretching towards the North, till you come to a place called Siffardan which are 60. miles, wherein is contained the town and Island of Goa: to an other Captain called Nisa Maluco, he gave the coast of Siffardan stretching Northwards, to Negotana which are 20. miles, and lieth inwards to the land of Cambaia: so that those two Captains had their governments in the country of Cuncam, which lieth on the Sea coast, and separateth itself from the land of Decam, by great and high hills, called Guate. These hills are very high, and have many corners and hooks of land, and do stretch towards Cambaia, to the Cape de Comorin, and from thence back again to the coast of Choramandel. The hill of Guate is so high, that men may easily see it within Goa, and all the coast along, though commonly it is covered with clouds, and it is the more to be wondered at, for this respect, because all other hills are uneven, high and low, and this is fair and flat land on the top, with great & goodly fields: & is by the Indians called Ballagate, that is to say, above the hill, for Balla is above, and Gate is a hill, whereby the Portugeses do commonly call the whole country Ballagate, although the principal part, and the land itself is called Decam, and also Canara, whereof the inhabitants are called Decanijns and Canaras, as the Kings also in times past used to bear titles, and call themselves Kings of Decam. But returning to the division of the rest of the countries, he divided likewise the land of Ballagate or Decam, into Provinces, giving one part to Imademaluco, by the Portugese's called Madremaluco, and an other part to Cotalmoluco, and an other to Melique Verido. All the said Captains were strangers, as Turks, Ruins, and Corasones, except Nisamalucode, who was Son to a Gentleman of the King's house, and because the King had lain with the mother of Nisamaluco, therefore he boasted himself to be of the lineage of the king of Decam, all the other Captains were slaves and servants, which the King had brought, and placed in those rooms, as putting great trust in them, thinking that they would acknowledge it, and be thankful unto him for the same. But it fell out otherwise, as we see it commonly doth, and that good is requited with evil, for these Captains in time, getting credit, authority and power, were in great estimation, and as it were, absolute Kings and Governors of their Provinces, for that the king never troubled himself therewith, but laid all the charge upon them, whereby they began to be puffed up with pride, and determined to usurp the Provinces under him, for them and their successors: And because it grieved them to be in subjection to an other, and at his commandment, they all met together, and among them, agreed to take their Lord and King prisoner, and so every one of them to be sole commanders of the countries they had in charge, which they easily brought to effect, for that they had all the means they would wish or desire, as did honour them with the name of Xa, which is to say a King, whereby they had the names of Adelxa, Nisamoxa, and Contumixa, and all the Kings continued so with the name of Xa, which in Persia is a King, and Ishmael is a proper name, whereby Xa Ishmael, and Xa Thamas are as much to say as King Ishmael, and King Thamas, and of the Turks and Rumes are called Suffy or Soffy, which signifieth a great Captain. The Kings of Decam also have a custom when they will honour a man, or recompense their service done, and raise him to dignity and honour. They give him the title of Nayque, which signifieth a Captain, as salva Nayque and Acem Nayque. And when they will give a man an honourable title, or salutation, they call him Rau, as Chitarau, which is to say, strong King, and such like titles, which among them is a great honour. Also Adelham or Hidelcam, is called Sabayo, which signifieth Seigneur or Lord, for the Island of Goa had a Captain or Governor, that was Lord of the town, when the Portugese's wan it first, called Sabayo, as the Portugese's Chronicles of their Indian conquests do make mention, whose house or Palace to this day in the City of Goa, is the inquisition house, and a place which standeth between the great Church and the same house, is as yet called the Palace of Sabayo. The 28. Chapter. Of the town and Island of Goa, chief City of India. THe City of Goa, is the Metropolitan or chief City of all the Oriental Indies, where the Portugese's have their traffic, where also the Viceroy, the Arch bishop, the King's Council, and Chancery have their residence, and from thence are all places in the Oriental Indies, governed and ruled. There is likewise the staple for all Indian commodities, whether all sorts of Merchants do resort, coming thither both to buy and sell, as out of Arabia, Armenia, Persia, Cambaia, Bengala, Pegu, Sian, Malacca, java, Molucca, China, etc. The City and Island of Goa, lieth under 15. degrees, on the North side, and is distant from the Equinoctial, (by the way that the Portugese's ships do come thither from Mossambique) 400. miles. It is an Island wholly compassed about with a river, and is above three miles great, it lieth within the coast of the firm land, so that the Island, with the Sea coast of the firm land, do both reach as far each as other into the Sea. It is only separated from the firm land, by an arm of the Sea, or of the river, that runneth in by the North side of the town, and so round about the Island to the South side, where it entereth again into the Sea, and is in form almost like a half Moon. The river runneth even unto the Town, and is indifferent broad, there are between the firm land and the Island, certain small Islands that are all inhabited by the natural borne countrymen, and on the other side of the town the river is there so small, that in Summer time, by wading to the knees in water, a man may pass it over on foot. On the which side the Island hath a wall with certain Bulwarks, which the Portugese's of late years have caused to be made, to defend them from the firm land in time of war, as it often happeneth, for it hath divers times been besieged by Dialcan or Hidalcam, at the mouth and the entry of the river. On the North side lieth the land of Bards, which is high land, under which land the Portugese's do Anchor safely out of all danger, and there they have a place to lad and unlade their wares. This land of Bards is also under the Portugal subjection, and is full of Villages inhabited with people that are of the firm land, lying above it, called Canarijns, who for the most part are Christians, but observe their own manner of apparel, which is to go all naked, their privy members only covered. This land is full of Indian Palm trees, whereon the Indian Nuts called Cocos do grow, as also all the other islands lying in the river. This land of Bards, is separated from the firm land by a small river, which is so little, that it cannot almost be discerned from the firm land. On the South side of the Island of Goa, where the river runneth again into the Sea, there cometh even out with the coast a land, called Salsette, which is also under the subjection of the Portugese's, and is inhabited, and planted both with people and fruit, like the land of Bards, and is likewise parted with a little river from the firm land. Between this land of Salsette, & the Island of Goa, lie also some small islands, all full of Indian Palm trees, and by the mouth or issue of the river, lieth an Island which is called Goa Velha, that is old Goa, from whence there cometh no special thing, neither is it much inhabited. Those lands of Bards and Salsette, are by the Kings of Portugal let out to farm, and the rents thereof are employed to the payment of the Archbishop, Cloisters, Priests, Viceroy, & other the King's Officers, yearly stipends, which is granted them, by special Privileges and Patents from the King. The Island is very hilly, and in some places so desert and rough, that on some sides men can hardly travel over land (but with great labour) to the town of Goa, the Island even to the Sea side is full of Villages, and inhabited by the Canarijus, which are the natural borne people of the land, and do altogether live by working upon the land, and by their Palm trees. The villages and dwellings of these Canarijus, are most round about the Island, and on the water sides, or by small Lakes, whereof there are some few, within the Island, and the cause why they dwell thus, is for that the Palm trees will not grow in any other place but upon low ground, by the waters, specially in sandy ground: so that there are no Palm trees to be found on the high land within the country unless it be upon sandy grounds on the Sea coast, or rivers sides. On the East side of the town of Goa upwards, into the river, about three miles from the town of Bards, lieth a place where the Portugeses ships do Anchor, the river hath some créekes, and a ship of 200. Tons or there about, may easily discharge before the Town, but the Portugese's great ships must discharge themselves at Bards: which being done, they may i● they will freely go and lie before the town. The town is well built with fair houses and streets, after the Portugal manner, but because of the heat they are somewhat lower. They commonly have their Gardens and Orchards at the back side of their houses, full of all kind of Indian fruits: as also the whole Island through, they have many pleasant Gardens and farms, with houses to play in, and trees of Indian fruits, whether they go to sport themselves, and wherein the Indian women take great delight. The town hath in it all sorts of Cloisters and Churches as Lisbon hath, only it wanteth Nuns, for the men cannot get the women to travel so far, where they should be shut up, and forsake Venus, with whom (so that they may enjoy and fulfil their lusts) they had rather lose their lives, whereof they make small account. The Island is both winter and Summer all alike green, and hath always some kind of fruit in season, which is a great pleasure, the town lieth upon some hills and dales like Lisbon, it hath in times past been very small, and walled, with a dry Ditch round about it, wherein there is no water, but when it raineth, the walls are yet standing, but no Gates remaining, and the town is now built round about with houses, so that it is, at the least twice as big without the walls, as it is within, and lieth open without walls or closures, saving only that the Island hath a wall on the East side, which beginneth over against the land of Salsette, and so runneth along until you come at Bards, and is only to defend them from the firm land, where the Portugese's have no commandment. The whole Island hath no other defence, but only upon the corner of the land of Bards, at the mouth of the river, where there standeth an old ruinous Castle, wherein lieth two or three Iron pieces, and one man that in the night time keepeth the watch, the Island on the Sea side is very high, full of stony Cliffs, but the land of Bards hath on the Sea side a very fair white Sand, about half a mile long, and somewhat more: the defence of the Island consisteth herein, that on the East side there are three or four passages or Gates, that stand upon the water side, on the uttermost part of the Island, right against the firm land, Salsette and Bards, every gate or passage hath a Captain and a clerk, which keep watch, that no man may pass into the other side, but by their licence. And the Indians, Decanijus, and other Moors and heathens, that are resident in Goa, and therein have their habitation, when they go into the firm land to fetch their necessary provisions, coming to those places which are called Passos, they must every man have a mark, which is Printed on their naked arms, and so they pass over to the other side, and at their return again they must show the same mark, whereby they may freely enter, for the which they pay two Basarukes, which is as much as a Hollanders Doit, and this is the profit that the Captain and Clerk of the said Passos do make. In the night they have a Boy, that keepeth watch, and hath a small Bell, which hangeth over the gate, which Boylyeth down, and toeth the string of the Bell at his foot and so ringeth it often times, to show that he watcheth, which is all the watch they hold throughout the whole Island. There are five of these Passos, one upon the South side of the Island, where men pass to the firm land, and to the land of Salsette, and is called Benesterijn, commonly named Passo de Saint jago, because the Parish of Saint jacobs' standeth there: The Tebe de Passo is on the East side of the Island, where men do only pass into. The firm land called O Passo Secco, which is the dry passage, for in that place the river is at the narrowest and shallowest. The third Passo on the South side of the Island, joineth almost to the Town, called O Passo de Daugijn, or of Madre de Deus, and so far goeth the wall, beginning at Passo de Benesterijn, or S. jago, and from thence the whole Island is without any wall or closure: from this Passo, right over against it, they pass over to an Island, which is hard by the firm land, where is also a Passo called O Passo de Norwa: the fift or last Passo lieth in the middle way of the River downwards towards Bards, which is the strongest of them all, and best looked unto, but no otherwise made then all the rest, & is called O Passo de Pangijn, from thence they pass to Bards, and also all the boats and ships that pass in and out of the river, must stay there & be searched, and this is all their watch and strentgh in the Island. Touching the Portugese's justice and ordinances, as well in worldly as spiritual causes, they are all one as they are in Portugal. They dwell in the town among all sorts of nations, as Indians, Heathens, Moors, jews, Armenians, Gusarates, Benianes, Bramenes, and of all Indian nations and people, which do all dwell and traffic therein, every man holding his own religion, without constraining any man to do against his conscience, only touching their ceremonies of burning the dead, and the living, of marrying & other superstitious & devilish inventions, they are forbidden by the Archbishop to use them openly, or in the Island, but they may freely use them upon the firm land, and secretly in their houses, thereby to shun and avoid all occasions of dislike that might be given to Christians, which are but newly baptized: but touching the worldly policy or good government of the country, and executing of justice, as also for the ruling of the towns men in the city: it is common to them all, and they are under the Portugese's law, and he that is once christened, and is after found to use any heathenish superstitions, is subject to the Inquisition, what so ever he be, or for any point of Religion what so ever. The Island hath nothing of itself to nourish it withal, but only some cattle, hens, goats, doves, etc. but very few, because of the barrenness and evil situation of the place, which is a most hilly, barren, and wild country, and full of waste ground: all their necessaries, as beasts, hens, hogs, eggs, milk, etc. come from Salsette and Bards, but most part out of the firm land, Corn, Rice, and other grain: also Oil, and all other necessaries come from other countries, and are brought in by the River, as from Cambaia on the North side, and from the coast of Malabar and other places, as in the description of the coast we have in part declared: of wine called wine of palm trees, they have enough, and so much that they have to spare for other places. They have but little fresh water, but only one Well called Banganiin, which standeth about a quarter of a mile with out the City, wherewith the whole town is served, which the slaves fetch in pots & sell it in the town, and is very good to drink: for water to dress meat, wash, and do other things withal, they commonly have Wells within their houses: the land of itself is very stony and dry, having a kind of red earth, so that some Italian Alchemissts have promised to get Copper & Gold out of the same, which neither the king nor Viceroy would ever consent unto, fearing lest the report of such treasure would be occasion of greater trouble unto them by their enemies that are round about them, through the desire that they have of riches, and therefore they have deferred to seek for it: by the map hereafter following you may see the situation of the Island and Town of Goa, with all the streets, Churches and places lively described. The 29. Chapter. Of the customs of the Portugese's, and such as are issued from them, called Mesticos, or half countrymen, as well of Goa, as of all the Oriental countries. THe Portugese's in India, are many of them married with the natural borne women of the country, and the children proceeding of them are called Mesticos, that is, half countrymen. These Mesticos are commonly of yellowish colour, notwithstanding there are many women among them, that are fair and well form. The children of the Portugese's, both boys and gyrls, which are borne in India, are called Castisos, and are in all things like unto the Portugese's, only somewhat differing in colour, for they draw towards a yellow colour: the children of those Castisos are yellow, and altogether like the Mesticos, and the children of Mesticos are of colour and fashion like the natural borne Countrymen or Decaniins of the country, so that the posterity of the Portugese's, both men and women being in the third degree, do seem to be natural Indians, both in colour & fashion. Their livings and daily traffics are to Bengala, Pegu, Malacca, Cambaia, China, and every way, both North and South: also in Goa there is holden a daily assembly or meeting together, as well of the Citizens and Inhabitants, as of all nations throughout India, and of the countries bordering on the same, which is like the meeting upon the burse in Andwarpe, yet differeth much from that, for that hither in Goa there come as well Gentlemen, as merchants and others, and there are all kinds of Indian commodities to sell, so that in a manner it is like a Fair. This meeting is only before Noon, every day in the year, except Sundays and holy days: it beginneth in the morning at 7. of the clock, and continueth till 9 of the clock, but not in the heat of the day, nor after Noon, in the principal street of the City, named the strait street, and is called the Leylon, which is as much to say, as an outroop: there are certain criers appointed by the City for the purpose, which have of all things to be cried and sold: these go all the time of the Leylon or outroop, all behangd about with all sorts of gold chains, all kinds of costly jewels, pearls, rings, and precious stones: likewise they have running about them, many sorts of captives and slaves, both men and women, young and old, which are daily sold there, as beasts are sold with us, where every one may choose which liketh him best, every one at a certain price. There are also Arabian horses, all kind of spices and dried drugs, sweet gums, and such like things, fine and costly coverlets, and many curious things, out of Cambaia, Sinde, Bengala, China, etc. and it is wonderful to see in what sort many of them get their livings, which every day come thither to buy wares, and at an other time sell them again. And when any man dieth, all his goods are brought thither & sold to the last penny worth, in the same outroop, who soever they be, yea although they were the viceroys goods: and this is done to do right and justice unto Orphans & widows, and that it may be sold with the first, where every man may see it, so that every year there is great quantity of ware sold within that City, for that there die many men within the Town, by means of their disordered living, together with the hotness of the country: the like assembly is holden in all places of India, where the Portugese's inhabit. There are some married Portugese's, that get their livings by their slaves, both men and women, whereof some have 12, some 20, and some 30, for it costeth them but little to keep them. These slaves for money do labour for such as have need of their help, some fetch fresh water, and sell it for money about the streets: the women slaves make all sorts of confectures and conserves of Indian fruits, much fine needle work, both cut and wrought works, and then their master send the fairest and the youngest of them well dressed up with their wares about the streets to sell the same, that by the neatness & beauty of the said women slaves, men might be moved to buy, which happeneth more for the affection they have to the slaves & to fulfil their pleasure with them, then for any desire to the conserves or needle works: for these slaves do never refuse them, but make their daily living thereby, and with the gains that they by that means bring home, their masters may well keep and maintain them. There are others that use exchanging of moneys, and to buy money when it cometh, as time serveth to fallen it again, for they buy the Rials of eight, when the ships come from Portugal, whereof some buy at the least 10 or 12 hundredth, and keep them till the month of April, which is the time when the ships sail to China, for then are the Rials of eight sought for to carry thither, and are commonly worth 25 or 30 in the hundredth profit, and then they receive for them a certain money, which at the same time is brought from Ormus, called Larriins, that come out of Persia, which they buy for 8 or 10 in the hundredth profit, & keep them till the Portugese's on the month of September come thither, and so deliver them again for 20 or 25 in the hundredth profit, in exchange for Rials of eight, as I said before, for they must have these Larriins with them to Cochin, to buy pepper and other wares, for that it is the best and most profitable money. There are yet other sorts of money called Pagodes, Venetianers, & Santhones, which are gold, all which they do likewise buy & sell, so that there are many that do nothing else, & become rich, specially he that hath a good stock. This exchange cometh most commonly from the spirituality, who do secretly use it, by other men's means, without any let or hindrance. Some there are that live upon their rents which they have by their palm trees, whereon the Indian nut called Cocus doth grow, whereof they may very well live and have well to maintain themselves, for that it is the principal commodity of that Island. Indorum casae, villae, et vici circa Goam. Indische hutte Lanthuÿsen en dorpen ontrent Goa. Contenancijen en habyten der Portugeesers so burghers als Soldaten in host Indien als se op die straten comen. Hoc habitu, qui e Lusitanis Nobilitate aut dignitate clariores in India fere conspiciuntur per plateas obequitant. Open dese maniere riden gemeenlick over stracten die Portugeesche Edellieden Regierders en Raetsheeren. Hac forma Lusitanorum nobiliores et qui opulentiores se gestari jubent Open dese manner laeten haer die Portugeesen draegen die van affcomtste en vermoegen zÿn. Fusten welcke die Portugeesen en haer vianden dic Malabaren gebruÿcken ter oorloch, en om coopmanschap te voeren There are among them but two manner of people, that is, married men and soldiers, for that all young men unmarried are named soldiers, which is the best name that a man can have, not that the soldiers are any ways bound or under the commandment and regiment of any Captain, which throughout India, is not used but when the Portugal's come into India out of Portugal, and are arrived there, every man goeth where he thinketh best, although in Portugal every man's name that goeth in the ship is written and registered, which is done in this sort: every man is written up, both his name and surname, with a note what pay they receive of the King, whereof some bear the title of Fidalgo da Caza del Rey nossas Senor, that is, a Gentleman of the kings house, which is the chiefest title: there are others named Mozos Fidalgos, which is also an honourable title, and they are commonly gentlemen's sons, or by the kings favour advanced thereunto: There are yet others that are named Cavalhiero Fidalgo, which is not so much as the other two, yet it is an honourable title, and is the title of a knight, who for some valiant act by him done is made knight, which they do for a small matter: for that if he do any act to be accounted of, or be in a manner at such an action doing, presently he is of a Captain or a Gentleman made a knight, whereof they much boast themselves: and it is now grown so common among them, that very Cook's boys and others as mean as they, are made knights: there are others also that are named Mosos da Camara, do Numero, e do Seruiço, which is servants to the King, some of his chamber, some of his accounts, and some for his service, this is the first title or degree of credit, whereby through their good service they attain unto better, and are more glorious of their titles, then of all the riches in the world. There are also that are named Escuderos Fidalgos, that is Esquires, which is likewise a degree of credit: Others are named Hommes honorados, which is men of honour, and the poorest among them (which are not named by any title) are set down for soldiers, which are the common and rascal sort: these are every man paid their wages according to their titles, and may each man in his quality (by long service, or some good action, but most by favour) rise to higher degree; for that according to their titles their service is rewarded. The Portugal's which sail for India, being thus registered & written down, the said Register at their arrival there, is delivered to be kept by one of the kings Officers thereunto appointed, which every three years is likewise changed, as other offices are, and is called the chief Clerk of the Matricola General, and hath three or four under Clerks at his commandment. Now in India when summer time cometh, and that it is needful or necessary to send out an army for some expedition to be done, or for to keep the coast, to convoy and safeconduct the traveling Merchants that daily sail to and from India, thereby to defend them and to let the Malabares their enemies from issuing forth to hurt them (as notwithstanding they yearly do:) then against September (which is the beginning of their Summer) the drum is stricken up, and it is proclaimed, that whosoever will serve the king in his fleet by sea, let him come to the Matricola General to receive his money, and then by the Viceroy there is ordained a chief Captain, and other under Captains for every Fuste and Galley: and in every galley there is about a hundredth men, and in every Fuste thirty men, little more or less. These are all paid by the Matricola, according to their titles every man as they are registered, when they come out of Portugal: and this pay is made every quarter, each quarter containing three months, that is, the common soldier seven Pardawen, called Xeraffins' (every Pardawe three testons Portugal money) and a man of honour nine Pardawen. The Moso da Camara or servant of the chamber eleven Pardawen, & so by degrees: which done the Captains bid their soldiers to a banquet, and of their own purses give them something beside their pay, for that every Captain seeketh to have the best soldiers, and buy much victuals and other things at their own charges, thereby to have their soldiers good wills, and to use them well. They sit altogether at one table in the Fustes or Galleys, where the Captain useth the soldiers with great favour and courtesy, for otherwise they would not much esteem him, nor yet obey him. The fleet being out, it saileth backward and forwards along the coast, and sometimes into some havens till the Month of April, and about the last of that Month they enter again into the river of Goa, where they winter, and then the soldiers are free, and every man goeth his way, without any further pay of the king. Then the Viceroy maketh a certificate for the General of the fleet, wherein he testifieth that such a Captain by his commandment hath been so many Months in the king's service at sea, & having done any matter of importance, it is therein set down at large, and how that he out of his own purse hath spent and laid out much money for the service of his Majesty, and according to this certificate the Captain General maketh certificates for every one of his under Captains and soldiers, in the same sort. There are likewise some Gentlemen that in winter time keep open household for all soldiers that will come thither to meat, whereof also they have certificates, and for all things that they do, which certificates they keep till they be some ten, twelve, or twenty, and with the viceroys licence go therewith to Portugal, ask some recompense for their services, according to their certificates: withal they must bring a certificate from the Matricola General of that their residence in India, and that there hath not any devise or subtlety been used about setting down their titles. The like must they have from all other officers, receivers and accountants both for munition and armour wherewith they served in war, for victuals also and such like, whereof many times the captains and soldiers do make but bad accounts, and many of them are aforehand with the king, which is presently registered under the title of him that hath committed the fault: from these Officers also they must have certificates, that there is no such thing committed by them: with these certificates they sail to Portugal, where there is an office of remembrances, to ask their rewards by, as their qualities and services are or shallbe rewarded: but if they have any friend in the court to speak for them, & by greasing their hands to procure dispatch: then do they obtain those offices for three years as Captains, Factors, clerk, judges, etc. and all other offices and places in India, but they must serve the place themselves in person. Some of them by favour get licences to pass them away, to sell them, or to give them with their daughters in marriage, and then the patent for such offices are registered in the King's Chancery, and sent into India where they must be confirmed by the Viceroy. These offices are always given in reversion after him that hath it promised before them, and then the Register is searched, to see how many are before him that asketh the said places, & when their time is out, or that they chance to die before they come to it, or be absent (as many times it happeneth) than he which is next in reversion hath the place, and is ready to receive it. And this in brief is the manner of their government and policy for martial affairs: their other government for justice and equity is as they use it in Portugal. By the table hereafter following you may see the description of the straight street in Goa, with the daily meeting therein, which they call Leylon, lively portrayed. The 30. Chapter. Of the Portugal's and Mesticos, their houses, courtesies, marriages, and other customs and manners in India. Goensi se quanta foro viden area pandat Plana frequens tectis splendida dives opum? Vt mercem hic properet gemmis auroque nitentem Ille abducta procul vendere mancipia? Congesta huc videas Ga● 〈…〉 Insulae et Eoo max● 〈…〉 Fori Goensis tabernarum mercium et mercatorum illud frequentantium aperta explicatio per ●Linschoten. 〈…〉 When they have any weddings and are married, whosoever they be if they have any wealth, all the friends and neighbours come together, every man on horseback, and he that hath not a horse will borrow one, and are every man very costly appareled, at the least some 50. or 100 horses little more or less, as the person is of quality, and so they ride altogether in good order unto the Church with their servants, and every man his hat for the Sun, the parents and friends in the hinder part, and in the last row the bridegroom between two of them, whom they call gossips: after them followeth the bride between two Commeres, each in their Pallamkin, which is most costly made, and after them follow the slaves both men and women going in troops, as if they ran to hunt, and so coming to the Church, and being married according to the order used in the Church of Rome: they are in the same order brought home again, and passing through the streets, the neighbours leaning upon Indian Carpets look out of the windows, and throw Risen water upon the Bride & Bridegroom, and other sweet smelling waters, with Roses and Sugar Comfits, or corn. In the mean time their slaves play upon Shawms and Trumpets most pleasant and melodious to hear, and coming to the house where the Bride and the Bridegroom dwell, with great reverence and courtesy bowing down their bodies, they take their leaves of all the company, which are all on horseback about the door. And so the Bride, the Bridegroom and the Commeres go up & sit with great gravity in a window, and then begin the horsemen that led them to Church, in honour of the married couple, one after the other to run a course, the gossips beginning first, and the rest following twice or thrice one after the other, with continual playing on Shawms, which are very common in India, for that he which is of any wealth hath them of his own within his house. This being ended, they all pass before the window where the Bride and Bridegroom sit, with a great reverence, and so pass on all saving the Gossoppes, for they go up to the Bride and Bridegroom, and bid God give them joy, then is there some Comfits and Marchpane brought forth, to drink a cup of water withal, and after some courteous salutations and congratulations to the 〈…〉 couple, they take their leaves & 〈…〉 so there remaineth with the Bride & ●idegroom but three or four of their nearest friends and kinsmen, for whom there is a dinner prepared, with little meat, yet very costly, which they pass over very lightly, and not many words, which done they presently bring the Bride to bed, without any other ceremonies or charges, wherewith the marriage is done and ended. Oftentimes it chanceth that they go to bed at the lest two hours before Sun setting, not having the patience to stay so long as we do in these countries. When a child is to be christened, it is likewise in the same sort led to Church with horses, & last of all cometh the father alone, after whom followeth two men on foot, the one with a great silver or guilt vessel full of bread baked like cracklinges, which in Portugal are called Rosquilhos, and in the middle a great Ware candle, well made and gilded, thrust through with some pieces of money of gold and silver, for an offering to the Priest that baptiseth the child, and all over strewed and covered with Roses: the other carrieth a great silver or gilt saltseller in one of his hands, and a lamp of the same stuff in his other hand, each with rich and costly Towels on their shoulders: after that followeth two Pallamkins, on the one side the Commere, on the other side the Midwife with the child, covered with a costly mantle, made for the purpose, and so the ceremonies of baptism being ended in the Church, it is again in the like sort brought home, and being there, they have the like manner of music and shawms, running and leaping with their horses before the window where the Commere sitteth, with the same ceremonies as at the wedding. This is the manner and custom of those that are married and keep house. But concerning the soldier that is unmarried, thus it is. They go in the summer time into the Armado lying on the water, and being within the towns and on the land, they are very stately appareled, and go very gravely along the streets with their slaves or men hired for the purpose, that bear a hat over them for the sun and rain: for there are many Indian's that are daily hired for the purpose, and have 12. Basarucos the day, which is as much as two s●iuers or a stoter, & they serve such as have no slaves, and that will not keep any to that end. The soldiers dwell at least ten or twelve in a house, where they have among them a slave or hi●ed Indian or two which serveth them, and washeth their shirts, and have four or five stools with a table, and every man a Bed. Their meat is Rice sodden in water, with some salt fish, or some other thing of small value (without bread) and clear fountain water for their drink, wherewith they are well pleased. They have amongst them all one or two good suits of apparel, all of silk as the manner is there, and when one goeth abroad, the other stay at home, for in the house they have no need of clothes, (but sit whosoever they be) in their shirts & a pair of linen breeches, and so as it were naked by reason of the great heat, for if some of them have occasion to go out twenty times in one day, they must so often lend him their apparel, and he must likewise put off his clothes, as often as he cometh home again. Some soldiers have a Gentleman or Captain to their friends which dareth them money to apparel themselves withal, to the end when summer time cometh, they may be ready to go with them in Fleet to sea, as also to have their friendship, by night and at other times to bear them company, or to help them to be revenged of any injury by them received, as I said before: for that he which in India hath most soldiers to his friends, is most regarded and feared. So that to be short, in this manner they do maintain themselves in common, whereby they are able to come in presence of the best of the country. Many and most of them have their chief maintenance from the Portugese's and Mesticos wives, as also the Indian Christians wives, which do always bestow liberal rewards and gifts upon them to satisfy and fulfil their unchaste and filthy desires, which they know very well how to accomplish, and secretly bring to pass. There are some likewise that get their livings by their friends, traveling for them from place to place with some wares and merchandises, and they are called Chattims. These do give over and leave the office of a soldier in the Fleet, and the kings service: for as it is said, there is no man compelled thereunto, although their names be registered in the office, yet do they still keep the name of soldier, as long as they travail abroad and are not married. The soldiers in these days give themselves more to be Chattims, and to deal in Merchandise, then to serve the King in his Armado, because the Captains and Gentlemen begin to be ●lacke in doing good unto them, as in times past they used to do. Also they give themselves to rest and pleasure: wherefore if they can devise any means for it, they had rather travail & deal in trade of Merchandise, and to marry and be quiet, in respect that the common soldiers in these days are but slackly paid: for that when they have at the least ten or twenty certificates to show for their former services, then have they not the means to furnish themselves with provision to make a voyage into Portugal, or to take any presents with them there to bestow them: for without such means, they are neither heard nor yet regarded, and if it fall out that they do procure the reversion of any offices, it is so long before the time cometh that they do enjoy them, being many in reversion, that oftentimes they die before they can obtain them. Again the long travail and great voyage maketh many to stay in India, and to employ their time to other trades, as they can best provide themselves. By these means the wars in India are not so hot, nor so thoroughly looked into, neither any other countries sought into or found out, as at first they used to do. Now they do only strive to get praise and commendation, and to leave a good report behind them: and now likewise they are all given to scraping & catching, as well the Viceroy, Governors, and others, as also the Church men and spirituality, little passing or esteeming the common profit or the service of the King, but only their particular profits, making their account, that the time of their abode is but three years: wherefore they say they will not do otherwise then those that were before them did, but say that others which come after them shall take care for all: for that the King (say they) gave them their offices, thereby to pay them for their services in times past, and not for the profit of the common wealth: therefore there is no more countries in India won or new found out, but rather here and there some places lost, for they have enough to do, to hold that they have already, and to defend it from invasion, as also that they do scour the Sea coasts, and yet many Merchants have great losses every year, by means of the sea rovers, and together with the evil government of the Portugese's, and it is to be feared, it will be worse every day than other▪ as it is evidently seen. This shall suffice for the manners and customs of the Indian Portugese's, and their warlike governments, which is commonly by sea, for by land they cannot travail, by reason of the different kingdoms, and nations consisting of divers several sorts of people, which are always enemies, and never live in peace, and some of them being friends, other enemies to the Portugese's: for the Portugese's have only some Towns, places and fortresses, with their havens on the sea coast, without holding any thing within the land, as in the description of the coast we have already declared. By the pictures hereafter following may be seen the forms and portraitures of the Portugese's that are married, and of the soldiers in India, as they walk in the streets: as also how they ride, not only gentlemen, but every man that hath the ability to keep a horse, as well Merchants as handicrafts men▪ of what sort soever they be, and how they cause themselves to be carried in P●llamkins, in the streets and throughout the towns, when they will not ride nor go on foot. You may likewise see their fustes wherewith they go to war upon the water which the Malabares their enemies do likewise use, (for they have no other sorts of scutes nor ships,) and do much mischief therewith: they are very light, as well to save as to row, they use them also for Merchandise, because of the fitness of the same, to pass from place to place. The 31. Chapter Of the manner and customs of Portugal and Mesticos women in India. THe Portugese's, Mesticos, and Indian Christian women in India, are little seen abroad, but for the most part sit still within the house, and go but seldom forth, unless it be to Church▪ or to visit their friends, which is likewise but very little, and when they go abroad, they are well provided not to be seen, for they are carried in a Pallamkin covered with a mat or other cloth, so that they cannot be seen. When they go to church, or to visit any friend, they put on very costly apparel, with bracelets of gold, & rings upon their arms, all beset with costly jewels & pearls, and at their ears hang laces full of jewels. Their clothes are of Damask, Velvet, and cloth of gold, for silk is the worst thing they do wear. Within the house they go bare headed, with a waistcoat called Baju, that from their shoulders covereth their navels, and is so fine that you may see all their body through it, and downwards they have nothing but a painted cloth wrapped three or four times about their bodies. These clothes are very fair, some of them being very costly wrought with loom work, and divers figures and flowers of all colours, all the rest of the body is naked without any hose, but only bore footed in a pair of moils or pantos●es, and the men in like sort. This is their manner in the house both old, and young, rich, & poor, none excepted, for they go forth but very little, and then they are both covered and carried, and what they need abroad, that the slaves both men and women do fetch in. The women eat no bread or very little, nor yet the slaves, not that they refuse it for the dearness or want of bread, (for they have enough and great abundance) but they are so used to eat rice, that they desire no other, which they seethe with water and eat it with some salt fish, or a kind of salt fruit called Mangas, or with some other composition both of fish and flesh, with pottage which they power upon it, and so eat it with their hands: for there they eat nothing with spoons, and if they should see any man do so, they would laugh at him. When they drink they have certain pots made of black earth very fine and thin, much like those that we use in Holland for flower pots, having in the neck thereof a partition full of holes with a spout, (and these cruses are called Gorgoletta,) to this end, that when they drink, they may hold the pot on high, and touch it not with their mouths, but the water running from the spout falleth into their mouths, never spilling drop, which they do for cleanliness, because no man should put it to his mouth, & when any man cometh newly out of Portugal, and then beginneth to drink after their manner, because he is not used to that kind of drinking, he spilleth it in his bosom, wherein they take great pleasure and laugh at him calling him Reynol, which is a name given in jest to such as newly come from Portugal, & know not how to behave themselves in such grave manner, and with such ceremonies as the Portugese's use therein India: so that at the first they are much whooped and cried at in the streets, until by use and practise they have learned the Indian manner, which they quickly do. The men are very jealous of their wives, for they will never bring any man into their houses, how special a friend soever he be, that shall see their wives or their daughters, unless it be some gossip or any other married man with his wife in company. When they will go together to some place to sport and solace themselves, they are always well guarded by their slaves, both men and women both for their safety and service. If any man cometh to the door to ask for the master of the house, presently the wives and their daughters run to hide them, and so leave the man to answer him that standeth at the door: likewise they suffer no man to dwell within their houses, where the women and daughters be, how near kinsman soever he be unto them, being once 15. years of age, nor their own sons, but have certain chambers and places beneath, or besides their house where they lie, & may in no sort come among the women, and thither they send them their meat and other provisions, for it hath oftentimes been seen in those countries, that the uncles son hath lain by his aunt, and the brother by the brother's wife, and the brother with his sister: whereof I have known some that have been taken with the manner, and that both they and the woman have been slain by the husbands. The women are very luxurious and unchaste, for there are very few among them, although they be married, but they have beside their husbands one or two of those that are called soldiers, with whom they take their pleasures: which to effect, they use all the slights and practices they can devise, by sending out their slaves and bawds by night, and at extraordinary times, over walls, hedges, and ditches, how narrowly soever they are kept and looked unto. They have likewise an herb called Deutroa, which beareth a seed, whereof bruising out the sap, they put it into a cup or other vessel, and give it to their husbands, either in meat or drink, and presently therewith, the man is as though he were half out of his wits, and without feeling, or else drunk, doing nothing but laugh, and sometime it taketh him sleeping, whereby he lieth like a dead man, so that in his presence they may do what they will, and take their pleasure with their friends, and the husband never know of it. In which sort he continueth four and twenty hours long, but if they wash his feet with cold water he presently reviveth, and knoweth nothing thereof, but thinketh he had slept. Deutroa of some called Tacula, of others Datura, in Spanish Burla Dora, in Dutch Igell Kolben, in Malaba Vumata Caya, in Canara Datura, in Arabia Marana, in Persia and Turkey Datula. Of the description of this herb and fruit you may read in the Herbal, if any man receiveth or eateth but half a dram of this seed, he is for a time bereaved of his wits, & taken with an unmeasurable laughter. Virgins Lusitanae in India gestus et amictus. Cleedinge en dracht van een Portugeesche Dochter oft Maecht in Indien. Matronarum et conjugatarum foras prodeuntium vestitus et ornatus. Der Portugeesen gehoude Vrouwen, habit en cÿraet. Viduarum Lusit. amictus quem iterum nuptae deponunt resumpto nuptar habitu. Cleedinge en dracht der Portugeescher We duwen welcke weather houwende afleggen. weder aen nemende der gehouder dracht Vestitus et comptus Mulierum cujus cunque ordinis et aetatis intra aedes. Der Vrouwen cleedinge en hulsel binnen shuys van wat staet en ouder dom die zyn. Lectuli quibus Vxores et Filiae Lusitanorum contecte gestantur▪ Coetskens daer de Portugeesche Vrouwen en Dochters bedecked in gedraegen word. Ratio qua coelo pluvio et alias Lusitanae gestantur comutantibus ante retro et utriumque famulis M●aniere vandie Portugeesche urouwen en dochters te draegen alst regent en oock op ander tyden met haer slaven en dienaers voor achter en besyden Lusitana▪ templa noctu invisura, comitata marito, et servis. E'en Portugeesche urouwe verselschapt met harc man en slaven des snachts die kercken besoeckende. Cachunde in m● opinion is made of the mixtures called Galiae Moscat●, Annotat. D. Pall. with the sape of sweet wood: they are black cakes whereon certain characters are printed, at the first very bitter of taste, but in the end very pleasant and sweet, they strengthen the hart & the maw, and make a sweet breath. And they are not content therewith, but give their husbands a thousand herbs for the same purpose, to ea●e, they not knowing thereof, thereby to fulfil their pleasures, and to satisfy their desires, which can not by any means be satisfied. They are likewise much used to take their pleasures in Baths, by swimming therein, which they can very well do, for there are very few of them, but they would easily swim over a river of half a mile broad. This shall suffice for their women now I will proceed to other matters. And the better to understand the shapes and forms of their women, together with their apparel, you may behold it here, when they go to Church and else where, both wives, maids and widows, every one by themselves, as also how they go in their houses, with their dish of Bettele in their hands, being their daily chawing work: also how they are carried in Pallankins through the street, with their women slaves round about them: also with their husbands and slaves by night, going to any sport, or else to Church, which they use after the manner of pilgrims, for them they go on foot, whereby they think to deserve greater reward, which by day is not permitted them, for they are not so much trusted: these visitations or night pilgrimages they hold & esteem for a great recreation and freedom, for that they hope, watch and look for the same, as children do for wake-dayes and other playing times: likewise the women slaves do make some account thereof, because they do never go abroad, but only at such times, or to Church on festival days behind their Pallamkins, upon the which days they advertise their lovers, and leave their mistresses in the Churches, or slip into some shop or corner, which they have ready at their finger's ends, where their lovers meet them, and there in hast they have a sport, which done they leave each other: and if she chance to have a Portugal or a white man to her lover, she is so proud, that she thinketh no woman comparable unto her, and among themselves do brag thereof, and will steal both from master & mistress to give them, with the which many Soldiers do better maintain themselves, then with the kings pay: and if it chanceth that these slavish women be with child, they are their masters children, who are therewith very well content, for so they are their captives, but if the father be a Portugal, or some other free man, when the child is borne, he may within 8 days challenge it for his, paying the master a small piece of money for it, as much as by law is thereunto ordained, and so the child shall ever after be free, but not the mother: but if he stay above 8 or 10 days, and within that time no man cometh to challenge it, although it be a free man's child, and he after that shall come to ask it, than it is the mother's masters slave, and he may hold it at as high a price as pleaseth him, without constraint to sell it, and it falleth out very little, or else never that the mother destroyeth her child, or casteth it away, or sendeth it to the father, be she never so poor free or captive, for they delight more in their children, and take more pleasure in carrying them abroad, specially when it is a white man's child, then in all the riches of the world, and by no means will give it to the father, unless it should be secretly stolen from her, and so conveyed away. The nursing and bringing up of the Portugese's Mesticos children is, that from the time of their birth they are kept naked only with a little short shirt (like the women's Bain, which they wear about their bodies,) and nothing else, till they be of years to wear breeches, or other clothes. Some of them are nurssed by their slaves, and some by Indian women, which they hire, whose shape and form you may see, following the Palamkin wherein the wife is carried, even as they go bearing their children. The 32. Chapter. Of the Viceroy of Portugal, and of his government in India. Every 3. years there is a new Viceroy sent into India, and some time they stay longer, as it pleaseth the King, but very few of them, he continueth in Goa (which is the chief City of India) where he hath his house and continual residence, and from thence all other towns in India: have their direction and government. From Goa every year the Portugal army is prepared and sent out, as I said before, he hath his counsel, Nobles, Chancery, and justices, as they use in Portugal, and all laws and justice, are by him executed and fulfilled in the King's nam●, yet if there be any matter of importante, which concerneth the Civil laws, they may appeal to Portugal, but in criminal causes no man may appeal, but such as have the degree of a Gentleman, such the Viceroy may not judge, but being prisoners, send them into Portugal, unless it be by the King's commandment, he is very magnificent in his estate, and goeth little out, but sometimes on Sundays, or holy days, when he goeth to Church, and when he goeth out of his house, the Trumpets and Shawms, standing in the Gallery of his house do sound, he is accompanied by all the Gentlemen and towns men of Goa, that have or keep horses, with a Ga●de of Halberdiers on foot, both on each side and behind him, and being in the Church, he● hath his seat in the Quire, lined with Velvet, and nailed with gylt nails, and a cloth with two Velvet cushions, under his feet and knees, and before him a bench, with a Velvet Cushion to lean his arms upon, his Gentlemen sit by him, but without the Quire, and by him standeth his Chaplain, that prayeth for him. The Archbishop (when he is at the Church) sitteth on his left hand, in the same manner, upon Carpets, Cushions, and bench of Velvet, where they are served in all ceremonial order, as the Kings of Portugal in their Churches use to be, and when he cometh home again, the Trumpets and Shawms do sound, as when he went out. In the hall of his Palace stand the Guard, and in the great hall, where his Council sit, are painted all the Viceroys, that have governed in India, since the first discovery and conquest thereof, and as they new come, their pictures are likewise placed there. Also in the entry of the Palace are painted all the ships, that since the first discovery of India, ever came out of Portugal into those countries, every year by itself, and the names and surnames of their Captains, with a note over every ship which was cast away, or had any mischance, all lively set forth, for a perpetual memory, and every year as any ship cometh thither, they are set by the rest. The Viceroys in the last year of their government, do use to visit the Forts lying round about the country, fifty, sixty, or eighty miles long, on the North and South side of Goa, to see how they are governed, they look well unto them, but commonly an other supplieth their place, and if they do it themselves, it is more to fill their purses, and to get presents, then to further the commonwealth, these Viceroys have great revenues, they may spend, give, and keep the King's treasure, which is very much, and do with it what pleaseth them, for it is in their choice, having full and absolute power from the King, in such sort, that they gather and horde up a mighty quantity of treasure, for that besides their great allowance from the King, they have great presents & gifts, bestowed upon them. For it is the custom in those countries, when any Viceroy cometh newly over, that all the Kings bordering about Goa, and that have peace and friendship with the Portugese's, do then send their Ambassadors unto him, to confirm their leagues with great and rich presents, therewith likewise to bid the Viceroy welcome, which amounteth to a great mass of treasure: these presents in this sort given, the jesuits by their practices had obtained of the King, and for a time enjoyed them at their pleasure (looking very narrowly unto them, that they might not be deceived) until long time since, a Viceroy named Don lois de Tried Earl of Atougia came thither, and refused to let them have them, saying that the King being in Portugal knew not what was given him in India, and that those presents were given unto the Viceroy and not to the King, and said the King had no power to give them to the jesuits: so that he kept them for himself, which the jesuits took in evil part▪ and said, the Viceroy was an heretic. Yet from his time ever since, the Viceroys have used to keep them for themselves. When the Viceroys have continued out their time, which is assoon as an other Viceroy arriveth at Bards, or any other Haven in the country, they do presently dispatch their Lieutenants▪ with full power and authority in the name of their masters, to receive possession of the government of India, and prepare the Palace for him, so that there stayeth not a stool or bench within the house▪ nor one penny in the treasure, but they leave the house as bare and naked as possible may be, so that the new Viceroy must make provision for to furnish it, and gather a new treasure. In the same ship wherein the new Viceroy cometh thither, the old returneth home, and because their time of government is so short, and that the place is given them in recompense of their service, and thereafter not to serve any more, there is not one of them, that esteemeth the profit of the commonwealth, or the furtherance of the King's service, but rather their own particular commodities, as you may very well think, so that the common speech in India is, that they never look for any profit or furtherance of the common wealth by any Viceroy, as long as the government of three years, is not altered. For they say, and it is found to be most true, that the first year of the viceroys time, he hath enough to do to repair and furnish his house, and to know the manners and customs of the countries, without any further troubling of himself. The second year to gather treasure, and to look unto his particular profits, for the which cause he came into India. The third and last year to prepare himself and set all things in order, that he be not overtaken or surprised by the new Viceroy when he cometh, but that he may return into Portugal with the goods which he had scraped together. The same is to be understood of all the Captains in the Forts, and of all other officers in India. Wherefore it is to be considered, how they use themselves in their places and the King's service, whereof the inhabitants and married Portugese's do continually speak, but they are far from the Kings hearing, who knoweth not, but that his Officers do him good service, whereby there is small remedy or amendment to be hoped for. The 33. Chapter. Of the heathens, Indians and other strangers dwelling in Goa. IN the town and Island of Goa, are resident many Heathens, moors (which are Mahometans) jews, and all strange nations bordering thereabout, every one of them using several customs, and superstitions in Religion. The Moors hold Mahomet's law, and the jews Moses law. There are also many Persians, Arabians, and Abexij●s, some of them Christians, and some of them moors. There is in Goa many Armenians that are Christians, and others that go and come to traffic there, as Persians, Arabians, Banianes, of Cambaia, Gusarates, and Decani●ns etc. The Moors eat all things except Swine's flesh, and dying are buried like the jews, but the Heathens, as Decani●●s, Gusarates, and Canaras, and other Indians being dead, are burnt to ashes, and some women being alive are burned with them, that is such as are Gentlemen or Noblemen, and the wives of the Bramenes, which are their Idolatrous Priests. Also for the Merchants some of them eat all things, except Cows or Buffles flesh, which they esteem to be holy Others eat not any thing whatsoever, that hath either life or blood in it, as those of Gusarata, and the Banianes of Cambaia, which observe Pythagoras' law: most of them pray unto the Sun and Moon, yet they do all acknowledge a God that made, created and ruleth all things, and that after this life there is an other, wherein men shall be rewarded according to their works. But they have Idols and Images, which they call Pagodes, cut and form most ugly, and like monstrous Devils, to whom daily they offer, and say, that those holy men have been living among them, whereof they tell so many miracles, as it is wonderful, and say that they are intercessors between them and God. The Devil often times answereth them out of those Images, whom they likewise know, and do him great honour by offering unto him, to keep friendship with him, and that he should not hurt them. They have a custom, when any maid is to be married, and that they will honour their Pagode, for the more credit to the Bridegroom, they bring the Bride with great triumph and Music before their Pagode, which is made with a Pin of ivory bone, to whom the nearest friends and kinswomen of the Bride, together with the Bride do go, and by force make the Image to take the Bride's maidenhead, so that the blood remaineth still upon the Image, for a remembrance thereof, and then after other devilish superstitions and ceremonies, having made their offerings, they bring the Bride home, where she is delivered to the Bridegroom, he being very joyful and proud, that their Pagode hath honoured him so much and eased him of so much labour. They have for the most part a custom to pray unto the first thing they meet withal in the morning, and all that day after they pray unto it, be it Hog, or any other thing▪ And if in the morning when they go out, they chance at the first sight to see a Crow, (whereof there are great numbers in India) they will not go forth of their doors all that day, no not for all the goods in the world, for they esteem it an evil sign, and an unlucky day. They pray likewise to the new Moon, and when she first appeareth, they fall upon their knees, and salute her with great devotion, there are among them certain people called jogos, which are such as we call Hermits, and those do they esteem for holy men, these men live a very strict life with great abstinence, and make the common people believe many strange things. They have likewise many Soothsayers and Witches, which use juggling, and travel throughout the country, having about them many live Snakes, which they know how to bewitch, and being shut up in little baskets, they pull them out and make them dance, turn, and wind at the sound of a certain Instrument, whereon they play, and speak unto them. They wind them about their necks, arms, and legs, kissing them, with a thousand other devices, only to get money. They are all for the most part very skilful in preparing of poisons, wherewith they do many strange things, and easily poison each other, their dwellings and houses are very little and low, covered with straw, without windows, and very low and narrow doors, so that a man must almost creep upon his knees to go in, their household stuff is Mats of straw, both to sit and lie upon, their Tables, Table-clothes, and Napkins, are made of the great Indian Fig leaves, they serve them not only for Tables, sheeets, and other linen, but also for Dishes, wherein they put their meat, which you shall likewise see in the Grocers, and Pothecaries shops, to put and wrap in all things whatsoever they have within their shops, (as we do in paper.) They likewise join them together in such sort, that they can put both butter, oil, & such liquid stuffs therein▪ and also whatsoever cometh to hand. To dress their meat they have certain earthen pots wherein they seeth Rice, and make holes in the ground, wherein they stamp it, or beat it with a wooden pestle made for the purpose, and they are so miserable, that they buy the Rice in the Husks, as it groweth on the ground, and some of them have Rice sown behind their house to serve their necessary use. They use to drink out of a copper Can with a spout, whereby they let the water fall down into their mouths, and never touch the pot with their lips. Their houses are commonly strawed with Cow dung, which (they say) killeth Fleas. They are very clean on their bodies, for every day they wash themselves all their body over, as often as they ease themselves or make water, both men and women, like the Moors or Mahometans. They wash themselves with the left hand, because they eat with the right hand, and use no spoons. They do keep and observe their ceremonies and superstitions, with great devotion, for they never go forth without praying, when they travail by the way. They have on every hill, cliff, hole, or den their Pagodes and Idols in most devilish and deformed shapes, cut and hewed out of the stones and rocks, with their furnises hard by them, and a cistern not far from them, which is always full of water, and every one that passeth by, washeth their feet therein, and so fall down before their Idol, some setting before him for an offering fruits, Rice, Eggs, Hens, etc. as their devotions serve, & then cometh the Bramenes their Priest and taketh it away and eateth it, making the common people believe that the Pagode hath eaten it. When they will make a voyage to Sea, they use at the least fourteen days before they enter into their ships, to make so great a noise with sounding of Trumpets, and to make fires, that it may be heard and seen both by night and day, the ship being hanged about with flags, wherewith (they say) they feast their Pagode, that they may have a good Voyage. The like do they at their return for a thanksgiving fourteen days long, and thus they use to do in all their feasts, affairs, marriages, childbirths, and at other times of the year, as sowing, and mowing, etc. The heathenish Indians that dwell in Goa are very rich Merchants, and traffic much, there is one street within the town, that is full of shops kept by those Heathenish Indians, that not only sell all kinds of Silks, Satins, Damasks, and curious works of Porselyne from China and other places, but all manner of wares of velvet, Silk, Satin and such like, brought out of Portugal, which by means of their Brokers they buy by the great, and sell them again by the piece or else, wherein they are very cunning, and naturally subtle. There are in the same steéet on the other side, that have all kinds of linen, and shirts, with other clothes ready made for all sorts of persons, as well slaves as Portugese's, and of all other linen work that may be desired. There are Heathens that sell all kinds of women's clothes, and such like wares, with a thousand sorts of clothes and cottons, which are like Canvas for sails and sacks. There is also another street where the Benianes of Cambaia dwell, that have all kinds of wares out of Cambaia, and all sorts of precious stones, and are very subtle and cunning to boar and make holes in all kinds of stones, pearls, and corrals, on the other side of the same street dwell other heathens, which sell all sorts of bedstéedes, stools, and such like stuff, very cunningly covered over with Lack, most pleasant to behold, and they can turn the Lack into any colour that you will desire. There is also a street full of gold and Silver Smiths that are Heathens, which make all kind of works, also divers other handicrafts men, as Coppersmithes, Carpenters, and such like occupations, which are all heathens, and every one a street by themselves. There are likewise other Merchants that deal all by great, with Corn, Rice, and other Indian wares and Merchandises, as wood and such like. Some of them farm the kings rents and revenues, so that they are skilful every way to make their profits. There are also many Heathen Brokers, very cunning and subtle in buying and selling, and with their tongues to plead on both sides. The Heathens have likewise their shops with all kind of spices, which they sell by retail, both by weight and measure, as Grocers and Apothecaries do with us, and this is only used among them. They have likewise of all sorts of wares whatsoever, but yet with less curiosity then with us, for it is mingled with dust and garbage. These are commonly the Brainenes, which serve likewise for Priests and Idolatrous Ministers, & have their shops throughout the City. In every place and corner, and under pentises, whereby every man may have to serve him at his need. There are likewise many barbers, which in every end of the streets do call to those that have cause to use them. They keep no shops, but for a small piece of money come In the Month of September when winter endeth, the banks of sand do fleet and vade away out of the River, so that not only small ships may come in and go out, but also the great Portugal ships of 1600. tons may freely enter without a Pilot, for it is deep enough and without danger. In winter it is a heavy and melancholic being there, for there is no other exercise to be used, but only to sit in their shirts, with a pair of lin●en breeches, and go & pass the time away with their neighbours, in playing and such exercises, for that throughout the whole town there is no other doing. The women and Mesticos take great pleasure in the winter time when it raineth, with their husbands and slaves to go into the fields, or some garden, whether they carry good store of victuals, & there in their gardens have many Cisterns or ponds of water, wherein they take their delights to swim and to bathe themselves. In this time most of their Indian fruit is in season. The summer beginneth in September, and continueth till the last of April, and is always clear sky & fair weather, without once or very little raining: Then all the ships are rigged and made ready to sail for all places, as also the kings army to keep the coast, and to convoy Merchants, and then the East winds begin to blow from off the land into the seas, whereby they are called Terreinhos, that is to say, the land winds. They blow very pleasantly & coolly, although at the first by changing of the weather they are very dangerous, & cause many great diseases, which do commonly fall in India, by the changing of the time. These winds blow always in summer, beginning at midnight, and continue till noon, but they never blow above ten miles into the sea, from off the coast, and presently after one of the clock until midnight the west wind bloweth, which cometh out of the sea into the land, and is called V●rason. These winds are so sure and certain at their times, as though men held them in their hands, whereby they make the land very temperate, otherwise the heat would be unmeasurable. It is likewise a strange thing that when it is winter upon the coast of India, that is from Di● to the Cape de Comorin, on the other side of the Cape de Comorin on the coast called Choramandel, it is clean contrary, so that there it is summer, and yet they lie all under one height or degrees, and there is but 70. miles by land between both the coasts, and in some places but 2●. miles, and which is more, as men travel over land from Cochin to S. Thomas (which lieth on the same coast of Choramandel) and coming by the hill of Ballagatte where men must pass over to go from the one coast unto the other: on the one side of the hill to the top thereof it is pleasant clear sun shining weather, and going down on the other side there is rain, wind, thunder and lightning, as if the world should end and be consumed: which is to be understood, that it changeth from the one side to the other, as the time falleth out, so that on the one side of the hills it is Winter, and on the other side Summer: and it is not only so in that place and country, but also at Ormus, on the coast of Arabia Felix by the Cape of Rosalgatte, where the ships lie: it is very still, clear, and pleasant water, and fair summer time, and turning about the Cape on the other side, it is rain and wind with great storms and tempests, which with the times of the year do likewise change on the other side, and so it is in many places of the Oriental countries. The sicknesses and diseases in Goa, and throughout India, which are common, come most with the changing of the times and the weather, as it is said before: there reigneth a sickness called Mordexim, which stealeth upon men, and handleth them in such sort, that it weakeneth a man, and maketh him cast out all that he hath in his body, and many times his life withal. This sickness is very common, & killeth many a man, whereof they hardly or never escape. The bloody Flixe is there likewise very common and dangerous, as the plague with us. They have many continual fevers, which are burning agues, and consume men's bodies with extreme heat, whereby within four or five days they are either whole or dead. This sickness is common and very dangerous, & hath no remedy for the Portugal's but letting of blood: but the Indians and heathens do cure themselves with herbs, Sanders, and other such like ointments, wherewith they ease themselves. This sickness consumeth many Portugal's every year, some because they have little to eat, & less to drink of any meat or drink that is nourishing, & use much company of women, because the land is natural to provoke them thereunto, as also the most part of the soldiers by such means have their living and their maintenance, which often times costeth them both life and limb, for although men were of iron or steel, the unchaste life of a woman, with her unsatiable lusts were able to grind him to powder, and swéep him away like dust, which costeth many a man's life, as the kings Hospital can well bear witness, wherein they lodge, whensoever they are sick, where every year at the least there entered 500 live men, and never come forth till they are dead, and they are only Portugeses for no other sick person may lodge therein, I mean such as are called white men, for the other Indians have an Hospital by themselves. In this Hospital they are very well looked unto by jesuits, and Gentlemen: whereof every month one of the best is chosen and appointed, who personally is there by them▪ and giveth the sick persons whatsoever they will desire, and sometimes spend more by four or five hundred ducats of their own purses, than the King's allowance reacheth unto, which they do more of pride and vain glory, then for compassion, only to have the praise and commendation of liberality. It is no shame there to lie in the Hospital, for many men go thither willingly, although they have wherewith to keep themselves in their houses, and have both wife and children. These Hospitals in India are very necessary for the Portugeses, otherwise they should consume away like miserable men, but by the means they are relieved, whatsoever they have, either sickness, wounds, secret diseases, pocks, piles, or any such like, there they are healed, and sometimes visited by the Viceroy himself, when he thinketh upon them, and that his commodities come in. He that will not lie there, and hath any wounds▪ or privy diseases, may come thither twice every day and be dressed, & go his way again without any question or denial. When they die therein, they are by two slaves carried into the Church yard, without either singing or ringing, only one man followeth after them, & throweth some holy water upon the grave: but if the sick man chanceth to leave any goods behind him, and speaketh unto the Priests to bring him to his grave, and to say Masses for his soul, than they run thither by heaps, and bury him like a man of countenance either in the Church or chancel, according to his will, and then hath he singing and ringing enough. But returning to our matter of sickness, pocks and piles, with other secret diseases, they are in those countries very common & not hidden or concealed, for they think it no shame, more than to have any other disease. They heal them with the root China: there are some that have had them at the least three or four times, and are not any thing at all shunned or disliked for the same, but dare both boast and brag thereof. It is not any thing perilous for the body, insomuch that they had rather have them, and fear them less than any of the foresaid diseases. The plague hath never been in India, neither is it known unto the Indians, but poisoning, witchcraft, & such like, whereby some lose their healths, and some their lives, is their daily exercise, and very common with them. The stone gravel, and rapture reigneth much among them, specially among married men, by reason of the great quantity of water that they drink being given to all pleasure and riotousness, enjoying all what their hearts desire, sitting always with their bellies open in their shirts in a gallery, recreating themselves with the wind which cooleth them, sometimes having a slave to scratch and pair their nails and feet, another the head, the third holds a Fan to drive away the flées. Their is the common use for two hours after noon, where likewise they take an afternoons sleep, and ever as they have thirst, they bring him a dish of conserves, or other comfits, that the water should not work too much in his body, but taste the better. With such and the like exercises they do pass the day till night comes on, so that commonly they have all swollen bellies like Bacchus, whereby the soldiers and other Indians call them Barrigois, that is, bellies, or great bellies. The day both Summer and Winter is there all of a length, not much difference, only in the change they have about an hours difference. The sun riseth at six, and setteth at six. When it is noon, commonly they have the Sun in the middle of the element just over their heads, and it giveth no shadow, although it stretcheth somewhat out as the Sun taketh his course. In Goa you may see both the Poles of the world, the North and South stars stand not far above the Horizon. And this shall suffice for the times and seasons of the year, sicknesses and other diseases in India, as brevity requireth. The 35. Chapter. Of the money, weight, and measure of India, and Goa. THe principal and commonest money is called Pardaus Xeraphiins, and is silver, but very brass, and is coined in Goa. They have Saint Sebastian on the one side, and three or four arrows in a bundle on the other side, which is as much as three Testons, or three hundred Reijs Portugal money, and riseth and falleth little less or more, according to the exchange. There is also a kind of reckoning of money which is called Tangas, not that there is any such coined, but are so named only in telling, five Tangas is one Pardaw, or Xeraphin bad money, for you must understand that in telling they have two kinds of money good and bad, for four Tangas good money are as much as five Tangas bad money. Wherefore when they buy and sell, they bargain for good or bad money. There is likewise a reckoning of Vintiins, which is not likewise in coin, but only named in telling: of these four good, and five bad do make a Tangas. The lowest and smallest money is called Bazaruco, these are fifteen bad, and eighteen good to a Vintiin, and three Bazarucos are as much as two Rei●s Portugal money: It is melted money of bad Tin, so that 375. Bazarucos are one Pardaw or Xeraphiin. There is also a kind of money out of Persia, called Lariins, which are long, very good and fine silver, without any allay. These are worth 105. and 108. Bazarucos, as the exchange goeth, little more or less. They have a kind of money called Pagodes, which is of Gold, of two or three sorts, and are above eight Tangas in value. They are Indian and Heathenish money, with the picture of a Devil upon them and therefore are called Pagodes. There is another kind of gold money, which is called Venetianders: some of Venice, and some of Turkish coin, and are commonly 2. Pardawes Xeraphins. There is yet another kind of gold called S. Thomas, because Saint Thomas is figured thereon, & is worth about 7. & eight Tangas: There are likewise Rialles of 8. which are brought from Portugal, and are called Pa●dawes de Reales: Other money of Portugal is not currant there. They are worth at their first coming out of Portugal 436. Reyes of Portugal, and after are raised by exchange, as they are sought for when men travel for China, but they are worth neither more nor less. They use in Goa in their buying and selling a certain manner of reckoning or telling. There are Pardawes Xeraphins, and these are silver. They name likewise Pardawes of Gold, and those are not in kind or in coin, but only so named in telling and reckoning: for when they buy and sell Pearls, stones, gold, silver and horses, they name but so many Pardawes, and then you must understand that one Pardaw is six Tangas: but in other ware, when you make not your bargain before hand, but plainly name Pardawes, they are Pardawes Xeraphins of 5. Tangas the piece. They use also to say a Pardaw of Lariin●, and are five Lariins, for every Pardaw▪ This is the money and reckoning of Goa, wherewith they buy, sell, receive, and pay. Many of them know well how to gain by these kinds of moneys, by exchanging, buying and selling of them. There is great falsehood in the Pardawes Xeraphins, which is the principallest and currantest money: wherefore there are in every street and corner of the City, jews that are Christians, called Xaraffes, who for very small profit look upon the moneys, & are so perfect therein, that as they let the money pass through their hands in telling, they know the false pieces without once looking upon them, or taking them up: yea although it lay among a thousand pieces: and if another should take it in their hands and tell it a thousand times, yet could they never perceive it, but in ringing it, a man may know it very well. These are coined in the firm land by the Heathenish Indians, to deceive the Portugal's withal, wherefore no man dares receive money, were it but half a Pardaw, except he show it to those Xaraffes. They tell money very readily and swiftly, and telling it do look upon it to see if it be good, and do give their promise that if it be found too short, or any false money therein after they have told it, they will make it good how much soever it be. They are also very ready to exchange money, or to do whatsoever men need touching the same. They sit at the corners of the streets, and before men's houses, and a table with heaps of money standing before them, every heap being a Tanga, which is ●5. Bazarucos, & when any man will change a Pardaw, they give him two or three, sometimes 8. or 10. Bazarucos more than the 375. Bazarucos, for they know how to make it up again, and so do they with all other money according to the rate. The weight of Goa is also in divers kinds, as in Portugal, with Quintales, Arrobas, and pounds. They have likewise another weight called Mao, which is a Hand, and is twelve pounds, with the which they weigh Butter, Hony, Sugar, and all kind of wares to be sold by weight. They have likewise a weight wherewith they weigh Pepper & other spices, called a Bhar, and is as much as three Quintales & a half Portugal weight. They have a measure called Med●da, that is to say, even weight. It is about a span high, and half a finger broad, whereof 24. measures are a Hand, and 20. Hands are one Cand●il, and one Candle is little more or less than 14. bushels, wherewith they measure Rice, Corn, & all grain, or other commodities to be sold by measure, and the ships are freighted after the same rate, for they say a ship or scent of so many Candles or so many P●l●r●. There is Rice, which they sell by the ●rden: it is brought in round bundles, wrapped in straw, and bound about with cords: Every Fardo is commonly three ●nd and a half. This Rice is better than that which cometh not in Fardens, and is called G●rasall, Ryce, which is the best, and beareth the highest price: and there is another sort, which is of a less price & slighter called Chambasal. There are also divers other sorts of Rice, of a less price & slighter than the other Rice, and is called Bat, and is almost like Barley▪ it hath but little husk. This is commonly the daily food of the countrymen in the villages called Canariins, & of the common and poorer sort which stamp and beat it themselves. It serveth also for Hens and Doves to eat in stead of Barley. There are divers particular sorts of moneys in many places of India, and inwards in the land among the heathens, which are currant only among them, every coin in their several places: For by Bengala they have in place of B●●aru●os a small kind of money called Amandeles, wherewith they get their livings, and buy and sell therewith, and divers other such like coins in several places of the Oriental countries, but the money weights and measures aforesaid, are those which they do generally and ordinarily use throughout all 〈◊〉, and principally in Goa, being the head town and stapell of all the Oriental countries. The 36 Chapter. Of the Indians called Bramenes, which are the ministers of the Pagodes, & Indian Idols, and of their manner of life. THe Bramenes are the honestest and most esteemed nation among all the Indian heathens: for they do always serve in the chiefest places about the King, as receivers, Stewards, Ambassadors, and such like offices. They are likewise the priests and ministers of the Pagodes, or devilish Idols. They are of great authority among the Indian people, for that the King doth nothing without their counsel and consent, and that they may be known from other men, they wear upon their naked body, from the shoulder cross under the arm over their body down to the girdle, or the cloth that is wrapped about their middle, ●. or 4. strings like sealing thread, whereby they are known: which they never put off although it should cost them their lives, for their profession & religion will not permit it. They go naked, saving only that they have a cloth bound about their middles to hide their privy members. They wear sometimes when they go abroad a thin cotton linen gown called Caba●a, lightly cast over their shoulders, and hanging down to the ground like some other Indians, as Benianes, Gusarates, and Decaniins. Upon their heads they wear a white cloth, wound twice or thrice about, therewith to hide their hairs, which they never cut off, but wear it long & turned up as the women do. They have most commonly round rings of gold hanging at their ears, as most of the Indians have. They eat not any thing that hath life, but feed themselves with herbs and Rice, neither yet when they are sick will for any thing be let blood, but heal themselves by herbs & ointmentes, and by rubbing their bodies with Sanders, and such like sweet woods. In Goa and on the sea coasts there are many Bramenes, which commonly do maintain themselves with selling of spices and other Apothecary ware, but it is not so clean as others, but full of garbage and dust. They are very subtle in writing and casting accounts, whereby they make other simple Indians believe what they will. Touching the points of their religion, wherein the common people believe them to be Prophets: whatsoever they first meet withal in the streets at their going forth, that do they all the day after pray unto. The women when they go forth have but one cloth about their bodies, which covereth their heads, and hangeth down unto their knees: all the rest of the body is naked. They have rings through their noses, about their legs, toes, necks, and arms, and upon each hand seven or eight rings or bracelets, some of silver and gilt, if they be of wealth and ability: but the common people of glass, which is the common wearing of all the Indian women. When the woman is seven years old, and the man nine years, they do marry, but they come not together before the woman be strong enough to bear children. When the Bramenes die, all their friends assemble together, and make a hole in the ground, wherein they throw much wood and other things: and if the man be of any account, they cast in sweet Sanders, & other Spices, with Rice, Corn, and such like, and much oil, because the fire should burn the stronger. Which done they lay the dead Bramenes in it: then cometh his wife with Music & many of her nearest friends all singing certain praises in commendation of her husband's life, putting her in comfort, & encouraging her to follow her husband, & go with him into the other world. Then she taketh all her jewels, and parteth them among her friends, & so with a cheerful countenance, she leapeth into the fire, and is presently covered with wood and oil: so she is quickly dead, & with her husband's body burned to ashes: and i● it chance, as not very often it doth, that any woman refuseth to be burnt with her husband, than they cut the hair clean off from her head: and while she liveth she must never after wear any jewels more, & from that time she is despised, and accounted for a dishonest woman. This manner and custom of burning is used also by the Nobles and principallest of the Country, and also by some Merchants: notwithstanding all their dead bodies in general are burnt to ashes, and the women after their husband's deaths do cut their hair short, & wear no jewels, whereby they are known for widows. The first cause and occasion why the women are burnt with their husbands, was, (as the Indians themselves do say) that in time past, the women (as they are very lecherous and inconstant both by nature and complexion) did poison many of their husbands, when they thought good, (as they are likewise very expert therein:) thereby to have the better means to fulfil their lusts. Which the king perceiving, & that thereby his principal Lords, Captains, and Soldiers, which upheld his estate and kingdom, were so consumed and brought unto their ends, by the wicked practices of women, sought as much as he might to hinder the same: and thereupon he made a law, and ordained, that when the dead bodies of men were buried, they should also burn their wives with them, thereby to put them in fear, and so make them abstain from poisoning of their husbands: which at the first was very sharply executed, only upon the nobles, gentlemen and soldiers wives, as also the Bramenes (for that the common people must bear no arms, but are in a manner like slaves.) So that in the end it became a custom among them, and so continueth: whereby at this day they observe it for a part of their law and ceremonies of their devilish Idols, & now they do it willingly, being heartened and strengthened thereunto by their friends. These Bramenes observe certain fasting days in the year, and that with so great abstinence, that they eat nothing all that day, and sometimes in 3. or 4. days together. They have their Pagodes and Idols, whose ministers they are, whereof they tell and show many miracles, and say that those Pagodes have been men living upon earth, and because of their holy lives, and good works done here in this world, are for a reward thereof, become holy men in the other world, as by their miracles, by the Devil performed, hath been manifested unto them, and by their commandements their forms and shapes are made in the most ugly & deformed manner that possible may be devised. Such they pray and offer unto, with many devilish superstitions, & steadfastly believe that they are their advocates & intercessors unto God. They believe also that there is a supreme God above, which ruleth all things, and that men's souls are immortal, and that they go out of this world into the other, both beasts & men, and receive reward according to their works, as Pythagoras teacheth, whose disciples they are. The 37. Chapter. Of the Gusarates, & Banianes of Cambaia. THe Gusarates and Banianes are of the country of Cambaia: many of them dwell in Goa, Diu, Chaul, Cochin, & other places of India, because of their trade and traffic in merchandise, which they use much with all kinds of wares, as corn, cotton linen, anil, Rice, and other wares, specially all kind of precious stones wherein they have great skill. They are most subtle and expert in casting of accounts, and writing, so that they do not only surpass and go beyond all jews and other nations thereabouts, but also the Portugeses▪ & in this respect they have no advantage, for that they are very perfect in the trade of merchandise, & very ready to deceive men. They eat not any thing that hath life or blood in it, neither would they kill it for all the goods in the world, how small or unnecessary soever it were, for that they steadfastly believe, the every living thing hath a soul, & are next after men to be accounted of, according to Pythagoras' law, & know it must die: and sometimes they do buy certain fowls or other beasts of the Christians or Portugeses, which they meant to have killed, & when they have bought them, they let them flee and run away. They have a custom in Cambaia, in the high ways, & woods, to set pots with water, and to cast corn & other grain upon the ground to feed birds & beasts withal: & throughout Cambaia they have hospitals to cure and heal all manner of beasts & birds therein whatsoever they a●le, & receive them thither as if they were men, and when they are healed, they let them fly or run away whither they will, which among them is a work of great charity, saying, it is done to their even neighbours. And if they take a flea or a Louse, they will not kill it, but take or put it into some hole or corner in the wall, and so let it go, & you can do them no greater injury then to kill it in their presence, for they will never leave entreating and desiring withal courtesy not to kill it, and that man should not seem to commit so great a sin, as to take away the life of that, to whom God had given both soul and body: yea, and they will offer much money to a man to let it live, and go away. They eat no Radishes, Onions, Garlic, nor any kind of herb that hath any colour of red in it, nor Eggs, for they think there is blood in them. They drink not any wine, nor use any vinegar, but only water. They are so dangerous of eating and drinking with other men which are not their Countrymen, that they would rather starve to death then once to do it. It happeneth oftentimes that they sail in the Portugese's ships from Goa to Cochin to sell their wares, and to traffic with the Portugese's, and then they make their provisions for so long time as they think to stay upon the way, which they take aboard with them, and thereupon they feed, and if the time falleth out longer, than they made account of their water and provision being all spent, as it happened when I sailed from Goa to Cochin, they had rather die for hunger and thirst then once to touch the Christians meat, they wash themselves before they eat, as the Bramenes do, as also every time when they ease themselves or make water. They are of a yellow colour like the Bramenes and somewhat whiter, and there are women among them which are much whiter and clearer of complexion than the Portugal women. They are form and made both in face, limbs, and all other things like men of Europe, colour only excepted. Their apparel is a thin white gown upon their naked bodies, from the head to the feet, and made fast on the side under their arms, their shoes of red leather, sharp at the toes, and turning up like hooks, their beards shaven like the Turks, saving only their moustachios, they wear on their heads a white cloth three or four times wrapped about like the Bramenes, and under their hair a star upon their foreheads, which they rub every morning with a little white sanders, tempered with water, and 3. or 4. grains of rice among it, which the Bramenes also do as a superstitious ceremony of their law. Their bodies are commonly anointed with sanders & other sweet woods, which they do very much use, as also all the Indians. Their women are appareled like the B●amenes wives, they eat like the Mahometans, and all other Indians upon the ground. In their houses or assemblies they sit on the ground upon mats or carpets, and always leave their shoes without the door, so that they are always barefoot in their houses: wherefore commonly the heels of their shoes are never pulled up, to save labour of untying or undoing them; they have a thousand other heathenish superstitions which are not worth the rehearsal, whereof we have told you the most principal and thereby you may well enough understand what the rest are. The 38. Chapter. Of the Canaras and Decanijns. THe Canaras and Decaniins are of the country of Decam, commonly called Ballagate, lying behind Goa. many of them dwell in Goa, where their wares and shops are, of all sorts of Velvets, Silks, Satins, and Damasks, which they buy by great of the Portugese's, also all kinds of cotton linen, porselyne, and all kinds of wares and merchandises of Cambaia, China, Bengalla, etc. which they likewise buy of the Portugese's, and other nations, and sell it again by retail: for the which purpose they have brokers of their own Countrymen, which look for all kinds of wares and commodities. These bring likewise all victuals and necessaries out of the firm land, into the town and Island of Goa. They have their Indian ships wherewith they traffic to Cambaia, Sunda, and the read sea. Many of them are gold and silver smiths, & work in Copper, wherein they are very cunning. They have also divers other handicrafts, as Barbers, Physicians, Carpenters, and such like, as dwell in Goa, so that they are almost as great a number as the Portugal Mesticos, and Christians. Their apparel is like the Gusurates & Benianes, except their shoes, which they wear like Antiques with cut toes, and fastened above upon their naked feet, which they call Alparcas. They wear their beards and their hair long, as it groweth without cutting, but only turn it up, and dress it as the Benianes and Bramenes use to do, and are like them for colour, form, & making. They eat all things except Kine, Hogs, and Buffels, flesh and fish. They account the Ox, Cow or Buffel to be holy, which they have commonly in the house with them, and they besméere, stroke, and handle them with all the friendship in the world, and feed them with the same meat they use to eat themselves, and when the beasts ease themselves, they hold their hands under their tails and so throw the dung away. In the night time they sleep with them in their houses, & to conclude, use them as if they were reasonable creatures, whereby they think to do God great service. In their eating, sitting in the house, washing, making clean, and other ceremonies and superstitions they are altogether like the Bramenes, Gusurates, and Banianes. In their marriages they contract each with other at 7. years, & at 11. or 12. years they are married, and dwell together. When they are to be married, they begin fourteen days before to make a great sound with trumpets, drums and fires, which continueth day and night for all those fourteen days, with so great a noise of songs and Instruments, that men can neither hear nor see: On the w●dding day, all the friends and kindred on both sides do assemble together, & sit upon the ground, round about a fire, and go seven times about it uttering certain words, whereby the wedding is done. They give their daughters no household stuff, but only some jewels, as bracelets, ear-rings, and such like of small value, wherewith their husbands must be content, for the Daughters are no heirs, but the Sons inherit all, but they keep and maintain their daughters and sisters till they marry: when they die, they are likewise burnt, and some of their wives with them, but not so many as of the Bramenes. Every one of them followeth his father's occupation, and marrieth with the daughters of such like trades, which they name kindreds. They have their fasting days, and ceremonies like the Bramenes, for they are as the laity, and the Bramenes as the spiritualty, the Ministers, Priests, & Prophets of their Idols. They hire and farm the customs and rents of the Portugese's, & the King's revenues in the land of Bards, Salsette, and the Island of Goa, so that often times for any question or strife they must appear in law, where they always come without Counsellor or Attorney, and know so well how to place their words, according to the laws of Portugal, not only temporal but spiritual, that they are able to set down, and show where it standeth written, as well as any Counsellor could do, & make their petitions & requests without any man's advise, that the Portugese's do wonder at their ready wits, as I have oftentimes found in them. When they are to take their oaths to bear witness with any man, they are set within a circle made of ashes upon the pavement where they stand, still laying a few ashes on their bare heads, holding one hand on their heads, the other on their breasts, and then in their own speech swear by their Pagode, that they will tell the truth without dissimulation, whatsoever shall be asked them, for that they certainly believe they should be damned for ever, if as than they should not say the truth, but conceal it. These are their principal customs and ceremonies, yet are there many others, which for brevity I omit The 39 Chapter. Of the Canarijns and Corumbijns of India. THe Canarijns & Corumbjins are the Countrymen, and such as deal with tilling the land, fishing & such like labours, to get their livings, & look unto the Indian Palm trees, whereon the Cocos do grow. There are some among them that do nothing else but wash clothes, which is there used like another occupation, they are called Maynattos: there are others that are called Patamares, which serve only for Messengers or Posts, to carry letters from place to place by land, in winter time when men can not travail by sea. These Canarjins and Corumbjins are the most contemptible, and the miserablest people of all India, and live very poorly, maintaining themselves with little meat. They eat all kind of things, except Kine, Oxen, Buffels, Hogs, and Hen's flesh, their religion is like the Decanijns and Can●ras, for they are all of one Country and custom, little differing: they go naked, their privy members only covered with a cloth. The women go with a cloth bound about their middles beneath their navels, and hanging down to the middle of their thighs, and the other end thereof they cast over their shoulders, whereby half their breasts are covered. They are in a manner black, or of a dark brown colour, many of them are Christians, because their chief habitation and dwelling places are on the Sea side in the country's bordering upon Goa, for that the palm trees do grow upon the Sea coasts, or upon the banks by river sides. The rice is sowed upon low ground, which in winter time is covered with water, wherewith those Canarijns do maintain themselves: these bring hens, fruit, milk, eggs and other such like wares into the town to sell. They dwell in little straw houses, the doors whereof are so low, that men must creep in and out, their household stuff is a mat upon the ground to sleep upon, and a pit or hole in the ground to heat their rice in with a pot or two to féeth it in, and so they live and gain so much as it is a wonder. For commonly their houses are full of small children, which crawl and creep about all naked, until they are 7. or eight years old, & then they cover their privy members. When the Women are ready to travail with Child, they are commonly delivered when they are all alone, and their husbands in the fields, as it fortuned upon a time, as I and some other of my friends went to walk in the fields, & into the villages where the Canarijns dwell and having thirst, I went to one of the Canarijns' houses to ask some water, therewith to refresh us, (which they commonly drink out of a Copper Can with a spout, thereat to drink without touching it with their mouths, which is all the metal they have within their houses,) & because I was very thirsty, I stooped down and thrust my head in at the door, ask for some water, where I espied a woman alone within the house, tying her cloth fast about her middle, & before her having a wooden trough, (by the Portugese's called Gamello) full of water, where she stood and washed a child, whereof as then she had newly been delivered without any help: which having washed, she laid it naked on the ground upon a great Indian fig leaf, and desired me to stay and she would presently give me water. When I understood by her that she had as then newly been delivered of that Child without any help, I had no desire to drink of her water, but went unto another to ask water, and perceived the same woman not long after going about her house, as if there had been no such matter, and the children are brought up in that manner clean naked, nothing done unto them, but only washed and made clean in a little cold water, and do in that sort prosper and come up as well as man would wish, or as any child within these countries can do with all the tending they have, & live many times until they be a hundredth years old, without any headache, or toothache, or losing any of their teeth. They wear only a tusk of hair on the tops of their heads, which they suffer to grow long: the rest of their hair is cut short, they are very expert in swimming and diving, they row up and down the Rivers in boats called Almadias', whereof some of them are hewn out of a piece of wood, and so narrow that a man can hardly sit in them, and it chanceth oftentimes that they turn over & over twice or thrice before they pass the river, and then they leap out into the water and turn them up, and so pouring out the water they get into them again. They are so miserable, that for a penny they would endure to be whipped, and they eat so little, that it seemeth they live by the air, they are likewise most of them lean and weak of limbs, of little strength & very cowards, whereby the Portugese's do them great outrage and villainy, using them like dogs and beasts. In their marriages and deaths they observe the manner of the Decan●ins & Canaras, as also in their religion & ceremonies. When the man is dead his body is burnt, and the woman cuts her hair off, and breaketh all her jewels, although they be but few & small, for they are most of glass. By the pictures following you may see the Decanijns or Canaras, or the Merchants of Goa, also the Banianes or Gusurates of Cambaia, with the Bramenes & his wife, in what sort all the women do go, as well Benianes as Decaniins, Moors & Indian women that inhabit the country. How those of Goa and Ballagate keep their weddings among the Decaniins and Canaras, with the manner how the living women burn themselves with their dead husbands, what estate the Ambassador of Hidaleam holdeth in Goa, & how he is carried in the streets, also a true description of the Canariin with his wife, & the manner how the Indian heathenish children are brought up: also of the soldier of Ballagate, which is called Lascariin, with the heathenish whore called Balliadera, who is a dancer, because she is commonly used thereunto, in any feast or open plays, & are ready to be hired for a small piece of money, whereof many of them dwell in Goa, with the manner of the dwellings & houses of the Decaniins, Canariins, & Corumbiins, & how they row in the rivers with their scutes, whereby I have placed the manner of the boats used by those of the Malabares in Cochin, so that I shall not need to make a several Chapter of them by themselves. The 40. Chapter. Of the Arabians and Abexiins dwelling in India. THere are many Arabians & Abexiins in India. The Arabians observe Mahomet's law, & the Abexiins some are Mahometans, some christians, after their manner, for they are of Prester john's land, which stretcheth behind Mosambique in Aethiopia unto the red sea, and the river Nilus in Egypt, and by their common traffic and conference with the Moors and Mahometans, there are divers of them infected with the same sect. There are many of them in India that are slaves and captives, both men and women which are brought thither out of Aethiopia, & sold like other Oriental Nations, the Abexiins that are christians have on their faces 4. burnt marks in manner of a Cross, one over their nose in the middle of the forehead, between both their eyes, on each of their cheeks one, between their eyes, and their ears, and one under their neither lip, down to the chin: and this is their Baptism, when they are made Christians, which they use in stead of water. These Abexiins, and Arabians such as are free do serve in all India for sailors and sea faring men, with such merchants as sail from Goa to China, japon, Bengala, Mallaca, Ormus, and all the Oriental coast: for that there they have no other sailors, nor there are no other because the Portugal's (although they serve for Sailors in the Portugal's ships that come into India, and have never been other in Portugal but Sailors, yet are they ashamed to live in that order, and think it a great discredit unto them, together with a great diminishing of their authorities & estimations, which they account themselves to hold in India, so that they give themselves out for masters of ships, and by their captains are also called Pilots and chief Botesonnes', but not lower: for if they should descend but one step lower, it would be a great blot and blemish unto them all their lives after, which they would not endure for any thing in the world. These Abexijns and Arabians serve for small money, and being hired are very lowly and subject, so that often times they are beaten and smitten, not as slaves, but like dogs, which they bear very patiently, not once speaking a word: they commonly have their wives and children with them in the ship wherein they are hired, which continually stay with them, what voyage soever they make, and dress their own meat, which is Rice sodden in water with salt fish among it. The cause why the women sail in the ship, is, for that in Summer and not else, their ships go to sea, when they always have calm water and fair weather, with good winds: they have commonly but one Portugal or two for Captain, master and Pilot, and they have a chief Boteson, which is an Arabian, which they call Mocadon, and he is ruler of the Arabians & Aberijns, that are sailors, whom he hath under his subjection, even as if they were his slaves or subjects. This Mocadon is he that conditioneth and maketh bargain with the owners of the ship▪ to have so many sailors, and he receiveth the monethlie money for their wages, and accounteth with the sailors particularly, but for government of the ship he hath not to do, neither troubleth himself therewith. The ships when they sail, use no cask for water, because there is not any throughout all India, nor any made there, save only such as come out of Portugal, and used in the Portugal ships: but in steed of pipes they use a great four cornered wooden cistern, that standeth by the main mast, at the very foot thereof, upon the keel of the ship, which is very well pitched, and made fast, wherein they lad as much water as they think will serve them for their voyage. The captain, master or Pilot, Merchants and passengers, have every man their meat by themselves▪ and their water in great Indian pots called Martavans, whereof in the description of Pegu I have already spoken. These people are so serviceable and willing to do any thing, that if there chanceth but a hat, or any other thing, to be blown over, or fall into the water, they will presently leap, clothes and all into the sea, to fetch it again, for they swim like fishes, when the ships lie within the haven or river, and that they will all go on land, than they go into the boat, and so row to shore, which done one of them roweth back again with the boat, which he tieth fast to the ship and swimmeth to land: and when they will go aboard again, if any of the sailors be unwilling to swim to fetch the boat, they are by the Mocadon or the master, with strokes compelled to do it: but they commonly never stay till it cometh so far, but rather strive who shall be first in the water to show their diligence: and when they do any thing aboard, as hailing ropes and other things, they sing & answer each other very sweetly, so that it seemeth to be very good Music. Their exercise on land is, all the day to drink, and to sit in tippling houses with their wives and children, and then they go hand in hand through the streets, réeling here and there, making a great noise with singing and gaping after their manner: there women wear breeches like the Arabians and Mahometans. The 41. Chapter. Of the black people of Mosambique, which are called Caffares, and of their manners and customs. THe black people or Ca●fares of the land of Mosambique, and all the coast of Ethiopia, and within the land to the Cape de bona Speranza, go all naked, although those of Mosambique, (that is the women) do a little cover themselves, which they do by means of the daily conversation they have with the Portugese's, who for Gold, silver and ivory bones, and such like, do exchange Cotton linen brought out of India, that within the land, and to the cape, they use in those countries: otherwise they cover themselves with the like apparel that Adam and Eva did wear in Paradise. They are all as black as pitch, with curled and singed hair, both on their heads and beards, which is very little, their noses broad, flat and thick at the end▪ great big lips: some have holes, both above & under in their lips, and some times besides their mouths through their cheeks, wherein they thrust small bones, which they esteem a beautifying: there are some among them that have their faces and all their bodies over razed and seared with irons, and all figured like razed Satin or Damask, wherein they take great pride, thinking there are no fairer people than they in all the world, so that when they see any white people, that wear apparel on their bodies, they laugh and mock at them, thinking us to be monsters and ugly people: and when they will make any devilish form and picture, than they invent one atfer the form of a white man in his apparel, so that to conclude, they think and verily persuade themselves, that they are the right colour of men, and that we have a false and counterfeit colour. There are among them that file their teeth as sharp as needles, which they likewise esteem for a great ornament. Many of them hold the law of Mahomet, that is to say, such as dwell on the coast of Abex or Melinde, and round about those places, as also in Mosambique, by reason the red sea is so near unto them, together with the Arabian Mahometans, with whom they daily traffic, as they also did in all places, & islands throughout the Oriental countries, before the Portugese's discovery and conquest of India, whereby all the Oriental country where they trafficked, was infected with their devilish law, and their poison spread and thrown abroad in all places, which is one of the principal occasions that the Gospel taketh no better effect in those countries, their pestiserous law being as it were rooted and engrafted in their minds. There are some of them that are become Christians since the Portugese's came thither, but there is no great pains taken about it in those countries, because there is no profit to be had, as also that it is an infectious and unwholesome country: and therefore the jesuits are wary enough not to make any houses or habitations therein, for they see no great profit to be reaped there for them, as they do in India & the islands of japan, & in other places, where they find great quantities of riches, with the sap whereof they increase much and fill their beehyves therewith to satisfy their thirsty & insatiable desires: most part of the Caffares live like beasts or wild men, yet they have their houses in troops or heaps, like country villages▪ where they assemble & dwell together and in every Village they have a Lord or King, to whom they are subject and obedient, they are commonly in wars one with an other, and one place or Village against an other, and have law and justice among them with some small Policy, concerning their worldly affairs and government: but as concerning Religion and faith, they know not what it meaneth, but live like beasts without any knowledge of God, or any likelihood or shadow thereof, they maintain themselves by hunting, which they do in the woods, where they take all that they find, they eat Elephant's flesh and all other kind of wild beasts, and of the Elephant's teeth, they make their weapons, instead of Iron and Steel, they do commonly make war one against the other, and some of them eat men's flesh, and some there are also that eat it not, but such as deal with the Portugeses. When they take any man prisoner in the wars, they sell him to the Portugese's, or exchange and barter him for Cotton linen, and other Indian wares. They have a custom among them, that when they go to war against their enemies, if they win the battle, or overthrow each other, he that taketh or killeth most men, is holden and accounted for the best and bravest man among them, and much respected, and to witness the same before their Kings, of as many as they have slain or taken prisoners, they cut off their privy members, that if they be let go again, they may no more beget children, which in process of time might mischief them, and then they dry them well, because they should not rot: which being so dried, they come before their Kings with great reverence, in the presence of the principal men in the Village, and there take these members so dried one by one in their mouths, and spit them on the ground at the King's feet, which the King with great thanks accepteth, and the more to reward and to recompense their valour, causeth them all to be taken up and given to them again, for a sign and token of honour, whereby ever after from that time forwards they are accounted as Knights, and they take all those members, wherewith the King hath thus honoured them, A co●●●e kind of chain 〈◊〉 women 〈◊〉 wea●e. and tie them all upon a string like a Bracelet or Chain, and when they marry, or go to any wedding, or feasts, the Bride or wives of those knights do wear that Chain of men's members about their necks, which among them is as great an honour, as it is with us, to wear the golden Fleece, or the Garter of England, and the Brides of such Knights, are therewith as proud, as if they were the mightiest Queens in all the world. From Mosambique great numbers of these Caffares are carried into India, and many times they sell a man or woman that is grown to their full strength, for two or three Ducats. When the Portugese's ships put in there for fresh water and other necessaries, than they are dearer, by reason of the great numbers of buyers, the cause why so many slaves and Captains of all nations are brought to sell in India, is, because that every ten or twelve miles, or rather in every Village and town, there is a several King, and ruler of the people, one of them not like an other, neither in law, speech nor manners, whereby most part of them are in wars, one against the other, and those that on both sides are taken prisoners, they keep for slaves, and so fell each other like beasts: he whose evil fortune is such, that he is one of the captives, must be patiented, wherein they show not much dislike, for when they are asked, how they can content themselves with that yoke of bondage, they answer that they can bear it well enough, seeing their Planet will have it so, and for that their friends and neighbours shall revenge their cause against those that have done it. Also in time of poverty or dearth the fathers may sell their children, as it happened in my time, that there was such a dearth, and scarcity of victuals in the firm land, and countries bordering upon Goa, that the men of India came to Goa (and other places where the Portugese's are resident) to sell their children, in great numbers, and for small prices▪ to buy them victuals. I have seen Boys of eight, or ten years, given in exchange for five or six measures of Rice, and some for three or four Ducats the piece, and some came with their wives and children to offer themselves to be slaves, so that they might have meat and drink to nourish their bodies. And because the Portugese's have traffic in all places, (as we have been in many) it is the cause why so many are brought out of all countries to be sold, for the Portugese's do make a living by buying and selling of them, as they do with other wares. What concerneth the Caffares in Mosambique, I have in an other place declared, in the description of Mosambique. Hereafter followeth the pictures of the Arabians and Abexijns, with their wives, as they go in India, also the pictures and manners of the Caffares, both men and women, as they go in Mosambique, all lively portracted. The 42. Chapter. Of the Malabares and Nayros in India, with their manners and customs. THe Malabares are those that dwell on the Sea caost, between Goa, & the Cape de Comorijn Southward from Goa, where the Pepper groweth. They have a speech by themselves, and their country is divided into many kingdoms, as in the description of the country, we have already declared, these are the greatest, and worst enemies that the Portugese's have, and by Sea do them great mischief, they are strong and very courageous, they go all naked only their privy members covered, the women likewise have but a cloth from their Navel down to their knees, all the rest is naked, they are strong of limbs, and very arrogant and proud, of colour altogether black, yet very smooth both of hair and skin▪ which commonly they anoint with Oil, to make it shine; they wear their hair as long as it will grow, tied on the top or crown of their heads with a Lace, both men and women: the laps of their ears are open, and are so long that they hang down to their shoulders, and the longer & wider they are, the more they are esteemed among them, and it is thought to be a beauty in them. Of face, body, and limbs, they are altogether like men of Europe, without any difference, but only in colour, the men are commonly very hairy, and rough upon the breast, and on their bodies, and are the most lecherous and unchaste nation in all the Orient, so that there are very few women children among them, of seven or eight years old, that have their maidenheads: They are very ready to catch one from an other, though it be but for a small penny. In their houses they are not very curious, their houses and household stuff, differeth not much from the Canarijns & Corumbijns of Goa. Their Idolatry, ceremonies and superstitions, are like the other Heathens. Of these Malabares there are two manner of people, the one is Noblemen or Gentlemen, called Nayros, which are soldiers▪ that do only wear and handle arms, the other is the common people called Polias, and they may wear no weapons, nor bear any arms, the Nayros must in all places where they go or stand, wear such arms as are appointed for them, and always be ready at the King's commandment, to do him service, some of them do always bear a naked Rapier or Courtelas in their right hands, and a great Target in their left hand, those Targets are very great, and made of light wood, so that when they will they can cover their whole bodies therewith, they are so well used thereunto, that they esteem it nothing to bear them, and when they travel on the way, they may be heard a great way off, for that they commonly make a great knocking with the Hilt of their Rapier, against the Target, because they would be heard. There are some that carry a bow and a venomous arrow upon their shoulder, wherein they are very expert, others carry long Pikes, some Pieces, with the Match ready lighted, and wound about their arms, and have the best locks that possible may be found in all Europe, which they know so well how to use, that the Portugese's can have no advantage against them. Wheresoever they go, they must always have their arms with them, both night and day. Not any of them are married, nor may not marry during their lives, but they may freely lie with the Nayros' daughters, or with any other that liketh them, what women soever they be, yea though they be married women. When the Nayro hath a desire thereunto, he entereth into a house where he thinketh good, and setteth his arms in the street without the door, and goeth in and dispatcheth his business, with the good wife or the daughter, the door standing wide open, not fearing that any man should come in to let him, for whosoever passeth by, and seeth the Nayros arms standing at the door, although it be the goodman himself, he goeth by, and letteth him make an end▪ and having done, he taketh his arms and departeth thence, and then the husband may come to the house, without making any words, or once moving question about it. In that manner they go where they will, and no man may deny them. As these Nayros go in the streets, they use to cry Po, Po, which is to say, take heed, look to yourselves, or I come, stand out of the way, for that the other sort of people called Polyas, that are no Nayros, may not once touch or trouble one of them, and therefore they always cry, because they should make them room, and know that they come, for if any of the Polyas should stand still, and not give them place, whereby he should chance to touch their bodies, he may freely thrust him through, and no man ask him why he did it. And when they are once touched by any Polya●, or by any other nation except Nayros, they must before they eat, or converse with other Nayro● wash and cleanse their bodies with great ceremonies and superstitions. Likewise they must not be touched by any Christian, or any other man. And when the Portugese's came first into India, and made league and composition with the King of Cochin, the Nayros desired that men should give them place, and turn out of the way, when they met in the streets, as the Polyas and others used to do, which the Portugese's would not consent unto, thinking it to be against their credits and honours, for them to be compared to the Polyas and unprofitable sort of people, whereas they esteemed themselves better than the Nayros, both in person and arms: therefore they would have the Nayros to give them place, whereby they could not agree, in the end it was concluded, (to pacify the matter, and to keep peace and quietness among them) that two men should be chosen, one for the Nayros, and the other for the Portugese's, that should fight body to body, and he that should be overthrown, that nation should give place unto the other, this was done in the presence of both nations, and the Portugal overcame the Nayro, whom he slew, whereupon it was agreed, that the Nayros should give place unto the Portugal, and stand a side until he be passed, where soever they meet. The Nayros wear the nails of their hands very long, whereby they show that they are Gentlemen, because the longness of the nails doth let and hinder men from working or doing any labour. They say likewise that they do it, the better and faster to gripe a thing in their hands, and to hold their Rapiers, which some Portugese's and Mesticos do likewise use, and hold the same opinion with the Nayros, whereof there are many in India, which let their nails grow for the same cause. The principallest or chiefest of those Nayros, which are leaders or Captains of certain numbers of Nayros, wear a Gold or Silver bracelet, or ring about their arms, above their elbows: as also their Governors, Ambassadors, and Kings, whereby they are known from other men, for otherwise they go all naked. Also their Kings, rulers, and other Captains and leaders, when they go abroad, are guarded and accompanied by other Nayros. They are very good and stout soldiers, and will set upon a man very fiercely, they are also very full of revenge, so that whensoever they fight against their enemies either by water or by land, and that they chance to be thrust into the body with a Pike, they are not presently therewith content to lie down, but if they cannot speedily pluck the Pike forth, they will not spare to pull it forth with both their hands, and draw it through their bodies, therewith to set upon them that gave them the wound, and to be revenged on them. Habitus et facies Mercatorum Goensium Indorum▪ qui mutandis mercibus valde industrij habit en gedaente der ●ndiaensche Coopluyden welcke in hare handle seer cloeck zyn Banjanes e Cambaja populus ●s●andis gemmis, scribendo, supputandoque valdé ●ercitatus. Banjanen vun Cambajen in't ke● van gesteenten schryven en rekenen zeer ge● Bramenes Idolorum in India Sacerdotes Bramenes der Indivenscher affgoden Papen oft Priesters. M●aniere van bruylost in't Lant van Ballagate achter Goa gelegen. Bramenes cum mortuus est. secundum eorum legem crematur. uxor autem ejus. pro amore. sese vivam in ignem cum illo conjicit. De Bramene do't wesende wort nae haer wet verbrant. en zyn urouwe wt liefde haers man's. verbrant haer levendich met 'em. Agricola Indus Canaryn dictus E'en Indiaens saint oft bouwman genaemt Canaryn Indorum liberi pro eorum consuetu●●●●, pudendis tantum rariori tela contectis Indiaensche kinderen als slants manner is 〈…〉 en die scha: melheyt met een dun linen doecksken be 〈…〉 hebbende. Miles Indus quem lascarin nominant E'en Indiaens soldaet lascarin geheeten. Inda meretrix, saltando et canendo victum queritans. E'en Indiaensche lichte urouwe met dans sen en singen haer cost winnende. Legati Regis Ballagatte in urbe Goa comitatus. Die staet des Ambassateurs van den Coninck van Ballagatte binnen Goa Scaphae piscatoriae Goensium et Cochinensium, alterae ex solido trunco exca vatae, alterae, e pluribus funibus coagmentatae, priores Almadias', alteras Tones et Paleguas vocant. implent et hash●drijs aquae recentis, quam ad naves deferentes di vendant. quarum magnus illic numerus. S 〈…〉 huÿten diemen te Goa. en Cochÿn. gebruÿckt am te visschen, d'eene wt een hout wtgeholt. lander wt veel struÿcken, met coorden tsamen gebonden. déerste word Almadias'. ●'andere Tones, en Paseguas, genaemt, die daer in groot getal zÿn, welcken verladen ●et cruÿcken vol soet waters daer in gestort. om aende schepen te vercoopen Naute Arabes quibus naves suas regendas Lusitani committunt in quibus cum uxoribus ut plurimum habitant. Ar●bischer scheepluÿden, welcke die Portugeesen. haer schepen vertrouwen te regeren. in welcken sijs oock met haer wyven meest woonen. Habitus Abissinorum quibus loco S. Baptismatis frons nutiritur Habÿten der Abissÿnen wt paep tan slant welcke in plaets van doop gebruÿcken brantmercken in't aensicht. Moerianen wt Mocambÿcke en die omliggende contreÿen diemen Caffres' noemt sommighe zÿn Christenen sommighe Heydenen en t●neestendeel Machometisten. The other common people of the Malabares, called Polyas, are such as are the country husband men and labourers, men of occupations, fishers, and such like: those are much contemned and despised, they live very miserably, and may wear no kind of weapon, neither yet touch or be conversant with the Nayros, for as the Nayros go on the streets, and they hear him call, they step aside, bowing their arms, and stooping with their heads down to the ground, not daring so much as once look up before the Nayros be passed: in other things they observe the customs of the other Indians, for that every man followeth the occupation of his Elders, and may not change it for any thing. The 43. Chapter Of the Moors and jews in India. THere are great numbers of Moors and jews in all places of India, as at Goa, Cochin, & within the land, some coming out of other places, and the rest borne of jews and Moors in that country, and so by birth right Indians, who in times passed by conversation and company of those jews & Moors, have been brought to their sect and opinion. In their houses and apparel they follow the manner of the land wherein they are resident: amongst the Indians they have their Churches, Synagogues and Mesquitas, wherein they use all ceremonies according to their law: but in the places where the Portugese's inhabit and govern, it is not permitted unto them to use them openly, neither to any Indian, although they have their families and dwelling houses, and get their livings, and deal one with the other: but secretly in their houses they may do what they will, so that no man take offence thereat: without the towns and where the Portugese's have no commandment, they may freely use and exercise their ceremonies and superstitions, every one as liketh him best, without any man to let or deny them: but if they be found openly doing it in the Portugese's towns and jurisdictions, or that they have any point of Christian ceremonies mingled among theirs, both men and women die for it, unless they turn unto the christian faith, as it oftentimes happeneth without the town of Cochin, where the King keepeth his Court: there the jews and Moors have free liberty to use their sects and ceremonies openly, for there the jews have made and built very fair stone houses, and are rich merchants, and of the king of Cochins' nearest Counsellors: there they have their synagogue with their hebrue Bible, and Moses Law, which I have had in my hand: they are most white of colour, like men of Europa, & have many fair women. There are many of them that came out of the country of Palestina & jerusalem thither, and speak over all the Exchange very perfect and good Spanish: they observe the Saboth day, and other judicial ceremonies, and hope for the Messiah to come. The Moors like wise have their Mesquitoes, wherein they pray, and above the Church they have many sellers and galleries, where they learn their children their principles of Religion before they go to Church: they wash their feet, for the which purpose they have always a cistern with water standing without the Church, & leave their Alparcos (which are their shoes) standing at the Church door before they go in, and being in the Church they fall flat on the ground upon their faces, and so with their arms & hands lifted up, make many counterfeit faces. They are also circumcised like the jews, & eat no hogs flesh, and when they are dead they are buried. In their churches they have not any Images, but only some stones or round pillars standing upright with certain Chaldean letters (out of their Koran) graven upon them. As I and a friend of mine chanced to go out of the town, we were desirous to see their mahometical Church, and their manner of service, which was denied us by the keeper of the door, that bade us put off our shoes, but because we would not, he said it was not lawful for us to enter in that sort into the Church: but to let us see it, he suffered us to stand within the door, and opened some of the windows, that we might see what was within it: then the Portugal asked him for their God & their Saints which they used to pray unto, because he saw the Church empty, as I said before: then the Moor answered him, that they used not to pray to stocks and stones, but to the living God, which is in Heaven, and said that the proud Portugal Christians, and the Heathens were all of one Religion, for that they prayed to Images made of wood and stones, and give them the glory which only appertaineth to the living God: with the which answer the Portugal was so angry, that he began to chide & make a great noise, and to give him many hard words, wherewith many jews & Moors assembled about them, so that there had grown a great quarrel, had it not been for me, that got him to hold his peace, and so brought him away, and let the matter rest in that sort. These Moors traffic much with spices to the red sea, and other places, both by water and by land. And although many of them dwell among the Portugese's and traffic much with them, yet secretly they are their most deadly enemies, and do them much mischief, and are the principal occasion that there are no more Christians converted to the faith of Christ, seeking all the ways and means they can to withdraw and dissuade them from it, whereby the Indians do both use and follow their customs and Religion. By the Picture following you may see the state and majesty of the king of Cochin sitting upon an Elephant, when he rideth abroad with his Nayros, or Gentlemen and soldiers that guard and conduct him, also the other Malabares, both men and women, called Polyas, which the Moors and Mahometans that dwell in Cananor, among the Malabares, as I said before. You shall also see the Christians that are called S. Thomas Christians, whereof many dwell among the Malabares, with one great leg, as they are borne, as in the description of the coast I have already showed, likewise the picture of the men of Pegu, and the Islands of Molucos. The 44. Chapter. Of the Pagodes and Indian Idols forming, keeping ceremonies and superstitions in general, briefly described. Cochini Rex elephante vectus, cum procerum comitatu, quos Nairos vocant. Die Coninck van Cochin op een elephant geseeten verselschapt met sijn edelen diemen Nairos noemt Provinciae Pegu incola, auri adamantum et rubinorum ferax, undelacca sigillatoria advehitur, E'en wt Pegu, waer veel gout diamanten en robynen gevonden en het zegellack gemaeckt ●ort Incola ex Insulis Moluco▪ ubi Carijop●ijlla magnâ copiâ crescunt, quorum vestes e stramine sunt factoe. E'en inwoonder wt die Eylanden van Mo●uco, daer die Garyophyl nagelen over uloedich groÿens▪ welcks cleede●en van stroy zyn▪ Penequais familioe, a Divo Thoma execratae intotam ut Indi referunt pro geniem Van penekays geslachten van S. Thomas als die ●dianen seggen gantselicken verulocekt Inquilini e Cananor Mahometani infectiss. Lusitanorum hosts Die Machometisten van Cananor en do't vianden vande Portugeesen Incolae Malabarae maritimi inter Goam et Cochina apud quos piper nascitur▪ Inwoonders van Malabar tusschen Goa en Cochyn aende Zeecant daer die peeper waist Horrendae Idolorum effigies, quae in omnibus viarum angulis obuia Indi prostrati passim adorant et donarijs prosecutur, a Bramenis sacerdotibus, ob sapientioe opinionem, apud illos magni habitis. Pagodes dicta. Scrickelicke be●denisse der Indiaensche affgoden gestest open all hoccken van de weegen welcke sijs ha●r offer hand done en seer de voetelicken aenbidden van haer papen Bramenes die am opinie van wysheyt daer seer geacht sijn Pagodes genaemt Mesquita seu templum Indorum Mahometistarum quae secta totum fere, orientem pervasit. Mesquita oft tempel der Machometische Indianen welcke seckte bynaer geheel Orienten doordrongen heeft In the Island of Seylon, whereof I have already spoken, there is a high Hill called Pico d'Adam, or Adam's Hill, upon the top whereof standeth a great house, as big as a Cloister: wherein standeth a Pagode of great account. In this place in time passed there was a Tooth of an Ape, shrined in Gold and precious stones, and therein was kept this Tooth, which for costliness and worthiness was esteemed the holiest thing in all India, and had the greatest resort unto it from all the countries round about it: so that it passed both S. james in Galicia, and S. Michae●s Mount in France, by reason of the great indulgences & pardons that were there daily to be had: for which cause it was sought unto with great devotion by all the Indians within 4 or 500 miles round about in great multitudes: but it happened an. 1554 when the Portugese's made a road out of India and entered the Island of Seylon, they went up upon the hill, where they thought to find great treasure, because of the fame that was, spread abroad of the great resort and offering in that place, where they sought the Cloister and turned up every stone thereof, and found nothing but a little Coffer, made fast with many costly precious stones, wherein lay the Ape's tooth. This booty or relic they took with them unto Goa, which when the Kings of Pegu, Zion, Bengala, Bisnagar, and others heard of, they were much grieved that their so costly jewel was in that manner taken from them, whereupon by common consent they sent their Ambassadors unto the Viceroy of India, desiring him of all friendship, to send them their Ape's tooth again, offering him for a ransom (besides other presents, which as then they sent unto him) 700. thousand Ducats in Gold, which the Viceroy for covetousness of the money was minded to do. But the Archbishop of Goa called Don Gaspar, my Lord's predicessor, dissuaded him from it, saying, that they being Christians, ought not to give it them again, being a thing whereby Idolatry might be furthered, and the Devil worshipped, but rather were bound by their profession, to root out and abolish all Idolatry and superstition, as much as in them lay. By which means the Viceroy was persuaded to change his mind, An Ape● Tooth had in great estimation and flatly denied the ambassadors request: having in their presence first burned the Ape's tooth, the Ashes whereof he caused to be thrown into the Sea. Whereupon the Ambassadors fearing some further mischief, took their leave and departed, being much astonished that he refused so great a sum of money, for a thing which he so little esteemed that he burned it, and threw the Ashes into the Sea. Not long after there was a Beniane (as the Benianes are full of subtlety) that had gotten an other Ape's tooth, and made the Indians and Heathens believe, that he had miraculously found the same Ape's tooth, that the Viceroy had, and that it was revealed unto him by a Pagode in a vision, that assured him it was the same, which he said the Portugese's thought they had burned, but that he had been there invisible and taken it away, laying an other in the place. Which the Heathens presently believed, so that it came unto the King of Bisnagars' ears, who thereupon desired the Beniane to send it him, and with great joy received it, giving the Beniane a great sum of Gold for it, where it was again holden and kept in the same honour and estimation, as the other that was burnt, had been. In the kingdom of Narsinga, or the coast called Ch●ramandel, there standeth a Pagode, that is very great, exceeding rich, and holden in great estimation, having many Pilgrimages and visitations made unto it from all the countries bordering about it, where every year they have many fairs, feasts, and processions, and there they have a Wagon or a Cart, which is so great and heavy, that three or four Elephants can hardly draw it, and this is brought forth at fairs, feasts, and processions. At this Cart hang likewise many Cables or Ropes, whereat also all the country people, both men and women of pure devotion do pull and hale. In the upper part of this Cart standeth a Tabernacle or seat, wherein sitteth the Idol, and under it sit the King's wives, which after their manner play on all instruments, making a most sweet melody, and in that sort is the Cart drawn forth, with great devotions and processions: there are some of them, that of great zeal and pure devotion do cut pieces of flesh out of their bodies, and throw them down before the Pagode: others lay themselves under the wheels of the Cart, and let the Cart run over them, whereby they are all crushed to pieces, and pressed to death, and they that thus die, are accounted for holy and devout Martyrs, and from that time forwards are kept and preserved for great and holy Relics, besides a thousand ●ther such like beastly superstitions, which they use, as one of my Chamber fellows, that had seen it, showed me, and it is also well known throughout all India. Upon a time I and certain Portugese's my friends having licence from the Viceroy were at a banquet and meeting, about five or six miles within the firm land, and with us we had certain Decanijns, and natural borne Indians, that were acquainted with the country, the chief cause of our going, was to see their manner of burning the dead Bramene, and his wife with him, being alive because we had been advertised, that such a thing was to be done. And there among other strange devices that we saw, we came into some Villages, and places inhabited by the Indians where in the way, and at every hill, stony Rock or hole, almost within a Pater noster length, we found a Carved Pagode, or rather Devils, and monsters in hellish shapes. At the last we came into a Village, where stood a great Church of stone, wherein we entered, and found nothing in it but a great Table that hung in the middle of the Church, with the Image of a Pagode, painted therein so misshaped and deformed, that more monstruous was never seen, for it had many horns, and long teeth that hung out of his mouth down to the knees, and beneath his Navel and belly, it had an other such like face, with many horns and tusks. Upon the head thereof stood a triple Crowned Mitre, not much unlike the Pope's triple crown, so that in effect it seemed to be a monster, such as are described in the apocalypse. It hung before a Wall, which made a partition from an other Chamber, in manner of a Quire, yet was it close made up without windows, or any place for light, in the middle whereof was a little narrow close door, and on both sides of the door, stood a small Furnace made within the wall, wherein were certain holes or Lattisses, thereby to let the smoke or savour of the fire to enter into that place, when any offering should be made. Whereof we found some there, as Rice, Corne. Fruits, Hens, and such like things, which the Indians daily offered, but there came so filthy a smoke and stink out of the place, that whosoever went near it, was almost ready to choke, the said place being all black, smerie and foul there with Before this door being shut, in the middle of the Church, there stood a Calf of stone, whereon one of our company leapt, and laughing, began to cry out, which the Bramene that kept the Church, perceiving, began to call and cry for help, so that presently many of the neighbours ran thither, to see what the cause might be, but before the thrung of people came, we dealt so well with the Bramene (acknowledging our fault, & saying it was unadvisedly done) that he was well content▪ & the people went home again. Then we desired the Bramene to open us the door that stood shut, which after much entreaty he yielded unto, offering first to throw certain Ashes upon our foreheads, which we refused, so that before he would open us the door, we were forced to promise him that we would not enter further in, than to the door. The door of their Sancta Sanctorum, or rather Diabolo●um, being opened, it showed within like a Lime kill, being close vaulted round about, over the head without either hole or window to cast in light, but only at the door, neither was there any light in all the Church, but that which came in at the door we entered by. Within the said cell or vault, there hung at the least 100L. burning Lamps, in the middle whereof stood a little Altar and covered over with cloth made of cotton wool, & over that with pure gold, under the which (as the Bramene told us sat the Pagode being of clean gold, of the bigness of a Puppet or a Baby sold in fairs: hard by the Church without the great door, stood within the Earth a great four cornered or square Cistern, he wed out of free stone, with stairs on each side to go down into it, full of green, filthy and stinking water, wherein they wash themselves when they mean to enter into the Church to pray. From thence we went further, and still as we went, in every place we found Pagodes hewed out of hard stones, & standing in their holes, of such lively shapes and figures as we told you before. These stand in the ways under certain covertures, without the Churches, and have hard by each of them a small Cistern of water, cut out of the stone to wash their feet, with half an Indian Nut, that hath a handle and hangeth there to take up water withal. And this is ordained for the travelers, that pass by, who commonly at every one of those Pagodes do fall down and make their prayers, and wash their feet in those Cisterns. By the said Pagodes, commonly do stand two little Furnaces, with a Calf or Cow of stone, before the which they set their offerings, which are of such things, as are to be eaten, every man as his devotion serveth, which they think the Pagode eateth in the night, but it is taken away by the Bramene. We found in every place such offerings standing, but we had little desire once to taste thereof, it looked so filthily, and as we had sufficiently beholden their misshapen figures and monstrous Images, we returned again unto the village, wherein we saw the stone Church, because the Bramene. had advertised us, that the same day about Evening, the Pagode should be carried in procession, to sport itself in the fields, and to fetch a circuit, which we desired to see. And about the time which he appointed, they rung a little Bell, which they had gotten of the Christians, wherewith all the people began to assemble, and took the Pagode out of his diabolical Cell, which with great reverence, they set in a Palamkin borne by the chief men of the town, all the rest with great devotion following after, with their usual noise and sounds of Trumpets and other instruments, wherewith they went a reasonable way round about a field, & then brought him to the stone cistern, where washing him very clean (although he were very filthy stinking) they carried him again into his Celestina, leaving him shut herein withal his Lamps, to make good cheer, and having made a foul smoke and stink about him, and every man left his offering behind him, they went home to their houses, leaving the Bramene alone, who in steed of the Pagode, made good cheer at their costs, with his wife and family. This is the manner of their ceremonies and daily superstitions, worshippings of false gods, wherein the Devil hath so blinded them, that thereby they are without all doubt persuaded to obtain eternal life, and tell many miracles of their Idols, whereby we are moved and put in mind, to call to remembrance how much herein we are bound to God, and to give him thanks, that it hath pleased him to illuminate us, with the truth of his holy Gospel, and that we are not borne or brought up among those Heathens, and devilish Idolaters, and to desire God that it would please him of his gracious goodness, to open their eyes, and to give them the truth of his holy word among them, as he is our only trust, for they are in all things like us, made after Gods own Image, and that when his good pleasure is, he will lose them out of the bands of Satan, and give both them and us that which is most necessary for our souls, Amen. The better to understand the manner of their devilish shapes and figures of Pagodes, I have hereunto annexed the picture thereof, even as they openly stand in the high ways or hills, with a Cow or Calf of stone by them, also their Church called Meskita, belonging to the Mahometans and Moors, dwelling in Malabar, with the Cistern of water wherein they wash themselves. The 45. Chapter. Of all the kind of beasts, cattle, and fowls in India. THere is over all India great store of cattle, as Oxen, Kine, Sheep, Hogs, Goats, Kids, and such like, and very good cheap, and in great abundance, although the flesh is not of so good a taste as that in Europe, which proceedeth from the heat of the country, & therefore it is not much esteemed. A man may buy the best Cow in Goa, for five or six Pardawes. Oxen are there little killed to eat, but are most kept to till the land, all other things as hogs, sheep and goats, are sold after the rate. Mutton is little esteemed of, and not much used to be eaten for it is forbidden to such as are sick, & the Hog's flesh is much better & sounder, which is rather permitted unto sick persons than Mutton. There are sheep in that country of five quarters in quantity, for that the tail is as great, & hath as much flesh upon it, as any of the quarters, there are many Buffles, but nothing good to be eaten, unless it be by poor people, but their Milk is very good, and is very well sold and ordinarily eaten, for you shall see the slaves & Canarijns in great numbers, all day going about the streets to sell the Milk of Buffles, and Goats, and excellent sweet Cream, and fresh butter in small pieces. They make likewise some small white Cheeses, but they are very salt and dry: wild Boars, some Hares, Coneys, Hearts and Hinds are there also to be found, but not many▪ Cocks, Capons, Pheasants and Doves are there in great abundance and good cheap. In the Island of Goa and there about are Sparrows, and some other small birds, yet not many: but on the coast of Cochin and Malabar there are very few Sparrows, nor any such like small birds. There are in India many Bats, and some of them so great, that it is incredible to tell. They do great mischief to trees, fruits and herbs, whereby the Canariins are constrained to set men to watch in their trees, and yet they can hardly rid them away. The Indians eat them, and say they are as good meat as a Partridge. There is a most wonderful number of black Crows, which do much hurt, and are so bold, that oftentimes they come flying in at their windows, and take the meat out of the dish, as it standeth upon the table, before them that are set down to eat: and as I myself sat writing above in a chamber of the house, the windows being open, one of those Crows flew in at the window, and picked the cotton one of mine Ink horn, and blotted all the paper that lay on my table, do what I could to let him. They sit commonly upon the Buffles backs, and peck off their hair, so that you shall find very few Buffles that have any hair upon their backs, and therefore to avoid the Crows they get themselves into marshes, and watery places, where they stand in the water up to the necks, otherwise they could never be rid of them. There are likewise great numbers of Rats, and some as big as young Pigs, so that the Cats dare not touch them. Sometimes they dig down the houses, for that they undermine the walls & foundations through and through, whereby many times the houses fall down and are spoiled. There is another sort of Rats, that are little and reddish of hair: They are called sweet smelling Rats, for they have a smell as if they were full of Musk. Of Aunts or Pismires there is so great abundance throughout all India, and so noisome, that it is incredible to such as have not seen it: for that men may set nothing whatsoever it be▪ that is to be eaten, or fatty, nor yet their clothes nor linen, but you shall presently find at the least a thousand upon it, and in the twinkling of an eye they will presently consume a loaf of bread: wherefore it is the manner throughout India, to make all the Cupboards wherein they keep their victuals, and chests, where their linen and apparel lieth, with four feet or pillars, and under every foot or pillar a stone or wooden cistern full of water, and place the Cupboard or chest in the middle of the room, not néete the wall, whereby they cannot come at it, otherwise it would be spoiled, and if they do never so little forget to power water into the Cisterns, if it be but a Pater noster while, presently there will be so many Pismires crawling all over it, that it is wonderful: so that it seemeth to be a curse or plague of God sent upon that country. There are some likewise that use such Cisterns of water under their bedstéed, because they would not be troubled with them as they lie in their beds, and also under their tables. Some men which keep Canary birds, or such small fowls (that are brought thither from Portugal, or out of Turkey and Persia for their pleasures) are forced to set them on a stick or perch made for the purpose, with a Cistern of water under it, otherwise it would presently be killed by the Pismires: and though it hangeth in the top of the house, yet they will come at it, if it have a string, to hold it by. The soldiers and poor people that have not the means to buy Cubbordes with cisterns) put the bread and other victua●les which they leave (which is not over much) into a cloth tied on knots, and hang it on a nail against a wall, and make a circle about it of Charcoal, so that the Pismires cannot get over, nor come at it. There is another sort of Pismires which are almost a finger long, and reddish of colour: they run into the fields & do great hurt to the herbs, fruits and plants. Moths & worms which creep and eat through men's clothes, are there in great abundance, whereby men must use no more clothes nor linen in those countries then that he necessarily and daily weareth on his back, otherwise they are presently moth-eaten and spoiled. They can hardly keep any paper or books from worms, which are like ear worms, but they do often spoil & consume many papers & evidences of great importance. There are also many Wall-lyces. They are called W●-lyce, because the breed 〈◊〉 wal●: B● in true English the● are called M●dges, in Latin, C●mice●. There is a kind of beast that flieth, twice as big as a Bee, and is called Baratta: These creatures also do much hurt, and are commonly in Sugar, Hony, Butter, Oil, and all fat wares and sweet meats. Many of them likewise come into their chests among their clothes and linen, which they do also spoil and spot. They are in great numbers and very hurtful. There can be nothing so close shut or made fast, but they will get in & spoil it, for where they lie or be, they spot all things with their eggs, which stick as fast as sirop upon a paper, so that there may be esteemed they are to draw, they bind the fat or pack fast with a rope that he may feel the weight thereof, and then the keeper speaketh unto him: whereupon he taketh the cord with his snout, and windeth it about his teeth, and thrusteth the end into his mouth●, & so draweth it hanging after him, whether they desire to have it. If it be to be put into a boat, than they bring the boat close to the shore of the Key, and the Elephant putteth it into the boat himself, and with his snout gathereth stones together, which he layeth under the fat pipe, or pack, & with his teeth striketh & thrusteth the pack or vessel, to see if it lie fast or not. It will draw any great shot or other Iron work, or metal being made fast unto it, be it never so heavy, they draw fustes, small Galleys, and other great boats, as Carvels, and such like, as easily out of the water upon the land, as if no man were in them: so that they serve their turns there, even as our slids or carts with horses do here to carry our wares and merchandises, their meat is rice and water, they sleep like kine, oxen, horses, and all four footed beasts, and bow their knees and all their members as other beasts do. In winter when it beginneth to rain, than they are unquiet, and altogether mad, so that their keepers cannot rule them, and then they are let some whether out of the town to a great tree, and there tied unto it by the legs with a great iron chain, where they carry him meat, and so he lieth in the open air, as long as he is mad, which is from April to September, all the Winter time when it raineth, and then he cometh to himself, and beginneth to serve again as tamely, that a man may lie under his belly, so you do him no hurt: but he that hurteth him, he must take heed, for they never forget when any man doth them injury, until they be revenged. Their teeth which is the juor bone, is much used in India, specially in Cambaia, whereof they make many curious pieces of workmanship▪ the women wear manillas, or arm bracelets thereof, ten or twelve about each arm, whereby it is there much worn, and are in great numbers brought out of Aethiopia, Mosambique and other places. In the Island of Seylon and Pegu, they fight most upon Elephants, and bind swords upon their teeth, they have likewise wooden Castles upon their backs, wherein are five or six men that shoot out of them with bows, or pieces, and also cast out wildfire. They do no other hurt but only serve to put the enemy out of order, and to scatter them out of their ranks, but if any one of them once turneth his back, than they all begin to turn & run over their own people, and put them all out of order. They are very fearful of a rat or a mouse, and also of the Pismyres, because they fear they would creep into their snouts. They are likewise afraid of gun shot and of fire, unless by length of time they be used unto them. When they have the company one of the other, the male Elephant standeth upon the higher ground, and the female somewhat lower. As they go along the way, although you see them not, you may hear them a far off by the noise of their feet and clapping of their ears, which they continually use. They are as swift ingoing almost as a horse, and are very proud, and desirous of honour. When there is any great feast or holiday kept in Goa, with solemn procession, commonly the Elephants go with them, the young before, and the old behind, and are all painted upon their bodies with the Arms and Crosses of Portugal, & have every one five or six trumpeters or players upon the Shawms, sitting upon them that sound very pleasantly, wherewith they are as well pleased, and go with as great gravity, and in as good order as if they were men. It happened in Goa, that an Elephant should draw a great fust out of the water unto the land, which fust was so great and heavy, that he could not do it alone, so that they must have another to help him: whereupon the keeper chid him, using many hard words, saying, that he was idle and weak, and that it would be an everlasting shame for him, that they must fetch another to help him, wherewith the Elephant was so desperate, that he thrust away his fellow (which was brought to help him) and beg●n freshly again to draw, with so great a force, more than he was well able to do, that with extreme labour he burst and fell down stark dead in the place. At such time as I was to make my voyage from Cochin to Portugal, the Rudder of our ship was out of order, so that it must of force be brought on land to make it fit again, and so it was drawn to the river side at the stern of the boat, which the Elephant should draw on land upon two boards, that it might slide up, and because it was heavy, (as the Rudder of a ship of 1400. or 1600. tons requireth) as also that the Elephant was as yet but young, and not grown to his full strength, so that he could not draw it out alone, yet he did the best he could: but seeing he could not do it, he fell on his fore legs, and began to cry and weep, that the tears ran out of his eyes, and because many of us stood upon the shore to behold this sight, the keeper began to chide him, and with hard words to curse him, because he shamed him thus in presence of so many men, not to be able to draw up such a thing: but what strength or labour soever the Elephant used, he could not do it alone, but when they brought another Elephant to help him, they both together drew it half out of the water, so that it lay partly upon the boards. The first Elephant, perceiving that with his head and teeth thrust the other Elephant away, and would have no more help, but drew it out himself: whereby it may be considered, that they are in understanding, and desire of commendation like unto men. They are likewise very thankful and mindful of any good done unto them. When new years day cometh, their keepers use of common custom to ask new years gifts of the Viceroy, the Archbishop, and other governors and Gentlemen, and then the Elephants come to the door and bow their heads down, and when any thing is given, they kneel on their knees with great lowliness, and thankfulness, for the good deeds so done unto their keepers (which they think to be done unto themselves.) They use as they pass by such houses, to bow their heads at the doors, as also when they pass by the Church doors, and by Crosses, which their Masters teach them. They have a custom that they go often into the market where herbs are sold, as Reddish, Lettuce, coleworts, and such like stuff, and those that are liberal to the Elephant, do use to throw something before him. Among the rest there was one Herb wife which always used to throw something of her wares before the Elephant. Now when the time came on that the Elephant groweth mad, as I said before, they use to go with them three or four days or a week about the streets before they bind them up, (being as then but half mad) to ask something of every body for the feeding of the mad Elephant in the winter time. And going thus about the streets, the master is not able to rule him, for he runneth about with his head downward, and by his roaring giveth the people warning to beware, and when he findeth or seeth no man, he leapeth and overthroweth whatsoever he meeteth withal, whereby he● maketh great sport and pastime, much like to the baiting of Oxen in Spain, which never ceaseth, until one, two, or more of them be slain, the like rule is kept with the mad Elephant in India. It chanced in this running about, that the Elephhnt ran through the streets, and in haste at unwares came into the market, throwing down all that was in his way, whereat every man was abashed, and leaving their ware, ran to save themselves from being over run by the Elephant, and by means of the noise and press of people, they fell one over another, as in such cases is commonly seen. Among them was this woman, that always used to give the Elephant some thing to eat, which had a little child in the market lying by her in a basket, and by the hasty rising up and throng of the people, the woman ran into a house, not having time to snatch up her Child, and take it with her, and when the Elephant was alone in the market place, where he roared up and down, overthrowing all things that were before him, he came by the child (that as I said) lay still in the market, and as every man looked, specially the mother, which cried out, & verily thought that the Elephant had taken it and cast it on his shoulder and spoilt it as he did all other things. He on the contrary notwithstanding all his madness, being mindful of the good will and liberality of the child's mother daily used unto him, took up the child handsomely and tenderly with his snout, and laid it softly upon a stall by a shop side, which done, he began again to use the same order of stamping, crying, and clapping as he had done at the first, to the great wondering of all that beheld it, specially to the ease and joy of the mother, that had recovered her child sound and well again. These and such like examples do often happen in India, which would be too long to rehearse, and therefore I thought good only to set these three or four before your eyes, as things worthy memory, thereby to teach us to be mindful of all good deeds done unto us, and with thankfulness to requite them, considering that these dumb beasts do show, us as it were in a glass, that we should do so as they do, not only when they have their sense and understanding, but (which is more to be wondered at) when they are out of their wits & stark mad: whereas men many times having all their understanding, and their five wits sound, do cast the benefits, which they have received behind their backs, yea, and at this day do reward all good deeds with unthankfulness, God amend it. The 47. Chapter. Of the Abadas or Rhinoceros. THe Abada or Rhinoceros is not in India, but only in Bengala, and Patane. They are less and lower than the Elephant. It hath a short horn upon the nole, in the hinder part somewhat big, & toward the end sharper, of a brown blue, and whitish colour, it hath a snout like a hog, and the skin upon the upper part of his body is all wrinkled, as if it were armed with Shields or Targets. It is a great enemy of the Elephant. Some think it is the right Unicorn, because that as yet there hath no other been found, but only by hearsay, and by the pictures of them. The Portugese's and those of Bengala affirm, that by the River Ganges in the Kingdom of Bengala, are many of these Rhinoceros, which when they will drink, the other beasts stand and wait upon them, till the Rhinoceros hath drink, & thrust their horn into the water, for he cannot drink but his horn must be under the water, because it standeth so close unto his nose, and muzzle: and then after him all the other beasts do drink. Their horns in India are much esteemed and used against all venom, poison, and many other diseases: likewise his teeth, claws, flesh, skin and blood, and his very dung and water and all whatsoever is about him, is much esteemed in India, and used for the curing of many diseases and sicknesses, which is very good and most true, as I myself by experience have found, but it is to be understood, that all Rhinocerotes are not a like good, for there are some whose horns are sold for one, two, or three hundred Pardawes the piece, and there are others of the same colour and greatness that are sold but for three or four Pardawes, which the Indians know and can discern. The cause is that some Rhinocerotes, which are found in certain places in the country of Bengala have this virtue, by reason of the herbs which that place only yieldeth and bringeth forth, which in other places is not so, and this estimation is not only held of the horn, but of all other things in his whole body, as I said before. There are also by Malacca, Zion, and Bengala some goats that are wild, whose horns are esteemed for the best horns against poison, and all venom that may be found: they are called Cabras de Mato, that is, wild Goats. These horns are of great account in India, and much esteemed, and are oftentimes by experience found to be very good, whereof I myself am a good witness, having proved the same. In the year 1581. as king Philip was at Lisbon, there was a Rhinoceros and an Elephant brought him out of India for a present, and he caused them both to be led with him unto Madril, where the Spanish Court is holden. This shall suffice as touching beasts and birds in those countries, although there are many others which are not so well known: therefore I have here set down none but such as are daily seen there in the land, and well known by every man in the country. The 48. Chapter. Of the Fishes and other beasts in the Seas of India. FIsh in India is very plentiful, and some very pleasant and sweet. The best Fish is called Mordexiin, Pampano, and Tatiingo. There is a fish called Piexe Serra, which is cut in round pieces as we cut Salmon, and salt it. It is very good, and will endure long to carry over sea in ships for victuals. Most of their fish is eaten with rice, that they seeth in broth which they put upon the rice, and is somewhat sour, as if it were sodden in gooseberries, or unripe grapes, but it tasteth well, and is called Car●iil, which is their daily meat, the rice is in stead of bread: there are also good Shads, Soles, and other sorts of fishes. The Garnaten is the best & greatest that ever I saw any, for that with a dozen of them a man may make a good meal. The Crabs and Crevishes are very good and marvelous great, that it is a wonder to tell, and that which is more wonderful, when the moon is in the full, here with us it is a common saying, that then Crabs, and crevishes are at the best, but there it is clean contrary: for with a full moon they are empty and out of season, and with a new moon good and full. There are also muscles and such like shelfishes of many sorts, oysters very many, specially at Cochin; & from thence to the cape de Comoriin. Fish in India is very good cheap, for the with the value of a s●iuers of their money, a man may buy as much fish and rice to it, as will serve five or six men for a good meal, after the Spanish manner, which is very good cheap, in respect of their victuals in Spain and Portugal. There is in the rivers and also in the Sea along the coast of India great store of fishes, which the Portingalls call Tubaron or Hayen. This fish doth great mischief, and devoureth many men that fish for pearls, and therefore they dare not swim in the rivers for fear of these fishes, but do use to bathe themselves in cisterns, made for the same purpose, as I said before. As our ship lay in the River of Cochin, ready to sail from thence to Portugal, it happened that as we were to hang on our rutter, which as then was mended, the master of the ship, with 4 or 5. sailors, went with the Boat to put it on, and an other Sailor being made fast with a cord about his middle, and tied to the Ship, hung down with half his body into the water to place the same upon the hooks, and while he hung in the water, there came one of those Hayens, and bitten one of his legs, to the middle of his thigh, clean off at a bit, notwithstanding that the Master stroke at him with an oar, and as the poor man was putting down his arm to feel his wound, the same Fish at the second time for another bit did bite off his hand and arm above the elbow, and also a piece of his buttucke. The Master and all the Sailors in the Boat not being able to help him, although they both stroke and flung at it with staves and oars, and in that miserable case the poor man was carried into the Hospital, where we left him with small hope of life, and how he sped after that, God knoweth, for the next day we set sail and put to Sea. These and such like chances happen daily by those fishes in India, as well in the sea, as in the Rivers, specially among the Fishers for Pearls, whereof many lose their lives. In the River of Goa in Winter time when the mouth of the River was shut up, as commonly at that time it is, the fishermen took a fish of a most wonderful and strange form, such as I think was never seen either in India, or in any other place, which for the strangeness thereof was presented to my Lord the Archbishop, the picture whereof by his commandment was painted, and for a wonder sent to the King of Spain. It was in bigness as great as a middle sized Dog with a snout like a hog, small eyes, no ears, but two holes where his ears should be, it had four feet like an Elephant, the tail beginning somewhat upon the back broad, and then flat, and at the very end round and somewhat sharp. It ran a a long the hall upon the flore, and in every place of the house snorting like a hog. The whole body, head, tail, & legs being covered with s●ales of a thumb breadth, harder than Iron, or steel: We hewed and laid upon them with weapons, as if men should beat upon an Anvil, and when we struck upon him, he rolled himself in a heap, head and feet altogether, so that he lay like a round ball, we not being able to judge where he closed himself together, neither could we with any instrument or strength of hands open him again, but letting him alone and not touching him, he opened himself and ran away as I said before. And because I am now in hand with Fishes of India, I will here declare a short and true History of a Fish, although to some it may seem incredible, but it standeth painted in the viceroys Palace in India, and was set down by true and credible witnesses that it was so, and therefore it standeth there for memory of a wonderful thing, together with the names and surnames of the ship, Captain day, & year when it was done, and as yet there are many men living at this day, that were in the same ship and adventure, for that it is not long since, and it was thus. That a ship sailing from Mosambique into India, and they having fair weather, a good fore wind, as much as the Sails might bear before the wind for the space of fourteen days together, directing their course towards the Equinoctial line, every day as they took the height of the Sun, in stead of diminishing or lessening their degrees, according to the Wind and course they had and held, they found themselves still contrary, and every day further backwards than they were, to the great admiration and wondering of them all, and contrary to all reason and man's understanding, so that they did not only wonder theraf, but were much abashed being steadfastly persuaded that they were bewitched, for they knew very well by experience, that the stream or course of the water in those countries did not drive them back, nor withhold them contrary to all Art of Navigation, whereupon they were all in great perplexity and fear, standing still and beholding each other, not once knowing the cause thereof. At the last the chief Boteson whom they call the master's mate, looking by chance overbord towards the beakhead of the ship, he espied a great broad tail of a Fish that had wound itself as it were about the beakhead the body thereof being under the keel, and the head under the Ruther, swimming in that manner, and drawing the ship with her against the wind and their right course: whereby presently they knew the cause of their so going backwards: so that having at the last stricken long with staves and other weapons upon the fishes tail, in the end they struck it off, and thereby the fish left the ship▪ after it had lain 14 days under the same, drawing the ship with it against wind and weather: for which cause the Viceroy in Goa caused it to be painted in his palace for a perpetual memory, where I have often read it, with the day and time, and the name both of the ship and Captain, which I can not well remember, although it be no great matter. There are many other fishes in those seas and rivers. In the River of Bengala called G●a●, and by Malacca there are Crocodiles, and other sea Serpents of an unspeakable greatness, which often times do overturn small fisher boats and other sentes, and devour the men that are therein: and some of them creeping out of the water unto the land do snatch up divers men, which they hale after them, and then kill them and eat them, as it daily happeneth in those Countries. There are by Malacca certain fish shells found on the shore, much like Scalop shells, so great and so heavy that two strong men have enough to do with a Leaver to draw one of them after them. Within them there is a fish which they of Malacca do eat. There were some of those shells in the ballast of the ship that came from Malacca, & kept company with us from the Island of S. H●len●, to the Island of Tercera, where the ship was cast away, and some of the shells taken out of her, which the jesuits of Malacca had sent unto Lisbon, to set in the walls of their church and Cloister, which they there had caused to be made, and most sumptuously built. The like happened to a ship called S. Peter, that sailed from Co● towards Portugal, that fell upon a sand, which at this day is called after the same ships name S. Peter's sand lying from Goa South Southeast under 6. degrees upon the South side, where it was cast away, but all the men saved themselves, and of the wood of the ship that was cast away, they made a small Bark or Carvel, wherewith they all arrived in India: & while they were busied about building of their ship, they found such great Crabs upon that sand, and in so great numbers, that they were constrained to make a sconce, and by good watch to defend themselves from them, for that they were of an unreasonable greatness, so that whomsoever they got under their claws, it cost him his life: this is most true and not long since done, for that in the same ship wherein I came out of India into Portugal, there were two of the Sailors that had been in the same ship called S. Peter, and affirmed it for a truth, as it is likewise painted in divers places in Goa, for a perpetual memory, which I thought good to set down, to show the strangeness of those fishes: and it is to be thought that there are many other fishes and sea monsters, as yet to us not known, which are daily found by such as continually use to sea, and do often meet with them. And this shall be sufficient for the fishes & sea monsters of India. The 49. Chapter Of all fruits, trees, plants, and common herbs in India, and first of a certain fruit called Ananas. Ananas' by the Canarijns called Ananasa, Anno●. D. P. by the Brasilians Nana, and by others in Hispaniola jaiama: by the Spaniards in Brasilia Pinas, because of a certain resemblance which the fruit hath with the Pineapple. It cometh out of the Province of Sancta Croce, first brought into Bra●lia, them to the Spanish Indies, and afterwards into the East Indies, where now they grow in great abundance, of the bigness of Citrons, or of a common Melon. They are of a fair colour, of a yellow green, which greennes when it is ripe vadeth away. It is sweet in taste, & pleasant in smell, like to an Abricot, so that by the very smell of them a man may know the houses wherein these fruits are kept. A far off they show like Artichokes, but they have no such sharp pricks on their leaves: the plants or stalks whereon they grow are as big as a Thistle, and have a root also like a Thistle, whereon groweth but one Nut in the middle of the stalk, and round about it certain small stalks whereon some fruit likewise doth often times grow. I have had some of the Slips here in my garden, that were brought me out of Brasilia, but our cold country could not brook them. This fruit is hot and moist, and is eaten out of wine like a Peach, light of disgesture, but superfluous in nourishing: It inflameth and heateth, and consumeth the gums; by reason of the small threads that run through it. There are many sorts of this fruit among the Brasilians, which according to the difference of their speeches have likewise different names, whereof three kinds are specially named and written of. The first called jaiama, which is the longest & the best of taste, and the substance of it yellow. The second Bomama, that is white within, and not very sweet of taste. The third jaiagna, which is whitish within, and tasteth like Rhenish Wine. These fruits likewise do grow some of themselves as if they were planted, and are called wild Ananasses, and some grow in gardens, whereof we now make mention. The wild grow upon stalks of the length of a pike or Spear, round, and of the bigness of an Orange, full of thorns: the leaves likewise have sharp pricks, and round about full of soft 〈…〉 the fruit is little eaten, although they are of an indifferent pleasant taste. The whole plants with the roots are full of juice, which being taken about seven or eight of the clock in a morning, and drunk with Sugar, is holden for a most certain remedy against the heat of the liver and the kidneys, against exulcerated kidneys, mattery water and excoriation of the yard. The Arabians commend it to be good against Saint Anthony's fire, and call it Queura. He that is desirous to read more hereof, let him read Costa in the proper Chapter of Ananas, and Ou●edius in the eight book, and eighteenth Chapter: and Thevetius in his observations of America, in the six and fortieth Chapter. Ananas' preserved in Sugar are like Cocumbers, whereof I have had many. Ananas' is one of the best fruits, and of best taste in all India, but it is not a proper fruit of India itself, but a 〈…〉 fruit, for it was first brought by the portingales out of Brasill●, so that at the 〈◊〉 it ● is sold for a novelty, at a 〈…〉, and sometimes more, but now there are so many grown in the Country, that they are very good cheap. The time when they are ripe is in Lent, for than they are best and sweetest of taste. They are as big as a Melon, and in form like the head of a Distaff, without like a Pine apple, but soft in cutting: of colour red and greenish: They grow about half a fathom high from the ground▪ not much more or less. the leaves are like the Herb that is brought out of Spain, called Aloe, or Semper viva, because it is always green, and therefore it is hanged on the beams of houses, but somewhat smaller, and at the ends somewhat sharp, as if they were cut out. When they eat them, they pull off the shell, and cut them into she's or pieces, as men desire to have them dressed. Some have small kernels within them, like the kernels of Apples or Pears. They are of colour within like a Peach, that is ripe, and almost of the same taste, but in sweetness they surpass all fruits. The juice thereof is like sweet Must, or new Rhenish Wine: a man can never satisfy himself therewith. It is very hot of nature, for if you let a knife stick in it but half an hour long, when you draw it forth again, it will be half eaten up, yet it doth no particular hurt, unless a man should eat so much thereof, that he surfeit upon them, as many such greedy and unreasonable men there are, which eat all things without any measure or discretion. The sick are forbidden to use them. The common way to dress the common Ananasses, is to cut them in broad round cakes or slyces, and so being stooped in wine, it is a very pleasant meat. The 50. Chapter. O● jaqua or jaacca. THis fruit groweth in calicut, and in some other places of India, near to the Sea, Anno●a. D. Pa●l. and upon rivers or waters sides. It is a certain fruit that in Malabar is called jaca, in Canara and Gusurate, Panar and Panasa, by the Arabians, Panax, by the Persians, Fanax. This fruit groweth upon great trees, not out of the branches like other fruits, but out of the body of the tree, above the earth, and under the leaves. The leaves are as big as a man's hand, greenish, with a thick hard vein that goeth clean through the length of them. The smallest of this fruit, specially that which groweth in Malabar, and is the best of all, is greater than our greatest Pumpians, (I mean of Portugal.) They are without covered with a hard shell, of colour green, otherwise it is much like the Pine apple, save only that the shell or husk seemeth to be set full of pointed Diamonds, which have certain green and short hooks at the ends, but at the very points are blackish, and yet are neither sharp not pricking although they seem so to be. These fruits are like Melons, and sometimes greater, outwardly green, and inwardly Yellow, with many soft prickles, appareled (as it were) like a Hedgehog. Those that grow in Goa are not so good, nor of so good a taste as those in Malabar. This fruit being ripe, which is commonly in December, smelleth very sweet, and is of two sorts, whereof the best is called Barca, the other Papa, which is not so good, and yet in handling it is soft like the other. The best cost about 40. marvedies, which is somewhat more than a Ryall of plate, and being ripe they are of a blackish colour, and with a hard husk, the outward part thereof which compasseth the Nut, is of many tastes, some times it tasteth like a Melon, sometimes like a Peach, and somewhat pleasanter, (but in taste it is most like unto the Peach) sometimes like a Honey Combe, sometimes like a Citron, but they are hard to digest, & do commonly come up again out of the stomach undigested, even as they were eaten. This fruit being cut up and opened longwise in the middle, is white within, and full of meat, with many partitions full of long Nuts, thicker and greater than Dates, with a grey s●n, the Nut white, like our Chestnuts. Being green they eat earthy, and sharp of taste, and engender much Wine, but being roasted or sudden they are like our Chestnuts & are very pleasant▪ they increase lust, for the which cause they are most used to be eaten: They stop the Flux of the belly, the skin about them is heavy for the maw, and corrupting therein, doth breed many evil and pestilent humours, whereof such as eat much of this fruit, do easily get the Plague, which the Indians call Morxi. He that desireth to see more hereof, let him Read Lodovicus Romanus, in his fifth Book and fifteen Chapter of his Navigations, and Christopherus a Costa in his Cap. of jaca, & Gracia ab Horto, in the second book and fourth Chapter. jaaca grow on great trees like Nut trees, & only on the sea shores, that is to say, in such countries as border on the seas, clean contrary unto all other fruits, for they grow above the earth, upon the trunks or bodies of the trees, & upon the great thick branches, but where the branches spread abroad, being small and full of leaves, there groweth none: they are as big as a great Melon, and much like it of fashion, although some of them are as great as a man can well lift up, and outwardly are like the Ananas, but smother, and of a dark green colour, the fruit within is in husks, like chestnuts, but of an other form, and every husk hath a Nut, which is half white, the rest yealowish, and sticketh to a man's hands like honey, when it is in the beehyves among the wax, and for toughness & in taste for sweetness not much unlike. The fruit is on the out side like a Chesnutte, and in form or fashion like an acorn, when the green knob that groweth under it is taken away, and of that bigness and some what bigger: this fruit that is outmost being eaten, the rest is good to be roasted or sodden, and are not much unlike in taste to the Chestnuts of Europa. There are of these husks in every jaacca a hundredth and more, according to the greatness thereof. There are two sorts of them, the best are called Girasal, and the common and least esteemed, Chambasal, although in fashion and trees there is no difference, save that the Girasals have a sweeter taste. By this name Girasal & Chambasal, the Indians do make difference of their Rice, and other things: they call the best Girasal and the worst Chambasal, after the which names they have their prices: the jaaccas continue all the year. The 51. Chapter. Of Mangas. MAngas grow upon great trees like jaca trees, they have many branches, and are of quantity as big as a great Goose Egg, Annota. D. Pall. and in some places of India do weigh two pounds, and more the piece. And many times there are of several colours upon one tree, some being a light green, others Yellow, & some a reddish green, and for smell and taste pleasant, and not being perished, are of better taste than any Peach. As touching their name, they are commonly called Mangas, in Canarijn Ambo, of the Turks and Persians, Amba. They bear fruit upon the trees, from April to November, according to the situation of the place, they grow in many places, but the best in Ormus, where before all other fruits they are desired, next unto them are those that grow in Gusarate, which for their goodness are called Gusarates, they are smaller than the other, but of better taste & savour, within they have a small Nut, or kernel. A third sort there is that groweth in Balagatte, and those are the greatest, for there are of them that weigh two pound & a quarter, of a very pleasant taste. Even so are those that grow in Charanna, Quindor, Madanagor, and Dultabado, being the chief towns in the kingdom of Nisamoxa, and like unto them are the Mangas of Bengala, Pegu, and Malacca. The shell of them being taken off, is eaten in slices with wine▪ and also without Wine, as we eat Peaches, they are also preserved; the better to keep them, either in Sugar, Vinegar, Oil, or Salt, like Olives in Spain, and being a little opened with a Knife, they are stuffed with green Ginger, headed Garlic, Mustard or such like, they are sometimes eaten only with Salt, and sometimes sodden with Rice, as we do Olives, and being thus conserved and sodden, are brought to sell in the market. This fruit is cold and moist, although commonly they esteem it to be hot, & say, it engendereth a pain and griping in the maw, of such as eat it, and more over the Heathen Physicians say, it is hot, and reject, or refuse it, because it engendereth Saint Anthony's fire, Carbuncles, hot burning Fevers, and swellings, with scabs and scuruines: which I think happeneth to men that eat this fruit, and being eaten, lieth corrupted in their Maws, or rather by reason of the great heat and season of the year. At the time when this fruit is ripe, many do fall into the forenamed diseases, although they eat none of this fruit. Before this fruit is fully ripe, it is somewhat hard of taste, specially the inner part next to the Nut, but being ripe, very sweet and savoury. The Nut that is within it, hath a hard husk or shell, with hard threads about it, wherein groweth a long Nut, as big as an acorn, white within, and outwardly covered with a thin white skin. Being raw it is bitter of taste, therefore it is good against worms, and looseness of the belly: against worms when it is eaten raw, and against looseness of the belly when it is roasted, and then it tasteth like a roasted acorn. There is an other kind of this fruit without stones which is very pleasant. There is also a third sort, which is wild, called Mangas Bravas, and is very poison, wherewith they poison each other, for whosoever eateth but a small quantity thereof, dieth presently. They do sometime mingle Oil with it, to make it stronger, and being taken in that sort, howsoever it be, it killeth very quickly, and as yet there was never any remedy found against it. This fruit is light green, and somewhat bright, full of white milky juice, and but a little meat. The Nut is covered with a hard shell as big as a Quince. Mangas groweth upon trees like jaaca trees: they are as big as a great Peach, but somewhat long, and a little crooked, of colour clear, green, somewhat yealowish, and some times reddish: it hath within it a stone bigger than a Peach stone, but it is not good to be eaten: the Mangas is inwardly yealowish, but in cutting it is waterish, yet some not so much: they have a very pleasant taste, better than a Peach, and like the Annanas, which is the best & the most profitable fruit in all India, for it yieldeth a great quantity for food & sustenance of the country people, as Olives do in Spain and Portugal: they are gathered when they are green, and conserved, and for the most part salted in pots, and commonly used to be eaten with Rice, sodden in pure water, the husk being whole, and so eaten with salt Mangas, which is the continual food for their slaves and common people, or else salt dried fish in steed of Mangas, without bread, for Rice is in divers places in steed of bread. These salted Mangas are in cutting like the white Spanish Olives, and almost of the same taste, but somewhat savoury and not so bitter, yet a little sour, and are in so great abundance, that it is wonderful: there are others that are salted and stuffed with small pieces of green Ginger, and Garlic sodden: those they call Mangas Recheadas or Machar: they are likewise much used, but not so common as the other, for they are costly and more esteemed: these are kept in pots with Oil and Vinegar salted. The season when Mangas are ripe is in Lent, and continueth till the month of August. The 52. Chapter. Of Caions. THis fruit groweth on great trees, not much unlike Apple trees (but the young trees have leaves, like Laurel or Bayleaves) they are of a pale green and thick, with white blossoms like Orange trees, but thicker of leaves, yet not so sweet of smell. The fruit is in greatness and form like a Goose Egg, or a great Apple, very yellow & of good savour, moist or spongy within, and full of juice, like Lemons, but without kernels: sweet of taste, but yet harsh in a man's throat, they seem not to have been common in East India, but brought thither from Brasillia, where those Nuts are much eaten, although Thevet in his description of America (61. Chapter) writeth otherwise. At the end of this fruit groweth a Nut, of form like the Kydney of a Hare, whereof I had many brought me by a Pilot of Portugal of an Ash colour, or when they are ripe of a reddish Ash colour. These Nuts have two partitions, between which two partitions, there is a certain spongeous fatty matter like Oil, hot and sharp, but in the innermost part thereof is a white kernel very pleasant to eat, like Pistaccios, with a grey skin over it, which is pulled off. These Nuts being a little roasted are eaten in that sort, & used to provoke lust. The fruit and also the Nuts are used in banquets, being eaten with wine & without wine, because of their good taste. They are good for the weakness of the Maw, and against perbreaking, and loathing of meat, but such as will not use them to that end, do eat them only dipped or steeped in a little water, the sharp Oil between both the partitions is very good for Saint Anthony's fire, and flashing in men's faces. The Brasilians use it against scurfs, this tree was at the first planted of the very Nut but the first and greatest fruit, had neither seed nor kernel, some think it to be a kind of Anacardy, because it is very like it, for the sharp juice that is between the partitions. Read more hereafter in Carolus Clusius his observations upon Graciam. (first Book and third Chapter.) Cajus groweth on trees like apple trees, and are of the bigness of a Pear, at one end by the stalk somewhat sharp, and at the head thicker, of a yellowish colour, being ripe they are soft in handling: they grow very like apples, for where the apples have a stalk, these Cajus have a Chestnut, as big as the fore joint of a man's thumb: they have an other colour and fashion then the Chestnuts of jaqua, and are better & more savoury to eat, but they must be roasted: within they are white like the Chestnuts of Europa, but have thicker shells, which are of colour bluish and dark green. When they are raw and unroasted, you must not open them with your mouth, for as soon as you put them to your mouth, they make both your tongue and your lips to smart, whereby such as know it not are deceived: wherefore you must open their shells with a knife, or roast them, and then they will péele. This fruit at the end where the stalk groweth, in the eating doth work in a man's throat, and maketh it swell, yet it is of a fine taste, for it is moist and full of juice, they are commonly cut in round slices, and laid in a dish with water or wine, and salt thrown upon them, for so they do not work so strongly, but are very good and savoury to eat: the time when they are ripe is in Lent, and in Winter time, like Mangas, but not so good as Mangas or Ananas, and of less account. They are likewise in great numbers over all India. The 53. Chapter. Of jambos. IN India there is an other fruit that for the beauty, pleasant taste, Annota. D. P. smell, and medicinable virtue thereof, is worthy to be written of, and is of great account in India, being first brought out of Malacca into India. The tree whereon this fruit groweth, is as great as the greatest Orange tree in all Spain, with many branches which spread very broad, and make much shadow, and is fair to behold. The body and great branches thereof have an ash colour-gray bark, the leaves are fair & soft, longer than the breadth of a hand, they are somewhat like the point of a Spear or Pike, with a thick thread or vein in the middle, and many small veins or branches in the sides: outwardly very green; and inwardly somewhat bleaker, with blossoms of a lively dark Purple colour, with many streekes in the middle, very pleasant to behold, and of taste like the twynings or tendrils of a Vine. The fruit is as big as a Pear, or (as some are of opinion) of the bigness and colour of a great Spanish Wal-nut, they took their name of a King. Theridamas are two sorts of this fruit, one a brown red, seeming as though it were black, most part without stones, and more savoury than the other which is a palered, or a pale Purple colour, with a lively smell of Roses, and within it hath a little white hard stone not very round, much like a Peach stone, white, and covered with a rough skin. This is not full so great as the other, yet are they both fit for such as have dainty and liquorous mouths. They smell like sweet Roses▪ they are cold and moist, and altogether soft, covered with a thin Rind, which cannot be taken off with a knife. The jambos tree taketh deep root, & within four years after it is set, doth bear fruit, and that many times in one year, and is never without fruit or blossoms, for that commonly every branch hath both ripe and unripe fruit, and blossoms all at once, contrary to the nature of all other trees: and every day as the blossoms fall (whereby the earth under it seemeth to be painted red) there grow new on, and when some of the fruit begin to grow, than others are almost ripened, and others being ripe are greater. The tree being lightly shaken, the ripe fruit falleth easily off, by reaching the neither bows. This fruit is ordinarily eaten, before other meat be set upon the Table, and also at all times of the day. The Malabares and Canarijns, call this fruit jamboli, the Portugese's inhabiting there, jambos, the Arabians, Tupha Indi, the Persians Tuphat: the Turks Alma, the trees are called by the Portugese's jambeiro. The blossoms and the fruit are conserved with Sugar, and are used for hot Agues to c●le man's thirst. The trees whereon the jambos do grow are as great as Plumtrees, and very like unto them: it is an excellent and a very pleasant fruit to look on, as big as an apple: it hath a red colour and somewhat whitish, so clear and pure that it seemeth to be painted or made of wax: it is very pleasant to eat, and smelleth like Rose water, it is white within, and in eating moist and waterish, it is a most dainty fruit, as well for beauty to the sight, as for the sweet savour and taste: it is a fruit that is never forbidden to any sick person▪ as other fruits are, but are freely given unto sick men to eat, that have a desire thereunto, for it can do no hurt. The blossoms are likewise very fair to the sight, and have a sweet smell: they are red and somewhat whitish of colour. This tree beareth fruit three or four times every year, and which is more wonderful, it hath commonly on the one side or half of the tree ripe jambos, and the leaves fallen off, and on the other side or half it hath all the leaves, and beginneth again to blossom, and when that side hath fruit, and that the leaves fall off, than the other side beginneth again to have leaves, and to blossom, and so it continueth all the year long: within they have a stone as great (and very near of the same fashion) as the fruit of the Cipres tree. The 54. Chapter. Of other fruits in India. THere is a fruit called jangomas, which groweth on trees like Cherry trees: they are in bigness like small round plums of a dark red colour, they have no stones in them, but some small kernels: they are of taste much like plums, whereof there are very many, but not much esteemed of. Annota. D. Pall. The fruit jangomas groweth on a tree not unlike in greatness and fashion to our Plum trees, as also in leaves and white blossoms, save only that these trees are full of Prickles or thorns, they grow of themselves in every place, & also in gardens at Bachaim, Chaul and Balequala, the fruits are like Sorben small and round, they are harsh in the throat like slows or unripe Plums, and have no stone within them, but some small kernels, when they come first out, they are like Pistaccios. The fruit being ripe, must first be bruised and crushed with men's fingers, before it can be eaten, yet it looseth thereby none of his virtue of binding, and therefore they are thought good to stop the Flux withal, although they are but little esteemed by the Indians. They say, that this fruit is eaten by certain fowls, and being voided out again & set in the ground together with the same Birds dung, it will grow the sooner and be the fruitfuller. There is an other fruit called Carambolas, which hath 8 corners, as big as a small apple, sour in eating, like unripe plums, and most used to make Conserves. The fruit which the Malabares and Portugese's call Carambolas, is in Decan called Camarix, in Canar, Anno● D. 〈◊〉. Camarix and Carabeli: in Malaio, Bolumba, and the Persians Chamaroch. It groweth on trees that are like Quince-trees, having leaves greater and longer than our appletrees, very green and bitter of taste, with small blossoms, of five leaves a piece, reddish without any white, and of no special smell, but fair to the eye, and of taste like Sorrell. The fruit is like a great Hond●s obey, long and yellow, and as if it were parted into four parts, the cods are somewhat deep, & press the fruit together, in the middle they have some small kernels, which for the sharp taste are pleasant to eat. This fruit is conserved in Sugar, & much eaten in medicines, and with meat. The ripe are used for hot Fevers, in steed of Sirop of Vinegar, which we use in these countries. The Canarijns use the juice with other medicines, there growing which are mixed with it, to make colours thereof, wherewith they take spots and blemishes out of men's eyes. Costa writeth that he knew a midwife in India, which used this fruit dried and beaten to powder, with Bettele leaves, to make women to avoid their dead fruit out of their wombs, this fruit is al●o kept in pickle, because it is pleasing to the taste, and procureth an appetite. There are yet other fruits, as Brindoijns, Durijndois, Iamboloe●, Mangestains, and other such like fruits, but because they are of small account, I think it not requisite to write severally of them, but only of two of them. Annota. D. Pall Fructuum Mangas, Cajus, jambos, jaquas, et Annanas, qui in India nascuntur, qui esusuaves, et Zimziberis, cujus e copia magna illic vilitas, virentis viva imago. Die fruyten die in Indien wassen en seer lieffelick zyn am te eaten als Mangas▪ Cajus▪ jambos▪ jaquas. en Annanas met die Gember welcke am der menichte weynich geacht is affconterfeytinge naert leeven gelyck die staen en wassen. The Barks of these trees are kept and brought over sea hither and are good to make Vinegar withal, as some Portugese's have done. Of the fruit called jambolijns. The trees that bear this fruit, have a bark like Lentiscus or the Mastic tree to the show much like a Myrtle, Annota. ●. Pall. but in leaves, like the Arbutus of Italy. It groweth of itself in the wild fields, the fruit is like great ripe Olives of Cordova, and harsh in a man's throat. This fruit is little used by Physicians, but is much kept in pickle, and eaten with sodden Rice, for they procure an appetite to meat, but this fruit (as also jaka) is by the Indians not accounted among wholesome fruits. There is also a fruit that came out of the Spanish Indies, brought from beyond the Philippinas or Lusons' to Malacca, & from thence to India, it is called Papaios, and is very like a Melon, as big as a man's fist, and will not grow, but always two together, that is male and female: the male tree never yieldeth any fruit, but only the female, and when they are divided, & set apart one from the other, than they yield no fruit at all. It is a tree of the height of a man, with great leaves. This fruit at the first for the strangeness thereof was much esteemed, but now they account not of it. There are likewise in India some fig trees of Portugal, although the fruit doth never come to good perfection. Oranges, Lemons, Citrons, and such like fruit, are throughout all India in great abundance, and for goodness and taste surpass those of Spain. Grapes are not there to be found, but only upon some houses, as we have them in netherland: yet against Christmas and Lent, there are raisins brought into Goa, by the Decanaes' and Indians out of the firm land, and from Ballagate, but they are not so good as those in Spain, and very few they are, but for price as good cheap as other fruits. There are also in India many Melons, but not so good as those in Spain, for that they must be eaten with Sugar, if you will have any sweetness in them: but there is an other sort like Melons, called Patecas or Angurias, or Melons of India, which are outwardly of a dark green colour, inwardly white with black kernels: they are very waterish and hard to bite, and so moist, that as a man eateth them, his mouth is full of water, but yet very sweet, and very cold and fresh meat, wherefore many of them are eaten after dinner to cool men. Cucumbers and Radishes are there in great numbers, also Coleworts, but not so good as in Europa, for the Coleworts never grow to their full growth, but are lose with their leaves open. They have likewise some salad herbs, but very little: herbs whereof men make Porridge are not there to be had, nor many sweet smelling herbs nor flowers, as Roses, lilies, rosemary, or such like sorts of flowers & plants there are none, yet they have some few Roses, and a little Rosemary, but of no great smell. The fields never have any other flowers in them, but only grass, and that is in Winter when it raineth, for in Summer it is clean burnt off with the exceeding heat of the Sun. There is only a kind of blossoms of trees, which grow all the year long, called full, that smell very sweet: the women do ordinarily throw them among their Linen and apparel to make them sweet. They likewise make Collars or strings full of them, which they wear about their necks, and strew them in their beds, for they are very desirous of sweet savours, for other sorts of sweet flowers & herbs, whereof thousands are found in Europe, they are not in India to be had: so that when you tell them of the sweet flowers and herbs of these countries, they wonder much thereat, and are very desirous of them. By these pictures you may see the form and fashions of the fruits called jaacka, Ananas, Mangas, Caius, & jambos, which are the five principallest & most esteemed fruits in all India, for others are but of small account: of Ginger also as it groweth, whereof in an other place I will say more, when I make mention of the spices and dry wares of India: all which are set down according to the life, although the leaves are not altogether so proportionable with their strings and veins, as they should be, or as the Physicians and Doctors in their Herbals have described them, having only showed the form and growth of the fruits, as I have seen and used them, The 55. Chapter. Of the Indian Figs. Nuces Indicae, magni in India usus et ques tuosae, cibum et potum homi nibus suaves et navibus materiam prebent idon●am quibus e aedem et onerantur et aluntur nautae Indiaensche nooten oft Palmboomen welcke in Indien veel opbren gen want given soete spijs en dranck▪ stoff tot scheepen▪ sensen en touwen en daer die selffde scheepen met gelaeden en die schip luyden meed gevoet werden▪ Ficus Indica per totum annum ferens fruct● cop●ose ●entes quotidianam multo rum escam▪ E'en plant draegende het qeheele jaer vruch●n. d●●men India●nsche vygen no●▪ seer vo●den● en ●en daegelickse spijse der Indianen. Fructuum icon quos Arrecca sive Faufel vocant▪ et Bettele folia, quos pauco calcis subactos integrum diem masticant▪ succum deglutientes ad corporis purgationem aliasque utilitates. Eruyten diemen Arrecca oft Faufel noemt en die blaeden Bet tell, welcke met what calcks vermen●t die Indianen e'en gant schen dach kauwen het say doorswelgen am ●lichaem te purge ren en ander haerder crachten. Piperis frute● haederae non absimilis. Orientaelsche Peeper wasschen de ●inuer cruyt niet ongelyck Indian Figs are by the Arabians called Moris and not Musa, not Amusa, and the tree Daracht Moris, ●nnota. D. Pall. by the Brasilians Pacona, and the tree Paquover, by Brocardus in his description of the holy land, Paradise Apples, by Ou●edus in the History of India, in his eight Book and first Chapter Platanus, in Guinea Bananas, in Malavar Patan, in Malayen Pican, in Canara, Decan, Gusurate, and Bengala, Quelli, Auicenna, Serapio, and Rhasis have likewise written certain Chapters hereof. Auicenna in his second Book and 491. Chapter, writing of the properties and qualities of this fruit, sayeth, that it yieldeth but small sustenance, that it engendereth Choler and Phlegm, and that it spoileth the stomach, wherefore he counseleth such as are of a hot constitution, after they have eaten these Figs, to take some Honey and Vinegar, sodden together with cold seeds. They are good against heat in the stomach, Lungs, and Kydnies, and provoke Urine. Rhasis, of the same in his third Book of Physic, and twenty Chapter, saith also, that they are hurtful for the maw, which I also found being in Syrie, when I used them, they make men to have an evil appetite to their meat, & a desire to ease their bodies, and do qualify the rawness of the throat. Serapio in his Book of Physic in the 84. Chapter saith, that this fruit is in the end of the first degree warming, and moistening, and that they are good against the heat of the stomach and Lungs, but for him which eateth many of them, they breed a heaviness in his Maw, but by means of their hast●e ripening, they are good for the Kidneys, provoke Urine, and make men apt for lechery. The Indian Physicians do use this fruit in medicines for Fevers and other diseases. The opinion, (as I think) why this fruit is called Paradise Apples, is partly for the pleasantness of taste, smell and colour, for the taste is between sweet & sour, the smell somewhat like Roses, and the colour a fair yellow and green: & partly also because this fruit being cut in the middle, have certain veins like a cross, whereon the Christians in Syria do make many speculations and discourses, which many strangers that have traveled in those countries do verify. He which desireth to read more hereof, let him read the worthy and learned Commentaries of Carolus Clusius upon Garsia ab horto, where he shall receive good contentment and satisfaction. There grow in India many Iniamos and Batatas. These Iniamos, are as big as a yellow root, but somewhat thicker and suller of knots, and as thick on the one place, as in the other, they grow under the earth like earth Nuts, and of a Dun colour, and white within like earth Nuts, but not so sweet. Iniamos were this year brought hethe out of Guinea, Annota▪ D. Pall as big as a man's leg, and all of a like thickness, the outward part is Dun coloured, within very white, roasted or sodden they are very pleasant of taste, and one of the principal meats of the Blackmoors. The Batatas are somewhat red of colour, and of fashion almost like the Iniamos, but sweeter, of taste like an earth Nut. These two fruits are very plentiful, specially Iniamos, which is as common and necessary a meat as the Figs, they eat them for the most part roasted, and use them commonly for the last service on the board, they ●eth them likewise in an other sort for ●orrage, and s●eth them with flesh like Colwortes or Turnops, the like do they with Batatas. The 56. Chapter. Of the Palm trees, whereon the Indian Nuts called Cocus do grow. THese Trees are commonly called by most of the Indians, Persians, and Arabians, Maro, & the nuts Nare●. The Malabares call the Trees Tenga Maran, and the fruit being ripe, Tenga, but unripe, and being as yet green, 〈◊〉. In Goa manha, the Portingalls call this fruit Coquo, by reason of the three holes that are therein, like to a Monkeys head. Auicenna calleth these Ia●ial-Indi, that is, Indian nuts. The Malayans of Malacca call the trees Trican, and the fruit Nihor. This is the most profitable tree of all India, as in order I will declare unto you the profit that ariseth thereby, they grow most in the Islands of Maldiva, and in Goa, and the countries round about them, as also through the whole coast of Malabar, whereby they traffic with them into all places, as to Cambaia, Ormus, etc. The tree wareth very high and strait, of the thickness of a small span little more or less, it hath no branches but in the uppermost part thereof, & in the top grow the leaves, which spread like unto Date trees, and under the leaves close to the tree grow the Coquos together, commonly ten or twelve one close by another, but you shall seldom find one of them growing alone by itself. The blossom of this fruit is very like the blossom of a Chestnut. The wood of the tree is very sappy like a sponge, and is not firm, they do not grow but on the sea sides, or banks of rivers close by the strand, and in sandy grounds, for there groweth none within the land. They have no great roots, so that a man would think it were impossible for them to have any fast hold within the earth, and yet they stand so fast and grow so high, that it maketh men scare to see men climb upon them, lest they should fall down. The Canarijns' clime as nimbly and as fast upon them, as if they were Apes, for they make small steps in the trees like stairs, whereon they step, and so climb up▪ which the Portugese's dare not venture, their planting is in this manner. They first plant the Coquos or Nuts whereof the trees do spring, and when they are about the height of a man, in winter time they plant them again, and dung them with ashes, and in summer time water them. They grow well about houses, because commonly there they have good earth, and being well looked unto and husbanded, they yield fruit in few years, which is the Canarijns livings that dwell here and there among those trees, and have no other occupation but only to dress those trees, which they farm of the Landlords, and by the fruit thereof do get their livings. Those trees are more abundant with them then Olive trees in Spain, or willow trees in the Low countries. The profits they reap thereby are these. First the wood is very good for many things, although it be spongious and ●appy, by reason of the length of it, for in the Islands of Maldiva they make whole ships thereof, without any iron nails in them, for they sow them together with the cords that are made of the said Cocus or Nut, the ropes and cables being likewise of the same tree, as also the sails which they make of the leaves, which leaves are called Olas. They serve likewise to make the Canarijns' houses, and for hats which they use to carry over their heads, for the sun or the rain, they make also mats or Tents that lie over the Palamkins when it raineth, to cover the women when they are carried abroad, and such like things: they likewise make thereof very fine Hats, that are much esteemed, and cost three or four Pardawes the piece, which they wear in Summer for lightness. They farm or hire those trees for two causes, one for the Coquos or fruit to eat it, the other to press wine out of them, thereof to drink. The nuts are as great as an ostrich egg, some smaller, and some greater, and are outwardly covered with a Husk or Shell, which as long as it groweth on the tree, is green with out, like an acorn with his husk or cup. The Indian nuts are covered over with two sorts of husks or shells, Anno● D. 〈◊〉 whereof the uttermost is hairy, and of it they make Cairo, that is, all their cables and ropes, and stop and make their ships close with it in stead of Ocam or tow, for that it keepeth the ships closer in salt-water then our Ocam or Tow, because in salt water it closeth and shutteth itself closer together. Of the other they make not only drinking cups, in India, but here with us also, for that the common people believe there is a certain virtue in them against stirring of the body, but it is not so. This Husk being dry and pulled off, is hair like hemp, whereof all the cords and Cables that are used throughout all India are made, as well upon the land as in the ships▪ it is of colour very like the ropes of Sparta in Spain, they are very good but they must be kept in salt water, whereby they continue very long, but in fresh or rain water they do presently rot, because they are not dressed with pitch, and tar as our ships are. The ship wherein I came out of India into Portugal, had no other ropes nor cables, nor any such kind of stuff, but such as were made of the Indian Cocus, called Cayro, which continued very good, saving only that we were forced every fourteen days to wash our cables in the Sea, whereby they served us as well as cables of hemp. The fruit when it is almost ripe is called Lanha, and within is full of water, and then it is white of colour, thin and soft, and the longer the Cocus is on the tree, the more the water groweth and changeth into white, which is the meat of the nut within, and tasteth much like a hazel nut, but somewhat sweeter. The Lanhos have within them a good draft of water, which is very clear, sweet, and cool to drink. It is at the least half a Can full, & when men walk abroad and are thirsty they go unto the Canarijns, who presently with a great knife in their hands come up the tree, and cut off as many Lanhos as a man desireth, selling them for a Basaruco or a two piece, which they make very ready and clear to be drunk, the first shell that is over the inward fruit (which as the nut is come to his full ripeness, becometh almost to be wood, is then but thin and soft, and very pleasant to eat with salt, and do taste almost like Artichokes, a man may drink as much of this water as he will for it will not hurt him, but is a very pleasant drink, when the fruit is ripe, there is not so much water in it, and is white within, and somewhat thicker of substance, and then the water is not so good as it was before being Lanhos, for than it becometh somewhat sour. These Cocus being yet in their husks, may be carried over the whole world, and not once hurt or bruised, and it happeneth oftentimes that by continuance of time, the water within the Cocus doth convert, and congeal into a certain kind of yellow apple, which is very savoury and sweet. The husk being taken off, the shell serveth for many uses, as to make ladles with wooden handles, and also certain little pots, which being fastened to a stick, they do therewith take and lad water out of their great pots, they make thereof also small vessels to bear wine in when they walk into the fields, and a thousand other things. These shells are likewise burnt, & serve for coals for Goldsmiths, which are very good and excellent. Of the white of these nuts in India they make porridge, and dress meat withal, straining and pressing out the milk, wherein with many other mixtures they seethe their rice, & to be short, they never dress any rice, which they call Carrijl, & is the sauce to their meat thereunto, but they put some of their Cocus milk into it, else the Cocus is but little eaten, for there it is not esteemed of, but serveth for meat for the slaves, and poor people. They likewise break the Cocus in pieces, and taking off the shell they dry the fruit or white meat that is within it, and it is carried in great quantities out of Malabar to Cambaia and Ormus & to the Northern coasts and quarters beyond Goa, as also to the country of Ballagate, & traffic much therewith. Of this white substance they make Oil, which they stamp in cisterns like Olives, and it maketh very good oil, as well to eat as to burn, which is likewise very medicinable. There are two sorts of Oil made of these nuts, Annota. D. Pal, one out of the fresh or green nuts, stamped and mixed with warm water, which being pressed forth, the oil swimmeth above the water● this oil is used to purge the maw and the guts, for it purgeth very gently, & without hurt some mix therewith the juice of Thamarindes, & maketh thereof a very wholesome medicine, the other Oil is priest out of the dried Cocus, which is called Copra, & is good also to purge the maw and against the shrinking of the sinews, as also for old aches and pains in the joints and limbs. This dried Cocus which is so carried abroad, is called Copra. When they desire to have no Cocus or fruit thereof, they cut the blossoms of the Cocus away, and bind a round Pot with a narrow mouth, by them called Callao, fast unto the tree, and stop the same close round about with pot earth, so that neither wine nor air can either enter in, or come forth, & in that sort the pot in short space is full of water, which they call Sura, & is very pleasant to drink like sweet whey, & somewhat better. This water being drunk, Anota D Pal is very good against the heat of the liver and the kidneys, and cleanseth the yard from corruption and filthy matter. The same water standing but one hour in the sun, is very good vinegar, and in India they have none other. This Sura being distilled, is called Fula, or Nipe, & is as excellent aqua vitae, as any is made in Dor● of their best rhenish wine, but this is of the finest kind of distillation. The second distillation thereof is called Vraca, which is very good wine, & is the wine of India, for they have no other wine. It is very hot & strong, yet the Indians drink it as if it were water, & the Portugese's use it in this sort. They put it into vessels▪ and to a pipe of Vraca they put 3. or 4. Hands of reasons that are brought for merchandise into India from Ormus, every Hand is 12. pounds, which being washed they put into the vessel leaving the bung open & the pipe not being full, for if it were it would burst, by reason of the heat, because therewith it séetheth in the Pipe like water on the fire, and boiling so, it is stirred every day for the space of fourteen or fifteen days, in which time the Vraca getteth as fair a red colour, as if it were Portugal wine, and differeth not much in taste, but yet sweeter, and hotter of itself, howbeit it is altogether as fair, and of as good a colour as their Portugal Wine, so that they can hardly be discerned one from the other: this Wine is called Wine of Passa, or Reasons. With this Wine there is great traffic used to Bengala, Malacca, China and other places, and every Pipe thereof costeth within Goa 30. Pardawen the piece, little more or less. Of the aforesaid Sura they likewise make Sugar, which is called jagra: they seethe the water, and set it in the Sun, whereof it becometh Sugar, but it is little esteemed, because it is of a brown colour, and for that they have so great quantity and abundance of white Sugar throughout all India. The innermost part of the tree or trunk is called Palmito, and is the pith or hart of the same trunk, which is much esteemed, and sent for a present unto men of great account. It is as thin as Paper, and also white, and is as if it were plaited or priest together, as they use to plait & press women's huykes in the Low countries: it is also long and slender, and hath sometimes 50. or 60. folds or plaites in it like a paper book. This the Indians use for paper, and books, which continueth in the same folds, whereon they writ when it is green, and so let it dry, and then it is impossible to get the letters out again, for it is printed therein with a kind of Iron instrument: The Indians call it Olla, whereof all their books, writings, and Evidences are made, which they can seal, and shut up as we do our letters. Of this Paper with the Indian writing upon it, you may see some at D. Paludanus house, which I gave him for a present. These trees are for the most part in the Islands of Maldiva, w●ere there are Cocus Nuts, that are excellent good against poison. Garsius and Costa esteem this for a fable. Costa writeth that he hath searched into it many times but found it contrary, as I likewise have done, and can find no such great effect.. Those Islands have no other dealing or living, but with Cayro, whereof they make ropes and Cables, and with the Copra, or the white substance of the Cocus, whereof Oil is made, so that they do oftentimes come into India, when the ship & all the furniture, victual and merchandise is only of those Palm trees, whereby it is well to be considered, that it is one of the greatest & principalest traffics and victua●ls in all India, This shall suffice for the description of the particular commodities of this tree, the lively picture whereof is here to be seen, together with the Cocus or Nuts, and the pots hanging at the same, to draw the water out of them, as also the growing and sprouting of the Fig trees, as well with fruit as with blossoms, all lively set down. The 57 Chapter. Of the Duryoens, a fruit of Malacca. DVryoen is a fruit that only groweth in Malacca, and is so much commended by those which have proved the same, that there is no fruit in the world to be compared with it: for they affirm, that in taste and goodness it excelleth all kind of fruits, and yet when it is first opened, it smelleth like rotten onions, but in the taste the sweetness and daintiness thereof is tried. It is as great as a Melon, outwardly like the jaacka, whereof I have spoken, but somewhat sharper or pricking, and much like the husks of chestnuts. It hath within it certain partitions like the jaacka, Annot● D. P. wherein the fruit groweth, being of the greatness of a little hens egg, and therein are the Nuts as great as Peache stones. The fruit is for colour and taste like an excellent meat, much used in Spain, called Mang●ar Blanco, which is made of hens flesh, distilled with Sugar: The trees are like the jaacka trees, the blossoms white, and somewhat yellowish: the leaves about half a span broad, somewhat sharp at the end, within light green, and without dark green. Arundo Indica femoris pene habiti crassitudine▪ Indiaens riet wasschende inde dick te van cen man's dije oft been Indicus en truncus brachijs sepandit opacis Grata etiam ut justis umbra sit agminibus Vt nova protrudens in apertas exerat auras Grandia germinibus sustinet ipsa suis▪ Arbor admiranda quae e ramis novos in terram truncos dimittens tam lata tandem occupat spatia▪ ut justum exercitum umbra possit contegere. Ficum Indicam vocant▪ E'en wonderbaerlicken boom welcke wt hear rancken weather near waerts wortelen beslaet ten laetsten so veel plaets datter cen vol sleegen leaguer mach onder berusten▪ Duriones fructus jucunda saporis suavitate prae alijs omni bus habiti eximij, nascuntur tantum in Mallacca Die uruchten diemen Durioens noemt boven all ander van smaeck en lieffelick heyt gepreesen▪ wassen alleen in Mallacca. Ecce tibi ramum nigra quem nox suavibus ornat Exuit ornatum floribus alma dies Vt decus hoc una vigeatque et defluat hora Continuas obeunt illa diesque vices Traxit et hinc nomen tristi quod squalido trunco Auricomum rutilo cum nitet orb jubar Haud secus et nostro quae sensu splendida fumos Esse. fidem veri h●x rediuma facit Arbour soli Indiae nota, cui per totum annum occidente sole flores, gignuntur multi, et odoratu suaves, oriente defluunt, unde tristis illi nomen. E'en boom welcke in Indien alleen bekent is, in't ondergaen vande Son voort▪ brengende veel welrieckende bloemen, welcke all in't opgaen vande self weather of vallen, en dat het gantsche jaer door. This fruit is hot and moist, and such as will eat them, must first tread▪ upon them softly with his foot, and break the pricks that are about them: Such as never eat of it before, when they smell it at the first, think it scenteth like a rotten Onion, but having tasted it, they esteem it above all other fruits, both for taste and savour. This fruit is also in such account with the learned Doctors, that they think a man can never be satisfied therewith, and therefore they give this fruit an honourable name, and write certain Epigrams thereof, & yet there is great abundance of them in Malacca: & the apples cost not above four Meruedies the piece, specially in the Months of june, july and August, at other times the price is higher. Here you must note a wonderful contrariety, that is between this fruit Duriaoen, and the herb Bettele, which in truth is so great, that if there were a whole ship, shop or house full of Duriaoens, wherein there lay certain leaves of Bettele, all the Duriaoens would presently rot and be spoiled. And likewise by eating over many of those Duriaoens, they heat the Maw, & make it swell, and one leaf of Bettele, to the contrary, being laid cold upon the hart, will presently cease the inflammation, rising or swelling of the Maw. And so if after you have eaten Duriaoens, you chance to eat a leaf or two of Bettele, you can receive no hurt by the Duriaoens, although you have eaten never so many. Hereupon, and because they are of so pleasant a taste, the common saying is, that men can never be satisfied with them. The 58. Chapter Of the tree Arbore de Rays, that is, root tree, and the Bambus or reed of India. THere is a tree in India called Arbore de Rays, that is to say, a Tree of roots: this tree is very wonderful to behold, for that when it groweth first up like all other trees and spreadeth the branches: than the branches grow full of roots, & grow downwards again towards the earth, where they take root again, and so are fast again within the ground, and in length of time, the broader the tree is, and that the branches do spread themselves, the more roots do hang upon the branches and seem a far off to be cords of Hemp, so that in the end the tree covereth a great piece of ground, and crosseth one root within the other like a Maze. I have seen trees that have contained at the least some thirty or forty paces in compass, and all out of the roots which came from above one of the branches, and were fast grown and had taken root again within the earth, and in time waxed so thick, that it could not be discerned, which was the chief or principal trunk or body of the tree: in some places you may creep between the roots, and the more the tree spreadeth, so much the more do the roots spring out of the same branches and still grow down till they come to earth, and there take root again within the ground, and still increase with roots, that it is a wonder. This tree hath no fruit that is worth the eating, but a small kind of fruit like Olives, & good for nothing but for birds to eat. Annota. D. Pal. Carolus Clusius that hath written very diligently of this tree, nameth it by authority out of Pliny, the Indian Fig tree, and saith, it groweth very high, first out of a strait thick trunk, or body that afterward yieldeth many small and thin twigs, which being young and tender, are of a gold yellow colour, and growing downwards towards the earth, do wax again like young Rushes, and so make as it were new trees again, which in time become as thick as the first, so that they cannot easily be discerned one from the other, saving only for the compass thereof, which in the end proceedeth to the thickness of three men's fathoms: out of the which roundness or circuit on every side there groweth other roots, and ●o to an innumerable number, so that this tree doth cover sometimes a little Italian mile, and doth not only spread from the lowest branches down again into the ground, but also from the highest, whereby that one tree seemeth to be a thick wood. The Indians that they may go through this tree, do cut away some of the branches, and make as it were galleries to walk under, and to keep them from the heat of the Sun, because the tree is so full of branches, that the Sun cannot shine through it, and by reason of the many crookinges and ways that are under this tree, there are many sounds of a great Echo heard under the same, so that in many places it will repeat a man's words three or four times together. He that told Clusius of this tree, said, he had seen 800. or 1000 men (whereof he himself was one) hide themselves under one of those trees, saying further, that there were some of those trees which might well cover 3000. men under it: the leaves which the new branches bring forth, are like the leaves of the Quince trees: the outside green, the inside whitish & rough, as if they were covered with Wool: whose leaves are much desired by Elephants, who therewith are nourished: the fruit is like the first joint of a man's thumb, and have the fashion & form of little small figs, reddish both within and without, and full of little greines like common figs: sweet of taste and good to be eaten, but not so pleasant as our common figs▪ they grow between the leaves & the new branches, as our Figs do: it groweth in Goa, and in some places bordering on the same: also Clusius saith out of Curtius, Plinius and Strabo, that those trees were also known of the ancient writers. He that desireth to know more hereof, let him read Clusius in his Chapter of Indian Figs. There are in India other wonderful and thick trees, whereof ships are made: there are trees by Cochiin, that are called Angelina, whereof certain scutes or skiffs called Tones are made: there are of those Tones that will lad in them at the least 20. or 30. Pipes of water, and are cut out of one piece of wood, without any piece or seam, or any joints: whereby men may well conjecture the thickness of the tree, and it is so strong and hard a wood, that Iron in tract of time would be consumed thereby, by reason of the hardness of the wood. There are also over all India many Sugar Canes in all places, and in great numbers, but not much esteemed of: & all along the coast of Malabare there are many thick Reeds, specially on the coast of Choramandel, which Reeds by the Indians are called Mambu, and by the Portugese's Bambu: these Mambus have a certain matter within them, which is (as it were) the pith of it, such as Quills have within them, which men take out when they make them pens to write: the Indians call it Sacar Mambu, which is as much to say, as Sugar of Mambu, and is a very medicinable thing much esteemed, and much sought for by the Arabians, Persians, and Moors, that call it Tabaxiir. Tabaxijr is a Persian word, Annota. D. Pal. & signifieth no other thing but a certain white or milk moisture, for any sap or moisture cleaving together is called Sacar Mambu, because the reeds or branches, which bring forth the same are called Mambu: the trees whereon Tabaxijr groweth, are some as great as a Poplar, and some smaller, commonly having strait upright branches, saving that some of the fairest of them are bowed for their galleries, Arbours, and other walking places: they have many joints, each of a span length, having leaves somewhat longer than the leaves of the Olive tree: between every joint there is a certain sweet moisture, white and cleaving together like Starch, sometimes much, sometimes little: every tree or branch doth not bring forth such sweet moisture, but such only as grow in Bisnagar, and in some provinces of Malabar. And therefore commonly in Persia and Arabia, it is weighed against silver, and is a merchandise much used & esteemed among the foresaid nations: this groweth within the joints of the reed, & is white, and sometimes blackish, and sometimes Ash colour. It is not therefore rejected or cast away, ●nota. ● Pal. because it is blackish: for this blackishness proceedeth either by reason of the superfluity of the moisture, or that it was too long enclosed within the tree, & not by burning of the tree, as some are of opinion. Rhases writeth hereof in his third book, and 36. Chap. and Serapio in his book of physic, in the 342. Chapter, and Auicenna in his 2. book and 617. Chapter, who are of opinion, that Tabaxijr is made of burnt roots, but his opinion is hereby proved to be false. The Indians use it against the pain in their privy members, or such like secret diseases, as also against hot or burning fevers, the Colerica passio, and the red Malison, and laskines, with such like diseases. Those reeds grow most in the coast of Choramandel in Bisnagar, and Malacca in many places, and in great abundance: they grow very high, and are divided in each joint one knot from another, at the least a span and a half, and rather more and are as thick as a man's leg above the knee: they do commonly grow upright, and most of them as high as the highest house in the Low countries: they bow them many times in growing, that they may bring them into a form or fashion to serve for their Pallamkins, wherein the Portugal's and Indian Lords are carried, as I said before: the leaves of those reeds or Bambus grow wide one from another, and have almost the fashion of an Olive leaf. Of the tree or reed called Bambus, Annota. D. Pal. some of the Indians make scutes or little skiffs, wherein two men may sit, which they do not altogether make hollow within, but leave two knots or partitions uncarued. In those scutes the Indians sit naked, at each end one, cross legged, & in each hand an oar, wherewith they rule the boat and drive her swiftly against the stream, specially in the river called Cranganor: and they are of this opinion, that those Scutes are never overturned by the Crocodiles (although they come about them) as others are, but for these it was never heard of. The 59 Chapter. Of the tree called Arbore Triste. THe Tree called Arbore Triste, that is, the sorrowful tree, is so called, because it never beareth blossoms but in the night time, and so it doth and continueth all the year long: it is a thing to be wondered at: for that so soon as the Sun setteth, there is not one blossom seen upon the tree, but presently within half an hour after, there are as many blossoms upon it, as the Tree can bear: they are very pleasant to behold, and smell very sweet, and so soon as the day cometh on, and the Sun is rising, presently all the blossoms fall off, and cover all the ground, so that there remaineth not one to be seen upon the tree: the leaves shut themselves close together, so that it seemeth as though it were dead, until evening cometh again, and then it beginneth to blossom as it did before: the tree is as great as a Plum tree, and is commonly planted behind men's houses, in their gardens for a pleasure, and for the sweet smell: it groweth very quickly up, for that many young plants do spring out of the root, and as soon as those young plants be above half a fathom high, they have presently as many blossoms upon them as the branches on the trees, and although they cut the tree down to the ground▪ yet within less than half a year there will branches spring out of the root, and likewise if you break a branch off from the tree & set it in the earth, it will presently take root and grow, & within few days after beareth blossoms: the blossoms are in a manner like Orange tree blossoms, the flower being white, and in the bottom somewhat yellow and reddish, which in India they use for Saffron, therewith to dress their meats, and to die with all as we do with our Saffron, but it is neither so good nor of so pleasant a taste, yet it serveth there for want of the other. Annota. D. Pal. Some say, that the water of this tree being distilled, is good for the eyes, steeping linen clothes in it, and so laying them to the eyes. This tree is found in no place but in Goa, and Malacca, & in some other places, where the Portugal's inhabiting, have planted them, for that they first came out of Malacca into India, but within the land there is none, they are called in the Malayan tongue Singady, in Decanun, Parisatico, in Decan, Pull, of the Arabians Guart, of the Persians and Turks G●l. The cause of this name, as the Indians say, is, that a Gentleman ●alled Parisatico had a fair daughter, of whom the Sun became amorous, and in the end obtained his pleasure of her, but not long after he fell in love with another, & forsook her, whereupon she falling into despair killed herself, and according to the custom of the country her body was burnt, of whose ashes they say this tree sprang up, and for the same cause was called Parisa●ico, and therefore they say by reason of the hatred it beareth unto the Sun, it never bringeth forth blossom or flower, but by night, and in the day time for grief they presently fall off. An●nota. D. Pal. The description of this Tree by Christopherus de Costa is set down in this manner: that it is of the greatness and similitude of a plum tree, with many small branches, separated by divers knots and partitions, the leaves growing two and two together, and as big as plum tree leaves, soft and rough on the out side, very like to leaves of Sage, and inwardly green, and somewhat sharp, but not so uneven on the sides as plum leaves, neither yet so full of veins. In the middle between the two leaves there groweth a little stalk, whereon are five small heads, & out of them four little rough leaves, out of the midst whereof there do spring five small white blossoms, of the greatness and form of Orange blossoms, but somewhat smaller, fairer, and sweeter. The stalk seemeth more red than yellow, wherewith the Indians colour their meat, as we do with Saffron. The green fruit is of the greatness of a Lupyne, and in fashion like a little hart, somewhat long and divided in the middle, having two places wherein the seed doth lie, which is also like a hart, and as big as the seeds of Saint john's bread, covered with a green Skin, and somewhat bitter. Of all other Trees these are the pleasantest of smell, so that they be not handled, for if they be, they do presently lose their sweetness and smell. The Indians are of opinion, that these flowers do quicken and comfort the heart, but they are somewhat bitter, the Heathens likewise do account the seed among their medicines that strengthen the hart. The flowers may be used in meat, the seed hath oftentimes been carried into Portugal, and there sowed, but never would grow, what means soever they used, the flowers fall off when the sun riseth as Clusius saith, either by reason of some contrariety, or because of the subtle nature of the sap, which the beams of the Sun do dry and consume: for those whereon the Sun shineth not, stay somewhat longer on the tree. These flowers are very carefully gathered, whereof a very sweet and pleasant water is distilled, which is called water de Mogli, some of this seed was brought me out of India by john Hughen, which I sowed in the ground, but it came not forth. The 60. Chapter. Of the Bettele leaves, & the fruit Arecca. THe leaves called Bett●e●e or Better, which is very common in India, and daily eaten by the Indians, do grow in all places of India, where the Portugeses have discovered, not with in the country, but only on the sea coast, unless it be some small quantity. It will not grow in cold places, as China▪ nor in over hot places as Mosambique and Sofala, and because it is so much used, I have particularly set it down in this place, although it is already spoken of in many other places. You must understand that this Bettele is a leaf somewhat greater and longer out than Orange leaves, and is planted by sticks, whereupon it climbeth like ivy or pepper, and so like unto pepper, that a far off growing each by other, they can hardly be discerned. It hath no other fruit but the leaves only, it is much dressed and looked unto, for that it is the daily bread of India. The leaves being gathered do continue long without withering, always showing fresh and green, and are sold by the dozen, and there is not any woman or man in all India, but that every day eateth a dozen or two of the same leaves or more: not that they use them for food, but after their meal tides, in the morning and all the day long, as likewise by night, and as they go abroad in the streets, wheresoever they be you shall see them with some of these leaves in their hands, which continually they are chawing. These leaves are not used to be eaten alone, but because of their bitterness they are eaten with a certain kind of fruit which the Malabares and Portugese's call Arecca, the Gusurates and Decanijns, Supari●, and the Arabians Fauffel. This fruit groweth on trees like the Palm trees that bear the Nut Cocus in India, but they are somewhat thinner, with the leaves somewhat longer, and smaller. The fruit is much like the fruit that groweth on Cypress trees, or like a Nutmeg, though some of them are on the one side flat, & on the other side thicker, some being somewhat greater and very hard. They cut them in the middle with a knife, and so chaw them with Bettele, they are within full of veins, white, and somewhat reddish. There is a kind of Arecca called Cechaniin, which are less, blacker, and very hard, yet are likewise used with Bettele, and have no taste, but only of the wood, and yet it moisteneth the mouth, and coloureth it both red and black, whereby it seemeth that the lips and the teeth are painted with black blood, which happeneth when the Arecca is not well dried. There is another sort which in the eating or chawing being swallowed down, maketh men light in the head, as if they had drunk wine all the day long, but that is soon past. They use yet another mixture which they eat withal, that is to say, a cake or role made of a certain wood or tree called Kaate, and then they anoint the Bettele leaves with chalk made of burnt oyster shells, which can do no hurt in their bodies, by reason of the small quantity of it, all this being chawed together, and the juice swallowed down into their bodies, for all the rest they spit forth, they say it is very good for the maw, and against a stinking breath, a sovereign medicine for the teeth, and fastening of gums, and very good against the Schorbucke, and it is most true that in India very few men are found with stinking breaths or tooth aches, or troubled with the Scorbuch or any such diseases, and although they be never so old, they always have their teeth whole and sound, but their mouths and teeth are still as if they were painted with black blood, as I said before, and never leave spitting reddish spittle like blood. The Portugal women have the like custom of eating these Bettele leaves, so that if they were but one day without eating their Bettele, they persuade themselves they could not live: Yea, they set it in the night times by their Beds heads, and when they cannot sleep, they do nothing else but chaw Bettele and spit it out again. In the day time wheresoever they do sit, go, or stand, they are continually chawing thereof, like Oxen or Kine chawing their cud: for the whole exercise of many Portugal women, is only all the day long to wash themselves, and then fall to the chawing of their Bettele. There are some Portugese's that by the common custom of their wives eating of Bettele, do likewise use it. When the Indian women go to visit one an other, the Bettele goeth with them, and the greatest pleasure or entertainment they can show one to the other, is presently to present them with some Bettele, Arecca, and chalk in a wooden dish, which they keep only for that purpose. This Bettele is to be sold in every corner, and street, and shop of the town, as also in every high way for travelers and passengers, and is ready prepared, that is to say, so many Bettele leaves, one Arecca & some chalk, and many times some Cate for such as desire to have it, which they commonly keep in their houses, or bear in their hands in a wooden painted dish, and so eat in this sort, first a piece of Arecca, and Cate, which they chaw, after that a leaf of Bettele, and with the nail of their thumb, which they purposely wear sharp and long, not round as we do, they pull the veins or strings out of the leaf, and so smear it with chalk, and rolling it together, they thrust it in their mouths and chaw it. The first ●ap thereof they spit forth, and say that thereby they purge the head and the maw of all evil, and phlegmatic humours, and their spittle being as fowl as black blood, which colour proceedeth from the Arecca, the rest of the juice they swallow down. The Indians go continually in the streets and ways with Bettele and the other mixtures chawing in their hands, specially when they go to speak with any man, or come before a great Lord, thereby to retain a good smell, and to keep their breaths sweet, and if they should not have it in that sort with them whensoever they meet or speak with any man of account, it were a great shame for them. Annota. D. Pall. The women likewise when they accompany secretly with their husbands, do first eat a little Bettele, which (they think) maketh them apt to the game. All the Indians eat it after their meals, saying that otherwise their meat would upbraid them, and rise in their stomachs, and that such as have used to eat it, and leave it, do presently get a stinking breath. They do at certain times forbear the eating of Bettele, as when any of their nearest friends die, and also on certain fasting days, as likewise some Arabians and the followers of Ali, Mahomet's brother in law, do upon their fasting days. In Malabar, this leaf is called Bettele, in Decam Gusurate, and Canam, it is called Pam, in Malaion, Siri, by Auicenna, Tambul, but better by others. Tambul, Auicenna sayeth, that Bettele strengtheneth the maw, and fasteneth the flesh of the Gums, for which purpose the Indians do use it, but where he affirmeth those leaves to be cold in the first degree, and drying in the second, it is not so, for either his Book is false printed, for he was deceived therein, for those leaves are hot and dry in the end of the second degree, as Garcius ab Horto himself hath found out, likewise the taste and smell thereof do affirm it to be so. This Bettele is like a Citron leaf, but somewhat longer, sharp at the end, having certain veins that run along the leaf. The rypest are holden to be the best, and are of colour yellowish, although some women choose the unripe, because they are pleasanter in the chawing. The leaves do whither by much handling. The Bettele in Malacca, beareth a fruit like the tail of an Eft, which because it tasteth well, is eaten: it is planted like a Vine upon sticks, as Hops with us. Some for their greater benefit Plant it among Pepper, and among Arecca, and there of do make a pleasant Gallery. This Bettele must be carefully looked unto, and often watered. He that desireth to know more hereof, let him read the worthy commentaries of learned Clusius, upon the Chapter of Garcius touching Bettele. The Noblemen and Kings, wheresoever they go, stand or sit, have always a servant by them, with a Silver ketle in their hand full of Bettele and their mixtures, and when they will eat, give them a leaf ready prepared. And when any Ambassador cometh to speak with the King, although the King can understand them well, yet it is their manner (to maintain their estates) that the Ambassador speaketh unto them by an interpreter, that standeth there in presence, which done, be answereth again by the same interpreter. In the mean time, the King lieth on a bed, or else sitteth on the ground, upon a Carpet, and his servant standeth by, ready with the Bettele, which he continually chaweth, and spiteth out the juice, and the remainder thereof, into a Silver Bason; standing by him, or else holden by some one of his slaves or his wives, & this is a great honour to the Ambassador, specially if he proffereth him of the same Bettele that he himself doth eat. To conclude, it is their common use to eat it, which because it is their daily exercise, and that they consume so much, I have made the longer discourse, the better to understand it, although somewhat hath been said thereof in other places. The Kings & Lords of India use pills made of Arecca, Cate and Camphora, with beaten Lignum aloes, and a little Amber, which they eat altogether with Bettele and Chalk, in steed of Arecca. Some mix Bettele with Licium, Annot● D. P● some and those of the richer & mightier sort with Camphor, others with Lignum aloes, Musk and Amber Grijs, and being so prepared, is pleasant of taste and maketh a sweet breath. There are some that chaw Arecca either with Cardamomum, or with Cloves. Within the land far from the Sea, those leaves are sold very dear. It is said, that the King of Decan Mizamoxa spendeth yearly thereof, to the value of above thirty thousand Milreyes. This is their banqueting stuff, and is given them by travelers, and the Kings give it to their Subjects. To the rich they give thereof being mixed with their own hands, and to others they send it by their servants. When they send any man of embassage or otherwise; there are certain Silk Purses full of prepared Bettele delivered unto him, and no man may departed before it be delivered him, for it is a sign or token of his pass port. By the pictures hereafter following you may see the figures of the fruits of Malacca called Duryoens, & the tree Arbore de Rays, or root tree, likewise the thick reeds, named by the Portugese's Bambu, and by the Indians Mambu, with the tree called Arbore Triste, or the sorrowful tree, as it is both by day and by night, and the tree whereon Arecca doth grow, as likewise the Bettele. And because Pepper is oftentimes planted at the foot of the Arecca tree, where it groweth and climbeth up round about the body thereof, I have set it down, in the same order as it groweth: The description whereof shall in an other place be showed, among the Spices and drugs of India, as also the Herbs, serving for Physic, and Apothecary ware etc. The 61. Chapter. Of the Herb Dutroa, and a Plant called Herba Sentida, or the feeling Herb. THe Herb called Dutroa, is very common in India, and groweth in every field: the leaf thereof is sharp at the end, like the point of a Spear, and is indented on the edges like the leaf of Bears claw, and about that bigness, having in it many long threads or veins, it groweth without taste, or moisture, and somewhat bitter and smelling like a Radish. The flower or blossom of this Plant is very like unto the blossom of Rosemary in colour: and out of this blossom groweth a bud, much like the bud of Popie, wherein are certain small kernels like the kernels of Melons, which being stamped, and put into any meat, wine, water or any other drink or composition, and eaten or drunk therewith, maketh a man, in such case as if he were foolish or out of his wits▪ so that he doth nothing else but laugh, without any understanding or sense once to perceive any thing that is done in his presence. And some time it maketh him sleep as if he were dead, in that sort he continueth for the space of twenty four hours: but if his feet be washed with cold water, than he cometh to himself again before the twenty four hours be expired. This Herb the Indian and Portugal women use much to give unto their husbands, and often times when they are disposed to be merry with their secret lovers, they give it him▪ and go in his presence and perform their lechery together, and taking their husband by the beard, they will call him Cornudo, with other such like jests, the man not knowing any thing thereof, but sitteth with his eyes open, not doing or saying any thing, but laugh and grin, like a fool, or a man out of his wits: and when the time cometh that he reviveth out of his transe, he knoweth nothing what was done, but thinketh that he had slept. This Herb the slaves use likewise to give their masters and mistresses, thereby to rob them and to break open their Chests, which is oftentimes done, this Dutroa must be used in measure, because it is a kind of poison, for if a man give too much thereof he may bring a man to his end, unless some strong and present remedy be taken, by some conterpoyson or Purgation. The remedy thereof consisteth in medicines which cause vomiting, Annota▪ D. Pall. for he must cast all out of his body, meat or what soever is remaining in his Maw, & then take divers purgations and strong Gl●ers, as also hard rubbing & binding both hands and feet, together with letting blood in the great toe●. This Herb groweth in all places in abundance, and although it is forbidden to be gathered, or once used, nevertheless those that are the principal forbidders of it are such as daily eat thereof, for their own wives sakes, that thereby they might fulfil their pleasures with other men, which is the common living of them all▪ some few excepted. Some men are so used to eat and drink Dutroa, not knowing of it, that tasting only of the juice of the leaves, they are presently in a transe, and so the wife is well assured, and without all fear to satisfy her lust. This and such like Herbs there are in India, and are much used, for that all the care & study that the women and wives of India have, is day and night to devise means to satisfy then pleasures, and to increase lust, by all the devices they can imagine, and to make their bodies the apt thereunto. Which to effect they know all the devilish inventions and practices which is like the black, saving the first outmost husk is white and smooth, without any wrinkle, but hath the very self same virtue and taste that black pepper hath. It cometh oftentimes mingled with the Malacca pepper. The pepper that groweth in the countries about Malacca is many times also brought into Portugal, but very little, for that it is 2 years between every ship that saileth out of Portugal thither, which being there, taketh in some pepper, but most Cloves and Nutmegs with their flowers and other merchandises of China: But the most part of that pepper is used in the same countries, as in Pegu, Zion, & specially in China, and other countries bordering on the same, which deal continually one with an other. Pepper by the Malabares is called Molanga, and in the countries by Malacca Lada: in Arabia, Fil●il: the Gusarates of Cambaia and Decamins of Ballagate call it Meriche: and they of Bengala, Moro●s: and the long pepper which groweth only in Beng●la and java, is called Pelc●m. Pepper groweth and is planted at the foot of an other tree, and most part at the foot of the tree called Arecca, or some such like tree, & groweth upon the tree, like Bettele or Iue. The leaves of pepper are like Orange leaves, but somewhat smaller, they are green and sharp at the ends, in the chawing it biteth the tongue, and tasteth much like to Bettele, it grows in bunshes like grapes, but a great deal lesser and th'inner, yet somewhat thicker than Gooseberries: they are always green till they begin to dry and to ripen, which is in December and january, for at that time they are gathered. The long pepper groweth in Bengala, and some in the Island of java, and is an other kind of tree: the long pepper is of the length of a needle, or the tag of a point, but somewhat thicker, and all of a like thickness: it is outwardly rugged, and of an ashy colour, and within somewhat white, with small seeds, but in taste and use it is like the other black and white pepper. The white pepper (as I said) is like the black, both in taste and form, yet it is accounted for better & stronger, and is not in so great quantity as the black. The Pepper called Canariins in the country of Goa and Malabar, almost of the fashion of Panike: it is of an ash colour, and hollow within, with some small kernels, which in eating tasteth and heateth like other pepper, yet it is used only by the poor people, and therefore is called Canariin pepper, that is to say, Country men's pepper, or poor people's pepper: therefore it is never laden away, for it is very course and of little value, neither would it be able to raise the freight, and therefore is it left in the country. The other pepper is in India and all other Eastern countries, much used and spent by the Indians themselves, and that in greater quantity then yearly is carried or laden from thence for other places, for they eat not any kind of meat, but they put therein handfuls of pepper, all unbeaten, so that they waste the more. In the description of Malabar I have set down in what places pepper doth grow, and is commonly laden, and the havens where the Portugal ships do come and fetch it: therefore it needeth not here to be rehearsed: pepper is likewise much used, when it is green, to be put in pots with vinegar and salt, and so is kept a long time, and in the same manner carried into Portugal: but it is most used in that sort to be eaten in India, and is called pepper in Achar, in which manner they use to dress all other sorts of spices in India, and eat it commonly to procure an appetite▪ as we do Capars, Olives, and Lemons, being pickled. Pepper is used in the kitchen, and in Apothecary's shoppe●, Annota. D. Pall. although in both places not as a meat or food, but for physic▪ it warmeth the maw, and consumeth the cold slymenes thereof, to ease the pain in the maw which proceedeth of rawness and wind. It is good to eat five pepper corns every morning. He that hath a bad or thick sight, let him use pepper corns, with annis, ●ennel seed, and Cloves, for thereby the mystinesse of the eyes, which darken the sight, is cleared and driven away. The Apothe●ries make a confection of 3. sorts o● peppe●, in this sort, of wh●te, black and ●ong Pepper of each 25 drams, wild time, ginger, ●nis seed, of each an ounce, with honey is much as needeth to make a con●e●, which is good for such as have a cold 〈◊〉 the Nucken, the pain in the liver, and the Dropsy. The 63. Chapter. Of cinnamon. Cinnamon in Latin is called Cinamom: by the Arabians, Quirsa: by the Persians Da●china, by the men of Seylon, (where it most groweth) Curdo: of the people of Malacca, Caysman: and by the Malabares, Camea: the trees are as great as Olive trees, and some lesser, with leaves of Colmi like Bay leaves, but of fashion like Citron leaves, though somewhat smaller. They have white blossoms, and a certain fruit of the greatness of black Portugal Olives, whereof also Oil is made, which is used for many things. The tree hath two barks, but the second bark is the Cinnamon, it is cut off in four square pieces, and so laid to dry at the first it is ash colour, after as it beginneth to dry, it roulleth together of itself, and looketh of the colour as it cometh hither, which proceedeth of the heat of the Sun. The tree from whence the bark is taken they let it stand, & within 3 years after it hath an other bark, as it had before. These trees are in great abundance, for they grow of themselves without planting, in the open fields like bushes: the root of this tree yieldeth a water, which smelleth like Camphora, it is forbidden to be drawn forth, for spoiling the trees. The Cinnamon that is not well dried is of ash colour, & that which is over much dried, blackish, but the best dried is reddish: there is much and excellent water distilled out of Cinnamon while it is half green, which is much used in India, & many times carried into Portugal, and other places: it is very pleasant both to drink and to smell, but very hot and strong: it is used against the Colic and other diseases proceeding of cold, it is likewise good against a stinking breath, and evil savour of the mouth. There is likewise a water made of the blossoms of this tree, but not so good, nor so well esteemed as that of Cinnamon itself. The places where Cinnamon groweth, is most and best in the Island of Seylon, wherein there is whole woods full of Cinnamon trees: in the coast of Malabar there groweth likewise great store and some woods of Cinnamon, but not half so good and lesser trees, the bark being grayer and thicker, and of small virtue. The Cinnamon of the Island of Seylon is the best and finest, and is at the least three times dearer in the price. The Cinnamon of Malabar is called Canella de Mato or wild Cinnamon, and is forbidden to be carried into Portugal: yet there is great quantity shipped, but all under the name of Cinnamon of Seylon, whereby it passeth, and the King hath his full custom as well for the good as for the bad. When the ●on of Seylon is worth in India 50 or 60 Pardawes the Quintale, the wild Cinnamon is worth but 10 or 12 Pardawes: but it is all registered in India, for Seylons' Cinnamon, and payeth custom in Lisbon, each Quintale 15 or 16 Milreyes, as well the good as the bad, and all other spices after the rate: and there may be nothing shipped in India, no not so much as the slaves, but it must all be registered in Cochin: and if there be any thing found, to be brought into Porti●l▪ and not registered there▪ it is forfeit to the King. There groweth Cinnamon also in the islands of java, and by Malacca, but very little, and not so good as that of Seylon. The trees which they burn in India, for wood, some of them are like Cinnamon in burning, and smell. Cinnamon healeth, it openeth & strengtheneth all the inward parts, it is somewhat attractive, stretcheth the maw, and digesteth the meat, it is also used against all kind of poison, that may hurt the hart. Cinnamon with Penny●oy all and Bivoet water drunk driveth away the Volgher, openeth the matrice, Some 〈◊〉 this 〈…〉 the 〈◊〉 ca●led 〈◊〉 Mo●. and maketh women have their flowers: it is likewise good against Fusten, and Catharres, that fall down from the head into the lower parts, also against the Dropsy, and breaking or stopping of the kidneys etc. The water and Oil of Cinnamon do greatly strengthen all the inward parts, as head, hart, maw and liver. etc. The 64. Chapter. Of Ginger. GInger groweth in many places of India, yet the best, & most carried abroad, is that which groweth in the coast of Malabar: it groweth like thin and young netherlands reeds of two or three spans high, the root whereof is the Ginger, being green, it is much eaten in India, for salads, as also sodden in Vinegar, which they call Achar, as I said of pepper, and other fruits that are used in that manner throughout all India: the time when they are most gathered and begun to be dried, is in December and januarie: they dry it in this sort, that is, they cover it with potearth, which they do to stop and fill up the holes, and thereby to make it continue the fresher, for the potearth preserveth it from worms, without the which it is presently consumed by them▪ it is little esteemed in India notwithstanding there is much shipped as well to the red sea as to Ormus, Arabia and Asia, but little for Portugal▪ because it will not save the fraught and custom: only the gunner of the Indian ships may lad and bring certain Quintals without paying any custom, which by the King of Portugal was of long time granted unto them, and is yet observed: and this they may fell to merchants and so by this means there is some brought, otherwise but very little, for that the most part of Ginger brought into Spain, cometh from Cabo verde, the islands of S. Thomas, Brasili●, and the Island of S. Domingo in the spanish Indieses, which is much trafficked withal in Spain: wherefore that of the Portugal Indies is little brought out of the country, because of the long way & great charges & yet it is better than other Ginger: as also all other spices, metals, and stones, that are brought out of the Oriental Indies, that is out of the Portugese's Indieses, are for goodness and virtue better than any other, which the continual traffic hath sufficiently made known. There is likewise much Ginger conserved in Sugar which cometh out of the country of Bengala, but the best cometh from China, it is very good to eat, and much used in India, & brought out of Portugal into these countries. Ginger by the Arabians, Persians, and Turks is called Gengibil, in Gusurate, Decan, Annota. D Pall. and Bengala, when it is fresh and green, Adrac, and when it is dried Sucte, in Malabar both dried & green Imgi, in Malayo Aliaa. It groweth like water Lilies, or Sword-hearbe, but somewhat blacker, with a stalk about two or three handfuls high, and with a root like a Lily, not spreading forth as Antonius Musa writeth, and is not so sharp, specially that which groweth in Bacaim, because of the over great moisture. This root is cut small and mixed with other roots, and so eaten for Salads with oil, salt and Vinegar, it is also sodden with flesh and fish. It goweth in all places of India, and is sowed or Planted, for that which cometh up of itself, is not so good. The best and greatest store cometh out of Malabar, and by the Arabians and Persians it is much desired, next it is the Ginger of Bengala. The third is that of Debut and Bacaim and of all the coast along, in the wild fields and inwardly within the land there is little found. There is also some found in the islands of S. Laurence and Comaro. The virtue and properties of Ginger is, that it maketh a man, to go easily to the stool, and restoreth a man's strength that is decayed. But it is found contrary in other Authors, that Ginger stoppeth, for that it causeth good digestion, and so laskements, proceeding of raw moistness, is stopped. It heateth a cold maw, and is good against humours, that darken the eyes, and is used in many medicines. The 65. Chapter Of Cloves. Cloves are by the Turks, Persians Arabians and most part of the Indians called Ca●a●●r, and in the islands of Maluco, where they are only found and do grow Chamke. These islands are fine, lying under the Equinoctial line, as in the descriptions thereof is declared. They have nothing else but Cloves, which are carried from thence, through out the world, the trees whereon they grow, are like Bay-trées, the blossoms at the first white, then green, and at the last red and hard, which are the Cloves, and when the blossoms are green, they have the pleasantest smell in all the world. The Cloves grow very thick together and in great numbers, they are gathered and then dried, their right colour, when they are dry, is a dark yellow, and to give them a black colour, they are commonly smoked. The Cloves that stay on the tree ungathered are thick, and stay on till the next year, which are those that are called the mother of the Cloves. And in the place where the trees stand, there groweth not any grass or green Herb at all, but it is wholly dry, for that those trees draw all the moisture unto them. That which the Portugeses call Baston▪ or with us the stock of the Clove, and is the stalk whereby they hang on the trees is gathered with the Cloves and so they are mingled together: for that in Maluco they never garble their Cloves, but in India they are many times parted, though very little: for they are most part sold and used with dust, and stalks and all together, but such as are to be sent to Portugal are severed and cleansed The Cloves are so hot of nature, that whensoever them are made clean, and separated from their Garbage, if there chance to stand either Tub or Pail of water in the Chamber where they cleanse them, or any other vessel with wine or any kind of moisture, it will within two days at the furthest be wholly soaken out and dried up, although it stand not near them, by reason of the great heat of the Cloves, that draw all moisture unto them, as by experience I have often seen. The same nature is in the unspunne Silk of China, so that whensoever the Silk lieth any where in a house upon the flower, that is to say, upon boards, a foot or two above the ground, and that the flower is sprinkled and covered with water, although it toucheth not the Silk, in the Morning all that water will be in the Silk, for that it draweth it all unto it. And this trick the Indians often times use to make their Silk weigh heavy, when they sell it▪ for it can neither be seen nor found in the Silk. But returning to our matter, the Cloves grow about the length of a great shot from the Sea side, and are neither planted nor set, and nothing else is done unto them, but only when they pluck and gather them, they make the place under the trees very clean. The tree will not grow very close to the Sea side, nor far from it, for these islands are altogether compassed about with the Sea. When it is a fruitful year, than the Cloves are in greater abundance than the leaves. When they gather them, they do not pluck them with their hands, but with ropes which they fasten about the branches, and by force they shake them off, and by that means the trees are so spoiled, that the next year after they yield but little fruit: but the second year then after ensuing, there grow up trees of the Cloves that fell upon the ground, when they gathered them two years before, like chestnut trees, and they grow very sound, because of the great rain that falleth in those places: for those Islands lie under the Equinoctial line, and yield fruit within eight years, and so continue above a hundredth years. The time when they are gathered and dried, is from September to januarie. When the Cloves are green, they make good conserves in Sugar, and are likewise salted in Vinegar & so kept in pots, and made of Achar, in which manner they are carried into Malacca and India. They likewise distil water out of the green Cloves which is very cordial and used in many medicines. The Indian women use much to chaw Cloves, thereby to have a sweet breath, which the Portugese's wives that dwell there, do now begin to use, the leaves of the Clove-trees, are altogether like Bayleaves. Cloves grow on trees like Bay-trees both in form and quantity, Annota. D. Pal. save only that their leaves are something lesser, like Almonds or Willow leaves. They are full of branches, and have abundance of blossoms, which do turn these fruits, and are called Cloves because in form and shape they do resemble a Birds claws. They grow like the Myrtle-tree upon the uttermost branches. Cloves are much used both in meat and in medicines. The people of java desire the grey Cloves, that hang a whole year and more upon the trees, and are no Males, as Auia doth absurdly advise, and as we of the common sort do, who covet the thinnest. When they are green, they use to salt them, with salt and Vinegar in Maluco, and some they put in Sugar, which are very pleasant to be eaten. The water of green Cloves distilled is very pleasant of smell, and strengtheneth the hart, likewise they procure sweeting in men that have the Pox, with Cloves, Nutmegs, Mace, long and black Pepper, some lay the powder of Cloves upon a man's head, that hath a pain in it, that proceedeth of cold. They strengthen the Liver, the Maw, and the hart, they further digestion, they procure evacuation of the Urine, and stop lascativenes, and being put into the eyes, preserveth the sight, and four drams being drunk with Milk, do procure lust. The 66, Chapter. Of Mace, folly, or flowers of Nutmegs, and of Nutmegs. THe Nutmeg tree is like a Pear tree or a Peach tree, but that they are less, and it hath round leaves. These trees grow in the Island of Banda, not far from Maluco, and also in the Islands of javas & Sunda, from whence they are carried to China, and Malacca, and also into India and other places. The fruit is altogether like great round Peaches, the inward part whereof is the Nutmeg. This hath about it a hard shell like wood, wherein the Nut lieth lose: and this wooden shell or husk is covered over with Nutmeg flower, which is called Mace, and over it is the fruit, which without is like the fruit of a Peach. When it is ripe it is a very costly meat, and of a most pleasant savour. This fruit or Apples are many times conserved in Sugar being whole, and in that sort carried throughout India, and much esteemed: for in truth it is the best conserve in all India, and is many times brought over into Portugal, and from thence hither. They are likewise salted and put in Vinegar, which is much used in India. When the Nuts begin to be ripe, than they swell, and the first shell or husk bursteth in pieces, and the Nutmeg flowers do continue red, as any Scarlet, which is a very fair sight to behold, especially if the trees be full of fruit. Sometimes also the Mace breaketh, which is the cause that the Nutmegs▪ come all together without the Mace, and when the Nutmeg drieth, than the Mace falleth off, and the red changeth into Orange colour, as you see by the Mace that is brought hither. The islands where they grow, specially Banda, are very unwholesome countries, as also the islands of Maluco, many that traffic thither die before they depart from thence, or if they escape, they are in great peril of their lives, by sickness, notwith standing great gain maketh men to travel thither. The Nutmeg (by the inhabitants of Banda, where they are most growing) is called Palla, and the Mace or Nutmeg flower, Buna Palla. The Decanijns and Indians call it japatry, and the Mace jayfol. The trees whereon Nutmegs and Mace do grow, Annota. D. Pall. are not unlike to Pear trees, but shorter and rounder leaves, they are good for pain in the head, for the mother and the Sinews. The Nut is compassed about with three kinds of Barks. The first & outermost is like the green shell of an acorn, and when they are ripe that shell openeth: than you find a thin shell or bark like a Nut, which compasseth the fruit, and by us is called Mace, which both in meat and Medicine is very serviceable and wholesome. The third shell is harder and more like unto wood than the first, and is like the acorn, but that it is blacker, which being opened, you find the Nutmeg therein. When the fruit is ripe, and that the first shell breaketh open, than the Mace is of a most fair red colour, and when the fruit is dry, the Mace likewise doth change, and becometh a Golden yellow. There are two sorts of Nutmegs, one long, which are called Males, the other round, which are better & stronger. The Nutmeg comforteth the brain, sharpeneth the memory, warmeth and strengtheneth the Maw, driveth wind out of the body, maketh a sweet breath, driveth down Urine, stoppeth the lask, and to conclude, is good against all cold diseases in the head, in the brain, the Maw, the Liver and the Matrice. The Oil thereof is better than the rest, for all the aforesaid named infirmities. Mace is specially good for a cold and a weak maw, it procureth digestion of the meat, drieth up all evil humours and breaketh wind. The 67. Chapter. Of Cardamomum CArdamomum is a kind of spice which they use much in India to dress with their meats, and commonly they have it in their mouths to chaw upon. It is very good against a stinking breath and evil humours in the head, and serveth also for other things in medicines: it groweth like other grains and is very like to Panyke, but of a white colour drawing somewhat towards yellow. The husks are as great as the husks of Panyke grains, but somewhat small: within there is about 10 or 12 grains of berries, which is the Cardamomum. There are two sorts of Cardamomum, that is to say, great and small, and called by the Malabares, Etremilly: the Gusurates, Decaniins & Bengalers call it Hil, and the Moors inhabiting among them, call it Hilachij. This is much used in India, and is a merchandise which is carried into all places of India: most of it groweth in calicut and Cananor, places on the coast of Malabar: it is likewise in other places of Malabar, and in the Island of java, and from the country's aforesaid it is most carried into other places, but little brought into Portugal, because of the great charges, and long way: yet many times the Sailors and other travelers bring it. They sith no flesh in India, but commonly they put Cardomomum into the pot, it maketh the mea● to have as good a savour and a taste as any of the other spices of India. Auicenna saith there are two kinds of it, the one he calleth Saccolaa quebir, that is, great Cardamomum, and the other Saccolaa Regner, that is, small Cardamomum: in Malabar it is called Etremelly, in Seylan Encal, in Bengala Gusaratte, and Decan sometimes Hil, & sometimes Elachi, but that is by the Moors, for the Heathens throughout all India call it Dor Cardamomum: to the auncicient Grecians, as Galen, Dioscorides, and others, it was altogether unknown: & although Galen in his seventh book of Simples saith, that Cardamomum is not so hot, as Nasturcium or water Cresses, but pleasanter of savour, and smell with some small bitterness, yet those signs or properties do not agree with the Cardamomum of India. Dioscorides in his first book and fift Chapter commending the Cardamomum brought out of Comagens, Armenia, and Bosphoras (although he saith also that such do grow in India and Arabia) saith, that we must choose that which is full, and tough in breaking, sharp & bitter of taste, and with the smell thereof causeth a heaviness in a man's head: yet is the Indian Cardamomum carried into those places, from whence Dioscorides affirmeth that his Cardamomum doth come, although it be neither tough in breaking, nor annoyeth the head, neither is bitter of taste, nor so sharp as Cloves: the great Cardamomum hath a shell that is long and three cornered, wherein are certain pale red kernels with corners: the small Cardamomum hath likewise a three cornered husk, yet shorter, and with smaller kernels, parted in the middle with a thin skin; & this Cardamomum is of three sorts, as minus, medium, minimum, that is, small, smaller, and smallest of all. It heateth the Maw, digesteth the meat, and driveth away the giddiness of the head: it is also eaten with Bettele, to purge the head & maw of slime and filthiness. The 68 Chapter. Of Lack or hard Wax. Lack by the Malabares, Bengalers, and Decaniins, is called A●sii, by the Moors Lac: the men of Pegu (where the best is found, and most trafiqued withal) do call it Treck, and deal much therewith by carrying it unto the Island of Sumatra (in time passed called Taprobana) and there they exchange it for Pepper, and from thence it is carried to the red sea, to Persia and Arabia, whereupon the Arabians, Persians and Turks call it Loc Sumutri, that is, Lac of Sumatra, because it is brought from thence into their countries. The manner how it is made is thus: in Pegu, and those places from whence it cometh, there are certain very great Pismyres with wings, which fly up into the trees, that are there like Plum trees, and such other Trees, out of the which trees comes a certain gum, which the Pismires suck up, and then they make the Lac round about the branches of the trees, as Bees make Honey and Wax, and when it is full, the owners of the trees come, and breaking off the branches lay them to dry, and being dry, the branches shrink out, and the Lac remaineth behind like a Reed: sometimes the wood breaketh within them, but the less wood it hath within it, the better it is: the pieces and crumbs that fall upon the ground, they melt them together, but that is not so good, for it hath filth and earth within it: it happeneth oftentimes that they find the Pismires wings within the raw Lac. When the Lac is raw, as it cometh from the Tree, it is a dark red colour, but being refined and cleansed, they make it of all colours in India. They beat the Lac to powder, Annota. D. Pa●. and melt it, and so mix all manner of colours upon it as they list, red, black, green, yellow, or any other colour, & make pieces, thereof, such a● are sold here to seal letters withal. Them they dress their bedstead withal, that is to say, in turning of the wood, they take a piece of Lac of what colour they will, and as they turn it when it cometh to his fashion, they spread the Lac upon the whole piece of wood, which presently with the heat of the turning melteth the Wax, so that it entereth into the crests & cleaveth unto it▪ about the thickness of a man's nail: then they burnish it over with broad straw or dry Rushes so cunningly, that all the wood is covered withal, and it shineth like Glass, most pleasant to behold, and continueth as long as the wood, being well looked unto: in this sort they cover all kind of household stuff in India, as Bedsteddes, Chairs, stools, etc. and all their turned woodworke, which is wonderful common and much used throughout all India: the fairest workmanship thereof cometh from China, as it may be seen, by all things that come from thence, as desks▪ Targets, Tables, Cubbordes, Boars, and a thousand such like things, that are all covered and wrought with Lac of all colours and fashions: so that it maketh men to wonder at the beauty and brightness of the colour, which is altogether Lac: they likewise use Lac to fill their Gold and Silver works, that is to say, haft●s of knives, and other things, which they make very fair outwardly of Silver, and inwardly full of Lac. The Indians likewise are so cunning, that they make Rings of Gold, which to man's sight seem very fair and bright, as though they were all of massy Gold, inwardly they are hollow and stopped with Lac, and cannot be perceived, unless a man be advertised thereof. There is Lac likewise in Ballaga●te and Malabar, but very little: the greatest quantity which from thence is carried throughout India, and all other places, cometh out of the kingdom of Pegu. The 69. Chapter. Of Annil or Indigo. ANnil or Indigo by the Gusurates is called Gali, by others Nil: it is a costly colour, and much carried and trafiqued into Portugal: it groweth in India in the kingdom of Cambaia: the herb is very like Rosemary, and is sowed like other Herbs, and when time and season serveth, pulled and dried, and then it is made wet and beaten, and so certain days after dried again, and then prepared. At the first it is a fine green, but after it is a fair blue, as you see it when it cometh hither, and the cleaner it is from earth and dust, the better it is to prove if it be good: they burn it with a candle, and if then it fall out like fine meal, it is good; but if it be gross like sand, it is not good: also being thrown into the water if it swimmeth it is good, but if it sink it is not good: this Annil was more accounted of▪ and commonly more worth than Cloves both in India and in Portugal: the King not long since hath farmed it out, so that no man may buy it in India, nor bring it into Portugal but only the Farmers, as they do with Pepper. Annil or Nile, as the learned Doctor Camerarius witnesseth, which hath had some of the plants within his garden, hath sky-coloured leaves, being like to the leaves of the Herb which in Latin is called Barba iovis, in Dutch Donder baert, but somewhat bro●der. The 70. Chapter. Of Amber, Musk, Algallia or Civet. AMber by some men is thought to be the foam of a Whale fish: others think it to be the filth and dung of the Whale, and others a certain kind of Betumen, which floweth out of a well that standeth on the sea side, and casteth the Amber up, but it is to be thought, that it is neither of the first two, for if it were, men should continually find Amber in these Countries, spocially on the coast of Biscay, where so many Whales are taken, yet is the●e no Amber found in that place: it were rather to be believed that it is a Betumen or pitch▪ proceeding out of some fountain or Well▪ or some thing that floweth from the bottom of the Sea, & so driveth upon the water because it is found in some places, and in some places not: where it is most found, and from whence it daily cometh is from the coast of So●la, Mosambique, and on the coast of Me●de or Abe●: It is likewise sometimes found by the Islands of Ma●diua, and the c●pe de Comorijn, but not much, and not so commonly as by So●la and Mosambique. There are others that think it to be a spongy earth, of some unknown Island, drought or hidden cliffs, and by force of the sea in time broken off by pieces, and cast upon the shore▪ like drifts or such like things, for it is often times found floating and driving in pieces of ten or twelve, and some of fifty or sixty pans broad. They say that in India there hath been found whole Islands of Amber, which being well marked by those that found and discovered them, whereby to come thither again and lad thereof, when they came to the same place they could not find them. In Anno 1555. An. 1555 there was a piece found not far from the cape de Como●iin that weighed 30. quintales, and he that found it, thought it to be pitch, whereupon he sold it for a small price, but afterwards being known, it was greatly esteemed: likewise oftentimes there cometh Amber that is mingled with shells, and all spotted with the dung of Sea fowls, that sit thereon. There is Amber of a grey colour, with whitish veins, that is the best: & it is called Amber Griis. There is a kind of Amber which is perfect black, but not so much esteemed as the grey, to prove if the Amber be good they thrust pings into it and that which yieldeth most oil is the best. It is much used among the Indian Noble men, and kings in their daily meats, they use it likewise much to provoke lust, and to increase nature, thereby to be the more apt for the same, as also in many fair works with musk, Civet, Bemoin, and other sweet things mixed together, whereof they make fine apples and pears wrought about with silver & gold, which they bear in their hands to smell upon, and in haftes of knives, handles of pomyards, and such like, which they make of silver, and Amber within them, which in divers places shineth through them. These and such like works are very common in India among the rich and mighty men of the country, as well Indians as Portugese's. Annota. D. Pal. Ambarium in Latin, Ambar in Arabia, is a kind of pitch, as the Author very well affirmeth, cast up out of some fountain that standeth in the bottom of the sea, which being set in the Sun doth presently become hard like other things that are also taken out of the sea, as Coral, etc. This Ambar by reason of the sweet & pleasant smell, doth comfort the head and the heart, and by the dryness thereof, it draweth away & consumeth all watery humours out of the stomach, and good against all filthy and foulness in a man's body. It cureth such as have the falling sickness. It is good against the rising of the Mother, being received in and thrust up into the body: to conclude it is good for all old men, and for every cold complexion. The Almisca●, Mosseliat▪ or Muskcat cometh from China: They are beasts like Foreste, or little Dogs, which being killed, and beaten and bruised, they let them lie and rot, blood and flesh together: which done they cut them in pieces both skin, flesh and blood, all mixed together, and thereof make divers purses, which they sow in a round form, and are in that sort carried abroad & sold to divers men. Those purses are commonly of an ounce weight the piece, and by the Portugese's are called Papos, but the right Papos, and perfect Mosseliat is the bollocks or stones of that beast: the others although they pass among them for Mosseliat, are not so good as the stones: therefore the Chinars, who in all things are very subtle, and fine workmen, make the purses clean round, like the stones of the beast, therewith to deceive the people, and so the sooner to procure them to buy it. This beast hath a very strange nature, and great understanding, for when it is chased, and perceiveth itself not able any longer to continue in breath, it taketh the stones between the teeth and biteth them off, and so casteth them away, as if it would say, if you come for them there they are, & while the huntsman is busy to look for them, she oftentimes escapeth away and saveth her life. The Chinaes' are very deceitful in selling of Mosseliat or Musk, for they falsify it very much, sometimes with Oxen and Cows livers, dried and beaten to powder, and so mixed with the Mosseliat, as it is daily found by experience in searching of it. When the Mosseliat beginneth to decay and looseth the smell, they take it out of the purse and beat it very small in a mortar, and that done being moistened with the urine of a child, and so put into an earthen pot that is leaded and close stopped, it will presently be good again, if there were any goodness or strength left within it. Some are of opinion, that musk groweth at certain times of the year about the navel of a certain beast, as if it were swollen. The pale yellow is the best, it strengtheneth the trembling cold hart, & all diseases of the same, being drunk or swallowed. It cleanseth the white spots of the eyes, it drieth moist catharres, it comforteth the head, & healeth the old aches thereof, proceeding of sleame. Algalia or Civet is much found in India, that is to say in Bengala, but because they cannot leave their villainy & falsifying thereof, it is not so much esteemed, by reason they mixeted, but the best Civet cometh from Myna in the coast of Guynea, which is very fair and good. It is the sweat that proceedeth from the Cats called Civet Cats, which are many times brought over alive, both into Spain, and also to these countries, but because it is so sufficiently known unto us, I will leave to speak thereof, and proceed to other spices, herbs, and drugs of India. Ciue● groweth in the outermost part of the cods of a certain beast, which thereof hath her name, ●ta. ●. Pal. & is called a Muscat, and as Hughin very well saith, is the sweat that groweth or engendereth in the hinder part of the beast, and is hot and moist, being laid upon a woman's navel, it healeth the rising of the mother, and maketh women apt to lechery. The 71. Chapter. Of Beniom. Benjoin is a kind of stuff, like Frankemsence & Mirabel, but more esteemed, for it serveth for many medicines and other things. Benjoin by reason of the sweet smell, comforteth the heart, the head, and the brain, it cleanseth the head from all superfluous humours, sharpeneth the wit being smelled unto, it is good to be used when diseases begin to go away. As when they make balls or pieces of Amber, and Musk, they must always have Benjoin with it to make it perfect, it groweth much in the kingdom of Syan in the Island of Sumatra, in the Islands of javas, & the country of Malacca, they are high trees full of branches, with leaves like lemon tree leaves, with a thick & high stem or stock in the middle, from whence proceedeth the Gum, which is the Benjoin. When the tree is young, than it yieldeth the best Benjoin, which is blackish of colour, and of a very sweet smell, and is called Benjoin, de Boninas, that is to say, Benjoin of the Flowers, because of the perfect smell. The second Benjoin is called Benjoin Amendoado, that is Benjoin of Almonds, because it is mixed with pieces of white Benjoin among the black▪ like to Almonds that are cut in pieces. This Benjoin is not so good, because the white Benjoin is of the old trees, and is not so strong nor of so good a smell as the black, but is mixed with the black, because it should be sold the better. These two sorts of Benjoin are the best, and much used and carried into Arabia, Persia, the land of Ballagate, China, and other places, as also into Portugal. Most part of this Benjoin groweth in the country of Zion, and by Ma●a●, there is other Benjoin which is worse, and groweth in the Islands of Sumatra, and javas. The inhabitants of the countries where it groweth call it C●mingion, the Moors, and Arabians call it Lovaniany (which is as much to say as frankincense of java.) The Decaniins and Ballagaters call it Vdo, they cut the tree and branches full of slits, to make the Benjoin the better to come forth, it is much trafficqued withal throughout India, for it is one of the comeliest drugs in all the Orient, because it excelleth all other in sweetness. The 72. Chapter▪ Of Frankincense and myrrh. Frankincense groweth in Arabia, and is called Lovan, and by Auicenna Conder: it is the gum that floweth out of the bodies of the trees, like Benjoin: the best Frankincense groweth upon the trees that stand on hills, and stony rocks, and stony places: for those which grow in the fields and in flat grounds yield not so good Frankincense: they have so great quantity of it, that oftentimes they mark their sheep withal, as if it were Pitch, Tar, or Rosin: from thence it is carried into India, China▪ and other places in great abundance, and very good cheap. Frankincense is of two sorts, one white, Annota. D. Pal●. that is round and like unto drops, which is the best, and called the ma●le: the other black, which is not much worth but only in smell. In India and with us they use Frankincense against the looseness of the belly, sicknesses of the head, Cata●rlies, surfeits, and parbraking, & is good for such as spit blood, it filleth up hollow swelling & healeth fre●h and bloody wounds. Mirre by the Indians is called Bola, it groweth in the same that Benjoin and frankincense doth, and cometh also out of Arabia F●lix, but most out of the country of Abexin from the inward parts of the country, lying between Mosambique, and the red sea, which is called Prester john's land, and from thence brought into India. and other places. myrrh is used in medicines, Annota. D. Pal. to d● down the Flowers and the fruit of women, also for old coughs, for laskes, & for bloody Flixes. The 73. Chapter. Of Manna and Rhubarb. MAnna cometh out of Arabia, and Persia, but most out of the Province of Vsbeke, lying behind Persia in Tartary: the Manna that is brought from thence in glass Vsalies' is in pieces as big as preserved Almonds, but of another fashion, and have no other special form, but like broken pieces: it is whitish, and of taste almost like Sugar, but somewhat fulsome, sweetish like Honey: the Persians call it Xercast, and Xerkest, that is to say, milk of trees, for it is the dew that falleth upon the trees, and remaineth hanging upon the leaves, like water that is frozen and hangeth in drops at gutters and pentises: It is also gathered and kept in glass Vials, and so brought into India, and other Countries, for in India they use it much in all sorts of purgations. There is another sort of Manna called Tiriamiabiin or Trumgibiin, which they gather from other leaves and herbs: that cometh in small pieces as big as Hempeséed, and somewhat bigger, which is red & of a reddish colour. Some think this Manna groweth on the bodies of the trees as Gum doth: it is much used in Ormus and Persia for purgations, but not in India so much as the first sort, there is yet another sort, which cometh in great pieces, with the leaves among it: it is like the Manna of Calabria, this is brought out of Persia unto Bassora, and so to Ormus, and from thence into India, and is the dearest of all the rest. There cometh also a Manna that is brought in leather bags, or flasks, which in Turkey and Persia they use to ride withal, & is melted like Hony, but of a white colour, and in taste like the other sorts of Manna, being altogether used for purgations, and other medicines. Annota. D. Pal. Manna very gently purgeth the gall: it easeth and moisteneth the harshness of the throat, the breasts and the stomach: it quencheth the thirst: but because it purgeth but weakly, it is strengthened with Time or Isop mingled with some strong purgations, & maketh them to effect their operations with more perfection and power, by means of the sweetness thereof, which is apt and more pliable unto nature But because it is no special merchandise, I will speak no more thereof, but for that we are now in hand with medicines to purge, I will say some thing of the root called Rhuba●be, although there is no certainty how or in what sort it groweth yet it is most certain, that it is not to be found in any country but in China, and in the farthest parts thereof, it is most brought by land through the Province of Vsbeke, whereof I spoke before: which Province lieth in Tartary, and bordereth on the one side upon China, and so reacheth behind India unto Persia. Out of this Province it cometh unto Ormus, and from thence into India: yet it is likewise brought by water, but because it is not so good, and doth sooner rot and spoil by water then by land, therefore most part of it is brought by land. That which is most esteemed & best sold, and greatliest desired, cometh in this manner, that is, first from China, through Vsbeke, and so through Turkey, from whence it is carried to Venice, & from thence into all these countries, so that the Rhubarbe of Venice is better, because it cometh over land, then that which is brought into Portugal, because it cometh by water, as also all things and herbs that belong to Physic, because they are better preserved by land then by water, they are little brought by sea, but it is a merchandise that is most carried by land unto Venice, as also because the Portugese's deal not much therein, and are little given to curiosities, contenting themselves to deal with such wares as are commonly known to all men, without seeking further, for they trouble not themselves with other things. The 74. Chapter. Of the wood called Sanders. THere are 3. sorts of Sanders, that is, white, yellow and red: the white and the yellow, which is the best, come most out of the Island of Tymor, which lieth by java. This Island hath whole woods and wildernesses of Sanders, both of white and yellow, and from thence it is carried throughout all India, and other countries, and traffic much therewith: the red Sanders groweth most in the coast of Choramandel and Tanassariin, which is in the country of Pegu: the trees of Sanders are like Nut trees and have a certain fruit upon them like Cherries, at the first green, and after black, but of no taste nor any thing worth, for it presently falleth off, only the wood of the tree is accounted of, which is the Sanders. It is called by the Inhabitants of the country where it groweth Chandanacon, the Decannus, Gusurates, Canariins, and other Indians call it Sercandaa: the Arabians and Persians Sandal, whereupon the Portugal's likewise do call it Sandalo. The yellow and white Sanders is much used and spent over all India, by all the inhabitants, both Indians, Moors, Heathens, and jews, whatsoever: they beat it or stamp it in water, till it be as soft as pap, that done they besmere themselves therewith, and let it dry upon their bodies, for it cooleth very much, & also because all the Indians do much delight in sweet smelling savours. The white & yellow or bleakish Sanders is likewise used by us, Annota. ●. Pa●. with rosewater, against the hot pains in the head, anointing it therewith: all those woods as well the red as the white and yellow, are good against hot fevers, being beaten and drunken into the body, they help the hot stomach, as also laid upon the stomach with Rose water, in burning fevers. This Sanders is not only good for the purposes aforesaid, but also for strengthening the hart, and therefore with great use it is put into Cordial medicines, & such as are made against the beating of the hart. The red Sanders is little spent in India, but they use it only against hot agues, anointing their pulses therewith, as also the temples, & their foreheads, but it is much ●ryed into other countries, as being very medicinable for many things, and the Indians make their Pagodes and Idols thereof, because they should be the costlier. The ●5. Chapter. Of Palo de Cebra or Snake-wood. SNakewood is most in the Island of Seylon: it is a low Tree: the root thereof being the Snake-woode is of colour white, showing somewhat yellow, very hard and bitter in taste, it is much used in India: they stamp and bruise it like Sanders, in water or Wine, and so drink it, it is very good & well proved against all burning fevers: one ounce thereof bruised and mixed with water is good against all poison and sickness, as the colic, worms, and all filthy humours and coldness in the body▪ and specially against the stinging of Snakes, whereof it hath the name: it was first found by means of a little beast called Quill, or Quirpele, which is of bigness very like a Ferret (wherewith in those Countries they use to drive Coneys out of their holes, and so catch them whereof in India they have many in their houses, which they play withal to pass the time away, as also to kill their Mice and Rats, and to drive them away. This beast by nature is a great enemy to the Snake, so that wheresoever she findeth any, she fighteth with them: and because it is often bitten by the Snake, it knoweth how to heal itself with this Snake-woode, (whereof there is much in Seylon, where also are many of those beasts, and great store of Snakes) so that if it be never so sore bitten, having eaten of this wood, it is presently healed, as if it had never been hurt. By this means the inhabitants have found it out & begun to make account of it, & since that time it is proved and found to be good for many disease's as aforesaid: wherefore now it is much trafficked withal, and carried into all countries, as also into Portugal, & from thence hither. Garcius ab horto writeth of three sorts of this wood, Anno●a▪ D 〈◊〉 whereof you may there read two of these sorts of Snake-wood I have in my house to be shown, one is that which john Hughen writeth to be the root of a tree, white and bitter of taste, with a rough Ash colour bark: the other was sent me ●u● 〈…〉, from the learned Doctor Simon 〈◊〉 Tonar, which is as thick as a ma● ar●e, with a bark besprinkled & spotted like a Snake, which inwardly is white, and bitter of taste The 76 Chapter. Of the wood Caiamba or ●num Aloes. THe ●ignum Aloes which in India is called Calamba and Palo D●guilla, is most in Malacca, in the Island of Sumatra Camboia, Zion, and the Countries bordering on the same: the trees are like Olive trees, and somewhat greater▪ when it is cut off, it smelleth not so well, because it is green, for the drier it is, the better it smelleth: the best and that which smelleth most, is the innermost part of the wood: some of it is better than the rest, which the Indians do presently know how to find out: the best and finest is called Calamba, and the other Palo Daguilla. Now to know which is the best, you must understand that the wood that is very heavy with black and brown veins, and which yieldeth much Oil or moistness (which is found by the fire) is the best, and the greater and thicker that it is, the better it is and hath the more virtue. Of this wood they make many costly things, and it hath a special and precious smell, so that it is greatly esteemed: specially the Calamba, which if it be good, is sold by weight against silver and gold. The Palo Daguilla next after the Calamba is much accounted of. There is another kind of Palo Daguilla, which is called Aquilla Brava or wild Aquilla, and is also much esteemed: for the Indians use it therewith to burn the bodies of their Bramenes, and other men of account, when they are dead: and because it is costly, therefore it is a great honour to those that are burnt therewith, as it is to those that with us are buried in Tombs of marble stones: but it is not comparable to the other Palo Daguilla, nor the Calamba. The wild Aguilla groweth most in the Island of Seylon, and on the coast of Choramandel, and the best Palo Daguilla, and Calamba groweth in Malacca. These costly woods are much used in India for Beads, and Crucifixes, which are holden in great reverence, and in truth is very much to be esteemed, for without all doubt it hath an excellent smell, which surpasseth all other woods, and the like can not be found but only in the soresaide places from whence it cometh. Lignum Aloes, Agallochum, Xylo, alias Paradise-woode, Annota. D. Pal by the Arabians called Agalugen and Haud, by the inhabitants of Gusurate and Decan, ud in Malacca, Garro, and the best Calamba. Of this wood I have many sorts, all very pleasant of smell, speckled with veins and full of moisture, and withal close and very heavy: this wood being taken inwardly, is good for a stinking breath: it is also very good against a waterish and moist stomach, which can receive no meat, but casteth it forth: it is also good for one that hath a weak liver, that is sick of the red Melison, or of the Pleurisy. The 77. Chapter. Of the root China. THe root China came into India, and was there first known in Anno 1535. 1535 for before that time they knew it not, for that as than they cured the Poor, which in India is a common disease) with the wood called Guaiacum, that is brought out of the Spanish Indies, and was at that time in a manner weighed against Gold: and as the land of China, is much subject to the disease of the Poor, it seemeth that God hath given them this root to cure and help the same, and since it was known and found out in India, they would never use any other remedy, because there is great store of it, and the best in all the world, whereby men in those countries do not once make any account of the Pox, or fear the healing thereof, for that it is more easilier healed than any other disease: also it is no shame with them, although they have had it at the lest 3, or 4. times: this root is now with them in so great abundance, and common use, that it is very good cheap, for that it is not worth at the most above half a Pardaw the pound, which in Portugal money is a Teston and a half. The sick persons do use it in this manner following, they take of the root▪ & cut it in smalll pieces or slyces, the weight of an ounce, which they seethe in four pots or quarts of water, letting it seeth till it be half consumed, whereof they seeth fresh every day: this water they must drink alone, & eat biscuit with nothing else but small roasted Chickens, without any Butter, suet, salt, or any other sauce, but only dry with the Biscuit, and this must be their dinner, at night some Reasons, and toasted bread with Honey and nothing else▪ every day twice they must lie on their beds well covered to make them sweat, every time an hour, or an hour and a half which they must continue for the space of thirty days, always keeping themselves out of the air, and from the wind, and lapping their heads and their ears very close, staying continually within the house, and above all things abstaining from the carnal company of women. These points aforesaid being observed, without all doubt they shall find great profit: and if the root doth work within them, they shall know it by this means, for that the pain in their limbs, and specially in their joints, will grieve them more and more, which is a good sign that it worketh in their bodies, and thoroughly searcheth the same, and this pain will still increase for the space of 15. or 20. days, yea and sometimes until 25. days, and therefore he that will use it must not despair, for without fail it will be so as I have said, within a day two, or three more or less. The 25. days at the furthest being passed, than their pain will begin to diminish, with so great a lightness and ease, that within the other five days, whereby the 30. days will be accomplished, the whole pain will be gone, so that the body and all the members will be as fresh and lively as if they never had been sick having used this rule aforesaid. And although the root China being sodden in the water, causeth a great appetite and a hungry stomach, nevertheless they must in any sort beware that they eat but little, and with measure, & that according to the rule prescribed: for if they break it but one day, nay but one hour, all their labour were lost, and so they must be forced to begin their diet again. It must likewise be understood that the older▪ and longer of continuance the pocks are, so much the sooner will the root heal them, as also the older the persons to be healed are of years, because that then the humours are not so ripe as in young years. When the 3● days are expired, they must beware of drinking other drink, and to that end they must keep the pieces and slices that were cut and sodden as before, every ounce by itself, and thereof take every day a heap of the same root so sodden, and seethe them again in a pot with as much water as they shall need to drink: but this seething need not to be done as the first seething, with consumption of the water, but only let it seethe up once and no more. This water must they drink in this sort for the space of 2●. or 30. days more, and beware of fish, or any goose or heavy meats, as Ox, Cow, or Hogs flesh, and such like, as also they must keep themselves from much air or wind, whereby their bodies being healed may return to their perfect healths again, and after these twenty or thirty days are full expired, than they must begin to use all kind of meats and drinks, although when the first thirty days are out, they may well go abroad, so they be careful of themselves, and they shall not need to sweat any more after the said first thirty days: also it must be remembered, that such as mean to take this diet, for their healths, it will be good before they use it, to take a good purgation, & when the first fifteen days are out, then take a second, and so at the end of the thirty day an● other, whereby it will work with more effect, and with Gods help they shall be as lusty and sound as ever they were, as it hath been proved by many thousands in India. This root is not only good for the Pocks and Piles, but also for cramps and palsies, and all cold diseases, as for lumites that are stiff and benumbed with cold, for the Gout: for the Emperor Charles the fift himself did use the same, and found that it did him good: But it must be understood that it is not good to use it at all times of the year, for in the dog days, and also in Summer, by reason of the heat it is not good, neither in winter because of the cold, but it is best to be used in Lent and Harvest time: for than it is most temperate weather, yet always with the counsel of the learned Physician, the better to know the disposition, complexion, inclination and age of the persons, together with the time of the year, the situation and climate of the country. The manner of healing aforesaid is as it is used in India: but in China which is a colder country, and almost under the same degrees that these Countries are under, they use to seethe the water stronger, for there they put 2, ounces or an ounce and a half of the wood into so much water, and let it seethe until the water be two parts consumed, which in India will not be borne because of the great heat. It is likewise to be understood, that the person and the disease of the person must be well considered: for that if the sickness be not very great, they must take less root, and let less water consume in the seething, the younger persons also must have stronger drink then old folks, because they have more humours in their bodies: And ye must consider, that he which will take or use this root, or the water thereof not being sick, it will waste and consume his flesh and good blood, and do himself great hurt, wherefore good counsel and advise must always be taken before it be used, and also i● it be taken too hot, and too much, it burneth both the liver and the lungs, and will fill the body full of piles, scurf, and ma●g●es, with other such like diseases, whereby a man shall have work enough to drive those new diseases out of his body, and fall out of one sickness into another, & rather become worse than he was at the first. This I thought good in brief to show you thereby to teach such as know it not, the true use of his root if it be done in time, & when need requireth: for that many do spend their wealths, and which is more, are all their lives long out of hope for e●er to recover their healths again, upon a disease, which with so little cost, is so easily to be cured. The sum of the foresaid water is likewise good against all scabs and swellings of the said M● Neapo●, 〈◊〉, or the French pocks, the best roots are the blackest, with few knots and white within: for the radish are not so good, the wood or tree whereof it groweth is like a Haw-thorne, strait, and about three or four spans high, & the root thereof is called the wood of China, or Pockewood, when they are green they eat them raw, and being sodden they taste almost like sugar canes but not so sweet. The tree hath but few leaves, but they are almost like the leaves of a young Orange tree. These plants or trees in China are called Lampaton, as the Chinos themselves do say. This shall suffice for this root of China so called because it is found in no place but in China, what is more to be said of it, I leave unto the learned Physicians, & others that deal withal, and have better experience thereof. The root of China is commonly used among the Egyptians, not only for the pocks, but for many other diseases, specially for a consumption, for the which they seethe the root China in broth of a hen or cock, whereby they become whole and fair of face. This root drieth much and cooleth sweat, it resisteth evil humours, and strengtheneth the liver, it healeth watery and filthy Ulcers, and scurfs & lepry. Is is good for a man that hath the pocks, and for those that are dried up, and medicinable against a hard and a great milt. The 78. Chapter. Of Amsion alias Opium. AMsion, so called by the Portugese's, is by the Arabians, Moors, and Indians called Affion, in latin Opio or opium: It cometh out of Cairo in Egypt, and out of Aden, upon the coast of Arabia, which is the point of the land, entering into the red Sea, sometimes belonging to the Portugese's, but most part out of Cambaia, & from Decan, that of Ca●o is whitish, and is called Mece●, that of Aden and the places bordering upon the mouth of the red sea, is blackish & hard. That which cometh from Cambaia and Decan is softer and reddish. Amfion is made of sleep balls or Poppy, and is the gum which cometh forth of the same, to the which end it is cut up and opened. The Indians use much to eat Amsion, specially the Malabares, and thither it is brought by those of Cambaia and other places, in great abundance. He that useth to eat it, must eat it daily, otherwise he dieth and consumeth himself, when they begin to eat it, and are used unto it, they heat at the least twenty or thirty grains in weight every day, sometimes more: but if for four or five days he chanceth to leave it, he dieth without fail: likewise he that hath never eaten it, and will venture at the first to eat as much as those that daily use it, it will surely kill him: for I certainly believe it is a kind of poison. Such as use it go always as if they were half a sleep, they eat much of it because they would not feel any great labour or unquietness when they are at work, but they use it most for lechery: for it maketh a man to hold his feed long before he sheddeth it, which the Indian women much desire, that they may shed their nature likewise with the man: although such as eat much thereof, are in time altogether unable to company with a woman, & wholly dried up, for it drieth and wholly cooleth man's nature that useth it, as the Indians themselves do witness: wherefore it is not much used by the Nobility, but only for the cause aforesaid. Opium is the juice of black Poppy, Annota. D. Pal. and is of two sorts, one sweet being pressed out of the leaves and heads together, which the Greeks' call Meconium: the other floweth or cometh out of the heads being cut, which is the right Opium. That which is heavy, close, fast and bitter in taste, that which with the smell of it provoketh sleep, & that which easily melteth in the water and is soft, white, and without grossness or kernels, is the best Opium, and is by the Turks called Maslac. They eat thereof daily the quantity of a pease, not thereby to provoke sleep, but to give them courage, specially when they go to war, thinking that thereby they are made more courageous, and that when they sleep they dream that they see many pleasant places, and are in company of divers goodly women: although it is commonly seen, that such is daily use Opium, are very still and sleepy, and very slow both in words and works, so that men know not how to deal with them. The 79. Chapter. Of Bangue BAngue is also a common meat in India, serving to the same effect that Amsion doth. It is a seed like Hempséede, but somewhat smaller, and not so white. Also the thing whereon it groweth is like Hemp, but it hath no substance whereof to make any thing. The Indians eat this seed or the leaves thereof being stamped, saying, that it maketh a good appetite, but useth most to provoke lust, as it is commonly used and sold in the shops, it is mingled with some powder of the leaves and the seed together: They likewise put green Arecca unto it, therewith to make a man drunk, or in a manner out of his wits: Sometimes also they mix it with Nutmegs and Mace, which doth also make a man drunk: Others (that is to say, the rich and wealthy persons) mix it with Cloves, Camphora, Ambar, Musk, and Opium, which (as the Moors likewise affirm) maketh a man pleasant, and forgetting himself, performing all kind of labour and toil without once thinking of any pain: but only laughing, playing, and sleeping quietly. The common women or whores use it when they mean to have a man's company, thereby to be lively and merry, and to set all care aside. It was first invented by Captains and soldiers, when they had lain long in the field, continually waking and with great travel, which they desiring to remedy, and again to comfort themselves, thereby to settle their brains do use Bangue, in such manner as is aforesaid. It causeth such as eat it, to reel and look as if they were drunk, and half foolish, doing nothing but laugh and be merry, as long as it worketh in their bodies. It is very much used by the Indians, and likewise by some Portugese's, but most by the slaves thereby to forget their labour: to conclude it is a certain small comfort to a melancholy person. A●o●a. D. Pal. Bangue is likewise much used in Turkey and Egypt, and is made in three sorts, having also three several names The first by the Egyptians is called Assis, which is the powder of Hemp, or of Hemp leaves, which water made in paste or dough, whereof they eat five pieces, each as big as a Chestnut and some more, such as eat it, for an hour after, are as if they were drunk, without sense, and as it were beside themselves, thinking they see many strange sights, wherein they are much pleased. This is used by the common people, because it is of a small price, and it is no wonder, that such virtue proceedeth from the Hemp, for that according to Galens' opinion, Hemp excessively filleth the head. The second they name Bosa, which is stronger than Assis: It is made of the meal of Lolium, by us called Dronkaydes weed or Herb, and of hempseed with water as aforesaid▪ others press out the juice, and eat that. The third is called Bernavi, which is the right Bangue, which they have ready dressed out of India (as Hughen writeth) whereof they take about an ounce, & at the first are merry, talking much & singing pleasant songs, laughing without measure, and using many foolish toys▪ which continueth with them almost an hour. After that they are in a manner furious, given to chiding and fight, which continueth likewise a little space, that done they are possessed with heaviness, and a certain kind of fear, that many times they cry out. In the end when they have played all these parts they fall in a sleep, and being awaked, they are as they were at the first. This is much used by foolish jesters or jugglers at feasts and banquets, to delight them. The Egyptians use also an other sort called Bers, that is to say, health for an hour. It is made of white Pepper, white Bilzen seed, of each five ounces, and of Opium two ounces and a half, Spica Nardi, Euphorbium, Bertram, of each one Mitchell, Saffran, fifteen Scruples, all beaten in a Marble mortar, and mixed with Honey whereof they make a confection. The 80. Chapter. Of Camphora. THere are two sorts of Camphora, one of Borneo (which is the best,) the other of China or Chincheu, which is nothing so good: it groweth on trees as great as Nut trees, and is the gum which is within the middle of the tree, and by sweeting and dropping cometh out from the same. This Camphora of Borneo, is likewise in the Island of Sumatra, and Sunda, as also in some other places there about. It is of bigness like a seed called in Portugal M●lho, and with us Barley, of colour whitish. It is of four sorts, whereunto the Indians use certain Sives with holes purposely made in them: the first having small holes, and that which passeth through them, is the worst, the next following it is somewhat greater, and so forth after that rate, as it is said before of Pearls, and so it is prised accordingly. It cometh sometimes all spotted, with some filth or foulness, which the Bamaners of Cambaia know well how to wash away with water, Soap, and the juice of Lemons: which done, they set it to dry in some shadow place, whereby it is whiter than it was at the first, and keepeth the former weight. It is likewise falsified with other Gum or powder of other roots, as the Indians can well handle all their wares. This is the right and true Camphora of Borneo, yet I believe there cometh very little of it into these countries: but the Camphora of China, which cometh from Chincheu, is in great abundance, and is brought in cakes or balls, and is much carried into all places, and very good cheap. For one pound of Borneo is worth a hundred pound of Chincheu, although the Champhora of Chincheu is mixed with Champhora of Borneo, and they know how to give it a colour, in such sort that it is both taken and used for good, and because it is so much used in medicines, I have particularly set it down, in this place, as also because it is one of the principallest wares in India. The 81. Chapter. Of Tamarinio. TAmarinio groweth in the most parts of all India, specially in the land of Gus●ate and the North parts beyond Goa: the Malabares call it Pulu: the Gusurates and the other Indians call it Anbilii: the Arabians, Tamarindii, because Tamaras in Arabia, are the same that with us we call Dates, and because they know not what to liken Tamarinio unto, better than unto Dates, therefore they call it Tamarindi, that is▪ Tamaras or Dates of India, whereupon the Portugese's call it also Tamarinio, and the Dates which are in great abundance brought out of Persia & Arabia into India: they name them after the Arabians, Tamaras. The trees of Tamarinio are almost like unto Chestnuts, or other nut trees, the branches being full of leaves, with a close & strong wood: the fruit of the Tamarinio is about a finger long, bowing or crooked, having green shells, or pills without, and being dry are grayish, having within certain kernels of the greatness of a Bean, which are covered about with that which they call Tamarinio: it sticketh to men's hands (for it is like lime) & therewith they prepare all their compositions throughout India, for it hath a sourish and sharp taste, and is the best sauce in all India, like vergis with us, and they never sith Rice but they put Tamarinio into it, wherewith their composition called Cariil is made, as in many places it is already declared: yet those that see it dressed will have no great desire to eat it, for they crush it through their fingers, whereby it showeth like rotten Meddlers: yet it giveth the Rice & the meat a fine sharp taste. Tamarinio is likewise proved to be a very good purgation, for the poor that are of small ability, and are not able to be at charges of Rhabarbo, Mann●, and such like costly Apothecary's ware, do only use Tamarinio pressed out into a little water, which water being drunk fasting in a morning, is the best purgation in the world, which is to be done when the Tamarinio is ripe or when it is green: it is used likewise in dressing meat, to put in among their flesh in steed of Vinegar, for it is much sourer than Vinegar, much like green gooseberries or grapes: the Physicians use it in purgations & medicines compounded with other herbs and spices, and it worketh well: it is likewise salted to send for Portugal, Arabia, Persia, & other places, yet the Indians keep it in their houses, in the husks, as it cometh from the tree, and it hangeth on the trees like sheaths of knives, but that they are somewhat bowed, as I said before: there is likewise sugar conserves made thereof, which is very good. The nature of this tree is to be wondered at, for that the Tamarini●, that is to say, the long crooked husk wherein it is, in the night time shrinketh itself up under the leaves, to cover it from the cold of the night, and in the day time it uncovereth itself again all naked and outright, as I have often seen and beheld it: when it is carried abroad or sold, it is out of the shells or husks, and being put together they make balls thereof, as big as a man's fist, but it is clammy and sticketh together. It is not very pleasant to look on, nor yet to handle, but very good cheap throughout all India, by reason of the great quanttitie thereof. Tamarinde, is by the Egyptians called Derelside. The tree whereon it groweth, Annota. ●. Pal. is as great as a Plum tree, with thick branches, and leaves like a Myrtle: The flowers white like Orange flowers, from the middle whereof do proceed four white thin threads, which grow out of the husk, wherein the seed and the pith is, which we call Tamarindi. The leaves of the tree do always turn towards the Sun, and when it goeth down, they shut together and cover the husk in the night time. At Alcayro in their gardens I saw some of these trees, and one by Saint Macarius Cloister in the wilderness, where no other Herbs nor trees do grow. The Turks and Egyptians use this tamarind, much in hot diseases and Fevers: they put it into fair water, and so drink it. I healed myself therewith of a pestilent Fever, being in Syria. It is a common Medicine among them, which as they travel through the dry woods and wilderness, they do use, and also against the Plague and other hot diseases, proceeding of Choleric burning humours, and against the heat of the Liver and Kidneys, it is very good. I can show the whole husk or shell of the tamarind with the leaves as they grow, and the Canna Fistula, which I myself gathered in Egypt. The leaves of Tamarinde trees, are used against Worms in children's bellies, and the young husks, as also the Cassia Fistula, are in Egypt used to be conserved in Honey o● Saint john's bread, or Sugar, whereof I brought great Pots full over. The Canna Fistula which is likewise much used for Purgations, and other such like Medicines is much found in India, as also in Cambaia, Zion, Malacca, and the places bordering on the same: but because there is the like in the Spanish Indies, and many other places, and sufficiently known, I will speak no more of it: but follow on with matters of less knowledge. Of these trees I have seen in Egypt at the least thousands together▪ Anota. D. Pal. specially about Damiata, a famous town in Egypt, lying on the river Nilus, even in like sort as the town of Campen lieth upon Issel about a mile from the Sea, The Egyptians call it Cassia Chaiarx-Ambar. The trees whereon Cassia groweth, are altogether like our Walnut trees, both for body, branches, and leaves, only the flowers are Golde-yellow, and of a sweet savour, out of these groweth the great husks wherein the Cassia lieth. The husks being small and without any wood are conserved likewise. The Egyptians use the husk of Cassia with white Sugar, & the juice of Calissi-wood, against gravel, and all diseases of the bladder and the Kidneys, also against coughing, and stopping of the breast, with Agaricum, also outwardly against hot inflammations laying the Cassia upon them. He that desireth to know more hereof, let him read Mathiolus and other Physicians, that have written most diligently upon the same. The 82. Chapter. Of Mirabolanes. THe Myrobalanes are found in many places of India, that is, in Cambaia, in the land of Ba●gate, in Go●, in Malabar, and in Bengalen: whereof there are five sorts▪ The first by Physicians called Citrinos', and by the Indians Ara●e, those are round, and are used to purge choler. The second which are called Emblicos, and in India Amuale, are used in India to tan Leather withal, as Tanners use Sumach, and when they are ripe and also green, they eat them for an appetite. The third sort in India called Resonualle, and by the Physicians Indius, are eight cornered. The fourth by the Physicians called Bellericos, and by the Indians Gu●ij, are also round. The fift & last are in India called Aretean, & by the Physicians Quebulus, those are somewhat long, roundish with points. The trees are almost like Plum trees, but they have several sorts of leaves, each tree by himself. They are commonly one with the other in greatness and fashion like Plums, but that some of them are squarer and rounder, as I said before. Three sorts are only used and esteemed of by the Physicians in India, that is Quebulus, which grow in Cambaia, Bisnagar and Bengala, which are likewise preserved & eaten in that sort, as also carried into divers places, as well to Portugal as else where, likewise the Cetrinos' and Indius, which also are preserved: and they grow in Malabar, Batecala and Bengala, they are much used, esteemed and carried into other countries. The Mirabolans when they are ripe are almost in taste like unripe Plums, but because this matter concerneth Physicians & apothecaries, I will speak no more thereof, having only set it down for a common thing in India. Annota. D. Pal. All these five sorts of Mirabolanes are brought us hither out of India ready dried, and some conserved in pickle, others in Sugar. The first we call Citrinas or Flavas, which are yellow Mirabolans, and the yellower the better, showing some thing green, close, and fast, and gummy with a thick shell. They purge the stomach from choler, and are good against Tertians, and other hot burning Fevers, and very necessary for a hot nature. The second we call Indus: these the blacker they are, the better they purge choler, specially black choler, they are good against shaking of the limbs, they cause a fair colour and drive away sadness. The third is called Cepule or Chebulae, the greater they are the better, blackish and somewhat reddish, heavy, and sinking in the water, they purge phlegm they sharpen men's wits, and clear the sight. They are here preserved in Sugar and Honey, they do strengthen and purge the stomach, they heal the dropsy, and are good against old Agues, they likewise give a man an appetite, and help digestion. The fourth we call Emblicas', and the fift Bellericas, they have in a manner one kind of operation like the other called Cebulus. They cleanse the body from phlegm, specially the brains, the Kidneys, and the stomach, they strengthen the hart, give an appetite, and ease belching. The Emblice, are also conserved & eaten to the same end. All these fruits purge, but in an other kind of manner than doth Cassia or Manna, or such like drugs, but they do it by astriction or binding, thrusting that out which is in the members. They that desire to know more hereof, let him read Mathiolus, and Garcius ab Horto, and others. The 83. Chapter. Of other Spices and Herbs in India SPiconardus groweth in the countries of Sitor & Mando●, (which are places that border upon the lands of Decan, Dely, and Bengalen) it is, sowed and groweth on plants, about 2, or 3. sp●ns high, (like corn) with great veins, wherein the Spiconardus groweth. They do commonly come close out of the earth by the root, and by that sort are brought into Cambaia, and other places to sell, and from thence sent into all places. Annota. D. P●. The Indian Spica comforteth the maw, being taken inwardly and also outwardly applied, and consumeth cold humours. Aloe, by the Arabians called Sebar, by the Decaners Area, by the Canarijns Cate Comer, and by the Portugese's Azeure, is made of the juice of an Herb, when it is dried, the Herb is called by the Portugese's Herba Baboza, that is Quill herb. There is much of it in Cambaia, Bengala, and other places, but in the Island called Sacotora (which lieth on the mouth of the red Sea, or the strength of Mecca) there is great quantity, and the best. It is a merchandise that is carried into Turkey, Persia, Arabia, and also into Europe, whereby the Island is much esteemed, and the Aloes called after the name of the Island, Aloes Socotrino, or Aloes of Sacotora. Annota. D. Pall. Aloes purgeth the stomach from choler, and tough phlegm, specially a watery and weak stomach: it taketh away all stopping, and consumeth raw moistures, preserving it from foulness: besides this, it strengtheneth the stomach, it is made stronger & of more force by adding to it Cinnamon, Mace, or Nutmegs. Aloes is good specially against Kooren and rawness, and for such persons as have their stomachs full of raw moisture, it is also used outwardly against sores that break forth of the body, and for the eyes. The fruit called Anacardi, is in many places of India, as in Cananor, calicut, and the country of Decan, and in divers other places. The Arabians call it Balador, the Indians Bibo, and the Portugal Fava de Malacca, that is Beans of Malacca, because it is like a bean, but somewhat greater than the Beans of these countries, they are used in India with milk, against a short breath, for the Worms and for many other things. When they are green, they make Achar thereof, that is to say, they salted them and lay them in Vinegar, as they do with the most kind of fruits and Spices, as in divers places I have showed. Annota. D. Pall This fruit hath her name from the hart, because in colour and likeness, it resembleth the heart, specially being dry. When the fruits are green and hanging on the tree (as I have seen them in Sicilia upon mount Aethna) they are like great Beans: and are salted like Olives, being very good to eat, within them they have a certain juice, as thick as Honey, and as red as blood, which is good against stains. The same operation that is in prepared Mirabolanes, is also in them, they heat & dry, they strengthen the memory, the brains and sinews, sharpen the wits, and are good against cold affections of the head. The Calamo Aromatico called in Gusurate Vaz, in Decan Vache, in Malabar Vasabu, in Malacca Daringoo, in P●rsia Heger, in Cuncan (which is the country of Goa and there about Northwards) Vaycan, and in Arabia Cassab and Aldirira, is sowed in many places of India, as in Goa, the Country of Gusurate and Ballagate, where it is sowed and so groweth, it hath no smell at all, until it be gathered. The women use it much in India, for the mother, also for pain in the Sinews, it is also much used for horses, for when it is cold weather, they give it horses in the morning to eat, being beaten and mixed with Garlic, Cominséede, salt, Sugar, and Butter. This receipt they call Arata, which is always used in India for horses, wherewith (as they say) they do them great good. The Calamo Aromatico is the stalk or Reed of the Herb, but the inward and spongious part is of yellowish colour, the root of the tree is good for nothing, but only the stalk or Reed thereof, with that which is in the midst of it. What the right Calamus Aromaticus is, Annota. D. Pa● my very good friend Doctor Carolus Clusius writeth in his learned Annotations upon Garcius ab Horto in his 127 leaf, whereof certain pieces were given me, which I brought out of Egypt, where it is found in great abundance, and much used. They call it Cassab Elderira, it is a thin Reed, being fresh and unwithered, of a light Gold yellow colour, with many knots and splinters in the breaking, within spongy like Cobwebs, white & tough in chawing, and astringent, with a little sharp bitterness, as I can show it, and much thereof may be had out of Egypt, where they put it in their Treacle, and use it many other ways, to drive down the Urine, and for the stone. Costus which the Arabians call Cost or Cast, the Gusurates of Cambaia Vlpor, and they of Malac●a Pucho, whether it is much brought, and also into China and other places. It cometh from Sitor and M●ndor above named, where Spiconardi is found, and from thence it is brought into Cambaia and India, and so into all other places. They are trees almost like Elder-trées with white blossoms, and very strong of smell. The wood and the root is the Costus, it is a great merchandise in Persia, Arabia, and Turkey where as it is very much used. I have many kinds of Costus, the Indian, described by Garcius, with all her tokens. The Arabian and Syrian with her right marks, and also an other sort, much like Ginger. The Indian Costus is the best of them all, it healeth, driveth down the Urine and the stone, it cleanseth the Mother, being received into the body, or thrust up into it, and maketh women apt to conceive. It is good against the biting of Snakes, pain in the breast, and the Worms etc. Cabebus so called by the Arabians, and also Quabes, by all the other Indians Cub●c●m, or Cubabelum, because the Chi●ars before the Portugese's coming into India, used to bring it out of the Islands of java from Sunda, where they grow, and in no other place. For as then the Chinars had Navigation into all places of India, trafficking throughout all the Oriental Countries, with all kind of wares, as well on the firmeland as in the Islands. The javers which are the inhabitants of the place, where it grows call it Cum●●. It groweth like Pepper against a tree, as ivy doth, the leaves are very like Pepper leaves, and it groweth in husks like Pepper but every grain hath a stalk of itself, whereby it hangeth. The Ia●ers hold it in so great estimation, that they sell it not, before it is sodden, because the strangers that buy it, should not plant it. It is much used specially among the Moors, who put it into their Wine, therewith to make them apt to accomplish their lusts, whereunto they are much given: and the javers use it against the coldness of the stomach and other diseases. Cubebus is a fruit like Pepper, about the same bigness, the best are such as are close, full, heavy and sharp, although they be less than Pepper, but somewhat bitter and smell well, being i● a manner sweet. They warm and comfort the stomach, which is weak by rea●n of superfluous or windy matter, they cleanse the breast from tough phlegm, they strengthen the Milt, break wind, and help cold diseases of the mother, being chawed, with Mastic, they cleanse the 〈◊〉 from fleagm, & strengthen them. The leaves called Folium Indum which the Indians call Tamalapatr● are like Orange leaves, but somewhat sharper, and of a dark green colour. They have 3 veins that reach unto the end of the leaf, one in the middle, and two on the sides, that is, on each side one. They have a sweet smell, almost like Cloves. The tree whereon they grow, is of a reasonable bigness: they grow always on the side of Lakes, waters, or ditches, and are in many places of India, but most in Cambaia: the Indians use many of these leaves, and cause them to be carried and sold by whole balls: they say they are good to provoke urine, & against a stinking breath: also they lay them between their apparel, clothes and Linen, for it keepeth them from worms, and say it serveth in all things as Spiconardi doth. The Latinists have derived the name thereof from the Indian word, Tamalapatra, and call it Malabatrium: An● D. 〈◊〉 the Arabians, Cadegi Indi, that is to say, the Indian leaf: it is likewise much brought hither, specially to Venice, and is used to provoke urine, to strengthen the stomach & to help a stinking breath. Galanga by the Arabians called Galuegian, is of two sorts, one that is small and smelleth well, which is brought out of China into India, and from thence to Portugal and other places: and this sort is in China called Lavaudon: the other being greater is found in the Island java, and by them called Lanquas, and this smelleth not so well, as that of China: they grow on small plants, a span or 2 spans high from the earth, of themselves without ●ing: that of java is the greatest plant, about 〈◊〉 spans high: it hath leaves like the point of a spear, with a white flower, which bringeth forth seed: although they sow it not, yet in India they have planted some in their Gardens for pleasure, and use it for Salads and other medicines, specially the midwives', (which in India are called Da●a: it groweth not of the seed, but of the root which is planted in the earth, like Ginger: they are great & long, and have knots like reeds: it is a thing used in India for many medicines, & carried into all places. Galanga is a root with many knots, Ann● D. P●. being red both inwardly & outwardly the knots running about it, smelling well, and sharp of taste, for savour and fashion like the Cyperus root, wherefore by some men it is esteemed for Cyperus of Babylon. It heateth and drieth in the third degree: therefore it comforteth the stomach, and driveth away the pain thereof proceeding of cold and windiness. It healeth a stinking breath: it helpeth the beating of the hart, being drunk with the juice of the leaf of Weghe: it healeth the Colic proceeding from wind: it is good also against the windines of the Mother, it increaseih lust, heateth the kidneys, and every morning eating a little thereof, it healeth the headache which hath long endured. Of these and such like herbs there are many in India, and in the Oriental parts, the names and properties whereof are to me unknown▪ because they are not so common, nor known among the meaner sort of people, but only by Physicians, Apothecaries, and Herbalistes: therefore I have only spoken of such as are commonly known, and daily used. And this shall suffice for Spices, Drugs, and medicinable herbs. The 84. Chapter. Of all sorts of Pearls, both great and small, and of precious stones, as Diamantes, Rubies, Topaces, Saffires, and other such like stones, called Oriental stones, and of the Bezers stone, which is good against poison, and such like diseases, and in what manner and place they are found. Pearls by the Portugese's are called Perolas, that is, such as are great, and the small Alioffar, in Latin, Margaritas: in Arabia, Lulu: in Persia and India, Motu: and in Malabar, Mutiu. The principal and the best that are found in all the Oriental countries, and the right Oriental pearls are some between Ormus and Bastora, in the straits, or Sinus Persicus, in the places called barren, Catissi, julfar, Camaron, & other places in the said Sinus Persicus, from whence they are brought into Ormus. The King of Portugal also hath his Factor in barren, that stayeth there only for the fishing of pearls. There is great traffic used with them, as well in Ormus as in Goa. There are also other fishings for pearl, as between the Island of Seylon, and the Cape de Comriin, where great numbers are yearly found, for that the King of Portugal hath a captain there with certain soldiers that looketh unto it: they have yearly at the lest above 3 or 4 thousand duckers that live only by fishing for pearls, and so maintain themselves, whereof every year many are drowned or devoured by the fishes called Tubarones' or Hayen, whereof I have already made mention: these pearls are not so good, nor so much esteemed as the pearls of Ormus and are of a lower price, which they know likewise how to discern at the first sight. There are also pearls found by the Island of Borneo, and the Island of Aynon, on the coast of Cauchinchina, but those of Ormus surpass them all. They are fished for by dukers that dive into the water, at the least 10 12 and 20 fathom deep. They grow in Oysters, but the great pearls are found in the Oysters that swim aloft, and the smallest called Alioffar, are commonly in the bottom of the sea. The duckers are naked, having a basket bound at their backs, which being at the bottom (to make the more haste) they rake full of Oysters and dirt together, and then rise up again, and throw them into boats, that lie ready for the purpose, with men in them, which presently take the Oysters, and lay them on land to dry, where with the heat of the Sun they open of themselves, and so they find the pearls of Alioffar in the fish: and when they have made an end of fishing for that day, all the Fishers, with the Captain, Soldiers, labourers and Watchmen for the King, go together, and taking all the pearls that are caught that day, they divide them into certain heaps, that is, one part for the King, an other part for the Captain and Soldiers, the third part for the jesuits, because they have their Cloister in that place, and brought the Country first unto the Christian Faith, and the last part for the Fishers, which is done with great justice and equality. This fishing is done in Summer time, and there passeth not any year but that divers Fishers are drowned by the Cape de Comoriin (which is called the Kings fishing) and many devoured by Fishes: so that when the fishing is done, there is a great and pitiful noise and cry of women and Children heard upon the land, for the loss of their husbands and friends: yet the next year they must to the same work again, for that they have no other means to live, as also for that they are partly compelled thereunto by the Portugese's, but most part are content to do it, because of the gain they get thereby after all the danger is past. They find sometimes many, and sometimes but a few Pearls in one oyster, sometimes two hundred grains and more. The oysters that have the best Pearls in them are thin and white, which the Indians call Cheripo, whereof they make spoons and cups to drink in. The Pearls are sold by sives which are made of metal driven into thin plate for that purpose, whereof the holes are round. There are many sorts of these sives, the first hath small holes, and the Pearls that pass through them are at one price: the next siue hath greater holes, and the Pearls that fall through it are at higher price, and so forth at the least seven or eight sives. The small stuff that serve for no Pearls, they call Alioffar, and are sold by the ounce, and used by Apothecaries and Physicians, and to that end many of them are carried into Portugal, & Venice, and are very good cheap. To give the Pearls a fair colour, in India they use rice beaten a little with salt, wherewith they rub them, and then they become as fair and clear as crystal, and so continue. There is yet an other sort of oysters by the Indians called Cha●lia▪ & by the Portugese's Madre Perol●, or in other of Pearl, & are of the shell fishes that we call inkhorns, which they know how to prepare and make clean. They bring many of them into Portugal to s●rue for to drink in, and to keep for an ornament, & for pleasure specially those that come out of China and Bengalen, some guilt and painted with colours very fair, some wrought with branches and other figures, as we daily see them brought thither. In India they make divers things of them, as desks, tables, cubbards, tables to play on, bo●es, staves for women to bear in their hands, and a thousand such fine devices, which are all inlaid and covered with this Chanco or Mother of Pearl, very fair to behold, & very workmanlike made, and are in India so common, that there is almost no place in those countries but they have of them. It is likewise much carried abroad, both into Portugal▪ and else where, but they are most used in India, for there the women, specially those of Bengala use to wear manillias, or bracelets of them about their arms, that is to say, those of most account, and they must not take a maiden's maidenhead from her that is of any estate or degree, but she must have some of these mother of Pearl bracelets about her arms, which at this day is yet much used, and obs●●ued, whereby it is very much worn▪ Torteanxes there are likewise in great numbers throughout all India: of their shells they make many curious devices, as Combs, Cups, and Bowls to drink in, with tablemen and divers such like things, knowing how to give it a fair and shining colour most pleasant to behold, and is more esteemed of in India, than the mother of pearl, by reason of the beautiful colour they set upon it. The 85. Chapter. Of Diamonds. DIamonds by the Arabians and Moors called Almas, and by the Indians where they grow Iraa, and by the Malagans where they are likewise found, Itam. They grow in the Country of Decam behind Ballagate, by the Town of Bisnagar, wherein are two or three hills from whence they are digged, whereof the King of B●snagar doth reap great profit: for he causeth them to be straightly watched, and hath farmed them out with this condition, that all Diamonds that are above twenty five Mangeleyns' in weight are for the king himself: (every Mangelyn is four grains in weight) and if any man be found that hideth any such, he looseth both life and goods. There is yet another hill in the Country of Decam, which is called Vellia, that is the old Rock: from thence come the best Diamonds, and are sold for the greatest price, which the Diamand grinders, jewellers, and Indians can very well discern from the rest. These Diamonds are much brought to sell in a Fair that is holden in a Town called L●spor, lying in the same country of Decam between Goa, and Cambaia, whether the Banianes and Gusurates of Cambaia do go and buy them up, bringing them to Goa, and other places. They are very skilful in these matters, so that no jeweller can go beyond them, but oftentimes they deceive the best jewellers in all Christendom. In this Roca Vellia, there are Diamonds found that are called Nayfes ready cut, which are natural, and are more esteemed than the rest, specially by the Indians themselves. In the strait called Tania pura, a country on the one side of Malacca there is likewise an old rock, which also is called Roca-Vellia, where many Diamonds are found, that are excellent: they are small, but very good, and heavy, which is good for the seller, but not for the buyer. Diamonds are digged like gold out of Ours, and where they dig one year the length of a man into the ground, within three or four years after, there are Diamonds found again in the same place which grow there. Sometimes they find Diamonds of one hundred and two hundred Mangelyns, and more but very few. There is another stone called a Topas for colour which is almost like the Diamond, but darker & of less estimation. There are many of them found, that are of great value for that kind of stone, and are likewise digged out of the earth like Diamonds in many places of India. There are also white Saffires and Rubies, which can hardly be known from Diamonds unless it be by very good and expert jewellers, and Diamond grinders. There is likewise found in India a kind of thing much like to Rock-christall, but indeed it is none: for there is no Crystal to be found in India, nor in any of the oriental countries. It is called berylo, and is little different from Crystal. It is much found in Cambaia, Pegu, and Seylon, and they make many things thereof, as beads, seals, and divers other things, which they sell unto the Christians, and use among themselves. The 86. Chapter. Of Rubies, Espinelles, Granades, Emeralds and other precious stones. RVbies are of many sorts, but the best are those that are called carbunckles, which are Rubies that weigh above 25. quilates, whereof there are very few and seldom to be found. The best Rubies that are of the best colour, and water are in India called Tockes, which are like Carbunckles, there are others called Ballax, which are of a lower price than the first, and they are red. There are others called Espinellas', that are of colour like fire, and are less esteemed than the other two sorts, because they have not the right water of Rubies. There are Rubies also of many other sorts, whereof some are white like Diamonds as I said before: other of a Carnation colour or much like white Cherries when they are ripe. There are Rubies found half white, half red, some half Rubies, half Safires, and a thousand such other sorts. The cause thereof is because that in the rocks and hills where they grow, their first colour is white, and by the force of the Sun, are in time brought to their perfection and ripeness, and being perfect they are of colour red, like the Carbunckle and Tockes aforesaid, but wanting somewhat of their perfection, and being digged out before, that time they are of divers colours as I said before, and how much paler they are, and less red than the Tockes, so much are they less in value: for as they are in beauty and perfection, so are they esteemed every one in their kind. Those that are half Rubies, and half Safires, which the Indians call Nilcandi, that is to say, half Safier, and half Ruby, proceed of this, that the Rubies and Safiers grow always in one rock, whereby they are oftentimes found, half one, half other. The Rubies by the Arabians and Persians are called jacut, by the Indians Manica. The Safiers are of two sorts▪ one of a dark blue, the other of a right blue, the jacinth, Granades, and Robasses are likewise certain kinds of Rubies, but little esteemed, the Indians call them the yellow and carnation Rubies, and so forth, according to their colour. These jacinthes, Granades, and Robasses, are in so great numbers in Cananor, calicut, and Cambaia, that they are to sell in every Market, and corner of the streets, by whole corgias, each corgia having twenty pieces at the least in it, they sell the corgia for one stiver or two at the most as many as you will desire, but you must understand, they are of the smallest sort. The Safier is not of so great estimation as the Ruby, and yet is one of the most precious stones that are next the Diamond, and the Ruby: the Rubies, Safiers, and other stones aforesaid, do grow and are found in rocks and hills like Diamonds: they come out of calicut, Cananor, and from many places in the land of Bisnaga, but most out of the Island of Seylon, which are the best: but those of the Country of Pegu are esteemed the finest, whereof there is great store. The emeralds which the Indians call Pache, and the Arabians Samarrut, there are none throughout all India, yet it is reported that some have been found there, but very few & not often: but they are much brought thither from 〈◊〉 in Egypt, and are likewise called Oriental: they are much esteemed in India, because there are but few of them. There are many also brought out of the Spanish Indies, and carried into the land of Pegu, where they are much worn, and esteemed of, whereby many Venetians (that have traveled thither with Emeralds and bartered them for Rubies) are become very rich, because among them men had rather have Emeralds than Rubies: All the said stones are likewise used in medicines, and apothecary drugs, Turqueses are found in great numbers in the Country of Persia, and brought into India from beyond Ormus, by hundredth pounds at once, earth and altogether, which in India are little esteemed, for that the Indians and Portugeses do not wear many of them, and make small account of them. The jasper is much found in the land of Cambaia, but not much regarded: they make dishes and cups thereof: it is of colour green like the emerald. Chrysolites and Amatistes are many in the Island of Seylon, Cambaia, and Ballagatte, and the stone called Alakecca, which is also called Bloodstone, because it quickly stauncheth blood, and other stones called Milk stones, which are good for women that give milk or suck. These and such like stones are in great numbers found in Cambaia and Ballagatte, and are brought to Goa to be sold, whereof they make Beads, Seals, Rings, and a thousand such like curiosities: they are much esteemed, for that a seal of such a stone is worth two or three Pardaws the piece: there is also in Cambaia much Alambre, or whereof they make many rings, beads, and such like things, which are much used: there are likewise stones, by the Portugal's called Olhos de Gato, that is to say, cats eyes, because they are like them (which is the Agate) and are of colour and fashion like cats eyes: they come out of Cambaia, but the best out of Seylon and Pegu: they are little brought into Portin●l, for there they are not esteemed, and likewise because they are worth more in India then in Portugal, for the Indians esteem much of them, specially the Chinos, and thither they are carried, better esteemed, and sold there then any other stones: the Indians say that this stone hath a certain property and virtue to preserve and keep a man in the riches which he hath, and that they shall not lessen, but still increase: the Loadstone, which the Portugal's call Ped●a de Cevar is found in great quantity, and in many places of India: the Indians say, that if a man use daily to eat a little of that stone, it preserveth him, and maketh him look young, and that he shall never look old: wherefore the Kings and great Lords of India use it in pots and vessels, therein to eat and seeth their meat, thereby as they believe to preserve their youths. The 87. Chapter. Of the Bezoar stones, and other stones good against poison THe Bezoar stone cometh out of Persia, from the land or Province called Caras●one, and also out of other places in India: they grow within the maw of a sheep or Goat, about a little straw, that lieth in the middle of the maw, for by experience the straw is often found within them: the stone is very slick & smooth without, of a dark green colour. These Goats or sheep are by the Persians called Pazan, whereupon they call the stone Pazar, and the Portugal's by corruption of speech call it Bazar or Bezoar, and the Indians Pedro do Bazar, which is as much to say, as market stone: for Bezoar in the Indian speech signifieth a market or place where all victuals are kept and sold, and for the same cause they call the smallest money Bazarucos, as if they would say market money. This Bezoar's stone is very costly, and is much used in India against all poison, and other diseases, and is more esteemed than unicorns horn in Europe, for it is much tried and sold very dear: The greater and heavier they are, the better and of more virtue they are: the common sort are of three four or five octaves weight, some more, some less: they are much brought into Portugal, and greatly esteemed: the place where they are most found, is (as I said before) in Persia and also in the Island called Insula das Vacas, or the Island of cows: It lieth before the mouth of the river, entering into Cambaia, hard by the coast where the Portugal navy often putteth in to refresh themselves, and being there, kill divers of the sheep or Goats, wherein they find many of these Bezoar's stones: likewise in the land of Pan by Malacca, there are many found: in the same country of Pan they find a certain stone within the gall of a Hog, which they esteem more against poison and other diseases then the Bezoar's stone: the Portugal's call it Pedra do Porco, that is, Hogs stone: it is much used in Malacca, it is of clear red colour, and bitter in taste, and savoureth like French soap: when they will use it and give it any man to drink, they throw it into a cup of water, and so let it stand a little, which done, they take it out again, and the water will be bitter, and cleanse all the venom that a man hath in his body, as by experience hath oftentimes been found. The Bezoar's stone is as hard as any stone, but not very heavy: It is thought that these stones do grow in the maws of sheep, and galls of Hogs by virtue of the grass or herbs whereon they pasture and feed, as we have declared of the Rhinoceros, because they do only breed in those places above named, and in no place else, where these kinds of beasts are. In the town of Vltabado in the Country behind Goa in Ballagatte, there is a stone found by the Arabians called Hagerarmini, and by the Portugeses Pedra Armenia, and because there are many of them found in Armenia, they are commonly called so: it is blue & somewhat light green: the Moors use it much in purgations and for other diseases: besides these stones aforesaid, there are also many sorts of stones, as well precious stones, as against poison and other diseases, and of many properties & virtues: but because they are but little known, or trafiqued withal, I have only made mention of those that are daily bought and sold, and commonly known. The 88 Chapter. A brief instruction how to know and find out the right Diamantes, Rubies, Emeralds, Pearls, & other precious stones, and how to value them by weight, at their right prices and values, & first of the Diamant. FIrst you must understand that the Diamant is the king of all precious stones, because it is sold by weight, and hath a very certain thickness, whereby it is ordinarily wrought, for when it is greater, it is nothing worth, and being less it will soon be perceived: by the which thickness although it standeth in a ring, they can both see and guess how much it weighth, within a little more or less, and being out of the ring it is weighed, thereby to value it truly: there are old and ancient records found in India, wherein are written the prices of the stones, that is, one Quilat for so much, two Quilates for so much, and three Quilates for so much after the rate etc. and so of all prices and weights accordingly: and because they are daily bought and sold, it is therefore needful for a man to have a memorial about him, that is, of the prices of the perfect and fair stones, without fault or spot, for that being unclean, or having any fault or spot, they are hardly to be valued. There are some Princes and great Lords that desire to know the cause why such precicious stones are holden at so great prices, whereunto no other answer is made, but because men buy and sell them so dear, for all things are esteemed no otherwise of, then because they are bought and sold at such prices, and so is their manner to sell, for if a Diamant of one Quilat alone, be worth fifty Ducats, being perfect, their reason is, that after the same rate a great stone or Diamant may be worth 30. or 40. thousand Ducats, being in greatness and perfection correspondent: and the stones as well great as little, that until this time have been bought and sold, have not been so light, that they were sold above or under their value and estimation. Now to value the great Diamant as it ought to be, it is necessary to know and determine what a Diamant of a Quilat is worth, and a Ruby to match therewith: the like of an Emerald, neither more nor less, & having well considered what or how much hindrance the faults and foulness of the said Diamant will be unto the sale thereof, deducting the same out of the price of the said Diamant, Ruby or Emerald being Oriental, of what greatness soever they be, you may value them, and I will first begin with the Diamant, for that other stones are valued after the rate thereof, and will declare the perfection which it ought to have. The diamant that is perfect in all respects, must be of that proportion, that the two squares on the sides must make the breadth of the upper part of the stone, and that the under part of the stone be no broader, than that three of the breadths thereof will make the breadth of the upper part, and deep according to the same proportion: and the squares on the side must stand close with the edge of the ring or thing wherein it is set, being of the whole depth, and somewhat longer than square, and yet no more, then that it may be guessed, which is the length and breadth thereof, also it must be without any faults both in corners and sides, and every one of the four corners sharp and clean cut, and of a good water, Crystalline & shining clear, so that it may not once be perceived that it draweth near any colour, and not of a dark water, but clear and clean: the Diamant with all these perfections is worth 50. ducats being of one Quilat: but because these perfections are not often found, and that few men understand them, therefore I will say that a Diamant of goodness and perfection according to the common estimation, being of the weight of one Quilat in worth 40. ducats, and after this rate we will make our account, and whether it be a small or great Diamant of what weight goodness or foulness soever it may be: you must first consider & know what it weigheth, & if they cannot tell you, them you must guess by the sight thereof, and always esteem it at less weight than you think it weigheth, that you may value it within the price, and having esteemed the weight, keep that in your memory, and say thus, if it were a Diamant of a Quilat weight of this water, and so perfect, or had the corners less than these, or any foulness in respect of this, and all the qualities, or faults which a Diamant ought to have, consider what such a Diamant may be worth, being of quality like that you will esteem, & weighing no more but one Quilat: which having well thought and considered upon, esteem it rather less than more, & hold the price in your memory as aforesaid, and think upon the weight that it should weigh, be it much or little, & double the same weight adding as much more unto it, as if it be two, take other two, and multiply them together, and say 2. times 2. is four: if it weigh 3. multiply it with three, and they make 9 and so according to the number you find, and so you shall multiply all Diamonds, in weight, of what weight soever they be, and multiply them as I said before with as much again as they be esteemed, and the production of your multiplication you shall multiply by the sum of money you value the Diamant to be worth, weighing one Quilate, and the production of the last multiplication is the value of the Diamant: & if in the weight there be any halves, as if it weighed 2●. Quilate, than you shall redeem them into half Quilates, which is 5. half Quilates, and then say 5. times 5. is 25. and that shall you multiply with the price of the half Quilate, as you esteem it, and the production thereof is the worth of such a Diamant, and if it chance that the Diamant were so small, that the weight of a grain should be therein esteemed: than you must reduce all the weight into grains, and multiply as aforesaid, and that which proceedeth thereof is the weight of such a Diamant as you seek to value or esteem. As for example, there is a Diamant that weigheth 2. Quilates, which is of such a quality, that being of one Quilate it would be worth ●0. Ducats, and being of half a Quilate, 10. Ducats, and being of a grain, 2. Ducats and a half. Now to know what this Diamant of 2. Quilates is worth, you shall say that 2. times 2. is 4. This 4. you shall multiply with 40. Ducats, which is the value thereof, being of one Quilate, it maketh 160. Ducats, which is the price of that Diamant of two Quilates: now that you have a Diamant of two Quilates and a half, which is five halves, you shall say five times five is 25. this 25. multiplied by 10. it maketh 250. ducats, because the half Quilate cost 10. ducats, which is after the rate of 40. ducats the Quilate, than the Diamant of 2. Quilates and a half amounteth to 250. ducats. Now if a Diamant weighed 7. grains, you shall say 7. times 7. is 49. which 49. you must multiply by the value of a grain, which is two ducats and a half: so a Diamant of 7. grains is 127. ducats. In this manner you may always know what a Diamant is worth, having rated the price of one Quilate: the weight of the Diamant you will esteem being thus known, as by example is showed, and so you may the easilier make your account. There are some Diamonds that are faulty and unperfect, and are not worth 40. ducats, but of a less price according to the faults, and may be worth 36.35.34 & 30. ducats, or any lower price, as the faults are esteemed, & in that case it is very troublesome to know what half a Quilat or grain should be worth: wherein you must do thus: when you have esteemed what a Quilat of such a Diamant may be worth & that in the weight thereof there falleth out a half Quilat or grain, than you must first know what value it would be worth being of one Quilate, and then make your account that the fourth part of such a price is the value of half a Quilate, so that when a Quilate is worth 40. ducats, a half Quilate is ten ducats, and one grain two ducats and a half: for four grains is a Quilate, if the Quilate be 36. ducats, the half Quilate is 9 ducats, and one grain two ducats and one Teston, and so after that rate may you know the price of all Diamonds, of what quality soever they be. The like reckoning is made with thin Diamantes, Rubies, and Emeralds, that is made with those which are of greater price, as I shall hereafter show you. You must understand that a Ruby be of such a quantity, that it may accompany a Diamant of one Quilate it is worth 70. ducats, or that there be any which in weight do accompany a Diamant of half a Quilate or grain, than you must make your account by half Quilates, or grains, and you must always know the price of one Quilate, and must understand that the fourth part of 70. ducats is the value of one half Quilate, and the fourth part of a half Quilate is the price of a grain, and so you shall make your reckoning of Emeralds, each one according to his weight and price. There are some Diamantes that are thin, and yet show very clear, which are more worth than they weigh, and less than their clearness showeth: for a Diamant having a very thin table and hollow, yet on the upper side having the perfection in square, as I said, should be in a thick diamant, which is of so good perefection both in sides & hooks: such a Diamant showeth to be of two Quilates and weigheth but one: wherefore when your Diamant is of what greatness soever it may be, being perfect in the upper part, and thin underneath, you must always make your account, that being thin underneath, it is of less weight than it showeth for, and if it be not altogether thin underneath, than it weigheth more, yet the weight profiteth it nothing at all: and having the upper table smaller, and the sides greater, it will also weigh more, but the weight availeth it not: but you must always esteem it to weigh but the half of that it showeth for: and not being wholly thin underneath, it will weigh more, but to no end: and having the table small, and the sides and corners great, it weigheth more, but the weight availeth not, but you must esteem it to weigh but half so much as it showeth for: for that before it be made ready it will lose much of the weight. Now if there be a Diamant that hath a great table outwardly, & the corners small, it shall not weigh half so much as it showeth for, yet is it not any thing the worse for that, unless the corners were too small: now if there be a Diamant thin underneath, and square above, with the perfections that should belong unto it, it is worth being of one Quilate 70. ducats, and having any faults or spots, every man may well consider what hindrance they are unto it, and after this manner a man may easily set the price & value of them, and make his account after the rate of thick Diamantes, his account being made of half the weight they seem or show to have: as if they show to be two Quilates, make your reckoning of one Quilate: and if it show three Quilates, make your account of six grams, which is the half: and if there be any half Quilates, then see the price what a Quilate is worth, and so what a half amounteth unto, and so make your account as aforesaid by thick Dyamantes, and in grains the like, for there is no other difference then in the price, for that a perfect and clear thin Diamant of 〈◊〉 Quilate is worth ●●. ●●ckets and 〈…〉 or less weight accordingly 〈◊〉. The 89. Chapter. Of Rubies. WHen you have a Ruby to value or esteem that is squared table wise, as it should be, and that such a Ruby is to accompany a Dyamant of the same weight of Quilates and so man● Quilates in colour, if it hath four and twenty Quilates in colour and perfection, like Gold of four and twenty Quilates, than it is certain, it is both fine and good. The Ruby is not sold by the weight▪ because it hath no certain thickness, for that many of them are made thin for pleasure to the sight, and the better to lay the ground or leaves under them, and it may very well be thin, but not very much, for than it should be a lot and hindrance unto it: if a Ruby be whole and perfect both in colour, cleanness, thickness, squareness, and form, it is worth an hundred ducats: but there are very few that are perfect in all points, specially being great, for they have always some faults or spots that are covered and hidden: but right perfect there are none, or very few, and not many men have any great knowledge therein: therefore I will say, thereby to make our account, that a Ruby which in common show is accounted perfect and good, is worth seventy ducats: so that when a jeweller or stone cutter doth ask another for a Ruby, which he hath not▪ 〈◊〉 saith only, there is a Ruby of greatness●●o accompany a Diamant of so many Quilates, and hath so many Quilates in colour, the other thereby understandeth of what colour and greatness it is. Now having a Ruby or Rubies with tables or unground, and are to value them, or know what they be worth, you shall consider with yourself and say thus: if there were a Ruby that were no greater than this, only serving to accompany a Dyamant of one Quilate, and were of such colours, clearness, and qualities, as this in quantity and greatness, & had the faults in all respects that this hath, what would it be worth▪ and having well considered the qualities, goodness or badness with the faults, how much they embase the price thereof, and having thereafter esteemed your price, being to accompany a Diamond of one Quilate, keep that price in your memory, and look on the Ruby how big it is, and what weight the Diamond hath, wit● the depth which it should be compared unto▪ and also if it be still raw and unground, consider how much it must be taken away in the grinding, and how big it will be when it is squared and fashioned: which having done, and knowing the weight of the Diamond it shall accompany, you shall then take as much more weight, & multiply it with the weight you have already found, that it should be accompanying a Diamond of one Quilate, and the production thereof, is the value of such a Ruby: to conclude, when you have determined what the weight of a Diamond is, that it may accompany, you shall make your account as if it were a Diamond, and that which proceedeth of the weight, you shall multiply with the price which you find it to be worth, to keep company with a Diamond of one Quilate: the Rubies that are unground and can be no tables it is to be understood that they are better in that sort then otherwise: Of these you must consider the price after the manner of the Diamond which he may accompany, & the height or depth of the stone, after that the colour, goodness and faults as it falleth out, and make the account or reckoning thereof as of Rubies with tables, and ground, and also of the Diamonds. There are also Diamonds that are not cut square in tables, but have a good fashion for to set in any jewel, as being pointed with three corners, hearts▪ and such like sorts, thereby to hide their faults, and are made in that sort to hold the greatness and weight thereof, and yet one of these being perfect in that manner, are not so much worth as those with tables: for that many times they have too much thickness underneath, which maketh the weight not to any profit, but rather hurt: which if it were whole and thin underneath▪ having outwardly all other perfections, it were as much worth as a Diamond, that hath a table being thick with his whole depth, which is 46. ducats being of one Quilate: so that when you have any of these you shall deal with them, as with the other, that is to consider, what they may be worth, being of one Quilate, and make your reckoning, as with the others aforesaid. The 90. Chapter. Of the oriental & old Emeralds, for that those that are found in the Islands of the Spanish Indies, are not yet tried nor resolved upon whether they be fine or not. THe old jewellers say, that if a man can find an Emerald perfect in all points, as in colour, clearness, fashion, and thickness, that such an Emerald is worth 3. Diamonds, which according to our account should be 120. ducats, and I believe verily that it is most true, but as yet there was never any found, either little or great that had all those perfections, there are some found that are perfect in colour and fashion, but of clearness and cleanness not one, for they have always some fattiness within them like green herbs and such like, wherefore to make our reckoning, we will say, that an Emerald of common sort, estimation, and perfection, is worth 80. ducats, being of the bigness, as that he may compare with a Diamond of one Quilate: for although it have certain green herbs within it, if they be not too many it is nevertheless esteemed perfect, having all the other perfections that it should have: therefore when you have an Emerald to value whether it be unground or a table, first you must consider the greatness▪ and what weight a Diamond should be that must compare with it, then look upon the faults or goodness that it hath, and considering well what such an Emerald should be worth▪ being no greater than a Diamond of one Quilate, you must make your account as with Rubies: which is, take the weight of the Diamond, whereunto you compare it, and multiply that with as much more, and the production thereof, multiply by the price that you have esteemed the one Quilate to be worth, and the production is the value of such an Emerald, and in the same sort shall you do with all the Emeralds you have to value, whether they be great or small, good or bad, always considering the faults or goodness it may have, and after that esteem it, and set the price, and if there be half a Quilate or grains in the weight of the Diamond you compare it unto▪ then you must make your account by halves and grains, as I said before of Diamonds and Rubies. When you will value any stones, you must look well upon them, and consider if it be a Diamond, of what water and fashion it is, if it hath all the depth and more, if it be foul or have any other fault in the corners or in the squares, & what hurt or disadvantage it bringeth to the stone, that you deceive not yourself in valuing the price it may be worth, being of one Quilate, thereby to make your reckoning as before: If it be a Ruby, mark well of what bigness it is, and what Diamond in weight it may be compared unto, & rate it always at less greatness, rather than at more, that you deceive not yourself, and consider well what colour it hath: If there be any Cas●edonia, or uncleanness, if it be thin or have any other fault therein, or any want in the squareness, & what hindrance those faults may be unto the stone, in the price, perfection, and greatness of the Diamond whereunto you compare it, and look you fail not herein, for if you do, you will clean over shoot yourself: likewise in setting the price what it may be worth being so great, as to compare with a Diamond of one Quilate, thereby to make your reckoning of the weight, that it may weigh more or less. What I have said of Rubies, you must likewise understand of Emeralds that are Orientale, all after one sort and manner of reckoning. There are other red stones called Espinelles, and of divers other sorts, whereof some are so perfect in their kinds, that they are like to Rubies, and this is to be understood of the good and the best. There are others called Espinelles da Rouca Nova, or new Rocket: some of them have the colour of Rubies, others draw near the colour of jacinthes, and it is not known whether they be right Espinelles or not: for the good jewellers esteem them for no Espinelles, but for Rubasses, and jacinthes, and so good that they are like to Espinelles: wherefore the stone grinders & jewellers say, that they are Espinelles, because they would be better paid for the fashion, and therefore they do polish them with Espinell dust or polishing. These Espinelles in their polish are Espinelles, but in colour Rubasses, and jacinthes, and there are many Rubies, which to polish well, and grind well, you had need polish with the polish of Espinelles. If there be an Espinell of the old rock, which in kind and quality is good, being perfect in all parts with a very good table, and were to be compared with a Diamond of one Quilate, it would be worth 40. ducats, but having any imperfections, every man may well consider what hurt and abate they may do in the price, and after the same rate make his account as he doth in Rubies, the Ballayeses are likewise sold by weight, but not in that sort as Diamonds and Rubies, but they are esteemed according to the weight, that is the best calies that may be found being of one Quilate, may be worth ten ducats, and having any faults▪ either in colour or other perfections, is of less value, but being perfect as I said already, it is worth ten ducats, and two Quilates twenty ducats, of three Quilates thirty ducats, and so after the rate as it is, small or great▪ being of the weight it should be, and being imperfect, every man ofskill may well consider what it is worth, being of one Quilate▪ & esteem it thereafter. The 91. Chapter. Of Orientale Pearls. THe Orientale Pearls are better than those of the Spanish Indies, and have great difference in the price: for they are worth more and have a better glass, being clearer, and fairer. Those of the Spanish Indies commonly being darker & deader of colour: yet there are some found in the Portugal Indies that are nothing inferior to the Orientale Pearls, but they are very few: Now to value them as they should be, I will only set the good Pearls at a price. A Pearl that in all parts is perfect, both of water, glass and beauty without knobs, of form very round or proportioned like a pearl without dents, being of one Quilate is worth a ducat, and after this rate I will make my reckoning, as I do with Diamonds Rubies and Emeralds, and if there be any faults in the water, clearness and fashion, or that it hath any knobs or other defaults, it may well be considered what hurt it may be unto the sale thereof, and according to the goodness, or badness value the price thereof: which having valued, we must see what it weigheth, and then make the reckoning thereof, as with Diamonds, Rubies & Emeralds, & if there be a whole string or a chain full of Pearls, you must look well upon them for where there are many, they are not all alike: the greatest being the best, & the other after the rate, for the goodness of the great will bear the badness of the small: but if it be contrary, than the bargain is not very good. This shall suffice for instruction to such as desire to deal therewith, to have always in their memory, and what herein is wanting for the better understanding and knowledge hereof, it may be supplied by true jewellers and stone cutters that are skilful in this point, and with these instructions can easily help, so that a man shall not need wholly to put his trust in those, that for their own profit will give them but bad counsel therein. The 92. Chapter. Of ●rta●ne memorable things passed in India during my residence there IN the month of December, Anno, 158●. there arrived in the town and Island of Ormus four Englishmen, which came from Aleppo in the country of Suria, having sailed out of England, and passed through the straights of Gibraltar, to Tripoli a town and Haven, lying on the sea coast of Suria, where all the ships discharge their wares, and merchandises, and from thence are carried by land unto Aleppo, which is nine days journey. In Aleppo there are resident divers merchants and Factors of all Nations, as Italians, frenchmen, Englishmen, Armenians, Turks & Moors, every man having his Religion apart, paying tribute unto the great Turk. In that town there is great traffic, for that from thence, every year twice, there traveleth two Ca●ylen, that is, companies of people and camels, which travel unto India, Persia, Arabia, and all the countries bordering on the same and deal in all sorts of merchandise, both to and from those Countries, as I in an other place have already declared. Three of the said Englishmen aforesaid were sent by the Company of Englishmen, that are resident in Aleppo, to see if in Ormus they might keep any Factors, and so traffic in that place, like as also the Italians do, that is to say, the Venetians, which in Ormus, Goa and Malacca have their Factors, and traffic there, as well for stones and pearls, as for other wares and spices of those countries, which from thence are carried over land into Ve●e. One of these Englishmen had been 〈◊〉 before in the said town of Ormus, and there had taken good information of the trade, and upon his advise and advertisement, the other were as then come thither with him, bringing great store of merchandises with them, as Clothes, Saffron, all kinds of drinking glasses, and Haberdashers wares, as looking glasses, knives, and such like stuff, and to conclude, brought with them all kind of small wares that may be devised. And although those wares amounted unto great sums of money, notwithstanding it was but only a shadow or colour, thereby to give no occasion to be mistrusted, or seen into: for that their principal intent was to buy great quantities of precious Stones, as Diamantes, Pearls, Rubies, etc. to the which end they brought with them a great sum of money and Gold, and that very secretly, not to be deceived or rob thereof, or to run into any danger for the same. They being thus arrived in Ormus, hired a Shop, and began to sell their wares: which the Italians perceiving, whose Factors continue there (as I said before) and fearing that those Englishmen, finding good vent for their commodities in that place would be resident therein, and so daily increase, which would be no small loss and hindrance unto them, did presently invent all the subtle means they could, to hinder them: and to that end they went unto the Captain of Ormus, as then called Don Gonsalo de Meneses, telling him that there were certain Englishmen come into Ormus▪ that were sent only to spy the Country, and said further, that they were Heretics: and therefore they said it was convenient they should not be suffered so to departed, without being examined, and punished as enemies, to the example of others. The Captain being a friend unto the Englishmen, by reason that one of them which had been there before, had given him certain presents, would not be persuaded to trouble them, but shipped them with all their wares in a Ship that was to sail for Goa, and sent them to the Viceroy, that he might examine and try them, as he thought good: where when they were arrived, they were cast into prison, and first examined whether they were good Christians or no▪ and because they could speak but bad Portugal, only two of them spoke good Dutche, as having been certain years in the low Countries, and there trafficked. There was a Dutch jesuite borne in the town of B●gges in Flaunders, that had been resident in the Indies for the space of thirty years, sent unto them, to undermine and examine them: wherein they behaved themselves so well, that they were holden & esteemed for good and Catholic Romish Christians: yet still suspected, because they were strangers, specially Englishmen. The jesuits still told them that they should be sent prisoners into Portugal, wishing them to leave off their trade of merchandise & to become jesuits, promising them thereby to defend them from all trouble: the cause why they said so, and persuaded them in that earnest manner was, for that the Dutch jesuite had secretly been advertised of great sums of money which they had about them, and sought to get the same into their fingers, for that the first vow and promise they make at their entrance into their order, is, to procure the welfare of their said order, by what means soever it be, but although the Englishmen denied them, and refused the order, saying, that they were unfit for such places, nevertheless they proceed so far that one of them, being a painter, (that came with the other three for company, to see the countries, and to seek his fortune, and was not sent thither by the English merchants) partly for fear, and partly for want of means to relieve himself, promised them to become a jesuite: and although they knew and well perceived he was not any of those that had the treasure, yet because he was a Painter, whereof they are but few in India, and that they had great need of him to paint their church, which otherwise would cost them great charges, to bring one from Portugal, they were very glad thereof, hoping in time to get the rest of them with all their money into their fellowship: so that to conclude, they made this Painter a jesuite, where he continued certain days, giving him good store of work to do, and entertaining him with all the favour and friendship they could devise, and all to win the rest, to be a pray for them: but the other three continued still in prison, being in great fear, because they understood no man that came to them, nor any man almost knew what they said: till in the end it was told them that certain Dutch men dwelled in the Archbishop's house, & counsel given them to send unto them, whereat they much rejoiced, and sent to me and an other Dutch man, desiring us once to come and speak with them, which we presently did, and they with tears in their eyes made complaint unto us of their hard usage, showing us from point to point (as it is said before) why they were come into the country, with all desiring us for God's cause, if we might by any means, to help them, that they might be set at liberty upon Sureties, being ready to endure what justice should ordain for them, saying, that if it were found contrary, and that they were other then traveling merchants, and sought to find out further benefit by their wares, they would be content to be punished. With that we departed from them promising them to do our best: and in the end we obtained so much of the Archbishop, that he went unto the Viceroy to deliver our petition, and persuaded him so well, that he was content to set them at liberty, and that their goods should be delivered unto them again, upon condition they should put in sureties for 2000 Pardawes, not to departed the country before other order should be taken with them. Thereupon they presently found a Citizen of the town, that was their surety for 2000 Pardawes, where they paid him in hand 1300. Pardawes, and because they say they had no more ready money, he gave them credit, seeing what store of merchandise they had, whereby at all times if need were, he might be satisfied: and by that means they were delivered out of prison, and hired themselves a house, and began to set open shop: So that they uttered much ware, and were presently well known among all the Merchants, because they always respected Gentlemen, specially such as brought their wares showing great courtesy and honour unto them, whereby they won much credit, and were beloved of all men, so that every man favoured them▪ and was willing to do them pleasure. To us they showed great friendship, for whose sake, the Archbishop favoured them much, and showed them very good countenance, which they knew well how to increase, by offering him many presents, although he would not receive them, neither would ever take gift or present at any man's hands. Likewise they behaved themselves very catholicly and very devout, every day hearing Mass with Beads in their hands, so that they fell into so great favour, that no man carried an evil eye, no nor an evil thought towards them. Which liked not the jesuits, because it hindered them from that they hoped for, so that they ceased not still by this Dutch jesuite to put them in fear, that they should be sent into Portugal to the King, counseling them to yield themselves jesuits into their Cloister, which if they did, he said they would defend them from all in troubles, saying further, that he counseled them therein as friend, and one that knew for certain that it was so determined by the viceroys privy Counsel: which to effect he said they stayed but for shipping that should sail for Portugal, with divers other persuasions, to put them in some fear, & so to effect their purpose. The English men to the contrary, durst not say any thing to them▪ but answered, that as yet they would stay a while, and consider thereof, thereby putting the jesuits in good comfort, as one among them, Of this ● Newberry▪ you may read more in M. Hackluy●es book of English voyages. being the principal of them (called Io●n Nuberye) complained unto me often times, saying he knew not what to say or think therein, or which way he might be rid of those troubles: but in the end they determined with themselves, to departed from thence, and secretly by means of contrary friends, they employed their money in precious stones, which the better to effect, one of them was a jeweller, and for the same purpose came with them. Which being concluded among them, they durst not make known to any man, neither did they credit us so much, as to show us their minds therein, although they told us all whatsoever they knew. But on a Whitsunday they went abroad to sport themselves about three miles from Goa, in the mouth of the river in a country called Bards, having with them good store of meat and drink. And because they should not be suspected, they left their house and shop, with some wares therein unsolde, in custody of a Dutch Boy, by us provided for them, that looked unto it. This Boy was in the house not knowing their intent, and being in Bards, they had with them a Patamar, which is one of the Indian posts, which in winter times carrieth letters from one place to the other, whom they had hired to guide them: & because that between Bards and the Firm land there is but a little river, in manner half dry, they passed over it on foot, and so traveled by land, being never heard of again: but it is thought they arrived in Aleppo, as some say, but they knew not certainly. Their greatest hope was, that john Newberry could speak the Arabian tongue, which is used in all those countries, or at the least understood, for it is very common in all places there about, as French with us. News being come to Goa, there was a great stir and murmuring among the people, and we much wondered at it: for many were of opinion, that we had given them counsel so to do, and presently their surety seized upon the goods remaining, which might amount unto above 200. Pardawes, and with that and the money he had received of the English men, he went unto the Viceroy, and delivered it unto him, which the Viceroy having received, forgave him the rest. This flight of the English men grieved the jesuits most, because they had lost such a pray, which they made sure account of, whereupon the Dutch jesuite came to us to ask us if we knew thereof, saying, that if he had suspected so much, he would have dealt otherwise, for that he said, he once had in his hands of theirs a bag wherein was forty thousand Veneseanders (each Veneseander being two Pardawes) which was when they were in prison. And that they had always put him in comfort, to accomplish his desire, upon the which promise he gave them their money again, which otherwise they should not so lightly have come by, or peradventure never, as he openly said: and in the end he called them heretics, and spies, with a thousand other railing speeches, which he uttered against them. The Englishman that was become a jesuite, hearing that his companions were gone, and perceiving that the jesuits showed him not so great favour, neither used him so well, as they did at the first, repent himself, and seeing he had not as then made any solemn promise, & being counseled to leave the house, & told that he could not want a living in the town, as also that the jesuits could not keep him there without he were willing to stay, so they could not accuse him of any thing: he told them flatly, that he had no desire to stay within the Cloister. and although they used all the means they could to keep him there, yet he would not stay, but hired a house without the Cloister, and opened shop, where he had good store of work, and in the end married a Mesticos daughter of the town, so that he made his account, to stay there while he lived. By this Englishman I was instructed of all the ways, trades, and viages of the country, between Aleppo and Ormus, and of all the ordinances and common customs, which they usually hold during their Voyage over land, as also of the places and towns where they passed. And since those Englishmen departures from Goa, there never arrived any strangers either English or others by land in the said countries, but only Italians which daily traffic over land, and use continual trade going and coming that way. About the same time there came into Goa from the Island of japan, certain jesuits and with them, three Princes, being the children of certain Kings of that country, wholly appareled like jesuits, not one of them above the age of sixteen years, being minded (by persuasions of the jesuits, to travel into Portugal, and from thence to Rome, to see the Pope, thereby to procure great profit, privileges and liberties for the jesuits, which was only their intent: they continued in Goa, till the year 1584. 1584. and then set sail for Portugal, and from thence traveled into Spain, whereby the King and all the Spanish Nobility, they were with great honour received, and presented with many gifts, which the jesuits kept for themselves. Out of Spain they road to see the Pope, where they obtained great privileges and liberties, as in the description of the Island of japen, I have in part declared. That done, they traveled throughout Italy, as to Venice, Mantua, Florence, and all other places and dominions of Italy, where they were presented with many rich presents, and much honoured, by means of the great report the jesuits made of them. To conclude they returned again unto Madril, where with great honour they took their leave of the King, with letters of commendation in their behalfs unto the Viceroy, and all the Captains and Governors of India, and so they went to Lisbon, and there took shipping in Ano. 1586. 1●86. and came in the ship called Saint Philip (which in her return to Portugal was taken by Captain Drake: and after a long and troublesome Voyage, arrived at Mosambique, where the ship received in her lading, out of an other ship called the Saint Laurence, that had put in there, having lost her Masts, being laden in India, and bound for Portugal, where the ship was spoiled: and because the time was far spent, to get into India, the said Saint Philip, took in the lading of Saint Laurence, and was taken in her way returning home, by the Englishmen, as I said before, and was the first ship that had been taken coming out of the East Indies: which the Portugese's took for an evil sign, because the ship bore the Kings own name. But returning to our matter, the Princes and jesuits of japan, the next year after arrived at Goa with great rejoicing and gladness, for that it was verily thought, they had all been dead: when they came thither, they were all three appareled in cloth of Gold and Silver, after the Italian manner, which was the apparel that the Italian Princes and Noblemen had given them: they came thither very lively, and the jesuits very proudly, for that by them, their Voyage had been performed. In Goa they stayed till the Monson, or time of the winds came in to sail for China, at which time they went from thence and so to China, & thence unto japon, where (with great triumph and wondering of all the people) they were received and welcomed home, to the furtherance and credit of the jesuits, as the Book declareth, which they have written and set forth in the Spanish tongue concerning their Voyage, as well by water & by land, as also of the entertainment that they had in every place. In the year 1584. in the month of june, there arrived in Goa many Ambassadors, as of Persia, ●4. Cambaia, and from the Samori●, which is called the Emperor, of the Malabares, and also from the King of Cochin: and among other things there was a peace concluded by the Samorijn & the Malabares, with the Portugal, upon condition that the Portugese's should have a Fort, upon a certain Haven lying in the coast of Malabare, called Panane, ten miles from Cal●cut, which was presently be 〈◊〉 built, and there with great costs and changes they raised and erected a Fort, but because the ground is all Sandie, they could make no sure foundation, for it sunk continually, whereby they found it best to leave it, after they had spent in making and keeping thereof at the least four tons of Gold, and reaped no profit thereof, only thinking thereby if the Samorijn should break his word and come forth (as oftentimes he had done) that by means of that Haven, they would keep him in where he should have no place to come abroad, to do them any more mischief. But seeing that the Samorijn had many other havens and places, from whence they might put forth to work them mischief, and as much as ever they did, although the Samorijn protesteth not to know of it, as also that he could not let it, saying that they were Sea rovers, and were neither subject unto him, nor any man else. They left their Fort, and put no great trust in the Malabares, as being one of the most rebellious and traitorous nations in all the Indies, and make many a traveling Merchant poor, by reason the Sea coast is made by them so dangerous and perilous to sail by: for the which cause the Portugese's army by Sea is yearly sent forth out of Goa, only to clear the coast of them, yet are there many Malabares in divers places, which by roving and stealing do much mischief in the Country, both by water and by land, which keep themselves on the Sea side, where they have their creeks to come forth, and to carry their prizes in to hide them in the country. They dwell in straw houses upon stone hills, and rocks not inhabited, so that (to conclude) they can not be overcome neither do they care for Samorijns, nor any man else. There is a Haven belonging to these rivers, distant from Goa about twelve miles, and is called Sanguis●o, where many of those Rovers dwell, and do so much mischief that no man can pass by, but they receive some wrong by them, so that there came daily complaints unto the Viceroy, who as then was named Don Francisco Mascharenhas, Earl of Villa Do●ta, who to remedy the same sent unto the Samorijn, to will him to punish them: who returned the messenger again with answer, that he had no power over them, neither yet could command them, as being subject to no man, and gave the Viceroy free liberty to punish them at his pleasure, promising that he should have his aid therein. Which the Viceroy understanding, prepared an army of fifteen Foists, over whom he made chief Captain a Gentleman, his nephew called Don julianes Mascharenhas, giving him express commandment first to go unto the Haven of Sanguisen, & utterly to raze the same down to the ground, which to effect, this fleet being at Sea, and coming to the said Haven, the Admiral of the fleet asked counsel what was best to be done, because Sanguisen is an Island lying within the coast, the river running about it, with many Cliffs & shallows in the entrance, so that at a low water men can hardly enter in. At the last they appointed that the Admiral with half the fleet should put in on the one side, and the Vice Admiral called joan Barriga, with the other half should enter on the other side, which being concluded among them, the Admiral entered first, commanding the rest to follow, and rowed even to the Firm land, thinking they had come after: but the other Captains that were all young Gentlemen and unexperienced, began to quarrel among themselves, who should be first or last, whereby the fleet was separated, & some lay in one place, some in an other, upon the droughts and shalowes, and could not stir, so that they could not come to help the Admiral▪ neither yet stir backward nor forwards. And when the Vice Admiral should have put in, on the other side the Captains that were with him would not obey him, saying he was no Gentleman, and that they were his betters, upon these and such like p●ints, most of the Portugeses enterprises do stand, and are taken in hand, whereby most commonly they receive the overthrow: and by the same means this fleet was likewise spoiled, and could not help themselves: which those of Sanguese● perceiving, having forsaken their houses and being on the tops of the hills, and seeing that the Foists lay without, one separated from the other upon the Cliffs and shallows not being able to put off, and that the Admiral lay alone upon the Strand, and could not stir, they took courage, and in great number set upon the Admiral's Foiste, and put them all to the sword, except such as saved themselves by swimming. And although the Admiral might well have saved himself, for that a slave proffered to bear him on his back, yet he would not, saying, that he had rather die honourably fight against his enemy, then to save his life with dishonour, so that he defended himself most valiantly. But when they came so many upon him, that he could no longer resist them▪ they slew him, & being de●d cut off his head, in presence of all the other Foists: which done they stuck the head upon a Pike, crying in mocking unto the other Portugese's, come and fetch your Captain again, to their no little shame and dishonour, that in the mean time looked one upon an other like Owls. In the end they departed from thence with the fleet, every man severally by themselves, like sheep without a shepherd, and so returned again into Goa, with that great victory. The Captains were presently committed to prison, but each man excusing himself, were all discharged again, great sorrow being made for the Admiral, specially by the Viceroy, because he was his brother's son, and much lamented by every man, as being a man very well beloved, for his courteous and gentle behaviour: the other Captains to the contrary being much blamed, as they well deserved. Presently thereupon they made ready an other army with other Captains, whereof Don jeronimo Mascharenhas was Admiral, being cousin to the foresaid Admiral deceased, to revenge his death. This fleet set foot on land, and withal their power entered among the houses, but the Sangueseans perceiving them to come, that purposely watched for them, fled into the mountains, leaving their straw houses empty: whether they could not be followed, by reason of the wildness of the place, whereupon the Portugese's burnt their houses, and cut down their trees, rasing all things to the ground, with the which destruction they departed thence, no man resisting them. At the same time the rulers of Cochijn by commandment of the Viceroy, began to set up a custom house in the town, which till that time had never been there: for the which cause the inhabitants rose up, & would have slain them, that went about it. Whereupon they left it off, till such time as the new Viceroy came out of Portugal, called Don Duarede Meneses, and with the old Viceroy assembled a counsel in Cochijn, where the government was delivered unto him: and there he used such means, that by fair words and entreaty they erected their custom house, and got the towns men's good will, but more by compulsion then other wise. Which custom is a great profit to the King, by means of the traffic therein used, because there the Portugal ships do make themselves ready, with their full lading to sail from thence to Portugal. The same year in the month of September, there arrived in Goa, a Portugal ship, called the Dom jesus de Cara●a▪ that brought news of four ships more, that were on the way, with a new Viceroy called Don Duarte de Meneses: which caused great joy throughout the City, and all the Bells being rung as the manner is, when the first ship of every fleet arriveth in Goa out of Portugal. In that ship came certain canoneers being Netherlanders, that brought me letters out of Holland, which was no small comfort unto me. Not long after in the same month there arrived an other ship called Boam Vragen, wherein were many Gentlemen, and Knights of the Cross▪ that came to serve the King in India: among which was one of my Lord Archbishop's brethren, called Roque da Fonseca, the other Lords were Don jorgie Tubal de Meneses, chief standard bearer to the King of Portugal, new chosen Captain of Soffala, and Mosambique, in regard of certain service that he had in times past done for the king in India▪ john Gomes da silva new Captain of Ormus: Don Francisco Mascharenhas brother of Don julianes Mascharenhas, that was slain in Sanguise●, as I said before, he was to have had the captains place of Ormus, but by means of his death, it was given unto his brother Don Francisco, for the term of three years, after he that is in it had served his full time. In November after, the other three ships arrived in Cochijn, and had sailed on the out side of Saint Laurence Island, not putting into Mosambique. The ship names were Santa Maria Arreliquias, and the Admiral, As Chagas, or the five wounds. In her came the Viceroy Don Duarte de Meneses that had been Captain of Tanger in Africa, or Barbary: and in this ship there were 9●0. Soldiers and Gentlemen, that came to safeconduct the Viceroy▪ besides the sailors that were above a 100 and had been above seven Months upon the way, without taking land before they arrived at Cochin, where they received the Viceroy with great solemnity: and being landed he sent presently unto the old Viceroy to certify him of his arrival, and that he should commit the government of the country unto the Archbishop, to govern it in his absence, specially because the Archbishop & he were very good friends, and old acquaintance, having been prisoners together in Barbary when Don Sebastian King of Portugal was slain: which the old Viceroy presently did, and went by Sea unto Cochijn, that he might return into Portugal with the same ships, as the viceroys use to do, for that after their time of Government is out, they may not stay any longer in India. The 10. of November Anno 1584. the ship called Carania went from Goa to Cochijn, there to take in Pepper, and other wares: and then do all the Factors go into Cochijn, to lad their wares, and when the ships are laden and ready to departed, they return again to Goa, where they still remain. In that ship the old Viceroy with many Gentlemen sailed to Cochijn. 〈◊〉 The fift of February Anno 1585. the Viceroy Don Duarte de Meneses, arrived in Goa, where with great triumph and feasting he was received. In the month of April the same year my fellow (and servant to the Archbishop) called Barnard Burcherts, borne in Hamborough traveled from Goa unto Ormus. and from thence to Bassora, and from thence by land through Babylon, jerusalem, Damascus, and Aleppo: from whence he sent me two letters, by an Armenian, wherein he certified me of all his Usage which he performed with small charges, and less danger, in good fellowship, and very merry in the company of the Caffyles. From Aleppo he went to Tripoli in Suria, and there he found certain ships for England, wherein he sailed to London, and from thence to Hamborough, which by letters from him written out of Hamborough I understood. In the month of August, there came letters from Venice by land, that brought news of the death and murder of the Prince of Orange, a man of honourable memory, as also of the death of Mons. the Duke of Alenson, or Amon, with the marriage of the Duke of Savoy to the King of Spain's daughter. The 20. of October, there arrived in Goa the ship called the S. Francis, that came out of Portugal, & with it came also some Dutch canoneers, that brought me letters out of my country, with news of my father Hugh joosten of Harlems' death. The first of November after▪ arrived at Cochiin, the Saint Alberto that came from Portugal. And the first of December that year there arrived in Cananor upon the coast of Malabar the ship called the Saint Laurence, and from thence came to Goa, most of her men being sick, & above 90. of them dead, having endured great misery, and not once put into land. At that time there wanted two of the fleet, that came from Lisbon in company with her, & they were the S. salvator, and the Admiral S. jago, whereof they could hear no news. At the same time there came certain Italians by land into Goa, and brought news of the death of Pope Gregory the 13. and of the election of the new Pope called Sixtus. At that time also the ships that came from Portugal sailed to Cochijn to take in their lading: which done in the month of januarie Anno 1586 they sailed for Portugal. In the month of May Anno 1586. letters were brought into Goa, from the Captain of Soffala and Mosambique unto the Viceroy and the Archbishop, to certify them of the casting away of the Admiral Saint jago, that set out of Portugal the year before being Anno 1585. whereof I spoke before, she was cast away in this manner. The ship being come with a good speedy wind and wether, from the Cape de Bona Speranza, near to Mosambique, they had passed (as they thought) all dangers▪ so that they needed not to fear any thing: yet it is good for the Master & others to be careful and keep good watch, and not to stand too much upon their own cunning & conceits, as these did, which was the principal cause of their casting away and so they sailed between the Island Saint Laurence and the Firm land, that runneth by the coast to Mosambique, which lieth on the left hand, & the Island of S. Laurence on the right hand, between the which Island and the fast land▪ there are certain shallows called the India, fifty Spanish miles distant from the Island of S. Laurence, and seventy miles from the Firm land, right against the country of Soffala, under 22. degrees, on the South side of the Equinoctial, and from thence to Mosambique is 90. miles. Those shallows are most of clear Corrale, very sharp both of black, white, and green colour, which is very dangerous: therefore it is good reason they should shun them, and surely the Pilots ought to have great care, specially such as are in the Indian ships, for that the whole ship and safety thereof lieth in their hands, and is only ruled by them, and that by express commandment from the King, so that no man may contrary them. They being thus between the lands, and by all the sailors judgements hard by the drowthes of India, the Pilot took the height of the Sun, and made his account that they were past the shallows▪ commanding the Master to make all the sail he could, and freely to sail to Mosambique, without any let or stay. And although there were divers Sailors in the ship, that likewise had their Cards, some to learn, other for their pleasures, as divers Officers, the Master and the chief Boatwayne, that said it was better to keep aloof, specially by night, and that it would be good to hold good watch, for that they found they had not as then past the shallows: yet the Pilot said the contrary, and would needs show that he only had skill, and power to command: (as commonly the Portugese's by pride do cast themselves away, because they will follow no man's counsel and be under no man's subjection specially when they have authority) as it happened to this Pilot that would hear no man speak, nor tak● my counsel but his own, & therefore commanded that they should do as he appointed them, whereupon they hoisted all their Sails, & sailed in that sort till it was midnight, both with good wind & fair wether but the Moon not shining, they fell full upon the Shallows, being of clear white Coral, and so sharp, that with the force of wind and water that drove the ship upon them, it cut the ship in two pieces, as if it had been sawed in sunder: so that the keel and two Oarlops lay still upon the ground, and the upper part being driven somewhat further, at the last stuck fast, the mast being also broken, wherewith you might have heard so great a cry, that all the air did sound therewith, for that in the ship, (being Admiral) there was at the least five hundredth persons, among the which were 30. women, with many jesuits and Friars, so that as then there was nothing else to be done, but every man to shrift, bidding each other farewell, and ask all men forgiveness, with weeping and crying, as it may well be thought. The Admiral called Fernando de Mendosa, the Master, the Pilot, and ten or twelve more, presently entered into the small boat, keeping it with naked Rapiers, that no more should enter, saying they would go see, if there were any dry place in the shallows, whereon they might work, to make a Boat of the pieces of the broken ship, therein to sail unto the shore, and so to save their lives, wherewith they put them that were behind in some small comfort, but not much. But when they had rowed about, and finding no dry place, they durst not return again unto the Ship, lest the boat would have been overladen, and so drowned, and in the Ship they looked for no help, wherefore in fine they concluded to row to land, having about 12 boxes of Marmalade, with a pipe of wine, and some Biscuit, which in hast they had thrown into the boat, which they dealt among them, as need required, and so commending themselves to God, they rowed forwards towards the coast, and after they had been 17 days upon the sea, they fell with great hunger, thirst and labour on the land, where they saved themselves. The rest that stayed in the ship, seeing the boat came not again, it may well be thought what case they were in. At the last one side of the upper part of the ship, between both the upper Oarlops, where the great boat lay, burst out, and the Boat being half burst, began to come forth: but because there was small hope to be had, and few of them had little will to prove masteries, no man laid hand thereon, but every man sat looking one upon an other. At the last an Italian, called Cyprian Grimoaldo, rose up, and taking courage unto him, said, why are we thus abashed? Let us seek to help ourselves, and see if there be any remedy to save our lives: wherewith presently he leapt into the boat, with an instrument in his hand, and began to make it clean, whereat some others began to take courage, and to help him, as well as they could, with such things as first came to their hands: so that in the end there leapt at the least four score and ten persons into it, and many hung by the hands upon the boat swimming after it: among the which were some women: but because they would not sink the boat, they were forced to cut off the fingers, hands, and arms of such as held thereon, and let them fall into the sea, and many they threw over board, being such as had not wherewith to defend themselves. Which done they set forwards, committing themselves to God, with the greatest cry and pitifullest noise that ever was heard, as though heaven and earth had gone together, when they took their leave of such as stayed in the Ship. In which manner having rowed certain days, and having but small store of victuals, for that they were so many in the boat, that it was ready to sink, it being likewise very leak, and not able to hold out: in the end they agreed among themselves to choose a Captain, to whom they would obey, and do as he commanded: and among the rest they chose a gentle man, a Mestico of India, and swore to obey him: he presently commanded to throw some of them over board, such as at that time had least means or strength to help themselves: among the which there was a Carpenter, that had not long before, helped to dress the Boat, who seeing that the Lot fell upon him, desired them to give him a piece of Marmalade and a Cup of wine, which when they had done, he willingly suffered himself to be thrown over board into the Sea, and so was drowned. There was an other of those, that in Portugal are called New Christians: he being allotted to be cast over board into the Sea, had a younger Brother in the same Boat, that suddenly rose up and desired the Captain that he would pardon and make free his Brother, and let him supply his place, saying, My Brother is older and of better knowledge in the world than I, and therefore more fit to live in the world, and to help my sisters and friends in their need: so that I had rather die for him, then to live without him. At which request they let the elder Brother lose, and threw the younger at his own request into the sea, that swom at the least six hours after the boat. And although they held up their hands with naked rapiers willing him that he should not once come to touch the Boat, yet laying hold thereon, and having his hand half cut in two, he would not let go: so that in the end they were constrained to take him in again: both the which brethren I knew, and have been in company with them: in this misery and pain they were ●0 days at sea. & in the end got to land where they found the Admiral and those that were in the other boat. Such as stayed in the ship, some took boards, deals, and other pieces of wood, & bound them together (which the Portugeses call bangadas) every man what they could catch▪ all hoping to save their lives, but of all those there came but two men safe to shore. They that before had taken land out of the boats, having escaped that danger, fell into an other, for they had no sooner set foot on shore, but they were by the Moors called Caffares, Inhabitants of that country spoiled of all their clothes, so that they left not so much upon their bodies, as would hide their privy members: whereby they endured great hunger and misery with many other mischiefs, which would be over tedious to rehearse. In the end they came unto a place, where they found a factor of the Captains of Soffala & Mosambique, & he holp them as he might, and made means to send them unto Mosambique, and from thence they went into India, where I knew many of them, and have often spoken with them. Of those that were come safe to shore, some of them died before they got to Mosambique, so that in all, they were about 60 persons that saved themselves: all the rest were drowned & smothered in the ship, & there was never other news of the ship then as you have heard. Hereby you may consider the pride of this Pilot, who because he would be counseled by no man, cast away that ship with so many men: wherefore a Pilot ought not to have so great authority. that in time of need he should reject and not hear the counsel of such as are most skilful. The Pilot, when he came into Portugal, was committed to prison, but by gifts and presents he was let lose, and an other ship, being the best of the Fleet, that went for India, in Anno 1588. committed unto him, not without great curses and evil words of the Mothers, Sisters, wives and children of those that perished in the ship, which all cried vengeance on him: and coming with thy ship wherein he then was placed, called the S. Thomas, he had almost laid her on the same place▪ where the other was cast away: hut day coming on, they romde themselves off, and so escaped: yet in their voyage homeward to Portugal, the same ship was cast away by the Cape de bona Speranza, with the Pilot and all her men, whereby much speech arose, saying it was a just judgement of God against him for making so many widows and fatherless children, whereof I will speak in another place. This I thought good to set down at large, because men might see that many a ship is cast away by the headiness of the governors, and unskilfulness of the pilots: wherefore it were good to examine the persons before a ship be committed unto them, specially a ship of such a charge, and wherein consisteth the welfare or undoing of so many men, together with their lives, and impoverishing of so many a poor wife and child: this loss happened in the month of August, An. 1●●5. 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 In May An. 1586. two ships laden with ●are set sail out of the haven of Chaul, in Ind●a, that belonged unto certain Portugal's inhabitants of Chaul, the owners being in them: those ships should have sailed to the straits of Mecca, or the ●dde sea, where the said merchants used to traffic: but they were taken on the Sea by two Turkish Galleys, that had been made in the innermost parts of the straits of M●a, by Cairo, on the corner of the red sea, in a town called Sues: the said Galleys began to do great mischief, & put all the Indian merchants in great fear. The same month there was a great army, prepared in Goa, both of Fustes and galleys, such as in many years had not been seen, and was appointed to sail to the red sea, to drive the Turkish Galleys away, or else to fight with them if they could: they were also commanded by the Viceroy to winter their ships in Ormus, and then to enter into the straits of Persia, lying behind Ormus, and to offer their service to Xatamas K. of Per●, against the Turk their common enemy, thereby to trouble him on all sides, if they had brought their purpose to effect: but it fell out otherwise, as hereafter you shall hear: for Chief of this army, there was appointed a Gentleman, named Rioy Gonsalues da Can●, who once had been Captain of Ormus, being a very fat and gross man, which was one of the chief occasions of their evil fortune, and with him went the principallest soldiers and gentlemen of all India, thinking to win great honour thereby: this army being ready, & minding to sail to the red sea, they found many calms upon the way so that they endured much misery, and begun to die like dogs, as well for want of drink as other necessaries: for they had not made their account to stay so long upon the way, which is always their excuse if any thing falleth out contrary to their minds: this was their good beginning, and as it is thought a preparative to further mischief: for coming to the red sea, at the mouth thereof they met the Turkish Galleys, where they had a long fight, but in the end the Portugeses had the overthrow, & escaped as well as they might, with great dishonour, and no little loss: and the Turks being victorious, sailed to the coast of Abex or Melinde, where they took certain towns, as Pate and Brava, that as then were in league with the Portugal's, there to strengthen themselves, and thereby to reap a greater benefit, by indamaging the Portugal, and lying under their noses. The Portugal army having sped in this manner, went unto Ormus, there to winter themselves, and in the mean time to repair their army, and to heal their sick soldiers, whereof they had many: and so when time served to fulfil the viceroys commandment in helping Xatamas, thinking by that means to recover their losses: being arrived in Ormus, and having repaired their Fustes, & the time coming on, the General by reason of his fatness and corpulent body stayed in Ormus, appointing Lieutenant in his place, one called Pedro Homen Pereira, (who although he was but a mean gentleman, yet was he a very good soldier, and of great experience) commanding them to obey him in all things, as if he were there in person himself: giving them in charge, as they sailed along the coast, to land upon the coast of Arabia, there to punish certain pirates, that held in a place called Nicola, and spoiled such as passed to and fro upon the seas, and did great hurt to the ships and merchants of Bassora, that trafficked in Ormus, whereby the traffic to the said town of Ormus was much hindered, to the great loss and undoing of many a merchant. With this commission they set forward with their Lieutenant, and being come to Nicola, where they ran their fustes on shore, so that they lay half dry upon the sand: every man in general leapt on land, without any order of battle, as in all their actions they use to do: which the Lieutenant perceiving, would have used his authority, and have placed them in order, as in warlike affairs is requisite to be done: but they to the contrary would not obey him, saying he was but a Boar, & that they were better Gentlemen & soldiers than he: and with these and such like presumptuous speeches, they went on their course, scattering here & there in all disorders like sheep without a shepherd, thinking all the world not sufficient to contain them, and every Portugal to be a Hercules and so strong, that they could bear the whole world upon their shoulders, which the Arabians (being within the land and most on horseback) perceiving and seeing their great disorder, & knowing most of their Fustes to lie dry upon the strand, and that without great pain, and much labour they could not hastily set them on float, presently compassed them about, and being ringed in manner of a half Moon, they fell upon them, and in that sort drove them away, killing them as they list, till they came unto their Fustes: and because they could not presently get their Fustes into the water, through fear and shame they were complled to fight, where likewise many of them were slain, and not above fifty of them escaped that had set foot on land: and so being gotten into their Fustes, they rowed away. In this overthrow there were slain above 800. Portugal's, of the oldest & best soldiers in all India, and among them was a Trumpeter, being a Netherlander, who being in the thickest of the fight, not far from the Portugal's ensign, and seeing the ensign-baerer throw down his Ensign, the easier to escape and save his life, and that one of the Arabians had taken it up, casting his Trumpet at his back, he ran in great fury, and with his rapier killed the Arabian that held it, and brought it again among the Portugeses, saying it was a great shame for them to suffer it so to be carried away, and in that manner he held it at the least a whole hour, and spoiled many of the Arabians that sought to take it from him, in such manner, that he stood compassed about with dead men: and although he might have saved himself, if he would have left the Ensign, yet he would not do it, till in the end there came so many upon him, that they killed him, where he yeéelded up the Ghost, with the ensign in his arms, and so ended his days with honour: which the Portugal's themselves did confess, and often acknowledged it, commending his valour, which I thought good to set down in this place for a perpetual memory of his valiant mind. The Lieutenant perceiving their disorder, and how it would fall out, wisely saved himself, and got into the Fustes, where he beheld the overthrow, and in the end with the empty vessels he turned again to Ormus, without doing any thing else, to the great grief and shame of all the Indian soldiers, being the greatest overthrow that ever the Portugeses had in those countries, or wherein they lost so many Portugal's together: among the which was the archbishops brother●▪ and many other young and lusty G●tlemen, of the principallest in all Por●ngall. At the same time the Queen of O●mus came to Goa, being of Mahomet religion, as all her ancestors had been before her, and as then were contributary to the Portugal. She caused herself to be christened, and was with great solemnity brought into the Town, where the Viceroy was her Godfather, and named her Donna Phillippa, after the King of Spain's name, being a fair white woman, very tall and comely, and with her likewise a brother of hers, being very young▪ was also christened, and then with one Mathias Dalburquer●k that had been Captain of Ormus, she sailed to Portugal, to present herself to the king. She had married with a Portugal Gentleman called Anton▪ Dazevedo Con●nho, to whom the king in regard of his marriage gave the Captain ship of Ormus, which is worth above two hundred thousand ducats, as I said before. This Gentleman after he had been married to the Queen about half a year, living very friendly and lovingly with her, he caused a ship to be made, therewith to sail to Ormus, there to take order for the rents and revenues belonging to the Queen his wife: but his departure was so grievous unto her, that she desired him to take her with him, saying, that without him she could not live▪ but because he thought it not as then convenient, he desired her to be content, promising to return again with all the speed he might. Whereupon he went to Barde●, which is the uttermost part of the River entering into Goa, about three miles off: and while he continued there, staying for wind and weather. The Queen (as it is said) took so great grief for his departure, that she died, the same day that her husband set sail and put to sea, to the great admiration of all the Country, and no less sorrow, because she was the first Queen in those countries that had been christened, forsaking her kingdom and high estate, rather to die a Christian, and married with a mean Gentleman, then to live like a Queen under the law of Mahomet, and so was buried with great honour according to her estate. In the month of August 1586 there arrived a man of Mosambique in Goa that came from Portugal in the ship that should sail to Malacca, 〈◊〉 that brought news unto the Viceroy, how the ship called the Boam Viagen, that in the year before sailed from India towards Portugal, was cast away by the cape de Bona Speranza, where it burst in pieces being overladen: for they do commonly overlade most of their ships, ● & affirmed that the ship had at the least ● handful high of water within it before it departed from Cochiin, & although before their ships set sail, they put the Master and other Officers to their oaths, thereby to make them confess if the ship be strong and sufficient to perform the voyage, or to let them know the faults, (which upon their said oaths is certified, by a protestation made, whereunto the Officers set their hands:) yet though the ship have never so many faults, they will never confess them, because they will not lose their places, and profit of the Voyage: yea, although they do assuredly know the ship is not able to continue the Voyage: for that covetousness overthrowing wisdom & policy, maketh them reject all fear: but when they fall into the danger, than they can speak fair, and promise many things. In that sort most of the ships depart from Cochiin so that if any of them come safely into Portugal, it is only by the will of God: for otherwise it were impossible to escape, because they over lad them, and are so badly provided otherwise, with little order among their men: so that not one ship cometh over, but can show of their great dangers by overlading, want of necessaries and reparations of the ship, together with unskilful Sailors, yet for all these daily & continual dangers, there is no amendment, but they daily grow worse and worse. In this ship called the Boam Viagen were many Gentlemen, of the best and principallest that had served a long time in India, traveling as then unto Portugal with their certificates, to get some reward for their service, as the manner is: and because it was one of the best and greatest ships of that fleet, the Ambassador of Xatamas King of Persia went therein to procure a League with the King of Spain, & to join with him against the Turk their common enemy: but he being drowned, the Persian would send no more Ambassadors, and yet he is still in League and good friendship with the Portugal's. The worst ship that saileth from Cochin to Portugal, is worth at the least a million of gold, & this was one of the best ships, whereby may be considered, what great loss cometh by the casting away of one of their ships, besides the men: for there passeth never a year, but one or two of them are cast away either in going or coming. In the month of September the same year 1586. there arrived four ships out of Portugal in Goa, called the Saint Thomas, S. Saluador, the Arrelickias, and Bon-Iesus de Carania, but of their Admiral S. Philip they had no news, since their departure from Lisbon. On the last of November, the same ships departed from Goa: some along the coast of Malabar to take in their lading of Pepper, and from thence to Cochiin, where commonly one or two of them are laden with pepper, but other wares are only laden from Cochiin. At the same time there was a ship called the Ascension that lay in Goa, & had made certain voyages to China and japan: which ship was brought by the Factors for pepper, because the ship Carama by reason of her oldness, was broken in Cochiin, and set upon the stocks to be new made, but not finished by reason of certain controversy that fell among the Factors. In this ship called Nossa Senhora da Sancao, my Lord the Archbishop sailed unto Portugal, by reason of certain quarrels newly begun between the Viceroy and other Councillors, and the Archbishop. And although by the Viceroy, all the Council, and Gentlemen, and commonalty of Goa, he was entreated not to leave them, yet he would not be dissuaded from his purpose, but went to ride unto the King, of whom he was well beloved, which the Viceroy and others liked not very well of, fearing he should give some information to the king, which would be smally to their profit, and in that mind he undertook his Voyage, discharging all his servants, saving some that he kept about him for his service, leaving no man in his house, but only his Steward, and myself to receive his rents and keep his house, and because as then the golden jubileo or pardon of Room was newly brought into the Indies, (called La Santa Crusada) being granted to the end, that with the money that should be gathered by virtue thereof, the Captives and Prisoners in Africa or Barbary, that had been taken Prisoners in the battle, wherein Don Sebastian king of Portugal was slain, should be redeemed, which was sent unto the Archbishop, being appointed the Roman Apostolic Commissary, etc. for the same: made me the general Clerk throughout all India, to keep account of the said receipts, & gave me one of the keys of the chest, wherein the money lay, with a good stipend, and other profits belonging to the same, during the time of his absence: thereby the rather to bind m● that I should remain in his house, and keep the same till his return again, as I had promised unto him: And so he set sail from Coch●n in the month of january, Anno 1587. 1587. his Pilot being the same man that cast the Saint jago away upon the flats of India, as it is said before. The ships at that time being ready to set sail, one some four or five days after the other, as they were laden, because they observe a certain order therein, the better to register all their wares and merchandises, it so fell out, that all the other ships being dispatched, the Arrelikias only was the last that laded: which having taken in her whole lading, the Officers and some of the Factors being bribed, suffered some of the ballast to be taken out, & in place thereof laded Cinnamon, because at that time Cinnamon was risen in Portugal, and at a very high price, and therefore the officers and Factors by gifts aforesaid suffered it to be laden in that manner, as having no other place to lad it in. You must understand that when the time cometh to set ●aile, the ships lying at anchor about a mile within the sea, where they received their lading, (the reason why they lie so far, is because it is summer time, and there the sea is as calm and still, as if it were within the land.) A trumpet is sounded throughout all the town of Cochiin to call them all on board, wherewith all that will sail, do presently come down accompanied with their friends, which in small boats called Tones and Pallenges bring them aboard, with great store of bread and such like victuals: so that you shall many times see the ships hang round about with boats, at the least three or four hundred, with such a noise and rejoicing, as it is wonderful to hear, and sometimes the ships are so laden, that the Cables touch the water, and besides that the hatches covered with divers chests, seven or eight one above another, having no other place to set them in, for the under the hatches they are so stuffed, that there is not an empty room: so that when they set sail▪ they know not where to begin, nor how to rule the ship, neither can they well for a month after tell how to place all things in order, and so was it with this ship, which being thus prepared, the Viador da Fazenda, or the kings officers came aboard, ask them if the ship were ready to set sail and departed, they say it was ready, and he having made a protestation or certificate thereof, the officers set to their hands, as some say, but others deny it, & presently he commanded them to wind up their cables, and hoist anchor, as the manner is, and so let their sails fall, with a great cry of Boam Voyage, or God send them good fortune, and a merry Voyage: all the boats being still aboard, which commonly do hang at her at the least a mile, or half a mile within the sea, because it is calm. This ship called the Arrelikia beginning in this manner to sail, among other roma● that stood upon the hatches, there were certain hens cages, from whence certain hens flew out, whereupon every man claimed them for his own: and upon a Sunday, (as in such cases it is commonly seen) they ran all on a heap upon the one side: whereby the ship being light of Ballast, and laden with many chests above the hatches (as I said before) it swayed so much on the one side, that by little and little it sunk clean under the water: so that not above a handful of the mast could be seen above the water. The people leapt into the ●oats, that as yet were hanging about the ship, which was good Fortune for them, otherwise there had not one escaped alive: but by that means they were all saved, the slaves only excepted that were bound with iron chains and could not stir and so they were drowned. God knoweth what riches was lost in her for nothing was saved but some few chests that stood above the hatches, which the Duckers got up, and yet the goods in them was in a manner spoiled, and the rest utterly lost: by this it may be considered what manner the Portugese's use in lading of their ships, and that it is to be thought, that as many ships as are cast away, whereof there hath been heard no news or tidings, are only lost by means of evil order and government. This being so unluckily fallen out, the Merchants used all the speed and means they could▪ by witnesses to make protestation against the Officers and the Factors of the pepper, that they might be punished for taking out the Ballast, but they kept themselves out of the way, and by prolonging of time it was forgotte●●nd nothing done therein: so that the Merchants that had received all the loss▪ were glad to put it up. In the same month came news out of Malacca, that it was in great danger & that many died there for hunger, as also that the ship that went from Portugal thither, was forced to stay there, because they had no victuals to dispatch it away: and likewise that the strait of Sumaria was kept by the enemy, so that there could no ships pass that way to China or japan. This was done by the Kings of Sumaria, that is to say, the kings of Achem and ●or lying by M●lacca upon the Firm land, which rebelled against the Portugese's in Malacca upon a certain injury done unto them by the Captain there. These news put Goa in a great alteration, for that their principal traffic is to China, Malacca, and japan, and the Islands bordering on the same, which by me●nes of those wars was wholly hinde● whereupon great numbers of ●ustes, galleys, and ships were prepared in Goa, to relieve Malacca, and all the towns men tasked every one at a certain sum of money, besides the money that was brought from other places, and men taken up to serve in the ships: for by means of their late overthrows and loss of ships, India was at that time very weak of men. In the month of May, Anno 1587. there came a ship or galley of Mosambique unto Goa, bringing news that the ship S. Philip had been there, and taken in the lading of pepper that was in the ship called S. Lauren●, that had arrived there, in her Voyage towards Portugal, and was all open above the hatches and without masts, most of her goods being thrown into the sea: whereby miraculously they saved their lives▪ and by fortune put into Mosambique. In this ship called S. Phil●ip, were the young Princes, the king's children of japan, as is before declared. From Mosambique came the same Galley that brought the news to Goa, the same Galley likewise brought news of the Army that was sent out of Goa in December, 1586. being the year before, unto the coast of Melinde or Abex, to revenge the injury which they had received in the Fleet: whereof Ruy G●nsalues da Camara was Captain, as I said before, as also to punish the towns that at the same time had united themselves with the Turk, and broken league with the Portugese's. Of this army was General, a gentleman called Martin 〈◊〉 de melo: wherewith coming upon the coast of Abex, or Melinde, which lieth between Mosambique and the red sea, they went on land, & because the Turks whom they sought for, were gone home through the read sea, they determined to punish and plague the towns that had favoured the Turks, and broken their alliance with them, and to the same end entered into the country as far as the towns of Pate and B●, that little thought of them, and easily ouerr●n them, because most part of the people fled to save themselves, & left the towns: whereby the Portugese's did what pleased them, burning the towns, and razing them to the ground, with others that lay about them and among those that fled to save themselves, they took the King of Pate, whose head in great fury they caused to be stricken off and brought it unto Goa, where for certain days it stood upon a mast in the middle of the town for an example to all others, as also in sign of victory: wherewith the Portugese's begins to be somewhat encouraged. and so they went from thence to Ormus, and from Ormus they were to go help the King of Persia, as the Viceroy had commanded them: but being at Ormus, many of their men fell sick and died, among the which their General Martin Alfonso da Metto was one, whereupon they returned again unto Goa, without doing any other thing. The same army sailing to the coast of Abex, and falling on the Island of Zamzibar, which lieth under six degrees on the south side, about 70. miles from Pate, towards Mosambique, about 18. miles from the Firm land, there they found the Saint Saluador that came from Cochiin, sailing towards Portugal being all open, having thrown all her goods overboard, saving only some pepper which they could not come at, and were in great danger, holding themselves by force of pumping above the water, & upon the point to leave, being all weary and ready to sink, which they certainly had done, if by great good fortune they had not met with the army, which they little thought to find in those parts. The Army took the ship with them to Ormus, where the rest of the pepper and goods remaining in her, were unladen, and the ship broken in pieces, and of the boards they made a lesser ship, wherein the men that were in the great ship with the rest of the goods that were saved in her, sailed to Portugal, & after a long and wearisome voyage, arrived there in safety. The 17. of September, 1587. 158●. a Galliot of Mosambique arrived at Goa, bringing news of the arrival of four ships in Mosambiqu● that came out of Portugal: Their names were S. Antony, S. Francisco, our Lady of Nazareth▪ and S. Alberto: but of the S. Mary, that came in company which them from Portugal, they had no news, but afterwards they heard that she put back again to Portugal, by reason of some defaults in her, and also of the foul weather. Eight days after the said 4. ships arrived in Goa, where with great joy they were received. At the same time the Fort called Columbo, which the Portugese's hold in the Island of Seylon, was besieged by the king of Seylon, called Ram, and in great danger to be lost: which to deliver, there was an army of fustes and galleys sent from Goa: whereof was General Barnaldin de Carualho. And at the same time departed another army of many ships, fustes, and galleys, with great numbers of soldiers, munition, victuals, and other warlike provisions, therewith to deliver Malacca, which as then was besieged and in great misery, as I said before: thereof was general Don Paulo de Lyma Pereira, a valiant Gentleman, and an old soldier, who not long before had been Captain of Chaul, and being very fortunate in all his enterprises, was therefore chosen to be General of that fleet. The last of November, the four ships afore said departed from Goa to lad at Cochiin, and from thence to sail for Portugal. In December after, while the Fort of Columbo in the Island of Seylon, was still besieged, the town of Goa made out another great fleet of ships and galleys, for the which they took up many men within the City, and compelled them to go in the ships because they wanted men, with a great contribution of money raised upon the Merchants and othrr inhabitants to furnish the same: of the which army was appointed general, one Manuel de Sousa Courinho, a brave gentle man and soldier, who in times past had been Captain of the said Fort of Columbo, and had withstood another besieging: whereupon the king put him in great credit, and advanced him much, and after the viceroys death, he was Viceroy of India, as in time & place we shall declare. He with his army arrived in the Isle of Seylon, where he joined with the other army that went before, and placed themselves in order to give battle to Ra●, who perceiving the great number of his enemies, broke up his siege and forsook the Fort, to the great rejoicing of the Portugese's, and having strengthened the Fort with men and victuals, they returned again to Goa, where in the month of March, Anno 1●88. ●587. they were received with great joy. In the month of April the same year, the army of Don Paulo de Lyma, that went to Malacca, arrived in Goa with victory, having fired Malacca, and opened the passage again to China and other places, the manner whereof was this: In their way as they passed the strait of Malacca, they met with a ship belonging to the king of Achein in Samatra, who was a deadly enemy to the Portugese's, and the principal cause of the besieging of Malacca. In the same ship was the Daughter of the said king of Achein, which he sent to be married to the king of ●oor, thereby to make a new alliance with him against the Portugese's, and for a present sent him a goodly piece of Ordinance, whereof the like was not to be found in all India, and therefore it was afterwards sent into Portugal as a present to the king of Spain in a ship of Malacca, which after was cast away in the Island of ●e●cera, one of the Flemish Islands. where the same piece with much labour was weighed up, and laid within the fortress of the same Isle, because it is so heavy that it can hardly be carried into Portugal. But to the matter, they took the ship with the king's daughter, and made it all good prize, and by it they were advertised what had passed between the kings of Achein, and joor: so that presently they sent certain soldiers on land, and marching in order of battle, they set upon the town of joor, that was sconsed and compassed about with wooden stakes, most of the houses being of straw: which when the people of the town perceived, and saw the great number of men and also their resolution, they were in great fear, and as many as could, fled and saved themselves in the country: to conclude the Portugese's entered the town▪ and set it on fire, utterly spoiling and destroying it, razing it even with the ground, & slaying all they found, and taking some prisoners, which they led away Captives, and found within the town at the least 2500, brass pieces great & small, which were all brought into India. You must understand that some of them were no greater than Muskets▪ some greater, and some very great, being very cunningly wrought with figures and flowers, which the Italians and Portugese's that have denied their faith, and become Mahometistes, have taught them: whereof there are many in India, and are those indeed that do most hurt, when they have done any murder or other villainy fearing to be punished for the same, to save their lives they run over by the firm land among the Heathens and Moors, and there they have great stipends and wages of the Indian kings and Captains of the land. Seven or eight years before my coming into India, there were in Goa certain Trumpeters and Cannonyers being Dutchmen, & Netherlanders, and because they were rejected and scorned by the Portugese's in India, (as they scorn all other nations in the world) as also for that they could get no pay, & when they asked it, they were presently abused and cast into the galleys, and there compelled to serve. In the end they took counsel together, and seeing they could not get out of the country, they secretly got into the firm land of Balagate and went unto Hidalcan, where they were gladly received, and very well entertained with great pays living like Lords: & there being in despair denied their faiths, although it is thought by some that they remain still in their own religion, but it is most sure that they are married in those countries with Heathen women, and were living when I came from thence: by this means are the Portugese's the causes of their own mischiefs, only through their pride, & hardiness, and make rods to scourge themselves withal, which I have only showed in respect of those cast pieces, & other martial weapons, which the Indians have learned of the Portugeses, and Christians, whereof in times past they had no understanding: and although they had placed all those pieces in very good order, yet it should seem they knew not how to shoot them off, or to use them as they should, as it appeared hereby, for that they presently forsook them, and left them for the Portugeses. With this victory the Portugeses were very proud, and with great glory entered into Malacca, wherein they were received with great triumph, as it may well be thought, being by them delivered from great misery, wherein they had long continued. Which the king of Achein hearing, and that his daughter was taken prisoner, he sent his ambassador to Don Panto de Lyma with great presents, desiring to make peace with him, which was presently granted, and all the ways to Malacca were opened, and all kinds of merchandises and victuals brought thither, which before had been kept from them, whereat was much rejoicing. This done, & order being taken for all things in Malacca, they returned again to Goa, where they arrived in safety (as I said before) in the month of April, and there were received with great triumph, the people singing Te Deum laudamus, many of the soldiers bringing good prizes with them. In the month of May following, upon the 1●. of the same month the Viceroy Don Duarte de Meneses died in Goa, having been sick but four days of a burning fever, which is the common sickness of India, and is very dangerous but it is thought it was for grief, because he had received letters from the Captain of Ormus, wherein he was advertised, that they had received news over land from Venice, that the Archbishop was safely arrived at Lisbon, and well received by the king: and because they were not friends at his departure (as I said before) they said he was so much grieved thereat, that fearing to fall into the displeasure of the king, by information from the Bishop, he died of grief: but that was contrary, as hereafter by the ships we understood, for that the Bishop died in the ship eight days before it arrived in Portugal, and so they kept company together: for they lived not long one after the other, whereby their quarrel was ended with their lives. The viceroys funerals were with great solemnity observed in this manner. The place appointed for the viceroys burial, is a Cloister called Reys Magos, or the three kings of Cullen, being of the order of Saint Francis, which standeth in the land of Bards, at the mouth of the River of Goa, and thither his body was conveyed, being set in the galley Royal, all hanged over with black pennons, and covered with black cloth, being accompanied with all the nobility and gentlemen of the country. And approaching near the cloister of Reys Magos, being three miles from Goa down the River towards the sea, the Friars came out to receive him, and brought his body into the church, where they placed it upon a hearse, and so with great solemnity sung Mass: which done there were certain letters brought forth, called Vias, which are always sealed, and kept by the jesuits by the kings appointment, and are never opened but in the absence, or at the death of the Viceroy. These Vias are yearly sent by the King, and are marked with figures, 1.2.3.4.5. and so forth, and when there wanteth a Viceroy, than the first number or Via is opened, wherein is written that in the absence or after the death of the Viceroy such a man shallbe Viceroy, and if the man that is named in the first Via, be not there, than they open the second Via, & look whose name is therein: being in place, he is presently received and obeyed as Governor, and if he be likewise absent, they open the rest orderly as they are numbered, until the Governor be found, which being known, they need open no more. The rest of the Vias that are remaining be presently shut up, & kept in the cloister by the jesuits, but before the Vias are opened there is no man that knoweth who it shall be, or whose name is written therein. These Vias are with great solemnity opened by the jesuits, and read in open audience before all the nobles, Captains, Governors, and others that are present: and if the man that is named in the Vias be in any place of India, or the East countries, as Soffala, Mosambique, Ormus, Malacca, or any other place of those countries, as sometimes it happeneth, he is presently sent for, and must leave all other offices to receive that place until the king endeth another out of Portugal: but if the man named in the Vias be in Portugal, China or japan▪ or at the cape de bona Speranza, than they open other Vias as I said before. The Mass being finished, the jesuits came with the king's packets of Vias, which are sealed with the Kings own signet, and are always opened before the other viceroys body is laid in the earth, and there they opened the first Via, and with great devotion staying to know who it should be, at the last was named for Viceroy one Mathias Dalbu●kerke, that had been Captain of Ormu●, and the year before was gone in company of the Archbishop to Portugal, because he had broken one of his legs, thinking to heal it: but if he had known so much, he would have stayed in India. He being absent the second Via was opened with the like solemnity, and therein they found named for Viceroy, Manuel de Sousa Coutinho, (of whom I made mention before, and who was the man that raised the siege in the Island of Seylon) to the great admiration of every man, because he was but a mean gentleman▪ yet very well esteemed, as he had well deserved by his long service: & although there were many rich gentlemen in place, whom they rather thought should have been preferred thereto, yet they must content themselves and show no dislike: and thereupon they presently saluted him, kissing his hand, and honoured him as Viceroy, presently they left the dead body of the old Viceroy, and departed in the Galley with the new Viceroy, taking away all the mourning clothes, and standards, and covering it with others of divers colours and silks: and so entered into Goa, sounding both Shawms and Trumpets, wherein he was received with great triumph, and led into the great Church, where they sung Te Deum laudamus etc. and there gave him his oath to hold and observe all privileges and customs according to the order in that case provided, and from thence led him to the viceroys palace, which was presently by the dead viceroys servants all unfurnished, and by the new Viceroy furnished again, both with household stuff and servants, as the manner is in all such changes and alterations. The body of the dead Viceroy being left in the Church, was buried by his servants without any more memory of him, saving only touching his own particular affairs. In the Months of june, julie and August, of the same year, Anno 1588. 1588. there happened the greatest winter that had of long time been seen in those Countries, although it raineth every winter, never holding up all winter long: but not in such great quantity and abundance, as it did in those three Months, for that it rained continually and in so great abundance, from the tenth of june till the first day of September, that it could not be judged that it ever held up from raining one half hour together, neither night nor day, whereby many houses by reason of the great moisture fell down to the ground, as also because the stone wherewith they are built, is very soft, and their mortar the more half earth. In the same month of August there happened a foul and wonderful murder within the town of Goa, and because it was done upon a Netherlander, I thought good to set it down at large, that hereby men may the better perceive the boldness and filthy lecherous minds of the Indian women, which are commonly all of one nature and disposition. The thing was thus, a young man borne in Antwerp called Francis King, by his trade a stone cutter, was desirous (as many young men are) to see strange countries, & for the same cause traveled unto Venice, where he had an uncle dwelling, who being desirous to prefer his cousin, sent him in the company of other Merchants to Aleppo in Suria, where the Venetians have great traffic, as I said before, there to learn the trade of merchandise, and specially to deal in stones, to the which end he delivered him a great sum of money. This young youth being in Aleppo, fell into company in such sort, that in steed of increasing his stock, as his uncle meant he should do, he made it less by the one half, so that when the other Merchants had dispatched their business, and were ready to departed for Venice, Francis King perceiving that he had dealt in such sort, that half his stock was consumed, and spent in good fellowship, knew not what to do, as searing his uncles displeasure, not daring to return again to Venice, unless he carried as much with him as he brought from thence: in the end he took counsel of some Venetians, with whom he was acquainted, that willed him to go with the Caffila or Caruana, that as then was ready to go unto Bassora, and from thence to Ormus in India, assuring him, seeing he had knowledge in stones, that he might do great good and win much profit in those Countries, and thereby easily recover the loss that by his folly he had received: which would turn to his great benefit, and likewise no hurt unto his uncle. Which counsel he followed, determining not to return back again before he had recovered his loss, and to the same end and purpose he joined himself with certain Venetians, who at the same instant traveled thither, and so went with the Caffila till they came unto Bassora, the best Town in all those Countries, lying upon the utter part of Sinus Persicus, that goeth towards Ormus, and from thence by water till they arrived in Ormus, where every man set up his shop, and began to sell his wares: but Francis King being young and without government, seeing himself so far distant from his uncle, made his account, that the money he had in high hands was then his own, and began again without any foresight, to lead his accustomed life, taking no other care, but only to be merry and make good cheer so long, till in the end the whole stock was almost clean spent and consumed, and beginning to remember himself, and to call to mind his follies past, he knew not what course to take: for that to go home again, he thought it not the best way, as wanting the means, and again he durst not show himself in the sight of his uncle. At the last he determined to travel unto Goa, where he understood he might well get his living, by setting up his trade, till it pleased god, to work otherwise for him, and so he came to Goa, and being there, presently set up shop to use his occupation. But because he found there good company, that is to say, Netherlanders and other Dutchmen, that served there ordinarily for Trumpeters and Gunners to the Viceroy, who did daily resort unto him: he could not so well ply his work, but that he fell into his wont course: which he perceiving, in the end determined to make his continual residence in Goa, and for the same purpose set down his rest, to seek some means there to abide as long as he lived, seeing all other hope was clean lost for ever, returning again unto his Uncle, or into his own country. At the same time, among other strangers, there was one john de Xena, a French man, borne in Deep, that in former times was come into India, for drum unto one of the Viceroys, and having been long in the country, was married to a woman of Ballagate, a Christian, but by birth a More. This French man kept a shop in Goa, where he made Drums and other joiners work, and withal was the King's Oar maker for the Galleys, whereby he lived in reasonable good sort. He had by his foresaid wife two sons and a daughter: and as strangers, of what nation soever they be, use to take acquaintance one of the other, being out of their own countries (specially in India, where there are very few) and do hold together as brethren, which to them is a great comfort: so this Francis King used much to this French man's house, by whom he was very much made of, and very welcome, as thinking thereby to bring him to match with his daughter, because of his occupation, which is of great account in India: because of the great number of Diamonds & other stones that are sold in those countries: and to conclude, as the manner of India is, that when they have gotten a man in once, they will never leave him: he ceased not with many promises and other wonderful matters to draw Francis so far, that he gave his consent thereunto, which afterwards cost him his life, as in the history following you shall hear the true discourse. To make short, they were married according to their manner, the Bride being but 11 years old, very fair and comely of body and limb, but in villainy, the worst that walked upon the earth: yet did her husband account himself a most happy man▪ that had found such a wife, as he often times said unto me: although he was so jealous of her, that he trusted not any man, were they never so near friends unto him: but he in whom he put his greatest trust, & least suspected, was the only worker of his woe. When he was betrothed to his wife, the father promised him a certain piece of money, and until it were paid, he and his wife should continue at meat and meal in his father in laws house, and should have a shop adjoining to the same, and whatsoever he earned should be for himself. When all this was done, and the matter had remained thus a long while, by reason that the father in law could not perform the promised sum, because their household increased, it came to pass that the old man fell into a sickness and died, and then Francis King must of force pay his part towards the house keeping, which he liked not of: & thereupon fell out with his mother in law: and on a certain time made his complaint to me, ask my counsel therein, I answered him and said, I would be loath to make debate between Parents & Children, but if it were my case, seeing I could not obtain my dowry, I would stay no longer there, but rather hire a house by myself, and keep better house alone with my wife, then continue among so many, where I could not be master. In the end he resolved so to do, & with much ado took his wife & Child with his slaves, and parted household, hired himself a house, set up his shop, and used his trade so handsomely, that having good store of work, he became reasonable wealthy. But his mother in law, that could not conceal her Morish nature, after the death of her husband: whether it were for spite she bore to her son in law, or for a pleasure she took therein, counseled her daughter to fall in love with a young Portugal Soldier, whom the daughter did not much mislike: which soldier was very great in the house, and ordinarily came thither to meat and drink, and Francis trusted him as well as if he had been his brother, in so much that he would do nothing without his counsel. This Soldier called An honio Fragoso continued this beastly course with Francis his wife, with the help of her mother, all the while that they dwelled with the mother▪ and it is said, that he used her company before she was married, although she was but young, which is no wonder in India: for it is their common custom in those countries to do it, when they are but eight years old, and have the slight to hide it so well, that when they are married, their husbands take them for very good maids. This order of life they continued in that sort for the space of four years, and also after that they had taken a house, and dwelled alone by themselves (for Antonio Fragoso kept his old haunt) and although Francis used continually to shut his chamber door, yet was this Portugal oftentimes hidden, therein he not knowing thereof, where he took his pleasure of his wife. At the last, one Diricke Gerritson of Enchuson in Holland, being Godfather unto Francis Kings wife, coming newly from China, desired the said Francis and his wife to come and dine with him at his house without the town, where as then he dwelled, and among the rest bade me, minding to be merry and made us good cheer: but because the honest Damsel Francis kings wife, made her excuse, that she might not with her credit come where Bachelors were, for that they had no such use in India, he desired me to hold him excused till another time. They being there at this feast, with the mother in law, and her son, & their household of slaves that waited upon them, as the manner of India is. After dinner was ended, and they well in drink, they went to walk in the fields, where not far from thence there stood a house of pleasure, that had neither door nor window, but almost fallen down for want of reparations, having on the back side thereof a fair garden full of Indian trees and fruits: the house and garden Francis kings father in law had bought in his life time for a small piece of money, for as I say, it was not much worth: thither they went, and caused their pots and their pans with meat and drink to be brought with them, being minded all that day to make merry therein, as indeed they did. In the mean time it was my fortune with a friend of mine to walk in the fields, and to pass by the house, wherein they were, not thinking any company had been there, & going by, Francis King being all drunken, came forth and saw me, wherewith he ran and caught me by the cloak, & perforce would have me in, & made me leave my companion, & so brought me into the garden, where their wives and his mother in law, with their slaves sat playing upon certain Indian Instruments, being very merry: but I was no sooner espied by them, but the young woman presently went away to hide herself for her credit's sake, according to their manner, as their manner is when any stranger cometh into the house. Not long after supper was made ready of such as they had brought with them, although the day was not so far spent, and the table clothe was laid upon a mat lying on the gr●und: for that (as I said before) there was neither table, bench, window nor door within the house. The meat being brought in, every man sat down, only Francis Kings wife excused herself, that I had shamed her, and desired that she might not come in, saying for that time she would eat there with the slaves, and although her husband would gladly have had her come in among us, thereby to show that he was not jealous of her, yet she would not, so that seeing her excuse he let her rest, saying it were best to let her stay there, because thee is ashamed. While we sat at supper where the slaves served us, going and coming to and fro, and bringing such things as we wanted, out of the place where this honest woman was, her husband thinking she had taken pains to make it ready, it was nothing so, for that while we were merry together, not thinking any hurt▪ in came Antonio Fragoso with a naked Rapier under his cloak, it being yet day light, and in presence of all the slaves, both theirs and mine, without any fear of us lead her away by the hand into one of the chambers of the house having neither door, flore nor window, and there putting off the cloth that she had about her middle,) which he laid upon the ground to keep her from fowling of her body) not being once ashamed before the slaves, neither fearing any danger, he took his pleasure of her: but if any mischance had happened, that any of the slaves had marked it and bewrayed it, the said Anthony had ten or twelve soldiers his companions and friends not far from thence, which with a whistle or any other token would have come to help him, and so would have slain us all, and taken the woman with him, which is their daily profit in India, but we had better fortune: for that he dispatched his affairs so well with her, that we knew it not, and had leisure to departed as he came, without any trouble, and she well pleased therewith: and when the slaves asked her how thee durst be so bold to do such a thing, considering what danger of life she then was in, she answered them that she cared not for her life, so she might have her pleasure, and saying that her husband was but a drunkard, and not worthy of her, and that she had used the company of that fine lusty youth for the space of four years together, and for his sake she said, she would not refuse to die: yet had she not then been married to Francis King full four years, neither was she at that time above fifteen or sixteen years of age. Not long after she had done, she came into the garden, and as it should seem, had clean forgotten her former shame, where she began both to sing and dance, showing herself very merry: wherewith all the company was very well pleased, specially her husband that commended her for it. When evening was come, every man took his leave, and departed to his lodging, and when we were gone we chanced by our slaves to understand the truth of the fact before rehearsed, and what danger we had escaped: whereat we wondered much, and Francis King himself began to be somewhat suspicious of the matter, being secretly advertised of his wives behaviour, but he knew not with whom she had to do, nor once mistrusted this Anthony Fragoso, thinking him to be the best friend he had in all the world: yea, and that more is, he durst not break his mind to any but only unto him, of whom in great secret he asked counsel, saying, that he understood, and had well found that his wife behaved herself dishonestly, ask him what he were best to do, and told him further, that he meant to dissemble the matter for a time, to see if he could take them together, thereby to kill them both, which the other counseled him to do, promising him his help and furtherance, and to be secret therein, and so they departed. Anthonio Fr●●o●o went presently unto his wife, and showed her what had passed between her husband and him, where they concluded upon that which after they brought to pass, thinking it the best course to prevent him. Now so it happened, that in an evening in the month of August, 15●●. Francis King had provided a roasted Pig for supper in his own house: whereunto he invited this Anthonio Frag●so, and his mother in law, who as it seemeth, was of counsel with them in this conspiracy and the principal cause of the Tragedy, although very stoutly and boldly she denied it afterwards. They being at supper and very merry at the same time it was my chance to sup in a certain place with a Dutch painter, whether Fr●●ci● King sent us a quarter of the Pig, praying us to eat it for his sake, and to be merry he that brought it being one of our own house. They had caused him to drink of a certain wine that was mingled with the Herb De●●oa, thereby to bereave poor Franci● of his wits, and so to effect their accursed device: for as it appeared, he that brought the Pig came half drunk, and out of his wits, whereby we perceived that all was not well. To conclude, the Herb began to work, so that of force he must needs sleep, and the company being departed, she shut his trap door, as ordinarily he used to do, and laid the key under his pillow, and went to Bed with his loving wife: where presently he fell on sleep like a dead man, partly by means of the De●●oa, and partly because he had drunk well. About eleven of the Clock in the night, Anthony Fragoso all armed, and another good friend of his not knowing (as he confessed what Anthonio meant to do, and came to the door of Franci● kings house, and knocked softly, and willed the slaves that slept below, to open the door: but they answered him their master was a bed, and that the trap door was shut on the in side. Francis his wife that slept not, when she heard it, ran to the window and willed him to bring a ladder and clime up, which he presently did, and she holp him in, where she took him about the neck kissing him, and bade him welcome, leading him in by the hand, where her husband slept, little thinking on the villainy pretended by his wife, and such as he held to be his best friends, and to be brief she said unto him: There lieth the drunkard and the Heretic, that thought to bring us to our ends, thereby to separate us from our love and pleasures now revenge yourself on him if you love me, and presently he thrust him into the body with his Rapier, clean through the breast, so that it came out behind at his back and being not content therewith, gave him another thrust, that went in at the one side, and out at the other side, and so at the least 4. or 5▪ thrusts more after he was dead: whereby the poor innocent man ended his days: which done, they took all the stones & Diamonds that he had of divers men to work, as also to sell: which amounted at the least to the value of 4●. thousand Pardawes, and took Francis his own Rapier that hung by him & put it into his hand, as if they would make men believe that he would have killed them, & that in their own defence they had slain him, but it was well known to the contrary: for that the slaves being below▪ herd all that had past. They took with them also the child being of two years old, and went out of the house, but they had not gone far, but they left the child lying at a door in the street, where in the morning it was found, & although the slaves made a great noise at their mistresses flight, & went to fetch the officers▪ yet they could not find them, for that night the murderers went & knocked at the jesuits cloister, desiring them to take them in, & gave them the most part of the stones, saying they had slain the man in their own defence, but the jesuits would not receive them, although they took the stones, of purpose to give them again to the owners. In the morning it was known through all the town not without great admiration, and although they sought diligently in all places where they thought or suspected them to lodge, yet they could not find them: but not long after they were seen in the town of Chaul, which is about thirty miles Northward from Goa, where they walked freely in the streets, without any trouble: for there all was covered, and few there are that look after such matters, though they be as clear as the Sun. The dead body lay in that sort till the next morning, & we Dutch men were forced to see him buried, for the mother in law would not give one penny towards it, making as though she had not any thing to do with him, but holp the murderer both with money and victuals, therewith to travel unto Portugal, and so he sailed in the fleet with us: for I saw him in the Island of S. Helena, as bold and lus●y, as if no such matter had been committed by him, and so arrived in Portugal, not any man speaking against him: having also promised both the mother, and wife of Francis King, that he would come again with the kings pardon, and marry her: which I doubt not of, if he once went about it. And thus Francis King ended his travel: which I thought good to set down at large, that thereby you may perceive the boldness and inclination of the Indian women: for there passeth not one year over their heads, but that in India there are at the least twenty or thirty men poisoned, and murdered by their wives, only to accomplish their filthy desires. Likewise there are yearly many women killed by their husbands being taken in adultery, but they care not a hair for it, saying with great boldness, that there is no pleasanter death then to die in that manner: for thereby (they say) they do show that they die for pure love. And to show that this honest woman was not of this bad inclination alone, you shall understand that a brother of hers, being but fourteen or fifteen years of age was openly burnt in Goa for sodom or buggery, which was done when Francis King and his father in law were living: yet could not Francis thereby be warned to take heed of his wife and that kindred: for as it seemeth it was Gods will he should end his days in that manner. The 16. of September 1588. there arrived in Goa a ship of Portugal, called the S. Thomas, bringing news of 4. ships more, that were in Mosambique, all come from Portugal, which not long after came likewise to Goa: their names were, Saint Christopher being Admiral, S. Marry, S. Anthony, and our Lady of Conseprao. By those ships we received news of the death of my Lord the Archbishop, called Don Frey Vincente da Fonseca, who died in his voyage to Portugal, upon the 4. day of August, An. 1587. 158●. between the Flemish Islands, and Portugal, eight days before the ship came to land. It was thought that he died of some poison, that he brought out of India, or else of some imposthume that suddenly broke within him, for that an hour before his death he seemed to be as well as ever he was in all his life, and suddenly he was taken so sick that he had not the leisure to make his will, but died presently, and voided at the least a quart of poison out of his body. To be short, he was clothed in his Bishop's apparel, with his Mitre on his head, and rings upon his fingers, and put into a coffin, and so thrown into the sea. These news made many sorrowful hearts in India, of such as were his well-willers and friends: and to the contrary such as hated him, were glad and rejoiced, because he had been earnest to reprehend and correct them for their faults: but none lost more by it then we that were his servants, which looked for great preferment by him, as without doubt he meant to have obtained it of the King, as being one of the principallest occasions of his going into Portugal, but death altered all. And although at that time my meaning and intent was, to stay the coming of my Lord Archbishop, & to continue longer there, yea possible while I lived: yet upon those news I was wholly altered in my purpose, and a horrible fear came upon me, when I called to mind what I had passed touching the things I was desirous to bring to pass. And although I had means enough there to get my living in good sort, being as it were one of those countrymen, and so in all places well esteemed and accounted of, yet those persuasions were not of force enough once to dissuade me from the pretence and desire I had to see my native country: so that it seemed my God had opened mine eyes, and by my Lord's death made me more clear of sight, & to call my native soil unto remembrance, which before was so darkened, that I had almost forgotten it, and stood in hazard never to see it more, if my Lord had lived and returned home again. But to avoid all occasions and inconveniences that might happen, & daily offered themselves unto me, I resolutely determined to departed, whereunto I sought all the means & necessary occasions I could find, to bring it to pass: & that which persuaded me most thereunto, was the loss of my brother William Tin, that had been with me in India, who sailing from Se●ubal in Portugal towards Hamborough, taking their course on the back side of England, was cast away, and never could be heard of, neither ship nor men. Being in this resolution, it chanced that a ship by authority of the Viceroy, and at the request of the Farmers of Pepper was appointed to sail for Portugal, because there was so great quantity of Pepper to be laden that the Portugal ships at that time being there could not take it in: and although the ships are purposely sent to lad Pepper, with licence from the King that there may no more but five ships lad every year, whereunto the Factors do bind themselves, yet if there be any goods in India, as Pepper & other wares, which the other ships can not take in, than the Farmers of Pepper and the kings officers may buy one or two ships, and make them ready for the purpose to take it in, so that there be ships found that be sufficient: which if the Factors refuse, than the Viceroy and the king's officers may ●raight as many ships as they think good, and as they find fit to take it in, and lad them with the Farmer's pepper, or any other goods that are there to be laden, so it be after the five ships are laden by the farmers: and all this for the profit of the King, without let or hindrance of the said farmers. In this sort as I said before, there was a ship called the Santa Crus, that was built in Cochijn by the King of the Malabares, and called after the name of the town of Cochiin, that was likewise by the Portugeses called Santa Crus, which the King of Malabares made in honour of the Portugal's, because he hath brotherly alliance with them, and is by the King of Portugal called our brother in arms. The same ship he had sold unto a Portugal, that therewith had made a voyage into China and japan, being of 1600. tons: and because it was strong and good, & so fit to make a voyage into Portugal, and because (as I said before) there was more pepper than the Portugal ships could take in, the farmers of pepper were desirous to buy it, & besought the Viceroy to let them have it, according to the contents of their composition, and the King's ordinance. Whereupon the Viceroy caused the farmers of the ships to be called together, & signified unto them what the request of the farmers of pepper was, that is to say, that the ship should be bought according to the King's ordinance, for as much as necessity did so require it, & they had refused to use it, & said that it was not fit for them, & so desired the in respect of the King's interest in the pepper, the ship might be bought accordingly. Always provided, that the king's ordinance (who granted them their Privilege) might be kept & observed, viz. that their ships might first have their lading, and be first dispatched. And although they that had bought it of the owners for ten thousand ducats ready money▪ were in doubt that they should not find wares enough to lad it withal, yet in the end it was in a manner laden as well as the other ships were. Now it was agreed by the owners that sold it, that the Master Gunner and chief Boatswain should keep their places still within the ship as they had when it sailed to China and japen. The Gunner's name was Diricke Gari●son of Enchusen, who after he had been 20. years in India, was minded as then to sail in that ship to Portugal, with whom because of old acquaintance, and for his company, I minded to see if I could get any place within the ship. And because the farmers of pepper had their factors in India, that were Dutchmen, which lay there in the behalf of the Foukers and Velsares of Ausburg, who at that time had a part of the pepper laden in that ship, and use to send in each ship a Factor, to whom the King alloweth a Cabin and victuals for the voyage: This place of Factor in the said ship called Santa Crus, I did obtain of the Farmers, because they were of my acquaintance. Whereupon I prepared myself to departed, and got a Passport of the Viceroy, without which no man may pass out of India, as also a Certificate out of the kings chamber of accounts, and out of the Matricola general, wherein all such as come into India are registered, with a note of my pay, which by the King's commandment is appointed to be paid upon certificate from thence, and withal the time of my residence in India, and what place I was employed in there, that when I came into Portugal, I might have recompense if I would ask it, or minded to return again into India. But although I had no such intent, yet I must of force observe this order, to make them think I would return again, and the easier to obtain my Passport, which was easily granted me by the Governor, as also the other Certificates: and having obtained them I took my leave of all my friends and acquaintance, not without great grief, as he that was to departed out of his second natural dwelling place, by reason of the great and long continuance that I had made in those countries, so that I was in a manner half dissuaded from my pretended voyage. But in the end the remembrance and affection of m● true natural country, got the upper h●nd, and over ruled me, making me wholly to forget my conceit unto the contrary: and so committing myself & my affairs unto God who only can direct and help us, and give good success to all endeavours, I entered into my new pretended course. ●588. In the Month of November 1588. the ships sailed again from Goa, to the coast of M●l●ba● & Cochijn, to take in their lading: And the 2●. of the same month, the Santa-Cru● set sail to begin our Voyage. The 28. day we arrived in Honour a Fort belonging to the Portugeses, and the first they have upon the coast of Malabar, which lieth Southward from Goa eighteen miles, in which place we were assigned to take in our lading of Pepper. They used not before to lad any Pepper in that place, so that we were the first that ever laded there: but from thence forwards, they minded yearly to lad one ship there, because the Queen of Batticola (that lay not far from thence) and Honour, being within her jurisdiction or kingdom, had bound herself, yearly to deliver seven or eight thousand Quintales of Pepper, so that the Farmers paid her half the money for the same six Months before thee delivered it, and then she would deliver it at times. For the which cause the Farmers have their Factor in Honour to receive it of her by weight, and lay it up till the time of lading cometh. The like have they in all the other Forts upon the coast of Malabar, as at Mangalar, Ba●selor, Cananor, Cochijn, Coulan etc. Now to know the right manner of farming of the Pepper, you must understand, that the Farmers take the same to Farm for five years, and bind themselves every year to send their stock of ready money, for thirty thousand Quintales of Pepper, so that the King will send ships to lad it in. The King on the other side bindeth himself to perform, and to send every year five ships, the Farmer's bearing the adventure of the Sea both of their money sending thither and of the Pepper brought from thence, & must lad it in India, into the ships at their own costs and charges: which being brought into Portugal, they deliver all the Pepper to the King at the price of twelve Ducats the Quintall: & if any be cast away or taken upon the Sea, it is at the Farmer's charge, for the King dealeth not but only with that which is delivered him in Portugal, being dry and fair laid up in the King's store house in Lisbon: for the which he payeth not any money unto the Farmers, until the said Pepper be sold, with the money whereof he payeth them: so that the King without any hazard or disbursing any thing o● his own, hath always his money for his Pepper, without the loss of any one penny. And in that respect the Farmers have great and strong privileges▪ first that no man of what estate or condition so ever he be, either Portugal, or of any place in Indi●, may deal or trade in Pepper but the●, upon pain of death, which is very sharply looked unto. Likewise they may not for any occasion or necessity, whatsoever, diminish or lessen the ordinary stock of money for the Pepper, neither hinder or let them in any sort concerning the lading thereof, which is also very strictly observed. For although the Pepper were for the Kings own person, yet must the Farmer's Pepper be first laden, to whom the Viceroy and other Officers and Captains of India, must give all assistance help and favour, with watching the same and all other things, whatsoever shall by the said Farmers be required▪ for the safety and benefit of the said Pepper. For the lading and providing whereof, the said Farmers are to send their Factor's servants and assistants, of what nation so ever they be, (except Englishmen, Frenchmen and Spaniards) unto every place, to see it laden and dispatched away, for other strangers may not go into India without the special licence of the King, or his counsel of India. The Pepper commonly costeth in India 28. Pagode's the Bhar, every Bhar is three Quintales and a half Portugal weight so that every Quintall standeth them in twelve Pardawes, Xera●●ius and four mangoes. Every Quintall is 1●8. pounds, and every Pardawe three Testons or thirty Stivers heavy money, and every ●a●ga. ●i●●e Reijs, or six Stivers, which is twelve collars of sixty pence Flemish the piece, after the rate of Portugal money, and twenty four Stivers of the like money, besides all charges & adventure of the Seas. But the great quantity maketh them gain the more, specially, if it come safe home. The ships & their frayghting, with condition to build them, and the provision of all necessaries for them, are also farmed by themselves, and all at the adventure of the Farmers: and if the ship come safe home, they give the King a certain sum of money for every ship, and every year furnish five ships, likewise at their own charges: but such Soldiers as are appointed to go in them, are bound to sail for the King, and have but only meat and drink at the Farmer's charge, the Officers and Sailors being placed therein by the King's Admiralty, which the Farmers may not once deny or refuse: so that the King adventureth nothing, neither in Pepper nor in ships, but only if the ships be cast away, he looseth the money that he should have had for the farm of every ship, if it had returned safe, & the gain of the Pepper that should have been delivered him, at a certain price. Whereupon the Admiralty of Portugal are now waren very careless to see them well conveyed, as they used to be during the times of the Kings of Portugal, when all the Pepper came for the Kings own accounts. And although the king hath promised continually to send his Navy by Sea▪ as far as the Flemish islands, there to stay for the coming of the Indian ships, and from thence to convey them unto Lisbon, yet since they were Farmed out there are few fleets sent forth, so that they are but little thought upon, but howsoever it is in the payment of the fee Farm, for Pepper the King will not lose a penny of his due, nor once abate them any thing. The sixth of December we had taken in our lading of Pepper which was 67●0. Quintales of the best that is in all Malabar, and very full. The same day we set sail from thence, keeping close under the coast, because that ordinarily in that country, every day from twelve of the clock of the night, till twelve at noon there bloweth an Easterly wind, which cometh out of the land: and then cometh a West wind out of the Sea, to the land ward, and with those two winds we perform our Voyage: but the East wind is always mightier and stronger than the West, and therefore the ships keep themselves close under the shore, for when they put further into the Sea, they can hardly get the coast again, because the West wind is not of so great force: as it chanced unto us, for that having put somewhat from the coast, we had much to do before we could get the coast again, by the which means often times they lose their Viages into Portugal, as by experience it hath been found. All the coast of Malabar is very pleasant to behold: for that they sail so close unto it that a man may tell every hill, valley and tree that is therein, being very green and fair land. The eleventh of December we came to Cananor, another fortress of the Portugese's, as we have told you in the description of this coast. There we lay a day and a half, to take in certain Masts, with other provision that we were to use, which is there in great abundance: & so we set sail again, keeping along the coast and passed by calicut, Pa●ane, and certain other places until the twenty four of December, when we arrived at Cochijn, where we lay till the twenty of januarie after in Anno 158●. In the mean time our ship was provided of all things necessary, and then we stayed till our turn came to set sail, because the other ships according to the contract were to set sail before us, one after the other, which custom I will here partly set down in brief. You shall understand, that as soon as the ship hath taken in her lading of Pepper, which is done with great care and diligent watch, as well in the King's behalf, as of the Farmers, and is laden in the two neither Oorlopes that is upon the Ballast, and in the Oorlop next over it▪ laying deal boards upon the Ballast, and making certain places and divisions for the purpose, with a hole over each place, to shut in the Pepper, leaving room by the main Mast to pass by it, so that there is at the least thirty several places, which they call Payoos, and all under the two lower Oorlopes as I said before. Which being all filled with Pepper, they shut the holes of those places very close, with Ocam and Pitch, and so are marked with numbers how many there are, and upon each place his weight of Pepper. These two Oorloppes being thus laden, there is left a place about the main Mast to bestow water, wine, wood and other necessaries for the ship, which are daily used. In the third Oorlop and on both sides thereof, there are divers places severally made that belong unto the Officers of the ship, as the Captain, Master, Pilot, Factor, Purser etc. and of all the rest of the Sailors that are allowed places: which they sell or let out unto the Merchants, to lad goods therein, whereof they make good profit. Upon the same Oorlop from the Mast unto the stern, are the places where they put their Powder, Biscuit▪ Sails clothes and other provisions for the ship. The other Oorlopes above these are laden by the Merchants, with all sorts of wares, which are in Chests, Fats, Balls, and Packs, and are placed in this sort, that is to say. As soon as the Pepper is laden, there is presently sent into the ship two waiters, and one that stoweth the goods (as a Porter) on the King's behalf: and he hath ten or twelve Porters under him, that must only lad and stow the goods in the ship, the Master nor any other not once having any thing to do with it, saving only the chief Boatswain▪ who is to look unto it, and yet commandeth nothing. No goods may be laden whatsoever, or how small so ever they be, but they must be Registered in the kings books, and they must bring a Billet from the Veador da Fa●enda, that is to say, the Surueighor of the business, being chief Officer for the King, wherein must be certified every kind of ware by piece meal, which they lad together with the name of the ship, wherein it is to be laden, for without that Certificate▪ the stowers and Porters will not take it in: and although you have your Billet, yet must you bribe the waiters, before you can get it aboard the ship, and some thing must be given likewise to the porters besides their duties, if you desire to stow your goods well, otherwise they will let it stand: and he that giveth most hath the best place in the ship: yea and they stow the ship so miserably full, that there is not a hole or an empty place to be found, but it is full stuffed: and for all their profit, it is often times seen, that the chief Porter, that doth only command and look over the rest, getteth for his part in bribes for stowage of a ship, sometimes seven or 800 Dukats, and the waiters as much, and all this only by gifts. Those offices are given by favour of the Viceroy and the Vendor de Falenda▪ which is the cause that the ships are often times laden so full that they are in manner ready to sink: so that a man would think it were impossible for them either to row or stir: because the sailors & officers of the ships have nothing to do therewith, until the last hour that it setteth sail & then it is delivered into their hands, and the waiters and porters go their ways, leaving the ship full in every place, even to the uppermost Oarlop, where there standeth commonly 7 or 8 chests, one above the other, both in the stern and foreship, upon the cables, in the forecastell, in the stirrige, and in every place, which are all full of great pots, fats, chests, hens cages, and such like, so that it seemeth rather a Labyrinth or a Maze, than a ship: and so they commit themselves to the grace of God and set sail: and often times it falleth out, that of 〈◊〉 sailors which are above the ship (as it did in our ship) not above 〈◊〉 of them could tell how to steer or handle the R●ther: & besides that, most of them were never at sea before, but by favour get their places, as all the rest do, so that when occasion serveth, being at sea, they stand looking one upon an other, doing nothing but cry Misericordia, and our Lady help us. In Cochiin there are a great number of boa●es called Tones, that are cut out of one piece of wood, and yet some of them are so great, that a man may lad 20 pipes of water in them. These they carry aboard the ships, that lie at the least a mile within the sea, and there they make price with them for a small sum of money, and then they go and fill the pipes themselves, with pots which they have for the purpose, and it is a great commodity unto them. This water is brought out of the river of Cochin called Manga●e, 〈◊〉 is very good. Touching the town and country of Cochin, I have already declared in the description of the Coast of Malabar▪ so that this shall suffice to show you what the country of India is: and now I will show unto you the manner that is used in the ships when they sail home again: which in part I have already touched, as also our departure and voyage from India to Li●bon. The 93. Chapter. Of my voyage and departure from India to Portugal THe first of jan. 1580, 1580 the Santa Ma●ia set sail, and because it was one of the oldest ships, it was first dispatched away, by reason that the sooner they departed from Cochin▪ they come in better time to the Cape de Bona Speranza, and the later they come thither, the more storms & foul wether they have, because as then the Sun goeth further into the North, and leaveth the South parts. Therefore commonly they let the best and strongest ships go last, because they are best able to hold out: and in the Island of S. Helena they stay one for the other until the 25. day of May, & no longer, which is the time appointed by the king, and so go in company together unto Portugal, for from India unto the Island of S. Helena they need not keep company, because all that way they fear no Rovers, and from thence they have all their Cannon shot pulled in, the better to pass the foul wether at the cape de bona Speranza. The 6 of january, the ship called our Lady de Consepcao set sail, the 10 of the same, the Admiral called S. Christopher: the 12 the S. Anthony: the 15 the S. Thomas, which was the greatest and the best ship in all the Fleet, and richest of lading: and the ●0 of the same month, we set sail, in our ship called the Santa Crus, being the last, where in was about 20● men of all sorts, as ●aylers, soldiers and slaves: for from India there go but few soldiers without the viceroys passport, by virtue whereof they go to present their services, and to fetch their pays and duties for the same. And this they do after they have served in India some years, & also when they have ability to pass over: for when they are poor, and have no help, they must stay in I●dia, even for necessity's sake, because they have no means to procure their passage, so that many of them are constrained to tarry there, and to marry with ●ores and Indian women, the better to maintain themselves although it be with misery enough. For the charges of a man's voyage out of I●dia into Portin●al, is at the lest ●● or ●●0 Pardawes, and that only for meat and drink, which a poor soldier c●n hardly compass, unless he can procure some gentleman, Captain, or some wealthy man in office▪ to be favourable unto him, in helping him to perform his journey. For in the voyages homewards the king giveth nothing to the soldiers and passengers, but free passage for himself and a chest of ●. spans high and broad and ● in length: and that after they have been ● years in India, & for that Chest they pay neither fraught nor custom: they likewise have a Chest in the roomage, free of freight, for which they pay custom: and this they may sell in India to any Merchant, as they commonly do, and is worth unto them at the least, 40 or 5● Pardawes. These places they call liberties, and he that buyeth them, registereth them in the name of him that he buyeth them of, to the end that in Portugal they may enjoy the same liberty and privilege: all the sailors and Officers also of the ships that sail in them from Portin●al▪ have likewise besides their places in the ships, the forage of such a chest allowed them, full of custom and freight. All these things are very sharply looked unto: for although the ships and goods are farmed, yet when they arrive at Lisbon▪ all the chests are brought into the Indian house, and there visited, to see if any goods be in them, that is forbidden to be brought out of India, as pepper▪ Anill, or Indigo, and other such wares as are farmed of the king: & if any be found, it is presently forfeited, and all the wares that are in such chests are likewise valued, so that if they amount unto more than the value of 〈◊〉 Milreyes, they must pay custom for the overplus, which in the time of the kings of Portugal was not used: for than they were accustomed to carry their chests home, and to show them only to the waiters: and although the poor sailors and Officers do much compl●yne for the loss & breaking of their liberties, yet can they not be heard: and thus there come but few Soldiers out of 〈◊〉, for the causes aforesaid: for I cert●nlie believe that of 15●● Soldiers and more that yearly are sent thither out of Portugal, there returneth not a hundredth again, some ●ying there in the country, others being cast away, and slain by divers occasions, and the rest by poverty not able to return again: and so against their wills are forced to stay in the Country. If any of them do chance to come, it is with some Viceroy, Captain, or other Gentleman, or person, that hath borne office or authority: and when such men come over, they always take some Soldiers with them, to whom they give meat and drink, and yet are such as are of their acquaintance, and that long before had been at their commandments: which they do for the most part upon a certain pride and vain glory: and in this sort there may yearly come 20 or 3● Soldiers over in each Ship, which have their Slaves and Black Moors with them: so that they come clean and sweet home, both for Linen and other things, because Linen in India is very good cheap: and the Ships when they return home, are cleaner than when they set out of Portugal, because they have fewer men in them, and such as come out of India, bring all their necessaries with them, besides that the ship is very sweet, by reason of the spice that is laden in it. The partition of the ship is in this manner: the Pilot hath his cabin above in the hinder part of the ship, on the right side, where he hath two or three rooms, and never cometh under hatches, nor down into the foreship but standeth only and commandeth the Master of the ship to hoist or let fall the sails, and to look unto his course, how they shall steer to take the height of the sun & every day to write and mark what passeth and how they sail, with what tokens, wind and weather they have every day: the Master hath his Cabin in the same place, behind the Pilots Cabins, on the left hand, with as many places and rooms as the Pilot hath, where he standeth and commandeth, with a silver whistle▪ & looketh only to the Main mast and her Sails, and so backwards: yet he hath the care of all the Ship, and whatsoever belongeth to it, and commandeth all things, as to make & mend the sails, which he cutteth out, & the sailors sow them: he looketh also if there be any fault in the ship, and causeth it to be mended, & as need requireth, to draw their Cannon in, and again to put it out. If he wanteth any thing, as clothe for sails, nails, ropes, or any such like things as are needful, she must ask them of the Factor and purser of the ship, which presently are delivered unto him, with a note of his hand in the book to be accountable for it. The chief Boteson hath his cabin in the forecastle, and hath commandment and government over the Fouke mast, and the fore sails: he hath also a silver whistle like the master, and taketh care for all things belonging to the Fouke mast, and for the fast binding of the anchors. The Guardian or quartermaster hath his cabin close by the great mast outward on the left hand, for on the right hand standeth the scullery and kitchen, where they dress their meat, he weareth a silver whistle and hath charge to see the swabers pump to make the ship clean, to look to the ropes & cause them to be mended, and to the boat which he commonly ruleth: the Gunner hath his cabin inward from the mast, hard by the Ruther under the first Oorlope, and must always sit by the main mast looking upon the master both night and day, that as the Master whistleth to will the Gunners to draw in their pieces, or to thrust them out, he may be ready so to do: he likewise taketh ca●e for the pieces and the things belonging to them: when they have cause to use them, the under Pilot doth nothing but help the chief Pilot & watch his quarter: they have likewise two or three of the best sailors, that do nothing else but command in the Pilots room when he sleepeth. The sailors have most of their Cabins in the forecastle, and there about, & the Gunners behind by the master Gunner, under the upper deck, & do nothing else but with their instruments put the great pieces forth, or draw them in as they are commanded, the swabers must do all whatsoever they are bidden to do by the officers, but never touch the Ruther: for the sailors do only steer and rule the ship when need requireth, but not the pump, neither do they hoist up the main sail, for the soldiers and slaves use to do that, the swabers pump, & the Carpenter doth such work as is to be done, the Cooper in like sort and the Calker, so that if the ship were sinking, not any of them will do more than belongeth to his charge, and what further is to be done, they will stand still & look upon it: the Captain hath the Gallery and the cabin behind, he commandeth only over the soldiers, & such as watch by night, the Pilot, Master, and the Boteson, are served in very good sort with their silver lamps, beakers, cups, & bowls, every man by himself, and are waited on by their slaves and servants, and have enough of every thing, but the other sailors, & swabers have not such store, but endure more hardness, for every man must provide for himself, as we told you before. Now you must understand that in their ships there is no averidge: for that when there happeneth any loss, or that any goods are thrown over board, he standeth to the loss that oweth the goods, without any more accounts, and that commonly falleth out upon the poor swabers, for they usually have their chests standing upon the hatches▪ because they have nothing to give unto the Porters that they might have a good place for them, as the others of greater ability use to do, and when any storm or hurt chanceth, than they throw the things overboard that first comes to hand, without respect of persons snye averidge to be made. In this sort setting sail, we held our course south south East for the space of 150. miles, till we came to the Equinoctial line, & from thence till we were under seven degrees in the same course, and from thence south West and by West, unto the cape de Bona Speranza, which way was never used before that time, for they used to sail from Cochiin south west, and south west and by South, between the Islands of Maldiva, and a thousand other Islands and sands, unto the Island of Saint Laurence, and so to the cape: but after that the Pilot had lost the Saint james upon the shallows of India, and escaped alive (and was now Pilot in the Saint Thomas, being the best ship in all our Fleet) he had the fore Voyage, and kept aloof two or three hundred miles out into the Sea, clean from all Islands, sands, or cliffs: saying that the casting away of so many ships (whereof no news or tidings could ever be heard) was, that they were cast away upon the sands, even as it chanced unto him, and to avoid the dangers thereof, as also to win the favour of the King and the officers of the Admiralty, he was the first that took upon him to discover that way, with the ship wherein my Lord the Archbishop sailed, and is almost the same way that the ships that come from Malacca▪ do hold when they sail to Portugal, where they see neither islands nor Sands, nor any other thing but only the plain sea, & so he came into Portugal, certifying the Admiralty of that new way, and although he was cast in prison for the same cause, yet by favour he was presently released, and the Admiralty perceiving it to be so great a danger for the ships to sail amongst the Islands and Sands, (which they thought to be the chief cause of the loss of so many ships) have expressly commanded that the Pilots should use that new discovered way, according to the said Pilots information, thereby to avoid all danger: but that is not the cause of their casting away, although many times they are the means of much mischief: but the chief reason is the unreasonable lading, and charging of the ships, the unskilful seamen, and the slack visiting or searching of the ships, to see if they be fit to sail, and have all things that they want. By these and such like means the ships are daily lost, as in other places by examples and true witnesses I have already declared, and as the same Pilot that first found this new way, did well approve and verify to be true, in the Saint Thomas, that the Sands or Islands did him no hurt, but only the overlading of her, wherewith the ship was by the Cape burst in pieces, as hereafter I will show. Notwithstanding this way is not therefore to be disliked, although it be somewhat further about, but it is a very good way and wholly out of all danger of Sands and Islands, whereby they do avoid the Island of Maldiva, with other droughtes and sands about the same. The 30. day of januarie in the night, we passed the Equinoctial line, and the next day after we descried a ship, which we thought to be the Saint Thomas, and the same day one of our Boys fell overboard, whom to save we made all the haste we could to get out our small boat, but because it stood full of things, we could not so soon get it forth, but that in the mean time the boy was cast at the least two miles behind us, and so was drowned. The third of February the ship (we saw) came close by us, and then we knew it to be the Saint Thomas, wherewith we made towards it to speak with them: but when they began to know our ship by the ropes, that were all white, made of Indian Cairo, and knowing that we were left behind them at Cochiin, and thinking when they descried us, we had been one of the ships that first set sail, as also that their ship was accounted one of the best for sail in all the fleet: for very pride and high stomach they would not stay to speak with us, but made from us again: which our officers perceiving, did likewise wind from them, every one doing his best to get before the other. By this and such like signs of pride, the Portugese's do often cast themselves away, and as it may be conjectured▪ it was one of the chief causes of the loss of the saint Thomas: for that they used all the means they could to sail well, and that they might pass the Cape before us, whereof they use to brag, when they meet at the Island of Saint Helena, as if it were done by their wisdom: for so it fell out with the Saint Thomas, that coming to the cape de Bona Speranza, it had a contrary wind, whereby they struck all their sails, and so lay driving against the waves of the sea, which do there fall against a ship, as if it struck against a Hill: so that if the Ships were of hard stones, yet in the end they would break in pieces, much more such Ships as are made of wood, and this is commonly their manner, thereby the sooner to pass the Cape: which our ship could not bear, so that we put back again with the wind, yet as little as we might, thereby to avoid the force of the sea as much as we could: but because the Pilot of the saint Thomas trusted overmuch in her strength, & did purposely mean to be before us all, thereby as he thought to win the praise, the ship did (as it well appeared) lie still and drive without any sails, which they call Payrar, and so by the great force and strength of the seas, together with the overlading, was stricken in pieces, & swallowed in the sea, both men and all that was within her, as we might well perceive coming unto the Cape, by the swimming of whole chests, fats, balls, pieces of masts, & dead men tied unto boards, and such like fearful tokens: the other ships also that arrived in the Island of Saint Helena, told us likewise that they had seen the like, most pitiful sights, which was no small loss of so great treasure, and so many men: so that we which beheld it, thought ourselves not free from the like danger. It was one of the richest ships, that in many years had sailed out of India, & only by reason of the good report it had to be so good of sail, being but new, for as then it was but her second voyage: so that every man desired to go, and to load their wares in her. In the same ship went Don Paulo de L●ma Periera, that raised the siege before Malacca, & had served the king 30. years in India, & had obtained many brave victories, thinking as them to be in the top of his honour, and to be much advanced by the king. He also carried with him a great treasure in jewels and other riches, as also his wife, children and one of his brethren, with many other gentlemen and soldiers that bore him company, thinking to have good fortune in their Voyage: there were likewise 10, or 12. gentlewomen, some of them having their husbands in the ship, others whose husbands were in Portugal, so that to conclude, it was full of people, and most of the Gentility of India, & in all our ships there were many that seeing us in danger would say they might have gone safely in the Saint, Thomas thinking it unpossible that it should be cast away. Therefore it is manifestly seen, that all the works and navigations of men are but mere vanities, and that we must only put our trust in God, for that if God be not with us in our actions, all our labour is in vain, But returning to our matter, each ship did their best to be first, until the seventeenth of February that we got before the S. Thomas, being in the South under seven degrees grées, and from that time forwards we saw her no more, but only the tokens of the casting of her away about the Cape de bona Speranza, which after being at the Island of S. Helena, was told us more at large. The same day we had a great storm of wind and rain, so that the Ruther of our great mast by force of the Sea was broken And from the line we had a North and northwest wind with continual rains, storms and fowl weather, never ceasing until we came under 20. degrees, which was upon the 25. of February, and then we had a Southeast wind, with fairer weather (called by the Portugal's the general wind) which they commonly find and look for under 12. degrees: but we had it not before we were under ●0. degrees: the cause whereof we thought to be, for that we had put so far into the sea, out of the common way. This wind commonly holdeth unto 27. or 28. degrees little more or less, and then they must look for all kinds of winds and weathers, until they come to the Cape de bona Speranza, without any certainty of winds. The 5. of March being under 25 degrees, we had an East wind, with a most great storm, and exceeding rain, so that our Ruther-staffe broke, and two more that we had in the ship, one after the other being put unto it broke likewise, with the pin and the joint wherein the end of the Ruther hung: and we were forced to lie and drive without steering, having stricken all our sails, and the ship so toised by the waves on all sides, that we had not one dry place in all the ship. In this sort we lay driving for the space of two days and two nights together, with a continual storm and fowl weather with rain. The same night we saw upon the main yard, and in many other places a certain sign, which the Portugal's call Corpo Santo, or the holy body of brother Peter Gonsalue●, but the Spaniards call it S. Elmo, and the Greeks' (as ancient writers rehearse, and Ovid among the rest) used to call it Helle and Phryxus. Whensoever that sign showeth upon the Mast or main yard, or in any other place, it is commonly thought, that it is a sign of better weather: when they first perceive it, the master or the chief boteswaine whistleth, and commandeth every man to salute it with a Salve corpo Santo, and a mis●ricordia, with a very great cry and exclamation. This constellation (as Astronomers do write) is engendered of great moisture and vapours, and showeth like a candle that burneth dimly and skippeth from one place to another, never lying still. We saw five of them together, all like the light of a candle, which made me wonder▪ and I should have hardly believed it, but that I saw it, and looked very earnestly upon it: and although it was fowl weather, whereby I had no great leisure to think upon such curious things, notwithstanding I came purposely from under the hatches to note it. Those five lights the Portugeses call Coroa de nossa Se●liora, that is, dear Ladies Crown, and have great hope therein when they see it. And therewithal our men being all in great fear and heaviness, and almost out of hope, began again to revive and to be glad, as if thereby they had been fully assured of better comfort. The seventh of March we had better weather, and then we took counsel how to mend our Ruther: some were of opinion we should sail to Mosambique, and rule the Ruther with a rope: others were of contrary opinion, and said we might mend it aboard, and so perform our voyage: so that at the last we pulled certain pieces out of the ships side, (for we had not brought one with us, as need required) but being pulled forth, they were all too little, and would not serve. In the end we sound it convenient to take one of the bosses in our ship, and thereof to make an anvil, and of two O●e hides a pair of bellows, wherewith we went to work: and of a piece of an old hook or drag, we took two or three ends, whereof but one would serve, and that half broken, and the splinters we bound with an Iron hoop: and so being fit to the Ruther, we set forwards in the name of God. This asked us two days work before we could dispatch it▪ & then we hoist sail again with great joy, & gave divers alms to our Lady and the Saints, w●th many promises of better life, as being in misery m●n commonly do. The day after we took the height of the Sun, and found ourselves to be under 28. degrees and two thirds, being in the height of the land called ●erra D●natal, although we were at the least ●●●. miles to seaward from the land, and there we had good weather with a Southeast wind. In this country called ●erra Do●●●a● which reacheth to 3●. degrees● and at the Cape de bona Sp●●anza, and is the hardest passage that is in all the voyage, and oftentimes they fear the land of Natal more th●n ●he ●ape: for there commonly is stormy and fowl weather▪ and many ships have ●eene spoiled and cast away, as the Portugal's records can very well show. In the same country also we found the signs of the casting away of the S. Thomas, so that to to conclude, commonly the ships do there pay tribute by casting some lading over board, or else leave body and all behind: and therefore it is called Terra Donatal, that is to say, the land of Christmas: and for this cause they never pass it without great fear but with good watch, and great foresight: all their ropes being stiff, and well looked unto▪ the pieces drawn in, and all chests, pots, fats and other roomage that are not stowed under hatches, being thrown over board into the sea, and every thing settled and made ready in his place: for that in this coast they have one hour fair weather, and another hour stormy weather, in such manner as if heaven and earth should waste and be consumed. In that place likewise with a clear and fair weather there cometh a certain cloud, which in show seemeth no bigger than a man's fist, and therefore by the Portugeses it is called Oho de Boy, or Ox eye) and although as then it is clear, and calm weather, and that the sails for want of wind do beat against the masts, yet as soon as they perceive that cloud, they must presently strike all their sails: for that commonly it is upon the ships before they perceive it, and with such a storm and noise, that without all doubt it would strike a ship into the water, if there be not great care had to look unto it: as it chanced to the second fleet, after the Portugal's had discovered the Indieses, there being ten or twelve ships in company, which in such a calm and fair weather let all their sails hang, and regarded them not, and this custom they observed in this our navigation, for suddenly the cloud came with a most horrible storm, and fell upon them before they could prevent it, whereby seven or eight of them were sunk into the seas, and never heard of again, and the rest with great hurt and much danger escaped. But from that time forwards they looked better to themselves, and have learned to know it, so that at this present they watch for it, and yet it giveth them work enough to do. This storm falling over their heads in this sort, continueth through the whole Country of Terra Donatal, until you pass the Cape de bona Speranza. The 12. of March being under 31. degrees, we were right in the wind, and had a calm, whereupon we struck all our sails, and so lay driving 4. days together (which the Portugal's call Payraes') having a very high sea, which tossed our ships in such sort, that the Sailors esteemed it to be worse than a storm: for that there the waves of the Sea met in such sort on all sides, and clasped the ship in such manner betwixt them, that they made all her ribs to crack, and in a manner to open, so that it is very dangerous for the ships. We were in very great care for our Fouke-maste, and therefore we bond our Masts and all the ships about with Cables, as hard as possible we might. This continued till the 17. of March, and then we had a little wind, so that we hoist sail again: but it continued no longer then to the next day, and then we fell again into the wind, and had a storm: wherewith our main yard broke, and then again we struck all our sails, and so lay driving or Payraering, as the Portugal's call it. In the mean time we mended our main yard, and so we continued driving without our sails till the 20. of March, with great rise of the waves of the sea, which much tormented us, as in that place they commonly do: all the which time we were under 31. degrees, and could not pass forward. In that time we saw many birds, which the Portugeses call Antenalen, and are as big as Ducks. The 2●. of March we had a little wind, but very sharp, yet we hoist our sails, and sailed by the wind. The next night after, we had a calm, which continued to the 22. day, and then we fell again into the wind, with so great a storm, that we were compelled to strike all our sails, which we could hardly pull in, and could not stay the ship in any sort, it drove so fast: whereby we were in great danger, so that we were compelled to bind the bonnet about the Forecastle, which was our sail, (for other sail we might not bear) and so sailed backward, whether the wind would drive us, thereby to have some ease, and yet we had enough to do, for we were compelled to throw our great Boat over board, with all the chests, pots, and vessels, that stood upon the Hatches, with other wares, such as came first to hand. This storm continued for the space of two days & three nights without ceasing. The 25. of March (being the day before Palm sunday) we had a better wind and weather, after we had given great alms to our blessed Lady of the Annunciation, whose Feast was upon that day, and again hoist up our sails, keeping our course towards the Cape. At the same time we had a disease in our ship, that took us in the mouth, lips, throat, and tongue, which took off the skin and made them swell, whereby they could not eat, but with great pain, and not one in the ship but had it. The eight of April in the Morning, after we had sailed fifteen days before the wind, towards the Cape, we perceived some signs of the land, which is green water: but we found no ground, yet was it not above forty miles from the land, according to the Pilots judgement. We saw there also divers of the Birds called Mangas de Velludo, that is to say, Velvet sleeves, for they have upon the ends of their wings, black points like Velvet, all the rest being white and somewhat grey, which they hold for a certain sign of land that lieth within the Cape de Bona Speranza called Baya de la Goa, or the Bay of the Lake, and lieth under thirty three degrees & a half, from the coast that reacheth towards Mosambique. The ninth of April at night, we were again right in the wind, being under thirty five degrees and a half, with a great storm, and foul wether, that continued till the 14. of the same Month, so that we were compelled, (not being able to endure the force of the Sea, with the continual storm and foul wether) to sail back again before the wind, with the half of our Fouke sail up, for that we found ourselves not strong enough to drive without sails, as the ships commonly use to do, which oftentimes is the cause of their casting away, as it may well be judged, by reason of the great force and strength of the waves that run there: so that it seemeth almost impossible for a ship to bear out so great a force, though it were of Iron. And although we sailed before the wind, yet we had danger enough: for that the Sea came behind and over our ship, and filled all the Hatches, whereby we were compelled to bind our Masts, Cables, and all the ship round about with Ropes, that with the great force of the Sea it might not stir, and fly in pieces. And forced we were to Pump night and day, having at each end of the Fouke-yarde, a rope that reached to the Pilot, and at each rope there stood fifteen or sixteen men, the Pilot sitting in his seat, and the under Pilot behind upon the stern of the ship, to mark the course of the Sea, and so to advertise the other Pilot. At the rudder there stood ten or twelve men, and the other Sailors upon the Hatches to rule the sails, & as the waves came and covered the ship, the under Pilot called, and then the chief Pilot spoke to them at the Ruther to hold stiff, and commanded the ropes that were at the Fouke yard to be pulled stiff: the Sailors likewise and the chief Boatswain standing on the Hatches, to keep the ship right in the waves, for if the waves had once gotten us about, that they had entered on the sides of the ship, it had certainly been said of us, Requiescant in pace. And it was there almost as cold as it is here with us in winter, when it freezeth not: whereby we were all sore toiled, and in a manner out of hart, so that we esteemed ourselves clean cast away: for we were forced by turns to go to the rudder & from thence to the pump, (not one excepted) so that we had no time to sleep, rest, eat, nor clothe ourselves: and to help us the better the staff of our Ruther broke in pieces, and had almost slain two or three of our men. But God had pity on us, so that there happened no other hurt but that some of them were a little amazed. This continued to the fourteenth of April, without any change, whereupon all the Officers of the ship assembled together with others of the company, taking counsel what was best to be done, and perceiving the ship not to be strong enough to pass the Cape, they concluded by protestation (whereunto they subscribed their hands) to sail with the ship to Mosambique, and there to winter and to repair the ship, and provide all necessaries for it, which greatly grieved the common sort because they did find as great danger in turning back again to Mosambique, as to pass the Cape, for that they were to sail again by the land Donatal, which they feared, as much as the Cape: and also though they did arrive at Mosambique, yet they accounted it as much as a lost Voyage. For that they must stay there till the next year, and there spend all they have, for that all things that come thither are brought out of India: so that every thing is there as ●eare as gold, which would be hard for the poor Sailors and Swabbers, as having but little means to relieve themselves, and thereby they should be constrained to sell that little they had brought with them, for half the value: and besides that they were as then about 100L. miles from Mosambique. Wherefore there grew great noise and murmuring in the ship, among the Sailors, that cursed the Captain and the Officers, because the ship was badly provided, for it had not one rope more than hung about the ship nor any thing whereof to make them, if those that we had, should have chanced to break. The Captain laid the fault on the Master, because he asked them not when he was at land: and the Ma●ter said that he had spoken for them, and that the Cairo, or Hemp (whereof in India the ropes are made) was delivered unto the Captain, and that he had sold the best part thereof, to put the money in his purse: & that was the cause why we wanted: with this disorder they bring their matters to pass, not once remembering what may after fall out: but when they are in danger, then there is nothing else, but crying Misericordia, and calling to our lady for help: the Captain could not tell what to answer seeing us in that trouble, but said, that he marveled at nothing so much, as why our Lord God suffered them (being so good Christians and Catholics, as they were) to pass the Cape, with so great torments and dangerous weather, having so great and strong ships, and that the Englishmen, being (as he said) Heretics, and blasphemers of God, with so small & weak vessels, & passed the Cape so easily: for they had received news in India, that an English Ship had passed the Cape with very great ease. And so we made back again towards Mosambique, being in great despair, for that no man cared for laying his hand to work, and hardly would any man obey the Officers of the Ship. In this manner sailing, we perceived divers vessels, and boards with dead men bound upon them, driving in the Sea: which comforted us a little, thinking that some other of the ships were in the same taking, and had thrown some of their goods over board, and so made towards Mosambique before us: whereby we thought to have company, and that we alone were not unfortunate, for that is commonly said, that companions in misery are a comfort one to an other, and so it was to us: but I would to God it had been so as we imagined, but it was far worse than turning back again, for those were the signs of the casting away of the S. Thomas, as being in the Island of S. Helena, as we were afterwards advertised. The 15. of April we had an other great calm, which continued till the 17 day, and taking the height of the Sun, we found ourselves to be under 37 degrees, to the great admiration of all the company, for that being (as I said) under 35 degrees, and having sailed for the space of 5 days with so great a wind and stormy weather towards Mosambique, we should rather by all men's reason, have lessened our degrees, & by estimation we made account to have been under 30 or 32 degrees at the highest: but the cause why our ship went backward in that sort against wind and weather towards the Cape, thinking we made towards Mosambique, was by the water, which in those countries carrieth with a very strong stream towards the cape, as the Pilot told us he had proved at other times: yet he thought not that the water had run with so great a stream, as now by experience he found it did: so as it seemed that God miraculously against all man's reason and judgement, and all the force of wind and storms would have us pass the Cape, when we were least in hope thereof: whereby we may plainly perceive that all men's actions without the hand of God, are of no moment. The same day again we saw green water, and the birds called Mangas de Velludo, or velvet sleeves, which are certain signs of the cape de bona Speranza, which put us once again in hope to pass it: and about evening a swallow flew into our ship, whereat they much rejoiced, saying that it was a sign and foreshowing, that our Lady had sent the Swallow on board to comfort us, and that we should pass the Cape: wherewith they agreed once again to prove if we could pass it, seeing we had such signs and tokens to put us in good comfort, that God would help us. This being concluded, we sung the Litany, with Ora pro nobis, and gave many alms, with promises of pilgrimages and visitations, and such like things, which was our daily work. With that the sailors & others began to take courage, and to be lusty, every man willingly doing his office, offering rather to lose life and welfare in adventuring to pass the Cape, then with full assurance of their safety to return unto Mosambique: we had as then great waves, and very big water in the sea, which left us not till we came to the other side of the Cape. The 18 of April we fell again into the wind, with as great storms and foul weather as ever we had before, so that we thought verily we should have been cast away: for that at every minute the sea covered our ship with water, & to lighten her, we cast divers chests, and much Cinnamon, with other things, that came first to hand, over board, wherewith every man made account to die, and began to confess themselves, and to ask each other forgiveness, thinking without more hope, that our last day was come. This storm continued in this sort, at the least, for the space of 24 hours: in the mean time great alms were given in our ship to many Virgin Maries, and other Saints, with great devotion & promise of other wonderful things when they came to land: at the last God comforted us, and sent us better weather for that the 19 of A●●ill the wether began to cleéere up, and therewith we were in better comfort▪ The 20. of April we took the height of the Sun, and found it to be ●6 degrees: and again we saw green water, and some birds which they call Alcatraces, and many Sea-wolues, which they hold for certain signs of the cape de Bona Speranza, & as we thought were hard by the land▪ but yet saw none: the same day we had the wind somewhat fuller, and were in great hope to pass the Cape, so that the men began to be in better comfort, by reason of the signs we have seen. All that day we saw green water, till the 22 of Apr. upon which day twice, and in the night following, we cast out the Lead, and found no ground, which is a good sign that we had passed the Cape called das Agulhas, or the cape of needles, which lieth under 35 degrees, and is about 20 miles from the Cape de bona Speranza, which lieth under 34 degrees & a half. And because that about this cape Das Agulhas, there is ground found, at the least 30 or 40 miles from the land, we knew we were passed it: as also by the colour of the water, and the birds, which are always found in those countries: and the better to assure us thereof, the great & high sea left us, that had so long tormented us, and then we found a smother water, much differing from the former: so that as then we seemed to be come out of hell into Paradise, with so great joy, that we thought we were within the sight of some haven, and withal had a good wind, though somewhat cold. The 23 of April we passed the Cape de Bona Speranza, with a great and general gladness, it being as then 3 months and three days after we set sail from Cochiin, not once seeing any land or sand at all, but only these assured tokens of the said Cape, which happened very seldom: for that the pilots do always use what means they can to see the cape, and to know the land, thereby to know certainly that they are passed it: for then their degrees must lessen, and there they may as soon make towards Mosambique, as to the Island of S. Helena: for although they can well perceive it by the water, yet is it necessary for them to see the land, the better to set their course unto S. Helena, wherein they must always keep on the left hand: otherwise it were impossible for them to come at it, if they leave that course: for if they once pass it, they can not come to it again, because there bloweth continually but one kind of wind, which is South east: and thus having passed the Cape, we got before the wind. The 24 of April the Pilot willed us to give the Bona viagen unto the Cape de Bona Speranza, according to the custom, with great joy and gladness of all that were in the ship: for that as then they assure themselves that they sail to Portugal, and not to turn again into India (for so long as they are not past the Cape they are always in doubt) and as than we were about 50. miles beyond the Cape. The signs and tokens whereby they know themselves certainly to have passed the Cape, are great heaps and pieces of thick reeds, that always thereabouts drive upon the water, at least 15 or ●● mile's from the land: as also certain birds by the Portugeses called Fey●oins, somewhat greater than sea m●w●s, being white & full of black spots over all their bodies, & very easy to be known from all other birds. These are certain signs whereby the Pilots do certainly persuade themselves that they are passed the Cape, and having passed it, they set their course for S. Helena Northwest, & Northwest & by west. The 27 of Apr. we were right in the wind, and so continued till the next day, and then we had a calm, being under 3● degrees on Portugal side. The ●9 of Apr. w● g●t before the wind, which is the general wind that always bloweth in those countries all the whole year, until y● come to the Equinoctial line, and is a Southeast wind: so that they may well let their sails stand, & lay them down to sleep, for in the greatest wind that bloweth there, they need not strike their main yard above half the mast. The 12 of May, in the morning betimes▪ we discovered the Island of S. Helena, whereat there was so great joy in the ship, as if we had been in heaven: & as than we were about 2 miles from the land, the Island lying from us West, south west: whereunto we sailed so close, that with a caliver shot we might reach unto the shore: being hard by it, we sailed about a corner of the land, that from us lay Northwest, which having compassed we sailed close by the land. West, North west: the land on that side being so high and still, that it seemed to be a wall that reached unto the skies. And in that sort we sailed about a mile and a half, and compassed about the other corner that lay westward from us, which corner being compassed, we presently perceived the ships that lay in the road, which were those ships that set sail before us out of India, lying about a small half mile from the foresaid corner, close under the land, so that the land as then lieth South east from them: and by reason of the high land the ships lie there as safe, as if they were in a haven: for they may well hear the wind whistle on the top of their main yards, but lower it can not come: and they lie so close under the land, that they may almost cast a stone upon the shore. There is good ground there, at 25 and 30 fathoms deep, but if they chance to put further out, or to pass beyond it, they must go forward, for they can get no more unto the land: and for this cause we kept so close to the shore, that the height of the land took the wind from us, & the ship would not steer without wind, so that it drove upon the land, whereby our horesprit touched the shore, & therewith we thought that ship & goods had all been cast away: but by reason of the great depth, being 1●. fathoms water, and with the help of the Boats, and men off the other ships that came unto us, we put off from the land, without any hurt, and by those Boats we were brought to a place where the other ships lay at Anchor, which is right against a valley, that lieth between two high hills, wherein there standeth a little Church called Saint Helena. There we found five ships, which were, the ship that came from Malacca, and the S. Marry that had been there about 15. days, which came both together to the Cape de Bona Speranza, the S. Anthony, and the S. Christopher being Admiral, that had arrived there ●0. days before, and the Conception, which came thither but the day before us, so that there wanted none of the Fleet but the S. Thomas, and by the signs and tokens, that we and the other ships had seen at Sea, we presumed it to be lost, as after we understood (for it was never seen after) for the other ships had seen Masts, Deals, Fats, Chests, & many dead men that had bound themselves upon boards, with a thousand other such like signs. Our Admiral likewise had been in great danger of casting away: for although it was a new ship, & this the first Voyage it had made, yet it was so eaten with Worms, that it had at the least 20 handfuls deep of water within it, and at the Cape was forced to throw half the goods over board, into the Sea, and were constrained continually to Pump with two Pumps, both night and day, and never hold still: and being before the Island of S. Helena, had there also sunk to the ground, if the other ships had no● helped her. The rest of the ships could likewise tell what dangers and miseries they had endured. About three Months before our arrival at S. Helena, there had been a ship which the year before set out of Ormus, with the goods & men that remained in the S. Saluador, that had been saved by the Portugal army, upon the coast of Abex, and brought unto Ormus, as in an other place I have declared. That ship had wintered in Mosambique, and had passed very soon by the Cape, & so sailed without any company unto Portugal, having left some of her sick men in the Island, (as the manner is) which the next ships that came thither must take into them. These gave us intelligence, that about four months before our arrival, there had been an English ship at the Island of Saint Helena, which had sailed through the straits of Magel●anaes, and through the south seas, & from thence to the islands of Phillippinas', and had passed through the straits of Sunda, that lieth beyond Malacca, between the islands of Sumatra and java: in the which way she had taken a ship of China (such as they call junckos) laden with Silver and Gold, and all kind of Silks, and that she sent a letter with a small present to the Bishop of Malacca, telling him, that she sent him that of friendship, meaning to come herself and visit him. Out of that ship of China, they took a Portugal Pilot, & so passed the Cape de Bona Speranza, and came to the Island of Saint Helena, where they took in fresh water and other necessaries, and beat down the Altar and the Cross that stood in the Church, and left behind them a Ketle and a Sword, which the Portugese's at our arrival found there, yet could they not conceive or think what that might mean. Some thought it was left there for a sign to some other ships of his company, but every man may think what he will thereof. In the ship of Malacca came for Factor of the Pepper, one Gerrit van Afhuysen, borne in Antwerp, and dwelling in Lisbon, who had sailed in the same ship from Lisbon about two years before, for that they stayed in Malacca at the least fourteen Months, by reason of the wars and troubles that were in that country, until Malacca was relieved, as I said before: whereby they had passed great misery, and been at great charges. And because it is a very unwholesome country▪ together with the constraint of lying there so long, of 200. men, that at the first sailed from Lisbon in the ship, there were but 18. or 20. left alive, and all the rest died, so that they were enforced to take in other unskilful men in Malacca, to bring the ship home. This Gerrard van Afhuysen, being of mine acquaintance and my good friend, before my departure out of Portugal for India, marveled and joyed much to find me there, little thinking that we should meet in so strange a place, and there we discoursed of our travels past. And of him among divers other things, I learned many true instructions as well of Malacca, as of the countries and islands lying about it, both for their manner of dealing in trade of Merchandise, as in other memorable things. By the pictures following, you may see the true description of the Island of Saint Helena, and of the three sides thereof, as we passed by it, and as we sailed about it to the road, as also of the Island of ascension. The description of which two islands you may here perceive and learn, as I myself could mark the same. The 94. Chapter. A brief description of the Island Saint Helena. SANCTA HELENA THe Island of Saint Helena is so named, because the Portugese's discovered it upon Saint Helen's day, which is the twenty one of May. It is in compass six miles, little more or less, and lieth under sixteen degrees and a quarter, on the South side of the Equinoctall 550. Spanish miles from the Cape de Bona Speranza, and from the coast called Angola or Ethiopia 350. miles, & from Brasilia 510. miles. These are the two nearest lands adjoining to it. It is a very high and hilly country, so that it commonly reacheth unto the clouds: the country of itself is very ashy and dry: also all the trees that are therein, whereof there are great store, & grow of themselves in the woods, are little worth but only to burn: for it hath no special substance, but showeth as if it were half consumed, so that it should seem that some mines of Brimstone, hath in times past been in that Island, as commonly all the islands are all much subject to the same: for that in some places thereof they find Sulphur and Brimstone. When the Portugese's first discovered it, there was not any beasts, nor fruit, at all within the Island, but only great store of fresh water, which is excellent good, and falleth down from the mountains, and so runneth in great abundance into the Valley, where the Church standeth, and from thence by small channels into the Sea, where the Portugese's fill their vessels full of fresh water, and wash their clothes: so that it is a great benefit for them, and a pleasant sight to behold, how clear & in how many streams the water runneth down into the valley, which may be thought a miracle, considering the dryness of the country, together with the stony Rocks and hills therein. The Portugese's have by little and little brought many beasts into it, and in the valleys planted all sorts of fruits: which have grown there in so great abundance, that it is almost incredible. For it is so full of Goats, Bucks, wild Hogs, Hens, Partridges, and Doves, by thousands, so that any man that will, may hunt and take them: & there is always plenty and sufficient, although there came as many ships more into the Island as there do: and they may kill them with stones and staves by reason of the great numbers of them. Now for fruits, as Portugal Figs, pomegranates, Oranges, Lemons, Citrons, and such like fruits, there are so many, that grow without planting or setting, that all the valleys are full of them, which is a great pleasure to behold, so that it seemeth to be an earthly Paradise. It hath fruit all the year long, because it raineth there by showers at the least five or six times every day, and then again the Sun shineth so, that whatsoever is planted, there it groweth very well: but because the Portugese's are not over curious of new things, there groweth not of all sorts of fruits of Portugal and India in that Island: for assuredly without any doubt they would grow well in that land, because of the good temperature of the air, besides this, they have so great abundance of Fish, round about the Island, that it seemeth a wonder wrought of God: for with crooked nails, they may take as much Fish as they will, so that all the ships do provide themselves of Fish, of all sorts in that place, which is hanged up and dried, and is of as good a taste and savour, as any Fish that ever I eat: and this every man that hath been there, affirmeth to be true. And the better to serve their turns, upon the Rocks they find salt, which serveth them for their necessary provisions, so that to conclude, it is an earthly Paradise for the Portugal ships, and seemeth to have been miraculously discovered for the refreshing and service of the same, considering the smallness and highness of the land, lying in the middle of the Ocean seas, and so far from the firm land or any other islands, that it seemeth to be a Boy, placed in the middle of the Spanish Seas: for if this Island were not, it were impossible for the ships to make any good or prosperous Voyage: for it hath often fallen out, that some ships which have miss thereof, have endured the greatest misery in the world, and were forced to put into the coast of Guinea, there to stay the falling of the rain, and so to get fresh water, and afterwards came half dead and spoiled into Portugal. It is the fashion, that all the sick persons, that are in the ships, and can not well sail in them, are left there in the Island, with some provision of Rice, Biscuit, Oil, and some Spices, for Fish and flesh they may have enough, for when the ships are gone, than all the beasts (which by reason of the great number of people fly into the mountains) come down again into the valleys, where they may take them with their hands and kill them as they list, those sick men stay there till the next year, till other ships come thither, which take them with them, they are commonly soon healed in that Island, as being a very sound and pleasant country: and it is very seldom seen that any of them dieth there, because they have always a temperate air, and cool wind, and always fruit throughout the who●● year. The king will not suffer any man to dwell in it, because they should not destroy & spoil the country, and hold it as their own, but will have it common for every man to take what he hath need of. In time past there dwelled an Hermit in the isle, who continued there for certain years, under pretence of doing penance, and to uphold the Church, he killed many of the Goats and Bucks, so that every year he sold at the least five or six hundred skins, and made great profit thereof: which the King hearing, caused him presently to be brought from thence into Portugal. Likewise upon a certain time two Ca●●ares or black people of Mosambique, and one javer, with two women slaves stole out of the ships, and hid themselves in the Rocks of this Island, which are very high and wild, whereby men can hardly pass them. They lived there together, and begot children, so that in the end they were at the least twenty persons, who when the ships were gone, ran throughout the Island and did much hurt, making their houses & dwelling places between some of the hills, where not any of the Portugese's had been, nor yet could easily come at them: and therein they hide themselves until the ships were gone, but in the end they were perceived, and the Portugese's used all the means they could to take them▪ but they knew so well how to hide and defend themselves, that in many years they could not be taken: in the end, fearing that they might in time be hurtful unto them, and hinder them much, by express commandment of the King, after long and great labour, they took them all and brought them prisoners into Portugal: so that at this present no man dwelleth therein, but only the sick men, as I told you before. When the ships come thither, every man maketh his lodging under a tree setting a Tent about it: for that the trees are there so thick, that it presently seemeth a little town or an army lying in the field. Every man provideth for himself, both flesh fish, fruit and wood, for there is enough for them all: and every one washeth Linen. There they hold a general fasting and prayer, with Mass every day, which is done with great devotion, with procession, and thanksgiving and other Hymns, thanking God that he hath preserved them from the danger of the Cape de Bona Speranza, and brought them to that Island in safety. There they use oftentimes to Carus their names, and marks in trees & plants for a perpetual memory: whereof many hundredth are there to be found, which letters with the growing of the trees, do also grow bigger and bigger, we found names that had been there since the year of the Lord 1510. & 1515. and every year orderly following, which names stood upon Fig trees, every letter being of the bigness of a span, by reason of the age and growing of the trees. This shall suffice for the description of the Island of Saint Helena. The 21. of May, being Saint Helenas day, and Whitsunday, after we had taken in all our fresh water, and other necessaries, we set sail altogether in company, and directed Th● 〈…〉 P●●nt●d 〈◊〉 London by ●ohn Wolf 〈◊〉 by William Rogers THE TRUE Description of the ISLAND of 〈◊〉 lyei●g 〈◊〉 by ● degrees on the S●uth side of the Equinoctial line. Printed at London by john Wolf G●●uen by William Rogers our course towards Portugal, leaving about fifteen sick men in the Island, & some slaves that ran out of the ships. The 26. of May in the Evening, we spoke with the Saint Mary, and the next day with the Gallion of Malacca: the same Morning and in the after noon with the Admiral, who willed us to follow him unto the Island of the Ascension. The same day one of our slaves fell over board, & although we used all the means we could to save him, yet we could not do it, by reason we sailed before the wind. The same day at night we saw the Island of Ascension, and lavered all that night, because we would not pass the Island. In the Morning the 28. of May, we sailed about the Island, to see if there were any ground to Anchor on, because the Admiral was so leak, that she could no longer hold out: and the men desired the Officers of the ship, that they would lay the goods on land, in the Island of Ascension, and there leave it with good watch and necessaries for them that keep it, and so sail with the empty ship to Portugal: and there procure some other ship to fetch the goods, thinking it was sufficient to have it well watched and kept there, for that there cometh not a ship in twenty years into that Island, because there is nothing in it to be had. We went close unto it, by a very white and fair Sand, where the Admiral and all the ships cast out the Lead, and found from eighty to fifty, and 4●. Fathoms water: and although they might have gone closer to the land, yet the Officers excused themselves, saying, that they could not go nearer, and that it was too deep and very dangerous for them to Anchor there. Which they said to pacify the men, desiring that they might borrow two Pumps north of the other ships, and so without doubt they would bring the ship safe unto Portugal, and although it would be great pain and labour for them to do it, yet they must of force content themselves: for that the Admiral and all the Gentlemen that were in the ship▪ pumped both day and night, as their turns came about, as well as the meanest in the ship, only to encourage the people. They borrowed one Pump of the Saint Mary, and sent to desire us to lend them another, and although our ship was none of the best among the Fleet▪ we were of opinion not to lend him any, as not knowing what need we should have ourselves, having so long a way to sail yet in the end seeing the great necessity they were in, we lent them one, the rather because they said, that the Admiral's meaning was, if it were calm wether, to discharge some of their wares into other ships, thereby to lighten themselves, but it fell not out as they thought, so that with great misery and labour they overcame their journey. The 95. Chapter. Of the Island called the Ascension. THis Island was discovered upon ascension day, and in show seemeth as great as the Island of Saint Helena, but not so high. It is full of hills and dales, lying under eight degrees and a half, on the Southside of the Equinoctial line▪ and lieth Northwest distant from Saint Helena, 19● Spanish miles, and from the Equinoctial line 140. miles. There is not any fresh water in the Island, nor one green leaf or branch. It hath many hills of a reddish colour, which show like a certain Earth in Spain called Almagro, and is full of stony hills, and dried land, it is like Saint Helena. There hath been some ships there, that miss Saint Helena, and sought for fresh water in that Island, but could find none. It hath certain fair and white Sands about it, and great store of Fish, wherein it surpasseth S. Helena, but in it there are no beasts at all, only by reason of the great quantity of Fishes. There are so many Birds in it that it is strange, and they are of the bigness of young Geese, & came by thousands flying about our ships, crying and making great noise, and ran up and down in the ship, some leaping and sitting on our shoulders and arms, not once fearing us, so that we took many of them, and wrung of their necks, but they are not good to eat, because they taste morish. I think the cause they are so tame is, because they see but few men, and some desire to go to them. About that Island and the Island of Saint Helena, unto the Equinoctial line, there are flying Fishes, as great as Herring which fly by great flocks together, two or three Fathom above the water, and fly in that manner at the least a quarter of a mile, until their wings or fins be dry, and then they can fly no longer, but fall into the water, and there wet themselves, and then fly again above the water. The cause why they fly in that sort is, because they are chased by the great fishes, that eat them, and to escape from them, they fly above the water, and some times into the ships: for many of them fell into our ship, which flew too high, for when their wings are dry they must needs fall. From that Island of ascension the ships held their course Northwest and by West, till they be a degree past the Equinoctial line on the North side, where there lieth a cliff called Penedo de Sam Pedro, which many times they see, and to it from the Island of ascension are 300. miles. The 5. of june we passed again the Equinoctial line, and then again began we to see the North star, which we had lost under ten degrees, on this side Cochijn, and now began to lose the sight of the South star, and there we had the sun in the South at twelve of the clock at noon, in which on the other side of the line at the same time is in the North. The 8. of june being 4. degrees in the North, we lost our general South east wind, that had served us from the Cape de bona Speranza thither, & then began the rains and calms: for as then we began to come near the coast of Guinea, which continueth to 9 degrees. These calms and rains held us till 11. degrees, being the 20, of june, whereby the ships separated themselves, by reason of the calms which made them not able to stéerre: and in the 11. degrees they met again, and there we had a North east wind, which is called the general wind, because it floweth continually in those Countries, and holdeth to 30. and ●2. degrees, beginning many times at 6. and 7. degrees: but we had it not till we were under 1●. degrees. This wind is somewhat scant, for we must of force sail in the wind, because our chief course is Northwest and by North. The 23. of june we passed the point of Capo Verde, which is under 15. degrees, and the 26. of the same month we passed the Islands of Capo Verde, which are ten in number. They begin under 15. degrees, and end in 19 degrees, and are distant from the firm land of Capo Verde, from 70. to 1●0. mile's inwards to the sea. Then we entered into the sea, called Sergasso, which is all covered with herbs, so that it seemeth to be like a green field, & so thick that a man can not see the water, neither can the ships pass through them, but with great labour, unless they have a strong wind. The herb is like Samper, but yellow of colour, & hath berries like Goose berries, but nothing in them. The Portugal's call it Sargasso, because it is like the herbs that groweth in their wells in Portugal, called Sargasso: whereupon that sea is called Sargasso. It is not known from whence it cometh: for there is no land nor Island that is known to be near that sea, but the coast of Africa, which is at the least more than 400. miles from thence. It is thought it cometh from from the ground, and yet there is no ground in that place to be found: and in sailing to India, the ships come not into that sea (for then they keep closer to the shore, so that it is not once seen) and it is not found in any place but there, beginning at 20. degrees, & continuing to 34. degrees, so thick, and so full as if they were whole Islands, most strange to behold. In that country it is as cold in winter, as it is here with us when it freezeth not, which the Portugal's esteem a great cold, and clothe themselves against it as we do in a mighty great frost. The last of june we were under 23. degrees, being right under the Sun: for that the Sun was then in the same height, and we also under the Tropike of Cancer, which is the furthest part that the Sun goeth Northward, and then it turneth again unto the Equinoctial line, and from thence into the South. We passed the line of Tropicus Capricorni twice, once on the South side, by the end of the Island of S. Laurence, and then again under 23. degrees, after we had passed the Cape de bona Speranza. The 2. of july we were under the height of the Islands of Canary, which lie under 28. and 29. degrees, and are distant from the coast of Barbary and Africa from 30. to 80. miles, which Islands lay on our right hand: and because in those Islands there are many things that are worthy the noting, therefore I thought it convenient to make a brief description of them. The 96. Chapter. A brief description of the Islands of Canaria. THe Islands of Canaria are seven, which in times past were called the Fortunadas, and at this day by the Spaniards are called the Canaries, by reason of the great numbers of dogs which they found in them, when they were first discovered. The names of the Islands are, great Canary, Teneriffe, La Palma, La Gomera, El'Hierro, Lansarotte, and Fuerte Ventura. In the Island of Teneriffe there is a hill called Pico de Terraira, which is thought to be the highest hill that ever was found, for it may easily be seen at the least threescore miles into the sea, before they come at it. It cannot be climbed but in the months of july and August: for all the other months it lieth full of snow, although below in the Island, and in other Islands thereabouts, they see no snow. It is three days journey to climb up into it, and on the top thereof it is flat, and when it is clear and fair weather, a man may from thence see all the Islands round about it, although some of them are at the least 50. miles distant, and as much in compass. The two months in which they use to climb up upon the hill, they bring down certain pieces of brimstone, from whence it is much carried into Spain: and at my being in the Island of Tercera, a shipper one of my acquaintance that came from Teneriffe, gave me a piece thereof, for a remembrance of him. In one of those Islands called Hierro, or of Iron, there is a wonderful and strange thing to be seen, and I verily think it is one of the strangest things in the world. This Island is on of the greatest of all the seven: but it is an unfruitful and barren land, and so dry, that in all the Island there is not one drop of fresh water to be found, but only in some places upon the sea side, which is far from hand, so that it profiteth the inhabitants but very little. But God of his mercy hath provided for the want of water both for men and beasts, in this manner: for there is a great tree, which no man knoweth, (for the like is not found in any other place) the leaves whereof are small and long, and always green without changing colour: this tree is covered and compassed about with a small cloud, which always continueth in one form, and never altereth nor diminisheth: and this cloud casteth dew upon the leaves of the tree, which hang down, and drop continually (without ceasing) a most clear, thin and fine water, which falleth into certain Cisterns, that by the inhabitants of the Island are made round about & under the tree, therein to keep and preserve the water. The Island of ascension, so called, because it was discovered upon the day of Christ's ascension into heaven, is not inhabited because of the unfruitfulness thereof, & because it wanteth fresh water: which is also the cause that it is not visited by the ships, for that they hope for no refreshing in the same. The hills of this Island are red like Bolus. About this Island are many birds, because of the great numbers of fishes that are about it, specially small flying fishes, which in Portugal are called Pisce Bolodor. Read more hereof in the book, in Folio 175. And this water is in so great abundance, that it serveth all the Island for their necessary uses, not only for the people, but also for their cattle throughout all the Isle, and no man can remember when that wonder first began. On the right side of this Island about an hundred miles distant: there is yet an other wonder to be noted, which is, that oftentimes there is an Island seen thereabouts, called San Borondon, where divers men have been on land, being only such as fell upon it on the sudden, and not looking for it▪ who affirm it to be a very fair, pleasant, and green Country full of trees, and all kinds of victual, and that it is inhabited by people that are Christians: but no man knows of what nation they are, neither what language they speak. The Spaniards of the Islands of Canaria have many times sailed towards it to view it, but they could never find it: whereupon there goeth divers opinions of it: for some think it to be enchanted, and that it may not be seen but upon certain days: some think it to be very small, and always covered with clouds, and that therefore it can not be seen nor found out: and also the great storms and strength of the water driveth the ships from it: but to conclude, it is holden for a truth, that the Island lieth thereabouts, as all those that come from thence do certainly affirm. The Islands of Canaria are very fruitful, and plentiful of all things, both victuals and other necessaries. They have of all kinds of corn, specially excellent good Wine, which from thence is carried into all places. There is likewise great store of Sugar, which is much esteemed, and also carried into all countries of Christendom, which causeth great traffic unto those islands, as well by Spaniards and Portugal's, as other nations, and is the common staple for the ships that sail out of Spain into the West Indies, and refresh themselves there, and also take in such Wine as they commonly use to carry with them to the West Indies. They have also great abundance of Cattle and Cammelles, and are now inhabited by spaniards, having yet therein many of the natural borne inhabitants, which they do call Guanchas', who by reason of their long conversation with the Spaniards, do wholly use their customs, and manner of apparel. The chief of these Islands is great Canaria, where there is a Bishop, and the inquisition with the tribunal Royal, and it hath the government over all the other Islands, that are called the Canaries. The 6. of julie we were under 32. degrees, where we lost the general northeast wind, and had a calm, and saw much of the herb called Sargasso, which covered all the sea. The 〈◊〉 of the same month, we got again before the wind, being under 34. degrees, and then we saw no more of the herb Sargasso, but a fair clear sea. The eighteenth of julie we were under 39 degrees, under which height lieth the Island called de Coruo, and the Island of Tercera, and also the river of Lisbon, all these days we had many calms. The next day we had a West wind being a right forewind, and saw many flying fishes, almost as great as Haddocks, that flew three or four fathoms high above the water. The 22. of july, the wind continuing, about noon we saw the islands called Flores, and de Coruo, which lie one close to the other: from thence to the Island of Tercera Eastward are 70. miles. At that time we began to have many sick men, that is to say, some sick in their eyes, and some in their breast and bellies, by reason of the long voyage and because their victuals began to lose the taste, & savour, and many wanted meat, whereby divers of them through want were compelled to seethe rice with salt water, so that some of them died, which many times were found under the fore deck that had lain ●ead two or three days no man knowing it, which was a pitiful sight to behold, considering the misery they endured aboard those ships. There died in our ship from India unto that place, of slaves and others, to the number of 24. persons. The same day about Evening, being by the Islands of Flores and Coruo, we perceived three ships that made towards us, which came from under the land, which put us in great fear: for they came close by our Admiral, & shot divers times at him, & at another ship of our company, whereby we perceived them to be English men, for they bore an English flag upon their main tops, but none of them showed to be above 60. tons in greatness. About Evening they followed after us▪ and all night bore lanterns with Candles bu●ning in them at their sternes, although the Moon shined. The same night passing hard by the Island of Fayarl, the next day being between the Island of S. George that lay on our right hand, and the small Island called C●o●o on our left hand, we esspied the three English ships still following us that took counsel together, whereof one sailed backwards, thinking that some other ship had come after us without company, & for a small time was out of sight, but it was not long before it came again to the other two, wherewith they took counsel, & came all three together against our ship, because we lay in the lée of all our ships, and had the Island of S. George on the one side in steed of a sconce▪ thinking to deal so with us, that in the end we should be constrained to run upon the shore, whereof we wanted not much, and in that manner with their flags openly displayed, came lustily towards us, sounding their Trumpets, and sailed at the least three times about us, beating us with Musket and Caliver, and some great pieces, and did us hurt in the body of our ship, but spoiled all our sails and ropes, and to conclude, we were so plagued by them, that no man durst put forth his head, and when we shot off a piece, we had at the least an hours work to lad it again, whereby we had so great a noise and cry in the ship, as if we had all been cast away, whereat the English men themselves began to mock us, and with a thousand jesting words called unto us. In the mean time the other ships hoist all their sails, & did the best they could to sail to the Island of Tercera, not looking once behind them to help us, doubting they should come too late thither, not caring for us, but thinking themselves to have done sufficiently: so they saved their own stakes, whereby it may easily be seen what company they keep one with the other, & what order is among them. In the end the English men perceiving small advantage against us, (little knowing in what case and fear we were, as also because we were not far from Tercera) left us, which made us not a little to rejoice, as thinking ourselves to be risen from death to life, although we were not well assured, neither yet void of fear till we lay in the road before Tercera▪ & under the safety of the Portugese's fort, & that we might get thither in good time we made all the sails we could: on the other side we were in great doubt, because we knew not what they did in the Island, nor whether they were our friends or enemies, and we doubted so much the more, because we found no men of war nor any Carvels of advise from Portugal, as we made our accounts to do, that might convey us from thence, or give us advise, as in that country ordinarily they use to do, & because the English men had been so victorious in those parts, it made us suspect that it went not well with Spain: they of the Island of Tercera, were in no less fear than we, for that seeing our deer, they thought us to be Englishmen & that we came to over run the Island, because the 3. English men had bound up their flags & came in company with us: for the which cause the Island sent out 2. Carvels that lay there with advise from the King, for the Indian ships that should come thither. Those Carvels came to view us, and perceiving what we were, made after us, whereupon the English ships left us, & made towards them, because the Carvels thought them to be friends, and shunned them not, as supposing them to be of our company, but we shot four or five times and made signs unto them that they should make towards the Island, which they presently did. The English men perceiving that did put forwards into the sea, and so the Carvels boarded us telling us that the men of the Island were all in arms, as having received advise from Portugal, that Sir Francis Drake was in a readiness, and would come unto those Islands. They likewise brought us news of the overthrow of the Spanish Fleet before England, and that the English men had been before the gates of Lisbon: whereupon the king gave us commandment that we should put into the Island of Tercera, and there lie under the safety of the Castle until we received further advise what we should do, or whether we should sail: for that they thought it too dangerous for us to go to Li●bone. Those news put our fleet in great fear, and made us look upon each other not knowing what to say, as being dangerous for them to put into the road, because it lieth open to the sea: so that the Indian ships, although they had express commandment from the king, yet they durst not anchor there, but only used to come thither, and to lavere to and fro, sending their boats on land to fetch such necessaries as they wanted, without ankering: but being by necessity compelled thereunto, as also by the kings commandment, and for that we understood the Earl of Cumberland not to be far from those Islands with certain ships of war, we made necessity a virtue, and entering the road, ankered close under the Castle, staying for advise, and order from the king to perform our voyage, it being then the 24. of July, & S. james day. We were in all 6 ships, that is 5. from East Indies, & one from Malacca, & lay in the road before the Town of Angra, from whence we presently sent three or four Carvels into Portugal, with advise unto the king of our arrival. There we lay in great danger, and much fear, for that when the month of August, cometh it is very dangerous lying before that Island, for as than it beginneth to storm. The ships are there safe from all winds, saving only from the South and Southeast winds: for when they blow, they lie in a thousand dangers, specially the east Indian ships, which are very heavily laden, and so full, that they are almost ready to sink, so that they can hardly be stéered. The fourth of August in the night we had a South wind out of the sea, wherewith it began so to storm, that all the ships were in great danger to be cast away, and to run upon the shore: so that they were in great fear and shot off their pieces, to call for help. The officers and most of the sailors were on land, none but pugs and slaves being in the ships: for it is a common custom with the Portugese's, that wheresoever they anchor, presently they go all on land, and let the ship lie with a boy or two in it. All the bells in the Town were hereupon rung, and there was such a noise and cry in every place, that one could not hear the other speak: for those that were on land by reason of the foul weather, could not get aboard, and they in the Ship could not come to land. Our Ship the Santa Crus was in great danger, thinking verily that it should have run upon the sands, but God holy them. The ship that came from Malacca broke her Cables, and had not men enough aboard the ship, nor any that could tell how to cast forth another anchor: so that in the end they cut their masts, & drove upon the Cliffs, where it stayed, and broke in pieces, and presently sunk under the water to the upper Dorlope, and with that the wind came North West, wherewith the storm ceased, and the water became calm. If that had not been, all the ships had followed the same course: for that some of them were at the point to cut their Masts, and Cables to save their lives, but God would not have it so. In that ship of Malacca were lost many rich and costly Merchandises: for these ships are ordinarily as rich as any ships that come from India, as being full of all the rich wares of China, M●luco, Lava, and all those countries, so that it was great pity to see what costly things, as Silks, Damasks, clothes of gold and silver, & such like wares) fleeted upon the sea, and were torn in pieces. There was much goods saved that lay in the upper part of the ship, and also by duckers, as pepper, Nutmegs, and Cloves, but most of it was lost, and that which was saved, was in a manner spoiled, and little worth: which presently by the kings officers in the Island was seized upon, and to the Farmer's uses, shut up in the Alsandega, or Custom house, for the kings custom, not once regarding the poor men, nor their long and dangerous Voyage that had continued the space of three years, with so great misery and trouble by them endured in Malacca, (as in another place I have already showed:) so that they could not obtain so much favour of the king nor of his officers, that of the goods that were saved and brought to land, they might have some part, although they offered to put in sureties for so much as the custom might amount unto, or else to leave as much goods in the officers hands as would satisfy them, and although they made daily, and pitiful complaints, that they had not where with to live, and that they desired upon their own adventures to freight certain ships or Carvels at their own charge, and to put in good sureties to deliver the goods in the Custom house of Lisbon, yet could they not obtain their requests: but were answered that the king for the assurance of his custom, and of all the goods, would send an Armado by sea to fetch the goods: which fetching continued for the space of two years and a half, and yet nothing was done, for there came no Armado. In the mean time the poor sailors consumed all that they had, and desperately cursed both themselves, the king, and all his officers: yet in the end by great and importunate suit of the Farmers of the pepper, every man had licence to lad his goods in what ship he would, after it had lain there for the space of two years and a half, putting in sureties to deliver the goods in the custom house of Lisbon, where they must pay the half & more of the same goods for custom to the King, without any respect of their hard fortune and great misery, during their long and dangerous Voyage, and he that will be dispatched in the Custom house there, must see the officers, otherwise it is most commonly three or four months before the goods are delivered unto the owners, and the best things, or any fine devise that the Merchants for their own uses bring out of India, if the officers like them they must have them, yet they will promise to pay for them, but they set no day when: so that the poor Merchants are forced to give them rest, and well contented that the officers are so pleased, and use no more delays. The eight of August, the officers of the ships took counsel together, with the Governor of the Island what they were best to do, thinking it not good to follow the kings advise, considering their long staying, and fearing some other hard fortune if they should stay, and because a great Gallion being a man of war, and very strong, lay as then before the Island, wherein was the Governor of Brasil●a, who by foul weather had put in there: they concluded that this Gallion being well appointed should sail with them to Lisbon, and although they did it without the advise and commandment of the king, yet bade they rather so to adventure their lives upon the seas, than again to stay the danger of the Haven, for that the winter did daily more and more increase, so that they were not to look for any better weather, and in that sort appointing themselves as well as they could, and taking in all necessary provisions, the same day they all set sail with no small fear to fall into some misfortune by the way: but because many that were of the ship of Malacca, stayed at Tercera to save such goods as by any means might be saved, and by that means to help themselves, (among the which was the Factor of the pepper, being one of my acquaintance, at whose request, as also because the Pepper of that ship, and of all the other ships belonged all to one Farmer, by whom I was appointed Factor, and seeing the necessity he bade, and that he alone could hardly dispatch so great a matter,) I took order for mine own affairs, and having dispatched it by other ships, I stayed there to help him, till we had further advise, and order from the Farmers of the Pepper and other spices and wares, of the which goods we saved a great quantity by means of Duckers and other Instruments that we used, having advise from the Farmers & the King that it should not be long before they sent for us, willing us to stay there, and to look unto the goods. This staying and fetching us away continued (as I said before) for the space of two years and a half, whereby you may consider the good order, and policy of the Admiralty of Portugal, and with what diligence and care they seek for the common profit of the land, and the poor Merchants of the Country, whom they ought to favour and help, as much as possibly they may, but they do clean contrary, as those which deal in Portugal do well find. The 13. of August the ships came back again unto the Island of Tercera, because they had a contrary wind as also for want of fresh water, but they ankered not. The day before the Earl of Cumberland with ●. or 7. ships of war, sailed by the Island of Tercera, & to their great good fortune passed out of sight, so that they dispatched themselves in all haste, & for the more security, took with them 4. hundred Spaniards, of those that lay in Garrison in the Island, & with them they sailed towards Lisbon, having a good wind: so that within a 11. days after they arrived in the river of L●sbone with great gladness, & triumph: for if they had stayed but one day longer before they had entered the river, they had all been taken by Captain Drake, who with 40. ships came before Cascalis, at the same time that the Indian ships cast anchor in the river of Lisbon, being guarded thither by divers Galleys. Now by the discourse of this long and perilous voyage▪ you may sufficiently perceive, how that only by the grace and special favour of God, the Indian ships do perform their voyages, yet with great misery, pain, labour, loss, and hindrance: whereby men may likewise consider the manner of their Navigation, ordinances, customs and governments of their ships, so that in comparison of many other Voyages, this present Voyage may be esteemed a happy & prosperous voyage: for oftentimes it chanceth, that but one or two ships (of the five that yearly sail to India come safe home, as of late it hath been seen, some being taken, and some lost, altogether by their own follies, & bad order, as herein at large you may perceive, etc. The 97. Chapter. Of the description of the Islands of Acores of the Flemish Islands. THe Isles of Acores, or the Flemish Islands are ●. that is, Terce●a, Saint Michael, S. Marry, S. George, Gratiosa, Pico, & Fay●el. There are yet two Islands called Flores and Cora●, which are not contained under the name of Acores, but yet at this day are under the government of the same Islands, so that they are in all accounted ●. Islands. They are called Acores, that is to say, Spar-hawks or Hawks, because that in their first discoverte, they found many Spar-hawks in them, whereof they hold the name, although at this day there is not any there to be found. They are also called the Flemish Islands, that is, of the Neatherlanders, because the first that inhabited the same, were Neatherlanders, whereof till this time there is a great number and offspring remaining, that in manner and behaviour are altogether like Neatherlanders, and there is yet in the same Island a running water, that issueth out of a hill, & so runneth into the sea, where as yet those issues or ofspringes of Neatherlanders inhabit, & is called Ariber●dos ●ramengos, that is the Flemish river. The principal Island of them all, is that of Tercera, called Iusu● de jesus C●stus of Tercera. It is between 1●. or ●6. miles in compass, and is altogether a great Cliff of land, whereby in it there is little room: for it is as it were walled round about with Cliffs: but where any strand or land is, there standeth a sort. It hath no Havens nor entrance of waters, for the security and safety of the ships, but only before the chief town called Angra, where it hath an open Haven, which in form is like a half Moon, by the Portugese's called Angra, whereof the town hath her name. It hath on the one side in manner of an elbow sticking forth, two high hills, called Bresyl, which stretch into the sea, so that a far off they seem to be divided from the Island. Those hills are very high so that being upon them, a man may see at the least 10, 12 and sometimes 15. miles into the sea, being clear weather. Upon these hills there stand two small stone pillars, where there is a Sentinel placed, that continually watcheth to 〈◊〉 what ships are at sea and so to advertise those of the Island: for that as many ships as he seeth coming out of the west, that is from the Spanish Indies, or Bras●, C●bo v● Guinea, and the Portugal▪ Indies, and all other ways lying south or west, for every ship he setteth a flag upon the pillar in the west, and when the ships which he deserieth, are more than 5. then he setteth up a great ancient, betokening a whole fleet of ships▪ the like he doth upon the other pillar, which standeth in the East, for such Ships as come from Portugal, or other places out of the East or North parts, these pillars may be easily seen in all places of the town, by reason of the highness of the hills, so that there is not one ship or sail that is at sea, or maketh towards the Island, but it is presently known throughout all the town, and over all the whole Island: for the watch is not holden only upon those two hills iutting into the sea, but also upon all corners, hills and cliffs throughout the Island, and as soon as they perceive any ships, the Governor and Rulers are presently advertised thereof, that they may take such order therein as need requireth. Upon the furthest corner into the sea standeth a sort, right against another fort that answereth it: so that those two forts do shut and defend the mouth or open haven of the town, where the ships lie in the road, and so no ship can either go in or came forth, without the licence or permission of those two forts. This town of 〈◊〉 is not only the chief town of 〈◊〉, but also of all other towns within the islands thereabouts. Therein is resident▪ the Bishop, the Governor for the King, and the chief place of judgement, or tribunal seat of all the Islands of Acores. Three miles from this town lieth another town towards the North, called V● de Prava for P● is as much to say, as strand because it lieth hard by a great strand, and for that cause there is little traffic thither, as not having any convenient place for ships to come at it: yet some times there cometh some one, that by reason of contrary wind cannot get before the town of Angr●, and so by constraint discharge their goods in that Town, which from thence are carried by land to Angra, and yet some part thereof is spent and used there. It is walled and well housed, but not many people 〈◊〉, and such as are in it, do get their livings most by husbandry: for there are 〈…〉 corn lands. The Island is likewise very fruitful and pleasant, it hath much corn and wine, but the Wine is not very good to carry into other Countries there about, because it is small, and will not long continue, so that it is used in the Country by the common people: but such as are of wealth, for the most part drink wines of Madera and Canaria. It aboundeth in flesh fish, & all other necessaries and meats for man's body, where with in time of need they might help themselves. Oil there is none, but it cometh out of Portugal. Also Salt, pots, pans, and all kind of earthen vessels, Chalk, and such like are brought thither out of other places, for there they are not to be found: for fruits they have (besides Peaches of divers kinds▪ and in so great abundance that it is strange Cherries, Plums, walnuts, Hast nuts, chestnuts but those not very good: of Apples, Pears, Oranges and Lemons with all such like fruits there are sufficient. Of all sorts of Herbs and plants, as Cole words, Radishes and such like they have at their certain tunes of the year. They have likewise in that Island a certain fruit that groweth under the earth, like Radishes or other roots, but the leaves or plants are trees like Vines, but different in leaves, and groweth long wise upon the ground: it beareth a fruit called Ba●a●as, that is very good and is so great that it weigheth a pound, some more, some less, but little esteemed: and yet it is a great sustenance and food for the common sort of people. It is of good account in Port●gall▪ for thither they use to bring it for a present, and those of the Island by reason of the great abundance do little esteem it. There is also another kind of stuff that is sowed like corn and is a fruit: it groweth upon the root of the grass or leaves and is round and as big as a great Pease, but not so round: in eating it tasteth like Cardnuttes, but harder to bite: it is like wise a good meat and much esteemed in other places, but by reason of the great quantity thereof, it is most used to fatten their Hogs▪ and is called ●un●. There is also in the Island a certain plant, which is found in all places thereof in the open fields: it groweth as high as a man▪ and beareth no fruit, only the root thereof is a substance, of the thickness of a man's two fi●tes, and in show as if it were natural golden hair, and in handling like soft silk, which is used there to stuff and fill their beds in steed of wool and feathers▪ and I do certainly believe, if any man of understanding would take it in hand, it would well be woven. The principallest traf●●●ue of this Island is their woad, such as we use for ●●ing where of much is made in that Island, and is fetched from thence by Englishmen, Scots, and French men, in barter for clothes and other wares, who continually traffic into that Island: and although by reason of the wars, the Englishmen are forbidden to traffic thither, yet under the names of Scots and French men, they have continual trade there. The Island hath not any wild beasts or fowls, but very few, saving only Canary birds, which are there by thousands, where many birders take them▪ and thereof make a daily living, by carrying them into divers places. It hath also wonderful many Quails, which they call Cod●●nisen: of tame fowls, as Hens, & Gynny hens are there likewise great store. Hunting is there little used, but only for Coneys, which are very great: Hares, Hearts, Partridges, Venison, and such like are not there to be found, because of the little respect or care the inhabitants have to breed any such things. Fish is very plentiful, and of divers kinds, and very good: in Summer there is great store taken, for in Winter they can hardly brook the seas. The chief months of winter weather for rain and storms are, januarie, February, March and April, and also the month of September is commonly very stormy: all the other months it is commonly good weather. The Country is very hilly, and in some places woody, full of bushes and trees: it is hard to travel, because their ways for the most part are stony, so that for a mile, or a mile and a half together, men can see no ground, but only stones, which for sharpness and fashion show like pointed Diamantes, whereby one can hardly tread upon it lest it should cut through both shoes and feet: and yet it is all planted with Vines, so full and thick that in summer time you can hardly see through it, for that the roots thereof do grow between the stones: so that a man would think it impossible that any thing should grow therein: and which is more, in some places it seemeth impossible for a man to tread upon it, being so wild and desert as it showeth and nothing but hard stones and rocks. In good ground their Vines will not grow but only in the wild & stony places: & for that cause they are much esteemed. The good grounds and plain fields, which in some places are very many specially by villa da Prava are sowed with corn and woad, & they have so much corn that they need not bring any from other places: although that besides their inhabitants & natural borne Islanders. They have continually with them 14. companies of Spaniards, which are all fed and nourished by the corn that groweth in the country unless there chance to come a hard & unfruitful year, as oftentimes it doth, for than they are forced to help themselves with foreign corn▪ and that specially because of the soldiers that lie in the Island: & yet it is strange, that the corn and all other things in the Island continue not above one year, and that which is kept above a year is nought and nothing worth. And therefore to keep their corn longer than a year, they are forced to bury it in the earth, for the space of four or five months together, to the which end every townseman hath his pit at one end of the town in the common high way, which is appointed for the purpose, and every man setteth his mark upon his pit stone: the Corn is but lightly buried in the earth: the holes within are round, and the tops thereof so wide that a man may creep in, whereunto there is a stone purposely made to cover it, which shutteth it up very close. Some of the pits are so great, as that they may hold two or three lasts of corn, some greater, & some smaller as every man hath his provision: and as soon as the corn is reaped and fanned (which is in july,) every man putteth his corn into those pits, laying straw under and round about it, & then they fill it full or but half full according as their quantity is, and so stop it up with the stone, which they cover with earth, & so let it stand until Christmas, when every man that will fetch home his corn: some let it lie longer, and fetch it by little and little, as they use it: but the corn is as good when they take it out, as it was at th● first hour that they put it in: and although that Cartes, horses, and men do commonly pass over it, and also that the rain raineth upon it, yet there entereth not any drop of rain or moisture into it: and if the corn were not buried in that manner, it would not continue good above four months together, but would be spoiled: and when it hath been thus for a long time buried in the earth, it will continue the whole year through, and then they keep it in chests, or make a thing of mats, like a coop to preserve it in, not once stirring or moving it, and so it continueth very good. The greatest commodity they have in the land, and that serveth their turns best, is their oxen: & I believe they are the greatest & fairest that are to be found in all Christendom, w● unmeasurable great and long horns. Every Ox hath his several name like men, and although there be a thousand of them in a heard, and that one of them be called by his name, he presently cometh forth unto his master that calleth him. The land is very high, and as it seemeth hollow: for that as they pass over a hill of stone, the ground soundeth under them as if it were a Seller, so that it seemeth in divers places to have holes under the earth, whereby it is much subject to earthquakes, as also all the other Islands are: for there it is a common thing, and all those Islands for the most part have had mines of brimstone, for that in many places of Tercera, and Saint Michael, the smoke and savour of Brimstone doth still issue forth of the ground, and the Country round about is all singed and burnt. Also there are places wherein there are fountains and wells, the water whereof is so hot that it will boil an egg, as well as if it hung over a fire. In the Island of Tercera, about three miles from Angra, there is a fountain in a place called Gualua, which hath a property, that all the wood which falleth into it, by length of time converteth into stone, as I myself by experience have tried. In the same fountain by the root of a tree, whereof the one half runneth under that water, and is turned into as hard stone as if it were steel: and the other part of the root (which the water toucheth not) is still wood and root, as it should be. The Island hath great store and excellent kinds of wood, specially Cedar trees, which grow there in so great numbers, that they make scutes, Cartes, and other gross works thereof, and is the commonest wood that they use to burn in those Countries, whereby it is the wood that with them is least esteemed, by reason of the great quantity thereof. There is another kind of wood called Sangu●nl●o, and is very fair of a red colour, and another sort that they call white wood, being of itself as white as Chalk: other that is p●r●●ite yellow, and all natural without any dying▪ and therefore there are divers good workmen in Tercera, that are skilful in joiners ocupation, & make many fine pieces of work, as Desks, Cubbordes, Chests, and other such like things, whereof many are carried into Portugal, and much esteemed there, as well for the beauty of the wood, as for the workmanship, and specially the Spanish Fleet, which ordinarily refresh themselves in that Island, do carry much of it from thence, for it is the best and finest that is made in all Spain and Portugal, although it be not comparable to the Seskes, and fine workmanship of Nurenbergh, and those countries: but for wood it excelleth all other countries, for that they have in the Spanish Fleet, besides their own kinds of woods, at the least a thousand sorts of Wood of all colours that man can imagine or devise, and so fair that more fairer can not be painted. There is a certain kind of Wood in the Island Pico, situate and lying twelve miles from Tercera, called Te●xo, a most excellent and princely wood, and therefore it is forbidden to be cut, but only for the Kings own use, or for his Officers. The wood is as hard as Iron, and hath a colour within, as if it were wrought, like red Chamlet, with the same water, and the older it is and the more used, the fairer it is of colour▪ so that it is worthy to be esteemed as in truth it is. All those islands are inhabited by Portugeses, but since the troubles in Portugal, there have been divers Spanish soldiers sent thither, and a Spanish Governor, that keep all the Forts and Castles in their possessions, although the Portugese's are put to no charges, nor yet hardly used by them, but are rather kept short, so that not one soldier dareth go out of the town, without licence: and therefore men may quietly travel throughout the Island, both day and night, without any trouble. Likewise they will not suffer any stranger to travel to see the Country and this order was not brought up by the Spaniards, but by the Portugeses themselves, before their troubles, for they would never permit it▪ and which is more, all strangers that came thither were usually appointed a certain street, wherein they should sell their wares and might not go out of that street. Now it is not so straightly looked unto, but they may go in all places of the town, & within the Island but not about it, to view the coast: which notwithstanding was granted unto us, by the Governor himself, who lent us his horses, to ride about, and gave us leave to see all the forts, which at this time is not permitted to the natural borne Islanders, neither are they so much credited. We road twice about the Island, which he granted us leave to do, by means of certain particular friendship we had with him: neither could the Portugese's hinder us therein, because we were in the kings service, as Factors for the kings Pepper, and for that, they held and accounted us as natural borne Portugal's: for the Governor would willingly have had me, to have drawn a plot of the whole Island, that he might have sent it to the King: wherein I excused myself: yet I made him the town with the Haven, coming in, and Forts of Angra, which he sent unto the King, the like whereof you may in this Book behold: for the which the Governor was greatly affected unto me, and showed me much friendship. We had in our Lodging a French Merchant and a Scot, that willingly would have gone with us, to see the Island, but could not be suffered: for the Portugal's think that they would take the proportion thereof, and so seek to defeat them of their right. But returning to our matter, the Islands are very good, and wholesome air, and the diseases that are most common in those Countries, though not very plentiful, but only here & there one are one sickness called O Axe, that is a kind of bad air that taketh them, & maketh them altogether lame, or half lame of their limbs, or of some one limb: and an other sickness, that is called O Sange, that is, a certain blood, that hastily cometh upon a man, as a swelling in the eyes, or other places of the face, or of the body, & is as red as blood, for (as they say) it is nothing else but mere blood: these are two diseases like the plague, and are commonest sicknesses in those Countries, which grow by reason of the great windines of the Islands, that are subject to all storms and foul weathers, and are unreasonable moist, which is one of the principal causes of these diseases: for the winds are there so strong and dangerous, that they consume both the Iron and the Steel of their houses, and bring them into powder: for I have seen Iron grates in the King's Custom house, as thick as a man's arm, and the windows of hard free stone, which were so consumed by the wind, that the Iron in some places was become as thin as a straw, and the stone in like sort: and therefore in those Countries they use to make their Roofs and painthouses of stones, which they dig in the water, out of sands upon the Sea coast of those Illandes, whereon the wind hath not so great a power to consume it: and yet that Custom house had not been made above 6 or 7 years before, at the most. In this Island besides the two towns, there are divers great villages, as S. Sebastian's, S. Barboran, Altars, Gualua, Villa nova, with many other parishes and hamlets: so that for the most part it is built and inhabited, saving only the places that are wild and full of woods, which can hardly be traveled, much less inhabited. Their most traffic is (as I said before) the wood that groweth in those countries, I mean for such as deal in merchandise, and the workmen that make it: but the rest weight for the fleets that come and go to and from the Spanish and Portugal Indies from Brasilia, Cabo, Verde and Guinea: all which countries do commonly come unto Tercera to refresh themselves, as lying very fitly for that purpose: so that all the inhabitants do thereby richly maintain themselves, and sell at their wares, as well handy works as victuals unto those ships: and all the Islands round about do as then come unto Tercera with their wares, to sell it there. For the which cause the English men and other strangers keep continually about those Islands, being assured that all ships for want of refreshing must of force put into those Islands, although at this time many ships do avoid those Islands, to the great discommodity of the islands and the ships. From Tercera Southeast, about 27. or 28. miles, lieth the Island of S. Michael, which is about 20 miles long, and is likewise full of Towns and Villages inhabited by Portugal's, for air and all other things like unto Tercera. The chief Town is called Punta del Gada, where there is great traffic of English, Scots, and French men, only (as in Tercera) because of the woad, which is more abundant in that Island, then in all the rest of them: for that every year there is made above two hundredth thousand Quintalles of Woad. It hath likewise great abundance of Corn, so that they help to victual all the Islands that are round about them. It hath neither Havens nor Rivers, but only the broad sea, and have less safeguard and defence than those which are of Tercera: but there they lie not under the commandment of any Fort: so that many set sail with all the winds, and put to sea, which in the road of Tercera they may not do: and therefore the stranger's ships had rather sail to S. Michael's, for there they can not be constrained to do any thing, but what they will themselves to do. There is also a company of Spaniards in a Castle that standeth by the Town of Punta del Gada, which is made by the Spaniards for the defence and maintenance of the same town. From the Island of S. Michael's Southwards twelve miles, lieth the Island Santa Maria, which is about ten or twelve miles compass, and hath no traffic but only of pot earth, which the other islands fetch from thence. It hath no Woad, but is full of all victuals like Tercera, and inhabited by the Portugese's. There are no Spaniards in it: because it is a stony Country, like Tercera, and hard to board: whereby the inhabitants themselves are sufficient and able enough to defend it. While I remained in Tercera, the Earl of Comberland came thither, to take in fresh water▪ and some other victuals: but the inhabitants would not suffer him to have it, but wounded both himself and divers of his men, whereby they were forced to departed without having any thing there. From Tercera North northwest about seven or eight miles, lieth the little Island called Gratiosa, & is but 5. or 6. mile in compass, a very pleasant, and fine Island, full of all fruits and all other victuals, so that it not only feedeth itself, but also Tercera and the other Islands about it, and hath no other kind of merchandise: it is well built and inhabited by Portugese's, and hath no soldiers in it, because it is not able to hear the charge. The Earl of Comberland while I lay in Tercera▪ came unto that Island, where himself in person, with seven or eight in his company went on land, ask certain beasts, Hens, and other Victuals, with wine and fresh water, which they willingly gave him, and therewith he departed from thence, without doing them any hurt: for the which the inhabitants thanked him, and commended him for his courtesy, and keeping of his promise. From Tercera West North West, eight or nine miles, lieth the Island of S. George. It is about twelve miles long, but not above 2. or 3. miles at the furthest in breadth: it is woody and full of hills: it hath no special traffic, but only some Woad, and yet very little of it. The inhabitants live most by cattle and tilling of the land, and bring much victuals to sell in Tercera: it hath likewise many Cedar trees, and other kinds of wood, that from thence are brought unto Tercera, and sold unto the joiners, which for that occasion dwell only in Tercera. From S. George West Southwest ●. miles, lieth the Island called Fayael, which is 17. or 18. miles in compass: it is one of the best islands next unto Tercera, and S. Michael's: it aboundeth in all sorts of victuals, both flesh and fish, so that from this Island the most part of victuals and necessaries cometh by whole Carvels unto Tercera: it hath likewise much Woad, so that many English ships do traffic thither. The principal road and place is the town called Vitta dotta: there the ships likewise do lie in the open sea under the land, as they do before all the other islands: by this town there lieth a fortress, but of small importance: & because the inhabitants of themselves do offer to defend the Island against all enemies, the soldiers were discharged from thence, which which before that time lay in the fort, complaining that they were not able to maintain nor lodge them. The same time that the Earl of Cumberland was in the Island of Gratiosa, he came likewise to Fayael, where at the first time that he came, they began to resist him, but by reason of some controversy among them, they let him land where he razed the Castle to the ground, and sunk all their Ordinance in the Sea, taking with him certain Carvels and ships that lay in the road, with provision of all things that he wanted: and therewith departed again to Sea. Whereupon the King caused the principal actors therein to be punished, and sent a company of Soldiers thither again, which went out of Tercera, with all kind of warlike munition, and great shot, making the fortress up again, the better to defend the Island, trusting no more in the Portugese's. In that Island are the most part of the Netherlanders offspring, yet they use the Portugese's language, by reason they have been so long conversant among them, and those that used the Dutch tongue are all dead: they are greatly affected to the Netherlanders and strangers. From Fayael Southeast three miles, and from Saint George Southwest four miles, and from Tercera Southwest and by West twelve miles, lieth the Island called Pico, which is more than fifteen miles in length. It is so named of a high mountain that standeth therein called Pico, which is so high, ●t some think it is higher than the Pico of 〈◊〉 When it is clear weather, it may as perfectly beseen in Tercera, as if it were not half a mile from thence, and yet it lieth above twenty five miles from it: for it is at the furthest end of the Island towards Fayael The top of it is seen clear and bright, but the neither part is covered with clouds, and with the Horizon, whereby the Island is much spoken of. It is very fruitful of all kinds of victuals, like Fayael, and hath great store of wood, as Cedars & all other kinds, and also the costly wood Te●xo. There they build many Carvels and small ships: & from thence by reason of the abundance of wood, they serve the other islands with wood. It is also inhabited as the rest are, their chief traffic being Cattle and husbandry. It hath much wine, and the best in all those islands, and it hath the savorest and pleasantest Oranges that are throughout all Portugal: so that they are brought into Tercera for a present, as being there very much esteemed, and in my judgement they are the best that ever I tasted in any place. And because the town of Angra, in the Island of Tercera is the chief town and ruler over all the Flemish islands, I thought good to set it down in this place, in the full proportion, with all the streets, Forts, and Road or open Haven, together with the hills called Bresil, where the sentinel is holden, for all ships that come into those islands: all lively described as in my simple skill I could comprehend and devise it. The 98. Chapter. Of the islands of Coruo and Flores. FRom Tercera westward to the Island named Flores are seventy miles: it is about seven mile's compass, it is also inhabited by Portugese's, and hath no special merchandise, but only some wood, it is full of Cattle, and other necessary provisions, and lieth open to all the world, and to whosoever will come thither, as well Englishmen as others: for that the inhabitants have not the power to resist them. A mile from thence Northward, lieth a little Island of two or three miles in compass called De Coruo. The inhabitants are of the same people that dwell in Flores. Between those two islands and round about them, the Englishmen do commonly stay, to watch the ships that come out of the West: for those are the first islands, that the ships look out for and descry, when they sail unto Tercera, whereby the inhabitants do but little prosper, because they are at the pleasure and commandment of all that will come unto them, and take their goods from them, as oftentimes it happeneth. Yet for all their poverty, not to lose both lands and goods, they must content themselves, and Sail with every wind. The I'll of Tercera lieth under thirty nine degrees, in the same height that Lisbon lieth: and is distant from Lisbon lying right East and West two hundred and fifty Spanish miles. This shall suffice for the description of the Flemish islands, called the Azores, which by daily traveling unto them are sufficiently known: for that at this time many of our nation do sail thither, so that every Merchant knoweth them. This brief description therefore is by me set town for the instruction of such as deal not in the trade of Merchandise, and know them not▪ whereby they may see what manner of Countries they are▪ etc. The 99 Chapter. Of certain notable and memorable accidents that happened during my continuance in Tercera. THe second of October An. 15●9. at the town of Villa dan Praya, in the Island of Tercera, two men being in a field hard without the town were killed with lightning. The ninth of the same month there arrived in Tercera fourteen ships, that came from the Spanish Indies, laden with Cochenile, Hides, Gold. Silver, Pearls, and other rich wares. They were fifty in company, when they departed out of the Island of Hanana, whereof, in their coming out of the Channel, eleven sunk in the same Channel by soul weather, the rest by a storm were scattered and separated one from the other. The next day there came an other ship of the same company, that sailed close under the Island, so to get into the Road: where she met with an English ship, that had not above three cast pieces, and the Spaniyard twelve. They fought a long time together, which we being in the Island might stand and behold: whereupon the Governor of Tercera sent two Boats of Musketeers to help the ship: but before they could come at her, the English ship had shot her under water, and we saw her sink into the Sea, with all her sails up, and not any thing seen of her above the water. The Englishmen with their Boat saved the Captain and about thirty others with him, but not one penny worth of the goods, and yet in the ship there was at the least to the value of two hundred thousand Ducats in Gold, Silver, and Pearls, the rest of the men were drowned, which might be about fifty persons, among the which were some Friars and women, which the Englishmen would not save. Those that they had saved they set on land: and then they sailed away. The twenty seventh of the same month, the said fourteen ships having refreshed themselves in the Island, departed from Tercera towards Saul, ●nd coming upon the coast of Spain▪ they were taken by the English ships, that lay there to watch for them, two only excepted which escaped away, & the rest were wholly carried into England. About the same time the Earl of Cumberland, with one of the Queen's ships, and five or six more, kept about those islands and came often times so close under the Island, and to the Road of Angra, that the people on land might easily tell all his men that he had a board, and knew such as walked on the Hatches: they of the Island not once shooting at them, although they might easily have done it, for they were within Musket shot both of the town and Fort. In these places he continued for the space of two Months, and sailed round about the islands, and landed in Gratiosa, and Fayael, as in the description of those islands I have already declared. Here he took divers ships and Carvels, which he sent into England: so that those of the Island, durst not once put forth their heads, at the same time about three or four days after the Earl of Cumberland had been in the Island of Fayael, and was departed from thence, there arrived in the said Island of Fayael ●i●e Indian ships, whole General was one ivan Doryne●▪ & there they discharged in the Island 40. millions of Gold and Silver. And having with all speed refreshed their ships, fearing the coming of the Englishmen, they set sail, and arrived safely in Saint Lucas, not meeting with the enemy, to the great good luck of the Spaniards and hard fortune of the Englishmen: for that within less than two days, after the Gold and Silver was laden again into the Spanish ships, the Earl of Cumberland, sailed again by that Island: so that it appeared that God would not let them have it, for it they had once had sight thereof, without doubt it had been theirs, as the Spaniards themselves confessed. In the month of November▪ there arrived in Tercera two great ships, which were the Admiral and Vice-admiral of the Fleet laden with Silver, who with stormy weather were separated from the Fleet▪ and had been in great torment and distress, and ready to sink: for they were forced to use all their Pumps: so that they wished a thousand times to have met with the Englishmen to whom they would willingly have given their Silver, and all that ever they brought with them, only to save their lives. And although the Earl of Cumberland, lay still about those islands, yet they met not with him so that after much pain and labour they got into the Road before Angra, where with all speed they unladed, and discharged above five millions of Silver▪ all in pieces of 8. and 1● pound great: so that the whole Ray lay covered with plates and Chests of Silver, full of Ryales of eight, most wonderful to behold: each myllion being 10. hundred thousand Ducats, besides Pearls, Gold, and other stones, which were not registered. The Admiral and chief commander of those ships & Fleet called Alvaro Flores de Quiniones was sick of the Neapolitan disease, & was brought to land, whereof not long after he died in Syvilia. He brought with him the King's broad Seal and full authority to be General and chief commander upon the Seas, and of all Fleets or ships, and of all places and islands, or lands wheresoever he came▪ whereupon the governor of Tercera, did him great honour, and between them it was concluded, perceiving the weakness of their ships, and the danger of the Englishmen, that they would send the ships empty with Soldiers to convey them, either to Syvil or Lisbon, where they could first arrive, with advise unto his Majesty of all that had passed, and that he would give order to fetch the Silver, with good and safe convoy. Whereupon the said Alvaro Flores stayed there, under colour of keeping the Silver, but specially because of his disease, and for that they were afraid of the Englishmen. This Alvaro Flores had alone for his own part above 50. thousand Ducats in Pearls, which he showed unto us, and sought to sell them, or barter them with us for Spices, or bills of exchange. The said two ships set sail with three or four hundred men, as well Soldiers as others, that came with them out of India, and being at Sea had a storm, wherewith the Admiral burst and sunk in the Sea, and not one man saved. The Vice Admiral cut down her Mast, and ran the ship on ground hard by Sentwal, where it burst in pieces, some of the men saving themselves by swimming, that brought the news, but the rest were drowned. In the same month, there came two great ships out of the Spanish Indies, and being within half a mile of the Road of Tercera, they met with an English ship, that after they had fought long together, took them both. About 7. or 8. Months before, there had been an English ship in Tercera, that under the name of a Frenchman came to traffic in the Island, there to lad wood, & being discovered was both ship and goods confiscated to the King's use, and all the men kept prisoners: yet went they up and down the streets to get their livings, by labouring like slaves, being in deed as safe in that Island, as if they had been in prison. But in the end upon a Sunday, all the Sailors went down behind the hills called Bresil: where they found a Fisher boat, whereinto they got, & rowed into the Sea to the Earl of Cumberlands ship, which to their great fortune chanced at that time to come by the Island, and Ankered with his ships about half a mile from the Road of Angra, hard by two small Islands, which lie about a Bases shot from the Island and are full of Goats, Bucks, and sheep, belonging to the inhabitants of the Island of Tercera. Those Sailors knew it well; and thereupon they rowed unto them with their Boats, and lying at Anchor that day, they fetched as many Goats and sheep as they had need of: which those of the town and of the Island well saw and beheld, yet durst not once go forth, so there remained no more on land but the Master, & the Merchant, of the said English ship. This Master had a brother in law dwelling in England, who having news of his brother's imprisonment in Tercera, got licence of the Queen of England, to set forth a ship▪ therewith to see if he could recover his losses of the Spaniards, by taking some of them, and so to redeem his brother, that lay prisoner in Tercera, and he it was, that took the two Spanish ships before the town. The Master of the ship aforesaid, standing on the shore by me, and looking upon them, for he was my great acquaintance, the ships being taken, that were worth 300. thousand Ducats, he sent all the men on land saving only two of the principal Gentlemen, which he kept a board, thereby to ransom his brother: and sent the Pilot of one of the Indian ships that were taken, with a letter to the Governor of Tercera: wherein he wrote that he should deliver him his brother, and he would send the two Gentlemen on land: if not, he would sail with them into England, as indeed he did because the Governor would not do it, saying that the Gentlemen might make that suit to the King of Spain himself. This Spanish Pilot we bid to supper with us, and the Englishmen likewise, where he showed us all the manner of their fight, much commending the order and manner of the Englishmen fight, as also for their courteous using of him: but in the end the English Pilot likewise stole away in a French ship, without paying any ransom as yet. In the month of januarie 159●. there arrived one ship alone in Tercera, that came from the Spanish Indies, & brought news, that there was a Fleet of a hundredth ships which put out from the Firm land of the Spanish Indies and by a storm were driven upon the coast called Florida, where they were all cast away, she having only escaped, wherein there were great riches, & many men lost, as it may well be thought: so that they made their account that of 22●. ships, that for certain were known to have put out of Nova Spa●g●a, Santo Domingo, Havana, Capoverde, Brasilia, Guinea etc. In the year 1589. to sail for Spain and Portugal, there were not above fourteen or fifteen of them arrived there in safety, all the rest being either drowned, burst or taken. In the same month of januarie, there arrived in Tercera 15 or 16 ships that came from Sivilia, which were most Flie-boates of the low countries, and some Britons that were arrested in Spain: these came full of soldiers, and well appointed with munition, to lad the silver that lay in Tercera, and to fetch Aluares de Flores by the king's commandment into Spain. And because that time of the year there is always storms about those Islands, therefore they durst not enter into the road of Tercera, for that as than it blew so great a storm, that some of their ships that had ankered, were forced to cut down their masts, and were in danger to be lost: and among the rest a ship of B●lcay ran against the land, and was stricken in pieces, but all the men saved themselves. The other ships were forced to keep the sea, and separate themselves one from the other, where wind and weather would drive them, until the 15 of March: for that in all that time they could not have one day of fair weather to anchor in, whereby they endured much misery, cursing both the silver and the Island. This storm being past, they chanced to meet with a small English ship of about 40 tons in bigness, which by reason of the great wind could not bear all her sails: so they set upon her, and took her, and with the English flag in their Admiralles stern they came as proudly into the haven, as if they had conquered all the Realm of England: but as the Admiral that bore the English flag upon her stern, was entering into the road, there came by chance two English ships by the Island, that paid her so well for her pains, that they were forced to cry Misericordia▪ and without all doubt had taken her, if she had been but a mile further in the sea: but because she got under the Fortress, which also began to shoot at the Englishmen, they were forced to leave her, and to put further into the sea, having slain 5. or 6. of the Spaniards. The English men that were taken in the small ship were put under hatches, and coupled in bolts, and after they had been prisoners three or four days, there was a Spanish ensign-baerer in the ship, that had a brother slain in the fleet that came for England, who as then, minding to revenge his death, and withal to show his manhood to the English captives, that were in the English ship, which they had taken, as is aforesaid, took a poniard in his hand, and went down under the hatches, where finding the poor Englishmen sitting in bolts, with the same poniard he stabbed six of them to the heart: which two others of them perceiving, clasped each other about the middle, because they would not be murdered by him, threw themselves into the sea, and there were drowned. This act was of all the Spaniards much disliked and very ill taken, so that they carried the Spaniard prisoner unto Lisbon, where being arrived, the King of Spain willed he should be sent into England, that the Queen of England might use him as she thought good: which sentence his friends by entreaty got to be reversed, notwithstanding he commanded he should without all favour be beheaded: but upon a good Friday, the Cardinal going to Mass, all the Captains and Commanders made so great entreaty for him that in the end they got his pardon. This I thought good to note, that men might understand the bloody and honest minds of the Spaniards, when they have men under their subjection. The same two English ships, which followed the Spanish Admiral, till he had got under the Fort of Tercera, as I said before, put into the sea, where they met with an other Spanish ship, being of the same Fleet, that had likewise been scattered by the storm and was only missing, for the rest lay in the road: this small ship the Englishmen took, and sent all the men on shore, not hurting any of them: but if they had known, what had been done unto the foresaid English captives, I believe they would soon have revenged themselves, as afterwards many an innocent soul paid for it. This ship thus taken by the English men, was the same that was kept and confiscated in the Island of Tercera, by the English men that got out of the Island in a fisher boat (as I said before) and was sold unto the Spaniards, that as then came from the Indies, wherewith they sailed to S. Lucas, where it was also arrested by the Duke, and appointed to go in company to fetch the silver in Tercera, because it was a ship that sailed well: but among the spaniardes fleet it was the meanest of the company. By this means it was taken from the Spaniards, and carried into England, and the owners had it again, when they least thought of it. The 19 of March, the aforesaid ships, being 19 in number, set sail, having laden the King's silver, and received in Alvaro Flores de Quiniones, with his company, and good provision of necessaries, munition and soldiers, that were fully resolved (as they made show) to fight valiantly to the last man, before they would yield or lose their riches: and although they set their course for S. Lucas, the wind drove them unto Lisbon, which as it seemed) was willing by his force to help them, and to bring them thither in safety: although Alvaro de Flores, both against the wind and weather would perforce have sailed to Saint Lucas, but being constrained by the wind, and importunity of the Sailors, that protested they would require their losses and damages of him▪ he was content to sail to Lisbon: from whence the Silver was by land carried into Sivilia. At Cape Saint Vincent, there lay a Fleet of twenty English ships, to watch for the Armada, so that if they had put into Saint Lucas, they had fallen right into their hands, which if the wind had served they had done. And therefore they may say that the wind had lent them a happy Voyage: for if the Englishmen had met with them▪ they had surely been in great danger, and possibly but few of them had escaped, by reason of the fear wherewith they were possessed, because fortune or rather God ●as wholly against them. Which is a sufficient cause to make the Spaniards out of hart, to the contrary to give the Englishmen more courage, and to make them bolder for that they are victorious, stout and valiant: and seeing all their enterprises do take so good effect, that thereby they are become Lords and masters of the Sea, and need care for no man, as it well appeareth, by this brief discourse. 15●●. In the month of March 15●●. There was a blazing Star with a tail seen in 〈◊〉, that continued four nights together, stretching the tail towards the South. In the Month of May, a carvel of Fay● arrived at Tercera, in the Haven or Road of Angra, laden with Oxen, sheep, Hens, and all other kinds of victuals, and full of people, which by a storm had broken her Ruther whereby the Sea cast her about and therewith she sunk, and in her were drowned three children, and a Friar Franciscan, the rest of the men saved themselves by swimming, and by help from the shore, but all the Cattle and Hens came drowned to land: the Friar was buried with a great procession and solemnity, esteeming him for a Saint, because he was taken up dead with his Book between his arms: for the which cause every man came to look on him as a miracle, giving great offerings to say Masses for his soul. The first of August, the Governor of Tercera, reeceived advise out of Portugal and Spain, that two years before the date of 〈…〉, there were sailed out of England 〈◊〉 great ships well appointed, with full resolution to take their form, seven of them into the Portugal Indies, and the other five to Ma●: of the which five, two were cast away in passing the straights of Magellane●, and three sailed to Malac●● but what they had done there▪ was as then not known. The other seven passed the Cape de Bona Speranza, and arrived in India, where they put into the coast of Malabar, and there took six Foists of the Malabares, but let them go again: and two Turkish Galleys, that came out of the straights of Mecca or the red Sea, to whom likewise they did no hurt. And there they laded their ships with Spices, and returned back again on their way: but where or in what place they had laden, it was not certainly known, saving only that thus much was written by the Governor of India, and sent over land to Venice, and from thence to Mad●. The seventh of August a Navy of English ships was seen before Tercera, being 20. in number, and five of them the queens ships: their General was one Martin Furbu●her, as we after had intelligence. They came purposely to watch for the Fleet of the Spanish Indies, and for the Indian ships, and the ships of the countries in the West: which put the Islanders in great fear, specially those of Fay●el, for that the Englishmen sent a Trumpet to the Governor to ask certain wine, flesh, and other victuals for their money, and good friendship. They of Fayael did not only refuse to give ear unto them, but with a shot killed their messenger or Trumpeter: which the Englishmen took in evil part, sending them word that they were best to look to themselves, & stand upon their guard, for they meant to come and visit them whether they would or no. The Governor made them answer, that he was there in the behalf of his Majesty of Spain and that he would do his best, to keep them out, as he was bound: but nothing was done, although they of Fayael were in no little fear, sending to Tercera for aid, from whence they had certain Barks with powder and munition for war with some Biscuit and other necessary provision. The 3. of August we received very certain news out of Portugal, that there were 80. ships put out of the C●●●nl●o, laden with victuals, Munition, money, and Soldiers, to go for Britain to aid the Catholics, and Leaguers of France, against the King of Navarre. At the same time two netherlands Hulks, coming out of Portugal to Tercera, being half the Seas over, met with four of the Queen's ships their General being S. john Hawkins, that stayed them, but let them go again, without doing them any harm. The Netherlanders reported, that each of the Queen's ships had 80 pieces of Ordinance, and that Captain Drake lay with 40 ships in the English Channel, watching for the Army of the Carunho: and likewise that there lay at the Cape S. Vincent ten other English ships, that if any ships escaped from the Islands, they might take them. Those tidings put the Islanders in great fear, lest if they failed of the Spanish Fleet, and got nothing by them, that then they would fall upon the islands, because they would not return empty home, whereupon they held strait watch, sending advise unto the king what news they heard. The first of September, there came to the Island of S. Michael a Portugal ship, out of the Haven of Pernanbuco, in Brasilia, which brought news that the Admiral of the Portugal fleet, that came from India, having miss the janld of S. Helena, was of necessity constrained to put in Parnanbuco, although the King had expressie under a great penalty forbidden him so to do, because of the worms that there do spoil the ships. The same ship wherein Bernaldin Rybero▪ was Admiral, the year before 1589, ●89. sailed out of Lisbon into the Indies with 5. ships in her company, whereof but 4. got into India, the 5 was never heard of, so that it was thought to be cast away: The other four returned safe again into Portugal though the Admiral was much spoiled, because he met with two English ships, that fought long with him, and slew many of his men, but yet he escaped from them. The 5. of the same month, there arrived in Tercera a carvel of the Island of Cor●o and brought with her 50. men that had been spoiled by the english men, who had set them on shore in the Island of Cor●o, being taken out of a ship that came from the Spanish Indies, they brought tidings that the english men had taken four more of the Indian ships, and a carvel with the king of Spain's letters of advise for the ships coming out of the Portugal Indies, & that with those which they had taken, they were at the least forty English ships together, so that not one Bark escaped them but fell into their hands, and that therefore the Portugal ships coming out of India, durst not put into the islands, but took their course under 40. and 42. degrees▪ and from thence sailed to Lisbon, shunning likewise the cape S. Vincent, otherwise they could not have had a prosperous journey of it, for that as then the sea was full of English ships. Whereupon the king advised the fleet, lying in Havana, in the Spanish Indies ready to come for Spain that they should stay there all that year, till the next year, because of the great danger they might fall into by the Englishmen, which was no small charge, and hindrance to the Fleet, for that the ships that lie there do consume themselves & in a manner eat up one an other, by reason of the great number of people, together with the scarcity of all things so that many ships chose rather, one by one to adventure themselves alone, to get home, then to stay there: all which fell into the English men's hands, whereof divers of the men were brought into Tercera, for that a whole day we could see nothing else, but spoiled men set on shore, some out of one ship, some out of an other, that pity it was to see, all of them cursing the Englishmen, and their own fortunes, with those that had been the causes to provoke the Englishmen to fight, and complaining of the small remedy and order taken therein by the king of Spain's Officers. The 19 of the same month, there came to Tercera a carvel of Lisbon, with one of the king's officers, to cause the goods that were saved out of the ship, which came from Malacca, (for the which we stayed there) to be laden, and sent to Lisbon. And at the same time there put out of the Carunha one Don Alonso de Bassan, with 4 great ships of war to come unto the islands, there to watch for the fleet of the Spanish & Portugal Indies, and the goods of the Malacca ship being laden, they were to convoy them all together into the river of Lisbon: but being certain days at sea, always having a contrary wind they could not get unto the islands: only two of them that were scattered from the fleet, arrived at Tercera, & not finding the fleet, they presently returned back to seek them: in the mean time the King changed his mind, and caused the fleet to stay in India, as I said before: & therefore he sent word unto Don Alonso de Bassan, that he should return again to the Carunho, which he presently did (without doing any thing, nor once approaching near the islands▪ saving only the 2 foresaid ships, for he well knew that the Englishmen lay by the Island of Co●uo, but he would not visit them: and so he returned to the haven of Carunha, whereby our goods that came from Malacca, were yet to ship, and trussed up again, and forced to stay a more fortunate time, with patience p●rforce The 23 of Octob. there arrived in Tercera a carvel, with advise out of Porting●le, 159● that of 5 ships, which in the year 159● were laden in Lisbon for the Indeses, 4 of them were turned again to portin after they had been 4 months abroad, & that the Admiral, wherein the Viceroy called Mathias d' Alburkerke sailed▪ had only gotten to India, as afterward news thereof was brought over land, having been at the least 11. months at sea and never saw land, & came in great misery to Malacca. In this ship there died by the way 280. men, according to a note by himself made, and sent to the Cardinal at Lisbon, which the names & surnames of every man, together with a description of his voyage, & the misery they had endured: which was only done, because he would not lose the government of India: & for that cause he had sworn either to lose his life, or to arrive in India, as in deed he did afterwards, but to the great danger, loss and hindrance of his company, that were forced to buy it with their lives, and only for want of provision, as it may well be thought: for he knew full well that if he had returned back again into Portugal, as the other ships did, he should have been cassiered from his Indian regiment, because the people began already to murmur at him, for his proud and lofty mind. And among other things that showed his pride the more, behind above the gallery of his ship, he caused Fortune to be painted, & his own picture with a staff standing by her, as it were threatening Fortune, with this posy. Queroque veneas▪ that is, I will have thee to overcome: which being read by the Cardinal and other Gentlemen (that to honour him brought him aboard his ship) it was thought to be a point of exceeding folly: but it is no strange matter among the Portugal's, for they above all others must of force let the fool peep out of their sleeves, specially when they are in authority: for that I knew the said Mathi●s d' Alburke●k in India, being a soldier and a Captain, where he was esteemed and accounted for one of the best of them, and much honoured, and beloved of all men, as behaving himself courteously to every man: whereby they all desired that he might be Viceroy. But when he once had received his Patent with full power and authority from the king to be Viceroy, he changed so much from his former behaviour, that by reason of his pride they all began to fear & curse him▪ & that before he departed out of L●sb●ne, as it is often seen in many men that are advanced unto state & dignity. ●591 The 20. of januarie Anno 1591. there was news brought out of Portugal into Tercera▪ that the Englishmen had taken a ship, that the king had sent into the P●rtingall-Indie, with advise to the Viceroy, for the returning again of the four ships that should have gone to India, & because the ships were come back again, that ship was stuffed and laded as full of goods as possible it might be, having likewise in ready money 500 thousand ducats in Rials of 8. besides other wares. It departed from Lisbon in the month of November 1590. & met with the Englishmen, with whom for a time it fought: but in the end it was taken & carried into England with men & all, yet when they came there, the men were set at liberty, & returned into Lisbon, where the Captain was committed prisoner: but he excused himself, & was released, which whom I spoke myself, & he made this report unto me. At the same time also they took a ship that came from the Mine laden with gold, & 2. ships laden with Pepper, and spices that were to sail into Italy, the pepper only that was in them, being worth 170. thousand ducats: all these ships were carried into England, and made good prize. In the month of july an. 1591. there happened an earthquake in the Island of S. Michael, which continued from the 26. of july, to the 12. of August: in which time no man durst stay within his house, but fled into the fields fasting & praying, with great sorrow for the many of their houses fell down, & a town called Villa Franca, was almost clean razed to the ground, all the cloisters and houses shaken to the earth, & therein some people slain. The land in some places rose up, and the cliffs removed from on place to another, & some hills were defaced and made even with the ground. The earthquake was so strong that the ships which lay in the road, & on the sea, shaked as if the world would have turned round: there sprang also a fountain out of the earth, from whence for the space of 4. days, there flowed a most clear water, & after that it ceased. At the same time they heard such thunder▪ & noise under the earth, as if all the Devils in hell had been assembled together in that place, wherewith many died for fear. The Island of Tercera shook 4. times together, so that it seemed to turn about, but there happened no misfortune unto it. Earthquakes are common in those Islands for about 20. years passed there happened another earthquake, wherein a high hill that lieth by the same town of Villa Franca, fell half down, and covered all the town with earth, and killed many men. The 25. of August, the kings Armada coming out of Far●● arrived in Tercera, being in all 30. ships, Biska●es Portugeses & Spaniards: & 10. Dutch ●lieboats, that were arrested in Lisbon to serve the king, besides other small ships Pataros, that came to serve as messengers from place to place & to discover the seas. This navy came to stay for▪ & convoy the ships that should come from the Spanish Indies, & the ●lieboates were appointed in their return home▪ to take in the goods that were saved in the lost ship that came from Malacca, & to c●̄uoy it to Lisbon. The 13. of September the said Armado arrived at the Island of Coruo, where the Englishmen with about sixteen ships as then lay, staying for the Spanish Fleet: whereof some or the most part were come, and there the English were in good hope to have taken them. But when they perceived the king's Army to be strong, the Admiral being the Lord Thomas Howard, commanded his Fleet not to fall upon them, nor any of them once to separate their ships from him, unless he gave commission so to do: notwithstanding the Vice Admiral Sir Richard Greenfield, being in the ship called the Revenge went into the Spanish fleet, and shot among them, doing them great hurt, and thinking the rest of the company would have followed: which they did not, but left him there, and sailed away: the cause why could not be known: which the Spaniards perceiving, with seven or eight ships they boarded her, but she withstood them all, fight with them at the least 12. hours together, and sunk two of them, one being a new double Fly boat. of 1200. tons, and Admiral of the Fly boats, the other a Biscaine: But in the end by reason of the number that came upon her she was taken, but to their great loss: for they had lost in fight, and by drowning above 4●●. men, and of the English were slain about a hundred, Sir Richard Greenfield himself being wounded in his brain, whereof afterwards he died. He was borne into the ship called the Saint Paul, wherein was the Admiral of the fleet Don Alonso de Barsan: there his wounds were dressed by the Spanish Surgeons, but Don Alonso himself would neither see him, nor speak with him: all the rest of the Captains and Gentlemen went to visit him, and to comfort him in his hard fortune, wondering at his courage, and stout heart, for that he showed not any sign of faintness nor changing of colour. But feeling the hour of death to approach, he spoke these words in Spanish, & said: Here die I Richard Gr●enfield, with a joyful and quiet mind, for that I have ended my life as a true soldier ought to do, that hath fought for his country▪ Queen, religion, and honour, whereby my soul most joyful departeth out of this body, and shall always leave behind it an everlasting fame of a valiant and true soldier, that hath done his duty, as he was bound to do. When he had finished these or such other like words, he gave up the Ghost, with great and stout courage, and no man could perceive any true sign of heaviness in him. This Sir Richard Greenfield was a great and a rich Gentleman in England, and had great yearly revenues of his own inheritance: but he was a man very unquiet in his mind, and greatly affected to war: in so much as of his own private motion he offered his service to the Queen, he had performed many valiant acts, and was greatly feared in these Islands, and known of every man, but of nature very severe, so that his own people hated him for his fierceness, and spoke very hardly of him: for when they first entered into the Fleet or Armado, they had their great sail in a readiness, and might possibly enough have sailed away: for it was one of the best ships for sail in England, and the Master perceiving that the other ships had left them, and followed not after, commanded the great sail to be cut, that they might make away: but Sir Richard Greenefield threatened both him, and all the rest that were in the ship, that if any man laid hand upon it, he would cause him to be hanged, and so by that occasion they were compelled to fight, and in the end were taken. He was of so hard a complexion, that as he continued among the Spanish Captains while they were at dinner or supper with him, he would carouse three or four glasses of wine, and in a bravery take the glasses between his teeth and crash them in pieces and swallow them down, so that often times the blood ran out of his mouth without any harm at all unto him, and this was told me by divers credible persons that many times stood and beheld him. The English men that were left in the ship, as the captain of the soldiers, the Master and others were dispersed into divers of the Spanish ships that had taken the, where there had almost a new fight arisen between the Biscayne's and the Portugese's: while each of them would have the honour to have first boarded her, so that there grew a great noise and quarrel among them, one taking the chief ancient & the other the flag, and the Captain and every one held his own. The ships that had boarded her were altogether out of order, and broken, and many of their men hurt, whereby they were compelled to come into the Island of Tercera, there to repair themselves▪ where being arrived, I & my chamber fellow, to hear some news went aboard on of the ships being a great at Biscaine, and one of the twelve Apostles, whose Captain was called Bertandono, that had been General of the Biscaynes in the fleet that went for England. He seeing us called us up into the gallery, where with great courtesy he received us, being as then set at dinner with the English Captain that sat by him, and had on a suit of black velvet, but he could not tell us any thing, for that he could speak no other language, but English and Latin, which Ba●tandano also could a little speak. The English Captain got licence of the governor that he might come on land with his weapon by his side, and was in our lodging with the Englishman that was kept prisoner in the Island, being of that ship whereof the sailors got away, as I said before. The Governor of Tercera bade him to dinner▪ & showed him great curtes●e. The Master likewise with licence of Bartandano came on land, and was in our lodging, and had at the least ten or twelve wounds, as well in his head, as on his body, whereof after that being at sea, between Lisbon & the islands he died. The Captain wrote a letter, wherein he declared all the manner of the fight, and left it with the English Merchant that lay in our lodging, to send it to the Lord Admiral of England. This English Captain coming unto Lisbon, was there well received, and not any hurt done unto him, but with good convoy sent to Sentinial, & from thence sailed into England, with all the rest of the Englishmen that were taken prisoners. The Spanish army stated at the Island of 〈◊〉 till the last of September to assemble the rest of the fleet together: which in the end were to the number of 14●. sail of ships partly coming from India, and partly of the Army & being altogether ready unto sail to 〈◊〉 in good company, there suddenly rose so hard and cruel a storm, that those of the Island did affirm, that in man's memory there was never any such seen or heard of before▪ for it seemed the sea would have swallowed up the Islands, the water mounting higher than the Cliffs, which are so high that it amasseth a man to behold them: but the sea reached above them, and living fishes were thrown upon the land. This storm continued not only a day or two with one wind but seven or eight days continually the wind turning round about, in all places of the compass, at the least twice or thrice during that time, and all alike, with a continual storm and tempest most terrible to behold, even to us that were on shore, much more than to such as were at sea: so that only on the coasts and Cliffs of the Island of Tercera, there were above twelve ships cast away, and not only upon the one side, but round about it in every corner: whereby nothing else was heard but complaining, crying, lamenting and telling here is a ship broken in pieces against the Cliffs, & there another▪ and all the men drowned: so that for the space of 20. days after the storm, they did nothing else but fish for dead men, that continually came driving on the shore. Among the rest was the English ship called the Revenge, that was cast away upon a Cliff near to the Island of Tercera, where it broke in a hundred pieces and sunk to the ground, having in her ●●. men Gallegos, Biscayne's, and others, with some of the captive Englishmen, whereof but one was saved that got up upon the Cliffs alive, and had his body and head all wounded, and he being on shore brought us the news, desiring to be shriven, & thereupon presently died. The Revenge had in her divers fair brass pieces, that were all sunk in the sea, which they of the Island were in good hope to weigh up again. The next summer after among these ships that were cast away about Tercera, was likewise a Fly boat, one of those that had been arrested in Portugal to serve the king, called the white Dove. The Master of her, was one Cornelius Martenson of Schiedam in Holland, and there were in her one hundred soldiers, as in every one of the rest there was. He being over ruled by the Captain, that he could not be Master of his own, sailing here and there at the mercy of God, as the storm drove him, in the end came within the sight of the Island of Tercera: which the Spaniards perceiving, thought all their safety only to consist in putting into the road, compelling the Master and the Pilot to make towards the Island, although the Master refused to do it, saying, that they were most sure there to be cast away, and utterly spoiled: but the Captain called him drunkard, and Heretic, and striking him with a staff, commanded him to do as he would have him. The Master seeing this, and being compelled to do it said: well than my Masters, seeing it is the desire of you all to be cast away, I can but lose one life, and therewith desperately he sailed towards the shore, and was on that side of the Island, where there was nothing else but hard stones and rocks, as high as Mountains, most terrible to behold, where some of the Inhabitants stood with long ropes and cork bound at the end thereof, to throw them down unto the men, that they might lay hold upon them and save their lives: but few of them got so near, most of them being cast away, and smitten in pieces before they could get to the wall. The ship sailing in this manner (as I said before) towards the Island, & approaching to the shore, the master being an old man, and full of years, called his son that was in the ship with him, and having embraced one another, and taken their last farewell, the good old Father willed his son not to take care for him, but seek to save himself: for (said he) son thou art young, and may have some hope to save thy life, but as for me it is no great matter (I am old) what become of me, and therewith each of these shedding many tears, as every loving father and kind child may well consider, the ship sell upon the Cliffs & brake in pieces the father on the one side, the son on the other side falling into the sea, each laying hold upon that which came next to hand, but to no purpose: for the sea was so high and furious, that they were all drowned, and only fourteen or fifteen saved themselves by swimming, with their legs and arms half broken and out of joint, among the which was the Master's son, and sour other dutch bo●es: the rest of the Spaniards and Sailors, with the Captain and Master were drowned: whose heart would not melt with tears to behold so grievous a sight, specially considering with himself that the greatest cause thereof was the beastliness and insolency of the Spaniards, as in this only example may well be seen: whereby may be considered how the other ships sped, as we ourselves did in part behold, and by men that were saved did hear more a● la●●e, as also some others of our Countrymen that as then were in the like danger ●an well witness. On the other Islands the loss was no less● then in Ter●e●●: for on the Island of Saint Georg● there were two ships cast away: on the Island of 〈◊〉 two ships: on the Island Gra●o: three ships, and besides those there came every where round about divers pieces of brok● ships, and other things fleeting towards the Islands, wherewith the sea was all covered most pitiful to behold. On the Island of S. Michael, there were four ●hips cast away, and between Tercera and S. Michael●, three more were sunk, which were seen and heard to cry out, whereof not one man was saved. The rest put into the sea without Masts, all torn and rend: so that of the whole Fleet and Armado, being 140. ships in all, there were but 3●. or 33. arrived in Spain and Portugal, yea and those few with so great misery pain & labour, that not two of them arrived there together, but this day o●e, and to morrow another, next day the third, and so one after the other to the number aforesaid. All the rest were cast away upon the Islands, and overwhelmed in the sea: whereby may be considered what great los●e and hindrance they received at that time: for by many men's judgements it was esteemed to be much more than was left by their army that came for England, and it may well be thought, and presumed, that it was no other but a just plague purposely sent by God upon the Spaniards, & that it might truly be said, the taking of the Revenge was justly revenged upon them, and not by the might or force of man but by the power of God, as some of them openly sa● in the Isle of Tercera, that they beleeue● verily God would consume them, and that he took part with Lutherans and Heretics: saying further that so soon as they had thrown the dead body of the Vice-admiral Sir Richard Greenfield over board, they verily thought that as he had a devilish faith and religion, and therefore the devils loved him so he presently sunk into the bottom of the sea, & down into Hell, where he raised up all the devils to the revenge of his death: and that they brought so great storms and torments upon the Spaniards, because they only maintained the Catholic and Romish religion: such and the like blasphemies against God, they ceased not openly to utter without that any man reproved them therein ●or for their false opinions, but the most part of them rather said and affirmed, that of truth it must needs be so. As one of those Indian Fleets put out of Nova Spaigna, there were ●●. of them by storm and tempest cast away and drowned in the sea, being 5●. in all▪ so that but 〈◊〉 escaped. Of the fleet that came from Santo Domingo, there were 14. cast away, coming out of the channel of Havana, whereof the Admiral and Vice-admiral were two of them: and from Terra Fi●ma in India, there came two ships laden with gold and silver, that were taken by the Englishmen▪ and before the Spanish Army came to ●oru●, the Englishmen at time, had taken at the least 20. ships, that came from S. Domingo, India, Brasilia, etc. and all sent into 〈◊〉 Whereby it plainly appareth, that m●y end God will assuredly plague the Spaniards having already blinded them, so that they have not the sense to perceive it▪ but still to remain in their obstinate opinions: but it is lost labour to str●ue against God, and to trust in man, as being foundations created upon the sands, which with the wind are bloom down, and overthrown as we daily see before out eyes, and now not long since in many places have evidently observed: and therefore let every man but ●ooke into his own actions, & take our Low countries for an example▪ wherein we can but blame our own sins and wickedness, which doth so blind us, that we wholly forget and reject the benefits of God, continuing the servants & yoke slaves of Satan. God of his mercy even our eyes and hearts, that we may know our only health and saviour jesus Christ▪ who 〈◊〉 can help, govern, and p●ue us▪ and ●e us a happy end in all our assures. By this destruction of the Spaniards and their evil success, the lading and shipping of the goods that were saved out of the ship that came from Ma●a● to ●ercera, was again put off: and therefore we must have patience till it please God to send a fit time, & that we receive further advise and order from his Majesty of Spain. All this being thus past, the Farmers of pepper and other Merchants that had their goods in Tercera, which were taken out of the lost ship that came from Malacca, seeing that the hope of any Armada, or any ships in the kings behalf to be sent to fetch it, was all in deign: they made request unto his Majesty, that he would grant them licence every m●n particularly to ship his goods in what ship he would at his own adventure, which in the end after long suit was granted, upon condition that every man should put in sureties, to deliver the goods in the custom house at Li●bone, to the end the king might be pa●ed his custom, as also that the goods that should be delivered unto them in Tercera, should all be registered: whereupon the Farmers of pepper with other Merchants agreed with a Flushinger, to fetch all the Cloves, Nutmegs, Mace, and other spices and goods that belonged unto them, the Pepper only excepted, which as then the King would not grant to lad. The same ship arrived in Tercera about the last of November, and because it was some what dangerous, being the latter end of the year, we laded her with all the speed we could, for as then the coast was clear of Englishmen. To be short, this Flushinger being laden with most part of the goods, saving the Pepper that was left behind, we set sail for Li●bone, passing some small storms, not once meeting with any ship, but only upon the coast where we saw ten Hollanders, that failed with corn towards 〈◊〉 and other places in Italy, and so by God's help upon the second of januarie, 1●●2 Anno ●5●●. we arrived in the river of Li●bone, being nine years after my departure from thence, and there I stayed till the mouth of julie▪ to dispatch such things as I had to do, and upon the seventeenth of the same month, I went to Sentinial, where certain Hollanders lay, with whom I went for 〈◊〉. The 2●. of Julie we set sail being in all twelve ships, and because we had a contrary wind, we put out higher into the sea. The 2●. of the same month we had a lasting storm, whereby we ran against another ship, being both in a hundred dangers to be sunk for we were within a span of touching one another: but God holp us, and we parted from each other, which almost seemed impossible: for that the bore spirit of the ship, that came against us, strake upon our Fankyard, and there with brake in pieces, and presently thereupon his Fouke-maste fell over board, whereby he was forced to leave the fleet. Another also of our company had a leak, so that he made towards the coast again, where to save the men he ran the ship on shore, as afterwards we understood, and so we remained but ten in company. The 1. of August, being 90. miles in the sea, because the wind held contrary, so that we could not keep our right course, we espied three strange ships: but were not long before we lost the sight of them again. The 4. of August there came three other ships among our fleet, which we perceived to be Biscayne's, whereupon we made towards them, and shot certain pieces at them and so they left us. The 16. of August the wind being yet contrary, and because we were about 15. passengers aboard our ship, our victuals (specially our drink) began to fail, so that we were constrained to keep an order, and to stint every man to his portion, being as then 120. miles from He●ssant inwards in the sea, under 46. degrees, which is called the half sea. The 18. we had a storm, whereby three of our fleet were left behind, because they could not follow us. The 24. of August we cast out the lead, and found ground, wherewith we were all glad, for it was the entrance into the channel between England and France. The ●●. of August being in the channel, there came two small English ships to view our floete, but presently put in again to the coast of England. The ●●. we descried land, being loofeward from us, which was Goutste● and D●rtmouth. The next day we passed by the Isle of Wight, sailing along the coast. The 30 of August we put into the head between Dover and calais, where there lay one of the Queen's ships, but she hoist anchor and sailed to the coast of England, without looking after us, so we set four men on shore: and then we had a scant wind, wherewith we entered into the North sea, not seeing any body. The 1 of September being cloudy, we had a storm out of the northwest, whereby we could not discern land: but in the evening we met with two ships that came out of the East countries, which told us they had seen land, saying it was the Terel, willing us to follow them, and so we discovered land, being the Vlie: but we thinking it to be the Te●ell, would no longer follow the other ships, but put so near unto it that we were in great danger: and then we perceived that we had deceived ourselves, and saw the other ships to take another course towards the Terrill: but we had the wind so scant and were fallen so low that we could hardly get from the shore, and withal we had a sudden storm, wherewith our Fouke mast broke, our main mast being already cracked: whereupon we were fully determined to anchor there, and stand upon good comfort and hope in God: and suddenly the wind came better, so that with great pain and labour about Sun setting we entered the mouth of the Terel, without any Pilot: for that by reason of the great wind they durst not come out: so that to conclude we got in, and there with thanks given unto God, we ankered. In the morning being the second of September, our Gunner thinking to charge the Pieces, and for joy to shoot them off before the town, by fortune a ladle full of powder took fire, and with the force thereof strake off all his right hand, and burned him in many places of his body, wherewith our joy was wholly quailed, and abated. The third of September we arrived in Enchuisen, where I found my mother, brother and sister, all living and in good health, it being twelve years, nine months and a half after my departure from thence. For the which God Almighty with his son Christ Jesus our Saviour, be praised and blessed, to whom belongeth all power, honour and glory now and for evermore, Amen. The end of the first book THE SECOND BOOK. The true and perfect description of the whole coast of Guinea, Manicongo, Angola, Monomotapa, and right over against them the Cape of S. Augustin in Brasilia, with the compass of the whole Ocean Seas, together with the islands, as S. Thomas, S. Helena, & the Ascension, with all their havens, channels, depths, shallows, sands & grounds. Together also with divers strange voyages made by the Hollanders: also the description of the inward parts of the same lands. Likewise a further Description of the Card of Madagascar; otherwise called the Island of S. Laurence, with a discovery of all the shallows, cliffs, and numbers of islands in the Indian seas, and the situation of the Country of the Cape de Bona Speranza, passing along to Monomotapa, Soffala, and Mosambique, and from thence to Quiloa, Gorga, Melinde, Amara, Bar●, Magadoxo, Doara, etc. to the red sea: and what further wanteth for the description thereof, you shall find at large in john Hughen of Linschotens book: also the voyages that the Portugal Pilots have made into ●ll p● of the Indies. Extracted out of their sea Cards, books, and notes of great experience. And translated into Dutch by I. Hughen van Linschoten. And now translated out of Dutch into English by W. ● THE KINGDOM OF CONGO map of the Congo LONDON Imprinted by John Wolf. 1598. THE SECOND BOOK ¶ The true and perfect description of the whole coast of Guinea, Man●congo, Angola, Monomotapa, and right over against them the Kape of Saint Augustine in Bri●n with the compass of the whole Ocean Seas, together with the Islands, 〈…〉 S. Helena and the A●en●i●n, with all their Havens, 〈…〉 parts 〈…〉. Likewise a further description of the Card of Mada●ar ●herwise called the Island of S. Laurence, with the discovery of all the 〈…〉 Chri●●, and numbers of Islands in the Indian Seas, and the situation of the Country of the Cape de Bona Speranza passing along to Mon●motapa, Ae●ala, & Mosamb●●●e, and from thence to Quiolo●, Gorga, Melin●e, Amara, ●aru, Magado●o, Doara, etc. to the red Sea: and what further wanteth for the description thereof, you shall find at large in john Hughen of Lins●hotens book. Also the voyages that the Portugal pilots have made into all places of the Indies, extracted out of their Sea Cards and books, and translated into our mother tongue. BEcause such as sail into India, do compass the most part of Africa, therefore there are certain Cards placed in this book, which show those parts of that coast, whereby the ships do sail, and not speaking of the rich Islands of Canar●a and Cabo verde, to all men well knewne, and right over against them, in Africa, the kingdoms of Gualata, Tombuto, and Meili, whereof Gualata is very small and poor, both of victuals and fruit, having little else, but Milie: Tombuto great and populous, abounding in corn, beasts, milk, and butter, but wanting salt. Melli rich of corn, flesh, and cotton. We will come lower towards Guine●, a greater & richer kingdom than the rest, lying in Ethiopia, or the Moors country: which the better to understand, you must first know, that the ancient Cosmographers have divided Africa into four parts, as Barbaria, Numidia, Libya, and Aethiopia▪ or the Moors country, not comprehending Egypt nor Abexin, now called the land of P●ester john, which are likewise moors, and the rightest, as the scriptures well declare, and aught to be counted and numbered amongst the chief provinces of Africa, which all Cosmographers, and describers of the world may read. Touching the kingdom of Guinea, wherein the Portugese's and Frenchmen have traffiked many years, and whither our Countrymen in these days do likewise travel, it bordureth on the kingdom of Meil●, and upon the river Niger, in length five hundred Italian miles, which are about one hundred Dutch miles: in this country the Portugese's hold a fort, being the castle of the Mine upon the golden coast. There is also the coast of Melegete, our country men that sailed thither this year, did first put in to the land between the Cape de las P●nas, and the Cape de tres Puntas, and found anchor ground at twenty fathoms water, and with their boat rowing on land, they came to a place, wherein stood man● houses, and a little fort placed upon a rock and many Moors about it, and t● 〈…〉 so played upon with shor, 〈…〉 unite off. This village 〈…〉 and the land 〈…〉 This sort is holden 〈…〉 b●● is not strong: before 〈…〉 about the length of two ●es 〈◊〉 ●nto the sea there lies ●1. cliffs, so that you must pass right between them 〈…〉 unto the ●ort, lying in a both 〈…〉. This castle lieth about three or four miles from the Cape de tres 〈…〉 not far from it being a hilly and 〈◊〉 country with many trees, some of 〈…〉 fathoms in compass: 〈…〉 village called 〈◊〉 〈…〉 and 〈…〉 〈…〉 with the 〈…〉 〈…〉 cloth or mo● 〈…〉 and tempe● 〈…〉 by south, towards 〈…〉 in two days could make ●t two degrees, so that they sailed each day one degree, although it was indifferent cold, by reason of the storms that sell, east north-east, and ease and by north towards the coast. Also such as will satie from the Cold havens to the cape de Lop● G● 〈◊〉 to 〈◊〉 Island, must keep 〈…〉 southward as possibly they may, 〈…〉 any wind, but hold as near a● they can, and yet all little enough, or else fall beneath the cape de Rio ● Gabain, that is, the river of Gabain or elsewhere, unless then the wind be full we●st, or that they have any 〈◊〉 out of the north, and so compassed into the south, otherwise it is not we● to be done, for that there are some that have been 5. or 6. weeks sailing thither. Here ye must note, that the nearer ye 〈◊〉 to the Equinoctial line, there you find 〈◊〉 southern winds: and when you 〈◊〉 the li●●●ou find the wind south & 〈…〉, and somewhat higher: 〈…〉 awise understand, that when 〈…〉 ●ng fishes, that then ye 〈…〉 of S. Thomas. 〈…〉 with the people of 〈…〉 with such as are not over 〈…〉 the Portugese's, which 〈…〉 them slaves, for 〈…〉: the country is 〈…〉 either knowing God 〈…〉, heathens, and idolaters, without government or any order, abundant in gold, elephants teeth, corn, Ethiopian pepper, rice, barley, cotton wool, and many kinds of fruits, whereof above a hundred sorts, both unknown & never written of were brought from thence unto me: besides this, there groweth all sorts of great beans, some on trees, in cods as big as a man's elbow, & a handful broad, others red and black like to the Turkish beans, but greater, some white & round, every one in a place by itself, like 〈◊〉 others round and small, as red as coral. with black strikes, like those that grow in Egypt, where I have ●●ne of them, and were called 〈◊〉 they are described by the learned doctor P●er A in 〈◊〉 book of Egyptian herbs. There at ●●wise others that are hard, 〈…〉 ●ted like marble 〈…〉, and birds are there abounds 〈…〉 peacocks, wild hens, gr●y 〈◊〉 〈◊〉, or 〈◊〉 small 〈…〉 very cunningly hang their nests upon the branches of the trees, whereof some were brought me thereby to preserve their eggs from worms and snakes. They have ●o self abundance of fish, so that to conclude, there wanteth nothing in those countries, but only the knowledge of the Gospel, thereby to bring them to the understanding of the word of God, and the pathway to salvation. The country is very hot, and intemperate for our country people, specially the●r sign, which is very hurtful, and breedeth much filth and worms, because it is warm and moist, and mother of ●ll corruption whereby springeth many diseases, as burning fevers, l●skes, the bloody th●●nd 〈◊〉 like. Sailing along the coast, they passed by the Island of 〈◊〉, and then under S. Thoma● line, so called, because it was first discovered upon S. Thomas day, the Island is in breadth about threescore Italian miles, which is twelve of our miles, and is in compass one hundred and four score miles, which are threescore Dutch miles, in form almost round, abounding 〈◊〉 sugar, and ginger, and all kind of 〈◊〉 alles, by rea● of the came and morones of the dews, which every morning ●a●r the earth, as a most sovereign thing ●o make such fruit increase and grow ●●. From 〈◊〉 southeast and by ●●st they came before 〈◊〉 or th● 〈…〉 〈◊〉 before the which river 〈…〉 three or four 〈…〉 dangerous 〈…〉 cometh out 〈…〉 with it, which make an extreme rough water: the river is above two miles broad, with many trees on both the sides, but there they found no man to traffic withal: whereupon they sailed further, as the wind served them, sometimes close by the shore, and sometime further into the sea, there the coast lieth north and south, and very shallow, so that at the least a mile or a mile and a half into the sea, there is not above twelve or thirteen fathoms water, and nearer within half a mile of the shore, four, five, six, or seven fathoms, but a man may go near unto the shore, because it is clear and fair ground to anchor in, and commonly in the night time they have the land wind from off the shore, which is called Vento 〈…〉 Terra, specially being near, a little further the coast reacheth somewhat more to the west, until you come to the cape of Lopes Gonsales, where th●y stayed certain days, to traffic with th● country people, but not much, because the French men had been there not long before, and spoiled the country, and during the time of their staying there, they observed many strange customs and manners of that people. First, concerning their religion, they know neither God nor his laws, for some of them pray to the sun & to the moon, some is certain trees, or to the earth, because th●y ●●●ad upon it, thinking it a great offence to ●ort ●hereon: they go most commonly in the streets with a great broad naked knife in their hands: they are all, both men and women pincked and razed on their bodies in divers manners, and very strong to behold, which they do with a knife, racing their skins, than they take a certain ointment mixed with some colour which they put into the races, they never drink, but first they pour some of the drink out of the pot: they drink not likewise between meals, but when they have eaten their meat, they drink a hearty draft of water, or of their palm tree wine, or else of water sodden with honey. In the morning, and at any other time of the day, when they meet any man, or reverence their ruler or governor in token of obedience, they fall upon their knees, and beat their hands together, where they kneel until he clappeth his hands, and sometimes they clap hands together one with the other, uttering these words, Fino, Fino Fino, wherewith they give each other leave to depart, and by the same they signify and show themselves to be friends. The country people are much addicted to steal from strangers but not from their own nation, and the women much given to lust and uncleanness, specially with strangers, which among them is no shame. There are some men that wear round bores about their necks made of barks, some great, some small, not much unlike the bores, which with us are used to be hanged in Inns and Taverns, to put money in for the poor: but they will by no means let any man see what is in them. For the most part both men and women go bare headed, with their hair frizeled and folded, yet very short, some wear hearts that commonly are made of barks of trees, or of Indian nuts, some wear plumes or feathers, which are made fast to their hair with certain wyars, whereof diverse sorts were brought me from thence▪ some have holes in their upper lips, and also through the middle part of their nose, and in the holes in their lips they thrust pieces of bone, as broad as a 〈◊〉 with a stalk that passeth through the hole, which being thrust in, hangeth both before his nose and his mouth, some thrust small horns or teeth through the holes and so wear them, all as they think▪ to beautify themselves, some bore a hole in their neither lips, and usually thrust their tongues through it, many of them both men and women wear Rings in their ears, whereof some are at the least seven or eight ounces in weight, and some have sticks thrust through their rings that are five or six fingers long. As touching their apparel, they have nothing but a mat made of the bark o● a tree died red, which they wear before their privy members over some of their mats: they wear Apes or sea cats skins, or the skins of some wild beasts, in the middle whereof there hangeth a bell, such as we hang about the necks of cows or sheep: they paint their bodies red, with a colour made of red wood, whereof (had some brought me from thence, it maketh a fair colour, and is somewhat lighter than b●astil, many times they make one 〈◊〉 red, the other white or yellow, with a strike or two of the same colour in their faces. Most of them wear a gerole or string about their middles of buffles skin with they hair upon it, which meeteth not together upon their bellies, by the breadth of a hand, but hath two ends sticking or turning up, and with a ver● small string are made fast about them: and before upon their bellies they wear a short broad Iron knife, with a sheath of the same metal: those girdles some of them are a handful broad, some two, some three, and some broader: besides these knives, they use throwing knives, with three or four points, being very dangerous, whereof I can show you.) The women wear great Iron, copper, or tin rings about their legs, some one, others two, and some more: many of them weighing at the least three or four pounds weight the piece, being almost close about their legs, whereby a man can hardly judge how they get them on: some men likewise use them, but not many. There are also some women that wear aprons before them made of Bresen, whereof I can show you. This shall suffice for the description of their apparel, and beautifying of their bodies, which is very strange and unseemly: no less disorder is there in their houses, for they live like beasts, and sleep on mats laid upon the ground. Their meat is made of great white roots, taken out of the earth, called Iniamos, very pleasant of taste, like the spanish Ba●at 〈…〉 or chestnuts. They are both roasted and sodden, with other roots, and sugar canes, and Bananas, which are a fruit of a tree, like the Indian figs, mentioned in this book, long like cucumbers, with a tart sweetish, but a pleasant taste: sometimes likewise they eat both fish & flesh, which they lay all in one vessel together, and so sit round about it like a company of beasts, and never drink, but after they have done eating. The governors eat alone out of a tin vessel, the rest out of a filthy earthen vessel, and sit upon a mat spread upon the ground. The most work that the women do, is to fetch water and fruit, and to dress the meat: they will by no means ease themselves upon the ground, esteeming that a great offence, but have great vessels made for the same purpose, which are set in the earth. They use no other weapons against their enemies, but only fists and traves: they that dwell by the mine, are better appointed with bows, arrows, pikes, and targets as long as a man, made of barks of trees, and such like things. Their Drums are broad above, and narrow below: they have likewise Cornets of Elophants teeth: of all these kinds of instruments and weapons, I had some brought from thence. Our men being in the River of Gaban came unto an Island, where they were carried on shore by a Moor, that had a great tooth sticking in his upper lip, with a broad knife in his hand, and all his body razed and pinked as I said before, where he brought them into a house among the Moors, wherein were certain coverlets, made of the rinds or barks of trees laid upon the earth, where they sat down, not making any choice, and being set, he clapped them on the shoulders, pointing upwards with his fingers, saying in his language, Ma●●bam, they not knowing what he meant, looked up, where they perceived a black man sat upon the top of a certain pair of Stairs, like an image, with many chains of bones and rings hanging about him, fearful to behold: at his feet lay certain black women, with Elephant's tails in their hands, to bear away the flies, and to make wind, whereby they understood him to be the Lord of the Island. Whereupon they kneeled upon one of their knees, honouring him according to the custom of the land, clapping their hands until the Ma●● or Lord made signs unto them, clapping his hands: which done, they rose up, the Ma●● giving them some of those mars made of barks as a princely present, of the which with their linen I can show you: others of the same ship taking their pinnace entered into another creak in the same River, about two miles higher, and there found a great village lying on the same river, so near, that they might throw a stone over the houses: and being within two ships length or the shore, they cast anchor on the shore there stood at least 1000 Moors, men, women, and children, whereof some had pikes, knives, and other weapons in th●ir hands, crying with loud voices, 〈◊〉 and other words, clapping their hands together, which to them was strange, both to hear and see. Not long after, a Moor that by them about four or five miles from thence, had been taken into their pinnace, stepped into the water, and went on shore, where being on land, the Moors, specially the women, hung about him, in such numbers, that he could hardly pass, singing and throwing grass upon him, that our men could neither hear nor see the man, never ceasing to sing and make a noise, but still continuing, dancing, leaping, and with their knives cutting off all the grass: mean time there came one out of the village, having a long staff in his hand, as ●f he were some officer, willing them to leave off their noise, driving th●m from the shore, but to no end 〈◊〉 reason of the great number of people that were there assembled, at the last the Moor that went out of the pinnace from our men, with one of their Canuyten, (for so they called their boats) came aboard, bringing two men and an old woman, that was one of the governors wives, having her breast painted green, and in each hand a branch of a tree, shaking both her hands, and the two men clapping with their hands, giving to understand (as our men conceived) according to their manner, that they were welcome: with them two of our men went on land, whereat the Moors made great joy, with singing, dancing, leaping, and such like pastimes, and going unto the governor, divers of them followed, specially the women, running both before and behind them, leaping and dancing like mad men, most of them having of the great broad knives in their hands, striking them together in most fearful manner: but it was no wonder to see them make so great joy, and show so much pastime, for that it was strange for them to see white men, which they never had seen, for that never any had been or traffiked among them: true it is that the Portugese's had been in the same River, but not so high, for our men were at the least ten or twelve miles from their ship within the River, and the River before that village called Crementun, was about a mile broad, having another village on the other side, and 〈◊〉 with their pinnace before that village, they shot off a piece, whereat all the people ●ne back, being afraid, but came presently again: and as our men went unto the governor, they led them by the arms, singing, and showing great signs of joy, for the coming of these white men into their country: and being at the governors house, which was made of reeds, they stayed about half an hour before he came out, mean time the people that followed them, never left singing & making anoyse● and when he came, there were three mats, and two stools, a great and a little brought with him, by certain Moors that followed him. All his body and his face was painted white, either with chalk or some other painting, a sack of whiting bring likewise brought after him. On his head he wore a cap made of a skin, stuck full of feathers, with chains made of bones above 100 times about his neck, arms, and legs, & being set upon his stool, there came an old woman, that gave him some of the whiting, wherewith he made as if he had washed his hands, the rest he threw upon his face, & with that he held up both his hands: mean time his wise had whiting given her, which done, she began to come forth of the house, singing and dancing, all the other women following her, & doing the like: with that the governor called the Moor that brought our men with him from the place aforesaid, saying unto him that our men were welcome, clapping his hands together, and saying Fuio, Fuio, according to their manner, and after many other words, he willed them to bring some Iron, saying they should have teeth for it, which having done, he brought forth his teeth. This river as I said is very broad and full of Crocodiles, and sea horses, it hath many creeks: and as they sailed from Crementun▪ it lieth Southeast, where in the night they lavered 2. or 3. hours, and came twice on ground, and ●● sailing forwards they passed by an Island, called Carace●●bo, lying in the mouth of the river, as there are many, being very low and flat land, and full of trees: From that Island there came a Ca●utien aboard their ship, and in it eighteen persons, and with them they had a small drum, of a hollow stock, whereon they played, and being by the ship, four or five of them stepped in, whereof one of them upon his face, breast, and arms, was all white, he bore a green branch of a tree, with a little bell, and some whiting in his hand, which he strewed about the ship, ringing the bell, & when they or any of our men spoke, he made show as it were to consecrate and bless the ship, which done, sirting down, and stammering in his words, like a man possessed with some spirit, or one that had a shaking fever. There was a great pot of Palm wine brought forth, whereof they drank one unto the other, which continued for the space of half an hour, which done, they went into their sc●te, & rowed to land, making signs to our men to come on shore, and to barter with them for their wares, which they did, carrying them some Iron and other merchandise, and went into the governors house being in a village, where among other things they saw a little cottage about three foot high, covered with straw, and open on the side, under the which stood a little gibbet, whereon hung a little horn, with certain stuff therein, which they would not let them see by no means, and under the gibbet stood a staff, with a dead child's skull fixed upon it, having in the one eye a bone, much like the bone that is found in the head of a ●addocke (whereof with us they make horses, bridles, and collars for degs, at the foot of the staff lay all sorts of bones, both of fishes and beasts: and among the rest, the ●awes of a Pris●● (which in our country is called a sword fish) without teeth, which the master took away, & brought it unto me: our men ask what that might signify, they said, there lay a dead carcase: and being in another village as they passed forward, they saw at the least twenty men sitting at the door of one of their houses, whereof some seemed to be of the principal commanders, and within that house there was a noise of singing, both by great and small, that it made them muse, whereupon they asked what it meant, they said there was one dead. The women being in travel, are not any thing ashamed, but every one, both young and old, men and women, run unto her, the door standing wide open: but one thing is to be wondered at, that the children are all circumcised, and yet they have neither law, order, nor knowledge of God. The country is fruitful, and full of all strange fruits, and abounding in all kinds of beasts, and birds of diverse forms, both great and small. There are some trees, where upon one branch there hang at the least 100 birds nests, altogether most pleasant to behold. They hang by certain straws made fast unto the boughs, because snakes should not creep in and suck their eggs: many of those nests were brought unto me. This shall suffice for the description of the coast of Guinea, after the which followeth the mighty kingdom of Congo. The ancient writers held opinion that this land was not inhabited, calling it Torri●●am Zonam, that is, a place in the earth, that through the heat of the sun is burnt up, but they were altogether deceived, for as Odoardus Lopez, a Portugal witnesseth, having with many other Portugese's long time inhabited therein. There is good dwelling, and the air, contrary to all men's judgements, very temperate, and that in winter there is no extreme cold, but only such weather as it is in harvest time at Rome. They use no linings nor shirt bands, nor change of clothes neither care they for the fire, it is likewise no colder on the tops of the hills, then in the valleys, but generally it is warmer with them in the winter then in the summer, only because of the continual rains, specially about the middle of the day, two hours before, and as much after dinner, which heat is very evil for our men to endure. The people of the country are black, but part of the women fear what ●●llow: their hair for the most part is black and curled, and some have red hair: they are of a mean stature, therein not much unlike the Portugese's, the balls of their eyes being of divers colours, black, and sea colour: their lips not so thick as those of N●b●a, & other Moors: their faces of all proportions, fat lean, and indifferent between both, like the Portugese's, and not like other Moors of Guinea, that are foul and deformed. The length of the day and night is in a ma●er all one, for that it differeth not one quarter of an hour to any man's judgement) throughout the whole year: their winter beginneth in our lent. about the middle of March, and their summer in the middle of September ● in winter it reigneth there continually, for the space of five months, that is, April, May, june, july, & August, in which time there are but few fair days, and there the rain falleth in such great drops, that it is wonderful, which water is all drunk up into the earth with the dryness of the land in summer time, wherein it raineth scarce once in six months: with the rain likewise the river is filled with thick muddy water, so that it floweth over the banks and moisteneth the ground. The winds that in summer do continually blow in those countries, are (as Hypocrates, and after him julius the first emperor of Rome, naming them with a greek name E●es●o●, Northwest, by the Portugese's called Ven●o Maestro or general wi●d, as being ordinary at that time of the year in all those countries, which are likewise causes of the rains, by driving up of mysts and vapours, upon the tops of the hills, which being there, and resolving into water, do fill the earth with rain, and those continual rains, are likewise causes of the growing and increasing of the great rivers that are in Egypt and Ethiopia as Niger and Nilus, and all the rivers there about, some running into the Mediterranean, others into the great Ocean seas, by reason of their slime & fattiness: and because in our sumer, (which is their winter for the most part it raineth throughout the countries of Congo and Ethiopia, it is not to be wondered at if the rivers be greater, and do overflow more than they are, in the further and very dry countries, for in Egypt (not accounting Alexandria with the places bordering on the same) where it never raineth, it is holden for a very strange & wonderful thing, how the river Ni● should gr●w so high, & full of thick muddy water, and always at one time of the year, not failing therein, thereby refreshing the earth, and giving food both to man and beast, whereby the ancient inhabitants of those countries, did use to offer sacrifices unto that River, calling it as Ptolomeus in his fourth book rehearseth a good Spirit, and yet at this day many Christians esteem it for a miracle, for that without the increase thereof, they would die for hunger: their lives ●as john Chrisostome saith) consisteth of the increasing of the waters, so then the Northwest winds, that in our summer time, which is their winter, blow in our countries, are the means in those countries, to gather clouds and moistures upon the high hills, from whence their rain proceedeth, which rain is the cause that their country is not so cold as ours, engendering in those hot countries a certain kind of warm water. Those rains than are likewise the cause of the growing & overflowing of the river Ni●us, and other rivers in those countries, whereof the inhabitants have devised and written to many fables. But in their summer, which is our winter, there bloweth contrary winds, as south, and southeast, which without all doubt are cold, as blowing from the contrary part of the Pole Antarctike, and cool those countries, as our winds do here in these countries, & like as with them they cause a fair & clear air, so with us they cause great store of rains, by a certain natural disposition of the heavens & the climates, ruled and governed by the high wisdom of God, that hath divided the heavens, & ordained the course of the sun and other planets, in such manner, that all parts of the earth by their light & brightness are filled with warmth and coldness, & therein do continue, with great proportion and equality: so that for certain, if the freshness and coldness of those winds did not refresh the countries of Ethiopia, Congo, and other places bordering on the same, it were impossible for the inhabitants to endure the heat. The same winds likewise do refresh and comfort the inhabitants of Grecia the Islands of Candia and Cipies, the countries of Asia Mynor, and those of Suria and Egypt, which live by the refreshing of those general Northwest & west winds, which rightly by the Grecians are called Zoephero, that is, bringing life, & those also are the cause that in Ethiopia, Congo, and other countries bordering thereon it never Snoweth, no, not upon the highest hills, unless it be further off, towards the Cape de Bona Speranza, or in some certain places, by the Portugese's called Snow hills, as in Congo they find neither Ice nor snow, which with them would be more esteemed than gold, therewith to cool their drink, so that the Rivers do not increase by the melting of snow, but only by means of the continual rain of five months, as I said before. But returning to our former matter, you may travel to Congo by two ways, one by the main sea, to S. Helena, and so further over, or along by the coast of Africa, to the Island of Saint Thomas, and so to the Cape of Lopes Gonzales, lying under one degree upon the South side of the Equinoctial line, about 21. Dutch miles from Saint Thomas Island, and from thence they sail with the wind (that cometh off the land,) along the coast, every evening casting anchor in some creak or haven until they arrive at the place where they desire to be. The kingdom of Congo beginneth at the Cape de S. Catharina, which lieth on the South side of the Equinoctial line, under two degrees and a half and passing along the coast, you sail by certain hills and strands, not worth the noting, till you come to two creeks, in form somewhat like a pair of spectacles, where there is a good haven called Baro D Alvaro Gonzales, that is, the creak or haven of Alvaro Gonzale●: not far from it runneth a little river into the sea, by reason of the redness thereof, by the Portugese's called Rio de ●as, Boreras, R●slas, because the water runneth over a certain red sand, that coloureth the water: at that place beginneth a high hill, called by the Portugese's la Sierra Complida, that is, a long hill: passing further, there is another river called ●a ●e ●as Almadias', which is as much to say, as the creak or haven for ships, because in that place many banks are made: in the mouth of this river there lieth three Islands, whereof the greatest is the middle being inhabited, wherein there is a haven for little ships, the other two are not inhabited. Parting from thence you come to the great river of Congo, called Za●e, taking his beginning or spring, partly from the same lake from whence the river Nilus doth flow. This river casteth forth so great abundance of water, that it is incredible, for that before it runneth into the sea it is at the least 5. miles & broad, & on the upper part it is fresh water, for 8 10. & 16 Dutch miles unto the red sea, whereby the pilots sailing over it, know what place they are in. Upwards into this river you may sail with great barks she length of fine miles, but not higher, by reason of the descending and fall thereof from a steep high ground, as the rivers of Nilus, Donow, and Rhein do in some places, which are called Catara●tas, that is, sheding or fall of waters, making so great a noise, that it may be heard a great way from it. In this river at the entry into the sea are many Islands, all inhabited, and very populous, that have divers governors, all subjects to the king of Congo. In tunes past those Islands made wars one against the other in certain scutes cut out of the body of a great tree, in their language called, Licondo, whereof some are so great, that six men cannot fathom them, with height and length correspondent, so that one of the greatest being cut in proportion of a scute, would hold two hundred men: Those scutes they row with oars, wherewith they make great speed, every man having an ore and a bow: and when they fight, they lay down the ore, and use their bow: and to steer and wind those scutes, they use no other rudder, than one of those oars. In this river there are many strange beasts, specially Crocodiles, that are very great, in their language called Carman, the sea horse, and another that seemeth to have hands, and a tail, like unto a Flask, which they call Ambize Angulo, that is, a sea hog, because it is as fat as a hog, it hath a good and savoury flesh, not like fish, although it be a fish which feedeth not of that which is in the river, but eateth the grass that groweth on the rivers side, and hath an head like an ore, whereof there are some that weigh five hundred pounds, the Fisher men that take them, are bound upon pain of death to bring them to the King. There you find an other hook of land called Cabo di Padran, and alittle from thence the river Lelunda, which cometh out of a small lake lying within the land, from whence more Rivers have their offspring, specially one called Coanza, whereof hereafter I will speak. This river Lelunda when it raineth not, is very dry, so that it may be passed over by foot, it runneth under the hill (whereon Congo the chief city doth stand) and from thence to the river of Ambrizi, which is a great river, with a haven, and runneth not far from the river of Congo into the sea: a little further you come to an other river called ●●ze, which hath no haven, and from thence to Onzo another river with a good haven, having her spring out of the same lake, from whence the river Nilus doth issue: and somewhat more to the south lieth the river Lemba, but it hath no haven, nor yet saileable. From thence you come to Damned, a very great river, wherein ships of two hundred tuns may sail: out of this river there runneth an arm or branch lying southward called Bengo, which with Coanza (another great river) make the Island of Loanda: both their streams meeting together, drive forth much filth and sand, which make the Island greater. Bengo is a great stream or river, which may be sailed up at the least five and twenty Italian miles, which are about five Dutch miles: and between these two Islands (as I said before) lieth the rich Island of Loanda, with the haven called by the name of, the Island Loanda, which is as much to lay, even or flat land, without hills. This Island is about four miles long, and somewhat less than a quarter of a mile broad, and in some places, not above a bow shoot broad, where there is a thing much to be wondered at, that when it is full sea, if one dig but two or three handfuls deep into the ground, they shall find fresh water, and digging in the same ground when it ebbeth, the water is salt and brackish. In this Island of Loanda are fished the Schulpekens, which in the kingdom of Congo, and other places borduring thereabouts are used for money, which fishing is done in this manner: There are certain women, that being on the sea side, go alittle way into the water, lading certain baskets with sand, which being filled, they carry them on land, & wash the sand from the Schulpkens, that are very small and in great numbers, by them esteemed of two sorts, some males, other females, which in show and colour are the fairest, and although many of them are found upon the strand or shore of the river of Congo, yet those of Loanda are the best, fairest, & most esteemed of, they are very shining, and of an ash colour, other colours are of no account: for those Schulplikens you may buy any kind of thing, whether it be gold, silver, or any kind of victuals, whereby you may perceive, that not only in the kingdom of Congo, and the countries about it, but also in other places of Africa, and in the kingdom of China, and some part of India, they have used other kinds of things in steed of money, as we use gold, silver, copper, and such like mixtures: for in Ethiopia they use pepper corns for money. In the kingdom of ●bu●o about the river Niger, Shu●penes, and Porcelleten▪ as also in China, and Ben ●alen, so that metal is not so much esteemed of in most parts of the world, as it is in Europa, and other places circumtacent. In this Island there are seven or eight villages by them called Libat●, whereof the principal is called the holy-ghost, wherein the governor is resident, being sent from Congo, where he administereth justice, and looketh sharply to the fishing of Schalpekens: There are many beasts, goats, and wild swine, for that the tame become wild, and run into the woods: also therein groweth a great and strange tree called Enlanda, being always green, of a strange form, specially in the branches that grow very high, and cast down certain small threads, which touching the earth do bring forth roots, from whence other plants or trees do spring forth most abundantly in great numbers: under the first rind or bark of this tree groweth a certain linen, which being beaten and made clean, and then stretched forth in breadth and length, it serveth to apparel the common people. In this Island also they use ships made of palm or Indian nut trees, the boards being peeced together, after the manner of the Portugal barks, wherein they use both sails and o●es, and with them they fish in all the rivers thereabout which are very full of fish, and with them likewise they row unto the firm land. On that side which reacheth towards the firm land: there are trees that grow in certain deep places, on the shore, upon the roots whereof the sea continually beateth, where groweth oysters as broad as a man's hand, very good to be eaten, and well known to that country people, which they call Ambiziamatare, which is to say, stone fish. The Island at one end is very near unto the firm land, and the channel is oftentimes swoome over by the country people, and in the same channel there are certain small Islands, which when it floweth are not seen, but when it ebbeth, they appear above the water, and being uncovered, they find the oysters lying at the roots of the trees, hare by the Island, on the outward part, swim many whales, that are black, and fight together, killing each other, whereof being fished, & taken up by the Moors, they make treane oil, with the which and with pitch together, they dress their ships: the mouth of the ●auen lieth in the north, in breadth above half an Italian mile, being very deep, and right over against it on the firm land lieth the village of S. Paul, not very strongly fortified, and inhabited by Portugese's, that are brought the thither with wife and children out of Portugal, all the channel is very full of fish, specially of Sardins and Ench●ones, which in winter time are there in so great abundance, that they leap upon the shore: also divers other good fishes, as soles, sturgeons, barbles, and great crevishes, which are very wholesome, and are there found in great numbers, whereby the common people do live. Satling further from Loanda, you come to the River called Coanza, which River with Bengo, and other Rivers aforesaid do make the Island of Loanda, so that Coanza also hath her offspring from a little lake, which maketh a River that floweth out of the same great lake, from whence Nilus and other Rivers have their issue, which Lake in this Card is called Zane or Zembre, of the ancient father's Tritoms Lanis, because therein (as it is said) Sea-gods, and Mermaids have been found. The entrance of the river of Coanza is about half a mile broad, & may be sailed up with a scute at the lest xx. miles against the stream, but it hath no special haven. Thereabout beginneth the kingdom of Angola, which in time past was under the obedience of the kings of Congo, but not long since, by means of a certain governor, it was taken from it, and made a government of itself, which holdeth himself as a friend, and not as a vassal to the king of Congo, yet many times he sendeth him certain presents in manner of a tribute. Fron Coanza passing forward you come to a hook of land called Capo Ledo, which having compassed about, you find other Rivers, the first is Songa, which may be sailed up xxv. Italian or five Dutch miles, the next Bengleli, where now one of the king of Angolas subjects is governor: than you come to a very good haven, fit and capable for all ships, called the creak of Kine, of some, the bank of Kine, because thereabout great numbers of kine do use to pasture, being a plain country, fruitful of grass, and all kinds of vutualles: & there many times is openly to be sold certain kinds of metal, specially silver, as Lopez and Pigafetta his interpreters do witness, from whence most part of this description is drawn and taken forth: and so far was the coast of the mighty kingdom of Congo usually accounted to be, where the Portugese's, in the first discovery of the country did ordinarily traffic, and beginneth under 4 degrees and ½ on the south side of the Equinoctial line, reaching till you come under 13. degrees, which are 630. Italian miles▪ that is, 126. Dutch miles, accounting five Italian miles to every Dutch mile: and although this country, as also all other, hath other sides, that lie both East, West, North, and South, yet this description of the West side (as far as it reacheth on the sea coasts) shall suffice for the necessary knowledge of those the sail along the African or Indian seas. But to make it some what better known, I will, in part, describe the fruitfulness thereof: which to understand you must know, that the whole kingdom of Congo is divided into sire principal provinces, which are called Bamba, Sogno, Sundi, Pango, Batta, and Pemba. Bamba is the greatest and the richest, it reacheth along the Sea coast from the river of Ambrizi, to the river of Coanza, having in it many Lords, whose names are needless to rehearse, for they are all called Mani, that is, Lord, as Mani Bamba, lord of Bamba, Mani Loanda, lord of Loanda, Mani Coanza, lord of Coanza. This province of Bamba is the key, shield and defence of the whole kingdom of Congo, from whence the king hath all his power & means to resist the enemy, for they withstand all rebellions of the places borduring about them: they have divers expert soldiers that are always in arms, helping and assisting the king in all his wars, and in the same province, if need require, he may have 400000. fight men, and according to the manner of the country at his commandment. The principal town of this province lieth in an even field, between the rivers of Loze and Ambrizi, and is called Panza, which is a common name to all their towns, where the governor lieth: it is distant from the sea about 100 Italian miles, which are 20. Dutch miles: in this province beginneth the hill, wherein are mines of silver, and of all other metals (reaching toward the kingdom of Angola) being very rich, and there on the strand they find the Schulphkens which they use for money, where likewise is the greatest trade for sale of slaves in all that country, being brought from Angola, which the Portugese's every year do buy of them by thousands, carrying them to sell again into divers far & different countries. The people of the country are very expert in arms. They bear long and broad rapiers, or two handed swordoes like the Slavonians, or Swissers, which are brought unto them by the Portugese's, & some of them are so strong, that with one blow they will strike a slave clean thorough the middle of the body into pieces: and further, there hath been so of them found that have borne the fourth part of a butt of wine (weighing about 325. li. upon their shoulders: besides those weapons, they have bows, wherein they be very expert, with long shields made of barks solded together, whereof I can show you. In this province of Bamba there be divers strange beasts as elephants, whereof there be many, by reason of the great abundance of woods, meadows, and streams, and be very great for that they grow half the time of their lives, which is 150. years. Those that have been found in Portugal, and here with us, are 〈◊〉, because they are young, & not come to the●● full growths: and to prove them to 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 great, it may be tried by the greatness and weight of some of the teeth that be brought from thence, for that there hath been 〈◊〉 found to be two hundred pounds 〈…〉, every pound four and twenty 〈◊〉. In Congo speech an elephants tooth is called Mene Manzo, and the young elephants are by them called Moana Manzo, their ears are as big as the greatest target that the Turks do bear, which are six spans long, in form like a Gys, and somewhat sharp towards the shoulder, and with the beating of their ears and tails, they drive away the flies, and likewise with the wrinkling and shrinking together of their skins they kill them. The hairs on their tails are very thick, black, and shining, the old having them much fairer than the young, and be more worth: their hairs are ●s●d by these country people, for neck laces, specially by the men and gentlewomen in the country of Angola, and the places borduring on the same, which are much esteemed and accounted of because they come from these kinds of beasts, as also for the fay renesse and strength of the hair, for that some of them are so strong that a man can not break them with his hands. Some of the country people venture their lives, to get them, which is in this manner: when the elephant passeth through so narrow away that he cannot turn himself, they leap out, or follow him, and with sharp knives cut off his hairs, which they sell, and are wreathed and folded in the manner and form of Rings and Laces, and so worn about thayr necks, arms, and fingers, thereof by whole tails, with th● th●●es they wear in those countries: and many rings of the same hair made by the ●es, you may see at D Paluda●● house: the ancient fathers had not the great knowledge of elephants, because they 〈◊〉, that they cannot bow their legs, & that 〈◊〉 step, standing upright against trees, by which means they writ them to be ta● but the experience of our country men, as also of the Portugese's, have found it to be otherwise, and th●t they have joints in their legs, and can bow them, lifting up their two ●egges against trees, to eat the ●arizes, as also stooping or kneeling down to the water, ●o drink thereof, of the which wants in their legs scan show you: what more 〈◊〉 the description of Elephants, seeing many author's have made mention of them, I esteem it needless to speak more thereof in this place. There are likewise 〈◊〉 of the same form and ●n, as 〈…〉 have been seen in 〈…〉 showeth a won● 〈…〉 beast, which is, 〈…〉 upon a white man, 〈…〉 that if a black and a 〈…〉 both together, they 〈…〉 black man, and not 〈…〉 ●ng hungry, they come a●●●●oure the catrel, although the hou●● 〈…〉 be never so near which they do●● 〈…〉 and no other kind of beasts 〈…〉 they spare not any kind 〈…〉 Co●● they are called Engo●, and are ●●uel beasts like Lions, but of an● colour and speckled: they are taken 〈…〉 being put into flesh and other 〈…〉 being hot with arrows 〈…〉 of the Tiger, is 〈…〉 extreme poison, which 〈…〉 procureth presit death. 〈…〉 ●●ke them are punished 〈…〉 their skins without the 〈…〉 ●une province hath another kind of 〈◊〉 called 〈◊〉, altogether 〈…〉 only differing herein, that 〈…〉 which the m●le doth not: this 〈◊〉 of a very strange hatre, for that 〈◊〉 ●he back down to the bellue it is all 〈◊〉 with thee colour's, white, black, and ●arke red, ea●●●ripe orderly follows the other, and th●●●ingers broad, as 〈…〉 the book printed at 〈…〉. Of these beasts 〈…〉 breed 〈◊〉 year there are 〈…〉, and ●de, and there● 〈…〉, whereby the Porting 〈…〉 s●●th, to say a man or other t●●●g is as swift as a Zebra, meaning thereby, as swift as possible may be, being tamed, they would serve in place of horses, both to ride upon, & to draw, as also in wars and other necessary affairs, so that herein a man may well see the great providence of God, that hath enriched all countries with necessary provisions, both of beasts and other things, as also with victuals: but because in all the kingdom of Congo there are no horses, and that they know not how to use them, many of them know how to make their orens ta'en, whereof they have great numbers, and setting saddles on their backs, with bridles in their mouths, they ride upon them also: in steed of beasts they use men, which are brought up to the same use, and stand in the streets ready to bear men, either in field beds, like the Indians in Palamkins or sitting upon stools or chairs, as you may see in the same book that was printed in Rome. Therefore such as desire to make great haste as we do in riding post) take divers slaves to bear them, and when one is weary, there changeth and taketh another, as we do horses, and by that means make speedy tourmes. There are likewise many other beasts, s●me as great as an ore, some less, by them called Empalanga, many wild buffles and wolves, that are good of smell. and love oil, which they suck out of the Palm trees, fores, hearts, hinds, goats, comes, and hares in great abundance, for that they are neither hunted nor killed. There likewise are many musk Cats by them made tame, whereby to get the musk, which they delight in. Snakes and adders in those countries are of a strange form, in respect of ours, and very great, for there are some that are at the least 25. palms long, and five in breadth, with their bellies & mouths so great, that they will devour a hart or any other beast of the same bigness: they feed upon the land, and in the water, using both the elements, & having filled their bellies, they do oftentimes lie in some dark place to sleep, and so are killed, and by the country people eaten, esteeming them as dainty a meat as we do hens and capons. There are many venomous adders, which if they bite a man, he dieth within four and twenty hours after at the furthest. There are other beasts as big as a Rans Owl, like Dragons, having wings and a tail, with a long mouth and many teeth, they eat raw flesh, they are of colour blue and green, and with a painted skin, and two feet: some of the Moors pray unto them. There are likewise many Chameleons, as great as a horseleech, with a high back, and four feet, changing into all colours. Birds there are of divers sorts, as Indian hens, Peacocks, geese, ducks, wild and tame partridges, fezants, pigins, and turtle doves, in great abundance, also Eagles, Falcons, Hawks, pelicans, and such like birds: besides all these, there are divers parrots, both green, and grey, and very red, by them called Framenghi, with an innumerable number of small birds, singing as pleasantly as Canare birds. The second province of Congo called Songo, lieth about the River of Zaire and Loango, and reacheth to the River Ambrizi towards the North, under seven degrees and a half, and endeth at the red stone Rocks, which lie upon the borders of the kingdom of Loango, in the middle of that province. There is a town called Songo, wherein the governor dwelleth, and of the same town the province taketh the name: In this province are many Eelphants, where they use to exchange their teeth for Iron, likewise apes and monkeys, both great and little, of divers kinds, whereof many are very pleasant and loving, good to pass the tune withal, doing whatsoever they see any man do: in this province they make much linen of the Indian Palm trees, wherewith they have great traffic, whereof I have many sorts: they are rich of kine, and of other beasts aforesaid: for Religion they are heathens, and pray to what thing soever they will, they esteem the sun as husband, and for the greatest God, and the Moon as wife, for the second God. Their apparel is like those of Congo, and have war with their neighbours, the people of Anzicana. Sundi the third province is the first, & as it were a part of the kings own inheritance, and therefore it is ruled by the king's eldest son, or a Prince of the blood royal, that is next heir unto the crown: it lieth about the City of Congo, by the portingals called S. Saluato●, and reacheth from thence about forty Italian miles, or eight Dutch miles, to the River of Zaire. The people of that country as also of Pango, deal much with salt and coloured linen, by the Portugese's brought out of India, using schelpkens for their money, for the which wares they barter linen made of Palm trees, Elephants teeth, sables, Martyrs, and some girdles made of the leaves of Palm trees, much esteemed of in those countries, whereof I can show you: in this province there groweth much Crystal, and many kinds of metals, yet they esteem of iron more than of all others metals, saying that other metals are unprofitable & of iron they ma●e knives, swords, and other weapons, with such like instruments, necessary for the use of man. Pango the fourth province, was in time past a free kingdom, ruled and governed of itself, on the North side reaching towards Sundry on the South side to Batta, on the West, to the country of Congo, and on the East to the Sun hills. The chiefest town is called Pango, and lieth on the West side of the River Barbela, which issueth out of the great lake from whence Nilus floweth, their traffic is like those of Sundi. Batta the fift province, on the North side joineth to Pango, and on the East to the River Barbela, and so to the sun hills, and to the foot of the Saltpetre hills, and of the South side of the same hills. it reacheth to Barbela till you come to the burnt hill. The chief town is called Batta, where the governor is resident, which governor is allowed to have musket and caliver shot, because that Eastward, beyond the sun & Saltpetre hills, on the East and West side of the river Nilus, there dwelleth certain people▪ of the Congoers, called G●aquas, and in their own country Agag, very fierce and cruel, and much given to fight, & to steal, whose ordinary incursions into the countries about them, and also into Batta, maketh them necessarily to stand upon their guard, & so to defend themselves. This province can raise 70. or 80. thousand men well armed: from thence are brought many Sables and Flumen, the rest of their traffic is like these at Pango and Sundi. In Peniba being the sixth province, ●●th the chief City 〈◊〉, in times past called Banza, that is the head, and now by the Portugese's S. Sa●tor it lieth on a hill within the land, distant from the sea 1ST. Italian miles, or thirty Dutch m●les 〈◊〉 hill very great and high, and most 〈◊〉, yet it yieldeth iron, being about two Dutch miles in compass, all built with man ●lages and houses, where there are about 100 thousand men. This hill is very fruitful, by reason of the fresh air, which is very clear and sound: it yieldeth much good water, which never hurteth in● is rich of grass and all kinds of beasts, and fruitful trees, which are always green, abundant in all sorts of grain that are used in those countries, specially of one sort, called Luco. which is holden and esteemed for the best and principal kind of grain, as our wheat, but smaller like mustardseed, and somewhat greater, which they grind in handmilles, whereof they make a very white flower, making bread that is both wholesome and of a good savour, and not much unlike our bread made of wheat: of this grain they have great store in Congo, which not long since was first brought thither from the river Nilus, specially from that place where Nilus fills the second lake. There is also much barley, called Mazza di Congo, that is, grain of Congo, and also great quantity of Maiz, that is, Turkish wheat, which is there but little esteemed, and by their country people called Mazza Manprito, that is, grain of Portugal, wherewith they fatten their hogs: of rice they have great plenty, but nothing worth. This country is likewise full of divers sorts of fruitful trees, so that the common sort of people for the most part do nourish themselves therewith, as citrons, lemons, and specially very pleasant oranges, neither sweet nor sour, but indifferent, between both: there are likewise many Bananes, which some think to be the fruit that in Syria and Egypt are called Mase, and in this Book Indian Figs, they are very pleasant and savoury fruit, of a sweet and sowerish taste, being a good sustenance for the country: in the fat land there groweth many sorts of palm trees, as the Indian Nuts, and such as bring forth Dates, & some greater, and other sorts of Palm trees, whereof they make oil, wine, vinegar, fruit, and bread: they press the oil out of the fruit as the Spaniards do olives, which for colour and substance is like our butter, but green and somewhat yellow, which they use in steed of oil and butter, and burn it in lamps: they likewise anoint their bodies therewith: to conclude, it is good to eat in tune of need, as it happened to our men, that without this oil had died for hunger. Of the same oil brought from thence, together with the wine and vinegar of the same palm trees, I can show you: the wine they draw out of the top of the tree, which being bored, there issueth a certain juice like milk, being cold and fresh to drink: the first that cometh forth is sweet and very pleasant, next issueth sour, and the last is vinegar, which may be used in salads, but being drink when it is fresh and new, it maketh the water to avoid, whereby in those country's men are little troubled with the stone, and drinking much, it maketh them drunk, and fasseneth well. The bread they make of the stones of this fruit, which in form are like almonds, but much harder: within those stones are certain kernels very pleasant to eat, increasing sound and good flesh: this fruit both inwardly and outwardly is green, and is eaten both raw and sodden. There are other trees that bring forth a certain fruit called Cola, as great as a pine apple, within it having an other kind of fruit like chestnuts, wherein are four red or carnation holes, which they hold in their mouths, sucking and chawing them, thereby to quench their thirst. This fruit put into water, maketh it sour, and of a good taste, they strengthen the stomach, and are passing good for an evil liver, other sorts of wild Palm trees are likewise found there, which yield much frui●, to be eaten, the leaves serving to make mais, to cover houses, and to make baskets or other necessary household stuff, whereof I have many sorts. There are likewise other trees called Ogbeghe, which bring forth fruit, in form like yellow plumbs, pleasant both in smell and taste, from these trees they cut certain branches, which they plant or set close together, making them fast each to other, as we do Boar or Thorns, therewith making senses for their houses, which branches growing up they make likewise galleries and arbours, therein to keep them from the heat of the Sun. Besides all the fruits aforesaid, there are many other sorts, very good for physic, as also to eat, specially Tamarinde of a very tart and pleasant taste, and very good against burning fevers. The Moors and Turks traveling by land, take the rind of tamarind with them, and mixing it with water, drink it, to cool the inward heat, specially the liver & kidneys, thereby also to make them laxative, as also Cassia Fistula, which is there very plentiful, also Citrons, Melons, Pompions, Cucumbers, and all other sorts of fruits that grow out of the earth. Such as desire a larger discourse touching the same, let them read Odoardus▪ Congo translated by master Abraham Hartwel, and Printed in London. Lopez, translated by Piga●etta, and printed in Rome, from whence I have gathered the most part hereof: and although the houses in Congo are small and low, yet there wanteth no substance to build withal, specially Stones, for there are great store, whereof may be made whose Pillars, and four square pieces of fine red Marble stone, and there are such great pieces, that a whole Church might be hewed out of one of them. Besides this marble, there are hills of jasper, porphier, or red marble, nured with white and other colours, which in Rome is called marble of Numidia, Africa, and Ethiopia, whereof many pillars are to be seen in Rome. There is likewise found many grained stones, among the which there are that are mixed with jacinths, which may be taken forth and separated from the other stones wherein they grow: of those may likewise pillars and other works be made, wherein might be seen divers sorts of stones. There are also other strange stones mixed with metal, of diverse colours, as copper, in show green and shining, whereof they may make Images, and other princely works, so that want of substance to build withal is not the cause of their small houses, for neither stone, chalk, wood, nor beasts to draw or carry them is wanting, only, they have no masons, carpenters, nor brickelayers, that should make th●ir houses, so that they dwell in little cottages. Hear might be declared, how this kingdom in the discovery of the East Indies being in the year 1490. and 1491. was by the Portugese's brought unto the Christian faith: also how shamefully the country was left when gold began to fail, I mean not by the decaying or diminishing of the gold, but because the King of Congo was persuaded by a Portugal, not to discover the mine, as also not mentioning the evil government of the Bishops, Priests, Moonkes, and Friars, that were sent thither, as being sufficiently declared by Odoardus Lopez in his description thereof, showing that they desired not the health and salvations of men's souls, but rather glory and rule, and to satisfy their insatiable lusts and greediness after gold.) Yet not long since the King of Congo now living, hath twice sent his ambassadors to the King of Spain & the Pope of Rome, friendly & heartily desiring them, to send certain preachers and teachers of the word of God, to instruct his subjects, withal, offering to discover the rich mines of gold that are within his country, thereby to win them to bring preachers to instruct his country: but christendom hath other matters in hand, as to hang, suppress, pursue, and destroy their christian brethren, which being beyond my profession, is not for me to deal in. But returning to the further description of the coast of Angola, to the great cape de Bona Speranza: first as touching Angola, it is by report) very populous, and abundant in silver, copper, and other metal, rich of all kinds of beasts and victuals, specially kine, yet the people rather eat dogs flesh, which they buy and pay dearer for it, than for any other flesh: their money is schulpens like theirs in Congo, and are like in speech, yet different in some words, as Spanish and Portugal: their king is an idolater or a Heathen. They have as many wives as they will, whereby they have such abundance of people, that Angola alone can make a million of armed men, all ready to serve their governors in the wars. They use many glass beads brought out of Venice, being of diverse colours, which they wear for an ornament about their necks and arms, in their speech they do call them Anzoles, and being hanged on strings, Mizanga. Having passed the kingdom of Angola, and the shore of Kine called Seno delle Vache, southward to the black cape, or Out hook, the coast stretcheth about 220. Italian miles. This coast is all one land, like Angola, and is under the government of many lords: and from this black cape reacheth a line Eastward, parting the hills called the cold hills, which also in some high places nearer to the Equinoctial line, are by the Portugese's called the Snow hills, which end at the foot of the Crystal hill, taking her name from the great abundance of crystal found therein: out of those Snow hills the waters that make the lake have their beginning, by the Portugese's called Dumbea, Zocche, and this crystal hill stretcheth further into the north toward the silver hills, as far as Malomba, where the kingdom of C●ngo endeth, being divided by the river of Coari. Coasting along the shore from the kingdom of Angola, to the cape de Bona Speranza, you must pass by the kingdom of Climbeb●, wherein raineth king Matama: this country reacheth to the river of Bavaghul springing out of the hill called Luna or the Moon, and both together running into the river Magnice, which floweth out of the lake aforesaid: behind this lieth Tropicus Cancri, and between this Tropicus Cancri and the cape de Bona Speranza, there reigneth no king, but diverse several Lords. This land is compassed by high, sharp, and cold habited hills: the people that are there live in the fields, like labourers in cottages, appareled in beasts skins, wild rough people, and not to be credited, not enduring or permitting any traffic with strangers. Their weapons are darts and arrows: their meat fruits of the earth, and flesh of beasts. The ancient Writers thought the river Ni●u● to have her off spring in the hills of the Moon, so that many to this day are likewise of the same opinion. In this hill towards the west lieth a small lake called Gale, out of the which lake floweth the River Camilla, by the Portugese's called the fresh river, which about the end of the false cape de Bona Speranza runs into the sea. This Hook is called the false or unright Cape, because the ships that sail from India to Portugal, do first discover a great corner or hook of land called De●li Agu●●ie, and after that this smaller hook, and therefore call it the Faise Cape, being separated from the right and great Cape. The space between these two Hooks or Capes is 20 Dutch miles, which bearing out like two horns, make an intercourse or gulf where the Portugese's at times take in water out of the fresh river aforesaid: and the people dwelling about this river are black (although the pole antarctic is there at 35 degrees as also those that dwell in the cold hills of the Moon, so that it is not the heat of the Sun, but the nature of the Country that maketh them black. And because this is the greatest hook or cape, and that reacheth furthest into the sea of any Cape whatsoever in all the world, and very dangerous to pass (as all other Capes are) as also because that in this place the sea makes a most fearful noise, & that the land winds coming down, make the sea thereabouts most rough and troublesome, whereby so many Portugal ships have there been cast away: and because by ancient Historiographers so little hath been said thereof, before and since the Portugese's discovered the same, & think it good in this place to set down, the measure and certain knowledge of the greatness of the Portugese's voyage towards the Indies▪ for that there are about 6000. Italian miles to sail before you come to compass this great cape, for that from the river of Fernando Poo where the head first beginneth to iut into the sea, to the furthest point, which (as I said) is called Delli Aguglie, that is, the needles, the coast from north to south is accounted 2200. Italian miles, and on the other side of the same hook or corner, to the point or cape Guarda fu●, lying over against the Island Socotora, the coast from south to north is accounted 3300. Italian miles, whereof 1000 Italian miles make 200. Dutch miles, and is 660. Dutch miles, so that from Lisbon sailing about the coast of Africa, & the cape de Bona Speranza to the kingdom of Goa, are about 15000. Italian miles, and thence to Malacca, & China, is as much again: so that not any people in the world did ever make so dangerous a voyage, as the Portugese's have done, except within these few years, certain English gentlemen, that not only have performed this voyage, but have sailed round about the world. This head is called the cape de Bona Speranza, that is, head of good Hope, for that all the ships that sail to India. or from India to Portugal, do fear the passing of this cape, thinking if they pass it, to have passed all danger. Now to return to our matter touching the coast of Africa, having passed the cape delli Aguglie, there are divers good havens for ships to harbour in, first Seno Formoso, & il Seno del Lago, because in that place the sea makes a gulf or entrance, wherein are certain islands and havens: alitle further the river called S. Christofer runs into the sea, in the mouth whereof lieth three islands: and somewhat further there comes a river out of the land (which the Portinga●e● call ●eria della Nativita, that is, the land of Christ's birth, because it was discovered on the same day) down to the cape de la Pescheria, between this cape & the river M●gnice, lieth the kingdom of Burtua, which reacheth to the hills of the Moon, and so to this river towards the north, where the country of Monomo●ap● lieth, and on the west side to the river Bavagul. In this country are many gold veins, the people being altogether like the men of Monometapa: & passing in this manner by the coast, you see the river of Magnice, by the which gins the kingdom of Sofala, & the country of Menomotapa. This river springeth out of the same lake where Nilus issueth forth, & runneth into the sea, in the middle of the entrance between two corners of land, one called Della Pescheria, the other Delli Correnti, lying under 23. degrees ½ on the south side of the pole, under Tropicus Caneri. Into this river not far from the sea, run three other rivers, whereof one is called S. Christopher, and by the inhabitants of the country called Nagoa: the second hath her name of a particular man called Lorenzo Marcho●, (because he found it first) and in that country Toroa: these two issue out of the hills of the Moon: the third is called A●r●e springing out of the other side of the hills, by the gold mines of Moon motapa: in some places of this river they find gold as small as sand. These three rivers, together with the river of Magnice running into the sea, cast forth great abundance of water, and from the mouth of these three Rivers stretcheth the kingdom of Sosala, to the river of Cuania, which hath received her name from a Castle of the same name, inhabited by mahometans. This river of Cuama divideth itself into seven parts, besides the channel that floweth upwards, all inhabited and very populous, and floweth out of the same river from whence Nilus doth issue: so the kingdom of Sofala lieth between these two rivers Magnice and Cuama on the sea side, yet very small, having but few towns or villages, whereof the principal city is Sofala, lying in an Island of the same river, giving the name to the whole country inhabited by mahometans, their King being of that sect, but subject to the King of Portugal, only because they will not be under the obedience of Monomotapa. In the mouth of this river Cuama, the Portugese's have a fort, where there is much traffic for gold, ivory and amber, which is found by the slaves upon the coast, bartering the same for linen made of cotton, and for silk, brought from Cambaia. The people as now inhabiting therein, were not borne in that country, but before the Portugese's discovered the land, they came out of Arabia Felix, with small barks to traffic there: and being once brought in subjection by the Portugese's, do now inhabit and dwell there, being neither Turks nor heathens. In the inward part of the country between those two rivers beginneth the kingdom of Monomotapa, wherein are many gold mines, which is carried into all the places round about, as well to Sofala, as throughout Africa, some being of opinion, that out of this country Solomon caused gold and ivory to be brought into jerusalem, which seemeth not unlikely, for that in this Kingdom of Monomotapa, were found many old and princely buildings, very costly, both for timber, stone, chalk, and wood, which in the countries about it are not found. The government of Monomotapa is very great, and reacheth over many warlike people, all Heathens and Pagans, black, of a middle stature, and very swift: in the which government are many kings that are subject to the same, and do often rebel: their weapons are darts and light targets. This Emperor holdeth many armies in several provinces, divided into legions, after the manner of the Romans, thereby to defend his great country, and to maintain his estate: amongst his men of war the legion of women is the best, which are greatly esteemed of by the King, wherein consisteth his greatest power. These women do burn their breasts, because they should not hinder them in shooting, like the Amazons, whereof the ancient Historiographers make mention: these women are very swift, expert, and cunning in shooting out of their bows. In their fight they use a certain subtlety, which is, that seeming to run away and flee from their enemies, as being scattered, upon the sudden return again, and do their enemy great mischief, especially when they think to have gotten the victory, and by that subtlety are overthrown. These women have places appointed them to dwell in by themselves, and at certain times have the company of men, that they may have children, which if they be boys, they send unto their fathers, if daughters, they keep them. The country of Monomotapa is in manner of an Island, form in that order by the sea, the river of Magnice, and a part of the lake from whence the river springeth, together with the river Cuam●, borduring on the south upon the Lords of the cape de Buona Spera●za, and on the north upon the kingdom of Monemugi. Sailing along the coast by the river of Cuama, you come to a small kingdom liing upon the sea side called Angoscia, taking the name from certain Islands that bear the same name, lying right against it, inhabited by mahometans and Heathens, which in small ships do traffic, and deal in such wares as those of Sofala use. And sailing further, you discover the kingdom of Mosambique, lying under fourteen degrees and a half, whereof I have sufficient spoken heretofore, as also of the Island lying behind it called Quiloa, and the great Island of S. Laurence, making the channel, which in the entrance towards the west is three hundred and forty Italian miles broad, and in the middle towards Mosambique, where it is narrowest a hundred and seventy miles, keeping that breadth all along the coasts towards India, containing many Islands. The ships that sail from Spain into India, and from India into Spain, do commonly keep their course through this channel, unless they be otherwise compelled by the wind: and surely this Island deserveth to have better people than it hath inhabiting therein, because of the situation, having many good and safe havens, together with fair rivers, & sweet fresh waters, which cause the land to bring forth divers kinds of fruits and spices, as beans, pease, rice and corn, oranges, lemons and citrons, and all sorts of flesh, tame and wild hens, swine and hearts of very good and sweet flesh, by reason of the fertility, and excellent good fish. The inhabitants are heathens, and some of Mahomet's sect, of a fair colour, much given to war, and to their weapons, specially bows and wooden halberts. This Island is divided into four governments, each fight against other. Therein are many mines of gold, silver, copper, iron, and other metals: but the wild people use not to traffic out of their own country, but only sail in small scutes (cut out of trees) from one place of the Island to the other, for the most part not suffering any traffic in their Island with strangers: yet the Portugese's at this time traffic in some of their havens, but go not on land, and from thence bring ambergris, ware, silver, copper, rice, and divers other wares. In this channel between the firm land of Africa and this Island, there lieth many both great and small Islands, all inhabited by mahometans, among the which the chief is S. Christofer, than the Holyghost, another called Magliaglie, as also Comoro, Anzoame, Maiotto and such like. Returning again unto the coast, and having passed Quiloa, you see the kingdom of Mombaza, lying under three degrees and a half on the south side, taking the name from a certain Island, so called, wherein lieth a fair town, with many goodly buildings, beautiffied with divers Images and figures, the king being a Mahometan, who withstanding the Portugese's, speed like those of Quiloa, taking it by force, where they found much gold, silver, pearls, cotton, linen, silks and cloth of gold, with other sorts of merchandises. This Island bordureth on Quiloa, and Melinde, inhabited by heathens and mahometans, and subject to the king of Monemugi. Sailing further, you come to the kingdom of Melinde, which is likewise very small, stretching along the sea coast till you come to the river Chimamchi lying under two degrees and a half, and upwards by the river it runneth to a lake called Calais, about a hundred Italian miles, or twenty Dutch miles: In this country about the sea side there is a very great town, most inhabited by white people, all heathens and mahometans: their houses are built almost like the houses in Portugal: their sheep are almost as big again as those in Portugal, with tails, which are accounted for a quarter of mutton, weighing at the least five and twenty or thirty pound. The women are white, and dress themselves after the manner of Arabia, very proudly, and in great pomp, all in silks, wearing about their necks, arms, and legs, jewels, rings, and bracelets of gold, going with their faces covered, like the Egyptian women, not being seen or known, but when it pleaseth them: in this town there is a good haven for ships to lie in, and for the most part, the people are friendly, upright in word and deed, holding good friendship with strangers, specially with the Portugese's, giving them much credit, and never hurting them. Between the two. heads of Mombaza, and Melinde there lieth three Islands, the first called Momsie, the second Zanzibar, and the third P●mba, all inhabited by mahometans, white of colour, very rich and abundant in wealth, but not used to the wars, only to till th'earth. In those Islands is much sugar, which is by them brought in boats unto the firm land, with other fruits of those Islands within the firm land. Beyond those three kingdoms of Quiloa, Melinde, and Mumbaza, lieth the great and large kingdom of Monemugi, which on the south lieth upon the kingdom of Molambique, by the river of Co●uo, and on the west upon the river Nilus, between the two lakes, on the north upon the Land of P●es●e● lolin it liveth peaceably with the 3. kingdoms aforesaid, traffiking with them for cotton, linen, which is brought thither out of Cambaia, which such like wares, brought out of India, which they barter for gold, silver, copper, and ivory, but on the other side towards Monomotapa, it hath continual wars, and that so cruel and bloody, that it can hardly be known who hath the victory, because in that place there meeteth two mighty people, and those that are most expert in arms throughout all Africa, for those of Monomotapa, the women called Amazon, whereof I spoke before: and for Monemugi, the people (by those of Mencongi) called Giachi, but in their own speech Agagi, which in time passed used much to invade the kingdom of Congo, nothing incomparable for strength, and agility to the Amazons. This people have a custom, with hot irons to burn their faces, especially their upper lips., and so make striketh and lines in them: also they turn their eye lids upwards and round about. They are black with shining skins. The white of their eyes being of so swart a colour, that by their faces they seem to be strange and cruel monsters: they are il favoured, & great bodies, living in the fields like beasts, & eat man's flesh. In war they are most courageous, setting most fiercely upon their enemy: their arms are darts, wherein they are most cunning. Coming again unto the Coast, & having past the kingdom of Melinde, to the Cape de Guarda fuy, there are many other places inhabited by white mahometans, where there are some good havens, whither divers strange ships and Merchants with their wares do ordinarily resort, whereof the chief is Pate, the second Brava, the third Magadoxo, the fourth Amffion, and behind that reacheth the broad and wide head or Cape of Guarda Fuy, which because of the greatness, issueth far into the sea, is known by many ships coming out of India, Arabia, Ormus, & other places. And about this Cape the Portugese's do yearly watch for the Turkish ships, which sail with many costly wares, not having licence of them, & they are boarded and spoiled of their wares by the Portugese's, presuming themselves to be lords of all the traffic in those countries, not permitting any other to traffic therein but only themselves, or by their licence. Having sailed about this Cape de Guarda Fuy, and setting your course towards the red Sea, there are other towns and havens, inhabited by the mahometans, the first called Meth, the other being somewhat further Barbora, and there are the last white people: from thence you find all black people, and beyond that you come to Ceila, Dalaca, Malaca, & Carachin, which coast in their speech is called Baragiam being all Moors, and expert in arms, their apparel from the middle upward being of cotton linen. The chief governors or nobles wear Cappoten, which they call Bermissi, this country is rich of gold, ivory, metal, and all kind of victuals. From thence you come to the mouth of the red sea, wherein lieth an Island called Babelmandel, on both sides whereof there runneth a channel into the red sea, whereof the West side is almost fifteen Italian, that is, three Dutch miles broad, through the which all the ships do pass both in and out: the channel lying on the other side, is shallow, and full of sands and cliffs, so that in all it is about six Dutch miles broad, whereof the one point lying in the African shore, is called Raibel, and the other lying in the country of Arabia Felix, is called Ara, whereabouts also is the haven of the rich town of Aden in Arabia, already spoken of in this book. This water runneth inward unto Swes, being about 1200. Italian miles in length, on both sides altogether dry and very shallow, full of Islands, deep only in the middle, where the ships do ordinarily sail, which is only by the great & swift course of the water, which scouring the channel, keepeth it clean and deep, casting up the sand on both sides. Now to say something of Prester john, being the greatest and the mightiest prince in all Africa, his country beginneth from the entrance into the red sea, and reacheth to the Island of Siene, lying under Tropicus Cancri, excepting the coast of the same sea, which the Turk within these fifty years hath taken from him, so that his government towards the Northwest and East, lieth most part by the red sea, and North-east, upon Egypt, and the deserts of Nubia, and on the South side upon Monomugi, so that to set down the greatness of all the countries which this Christian king hath under his commandment, they are in compass 4000 Italian miles. The chief City whereof, and wherein he is most resident is called Belmalechi, his government is over many countries and kingdoms that are rich and abundant, in gold, silver, and precious stones, and all sorts of metals, his people are of divers colours, white, black, and between both, of a good stature and proportion. The noblemen and gentlemen of the country, apparel themselves in silk, Embroidered with gold and other such like. In this country they observe laws for wearing of apparel by degrees, as they do in Portugal, for that some are not permitted to wear any other apparel but Leather: the people are Christians, but hold certain ceremonies of the jewish law, and upon the day of the conception of the virgin Mary, all the kings and Princes under his obedience, do come unto the said town of Belmalechi, there to celebrate the feast, every man bringing with him such treasure or yearly tribute as he is bound to pay, and at the same feast the people come thither in pilgrimage to honour it, whereupon that day there is a great procession, and out of the church from whence they come, they bring an Image of the virgin Mary, in form like a man, of Massy gold, and where the eyes should be, it hath two great rubies, the rest of the whole Image being wrought with excellent workmanship, and set with many precious stones, laying it on a beer of gold very cunningly wrought. At this procession Prester john himself is personally present, either sitting in a Chariot of gold, or riding on an Elephant, most richly trapped, himself appareled in most strange and costly cloth of gold, all embroidered and set with pearls and stones most sumptuous to behold: to see this feast and Image the people run in so great troops, that by reason of the press, many are thrust to death. This Emperor Prestor john is not rightly named, for that his name is Belgian, Bel signifying the highest, perfectest, and excellentest of all things, and Gian Lord, or Prince, which is proper to all that command or govern over others: so than Belgian signifieth the chief or highest Prince, which name being so joined, is proper to none but to the king, having also a surname of David, as our Emperors the name of Caesar or Augustus. Here I must alittle discourse of the river Nilus, which hath not her issue in Belgians land, neither from the hills of the Moon, nor as Ptolomeus saith, from the two lakes which he placeth in the middle between east and west, with the distance of almost four hundred and fifty Italian miles one from the other, for that under the same pole where in Ptolomeus placeth the said two lakes, lieth the two kingdoms of Congo and Angola, towards the west, and on the other side towards the east the kingdom of Monomotapa and Sofala, with distance from the one sea to the other of about twelve hundred Italian miles: and Odoardus saith, that in these countries there is but one lake, which lieth on the bordures of Angola, and Monomotapa, which is in bigness about a hundred ninety five Italian miles: of the which lake we are well assured, and truly certified by those of Angola, but on the east side of Sofala and Monomotapa, there is no mention made of any other lake, whereby it may be said, that under the same degrees there is no other lake. True it is that there are yet two other lakes, but they lie clean contrary to those whereof Ptolomeus writeth, for he (as I said before) placeth his lakes right in the middle between east and west, and those whereof I speak, lie right by direct line between north and south, distant about four hundred miles. Some men in those countries are of opinion, that Nilus springeth out of the first lake, and then again hideth itself under the earth, and issue out again in another place, which some men deny, and Odoardus saith that right the opinion therein is, that Nilus passeth not under the earth, but that it runneth through certain fearful and desert valleys, where no man cometh or inhabiteth, (without any certain channel) and so it is said that it runneth under the earth. Therefore it is most certain that Nyl● floweth out of the first sake, which lieth under twelve degrees, by the pole antarctic, which lake is almost compassed about with hills, whereof those that lie eastward, are called Ca●ates, with rocks of Saltpetre, and of silver on the one side, and on the other side hills, through the which Nilus descendeth about four hundred miles right north, and then runneth into an other lake that is greater, which the inhabitants do call a Sea or Mere, because it is greater than the other, being in breadth about two hundred and twenty miles, lying right under the equinoctial line. Of this second lake we are truly advertised by the people of Arzich● the which bordure upon Congo, who traffiking in that country report, that in that lake there are people that do sail in great ships, that can write, using weights and measures, which they have not in the bordures of Congo, which also build their houses of stone and chalk as it groweth in the earth, much like the people of Portugal, whereby it may be said, that Prestor john's land is not far from thence. Out of this second lake aforesaid, the river Nilus runneth to the Island of Meroe, being distant from the lake 240. Dutch miles (whereunto other Rivers have their course, as the river of Colues, etc. lying on the bordures of Melinde,) and coming to the said Island of Meroe, it divideth itself in two parts, compassing about a high land called Meroe: on the right side of Meroe towards the east runneth an other river called Abagni, springing out of the lake Bracina, which river runneth through Prestor john's land to the said Island: and on the other side towards the west runneth other rivers, among the which is Saraboe. This river entering into Nilus, and running about the Island of Meroe, run together in a brother stream through Ethiopia, which is called Ethiopia, lying above Egypt, and reacheth to the descending thereof, where the river Nilus, meeteth again with both the streams, together, in a high valley, and so with a great fall runs to the Island of Siene, with so horrible a noise, that the people thereabouts by that means are most part deaf, and thence running through Egypt, it watereth all the country, and maketh it fruitful, and from thence runneth into the Mediterranean sea, right over against Cypress, and that with two notable streams, besides others, whereof one at Rossetto a days journey from Alexandria runneth into the sea, the other at Pelusio, now called Damiata: so that hereby I conclude, that the river Nilus in Egypt, the river Zaire in Congo, and the river Nigri in E●●iopia▪ are the causes of the fruitfulness of those countries: all at one time increasing and overflowing, by means of the exceeding great rains, that for the space of five months do continually fall in the country of Congo, and the places borduring on the same. Touching the coast of Aden, the coast of Arabia Felix, and the country running along by the gulf of Persia, until you come to Goa, it is sufficiently already declared in this book, whereunto I refer you. The description of America, and the several parts thereof, as, Nova Francia, Florida, the Islands called Antillas', jucaya, Cuba, jamaica, etc. with the situations, degrees, and length, how far they are distant one from the other: likewise the fruitfulness and abundance of beasts, birds, fishes, and fruits of the same countries, with the manners fashions, apparrels, and religions, together with the principal actions of the people inhabiting therein. When the author of this book, as also the Printer, had bestowed and used great labour and charges herein, to set forth some perfect Cards of America, because that often times the Indian ships in their sailing out, or returning home, do fall upon those coasts, specially Brasilia, which herein is most discovered, they thought it expedient therewith to place a brief description of the same countries, thereby to show the readers the principal places therein, whereunto at this day most ships do traffic, hoping they will take it in good part. THe fourth part of the world, which at this day we call America, or west India, was because of the great distance unknown to the ancient Cosmographers till the year of our Lord 1492. that Christopherus Columbus a Genevois discovered the same, and five years after that one Americus Vespacio, by the King of Castilliaes' commandment, sailed thither, and called all the country America after his own name, and for the greatness thereof, is also called, the new world, reaching as Postillus is of opinion, from the one pole to the other, being divided by the straigths of Magellana, where it endeth under 52. degrees on the south side of the Equinoctial line. This country by divers men is diversly parted, some making it a part of the whole world, and call it the fourth part by the name of America: others make out of that country in general, two other parts of the world, dividing the world in six parts, as Asia, Africa, Europe, Mexicana, or the new Spain, Peruana, and Magellanica, as the sixth part which as yet is but little discovered: others divide it into three parts, in Peru, new Spain, others Mexico, & new France. They that first found it, accounted it but for one part, after that, the Spaniards discovering more land, divided it into two parts, into Mexico, (or new Spain) and Peru: after that the Frenchmen discovering more countries, called that which they discovered Nova Frauncia, which in time being by the Spanniardeses, won from the Frenchmen, was accounted for a piece of new Spain: at the last the straits of Magellana being found out, was by Petrus Plantius, a minister of the word of God, added as a sixth part, but because our Card extendeth no further than to certain limits of Nova Frauncia, namely to the province or country of Florida, we will not speak much of the rest, and proceed with the other parts, with certain Islands in our Card, called Antillas' or four lands, because they lie before the firm land, defending and covering the same, as a hen with her wings covereth her chickens. The land than which stretcheth towards the pole Arcticum, or northward is called new France, for that in Anno 1524. ●524. johannes Verrazanus of Florence, being sent by the King and Queen mother of France into the new world, did almost discover all that coast, beginning from Propicus Cancri, about 24. degrees, till he came to 50. degrees, and somewhat further into the north, where he erected the French standard, so that from thenceforth that country was called by the name of Nova Frauncia, and Villagagno Frauncia Antarctica. The breadth of this country is from 24. degrees to 54. degrees towards the North. The length from 280. to 330. miles, whereof the East part by the writers in these days, is called Norumbega, reaching to the gulf Gamus, where it is separated from Canada. About this land, which is not less in compass then Europa, or whole Christendom, lie divers Islands, & among the rest Terra di Laborador, stretching towards Groenland, whether divers ships, both Spaniards, French, and English, do often times resort, seeking some passage through the same to enter into the East Indies, but all in vain, for the most part consuming and destroying themselves therein, & found much ice and snow. The people of this Island are well proportioned of body and limbs, well made, and fit to labour: they paint their bodies, thereby to seem fair, and wear silver and Copper rings in their ears, their apparel is speckled furs and marterns, and such like, in winter they wear the furs inward, and in summer outward, like the Lapelanders and Vinnen: they gird themselves with cotton girdles or with fish skins, and such like things: their chief food is fish, specially Salmon, although they have both birds and fruit enough: their houses are made of w●od, whereof they have great quantities, and covered with the skins of beasts or fishes. In this land are griffons, white bears, and birds. There is a country under 44. degrees and a half, called Baccalao, taking the name of some kind of fishes, which thereabouts are so abundant, that they let the ships from sailing. This country of Baccalaos reacheth nine hundred miles, that is, from the Cape de Baccala●● to F●orida, which is accounted in this sort, from the point of Baccalao to the bay of the river, are 70. miles, from the bay of the River, to the bay de los Islos, 70. miles, from thence to Rio Fundo 70. miles, from thence to Cabo Baxo 160. miles, and again to the river of Saint Anthony. 100 miles, from thence to the furthest Cape 180. miles, and again to the Cape of saint Elena, 110. miles, and from Saint Elena to the point of Canaverall, or the Reedlyooke 100 miles, then to Florida 40. miles, which is in all nine hundred miles, which is the greatness of this land, whereof the least latitude from the Equinoctial line is 48. degrees and a half: this country both on the sea coast and otherwise, is very populous, and like the low countries, because it lieth in a corner. This Land hath many Islands lying about it, as Curia, Regia, Baya Bica Stella, the Cape of Hope, and the Britons Cape. Before you come to Florida, the province Cichora, lieth by the River jordan, and another hard by it, called Guada Lupa. The west side of Nova Frauncia hath divers provinces now discovered, as Quivi a, ●euola, Astaclan, Tethchichimichi. The south side of Florida is called by the Spaniards Floridum Pascha, because johannes Pontio Legionensi found it out on Easter day, in Anno 1512. and not because of the greenness and budding of the trees in the same land, as Thieves writeth. The north side of nova Frauncia is as yet not discovered, and because our Card discovereth no further than to Florida, we will begin therewith, and describe some part of the situation thereof, because it is worthy memory, as being a place wherein many Spaniards & Frenchmen have lost their lives, as also because it is the first, & best known of all new France, whereunto the Frenchmen have used to sail, and therein in the time of Charles the ninth, had a certain fort, which was called by his name, Charles burg●, but was after taken by the Spaniards, and all the Frenchmen slain, contrary to their faith and promise, specially such as yielded themselves into their hands. But because my meaning is not to recite histories, I remit the reader to the books which make mention thereof. Florida hath a Cape lying far into the sea stretching Southward, in manner of a tongue reaching an hundred miles, the measure being taken from the lowest northern corner, to the south point. This Cape or hook as I said, is long and narrow, like Italy: in length an hundred miles, and in breadth twenty or fifty miles, where it is broadest. On the East side it hath the Islands of C●ehora Banama, and Lucaya, on the west side towards Spain and the gulf of Mexico, it is divided from new Spain, by the land of Anavaca. On the north side it bordureth on the firm land, it lieth right against the point towards the south: 25. miles into the sea, lieth the famous Island Cuba, otherwise called Isabell●: the sea that runneth between this point of Florida and Iuc●tan, is called Mare Catayum, by other, the gulf of Ferdinando Cortosi, or the gulf of Florida, or of Mexico. It is a flat land, wherein are many rivers, which moisture the land, and make it fertile, the sea side being sandy, whereon there groweth divers pine trees, without nuts or shells, also many acorns, wild cherries, mulberries, chestnuts, but ranker of taste then ours in these countries, many mastic, Cedars, Cypress, Bayes, & Palm trees, Nuls, and wild vines, which grow upon the trees that are next them, bringing forth grapes that are good to be eaten, also a certain fruit of Medlars, greater and better than ours, there are also plums very fair to behold, but not good of taste: there are also Framboisen or Hinnebesien, and some very small round berries, of a pleasant taste, not much unlike our Clap berries: there groweth roots which in their speech they call Hatle, whereof in time of dearth they make bread. fourfooted beasts are there likewise in great abundance, as Hearts, Hinds, rain Dear, Goats, Bears, Leopards, Foreste, & many kind of Wolves, wild Dogs, Hares, Coneys etc. Their birds are Peacocks, Partridges, Parrots, Pigeons, ring Doves, Turtledoves, Meerelens, Crows, hawks, Falcons, Marlins, hearns, Cranes, Storks, wild Geese, Ducks, water Ravens, white, red, & black, and ash coloured, Reighures and many other water fowls, & Crocodiles in so great abundance, that it is incredible, which often times do eat and devour men swimming in the water: there are likewise many kinds of snakes, and a certain kind of beast not much unlike the lion in Africa. Gold and silver wherewith they traffic, they have it (as they say) out of the ships which fall on ground upon the Cape, which is not unlikely, because most of the ships are cast away upon that Cape so that there is more money thereabout, then in the north parts. They said likewise that in the hills Apalatcyaeris, there is gold to be found: in this country also groweth the root China, which by means of the Emperor Charles, hath gotten a great report, and is much used by physicians, which some also use to heal the French pocks. Besides all these things aforesaid, there are divers sorts of seeds and herbs, whereof many kinds of colours are made, very profitable for painters: the inhabitants know well how to use them, therewith to die all kinds of leather. The people are in a manner a black yellow, and evil favoured, yet strong, of good proportion of body. They cover their members with very fair dressed hart skins: most part of them paint their bodies, and also their arms and thighs, with many figures, which colour will not off, unless it be washed, it is so printed and sunk into the flesh: they have black hair down to their hips, being long, which they very cunningly bind up: in their dealings they are wholly light, and not to be credited, but very bold and valiant in arms, and in the wars, wherein they use bows and arrows, whereof the shafts are made of hearts, goats, or skins finely painted, and so cunningly wrought, that in these countries they cannot be mended, and in steed of heads, they take fishes teeth, or sharp pieces of wood: they exercise their boys in leaping, shooting in bows, and playing with balls: they have great delight in hunting and fishing: their kings hold continual wars, not sparing any of their enemies, if they overcome them, but presently cut off their heads to be no more troubled with them: which coming home, they set up in certain places for a triumph and victory. Women and children they will not hurt, but keep and nourish them among them: and returning from their wars, they call all their subjects together, where for the space of three days, they do nothing but banquet and make good cheer, with singing and dancing. To the old women that are among them, they give the skin and the hair of the heads of their enemies that are cut off, compelling them to dance, and sing songs in praise and thanksgiving to the Sun, as having by his means obtained victory. They have no Religion, nor any knowledge of the true and living God, but in steed of him, (as other Americans) they honour the Sun and the Moon. They fear their Priests, and put great credit in them, because they are great conjurers, soothsayers, and invocaters of devils, which by most fearful means they cause to appear. Their priests are likewise their physicians and surgeons, for the which cause they use continually to bear a sack full of herbs and salves to heal their sick people with, for the most part have the pocks, as being very hot of nature, and much addicted to lechery, whereby often times they use women, maids, children and Boys. Every man hath but one wife, only the king, to whom it is permitted to have two or three, but with this condition, that the first he marrieth shall be honoured before the rest, and only holden for Queen, and her children to inherit his goods, and to be heirs of the crown. The women do all the work about their houses, and when they are once with child, their husbands never deal with them until they be delivered, and eat no meat of their dressing, at such time as they have their flowers. Besides this, all the country is full of Flermophroditers, which of nature are both man and woman, those are kept to labour, and to carry their munition and weapons when they go to wars: they paint their faces, and put certain birds feathers into their hairs, thereby to seem the fairer and more fearful. Their provision of virtuals is bread and Meele of wheat and honey: they roast their Meele of Maiz, because it may continue the longer, & cause some broiled fish dried to be carried with them. In time of dearth they eat many bad things, putting sand and coals among their meal. When they go to wars the king goeth first, having in one hand a staff, in the other a bow, with arrows in a case hanging on his shoulder: the rest follow him with bows and arrows, either in cases or else stuck in their hair: at their meeting with the enemy, and also in fight, they use great and fearful cries, like other Barbarians, Turks, and Tartarians. They never begin war before they have taken counsel together, meeting about it in the morning: in which their assemblies they use a very strange custom, which is to be noted, for that being assembled, they let themselves down on both sides of the king, in manner of a half Moon, the king sitting alone in the middle of them upon a store made of nine pieces of round wood, higher than the rest, that he may be known, which done, they come and do him honour, saluting him, the oldest beginning first, and lifting their hands above their heads, speak and say, Ha, Herald Ya, Ha, Ha: the rest answering Ha. Ha which done, each man sitteth down. And if there be any matter of great importance to be handled, the king causeth the priests (by them called lavas and the ancients to be sent for, ask their advice, mean time he causeth certain women to seeth Cacinam, which is a certain drink priest out of leaves, which being sodden and clarified, the king being set with his Lords & others, each man in his place, there cometh one in presence of them all, and lifting up his hands, and blessing, and wishing them all good luck, filleth a cup of mother of pearl, full of that hot drink, which he first presenteth to the king, which having drunk, he willeth him give it to the rest. This drink they make great a●c●at of, and give it not to any man that sitteth in council, before he hath showed some valiant act in the field against the enemy: which drink is of such force, that presently after they have drunk it, 〈◊〉 maketh them sweat, and such as drink it 〈◊〉 it up again, are not employed in an great affairs, nor may not serve as Captain or other officer in the field, as being unfit for such a place, for that when they are in the field they must of force often times fast two or three days together, to the which end this drink is very good, for that whosoever drinketh it, may well fast four and twenty hours after, and neither eat nor drink: wherefore when they go to war, they cause the Hern o● hrediter to carry divers bottles of that drink with them, which sustaineth, feedeth, and strengtheneth the body, not once making their heades●le nor light. They sow their wheat twice every year, that is, in the months of March and june, & all upon our land, in three months being ripe and ready to reap. The other six months they let the earth he untitled: they have very great Pumptans, melons, & very good beans: they never dung their ground, but burn off the Stubble, which in the six months consumeth, and with those ashes fatten the ground, as they do us some places of Italy, they plough and dig up their ground with a wooden spit or shovel, and throw two or three grains of wheat into one hole, as we use to set beans or pease: when their corn is to be sowed, the king sendeth one of his servants to assemble the people, that they may blow and dig the earth, and then causeth much of the aforesaid drink to be made, to give it to the labourers. The wheat being reaped, they carry it into a common barn, or place made for the purpose, whereof every man according to his desert hath a part. They sow no more then necessarily will serve, keeping the rest to serve them for the six months wherein they sow not, and for longer time they provide not: also every year in winter time they withdraw themselves into the woods for three or four months together, continuing there in certain places made of Palm tree branches, mean time feeding upon Acorns, flesh of Darts, fish, and oysters, peacocks, and other fowls. All their meat is broiled upon coals, making it somewhat hard, by reason of the smoke and extreme heat: among other meat, they are very desirous of Crocodiles flesh, which showeth very white and fair like veal, but tasteth like rotten Moschus: if any man be sick, in steed of letting blood, their priests do suck the place where their pain lieth, until the blood doth issue forth. The women in Florida are great and very wise, and coloured like men, and pinked on their bodies, legs, and arms, putting such colour into the places, that will not easily come forth: but the women kind when they come first into the world, are not so black, but very white: the black yellowish colour is made upon them by a certain ointment, as the Tartarians and other heathens use to do, which ointment they use to make of a certain ceremonial oil by them used. Their colour likewise changeth because they go naked, and with the burning heat of the sun. The women likewise are very quick and subtle, like the women of Egypt, and can swim over great rivers, holding their children fast under one of their arms, and will likewise climb up the highest trees that are in all those countries. The chief provinces in Florida, which the Spaniards, both in the beginning, and since at other times have found out, are these: first Panuca, lying on the borders of Nova Spaigna, discovered by Franco de Grace, in An. 1518. 1518. who left many spaniards bohind him, being slain, eaten and devoured by the wild people, whose skins being dried, they hung for a memory and everlasting triumph in their jools Temples. Those people are very unchaste, and held open stews, where by night they meet and lie together. They bore holes in their noses, and also in their ears, to hang rings at them: they scrape their teeth to make them clean, and marry not before they be forty years of age, although their daughters are deflowered at the age of ten or twelve years. There are in Florida other provinces, as Anavares, Albardaosia, jaguasia, Apalachia, Autia, Samovia, and divers others, all observing one kind of religion & customs, wholly without any fear of God, policy, manliness, or reason. The best and fruitfullest part of Florida bordereth on Nova Spaigna, to the river and province of Panuca, which river runneth with so great a stream into the sea, that it is a very good haven for ships. Here followeth the description of the coast of Florida, forasmuch as is contained in the Card hereunto annexed. THe length of the furthest point of Terra di Laborador, unto the Cape of Saint Elena, lying in Florida, is before declared, now shall follow that which is further set down in the Card, beginning from Saint Elena, which lieth under 32. degrees: This is a very fair and broad river, surpassing all others whatsoever in the north coasts: wherefore by the Frenchmen it is called Porto Real or kingly haven, having found it to be ten seadom water: about this river there are many woods of Dakes and Cedar trees, wherein are many Hearts and other wild beasts, and Peacocks. The mouth of the river is three miles broad, and hath two Capes or hooks of land, one stretching West, the other North: upon this river the Frenchmen have built a fort, called Charles for't: some say this river runneth unto the river jordan, and so into the other sea. Between both these hooks of land, in the mouth of the River, there lieth a fair Island full of trees: from Saint Elena to Rio Secco, is forty Spanish miles, whereof seventeen and a half make a degree, and this River lieth under 31. degrees: from Rio Secco to Santa Cioce, and from thence to the point of Cannaveral, which lieth under 20. degrees, are forty miles. Here I must pause a while, & follow the Frenchmens rule, because this country was likewise discovered and also described by them. So then the Frenchmen reckon from Saint Elena, sailing southward along the coast four French miles, where you come to the River Magnus, or Grandis that is the great River: then Guade or as it is in our Card Guate, and further Bellum or belus, from thence to Gironda, then to Garumna, and so to Charenta, from Charenta, to Ligetim, or the Loire, six miles, from Loire to Axona in the mouth whereof lieth an Island, in our Card called Rio di S. Pero, from Axona to Sequana or Seine, because it was like the river that runneth through Paris unto Rouen, lieth six miles, and all these nine rivers lie within the space of sixty French miles, leaving the Seine, and sailing southward by the shore, you pass certain small Rivers, as Ay & Serravahi, than you come to the great River Maius (so called by the Frenchmen) that is the River of May, because it was found by one Landometo upon the first day of May, and is distant from Sequana or Seine 14. miles: thereabout grew certain red and white mulberry trees, upon the highest branches whereof, hung great numbers of silk worms: from this river you come to a gulf that reacheth somewhat inward into the land, being the place where Landonerius first arrived, when he sailed out of France into those countries, and there he saw in the mouth of a certain river, many sea Swine or Dolphins, whereupon he called the same River by the name of those Dolphins: on the South side of the gulf lieth the French Cape, about thirty degrees from the line, so called because the Frenchmen did first land there. This Cape is not high, but a flat strand, all full of high trees and thick woods. From the French Cape you come to Cannaveral, another Cape, five & thirty miles distant, taking the name form the reeds that grow thereon. The Spaniards and also our Card do not set down many of these Rivers, and the greatest part of them that are described, are altered in their names, for the River of May by them is called Maranca, the Seine Saint Augustin, the Ga●●mna S. Matheo, & the great river S. Pero. From Cannauer●l to the cape of Florida are forty miles, and between these two Capes lie many flats. The cape of Florida lieth under five and twenty degrees, and before it lie many cliffs, which they name Martyrs or Ma●ti●s, and on the other sides little Islands, called Testudines, that is Torteaux, because they are in form like those kinds of beasts. The Cape of Florida is in breadth twenty miles, and from thence to Ancon B●xo are 100 miles, and lieth fifty mile's east and west from Rio Secco, which is the breadth of Florida. The description of some Islands that lie over against the coast of Florida. FIrst you most note that the whole coast of Florida is full of Islands, cliffs, banks, flattes, and such like dangerous places, and as touching the Islands, they are at the least four hundredth in number, besides the great Island called Luca●ae, that giveth the name to all the rest, and Bahama, which lie all north from C●ba, and saint Do●inic●. The common opinion is, that these Islands were all one land, and joined to the great Island, and by the force of the sea separated one from the other, as it is thought of I●aly and Cici●ia. They lie under seventeen and eighteen degrees: the people of those Islands are whiter, and better proportioned then those of Cuba, and Spaignuola specially the women that are very fair, for the which cause many of the firm land went thither to dwell, as from Florida, Cachora, and jucatan, because there they found more pleasure among the people, then in other Islands, and great difference in their speech, whereupon hath risen the common opinion, that in those Islands the Amazons did dwell (being women that burned their right breasts, the better to shoot in bows, when they went to fight against their enemies) and that there was a fountain that made old women young. The men go naked, only when they go to wars, and when they keep any feasts, or use to dance, than they put on a certain cotton garment, and other garments of divers coloured feathers, finely wrought, with a great plume of feathers on their heads. Touching the women, they have very strange customs, for the married women, or such as have had the company of a man: they cover their privy members from the Navel down to the knees, with certain mantils of cotton, made in manner of nets, wherein they stick certain leaves, otherwise they go naked, until such time as they first perceive their flowers, and then they invite all their friends, and make a great feast or banquet, as if they were married, with great signs of joy, and then they begin to hang that kind of mantle before them, wearing the same as long as they are unmarried. They are in great subjection to their masters, in such manner, as that if they should command them to throw themselves headlong from off a hill, or to do any other thing whatsoever, they will not refuse to do it, what danger soever consisteth therein, not once ask wherefore they should do it, but only, because the master commandeth it. Here also you must note wherein their king's government consisteth, which reacheth no further then only concerning sowing or planting the ground, hunting, & fishing, for that whatsoever is sowed or planted, hunted, or fished in any respect, is only in the king's power, and done by his commandment, which divideth those kinds of labours among the people, directing every man what he should do. The fruit that is reaped and gathered, is brought all into a place appointed, and from thence it is yearly delivered unto every man according as his household and necessary use requireth, so that their Lords are nothing else but kings of Bees, stewards, & distributers of the common goods of the country: think then (I beseech you,) what a golden time those people had, where neither this is mine, or this is thine, was ever heard among them. The only well spring of strife & contention. Those in the east parts using nothing else but playing at the ball, fishing, and hunting, where neither law nor process was used nor decided, where only the kings will was a law, and in all things were content to obey it. They found certain red stones in shells of fishes much esteemed and accounted of among them, which they wear at their cares, and others more esteemed, of which they took out of snakes Hersenen or snails, (whereof the flesh is very good to eat) of a fire red colour, clear, and so like rubies, that they could hardly be discerned from them, whereof the Snakes in their speech are called Coho●o, and the stones Cohibici. They gather likewise in the sand upon the sea side, certain clear shining stones, yellow, black, and other colours, whereof they make necklaces and such like jewels, to wear about their necks, arms, and legs: in many places of those Islands they have no flesh, nor eat it not, their meat is fish, breda of wheat, roots, and some fruits. The people of these Islands being carried to saint Dominico or Cuba, died there with eating flesh, it being given them by the Spaniards. In some of those Islands there are so many pigeons & other birues, which build their nests in the Trees, that many out of the firm land, and also from the other Islands, come thither and load whole scutes full, and take them with them: the trees wherein they breed are like Youngarnet trees, the bark having a certain taste like Cinnamon, and somewhat better, and hot like ginger, smelling like cloves, yet are they not accounted for spices: among other fruits they have a certain kind by them called Ia●●ma, both savoury and wholesome, about a span and a half long, like a fig when it is green: the leaf likewise not much differing from the fig leaf, and of the bigness of a willow tree: not close like other trees, nor hollow like reeds, but fast like Elders, the leaves being excellent good to heal wounds, as the Spaniards have well tried. To speak more hereof is needless: those Islands of Lucaya are more desolate and not inhabited, for because they have no gold. The Spaniards carried many thousands of them into other places, and in seeking for Gold spoiled and destroyed them. Hereafter followeth other Islands lying about that coast, and first Cuba, being one of the principal Islands under the Antillas'. CVba another very great Island, accounted among the Antillas', was by Columbus first foundout, and discovered in An. 1492. 1492. which he called Fernandinam and I●hannam, as also Alpha and Omega, as Peter Martin saith, and by others the Island is called saint jacob, after the name of the chiefest town therein, which by reason of the great haven as also the situation thereof, hath a very great traffic, as having on the East side the Island of Saint Domingo, on the West jucatan, on the North the great Cape of Florida, and on the South the Island jamaica, all set down in this Card. It is in form like unto a willow leaf, because it is longer than broad, being in length from east to west three hundred miles, and from north to south seventy miles, in breadth in some places but fifteen and in some nineteen miles. The middle of the Island lieth in longitude 19 degrees, and in latitude or height twenty degrees. It was long time accounted for firm land, because of the greatness, which is no marvel, for the inhabitants themselves knew no other, but that it had no end (and also long after the Spaniards coming thither) because the people are poor and naked, contented with a little, and with their own, not seeking any further, neither caring what their neighbours did, and therefore knew not if there were any other land under the heavens, then that wherein they dwelled. The ground is high, rough, and sharp of hills, the sea in many places being white, and the rivers small, and good water, rich of gold and good copper, the air temperate, yet somewhat cold: therein is found much Mather, serving to die wool, cloth, and leather: it is also full of thick woods, fishponds, and fair Rivers of fresh water, also of ponds that naturally are salt water: In the woods are many hogs and oxen, the rivers do oftentimes cast forth gold: in this Island are six towns inhabited by Spaniards, whereof the first & principal is Saint jacobs', the residence and sea of the Bishop, but Havana is the chief town of merchandise, and where all their Ships are made. Two principal and notable things are by Gonsalo Onetano written of this Island, the first, that therein is a valley situate between two hills, in length about two or three Spanish miles, wherein nature of itself bringeth forth certain round balls, such as by art cannot possibly be made rounder, and in so great abundance, that they may balist or load whole Ships therewith, and are used in the ships in steed of Iron or Leaden bulltes. The other is a certain hill not far from the sea, from whence there floweth pitch in great abundance, and runneth unto the sea, where it driveth upon the shore from place to place, as the wind and weather serveth. This pitch is used by the inhabitants and Spaniards, to pitch their ships. The people of the Island are like those of Hispaniola, only differing in speech: both men and women go naked, and keep their bridalles in very strange manner: for that he which is married lieth not the first night with his wife, be if it be a Lord, he biddeth all the Lords, and one of them doth it for him, and if it be a Merchant, than Merchants take the pains to help him, but if it be a countryman, either one of the Lords or the priest doth ease him of a labour. They leave their wives for very small occasions, but the women may not forsake their husbands for any cause whatsoever. The men are very unchaste, and wicked livers: there are great worms and snakes in the Island, and not venomous, but easy to be taken, the flesh whereof they eat, and are never hurt therewith, which snakes do live by eating certain beasts, called Guabiniquinazes, whereof many times there are seven or eight found within their maws: they are in greatness like Hares, in form like fores, only that their feet are like Coney's feet: the head like a weasel, a Foreste tail, long hair like a Badger, of colour somewhat red, the flesh savoury and wholesome. This Island was very populous, but now hath very few, only certain Spaniards, the rest being almost clean rooted out, and dead for want of meat. jamaica. RIght against Cuba lieth another Island, which still holdeth the name, it always had, and is called jamaica and of the Spaniards saint jacob, it lieth between seventeen and eighteen degrees, on this side the Equinoctial line, on the East side it hath Saint Dominico, about five and twenty miles distant, on the West side the Cape or corner of jucatana, on the north Cubam, also five and twenty miles distant and somewhat more, and on the South another small Island, called Lacerana, of five and twenty miles distant as the rest. This Island was discovered by Christopherus Columbus, in his second navigation into those countries, and was taken by his son Don Diego, governing the Island Saint Dominico, by one johan de Squibel, a captain. The breadth of the Island surpasseth the length, for it is from East to West about fifty miles, and from north to south twenty miles, it is most inhabited by Spaniards, the inhabitants also being burnt and destroyed by them, like those of Lucaya. The middle of the Island hath the longitude of 191. degrees, and latitude or height eighteen degrees, and is distant from the line seventeen degrees, on the north side. It hath a hill that raiseth it on all sides, inward to the middle of the land, and so proportionably and even, that it can hardly be discerned: it is very fruitful both on the sea side, and within the land, and in times passed very populous, such as were very witty and subtle, more than other of the Islanders thereabouts, both in wars and other labours. There is likewise gold, and very fine cotton wool, and at this present it is full of beasts brought thither by the Spaniards, and there have increased. The swine's flesh is better in that Island, then in any other place. The chief town in this Island is called Hispalis of Sivilia, because of the abbey which therein is erected, the first abbot being Peter Marti● borne in Milan, an excellent learned man, and he that wrote most concerning this History. Hispaniola or Haiti. THe second great Island accounted among the Antillas', was by the first inhabitants called Quisqueia, or Quisquesia, and after that Haiti, and then Cipanga: Haiti is as much to say, as roughness or sharpness, and Quisqueia great land, Christopherus Columbus called it Hispaniola, and now it is called Saint Dominico, after the chief Town in the same Island: it was discovered in Anno 1493. 1493. on the east side thereof lieth the Island of Saint john, and many others, on the West Cuba and jamaica▪ on the north the Island of the Cannibals, and on the south the firm land, which is the Cape of Vela by Venezuela, or little Venice. The compass of this Island is 350. miles, Benzo saith 400. French miles, which is in a manner all one, and it is broader than long, for in length it is from East to west 150. miles, and from north to south 40. miles, the middle of the Island lieth in the longitude of 300. degrees, in latitude 19: in it there are very many and great havens, as Hatibanico, Iwa, Ozoma, Neyva Nizao, Nigua, Hayna, and jaques, which do, all run into the sea. There are others that are smaller, as Macorix, Ciba●, & Cotui, whereof Macorix is very full of fish, the other two abounding in gold. In this Island are two very strange lakes, the one because of the goodness and profitableness thereof, the other, by reason of the strangeness, the one coming out of the hills, from whence the River Puizao hath her issue: it profiteth no man, only it giveth a fear, and a little sinder sulkes. The other of Xaragua is salt, although many sweet rivers run into it, and hath many fishes, among the which are very great Tortuxes and Tiburones or Hayen: it is hard by the sea, and is eleven miles in compass: the river sides and shores were much inhabted, except the Saline a very fair haven, and the River jaques, where there is a great salt hill: There groweth in this Island great store of very fine blue colour, and much brasil wood, cotton wool, (but they know not how to make any thing of it) amber, rich mines of gold, and is also fished out of lakes and rivers, and likewise silver and other metals, great abundance of sugar: it is very fruitful ground, Reddish, Lettuce, and Coleworts being sowed therein, are within sixteen days after ripe, and to be eaten: Melons, Cucumbers, and Gourds, within six and thirty days are also ripe and very savoury, above all others whatsoever. The form of the Island is like a chestnut tree leaf, in the middle of the Island there passeth a stony or rough hill, in form of a man's back, which is called Cibam or Cipangi, where in times past much gold was found: out of this hill runneth four great rivers, dividing the Island into four parts, whereof the one is in the East, and is called junna: the second in the west, called Attibunicus, the third in the north, called jachem, and the fourth in the South, called Naxban, whereabouts there is much brasile wood, and woods of divers spices, but not like our spices, which they barter for other wares, specially for stools and dishes of black ebanny. Upon the hill of Cibano, lieth the Castle of Saint Thomas. There are likewise many towns within this Island, the principal called Saint Dominico, made by Bartholomeo, Columbo▪ and by him so named, because they arrived in that Island upon saint Dominicks day: it lieth on a plain ground, upon the sea side, and hath above five hundred houses, built after the spanish manner, on the West side thereof runneth the river Ozama, or Ozonca, into the sea, where there is a good haven, in the which many ships may anchor: about this River lieth very great and thick woods: the greatest traffic next their gold is sugar, and hides, for that all sorts of four footed beasts being brought thither out of Spain, have so much increased therein, that there are some spaniards in the Isle, that have six thousand or eight thousand beasts. Isabel and another town lying on the other side of the same Island in a valley, concerning the situation, the people, their Religion and customs, you may sufficiently read in the spanish Histories thereof set forth, yet will I note some that are very strange: in this Island are certain worms very common among them, and by the inhabitants called Cwero, in greatness as big as a joint of a man's finger, with four wings, two very little, the other two somewhat greater, and harder, and are as covers to the smaller, these worms shine by night as the slow worms here with us, which light doth not only appear like a star, casting forth streams and shining out of their eyes, but also in the whole body, so that when they fly and spread their wings, they give much more light out of their bodies, then when they sit still: in which worms men may well behold the great works and blessings of God, by his strange gifts bestowed upon his creatures: for by the light of this little worm, the darkest chamber that is in the night time, may be made clear and bright, whereby a man may read, writ, or do any thing, not néeding any other light: and likewise if a man bear that worm in his hand, he shall have as great a light as if he bore a torch or lantern, and many light others therewith, and the more worms there are, the greater will be the light. Not far from Hyspaniola lieth another small Island, called Mona, between Hispaniola and Boriquena, or Saint john's under seventeen degrees on the North side of the line. This Island is small and flat, and even land, in bigness about three miles, and inhabited by a few Indians, and Christians, it hath very good water, and is full of fish, specially of very good crevishes. Boriquen. FRom this Island you come unto Boriquen, now named S. john a rich haven: on the East side it hath the Island of Sancta Croce, on the West other small Islands, Northward the Island of Saint Dominico, which is five and twenty miles distant, and on the South, the Cape of Paria, distant above three hundredth thirty and six miles. The length of this Island is more than the breadth, for from East to West it is fifty miles, from north to South eighteen miles, and is divided into two parts, that is, the North and the South quarter: the middle of the Island lieth under 303. degrees longitude, and 18. degrees latitude: in form almost square, populous and well housed, having many good havens and woods. The inhabitants have continual wars against the Cannibals, or such as eat men's flesh. This Island was rich of gold on the north side, and towards the south, fruitful of bread, fruit, grass, and fish: it is said these people used not to eat any flesh, which is to be understood of wild flesh, but they eat many birds, as Pigeons, and such like: in other things they are like those of Hispaniola, only that they are better soldiers, and use bows and arrows: in this Island there is a certain gum, by them called Ta●unuo, unwholesome and fatty like tallow, wherewith and with oil they dress their ships, and because it is bitter, it preserveth the ships from worms. There is likewise much por wood, which is used to heal the poor and other diseases. This Island was discovered by Chrostopherus Co●umbu●, in his second voyage into India: There is a very strange and notable History written of the inhabitants hereof, which is, that at the first arrival of the Spaniards in that Island, they thought the Spaniards to be immortal and never died, whereof to be assured, upon a time, one of their Cariquen or Lords, called Vraioa de Yaguara, caused one of the Spaniards to be taken, and to prove if he were immortal, caused him to be put into a River under the water, and there holden, to see if he would come forth alive, but being dead, and brought before the king, he was thereby assured of their mortality, whereupon he rose against them, and slew 150. of them, that were busy in seeking of gold. Saint Crus, Hay, Hay FRom Borequien you come to the Island S. C●us, in time passed by the inhabitants called Hay, Hay, being inhabited by Cannibals, or eaters of men, as also the next unto it, called Guadalupea, by them called Qui●ra, or Quera, which Caribes or Canibales had in short time devoured at the least 5000. men, which they stole and took out of the Islands round about them: from thence you come to divers other Islands, which lie like an Archipelago, having the same name, but many of them are likewise called after the form or fashion that they bear, as Anguilla, which is an eel, as being long and small▪ Redonda Maria because it is like a sphere, & very round Mon●ratu●, that is, a closed hill, because the Island hath high hills round about it, full of people and victuals, some of saints, as S. There 〈…〉, S. Bartholomew, S. Barbara, Beata ●i●g● Antigua, till you come to the old Virgin mary's, which lie together in a row, very pleasant to behold, some green, others red▪ blue, yellow, and violet, most wonderful to such as sail by them, whereof many colours are made. Guadalupea. BY Antigua lieth Guadal●pe●▪ the chief and greatest Island of Cannibals four degrees distant from the Equinoctial line▪ it is round above 130. miles, and divided by two streams, like Engl●n● and 〈…〉 so that it seemeth almost to be two Islands it hath many goodly havens the na●● 〈◊〉; given it of our Lady of Guadalupe it is ●ul of villages, each of twenty or thirty houses, all wood, and round, made of certain great oaks which they thrust into the earth, and those serve for the doors of their houses, than they place smaller, which hold the rest from falling. Their branches on the top being bound together like tents, which they cover with Palm tree leaves, to keep them from the rain, within they fasten ropes made of cotton wool, or of B●esen▪ whereupon they lay cotton mattresses, and hanging beds therein to sleep. This Island hath seven fair rivers, the inhabitants were called Ca●uc●erum, it hath very great Parrots, much differing from others, being red both before and behind, with long feathers the wings speckled with red, some yellow, some blue, all mixed together whereof there are as great abundance, as of Spree 〈…〉 o in our countries: there groweth in this Island a certain gum called A 〈…〉 m: not much unlike Amber: the smoke or air of this gum being let up into the head, driveth out the cold: the tree bringeth forth a fruit like dates, but of a span and a half long, which being opened, hath a certain white and sweet meal. This fruit they keep for winter, as we do chestnuts, the trees are like fig trees: they have likewise in this Island all kind of orchard fruit, and some are of opinion that all kinds of sweet fruits were first brought out of this Island into the other Islands round about it, for they are hunters of men, which having taken, they eat them, and for the same cause they travail abroad many hundredth miles, both far and near, and in their travel whatsoever they find, they bring it home and plant it. They are not friendly, but fierce and cruel. They endure no strangers among them, both the men and the women are very subtle, and expert in shooting with their bows, and their arrows being poisoned: when the men are gone abroad, the women keep their places and countries, most stoutly defending them from all invasion: to conclude, all parts of that Island both hills and dales, are very fruitful, and in the hollow trees and cliffs of hills, and rocks, they find home. Desiada, or Desiderata● ABout eighteen miles from Guadalupa towards the East, lieth Desiada, another Island, being twenty miles great. Desiada▪ or Desiderata, that is desire, so called by reason of the fairness of the Island: ten miles from Guadalupa towards the south, lieth Galanta, being in compass above thirty miles, it is an even and fair country, whereof the Island hath taken the name, for Galanta in Spanish betokeneth fair. Therein are divers sweet smelling trees, both in barks, roots, & leaves. There are likewise many great Horseleeches. Nine miles from Guadalupa towards the East, there lieth six small islands, called Todos los Sanctos▪ or all Saints, and Barbara spoken of before. Those Islands are very full of cliffs, stony, and unfruitful, which the Pilots are to look unto to avoid the danger that may ensue. A little further, lieth Dominica, taking the name from the day, because it was discovered upon a sunday, and also an Island of Cannibals, so full and thick of Trees, that there is scant an elle of free land. Thereabouts also is another Island called Madannina, or the women's Island, where it is thought that women only inhabited in manner of Amazons, whither the Canibales often times resorted to lie with them, and if they had daughters, they kept them, but boys, they sent unto their fathers: it lieth forty miles from Mons Serratu▪ After that lieth yet three Islands, (besides other little Islands and divers cliffs) called S. Vincent, Granada, and S. Lucia. Coming further towards the coast of Florida, where we left▪ right against it there lieth certain small cliffs, called Martyrs, and the little islands called Tortugas, because they are like a Torteauxes. From this point of Florida to Ancon Baxo are 100 miles, and lieth fifty miles distant East and West from Rio Secco, which is the breadth of Florida, from Ancon Baxo 100 miles to Rio di Nieves, from thence to the river Flores 20. miles and somewhat more, from the river of Flores to the bay called Bahya del Spirito Sancto, which is likewise called La Culata, being in the entrance thereof thirty miles broad: from this Bahya which lieth under 29. degrees, are 70. miles to the river called Rio del Pescadores, from Rio deal Pescadores (which lieth under 28. degrees and half, there is 100 miles to the River called Rio de las Palmas, from whence Tropicus Cancri beginnneth: from Rio de las Palmas to the River Panuco are 30. miles, and from thence to Villa Rica, or Vera Crus, are seventy miles, in which space lieth Almeria: from Vera Crus, that lieth under 19 degrees▪ to the river of Aluarado, (by the Island called Papa Doapan, are thirty miles: from the river Aluarado to the river Co●z●coalco are fifty miles: from thence to the river Grital●a are forty miles. The said two rivers lying about eighteen degrees: from the river Gritalua, to Cabo Redondo, are eighty miles, as the coast stretcheth along wherein are contained Champoton and Lazaro: from Cabo Redondo to Cabo di Catoche, or jucatan are 90. miles, and lieth about 21. degrees, so that there are in all nine hundred miles in the length of the coast of Florida to jucatan, which is another Cape or hook, which stretcheth from off the land northward, and the further it reacheth into the sea, the more it crooketh or windeth about, and is sixty miles from Cuba. The Island whereof we have already spoken, which doth almost enclose the sea that runneth between Florida and jucatan, which sea by some men is called Golfo de Mexico, of others Golfo de Florida, and of some others Cortes: the sea that runneth into this gulf, entereth between jucatan and Cuba with a mighty stream, and runneth out again between Florida and Cuba, and hath no other course. A brief description of Nova Hispania, or new Spain. THe second part of America is called Nova Spaigna▪ or new Spain, it beginneth towards the North, about the River of Panuco, upon the borders of Florida, on the South side it reacheth to the province Darien●, where it is divided from Peru on the East it hath the main Sea, and on the west the South sea called Mare Australe: this whole Province was in times passed by the Inhabitants called Cichemecan Cathuacan, or Co●acan, which people came out of the land of Culhua, which lieth above Xalisco, & made their habitation about the Moors of Tenuchtitlan, where at this present lieth the town of Mexico, which people having neither country nor dwelling place, chose that for the best and most profitable, therein building divers houses and habitations, and in that manner placed both their new and old villages under the commandment of Culhuacan, giving the same name to all that country. This land is great and hath many people and countries under it, but the principal and chief province which the spaniards hold therein is Mexicana, also ●enustiran or Culhuacan, as I said before, the other provinces are Guatimala, Xaliscus, Hondura, Cha'cos, Taic●, Chamo●la, Claortomaca, Hu●cacholla, and the kingdoms of Michuacan, Tescuco, Utazcalia, Tenuacan, Maxcalcinco, and Mix●e●apan. Mexico or Culhuacan was brought under the subjection of the kings of Spain, by Fernando Cortes Merches deila Valo in the year of our Lord, one thousand five hundred and eighteen, 1513 which country is very rich of gold and silver, for that many rivers have gold in the sand. The Sea shore in those Countries yieldeth many pearls, muzzles, or oysters, wherein they find the pearls, whereof there is a great fishing, and much traffic for them. There are likewise in this country many lakes or meres that are still and have no issue, which by the heat of the Sun turn into salt. There is likewise no less abundance of Cassia Fistul● then in Egypt, growing on trees, with leaves like walnuts, and yellow blossoms, from whence the pipes or cases of Cassia do issue forth, which are used to purge in hot fevers, to cool and cleanse the gall and heart blood, as also very good against the stone in the bladder and kidneys, and other diseases. There is likewise in that country a kind of fruit that groweth in great abundance called Cacao, altogether like an almond, which is taken out of the husk, and covered with a thin skin, whereof the kernel is divided into three or four parts, of a dark yellow with black veins, being harsh in the mouth, and of an evil taste, but with them is much esteemed, whereof, being beaten with some of their country pepper, they make a certain drink, which they esteem of great price, giving it unto great Lords, and such as are their especial friends, as we esteem of muscadel or maluesie. The sea bordering upon this country, as also the rivers running through it are full of fish, wherein also they find divers Crocodiles, as in Egypt, the flesh whereof is so much esteemed before all other meats, that they account it for a princely dish, whereof some are above 20. foot long. The country is full of hills, and stony rocks, and great difference in their speech, so that they hardly understand each other without Interpreters. The places wherein the Spaniards first placed their men were Compostella, where the Bishop and the King's counsel are resident, and Colima, which they call the Purification: in new Galicia is the chief Guadalahara. and the head or principal part of the kingdom. Mecheocan also a Bishop's sea, Cacatula the town of Angels, a chief town and bishopric, M●x● a kingly city, and Queen of all cities in the new world, lieth upon the border or side of a lake: the market place of the Town lying full upon the lake, whereby they can not come at it but they must pass over bridges. This lake is l●●t, and is in length six lucas, or twelve miles, and is in breadth ten miles, without fish, only a small kind that may rather be called worms than fishes, from the which lake in summer time there ariseth such a stick, and infecteth the air in such manner, that it is unwholesome to dwell there, notwithstanding it is inhabited by as many merchants, as any town in Europe, the city is great, at the least three miles in compass, wherein are so many temples that it is incredible: the particularitte whereof, before it be long shallbe translated out of Spanish into our mother tongue, by the author thereof, whereunto I refer you. Not far from this city lieth an other fresh lake very full of fish, whereon, as also upon the shore, lie many towns. When this town was first taken by the Spaniards, there reigned a king called M●ntez●m●, being the ninth in degree, and as then the town was but 140. years old, which is to be wondered at, how it is possible that so great a city in so few years should be so famous. The merchandises that are most carried out of this country, are gold, silver, pearl balsam, cochenilia, the white root Macheocan, which is good to purge, Salla Pariglia, and an other root which maketh men sweat, brimstone, beasts skins, and fish. And thus much for new Spain in general, and of Mexico in particular. Not minding at this present time to make any longer discourse, because that our Card showeth little thereof, and now returning to our own Card, you must understand that the lower end of Cuba hath an out Hooke, called P. de Santa Anthonio, which is very fit for to take in fresh water, and to calk and mend the ships. Sailing from this hook sixty five miles, to the firm land, you come to the hook of jucatan, which runneth into the sea like a half Island. jectetan is in Indian speech, I understand you not, for that upon a time when certain Spaniards put out of the haven of Saint Anthony, to discover new countries, and arrived in that Island, they made signs unto the people to know the name of the country, whereupon the Indians answered them and said, O Tectetan, Tectetan, that is, We understand ye not: and so the Spaniards corrupting the name Tectetan call that land jucatan, yet the furthest point thereof in their speech was called ●ecampi. This point of jucatan lieth under 21. degrees, under the which name a great country is comprehended, by some called Peinsula, that is, a place almost compassed about with water, for that the further this point reacheth into the sea, the broader it is, being in the narrowest part 80. or 90. Spanish miles broad, for so far it is from Xicalanco. Therefore the sea Cards that place this land nearer or smaller, do err much, for that it is in length from East to West two hundred miles, being discovered by Francisco Hernandez of Cordua, in the year of our Lord 1517. 151● but not all of it, for that sailing from out of Cuba from Saint jacobs', to discover new countries, or (as some say) to fetch labourers to travel in his mines, he came about the Island Guanaxos, (herein called Caguan x● to the cape di Honduras, where good, honest, civil, and simple people dwelled, being fishermen, having no weapons, nor used to the wars: and proceeding further, sailed to an unknown point of land, where he found certain salt pans, whereunto he gave the name of Donne, that is, women, for that there were certain stone towers with stairs & chapels covered with wood and straw, wherein were placed diverse Idols that showed like women, whereat the Spaniards marveled, to find stone houses, which till then they had not seen, and that the inhabitants were rich and well appareled, with shirts and mantles of cotton white, and coloured, with plumes of feathers, and jewels of precious stones set in gold and silver: their women likewise apparelled from the middle downwards, as also on the head and breast, which having seen, he stayed not there, but went unto an other point, which he named Cotehe, where he met with certain Fishermen, who with fear fled from him into the country answering or calling unto him, Cotehe, Cotehe, that is to say, home, home, thinking he asked them the way into the land, whereby this point hath holden the name of Cotehe. There upon the sea side they found a great town, which for the greatness thereof, they called Alkair, after a Town of the same name, lying in Egypt (yet I think it not to be half so great as they affirm it to be) where by the Inhabitants they were friendly received, and being entered into the town, they marveled to see houses with high towers, goodly churches, paved streets, and great trade of merchandise. The houses were of hewn and carved stones workmanlike made and built with chalk, but covered with straw and leaves, the chambers within them of ten or twelve steps high: they were likewise appareled, but not with woollen cloth, because they had no sheep, but with cotton woven in diverse sorts, very finely coloured: the women likewise appareled from the middle down to the foot, covering their heads and breasts in divers sorts, very carefully seeking to cover their feet that they might not be seen: going diligently to church, to which end such as were rich & of authority had their own paved street from their doors to the church, but were Idolaters, & although they offered men unto their Idols, yet they did not eat man's flesh. They were likewise circumcised, but it is not known why they used it, unless it were the devil that ruled over them willed them so to do: in their dealings they were upright, and kept their promises: they traffiked without money, by bartering, specially for cotton and apparel, or gowns made thereof, all without sleeves, which is the greatest riches they bring unto their Lords, and which they carry to Mexico, Capo di Hondura● and Cuba they have likewise many Bees, honey and ware, but they knew not how to use ware before the Spaniards came thither: gold and silver mines they had none, although the Country was a rough, sharp, and stony land, yet it is fruitless, full of Ma●z or Turkish wheat, and abundant in fish: there was in those Countries before the Spaniards arrival, at the least four hundred thousand Inhabiters, whereof there are scarce eight thousand left, they have been so rooted out by the Spaniards, some slain, some sold for slaves, and carried into wild unhabited places, to see for gold, and others by hiding themselves from the cruel Spaniards. Guatimala. BY jucatan inward to the land, lieth the province of Guatimala, wherein there was a town, having the name of the Province, which upon the eight day of September An. 1541. ●541. by means of continual storms and rain was wholly overthrown and destroyed, wherein were killed about a hundred and twenty Spaniards. The day before it happened, some of the Indians went unto the Bishop of Guatimala, whose name was Franciscus Masoquin, teling him that at the foot of the hill whereon the town stood, they had heard a most horrible and fearful noise: whereunto the Bishop answering them said, have I not often times willed and instructed you not to think upon such things, and presently after about two hours after midnight, there fell an unmeasurable water down out of the hill, that ran with so great a force, that it carried stones and all things with it, divers fearful sights and horrible cries being heard and seen in the air: after the which the Town was new built, & placed in a plain field about 3. miles distant from the place, wherein it stood, having about 80. or 90. houses in it all of free stone, & covered with tiles. In this Province are many Earthquakes, as Benzo writeth, who continued long in those countries, otherwise the country is of a good and temperate air, fruitful of corn, and of trees that were brought out of Spain thither, yet few of them prosper, only Fig trees and Apricockes, but the fruit is not very savoury. There are likewise many Cacavaren: as touching the Religion and manner of those people, they are much like those of Mexico, and of Nicaragua, whereof I will speak, they likewise deal together, but because this Province standeth not in our Card, I have spoken sufficiently thereof. Fonduras. NExt to Guatimala, is the great country of Fonduras, wherein before it was inhabited by Spaniards, there were at the least, 410000. Indians, whereof there are not at this present (nor many years since) above 8000. left alive, part of them slain by the Spaniards, part led Captives and consumed in their golden mines, and part ran away to hide themselves in desert places and holes under the earth, so to avoid the Spanish tyranny. In this Province the spaniards have erected 5. towns, which are not in all above 120. or 130. houses, most part built of reeds and straw, and at this present not much inhabited, because the gold which is their only desire beginneth to fail. The chief of these towns in our Card is named Truxillo, of others, Trugillum, or Turtis julia, wherein there is a Bishop, this Town is situate upon a little hill, on the sea side in the north part the rest of the towns shall likewise be spoken of in the description of the coast. And returning again to the Cape of jucatan, right against it there lieth a most sweet and pleasant Island, by a king named Cozumela●, whose ancestors dwelled therein, called Cosumell, which from the further corner of Cuba Porto di Sa●nt Anthoni●, is seventy miles, and from jucatan five miles, it is round 45. miles, being a flat and even country, very fruitful they have gold, but it is brought from other places, and great abundance of honey and war, and all kind of fruits, herbs, birds, and four footed beasts, for other things, as Churches, Houses, streets, traffic, apparel, and customs, altogether like jucatan, some of the houses are covered with straw, because they want stones, yet there are many stony places, & in some places pillars of Marble as they have in Spain. At the first entry of the Spaniards into that Island they were not received, but after the ruler thereof entertained them very courteously, and brought them up into a tower, where they erected a Cross, because that they arrived there upon the 5. of May, being as then holy rood day, and called the Island S. C●●s, but in our Card it keept●h the old name. In this Tower they found certain chambers, wherein they saw many Idols, lying among other Images, which they with great noise called upon & prated unto, offering certain sweet savours and incense unto them, as other Idolaters and Heathens use to do, therein fulfilling their Heathenish Ceremonies, they are likewise circumcised. From this cape to Rio Grando are 100 miles, wherein are contained La Punta de las Mugeres, and the Baliya de la ascension. Rio Grando lieth under 16. degrees, and from thence are 150. miles to C●uo di Camaron, which are accounted in this manner: first, from the great river to the haven of Higueras are 30. miles, from Puerto Higueras to the haven et Puerto di Cauallo●, other thirty miles. This is the second place by the Spaniards divided into a colony: a days journey from thence lieth Saint Pedro in a plain field close to certain hills, being the third Colony of the Spaniards, not far from thence runneth the river Vilua, and the lake in the middle: from whence he certain hard grounds like Islands covered over with weeds, which as the wind bloweth, fleet from place to place. From Puerto de Cavallas to Puerto del triumpho de la Crus are thirty miles between, the which lieth next to Guamareta, Saint jacob, and Truxillo. From Puerto del triumpho de la Crus to Capo de Honduras are 30. miles, and from thence to Cabo del Camaron 20. miles, from thence to Cabo de Gatias a dios lying under 14. degrees, are accounted 70. miles: this is likewise a Spanish colony or town builded by them, and between them on the same coast lieth Carthago, also a Spanish town from Gracias a dios are 70. miles to del Aguadera, which springeth out of the lake or sea of Nicaragua, and is here called Aguadaco: now again for a time we will leave speaking of the coast, to declare the Province and Country of Nicaragua. Nicaragua. DEparting from Fondura, and passing the borders of Chiulutecca, you come to the Province Nicaragua, stretching towards the south sea, which is not very great, but rich, fruitful and pleasant, but of so unreasonable a heat, that in Summer time the heat cannot be endured in the day time, but only in the night, it raineth there for the space of 6. whole months together beginning in May. The other six months are exceeding dry: the day and night being all of a length, honey, wax, cotton, wool, and balsam grow there in great abundance, and many kinds of fruits, which are not found in other provinces, neither yet in Hispaniola, nor any other place: and among the rest a kind of apple, in form much like a pear, within it there is a round nut, almost twice as big again as one of our common nuts, very sweet and pleasant of taste, the tree is great, with small leaves. There are few kine, but many hogs, which were brought out of Spain to breed therein. The country is full of Indian villages, all with small houses made of reeds, and covered with straw: they have no metal: yet at the first entrance of the Spaniards, the inhabitants had certain common and base gold among them, which was brought out of other places thither: there are many parrots, which do great hurt unto the seeds, and would do more, were it not that they are driven away by slings and other means. The Spaniards at their arrival in those countries, by reason of the great abundance of all things, called them the Paradise of Mahomet. There are many Ginny hens, and a certain fruit called Cacavate, which they use instead of money, it groweth on an indifferent great tree, and only in warm and shadow places, as soon as the Sun cometh upon it it withereth, and therefore it is sowed in woods under trees, and in moist places, and all little enough, but the trees whereby it is planted must be higher than it, and bound close together, that they may defend and cover them from the heat of the sun: the fruit is like almonds, and being taken out of their shells, are covered with a thin black skin, and the piths being taken out it may be divided into two or three parts, having brown and grey veins, but of a hard taste. When they make drink thereof, they dry it in a pot by the fire, and then bruise it with stones, which done, they put it in a cullender, or pot made with holes, mixing it with water, and putting thereto a little of their pepper, and so drink it. This drink is somewhat bitter, it cooleth the body, not making them drunk, and by them throughout all the country, it is esteemed for a most precious thing, which they present to men of great account, as we do malvoisie or hypocrase. The manners of this people are not different from those of Mexico, they eat man's flesh, their cloaks and garments are without sleeves: they kindle their fire by rubbing two pieces of wood one against an other, which is their common custom throughout all India: and although they have great store of wax, yet they knew not how to use it, for that in steed of candles they used lights made of pine tree boughs: their speech is diverse, but the Mexican speech is the best, and that is furthest known, for that therewith men may travel through the country above fifteen hundred miles, and is very easy to learn: when they dance, they use a very strange manner, for they are at least three or four thousand together, sometimes more, according to the number of inhabitants, in the field where they will dance, being all together, they make the place very clean, than one of them goeth before leading the dance, commonly going backward, turning in and out, all the rest following by three and four together, using the like apish toys, their minstrels and drums, singing and playing certain songs, whereunto he that leadeth the dance answereth, and after him all the rest, some bearing Wayerkens in their hands, & some rattles full of stones, wherewith they rattle, others have their heads all slucke with feathers, some their legs and arms bound about with strings full of shells, some overthwart, and some crooked, turning their bodies, some opening their legs, some their arms, some counterfeiting the deaf man, and others the blind man, some laughing, others grinning, with many strange devices, they keep their feasts all that day till night drinking nothing but Cocavate. The ships that sail over the south sea to Nicaragua, pass thorough the narrow stream about five and twenty miles inwards, towards the land, till they come to a dorp called Re●l●gio, where there are certain reed houses, inhabited by Spaniards, where the ships anchor by reason of the good haven, and because of the wood. A days journey from this place eastward lieth Legio or Leo● the Bishop's sea of Nicaragaa, standing upon the border of the lake of Francisco Fernandez, as also Granaten and other Spanish towns lying upon the same lake, fifty miles from each other almost, at the other end where the lake issueth into the northern sea. Those two towns are both scarce fourscore houses, part made of lime and stone, and part of reeds and straw. Five and thirty miles from Leon lieth a hill, that casteth out fire, in such abundance, that by night they may behold at the least 100000. sparks of fire flying into the air: many Spaniards are of this opinion, that therein must be gold, which giveth the fire a continual essence, whereby they have sought many means to try it, but all in vain, and therefore needless to rehearse. Returning again to the lake of Nicaragua. therein are great fishes, and amongst the rest a certain kind of fish, in Spanish called Man●, having fins hard by their heads, like two hands, this fish is almost like an otter of 35. foot long, and twelve foot thick, the head and tail like an ox, small eyes, hard and hairy skin, of colour light blue, with two feet like elophantes feet: the sins standing out like Kopen, feeding their young ones with their dugs. This fish feedeth both on land and in the water, they are very familiar with men, whereof the Indians tell a most wonderful thing, which is, that there was a king called Ca●a●amavuis, that had taken a young M●nate which for the space of six and twenty years he kept and brought up with bread, in a lake called Guamabo, that bordered upon his house, which fish in time became so tame, that he surpassed the dolphin, whereof we read so many histories, for that at what time soever the king's servants called him Matto, Matto, which in Indian speech is Manisecale or courteous, he would presently come out of the lake, and eat meat out of their hands, and would likewise come out of the water, and go into the house, to fetch his meat, and there would play with the children: and when any man was desirous to go over the lake, he would oftentimes take eight or ten of them together, and swimming bear them lightly on his back over the water, in which manner playing with him, the Indians kept this fish long time, till by some injury done unto him he became angry, for that upon a time as a Spaniard would prove if his skin were as hard as they reported it to be, threw an arrow or dart at him, and although it hurt him not, yet he felt the sharp point of the arrow, and from that time perceiving that men with beards and in apparel were there, they might well call him, but all in vain, for he would never come up again, but in the end, when the river A●bunicus chanced to flow so high, that it ran over the banks, and so into the lake Guaniabo, the fish followed the stream, and swam into the sea, these kinds of fishes are much seen and taken in that country, for that their flesh is of a very good taste, like hog's flesh, which being salted is carried to Nombre de Dios, and other places. The lake of Nicaragua lieth not far from the south sea, and about a hundred miles from the north sea, running through a river that is full of ships, which the Spaniards called Desaguadera that is, falling of water therein. Thereabouts, & in that river there are many crocodiles, that lay their eggs upon the sands on the rivers sides, as big as geese eggs, which being thrown against a stone will bruised, but not break, and in time of hunger, are eaten by the spaniards, their taste is like a Moschu● half rotten, and by the Indians is accounted for an excellent kind of meat: by Nicaragua the country is rough and sharp, because of the thick woods, and uneven hills, where not only horses, but men can hardly pass over, unless it be with great pain and labour: about this country for the space of four months, there are certain Torte●ux that do continue in the sea, as also upon the shore, which lay their eggs as the crocodiles do, in the sand upon the shore, whereof presently by reason of the great heat of the sun, there cometh young Torteaux the flesh of this beast being fresh, is wholesome and pleasant to eat. From Cabo de Gratias a dios, to the Rio grand, or Desaguadera (as I said before) are seventy miles, from Desaguadera to Corobaro are forty miles, from Corobaro to Nombre de Dios fifty miles, between Corobaro and Nombre de dios lieth Veragua, and the river Swerus: these 90. miles lie under nine degrees and ½, so that from the point of jucatan to Nombre de Dios are 500 miles. As touching the manners of the Indians of Sweren that are about the river Swerus, & dwelling by Veragua they are not much different from the rest, only that they eat no man's flesh: in their country are many bears, tigers, and lions, that are very fearful, and flee when they see a man: there are likewise very great snakes, but not venomous, and many sea cats: there is likewise an other kind of beast called Cascui, in a manner like a black pig, hairy, with a hard skin, small eyes, open ears like an elephant, but not full so open, nor hanging down, cloven feet, and a little snout, armed like an elephant, and of so shrill a voice, that it maketh men deaf, and is of a good and savoury flesh. There is likewise an other wonderful and strange beast, of Gesnerus called a Fox ap●, on the belly whereof Nature hath form an other belly, wherein when it goeth into any place, it hideth her young ones, and so beareth them about her. This beast hath a body and member like a fox, feet like men's hands, or like sea cats feet, ears like a bat, it is never seen that this beast letteth her young ones come forth but when they suck, or ease themselves, but are always therein, until they can get their own meat: also there is another kind of beast called Iguanna or juanna, not much unlike our eftes, having a thing hanging at his chin like unto a beard, and on her head a comb like a cocks comb, upon his back certain sharp quills, sticking upright like thorns, and amongst the rest, some having teeth like a saw, with a sharp tail, and stretching out, sometimes winding like the adder. This beast is accounted among the unhurtful snakes, every time it layeth it hath forty or fifty eggs, round, and as big as a nut, whereof the yellow is separated from the white, like hens eggs: they are good to eat, and very savoury flesh, but not roasted either in oil or butter, only in water: this beast feedeth both on land, and in the water, it climbeth trees, and is fearful to behold, specially to those that know not the nature thereof, yet it is so gentle & quiet that it maketh not any noise, and being taken and bound, it liveth at the least ten or twelve days without meat, it is of a good and savoury flesh, and is kept for likorishnesse, specially the women, only such as have had the pox, if they eat it, their pain reneweth. Nombre de Dios. NOmbre de Dios, is a town of traffic lying on the north sea, so named by Diego de Niquesa. a Spaniard, that had endured some hard fortune, and landing in that haven with the rest of his men said, ●n Nombre de Dios, that is, in the name of God, and so began his work again which before he did pretend, and there erected certain houses, giving the place the name aforesaid: this town lieth east and west upon the sea side, in the middle of a very great wood, in a very unwholesome place, specially in winter time, by reason of the great heat and moistness of the earth, as also, because of the moorish ground that lieth on the west side of the town, whereby many of the Indians die: the houses are built after the Spanish manner, as also those of Panama, wherein many Merchants dwell that sell their wares by the great: the rest of the houses are for strangers, like Inns, as also for Grocers, handicraftmen, and such like, most part of the merchants of Nombre de Dios, have houses likewise in Panama, for that the traffic out of Peru cometh to Panama, and out of Spain to Nombre de Dios, and there they are continually resident, until they become rich, and then they go to other places, or else return into Spain. On the north side of this town lieth the haven wherein many ships may a●ker: touching such fruits as they bring 〈◊〉 of Spain into those countries, there g●●●eth some in that untemperate and vn●some air, as lemons, oranges, re〈…〉 hes, coleworts, and lettuce, but very small, few, & not very good, other victuals are brought thither out of Hispaniola, Cuba, and the province of Nicaragua, as India wheat or maiz, bread called Cazab●, salt fish, hogs, batatas, and from Panama kine, and flesh unsalted, all other kind of wares are brought out of Spain thither, for that every year there cometh ships out of Spain laden with wine, meal, bread, biscuit, olives, oil, figs, reasons, silks, woollen and linen cloth, and such wares necessary for the sustenance of man: which wares being arrived in that country, are carried in little scutes through the river Chiara, to a place called Ciu●ce, fifteen miles distant from Panama, where it is delivered to a Spanish Factor, which registereth all the wares, and keepeth them, until they be carried by beasts unto Panama, a Town lying on the other side of the Lake, from whence by ships they are conveyed into other places, thorough the whole country of Pe●●, C●a●c●s, and Chila. as also northward in the out places of the Spaniards. The breadth of the country between N●mbre de Dio●, and Panama, from the one side to the other, is not above seventeen miles, whereby Peru is no Island. The Spaniards compare this town to Venice, but I think they near saw it, for if they had, doubtless they would be of another opinion. But letting Panam● rest till another time I will proceed with the description of the coast, from Nombre de Dios to Farallones deal Darien, lying under eight degrees, are seventy miles: touching the town of Dariene. till you come to the old virgin Mary, it heath in an unwholesome place, therefore all the inhabitants are of a pale yellow colour like those that have the yellow iandise, yet it proceedeth not from the nature of the land, for that in places of the same height there is wholesome dwelling, that is, where they have fresh water, and clear fountains and where under the same height they dwell upon hills, and not as Dariene which lieth in a valley: the sides of the river being compassed with high hills, and by that means they have the sun but at noon time, only right over them, and on both sides, both before and behind they are no less troubled with the reflection of the sun beams, causing a most unsupportable heat, in such sort that the dwelling in Dariene is not hurtful, by reason of the nature of the land, but because of the situation thereof: it is likewise deadly, by reason of the moorishnesse of the ground, being wholly compassed about with moorish stinking water, the Town itself being a very pit or moorish plot of ground: and when they throw water upon the floors of their houses, it doth presently engender toads, and when they do dig but a span and a half deep in the earth, presently there appeareth Adders out of the poisoned water, that are within the filthy earth of the river, which floweth with filth, and full of dirt. Out of this deep valley, even unto the sea, in Dariene are Tigers, Lions, and Crocodiles, Oxen, Hogs and Horses, in great abundance, and greater than those that are brought thither out of Spain, many great trees and fruit, and all kinds of fruits and herbs that are to be eaten: the people are of colour between dark and red yellow, of good proportion, with little hair, or beards, only upon the head and the kickshaws, specially the women, which with a certain herb make it fall off, they go all naked, specially upon their heads, they have their members hidden, either in a shell, or in a case, or else they cover it with a cotton linen, the women are covered from the middle to the knees, all the rest is naked and bare: in that country there is no winter, for that the mouth of the river Dariene lieth less than eight degrees from the equinoctial, so that day and night is there of a length: from the furthest point that reacheth into the sea, lieth a village in the Province of Caribana, nine miles from Dariene called Futeraca and from thence about three miles lieth Vraba, whereof the whole stream hath her name, and in time past was the chief Town of the kingdom: six miles off lieth Fe●, from thence to Zereme are 9 miles, from Zereme to Sorache, are twelve miles. These places were all full of Camballes, and when they had no enemies to fight withal, they fought one against the other, that they might devour the men. The gulf of Vraba is 14. miles long, and in the entry six miles broad, and the nearer it runneth to the firm land, the narrower it is, into this river run many waters, and one that is much more prosperous than the River Nilus, whatsoever is sowed or planted in Vraba, it springeth very speedily, for that within 28. days they have ripe Cucumbers, Goardes, Melons, etc. In Dariene and Vraba there groweth much fruit that is very pleasant and sweet of taste, & much above our fruits, whereof whosoever is desirous to know more, let him read the histories thereof, as Peter Martyr in his ninth book of the description of the firm land. In the mouth of the gulf of Vraba lieth a small Island called Tortuga, that is, the Island of Torteaux, because it is form like a Torteaux, or because there are many Torteauxes therein, and further on the same coast lieth the Island l. Fuerte, which is in the middle between Vraba and Carthago, wherein also are Cannibals, most cruel villains, and from thence you come to Puerto de Caribana, the haven of Caribana, or of Cambals, whereof the Caribes have received their name. From thence you come to the river de Guerra, and then to the river of Zenu, which is a great haven, the town being about seven or eight spanish miles and a half from the sea, wherein is great traffic of fish, fine gold & silver works. They gather gold out of the rivers in great floods & rains placing great nets in the water, wherein they stay the gold, which is in great grains: it was discovered by Roderigo de Bastidas, in the year of our Lord 1502. 1502 And within two years after by Giovanni de la Cosa: And then again in the year of our Lord 1509. 1509 by Don Ancisus: and after him followed Alonso de Hoieda, who desiring to discover their sands, or barter with the inhabitants, as also to learn their speech, and to know the riches of the country, sought to come acquainted with them, but the Indians withstood them, and determined to fight: wherewith the Spaniards showed signs of peace, causing an interpreter (that Franciscus Pizairo had brought from Vrava) to speak unto them, saying that he and his companions the Spaniards were christians, peaceable and quiet people, and such as having by long voyages passed the great Ocean seas, had as then need of all necessary provisions, and of gold, desiring them to barter the same with them, for other costly wares, which they had never seen. Whereunto the Cariben of Zenu answered them, that it might well be they were such quiet people, but yet they showed not the signs of peace, and therefore they willed them presently to depart out of their country, for they said they were not minded to be mocked by them, neither meant they to endure an enemies or strangers weapon within their country. Whereupon D. Ancisus replying answered them and said, that he could not with honour departed from thence, before he had delivered his message unto them for the which he was sent thither, making a long oration, thereby to persuade them to the christian faith, grounded only upon one God maker of heaven and earth, and of all creatures therein: in the end telling them that the holy Father the Pope of Rome Christ's lieutenant throughout all the world, having absolute power over men's souls, & religion, had given their country to the mighty king of Spain his master, & that he was purposely sent thither, to take possession thereof, wishing them therefore not to oppose themselves against him, if they meant to become christians and subjects to so great a Prince, only paying a small yearly tribute of gold. Whereunto they in jesting manner, and smiling, answered much after the same manner, as it is written of Attabalipa, that they liked well of his proposition touching one only God, but as then they were not minded to argue thereof, neither yet to leave their religion, & that the Pope might well be liberal of other men's goods, that belonged not to him, or at least that he should give that which was in his power to deliver, as also that the king of Spain was either very poor, to desire that which was none of his, or very bold to seek that which he knew not, and that if he came to invade their country, they would set his head upon a stake, as they had done many other enemies his like: but the Spaniards not esteeming their words, entered upon the land and overcame them. From the gulf Vraba to Carthagena are 70. miles, between the which two places the havens and rivers aforesaid do lie, the partition being passed over, as also Puerto de Naos, that is, the haven of Ships, it is from Carthagena to S. Martha fifty miles. Carthagena. CArthagena was so named, because that in the mouth of the haven there lieth an Island in Indian speech called Codego, as also new Carthago, in Spain Scombria, or else because all the Spaniards dwelling therein, came out of the City of Carthago in Spain: the Island is about two miles long and a mile broad. When the spaniards came first into that country, they found it full of Fishermen, whereof at this time they can hardly find any remnant, which is not to be wondered at, for that not only in this province, but in all the other Islands, wherein the Spaniards have been, there is hardly any Indians left, because, the Indians as long as possible they might would never have any dealings with the Spaniards, because of their tyranny. This Country is rich of fish, fruits, and all kind of victuals necessary for men: they cover their privy members with clothes of cotton wool: both men and women go to the wars, for in the year of our Lord 1509. as a Spaniard called Martinus Amisus made war upon those of Zenu, bordering upon Carthegena, he took an Indian woman of the age of twenty years, that with her own hands had slain 28. Christians: their arrows are poisoned, and they eat their ●nue●●tes flesh, and spoiled many Spaniards: at their feasts which in times past they used to hold they beautify their bodies in the best manner they can devise, with jewels, and golden bracelets, mingled with pearls, and stones called smaragdes, wearing them about their faces, arms, legs, and other parts of their bodies: their chief merchandises are salt, fish, and pepper, which groweth in great abundance all along the coast, it is of form long, and sharper than the ●st Indian pepper, and much sweeter and pleasanter of smell than the common Bra●ilia pepper, which wares they carry into such places as want it, where they barter for other things, before they were under the subjection of the Spaniards: they had many kinds of fruits and trees, cotton wool, feathers, gold bracelets, gold, many pearls, smaragdes, slaves, and divers roots, wherewith they traffiked, bartering them without any respect, desire or covetousness, using these words, Take this, and give me some other ware for it, but no ware was more esteemed with them than victuals, but now they likewise begin to covet after gold and other things, which they have learned of the Spaniards. Benzo in his second book of the Indian history and fift chapter showeth a notable example, saying, that upon a time he being very hungry, went into an Indians house, praying him to sell him a chicken, and the Indian asked him what he would give him, he pulling forth a spanish rial of silver, gave it him, which the Indian taking, held between his teeth, and said, Then I perceive you would have my victuals, and give me that which no man can eat, neither is it of any account, therefore take you your piece of silver, and I will keep my victuals. Between Carthagena and saint Martha, there runneth a great swift river called Rio grand, which standeth in our Card, which issueth with such force into the Sea, specially in winter, that it beats the stream of the sea back again, whereby the ships that pass by it, may easily take in water. Sailing upwards into this river to the kingdom of Bogota, by the Spaniards called Granada, there are certain mines of emeralds found in the valley of Tunia, in this Card called Tomana, whereabouts the spaniards have builded new Carthage. The inhabitants of the valley of Tunia, and the people bordering on the same do worship the sun for their chief god, with such reverence, that they dare not stare or once look steadfastly upon it: they likewise worship the Moon, but not so much as the sun: in their wars, instead of Ancients they tie the bones of certain men (who in their lives were valiant in arms) upon long staves, and so carry them before them to encourage others to be the like, and make them the readier to fight. Their weapons are arrows, pikes made of palm tree wood, and stone sword. They bury their kings with golden neckelaces, set with emeralds, and with bread and wine, whereof the Spaniards have found many such graves, which they have opened. The people that dwell upon the aforesaid great river, are all Cannibals or Caribes, as also those that dwell about saint Martha, and in time past were Caribes. The inhabitants of the Islands of Boriquen, Dominico, Matitini, Cibuchine (now called saint Croce) and Guadalupe, as it is already declared, which row on the water with scutes made of a certain wood called Canois, and that fought against those of Hispaniola, and the people of the firm land, whom they spoiled and eat. The common opinion is, that they came first out of the firm land of Caribana, by Vraba, and from Nombre de Dios, in Indian speech called Caribes, and all strong and valiant men, are now by them called Caribes, which are very expert in bows and arrows. The Brasilians name them Prophets, or Soothsayers, and Caribes Priests. The people inhabiting in the valley of Tunia, poison their arrows, and before the Spaniards overcame them they had continual wars against the people of Bagota, or Bogota, they are good soldiers, cruel, and very revengeative: when they go to wars, they carry their Idol Chiappen with them, as a judge of the victory, unto whom before they enter into the field, they offer many sacrifices and offerings of certain living men, being the children of slaves, or of their enemies, painting all the Image with blood, which done, they do eat the flesh: when they returned victorious, they held great feasts with dancings, leapings, and sing, some drinking themselves drunk, and again besmeering their Image with blood, and being overcome, they were sorrowful, and heavy, seeking by new sacrifices to entreats their Chiappen, that he would help and assist them, and send them victory against their enemies. S. Martha. SAint Martha is also a Town and Haven of the Spaniards lying on the firm land under eleven degrees, on the north side of the Equinoctial line about fifty Spanish miles, from Carthagena, it lieth at the foot of certain hills, so monstrous high, that it is, incredible, how in so great extreme heat, so great quantity of snow should lie upon the tops of those hills which is seen a great way off, and whereby the haven is known. This country was discovered and taken by Roderigo de Bastidas in 1524. 1524. where it cost him his life, not by the enemy, but by his own men, that when he was asleep, killed him, and gave him five wounds in his body. The people of this country are so cruel and fierce, that they have oftentimes driven the Spaniards from their country, not caring for the ships, but running into the sea, till the water mounted as high as their breasts, shooting with thousands of poisoned arrows, and never would give over, were it not by means of the great shot, together with the cries of such as were afraid, and ran away, thinking them to be thunder claps, which oft times happen in those countries, by reason of the evenness of the country, with the height of the hills. The compass of this haven is three Spanish miles, and so clear that they may see stones lying on the ground within the water, although it is at the least twenty else deep: into this haven there floweth two running waters, but not fit for great ships, but only for little boats, cut out of pieces of wood: it is a great pleasure to hear what they report of the great numbers, and goodness of the fishes that are taken thereabouts both in fresh and salted water, for the which cause they found many Fishermen thereabouts, with many nets made of packethreede, hanging on cotton ropes, which was their greatest living, for that for fish they had whatsoever they desired of their neighbours. In this country they found sapphires, emeralds, calcedonies, jaspers, amber, brasil wood, gold and pearls, that is, in the two provinces Caramaira and Sacurma, wherein the two havens Carthagena and S. Martha do lie. Caramaira is a very fruitful and pleasant country, wherein there falleth neither hard winter, nor over hot summer, day and night being there almost of a length. The Spaniards having taken in this country, found gardens ready planted, moistened with strange waters like the gardens in Italy: their common meat is Ages, luca, Maiz, Batatas, and some fruits of trees, such as other Indians thereabouts do use, they eat fish also, and man's flesh, but not often. Ages are roots, of the greatness of long turnopes in Italy, pleasant of taste, not much unlike chestnuts, which they use in banquets instead of fruit. juca is also a kind of root whereof they do make bread: the juca that groweth in Cuba. Hayti, & other islands, is very hurtful being eaten raw: and to the contrary that of S. Martha is very wholesome, being otherwise eaten, it is very good of taste: these roots are planted & not sown, which being ripe, are as great as a man's arm, or the small of his leg, & ripeneth in half a year, but if it stand two years in the ground, it maketh better bread, being ripe, they are priest between 2 stones, whereby the sap runneth forth, which is very hurtful in the Islands, unless it be sodden, as we do milk: otherwise being drunk of men or beasts, it kills them as being a strong poison, but sod till it consumeth to the half, & so let stand till it be cold, it may be used instead of vinegar, & being sod till it be thick, it becomes sweet like honey, & so they use it in the firm land, being raw, for drink, and sodden, for vinegar & honey. I said in the firm land, for that in the Islands it is very dangerous & venomous: of the material substance of the root being priest, which is like almonds that are stamped, they make round cakes as big as dollars, which they bake, & is their Cacavi or bread, wherewith they so long have nourished themselves: this bread is somewhat harsh in the throat, if it be not tempered with water, or mixed with other meat. Yet I had rather eat bread made of Maiz, that is, Brasilia wheat, for that it giveth no less sustenance than our wheat, & is very wholesome, agreeing with the stomach, whereof they make bread, as we do of wheat Batatas are also common, & in great abundance in this country, which are roots of the thickness of a man's arm, & some smaller, pleasant of taste, and procuring good nourishment, yet they cause wind, unless you roast than, than they lose that effect, specially when they are eaten with any good wine: of these roots they also make conserves, not much unlike that which is made of Quinces, and cakes, with other such kinds of devices. At this time there are many of them in Spain, whence they are likewise brought into our countries: Those that are desirous to read more hereof, let them peruse the Writers of the new World, or the books of the learned doctor Carolus Clusius, which writeth thereof at large, from whence this is taken. In S. Martha is great traffic for fish, cotton, & feathers, their houses are of earth, hanged with mats made of ●esen, and of divers colours, they have many coverlets of cotton, wherein are woven the figures of Tigers, Lions, Eagles, and such like. From Saint Martha to the Cape de la Vela, that is, the cape of the sail, are 50. miles: this cape lieth under 12. degrees, & is 100 miles from S. Dominico: between S. Martha and the cape de la Vela, lie these places, Cape de la Guia, the point of the needle or of the compass, Ancon de Gacha, an open haven of Gacha, Rio de Palominas, the river of Palominas: Rio de la Hacha, the river of the Tocrtses: Rio de P●edras, the river of Stones: Laguna de S. ivan, the lake of S. john. From the Cape de la Vela to Coqui●ocoa are forty miles, in our Card it is placed with two words divided, which should be but one. Th●s is another point lying on the same corner, behind the which beginneth the gulte of Ven●z●el●, which in compass and breadth is from the cape of S. Roman eighty miles. Porete Venezuela, little Venice. THe whole coast from the Cape de la Vela, to the gulf of ●ar●● was discovered by Christopher Coranto, in An. 149●. 1498. and the first governor of Venezuela, was a h●gh Dutchman, called And●● sius A●mg● who in the name of Wel●ren travailed into those countries, the Emperor having besieged their town, in the year of our Lord 1518. and died of a wound given him by a poisoned arrow, 〈◊〉 and most of his men died for hunger, after they had eaten dogs and some Indians flesh: it is a B●shopr●cite the town being called Venezuela because it is binlded in the water upon an even rock, which water and lake is called Maracaibo, and by the Spaniards Lag● di Nostra D●nna: the women of this place are preuder & better mannered than others of the prou●ces thereabouts, they paint their breasts and arms, all the rest of their bodies are naked only their privities which they cover with certain deaths, which to leave off were great shame unto them, & likewise if any man should lift it up, he should do them great 〈◊〉 & dishovor. The maids are known by their colour, & the greatness of their girdles that they wear, which is a certain sign o● their maidenhead. The men carrte their members in a shell, they pr●● to Idols, and to the devil, whom they paint in such a ●riue as he instructeth them: or as he the ●●d himself unto them. In wars they use poisoned arrows, & pikes of five and 〈◊〉 ●●●●ful long, knives of reeds, great t●●●●s made of barks of trees, and also of 〈◊〉. Their priests which also are Ph●●●tions, ask the sick person (by whom they are sent for if they certainly believe that they 〈◊〉 help them, and then lay their hands upon the place where they say their pains, ●●postumes, or swellings are, crying or calling out, and if it fortune that they heal not, they put the fault either in the sick person, or in their gods, and in th●s sort their Ph●●tions deal with them, In the ●●●ht time they mourn for their Lords, which is singing certain songs in their commendations, that done they roast them, and beat them to small powder, which them, drink in wine, which among them is a great honour. From Venezuela to C●● S. Roman is eighty miles, and from S. Ro●●n to Golfo Triste, are fifty miles, wherein lieth Curiana. Curiana. CVriana hath a haven like that of Calais in Spain, where on the shore there are about eight houses, but not far from thence within the land there was a v●llage, full of people, that went naked, but very friendly, for ple, innocent, and familiar, and received the Spaniards w●th great joy, and for pings, needles, Lels glasses, and beads, they gave them many strings of pearls: receiving them into their houses, serving them with all kinds of meats, and for four pings gave them a peacock, for two pins a pheasant, for one pin a turtle dove, or house pigeon, for a stone, g●●sse, or a pin or two, a goo●●: & they ask them what they would do with the pings, seeing they were naked, they said they were good to pick their teeth, and for the bells they took great delight to hear them ring: the country is very full of the birds before rehearsed: also of hearts, wild swine, and cennies, of colour and greatness like our hares, which birds and deer's flesh is their meat, as also the pearl oysters, whereof thereabouts are great abundance, and much eaten: they are all very s●●ful in shooting at wild beasts and birds, their beats are hewed out of a piece of hard wood, but not so well proportioned as those of the Canniballes, and in H●spani●l●, which they call Gall●●s, their houses are made of wood, and covered with palm 〈◊〉 ●●ues, wherein, when they are at res●, th●● may easily hear the fearful cries of wild beasts, which hurt not any man, for 〈◊〉 inhabitants go all naked, and without campany into the woods, only with their be●●s and arrows, and not it was never heard that any of them was ever slain or devoured by wild beasts. They likewise brought the Spaniards as many hearts and wild swine as they desired, all killed with their arrows, their bread is of roots or Maiz like other Indians: the people have black and half curled hair, and somewhat long: they make their teeth white with an herb which all the day they chaw in their mouths, which having chawed, they sp●tte out again, washing their mouths. The women are better for keeping of a house, than to labour in the fields, and the men use to work in the grounds, and to hunt: also to go to wars, to dance and to play. In their houses they have many earthen vessels, as cups, pots, & such like, which are brought them from other places. They keep certain yearly fairs, every one carrying to each other, such things as they want. They wear strings of pearls about their necks, as common as the country women in Italy wear crystal beads, whereon hangeth many beasts and birds made of base gold, like Rheins gold, which is brought unto them from Carichieta, six days journey from thence, towards the south: and when the Spaniards asked of them where they had the gold, they made signs which way, showing them it was in an other country beyond them, but counseled them not to go thither, saying they were Canniballes, and such as eat man's flesh. The men bore a gored which they wear for a codpiece, and tie about their middles with a string, hiding their members therein, or in a Snakes shell, the rest of their bodies are all naked. Thus much for the customs and manners of Curiana. Between the Cape of Saint Roman, and Golfo Triste lieth Core Taratara, and P. Secco. From Golfo Triste to Cariari are a hundred miles, the coast lying under ten degrees: between them lieth many havens and rivers, specially Puerto di Canna Fistola, P. Fle●chado, that is, the point where they were shot at with arrows. Punto Muerte, the dead haven. Cabo de joan Blanco, the cape of john White, Cabo la Colhera, Rio Dunari, Illa de Pirico, Maracapana, Chelheribiche, St. Fee, that is, holy Faith, Rio de Cumana, Punta D'ara●a C●m●● and Maracapana: along by the coasts aforesaid lie many Islands, as Moines, that is, the Isle of Monks, Quiracao, Buenaire, Good Air, Rocques, or Roca, Stone Rocks, de Aves, the Birds, Tortuga, Torteaux, and then Cubagna, or Margaritha, the Isle of Pearls. A certain description of Maracapana, and Cumana. CVmana signifieth a Province and a River, wherein there is a town and a cloister of grey Friars, because of the great numbers of pearls that are found thereabouts. The people of this country went naked, only that they covered their members, either in a gored, or Snakes shells, or else with bands of reeds or cotton wool: in wars they wear mantles, and deck themselves with feathers: at feasts and banquets they paint themselves, or else struck themselves over with certain gum, and salves that be clammy, wherein they stick feathers of all colours, which is no ill sight: they cut their hair above their ears, and if any hair grow upon their knees, or on their faces, they pull them out, and will have no hair upon any place of their body, although they are by nature most of them without beards or hair, and such as let their hair grow after the Spanish manner, they call them beasts: these people make great means to make their teeth black, and such as have them white, they esteem them to be women, because they take no pains to make them black, which they do with the powder or sap of a certain herb, by them called Hay, or Gay, which leaves are very soft like turpentine leaves, and in fashion like Mortella, being of the age of 15. years, and that their courages began to rise: they begin to bear those leaves in their mouths, and to chaw them, until their teeth become as black as coals, which blackness continueth until they die, which likewise preserveth the teeth from rotting, spoiling, or any pain, they mire the powder of that leaf with another sort of powder of a kind of wood, and with chalk of white shells burned, in which sort those of the East Indies use their betele and Arrecca, with chalk of oysters, which is already declared in the description of the East Indies: the powder of these leaves, wood and chalk they bear continually in their mouths, still chawing it, which they keep in basketts and boxes made of reeds, to sell and barter the same in the markets round about them, for gold, slaves, and cotton, and for other wares: all the maids go naked, only they wear certain bands about their knees, which they bind very hard, that their hips and thighs may seem thick, which they esteem for a beauty: the married women wear shoes, and live very honestly: and if they commit adultery, they are forsaken by their husbands, & punished. The lords and rich men of the country have as many wives as they list: and if any man come to their houses to lodge, they give them one of the fairest to lie by them: the rest have but one, and some none: the women till the land, and look to the house, and the men not being in the wars, do fish and hunt: they are highminded, revengeative, and hasty: their chief weapons are poisoned arrows, which they prepare in divers manners, as with the blood of snakes, the juice of herbs, and mixtures of many other things, whereby there is no means to heal such as are once wounded therewith. The children, women, and men from their youth upwards learn to shoot in bows: their meat is horseleeches, bats, grasshoppers, crevishes, spiders, bees, and raw, sodden, and roasted lice, they spare no living creature whatsoever, but they eat it, which is to be wondered at considering their country is so well replenished with good bread, wine, fruit, fish, and all kind of flesh in great abundance whereby it cometh that these people have always spots in their eyes, or else are dim of sight, which some notwithstanding impute to the property of the water in the river of Cumana: they close their gardens or lands with cotton yarn, by them called Bexuco, placing it about the height of a man, and among them it is accounted for a great offence, if any man should venture either to climb over, or creep under that cotton, holding for certain that whosoever doth tear it, shall die presently after it. The men of Cumana, as I said before, are much given to hunting, wherein they are very skilful. They hunt and kill Lions, Tigers, Goats, Ileren, Hogs, and all other kind of four footed beasts, which they kill with bows, or take with nets. There are likewise in these provinces many very strange beasts, part whereof are already described, and part not: he therefore that desireth further instruction herein, let him read the Spanish historiografers, that writ larger. The women as I said, till the ground, sow Maiz, and all kind of corn, plant Batates, and other trees, watering them, specially the Hay, wherewith they make their teeth black: they plant trees, which being cut, there issueth a white liquor like milk, which changeth into a sweet gum, very good to smell unto. They plant likewise other trees called Guare●ma, whereof the fruit is like a Mulberry, but somewhat harder, whereof they make a certain kind of sodden Must, which healeth cold, and out of the wood of the same tree they make fire. They have another kind of high and sweet smelling tree, which seemeth to be Cedar, whereof the wood is very good to make chests & cases, & by reason of the sweetness of the wood, good to keep things in: but putting bread into them, it becometh so bitter, that it is not to be eaten: the wood is likewise good to make ships, for that it never consumeth in the water, by worms, or any other means. There are other trees from whence they have lime, wherewith they get birds, and anoint their bodies therewith, wherein they stick feathers. The land of itself bringeth forth Cassia, but they eat it not, neither know how to use it. There are so many Roses and sweet flowers in that country, that the smell thereof maketh men's heads to ache, in smell exceeding musk: worms, as grasshoppers, Caterpillars, and such like, there are very many, which destroy the seed. There are likewise veins of sea coals burning like pitch, whereof they make great profit. Thus much concerning the fruitfulness of the country, their manners and customs in planting, hunting, etc. Besides this, these people take great pleasure in two things, that is, dancing and drinking, often times spending eight days together in banqueting, dancing, and drinking themselves drunk: besides their ordinary dance and meeting together, at the feasts and coronations of their Kings and Lords, or in common assemblies and public banquets: many of them meet together, every one dressed in a several manner, some with crowns of feathers, others with shells or fruits about their legs, like jugglers here in our country, using all kinds of toys and devices, some strait, others crooked, some backwards, some forwards, grinning, laughing, counterfeiting the deaf, blind, and lame man: fishing, weaving, and doing all kind of works, and that for the space of five or six hours together, for that he which continueth longest in that manner is the best man, and he that drinketh well is a lusty fellow: having danced, they sit down cross legged like a Tailor, and make good cheer, drinking themselves drunk at the king's charges, of which their dancing I have spoken in another place, so that to speak any more thereof it were needless. They are great Idolaters, praying to the Sun and the Moon, thinking them to be man and wife, and to be great Gods: They fear the Sun very much when it thundereth or lighteneth, saying that it is angry with them: they fast when there is any eclipse of the Moon, specially the women, for the married women pluck their hairs, and scratch their faces with their nails, th● maids thrust thorns of fishes into their arms, and therewith draw blood, thinking that when the Moon is in the full, they think it is to be shot or hurt by the sun, by reason of some anger or grief he hath conceived against it: when any blazing star appeareth, they make a great noise with Drums, and hallowing, thinking by that means it will be gone, for they think a blazing star signifieth some great hurt or evil fortune. Among many Idols and figures which they honour and invoke for Gods, they have a certain thing like a Burguinion Cross, which they hang upon their new born children, thinking thereby they are preserved in the night from all evil things. Their priests are called Places, who in those countries have the maidenheads of their Daughters when they marry. Their office likewise is to heal the sick, and to say truth, to call upon the the devil, and to conclude, they are skilful in the black art and conjurers. They heal with herbs and roots, both sodden and raw, beaten, and mi●●ed with fat of birds, fish, or beasts, with wood and other things unknown to the simple men, using certain dark words and sentences, which they themselves do not understand. They suck and sick the place where the paine●s, thereby to draw out the evil humours, and if the pain or fever increaseth, the priests say that their patients are possessed with evil spirits, wherewith they rub their bodies all over with their hands, using certain words of conjuration and charms, sucking after that very hard, often making them believe that by that means they call the spirit, which done, they take a certain wood, whereof no man knoweth the virtue but only themselves, wherewith they rub their mouths and throats, so long until they cast all whatso●u●r they have within their stomachs, and with so great force, that often times they cast forth blood, mean time stamping, stammering, calling▪ and knocking with their feet against the earth, with a thousand other toys needless to rehearse. Cub●gua, or Margaritha. CVbagua or Margaritha is the Island of pearls, and is in compass three miles, lying under twelve degrees and a half, upon the north side of the Equinoctial line, four miles from the point 〈◊〉, a count●● wherein there is much salt, & although the ground is both flat and even, yet it is unfruitful and dry, both without water and trees, and wherein there is little else found, then only Comes, and some Sea fowls. The inhabitants paint their bodies, they eat the oysters wherein the Pearls are found, and fetch all their fresh water from the firm land, giving pearls for it: there is not any Island in the world so small as it is, that hath raised so much profit, and made both the inhabitants and strangers rich, as this hath done, for that the pearls which in few years hath been brought from thence, do amount unto above two millions of gold, although thereby many Spaniards and slaves have lost their lives. From the point ● Arya to the Cape de Salines, that is, to the point of the Salt pans, are seventy miles, & between them lieth Ca●be, and the Cape de tres Puntas, which is the Cape of three points: from the Cape de Salines to Punto Auegado, that is, the drowned haven, are more than seventy miles, and the ceased running along by the gulf of Pa●a, the land maketh with the Island Trinidad. Paria. IN the mouth of the gulf of Paria, lieth the Island la Trinidad, taking the name from a certain promise made by Columbus in his second voyage, in An. 1497. being in danger, or because he first perceived three hills, seeking for fresh water, his people in a manner dying with thirst. The mouth of this gulf was called os Draconis, that is, the Dragon's mouth, because of the great stream that runneth therein. The whole country and shore of Paria stretching towards the South, is the goodliest country in all India, and the fruitfullest, as Benzo and Columbus both do witness, so that by some it is called the earthly Paradise: it is a great, flat, and even land, overflowing and abundant of all things, always bring forth flowers of sweet and unsweet savour. The trees continually green, as it were in May or lent, but not many fruitful or wholesome trees, and in some places thereof is great abundance of Cassia Fistula, the whole country is generally hot and moist, whereby there are divers worms, among the which are many Mites, which by night fall very heavily upon the people, and many grasshoppers, that do much hurt, the inhabitants bear there members in a gourd or reed, as it were in a sheath, letting their stones hang out, before the Spaniards came into the country, they wore such kind of codpieces bordered with gold & pearls, and such like things, which custom the Spaniards made them to leave: the marrted women cover their secret parts with an apron, by them called Pampanillas, and the maids tie a piece of cotton before their bellies, their kings have as many wives as they will▪ yet one of them is accounted for the right Queen, and hath commandment over all the rest: the common people have three or four, as they think good, and when they are old they put them away, and take young for them. They likewise let their Piacchoes or priests he with their gentlewomen and their maids the first night of the marriage. This people, as also most part of the Indians, maintain themselves with fish, and wine made of Ma●z which is with them in ●eede of corn, and also with other fruits and roots, as all the rest of the Caribes do, and some eat Lice, Apes, Meerecats, Frogs, Worms, and such unprofitable things as those of Cumana, they use a kind of salve, to make their teeth black like those of Cumana, which is made in this manner: they take shells wherein the pearls are sound, with the leaves of the tree called Axis, (the fruit of the which tree they eat continually all the year like sauce or pepper) which they burn together, and being burnt, they put a little water unto it, wherewith the white looketh like chalk, with the which salve they make their teeth as black as coals, and therewith preserve them from ache, their bodies are painted red and black, with colours made of the juice of Herbs, and the filthier it showeth, the fairer they esteem it to be. Their beds are like nets made of cotton, which they make fast to two boards, and therein they sleep. Sleeping in the fields they have on the one side of their beds a fire, to warm them in the night: their weapons are arcowes, made either of reeds or palm wood, whereon they put sharp stones or bones in place of iron, which they smear with pitch, which is a most cruel poison, made of roots, herbs, Ants, fruits, and certain stinking juice, which the old women do very diligently seeth with snakes blood, with the venomous air whereof many of them die while they seeth it, if any man be strucken with an arrow that is new dipped therein, their body presently swelleth, and they die with all speed, in a manner raving, and when the poison is old, it looseth the greatest part of the strength: the remedy against such poison, is to thrust a hot burning iron into the wound: all the slaves that the Spaniards take out of this country, they carry them into the country of Cubag●a, burning them in the foreheads with a letter C. whom they keep for fishers or pearls, by which means many of them are carried out of the Island, whereby at this present it is almost desolate, for that the fishing for pearl is there almost clean done, and the gold consumed, which maketh the Spaniards not to esteem of that place. Hereafter followeth the description of the coast of Paria, to the straits of Magellanes. FRom Punto Anegado which lieth under eight degrees, are fifty miles, to Rio Dulce, which lieth under six degrees: from Rio Dulce, that is, the sweet river, to R●ode O●ellana, which is called Rio de la amazons is 110. miles, so that there is accounted eight hundred Spanish miles, or 3200. Italian: from Nombre de Dios along to the coast of the River Orellana, which cunneth into the sea, (as it is said) having fifteen miles in the breadth of the entry, and most under the Equinoctial line. From this River I will show the coast as it lieth, yet first I must tell you the rivers, & their names that lie between it and Pun●o Anegado, first Rio Grando, the great River, than Rio Dulce, the sweet river, Rio de Canoas', the River of Canos. Canoas' are scutes, by the Indians made out of pieces of wood, which they make hollow, and therewith they fish in the rivers, Capo de Corrientes, the point of the stream, Aldea the village, Capo de los Farillon●z, the point of the cliffs, Rio de Ancones, the river of the open havens, Rio de Laga●tos, the river of the Crocodiles, Rio de vincente P●●zon, Rio de Cacique, the K. river: for Cacici in Indian speech is Kings. Costa Brava the wild point, Capo de Corrientes, Rio de Caribes, the river of Caribes, or eaters of men. Rio de Canoas', Rio de Arboledas, the river of bows, Rio de Montanna, the river of the hill, Rio Apercellado, the river of the Banks, Bayha de Canoas', the bay of Canaos, or Scutes, Atalaya sentinel or watch, Rio does Fumos, the river of Smoke, Rio de Pracellet, the river of banks, Capo de North, the North point. And there being past that point, the great river Oregliana (in Spanish Orellana▪) runneth forth which 〈◊〉 the greatest river in India or in all the world, some called this river the sweet sea, it is at the mouth or entry fifteen Spanish miles broad, there are some that said this river and the River of Maragnon, which hereafter shall follow, have all one head or spring from Quito by Mullubamba, & then this river runneth under the Equinoctial line at the least 1500. spanish miles, as Orellian & his companions recite, that came out of Peru from the south sea, clean overwhart the country through this river, with great hunger & much trouble, and so entered into the north sea, not that it runneth strait outright, but crooking and compassing in and out, which maketh it so long a journey, for that from the head of this river to the sea it is but seven hundred Spanish miles, to travail right forth over the country. This River within the land is in some places four and some five miles broad, making many Islands. The common opinion is, that upon this river there dwelleth women that burn off their right breasts, that they be not hundred thereby to shoot in bows, which they use in the wars: by the ancient writers they were called Amazons, and had a great part of Asia under their subjection: from the river Orellana, to the River Marannon, or Maragnon, are 100 miles, which in the mouth or entry is 15. miles broad, & lieth under 3, degrees, on the southside of the Equinoctial line, in it also are many Island: thereabouts likewise there groweth good Frankincense, which is esteemed better than that of Arabia, & there also were found certain Emeralds, and tokens of gold, with other riches. They make wine of divers kinds of fruit, specially of great dates, in quantity as big as spanish Quinces, which is very good & may be kept, the men wear jewels at their ears, and three or four rings through their lips, which they likewise s●t, as a beautifying unto them, they sleep in beds stretched abroad and made fast to trees, a good height from the ground, without any coverlets, as all the Indians from Nombre de Dios, & so to the straits of Magellana use to do. There are in this river filthy flies which make men lame, being bitten or stinged by them, unless they do presently pull out the stings: there are many of opinion that this River M●ragnon, and the aforesaid River of Orellana, do both spring out of the country of Peru, but no man knoweth the certainty thereof. From Maranhon to tetra de Humos, or Fumous, that is, the country of Smoke, where the line parteth is 100 miles, & from thence to Angla di S. Lucar, are 100 miles, and from thence to Cabo de S. Augustin, lying under 8. degrees and a half, on the South side of the Equinoctial line are 70. miles, the length of the coast from the river of Maragnon to Cabo de S. Augustin, is as followeth, first an Island called Isla de S. Sebastian. Acenc●o Ascension: P. de Pracell, the haven of Banks: P. de Corrientes, the haven of the Stream, Rio de Il●ieo, the river of the Islands, Costa Branca, the white coast, Rio de Coroa the river of the Crown, Cabo del este, the Easter coast, Rio des Lixos, the river of filth, Rio does Reciffes, the river of cliffs, Rio S. Miguel, the river of saint Michael, Bahya does ●ortugos, the River of Torteeux, Grand Bahya, the great Bay, Cabo de S. Roque, the point of S. Roche, Cabo de S. Raphael, the point of S. Raphael, Baya de Traicam, the Bay of Treason, Paraiba os Petiguares, Pernambuco, the Cape of S. Augustin was discovered in An. 1500. 1500. by Vincentio, janes' Pinzon, in the first month of the year. Brasilia. NOw followeth the East province of America, or of Peruana commonly called Brasil the which was most discovered by the Portugese's, and by them subdued and brought under subjection, they had therein from North to south, 40. miles, and from East to West 160. miles, which stretching along by the coast, is more than 700. miles. This country hath the name of Brasilia, by reason of the great abundance of red brasil wood which from thence is brought into these countries: in this country are many provinces and sundry people, some subject to the Portugese's, & some to the Frenchmen, as Marga●atan, Taba●arren, Oueta●aten, Tououpi●ambaultiem, and Morpions, all cruel Indians, and most of them Cannibals, whereof in the description of the coast we make mention: not far from the Cape S. Augustin, lieth Pernambuco, a place where the Portugese's have great traffic for sugar and Brasil wood. This cape lieth under eight degrees and a half, on the south side of the Equinoctial line, and was discovered by Vincente janes' Pinzon, in the year of our Lord, 1500. in the month of january, and is the nearest place to Africa or Spain, of all the country of America, for that it is accounted but 500 miles from this point to Cabo Verde in Africa, the common reckoning of the sea Cards, yet some esteem it to be less. From this cape to Baia de todos Sanctos, lying under 13. degrees, are 100 miles: between the which two places, I let pass S. Alexio, S. Miguel, Rio de Aguada, that is, the river of watering, Rio di Francisco, Rio de cana Fistola, because in that place there groweth much Cassia, such as is in Egypt, Rio Real the king's river, Rio de Tapuan A. Povoacam, the village or commom assembly, etc. after the which followeth the Baya de todos Sanctos, From this bay to the Cape does Abrollios', or does Baixos, that is, the Cape of the droughts, which lieth under 18. degrees, are 100 miles, and between them lieth these places, Rio de S. Giano, that is the river of S. julian, os Ilhos, the Islands, Rio de S. Antonio, Rio de S. Crus, P. Seguro, the sure haven, Rio de Brasil, Rio de Caruelas, etc. Margaiates. MArgaiates are certain people mingled with the Portugese's, & are Cannibals, the country wherein they dwell is gran both in winter and summer, as it is with us in May and june, both men and women go naked, as they come out of their mother's wombs, painting themselves with black strikes, like the Tartarians. The men shave themselves like Friars, they make holes in their neither lips, wherein they wear certain green polished jasper stones, wherewith they shut and open the holes: which stones they wear for a great ornament, which notwithstanding being taken out of the holes, maketh them show most ugly, as it they had two mouths one over the other: the women let their hairs grow long like our women, and bore not their lips, but make holes in their ears, wherein they hang certain white bones, which hang as low as their shoulders. This country yieldeth much Brasill wood, from the Cape does Baixos, to Cape Frio, which lieth like an Island, are an hundred miles: between these two places lie many rivers and havens, specially these, P. del Agnado, Rio Dulce, Re●os Magos Spirito Sancto, where the Portugese's have a Castle, which the Margarites or Barbarians call Moab: from Moab you come to Tapenury, where there lieth certain Islands friends unto the Frenchmen, from thence you come to Paraiba people that dwell in cottages made like ovens. From thence passing along the coast, you come to certain running sands, whereabouts also are certain cliffs, that jut into the sea, whereunto the sailors are to take great regard. Right against those shalowes or flattes, there lieth an even or flat land, about twenty miles great, inhabited by the Ouetacaters most cruel Barbarians. Ouetacates. THis people make wars, not only against their neighbours, but also one against the other, as likewise against all strangers. They suffer no man to deal or traffic with them, and being hardly beset by the enemies (although never overcome) they can run so fast away, that they seem in a manner to surpass the wild Hart, as it is seen by their hunting of wild beasts. They go naked like other Brasilians, and let their hair grow long, down to the middle of their bodies, contrary to all other Brasilians: yet they cut it away on the fore part of their heads, and behind in their necks, as the rest do. These cruel Cannibals dwell in a small, but an invincible country: they eat raw flesh like dogs and wolves, they have a several speech different from their neighbours, and because of their cruelty they have but little of our wares brought unto them, and that they have, they get it in exchange, for certain green feathers. This exchange is done one standing distant from the other at the least an hundred paces, showing each other their wares without speaking one word, and each of them laying their wares in a certain place appointed: they take it away, giving no longer credit one to the other, then for the time that they have exchanged their wares: after that being returned to their places, they to then best to rob each other of his merchandise, wherein the Ouetacaters, running faster than the other, and faster than hounds, do oftentimes win the prize. Being past this country of the Ouetacaters, you come to another province called Maq-He, which is likewise inhabited by cruel Barbarians, which nevertheless cannot sleep nor rest in peace, for their bad neighbours the Ouetacater●. Upon this coast lieth a great high sienie rock made like a tower, whereon when the sun shineth, it glisters like Sinarag●u● whereby many have thought it to be a reck of Sinaragdus stones, and therefore by the Frenchmen and Spaniards it is called M●nsis, that is, Sinaragdu●. It is not possible neither by ship nor on foot, to get unto that reck, because of the cliffs wherewith it is compassed, and being by it, there is no ways or means to get upon it. About this country lieth three small unhabited Islands, called Maghensis full of birds, which are so tame, that men take them with their hands, and kill them with staves. From thence you go to Cape Frio, a very good haven, & well known by means of the French traffic, whereabouts the ●ou●up●nambau●●, friends to the Frenchmen do inhabit: about this Cape are many great whales, in Latin called Prestis, and in Dutch Sword-fish, yet they are no sword fishes, for that their jaws are full of teeth like Saws. There are likewise on this Cape many Parrots, in as great abundance as crows with us: about this Cape lieth the creak by the Barbarians called Ganabara, and by the Portugese's Rio de Gane●r● because it was discovered in the first month of the year, and the Bayase●moza: this creak is well known to the Frenchmen, because they traffic thither, and therein had made a fort, it lieth under three & twenty degrees, on the South side of the Equinoctial line. right under Tropicus Capricor● it is in the entry six Spanish miles broad, and further in but three or four miles broad, and there lieth smaller hills then at the entry. The mouth of this creak is very dangerous, for that if you leave the sea, you must sail by three unhabited Islands, where it is great fortune but the ships do strike in pieces upon the rocks and cliffs: you must likewise pass before a point, not above three hundred paces broad, which hangeth from a high hill, having the form of a Pyramids, which not only seemeth very great, but far off showing as if it were made by man's art, which by reason of the roundness, as also because it is like a tower, is by the Frenchmen called le pot de Buere, that is, the Butter pot: a little further in the creak is an even rock, about a hundred and twenty paces great, by the Frenchmen called Retire or Mouse fall, to which Villagagno at his first arrival brought all his necessaries and provision, thinking thereon to build a fort, but the waves drove him back again: about half a mile further lieth the Island wherein the Frenchmen did dwell, which before their arrival was not inhabited, and is in compass about a thousand paces, yet the breadth is six times more than the length, all compassed about with cliffs, as also with water, in such sort, that the ships cannot come at it but with great danger, only in one place, and that with small boats, whereby it appeareth that this Island by reason of the situation, is very strong: on both sides of this Island there standeth a little hill, whereupon the Governor had made his house, and on a Rock about fifty or sixty foot high in the middle of the Island, he had placed his Court or Castle called Coligni, in honour of the Admiral of France, that had sent him thither. In other plain fields about the same, were the rest of the Frenchmens houses made round, and covered with leaves or boughs, being in all about eighty men. 10000 paces, or two Spanish miles and ½ further from this Island, lieth another very fruitful Island, in compass about three French miles, called the great Island, inhabited by Tououpinamba●●i●s, great friends to the Frenchmen, to whom they oftentimes went to fetch meal and other necessaries: there are likewise in this creak many other small and unhabited Islands, where there are many good oysters, the Barbarians dive under the water, & with their hands bring up certain great stones, whereat there hangeth great numbers of Oysters, and so fast cleaved to the stone, that they can hardly get them off, very good to eat, some of them having small Pearls within them: they are by the Barbarians called Leripes. This water is full of strange fishes, specially Barbels and Sea Swine: there are likewise whales with very fat and thick skins: there runneth likewise into this creak out of the middle part of the land, two fresh rivers, upon both the sides whereof lieth many villages of the Barbarians: ten or fifteen miles further along the coast, towards the river de Plata, or the straits of Magellana, there is another great creak, by the Frenchmen called Vasarum, whereunto they use to sail, as they do to the other which they first took in. Hereafter followeth the manner and customs of the people. THe Toupinambaultiis are not much unlike our people, well proportioned of body and limb, but stronger and healthsomer than we, and less subject unto sickness: among them are found few lame cripples, blind, or misshapen men, although there are of them that live to the age of an hundred and twenty years, accounting their years by the Moons, few of them likewise having grey hairs, which is a certain sign of the temperateness of that land, as having no extreme cold, nor excessive heat, having green trees, herbs, and fields all the year through, and because they live without care they show always of one age, for they have no hurtful poison nor foul water to drink, whereby all diseases do grow: they have likewise no passions or afflictions of mind in their countries, which move, vex, and consume both the spirits and bodies, as not knowing of any favours, covetous desires, chide, hate, or envy, which (but to our shame) consumeth the Christians. As touching the colour of their bodies, they are not altogether black, but brown like the Spaniards, because of the heat of the sim: they go all naked as they came out of their mother's wombs, not once shaming thereat, unless it be at banquets, or when they go to wars: there are some of them that bind two great leaves together, therewith to cover their privy members, not so much for their credit, but because they have either some deformity, or else disease therein, which oftentimes happeneth among them, they are not rough nor hairy, as some men describe them, for they suffer no hair to hang upon their bodies, for that as soon as they perceive it, they pluck it forth either with their nails, or shears, which they have either of the Frenchmen, or the Portugese's, which they pull not only from their chins, but also from their eye brows, eye lids, which maketh them for the most part seem fearful and ugly. The hinder part of their heads is covered with hair: the young boys until they come to man's state, we are their hair from the crown of the head, down to their necks, but all their foreheads shaven, as if it were a friars crown, on the hinder part of their heads they let the hair grow, after the manner of our ancestors, which were all shorn only in their necks, and that was rounded. They have likewise for a custom, that they bore holds in their boys underlippes, wherein they stick sharp bones, as white as ivory, which they take out and put in as often as they will, and being older, they take away the bones, and in steed thereof wear green jaspis stones, being a kind of bastard Emerald, inwardly flat, with a thick end, because they shall not fall out: some wear such stones that are sharp, and of a finger long, when they take out the stones, they play with their tongues in the hole, which is most ugly to behold, for that it seemeth they have two mouths: some of them wear not only this stone through their lips, but also through both their cheeks: touching their noses they are flat, which they cause to grow so by force when they are young, contrary to us, which desire strait noses, but they esteem their flat noses for a beauty, they paint their bodies with many colours, specially above all others, their legs with a black colour, with the sap of a certain herb by them called Genipat, so that a far off they seem to have black boots, or strait hose, like the priests in our countries, the blackness of this sap cleaveth so fast on, that if they wash themselves for the space of ten or fifteen days together, yet it will hardly come off. They have likewise necklaces of eight fingers long, made of bones, as white as Alabaster, which they call jaci, according to their form, which they put upon cotton strings, and wear them about their arms, as also other flat and round bones, like stivers, certain pieces of money in Holland, which being bored through the middle, and hanged one by one upon strings, they wear them in such sort as we wear chains of gold, which they call Bouse. Besides this, they make certain round beads of black shining wood, which they tie together upon strings, and wear them likewise about their necks, which shine as black and glistering as if they were jet. They have likewise many Hens of our countries, which the Portugese's brought thither, from the which they pull the small white feathers, which with irons they hack and make soft, and then colour them red: which done, they anoint their bodies with gum, and strew the feathers therein, whereby they look like new hatched birds, whereof this opinion hath risen by some men that have first gone into those Countries, and seeing them dressed in that manner) that they wereso by nature. They dress their foreheads with feathers of divers colours, very cunningly placed together, like the French gentlewomen, that ware periwigs of strange hair: these apparrels and ornaments of feathers and stones, as also the rattles wherewith they make a noise, with their wooden halberdes, and many other things to them belonging, you may see at Doctor Paludanus house: those crowns on their heads they call jempenambi, in their ears likewise they wear certain white bones, not much unlike those which the children wear in their lips. In Brasilia there are certain black Birds like Crows, by them called Toucan, which have certain rings about their necks, of yellow and red feathers, which they flay, and dry the skins, and being dry, are likewise called Toucan, which they wear upon each Cheek, sticking them on with ware, and when they go to wars, or to a banquet, when they mean to kill a man and to eat him, according to their manner, because they will be after the finest sort, they put on that kind of apparel made of feathers, with hoods upon their heads, and things made of green, red, blue, and other colours of feathers, about their arms very cunningly set together, which by us could not be mended, showing as if they were of wrought Velvet, as Paludanus can show you. Such feathers likewise they bind upon their Halberds, which are likewise almost like a black Spit, Lap of hard wood, made red or black. They wearelikewise on their shoulders certain mantles of Eastrige feathers (which is a sign that they have Eastriges) that are very cunningly set together, and hang long about them, by them called A●aroy: such as will among them be accounted manly and stout, & have the report to have killed & eaten many men, they cut great slashes in their breasts, hips, and thighs, whereby they make the flesh to rise, which they cover with a certain powder, and make them look black, which colour never goeth off during their lives, whereby a far off they seem to have cut leather jerkins on their bodies, such as the Switsers use to wear. When they will hold any drunken feast, or dancing, whereunto they are much given, to increase their mirth, besides the great noise and cry which they ordinarily make, they have a certain kind of hollow fruit, which Theretus calleth Ahonay, the pith whereof being taken out, some of them are filled with stones, and some without, and so are put upon strings of cotton wool, which they tie about their legs, dancing therewith, as our jugglers and morris dancers in these countries dance with bells: likewise they carry in their hands certain dried goords, which they fill with stones, & having a stick in the end, make a noise therewith, as our children do with a blather full of stones: which instrument with them is called Maraca: the women go naked like the men, and pull away their hair from the eyebrows, and eyelids, but wear it on their heads like our women, which they wash and comb derie often, and tie it up with red cotton hairelaces, as our country women use to do, but most part of them use to let it hang down about their shoulders, wherein they take great pleasure: the women neither boar lips nor cheeks, but only their ears, with so wide holes, that a man may thrust his finger through, in them they hang certain long things, which reach unto their breasts or shoulders, like bloodhounds or water spaniels ears. They paint their faces with all kinds of colours, which their neighbours and other women do for them: in the middle of the cheek they make a round circle, drawing lines from it of divers colours, until their face is full, not leaving so much undone as the eye lids: they wear bracelets of white bones, cut thin like plates, very cunningly joined together with wax and gum, & also white necklaces, which they call Bonze, & wear them not about their necks like the men, but only their arms, for the which cause they are very desirous of the glass beads of all colours such as we have here in these countries, by them called Maurobi, it is to be wondered at, that if any apparel be given unto them, they will not wear it, excusing themselves & saying that it is not their custom, but had rather wear stones & other things upon their bodies, than such clothes: they have a custom that in every river where they come, they steep unto the water and wash their hands, & many times they duck into the water at that least ten times a day, to wash themselves like birds, and if they were appareled & should put it off as often as they do so, it would be over troublesome unto them: likewise the women slaves being compelled to wear clothes, many evenings to pleasure themselves, do put off their clothes, smock, and all, and so run naked about the country: I must speak somewhat of their little children, of the age of four or five years old, which being fat of body, with white bones in their lips, their hair shorn, and their bodies painted, run playing in great numbers about the country leaping and dancing, most wonderful and very pleasant to behold: & lastly it is to be noted, that many are of opinion, that the nakedness of their women should be an occasion to provoke them unto lust, which notwithstanding is found contrary, for that by reason of their unseemly nakedness, the men rather have a loathing then a lust, and to the contrary, the great and costly apparel, as gowns and petticoats, counterfeit hair, the sumptuous dressing of the head, the chains and bracelets of gold, which our women use, do more provoke and entice men unto lust, then simple nakedness, although it is against the ordinance of God, and therefore not to be commended, as not being convenient, but as therein they go beyond the limits of God's word, our women also do pass the bounds of godly matrons, and sin no less than they in such he athenish customs. Of the meat and drink of the Brasilians. THe Brasilians have two sorts of roots, called Aypi and Maniot, which being planted, in three or four Months become a foot and a half long, and as big as a man's thigh, which being taken out of the earth, are by the women dried by the fire upon a Boucano, and then grated upon sharp stones, as we do Nutmegs, whereof proceedeth a certain white meal, and being moist, is of taste like our new starch, which to prepare, they have great earthen Pots, wherein they seeth it, stirring it continually, until it be as thick as pap, yet they make two kinds of meal, one sodden till it be hard, which they call Ouyentan, that is, hard meal, which because it will continue long, is carried with them into the wars, the other is less sodden, and somewhat softer, called Ouypou, that is, soft meal, which tasteth like white bread bran, specially when it is eaten fresh, and although both these kinds of meal being fresh, are of a very good taste, and strong meat, yet are they not fit to make bread, they may well knead it as we do wheats or rye, and it will be very white, but being baked, it will on the out side burn and become dry, and inwardly continue meals as it was at the first: with the broth of fat flesh. They make good pap thereof, very pleasant of taste, seeming like sodden rice, by them called Mingant, with their hands they press certain juice out of this root, which is as white as milk, which being put in earthen pots and set in the sun, it runneth together like curds, which they put into earthen dishes, & fry them as we do eggs. The root Aypi is much used to be roasted and eaten, as being soft, and tasteth like chestnuts, the other must be made into meal and sodden, otherwise it is dangerous to be eaten: both the steels of the roots are not much unlike each other, being as great as a small juniper tree, and leaves like Poenie, the strangeness of these roots consisteth in the great numbers, for that the branches (that are as brickle as the stalks of hemp) being broke into divers pieces, and so thrust deep into the earth, without any other usage, within three or four months after do bring forth great quantities of those roots: they have likewise much Indian wheat, by them called Anati, and by others Maiz, whereof they make meal, which they bake and eat. Touching their drink, which they make of those two roots, and also of Maiz, it is made in this sort by their women, being of opinion, that if it should we done by men, that it would have no taste. They cut the roots in small pieces, as we do turnops, which they seethe in yellow pots until they be soft, which done they set them from the fire, and then set themselves round about the pots, chawing the sodden roots, which they throw into another pot made ready for the purpose, and set upon the fire, wherein they are sodden once again, and continually stirred, until they think them to be enough, which done, they are poured into other fats made of reeds, not being clarified, and a third time sodden and skimmed, they cover the reeds, and keep it to drink, as their manner is, and as hereafter I will show you: in the same manner the women make a drink of Maiz or Indian wheat, which they call C●ou-in thick and troubled, in a manner tasteth like milk, and because this Maiz and roots are there in great abundance they make as much drink as they will, which is by them likewise done, keeping it till they come altogether to drink, and when they come to the drunken feasts, and that they mean to kill a man and eat him, then the women make fires about the vessels, whereby the drink becometh warm, and then it is first drawn, and the women filling a gourd half full, give it to the men as they are dancing, which they drink at one draft, and that so often and so long, that they empty all their vessels, as Letio himself hath seen (from whom I gathered this discourse) that for the space of three days they have done nothing but drink, and never ceased, and being so full that they could bear no more, yet would they not leave off, but still keep company: at those drink they are merry, singing, leaping, dancing, and exhorting each other to be valiant in arms, and to kill many of their enemies. That done, they run one after the other like crane's in their flight, leaping until all their vessels are empty, at the which feasts, especially when they mean to kill and eat a man, they are dressed in fine feathers and with necklaces, and bracelets: in their dances there are no women coupled with them, but every one danceth by himself, and these drink are observed when those of one village meet together, and neighbours drink one with the other, sitting in their hanging beds, but with more good fellowship, wherewith there are two things to be considered, first, that the Brasilians do never drink when they eat, as we do, nor when they drink, they never eat: secondly, that they eat without word speaking, and if they have any thing to say each unto other, they do it after their meat, they use likewise no certain hour to eat in, but when they are hungry they fall to their meat, as well by night as by day, yet they are very sober in eating, washing hands and mouths both before and after meat, which I think they do to take the clamines of the meat off from their fingers. Of certain great beasts and Crocodiles in Brasilia. FIrst you must understand that in all Brasilia there is not any four footed beasts like these in our countries, they have great numbers of one kind which they call Tapirouslou, of a middle stature, between a cow & an ass, this beast hath reddish & long hair, like a cow, but hath no horns, and a shorter neck, long & hanging ears, smaller and longer legs, a whole foot like an ass, so that it is not wrong named to be called a cow ass, yet different from both, first because it hath a short tail (as many beasts in America have no tails at all) & sharp teeth; yet without any courage, for it runs from a man: the Brasilians shoot at this beast with their arrows, or else take them in pits, which they dig for the purpose, & esteem much of it, because of the skin: they having flayed it off, they cut the hide in round pieces, which they dry in the Sun, whereof they make buklers, wherewith they defend them selves from the enemy's arrows, for that by reason of the heat of the sun they become so hard, that no arrow will pierce them, be they never so fiercely drawn. The flesh of the beast tasteth much like our bores flesh, and by the Brasilians it is roasted upon the coals, and so kept, for that because they have no salt, they all broil their meat upon wooden gardirons, and so keep it: in every village you find such girdirons, which oftentimes he full of men's flesh. Secondly, they have a certain kind of Hart, by them called Seovaslous, yet less than ours, and with shorter horns, with long hair like goats: and wild American Swine, by them called ●aroslou, which is as big of body, ears, head, and feet, as ours are, as also the like teeth, which are very dangerous, but because it is leaner and ranker, and grinneth fearfully, therefore it is misshapen. This beast by nature hath a hole in the back, as the sea Swine have in their heads, whereat they receive and cast forth their breath. There is likewise a fine coloured beast, called Agouti, which is a kind of hart, with cloven feet, a short tail, with a nose and cares much like a hare, very pleasant and savoury of taste: there are also two or three kinds of beasts called Tapitis, not much unlike our hares, red of hair: in the woods are great rats, of body and hair like Ekehornes, in taste not much unlike our coneys, Pag. or Pague, a beast of the height and greater than an indifferent Grayhound, with an evil favoured head, a fair skin, speckled white and black, of taste much like veal. There is likewise another beast called Sarigoy, which because it stinketh, the Barbarians will not eat, yet it is good & savoury flesh, specially when the fat of the kidneys (wherein the stink lieth) is taken away. There are also Tatous or Armadillen, whereof in other places I have spoken, which are of very white, good, and savoury flesh: also there are certain Crocodiles, which they call jacare, as big as a man's leg, and indifferent long, not hurtful, they come into their houses, where the children play with them without any danger. The Crocodiles in those countries have a wider mouth, high feet, the tail neither round nor sharp, but very thin at the end: there are likewise divers kinds of Easts speckled like our little ones, & of four or five foot long, in thickness correspondent, fearful to behold, but keep in rivers & moors like frogs, doing no hurt, they call them Tovous: being sleyed & sodden, they surpass all meats for taste & goodness, their flesh being as white as a capon's flesh, sweet, short, & excellent good. They have great toads, which the Toupinambaviltu eat whole being roasted, so that they are not poison like our toads, they eat likewise snakes of the bigness of a man's arm, & five foot long, but of no great taste, there are also many other snakes, specially in the rivers, that are as green as grass, long & thin, whose sting is very dangerous: there are also in some meres of woods, divers great and dangerous Easts. johanes Lerus writeth, that passing through a wood, he met an East, as big as a man's body, & of five or six foot long, all covered with white scales like oyster shells, which lifted up one of her forefeet, and casting up her head, looked upon him with staring eyes, breathing at the mouth most fearful to behold, and after he and his company had stayed a quarter of an hour to behold it, it clome up the hill with such a noise over and through the trees, that not any Hart running through the wood, could make a greater noise. There is yet in this country another kind of strange beast called jan-ovare, feeding only upon the prey: this beast for length of legs and swiftness, is like the Grayhound, but under the chin it hath a beard or certain long hair, & a speckled skin, like a Linx, and in other parts not unlike the Linx: this beast is much feared by the Brasilians, for that whatsoever it taketh, it teareth it in pieces, and spoileth it like a Lion, feeding thereof: the Indians take this beast in pits, & to revenge themselves, they cause her therein to pine to death, whereby they double her pain. Méerecats are there in great abundance, that are small & black, by them called Cay, and among the rest, one kind of Méerecat called Sagovin. of a very fair coloured hair, as big, and of hair as an Ekehorne, but as touching the form of the chaps, breast, and neck & other parts, altogether like a lion, being one of the arrest little beasts in all that country, but for the tenderness thereof it cannot be brought over sea. There is yet another very strange beast, by the Indians called Hay. as big as a dog, with a face like a Méerecat, & a hanging belly like a sow that hath new farrowed▪ of hair dark white, all black, with a long tail, with rough feet like a bear, long claws, when it lieth in the woods, it is very wild, but if they take it, it will be tamed, the naked Tovoupinambaultiers play not willingly with it, because it hath very sharp claws: no man (as the Indians say) did ever see this beast wild or tame, to eat any thing, but as they think, it liveth by the air, whereof I have spoken in other places. Lastly there is yet another strange beast called Coaty, as high as a Hare, with short & speckled hair, small sharp eyes, a head very small, & down from the eyes a snout that riseth up, of a foot long & more, round like a stick, & somewhat small at the end, in such manner, that it is all of one bigness, with so narrow a mouth, that a man can hardly thrust his little finger therein, very strange to behold: and being taken, it pulleth all his four feet together and falleth either upon the one side or the other, and will not rise, unless they give it mice, whereof it liveth in the wood: this country aboundeth with all kind of foul, whereof some are to be eaten, and some not, as Indian Hens, by them called Arignow Oussou, and common hens of these countries, first brought thither by the Portugese's, and among them the white hens are much esteemed, to pull out their feathers, and to die them red, therewith to dress themselves, yet they eat them not, thinking likewise that their eggs are poison, which they fear, because they see the Frenchmen eat them: whereby it cometh that in the villages where no stranger's traffic, there are so great numbers of hens, that you may buy one for a penny: besides the hens, they bring up many ducks, which they call Vpec but because they are of this mind, that if they should eat such slow birds, they should likewise become slow, and so might be taken by their enemies, therefore they eat none of them, nor any other beast that goeth softly, nor fishes that swim slowly. There are likewise many speckled hens, of three sorts, all black, with white spots, very pleasant of taste, like pheasants: there are also two kinds of fair cocks called Moutor, as great as peacocks, speckled with white spots, and black feathers. Macocava & Yamboun-Ouaslou. are two kinds of partridges, as big as ducks, and of taste like pheasants, wood Doves, Turtledoves, and yet another kind of partridges, all of one taste: of fowls that are not eaten, there are many, as divers kinds of parrots, whereof some are so fair, that fairer cannot be found, specially 2. sorts, called Aras & Canide, the feathers whereof they use for their apparel, hats, & arm bands. They have very fair red, blue, and gold yellow shining feathers, whereof divers of them sing. Besides those, they have four other kinds of Parrots, whereof one kind is very little brought hither, by them called Aa●ourous, which have their heads parted in three colours, as red, yellow, and violet, the wings all red, the tail long and yellow, and the body green, which learn so perfectly to speak, as if it were men: we read of one that when it was bidden, would dance, skip, sing, and play all the parts of the wild Barbarians: being carried with them into the wars & commanded to be still, it would be as quiet as if it had been dumb, neither stirring soot nor tongue: such Parrots as are brought hither, they call Marganas, and esteem them not, for they are as common there, as pigeons with us, which although they have a certain hard flesh like heathcocks, yet there are many of them eaten in those countries: there are likewise little Parrots, which are brought hither, but among the chief fowls of that country, there is a very small bird called Toucan, as big as a pigeon, black like a Raven, only the breast, which is yellow, with a round red ring about her neck, as I said in another place, which they wear upon their cheeks, specially when they go to any feasts or dancings, whereupon it hath the name of Toucan-Tabourace, that is, the feathers to dance with: the bill of this bird is greater than all the body, and is one of the strangest things that ever was seen: there is another of the greatness and colour like a Merlin, only upon the breast, which is as red as an o'er blood, it is also by the Indians flayed, and the skin dried like the Toucan. which bird they call Panon: there is another like a Lister, as red as scarlet, which they call Quempian. I must not forget a wonderful strange little bird, no bigger than a Scalebiter, or a horse fly, with white shining feathers, which hath so great and pleasant a voice in singing, that it resembleth our nightingale, in such sort, the it may be said it were impossible that out of so small a body, there could issue so great a voice, which bird by the Indians is called Gonambuch. There are yet many other kinds of birds, of colour red, white, violet, & purple, etc. all much differing from ours, & needless to rehearse. There is one among the rest which the Indians do much regard, not suffering it to be hurt, or to be taken, as thinking it a bird of some secret divination, it is as great as a pigeon, of a grey colour, crying very heavily, which is heard more by night than by day: the Tovepinambaultii are of opinion, that those birds are sent unto them by their friends that are dead, to bring them good news, and provoke and stir them to be of good courage against their enemies in the field, they think also, so they take good regard unto this Birds song, and fortune to be slain in the wars, that after they are dead, they shall go unto their forefathers, beyond the hills there for ever to be merry, and continually to dance: They certainly persuade themselves that those birds bring news from their friends, and that thereby they should be merry, and of better courage, so that they take great regard unto their cries. There are likewise in this country many bats as big as crows, which by night enter into the houses, and finding any man lying naked, they suck the blood out of their toes in great abundance, whereof in another place I will say more. Their Bees are less than ours, like black flies, and make their honey in hollow Trees: the Indians have good knowledge how to get their ware and their honey: they use not the wax to burn, but only to stop their reeds, wherein they keep their feathers from the worms. Touching small worms like flies or Mites, as also scorpions and earth crevishes, which are hurtful unto men, it is needless to write: they have divers fishes, whereof many are common here with us, as two sorts of Barbels, the one called Rurema. the other Parati, both being sodden or roasted, are of a very good taste, which because they swim in companicars, e by them killed with darts, sometimes two or three together. The meat or substance of those fishes is very tender and short, wherefore the Indians dry them, and make flower & meal thereof. There are three other kinds of very great fishes, whereof one is called Camoroupovy Ouassou, the other Ouara, the third Acara Ouassou, all veeie good of taste, & good to be eaten: there is a certain kind of flat fish, called Acarapep, which being sodden yieldeth a certain yellow fat, which they keep for sauce. This fish likewise is very good meat, Acarabouten is a slimy fish of a red colour, it is better than the other, but not so savoury in the mouth, Pira-Ipochi is a long fish like an eel, but not to be eaten: the Rochets which are taken in the Créeke of Ganabara, and thereabouts in the sea, are much greater than ours, with two long horns sticking out before, and five or six claws in the belly, which men would think not to be natural, but rather artificial, with a long thin venomous tail. In their Rivers are many strangs fishes, specially one called Tamovata, which is a handful long, with a most great and monstrous head, others called Pana, Pana, which likewise hath a great and monstrous head, yet both good to eat and very savoury. A description of certain trees and fruits in those countries. FIrst there are many Brasil trees, whereby the country hath taken the name, this tree by them is called Araboutan, because of tha great and thick branches, not much unlike our oaks, some of them are at the least three fathoms thick, their leaves are like box or palmetrées, but yield no fruit, the wood would with great labour and pain be conveyed aboard the ships, if the wild people did not help them, for the merchants should hardly lad a ship in a whole year, because of the hardness and troublesomeness in the cleaving, as also that there are no beasts to draw or carry it to the ships, but must be brought down by men, which for clothes, shirts, hats, knives, and such like things, are hired to cleave and round it, and to bring it out of the woods far within the land, upon their shoulders, to the ships: it is much burnt in that country, and is of nature dry, whereby when it it is burnt, it maketh little smoke, the ashes whereof yield a certain red colour: the Tovoupinambaultii wondered much what our men do with all that wood, ask if there were no wood in our countries for to burn, and answer was made unto them, that we used it to die withal, as they died their ropes or strings: this is showed in another place. Beside this Brasill tree, there are five kinds of Palm trees, whereof the principal is called Gerau, the other Iri, of these trees I have sufficiently declared in the Histories of the East Indies, as also in the description of the African coast: there is a tree called Ayri, a kind of Ebon wood, with leaves, not much unlike the palm trees, the body covered with thick thorns, the fruit thereof indiffeeent great, wherein there is a pith as white as snow, but not good to eat: the wood is black and very hard, whereof the Barbarians make their halbeards, coluen & arrows, it is likewise so heavy, that it sinketh under the water: there is also much wood in this country, whereof some is yellow like Box, some violet, some white like paper, some pale red, some varnish red, and some dark red, whereof likewise they make Halberds: another wood is found therein called Copau, whereof the trees are like our walnut trees, but bear no nuts, the wood being plained, hath grains like Walnut tree: there are many other kinds of trees, whereof some have leaves round like pence, others great, of a foot and a half long, as also a tree which is very pleasant to behold, and so sweet of smell, that it excelleth the rose, specially when it is cut: to the contrary there groweth another tree called Aou-at, which wood being cut or burnt, stinketh so unreasonably, that no man can abide it: it hath leaves like our apple tree leaves, and a fruit not unlike the Egiel, the nut whereof is so venomous, that being eaten, it worketh presently, but because the Indians make their rattles of this fruit, they esteem it much: Besides this, there groweth in Brasilia many kinds of fruits, and apples, pleasant to look on, specially on the sea side, but not to be eaten, and very dangerous, some are like mispelles, whereof the Indians warned our men, that they should not eat them. Hivourae is a barley about half a finger thick, good of taste, specially being fresh, it is a kind of pox wood, and by the Indians used for a certain disease called Pians, which is as dangerous with them, as the pox with us, there is likewise a tree by them called Choyne, of a reasonable height, for leaves, form, and greenness like the Bay trees, the fruit as great as a child's head, as big as an Ostrich egg, but not to be eaten: the Tonoupinambaultians thereof make certain rattles, by them called Muaracas, & of it also they make vessels to drink, with such like things, cleaveing them in the middle. The tree by them called Sabaneay, beareth fruit bigger than a man's two fists, whereof they make drinking cups, and is much like a cup: in this nut there are certain piths, not unlike for form and taste to the almond. There is an other tree in bigness like a Sorben, the fruit whereof is by them called Aca iou, of form and greatness like a hens egg, which being ripe, is of a gold yellow colour like a quince, very good and savoury to eat, having a certain sharp taste, and in it a juice that cooleth heat, but because this fruit is not easy to be gathered, as being high trees, the meere-cattes eat them, and such as fall to the ground, are the Indians part. Paco-aire is a sprig about ten or twelve foot high: the body as thick as a man's thigh, but yet so soft that it may be cut in two with one blow: the fruit thereof is by them called Paco, which are of a handful long, in form like cucumbers, and being ripe, are of the same colour: this fruit groweth 20. or 25. upon a branch, which the Indians pluck off and carry into their houses, they are very pleasant of taste, whereof you may read at large in the East Indian Histories: the sprigs that bring forth cotton, are there in great abundance, being of an indifferent greatness, and have leaves like the yellow bells of the ash trees, from whence there groweth an apple as big as Bulken, which being ripe, openeth in four parts, and yieldeth forth cotton, the Barbarians call it Ameni iou, in the middle of which wool are certain black kernels, pressed together like men's kidneys, and as big as beans, this cotton is gathered by the Brasilian women, which they spin, and thereof make many things, Citrons and Lemons by the Portugese's brought into those countries, grow there in great abundance, very pleasant and good: also many sugar canes, whereby much sugar is brought from thence into Portugal: it is much to be wondered at, that seeing there is so sweet a substance in those reeds while they are fresh and new gathered, that being but a little withered or put into the water, they do presently convert into so sour a substance, that it is as good Vinegar as any can be found. Besides these sugar reeds, there groweth other reeds as thick as a man's leg, which being green, are with one blow easily cut in two pieces, but when they are dry, they become very tough and hard, whereof they make arrows, & sticks to carry in their hands: in that country likewise is much Mastic, & excellent good Gum (which was ordinarily brought out of Chio) also divers and innumerable sorts of sweet smelling flowers & herbs. And although that about this Cabo de Frio there is much thunder, rain, and great winds, as lying under Tropicus Capricorn, yet because there falleth no frost, snow, nor hail, therefore the trees are there always green, as they are with us in May: and in December when the days are shortest and coldest here with us, they are there at the longest and hottest, but it is to be understood, that they never fall out to be so long or short as they are with us, for they have the day and night of an evener length than we, and a more temperate air. The fruits of this country are many, whereof Ananas is the best, the leaves whereof are like the leaves of Iris or aloes, a little bowing, and in manner round, the fruit is long like Cucumbers or distaves, when they are green they press a certain juice out of them, which tasteth as pleasantly as Maluesie, of this fruit I have already spoken in the description of the east Indians, so that at this time it is needless to write any more thereof, as being there to be read: there is an herb in Brasilia, by the Tououpinambaulti● called Petum, which we call Tabacum or Nicovana, and now it groweth in our gardens, but not so good, nor so strong as theirs: this herb is sufficiently described by Clusius and other writers, & very well known, it hath leaves like our dock leaves, or Consolida Maior by the Brasilians it is much esteemed, which they gather and make into balls, and being dried, take four or five of the leaves, and rubbing them together, they make them burn, the smoke whereof they receive in to their bodies, which doth so fill & nourish them, that having received in the smoke, they will go two or three days when they are in the wars, and neither eat nor drink, which Le●ius likewise hath tried, as also, that the same smoke maketh men avoid sleugine, out of their heads, & therefore the Indians wear bundles thereof about their necks, to smell unto it: the roots Maniot and Aypi I have already described. There is likewise another kind of root called Hecich, whereof there are three kinds, some being sodden are blue, others yellow like quinces, and the rest white like parseneps, they are all good of taste, specially the yellow, which being roasted, are as good as pears, & are there in as great abundance as turnops in Savoy, about two handfuls thick, and a foot and a half long: the herb runneth along upon the ground, and hath leaves like cucumbers or great spinach, but differing in colour, nearer to the broom or white wild vine leaves: because these roots never yield seed, they are cut in pieces and planted n the earth: he that desireth to know more hereof, let him read Clusius his works, and they will satisfy his desire. There is also a kind of nut (by them called Manobi) which groweth under the ground and hang by little threads one fast to an other, having a substance within them like to our hazel nuts, of a brown whitish colour, with husks like the shells of pease. Touching Brasilia pepper, which also at this present day groweth in our gardens, and very hot it is, by Mathiolus called S●iquastium, and Brasilia beans and pease, whereof needeth no great description, as being commonly known. To conclude you must understand, that seeing Brasilia hath no wild beasts, fowls, fishes, nor living creatures, such as are in Europa, neither yet tree, nor herbs, only pulcelen, basil, and vaarne or felix, which grow in some places thereof, we may say with the Prophet David in his 104. psalm: O Lord, thy works most strange and wonderful, both far & near are seen & known right well How wisely thou all things dost bring to pass, whereby all creatures thy great goodness feel, And who can either number, writ, or show, the kinds of beasts that are in land and sea. And surely these people might well be accounted happy, if they had the knowledge of the true and everliving God. A brief discourse of their wars and arms. TOuching their wars, they use them not, thereby to get riches by force, or to enlarge their dominions, but only of mere affection and desire they have to revenge the deaths of their forefathers, which by their enemies have from time to time been taken and devoured, wherein they are so zealous, that as many of their enemies as they take are sure to die the like death, and to be eaten by them, and having once begun wars with their neighbours, they will never be friends again, but where or howsoever they can entrap or catch each other, they are sure to die: The manner of the Tououpinambaul●ers wars are in this Although they have no Kings nor Princes among them, not one of them being of greater account than the rest, yet they have this custom, that they honour their ancients, by them called Peore ru Picheb, and in every village they are ready to do as they command them, which their ancients many times, walking among them, or else sitting in their hanging beds of cotton, take occasion to use this manner of speech unto the people saying, Are not our forefathers that have fought with, overcome, slain and eaten so many of our enemies, an example unto us, not to stay continually at home? shall we suffer our nation, which in times past was so fearful to our enemies that they durst not look them in the face, be thus brought into so open shame and reproach? that it shall be said our enemies came to assail us within our own houses? shall we by our negligence and slowness stay and watch till the Marga●aters and the Peros Engaipa, which are cruel Portugese's, do first show their powers and execute their tyrannies upon us? & having spoken in that manner, he clappeth his hands upon his buttocks, and crying out saith, Erima, Erima, Tovoupinambaults, conomis, ovassou, Tan, Tan, etc. that is, Behold my friends, you strong young men, is this convenient to be done, let us rather arm ourselves, and by force be overthrown, or else revenge our injuries received. These and such like Orations, which endure for the space of six hours at the least do the Elders use unto the people, which they with great patience and quietness hearken unto, and therewith are so encouraged, that presently, with all speed they assemble themselves together in a certain place, and in great numbers with sword and holberdes (by them called Tacapes) of red or black wood, very heavy like bore trees, about five or six foot long, round at the end like a spit, a foot broad, and the thickness of a thumb in the middle, all the other part sharp. Besides those weapons, they have orapats, which are bows, there are likewise of black or red wood, wherewith they can shoot so sure and certainly, that no man excelleth them, of the which bows and arrows, because there are so many of them brought into these countries, there needeth no great description: withal they have bucklers of the skins of Tapiroussou, broad, flat, and round like the cover of a drum, wherewith they cover not themselves, but use them only to receive their enemy's arrows: these are all the weapons they do commonly use, only that they do put on certain kinds of apparel made of feathers, wherewith they set forth their bodies, otherwise they will not have any thing upon their bodies (were it but a bare shirt) that might be any let or hindrance unto them. And being armed in this manner, they set forward sometimes eight or ten thousand men (with certain women not to fight, but to carry their necessaries & provisions and being in the field, the ancientest among them such as have slain and eaten many of their enemies) are appointed for captains and commanders, after whom the rest follow, and set forward towards the enemy, and although they meet all together without order, yet when they march they place themselves in ranks, the strongest going before, and the rest after them, wherein it is strange, that so many men being together without a general, can so well place themselves, and know when they should set forward. There are some of them that blow in great horns, like our trumpets, which they call Inabia, wherewith they encourage the people, and give them signs of battle, others have pipes or flutes made of their enemy's bones, which at other times they have slain and eaten: whereon all the time of their march they cease not to pipe, thereby to stir their fellows hearts to do the like with their enemies bones that by them should be taken. And if they assail their enemies by water, they keep close to the shore, not daring enter far into the sea, because their scutes which are made of the barks of trees, are not able to endure against a tempest, but serve only in calm weather, each scute holding fifty men, which may easily sit therein and row, with so great swiftness, that it is wonderful. In the manner before rehearsed they travel sometimes ten or twelve miles within their enemy's country, using to march with their strongest men first, leaving the weakest with the women a day or two days journey behind them, marching very quietly entering into certain woods, where they stay & hide themselves for the space of half a day, mean time if they meet with any of their enemies, either men, women, or children, they keep them not prisoners, neither take them with them, but presently kill and roast them upon their boncans or girdirons, and so eat them, which they do, not to be troubled with them when they should enter into the villages of their enemies, which are all without walls, their houses being of 80. or 100 paces long, without doors, placing in steed thereof certain Palm trees or branches of the herb called Pindo: yet there are some villages among them, such as border upon their enemies, that are paled about with boards of six foot high, against the which when they mean to do any exploit, they watch the way that goeth unto the village, where such as issue forth or enter in, fight with them, are taken prisoners, and are killed and eaten. But when they meet in open field, army against army, it is done with such fury and horrible bloodshed, that it is incredible, as joannes Lerius a Burgonian hath personally beheld them, can witness, from whom this is gathered, for that they run with so great fierceness and boldness together, as never was heard of: for (as Lerius writeth) when the Tovoupinambaultiers first perceived their enemies, they made so horrible a cry, as greater is never heard among us when we hunt the wolf, and that so loud, as if at that time it had thundered, it could scarcely have been heard: and approaching nearer unto them, they began a second time to cry, with blowing of horns, and piping on their flutes, calling to their enemies, and showing them the dead bones of their friends, and their teeth, which they do wear about their necks upon strings, at the least two else long: that done, entering into battle, and beginning to shoot, you may see their arrows flee into the air as thick as swarms of flies, with all kind of coloured feathers, which maketh a most pleasant show, if it might be seen without danger: in the which shooting, whosoever is hurt, presently pulleth forth the arrow, and like a mad dog biteth it in pieces, yet he leaveth not off, but still fighteth, as being so cruel and fierce that they never cease fight as long as any strength is in their bodies, never flying: and such as they strike with their wooden halberts, fall presently dead unto the ground, like oxen that are killed by the butcher. This manner of fight was seen by Lerius, to be done by the Tovoupinam baultiers, who after three hours fight had the victory, and after many on both sides were slain and wounded, they brought about thirty men and women prisoners, which they placed in the middle of their battle, the strongest of them being tied with ropes: which done, they returned to the Créeke or entry or Ganabara, of the which prisoners ten of them were bought and sent to Henry the second king of France. Lerius himself bought a woman and her child, and being with him, he thinking to comfort her, telling her he would send her into France, she answered him, that she had rather be eaten by her enemies, or to be let lose, that she might once again help to be revenged on the enemies that have taken her, wherein you may see how stiffly they are bend unto revenge, never forgetting or forgiving any injury whatsoever. The manner how they use their prisoners, and what ceremonies they use in the kill and eating them. THe prisoners being brought home by such as have taken them, are not only well fed, but they give the men, women to bear them company (but not the women men to lie with them) and which is more strange, divers of them that have prisoners will not refuse to give him daughter or sister to wife, which must live truly and honestly with her husband, and because they observe no certain time of the offerings, or butcheries of their prisoners, but sometimes sooner, sometimes later, as they think good, therefore the men prisoners are kept to hunt, fish, and catch birds, and the women to garden, plant, and fish for oysters: and when like swine they are fat and well fed, they are slain and eaten, in manner as followeth. First they certify all the neighbours round about, when, and in what place their feast shall be kept, where there reforteth a great number, both men, women, and children, consuming all the forenoon with drinking, among the which are the prisoners (which know full well that it willbe unto their costs) all beset with feathers, who not only feareth not death, but in dancing, leaping, and drinking excelleth all the rest, in which manner, having consumed at the least six or seven hours, two or three of the strongest among them lay hold upon the prisoner, and therewith bind him about the middle with cotton ropes, or with the barks of a certain tree, by them called juire, which is like a Linden tree, mean while he standeth still and never resisteth them, although both his arms & hands are at liberty: which done, they lead him in that manner round about the village for every man to see him, he not once hanging down his head (as those which in our countries are ready to be executed use to do) but to the contrary with an incredible boldness boasting of his deeds, and telling them that lead him, what he hath done, speaketh unto them in this manner: When I was at liberty, I have many times in this sort bound your friends and kinsmen, and with much more boldness commending himself, and setting forth his actions, turning his face on all sides, and looking about him he speaketh to some one of them and saith, Hearest thou friend, It is I that ate thy father, and to an other, sirrah, it was I that killed thy brother and broiled him upon the coals, and have taken and eaten so many of your people, that I am not able to number them, and be you well assured that my friends the Margaiaters will not leave my death unrevenged, and will once catch some of you, and serve you in the like sort. And in this manner being showed round about the village, in the end, the two men that hold him, stepping back about three else distant from him, pulling the rope wherewith he is bound on both sides so straight, that therewith he standeth fast, and is not able to stir either backward or forward: which done, they bring unto him certain stones or pieces of broken pots, and they that hold him bound in that manner, being covered with bucklers of tap●roussou speak unto him, and ask him if before he die he will revenge his death, wherewith presently in great fury, he throweth stones at them, as also at all others standing round about him, which many times are above four thousand people, not once caring how many of them are hurt or wounded, not although he should break any of their legs with a blow, and having cast stones, potshards, earth, and all whatsoever he can reach: then he that must kill him (having all that day kept himself close, and not once come forth) goeth unto him and saith, Art not thou one of the Margaiaters our enemies? hast not thou thyself taken prisoners and eaten some of our kinsmen and friends? whereunto the prisoner answereth him, and saith, Pa, che, tan, tan, aiouca, a●oupaue, that is, I am he that hath slain and eaten many of your people, and to grieve them the more, he layeth both his hands upon his head, and saith, O how lustily have I therein behaved myself? how earnestly have I pursued you in the battle, and have eaten an innumerable company of you? Wherewith he that shall kill him answereth him and saith: Therefore now seeing you are here, and our prisoner, I will kill you, and your body being roasted, shall likewise be eaten. Whereunto he answereth and saith, Well, what remedy? assure yourself my friends will revenge my death: and while he speaketh he is stricken down with the wooden holbert: and if he had a wife (as during their imprisonment they commonly have) she falleth first upon the dead body, and with a few (although crocodiles) tears she weary over him, for that it is said the Crocodile weary before he devoureth the dead body he hath slain, in the same manner do they, for that the false tears once shed, she would be the first that should eat his flesh: which done, the other women, specially old women, as being most desirous to feed on men's flesh, tell those women that keep the prisoners, that they must make haste to bring the dead body, and hot water with them, wherewith they rub, scrape, and wash the body so clean, that the skin goeth off, the flesh seeming as white as a roasted pig: which done, cometh the master of the prisoner, with as many companions as he thinketh good, and divideth the dead body, as quickly as a Butcher with us should cut up a sheep, or other beast: and as with us when the hunters have killed a Buck, throw the entrails and blood unto the hounds, so those Barbarians anoint their children with the blood of their dead enemy, thereby to provoke them to cruelty and revenge: before the Christians used to those countries, they cut the body in pieces with certain stones, but now they have knives. The man in that sort divided, and the entrails being washed and made clean, the girdirons are looked unto by the other women, that are very desirous of man's flesh, where they fit and lick up the fat that droppeth off the quarters, therewithal most earnestly exhorting and provoking the young men and children to take some more of their enemies, and to bring them such meat. In this sort one, two, or three prisoners, or more, as it falleth out, being slain and roasted, all the company that are present, assemble about their boucans or girdirons of wood, for that the Indians roast no meat upon spits, as some men paint them to do, for that they think it impossible that ever it should be roasted enough being turned round about, where they make great joy, leaping, skipping, and with most fierce countenances beholding the roasted quarters, every man taking a piece, not for hunger, or desire of eating, (as some would think) or because without all doubt man's flesh is very savoury, but rather in respect of revenge, specially the old women, that are most ravenous of man's flesh, for their intent is only to gnaw the flesh of their enemies to the bare bones, thereby to put the rest of the prisoners (as than not slain) in greater fear, for that to satisfy their monstrous and greedy desires, there is not one piece of the whole body, not so much as their finger's ends, nose, and ears, but by them is eaten, (only the veins and the skull, which they keep, as we do dead men's bones in our Churchyards) and show them as signs of their dictories and triumphs. The great bones of their legs and arms are kept to make pipes, and their teeth they put upon strings, which they wear about their necks. Those that have killed them, esteem it for an honourable action, and departing from the rest of their company, cut certain slashes in their breasts, arms, legs, and other fleshy places, wherein they put a certain salve, thereby to make scars and signs thereof in their bodies, upon the which they throw certain black powder which never goeth off, being of opinion that the more strikes he hath in his body, the more men he hath murdered, and for the same is accounted a lusty fellow, and of great courage. And to finish their bloody tragedy, if it fortune the woman (that was given unto the prisoners during his imprisonment for his wife) be with child, they take the child when it is borne (a thing most fearful and horrible to hear, for they never suffer it to grow to years) and eat it, alleging that such children are of their enemies seed. And those Barbarians do not only seek utterly to extinguish their enemies, but would likewise have other strangers and countrymen that come among them to use the same cruelty, and to eat men's flesh, which by some rejecting all humanity, hath been done. ¶ Of the religion of the Brasilians, and the misery or fear where into the poor men are brought by their Caraiben, not acknowledging any God. IN the history of Peru, a province lying on the south side of Brasilia, and bordering upon this Country whereof I speak, is declared that they worship the sun and the moon, but these Toupins have no god, neither heavenly nor earthly, and therefore have no churches nor temples, wherein they should assemble to worship their idols, clean contrary to the custom and manner of all Heathens and idolators throughout the whole world. They understand not what the creation of the world meaneth, neither do they give any names to the days, or esteem one more than the rest, nor account not their times by weeks, months or years, but only by the moons: and as touching godly or worldly literature, they are wholly ignorant, not using so much as any kind of characters or letters, wondering much at the Frenchmen that wrote upon paper, and could read it: wherein we are greatly to praise god that hath given us the grace that we can certify each other by letters of our actions being in far countries, and thereby also attain unto the knowledge of the true and lively God, maker of heaven & earth, whereof when any man speaketh unto those simple people, being in great admiration, they stand still as it were abashed, and cry I c●●, and because they seemed to be very fearful of the thunder claps, by them called Toupan, and that thereupon the Frenchmen (taking occasion to mark their simplicity and little knowledge) told them that God, to show his great power and majesty, did thereby cause both heaven and earth to shake, they answered that such a God must needs be wicked that put men in so great fear: Such is the miserable estate of those poor men. Now if any man ask whether they live like beasts, without and God, it may be answered them, that there is not much difference, for that those people are wholly more than other men without any knowledge of God, and yet being in this grievous blindness, they believe the immortality of the soul, and do most assuredly persuade themselves, that the souls of such as here in this life have valiantly and well behaved themselves (which their valiancy and well living is meant by killing and eating of their enemies) do fly behind certain high hills, where being in pleasant gardens (with the souls of their forefathers) they continue in everlasting joy, pleasure, and dancing: and to the contrary that such as are slack, (which live without honour, and will not defend their native country) are borne away by the Aygnan, for so they called the devil, with whom they lived in everlasting pain. They are likewise in this life many times tormented by the devil, which also they call Kaagerre, for Lerius writeth, that he personally saw them, and heard them speak to the French men, and raging like mad dogs, began to cry out and say unto them, Alas, alas, help us, for the Aygnan beateth us, and would tell them, that they did oftentimes see the devil, sometimes in form of a beast, sometimes in likeness of a bird, at other times in divers shapes: and because they marveled that they were not troubled nor molested by him, they made them answer, that god who is of greater power than their Aygnan or devil, did preserve them from him: whereupon they being tormented promised to become christians, and to believe in the only God: yet their pains were no sooner ended, but they presently forgot their promise. And it is most certain, that they are so tormented, for Lyrius saith, that he hath often seen them, when only with the remembrance of their torments, they were in so great fear, and sighed so deeply that very grief made them to sweat, and sitting with their hands upon their heads, mourning and lamenting said, Mair atourassap, acequere, aignan atoupave, that is, O my good friend, and my companion, I fear wicked sathan above all other things, whereunto he answered them, that he feared him not, wherewith lamenting their estate, they would say, O how happy should we be if we were fréeed from him: if you will be free said Lerius, than you must believe in him that is mighty. Then the Aignan or the devil which they being in pain promised him to do: but their torments past, they had clean forgotten what they said. Herein you must understand that those of Peru and Cusco, did not only believe the immortality of the soul, but also the resurrection of the body, as in the History of Peru is already declared, by the example of the Indians, who seeing the Spaniards to open graves of the dead Indians, and to take away their jewels, desired them that they would not scatter nor throw away the bones, to the end that the dead might not want them when they should rise again. This is written to the end that all ungodly men, that are conversant with the simple Tovoupinambaultes, persuading themselves that there is no God, should learn of the wild miserable wretches, that there are certain wicked spirits, which torment the ungodly (not believing in the power of God) here in this life. And it they affirm (as many of them do) that such wicked spirits are nothing else, but the evil affections and conceits of the mind, and that therefore the Barbarians do foolishly persuade themselves of that which is not true, it may be answered them (as they may read in our description) that the Americans were openly and certainly tormented by wicked spirits, whereby it may sufficiently appear, that such torments are no fleshly effects, which torment the strongest of them in that manner. Secondly, although such ungodly men are altogether unworthy to hear that which the holy scripture speaketh concerning the resurrection of the body, yet this second point of the Barbarians may well be propounded against those which believe the immortality of the soul, as also the Perwians that believe the immortality both of soul and body, whereby they may be ashamed, and learn of such wild men: and although those people knew how to be quit of all their torments and griefs aforesaid, yet are they in great fear of thunder, as fearing a certain power, which they cannot resist or withstand, yet will they not know it, wherefore the Gospel in the Acts of the Apostles, fourteenth Chapter and seventeenth verse, most truly saith, that God in time passed suffered the heathens to walk in their own ways, although he ceased not continually to make his power known, by doing us good, sending us rain from heaven, and giving us fruitful times and seasons, filling our hearts with joy, and our bodies with meat, so that it is the only wickedness of man that will not acknowledge the eternal God and maker of all things. And in another place, in the first to the Romans and twentieth verse, Saint Paul saith (for that which is invisible unto man, which is his eternity and Godhead) is manifested unto us by the creation of the world. Therefore although those men will not confess God with their mouths, yet are they by their own actions overthrown, and made to know there is a God, and that so they are not ignorant, or may once pretend the same, considering their belief of the immortality of the soul, the fear they have of the thunder claps, and the wicked spirits that torment them. They have likewise Prophets or Priests, which they call caribs, that go from village to village, making the poor people believe that they are conversant with spirits, and that they can make strong whom it pleaseth them, and give them power to vanquish the enemy, also that by their help the fruits and great trees do grow and increase upon the earth. Besides this, every three or four year they come together, both men, women and children, observing a certain feast, but in several houses, so close or near together, that they may hear each other: where they first begin with fearful songs and some dances, their Caribens being with them, the women foaming at the mouths, as if they had the falling sickness, beating their breasts, and making a most fearful noise, as if they were possessed with evil spirits, and in like sort the children: which noise being ended, they are still for a time, and then begin again to sing so sweetly, and in measure, that it would delight a man to hear them, withal dancing a round, each following and not leading the other, bending their bodies forwards, and their right leg somewhat outward and crooked, with their right hand upon their buttocks, letting the left hand hang down, and in this manner they dance and compass thrice about, in each dance having three or four Caribes, with hats, apparel, and arm bands of feathers, each Caribe having in his hand a Ma●aca or rattle, thereby making the people believe that the spirit speaketh unto them out of th●●e rattles, stepping forward and backward, and (not as the people do) standing still in one place. They likewise often times take long Reeds, wherein they put a certain herb by them called Petum, which they set on fire, and turning themselves about, incense the people with the smoke thereof, with these words, Receive the spirit of strength, whereby you may overcome your enemies: which kind of ceremonies continue for the space of six or seven hours together, and with so pleasant melody, that men that are seen in music (as those people are not) would marvel thereat, and think it impossible: and at the end of every song▪ stamping on the ground with their right foot, every man spitting, and with a hoarse voice often uttering these words, He, He, Hua, He, Hua, Hua, Hua: In these ceremonies they first remember their valiant Predecessors, being in good hope that they shall go behind the hills, and there with them be merry and dance: that done, they do most earnestly threaten the Ouetacaten (a most cruel people bordering upon them,) that in short tune they hope to overrun them, and at the last singing somewhat of noah's flood, that it destroyed the world and drowned all the people, only their forefathers, that saved themselves upon the tops of high trees, whereby it should appear that they have had a certain knowledge of noah's flood, although now clean forgotten, because they have no books, neither yet can read. These ceremonies ended, they entertain their Caribes most sumptuously with dainty meat and drink, and make good cheer: the said Caribes walk likewise through the villages with their rattles or Maracan, & covering them with feathers, they make them fast to a staff, which they fix into the earth, and there offer meat and drink before it, as if it were an Idol, making the poor men believe that the rattles eat and consume the meat and drink, whereby every householder thinketh himself bound to set, not only flesh and fish before them, but also of their Coavin, which is their drink: the manner of it is thus: their Maracans or rattles being tied to a stick, and fixed in the earth, as afore said, for the space of fifteen days, are by the people served with great devotion, and therewith they do so bewitch the poor people, that they make them believe the rattles are holy, and that the spirits speak out of them. The Frenchmen seeking to bring them from that fond opinion, were hardly thought of by them, and thereby incurred the Caribes sore displeasure: in like manner Balaams' priests hated Elias, for discovering their deceits. And thus much concerning the ceremonies and Religion of these poor simple people, which at this present shall suffice, and such as are desirous to know more, let them read the histories thereof, specially johnes Lerius, from whence for the most part this is taken forth, who hath described at large what happened unto him in his voyage into those countries. The manner of their marriage, number of wives, and the degrees of marriage observed among them, also the education of their children. IN marriage they observe these degrees of kindred, no man marrieth with his mother, sister, or daughter, other degrees they respect not, for the uncles marry with their cousins, and so of other degrees: when they match together, they use no ceremonies, but he that is desirous to marry with a widow or a maid, speaketh unto their friends (if they have any) or to their neighbours, for want of friends, ask them if it be their wills that such a one should marry with them, if they say I, then presently he taketh her home without any more ceremony, & keepeth her for his wife, but if she be denied him, he never seeketh further unto her: but here you must consider, that they are permitted to take many wives, for that every man hath as many as he thinks good, and the more he hath, the stronger and worthier they esteem him: there are some of them that have eight, yet the live in such unity, that although some one of them is better beloved than the rest, yet they never conceive any jealousy therein, neither yet once murmur thereat, but live quietly together, weaving and making their cotton beds, doing their household work, looking to their gardens, and planting of their roots, etc. Such women as commit adultery, are by nature so abominable to the Americans, that it is in the man's power to kill them, or else with shame to put them from him: it is true that they take no regard unto their maids, but let them do as they will, but being once married, they must observe their promise, upon the pains before rehearsed, but they are not so much addicted to uncleanness as the people of East India: the women that are with child abstain from great labours, and do nothing but ordinary work about the houses, and commonly the women do more work then the men, for the men only in the morning, set certain trees about their gardens, but not all the day after, but consume most of their time in the wars, hunting, & fishing, & to make Brasilia halberds, and weapons of wood, as also bows and arrows: as touching the bringing forth of the child into the world, the men receive them from the woman's body, and with their teeth bite off the child's navel string, and then press down the nose, esteeming it a great beautifying unto them the child being borne, is presently washed by the father, and painted with red and black colour▪ it is never swaddled nor lapped in clothes, but only laid in a little cotton bed, and being a boy, the father presently giveth him a wooden knife, a bow, and a little arrow, which are laid by him in his bed, and therewith he kisseth the child, saying unto him, My son, when thou art great thou must be strong, and revenge thyself upon thine enemies: as touching their names, they give them the names of such things as they know, as Orapacen, that is, bow and arrow, Sarigoy, four footed beast, Arignan, hen, Arabouten, a Brasill tree, Pindo, a great herb, etc. The children's meat besides their mother's milk, is chawed meal, & some soused meat, the woman that is delivered, lieth 2. or 3. days at the most upon her cotton bed, after that she putteth a cotton cap upon the child's head, and either goeth into the garden or else about the house to do some work, which our women cannot do, as being of weaker complexions, and living in an untemperate air: besides this, we would think if our children should not be word or swaddled, they would grow crooked, whereof not any such are found to be among them, but rather go uprighter than any other people in the world, which is also by means of the temperateness of the air. The children growing great and to man's state, are taught no other thing, then only to be revenged of their enemies, and to eat them: also they are bound (as right followers of Lamech, Nimrod, and Esau, to hunting, and to go to the wars, to kill and eat both men and beasts. What laws and policies are used among the Brasilians, also how friendly they entertain strangers, together with their weep, and words used by the women unto strangers at their first coming into their houses. THe policy of the Brasilians is hardly to be believed: how reasonably and naturally they behave themselves therein, I mean among themselves for common quarrels, for that as touching their warlike affairs against their enemies, it is sufficiently declared, but if there riseth any strife or quarrel among themselves, such as are present will not seek to pacify the matter, but rather let them fight or deal together as they think good, yea, although they should pluck each others eyes out of their heads: but if one of them chanceth to hurt the other, and being taken, he is likewise wounded in the same place where he wounded the other, and if it fortune that by the wound the party dieth, he that killed him shall by the kindred of the dead man be likewise flame, so that with them they pay life for life, eye for eye, and tooth for tooth. Their goods are houses and land, which they have far greater than their necessities requireth: as touching their houses, you must understand that every village hath at the least 100L. houses, whereby many of them must of force dwell in a house, yet every family hath a several place, although without any distance, as being nothing between the houses, to let them from seeing from the one end of all their houses to the other, although many times they are at the least 60. paces long, yet every man hath his wives & children several to himself, and it is to be wondered at, that they never dwell above five or six months in one house, but taking the trees and the herb P●●●o, whereof their houses are made, they carry them oftentimes at the léast 1000 paces off, yet the villages keep their ancient names, whereby it may easily be gathered what great houses they build, seeing it oftentimes happeneth that one man in his life time doth remove his house twenty times at the least: and if any man asketh them why they so often remove their houses, they make answer, that changing of place is wholesome, also that their predecessors did the like, which if they should leave, they should not live long: touching their grounds, every Moussacat, that is, householder, hath certain gardens and orchards to himself, which he useth as he tihnketh good: but as touching the tilling and dressing of their grounds, as we do ours it is not used among them: as concerning their household work, the women spin and work cotton wool thereof to make ropes and hanging beds, which beds they call I●●s, they are about six or seven foot long, made like a net, but somewhat thicker, like our thin cloth, with strong ropes at the head and foot to tie them at, but because such beds are brought hither and so well known, it is not necessary to speak any more of them, neither of the manner how they use to spin the wool, but touching these things you may read Lerius, my desire being only to set down their chief and principal customs. When the men go to war, hunting, or fishing, they take such beds with them, and making them fast to two trees, they sleep therein, which beds being foul, either with dust, smoke, or otherwise, are by the women made clean, which is done in this manner: they go into the woods to seek a certain fruit not much unlike our pumpcons, but greater, for that most part of them are so great, that a man can hardly bear them in his hand: this fruit they stamp very small, and put it in an earthen pot, steeping it in water, which done, they stir it with a stick, in such sort, that it yieldeth forth a thick scum, which scum they use in steed of Soap, wherewith they make their beds as white and clean, as any Fuller doth his cloth, and in summer time or in the wars, it is better sleeping on those beds then upon ours: as touching their household stuff, the women make great earthen Pots, therein to put their drink Coa●in. They make pots likewise of many fashions, small and indifferent great cups, broad dishes, and such like vessels, the outward part not much polished, but inwardly so clean & white, with a certain colour laid upon them, that they far surpass our pot makers, they likewise make certain mixture of black and white colour together, wherewith they paint and stripe their earthen vessels, specially those wherein they keep their meat: their manner of earthen work is much pleasanter and better than our wooden dishes, only the women which paint their pots, have this fault, they cannot paint one thing twice, because they do it not by art, but only according to their fantasies. These Barbarians also have certain pumpeons and other fruits, which they divide into two parts, and cutting the meat out of them, they use them for drinking cups, which they call Cobi, they have also great and small baskets, made of whole Rushes, not much unlike wheat straw, cunningly wrought and folded together, which they call Panacon, wherein they keep their meal and other things: their weapons are wooden Halberds, bows and arrows, feathered coats and caps, with arm bands and rattles by them called Mar●, whereof I have sufficiently spoken, so that at this present it is needless to say more. Now than the Barbarians house, with his household stuff, and furniture, weapons, bed, and apparel, being sufficiently described, I will show you the manner of their entertainment of strangers: and although the Tououpinambaul●ers do receive their guests in friendly sort, yet their strange manner to such as know it not, is very fearful, as Lerius telleth it happened unto him at his first going to visit them, saying that when he came first into one of their villages, all the Barbarians ran about him, and said unto him, Marape derere, Marape derere, that is, what is your name, & how are you called? one of them taking off his hat, and setting it on his head, the other hanging his girdle and sword about his naked body, the third putting on his Cassock, making a great hollowing: shouting, and in that manner one going one way, the rest another, with his clothes and furniture on their backs, he verily thought to have been quit of them, and in danger of his life, which after he found to be needless, as not knowing their customs, doing the like at the first to all such as come among them, not being of their company: & when they have taken their pleasure in wearing their apparel, they give it them again, the interpreter also told him that they were desirous to know his name, but said unto him when he told them, he must not give them any name in our speech, because they cannot pronounce it, as in steed of Ioh● they say N●●n, and because they cannot remember such words, he said he must name himself by some thing that is well known to them: and because Lerius signifieth an oyster, he called himself Lery oussou, which they wondered at, and said Te● Mair, hay Frenchman, this is an honourable name. And such as we never heard of any Frenchman, and surely Circe's with all her charms and herbs did never convert a man so lightly into an oyster as then it was done, after which time Lerius spoke often with them, and herein you must note that they are so good of memory, that when they have once heard a name, they will not lightly forget it. Then Lerius proceedeth further to show how he sped among them in that his first journey, which is, that going further with his interpreter, he came into a village of Barbarians called Eurami●, by the Frenchmen Goset, wherein his interpreter had dwelled, where they found the Barbarians dancing & drinking of their Coavin, as having that day killed one of their enemies, for the which cause they held the feast, the pieces of his body as then lying upon the Boucan, how this fearful spectacle pleased him you may well judge, which notwithstanding was nothing at all, considering what followed, for being come into the house, and according to their manner set upon a hanging bed, the women as their custom is, weeping, and the good man of the house friendly entertaining him, his interpreter being used thereunto, & wholly accustomed to their drink, without speaking unto Lerius, or once bidding him welcome, left him, and went to dance and drink among the Indians, and he being weary, and having eaten certain bread and other meat that had been set before him, laid himself down to rest, yet by reason of the noise which the Barbarians with dancing and drinking made about him, he was well kept from sleeping, specially when one of the wild men came running unto him, with a broiled shin bone of a man in his hand, ask him if he would eat with him, judge than I pray you if fear made not sleep to avoid out of his eyes, specially (as he writeth) for that he thought (as than not understanding their speech) the wild man showed him that piece of the broiled flesh, telling him that they would do the like with him, so that with fear he began to be suspicious, that he was betrayed by his fellow, who in that sort had delivered him into the Barbarians hands, whereupon he determined if he could to get away, but being compassed on all sides w●h Barbarians (that meant him no hurt) he fowde it impossible, so that with the fear he had received, which still increased more and more, thinking he should likewise be slain and eaten, he passed over the whole night only in prayers, in the morning very early the interpreter came unto him, that had passed all the night in drinking with the Barbarians, and seeing him look so pale, and having a fit of an ague then upon him, asked him if he were sick, and whether he had ●ot slept well, wherewith he blamed the interpreter for leaving him alone among the Barbarians, he not undeestanding what they said, and because he could not shake off his fear, he desired his interpreter that he might presently departed from thence, but he to the contrary putting him in good comfort willed him to take courage, saying that the Barbarians meant him no hurt, and withal discovered his fear unto them, who for his sake had watched and made that sport all the night long, because they esteemed him welcome, which the Barbarians hearing, said that they had somewhat perceived it, and that it grieved them that he had passed the night in so great sorrow and disease, and with that they all began to laugh, which made him cast off all fear: after that, he and his interpreter went into another village, where as the manner is, entering into a Maussacats house (which in every village they must do, and go to no place else, if they will have their love and favour) he sat down upon a hanging cotton bed, and for a little time sitting still, presently the women went unto him, and sitting down upon their heels close to the ground, covering their faces with their hands, bade him welcome, weeping and uttering many words in his commendation▪ as saying, you have taken a great and dangerous voyage in hand, only to come and visit us, you are good, you are strong, and if it be a Frenchman, they add further, you have brought us many fine things that we never saw: and to conclude, with such counterfeit tears and pleasing words they receive and salute their guests, & then stranger sitting upon the cotton bed, must do the like, holding his hand before his face, which (some good fools) provoked by their tears, have not let to do, and he must likewise answer them, and sigh as though he were grieved. This foolish entertainment of the women being ended, the Maussacat or good man of the house, who all that time is busy making of his arrows, and never regardeth his guest, as though he had nothing to do with him, (which is a very strange manner in respect of ours) at the last steppeth unto the guest, and speaketh unto him saying, Ere joube? that is, are you come? how look you? what is your desire? and what seek you? as Lerius hath particularly described: then he asketh if he hath a stomach to eat, if he say or make signs that he is hungry, then presently he causeth all kind of victuals to be set before him, as meal, which is their bread, roasted flesh of certain beasts, birds, and fishes, and such like meat, which is brought in earthen dishes, and because they have neither Tables nor Stools, they set it on the ground, and drink, and if they have any Caovin in the house, they give it him. In the end when the women have wept sufficiently, bidding the guest welcome, they come unto him, bringing certain fruits, as●ing, or covertly desiring of him in respect thereof, either looking glasses, Combs, or glass beads▪ which they wear about their arms, and if he meaneth to stay all night, the Mauslacat commandeth the women to hang him up a clean bed, about the which he causeth small fires to be made, which oftentimes by night he causeth to be blowed with a certain pair of bellows, (by them called Tatapecova) which are made of two round beds, not much unlike the fans wherewith the Gentlewomen in our country do keep themselves from the heat of the fire, which fires are not made because of the coldness of the country, but to drive away the moistness of the night, as also because it is a custom with them so to do: and seeing we are now in hand with fire, I think it not unconvenient to say some thing thereof, they call the fire Tata, and the Smoke Tatatin, and when they travail either to the wars, to hunting or to fishing, they always have fire with them, because of the Aygnan or Devil, who continually tormenteth them, therewith to drive him away, which they kindle not with Flint stone and a piece of Steel as we use to do, but rub two pieces of wood one against the other, one piece being soft, the other, hard, which is done in this manner: they take a piece of hard wood of a foot long, which they make sharp at one end almost like a prick, which point they thrust it into the soft wood, and turn it so often with their hands, as if they would boar the piece of wood therewith, and by that means it not only smoketh, but taketh fire, which done, they take cotton or dried leaves, and therewith kindle their fire. The guest being in this sort entertained, and laid in a clean cotton bed, if he be liberal he giveth the men knives or shears to clip and pull out their hairs, to the women combs or looking glasses, and to the children fish hooks, and if he chance to have need of victuals by the way, agreeing with them for their meat, he may take it all with him, and because in those countries there are no kinds of beasts to carry men or their wares, they are forced to travel on foot, if they be weary, and that the Indians let them have some of their maids, they presently as being very willing and ready to serve take up the burden, & often times carry the man himself, and if he speaketh unto them to rest themselves, they answer him saying, think you us to be as weak and faint as married women, that we should faint under our burden? rather you then should think so, we would carry you a whole day long: they are likewise touching natural love, better given & affected then we, for that daily they give each other flesh, fish, and fruits, & it grieveth them that their neighbour should not have as much as they, which liberality also they use to strangers, which in this one example by Lerius himself t●●d and set down, may sufficiently be proved, which is, that as Lerius with two other Frenchmen, travailed through the woods, and was in danger of his life by a fearful East, as also that unadvisedly he and his companions had passed hard by the borders of the Margaraters, enemies to their friends the Tovoupinambaultiers▪ (by whom if they had been taken, they had been eaten, and which is more, sticking their bodies upon thorns, would have made them p●●e in that manner, for the space of two days without meat or drink) at the last they came into a village called Pavo, where by the Barbarians they were most friendly welcomed, who understanding the great danger they had escaped, not only from the beast▪ but also of the Marga●aters, that use to stick their bodies upon thorns, as I said before, did with such pity and compassion bewail their hazard, that it might assuredly be said, that those simple Barbarians did not counterfeit, but rather wished them all good: and first with fair water (according to their manner) they washed their feet, each of them sitting by himself in a clean bed: that done, the good man of the house that had made ready their meat, set fresh meale● eating like our white bread crumbs) broiled flesh, fish, and fowls, with all sorts of their best fruits, making them good cheer, and when night came, he caused all the children to be conveyed out of the room where they slept, that they might not be diseased, and in the morning betimes he came unto them, saying in their speech, Agite autourassap, that is, my good friends have you rested well this night, and they answered, I very well: he still as yet (saith he) for I know that yesterday you had a weary journey. To conclude, it cannot be expressed with what friendliness they were entertained by the Barbarians, wherein you may perceive that although the wild men are cruel and revengative against their enemies, yet they are no less loving to their friends and favourers. Of the healing of the Barbarians diseases, of their burials, with the sorrow and mourning they make over them that are dead. IF any of them be sick, he showeth in what place he is pained, causing it to be searched by some one that standeth by, or else by the travelers about the country, which are their cusening Pages, that is, Physicians, and are another sort of people than the Caribes, who do likewise affirm that they can ease men of their pains, and lengthen their lives: Those people are much subject to fevers and other kinds of diseases, but not so common as with us: besides this, there reigneth among them a certain incurable disease, called P●au●, proceeding from their lechery, although many of their children are troubled therewith, as young children with us are sick of the small por, it maketh blisters greater than the joint of a man's thumb, which run over all the body and face, and is no less shame unto them, than the French pox unto us, they give the sick person no meat unless he desire it, although he should die for hunger, and although the sickness be dangerous, yet those that are in health spare not to dance, leap, and drink, thereby troubling the sick man, whereof he never complaineth or once disliketh, although it be much grief unto him: but if he dieth, specially being a houskeeper, they presently change thou singing into weeping and mourning, with such a noise, that all the whole night they never cease, specially the women that cry out, not like men, but like wolves and dogs, & with stammering voices, utter these or such like complaints, saying, Alax the strong ma● is dead, that used to bring us so many men to eat, others crying, O what a lusty hunter, and how cunning a fisher man was he, O what a strong and valiant man was he in destroying our enemies the Marga●aters and Portugese's and in that sort lamenting and crying, they embrace each other, never ceasing till the body be carried to the grave, adding many times, he is now gone whom we bewail, the man Eheu is dead, whom we shall see no more before we go behind the hills, there to dance with him, as our prophets the Caribes teach us, with many other words, which continue for the space of six ho●●●es, for they keep not their dead bodies any longer unburied, and then they set the dead body in a round pit or grave, in form like a wind pipe, wherein he standeth upright: but if the dead man be a house keeper, he is lapped in his cotton bed, and so buried in the middle of his house, with feathers & such like things put into his grave, as if he were living in the same manner, that the Perunians bury their kings with their jewels about them, as it shall be showed. The next night after the dead body is buried, they set certain dishes of meal, flesh, fish, and other victuals by the grave, because they are of opinion, that the A●gnan, or the Devil would come and dig the body out of the grave, if he found not other meat to eat, and withal they set some of their Coa●in, which they do as long as they think the body is not corrupted, from the which opinion they can by no means be persuaded, although in the mornings they find the meat whole, and in the same sort it was when they set it there. This toy, or foolish devise seems to spring out of the false gloss of certain Rabines, but he that desireth to see more hereof, let him read Lerius: and because the Americans do often change their dwelling places, by whole villages together, therefore when they remove they cover their graves with a great herb called Pindo, whereby such as travel may easily know where men are buried, by the which places, whensoever they pass, they make a most fearful noise. Thus much touching the general custom of all the Brasilians, and now we will proceed with the description of the rest of the coast from Cabo Frio, to the straits of Magellanes. Hear followeth the description of the sea coasts. FROM Cabo Frio to Punta de Buen Abrigo (in our Card called Abitrioga) are a hundred miles: Beyond this point reacheth Tropicus Capricornus, and the line of repartition, which beareth the name aforesaid, from Buen Abrigo, to the Bay of S. Michael are 50. miles, and fro thence to the river of S. Francis, which lieth under six and twenty degrees are seventy miles: from S. Francis to the river of Tibiq●●●e are a hundred miles, wherein lieth Puerto de Patos, which is under eight and twenty degrees: and right against it an Island called S. Catherina, Puerto de Fara●o● and others: and from Tibiquire, to Rio de la Plata are more than fifty miles, so that from Cabo de S. Augustin, to Rio de la Plata, that is, the silver river are six hundred and threescore miles, which lieth under thirty five degrees on the South side of the Equinoctial line. This river by the Barbarians is called the river of Parana, or Paranagna●●, that is to say, great river, or a river like the sea, having certain entries that are very broad, & many Islands, it is rich of silver, pearls, precious stones, and fish: it is in breadth xx. miles, and many Islands between both the hooks of S. M●●ia● and Cabo B●anco. This river increaseth and flowesh over like the river Nilus, making the country fruitful at certain times of the year, and as some are of opinion, it springeth out of the hills in the kingdom of Peru, into this river there runneth many other great rivers, as Auanca, Vicas, Purina, and X●●xa, which spring out of the high land called Bombon, many of the Spaniards that dwell upon this river, have come up as high as to Peru, and the mines of Potosi. The whole coast from Cabo Frio, to the Rio de Plata, or rio Solis, is inhabited by goodly men and well proportioned, but all eaters of men's flesh. The country is full of brasil wood, and of white Anime. From Rio de Plata to Puerto de S. Elena, are threescore miles, from S. Elena to Arenas Gordas are thirty miles, from thence to Baros Anagedos forty miles, from thence to Terra Baixa fifty miles, from terra Baixa to Bahya S●n F●ndo threescore and five miles: and from this Bay which is under one and forty degrees, to the Arrecifes de Lobos are forty miles. Upon this bordereth the country of the Patagones', where the inhabitants paint their faces with certain herbs: from Lobos which is under forty four degrees, to Cabo d● S. Dominico, are five and forty miles: from this cape to another called cabo Blanco are twenty miles to the river of john Serrano, which lieth under nine and forty degrees, and by others called Rio de Traba●os are threescore miles, between them lieth Ba●a de S. julian, wherein is a good haven. The people being wild, and without weapons, covered with skins, and without any law, but of a great stature: from thence to the Promontorium or cape de las 11000. Virgins are fourscore miles: from Cabo de las 11000. Virgins which lieth under one and fifty degrees and a half, to the entry of the straits of Magellanas', which under the same degrees from east to west are accounted 110 miles, some say 130. miles, and the south and north part from Venezula twelve hundred miles, it is two miles broad, in some places more, and very deep, and rather increaseth than diminisheth, and runneth southward. In this straight are many Islands and havens. The coast on both sides very high, and full of great rocks: the country unfruitful, it hath no green land, but is very cold, as having snow the most part of the year: about it groweth many trees, whereof are divers cedars, and other trees, bearing fruit like Bisnole or Creken. There they find Estriges, and other greater birds, with many strange beasts: also in that straight are many sardines, & flying fishes, they eat of all kinds of meats: there are likewise many seawolues, wherewith they line or fur their clothes, and whale fishes, the bones whereof they use to make ships, as also of the barks of trees. This straight was discovered by Fernando Magellanus a Portugal, 1521 in the year of our Lord, one thousand five hundred twenty and one, and as some say, one thousand five hundred and nineteen, 1519 entering upon the one and twenty day of October, and issuing again in the month of December after, when as then the days were there at the longest, and the night's shortest. Touching this straight you may read at large in the histories of India, and the navigations of the Englishmen that also have passed the same. The K. of Spain in the year of our Lord one thousand five hundred eighty and two, commanded a Castle to be made upon the point, or first entry into those straits on the south side towards Peru, from whence most part of his treasure cometh, thereby to impeach other Nations to enter or pass the same: about this strait dwelleth certain great giants of ten or eleven foot high, and higher (as some men write.) Magellanica, the sixth part of the world. MAgellanica is the sixth part of the world which as yet is least known, but with out all doubt very great, and stretcheth far and wide: the province in that country lying right against the straight of Magellana is called Terra de Fuego. Beach another province lying in that part of the world, is esteemed to be rich of gold: the furthest Islands thereof are java minor, or little java, divided into eight Kingdoms, bringing forth many kinds of spices, as yet unknown to us. java maior, Timor, from whence is brought white and red sanders wood. Banda, from whence nutmegs and mace are brought: the Islands of Moluco, wherein groweth cloves: Los Romeros, and the Islands Salomonis. But hereof I will leave to speak until a more convenient time, and will proceed with our description to Peru, beginning from Panama, right against Nombre de Dios, and so containing our description in the briefest manner to Cabo Deleado, or the desired Cape, lying in the straits of Magellana: but before I begin, I will first make a brief description of Peru in general. Peru is a common word, and signifieth three things: first, a poor small country and haven of the Spaniards, discovered by Pizzarro, and Almagio, lying about Panama under two degrees, on the north side of the line: secondly, by this word is understood the whole country beginning at that haven, and following along the coast within the south seas, till you come to Chile, containing eight provinces, as Quito, Cagnaresia, Porto veio de S. jacomo, Cassamalca, Cuscoa, Cagnasia, Calloa, and Charcassia. Thirdly, this word Peru or Perwia signifieth the sixth part of the world, namely, that which is divided southward from America, which is also separated from New Spain, by a strait or narrow piece of ground, not above seventeen miles in breadth, making that Peru (which otherwise is wholly compassed about with the sea) is not an Island, for that on the south side it hath the sea called the South Sea, whereby men pass through the straits of Magelana: on the west part lieth the strait itself, which divideth Peru from the land that lieth over against it, as yet not fully discovered, and by some called Terra di Fuegos, that is, the land of Fire. This straight or narrow passage, was found out by Magellanus, in the year of our lord one thousand five hundred and nineteen, and as some say, in the year of our Lord one thousand five hundred and twenty one, and reacheth right east & west 110. miles, and lieth under 52. degrees and thirty minutes, being in the greatest part but two miles broad: the shore on both sides being full of high stone rocks. In this part of the world are five principal great provinces, as Castilia deal Or●, or the Golden Castle, Popaiana, Brasilia, Chile, and Peru, and is divided from new Spain, by the province of Dariene. Beginning from thence, and reaching to the straits of Magellana, you must then understand Peru to be a whole sixth part of the world, which reacheth wide and broad to above sixty four degrees and thirty minutes, namely on the south side of the line to fifty two degrees, and one half, and on the north side twelve degrees to Saint Martha. which is the furthest part of the country northward: in the furthest length this part hath fifty three degrees, accounting from the meridian. Passing the Cape Saint Augustine which lieth under 8. degrees, and thirty minutes, southward to the Meridian, and the head of saint Francis lieth upon the point of two parts southward. The whole sixth part of the world is in form almost like a Hart, or a Triangle, standing three equal distances or lines, being drawn from the three corners or points of the land. The first from the Cape Saint Augustine, to the straits of Magellana. The second from Magellana to saint Martha: and the third, from saint Ma●tha again unto saint Augustine, which in this sort may be described, for that placing the one corner of the triangle, being Cape saint Augustine, under eight degrees and thirty minutes southward, and the length three hundred forty and one degrees, the other corner of the triangle being the straight of Magellana under fifty two degrees and thirty minutes southward, and the length 303. degrees. The line that is between these two heads must have sixty degrees, as the Meridian three hundred sixty hath, so much then, or somewhat more hath the line that runneth from Magellana to Saint Marcha, which lieth under twelve degrees, and in length two hundred ninety four degrees: therefore this land hath almost the form of a triangle: others say, it is form like an egg, which on both sides runneth sharp downwards, and is broad in the middle, whereof (the better to know it) I will first begin with Peru, and the course the Portugese's held from Panama to Peru. In tune passed by the name of Peru men understood all the provinces that lie thereabouts, from Pastoa unto Chile, and from the river Maul● north and south, unto the river Anchasmay. Now the Spaniards by the word Peru mean the land that lieth between the river Argiropilis, or Villa de la P●atta, & the province Quito, which is a fruitful, sound, populous, and well inhabited country, being in length from north to south seven hundred miles, and in breadth from east to west about a hundred miles, so that the borders east and south are Argiropolis, towards the west sea and towards the north the province Pastoa. This land is divided into three parts, that is, Planitiem, Sierras, and Andes, that is, an even flat land lying on the Sea side, with hills, or hilly country, which pass through the middle of Peru lying eastward over the hills. This land is rich with gold and silver, more than any country in all the world, which well appeareth by the yearly quantity of gold and silver brought from thence, respecting not the boastings & brags used by the Perunians themselves, that say, The sums yearly brought out of that country is nothing in respect of the quantity therein, for that it may be esteemed as much as if a man having a sack full of corn, should take a few grains out of it: it may likewise be judged by the history of Francisco Xeresio, who writeth, that in Cusco there were houses, having the gates, walls, and roof covered with plates of gold. Besides this, Girava writeth that the inhabitants of Anzerma had their weapons, breastplates, neck pieces, and pieces for their shins, all of massy gold: he likewise writeth, that about Quito there were gold hills, that yield more gold than earth, the like do all Historiographers witness, that writ of king Atabalidas ransom, which was so great, that the like was never heard of, for that he caused the chamber (wherein he was kept prisoner) being of two and twenty foot long, and seventeen foot broad, to be filled so full of gold, that he standing upright therein, and stretching his arms and fingers above his head as high as he could reach, the gold covered them, offering that if they would have silver and leave the gold, he would fill the Chamber twice full, but the Spaniards took the gold, whereof the king's duty being a fift part, amounted to six hundred and seventeen thousand, six hundred forty seven Carolus gyldernes, & 30000. marks of silver, every horseman had 12000. castilians', every castilian of fourteen rialles besides silver, and every footman 1450. castillians, besides silver, being 180. marks, so that to conclude, the gold only ammounted unto (in Flemish money) the sum of three millions, eighty eight thousand; two hundred & five carolus gylderns, besides the silver, whereby may be known the great abundance of gold and silver that is in those countries: and although Atabalida paid so great a treasure for his ransom, yet was it not comparable unto the which his elder brother promised to pay, so that he might save his life, for that he had all the treasure of his predecessors, and also his fathers, which were not known to Atabalida, when he first entered into the kingdom, from whence by force he had driven his brother, and placed himself therein. We read likewise, that when the Spaniards first entered that country, they shooed their horses with shoes of gold, and what it yieldeth yearly at this present doth sufficiently appear by the Armada that came from thence into Spain the last year, which needeth not herein to be declared. But now proceeding to the description of the coast of Panama to Peru, you must first understand that Panama and Nombre de Dios are two towns, lying one right over against the other, the one on the north sea, or north side of Peru, the other on the south sea seventeen miles distant one from the other, Panama lying in a little valley, so near unto the sea, that when the moon is in the full, the sea entereth into the houses lying nearest to the shore: the houses thereof are part of reeds, and partly made of other substances mixed together, most covered with tiles, but there are not many houses in the town. There is in this town a very fit and safe haven, but very small, where with the stream or flood, the ships do enter, and with an ebb, they go out, but not heavy laden, for that such as are deep laden, would be in danger to fall upon the flattes: in this haven there runneth both a great flood and ebb, so that where the water is very deep, within an hour after it will be dry sand, whereby the ships must keep somewhat from the land, discharging and lading their ships by little scutes, as well such as come out of Spain thither, as that go from thence into Spain. This Town hath from Peru, maiz, meal, hens, and honey: it hath of itself, kine, and hogs, oranges, lemons, coleworts, onions, lettuce, melons, and such like things in great abundance. This province of Panama, in time past was much inhabited, and haunted by the Indians, and all the rivers yielded gold, but now by the Spaniards are most fished dry. When men will travel by land from Panama to Nombre de Dios, the first days journey is fair and good way, the next day you enter into woods, which continue till you come to Nombre de Dios. In the middle of this way you come unto a water, which in three hours can hardly be passed over, because of the many crooking & windings thereof, and many are cast away therein, the stream (specially in winter when there falleth much rain) running most swiftly. Such as compare this town to Venice, are much deceived, for that both of them put together, with many other towns erected by the Spaniards in those countries, will not make the compass or greatness of the City of Venice, although every man may judge as pleaseth him. As touching the manner of sailing from Panama to Peru, as also at what times of the year, you must understand, that the best and fittest times of the year are in the three first months, that is, january, February, and March, until the month of April, for as then the Sea is open, summer coming on, and many of the Brisen (which are east and northester winds do blow, no west or southerly winds as then stirring, whereby the ships do easily perform their voyages, and commonly arrive at their desired havens, before any other wind, specially south wind, which for the most part of the year upon the coast of Peru) do blow. They may likewise put out in the months of August, and September, but make not so good arivage, as in the months aforesaid, and if any ships do put out of Panama, at other times than in the months aforesaid, they are sure to have a long and tedious voyage, and commonly some one of them is forced to turn back again, not being able to get the coast, and are (by reason of the southern winds, which for the most part of the whole year blow upon the coast (as I said before) as likewise because of the great contrary stream) many of them are brought into great danger. It is very good with the wind blowing from Peru, to sail to Panama. Nicaragua, and other quarters thereabouts: but to sail to Peru from Panama it is very dangerous, and uncertain. The ships that are laden with Spanish wares, and departed from Panama▪ first come to ●aboga, and the islands bordering on the same (which have received their names from the Pearls) where they take in fresh water, in those Islands that are at the least five and twenty or thirty together. The Spaniards in times past found many Pearls, whereof they held the name of Islas de Pa●las.) They lie hardly under eight degrees northward. The greatest of them in times past, was wont to be inhabited: but not now, because the fishing for pearls beginneth to decay, and such as are owners of those Islands there: in keep slaves of Nicaragua, and Cubag●a, that look to their beasts, and sow the ground, as being very fruitful: from thence they put into the sea westward, & then see the point called Carrachine, which lieth northwest and southest from the great Island of pearls called Taboga, distant about thirty Italian miles, which are seven Spanish miles and a half: as they come near unto this cape, they shall perceive it to be a high hilly land, lying under seven degrees and a half, from this point to the Rio de Pinas, or Pine tree haven) the coast runneth south west, and south-west and by south, and is distant from the point aforesaid four and twenty miles, which are six Spanish miles or six degrees and a half: it is a high land with great hills and dales: on the sea side there groweth very great pine trees, and therefore it is called the Haven of Pine trees: from thence the coast lieth southward and south and bywest, to Cape de las Correntas, that is, the cape of Streams, which is very small, and reacheth into the sea, and because of the great and stiff stream that runneth like a strong fall of waters, running eastward like rivers, many times the Portugal ships which sail that way, are forced to anchor in the night, and in the morning setting sail, it happeneth oftentimes, that when they think to wind, that they are stayed, and driven back again, & so hang sometimes 15. or 20. days about that Cape before they can pass it: but passing forward beyond that Cape, you come to the Island lying before the Rio de Palmas, so called because of the abundance of palm or Indian nut trees that do grow thereon. This river is in compass somewhat more than five miles, which is one Dutch mile, and a mile and ● Spanish, which was once inhabited: it is distant from Cabo de Correntes, seventy five miles, or four degrees ●. Thereabouts are many rivers, all very good water, and not far from thence lieth the land and river of Peru, where Piza●us arrived, and after his name almost all the country is called Peru: from the Island de las P●linas following along the coast and the same course, you come to the strand of Bonaventura, which is distant from the Island aforesaid somewhat more than nine miles, which are two Spanish miles ¼. Hard by this strand (which is very great) lieth a high cliff or rock of stone, and the entry of the Bay is under three degrees 1/●. All this side is full of very great hills, and there runneth into the sea many and very great rivers that have their springs out of the hills, by one of those the ships enter into the land or ha●●n of Bonaventura, but the pilots that pu●●h there, aught to have good knowledge of the river, for that if they be not well acquainted with it, they are like to indu●e much danger, as it happeneth unto many ships, that had Pilots to whom the river is not known: from this Bay the coast runneth east, and east and by south to the Island Gorgona, which is distant from the strand seventy five miles, which are nineteen Spanish miles: the coast all along this course, is very low, full of trees, and other wild places and hills, from whence there runneth many great rivers, whereof the chief and greatest is the river of Saint john, which is inhabited by Barbarians, having builded their houses upon great posts and stoops, in manner of hovelles, where many dwell in one house, (and some alone by themselves) because the houses are very long and broad. These Indians are rich of gold, and their country is very fruitful, the rivers by force of the streams abounding with much gold, but it is so sleek and moorish that it can hardly be gotten, but with the loss of many people, and with great labour. This Island of Gorgona is unmeasurable high, wherein for the space of eight months yearly it never ceaseth raining, and thundering, whereby it seemeth the Elements fight and strive one against the other, it is in circuit about two miles, or six Italian miles, all high hills, upon the the trees whereof are seen many peacocks, pheasants, speckled cats, great serpents, many sea crabs, and night fowls, seeming as if it were not inhabited, it hath likewise much fresh water. Summer there beginneth at the end of May, clean contrary to Panama, whereas then winter beginneth. In this Island Franciscus Pizarius with 13 others that had discovered the country of Peru, stayed certain days, enduring great pain and hunger, before they could overcome the country. This country of Gorgona lieth under three degrees: and as touching the miles that in this discourse, as also in the description of Brasilia, and other places I have observed, they are all Spanish miles, whereof seventeen 1/● make a degree: from this Island the coast runneth west south-west, to the Island del Gal●o, or of the Cock, all this coast being low and full of valleys, from whence there runneth many rivers: this Island is small, and in compass scarce a mile, or about three Italian miles, it hath certain red Downs. The same coast from the firm land thither lieth two degrees from the Equinoctial: from thence the coast turneth southwestward till you pass the point called Mangla●es, which are trees so called, and in our Card Manglalos▪ which lieth scarce under two degrees: and from the Island to the point which is six Spanish miles, little more or less, or four and twenty Italian miles: the coast is low and full of valleys, and thereabouts runneth certain rivers into the sea, which inwards to the land are inhabited: from thence the coast runneth south-west to the strand called S. jacob, or S. jago, and maketh a great creak, where there is an open haven or road named by the Sardinians: and from thence runneth the great river of S. jacob, where the government of Pizarro began: and this strand is 9 mile's ¼ from the point of Manglares, and it happeneth many times that the ships have there at the beak head fourscore fathoms water, and at the stern they touch the ground: and also it is often found, that sometimes they sail in two fathoms water, and presently they find ninety fathoms, which the strong course and fury of the river causeth: and although there are such banks, yet are they not dangerous, neither do the ships refuse to pass in and out when they will. The strand of S. Matthew, in our Card Mathias, lieth full in one degree: from thence the coast runneth west to the Cape saint Francis, which lieth from the strand thirty Italian miles, that is, seven Spanish miles and one half: this point lieth on high ground, and hard by it are certain red and white Downs, that are of the same height. This point of saint Francis lieth under one degree, on the north side of the Equinoctial line. From thence the coast runneth southweast, to the point Passao, which is the first haven of Peru, over the which passeth the Equinoctial line. Between these two points there runneth four great rivers into the Sea, which are called Liquixinus, in Latin Quisinuae, and there about there is an indifferent good Haven, where the ships find good water and wood to burn. From the point Passao, to the firm land are divers high hills, that are called De Quaque: the point is a land which is not over low, where you see certain Downs as aforesaid. ¶ Here followeth the Navigation from the Line to the Town of the Kings called Lyma. FRom hence forward we have declared the coast of Panama, in the South sea, till you come to the haven of Quixinus, which lieth in the Country of Peru, now I will go forward with the course that lieth between Quixinus and the town of Kings, so then departing from the point de Passos the coast stretcheth south, and south and by west, to the haven called Porto veio, or the Old Haven: and before you come thither, there lieth the strand called Charaqui, where the ships may put in without any danger, and it is so safe a strand that they may there lay their ships on shore, and mend them if they need, be they never so great, for it is a good haven of entrance, only that in the middle of the entry there lieth certain stones or rugged Islands, but the ships may enter at which side they will and pass by them without any danger, for there is nothing to be shunned, but only that which you see before your eyes, the Old Haven lieth under one degree on the south side of the Equinoctial line, and is one of the five Towns which the christians or Spaniards have built in the flat land of Peru, so that Porto Veio signifieth the town and country lying thereabouts, which is much overrun & wasted, because it is a poor unwholesome country, yet it hath certain mines of Sinaragdes, which they held long time hidden, and by no means would discover them, as to this day they yet do. They had likewise in times past many gold and silver vessels which are by the Spaniards all taken and carried away, but now by the king's letters patents being made free, they pay to their superior lords, but only the tenth part of all their fruits, whereby many Spaniards withdraw themselves from thence, seeing their profit to decay. The Country about Porto Veio was rich of gold, where the people made their houses in the trees, like birds nests, and because the coast is moorish, there is no being for horses, whereby it was not so soon subdued by the Spaniards, as also because that out of their nests, they threw stones, iavelines, pots with hot water, and whatsoever came next to hand, whereby they killed many Spaniards, wherewith they were forced to cover themselves with boards, and so cut down the trees, before they could overcome them, as also because the Country is so rough, sharp, and wild, that they could hardly find provision for their army: there is yet much country thereabouts unhabited. By the Old Haven two miles within the land is the town of saint jacob, or jago, which for houses and inhabitants is not inferior to Porto Ve●o: and thereabouts is the passage of Gainacava, by the Spaniards so called for this occasion, that Ga●●acaua the father of Attabalida upon a certain time sent one of his Captain●●, ●●th a great army to subdue that country, who minding to pass his people over the river, commanded them to make a bridge of pieces of wood, that so they might pass. Which being made, when his people with their armour and weapons were upon it, the enemy cut the ropes, wherewith the pieces of wood were fastened together, whereby many of them that were upon it, by force of the stream were drowned in the river, and the rest spoiled by the enemy. Which Gainacapa understanding, assembled a great number of soldiers, and with them departed from Quito, and being in the plain field, in open battle he overcame those people: after the which victory, minding to make a passage over the river, that men might pass over on foot, to the same end he caus● great numbers of stones and earth to be brought thither, and threw them into the river, being twenty foot broad, but whatsoever he threw in, all would not prevail, by reason of the great depth, and swiftness of the river, that carried it away by force of the stream, which he perceiving, left off his work and so departed, and therefore the Spaniards have given this place the name of the passage of Gainacava: about the which passage lieth the town of saint jacob builded by them. About a Spanish mile and a half distant from this town of saint jacob, towards the south lieth a round hill, by them called Christ's Hil. From Porto ve●o further forward the same course almost four miles distant in the south, lieth the point of saint Laurence, and two miles, and a quarter from thence south-west lieth an Island of the same name, which is full a mile in compass, wherein the Indians or Perwians of the firm land, in times past used to make their sacrifices and offerings, killing many lambs, sheep, and some children, offering their blood unto their idols, or devils, whose figures were made and carved in stone, to whom they do usually pray. When Franciscus Pizarius with his thirteen companions traveled to discover Peru, they entered likewise into this Island, where they found certain jewels of silver and gold, many cloaks and shirts of very fair and fine wool, so that from that time forwards, and for the same cause this Island was called Silver. The point of saint Laurence lieth under one degree, on the south side of the line. And (as I said before) Peru beginneth at the line, and stretcheth southward unto Chile. The people that dwell under the line and thereabouts, have the customs and manners of the jews. Whereby many men are of opinion, that they are issued from the jews, or of the race of Cham: they speak hoarsely, and in the mouth, like the Moors, and are much given to uncleanness, especially that which is wholly against nature, whereby they do not well agree with their wives, but rather despise them. The women wear neither hair nor apparel, but only a certain apron before their privities. They plant, sow, reap, and thrash the corn, and wheat meal, whereof they make bread, which wheat in Peru is called Zara: the men wear short shirts without sleeves, down to their navelles, their members being uncovered, and some go naked & paint their bodies with a black colour, their hair being shaven, and cut almost like Friars, but they leave no hair neither before nor behind their heads, but only upon the sides: it is likewise a common custom with them to wear many jewels of gold, both in their ears, and noses, specially emeralds, such as are found in those Countries. And although the inhabitants will not discover the mines, yet hath it been perceived by certain rough stones: on their arms and legs they wear many beads of gold, silver, and small tourqueses: also of white and red Teekens and Huyzkens, but will not have their wives to wear any such: touching the situation of the Country, it is very hot, and unwholesome, and there they have certain sore biles, that issue out upon their faces and other parts of their bodies as big as acorns, having deep roots, worse and more deformed than por, and must be wrong off by binding a thread about them when they are ripe: they paint their mouths, and boar holes in their ears, nose, lips, and cheeks upon their festival days wearing jewels and pearls therein: the scutes by them used in those countries, to fish, as also to sail in, are like drifts made of three, five, seven, nine, and eleven light quarters, or rafters of wood laid or bound together, as men bind masts, and let them drive upon the water, and their manner is to bind the longest in the middle, and the rest on both sides shorter than other, and as their drifts are long or short, so are their sails proportioned, and when they have brought their drift a good way forwar● they throw bread, fruit, and such like things into the sea, praying for a good wind, as being weary, and wholly without strength to row any more. The doors of the Churches in that Country stand Eastward, hanged with certain cotton linen, and in every church there standeth two graven Images, of form like black Bucks, and before them there is a fire made of sweet wood, (which groweth in that country) which fire burneth continually, out of the which wood, the bark being taken away, there issueth a certain sweet gum, I think it to be Cedar, from whence the gum Elemi is taken, which is accounted for the life of the dead, and the death of the living, because it preserveth the dead body from putrefaction. There are also in those temples certain Images of great serpents, which they pray unto: and besides these common idols, every man hath his several Idol, each man according to the trade he useth, as the Fishermen a great fish, and the Hunters a hart or the Image of some wild beast, by the Cape Passao, in some churches upon every pillar thereof, were placed the bodies of men women and children crucified, that were so well kept and dried, that by no means they could rot or cast forth any unswéete savour: there were likewise the heads of Indians set upon nails, which with some certain substance they had so closed and knit together, that they were no bigger in compass than a man's fist: their houses are made of great thick reeds, which grow in that country: but for fruit they have very little. Proceeding further to the description of the coast, and following on south and southweast to Cape saint Elena, before you come to that point, there are two havens, one called Colao, the other Calemgo, where the ships anchor, to take in fresh water, and wood to burn: and from the point saint Laurence, to Cape saint Elena, are full nine miles, and lieth under two degrees, and from the point towards the north it maketh a hook of land, which is a very good Haven: about a bow shoot from thence, there standeth a fountain, which by certain veins runneth into the sea, from whence there issueth a certain Bitumen, altogether like pitch, and by the Spaniards is used about their ships instead of tar, and the Perwians say, that about that point in times past, there dwelled great men like Giants, but they knew not from whence they came, and fed upon such meat as their neighbours used, specially fish. Those Giants fished likewise upon drifts, and many times came on foot to land through the water where they had at the least two fathom deep and somewhat more. They went naked, and were most cruel, killing many of the people thereabouts. When the Spaniards arrived at Porto Vero, they found therein two Images of those Giants, a man and a woman, and the Perwians say likewise that the destruction of those Giants was done by a boy that came down from heaven, shining like the Sun, that fought against them with fiery flames, in such manner, that where the flames touched, they tore and rend the stones, the rents and holes whereof are at this day to be seen, and by that means the Giants ran into certain holes to hide themselves, where they were all destroyed. This tale was not greatly believed by the Spaniards, until one john de Helmos borne in Truxillio, Governor of Porto Vero, in the year of our Lord God everlasting, 1543 one thousand five hundred forty and three caused certain places to be digged up, where they found so great bones and ribs, that it was incredible to be men's bones, but that they found the heads lying by them, the teeth thereof being three fingers broad, and four fingers long, and five quarters square, which were sent into divers places of Peru, and from that time the Perwians tale thereof was believed to be true. The Spaniards opinions are, that because the Giants were given to sin against the laws of nature, that the most righteous God had destroyed them by his Angel with fire from heaven, as he did the Cities of Sodom and Gomorrha: Yet is this not certainly to be credited, because the Americans have no histories, books, nor other writings to record the same, only the memories and rehearsalles of men from time to time, and by some tokens and memorials there made of all sorts of painted cotton ropes, which they call Quippos, signifying by the number of knots, made of divers fashions, that which they would remember, beginning from the bottom, and so telling upwards, from one to ten, and so forth, painting the ropes of the same colour that the things were of, which they would thereby signify or have in memory, whereof the Spaniards by their Barbarian cruelty and negligence have spoiled great numbers, in every province: there were men appointed for the purpose, in that manner to register such things as had happened, as you may read more at large in the History of Mexico, those that did it were called Quippo camayos, of which cords there were whole houses full, which by such as were acquainted with them, could easily be told, although the things had been done many years before▪ but returning again to the description of the coast, from the point of saint Elena you sail to the river of Tumbez, which lieth almost nineteen miles off, and from thence about four miles lieth the Island P●na otherwise called the Island of Saint jacob, which is more than seven miles and one half in compass, very rich, and inhabited with so many people, that they warred continually with the men of Tumbez, and the people of the firm land: between them having had many battles in open field, but by continuance of tune, and power of the Spaniards, they were in the end wholly subdued. This Island is very fruitful and full of all sorts of trees, abounding both with wild beasts and fish: also of fresh water: for their apparel they used shirts and other clothes: they fish with drifts of light wood, bound upon two other pieces of wood, as their neighbours do, of the which drifts some of them are so great, that at the least fifty men and three horses might sit upon them, which they used both with sails and oars, wherein they are very expert. It chanced on a time, that the Perwians bore certain Spaniards upon one of those drifts, and that they untied the cords that bond the wood thereof together, whereby the Spaniards were all drowned, and the Indians saved themselves upon the pieces of wood, and many without them swam to land, as being very expert therein. Their weapons are slings, bows, clubs, and bills of silver and copper, also lances and pikes with heads of base gold: both the men and women wear many jewels, their drinking cups and vessels being of gold and silver: the Lord of the Island was much honoured by his subjects, and was so jealous that he cut off both the noses and privy members of his servants that attended on his wives. In this Island Pizarius and the Spaniards were very friendly entertained. But the Governor perceiving their great avarice and covetous desire in seeking for gold, as also their lechery with the women, fell upon them, with great numbers of Indians: but in the end, not being able to resist the Spaniards, he was forced to fly and keep himself in the woods: which victory was after by Pizarius most cruelly used, and therewith passed over unto the province of ●umbez, which is about 12. miles distant: but the inhabitants having heard of their cruelty used among those of Puna, fled into a Castle lying somewhat inward from the sea: but Pizarius to the contrary sent unto the Governor, making as though he would be friends with him, whereupon the Governor came not alone, but prepared himself very strong to go & meet him, thinking thereby to overthrow him: but the spaniards setting forward towards him, in the night time passing over the river with their men, being guided by such as were well acquainted with the way, and going through sharp and rough ways, they surprised the Perwians by night, as they lay sleeping, and so overcame them, and after the overthrow entered the town of Tumbez, which they rob, and spoiled the rich church, taking away the same: and in that town he was informed of the great riches in Per●. Touching the Island Puna, it is a common opinion, both of the Indians & Spaniards, that in time past, there was much gold and silver hidden within their Temple. Also the inhabitants at this present living do affirm, that their forefathers were very religious, and much addicted to soothsay, and other abuses, very covetous, and above all other things, they used the accursed sin of S●dome lying with their own sisters, & committing many other grievous sins. Into this Island fled brother Vincentius de vail viridi (a Friar that was the chief cause of the wars against the Perwians, and after that first Bishop of Peru) with two and forty Spaniards, seeking to shun the wrath of Didaci Almag●●, and having hidden himself in the night time, the Islanders with clubs slew both him and his company, where he received a very just reward for his good works. In Puna, and in the countries of Guaiaquil, and Porto Ve●o groweth the root with us called Zarzape●●●a▪ which is used against the por and other diseases. In that Island they bruise it between two pieces of wood, & so press out the juice, which done, they mix it with warm water, and give it to the patiented, whereupon they sweat as much as possible they may, which drink they use for certain days, eating only a little biscuit, with a roasted hen, in our country we use to cut the root in small pieces, and seeth it, causing the sick person to drink it certain days: by this Island there lieth another (but somewhat further into the sea) called S Clara, not that it is at this present, neither was in time passed inhabited, as having neither wood nor fresh water, but only because the predecessors of the Islanders of Puna used therein to bury their forefathers, & there offered their sacrifices: the place wherein they buried their dead, was very high, with whom they buried great treasures of gold, silver, & other jewels, as offered and laid up for the use and behoof of their Gods, which at the entrance of the Spaniards they caused to be hidden, no man knowing where it is become. This river of Tumbez is greatly inhabited, and in time past was much more populous: by it there stood a very strong and beautiful Castle, built by the jugas or kings of Casco, who ruled over all the country of Peru, and therein kept a great treasure, where there was a temple of the sun, and a covent of Ma●aconas, which is as much to say as chief or principal women and maids, that were consecrated and appointed for the service of the Temple, which lived almost after the manner and custom of the Vastale virgins in Rome▪ and were therein maintained: but because these women with their services and works are spoken of hereafter, I will for this present leave them. Touching the building of this castle, it was long since destroyed, yet not so wholly, but that men may yet perceive the greatness and magnificence thereof. The mouth of the River Tumbez lieth under four degrees on the south side in the firm land. Right over against Pana there are people that have five or six of their foreteeth in the upper gum pulled forth, some say they do it of pride, and think it a beauty, others say that they had their teeth pulled out as a punishment for certain injury they had in times past done and committed against the kings or jugan of P●ru, and others say they offer them unto their Idols. From the river Tumbez the coast runneth south-west, to Cabo Blanco, or the white Cape, being distant full 11. miles, and lieth under three degrees and from whence it runneth west, to the Island de Lobos or of wolves: between Cabo Blanco and the Isle de Lobos, lieth a point called Depa●na, and in our Card Pariana, which reacheth almost as far into the sea, as Cabo Blanco: from this point the coast reacheth again south-west, till you come to Parta, between Cabo Blanco and Parta, lieth the town of S. Michael, which was the first town that the Spaniards built within Peru, called Nova Castillia, and was begun by P●z●rius, in the year of our Lord 1531. 1●31 wherein also was the first Christian Church, although at this time of small importance, and so I will leave to speak thereof. The whole coast from Tumbez is without hills or days, and where there are any dales they are bare, only full of sand and stones, and but few rivers issue from the coast: the haven of P● lieth beyond the Cape somewhat more than six miles, and is a good haven, wherein they rig their ships, & new tar them, being the principal staple of all Peru, and of all the ships that sail for those parts. This haven of Parta lieth under five degrees, from the Island of Wolves aforesaid, thither you run east and by west, which are distant three Spanish miles, or twelve Italian miles, and from thence the coast runneth south, wherewith you fall upon the point de la Cora: in the middle between the Island of Wolves and this point, there is a great intercourse or creak of water, having very good harbour for ships to anchor in, it lieth under six degrees on the south side of the line, from thence you perceive 2. Islands, both called Islas de Lobos, that is, Islands of Sea Wolves, because of the great quantity that are thereabouts: the first of these Islands lieth north and south, with the first point, and is distant from the firm land three Spanish miles, or 12. Italian miles: the other Island lieth 9 miles further forward, and is not full under seven degrees, south-west from the coast, till you come to the haven called C●sma, and from this first Island you sail north-east & south-west to Malabrigo, (which is the slender or bad defence) where there is a haven wherein their ships may not enter, but with fair weather, and such specially as have great occasion, thereby to further their voyage. Seven miles and a half further you come to Tarr●e●sse, (that is the cliff) of Truxilio, which is a very bad haven, and hath no other harbour or defence, then only good anchors, and a mile and a half within the land lieth the town of Truxilio, which is also one of the Spanish towns, situate in the plain country of Peru, it is builded upon the corner of a River in the valley of Chimo. The country thereabouts is very fruitful, abounding in wheat, M●l●, cattle and water, and the town built in good proportion, having about three hundred Spanish houses, with broad streets, and a great market place: round about the town are many fair gardens, and every house is served with water by channels, coming out of the River, and runneth into all their gardens, which are continually green and full of blossoms, wherefore it is said this town lieth in a very good place, compassed about with fair and pleasant meadows, corn fields, and Pastor grounds, where the inhabitants feed their cattle, and likewise plant and sow their Corne. There the Spaniards have planted many kinds of spanish fruits, as por●ga●nats, oranges, lemones, citrons, figs, & much of the country fruit in great abundance, and very good: besides this, they have many fowls, hens, and capons, whereby they are provided of all things, of flesh in great abundance, and fish out of the sea, which is hard by them, & also in the river. The Indians inhabiting about the town, are in subjection to the Spaniards, and furnish the town with all things that are necessary: at this Town there are whole ships laden with cotton linen, made by the Indians to sell in other places. This town was made and erected by Marquis Francisco Pizarto, the first governor of Peru, 1533 in the year 1533 From Tru● by land unto saint Michae● another spanish town, and the first place where they inhabited in those countries, are about five and forty spanish miles, or an hundred and eighty Italian miles, little more or less, for that coming from Saint Michae●s to the valley Motup●, are fifteen miles and a half, all sandy and bad way, specially where men much chiefly travel: and being past those fifteen miles, you enter into certain valleys, and though thereabouts falleth certain small rivers out of the hills, yet they reach not to the valleys, but run into the sands, whereby they do no good: and to travail this way, you must departed out of Saint Micaels in the enening, and so go all night, and early in the morning you come to certain places where you find water to drink, for by night the heat of the sun doth not hurt, some carry bottles with water or wine, and when you come unto the valley Motupe you enter into the king's hieway, very broad & even, which I have occasion to speak of the kings of Peru▪ I will declare more at large. This valley is broad and fruitful, but the river that falleth from the mountain, stoppeth before it cometh unto the sea but because the earth is very moorish, there groweth many trees: the people draw their waterout of certain pits, which they dig within the earth, their traffic is cotton wool, and cloth made thereof: three miles from Motupe lieth the fair fresh valley of Xa●anca, which is also three miles great, through the which there runneth a goodly river from whence they fetch water to moisten their grounds: this valley in time past was very populous, and likewise the other: in this valley were many houses of great Lords, that therein kept their stewards to command over the rest, who were greatly honoured and feared by the common people: from this valley you go to another called ●uqueme▪ which likewise is great and full of bushes, the ruins of the great houses that stood therein, yet to be seen, do evidently show that many people have inhabited in that valley: a days journey further there is yet another fair valley called ●●nto, and between these two valleys there is nothing but sandy ways, and dry stony hills, where you find● neither living creatures, trees, nor leaves, but only certain birds that fly over it, and such as will pass that way, must have good guides, lest they lose themselves in the sandy downs, and by reason of the great heat of the sun, and want of water, should faint for thirst. From Cinto you come to an other valley called Coliche, through the which there runneth a great river called by that name: this valley likewise in times past was full of people, but now for the most part by means of the wars, they are almost consumed: from whence you go to Zana, much like the ●ormer, and somewhat further to Palcamayo, of all the rest thereabouts the most fruitful and populous: the people of this valley before they were overcome and subdued by the ●ings of Peru were very mighty and much esteemed of by their neighbours, they had great churches, wherein they sacrificed, but now all destroyed and overthrown: there were likewise many Indians graves. Through this valley there runneth a great river, that watereth all their grounds, and through it also passeth the king's high way, and therein were many houses belonging to the king. In this valley they make much cotton work, & have all kind of cattle, as kine, hogs, goats, and such like beasts, and is very temperate. From this valley you go to another called Cancama, not inferior for fruitfulness and pleasure to the other. They have likewise many sugar canes and very good fruit, wherein there is a cloister of Dominican Friars, made by Dom di S. Themafe, and three miles from thence in the valley of C●●●o, lieth T●ux●l●▪ as I said before, which val●●e keepeth the name of a Lord called C●●o, who was a valiant Soldier, and lived long time 〈◊〉 wars. The kings of Peru greatly esteemed that valley, wherein they builded many houses and gardens of pleasure, and through it also passeth the king's high way, with the wales: but returning again unto the coast, the haven of ●xillo lieth under seven degrees ● and from thence you sail to the haven of Goanape▪ which lieth full five miles from the town of ●x●lo, under eight degrees and ● and somewhat further southward lieth the haven 〈◊〉 or holy, where the ships put in, by it there is a great river and a very good water: all this coast is without hills, and (as I said before sandy and chalky valleys. This haven of Porto Santa lieth under nine degrees: and further southward about four miles distant lieth another haven called Ferrol▪ a very good and sure haven, but hath neither fresh water, nor wood to burn: and about four miles and a half further there lieth a haven called Casina where there is a River of fresh water, and much wood to burn, where the ships do ordinarily refresh themselves, it lieth under ten degrees: From Casma the coast runneth south to the cliffs called Los Farollones di Guaura: A little further lieth Guarmey, wherein runneth a river: and from thence you sail the same course to the Barranca, or Downs, which is fifteen miles towards the south: and four miles and one half further lieth the haven of Guaura, where the ships may take in as much salt as they will, for there is so much that all Spain and Italy might be furnished with salt from thence, and yet they would have sufficient for the country: three miles further lie the Cliffs or Farrollones: From this point which ●utteth out of the land with the same north-east and southweast course, you sail six miles further, to the furthest cliff that lieth into the sea. These Cliffs lie under eight degrees and one half: from thence the coast turneth again southeast, till you come to the Island of Lyma, in the middle way, and somewhat more towards Lyma lieth a rock which is called Salmarina, and is under seven or seven degrees and a half. This land maketh a bar of defence before Callao, which is the haven of the Town of Kings, or of Lyma, and by this defence from the Island the haven is very safe, for the ships to harbour in: Callao lieth under twelve degrees and a half. The way by land from Truxillo to Lima. THe town of Truxillo lieth distant from Lima sixty spanish miles, which is 48. dutch miles, or 240. Italian miles, all the which way is sandy, unless it be when you pass certain valleys. Now when you set out of Truxillo, you come first to the valie of Gu●nape, which is full five Spanish miles from thence, that is, 21. Italian miles, which in times past was well known because of the good drink called Cica, that was made there, no less then in Italy, Mente, Frascon, and in Spain, S. Martin, are esteemed for the good wines that are there to be sold, and this valley is inhabited and watered as the rest are, it hath a very good haven, where the ships take in all their provision: from thence you come to a little valley, where no river runneth through, but it hath a small water, where those of Peru and other travailers use to drink: and going further, you come to the valley of Santa, which in time past was very populous, and had in it many brave soldiers, and captains for commanders, which held stoutly against the Kings of Peru, so that they were forced to overcome them more by policy then force: they were likewise much esteemed of by their kings, that caused many houses & palaces to be built therein, as being one of the greatest and biggest valleys in those countries, and through it there runneth a very strong and great river, which is very full and high when it is winter in the hills, wherein also were many Spaniards drowned. Now they have a drift to set over their passengers, therein in time passed there dwelled many thousand people, now there are not above 400. left. They go appareled both men and women with certain mantles and shirts, with bands or rolls about their heads: all kinds of fruits both of that country, and such as are brought out of Spain, do grow therein in great abundance. There likewise they take much fish: the ships that sail along the coast, do there take in fresh water and other provisions: two days journey from thence, lieth another valley called Guambac●o, for fruitfulness & other things like unto the rest, & about a days journey and a half further lieth the valley of Guarmey, wherein are many beasts, cows, hogs, and horses, from thence you go to Parmongo, no less pleasant than the former: in it are yet seen certain fair castles, built after their manner, wherein upon the walls are painted the Images of certain beasts and birds: and it is to be wondered at how they make the water run out of the river so far into the land, whereby it moisteneth all the country: a mile and a half from the valley, lieth the river Guaman, which in our speech signifieth the river of the fields, and is by them called Barranca, which valley is like all the rest, and when it raineth much in the hills, this river is very dangerous. A days journey from thence lieth the valley of Guaura, from the which you go to Lima, the valley wherein it lieth is the greatest and broadest of all that are between it and Tumbez, and as it is greatest, so was it very populous, whereof at this time there are few left: for when the town began to be inhabited, the inhabitants of the town took the country and land from those that dwelled in the valley, who after that were likewise destroyed and clean rooted out▪ This town next unto Cusco, is the greatest in all the country of Peru and the principal, for that at this present the Viceroys of Peru, the Archbishop, the Council, and the Chancery, wherein all processes are sued, and the laws of the whole country administered, are resident therein, whereby there is great traffic and concourse unto Lyma, because many people come thither out of the towns lying about it. In this town are fair houses, some built with Towers and costly galleries: the Market place is great, and the streets broad, and entering into the market place, from whence also you may go into every place of the town, and to the fields, and into most of the houses there runneth certain channels, that convey water, a great commodity and pleasure unto the townsmen, wherewith they may water all their gardens and orchards, which are there very fair and pleasant: upon the river likewise are many water mills, made after the manner of our country, wherewith they grind their corn, to conclude, therein dwelleth many rich inhabitants, some worth 150000. ducats: and from this town oftentimes there saileth ships that are worth in value at the least 800000. ducats, and some a Million: on the east side a little above the town, lieth a high hill, whereon there standeth a Crucifix: on another side of the town, the townsmen have certain places where they keep their cattle, their dovehouses, vineyards, (but no good grapes because of the ground) gardens of pleasure, not only full of all those country fruits, but also of Spanish fruits, as figs, poundgarnats, lemons, oranges, melons, beans, pease, and sugar canes, all very good and savoury, and better then in Spain, and to say the truth, to pass a man's life in quietness (were it not for the report that runneth of the Spaniards, that they make war against those people without a cause) I think it the best and most pleasant place in all the world, the air being so temperate, that all the year long there is no extremity either of heat or cold, and it was never heard that ever they had famine, plague, or any rain, thunder, or lightning, but to the contrary, always a clear and fair sky: it was builded by the Admiral Don Francisco Pizarro, in the year of our Lord 1535. 1535. and was called 〈◊〉 Kings town, because they arrived therein upon twelve day, by us so called. Touching victuals, besides fish, which they have both out of the sea and the River▪ in great abundance, as also flesh and fruits of trees, and of the earth, as I said before: they have no less quantity of wheat: and the four months of summer in Spain, are winter with them, only somewhat colder than the summer: in those sour months of winter, there falleth every day in the forenoon, a small dew or mist, but not unwholesome, as with us, for that those that have any pain in their heads, washing their heads therewith, it healeth the ache: it is very likely that this town of Lima will daily increase in people and houses, for many years together there were not above 500 houses therein, yet the place is great enough to contain 2000 houses, for the streets are very broad, and the market as big as a great field, every house is eighty foot broad, and a hundred and sixty foot long, and because there is no convenient wood whereof to make chambers, for that all their wood within two or three years, is clean consumed by worms, therefore the houses be but of one story high, yet very costly and sumptuous, with many chambers, halls, and parlours, both fit to dwell in, and also to receive strangers, the walls of the houses are made of a certain stuff baked hard together, and filled with earth. They cover their houses with painted mats, or else with painted linen, and round about and above upon the walls they make arbours of green boughs, wherein they sit to keep themselves from the sun, for rain they need not care, for there it never raineth: this City hath under it all these towns hereafter named, where there are Bishops, as Quito, Cusco, Guamanga, Arequipa▪ Pax, P●ata, Trugillo, Guanuco, Chachapo●a, Portus, Vetus, Guaiaquil, Popatan, Carchi▪ Saint Michael, and S. Francis. Before it was said that Peru is divided into three provinces, in flat or plain land, on the sea coast in hilly land, that runneth through the middle of Peru, & in other lands, lying beyond the hills: touching the flat land on the sea shore, I have hitherto spoken, beginning from the line, and the Cape Pas●ao hitherto, so you must understand that from Tumbez, not only to Lima but also further southward, the sea coast is full of many great droughts, and wild sandy places, where for the space often miles it never thundereth, lighteneth, nor raineth, but beyond that, or all the space that is between those ten miles and the hills, it thundereth, lighteneth, and reigneth. In this flat land there are no fountains nor wells, but four or five standing waters that are brackish, because they are near the sea, the inhabitants use the river waters, that run out of the hills, which spring of the snow and rain that falleth on the hills, and not out of fountains that stand among the hills. The distance of these rivers are already partly described, lying seven, eight, ten, twelve, fifteen, and twenty miles one from the other, yet most part seven or eight, whereby such as travail direct their course, because they have no other waters: on both sides of these rivers about a mile broad or further, and sometimes more or less, according to the situation of the country, are divers fruitful trees, and corn lands, which are planted and sowed by the people of the country, which they may do all the year long, also there groweth about those rivers many wild trees, cotton, reeds, thistles, and L●s, and since the Spaniards subdued the country, they sow wheat, moistening the land by certain channels, made out of the Rivers, and because they run with so great force out of the high hills, that without help men can hardly pass them, and many are drowned: such as travail in that flat country go so near to the sea coast, that they have them always in their sight: when it is winter in the hills, and that it raineth much, it is dangerous travailing in those countries, specially to pass the rivers, which they must either do upon drifts which they have for the purpose, or with a net, which they fill with canworden or goords, whereupon the travailer must lie, and one of the Indians swimmeth before him, drawing the net or drift, and an other behind that steereth it. The people in the flat land dwell in houses made of boughs, the men wear shirts and clothes upon their knees, and over it they cast an upper garment or mantle, the women wear a kind of cotton pettiecoate, from the head to the foot, and although their manner of apparel is in every place almost alike, yet they use certain differences in the attiring of their heads, some wearing nothing but plain hairelaces, some double and wreathed, others of one colour, and some of divers colours, and there is no man but he weareth some thing upon his head, and all different, according to the manner of the country. Those Perwians of the plain country are divided into three manner of people-ech having a different name, whereof the first are called jungas, those are such as dwell in the hot country, the second Tallanes, and the third Mochicas, each having a several speech, only that the Lords could speak the Cuscan speech, as our Courtiers speak French, the cause thereof is, that their Kings held it for a dishonour unto them, to speak to their subjects by an interpreter, for the which cause Guaynacapa father to Atabaleba, commanded that all the able men of the country should send their children to his Court, under pretence as he said, to serve him, to learn that speech, although his intent was none such, but only thereby to assure himself of his kingdom, against such as might rise up against him, which they would not do, he having their children in his power, and by this same means all the noble men learned the speech commonly used in the Court, wherewith a man may travail clean through the country. Of the winds that blow in the plain country of Peru, also the occasion of the droughts, and of the other towns and places which lie in the further description of the sea coast. BEfore I return to proceeding with the description of the rest of the sea coasts, from Lyma to Arequipa, I think it not unconvenient to declare why it raineth not in the plain country of Peru, lying on the sea side, where nevertheless there is so great occasion given of rain, because the Sea, (which commonly yieldeth moisture) lieth upon the one side, and the hills, (whereon there is always so great quantity of water and snow) upon the other side: you must understand that upon the hills summer beginneth in April, and continueth May, june, july, August, and September, and in October winter beginneth, and continueth the other months till March, not much differing from our Countries, or from Spain, in that time they both plant, build, and gather in their fruits and seeds: but day and night are all of a length, only that in November they differ a little, and in the plain land it is contrary, for when it is summer in the hills, it is winter there, so that in the plain country summer beginneth in October, and continueth till the month of Aprll, where as then winter beginneth: and surely it is a very strange thing to think how so great difference should be in one country, where a man may upon one day in the morning, travail from the hills, where it raineth, and before night be in the plain country, where it never or very seldom raineth, for that from the beginning of October, all the summer long, it never raineth in that country, only there falleth certain dew, which in many places hardly layeth the dust of the sands, wherefore the inhabitants of the plain country must continually water their grounds, and not till nor plant any more land, than they can bring the water unto: in other places by reason of the unfruitfulness of the country, there is no grass, as being all dry sandy and stony grounds, the trees growing thereon, are unfruitful, with very few leaves, there likewise groweth divers thistles and thorns, and in some places nothing at all: when it is winter in the plain country, there are certain thick and close clouds, only as if the air hung full of rain, from whence there only proceedeth a certain small miseling, that can hardly lay the dust of the sand, which notwithstanding is a very strange and wonderful thing, that the air being in that sort so thick and close, there falleth no other moisture, and yet the sun for many days because of the clouds, cannot be seen, and as the hills are very high, and the coast low, it appeareth that the hills draw the clouds unto them, not suffering them to fall upon the plain land, so that when the waters do naturally keep their course, it raineth much in the hills, and not in the plain country, but therein causeth a great heat, and when the dew falleth, than it is clear weather upon the hills, and rains not there: likewise it is very strange that for the most part of the year there bloweth but one kind of wind in the plain country, that is, south-west winds, which although in other countries they are commonly moist, and causes of rain, there they are clean contrary, I think because they are suppressed by the high hills, from whence they blow, that they draw no moisture or dampenesse out of the sea into the air, whereby any great rain should follow: by these winds also it happeneth that the water in the South sea runneth into the North, and maketh a hard navigation from Panama to Peru, both against wind and stream, in such sort that it cannot be done, without lavering and striving against the wind. There is yet another thing to be marked, which is, that under the line in some places it is moist, and in some places cold and moist, and in those plain countries of Peru, cold and dry, and departing from thence to the other side, it raineth continually. Here followeth the description of the coast of the plain country of Peru (with the havens and rivers lying therein) between the town of Lyma, and the province of Dechia, as also the degrees and the manner of the sailing on that coast. THe Ships that sail from the town of Lyma or of Kings, take their course towards the south, and so come to the haven of Singalla, which is very great, whereby at the first the Spaniards were in mind to have built the town of kings in that place, it lieth distant from Lyma 2●. Spanish miles, or 105. Italian miles, whereof five make a Dutch mile, which is one and twenty Dutch miles, it lieth not full under fourteen degrees on the south side of the line. Hard by the haven of Sangalta, lieth an Island taking the name of the sea Wolves: all the coast from thence forward is very low, although in some places there are small hills of plain stone, and some sandy downs, wherein as yet, neither before, nor till this time it ever reigned, where also there falleth no other moisture, then only the small dew, whereof I spoke before: about this Island of sea Wolves, there are seven or eight other Islands, which lie in Triangle, whereof some are high, some low, and all unhabited, having neither water, wood, trees, grass, nor any thing, only Sea Wolves, and great store of sand. The Perwians of the firm land, (as they themselves say) in times past used to go into those Islands, and there to offer sacrifices, where it is thought much treasure lieth hidden, these Islands are distant from the firm land about three miles. Further in the same course under 14. and 1/● lieth another Island of the same name, and from thence sailing on, and coasting along the shore south-west, and south-west and by south, and being 9 miles beyond the Island, you come to a point called Nasca, lying under fifteen degrees less ¼ under the which the ships may anchor, but yet they cannot land with their boats, neither throw forth their Bocken: following the same course under fifteen degrees, 1/● there is another head or point called S. Nicolas, and from this cape the coast runneth south-west, and when you have sailed nine miles in that sort, you come to a haven called Hacan, which lieth under sixteen degrees, from whence following on the coast, you come to the river Diocouna, on which side the coast is altogether wild: A little further there is another river called Camena, and somewhat further the river Quilca, and about half a mile beyond it there is a very good ground where the ships may ride and anchor, which haven is also called Quilca, like the river: and from thence as men put out, they sail to the town of Arequipa, which lieth 12. miles from this town, the haven and the town lying under seventeen degrees ½: sailing along the coast of this haven, about three miles distant you see certain Islands, in the which certain Indian fishermen of the firm land do lie to catch fish: about two miles further there is another Island hard by the firm land, where on the loof side the ships may harbour, it is called Chul●, from whence there are wares sent to Arequipa and is from Quilca nine miles▪ it lieth under seventeen degrees and a half. The way by land from Lyma or Cidado de los Re●es to Arequipa. DEparting from Lyma, and following the coast about three spanish miles, or twelve Italian miles you come to the valley of Pachacama, in our card Pachamma, a most pleasant place, and well known among the Perwians, because of the most stately Temple that sometimes stood therein, for riches exceeding all others in that country, being placed upon a little hill made of square stones and earth: in the which temple were many painted doors & walls, with forms of wild beasts: in the middle thereof where the idol stood, were the priests, that showed themselves to be very holy, and when they offered sacrifice for all the people, they turned their faces towards the gates of the temple, and their backs to the Image, casting down their eyes, and full of fearful demonstrations, made great stamping (as some of the old Indians say) like the manner of the sacrificators of the Idol Apollo, when the people stayed to hear the prophecies. Those old Indians likewise say that they used to offer many beasts and some men unto this Idol, & at their chief feasts this Idol gave them answer to their demands, and what he said they believed: in this temple there was great treasure of gold and silver hidden, and the priests were greatly esteemed, the Lords of the country being much subject to their commandments: round about this temple were certain houses made for Pilgrims, and no man was esteemed worthy to be buried about that Church, but only their kings, noblemen, and the priests that came thither on pilgrimage, bringing certain offerings with them: when they held their greatest feast in all the year, there assembled many people, that according to their manner played on instruments: when the kings of Casco subdued the valley, they having a custom throughout all their countries, to erect temples in the honour of the sun: and beholding the greatness and ancientness of that temple, with the persuasion that the common people had of the holiness of that place, as also the great devotion used therein, they thought it not convenient to destroy that church, but appointed another to be made by it in honour of the sun, which should be esteemed the greater, which according to the king's commandment being finished, be endowed it with great gifts, sending thither certain women, wherewith the devil of Pachacan●a was very well pleased, as it appeareth by the answer he gave unto them, being served as well in the one temple as in the other, and keeping the poor souls under his power: and now although this temple is defaced, yet he ceaseth not secretly to speak with some of the Indians, telling them that the same God which is preached by the Spaniards and he are all one, thereby to keep them in obedience unto him, and not to become christians. In steed of those Idols, there are crosses erected, as they think to please the devil, the name of the devil was Creator of the world, for Camac is creator, and Pacha world: but God permitting Francis Piza●ius to take King Atabaliban prisoner, he sent his brother Fernando Pizarrus to destroy the temple, and to take away the treasure, although the priests before his coming had hidden part thereof, which could never be found, yet a great part was carried away. This valley is very fruitful, rich, and full of trees, abounding with kine and other cattle, as also good horses. From the valley Pachacama you come to Cilca, where there is a notable thing to be noted, for the strangeness thereof, for it never raineth there, neither is there any river, whereby they may convey the water, therewith to water their grounds, yet the most part of this valley is full of Maiz and other roots that are good to eat, with fruitful trees: the means they have to help themselves therein, is thus, that they make certain deep pits within the earth, wherein they sow their Maiz and other roots and other fruits, and by reason of the clear and pleasant air, as also the small dew and moisture that falleth, God sendeth them great abundance of Maiz and other things, but no other corn, neither would that likewise grow therein, if they did not throw one or two heads of the fish called Sardinia into the ground with every ear of corn, which fish they take with nets in the sea, and by that means it groweth in great abundance, whereby the people maintain themselves. The water that they use to drink, they take it out of great deep pits, and for the better provision of their corn, they do every year fish for so many Sardines as they shall need, both to eat, and sow their corn. There was likewise in that country many houses for provision and munition, belonging to the King of Peru, therein to lodge and rest themselves when they travail through their countries. Two miles and a quarter from Ci●ca is the province of Mala, where there runneth a fair river, the coast whereof is full of trees: and not full four miles further lieth Goarco, well known in that country, being great and broad, and full of fruitful trees, specially of Gwyas, a certain Indian fruit, very pleasant of smell and taste, and also Guavas, and Maiz in most great abundance, with all other things, as well Indian as Spanish fruits. Besides this there are great numbers of Pigeons, Turtle Doves, and other kinds of fowls, in the woods and wild country, which make a good shadow in the valley, under the which there runneth certain streams of fresh water. The inhabitants of this country say, that in times past that place was very populous, and that they ruled and had commandment over some of the hills, and over plain countries, and when the Ingen or Kings of Peru or Cusco came to subdue them, they held wars against him for four years together, minding not to lose the liberty, which their predecessors before them had so long maintained. During the which wars, many strange things happened, which are herein needless to rehearse, because my meaning is not to make a History, but only to describe the coast: and although the Kings of Peru in summer time, because of the great heat withdrew themselves into Cusco, yet they had their Captains and Soldiers that held continual wars, and because they might the better bring their affairs unto effect, the Ingen in this valley caused a new Casco to be built, whether he and his nobility repaired, giving the streets and other places the names of the old Cusco, & when he had subdued that people, the said residence of the King and the town did both decay, yet in steed thereof there remaineth a goodly Castle, which he left in sign of victory, situate upon a hill within a goodly valley, the foundation being of four squared stones, so cunningly closed together, that it could not be perceived how they were joined: from the which Castle there went a vast under the earth to the sea coast, so that the waves beat against the entry thereof with such force, that it is wonderful to think how that piece of work was made: which Castle was most curiously painted, and in it also there was a great part of the king's treasure, the ruins whereof in regard of the Perwians perpetual commendations ought not further to be spoiled, as being works done by such people, which unto us would be altogether incredible, if they had not been seen: a mile & a half further upward from the castle of Goarco there is a river called Lunaguana, in our Card Laguna, which valley is altogether like the former, and four miles and a half from that is the great valley of Chincha, much esteemed in Peru, specially by the ancient inhabitants. In this valley there is a cloister of the order of saint Dominike. At the spaniards arrival there were above 25000. men in that valley, where now there are scarce 5000. and were overcome by Inga jupangue, & of ●opaynga Iupang●e, who had their governors therein, with many houses of pleasure, and the temple of the Sun, yet the inhabitants lest not off to serve and honour their old Idol called Cinciaycama, the king had likewise in this valley many pensioners and soldiers, commanding some of them for certain months in the year to repair unto the Court, and go to wars with him. This valley of Cincia is one of the greatest valleys in all the country of Peru, where it is a most pleasant sight to behold the green trees that grow in the waters that run under them, with most sweet and pleasant Citrons, not like the Spanish Citrons, although in form not differing much, for that these being peeled are yellow, and of a good taste, and so pleasant, that a man can never satisfy himself therewith: in those woods there are many birds, but beasts very few, because of the continual wars: in times past, there was likewise many graves in this country, wherein the Spaniards found much treasure. Departing from this goodly province of Cincia, and travailing further over the plain country, you come to the pleasant valley I●a, which is no less inhabited than the former, through the which also there runneth a river, which in some times of the year is so small, that they should want water, but that they have a channel of water that cometh out of the hills: herein are many fruits, there are likewise many young horses, kine, goats, pigeons, and turtle doves: from thence you come to the valley and river of Nasca, otherwise called Caxa Malca, which in times past was very populous, where they till their ground, and water their fruits, in manner before rehearsed. These people for the most part were spoiled and consumed by the disunion and contention of the Spaniards, in it were many great places and houses of munition for the kings of Peru, and divers graves, all spoiled and destroyed by the Spaniards: the valleys of Nasca are many in number, whereof one of them hath many canes that yield much sugar: they have likewise much sugar, which they bring to sell in the towns bordering upon them: through all these valleys the kings great high way doth pass, and in some sundry places there are as yet certain tokens or signs to show the right way, that men should not stray aside, of the which way I mean to say more hereafter, when I come to speak of the kings of Peru: from this valley commonly called Nasca you go to Hacary, and then to Ocuna, Icamanna, and Iquilca, where there are great rivers, and although at this present there are but few inhabitants, yet in times past they were no less populous than the first, they are fruitful and very fat to feed cattle: in the valley of Quilca lieth the haven of Arequipa, and the town, so that from Lima or the King's town to Arequipa are ninety Spanish miles, or three hundred and sixty Italian miles: the town lieth about eleven miles within the valley of Quilca, distant from the sea in the best and most pleasant place of all the valley to be built upon, where there is a very good and temperate air, whereby it is commended for one of the most wholesomest places in all Peru, and the pleasantest to dwell in, being a Bishopric, and under the jurisdiction of Lyma, having in it about three hundred Spanish houses: the country thereabouts is very fat, and yieldeth very good Corn, whereof they make bread: the limits or jurisdiction of the town reacheth from the valley of Hacari, to Tarapaca, and in the province or country of Condesuyo: they have likewise authority over certain places, which are under the Spanish government: those of Hubnas', Ciqui Guanitta, Quimistaca, and Colagnas, are all under the commandment of this town, in time passed very populous, and now most part destroyed by the Spaniards: they pray to the sun, as other Perwians do, and wear shirts and mantles, most of their silver and treasure is brought from Charcas, and the mines of Potoisi, and Porco, from thence it is carried to Lyma, and so to Panama and Spain: about this town there is a hill of Brimstone, which burneth continually, whereby it putteth the country in great fear, doing great hurt unto the country and the town: sometimes by reason thereof they have certain earthquakes: this town was builded by Francisco Pizarro in his majesties name, in the year of our Lord 1536. 153● Many Spanish wares (as wine, oil, olives, meal, corn, or wheat. etc.) are brought thither, therewith to serve the Country of Charcas, and the mines of Potoisi & Porco. There also many of the Inhabitants of the p●●ne country do come and traffic, concerning the mines aforesaid, whereby much silver and treasure is brought thither, to be conveyed from thence into other places: thereabouts on the sea coast are many great Gieren, that spread their wings at the least fifteen or sixteen handfuls broad, that live upon Sea Wolves, which they take, picking out their eyes, and feeding of their bodies. There are likewise great numbers of Sea Mews, by the Spaniards called Alcatraces, that likewise live of sea fish and sea crabs, and such like. Their flesh is stinking and unwholesome, so that many who for want of meat have eaten them, died thereof. And thus much for the first part of the plain country of Peru, lying along the sea coast. Now before I proceed further, I will speak somewhat of the Perwians dwelling upon the hills, and of their towns, withal not forgetting their kings, that ruled over all those people, and have so rich a country of gold & silver: Peru is in length 525. Spanish miles, or 420. Dutch miles, which are 2100. Italian miles in breadth: in some places 75. Spanish, or 60. Dutch miles, in some places broader, and in some narrower, accounting the length from Quito, to the town Delia Platta: in this country of Peru are three sorts of hills, wherein men cannot inhabit: the first part of the hills are called Andes, which are full of great Woods, the country being unfit and unwholesome to dwell in, which likewise were not inhabited, but beyond the hills: the second part of the hills taketh her course from the Andes, which are very cold, and are great snow hills, so that there also no man can dwell, because of the great cold and abundance of snow, which maketh the ground so soft, that nothing can grow therein. The third part of the hills are the Sandie Downes which run through the plain land of Peru, from Tumbez to Tarapaca, where it is so hot, that neither water, trees, grass▪ nor any living creature is seen thereon, but only certain birds that fly over them. Now Peru being so long, and situate in this manner, there are many wild and desert places not inhabited, for the causes before rehearsed, and such as were inhabited were great valleys and dales, that by reason of the hills are throwded and defended from the winds and snow, whereby those valleys and great fields are very fruitful, so that whatsoever is planted therein, yieldeth fruit most abundantly: the woods about them bring up many beasts and birds: the Perwians that dwell between these hills, are wiser, stronger, and subtler than those in the plain country lying on the sea coast, and apt to govern and for policy: they dwell in houses made of stone, whereof some are covered with earth, others with straw, because of the rain, whereof those in the plain country by the sea side, have no care at all, covering their houses, thereby to keep them from the sun, with painted mats, or boughs of trees, out of these valleys lying between the hills, there runneth many streams of good water into the south sea, and moisten the plain country of Peru, causing many fruitful Trees, corn, and other things necessary for man's life to grow therein, as I have already declared. Of the people and countries that are therein lying from Pasto to Quito. THe village of Pasto lieth in the valley Atris, which is in the land of Quillacinga, people without shame and good manners, as also they of Pasto, little esteemed by their neighbours, travailing from Pasto you come to Funez, and two miles and ¼ further to Isles, from thence to Gualnatan are two miles and a half, and from thence to Ipiules two miles and a quarter, in all these villages is very little maiz by reason of the cold, although they are so near unto the line, but much Papas and other roots that are to be eaten: from Ipiules you travail to Guaca, but before you come at it you may see the King's highway, which is no less to be wondered at, than the way that Hannibal made through the Alps, whereof hereafter I will speak: also you pass hard by a river, upon the side whereof the King of Peru had made a fort, from whence he made war upon those of Pasto, and over this River there is a bridge, by nature so artificially made, that art could not possibly mend it, it is of a high and thick rock, in the middle whereof there is a hole, through the which, with great fury the stream passeth, and upon that rock men may go over it, this rock in their speech is called Lu●●ch●ca, that is, a stone bridge, about that place is a fountain of warm water, wherein a man cannot endure to hold his hands, although the country about it and also the river are very cold, whereby it is hard travailing: by this bridge also the King of Peru meant to have built another castle, therein to keep garrison, but he was prevented by the Spaniards arrival in those countries: in this country there groweth a certain fruit as small as plumbs, and black, by them called Mortunnos, whereof if any man eateth, they are drunk and as it were out of their wits for the space of four and twenty hours. From this small country of Guaca you come to ●usa where the province of Pas●o endeth: not far from thence you come to a little hill, whereupon also the Kings of Peru had a castle much defended by the Perwians, and going further you come to the river of Mira, where it is very hot, an there are many kinds of fruits, and certain fair melons, good connies, turtle doves, and partridges, & great abundance of corn, barley and maiz: from this river you travail down to the rich and costly houses of Carangue, & before you come thither, you must first pass over a lake in India called Aguarcocia, in our speech the open sea, because Guianacapa king of Peru, at the Spaniards arrival caused 20000. men of the places thereabout to be assembled, & destroyed them all because they had displeased him, and threw their bodies into that lake, making the water red with their blood. The houses of Carangue are in a little place, wherein there is a goodly fountain made of costly stone, and in the same countries are many fair houses belonging to the kings of Peru, all made of stone, and also a Temple of the same, wherein there was alone 200. maids, that served the temple, and are very narrowly looked unto, that they commit no uncleanness, if they did they were cruelly punished, and hanged, or buried quick, with them also were certain priests that offered sacrifices and offerings, according to their religious manner. This Temple of the sun in time of the kings of Peru was holden in great account, being then very carefully looked unto, and greatly honoured, wherein was many gold and silver vessels, jewels and treasure, the walls being covered with plates of gold and silver, and although it is clean destroyed, yet by roums you may still behold the great magnificence thereof: in times past the kings of Peru had their ordinary garrison in the houses of Carangue, with their Captains, who both in time of peace and war, continued there to punish offenders. Departing from the houses of Carangue, you come to O●aballo, which is also rich and mighty, and from thence to Cosesqui, and before you come thither, you must pass certain snowy hills, where it is so cold, that men travail over them with great pain: from Cosesqui you go to Guallabamba, which is three miles from Quito, and because the country thereabout is low and almost under the line, therefore it is there very hot, yet not so hot, that men cannot dwell therein, or that it hindereth the fruitfulness thereof: by this discourse you may perceive the eror of many ancient writers, that say that under the line by reason of the great heat no man may dwell, but to the contrary you see that after their manner they have both summer and winter, in some places cold, and in some places hot, as also that under it there dwelleth many people, and there many fruits and seeds do grow, In this way you pass many rivers by bridges, whereabouts are great houses, and strange things to be seen, and to conclude, at this present the Spaniards by them maintain their cat-tail. The description of Quito. AMong the towns that lie in the hills of Peru, and at this time inhabited by the Spaniards, Quito is one of the chiefest, it lieth in the valley Annaquito, about five miles beyond the south side of the Equinoctial line, in time past it was a very fair, rich, and pleasant town, specially in the years of our Lord 1544. 1544 and 1545. then it flourished, because the gold mines (which every man regardeth) were first found out, but by the wars that Pizarro made, it is almost destroyed, the earth thereabouts seemeth to be unfruitful, yet it is found contrary, for in it are many cattles, as also all other provision of corn, fruit, and foul: the situation of the country is very wholesome and pleasant, not much unlike Spain both for herbs, and seasons of the year, for that summer beginneth there in the months of March and April, and continueth till half November, & although there is much cold, yet they have no less seed than in Spain: there is likewise much spanish fruit, those people are commonly friendlier, and civiler than those of Pasto, and of a mean stature, and go appareled at this time like other Perwians. About Quito there used to be great numbers of sheep, that were not much unlike camels, but not so great, only in form, fit both to carry men and other burdens, but not above three or four miles a day, and being weary they lie down, so that they can hardly be forced to rise again: there are likewise many hogs and hens, that are bred of our country hens, & great abundance of connies, very pleasant of taste, and no less quantity of goats, partridges, pigeons, turtle doves, and such like foul: among other things which are by the Perwians laid up for provision (besides maiz) one is Papas, which is round like a turnup, which being sodden or roasted are altogether like chestnuts, another is a kind of fruit called Quinua, the trunk of the tree or sprig being as high as a man, with leaves like beets, whereon grow certain seeds, some red, some white, whereof they make their drink, and eat it likewise as we do rice: the people are very skilful in tilling the land but not after our manner, for there the women do it, the men spin, weave, & make clothes, and look to their arms. From Quito you come to another town called Francisco del quito it lieth on the north side in the lowest province of Peru, this town is much colder than warm, and hath but few fields about it, lying in a small valley like a pit, all compassed with hills: from S. Francisco you go to the palaces of Tomebamba (being about 30 miles distant) and from thence to Panzaleo: the inhabitants of this country differ something from their neighbours, as touching the binding of their heads where by the Indians of all places are known: they had likewise another speech differing from their neighbours, yet all of them learned the Cuscan speech, which if the fathers did not teach their children they were punished, the men wear long hair tied up with a hairlace, they go in shirts without hands or sleeves, and close all about them, only where they must put forth their heads and arms, over the which they wear long woollen mantles, and some of cotton, the Lords wear such as be very fine, and painted of diverse colours, their shoes were made of leaves, the women go in long gowns covering all their bodies, tied about them with a woollen band, going many times about their bodies, and therewith make themselves a long body, over the which they wear a fine woollen gown pinned about their necks with certain golden and silver pings, which they call Topos, having great flat heads, and very sharp points, about their heads they tie a fair fillet or headband, by them called Nin●i●: to conclude, the manner of their apparel and also that of Cusco, is the fairest and best in all America. They are very careful to comb their hair, which they wear long: they are white of face, of good complexion and manners, wherein they differ much from the women of the plain country: two miles from Pancalco lieth Mulahallo, in times passed also very populous, but at this present most consumed: on the right side of this villag lieth a hill of brimstone, which when it bursteth out, it casts forth many great stones, with fearful sights: a little further lieth I'acunga, in time passed not less than Quito, as well for houses as other things, as by the ruins may yet be seen. From Tacunga you come to Muliambato, and from thence to the river Ambato, and two miles further to Mocia, and from thence to Rio Bamba, lying in the Province of Puruaes', where there are goodly fields and good herbs and flowers, altogether like Spain: from Rio Bamba you come to Caiambi, and then to Tumb●z, or Teocallas, and Ticiquiambi▪ and from thence to Thomebamba, in the Province of Canares there were likewise great houses of ammunition, as also throughout the whole country, at every eight, ten, or twelve miles, wherein was all things that belonged to the wars, and thereabouts likewise were certain of the King's garrisons and captains, having commandment of the countries, thereby to hold the country in peace, and to punish such as rebelled, though they were their own sons. Thomebamba lay in a plain country, where two rivers met together, and ran into the sea, being nine mile's compass, in a cold place, where notwithstanding were many wild beasts, as Goats, Coneys, etc. there likewise was a Temple of the Sun, made of brown, green, and black stones, like jasper stones. The gates of the King's Palace were bravely guilded, wherein were set certain Emeralds plaited in gold. From Thomebamba you go to Bracamoros, in our Card Boamo●aces, found out and discovered by john Porzel, and Captain Vergara, who therein had made two or three forts, thereby to overrun and subdue the places lying about it. The Province of Bracamoros, is about sixty miles from Quito: travailing along the hill about five and forty miles further, lieth the Province of Chichapoyas, or Cachapo●as, wherein the Spaniards have a town called Frontiera, on Levanto, where the country is very fruitful of all kind of Spices, and of rich Gold mines: Levanto by reason of the situation of the place, is very strong, and well kept, as being almost compassed about with a deep valley, wherein for the most part there runneth a certain river, whereby the town of Frontier builded upon Levanto, is not easy to be won, if the bridges be once broken down. This province was built with houses, and peopled with inhabitants of the Spanish nation, by Alonzo de Aluarado, in the year of our Lord 1536. 1536. Therein are fair and white women, fairer than in any other part of Peru, also very gracious and courteous, and withal, very well appareled. From thence you go into another Province called G●ancas, a goodly country, both those people of Cachapoia and Guanca, are subject to the Spaniards of Frontiera, as also those of Cascayunga, people of another province. In all those Provinces the kings of Peru had their houses of ammunition, and in some of them rich mines of Gold. Both men and women in these countries go appareled: In time passed they had their Temples, and offered to their Idols, and were very rich of cattle, and made much costly apparel for the king, as yet at this day they do, and many fine coverlets and carpets. In those Provinces there are many fruitful trees, and the countries are full of Wheat and Barley. Touching their ceremonies, customs, burials, and offerings, they are like all the other Indians, they bury much silver and gold with their dead, and some living women: they offer unto the Sun, as I will declare when I writ of the Kings of Peru. This Andes or hill being passed, you come to Maiobamba or Moyobamba another great river, and some places inhabited: From Mayobamba, you travail to Guanuco, a town inhabited by Spaniards, and lieth about forty miles from Cachapoya, it is likewise called Leon de Guanuco, having the name of a Spanish Town, by the commandment of Vacca di Castio, borne in Leon. The situation of this Town is very good and wholesome, because the morning and night seasons are very temperate, where also by reason of the temperate air men live very healthful. There they gather much Maiz and other grains, Quinces, Figs, Citrons, Lemons, and other Spanish fruits, as also much of their own country fruit: besides this there is much Platain, & because it is a very good soil, it is thought the town will increase, for all their kine, goats, horses, and other beasts are kept in the fields. There are likewise many Partridges, Pigeons, and other Birds, wild Hawks and tame, therewith to catch the other birds. In the hills there are some Lions, Bears, and other wild beasts: and in most part of the places that are under the government of this town, the kings high way doth pass, and there are likewise many houses for ammunition: among those people were certain soothsayers and conjurers, that were skilful in the course and nature of the stars, in time passed there were so many of their country sheep, that it was incredible, which by means of the Spanish wars were most part consumed. Their houses are of stone, and covered with straw. The living women in those countries are buried with the dead men, and are not so unchaste as others are. In their country are good mines of silver: Forty miles further from Guanuco de Lion, lieth another town, inhabited by the Spaniards, and builded on the hills, by Francisco Pizarro in the king's name, in the year of our Lord 1539. 1539. and called S. johan dila vitoria di Guamanga: the cause why it was made, was chief to clear the passage between Cusco and Lyma, from invasion of the Perwians, before the country was wholly subdued: by this town there passeth a river of good sweet water to drink, and there are very fair stone houses and some towers, the market place is plain and very great, and there it is a wholesome air, for that neither sun, air, nor elements do any hurt, but are very temperate, round about the town the Spaniards have their houses for cattle, which lie in the valleys upon the rivers side. The greatest river that passeth thereabouts is called Vinaque, where there are many ruins seen, of great four square palaces, built in other sort then the Perwians use to do, that make their houses long and narrow. They say those houses were built in old time by strange people, but what they were they knew not. There is likewise goodly wheat, whereof they make as good bread as any in Spain, and all kinds of fruits in great abundance: from Guamanga to Cusco are five and forty miles, little more or less, in this way you pass the fields of Chiupas, where the cruel battle was fought between Vacca di Castra, and Dondiego di Almagro, and being eight miles beyond Guamanga, lieth Vilcas, which is said to be in the middle of all the countries, that are under the government of the Kings of Peru, for that Vilcas lieth in the middle between both, and is as far from Quito as from Chile, where also were great and costly houses for the king, and a temple of the sun, from whence five miles further you keep on the king's high way to Vramarca, whereabouts there is a bridge of two arches, very cunningly made, that passeth over a river: in breadth 166. paces. The River of Vilcas runneth out of the Province of Soras, very fruitful and abundant in victuals, gold and silver mines, and of warlike people, appareled in woollen clothes, and well esteemed of by the kings of Peru. From thence to Andagnayla upon the River Abamcay, are seven miles: and travailing six miles further, you come to another River called Apurim●, there the ways are very bad, rough, and sharp, over hills and stony ways, dangerous to descend, for that many horses laden with gold, do stumble and fall into the River, & so are spoiled: from Apurima you come to Ma●ambo, and passing the hills of Vilca conga, you come to Xaqui Xaguana, which is very even, but neither long nor broad: in this valley were certain goodly houses and palaces of pleasure for the kings of Cusco, who used to go thither to recreate themselves, and is scarce 4 miles from Cusco, through the which also passeth the king's high way, and otherwise it would hardly be traveled, as having certain moorish grounds which cross the way close by the walls: and from thence you come to Cusco, in times past the chief of all Peru, and the whole country governed by the kings, made by Mango Capo, the first king of that race, in a very rough and sharp place, compassed with hills and between two small rivers, whereof one runneth through the middle of the town, and is inhabited on both sides it hath a valley on the East side, & the stream that runneth through the town, taketh her course on the west side: in this valley because it is cold, there are very few fruitful trees, only certain Molles, whereof hereafter I will speak, because therewith they make their drink. On the north side this town had a Castle upon a hill, which for the greatness and strength thereof, was much esteemed, but now most part destroyed, although the foundation and some towers thereof are yet to be seen: it hath likewise on the east and north side, the Province of Andesuyo and Cinciasuyo, on the south side the countries of Callao, and Condesuio, under the which lieth Callao, between East and South, and Condesuyo between south and west: a part of this City was called Havan Cusco, & the other Oren Cusco, places where the Noble men, and Gentlemen, and principal of the town dwell: on the other side the hill Carmenga, where there stood certain small towers, wherein they noted the course of the sun: in the middle where most of the people dwell was a great place from the which there passed forth high ways, that went into the four parts of the kingdom: and this town only was orderly and fairly built with stone houses, and richer and mightier than all the other Towns of Peru, for that upon pain of death no man might carry any gold out of the same: therein was the richest temple of the sun in all the world, which was called Curicanche, & in it was the high Priest, by them called Villaona, and part of this city was inhabited by M●timaes, which are strangers, that all were holden under good policy, laws, & ceremonies of their Idols, most wonderful to hear: the Castle was made of so great four squared stones, that ten pairs of oxen could hardly draw one of them, so that it cannot be imagined how by man's hands those stones were brought thither, having neither oxen, horses, nor any other beasts to draw withal. The houses at this time inhabited by the Spaniards, are most built by people of the country, but are somewhat repaired and made greater: in the time of their kings this city was divided into four parts, according to the four parts of the world, and had the names from the four provinces that lay upon each corner of the City, and when the Kings were living, no man dwelling in one quarter of the City might remove household into another, upon great pain and punishments inflicted: and although this City lieth in a cold place, yet it is very wholesome and better provided of all sorts of victuals, and greater than any other throughout all Peru: round about it there used to be certain mines of gold, but now consumed, and are left for the silver mines of Potosi, because now the profit is greater by silver, and less danger. In this town was great resort from the parts of Peru, for till the nobility were forced to send their children thither under pretence of learning the speech, and to serve the king, but were there rather for pans, that in the mean time their fathers might not rise up against the kings: other people dwelling about it, were forced to come thither to build houses, to make clean the Castles, and to do other kinds of works, whatsoever they should be commanded: about this City there lieth a great hill, called Guanacaure, of great account with the kings, where they offered both men and beasts: and although in this City there were people of all nations, as of Chile, Pasto, Cagna●es, B●acamo●o, Chacapoyas, Guancas, Charcas, Collao, etc. yet every nation dwelled in a place by themselves, appointed for the purpose, and held the ceremonies of their ancestors, only that they were forced to pray unto and honour the sun, as the high God, by them called Mocia. There were likewise in this City many great buildings under the earth, wherein there dwelled certain conjurers, soothsayers, and such as told fortunes, who as yet are not all rooted out, and in those holes there is daily found great quantities of treasure. About the City are many temperate valleys, wherein there groweth certain trees and corn, although in times past every thing was brought thither in great abundance. Upon the river that runneth through the town they have their corn mills: now they have likewise many Spanish capons and hens, as good as any are in Spain, as also kine, goats, and other cattle: & although there are but few trees, yet there groweth much pease, beans, tars, fitches', and such like, because therein was the most rich and sumptuous temple of the sun and high priest. I think it not unconvenient to speak something of their Religion, and of the Pedigree of the Kings of Peru, and then in brief manner to go on with our course, of showing the ●ownes lying on hills, till you come to Arequipa, as also the coast reaching to the straits of the Magellanes. The Religion of the Perwians. TOuching their Religion, they acknowledge, and after their manner worshipped a creator of heaven and earth, whom they called Pachacama, which signifieth creator, & a son of the Sun & Moon, like that in the valley of Pachacama, where they had made a great temple, yet they accounted and held the Sun for the greatest God, as a creator of all living creatures, which in Cuscan speech they called Ticebiracoce, and although they had this knowledge and understanding, yet they used their old customs, not only to pray unto the Sun and Moon, but also to trees, stones, and other things, the devil through them giving them answers, and because they had no certain knowledge out of any writings or books of the scriptures, or of the creation of the world, neither yet of the flood, therefore they observe that which their forefathers told them, which was that a notable and worthy man (which they call Con) in times past came out of the north, into their countries, with most swift pace, that had no bones nor joints in his body, neither was it knit together by any kind of substance, that in one day could throw down, or raise hills, and fill deep valleys, and pass through a place where no ways nor means to pass was found, and that this man had made their predecessors, giving them herbs and wild fruits to live upon, and that he being offended with the Perwians inhabiting the plain country, converted their fruitful land into sandy grounds, and caused rain not to fall therein, yet being moved with pity, because of the beasts, and to water the dry fields he opened divers fountains and rivers, whereby the people might moisten their grounds. This Con being son of the Sun and Moon, in times past they honoured for the highest God, until an other came out of the south called Pachacama, (which signifieth Creator) who also was engendered by the Sun and Moon, and of greater power than Con, at whose coming Con departed away: and this Pachacama converted the people made by Con into Sea colts, Bears, Lions, Parats, and other birds, and made other men that were the predecessors of the Perwians now living, and taught them the manner of planting and tilling the earth, whom they after that esteemed for their God, building Churches for him, and praying unto him, and called a whole Province after his name Pachacama, lying four miles from Lyma, as already is declared, where in times past the Kings and noblemen of the land were commonly buried: which their god Pachacama was long time worshipped by them, till the coming of the Spaniards into Peru, and after that he was never seen. Again▪ it is to be thought it was a Devil, who used that manner of subtlety, thereby to deceive and blind the people, who in those times appeared in form of a man, as it is evident, that before the Spaniards arrival, he showed himself in that great costly temple, in form of a man, and answered the Priests, which answer the Priests delivered unto the poople. They do generally believe and tell, that once there was a great flood, whereby all the world was drowned, only a few persons, that hid themselves in certain high hollow trees, and having provided victuals, stopping the holes, by that means saved themselves from the common misery of all mankind: and that when th●se men thought the rain and waters to be gone, they sent out two dogs, who returning all wet back again, they guessed the water not to be consumed, and so thought it not time to go forth. After that they sent the two dogs forth again, and perceiving them to come home all dirty, they then knew the water to be gone, and came forth, where they found great numbers of snakes, which the slime earth had bred, whereby they had work enough to kill and destroy them. They likewise say that the world shallbe destroyed, but not before there shall first come a great drought, and in manner a burning of the air, whereby the sun and moon shall be darkened and taken away, wherefore when there happeneth any Eclipses or darkenesses of the sun or moon, but specially of the sun, than they sing sorrowful songs, and make great mournings, thinking the world shall be destroyed, and that the end approacheth. What are these but clouds of their religion? which the devil in so great blindness could never drive out of these poor people's hearts, so that those of Brasilia believe the immortality of the soul, and the Perwians believe not only the immortality of the soul, but the resurrection of the body, as it appeareth not only by the manner of their graves, but also by the request made by them unto the Spaniards, (when they opened their predecessors and Kings graves, to take out the treasure) desiring them not to take away or scatter the bones of the dead, that they might not want them at their resurrection. Touching the manner of their graves, their Kings and Nobility are buried with great magnificence, being set in seats within their graves, appareled with their best clothes, one or two of their living wives buried with them, being the fairest, and such as in his life time he loved best, for the which when time serveth, great controversy riseth among the women (which by the king in his life time is ordained and appointed) they bury likewise with him two or three of his servants, and much gold and silver, and the best they had, also fruit, bread, maiz, and such like things: and which is more, the last service the friends do for him, is, that with reeds or pipes they power a certain measure of their drink called Cicha into the dead man's mouth, to this end, that he may not want drink before he cometh into the other world: in which his journey he useth that meat, and the company of his wives and servants, which manner is used almost through all Peru and Mexico, only that every one doth more or less according to his estate: but they use most in Peru to bury living women, which mischief sprang from the devil that blinded them, that at some time appeared unto them in shape of those that were dead, walking upon the earth, and women with him. So great is the power and blindness of Satan in the children of the unbelieving. In East India the devil so wrought, that he got them to burn living women with the dead, & here in Peru hath persuaded them to bury living women with dead bodies. They mourn many days for their dead, and upon the grave they place the Image of the dead person. The common people and handiecraftesmen place something of their handiecraft upon their graves, and the soldier some kind of weapon used in the wars, whereby it may be seen who lieth buried in that place. So then the Perwians pray unto the Sun and the Moon, and acknowledge them for the highest gods, and swear by them, as also by the earth, which they esteem to be their mother: and if at any time they speak with the devil, ask counsel, and attending answer of him, they did it more for fear they had to be hurt by him, than for any worship: that they held and accounted the Sun for the chief and highest God, first it appeareth by many and so costly temples, by them erected, throughout all the kingdom of Peru, as also by the answer of king Atabalida, made to the Dominican Friar Vincentius de Valle Viridi (after first Bishop of Peru) who showing him of the creation of the world by God, and the redemption thereof by the death of jesus Christ, he answered him, that no man made the world, but only the Sun his god, that died not as Christ did, and said, that he might believe in the crucified and dead Christ, if it pleased him, but for his part, he would believe in his own god, and his Guacas which dieth not: this Guacas were certain stones, that with weeping they honoured and called upon. Their manner of praying to the Sun. THe Perwian (as I said before) had divers great and sumptuous Churches of the Sun in all places of the country, many of them having the walls and Pillars covered and plated with gold and silver, with most costly stools and benches, and when the Prince, Lords, or Priests would desire any thing of the sun, they rise betime in the morning, before the sun riseth, and get them upon a high stone scaffold made for the purpose, where holding down their heads, and with wring and folding their hands, and then presently lifting up and spreading their arms, as if they would receive the Sun into them, they murmur certain words, showing their requests, and in the same manner they used to pray unto the sun since they were subdued: they fall down before the Spaniards, and desire them to be merciful unto them, and not utterly to destroy them: in some places, specially under the Line and thereabouts, they placed the gates of their temples in the Est, and covered them with certain cotton linen: in every Church there stood two graven Images, of fashion like black Bucks, before the which they kept a continual fire of sweet wood, which I think to be Cedar, because the bark being taken off, there issueth a certain sweet gum, which is most excellent to preserve the bodies of dead men, and to the contrary corrupteth the body of a living man. Likewise there are in those Churches certain Images of great Serpents, which they pray unto, but this is only about the line in Peru and Cusco, and not where they have the Guacas, which are stones, about the which no man may come, but only the Priests, that are appareled all in white: and coming to them, they take in their hands certain white clothes, and fall upon the ground, speaking to the Image in a strange speech, because the common people may not understand it. Those Priests receive all the offerings that are given unto the Idol, burying the tenth part thereof in the Church, and keep the rest for themselves: and you must understand that all the offerings must be wrought with gold and silver, and of such form and fashion as the thing is which they desire to have of their Guaca. They offer also living men, and all kinds of beasts, looking in the hearts and entrails of the men or beasts which they did offer, for certain secret tokens, which if they found not upon the offerings, they still offered new men or beasts, until they found the tokens, thinking the Idol not to be pleased with such offerings as had them not. When the priests should offer sacrifices, than they abstain from the company of their wives, and ceased not all night to do nothing but cry out, and pray to the devil, running into the fields, and to the places where the Guacas stand, whereof there were so many, that every man had one before his door, and the day before they should speak with the devil, they fasted, some binding a thing before their eyes, and some thrust them clean out, and it hath often been seen that some of them have done it of mere devotion. The kings and noble men enterprise not any thing before they have consulted with the Priests, and the Priests with the Idols: in their sacrifices, they use not only beasts but men and children, but they eat not man's flesh, as the Cannibals do. When the Spaniards spoiled their Temples, they found therein many pots full of the dried bones and flesh of dead children, that had been offered to their Idols: they offer likewise birds and other beasts, and with the blood of their offerings they anoint the mouths of their Idols, and the doors of their churches. There was likewise among the gold that lay by their idols certain staves and miters for Bishops, such as our Bishops use when they are in their robes, or as the Painters use to set forth Saint Nicholas▪ with his Cross and Myter: and being asked what those things meant, they knew not what to answer, neither from whence they came. Besides those great temples of the Sun and Guacas, there were in all places of the country of Peru, many other Churches and Cloisters, for young maids, wherein some had one hundred, some two hundred, and some more, all observing chastity, or at the least, vowing to keep it, and to honour the Sun, like the Vastal virgins in Rome, or our Nuns. Those they called Mamacomas, and were bound to stay in the cloister during their lives, and never to departed from thence, doing nothing but spin, weave, and sow, very fine cloth of cotton and wool, apparel, and furnitures for their Idols, or as others affirm, the clothes by them made, were burnt with the bones of white sheep, the ashes whereof as a sign and token of godly honour they threw into the air against the Sun. Those maids were very narrowly looked unto by certain Priests, and other men, appointed for the purpose, whereof some were gelded, because they should not seek to defile them, which if the maids once committed, they were either put to death, or buried quick, but if the maid with child would take her oath that it was begotten by the Sun, than the child was free from death: and every year in the month of August, when they had gathered in their corn, or maiz, the Per●uians that dwelled in the hills made a great feast, they set up in the middle of their Market place two great high trees, like our Maie-poles, and in the top of them they placed certain Images, made like men compassed about with flowers, and so in rounds, yet in good order, coming thither they strike up drums, throwing and shouting one after the other with stones and arrows at those Images, making great noise with whooping and hallowing and every man having shot and thrown. The Priests brought an other Image, which was set below on the neither part of the trees, whereunto they offered, either a man or a sheep, anointing the Image with the blood thereof, and after they perceived the tokens in the heart or entrails, they certified it unto the people, and the tokens being found, the feast was ended, either with joy or sadness, most part in drinking, whereunto they are much addicted, and so danced, turning and passing under each others arms, each man having either a bill, club, or some other weapon in his hand: such as are desirous to know more of their ceremonies and false worshippings of Idols, let them read the histories of the Spanish Indies. The country of Peru was first ruled by judges, which are Kings or Rulers, that come from the great lake called Titicara, or as some writ, Titicaca, lying in Charcas, being four score miles in compass which runneth westward through a great river, which in some places is half a mile broad, and then runneth into an other small lake forty miles distant, and it is to be wondered at, how the abundance of water that runneth out of the great lake, is comprehended in so small a place, where it is not once perceived to increase. The lake being so small, and the water so great: but it is reported, that in that lake there is no bottom or ground, and that the water runneth under the ground thorough the earth into another sea or river, as it is said of the river Alpheus, that it runneth from Peioponces or Moica to Cicilia, under the ground: and from this lake or thereabouts the kings of Peru had their original, the pedigree of which kings is by jacob Fernando, a Spaniard, declared in this manner. Frst Mango Capa, who according to the Indians report, was not borne of a woman, but sprang out of a stone, which until this day is yet shown by them about the town of Cusco, he by his wife Mama Guaco, had issue one son called Sicheroca, that ruled after his father, and was the second Ingen or king, you must understand that the inheritance of the kingdom continueth in the issue sons successively, and not unto the children of the sons, before all the brothers have reigned one after another, but first the eldest son is King, then after his death his second brother succeed in the kingdom, and not the eldest brothers sons, and the second brother dying, there being no more brethren, the crown falleth unto the eldest brothers sons, without alteration or change: this Sicheroca was a valiant soldier like his father, and brought many of his neighbours to subjection, and by Mama Cura he had issue a son called Locuco Pang, the third king, who studied rather to hold those lands he had under his subjection, then to win or increase more unto them: and being aged, he married a wife Mama Anaverque, by whom he had a son called Maita Capa, that augmented his kingdom, and thereunto joined the province of Cusco, and by his wife Mama jacchi Dela he had issue a son, called Capa Cyupangu, of whom there is nothing worthy memory, only that he left a son (by his wife Mama Cagna) called Inga Ruca, who likewise did no special thing during his life, but only by his wife Mama M●cay he had divers sons, and one among the rest called jaguar Guacinga jupangue, of whom there is a strange history recited, which is, that he being a child of the age of three months, was taken by certain Caciquen that are likewise Lords or kings, that thought to kill him, and while they consulted amongst themselves concerning his death, it chanced that as the child cried, certain drops of blood issued out of his eyes, whereby they were abashed, esteeming it for a miracle, they left the child and departed, which being taken up by a stranger, was carried to the king, and after that became great and proved a brave soldier, so that he overcame many of his neighbours, and brought them in subjection under him, he had to wife Mama Chipuia, and by her had his eldest son named Vi●a Cocham, that succeeded him in his kingdom, and much increased his dominions: after him reigned Pachacoti his son, borne of Mama Yunta Cayan, this Prince was much valanter than all his predecessors, whereby he overcame many people, and by him the foundation of the castle of Cusco was first begun: and dying, he left for heir and successor of his kingdom ●opa Inga jupangue his son, borne of Mama Anaberque, that followed his father's steps, and overcame many people, and brought them in subjection, and finished the castle of Cusco begun by his father. The provinces by him won, were C●i●e, and Quito, and he caused the kings highway (so much wondered at of all the world to be made from Cusco, through the province of Charcas unto Chile, in the which way, from half mile to half mile, he had placed posts by them called Chasquis, which were Indians that went faster than any of our horses, to the great ease and contentment of travailers, for by that means they might shorten their way, and in three days travail 120 L●uken (that is 240 miles) by reason of the swiftness of the men that bore them and stood for posts,, after the A●trican manner in the kingdom of Congo, as I have already declared, for that after the arrival of the Spaniards, there were neither horses, asses, nor mules within the country whereon men should ride or travail withal. This king dying, left issue above 150. sons, among the which one of them named Guaynacapa, begotten upon Mama Oclo his wife, succeeded him in his kingdom, not any thing inferior for valour, wisdom, and council, both in peace and war, much augmenting and increasing the limits of his country, observing great order and equity in all things, both concerning the government of the country, and the people, appointing better orders, and many old and ancient laws that were unfit and not convenient, he caused to be abrogated, and new devised in their place: he married a wife called Coyam Pilico vaco, by whom having no children, he married divers other wives, so that the number of his children was much greater than his fathers, who notwithstanding had 150 sons. Among his children the eldest was called Guascar Inga, his mother being called Rava Oclo, and as I said before this king Guainacapa much increased in his kingdom, and overcame many people, among the which he held so good government and order, as it seemed in manner unpossible, specially among such rude & simple people, that were wholly without learning, wherein appeared a most manifest example of great subjection and love in his subjects towards their natural Lords: and hereupon to his great honour, they made the two notable and costly highways (so much esteemed in all countries) and may well be accounted for one of the seven wonders of the world, for when Guainacapa was gone from Cusco with his army to make war against the province of Quito, distant from thence at the least 500 miles, he was forced to pass over high hills, whereby both he and his people endured great trouble and misery, because 〈◊〉 war was full of hard and rough stones, before his return again being victorious, his subjects in token of great joy, as also for his further ●ase and commodity, because he and his soldiers had indeed so hard and laboursome a tournee) cut down and digged up all the 〈◊〉 ways and stony cliffs, making the way even and plain, so that in some places there were valleys of twenty or thirty men's height, that were filled up and made even with the hills, which way they made in that manner for the length of five hundred miles, so plain and even that any cart or waggon might travel thereon, which way, after the Spaniards arrival in the country was in divers places spoiled and destroyed, to let the Indians from traveling that way, and thinking this not sufficient, when the said Guainacapa went to visit his country of Quito, and took his way through the plain country, they likewise made him another way, to fill all the valleys and ●rish places therein, and to make them even, which way they made about forty foot broad on both sides with high walls, and in the sandy ways they set great droughts with ropes tied unto them, because men should not lose themselves in the wa●e, which stretched likewise 500, miles, the walls as yet in some places are to be seen, but by means of their wars the Banks for the most part are taken away and burnt, and besides all this, he himself caused many temples of the sun and other Idols, and divers Ta●●bo● which are houses of munition and of pleasure (for the benefit and commodity of his successors in time of war) to be made and builded as well on the hills, as in the plain country, both on the river sides, as in every way, the rivers whereof are at this day in many places to be seen, whereby may be conjectured the greatness and riches of those kings, and the great care they had for the defence, and safety of their countries, for that hereby when they travailed through the country, not only they and all their company might lodge in those houses, but the houses were still furnished and provided (by the people inhabiting about them) not only with victuals sufficient for a whole army, but also with apparel and all kind of weapons that were used in the wars, therewith presently to apparel their soldiers, and to make them ready for the wars, as bows, arrows▪ pikes, halberds, clubs, bills, etc. for 20000. or 30000 men presently to be raised, whereof there was no want, and those houses were some 8 or 10, and some twenty miles at the furthest one from the other, never further distant than a days journey. As touching the ornaments of the kings of Peru, which they in steed of crowns and princely sceptres used to wear thereby to show their power and majesty, they ware certain tassels of red wool bound about their heads, hanging down upon their shoulders, almost covering their eyes, whereat there hung other threads, which they used when they would have any thing done or executed, giving that third unto one of the Lords that attended on them, and by that commandment governed the provinces, and by that token they commanded all whatsoever they would desire, which by their subjects was with so great diligence and dutiful obedience fulfilled, that the like was never known in any place throughout the world: and if he chanced to command that a whole province should be clean destroyed, and utterly left desolate both of men and all living creatures whatsoever, both young & old, if he sent but one of his servants to execute the same, although he sent no other power or aid of men, nor other commission than one of the theerds of his Quispell, it was sufficient, and they willingly yielded themselves to all dangers of death or destruction whatsoever. These kings were borne in chariots or seats made of beaten gold, borne on the shoulders of 1000 Lords and councelours at times thereunto appointed, whereof if any of them unadvisedly stumbled & staggered, he was presently put to death, and no man spoke unto the king at any time, but they brought him certain presents, and if they went to speak with him ten times in a day, so often must they present him with new gifts, it was likewise accounted for a great fault, so look the king in the face. Being in the wars, and having overcome any country, or province▪ they observed the ancient custom of Rome, which was, to take the people with them that they might not rise up or rebel against them, yet with great difference from the Romans', for that having won ●ame land or province, they took many or ●●we out of it, according to the number of people that were therein, & if these whom they had conquered inhabited in a hot country, they were placed in another warm country, & if theirs were cold, they likewise went into a cold country, where they had the lands divided among them, that each man might live upon it. And it the natural count●●men of any province or place w● to ●●bel against their prince, the king's Li●tenants and Commanders used the 〈◊〉 as ●hat is the strange people to keep them in subjection, and to the contrary, if the Mitimaes seemed once to stir or rise up, they kept them in subjection by the natural inhabitants, and by this policy they maintained their country in great peace and quietness. Besides this they used another means, not to be hated of their subjects, for that they never took the rule or authority (of any people that were subdued by them) from the Caciquen or Lords that were nobly borne, if any of them disliked thereof, they punished him, yet gave his office either to his children or to his brethren, commanding them to be obedient when they went to hunt and take their pleasures, which they call Chico, they assembled many men together, according to the situation of the country, some times four or 5000. men, whom they placed in a ring together, that many times compassed at the least two or three miles, and so singing a certain song, they followed each other foot by foot, until they were so near together, that they might reach hands, and yet nearer till they could embrace each other, & the nearer they went together, the closer they made the ring, by which means all the beasts by them enclosed, they killed as they thought good, with so great a noise and cry, as seemed incredible, not much unlike the manner of the Dutch Princes, in their general hunt, specially of the Wolves, only that they have not so many men, nor sing not, yet make a great noise. The beasts that they take are wild Sheep, Rheen, Foxes, Lions, black Bears, Cats, many Hogs, and other beasts, & fowls, as Turtle doves, Quails, Spetchten, Parrots Hawks, etc. The tributes and tallages, that the kings received of their subjects, were things of their own increase: out of the countries that were unfruitful they brought him Hoopwik, of Crocodiles, by them called Caymans', and many other worms. This Guaynacapa renewed the temple of the sun in the City of Cusco, covering the walls and ruffs with plates of gold and silver, and as I said before, the province and country of Quito was won by him, which country pleased him so well, that for a time he continued therein, mean time leaving his eldest son Guascar, juga Mango and other of his children in Cusco, to govern the country, and in Quito he married another Wife, daughter to the Lord of the same province, and by her he had Atabalipam, a son whom he greatly loved: and when he travailed to Cusco, he left him and others in Quito, yet before he died, he went once again to Quito, partly because the country liked him so well, and partly to see his son Atabalipam, and there before he died, he ordained that the country and town of Quito should remain to his son Atabalipam, and his heirs for ever, as being taken from his forefathers, which his son Guascar after his father's death would not permit, and for the same cause raised wars against his brother, which in the end was the overthrow and subjection of Peru, whereof, as in the life of Gualca●, (that after his father's death ruled all the country unto Quito) it appeareth. Guascar signifieth a cord or cable, for that at the time of his birth, the king caused a cable of gold to be made, as great as two hundred Indians could carry, he used likewise a plate of gold whereon he sat, worth at the least 25000. ducats (which after fell into the hands of Francisco Pizarro, first governor of Peru) and all his vessel was of gold, whereby it appeareth that gold was likewise much esteemed by them. The Kings in Cusco had many goldesmiths' shops, therein to make and work all kind of vessels, jewels, and images of men, beasts, fowls, and herbs of gold, all in good proportion: and although their Goldsmiths used not any iron tools, yet they make most excellent workmanship, although somewhat groser and plainer than ours. The manner of working was in this sort, first they took the silver or gold that they would melt, and put it in round or long melting vessels, made of cloth, pasted about with earth and beaten colours, which being dry, they set it in the fire, with as much gold and silver therein as they would melt, or as it would hold, and so with five or six reeds blow so long about it, until the metal melted and became red hot, and the skim being taken off, it being taken out of the melting vessel, every man had his part, which they sitting upon the earth, with black Ke●ci●ick stones (made in form like hammers) they forged & framed their images of Gods, vessels, and jewels of gold, chains, and forms of all kind of beasts, birds, and herbs, with all manner of things. But to return unto our former matter, the Sons of Guaynaca●a called Guascar and Atabalipa, were the cause of the destruction, ruin, and overthrow of the country of Peru by reason of the wars by them made one against the other, for the government of the country, which was so cruel, that they once met & fought for the space of three whole days together and never ceased, where many people were slain ● and Atabalipa taken in the battle and kept prisoner in the province of Tomebamba, and there very straightly kept in one of the King's Castles, yet by subtlety, and entreaty made to certain women: he had a copper inst●●ment brought unto him, wherewith he broke the walls of the Castle of Tomebamba, and got out of prison, at the same time that his brother's soldiers and captains were making good cheer, drinking their Cicha, whereunto they are much addicted, and dancing for joy of the victory: and being at liberty, he fled unto Q●●to, telling his people, that he was by his father converted into a snake, and so crept out of prison at a little hole, his father promising him victory, so that his men would once again return with him to battaylet whereby his people were so well encouraged, that they went with him again into the field, where Fortune favouring him, and being victorious, he took his brother Guascar prisoner, (to whom not long before he had been prisoner) and therewith obtained all the Country, making himself chief ruler thereof, keeping his brother prisoner within Cusco. About the same time Franciscus Pizarrus arrived in Peru, being Oyvaer of those two mighty kings, and by reason of their dissension, made him master of so great and rich countries of gold. He that desireth a larger description hereof, may read the Spanish Histories, that writ of the description of the new world. Pizarius being in the Country, made war against Atabalipam, and in th'end overcame him, and for a time kept him prisoner: and during his imprisonment he agreed with Pizario for a certain ransom, and when it was ready, he caused his brother Guascar to be sent for out of Cusco, and by the way, before he came at him, he caused him to be slain, fearing (and not without a cause) that if Guascar once came before the Spaniard, and should declare his misfortune, he would without all doubt offer a greater ransom (as he had done) than he should pay, and by that means he should remain in prison, and his brother at liberty, having had all the treasure of his predecessors, as also his fathers. But A●tabalipa having brought his ransom which amounted unto 3088235. gilderus, was not long after, by cruelty of the Spaniards without any cause, and also against their oath and promise, most shamefully by certain Moors, at the commandment of Pizarius, openly strangled in the Market place: and as some writ, his body was after burned to ashes. This was the 〈◊〉 able end of the mighty K. Atabalipa, a man of a mean stature, wise, and high minded, wholly given to rule. Twenty days before his death there appeared a blazing star, which when he perceived, he prophesied, that in short time after a gr●at Prince of that country should die, not thinking it to be himself. Guascar and Atabalipa being both dead, the government f●l unto Mango Inga the third brother, who dying, left his kingdom to his son Xaires Topa Inga, that married a wife called C●ya daughter of a noble man called Cuxi V●rcay Guascaris: and he before he entered into the government, changed his name to Mango capa Pachuti jupan, withal making himself subject unto Philip King of Spain, which happened 1557. 1557 on the sixth of january being Twelve day. Thus much touching the kings of Peru. A description of the places or towns lying among the hills. Three miles from Cusco, lieth the valley jucay, a very pleasant valley, lying between two hills, very fresh and wholesome air, as being therein neither over hot, nor cold: and two miles beyond it lieth Tambo, another valley, wherein are seen great ruins, of the king's munition houses. And traveling further, you come to Condesuyo, a province, where in times passed there dwelled certain warlike people, their towns standing between high hills, where there were many wild and tame beasts. Their houses were of stone, covered with straw: therein also were many houses and palaces of noble men. They have all one manner of living with the rest, the Perwians offering lambs and other beasts in their churches, wherein at certain times the devil showed himself: the rivers are rich of gold, and there are made certain coverlets of fine wool cunningly wrought in divers colours. This way before called Andes, is very long, for it runneth clean through Peru, to the straits of Magellanas' wherein there lieth many provinces and towns, and divers high trees, some covered with snow, others with flames of burning brimstone, whereby it is very hard to be traveled, specially, because therein for the most part, it commonly raineth. traveling many miles further, you come to the country called Collao, wherein is the lake called Ti●icaca, where there is an Island, and therein a Temple of the Sun, wherein they sowed their maiz, and keep their treasure. Round about this lake are many villages, and therein much good fish is taken. Somewhat further you come unto the town of Plata, which is a hundred and fifty miles from Cusco, in the province of Cha●cas, in a colder air than any other place in all the hills: there are but few inhabitants, but such as are very rich▪ and most because of the mines of Porco and Potosi, for Poto●i is not above eighteen miles from the town of Plata, discovered by the company of Captain Caruaial, for that as some of the Indians with one jan de Villa Roel a townsman of Plata traveled thorough the country, they found a high hill lying in a flat and even valley wherein perceiving certain tokens of silver▪ they melted a piece of the Mineral, and found it so rich, that one quintal made fourscore marks silver, the like whereof was never heard of. This news being come to Plata, presently the chief governors of the town went thither, where they divided unto every man as much as he could do or labour in, whereby such resort came thither, that in short time the place was inhabited by more than 7000. men: the Indians working and making contract with the Spaniards their masters, how much silver they would weekly deliver. This mine is of a wonderful strange nature, because it will not be melted by blowing with the bellows, neither in furnaces like other mines, but only in small furnaces by them called Guairas, which they set upon the highest part of the hill, placing the mouths southward from whence the wind doth continually blow, throwing into the mine fire, coals, and sheeps dongue, whereby the wind made the fire to burn so hot and clear, as that not any bellows or other instruments could do more: and the Perwians working in this manner, by so easy means had so great gain, that some of them got weekly besides their masters part, forty thousand Pesoes, but by resort, it became likewise to be scarce, for that they left other mines, as Pero, and the river of Caraba●a, wherein they found gold, to come thither, because there they made more profit. In those hills, and all the land thorough, there are many veins of all colours, whereof men may make fair colours: the silver found in this mine, and which belongeth to the king for his part, is carried by land to Arequipa, and from thence to Lyma, Panama, Nombre de Dios, and Spain. A further description of the sea coast from Arequipa to Chile, and from thence to the straits of Magellana. CHulli a Haven of Arequipa, lieth under seventeen degrees and a half, and one mile and a half from thence the River of Tambopalla, and seven miles and a half further, there reacheth a point into the sea: not full a mile beyond, or further out then the other land, upon the which point there are three cliffs: about this point not full a mile from it, there is a goodly haven called Illo, in our Card Rio de Vl●e, and there runneth a river into the sea that hath good water, and is also called Illo, lying under eighteen degrees and ⅓: from thence the coast lieth southeast, and southeast and by east: and five miles & a half further, there is a point which the Sea men call Moro del Diavolo, that is, a round house or hovel of devils. This coast is all wild and desert, and with great Batzen: not full four miles further from this point, there is another river not very great, but good water. From this river Southeast, and Southeast and by east, sailing seven miles and a half, there reacheth another round hovel, which is very high, and maketh certain downs: beyond this point is an Island, and thereabouts lieth the haven of Arica, which lieth under 19 degrees and 1/●: from whence the coast reacheth South-west: not full seven miles further, there runneth into the sea a river called Pizagua, and in the same course sailing along the coast, you come to the haven Taracapa, which is 19 mile's ¼: hard by Taracapa lieth a Island, little more than a mile in compass, and is distant from them about one mile and a half, and there maketh a strand or bay of Sand by the haven, under 21. degrees: from Taracapa you sail along the coast south & by west, about four miles, and then you come to the point of Decacanna, and 12. miles beyond this point you come to the haven Moxillioni, which lieth under 22. degrees and a half: from this haven sailing upwards south south-west about 67 miles and a half, the coast lieth in a manner strait, and therein are some points, creeks, and sandy bay, at the end whereof there is a great creak, where there is a good haven, called Copayo lying under 27 degrees, above the which lieth a small Island, about half a mile from the firm land, & from thence beginneth the country of Chile, inhabited with people: being past this haven of Copaypao, a little from thence, there lieth a point which makeh another creak, whereon standeth two cliffs, & at the end thereof is a river of good water, called E● Glasco, this point lieth under 28. degrees & ●: following the coast south-west on, about eight miles and a half, there is another point, which maketh a great haven for ships, but therein is neither fresh water nor wood: and hard by this haven lieth the haven of Coquinbo, & between this and the point passing by seven Islands, there is a haven under 29. and a half, & seven miles and a half further, following the same course, there is another point, about the which there is a great creak or bay called Antogayo, in the Card Bahio de Tage, about four mile further lieth the River Limara, in the Card Lemare, from this river, you keep the same course to another creak or bay about 7. miles distant, which hath a cliff, but no fresh water, lying under 31. degrees, and is called Choapa, in our card Cupa: further in the same course, about 15. miles, there is a very good haven, called the Q●i●nic●o, in our Card Cutero at Quintero: it lieth under 32. degrees, & seven miles and a half further, is the haven Val Paraize, and from the town of S. jacomo by us called Chile, after the name of the country. Touching this country of Chile it is very great, stretching along the sea coast, reaching above Chaicas and Peru, a cold country, which is by reason of the situation thereof, as lying by the Pole Antartico, wherefore it is called Chile, that is the cold country, partly because of the great cold which men endure, travailing over the Andes, unto this country, and partly because of the coldness of the country itself, although it is much like Spain, touching the temperateness of the air. This country was first discovered by Petro de Valdivia, in the year of our Lord 1539. 1539. and is all inhabited: in some place it is hilly, and in other places plain fields, pointed and running very crooked, by reason of the inflection and crooking of the sea. Touching the rest of the situation, as I said before, it is very temperate, having winter and summer, as it is in Spain, yet at contrary times, for their summer is winter in Spain, and the Spaniards winter their summer. The south star that should answer and be right distant to our star, being there on land cannot be seen, but only a small white cloud, between day and night making a small circuit or compass, about certain places of the Pole Antarctike. There likewise you see four stars, in form like a cross, with three other stars following them, which make seven stars, like ours, without any difference▪ that may be perceived, only that the four which in the south make the form of a cross, stand closer together than those of our Pole Antarctico. Touching their day and night, they are in Chile according to the situation, short and long, as with us, yet contrary to ours, for that our shortest days are their longest days. Their apparel and meats are altogether like those of Peru, both men and women are of good complexion and behaviour, upon the coast of this country are many rivers, which by day do run with water, and by night they are without water, because the snow by day melteth, by reason of the heat of the sun, and so runneth down from the hills, which by night by reason of the cold air, congealeth, and so runneth not. In Chile and Chaicas they have many sheep, that are like camels, but that they have not a hill upon their backs like the Camel. The Spaniards use them to ride upon, as being able to bear a man four or five miles a day, but being weary, they lie down, and will not rise whatsoever they do unto them, be they never so much beaten: and whosoever rideth upon them, the sheep being weary, she will cast up the head towards him that sitteth upon her, and blow a filthy stink into his face, thereby to be eased of her burden. These beasts are very profitable and necessary, no less than Camels in Egypt & Africa, and are fed with a little Maiz and other meat, specially those that they use to ride upon, to labour, and to carry burdens. They go likewise as Camels do, four or five days together without drinking, and but little meat: some of them called Pachos have very fine wool, with long fleeces, wi●h very good, wholesome, and savoury flesh, like our gammons of Bacon. The haven of Chile or S. jacomo lieth under 32. degrees, and 2/● parts: sailing further along the coast in the same course, you come to the river of Calma, distant from Chile eighteen miles: it is here also to be considered, that all the coast from Tumbez to this place, is very good to sail by, and a calm sea, without tempests or foul weather, whereby the ships may lie at anchor where they think good. Nine miles from Calma you see the point of the river called Manque or M●ule, in our card Maole and ten miles and a half further there is another river called I●ata, in our Card Rio Tatu●a, and so sailing south and south-west eighteen miles, there is another called Biobio, lying almost under eight and thirty degrees, in the same course, keeping along the shore, full eleven miles distant, there is a great Island about four miles distant from the firm land called Lucengo, and somewhat further beyond this Island is a great broad creek called Valdivia, in our card La Baldibia, wherein there runneth a great river called Ayntlendo, in our Card Rio Aymlendos, this Créeke lieth under 39 degrees and ⅔. Following the same course further by the shore, to south south-west, you come to the Cape S. Maria, lying under 42. degrees, and 1/● towards the south, and from (as the Pilots report) the coast reacheth south●●st to the straits of Magellana, and between them lie many havens and places needless to rehearse, as being noted in the card: inward in the land there is the Country of Patagonen, wherein there are Giants of nine and of ten foot high, that paint their faces with diverse colours made of herbs, pressing out the sap. And herewith making an end, for the rest I refer the Reader to the Card. The end of the second book. THE third BOOK. The Navigation of the Portugese's into the East Indies, containing their travels by Sea, into East India, and from the East Indies into Portugal, also from the Portugal Indies to Malacca, China, japon, the islands of java and Sunda, both to and fro, and from China to the Spanish Indies, and from thence back again to China, as also of all the coast of Brasilia, and the havens thereof. With a description of the Firm land and the islands of the Spanish Indies lying before it, called Antillas', together with the Navigation of Cabo de Lopo Gonsalues to Angola, in the coast of Ethiopia, with all the courses, Havens islands, Depths, Shallows, Sands, Drougths, riffs and Cliffs, with their situations, also the times of the years when the winds blow, with the true tokens and knowledge of the tides and the weather, water, and streams in all the Oriental coasts and Havens as they are observed and set down by the King's Pilots, in their continual and daily Viages. Translated out of Dutch by W. P. jehovah world map I Wolf excu. W: Rogers sculp LONDON Printed by John Wolf, 1598. The third Book. The Navigation of the Portugese's into the East Indies, containing their travels by Sea, into East India, and from the East Indies into Portugal, also from the Portugal Indies to Malacca, China, japon, the islands of java and Sunda, both to and fro, and from China to the Spanish Indies, and from thence back again to China, as also of all the coast of Brasilia and the havens thereof. With a description of the Firm land, and the islands of the Spanish Indies lying before it, called Antillas' together with the Navigation of Cabo de Lope Gonsalues, to Angola in the coast of Ethiopia. With all the courses, Havens, islands, depths, shallows, Sands, drougthes, riffs, and Cliffs, with their situations. Also the times of the years when the winds blow, with the true tokens and knowledge of the tides, and the weather, water, and storms, in all the Oriental coasts and Havens, as they are observed and set down by the King's Pilots, in their continual and daily Viages. THE I. CHAPTER. Of the courses and Viages of the Portugese's into the East Indies. FIrst you must understand that all Christendom lieth on the North side of the Equinoctial line, and Lisbon under thirty nine degrees and a half, and lieth with the Island of Madera Northeast & south-west, the Voyage being 172 Spanish miles, and Madera lieth under 32 degrees, and is distant from the Island la Palma (which the ships sailing to India may easily perceive) 63. miles. The Island la Palma lieth under 28. degrees ¼ & from thence you must sail Southward, as long as time will permit, for commonly when you come under five or six degrees, you find south eastwards and then you must sail south-west, as much as you can, until you pass the cape of S. Agustine which lieth under 8 degrees ½. on the south side that is upon the coast of Brasilia, from the Island la Palma, to this Cape of Saint Augustine are 900. miles the course lying North-east and south-west, when you are passed the point you must sail South-west, because the wind is there commonly south and southeast, and from the islands of Tristan da Cunlia, lying under 34. degrees, on the south side of the Equinoctial you must hold south-west, and when you think you have passed these islands, you must sail till you come under 36. degrees, and keep Eastward, until you have passed the Cape de Bona Speranza, and then you must hold North-east towards the land, and having known the land, according to the place you then have known, you shall set your course to Mosambique, or outward about the Island of Saint Laurence, from the Cape of Saint Austin to the Cape de Bona Speranza are 1060. miles, which Cape de Bona Speranza lieth full under 34 degrees and a half on the south side of the Equinoctial, and is East southeast and West, Northwest with the Cape Das Agulhas which is 32. miles, and Cape das Agulhas, is full under 35. degrees, lying with the Cape do infant East and West, and somewhat East and by North, and West and by South, the course is 26. miles, Cabo do infant is under 34. degrees and 2/●. and lieth with the Cape Talhado, East Northeast, and West Southwest 19 miles, Cabo Talhado is under 34 degrees, & lieth with Bahija Fermosa East and West 1●. miles, Bahija Fermosa is under the same height of Cabo Talhado and lieth with the islands Chanos East north-east, and West Southwest, 37. miles, and with the first point called Punta Primiera Northeast and Southwest, and somewhat North-east and by East, and south-west & by West, the course is 50. miles, Punta Primiera is under 32. degrees, and lieth from the last land called Terra do Natal 50. miles, which is under 30. degrees and a half, and lieth with the land called Terra does Fumos, Northeast and Southwest, and somewhat of North-east and by North, and South-west & by South, and the course is 75. miles, the land of Terra does Fumos is under 27. degrees and a half, and lieth with the Cape das Correntes, Northeast, and South-west, and somewhat North-east and by East, and South-west and by West, the course is 95. miles, Cabo das Correntes is under 24. degrees and a half, and lieth with Insulas Primieras Northeast and Southwest, and somewhat North-east, and by North & Southwest and by West, the course is 132 miles, the Insulas Primieras are scarce under 17. degrees and a half, and lie with Mosambique Northeast and Southwest, the course is 52. miles, Mosambique is under 15. degrees, and putting forth from Mosambique towards India, you must sail North-east, until you come before the Island of Comora the course is 80. miles, till you come under 11. degrees and then you must yet take your course North-east, unto the Island As Ilhas do Almirante, which are under three degrees and a half on the south side, being past those islands, you must take your course North-east, and North-east and by East, wherewith you shall come to the islands As Ilhas Queimadas, which are under 16. degrees, upon the coast of Goa, or India, here you must remember that at this time the streams in that country do always run Northwest, that is towards the straits of Mecca, or to the red Sea, therefore presently when you are under 16. degrees, (to keep your right course) you shall still hold your course aforesaid, which is Northeast and by East, or somewhat more, as you find occasion, your Compass will always show you what you may do, and thus must you sail for the space of 200 miles, towards the coast of India being sure you go no lower than 15: degrees, to avoid the drougths called Os Baixos de Pandua, which lie under 13. degrees Northward, also when you think to be upon the coast of India, you must still hold above 16. degrees, for that the stream and water upon that coast runneth Southward, & commonly the wind is there out of the North & Northwest, and to know when you are upon the coast of India, you shall find these tokens, that is 300. miles from the coast you shall see Crabs, and 50. miles from the coast you find Snakes in the water as big as Eales or Lampernes, which is always most certain, and within 20. miles from the land you have ground at 80. fathom, and 14. or 15. miles from the shore 70. fathom, you need not fear to fall on the coast, for it is fair and without danger, and hath good Ankeridge, and all the islands and Cliffs upon the coast, lie close to the Firm land, whereby there is no danger, and all the coast called India, lie North and South, and somewhat North and by West, and south and by East, and you must understand that all the coast of India, Persia, Arabia, the straits of Mecca, or the red sea, the coast of Choramandel, Seylon, Bengalen, Pegu, Sian, Malacca, Camboia, Cauchinchina, China, japon, etc. lie on the north side of the Equinoctial line. The 2. Chapter The course or voyage to East India, made and set down by the King's Pilot called Diego Astonso a Portugal. Sailing from Lisbon to the Island of Madera, you must set your corpse Southwest and make towards the Island Porto Santo, & from thence you must pass between the Island Deserta, and Madera, shunning the islands or Cliffs called Os Saluagiens, lying two miles southwestward from the Madera, for thereabouts are great drougthes, which by night are very dangerous, you may pass by them on the East side, & so keep your course to the Isles of Canares, and having passed those islands of Canares, you must set your course Southward till you come under 14. degrees, keeping 50. miles downwards from Cabo Verde, and from thence you must set your course south-west and South-west and by West, till you come under 6. degrees, and from thence south-west, and south-west and by South, so that you hold your course 70. miles from the drought of the river called Rio grand, & 80. miles from Saint Anna, always doing your best to get under the Equinoctial line, letting your course still be somewhat about the south, and if the wind be South, then rather choose the East, than the West side although you be under the line and as long as you have no Southeast wind, hold Eastward, not once approaching the land called I' erra do Mallagetta, nearer than 50. or 60. miles distant, and when you have the Longitude and Latitude whereby you may know you have passed the Cape Das Palmas, then when you Lavere, make short turnings I mean under the line, or on this side thereof, lest the stream should drive you within the Cape aforesaid, but rather strick all your Sails, then drive in there, for otherwise you cannot save yourself neither yet get into India, I have before showed you what you shall do being an hundred & forty miles under the line, then cross right over, so to pass before Brasilia, for that following the way and course aforesaid, you can not fail, but you must needs pass by Brasilia: on the aforesaid coast of Malagetta, the stream (with a new Moon) runneth South-west, therefore as then you shall not set your course towards Brasilia, being under the line, but when you set your course South West, hold you as long therein as the wind continueth good, and then use all speed and diligence, (as I said before) to pass the line, over the side of Brasilia, thereby to get under eight degrees, under the which lieth the point called Cabo de S. Augustin, and then if under those eight degrees, you desire to leave the sight of the land, then turn not upon the other side, but rather cast anchor, until the wind cometh good, to keep on your course, and you must understand that the stream on this side of Brasilia, Cape de S Augustin, and that country) runneth to the Antillas' (which are the islands of new Spain) wherefore I think it not your best way to Lavere, for if you do, without all doubt you will be forced to turn again unto Po●tingale● from thence that shall take an other way, unto the Island of Martin Vaas (having past the line) & the righter you keep this way it is the better. From the Island of Martin Vaas, or from the height under which they lie, to the Islands of Tristan de Cunha, having a fore wind, you shall hold your right course, without any racking or abatement of your reckoning: for those islands lie with the others all under one longitude and latitude, with the difference that the Compass hath in those Countries, that is by the Islands of Tristan de Cunha wind or lay the needle of the compass a strike and a half Northeastward, and when it is an hour after twelve of the Clock by the compass, it is then by the Astrolabium but full twelve of the Clock, and to know when you are hard by the Islands, you shall find it by this, that you shall see certain Birds flying, five and five in ranks together, than you are hard by them, and from thence forward certain birds will follow you, by the Portugese's called Feigions, full of black and white spots, whereby they are easy to be known, being South and North over this Island you shall see certain things drive in the sea, by the Portugal's called Sargoslo, and is almost like the weeds that is found by Vie●inghen in Holland. From these Islands of ●rulan de Cunha, to the cape de bona Speranza, being in this country about the eight of june, you shall see in driving the sea, certain weeds called Sargollo and Trombas, like pieces of thick reeds, those reeds are short and full of branches, and are not so long as those that are found, by the Cape de bona Speranza, here you must keep on your course till you find them to increase, and be not abashed thereat, for it cometh by this means, that the more it stormeth and is foul weather in the islands the more of those reeds & weeds are smitten down, which with the water & the wind that cometh both from behind and over the Island, drive towards the Cape de bona Speranza, wherefore I advertise you that if you find those reeds and weeds, to keep 150. miles further from the Islands of Tristan de Cunha, for they are signs of that I told you of before. When you come under the height of 35. degrees full or scarce to the Cape de bona Speranza, you shall see Trombas or pieces of thick reeds in the water, and when you see them, assure yourself they come from the Cape de bona Speranza, and you are then past those of the islands, when you find those Trombas, than you are but 3●. or ●0. miles from the Cape de bona speranza. Those pieces of reeds are long almost like Basuynen, but when you are under 35. degrees and a half than you see them no more, but certain birds as great as Ravens, with white and flat bills, with black feathers, those fly not past 20. or 30 miles from the Cape de bona speranza, and some grey birds, by the Portugal's called Alcatiases, these are the right tokens you find: from the Cape de Bona Speranza to the Cape das Agulhas, you must likewise understand, that the traversing or cross way from Brasilia, to the Cape de Bona Speranza, is much shorter or less than is placed in the sea cards, but let no man seek to know the cause thereof, as having no great matter consisting therein concerning the vosage, & though there were, yet it is not convenient that other nations and strangers should understand it: you find likewise between the islands of Tristan de Cunha and the Cape de bona Speranza, certain sea wolves, but being in that country about the last of june, it may be you shall not see them, for than they withdraw themselves from thence, because of the cold, & keep under the land: but if you chance to be by those islands of Tristan de Cunha, about the 10 of May, than you shall not pass above 35 degrees, because at that time the West winds do there blow which most great fury & tempests, specially with a new Moon, lest it happen to you as it did to the ship called the Bon jesus, which was overwhelmed in the sea by the great waves, that the winds raised, as I myself saith Diego Afonso, have seen being in the ship called S. Clare of the Cape de bona Speranza: that shall see certain birds in the water called Antenas, which are great speckled fowl, than you are by Cape das Agulhas, you shall likewise find some fish bones, or cuttle bones (such as the goldsmiths use) driving upon the water, and when you have the sight of land, under the degrees aforesaid, being thirty miles from the Cape de Bona Speranza, as also coming under the 36. degrees, you shall find those birds called Antenales, and when you are passed the Cape de Bona Speranza, and have seen land, whether it be the Cape de Bona Speranza, or the cape das Agulhas, either beyond, or on this side, then keep aloof from the land at the least 30. miles into the Sea, and if you mean to go to Mosambique, than you must sail North East, that is to the Baixos, or droughts of India. In the course from Brasilia, to the Cape de Bona Speranza many birds follow after you, but as soon as you come within the sight of the cape de bona Speranza, they leave you, & many times the black Ravens aforesaid: that you may be sure to be within the Cape, that is on the east side of India, you shall perceive the waves of the sea, that follow you from the Cape out of the East into the West, do presently leave you, as soon as you are passed the Cape das Agulhas inwards, until you come to others out of the South West, that is inward from the Cape: also by this Cape the needle of the compass is right and even: so that when it is noon by the Astrolobie, it is likewise noon by the sun dial, or the compass both agreeing in one, which is a good sign that you are North and South with the Cape das Agulhas, or between both, that is, the Cape de Bona Speranza, and the Cape das Agulhas, and this is a great sign, as well from Portugal into India, as from India to Portugal: but sailing from Portugal to India, than the needle of the compass turneth Northeastward again, 30 miles from the Cape das Agulhas towards Mosambique. The coast runneth East and West, and you must be careful (being past the Cape das Agulhas six or seven miles into the sea from the land called Auagda de Sanbras, not to take the way towards the Cape, but towards the South West, and South West and by West, because it is necessary so to do to save a great deal of way by reason of the streams and waters that run inwards towards the land. If it chance you pass the Cape a far off, and so see not any of these signs, them take the height of the sun, and look on your dial, but you must do it advisedly and with a strait thread, and then if you be 150. miles beyond the cape inward, it being noon by the astrolabe. The shadow of the sun dial will not be upon noon but will want a strike, and when it is noon by the dial, than it will be half a degree past the Astrolabe, which if you find to be so, then assure yourselves, you are 150. miles inwards beyond the cape de Bona Speranza, or das Agulhas, and mark it well, for you shall find it to be true, and when you set your course to sail within the Island of saint Laurence, you shall find some small white birds in companies together, they fly about twenty miles from the land, towards the droughtes of India, and coming under twenty degrees, you shall most certainly find the birds called Garagiaus, and Alcatrases, that are like Seamewes, than you hold a good course, and if you see not any of those tokens, look well to yourself, for them you are hard by the Island of S. Laurence, or upon the banks of the coast of Soffala, and seeing many birds, you are but 10 miles from the droughtes of India, then take your course North East, and North East & by North, and so hold on till you come under 19 degrees and ¼ and from thence Sail North East till you be in eighteen degrees, from thence you shall run North, and North and by East, till you come to sixteen degrees, and ¾ being under those degrees, and seeing many birds called Alcatrases in companies of 6.7.8. or 10. then you are but ten or fifteen miles from the Island of joan de Nova: therefore use all diligence both by day and night, not to come near it, specially when it is with a new moon, and sail North westward, and then you will come by the Islands named does Angoxes, and the more northward you run, you shall keep the better course towards Mosambique, being careful not to come nearer the land then twenty five fathoms deep, for the coast is altogether droughtes & shallows, where on Don john Periera was cast away, and yet is thirteen fathom deep round about. The 3. Chapter. The Navigation from Cavo das Correntes, to the droughts called os Baixos de India, & from thence to Mosambique. AND if you chance to see the cape das Correntes, being 6. or 7. miles from you, and minding to sail to Mosambique, then sail East Northeast, having a sharp wind, and coming under 22. degrees, under the which height the droughtes of India lie. You shall see many of the birds called Garagiaus flying in companies, and if you have a full wind, then sail North-east to the height aforesaid, & to know if you be near unto the droughts, you shall see many of the birds called Garagiaus, and Alcatrases flying together, and if you see many Alcatrases, than you are near the droughts: but seeing the Garagiaus alone without Alcatrases, than you are twenty five miles from thence. Fron thence you must sail North-east, and North-east & by North, to 19 degrees and 1/● and then sail North-east, to 18. degrees, and from thence north, & north and by East to 16. degrees and 1/● and being under this height, you shall see many of the birds called Alcatrases, and so assure yourself to be hard by the Island of joan de Nova, and if you see Alcatrases by 6. or 7. together, than you are but 10. or 15. miles from thence, because there they use to fetch their food: therefore use all diligence to get yourselves out of that height of the Island, which is 16 degrees and 1/● and to be out of danger sail Northwest, whereby you come to the Islands of Angoxas, which are close by the coasts towards Mosambique, and the more Northerly you keep, the nearer you come to Mosambique, but as you sail from the Islands of Angoxas to Mosambique, beware you come not nearer than 25. fathom to the Corals where Don joan Perreira was cast away, and yet round about it is thirteen fathoms water, being past the Islands of Angoxas Northeast, than sail Northeast, & by East, which is a good course, always keeping at twenty five fathom as I said before. The courses aforesaid from Cabo das Correntes forwards, may be done nearer and shorter if you have the wind Southeast, for than you may sail along by the Islands lying upon the banks of Solfala, the sooner to Mosambique, and with an east wind under, the degrees, and with the signs aforesaid, you must likewise shun the drought of India and the banks of the Island of S. Laurence that lie towards the drougths of India, & between those two droughts it is 95. fathom deep, and if you desire to enter into the road of Mosambique, in the entrance you must pass by the two Islands of S. George, & S. james, and leave them on the south-west side, keep aloof from S. George, about six or seven fathom deep, and so running forward till you be in, having care to keep off from the banks where you see the water break, till you come close before the Island and fortress of Mosambique. The 4. Chapter. The Navigation from Mosambique to India. WHEN you depart from Mosambique towards India, than sail Northeast, whereby you shall discover the Island Alha da Comoro which is distant from Mosambique 94. miles, or 11 degrees, and ½ whereof the furthest point Northward is a very high land, 15. miles from thence you shall see certain birds called Rabo● de juncos (that is tails of stalks of berries) for that they have a long narrow tail, stretching out like the stalk of a berry, and by night you shall hear the birds called Garagiaus sing or make a noise, following your course from this Island or towards India, you must understand) as soon as you discover the uttermost point of the Island of Saint Laurence, towards the North) that the water and streams run North and Northwest, toward the Cape of Guardafu, and to the mouth or entry of the straights of Mecco, or the red sea, and you must mark, that if it chance that you sail with a half wind and shoot full, or sail before the wind, yet therefore you must not reckon according to the course you hold, but always take a strike for abatement or cutting off, and being by the wind two strikes because the water and stream drive you continually to the Northwest and look well before you, that if you find many heights, it is by reason the water drives you as I said before, & to be assured to fall upon the coast of India, you must take heed to the needle of your compass, that yieldeth a strike and more to the North-east, and if you reckon your course according to the way the ship maketh, than you lose all that which the needle or compass yieldeth towards the North-east, and that which the water driveth you towards the Northwest, whereby you come too short, and cannot get the coast of India. The stream or drawing of the water towards the red sea, is from 4. to 7. degrees, wherefore you must always have great care to be forward, and not to come to short. In those countries you shall always see many of the birds called Rabos de juncos, and when you are near unto the coast and droughtes of Pandua, than you see them no more, but only about 5●. miles in the sea you shall perceive divers Snakes like Eales & bigger, driving in the sea, you must likewise understand that the stream of the water at the Cape de bona Speranza, till the times aforesaid, do always run from the Cape del Gado, or to the cape de bona Speranza southwestward, notwithstanding that some streams run cross through them that is along the Islands, as I 〈…〉 P●●iera, run Westward, upon the banks of Cabo das correntes, to the River called Aguada de Boapaz, the streams run likewise Westwards towards the creak that lieth by the Cape das Agulhas, at Agundi de San Bras the stream runneth towards the land, and upon these coasts you shall find that the stiffer the wind bloweth out of the West, the more the water and streams run against the wind. The 5. Chapter. Of the navigation and course from Lisbon to the East Indies, written & set down by the King's Pilot, called Rodriges de Lagos a Portugal. WHen you put out of the river of Lisbon, to sail to the Island called Porto Santo, you must run South-west, and setting out of Lisbon, you must mark the sun by the Compass to prove it, that is in the rising and setting of the Sun, and the middle between her rising and setting, which is North and South, and as much as you find the needle of the compass, to lie northeastward so much you must run southward, for 〈◊〉, lieth north-east and south-west, with the river of Lisbon, wherewith it meeteth full and even, when you perceive or have a sight of Porto Santo, or the Island Madeia, sailing to the Island La Palma, than you shall give all that which the Needle of the Compass lieth Northeastward, and somewhat more, for that it lieth more Eastward than it is set down in the sea Card, and from thence to the Island de Ferro, to the which Island you shall likewise wind a little more Westward than it lieth in the Card, and hereof fail not, as being negligent to observe it, for although you abate ten miles from your course to the Island La Palma, as it is in the Card, yet you shall go right upon it, and having past the Island La Palma, than your best way is to run southward, 30. miles from the Islands of Capo Verde, always giving all that which the Needle of the Compass lieth Northeastward, or that you shall run between two meal tides, that the one mealetide South, and the other South and by East, setting your course to the South, or the better to understand it, all that which the Needle of the Compass yieldeth, which may be half a strike, and rather less than more, and sailing from under 22. to 18. degrees, you shall see green water, which cometh from the point called Capo Branco, and from the creek where the fortress of A●gu●●n lieth, which green water if you see it more than two meal tides, than it is a sign that you are near the coast: but if you see but a little green water, that is less than for the space of two mealetides, than you are nearer to the Islands: and coming under ten degrees as long as you are by the coast of Guinea, you shall give the Needle of the Compass no abatement, or cutting off, because the water draweth towards the land, whereby the Northeasterne drawing of the Needle of the Compass, (which may be a third part of a strike) agreeth with the drawing of the water, and so the ship runneth southeast, and the water and stream cometh always out of the south, whereby it is driven unto the shore. Sailing from 5. to 3. degrees, it is good to keep off the coast, from 70. to 100 miles, and not more: for being more it would not be good for your voyage: the reason is, for that being 100 miles or more from the coast, than you have but few south winds to get the coast again, but rather have all the thunders and lightnings from the East to the South, and southeast, which keep you from getting to the shore, and because those thunders come upon you on all sides, therefore it is good to run (if it be possible) from ●0. to 8●. miles, that is to 2●. degrees, and 1/● where you shall find a southeast wind, continuing from the 2●. of April to the 15. of May, but if you stay till the end of April, it may happen that as than you shall not have the southeast wind, before you be under one degree of the Equinoctial line. The signs you have upon this coast of Guinea, are some of the birds Garagiaus, and if the thunders come out of the East, being 60. or 70. miles from the shore, you shall see certain Swallows and Duckers, & when you have the southeast wind, and that you make towards the point or bough of Brasilia, although in the first day of your navigation it diminisheth not so much in the height as it should, you must not be abashed thereat, for that which you find to be less diminished, is not by reason that the water or stream hindereth you, as many and the most part of men are of opinion, for that the degrees hard by the Equinoctial are greater than others that are higher, as you shall well perceive sailing to India, or coming from thence with a fore wind under the line, than the degrees diminish but a little, whereby it may be assured that the small diminution or running forward is not by reason of the water or stream that run to the Antilhas or four Islands of the Spanish Indies, coming to the line or a degree further, then in any sort turn not again unto Guinea, for it would be against yourself, and thereby you should spend your time in vain, for that some ships that departed out of Lisbon in my company, that from under the line they would wind towards Guinea, which I did not, but contrarily made over to Brasilia, whereby those ships came a month later than I did into India. In this bough or crossing to Brasilia, you shall set your course as the wind serveth, and look well to your Compass, for that as soon as you are passed the line, than the Needle of the Compass lieth half a strike and more to the North-east, and sailing from the 8. of the 18. degree, than the more the Needle of the Compass lieth North-east, the further you are from the coast of Brasilia, and say that you lay East and West with Cape S. Augusten, and that the Needle of the Compass should yield two third parts of a strike Northeastwarde, than you are 150. miles from it to seaward in, which is thus to be understood, that if the Compass were made in Portugal, & there lay half a strike Northeastward, if it be good and true, it will do the same upon the coast of Brasilia, being East and west with the Abrolhos, and about 170 or 200. miles from it, than the Needle of the compass shall lie a whole strike or somewhat more Northeastward for that the Meridian (of the Compass, that in Portugal lieth half a strike Northeast) maketh the same Meridian 100 and so many miles within the country of Brasilia, which also likewise doth so agree with the sea. In this course aforesaid you see many birds called Rabos Forcados, that is hanging tails, and by all the Islands of Martin Vaas, you shall see white Garagiaus or sea Mews. Now when you come under the height aforesaid, having a large wind, and that you might sail East Southeast, let the Compass wind a strike, or a strike and a half, which will wind so much coming under 30. degrees, and although the Compass windeth a strike and a half, yet you shall not therefore reckon any abatement in your course, more than half a strike, for this way is a strike shorter than it is placed in the sea Card, and use all the means that you run not higher than two and thirty or 33. degrees towards the Island of Tristan da Cunha, for you shall have a better and surer course from very foul weather and less storms, for commonly for the most part you have the wind there at North & North-east, which to avoid, take this counsel given by me, because I have well tried it to be true: and coming by the aforesaid Islands of Tristan de Cunha, you shall see some of the weed called Sargosso, driving upon the water, with divers Trombas, which are thick pieces of reeds, which when you see, than you are beside the Islands, you shall there likewise see great sea Ravens, and some small Ravens with white bills, which fly close by the Islands, and when you are right south and north with the Islands, than the winding of the compass Northeastward, beginneth to diminish, and lieth but a strike and ● part for that 70. or 80. miles from this Island you are in the middle or half way of the Meridian, between Brasilia and the Cape das Agulhas: also herewith you must understand, that under the height of 35. degrees, little, more or less, you must account 330. miles for each strike of the compass from the North-east, and when you see the tokens aforesaid, you must run to 35. degrees and ● which is a good height, holding your course east, and east and by north, till you be within 100 miles of the cape de Bona Speranza, than the compass will wind no more but ● part of a strike, likewise the water will there draw you northwest or north: now if by negligence you chance to fail, or by the winds are driven under 35, degrees, then when you are 30 or forty miles from the cape de Bona Speranza, you shall see many thick pieces of reeds, and sea wolves, which being under 36. degrees you shall not see, be it full or scarce, and coming within 40. miles of the Cape de Bona Speranza, be it under 36. or 35. degrees, you shall see a gathering or running together of the water, that is in the day time, for by night if you cannot see it, because that when you are once in it, than you cannot perceive it: there you find many birds sitting upon it, by the Portugal's called Cavoitoijns, and from thence to the Cape, there are some sea Ravens, with white bills which is a great sign, for it may be you may find ground, and never see the birds called Alcatrases, and when you come North and South with the Cape de bona Speranza, from five and thirty to thirty degrees, than you shall find muddy ground, to the Cape das Agulhas, and when you are passed that muddy ground, you shall find a kind of yellowish ground, and somewhat more inward by the Cape das Vacquas, which is towards the Agua de de San Bras, you have shelly and stone ground. The Compass (as I said that is fire at the Cape das Agulhas, must in Lisbon be marked or striked, and must there lie a half strike Northeastward, which they must very well know how to mark, although some of our Pilots think it not necessary to know how much the Compass turneth or lieth North-east, or Northwest, saying that our predecessors understood not the Compass, and so marked the coast, whereunto I answer, that in some navigations it may be excused, but in most part of the voyage or navigation it is very necessary, specially from the North-east and Northwest, as you must sail from the Cape de bona Speranza to Mosambique, as well in the course as to sail in the middle between the Island of Saint Laurence, Soffala, it must have a strike from the Northwest to sail in the middle of the channel, and this is necessary to be known by all pilots that sail to India, because oftentimes they find themselves sometimes upon the Islands, somethat by means of the streams and wa-times upon the banks of Soffala, and ters as you take your course from Capo das Agulhas, to Mosambique, it is good to sail an hundred miles Eastward, thereby to shun the coast, because of the water and streams that run southwestwarde, and coming north and south with the Bay called Bal●a Del Goa, than the Needle of the Compass will be 1/●. part of a strike and no less Northwestwarde, from whence notwithstanding you must not go nearer than 60. miles unto the coast, continuing your course as I said before to keep yourself off from it: from this place the Ravens with white bills will follow you, until the Cape das Correntes, be Northwest from you, and so when the said Cape lieth right upon that strike, than the Ravens will leave you, for that they are not found but from the Cape das Correntes, to the Cape de bona Speranza, & being North and south with the point aforesaid, than the Compass will be 1\●. of a strike rather more than less Northwestwarde, and in the middle of the channel a whole strike. Coming by the droughts of Os Baixos de judia, being Westward from them, or not seeing them, than you shall see many of the birds called Alcatrases, that being 10. or 15. miles from them, but being 20. miles off, on the same side, you shall likewise see some, but the compass will not wind a full strike, but if you were on the side of the Island of S. Laurence, within 10.12. or 15. miles, than peradventure you may not see them, and when in the height of those droughtes (which lie full under 28. degrees) you see the birds called Alcatrases, then pass not by the side of the Island of S. Laurence, for that on that side towards the Island you shall not see them, but hard by and on Soffala side you shall perceive them 20. miles from the land: this is to be understood at the time of the Monsons', which is at the time that the Portugal ships (that depart from thence in the month of March) do pass by, for they that come in the Monson or winter time, may possibly not find them: for that it happened unto me that coming in the Monson of winter, in company of the Earl Don Luis de Tayde, I passed 20. miles and more from the droughts towards the coast of Soffala, and saw not one bird, but the day before I had seen ten or twelve of the birds called Alcatrases, and as soon as you perceive the signs aforesaid, then run no further North or North and by East, until you be under 19 degrees and ¼. under the which heights the Islands As Ylhas Prinneras do lie, and somewhat more to the West, for that holding your course North-east, the stream runneth so fast, that you should presently fall upon the banks of Soffala, and if you chance to see the Ylhas Prinneras, trust not under that course, for although you pass by them East Northeast, yet it is false, because the first and last of them lie East and West one against the other, till you come to a dry sand, called A Coroa de Sanguase (that is, the Crown of Sangase,) than you run by the Islands of Angoxas, East Northeast and West south-west from this Crown of Sangase to Mosambique you run along the coast Northeast and Southwest. From thence to Mosambique are some roads or ankering places, from 18. to five and twenty fathom deep, but my opinion is, if it be possible, that it were better not to anchor, because that upon that coast there are many cliffs and storms which are oftentimes not seen, if the water break not upon them. The signs that are found within 14, miles from Mosambique, is a great thick land, and a mile and a half from the coast, lieth a bank, where you pass over, with fifteen fathom water: the land aforesaid is called Maginquale, and upon it along by the shore there are some trees, like Pineapple trees: from thence to Mosambique are twelve miles, and to Mocango 5. miles, having all that way the aforesaid trees, and sometimes the water breaketh about a mile from the shore. Now to put into Mosambique▪ you must take your course in the middle way between the Island S. George and the droughtes of Canaciera, where you shall find 7.8. and sometimes 9 fathom when it is high water, and being as far as the Island, so that in your sight the Island of Saint George, and that of Saint james are all one, than you are right against the Islands, and from thence putting in, you shall set your course right upon the strand of S. Anthonio, in the Island of Mosambique, until you be in a good depth, which shallbe a channel, stretching North and South, and coming with the same course to twelve fathom deep, than wind Northward, always keeping of the point called No●●a Senhora do Baluarte, which is a Church that standeth upon the highest part of the Island upon the water, without the fortress of Mosambique, and also from the sands called Cabaciera, which lieth on the other side right over against Mosambique. This Bay of Mosambique lieth scarce under 15. degrees: in this haven of Mosambique the Compass windeth not a strike Northwestward, and from thence to the a Ilha do Comoro, you must run north-east, which Island lieth under 11. degrees, 1/●. that is, in the end of South-west, the course from this Island, or to the line is Northeast and north-east and by east from hence to the line, certain nights you shall see shining or white water till you come to three or four degrees, and shall have the wind Southeast, and from thence forward you shall begin to have it South-west and south, so you begin to come from India in the winter time, from the Equinoctial line, or to the height of Coa, that is under 15. degrees and 1/●. you must run East Northeast, and in this way the Compass will lie a strike and a half Northwestwarde, and as much as it lieth Northwestwarde must be sailed northeastward unto the afore said height of Goa: the signs you always find in this way, are always about ten degrees, in the night time you have white and shining water, and from those ten degrees to the coast of India, sometimes you see many birds that come from the shore, that is from the coast of Arabia, as Quartelles, and other such like small birds, and 180. or two hundred miles from the coast of India, than the Compass beginneth to lessen in the Northwest, for that in the haven of Goa it lieth but one strike to the Northwest, and 1/●. part, and rather less than more. The 6. Chapter. To sail from Goa to Cochin. FRom Goa to Batecola, you must sail two or three miles from the land, from twenty to five and twenty sadom deep, for it is deeper there then nearer to Cochin, for about half a mile from the Island of Batecola you find six and twenty fathom deep: from thence it is good to run Southeast, and Southeast and by South, to the fortress of Barcelor, and to know if you be by Barcelor, or in the height thereof, you must understand that there are high hills, which begin at Batecola, and continue to Barcelor, and right above Barcelor there is a round hovel like dark mist or cloud, which standeth in the end of the high hills: on the South side of Batecola to this haven it is four or five miles, and half a mile from the shore it is all stony. By Barcelor you may anchor at ten fathom deep, about a mile and a half from the shore, and desiring to sail unto Cochin you must hold your course South, south-west and somewhat more into the sea, as the wind will permit you, for there are other Islands and cliffs, being where you may pass by, (as I said before) at fourteen fathom water: it is a good course to keep at sixteen fathom: from those islands three or four miles forward there are nothing but Islands and cliffs, which having passed, you come to see the Fort of Mangalor, as you pass by the shore at fifteen fathom deep, from thence you sail to the Fortress of Cananor: from Cananor to the Islands as Ilhas' Cagidar, which is ●. miles, let your course here be south southeast, & at 18. fathom deep: from the Islands of Cagadas to Chale are 7. miles, & the course is south southeast & 18 fathom deep, from Chale to Panane are 9 miles in the same course, and from Panane to Cochiin are 10. miles, the course being south, southeast, and at twelve & ten fathom deep, which is a good way. The 17. Chapter. The course or Navigation from Cochin to Portugal, written by the said Rodri● de Ligos. THe town of Cochiin lieth under nine degrees, and ●/● rather less than more, and departing out of Cochiin towards Portugal, you must hold your course West and as much Frorth till you come ● mile's from Cochiin, and being there you shall so set your course, that as you pass through the Islands of Maldina and Ma●ale, you may come to the height of 8. or eight degrees and not to fall upon any Islands, although the sea card in this course hath certain Islands, yet to say truth there are none. Those Islands being past, it is good to take your course South-west, till you come to four degrees, and from thence south south-west, to three degrees, on the south side of the Equinoctial, from Cochin all the way aforesaid to this place. The compass lieth northwest a strike and a half, being under three degrees on the south side of the line, than you begin to have the thunder out of the west, and northwest, with a stiff wind, and from thence you shall hold south and south, & by west, to ten or twelve degrees, in which you shall have the wind southeast under these twelve degrees, the compass holdeth northwestward a strike and ● parts, but shall not therefore be made any abatement in your reckoning: for it is often found that the water or stream doth there run to the west, which would then be two faults: for that as I understand it in this course, you must account all that is said the ship hath gone, because you shall likewise find streams that draw to the southeast being at 12 degrees, (as I said before till you be under 15. degrees, them you have the wind sometime south southeast, than you must not lie westward for it is not good, but rather run east and east southeast, always keeping good watch to the eightéenth degree, under the which lieth the droughtes called 〈◊〉 Baxios does Garagiaus, and having a southeast wind, than it is good to hold your course south-west, until you discover the Island of Diego Rod●ges, and if it lieth right before you than you shall see some of the birds called Alcatrases, and some herbs called Sa● driving in the water, and there the compass goeth no higher, but beginneth from thence again to diminish or lessen, when you are passed this Island or the point thereof, then run south-west, and south-west, and by west to 26. degrees, under the which height lieth the first point of the Island of S. Laurence, & as soon as you are under this height, than you shall hold your course west, south-west to 29. degrees, and from thence west and west and by south, and to know when you are north and by south with the Island of Saint Laurence, that is with the middle of the uttermost land on the south side, then mark the compass well▪ and if you be by the country aforesaid, than your compass will be a strike and 1/● one from the other, northwestward, from thence you shall hold your course, as wind and weather serveth, for being from about the 15. of April, till the last of May, it is necessary to have the Firm land on board: for that there, at those times you have the wind North, and northwest▪ and being in the months of February and March, than the wind is east and south, where you must rule your course as the wind serveth, and being right with the land north, & south, than the compass shall leave a strike rather more than less to the Northwest, which is a certain sign to be right against it, but if it be more, then assure yourself you are not by the land, then being 30. or 40. miles from thence and though you be but 30 miles from the land, you shall see green water, but you find no ground. The compass that I speak of shall be six, and even at the Cape das Agulhas, with those that make them lean northeastward in Portugal, a half strike rather less than more, and when you come to the Cape das Agulhas, and hetherwards, as long as you have not muddy ground, you are not at the Cape das Agulhas: wherefore spare not often to cast your lead, for it will be for your own good. Passing the Cape das Agulhas to the cape de Bona Speranza, it is not good to sail northwest, as long as you have ground, for that therewith you should not pass the Cape de Bona Speranza, but being past it, then run northwest, till you come to 16. degrees, under the which height the Island of Saint Helena doth lie, or to 16. degrees and 1/● and when you come to that height, then run west and somewhat southerly, or the first meal tied west, and by south, because of the compass of the sea in some streams, for I think you shall find no more heights, although you should sail west, and by south, and sailing on that course you shall continue it 50. miles further, but no more, and when you perceive the Island and cannot reach it by day, then strike all your small sails, holding about 5. miles from thence, in such manner, that in the night time you hold west, and west, and by north, there the compass beareth full north-east half a strike, and as you make your reckinng well in your course from the cape de Bona Speranza, to this Island, with the advantage of the compass as it ought to be, you shall find that it lieth above seventy miles more westward, than it standeth in the Sea Card, departing from this Island to sail to Portugal, and to see the Island called Ascension, you shall run northwest, and northwest, and by west for 70. miles, than you shall go somewhat Easternly as some do than it will be needful to sail 100 mile's northwest, and by west, and from thence northwest, until you come by the general wind, but come no nearer unto the land, for than you should not make a good voyage, and although the south wind doth continue longer in this course, which bringeth you to twelve & fourteen degrees, on the north side, yet leave it not for that, neither put close under the coast of Guinea, when you have the general wind although you might more westernly, neither leave off therefore to follow your course, for it will be large enough, althougl, sometimes it scanteth, because you are close by the land. It is good to keep 150. or 200. miles from the coast: for although that by the sea cards you find yourself to be two hundred miles from the land, notwithstanding you are a good way nearer, the reason whereof is, that you sail from the point of the Island of S. Helena, which lieth in the sea card, and not from the Island that lieth 70. miles westward, as aforesaid, and although the points do assuredly lie towards the Island Flores, it therefore maketh no reason that it is not so, as I say, for that in the course through the sea, where you find the herb Sargosso, the wind being there always north-east, the sea or stream runneth to the Antilhas, or fore Island of the Spanish Islands, whereby the ships do so little multiply in the course of Sargosso, & if these waters and streams do chance to meet the ships when they are in the course of Sargosso, it happeneth often times that the ships bear too loofeward, but very seldom, and it happeneth oftentimes, that by Guinea the stream runneth northward, and being somewhat near the land, than the water draweth you presently to the land, also the wind coming most out of the northwest and north, which letteth you from sailing northwest, and being to Seaward you shall rather have a north-east wind, and although you have many means to keep you from going close under the coast of Guinea, I set this down here, because I have noted it myself: for that all the ships, in what course soever they be, which presently wind themselves to keep aloof from the coast of Guinea, being in the course of Sargosso, they have no full wind, but only north-east winds, and sometimes calms, which sailing to lee ward you find not, where you have the wind east, and east southeast. All the ships that come from the Antilhas or Spanish Islands, the scarsest winds that they find are out of the East, whereby you may understand, that when you hold far off from Guinea, it is no cause of having a longer Voyage: but you shall the sooner find a better and fuller wind, and so when you come under twenty degrees, and that the compass keepeth steedie to twenty five degrees, than you are not to lee ward, there you begin to see the herb Sargosso, whereby that herb is called Sargosso, and make no reckoning of being too loofeward or too léeward, for there is no certainty thereof: so when you sail north and north-east, and that the needle of the compass lieth not north westward, them be well assured that the Island Flores is right before you, continuing so till you come to the Island of Fayael, (which is one of the Flemish islands called as Ilhas does Alcores.) The compass that within S. Helena was full half a strike Northeastward, will be full if you mark it well, and when you come under thirty sire, or thirty nine degrees, and ⅓ than you shall see the Island Flores, with some Torteaur in the water, and being forty miles from the Island Flores, towards the coast, than you shall see the birds Garagiaus and Duckers, and the compass will in a manner be even, and if there be any difference, it will be somewhat northeastward: for from the Island Flores to the Island Fayael, the compass is full as six, as I said before. The 8. Chapter. The course and Navigation from India, to the Cape de Bona Speranza, set down by another Portugal Pilot. WHEN you depart from Cochiin, to sail for Portugal, you must do your best to get under ten degrees and a half, till you be 50. mile's West south west from it, whereby you will be scarce under 10. degrees, under the which height lieth the islands Mamales, for the stream will always draw you to the middle of the Channel, between these islands and the islands of Maldiva under 9 degrees & a half, you must pass full forward without seeing any of those islands, and go shore under 9 degrees & a quarter, although in the Cards they place many false islands. And if you chance to set sail from Cochin the 20. of januarie, little more or less, then run so that you may pass the islands on the south-west, and south-west and by south, until you be under the Equinoctial line, because you go late to sail, and it may be that the wind and weather will not serve you so well, to hold to Sea ward from the Island of Brandaon, than you may hold your course between the islands called Does Irmaos, lying under 4. degrees on the south, and from thence you must take your course to the islands of Pedro Mascharenhas, and so following your way, if it chance being under 4. degrees southward you have much thunder, lightning and rain, because commonly it is found there in the month of February, as I myself have tried, until 14. degrees, then do your best, to get under 14. or 15. degrees, for commonly under 15 or 16. degrees you shall find southeast winds and then put no further into the Sea, but pass between the Island Brandaon, and the Island of Lopo Soars, which is a good course and as soon as you are passed the Island, then take your course by the Island of joan de Lisboa, between the which Island and the Island of Pedro Mascherenhas, you have a good way, so that you come to pass 14. or 15 miles from the Island of Saint Laurence, from thence set your course West south-west till you come under 29. degrees, and then run West, and West and by South, to 34. degrees or as far as you will, by this course running in this sort, coming within 50. or 6●. miles of the land called Terra do Natal you shall see many Birds, and the more it stormeth & is foul weather, the more Birds you shall see, and if you see many, then be assured you are far from the land, and when you lose the sight of them, then look well to yourself, for the closer you are by the land, you lose the sight of them altogether, unless it be the black Ravens with white bills, & the nearer you are to the land the more you shall see of them, although they are likewise seen at the least 20. miles from the shore, but fear not, when you begin to come to the Island of S. Laurence, but hold the course abovesaid, and when you begin to discover the mouth of the Channel, between Saint Laurence and Mosambique, than you presently find the running of the stream towards the Cape de Bona Speranza, and fear not in that country to hold your course south-west for commonly after you have the wind south, and as much as you have run west Northwest, so much you have furthered your way, but take heed you keep still from the coast, and so you will make a better Voyage, for the stream will drive you to the Cape although the wind helpeth you not, and this is to be understood, that when you come late from Cochin, you shall always thereabout find great West winds, also you must know, that (in March and April, all the way from the furthest point of Saint Laurence to the Cape) commonly there bloweth North and Northeast winds, and if for a day or two it bloweth out of the Southeast, or South, it is a great wonder, therefore make no account of it, for at those times they blow very seldom, in all the way aforesaid to the Cape, and the nearer you come to the Cape you find the more northerly winds, but when the North wind cometh missed and fleet, then be sure of West winds, for it is the nature of them in those countries, and you must understand, that if you arrive in those countries in a Schrickel year (for they are much more dangerous than other years, because the conjunction of the heavenly Planets and bodies as then are different, as also the inferior bodies, that are subject to the superior, whereby they are governed:) than you shall find from 30. degrees upwards, that as soon as you have a northerly wind with a small or miseling rain, that there followeth great and foul weather, then look well to yourself, and take great heed, lest it fall not suddenly upon you, for it by unadvisedness it should fall forwards upon you, it were not possible for you to find any means to keep yourself from being overwhelmed in the sea without the special favour of God, for that they come with most great fury and outrageously, but if you chance in the beginning of February to be by the furthest point of S. Laurence 70. or 80. miles, inward to the Sea, then take your course to the Cape Das Agulhas, for than you shall find the winds always Southeast, so you pass not further into the Sea than 36. degrees, which Navigation you shall make departing out of India, in the ninth of December, you have ground by the Cape Das Agulhas at twenty and twenty five miles from the land at a hundred and a hundred and thirty Fathom deep, under thirty six degrees and a half. The 9 Chapter. The Navigation or course from Monte De●●n to Portugal, which is the chief hill in India, and lieth in the country of Malabar, six miles Northward from Cananor, and from Goa sixty one miles Southward. DEparting from the hill or Monte Delijn towards Portugal, by the way without the Island of Saint Laurence so set you North-east, & south-west, with the hill Monte Delijn, taking your course East, and East, and by South, and then you shall come by an Island lying under 10. degrees and a half, fifty miles from Monte Delijn, and then you must take your course South-west, and South-west and by West, and then you shall come 25. miles beyond this Island, under the height of 9 degrees and frac34;. taking care not to go more southward towards the Island of Maldiva, from whence half a mile it is deep and fair, and as soon as you are passed this Island whether it be early or late in the year, then run south-west and south-west and by South, until you have passed the line, and if there you find the wind West, then run South, and South and by West, if you can, if not southward, which is a good way, and in this course you hold freely without fear, if in this course from 13. degrees upwards, you find divers Birds called Garagiaus, flying in companies together, fear not therefore to follow your course, & being late in the year, than always keep on the South side, thereby to avoid the drougthes called O● Baixos de Lopo Soars, and Garagiaus, lying under 16. degrees holding this course you may boldly sail both by day and night, for you shall find no let as I myself have well tried. The 16. degrees not being past, you must also pass between the drougthes' aforesaid, and the Island of Brandaon, and coming to the height, there lose a night's sail to be the surer, and make your account that when you find many Birds called Garagiaus, with other speckled Birds among them, flying in companies together, than you are 40. miles beyond the Island, from whence you shall sail south-west, and south-west and by South, for certain meal tides, and it being early in the year, when you set sail from India, then avoid all those islands and drougthes, and take your course to Sea wards towards the Cape Das Agulhas, and if it chance that about the seventh of February you find yourself 100 miles little more or less, from the furthest point of the Island of S. Laurence, that is under his height as I have been, then run West south-west until you be under the height of the Cape de Bona Speranza, take heed to the stream, that might deceive you, because there in February, they run very swift, by reason of the East winds which as then blow very swiftly, & so run your course to the Cape de Bona Speranza till you be under 36. degrees and a half, and when you are by the Cape Das Agulhas, then look when it is noon by the Astrolabe, and if as than it is likewise noon by the sun Dial, or not wanting above the thickness of a thread, than it is a good sign, as well outward, as coming back to Portugal, for there the needles of the Compass are right and a like, and being upon the one side or the other, they will lie either North-east ward, or Northwest ward, as you are passed the Meridional line, and so much it differeth from equality with the Sun Dial, also when you come to the Cape Das Agulhas, or further forward, then look upon the water, and if it be green, then turn back again under 36. degrees and a half, and cast forth your Lead, and you shall find 30. fathom deep, and being under 36. degrees 2/●. degrees you shall find 90. fathom, and then you shall not see many black Ravens with white bills, nor Alcatrases, but on both sides of the Cape Das Agulhas you shall see many, both on the coast and 20. miles to Sea ward, but not further, and you shall find the water (so that you be not upon the depths aforesaid) light and gréenish, as also some of the Sas-been driving in the water, and as soon as you have found grounds, without seeing the land of Cape de Bona Speranza, then run still along by this ground till you lose it, and then be assured that you are passed the Cape Das Agulhaas, then hold your course West Northwest, and so you shall find 12. miles from the Cape, and when you begin to leave it, than you shall begin to see thick Reeds swimming upon the water, for the space of ten or fifteen miles from thence. In the course aforesaid, and when you see them, it is a good tooken and you may be assured to have past the Cape de Bona Speranza, when you are by the Cape Das Agulhas then mark the Sun Dial, and the water of the ground, and they will show you when you are there, for by this Cape, the needles of the Compasses are fix and even, and within or without that Cape, they lie either Northeastward or Northwest ward, as I said before, the Navigation from the Cape de Bona Speranza to Portugal is without danger to the Equinoctial, for that you always find a Southeast wind, and from the line to Portugal it is daily sailed, whereby it is commonly known to every simple Pilot, yet such as are desirous to know it, may see it in this Book, where it is set down, as also in mine own Voyage from India to Portugal where it is particularly declared till you come to the town of Lisbon. The 10. Chapter. Of the right tokens and knowledge of the Cape Das Correntes and the islands as Ilhas Premeiras and of all the Havens and coasts of Mosambique. THe banks of Soffala begin at the Cape de S. Bastian, and reach to the islands Primeras all along the coast, and the coast lieth North and South to Soffala, and hath somewhat of North and West, & South and East, herein are some rivers, but only fit for small ships, the river called Mataca, or Monemone lieth under 21. degrees and a half, it is a small river, being at high water within the Haven but three Fathom deep, and for a mark hath a high tree standing on the South side, and along the shore some Sandie downs, which in sight show like islands without trees, on the North side lie certain shallows, you enter into the Haven Northwest on, that is on the side where the trees stand, and there as you are within the point you may Anchor at five and six fathom deep. Quiloan or Quiloane lieth under 20. degrees and a half, and on the South side hath a high Palm tree, and the land on the same side is like a hook, and if you desire to put into Quiloane, although it were with a ship of four hundred tons, you may well do it, being high water, but you must take heed of a drought, lying three miles from the Haven. This Haven at high water is five Fathom deep, and when you are in hard by the point of the river you find five or six Fathom water, with muddy ground, you enter therein West, Southwest, and South-west and by West, and the drougthes aforesaid lie East, Southeast and West Southwest like Quiloane. From Mataca or M●nemone to Quiloane you shall see land, at thirteen or fourteen fathom deep, and being under 21 degrees and 60 fathom deep, than you shall be fifteen miles from the land, & shall find Coral upon the ground, and from thence inward small sands, sailing from Quiloane to Soffala you must run North and north and by East, without the point or hook, till you be at 12 or 13 fathom deep, and till you see Soffala: and if you desire to stay there, then run till you be under 6. or 7. fathom, which is 6. or 7. miles from the land: the Haven of Soffala changeth every year, therefore you can not put into it without one of the country Pilots, and it hath for a mark a company of palm trees standing together on the north side: & sailing from thence to Mosambique, you must run East, till you come to forty fathom water, and from thence East north east, running fifteen or sixteen miles from the Islands Primeiras, you shall always in these countries all along the coast, find small, thin, black sand, mixed with the earth, although you sail close in sight of the land. Soffala lieth under twenty degrees, and the Haven called Bango under nyntéene and ½, and the river of Cuama under eighteen and ●/4: and you run along the Coast from Soffala to Cuama, North East and South West, being thirty miles, and if you have occasion to enter into the River of Cuama, to take in fresh water, you must enter with a small Boat, for within it is all fresh water, from Cuama to the Islands of Primeiras, you run along the coast east and West, and somewhat East and by north and West and by South. There are two sights of land, and being under eighteen degrees, you find therne five fathom deep in sight of land, for the Banks in those Countries are very small: the course is fifty miles. The River called Does Bonis Sinais or of good tokens lieth under seventeen degrees and ¾, and hath these marks, that is upon the North east side: at the mouth of the Haven there standeth an heap of trees, and on the south side it hath a sandy strand, and upon the furthest point outwardly, there is a sand Hill or Downes, which far off showeth like an Island: the entry is on the South West side, along by the sand: the Haven at the mouth with low water is two fathom, and being within it you may lie at 6. or 7. fathom water: you can not see the entry as you are without, but on the North West side you see the beginning of the land, that hath a heap of trees standing upon it, which a far off show like the Mast of a ship, and the nearer you draw to the land, the less you see thereof, so that being in the River, you see nothing at all, because it is hindered by the other branches. The Channel of the Islands Primenas', and of the Islands of Angoxas are all one, and you sail East, North east, and West south west, and it is 30 miles, with ten or twelve fathom deep, and nearer to the Islands then to the firm land, and if you will stay by one of these Islands with a West wind, you may freely enough go close unto it, for it is deep and passing good ground. The first of the islands of Primeiras lieth under 17 degrees & ½, & if you desire to run between them, then run South-west from the Island, and you shall freely enter the channel without fear, for it is deep enough, for the drougthes lie a mile and a half distant from the Island: and if you desire to put in there with a west wind, then go close to the Island, running to the middle thereof▪ towards the south side, where you may anchor, within the length of a great shot, at 6 or 7 fathom deep, and desiring to pass either in or out between the droughtes (which lie North-east) you may very well do it, and though you bear all your sails, keeping always nearer the sand of the Island, then to the droughthes in the middle Island, for it is all one upon what side of the Island you sail, for there is no cause of fear, but only where you see the water break: and desiring to anchor by the middle Island, you may freely do it, and that close by it, for it is 12 fathom deep at low water with a West wind, but not with an East wind: in the middle way, on that side which lieth against the firm land, there standeth a heap of trees, by the which you shall find a lake of fresh water to serve you, if necessity requireth, and lieth a little inward from the strand, and if you can not well go far inward to the lake, do but dig in the strand, and you shall presentie find fresh water, but it must be when it is an east wind▪ for with a West wind the water striketh with so great a force upon the shore, that you are not able to stay there with your boat. The middle Island, which lieth North east hath no passage at all to the sea, but from thence to the drouthes called Acoroa de S. Antonio are seven miles, and to the first Island of Angoxa five miles, and is all one course with the Islands: you may freely pass by the land, with what ship so ever you will, for it is deep enough: all the Islands of Angoxas have thorough fares, one running through the other, all deep and good ground: so that there is between the Islands and the firm land, at the least eight fathom deep, but you must always sail nearer the firm land then the Islands. There lieth a sandy drought between the Island of Angoxa, which likewise is to be sailed on both sides. These Islands of Angoxas are 4, and between the two middle Islands lie the aforesaid sand drougthes, wherefore I wish you not to go too near them, for they are dangerous. There lieth a sand drought 4. miles from the first Island of Angoxa towards Mosambique, which every springtide is covered with the sea, having other sands round about it, that are always covered with the sea, therefore I wish you to take heed of them: you may from thence run along the shore, where it is deep water, from these drougthes 14 or 15 miles towards Mosambique, there is a haven, called Os Coaraias, that is the Corales, from the which haven about a mile and a half into the sea lieth a clif, which is very dangerous, and which a man can hardly shun till he be almost upon it, and with a Springtide the water breaketh not over it, wherefore you must take heed unto it, for many ships have stricken upon it, and Don joan Periera fell upon it: when you pass it, you must put 3 miles from it into the séa, North east & north-east & by East, being by night, but by day you may sail with more security, and look about you, yet nothing going nearer to the shore then 25 fathom deep: in this course you shall pass by the drouthes of Musicatte, and following your course North east, you shall come right upon the islands of Mosambique: if you have occasion to anchor before you come to Musicatte, then keep off from the cliff towards the land, till you be at 15 fathom, and there you may anchor, for it is good ground, yet but in few places, only under the point of Musicatte, at 20 fathom and more, you shall have fair ground: the point of Musicatte lieth with the islands of Angoxas North east and South west, being 18 miles distant: from thence to Mosambique you run North east along the coast: the East side of the Island Premeira lieth with the drongthes' North-east & South west and some what North east and by East, and South west and by West: the land of the Islands Premeiras, on the side of Mosambique lieth under 16 degrees and and ¾ & you run along by those islands and sands, East and West, and East by North and West & by south: and if there you find yourself to be inwards at 12 or 13 foot and less, within a length of a great shot of the islands, yet be not abashed, but beware of the outside, which is full of stones and other filth, whereby no means you can anchor, as being nothing but wood & ston●: if you chance to be in the middle way between the islands & the drougths, with an East wind, than you must pass in & out between the first Island & the drought, which Island lieth in middle way from the islands Premieras, on the side of So●●ala, as also from the third Island towards Mosambique, running along the West side at 7.10 & 12 fathom deep: the other drougthes lie in the middle way, under the stone cliffs, therefore you need not fear them, but between the Island from the trees, that are upon the East side, you can by no means pass, for it is all over nothing but droughthes and shallows. From the South west side of these islands Premieras, and North-east and south west, with the first Island, 7 miles from it there lieth a sand drought of four fathom deep, both in length & breadth, the carriage of a great shot in length ten or twelve miles from the islands Premieras, lieth the River Quilimani, where the Coast reacheth East and West, and somewhat East & by North, and West and by south, and you shall find 6 or 7 fathom deep within three miles of the land, where you find no other drougthes then that of Quilimani, which you must take heed of, for they reach 6. or 7. miles into the sea, and if you find yourself inwards from Cavo das Correntes, you may at all time's anchor, for it is good ground, because you are upon the banks, and have no cause to fear, because the wind blowing from the land will always help you, whereby you may put into the sea, as you think good. The 11. Chapter. The course from India to Porto Piqueno de S. jago, that is the small haven of S. jacob, which is the mouth of the River Ganges lying in the kingdom of Bengala. HE that desireth to sail from India to Po●to Piqueno or the small haven, lying in Bengala, I mean outward about the Island of Seylon, he must set sail out of the Haven of Cochiin between the which and the 20. of April, holding his course along the shore, to a place called Briniao, which lieth upon the Cape or point of Comoriin, (that is the furthest point or end of the Indian coast, southwestward) & from thence holding his course south, till he be under 6 degrees & ¾, and from thence South east to 5 degrees and ⅔, and being there he must run East, till he seethe the Island of Seylon, for the point of Seylon called A Ponte de Gualla (that is the point of the Galley) is the farthest land from thence lying in the south, under 6 degrees: therefore if you hold your course East, till you be under 5 degrees and ⅔, you can not fail to see the land of the Island Seylon: this way and course you must always hold, setting out of Coch●●, from the 10. of April, to the 20. of the same, (as I said before,) for if you depart later from thence, you must stay longer, because as then the wind beginneth to blow stiffly out of the South, at other times having the wind Southwest, and Northwest, blowing very strong and blustering: when you see the Island Seylon, you shall sail along the coast, East and West, and somewhat East & by North, and West and by south, to the first drought lying scarce under 6. degrees, and the other drougths lie farther under 6 degr. & ½ 7 miles distant one from the other, in the same course of East and West, and East and by North, and West and by south, from the point A Punta de Gualla to the first drought, are almost 28 miles. Being 10 or 15 miles beyond the drougthes, you shall sail North-east, till you be under 16 degrees and ½, from thence running North, whereby you shall come to the Coast of the firm land, about ten or twelve miles from the land, called O pagode de jorganatte (that is the Idol or Idols Temple of jorganatte, which is a very good course for this voyage: when you perceive this land, which hath certain high Hills, you shall see some round Hovels, that are rounder and higher than the Hills, standing upon them, called Palur, by the which you shall pass along North-east, and South-west, and somewhat north-east and by East, and South-west and by south, until you come to the thin and low land, and passing by it, you shall come to a River, which hath for a mark a flat high field of sand, and an other plain with a hovel, having on the one side somewhat further in the show of an other thick Hovel with trees, and keeping on your course till you come right over against the river, them the hovels seem to be right over against the other thick land: it showeth thus when you are about a mile & ½ & to the sea ward from it: from this river to the first Pagode or Idol, there is about three or four miles, and from this Pagode forward you find no more high hills, like that you have passed before, and passing strait from thence some of them show as if they had tables or plains upon them: this Pagode lieth full under 20 degr. your best way is always to look out for it, as being requisite for you thereby to make a good voyage: beyond this first Pagode, there standeth an other Pagode, as great as the first, with 2 or 3 small Pagodes standing somewhat further: from the first Pagode to the second is about 4 miles, and the coast from the one to the other lieth East and West, here you must not keep too close to the shore, for you shall hardly put off again because it maketh a creek, likewise before you come to the first Pagode you must keep off from the land, because two miles before you come at it, there lieth a small drought, stretching a mile into the Sea. From the first Pagode to the second, you see certain hovels and trees, and from the second Pagode to Sataguan, it is a lower land, all waste and wild ground, being altogether bare to the point called a Punta das Palmerias (that is the point of the Palm trees, and you run West along the coast, from the Pagode aforesaid, to a point with a Riffe (lying 12. miles from the point of Palmerias) there lieth a river, the point aforesaid reacheth a great half mile into the Sea, you run along the coast Northeast, and from the aforesaid Riffe point to the Palmerias, the coast runneth North-east, and North-east and by East, and to know the Riffe and the land thereof you must understand that the land of the Riffe, is greater and thicker than the other land of the Cliff, and maketh show of an Island, and presently somewhat further you shall see nine or ten trees, showing like round hovels, from the Pagode to this Riffe are about 12. miles, from thence forward you shall run along the coast at nine & ten fathom deep, until you come to the said Palmerias, whereof the fore part of the land is very low, having a bare hovel, which showeth itself like the Arenas Gordas, or red Downs, lying by Saint Lucas de Barameda, in the coast of Spain, from this done or hovel to the Palmerias, it is altogether a low and bare land without any trees or bushes, the Palmerias were wont to be ten or twelve Palm trees, now there is but one, hard by the same Palmerias on the side of Sataguan there stand certain Hovels, and from thence forwards, you have no points, hooks, trees, nor any more bushes, but the land for a mile way is nothing but like a Riffe. And when you see the point of Palmerias, than you shall hold your course East, until you be 12. Fathom deep, and from thence North-east, till you find eight Fathom and a half, and being in the day time, you shall presently see land, which shall be beneath all the riffs, and if the land be covered with any damps or mists, you shall then not see it before you be at 4. fathom deep. This course you shall hold with a Compass, that faileth not, for if it doth, you must make your reckoning thereafter, this land whereby you shall pass is a flat low land, without either bush or tree, and passing forward along the coast, you shall upon the East side perceive a long black Hovel, like a Champana without a Mast (which is an Indian Carvel) and somewhat further from this Hovel, there are a company of trees, which are about three or four, that show greater than the hovel, these trees stand somewhat low, and a little from these trees beginneth the Riffe of the country of Orixa, which having seen, you shall presently see the water to Seaward break, which is upon the drougthes of Bengalen, for there the Channel is smallest, and behind you leave many riffs on the side of Bengalen, which do all lie to Sea ward, wherefore you cannot see them, and passing by them, you approach the Riffe of the land of Orixa, for although you sail close by, you need not fear other then that you see before your eyes, the depth is three Fathom, with small black Sand in the bottom. On Bengalen side you shall have four or five fathom water with muddy ground, on the which side you must not go, for that beyond that muddy ground, you should come to a bank of Sa●●, coming from Bengalen, when you find this ground, you shall (if need be) come North-east and by North, until you be at three fathom, for this is the right way, the aforesaid Riffe of Orixa being past, you shall presently find more depth, and if you desire to run along by the land of Orixa, then set your course right upon the first point, that you see before you, the least depth you shall find is three fathom, which is the right way until you be close by the land, where you shall find 5. or 6. fathom deep, and if you need any wood to burn, then go on the other side of the land of Bengalen, for there the wood is better than on the side of Orixa, but having done you must again put to the side of Orixa until you be passed two rivers, lying on the same side of Orixa, whereof the first is liker a Créeke then a river, the other lieth about a mile further in, which hath a great mouth or entry, two or three miles further beyond that River, there are some flowing Beken with trees, & a mile beyond them, there is wood or wilderness full of thick trees, like Palm trees, from the beginning whereof you must cross over to the other side of the land, called Guinette) right upon a tree, standing on the same side, which is higher than all the rest, and standeth on the left side of the river called Chandecan, from thence forward it is all shallows, wherefore you must pass further thereabouts with a full sea, if you desire to pass through the channel of the land, you shall take your course as I said before, & from Palmieras to the North-east, you may run at five fathom, and being by day you shall run at three fathoms, and running at this depth along by the land, although you come sometime to less depth, yet you need not fear, with the which course you shall see the Riffe of Orixa, and when you see it, you shall make towards it, and make 2/●: parts of the way towards the land, and a third part towards the Riffe, and so you have the right way as aforesaid. The 12. Chapter. another description of the same course, from India to Porto Piqueno, or the small Haven of Bengalen, set down by an other Pilot, large and better described, with the whole situation and course thereof. Sailing from the coast of India to the haven called Porto Piqueno, in the kingdom of Bengalen, outward about the Island of Zeylon, you shall take your course along the coast of India, till you come to see Briniaon lying by the Cape de Comorin, which is the furthest point of the land of India, from thence taking your way cross over, for from thence forward it is a good country, and make the shortest cross you can, thereby to go sure, and not to fall inwards, or between the Island of Zeylon, and when you see Barreias, which are the Dounes of Briniaon aforesaid than you shall sail Southward running so at the least fifteen or twenty miles, and from thence forward you shall shorten your way, as you think best to get under five degrees, and being there, you shall sail Eastward, as much as you think convenient, that you may be assured to pass the point of Gualle. which is the furthest point of the Island of Zeylon on the South-west side, lying under six degrees, when you think you are at the point de Gualle, to be assured thereof, make towards the Island, to know it, before you come to the drougths, between Tanadare (which is five miles from Punta de Gualla) and the first drought, where commonly all the ships know the land, such I say as we sail to Bengalen, or to any of the havens thereof, as Porto Piqueno, or Porto grand, that is, the small or the great Haven, where the Portugal's do traffic, and having sight of the land of the said country, go as close unto it as you will, but not passing above twelve fathom deep towards the land, because there lie certain cliffs along the shore, whereof we know not certainly the danger, besides the sands, between the which and the land you may pass through, as hereafter shall be showed, and sailing thus as I have said, along the shore, you must understand that the land of Tanadare is for the space of five miles to the Drougthes on the sea side altogether low land, and when you are further to landward in, you begin to see certain hills, that is three great hills, right against it, and then you shall presently see the first drought, between the which and the land you may well pass, for that most of the ships that go and come by the Island, run through that way: in the middle way you shall find between it and the land 11. and 12. fathom deep, of fair, & in some places stony ground, and you need not fear any thing, but only that you see before your eyes. This first drought or sand lieth full under 6 degrees and ½ and right against it upon the land, you see a hovel standing alone, and no more in all that country to be seen, 6 miles further from that first great drought: there lieth an other small drought, which is distant, North-east, & South-west, and somewhat north-east and by East, and south-west and by West: this small drought lieth under 6 degrees and ¼, about 2 miles from the land: and if you desire to run between it and the land, you may well do it, for it is ● or 6 fathom deep at low water, with sandy ground, which I know by those that have passed that way above 30. times, as well going as coming back again, but if your ship be great, than it is better to sail about further into the sea. Those drougths or sands being past, then run along by the land, and never put from it, for it is your best course to go close by it, and passing by the Island of the hills, and the high land, you shall see a high sharp Hill among others from whence there runneth a point that lieth out towards the South-west. This hill is called O Capello de Frade, that is, the friars cowl, and lieth full under 8 degrees: I set not down the course you must commonly use to take along the Coast to the said Capello de Frade, because you come upon no direct line: this friars cowl maketh a point of land, from the whence there runneth a Riffe about half a mile into the sea, whereon in some places you may see the water break from this point to Trinquanamale are 17. miles, and you run by the coast north and south, which is all low land with a bankie ground, and from thence you shall see no land, but the land that lieth inward five miles. Before you come to Trinquanamale you find a small river. Trinquanamale is a great haven, being in the entry more than 3. miles in breadth, & all low land, but very deep round about, he that will anchor therein may lie under certain islands, and inward it maketh a river that runneth to Seyta vaqua, the other to it is all low land, to know Trinquanamale a far off, at the mouth thereof on the north side, lieth a yellow Sandie Down, and hath upon one of the hooks or points, two long hills rising up, and reaching inwards to the country, and no other high land, neither behind them, nor before them in all that coast, coming by Trinquanamale, and having known it, you must then presently cross over, for there it is best to follow your course, and from thence you must run North, and North and by east, always reckoning the declining or winding of the compass, and if it be in the monsons of the winds, in the month of August, than you shall sail full north, because as then the stream runneth very strong into the sea, and this course you shall hold till you come under 17. degrees, which is the height of the point called a Punta de Guado variin, lying on the coast of Choramandel, which is the beginning of the kingdom of Orixa, and being under 17. degrees, from thence you shall put to the coast of the Firm land, to make a good voyage, always taking care not to run above 19 degrees & ½ without seeing land, because that under 19 degrees, there lieth a river called Puacota, from the mouth whereof 3. miles into the sea, there lieth a rock or stony cliff of the length of a ship, which may easily be seen, for it lieth above the water, you may pass between it and the land without danger of any thing but only that which you see before your eyes, all this coast from the point of Guadovariin, is altogether great thick land, and hills which may be seen far off from the river of Puacota, to another river called Paluor or Palura are 12. miles, and you run by the coast Northeast, and South-west, above this river of Palura there lieth a very high hill, called a Seira de Palura, that is the hill of Palura, which is the highest hill in all that coast. This river lieth full under 19 degrees, and ½ from this river to the point called a Derradeira terra alta, that is, the last high land, you keep the same course along the shore, and is in length seven miles, and lieth full under nineteen degrees, and ⅔. I set down this description of the last high land, because such as sail along by the coast, may understand that there all the hills and high lands do end, and from thence forward it is altogether low land, and sandy strands, till you come to the place called as Palmerias, or Palm trees: from the last high land, or Derradeira terra alta, to the river called Rio de Manicapatan, the coast runneth north-east, and south-west, and reacheth 5. miles, and to know when you are right against the River of Manicapatan, you shall see a high tree standing alone upon the sea side, and is a very flat land on the sea side, having a bankie and shallow ground, the tree standeth on the left hand of the entry into the river, from Manicapatan you run along the coast East, Northeast, and west south-west, to the Pagode de jorganate, that is the Idol or temple of jorganate, and reacheth three miles. This Pagode of jorganate lieth under 20. degrees and ¼, from this Pagode of jorganate, to another great black Pagode or Idol, the coast runneth east and west, & somewhat east and by north, and west & by south, and reacheth 7. miles. This black Pagode lieth not full under 20. degrees and ½, from this black Pagode to the river of Cayegare the coast runneth north-east, and south-west and somewhat north-east and by east, and south west and by west, and reacheth 10 miles, the river of Cayegare lieth not full under 21 degrees, and about 4. miles before you come to it, there lieth 5. hovels which show like a Haven of the Sea, built with Cottages, in the mouth of the river aforesaid, there lieth two sands, running a good mile southwestward, and at the entry thereof lieth a Riffe running along by the coast for half a mile into the sea, the entry of the river is 4. fathom deep, and you go in and come forth northwest and southeast, the sands aforesaid, as you enter, lie on your left hand, and there the depth runneth along. To know Cayegare a far off, you must understand that when you have passed the hovels aforesaid, then Cayegare showeth like an Island, having three or four trees higher than the rest, and a little beyond it standeth a small Pagode, and somewhat beyond this Pagode, there is a little wood, very thick with trees, which seemeth to be part of Cayegare, and other wood there is none beyond it, by the said Pagode there standeth some Sandie Downs of red colour, with some water Beecken from the River of Cayegare to the point called a punta das Palmeiras, the Coast runneth north-east, and south-west, and somewhat north-east and by east, and south-west, & by west, and reacheth eleven miles 2. miles before you come to the point of Palmerias, you shall see certain black hovels standing upon a land that is higher than all the land there about, and from thence to the point it beginneth again to be low ground, and right over against the hovels you shall see some small, (but not over white) sandy Downs, the marks and tokens which you shall find being right against the point de Palmerias are, that upon the point there is neither tree nor bush, and although it hath the name of the point of Palmtrees, it hath notwithstanding right forth, but one Palm tree. If you fall upon it by day, being by Caijagate, and desire to follow your way, then sail at the depth of twelve fathoms, north-east, & north-east and by east, always with your lead ready in the hand with good care and diligence, and being at 16. fathom, you shall presently wind north-east, until again you find 12. fathom, always keeping at that depth, till you find but 7. fathom, and lie thereon by night, where you shall anchor till it be day, and then hoist up anchor, running the same course of North-east, and north-east and by north, till you come to four fathom, and coming thither you shall send a man into the top, to know the land. This coast reacheth East north-east, till you come to a hovel, which showeth like a Champana without a mast, with a boat following it, those Champanas are Carvels of India, wherewith they sail in the sea, and along the coast, this is the best mark you find upon the coast of Orixa, and always take good heed to your depths, and if they begin to increase, that is, above five fathom, than you shall presently turn again to 3. and 3. fathom and ½ scarce, and this is the right course: for that if you sail still at 5. and 6. fathom, you should in the end come on ground, & when you see the hovel called Champana, (as I said before) you shall run along by it till you see three trees standing together, yet somewhat distant each from other, which trees are called as Aruores da Conhecensa, that is the trees of Marks. Right against those trees lieth the riff of Orixa, and being to seaward you shall see the water break upon it, on Bengalen side, and you cannot see the marks aforesaid but in clear weather, and if it be misty, dark, or cloudy weather, then have the lead ready, without neglecting it for you must run at 3. and ½ and 4. fathom deep, and you must understand that on the side of Bengalen you find hard sandy ground, and on the side of Orixa muddy and small black sand. I set this down because I myself have passed over it with great ships, being past the riff of Orixa, and Bengalen, you shall see the Island called a Ilha does Gallos', that is the islands of Cocks, & you must run right upon it without fear, for it is deep enough, and on the other side of Orixa it is all banks, therefore I counsel you to go near to the Island of Cocks sailing along by it, whereby you shall presently come to a river called Rio de Chamdequan, which having passed, you shall from thence cross over to the side of Orixa, where you shall see a hook or point of the river Angellijn, this point of land will lie northward, and coming thither you shall always have your lead in hand, and the depth that you shall find in those places, are 3.3. ½ and 4. fathom, but being full sea it is deeper, which will continue till you be right against the river of Angelijn: for from thence forward you have many depths, and being right against the river of Angelijn you shall run along the shore till you come to a river called Gilingoa, & being right against that river, I wish you not put too far from the shore, towards the right hand, for there you find a sand drought, whereon Bartholomeus Rodriges de Moraiis was cast away with a ship full laden, as he put out, therefore I advise you to keep on the left hand, for there it is deep enough, from this river to certain high Beecken or down falls of water, you may have wood to burn, and from those Beeckens you must cross over on the other side of Guijnette, where you shall presently see 5. or 6. trees higher than the rest, until you be close to the other side. Those trees stand at the mouth of the river Chandequam on the east side, the depths you shall find upon those banks are 2. & ½ and three fathom deep, till you be on the other side, for there you find many depths, from this place forward you need no other advise, for the Fisher men as then will bring you where you should be, you shall pass over the water with half flood, but I advise you once again, that if you sail in the morning by the aforesaid river of Cayegare, then run along the coast, till you come to the point das Palmerias, and from thence to 17. fathom deep, from thence holding your course northwest, and northwest and by north, this way must be followed with a Compass that yieldeth one strike till you come to 12. fathom deep, and then running the same course, till you come to 4. and three fathom, and ½ wherewith if it be clear weather, you shall presently see the land of Orixa, but if it be dark and misty weather, then run no more towards the land, keeping still at 4. and 3. fathom, and ½ runrunning East, for the lead and the depths will bring you well in, and take heed you come not into many depths keeping still as I said before at the small depths, and if it be night being at seventeen fathom, then run towards the 2. islands, and see you anchor not, for it is bad ankering there, and passing by the aforesaid Punta das Palmeiras, running in by night, you shall then not pass above 7. or 8. fathom until it be day, wherewith as then you may go in, & if you chance to be there with a small ship, then keep at 2. and 2. fathom and ½. till you be in the sight of the riff of Orixa: and when you begin to be right against it, then run within the length of a great shot near unto, for it is deep enough, and from the side of Orixa it is all banks and shallow ground. The riff aforesaid shall be on your right hand, that is to seaward from you, and from thence you must make right with the Island A Ylha does Gallos', or if you will to the point of the River Angelijn, where you may freely sail, for there you shall find two and a half and three fathom deep, but it must be with a small ship as I said before. The 13. Chapter. The course from India to the haven of Aracan, which is the same way that you hold to Porto grand, or the great haven, lying in the country of Bengalen. Sailing from India or Cochijn to the haven of Aracan, you must hold your course to the Island of Seylon, in manner aforesaid (as in the description of the course to Porto Pequeno) running so to the point or end of the sands or droughtes (lying full under 6. degrees) and upon the point of the land, which runneth East and West, coming by this point or hook, you shall from thence put off from the land, running 7. or 8. miles Northeastward, to come out under the Island, and then let your course be North-east, and North-east & by North, till you be under 12. degrees, and that Manacosta be south-west from you and from thence you shall run North-east, till you be almost under 20. degrees, which is the height of Aracan, and if then you see no land, you shall run East unto Aracan, under the same height of 20. degrees: three or four miles from the land there lieth a riff, whereupon the water breaketh, and at low water is uncovered: it is in greatness and length about the length of seven ships, both ways: and when you see it you must take heed of it and go no nearer than the shot of a great piece. The haven of Aracan lieth under 20. degrees, and being five or six miles to seaward from it, you shall there find twenty fathom deep, sandy ground, and being at 19 degrees and ½. toward the land you shall find deep muddy ground, at the least 6 miles from the shore, and being but three or four miles from the land thirty fathom deep muddy ground, you must be careful at 19 degrees and ½. not to run in with the land, but do as I said before. The 14. Chapter. The course from India to the haven of Martavan, lying in the kingdom of Pegu, with the situation of the coasts. Sailing from India to Martavan, or to the kingdom of Pegu, you shall hold your course (till you be past the Island of Seylon) as they do that sail to Bengalen, and being about the Island, you shall make to the islands called As Ylhas d' Andemaon, whereof the first Island lieth south under 11. degrees, and the furthest land in the North under 14. degrees, you run on the East side of them, North-east and Southwest, from the islands d' Andemaon, to the firm land, are above 60. miles, and running to Andemaon, you shall use all the means you can to pass by them upon the North side, and being past you must (as I said before) make towards Martavan, (which lieth under 16. degrees) and when you are at 14. degrees you shall make with the land, but better at 13. degrees, because of the creak or winding in of Martavan, (where you find a very strong stream always drawing Northwest, and if you make with the land being at 14. degrees, you shall see many Islands which you may freely pass close by, for it is all over very deep, for there it is 12. and 13. deep muddy ground close by the shore, besides the Island Pulo Comudo, which is about 6. or 7. miles from the haven of Martavan, between this Island and the firm land there lieth many riffs, notwithstanding if you chance to fall between those Islands, you shall make towards the side of the Island, but not too close, where you shall find a channel of three fathom deep, and on the side of the firm land you have many sands and shallows, passing from thence to the haven of Martavan (being past that Island) you shall pass along the shore, where you shall see certain cliffs lying towards the sea, which show like Almadias' (which are Indian Scutes, by them used in the rivers) which cliffs lie about 2 miles from Pulo Comudo towards Martavan, and right over against these cliffs you have on the firm land a point or hook of high land, and on the North side of this point there lieth a sandy strand upon the low land: this land belongeth to Xemiin Vegarum, that is in Pegu speech, the Lord of Vegarum, for Xemiin is Lord, and Vegarum the name of the land: from thence Northward the land is high, in some places having créekes, cliffs and Islands: before you come to the haven of Martavan there is a white hovel or land, that serveth for a mark, having close by it two Palm trees: and about two miles further you shall see a thick top of land, upon the end whereof towards the sea lieth an Island, which cannot be seen nor discerned from the land, till you be right against it, and that you have discovered the River within where the haven of Martavan lieth, and being past this Island, you shall see a white hovel, which lieth likewise on the South side: within the Island there is a lake that hath good fish, and before you come to the haven (coming from the Island of Comudo) about a mile, or a mile and a half to seaward from the land, you shall see a round Island full of bushes, called A Ilhas de Cebollas, that is, the Island of Onions, by the which Island on the south side thereof, there lieth a cliff whereon you see the sea break: from this Island to the haven of Martavan, there are about two miles, & coming from Pulo Comudo, you must put off from it towards the land, holding your course as aforesaid, as not having any cause of fear, but only of that which you see before your eyes, you must likewise understand that from the Island Das Cebollas forward towards the North, there is no other islands nor cliffs, which is a very good mark of this creak, for that being on this side thereof, you are no sooner passed one Island but you see another, but from thence forward you see not any, as I said before, but you must be sure not to pass beyond the haven of Martavan, for that being at twelve fathom, not long after you should fall upon the drought. This haven of Martavan is about a mile or a half and a half broad, having on the North side a low flat land even with the sea, and is an Island called Momua: you may see it as you pass along the shore, from Pulo Comuda, towards the haven, you must still keep at twelve fathom, and coming to 8. or 9 fathom, than you shall anchor, for than you are in the haven; and put no nearer to the shore, neither run not further from the creak to the bank, for than you shall find less depth: this river of Martavan runneth North-east & Southwest both out and in, but you may not enter therein without a Pilot, for that within the River upon the East side it hath a stone cliff or rock, which draweth the water unto it, therefore you cannot enter without a Pilot: also in the entry of this river and haven, on the right hand there lieth a sandy bank, where in the middle way there runneth a channel of six or seven fathom deep, which you shall know by this, that is, in the deepest part thereof it hath much fish, which you may see, and this haven of Martavan lieth under 16. degrees and ●/4;. and the town of Martavan under sixteen degrees: upon the furthest end of the Island of Andeman on the North side there lieth two islands, between the which and the Island of Andeman you may safely pass: also on the furthest point of the South side of the Island of Andeman lying under 11. degrees, there lieth some Islands, and from thence to the Islands of As Ilhas de Nicobar, southward there reacheth an Island: also as you put off from the Islands of Andeman towards the coast, meeting with some gatherings of water, you need not fear them, for it is nothing but the water itself without any sands, although there lieth some upon the coast: there lieth only in the middle way an Island, which the inhabitants call Viacondam, which is a small Island having fair ground round about it, but very little fresh water, and nothing else but Pine trees, wherefore you need not go into it. The 15. Chapter. The course from Cochiin in India to Malacca. HE that will sail to Malacca in the great Monson (which is the principal time when the winds serve to go thither) in the Month of April, than (to make a good voyage) you must set sail from Cochiin upon the six and twentieth of April, and being out of the haven, you must hold your course southward till you be under 7. degrees, and from thence south southeast to 6. degrees, and being under that height, than you shall run Southeast almost to five degrees, and from thence East until you are passed the Island of Seylon, and being there you shall keep on your course till you be under 5. and ⅓. and 5. degrees, and ●. from thence you shall make towards the islands of Gomespola, which lie under 6. degrees by the point of Achiin, in the Island Sumatra, and coming to the Island of Gomespola, if you fear not the Acherins', (which are subjects to the kingdom of Acheiin in the Island of Sumatra, and deadly enemies to the Portugeses) then take your course along by the Island of Sumatra, to the Cape called Taniamburo, lying on the same coast of the Island almost 30. miles from the Islands of Gomespola, and from thence you shall take your course towards the coast of Malacca, running as far to loofewarde as possible you may to discover Pulo Sambilao, which is an Island lying close upon the coast under 4. degrees, and ⅔. and distant from Malacca 40. miles Northwest and by North, for that such as discover and come to this Island, maketh a quick voyage to Malacca, and those that fall to leeward towards Pulo Pinan (which is an other Island under five degrees and ½. lying with Pulo Sambilao, North and by West, 12. miles, & near Pulo Batun there is another Island lying Northwest and by North from Pulo Pinaio ten miles, & under 6. deg.) might peradventure find Southeast winds, which blow much on that coast: therefore he that goeth late to sail hath a long voyage, wherefore it is best to departed early from Cochiin, to make a better voyage. The 16. Chapter. An other & larger description of the course to sail from Goa in India to Malacca, with the description of the coasts. Such as desire to sail from Goa, or out of India to Malacca, must put 20. miles into the sea, that he may sail without the Island of Seylon, unto the Islands called As Ilhas de Nicobar through the middle of the channel, which lieth under 7. degrees, and ½. and in that country you must look to the stream, because with a west wind they run towards the Gulf of Bengalen, and with an East wind into the sea, about 20. or 30. miles from the Islands, there is such a concourse & breaking of water and streams, as if there were sands. When you come to the middle of the islands of Nicobar, there you find a channel, lying under 6. degrees and ½. the islands being distant one from the other about a mile and a half, where you may pass through without fear, as having nothing to fear, but that you see before you, the depth you find there is 12. & 13. fathom, & at the end this channel, by the North Island of the Islands of Nicobar lieth an Island, where you may pass through with that greatest ship that is: the South end of this Island lieth under 6. degrees and ¼. and the channel aforesaid under 7. degrees: if you go through the middle of the channel lying under 6. degrees, you shall at the entry to the islands see 4. islands, whereof three lie half a mile from the Island: two of them are great and high, the other small: the fourth lieth distant from the Island about three miles, and is a great round Island, flat on the top, and Northward you shall see another Island, lying under 8. deg. the entry of this Island hath a thick high back, flat at the end, and being in the middle of the channel you shall see another Island, lying hard by that under 8. deg. a flat land, distant from the other about two miles: from the Islands of Nicobar to the Northerly islands are about 7. miles, and there you need not fear any thing: at the end of this channel the Island of Nicobar hath a round hovel, at the foot whereof lieth an Island, I counsel you not to pass by the south side of the Island Nicobar, thereby to keep yourself out of the danger of those of Acheiin in the Island of Sumatra, which are continually thereabouts, and are deadly enemies to the Portugal's, but rather do your best to pass the way I spoke of before, although you should sail under 8. and ¼. or 8. degrees and ●. for you may pass without danger, for they are all channels or thorough fares: being past the Islands of Nicobar as I said before, you shall take your course towards the Island Pulo Cuto, you run between Pulo Cuto and Nicobar East and West, and somewhat East and by South, and West and by North: the course is nine miles and lieth under 6. degrees and 2/●. to know Pulo Cuto, coming out of the Sea towards it, upon the East side thereof you shall see a high round land, on the shore very low: they are three islands together, having on the South side, on the furthest point of them 3. or 4. cliffs or rocks that lie uncovered, & on the North side an other mouth or opening, running between the great Island & the Island of the sea: in this Island on the Southeast side there is a very good place to take in fresh water, lying by a long point of land: you may likewise take your course from the islands of Nicobar to the Island Pulo Pera, which is a small round Island, without trees, lying under 5. deg. and ⅔. the course being about 100 miles, you run East Southeast, and West Northwest, from Pulo Pera to the Island Pulo Pinaon, are 15. miles, and are one from the other East and west, & somewhat East and by South, & West and by North. This Island Pulo Pinaon lieth 5. miles from the firm land, full under five degrees and ¼. the mark thereof is, that it is high in the middle, having on the North point a round hovel, and an Island lying in the middle way from the same Island, and coming along by the land, it hath a great creak with a sandy strand, at the end whereof lieth an Island, where there is a place of fresh water: on the South point it is low land, making an other Island. Pulo Pinaon lieth with Pulo Sambilaon North & south, there you must look well to yourself, for from this Island Pulo Pinaon there runneth a bank, reaching to a point or book of high land, which runneth into the sea at the least 2 miles: upon it you shall find 5. fathom deep & somewhat more, but towards the land less: & when the point aforesaid lieth from you east, & east & by north, than you shall see Sambilaon: the course from Pulo Pinaon to Pulo Sambilaon is 22. miles, and lieth almost under 4. deg. East & West from Pulo Sambilaon, 4. or 5. miles to seaward lieth the Island called A Ilha das jars, which is a small round Island full of trees, and on the South-west side it hath fresh water, but very little, but in Pulo Sambilaon you have very good fresh water in all the 4. islands thereof, the greatest whereof nearest the land lieth in the middle, in the which on the North side there standeth a hovel, on both sides whereof are sandy strands, wherein are fresh water: likewise the other 3. Islands that are in the middle, have every one upon the east Northeast side sandy strands, in the middle whereof where there is an opening, you shall find very good fresh water at the foot of a great tree by all these islands, as well on the sea as the land side, as also through the channel running between them, you may freely pass without fear, for it is deep enough, & you may anchor in sight of the land at 20. & 25. fathom deep. If you desire to pass through the great channel of Pulo Sambilaon, than you must run south & south and by East to the Islands called As Ilhas d'Aru, which lie upon the coast of the Island Sumatra: they are 3 small flat islands, full of bushes and woods, and when you are within a mile of these islands, you shall sail southeast, southeast & by east, & east southeast till you be at 10. fathom deep, towards Pulo Parcelor, which is a high hill lying upon the coast of Malacca, showing far off to be an Island, it standeth in a flat land, whereby the land is not seen until you be full upon it: from Pulo Parcelor to the point called Cabo Rachado, that is, the cloven point lying full under 2. degr. & ½. you sail to Malacca East southeast, & West Northwest, along the coast forward it is altogether a country full of points and hovels, but high and being in the middle way between Cabo Rachado and Malacca, you shall presently discover the islands that lie about half a mile from Malacca close by the land. The 17. Chapter. To sail from Pulo Sambilaon, or through the great channel to Malacca. SAiling from Pulo Sambilaon to the Islands As Ilhas de Arundell, lying on the coast of the Island Sumatra, you shall hold your course south, for the space of 13. miles, whereby you shall come upon the bank, so that it is all one to sail from Pulo Sambilaon running southward, as from the Island das jarras, (that is the Island of pots) southeast, & southeast & by south, for you come out all at one place, & when the islands de Arundell lie west, & west and by North from you, than cast out your lead, and you shall find sandy ground, from thence you shall hold your course southeast, still casting out your lead, & finding 10. fathom, (keeping the same course till you be at 13. fathom muddy ground) you shall run southeast, & southeast and by east, but finding 16. & 17. fathom sandy ground, than wind towards the side of Malacca, to 12. & 13. fathom, setting your course again southeast, & southeast and by east, & if you find yourself to be at 10. fathom, then turn again to the southeast, always seeking to be at 10.12. & 13. fathom, for it is the best ground and depth of the channel, & when you see a round hill right before you (which showeth like an Island) that is Pulo Parselar, to the which the droughts or sands aforesaid do stretch, notwithstanding you shall not let to pass on your way, not coming nearer to Pulo Parselar, than 2. miles Northeastwarde, for than you are passed the drougthes' aforesaid, from thence forward put towards the land, about a mile distant, holding your course southeast, towards the point of Cabo Rachado, & before you come within 3. miles thereof, you find a Riffe lying four miles from the coast, which is but 4. fathom deep at high water, & to seaward from thence there is a channel of 10. fathom deep, running from the Island of de Arundell to Pulo Parselar, you shall use all the means you can to have the greatest Island de Arundell, Southwest and south-west & by west from you, holding your course southeast, always at 18. & at the least 17 fathom, & if you will put from Pulo Parselar, to the Islands de Arundell, you shall let Parse●ar lie North-east, & north-east & by east, from you running northwest, & Northwest and by West, always at 16.17. & 18. to 15 fathom deep: this way is not otherwise to be done, for I have passed so myself, and found it a very good way. The 18. Chapter. The course from Malacca to Goa, with the stretchings, and situations of the Coasts. DEparting from Malacca, to Goa or India, your best course is to sail a mile, or a mile and a half along by the coast of Malacca, always having in sight the strikes and neither parts of the Trees that stand upon the land, till you be at Pulo Parcelar, and from thence you have from 16. to 27. and 28. fathom deep, but you must remember not to pass above 14. fathom, neither on the one side, nor the other, and sailing from Malacca about two miles and ½ or 3. miles from thence, you find 2. or 3. droughts of stony cliffs, reaching about half a mile into the sea, lying right over the cistern, or the kings Bath, by the Portugese's called Tanque del Rey, you shall likewise look that you go not near the cheek of Cabo Rachado, which Cape lieth under two degrees, and ½ upon the same Coast of Malacca Northwest, and by North ten miles distant, as well upon the Southeast, as the Northwest side, and go not near the land by a mile at the least, as I said before: there you have a good mile and a half to the principal part of the channel that runneth to Parcelar, and passing by Pulo Pacelor, and desiring to cross over from the droughts, you shall keep off from Pulo Parcelor about 2 miles, because that from it there reacheth a bank that jutteth about half a mile into the sea, being (as I said) about two miles from the land, to pass over the droughtes being with a flood, than Pulo Parcelor shall lie Eastward from you, and at an ebb, East, Northeast: therefore it is needful for you to have great care of the tides, that you be not deceived, & coming in this sort into those parts, you shall run west Northwest, keeping either on the one side or the other, as the tides fall, and if you cross over the sea Pulo Parcelor, it is best for you to keep east, and east, and by south from it, and being in the middle way to the islands of Daru, lying close upon the coast of Samatra under 3. degrees, west, Northwest, and 30. miles from Malacca: then if you see Pulo Pacelor, let it be between east southeast, and east & by south from you, and yet you have a good course, and coming towards Pulo Parcelor, you must have it to lie north-east and south-west, being two miles from it, but when you leave it to make towards the islands of d' Arundell, than it is best to have it east and east, and by south, and being in the sight of the Island of d' Arundell, making towards the great Island, you may run within a mile or two thereof safely and without danger, for it is all deep ground. The depths you shall find by the droughts aforesaid, passing through the Channel, are from 10. to 11. fathom, but not above, and the greatest depths you shall find running through the channel are 12.13.14.15.16. and 17. fathom, and although at 3. or 4. castinges you come to 10.9. & 8. fathom of small fine and black sand, or muddy ground, yet your course is good, for you shall presently again come to 12.13. and 14. fathom, and having this depth and ground, and holding the course aforesaid, although at some castings, you find small fine white sand, yet your course is good, but if you find great sand or shells, than you are out of the channel, and when you find the ground full of black shells and great sand, I counsel you to seek again for fine small and black sand, or muddy ground, for the ground of great sand and shells is out of the channel: therefore you must not cease to cast out your lead, to assure yourself, it is likewise good to know the depth with two leads upon each side of the ship one, with good and careful oversight, always having your anchors ready, with a cable of 12. or 15. fathom long, if need be, therewith to help yourself, & because herein there is mention many times made of Pulo Pacelor, I thought it good likewise to set down under what height it lieth, although it is sufficiently set down us the Sea Cards, it is a land that maketh a point like to a Cape lying on the Coast of Malacca, Northwest, and by North, about fifteen miles distant, full under three degrees: also you must remember, that taking your course from Pulo Parcelor, to the Island of d' Arundell, being in the middle way, you must let Pulo Pacelor lie in East, and East, and by South from you, and being somewhat nearer the Islands, than Pulo Parcelor is from you almost East Southeast, that is as you go near the Islands, for that running in this sort you have a good course, and are sure and safe from the droughtes, and if by night you pass over the droughts, than you shall mark the land in the day time, as I said before, having a good wind, always looking to your tides that they deceive you not, driving you upon the one or the other side: for there the stream runneth very strong, as well in the flood, and as in the ebb, always ruling yourself according to the tides, and holding your course in such manner, that you may cast out your lead, and as the aforesaid great Island of d'Aru lieth South-west from you, being about two miles from it, than you shall have Pulo Sambilao right against it, so you fall not from the Islands towards Samatra, holding your course as aforesaid, towards Pulo Sambilao without fear, because the monson, or time of the winds do as then blow from the land into the Sea, and if herein you chance to be negligent, you shall do yourself great hurt, and procure great hindrance in your Voyage: the depths and ground that you find from the Island of d'Aru to Pulo Sambilao, and from 27. to 40. fathom muddy ground, and in some places sand, and passing by the Island of d'Aru, than you find from 40. to 50. fathom deep, from the Islands of Pulo Sambilao, to th' Islands of Pulo Pinao, you shall keep along by the shore, not once putting from it, shunning a bank, (lying right over against the land called Barus, between Pulo Sambilao, and Pulo Pinao) which is muddy ground, and it is said that there you have three fathom water, you shall still use your lead, and run not nearer than fifteen fathom to the land, nor further than thirty fathom to Sea ward, because divers times there cometh great blasts (out of the hills of Queda) from North-east, and north, north-east, and sometimes sharper, & many times run further from the coast, as I said before, and so you shall hold your course without danger from the coast of the Island Samatra, where in the monson you have greatest cause to fear, and therefore you shall hold your course without putting from the land till you come to the Island of Pulo Pinao, and being by them, or at the height and length of them, and having the monson (that is the wind which as then bloweth and is good for you) you may then put from the land doing your best to keep too loofeward off Pulo Pera, which is a good course: but if the wind serve you to make towards Pulo Batum, it is better: for from this place you must take your course towards the channel, under 7. degrees and ½, but having the monson, as aforesaid, although it be somewhat backward, you shall lose your time: for the monson at the first is sometimes sharp, and after that beginneth to be larger, as you turn or wind from the land or coast. With this course you shall run to the channel, and pass it under seven degrees, and ●/2 and before you come under seven degrees and 1/2 to seven and 2/● or less having past the islands, you shall always keep under the aforesaid seven degrees and ½, because in that gulf or country many times the wind is north, and north Northeast: in your course towards the Island of Seylon, you shall run under seven degrees and ½. and under seven degrees, with the which you shall come to the Island of Seylon, to a place called Matecalou, which lieth too loofeward off the sands, there you have no ground but within two miles of the land, you must likewise understand, that from the middle of the Gulf to the Island of Seylon, the water and the streams in this time of monson run outward into the sea, likewise the compass yieldeth more to the Northwest: whereunto you must have great regard, and being at the Island Seylon having it in sight you shall not lose it, but keep your ground from thirty fathom, (looking well before you, and taking heed of the droughtes that are very dangerous, the foremost of them being of stone Cliffs the length of a Galley, without any other then only those you see) to fourteen and sixteen fathom, and in the half way or middle thereof and the land, you shall find the depth aforesaid, and another Sand that lieth behind you, which is the first, and cannot be seen but that the Sea breaketh upon it, and they say you may pass with small Ships between it and the land, being four fathom deep, but I think it is better to put from it to sea ward, it is from thence to the land a mile, and you may go near it at sixteen & eighteen fathom, and if you fall upon it by night, you must sail only with your Foukesayle, when you are in sight of unknown land, keeping at eighteen fathom near the land, and not above thirty fathom to Seaward, from this sand you shall run along the coast at fifteen, sixteen, twenty, twenty five, and thirty fathom, but in such manner, that you lose not ground, for you may have a Calm, and so by that losing of ground, the water and streams might drive you to the Islands of Maldiva: wherefore you must have good regard, until you come to Negumbo, which is in the Island of Seylon, and from thence it is good to cross over to the Firm land, and coming to Negumbo, you shall not put off from the land, unless it be from the fifteen of February, for from that time forwards, than the stream and waters begin again to run inwards, and being from the fifteen of February forwards, you may put from the shore (that is from the Island of Verberyn which lieth close upon the Coast of Seylon,) to the Portugese's Fort called Columbo, as it falleth out best for you, lest it happen to you as it hath done to many other ships that for want of care, were driven to the islands of Maldyva: from this last sand to Tanadare, and to the point called A Punta de Gualla, along the Coast and sea side: the Country is almost all of one higth, and right over against the sands aforesaid inwards to the land, you see 3 high trees, and from thence to Tanadare you have sandy strands, and you may still run along the shore without fear, till you see Tanadare, which is very well known, and deceive not yourself, for that outwardly it showeth like Punta de Gualla, but the marks and right tokens thereof are, that it hath a thine point of land striking out, in form like a tongue, with a stone riff hanging from it towards the sea, as far as you may throw a stone: this point of land or tongue striking out, is full of Indian Palm trees, which show very fair, and a mile or two before you come at it, this point or tongue of land appeareth beyond the Palm trees, further into the sea, but the Palm trees are thick, and show very fair, and before you come to Tanadare you have two or three sandy bays, not necessary to be described, and when you come right against the wood or bush of Palm trees, in the middle thereof you shall see a white Pagode, that is a Temple of the Indians Idols, from this Pagode, towards the North side, you shall see certain downs of white and red earth, which are good marks, and the right knowledge of that Country: you must not go too close unto the shore, for it hath a small sand stretching into the sea, but not far: when you see the downs aforesaid, than you must run at eyghtéene & twenty fathom deep, for that if the wind beginneth to calm, and your ground to be deeper, you must cast anchor, for if you neglect it, you should presently fall on ground, because the streams and waters do run very strong to sea ward: from Tanadare to Belliguao are about 6. miles: this place of Belliguao is a very great créek, and from the south side thereof, there appeareth certain great hovels of red earth, that lie within the Créeke, and can not be seen till you be full before the creak, and on the North side it hath two small Islands close to the land, from the which Islands there cometh a small sand, but it lieth on the south side towards the land. From Belleguao to Gualla are five miles, and the way between them is altogether on the sea side, full of Palm trees, and between them likewise lieth an Island hard by the land, all of stony cliffs: and when you make towards Gualla, you shall perceive a high land full of woods, and a plain desert, and from the North side of the bay it hath a great wood of Palm trees, and if you have occasion to anchor in the bay, you may well enter at fifteen and fourteen fathom deep, but such as desire to keep on their course need not put in there. From Tanadare to this Haven of Gualla (which are twelve miles) you run from the one to the other, Northwest and Southeast, and somewhat Northwest & by West, and Southeast and by east, and all the way along this Coast to Gualla, is not to be sailed, but only where you may see ground with your Lead. From Gualla to the point called Belitote, is five or six miles, which point hath a thick wood of Palm trees (and right over against it about half a mile there is a great Cliff) and between them both lieth many stony cliffs: along the shore, by the point of Gualla, are two sands, whereon the water breaketh, the one is before you come at the point which runneth into the sea, about ¼ of a mile, and the other is right over against the bay, on the North side, running a small mile into the sea, and of this you must take great care: you may well pass by it in the night, at twenty fathom deep, so that you need not fear: upon this same the sea breaketh very long, specially when it is high water. From thence you shall take your course unto Columbo, as the Coast reacheth, and from the Island of Verberijn forward, the ground is full of Banks and shallows, and being hard by Columbo, about three or four miles towards Negumbo, you may anchor at eight or nine fathom, but by Columbo you cannot do it, but if you have great occasion, than you may anchor at eighteen fathom towards the land. There you find stony ground, and the same you find at the point where you have twenty five fathom deep, inwards to the sea, and that in most places, therefore you must be careful in throwing out your Anchor, first proving with a lead: the ground of this Country is in some places small, and in other places great sand, which is the surest, and in some places it hath red sand, and likewise places of white and black sand, which are tokens of the ground along the Coast, upon all the which ground you may anchor. The right marks and tokens of Columbo, (which is the place where the Portugal's hold their fort) are these, that is, when you are within the Haven than the Pico of Adam, so called (which is a high hill, higher than any other in all the country about it,) shall be in the East and setting your course to the Haven of this fortress, than you shall lose the sight of all the hills and Hovels, and begin to sail by thin flat land, which is a mark and a very good token of the Haven, the winds that you there shall find for the most part of that time or Monson, are North Northeast, Northeast, and sometime East Northeast, and also East, the Viracoins (which are the winds that blow out of the Sea,) are many times North, and Northwest, I writ this, that men should not wonder to find them so, in that place, likewise you find there West Northwest, and West Southwest winds, according to the conjunctions of the times, when men are in that coast, the winds that are called Viracoins which commonly blow out of the west, throughout all India, at such time as men use to sail upon the Sea, which is in Summer from noon to twelve of the clock at night, and come out of the Sea, towards the land, and therefore by the Portugese's they are called Viracoins, that is wind out of the Sea, and from midnight to noon, the winds blow out of the East, which come over the land into the Sea, as it is at large declared in my Indian Voyage, and is only here set down because it should not seem strange to any man, to read of these winds and their manner of blowing in these countries, when you will put to Sea by night with the Terreinhos, or land winds, if they be not North-east, than you shall not set sail before midnight, & if they be not full, to Sea ward, then put not to far off from the shore because it would not be good for you, to put to far into the Sea, for that you could not well get the land again, because the Viracoins or sea winds that come out of the North and Northwest, do often stay late, & blow but slowly. From Negumbo you shall cross over to Cape de Comorijn, to the East side of the Cape, towards the land, called das Areas Gordas, that is of the fat or thick Dounes, which is 12. miles from Cabo de Comorijn, on the side of Choramandel, for it is good to put on there because of the stream, which runneth very stiff outward with a hard wind by these Areas Gordas, as also some part of the way to the Cape, you find ground (and many times see the land because it is long) at 40. fathom and less, and if you come inward from the Cape, being by night and find ground, than you may freely pass over this ground from 12. to 18. fathom deep, for as you come right against the Cape, than the ground is full of white Sand, and you shall not find above 20. fathom to Seaward, from Areas Gordas to the Cape, for from Areas Gordas' inwards, the ground is full of banks, and small black Sand, and you must run a mile, a mile and a half, and two miles from the shore, upon the ground and depths afore said. And when you pass by Cabo de Comorijn, to Coulaon, you shall hold your course along the coast, about a mile from the shore, that you may Anchor, and not going nearer to the sand than 12. fathom, but it is good to run from 15. to 18. fathom, always taking heed of the stones of Travancor, which lie between the Cape and Coulaon, and being in the night time, the surest mark to know if you be before Coulaon, is to find the ground full of banks, for from Coulaon to Batecola (that is by Onor not far from Goa) the ground is bankie, and you may Anchor at 8. fathom without fear, from Batecola to Goa, the ground in some places deeper, whereby you may govern yourself. Touching your Ankerage, from Cochijn to Cananor you need not fear, only to take heed of the Island called Ilha Cagado, lying Southward from Cananor seven miles, and three miles Northward from the fortress of Mangalor, there lieth a row of islands, Cliffs, and Rocks, along the coast until you come to the fortress of Barcelor, from thence to Batecola you have certain Cliffs, but they are close to the land, and the two islands of Batecola, you may pass between the first of them, and the Firm land without fear, for it is 15. or 16. Fathom deep, a little further lieth the Island of Honour, close to the Firm land, then followeth the Islands of Angediva, which reach as the coast doth, and if it be late in the year, you shall not put far into the Créeke of Ancola, for as then there is no Terreinhos or land winds, to drive you out again, therefore it is then better to run something far from the coast, for you have many times the Viracoins or Sea winds somewhat far off, and being near the shore, they would not much help you. This must be from the twenty of March forward. If you chance to be by Angediva and had need of a Road, or harbour, you must enter into Angediva on the North side, as far from that land, as from the Firm land, and rather somewhat nearer the Island, than the Firm land, where you have a good Road or harbour, for there many times divers ships do winter, being constrained thereunto, within it is six fathom deep, a little further from Angediva, lie four or five islands, from the river Sanguisijn, close by the Firm land, and from thence about half a mile further forward lieth the Island of Goa Velha, (that is old Goa) and then there are no other islands herein to be noted. You must understand that oftentimes it happeneth, that along the coast, you shall find the wind Northwest, and North Northwest, without changing which bloweth very strong with the which wind I advise you not to set sail, although it blow out of the North, but if it be clear day, than you may hoist Anchor, and put to Sea wards and if the wind cometh not about, to North-east, being four miles from the land, and before noon, about nine or ten of the clock, you shall Anchor till it be noon, till the Viracoins or Sea winds come, therewith to sail again towards the land, for in this sort you shall get advantage to loofeward, although it be with pain and labour, as likewise the time will show you what you shall do. I must further advertise you, that when you are by the coast of Seylon, it being about the fifteen of February or past, than you need not sail, further than to the islands Verberijn, and from thence to the Cape de Comorijn, for as than you need neither to fear water nor streams, to drive you outward, yet you must not be negligent therein, for some years the storms come later & sometimes sooner, as the winds blow, whereof you must be careful, and being the fifteen of February, or past, you must remember not to run inwards, but keep out, for as then the streams run inwards, which might deceive you, and the later it is in February, the stronger they draw inward, coming to Cochijn between the 15. and 20. of March, you may well get from thence to Goa, although the Voyage is some thing doubtful, but being past the twenty of March, I would not counsel you to do it for that of late many years together, there hath been upon the coast of India (in April and May) divers blustering storms of cross winds, blowing towards the coast, with dark and cloudy skies, which would bring you in great danger, therefore against that time it is best to choose a good Haven, nevertheless, God can send fair weather & winds when it pleaseth him. To put into the Haven of the fortress of Barcelor, in the coast of Malabar aforesaid, you must understand that when you see a round Hovel upon the end of the hill of Batecola, towards the Northeast, and North-east and by East, than you are right against the fortress of Barcelor & may put in at 7. fathom, so you have the fortress East, and half a strick to East and by North from you, and you shall see all the Cliffs lying along the coast, to the islands, as Ilhas de Saint Maria, which are altogether stony Cliffs, but they stand close to the land. The 19 Chapter. A description of all the Havens, places, coasts, and Sands upon the East and South side of the islands Seylon, with their heights, courses, stretchings, & situations, with the course from thence to the fortress of Columbo holden by the Portugese's. FIrst I will begin with Trinquanamale, which lieth under nine degrees, upon the East side of the Island Seylon, eight miles from thence southward lieth a small river, and before you come at it, putting from Trinquanamale, there are some islands that with Birds filings look white, and in the mouth of the river aforesaid lie two small islands, full of trees, from Trinquanamale to this river the course is North and South, and North and by East, and South and by West, and running along the coast towards this river, than you shall leave the islands aforesaid on the land side, sailing without them, for that between them and the land are many stones and Cliffs, this river and Trinquanamale lie distant from each other eight or nine miles at the furthest. From the said river (with the islands in the entry thereof) to the river of Mataqualou are 12. miles, and lieth under the height of seven degrees and 1/●. The course from the one to the other is Northwest, and Southeast being past this river, coming between the islands & the mouth thereof, you may go as near the shore as you will, for it is without danger, & within a great shot of the land it is 20. fathom deep. From Mataqualou, about five or six miles, the course is North and South till you come to the point or hook, and from this point five or six miles further you run along the coast North and South, and North and by East, and South and by West, further forward towards the first Sand about five or six miles, Northward, there standeth a wood of Palm trees, and coming right over against it, the coast runneth North Northeast, and South south-west, and somewhat North and by East, and South and by West, from those five miles to the first sand, the course is North East and south-west, and North-east and by East, and South-west and by West, and before you come within four or five miles of these Sands, you shall see some Hovels and hillocks of red Earth, along the Sea side, & inward to the land there appeareth certain high hills, whereof one of them lying most Northward hath a Hovel striking out of the top thereof, which seemeth to be a block house, being of red Earth. You may pass between the first Sand and the land at seven or eight Fathom deep, always keeping as far from the land as from the Sand, for they are a good mile distant, and running about by the Sea, you shall find Sandie ground round about it, this Sand lieth under 6. degrees, and from this first Sand about 6. or 7. miles southward, there is yet an other Sand, and the course from this one to the other is east, North-east and West south-west, along the coast, this second Sand lieth scarce under 6. degrees, between the which and the Firm land are 12 and 13. Fathom deep, all good ground, and from the last Sand to a Créeke called A●alla the coast runneth East and West, and East and by North, and West and by South, 4. or 5. miles further forward from this Créeke, there lieth an other Créeke called Hulpulam from whence to Tanadare are about 7 miles. Tanadare is a point of the land, whereon there standeth a wood of Palm trees, and when you are right over against it, you shall see a white Pagode (that is a Temple of the Indian Idols) and on the North side of this Pagode, stand certain Hovels, of white and red Earth, and passing before it, you shall not go to close to the shore, for there about are certain Sands, and being past this point, then go presently at 20. Fathom deep, for it is all good and clear ground, and if it should be calm there you may Anchor. From Tana dare to Belliguon are about six miles, Belliguon is a very great creak, on the South side whereof are certain Hovels of red Earth, that stand within the creak, for that you cannot see them, before you have fully discovered the creak, and on the North side it hath two islands, lying close by the land, & on the South side of those islands along, there lieth a Riffe, or Sand. From Belliguon to Gualle are five miles, all this way from the one to the other, the land is altogether close and full of trees, along the Sea side, about half a mile from Belliguon to Gualle, there lieth a stony Island, close by the land, and an other on the South side of Gualle, and making towards it, you shall see a high flat land full of trees, and an even wilderness, and on the North side of the bay, there standeth a great wood of Palm trees, upon the Sea coast, and within the Haven you shall see a white house, which is a small Chapel of the Virgin Marie, passing from Belliguon to Gualle (and coming right against this point) on the South side towards the Bay, you must put to Seaward thereby to shun a Sand whereon you shall see the Sea break, and to Anchor you shall run North & North Northwest, in such manner that you may always see certain Cliffs (that lie on the North side) and inwards from the Bay, you shall see the Palm trees, which will be upon the south side towards Belliguon, which lay hidden by the point, there you shall find 14. and 15. fathom water, and running till you come to 13. fathom, & finding sandy ground, you may Anchor, for to Seaward it is altogether stones. From Tanadare to this Haven of Gualle, (which are twelve miles) the course is Northwest, and Southeast, and Northwest and by West, and southeast and by East, this Haven of Gualle lieth under 5. degrees and 1/●. from thence passing along the coast, you sail about the Portugal's Fort called Columbo, this course I have already sufficiently declared, in the Navigation from Malacca to India, therefore it is needless here to be rehearsed. The 20. Chapter. The righr course from Malacca to Macau in China, with the stretchings of the coasts. DEparting from Malacca, to the straits of Sincapura, and so to China, you must set your course to the islands called Ilha grand, lying three miles from the Haven of Malacca, passing (for more security) without about the islands: from those islands to the river called Muar, are three miles, which hath for a mark a Hovel full of trees, on the south east side, without any other high land thereabouts. From the river of Muar to the river called Rio Fermoso, you run along the coast Northwest and southeast, and Northwest and by West, and southeast and by East, the course is nine miles, this river of Fermoso is great and fair, having in the entry 6. and 7. Fathom deep, and also within, you enter into it by the foot of a high hill, on the South southeast side, and it lieth on the South side of Malacca, it hath certain banks, sticking out into the Sea (from the point lying North east, which is a flat & plain country) which you must shun. From this Rio Fermoso to the Island Pulo Picon, the coast runneth the same course, southeast and by East, and the Island Pulo Picon lieth half a mile from the coast, having three islands by it, two on the Sea side, and one upon the land side, but you must not pass between it and the land, for there are many Sands, it is distant seven miles: southeastward towards the Sea from Pulo Picon, there lieth a great and a very high Island, with many islands about it, called Pulo Carimon, along by the West side of the same Island, towards the strait of Sabon, which is the way to Sunda, and the Island of java, the navigation and course whereof I will in an other place set down, therefore for this time it shall not be touched, and will proceed to our matter aforesaid. From this Island of Pulo Picon, to a point of land that stretcheth out, called Taniamburo, you run East ward by the coast, being about three miles, this point maketh a hook, and from thence forward the coast turneth inward like an arm, running from thence right southward, about a mile from this point lieth a river, and a little mile further forward there is an other river, with a great mouth, where there lieth an Island, called old Sincapura, being deep and fair ground, this river issueth out again in the Haven of jantana, where Antonio melo by chance did once enter with a ship of eight hundredth Bhares great (each Bhar weighing three Quintals and a half Portugal weight) & came out again at the river of jantana, from this river the land runneth down towards the South (as I said before) which maketh a hook, where the mouth or entry of the first strait (that you must pass through) beginneth. The land on the North side of this entry is higher than the South, which is low and flat, having a Hovel of trees, striking out about all the rest, there is the end or furthest point of that land, for that going Eastward on, than you find islands and stony Cliffs, which first reach southward, and then again come Eastward out, making the form of an arm, from the said point of Taniamburo, to the mouth or entry of this strait, the course is 5. mile's East & West, at 7. and 8. fathom deep. He that will pass through Sincapura to China (passing by Pulo Picon in the beginning of the month of july) he must go near to the side of the great Island Carymon, because the winds of the Monson of java (which are at the time) do always blow from the south side of Sumatra, likewise when you keep by the side of Carimon (and being past it) you presently have the mouth or entry of the strait open unto you, with the marks aforesaid, in this way you find many depths, & passing along by Taniamburo, them the land of the entry to the straights showeth as if the one ran through the other, which is a common and certain mark, but hold you to loofeward, the better to enter at your pleasure. This first strait at the entry hath two riffs, on each side one, which come from the point or hook of the land, the land on the south side (from the entry thereof) is altogether islands reaching a whole line eastward, which make the strait, & to enter therein you must keep nearer the south side then the other, & at your first entry you shall find 12.10. & 9 fathom deep, and being so far in (that the land on the South side (which are islands) make but one point, then on the other side before you, you shall see a hook or point, whereon there standeth a small red Hovel, which when you see, than you shall turn from the right hand towards that small Hovel, because it is the first Island, which you then have past & from that Island forward, there beginneth an other Island, between these two islands lieth a Riffe, or Sand, which with a low water is part uncovered, & reacheth into the middle of the channel, where you must run with the Lead continually in your hand, which will show you where you are, & coming to the point aforesaid of the small Hovel, then put to the land on the right side, which is islands (as I said before) for it hath only between the Island aforesaid, the said Riffe, and then you shall run Eastward, about half a mile with the said depth of 8. and 9 Fathom, & from thence forward, the row of islands (whereby you sail) reach South Eastward, and presently somewhat further, on the right hand of the same Island, you shall see a round Island, running a little out from the other, which will be upon your right hand, by the which you shall pass along, with good watch & there you shall find 8. and 10. fathom deep, muddy ground. The land on the left hand which is the North side, is Creeks and open ground, and hath a great creak which turneth towards the South, on the which side lieth an other round Island that is on the same side from you, you shall keep from this North side (which is nothing but Creeks) for they are all full of riffs and shallows, running as I said before, along by the islands on the right hand, & coming by the aforesaid round Island, on the right hand, at the end of the row of islands whereby you pass, you shall see a small flat Island, with afew trees, having a white sandystrand, which lieth east and west, with the mouth of the strait of Sincapura, which you shall make towards, & when you begin to come near it, than the strait beginneth to open & discover itself, you may sail near it and wind about like a bow, so to avoid the riffs & shallows of the North side, as also not to fall towards the south side of the mouth of the strait, with the ride that runneth there, for you have many depths and foul ground, you must always hold on the North side, where there is a sandy strand, of the length of the shot of a great piece, at the end thereof making the form of a sandy Bay where you find fresh water, & as far as that strand runneth it is all along fair ground, to Anchor in if need be, and coming to this strand you have the stream that driveth you along by the land towards the mouth of the strait, which you have not, passing further from then● for then they drive you towards the deep and foul ground, lying on the South side thereof, as aforesaid, & once again I advise you, not to pass (from the end of the strand) to the north side for it is altogether riffs and shallows, as aforesaid. The mouth or entry of this strait, entereth between two high hills, being as broad as a man may cast a stone, and reacheth Eastward, & is in length about the shot of a great piece, the channel of this strait hath in length 4. fathom and ½. deep, in the entry at the foot of the hill on the North side there lieth a stone cliff, which showeth like a Pillar, this is commonly called of all nations that pass by it, the Varella of China, & on the South side, a good way from the mouth thereof▪ it maketh a creek, in the middle whereof lieth a Cliff under water from the which there runneth a bank towards the middle of the channel somewhat further on the same side, the length of a small shot, it hath an opening which runneth through on the other side into the Sea, making an Island, this opening is shallow all over, serving only for small Foists to pass through, in the middle of this Créeke where this opening is, lieth a Cliff, or stony place two fathom under water, which stony place cometh so far without the Créeke, as the point of the land reacheth, and somewhat more towards the middle of the channel, being past this Creek, the land hath a hook of a hovel falling downward, where the strait endeth, & in passing about this, there is a round Hovel by the which you have deep and fair ground, & when you have passed about it, the land from thence reacheth southeast, on the North side of this strait from the beginning to the end, there are three Créeks, whereof the two first are small, & the third great, it is situate right over against the hook or point of the red Hovel, where the strait endeth, this third creak hath a stony bank, which at a low water after a spring tide is uncovered, & reacheth from the one point to the other, you must be careful not to fall upon it, & all that which lieth on the North side, and without the Créeke all over the channel from the one point to the other is fair ground, & without danger. In the issuing of the strait, being without it you have two riffs, whereof the one lieth right over against the issuing of the strait, about the shot of a great piece towards the East coming from the land on the north side, & stretching southward, the other lieth in the South the shot of a great piece from the issuing of the land of the strait, reaching Eastward so that they make a cross one through the other, and between those two riffs the channel runneth and with the ebb of a spring tied you may see them, the channel that runneth between them both hath scarce 4. fathom deep, the ground within the channel is muddy & without sand. This I have particularly noted unto you, for their instructions that hereafter shall pass through that way, for that the descriptions of the Navigation or course thereof, heretofore written & set down are very short, and obscure, for such as have not passed through that way, whereby many ships have run on ground, stricken & passed many dangers, & some cast away, but returning to our matter, and following the course aforesaid, when you are as far as the mouth of the entry of the strait, than you shall pass right through the middle of the way somewhat towards the North side, because of the sands aforesaid, that lie within the straits, always with your Lead in your hand, looking round about you, for that at the shalowest place in the middle of the channel, it is 4. fathom and ½. also because it is so narrow that you can hardly cast out your Lead, me thinketh it is your surest way, upon each Sand to set a Scute, or other mark, that may serve you for Beakens, so to avoid them, and going a little further by the creak, which hath the opening that cometh out of the other side of the Sea, where the Cliff lieth two fathom under the water, then keep presently towards the hovel, on the right hand, that maketh the point of the creak aforesaid, where also running along by your Compass, as before by the land on the left hand, somewhat nearer to it, than on the other side, till you be out of the strait▪ always taking heed of the land and creak lying on the North side, right against this Hovel, for it is full of stones and Cliffs, as I said before, likewise you must shun the east side, right against the issuing of the strait, for that the shot of a great piece from thence, it is altogether cliffs, as aforesaid, & when you are out of the strait, & desire to Anchor, then make towards the South side along by the land, that you may get out of the stream, you must Anchor at 6. fathom, for if you stay in the stream of the strait, you may chance to lose an anchor by the drawing and shaking of the ship, or that you should drive and run upon the sand: at this road you are right over against a strand, where you find fresh water when need requireth, & being out of the strait, in manner as aforesaid, you shall take your course along by the land, upon the right hand, always casting out the lead, and not putting lower than scarce 4 fathom, neither to the land, nor towards the sea, and when you are passed half way to the strand coming out of the strait, you shall have no more but full 4. fathom deep, and being past this first strand with a hovel and cliffs, that stand at the end thereof, and a sandy bay lying against the hovel, being half way from the other hovel, which standeth on the end of the aforesaid sandy bay, behind the which, that opening which is in the strait, cometh out again: then hold your course eastward, at 4. fathom, not turning to the one nor the other side, for you should presently find both drougthes & sands: the channel is muddy ground, and you must still have the Lead in your hand, until you find other depth, which will not continue long, and for more security it is best to run before with a scute to try the channel, for it will show you both the channels, when you are at 12. or 15. fathom: them beware of the south side, until you be above a mile beyond the strait, for from 15. you shall come to 10. fathom, & from thence to dry land, for it is all riffs & sand: this strait hath 6. islands lying at the end of the land of jantana, which is the North side, and you run along east & west, it is in distance about 8 miles, but you must not pass between it & the land: the sea by it about half a mile Southward is all fair & good ground, at 15. fathom sandy ground: in the middle of this way from the strait, to the islands, or little more or less, lieth the river of jantana, which hath a great mouth, the entry thereof being along the land on the east side, where great ships have many times entered, & on the West side, where there standeth a hovel of red earth: it hath a Bank of hard sand over the mouth of the river, reaching about half a mile into the sea, upon the which many ships have fallen, wherefore take heed of it: from the point of the Island abovesaid, lying at the end of the land of jantana, there runneth a riff eastnortheast into the sea, well 2. great miles, and when it is calm wether you cannot see the water break upon it, only that it hath a certain white skin over it, which is presently seen and discerned: and when it is rough wether, than the water breaketh all over: between this riff and the Island runneth a great Channel, all stony ground, and the shallowest place that I found therein, was 5. fathom, & ½, and then to 7. fathom & 1/●, and then again I found 6. or 8. fathom & ½, and is in breadth about the shot of a great piece, right over, if you will pass this Channel, you must run half a mile of from the Island, & come no nearer to it, for if you should you would run on ground: it were good that great ships should not pass through it, unless they were compelled thereunto, as it happened to Francisco Dagmar, that there ran on ground, and was in danger to have cast away his ship, because he ran to near the riffs, and that the wind scanted: two miles from these Islands, Southsoutheast, lieth Pedra Branca, (that is White stone) which is an Island of white stone, rocks and cliffs, and hard by it there are other rocks and cliffs, on the South side thereof, on the which side likewise lieth the Island of Binton, which is very long: in the middle whereof there is a high hovel, whereupon there is deep ground, but not good to anchor for such as come from China: round about Pedra Branca, and close by it, there are 6. fathom deep, good ground, but you must take heed of the cliffs and riffs lying by it. I have already told you, that in passing through the strait (when you are over the sands, at 15 fathom, in manner as aforesaid) you must sail Eastward, towards the Islands, which you shall presently see, as soon as you are passed the River of jantana: and when you begin to come near them: them you shall keep towards Pedra Branca, and look that you keep half a mile from it taking heed you come not near the side of the Islands, for two causes, the one because the winds at that time, when you sail to China, do always blow off from the side of Binton, which is the Monson that cometh out of the South south-west, and if the wind should scant, and fall into the Southeast, as often times in those countries it happeneth, being on the side of the Islands, you could not pass by the riffs, whereby you should be compelled to pass through the channel that runneth between Pedra Branca, and the Islands, or else you should spend so much time in staying there, and that the Monson (that is the time of your voyage) to China would be spent: the other is, that if you chance to be there with a slow wind and tide, or with few sails spread, than the streams would drive you upon the riffs, before you could avoid them, as it happened to the ship of Don Diego de Meneses, whose Pilot was Go●●alo Vie●a, who by the water was driven upon 10. fathom, where he ankered, and then after he came to 7. fathom, where he spent 3 days by ankering to get out again: for the which 2 causes I advise you to keep on the side of Pedra Branca, or the white cliffs aforesaid. Fron Pedra Branca to the Island Pulo T●nge that run north & south, & north & by east & south and by west the course is 13. miles: this Island is high and round, having in the middle a high sharp hill full of trees: it lieth by the coast of the firm land, & between it & the firm land, there is good sailing, but it is not Oorbaer: this Island lieth with Pulo Timon north-east & south-west and are distant about 7. miles to sail to Pulo Tinge, you shall take your course from Pedra Branca, a great mile Eastward, and from thence North and north and by East, always with the lead in your hand till you be past the riffs, & being at 14 fathom, being as you guess in that country, you shall presently keep off from it, into the sea, being before it, & you need not fear any thing, but that you see before your eyes: in this course to Pulo Tinge, in the sight of the Island, there lieth 4 or 5 islands, which shall lie on the land side from you, and when you are hard by Pulo Tinge, than you shall presently see Pulo Timon: the Island of Pulo Timon is great & high, and on the side whereunto you sail, are two ears of land which are full of great high trees to make small masts & anchors: because in those countries they use such kind of wooden anchors, and it is commonly covered with mists & clouds, and hath all over a clean muddy ground: therein are 2 places, where you find good fresh water, one being on the side of the land, in the middle of a long strand, a little inward to the land, where you find a good reed, but when you come early thereunto, as in the month of june and the beginning of july, it is dangerous to anchor there, because of the west wind which at that time bloweth with great force in those countries, therefore I think it better to run to the other place, where you likewise find fresh water, on the East side towards the sea, running right upon the face of the Island, & along by the East side, and being past a certain hovel, that maketh a hook, you shall find a sandy Bay, where you must enter into the land, and when the point or hook lieth southeast, you may anchor, where you may lie for the Momson, and there you shall have 20 fathom deep: there is likewise great fishing for excellent good fish, and in the same bay, there lieth the place where you take in fresh water which runneth into the sea, also on that side you have much better wood, & nearer to fetch, & there you lie safe from west winds, on that side of the land you have certain islands along the coast, & from the north point of this Island Pulo Timon, about the shot of a great piece, there lieth an other Island, and by the South point an other, & likewise about 3 mile's south eastward, there lieth 3 other islands, whereof the one is great & round the other 2 being somewhat smaller, & are called Pulo Laor: the Island of Pulo Timon lieth under 2 degr. & ⅔ on the north side of the Equinoctial, & 12 mile's northwest ward stron it, lieth the river Pan, in the firm land, over against the which about 2 miles to seaward, there lieth a small Island, having an even round tree in the middle: & half a mile from it, it is 6 fathom deep ground. Fron Pulo Timon to Pulo Condor the course is North north-east & Westsouthwest 115 miles, Pulo Condor lieth under 8 degr. & ⅔, it is a great Island, with high hills, having close by it 5 or 6 islands, and on the north-east side it hath a small Island or stony cliff, which showeth far off like a ship under sail: it is over all good ground at 10 or 12 fathom deep, and on the Northwest side it hath a place of fresh water, it lieth north and south, with the river of Camboia, (which is called the haven of Malaios) 12. miles distant, but you are not sure to have fresh water there, for when it is late in the year you have there the winds at north and northwest, which some thunder, whereby you may not stay with one sail only, for that being without sails, it would strike you to ground, and cast your ship away, when it is early in the year, them you have East winds. From Pulo Timon to Pulo Condor thou shall always find ground at 35 & 38 fathom, and to hold your right course to Pulo Condor, you shall sail north north-east, not accounting any winding of the compass, for if thou should do so, you should run on the south side, to seaward, and run by without seeing it, which is an evil course, for that the winds always in this course do blow from the side of the land: and if it chance that before you see the Island Pulo Condor, you find the water thick, troubled & foul then cast out your lead, & you shall find 18 or 19 fathom water, with a soft muddy ground, & so run half a strike in that course, till you come to 17 fathom, and being there, then rune north-east, and being at 1/1 6 fathom, before you see the Island, them hold your course East & East and by north, always at 16 fathom deep, whereby you shall land on the south side of the Island, where you must take heed of 2 islands lying 7 miles on the West side of Pulo Condor, full of bushes, a mile or thereabouts distant from each other, and if it be possible, you shall not run between them: for that without them and close by, you find good ground. I have lain there at anchor, with a calm, about a mile from the Island, which lieth nearest the land: there the streams run strong with the tide Northeast and Southwest. From this Island Pulo Condor to the Island Pulo Secir, the course is Northeast and Southwest, & north-east, and by east, and South-west & by West, 45 miles. This Island is low and long land, reaching North and south, and on the North point it hath a stony Island, lying half a mile from the land: you may pass between it and the Island, on the East side it hath a Sandie Bay, where once a junco, (that is to say, an Indian or Chinish great ship) was laid on the shore to be new dressed, belonging to a Rover of Patane, (a country lying upon the coast on the East side of Malacca, towards the kingdom of Zion) I have passed within half a mile to seaward by this sandy bay, it is all good ground: this Island is distant from the coast of Camboia or Champa nine miles: if you put to seaward from Pulo Condor, without seeing it under 8. degrees, you shall find 25. and 26. fathom deep, with black muddy ground, & much of the skin or Sasbeene driving upon the water, and being 12. miles past it, at the height of eight degrees, and ½ than you shall see certain sea Snakes swimming in the water, at 28. and thirty fathom deep, and ten miles further much of the Herb called Sargosso under the water at the same depth, which depth you shall find to be 9 degrees, & ●. to this place you shall hold your course North-east, for we could run no higher because the West wind bloweth very stiff, but from thence run southeast towards Pulo Cain, thinking to get the coast of Champa, & when you come within two miles of the Islands, (lying nine miles Southward from Pulo Secir, you shall find muddy thick water, & coming by this Island you shall find no ground: those two Islands aforesaid were by the Chinars called Tomsitom, three miles distant from each other, you run along East Southeast, and West Northwest: the East Island is high and round, on the sea side being calm, in the upper part thereof it hath the fashion of a Cap, such as the Mandorijus (which are the Lords of China) do wear: half a mile from it lieth a Cliff like an Island, and hath on the West side reddish cliffs, and on the north side an other Island: round about all these Islands and cliffs there is no ground. I set this down for that I have sailed all this country and noted the way, as also all whatsoever I have declared in this discourse: we took this course aforesaid for want of masts, for we durst not bear our seals because of the stiff West winds, and if any man chance to fall in the like need and troubles, let him not hope to find the coast on the board side: from those islands you shall hold your course northerly, to discover Pulo Secir, and from thence to the coast of Champa, for you must know that the streams (from Pulo Condor and from the coast of Champa to Pulo Secir and those Islands) run Eastward, by which means you run presently to the coast, as hereafter I will show: and as you pass by these Islands of Pulo Secir Northwestwarde, th●n the stream runneth to the coast of Champa, which will drive you overthwart, from the aforesaid Islands of Pulo Secir, there are no sands nor shallows, as many men suppose, the worst you find, is that there is no ground, these islands lie 18 miles distant from the coast: from Pulo Condor you shall presently run to the coast of Champa, and if you pass by it on the south side, then hold your course half a strike North north-east, till you be in sight of the coast, and half way in this course you shall find eight and twenty fathom deep, and if you pass by it on the North side, you must run North-east, and North-east and by North, and not higher to loofewarde, to shun the drougthes, whereon Mathias de Brito was cast away: and if in the night time you pass by any land, than cast out your lead, and finding fifteen fathom water, then put no nearer to the land, but presently run East Northeast, as the coast lieth, for the sands in those countries lieth at 13. fathom along the coast, 4. mile from it. The coast of Champa along the sea side is low land and great sandy strands: you run along by them East north east, and West Southwest to a point lying under 10. degrees and ●. and before you come within two or three miles thereof, the sandy strand and high way endeth, for this point is a very high land, reaching southward in, so that it maketh a Cape: from thence forward it is altogether very high land to Varella, with great hills: within this point towards the West Southwest lieth a creak, and two miles on this side before you come at it. There lieth close by the land a small, long, and low Island, all of hard stony cliffs and rocks, which a far off show like a town: from this Island to Pulo Secir, there runneth a bank of 10. and 12. fathom deep: upon the aforesaid coast of sandy strands, 15. miles before you come to the point aforesaid, there is a river called Sidraon, where you may enter with ships of SIXPENCES. Barhes on this river lieth the fairest and best town in all the kingdom of Champa: it hath for a mark a long hovel with 2. tops: I have passed within the shot of a great piece near to the stony Island aforesaid, and found 8. fathom deep, altogether even stony ground, with much of the herb Sargaslo, whereby I could hardly make the lead to sink down, and along by the aforesaid high point or hook there is 20. fathom deep. When you are by the coast of Champa, than you shall run East Northeast: within two or three miles at the furthest it is altogether fair and good anchor ground, to the point or hook aforesaid, you shall leave the Island of stones on the land side, not passing between it and the land: from this point to another point are 12. miles, & you run Northeast, and from this second point yet 12 miles further there is another point: this course is run half a strike to the North Northeast: between this second and third point there lieth two creeks, the first whereof is the haven where you lad black wood, which is called De●raon: from this third point to the Varella the coast runneth North, and seven miles before you come to the Varella there is a creak where there lieth a town, and two miles further there is an Island of stony cliffs close to the land, which a far off showeth like a man that fisheth or angleth, whereby the Portugal's call it Opescador, or the fisher, and if you desire to run to the Varella, (being past the Island) you shall presently be near the land, where you have a great strand with fair ground. This Varella is a high hill reaching into the sea, and above on the top it hath a very high stony rock like a tower or pillar, which may be seen far off, therefore it is by the Portugal's called Varella, (that is, a Cape, Back or mark) at the foot of this hill on the South side it hath a very great creak reaching northward in, all of muddy ground, & 15. fathom deep, you cannot see it far off, because the one land runneth through the other, but as you pass by the strand aforesaid, and begin to come near the Varella, than the creak beginneth to open, which hath a very fair entry, and within hath two running streams of very good fresh water, he that cometh thither with a ship by my advise shall not put in there, because he shall have much labour and trouble to bring the ship out again, for there the wind is scant: you may well anchor without at the entry or mouth thereof as I have done, or you may seek for the other places where fresh water is to be had, that stand on the other side of the hill, towards the North, at the foot thereof where the high land that reacheth into the sea endeth, where you begin to find a very great strand: to get this water you must go very near to the point of this hill, and as you run along towards it, when you compass it about you shall see a small sandy bay, with the aforesaid great strand and place of watering, where you may anchor when you will, for it hath good anchor ground, but it hath a great inconvenience, and mischief, which is, that you lie compassed about by the country people that are great enemies to the Portugal's, and sea Rovers, therefore you must keep good watch, with great care when you, fetch fresh water, as well within as without because the country people use to over run and spoil men on the sudden: this Varella lieth under 13. degrees, this land of Varella is a hook, and from thence to Pulo Cutuo the course is North, and north and by West, for the space of 48. miles, & from thence the land beginneth to be a great deal lower, then that you have past, having in many places sandy strands, where men may anchor: ten miles from Varella forward, a mile from the land there lieth a long flat Island called Pulo Cambir, and between this Island and the land are 12. fathom deep sandy ground, & in the middle of the Island on the land side, there is a small sandy bay that hath fresh water, where if need be you may anchor, for it is good ground, and in the middle of the channel between the Island and the land it is altogether fair being a small mile in length: from this Island about twelve miles Northward, the land maketh a point, and from thence to the Island there is a great creak, and inward to the Northwest where the high land endeth, (which from this point inward runneth to the West) it is an open or broken low land where you find a river of three fathom deep, within the haven having sandy ground, with a great mouth or entry, and within it hath a Well of 13. fathom deep: this river runneth further into the land, & 4. or 5. miles inward from the entry or mouth there lieth a great village, where you may have great store of victuals and other necessaries: in the mouth of this river on the east side there standeth a high hovel, and on the West side a low sandy strand, you must enter right forth in the middle, and although it is very wide, yet being within you must make yourself sure which anchors & cables, specially from the west side, for that if it were early in the year you shall there find stiff West winds, which would drive you on the other side of the River: in this River is much fish: also in the land there is much wild flesh, with Swine, Tigers, Rhinoceros, and such like beasts: the country people were of good nature, but we have given them cause of suspicion by our bad dealing with them: five miles further forward from this River along the coast there are two islands with certain cliffs about half a mile from the land, and you may pass between them and the land, twelve miles from these Islands, there lieth other Islands by the land, where there are some places of round sand with a sandy strande, and there is a small River, where you have much Cat (that is, Ryce unstamped in the husks as it growgroweth, and is twelve miles from Pulo Caton, wherewith many have deceived themselves that run cross over, when they saw it and tan on ground, Pulo Caton is a long Island, with two high hills at the end thereof, and in the middle low, so that far of it seemeth to be two Islands, it hath a flat and even ground of bushes, stretching northwest, and southeast, on the southeast side it hath a Riffe, where the water breaketh forth running the shot of a great piece further into the Sea, on the land side it hath fresh water, and lieth distant from the coast 2. miles, and ●/2, the channel between both hath thirty, and thirty five fathom deep, with good ground, right over against this Island lieth a river, with a great mouth or entry, being within the Haven 5. or 6. fathom deep, it is very well inhabited, and built with houses, in this Haven Gomes Barretto entered with his ship, this Island lieth under 15. degrees and ⅔, and North Northwest, a mile and a half from it, there lieth another small low Island, and you may pass between them both, North, Northwest 14. miles along the coast lieth the Island of Champello, full under 16. degrees and ⅔, this Island Champello is great and high, having upon it certain tops or heads sticking out, it lieth north northwest, and south southeast, it hath two high hills with a valley in the middle, that in the southeast being much higher than the other, it hath likewise many trees, on the Northwest side it hath a very high Island, with two small Islands lying close at the foot thereof, on the West side it hath much and very good fresh water, and is distant from the Coast about two miles, it is a very low land along the sea strand, and West Northwest from thence is the River of Coaynon lying two fathom deep, in the Haven it is sandy ground, where much traffic is used, but the people are not much to be trusted, from this Island of Champello Northwest, for two or three miles it is full of trees, & two miles further, the Coast maketh a great thick point full of trees, and three miles beyond this point, lieth a great creek, which in the entry hath an Island for a defence or closure, and is all clear ground, where you have much victuals and Merchandises that come out of the country by the River of Sinoha, this creek was called the Enseada, or créeke of Saint Don jorgie, it hath much wood, & very good to make ships of, five miles from it along the Ceased lieth the river of Sinoha, which hath in the Haven 14. span of water, all sandy ground, in this Haven is the whole handling and traffic of the goods that come from Cauchinchina and thither, and to Champello you run Northwest. This Island of Champello hath a good road, and safe harbour, but only when it bloweth out of the west and south-west, and although the wind cometh from the land, notwithstanding it troubleth you much by reason of the lownes of the land: you must understand that ten miles before you come to Varrella 13. miles within the sea, there beginneth certain Sands that are very dangerous, which reach as the land doth till you be under 17. degrees, and run nearer to the north-east, at the end whereof, in the way to China there lieth 8. Islands, three great, & five small, all full of trees and sandy strands, but without fresh water between them, & round about it is altogether flat and foul way, so that as soon as you let fall the anchor, the cable is presently fretted in pieces, between these Islands there is 4. fathom deep. This information was given me by certain people of Sian that lost their junco or ship in that place by reason of a calm, because they ankered, and all their cables broke from the ground, & they saved themselves in the boat, & run through all those Islands to find fresh water, and could see none: you run from the hook or point of those sands, to Pulo Caton Northeast, and South-west, and North-east and by east, and south-west and by west, for they lie like a bow: therefore trust not the old description of this Navigation, that saith they have channels from thence to Pulo Caton, running overthwart it is thirty miles, but returning again to the course from Varella to Pulo Caton, when you are as far as where the coast stretcheth Northward, than your course shall be two miles off from the land till you come to Pulo Caton: for that if you come thither early in the year, you have the west winds so strong, that if you should be far from the coast, they would carry you by force upon the sands, without any remedy, as it happened to the ship called the Santa Crus, you shall not pass above two or three miles at the furthest to seaward from Pulo Caton, and if you chance to be on the side of the land, you may likewise pass through by the Channel that runneth between the Firm land and the Island, which is two mile and a half broad, all fair and good ground (as I said before.) Pulo Caton lieth with the south point of the Island Aynon North and South, and North & by east, and South and by West, somewhat more than 50. mile. This south point of Aynon lieth scarce under 18. degrees, and ½, & reacheth from the point aforesaid, southwestward 12. or 13. miles, and from the East side lieth the way from China, which you run Northeast, and north east, and by north to 19 degrees, and ½, and on the side of the Firm land the Island compasseth about to the point or end of 19 degrees, and ½, from the North-east side in such manner, that the Island is in form four square, & the channel between it and the Firm land, is in the narrowest part 6. miles, where there lieth a haven called Anchio, having certain sands between them, yet with a channel wherein great ships may pass, seven miles eastward. From Anchion lieth a creek with good harbour, and a mile further about three miles distant from the land, there lieth a great Riffe and sands, but returning again to the aforesaid South point of the Island, which is right before a very high land that surpasseth all the rest of the land in the said Island, at the foot thereof on the north side there is a good Haven called Taalhio, at the mouth whereof lieth a small round Island, and from this high land aforesaid, it runneth 12. miles northwestward, and from thence it is altogether low land on the sea side, and inward hills and hovels from the end of the land Aynon, on the north side under 19 degrees and ⅓, to the Island Pulo Gom in the same course of north-east, and north-east, and by north are 8. miles, and lieth 5. mile from the Firm land, it is a high land, in form like a Bell, and on the side of the land it hath a road with a good harbour, wherein the ship Santa Crus lay, from thence you go to the seven Islands, called Pulo Tio in the same course of north-east, and north-east, and by north, being five miles, Pulo Tio are 7. islands great and small, separated one from the other without any Trees, from thence the Coast reacheth North-east, and North-east, and by North, to the Enseada does Ladroins (that is the creak of Rovers,) from Pulo Tio seven miles lieth a Riffe, which reacheth 5. or 6. miles from the land into the sea, and upon the east side thereof about half a mile from it, there is four fathom water flat sandy ground, and a mile further from thence there lieth a great river, whether many ships do sail▪ and put in a little further from this Island lieth another River, wherein I have been, which hath a good harbour against the monsons of China, and with a south-west wind is discovered, and threre also runneth strong streams, the entry thereof is close on the east side along by a point of land, it is fair and good ground, and being about this point of land, you shall run till you come to a sand bay, where you shall anchor, for within, it is shallow and sandy, on the coast between these 2. rivers lieth 2. or 3. islands close by the land, and from these 2. rivers, 6 miles forward lieth the Enseada does Ladroins which is very great, it hath on the west south-west side of the mouth certain stony cliffs, from the which there stretcheth a Riffe towards the sea, whereupon one of the Portugal ships did fall, from the aforesaid second river to this creek about half a mile from the coast, there is 7. or 8. fathom deep fair ground. The land of this creak, on the north north-east side hath a very high hook or point of land passing about this hook for the space of half a mile, (it is shallow but muddy ground,) you go to the Haven of Comhay: whereupon the coast is called the coast of Comhay, thither the ships of Zion or Sian used to come, it is like a creek that is very great, having another point or end of high land, which reacheth North and South, and right over against this haven on the south side lieth the Island of Sauchoin about 5 or 6 miles from it, and is distant from the aforesaid point of Enseada does Ladroins or créek of Rovers, 7. miles southeastward. This Island Sanchoan is great, high, and full of hills, among the which there is a crooked hill with high hovels on the top thereof, like the joints of a man's fingers, when his hand is closed, which is a sure and good mark. This Island hath many trees, great creeks & hays, where in times past men used to traffic: between this Island, and the Firm land lieth 4. or 5. other high islands, without bushes or trees, which lie under one course with the Firm land, and the Island Sanchoan in such sort, that Sanchoan maketh the furthest hook or end outward, and from thence reacheth towards the land, northwest and southeast, so that a far off it seemeth to be all one land, these are the first islands of Canton, which lie under 21. degrees, and 1/●, from thence to Lamon you sail outward about the islands east north-east, and from Sanchoan to the land there runneth 3. channels or passages, which make those islands, through the which you may pass with ships, the best channel is that which runneth along by the Island of Sanchoan (which is the furthest outward to the sea) of 6. and 7. fathom deep, it hath in the entry thereof upon the same Island, a small Island full of bushes, and on the northwest side lieth two great high islands, which make the mouth or entry, and at the entry along by the strand there lieth some small islands and hillocks, before the islands aforesaid towards the land lieth an other Island, making another mouth or entry between this, and the two islands aforesaid, from this Island to the land is the third mouth or entry, through these two entries great ships do pass with the tides, it is altogether soft muddy ground, to know the Island of Sanchoan, besides the marks aforesaid, or to know if those islands lie before or behind, you must remember that Sanchoan maketh a point lying outward, and that from thence you run towards the land northwest and southeast, & from thence further east north east, and west south west, and mark the course with your compass, and you shall presently know whether you be forward or backward, and if you be so far to seaward, that you see the one coast reacheth east north east, and the other northwest, than you are right over against it, by this means I found it out, for I was the first that marked it, and such as know it learned it of me. The course from Pulo Caton towards China is thus, you shall not sail above 2. or 3. mile at the furthest to seaward for the causes afore rehearsed, and being passed then run north northwest, or northwest, until you find an opening between the Island and the Firm land, and as it beginneth to open, then run half a strike north north east, towards the point of the Island Aynon, and passing between the Island Pulo Caton and the Firm land, you shall keep the same course, because the stream in that monson runneth towards the creek of Cauchinchina, and with this course you shall see Aynon being 7. or 8. miles to seaward from thence, and it may be that if you come thither at a spring tide, or with a slack wind, that you will be driven further inward, when you perceive the land then mark your compass, and if the coast reacheth east north-east, then keep that course until you think you to be past it, and if the coast stretch north-east, and north east, and by east, as the Island lieth, then run so, till you may well discern the land, & being 5. or 6. miles from thence, & that from thence you desire to sail to Sanchoan, then run with the same course for half a strike north north-east, whereby you shall see Pulo Tio, & if you be 4. or 5. miles from thence to seaward, then run north-east, & north-east & by north, and if you be but two miles from thence, them run your course for half a strike between north-east, & north-east, & by north, with this course you shall come to the Island of Sanchoan, & shall see the Island called Do Mandoriin, which is a small round and high land, & lieth 5. or 6. miles from the islands, & if you desire to put into the Haven of Macau, then run north east, & east, and by north, running to seaward 5. or 6. miles from Sanchoan, & when you are within 15. or 20. miles of the Islands, than you shall find muddy ground at 25. fathom deep, & when you see the Islands (look well to yourself as I said before) you must go near them, and run along by them: about a mile distant, from Sanchoan to Macau are 18. miles, & there are five channels or passages: the first between the Island Sanchoan, & the Island Vasco de Faria about 5. miles broad. This Island of Vasco de Faria, lieth nearer the land than Sanchoan, & hath a high pointed hill, & on the sea side a high round hovel, being between it and the hill very low land, so that a far off it showeth like two islands, & when you are hard by it, and that you begin to discover the flat land, it showeth like a channel, and not far from it towards the 〈◊〉 it hath two or three small islands. This Island lieth north and south with Sanchoan, a mile from it lieth a small long Island without bushes, which all along the Island hath a crooked rig or back descending at the end, this Island is called Pulo Baby: by this Island, along by the land of Sanchoan lieth a Rock somewhat above the water. I here place all these marks and tokens of this channel, because it should the better be known, to such as have occasion to pass through it, which they may boldly do, & being past the islands, of the Island Vasco de Faria, the first that you then come to see, is in the fourth mouth or entry, which openeth not because an Island lieth right before it, 4. or 5. miles forward lie other Islands along by the Island, (which you shall leave on the West south-west side) all upon a row, and a far off seem to run one through the other, but when you are right over against them, than they lie as I said before, they are five or six in all both great and little: from these islands about two mile's East north-east, there lieth two islands close together, stretching North and South, by these you have others upon the same row towards the land, all in the same strike or course, in the entry hard by those two islands, there lieth a great high and round Island between the aforesaid row of Islands, the islands aforesaid, there is a good hold or opening through the which you have the nearest way to Macau: for the better knowledge whereof, about three or four miles further, (east north east) there are three islands distant from each other, which from the land all in a row do reach into the Sea, whereby they lie further outward than the other which you pass along by, so that they lie right over against you, and when you come to the mouth or entry of Macau, and begin to put into it, it is altogether open (without any Island to be sailed or compassed about) sailing right towards the firm land, which is 8. miles Northward from thence, where the mouth or entry is, whereby you go to Caton, by the Portugal's called A● Orelhas de Lebre (that is the hare's ears.) In this entry it is 8.9. and 10. fathom deep, and if you come thither at the ebb of a spring tide, the stream runneth so strong & stiff, that no wind will serve to get up: therefore it is best to anchor there with all your sails up, until you see it flow running along by the row of islands that lie on the east side, & so inward, shunning a rock lying close by those islands above the water, putting to seaward, for that you cannot pass between it, and the islands with any ship, also you shall find another Cliff upon the west side, being in the middle way, & seeing right before you a small and low Island, lying in the same row of Islands, in the East as you go, than you are by the mouth or entry of the second channel that runneth to Macau. This entry reacheth East and West, and may be about a mile broad, you must make to that small Island, and leaving it upon the North side, you must hold your course between it and the other islands, and so put in, always keeping nearest to the small Island, where the depth will begin to lessen, and much more when you are passed it: for there you have a bank of 28 spans of water of soft muddy ground, the land lying upon the south side of the channel, is four or five islands close one by the other, which reach east and west, and they have on the north side a great and high Island, which runneth to the haven where the Portugese's inhabit, and hath a creek or bay that stretcheth Northward▪ at the mouth of this Haven lieth a great and high Island close by the land on the north side, between which and the Island it is dry and shallow ground, and before you come to this Island, there lieth upon the side of the north Island a Cliff under the water, to seaward towards the middle of the channel: therefore you shall hold off from this north land and put nearer to the south, and when you being to discover the Portugese's town, with the Haven where the ships lie at anchor, them you shall put to the east hook of the entry of this Haven, keeping close to it till you be in, where you shall find four fathom and ½, or 5. fathom deep, shunning the west side, for there it is all over, banks and sands, and along by the point you find muddy ground▪ this point or hook is a high land, and from thence inward, about the shot of a great piece further lieth another point of sand, and from the low land runneth a bank of 18 spans of water, reaching cross over to the other side as far as the first houses, and before you come to it, in the middle of the River there lieth a Riffe: therefore you must hold upon the east side, and run along by it till you anchor, it is good muddy ground at four fathom and ½ deep. The 21. Chapter. The course from the Kingdom of Zion, to China, with the situation of the places. DEparting out of the haven or river of the town of Zion or Sian, you shall hold your course Westward, and coming to it, you shall find a Riffe lying on the north side of the coast Haven called Bancolea two miles from the land, and between it and the land there is a channel of four fathom deep, notwithstanding you must pass without it, as far above it as you can, this haven of Bancosea lieth with the Haven of Zion north-east and south-west, and somewhat north-east and by east, and south-west and by west, and being against the coast, you shall keep along by it for it is all good ground, and when you have passed the Riffe aforesaid. The Coast upon the shore is low land, having inward a small hovel, stretching North and south 4. miles from Bancosea Southward. This low land maketh a point reaching outward, lying under 14. degrees and ½ from thence forward you shall see a great thick land, which seemeth to run inward to the sea: but before you come at it there is a river called Chaon, at the mouth whereof stand certain trees like palm trees, and coming to the aforesaid land, you shall see another great thick land which showeth to lie east, and west inwards to the land, having many sharp rocks, there the land maketh a point or end, which is commonly called the point of Guy, thetherto the land reacheth Southeast, this point of Guy lieth under 12. degrees and ⅔, and between it and the aforesaid thick land that lieth behind you, you shall find 11. and 12. fathom deep with good ground, when you are past or about this point of Guy, than you shall hold your course south southeast for the space of 25. miles, and then you must sail south east, and southeast, and by south, whereby you shall see an Island which a far off showeth like 3. islands, being long & flat, full of trees, & lieth full under 10. degrees, which will be on the east side, all this way you must take care not to fall to leeward, and being by this Island aforesaid, you shall run southeast, and rather hold aloof to the south, then to fall to the west, because of the sharp wind which you commonly find in that part, and in this course you shall see another Island greater than the first, and reacheth East and West being on the top thick and flat land. The West point a great thick hook pointed towards the sea side, & Eastward it descendeth towards a black land, which seemeth to be a close and thick bushy place, lying full under 9 degrees, & ½. This Island lieth with the Island of Pulo Why, southeast & northwest and so you must run 25. miles. Pulo Why are two Islands, whereof the greatest reacheth North and South, having a high hovel on the South side, and on the North side two low hovels▪ with a valley in the middle: thus the West side showeth, but on the south side it seemeth altogether high and round, with a small valley in the middle, making 2. rocks, showing like two men: the other and the smaller Island lieth on the southeast side, somewhat distant from the other, making a channel between both, where you may pass through, for it is fair ground: this small Island on the Southeast side hath a small Island of stony cliffs, from the which there runneth a stony Riffe, which you must avoid, for all the other places are good and fair, being twelve fathom deep: close by the Island, and in the greatest Island on the south West side, there is fresh water with a sandy bay, and when you make towards this Island, coming to it you shall find thereabouts 14. fathom deep with hard ground, and if you find muddy ground, than you are hard by the land: from Pulo Why to the firm land of Camboia are 7. miles: this coast of Camboia is low land full of trees, and along by it, it is banky and muddy ground: it lieth Northwest and southeast to a point which lieth with Pulo Why, East Northeast and West Southwest, stretching likewise the same course of the aforesaid point to the haven of Camboia, which is twelve miles distant: this haven is called Does Malyos, (that is of the Malaquiters, or those of Malacca) lying right over against Pulo Condor, which lieth with this haven or River Northwest and Southeast, and northwest & by North, and southeast and by South, from Pulo Why Northwestwarde there lieth a great River, being three fathom deep within the haven, on the side sandy ground, and in the middle muddy ground: the Chinars that sail from Zion to China pass by the north side of Pulo Why, and when they are right over against it, than they run Eastward to know the hook aforesaid, running the same course to Pulo Condor, which they see upon the North side, when you are right against this point or hook, than you shall find ten fathom deep muddy ground, and somewhat further 13. fathom sandy ground, but you must not run nearer than this 13. fathom towards the land, but rather keep at 14. fathom, for it is surer: & take heed of 2. islands, that lie 6. miles from Pulo Condor, which will be on the South side, and right before you, you shall have the North point of the Island Pulo Condor, lying under 8. degrees, and ⅔. and you run with Pulo Why East & West, and somewhat east and by south, and west and by North, and if you see Pulo Why on the south side, and so it should be on your North side, than you shall run within a mile or half a mile thereof, always taking heed of the aforesaid Riffe of the Islands, ●●king your course Eastward to Pulo Condor, with good regard of the Islands: the Island to the which you shall come on the south point (passing by the South side of Pulo Why, within 3. miles thereof) you shall find 16. fathom deep, and keeping your course to Pulo Condor, at the depth aforesaid you shall pass within half a mile to the south side of the Islands, being 6. miles from Pulo Condor, but rather take the depth (for more security) of scarce seventéen fathom, whereby you shall come on the South side of Pulo Condor, within 3. or 4. miles thereof at the furthest, and when you are in sight of the islands, than you must put to Pulo Condor as you will, leaving the islands on the North side, if you pass on the south side of Pulo Condor to go to the firm land to the cost of Champa, them run North Northeast, and North-east and by north, which will bring you to the sea coast, and to shun the sands whereon Mathias de Brito fell, which lie 4. miles from the land, if you run along the shore at 13▪ fathom, than you come upon those sands, but when you are passed them, all the rest of the course from Champa forwards is farye and good ground, and being in this Country you shall take your course as I have showed you in the description and navigation from Malacca to China: the sands aforesaid lie upon the coast of Champa, run with Pulo Condor North and South, and North and by East, and south and by West, and almost half a strike more. The 22. Chapter. Of the course from the Island Pulo Condor to the haven of Sian. FRom Pulo Condor to Pulo Why, there are about full 20. miles, lying from each other East and West, and somewhat East and by North, and West and by south, and to go to Pulo Why, hold your course right west, not reckoning any abatement for the yielding of the Compass, and being found what more than half way, you shall find a bank of muddy ground, of 8. or 9 fathom deep, and being northward in the stern of the ship, you shall see the trees upon the coast of Camboia which is a very low land, this bank aforesaid being past, it will not be long before you shall see Pulo Why, right over against you, and as soon as you see it you shall make towards it on the north side: you must understand that this land of Camboia maketh a point from whence the bank aforesaid runneth of, from this point to the haven of Sian, you run along the coast north northwest by that which lieth many islands, stretching along by it till you be under 12 and 12. degrees and ½. In this country lie the most and greatest Islands, one by the other, and there make a hook, for the land hath a creek called A Ens●●da de Lian, which runneth a good way inwards and lieth under 12 degrees and ½. the north point of the land of the mouth of this creak lieth under 12 degrees ¾. and the land of this point aforesaid which lieth inwards, reacheth east north-east, and hath many trees, which a sandy strand: from this point to sea ward there lieth 2. high round islands without any trees: you cannot pass between the first Island and the land, for the channel or passage lieth between the first and the second (or the better to be understood) between them both, there is a small channel, but very deep of 60. fathom water, and there runneth a strong stream under the height of the point aforesaid of this creak, little more or less, about half a mile from the land on the inner side, there lieth a very long cliff stretching as the land doth, which at low water may be seen, you run from this point to the haven of Sian, along by the land north and south: the Islands aforesaid are within 10. miles of the haven as you pass along, they are not over great, neither have they any trees nor fresh water, and all along you find good ground till you be within half a mile, and nearer you shall not go, neither run in between them and the land, but let them lie on the east side, coming to Pulo W●, until the tenth of February, there you find much east wind, whereby the west coast lieth like an empty wall, therefore you shall keep on the east side of the aforesaid islands, that lie along by the coast, being sure not to put in between them, keeping this course north northwest, along the shore, as I said before, and coming to the furthest point of the said Island (which is full under 12. deg.) without seeing any more Islands, then be assured that you are within the creak of Lion▪ and being there, you shall presently set your course Northwest, & Northwest and by North, to get out of the creak, lest the stream should drive you inward▪ & with that course you shall come to see the two Islands aforesaid, lying on the north point of the aforesaid creek, & it is in crossing over twelve miles, & as you begin to see the coast on the other side, lying before the creek northward, the Island stretching in that sort as I said before, being past the point of the créeke you shall run thither, & being by it you shall sail without it about half a mile from the shore: these islands end about 10. miles before you come to the haven of Sian, as aforesaid, and the last of them are 4. or 5. small islands, one running through the other along the coast: these islands have no trees▪ & are of red earth, and coming to the end of these islands, then put to the shore, until the Islands be right south from you, then take your course right North, wherewith you shall see the haven of Sian, which lieth from these islands 10. miles distant. The haven of Sian lieth in a low land full of trees, & without any sandy strands, but altogether of soft muddy ground & dirt, & hath likewise a bank of muddy ground, reaching two miles and a half southward: when you enter first upon this bank it is hard muddy ground: you cannot enter into this haven with any great ships but with a spring tide: and although you should fall upon this muddy ground, there is no danger, for you must come upon dry land to put out, or in with the tides, coming from the Islands aforesaid to the haven of Sian, in manner as I said before, sailing northward, & as they lie southward from you, being in the night time, you may boldly anchor upon the muddy ground, for the next morning you shall find yourself right over against the haven, so that you shall plainly see it, for it is the mouth or entry of a great river, & you shall sail therein passing over muddy ground, & all with the tides and south winds, which will bring you upwards at pleasure. The 23. Chapter. Of the course from the haven of Camboia to the Island of Pulo Timon, & Pedra Branq●●. DEparting from the point of the haven of Camboia, & being about half a mile or thereabouts in the sea, you shall hold your course South-west, whereby you shall see two Islands lying between Pulo Co●dor and Pulo Why, from the which you shall sail about half a mile still running south-west, not once putting Southward, because of the strong streams, that run to the Island of Bornon, and if the wind begin to be calm, and that you desire to Anchor in the middle of the gulf, you may well do it, for it is at the least 38. or 40. fathom deep, therefore leave not sailing South-west ward, for with that course you shall come right upon Pulo Timon, the Island of Pulo Timon is great, high, and full of trees, and hath very good fresh water, and if you need, there you may have it, right over against it in an Island lying in a Créeke of the same Island, when you put to this Island of Pulo Timon, on the North-east point you shall see a round Island, and desiring to run between it and the Island, or between it and the Firm land, you may well do it, for you may pass freely round about in every place, and coming to Pulo Timon, you shall hold your course South, and somewhat South and by West, towards Pulo Ting, which is a very high & round Island, much like a Down, or a sheaf of Corn, it hath some small islands lying by it in the same course of South, and South and by West, you shall come to Pedra Branqua or the white stony Cliff, & from thence you begin the course to Sincapura, running about three or four miles Westward. The 24. Chapter. Of the course out of the Haven of Macau in China to the Island of Pulo Timon, & the strait of Sincapura. WHen you depart from Macau to the other coast, you must put out at the East channel, if the wind be Northwest, if not, than you cannot pass, that way, but you must sail through the south west channel, which is a good way to pass out, running from the point of Varella, right unto the land on the other side of Macau, to shun the cliff of Belchior Dalmeida, and when you are about a Harquebus shot from the other side, than you shall run along to a point of land, which is the end thereof, where the Island of Castro lieth, from this point the bank hangeth off, for the which cause you shall run nearer to the land of Castro, then to the point of land that you run not on ground, for in those countries you have most of the shallows in the land that lieth on the left hand, and the depths on the right hand, with a spring tide, at this bank you find 4. fathom and a half, and being without the bank, you shall sail unto the mouth or hole, running as then to the point of the bank, to shun the Cliffs, which will presently be seen, for that the water breaketh upon them) until they be on your right hand, being out of the mouth of this entry you shall sail the course hereafter following, and having also departed from Varella, being a Harquebus shot from thence, you must run to the Island called Do Bugio, (that of the Meercatte) and being over against it, pass close by it, for it is a good way, for the north winds which you find there about, and because the wind on the other side is very scarce, the aforesaid Cliff lieth in the middle way of the channel, and you must run on that side from the north along the coast, to the Island of Castro, and when you are out of the channel, you shall keep South-west along by the islands, if it be clear weather till you see the Island of Sanchon, and when you are within eight miles of it, being to Seaward from it, than you have good sailing, for I do always hold this course, and pass well with it, being 8. miles to Seaward from Sanchon, you shall run South-west, for the space of two miles or that you be 12. miles as you guess from the furthest hook of the Island of the Sands, and being there, you shall then run South-west, so long as that you think that you are inward from the furthest point of the Sands towards Pulo Calon, and then again running South south-west, and South, & South and by West, by which course you shall come to see the islands of jeronimo Pretto, which course I have holden in this manner with a good and speedy wind, being in sight of the islands of jeronimo Pretto, and sometimes without to Pulo Cambir, and having a bad wind, not being North, than the time will show you what you have to do, when you see those islands, you may go near them if you will, for it is fair clear sandy ground, at fifteen Fathom, from thence to Pulo Cambir, the coast runneth North & South, and somewhat North and by West, & South and by East, this Island Pulo Cambir, is long and flat, and on the sea side it hath some red spots or veins, the bushes thereof being even and alike, right over against the points thereof, Northward upon the Firm land there lieth a river, which is the river of Pulo Cambir, if you come thither in the Monson of South winds, you may have therein fresh water for it is very good. You shall likewise understand, that being eight miles to Seaward from the Island Sanchoan you will take your course from thence South Southwest, and then you shall likewise see the islands of jeronimo Pretto, but it must be with a Compass that is fix, I advertise you once more, that when you are in sight of Pulo Cambir, about three or four miles from it, there lieth certain islands, and half a mile to Seaward from the South point there lieth certain stony Cliffs above the water, that show like Bucks horns, you may freely pass between all the islands, and that Island for it is fair and good ground. From thence to the Varella you run along the coast North and South, & somewhat North and by West, and South and by East, it is twelve miles distant, this Varella is a very high tower, standing upon a point of land, that cometh out from the land and reacheth into the Sea, by this Varella there is a Haven, which you cannot see, as you come outward towards it, because the one land runneth through the other, also upon this point sticking out on the south side, there is a place of very good fresh water, in the sandy strand and on the North side of the same point is an other place of fresh water, upon an other sandy Strand, the land there hath some Cliffs and small islands, and when you come thither to fetch water, it must be with a good tide, for there you have no Anchor ground, but very close to the shore, the best way is, to put into the Bay, for it is a good Haven, I have been in it, and it hath good Harber, for North and South winds, with 14.15. and 16. fathom deep, sandy ground, and if you desire to go any nearer to the land, you shall find eight and seven fathom deep good ground, this haven of Varella lieth under 13. degrees, in this way from Varella to Pulo Sesir, there are some islands lying about 9 or 10. miles from Varella, from the point of Varella to these islands, the coast runneth North and south, and from these islands to Pulo Sesir, you begin to run along by the land North Northeast, and South Southwest, this Island Pulo Sesir taking the name of the land, (because it lieth on the coast, for there is an other of the same name lying to Seaward) is a stony Island, without bushes, having in the middle a pointed hill, like a Varella, it is a flat Island of yellow colour like the Sea water, to know Pulo Sesir, being a mile or two from it, upon the Firm land you shall see an opening, this country is good to pass along by it, for the space of two miles, where you shall have ground at seven fathom great sand but put not off into the Sea from Pulo Sesir, for it is an evil way, because you have but 4 fathom deep, with stony ground: Pulo Sesir lieth from the land under 10. and 13 degrees, and the course from Varella to Pulo Sesir is about 50 miles: from Pulo Sesir to Pulo Condor you shall hold your course South south west, and south-west & by south, at 18. and 20. fathom deep, whereby you shall see the Island Pulo Condor: but I advise you when you come over this cross way from Pulo Sesir to Pulo Condor, to hold your course from the sandy point Southsouthwest, at 18. or 20. fathom deep, and when you find 15. fathom, them you are right by the coast of Cambaia, and shall not see Pulo Condor, but on the land side: but for your better way, you shall still hold at 18 and 20. fathom, and by this course you shall go full upon Pulo Condor, which is a great Island, having many islands round about it, and in every place much anchor ground: there likewise you have fresh water on the west side: it lieth under 8 degrees & ⅔ from Pulo Sesir to Pulo Condor are 50. miles, and from Pulo Condor to Pulo Timon you shall hold your course southsouthwest to 30. and 35 fathom, muddy ground: in this course and depth you shall see an Island being right over against the 7. points of the coast: it showeth like 3. hills, which stand in the space of two openings, which are in the middle of the land, and on the Northwest side it hath a cliff Island. From thence to Pulo Timon, you shall take your course south, and south & by west, at 28. and 30. fathom, being from the one to the other 115. miles, and you shall always run, as I said before to the Island of the 7. points called Pulo Tingaron, southsouthwest, because of the the streams that run to the Island of Bornon, & leave not that course at any hand till you see it, for it is 20. miles distant from Pulo Timon: this is a good course, and I advertise you again, that when you are in the way from Pulo Condor to Pulo Timon, in the middle between them both, you shall find 25. fathom deep: in the middle way to Pulo Timon you shall have 35. fathom. Pulo Timon lieth under two degr. and ½ on the North side it is a great Island, having other islands lying by it: on the North side it hath fresh water, in a sandy strand, where the ships that come from Sunda, to go for China, take in water: being in sight of Pulo Timon, you shall pass on the out side thereof, till you pass by the south point, along through the channel that runneth between this point and an other Island, which Island shall be to sea ward from you: and as soon as you are in the channel, on the south-west side, you shall see an other high Island, called Pulo Tinge, to the which you shall go, within a mile and a half, or two miles thereof, and being there you shall take your course southward to Pedra Branca, or the white Cliff, at 18. or 20. fathom deep, always with the lead in hand: & if in this course you come to less ground, than put to sea ward, till you be at 18 fathom, about 4 miles distant from the coast▪ to avoid the riff that cometh from the point or hook of jantana, where the islands lie, which you shall presently see, having good regard that you pass not by Pedra Branca: but when you see, you shall make towards it, which you must keep on the lee side, for that being with a flood the streams run very strongly to the Island of Binton, whereby you should not pass by Pedra Branca, for there I was forced to cast out 2. anchors, and you shall still sail with your lead in hand, and when you find 15. or 16. fathom, them you are at the end of the riff, and it may be that as then you can not see Pedra Branca, and coming to 18. fathom, then put no further to the sea: and running in that sort, till you see Pedra Branca, running as then to the point of the land, that you shall see on the land of jantana, which is the land on the North side, which you shall pass along by, till you come to see red Hovels, lying at the Haven of jor: and before you come to the haven of jor, you shall hold off from it, not putting into the haven: for there lieth a Bank, but you must pass the red Hovels, and run towards the land, which is a sandy strand: and as you pass along to the mouth or entry of the strait of Singapura, you must be careful that as soon as you are within Pedra Branca, you run to the land of jantana, without turning to the other side, for there it is very bad ground, and the wind would hinder you to get over, and if you desire to run on the inside of the Island Pulo Timon, you may well do it. The 25. Chapter. The course from Malacca to Sunda, lying in the Island of java Maior, with the situation of the country. Sailing from the great Island lying 3. miles southeast from Malacca, to the River called Rio Fermosa, your course lieth Northwest & Southeast, and Northwest and by west, and southeast and by east, which is 13. miles: all this way, if you will, you may anchor, and it is not above 30. fathom deep, good muddy ground. This Rio Fermoso lieth on the Coast of Malacca, within the entry, on the Southeast side hath high land, and on the Northwest side low land: it is in the Haven six or seven fathom deep: when you enter into it you shall put to the Southeast side, keeping from the Northwest, for there you shall find shallows. From this Rio Fermoso to the Island Pulo Picon, which lieth in the same Coast, a mile from the land aforesaid, you run Northwest and Southeast, and Northwest and by north, and South-west and by south: between this Island and the firm land it is shallow ground, and the course is 6 miles: from Pulo Picon to Pulo Carymon, which is a great and high land with trees, with some islands round about it: you run North and south, and north and by west, and South and by east, and are distant 5. miles: from the Island Carymon there is about 3. miles to the coast of Samatra, you must make towards this Island, and from thence run along by it, on the west side, for it is good way. On the south point of this Island Carymon lieth certain Islands: from these Islands two miles forward, lieth an other small long Island called Pulo Alonalon: there the channel is at the narrowest. From this Island beginneth the strait called Estrecho de Sabon, that is the strait or narrow passage of Sabon, and being as far as that Island, you shall hold about half a mile from it: from Alonalon, to the great Island of Sabon, are about 2 miles, in the middle of this channel, there lieth other small islands, that shall all lie on the East side from you, having good regard not to fall upon them: when you run through this channel, you must be advertised, that in the middle thereof there lieth a hidden Cliff, under the water, whereon a ship did once strike with her Ruther. Coming by the Island Alanolon, on the South-west thereof, that is on the side of Sumatra, you shall see two small islands, with an other somewhat less full of trees, be all rampard, with certain cliffs lying by them: and when those Islands are south-west & south west & by west from you: them you shall hold your course South, where you shall find nine fathom water, always keeping off from the Coast of Sabon, which is the east side, for it is shallow, but run in the middle of the channel, for it is good ground: half a mile off from the Island Sabon, lieth a small Island, called Pulo Pandha: this Island in the middle hath a stony cliff, and when you are so far that Pulo Pandha lieth Eastsoutheast from you, them hold your course southward, and you shall find 9 fathom deep, running half a mile distant from the Island of Sabon: the Island and cliff aforesaid being past, you shall find hard ground, holding your course South until the Island Pulo Pendha lieth northnorth east from you, where you shall presently find muddy ground and from thence forward you may anchor, if you will, and when the aforesaid Cliff lieth from you as aforesaid, then on the West side, you shall see two Islands or Cliffs, whereof the first hath some trees, and the other (which lieth nearest to the mouth of Campar, in the Island of Sumatra) hath no trees: they close one to the other: from thence to Sumatra are many stone Cliffs: when you come to pass by these Islands that shall lie from you on the side of Sumatra, you shall run through the middle of the channel between the Islands and the coast of Sabon southward, as I said before, holding your course along the coast of Sabon, about half a mile from it, where you shall always find eight fathom muddy ground, until you come to a small Island, lying hard by the coast of Sabon, having many Cliffs round about it and as you pass by it, you shall keep outward from it, leaving it on the side of Sabon: there likewise you have muddy ground, and the shot of a great piece further off, the depths will presently begin to lessen, to seven and six fathom, and ½. from thence you shall run to a point of the Island Sabon, lying right over against one of the mouths of Campar: those mouths or holes lie on the coast of Sumatra, right in the face of this point, about two bows shot from the land there lieth two Cliffs, which at full sea cannot be seen: they are called Batotinge, between them and the land are six or seven fathom deep, and between them both nine fathom: you may pass with a ship between them, and to seaward from them towards Sumatra, you find hard by 12. and 13. fathom deep, to make towards these cliffs, and also to pass by them you shall take your course, (as soon as you see the aforesaid Islands that by the Island of Sabon being past as you do, passing along by Sabon, with your lead in your hand at seven, six, ½. & ●. fathom deep, and thither the depths will lessen, being all muddy ground, which you shall have until you come right against the highest hovel of those that stand upon the point of Sabon, and with a point of the land of Sumatra, being one of the sides of the mouths of Campar, called As Bocas de Campar, from whence the one land lieth with the other, East and West: in this country are the aforesaid cliffs of Batotinge, being here, the depths will presently begin to increase to seven and eight fathom: which depths you shall hold until the Cliffs lie behind you, and from thence putting to sea, towards the side of Samatra, leaving Sabon side being careful to keep from it, for you have nothing else in that place that can hurt you, but only the cliffs which the streams run unto, you shall likewise take heed on both sides, as well of Sabon, as Sumatra for they are all over, from thence along the coast full of banks and shallows. These two Cliffs aforesaid being past, which you shall almost leave behind you, you shall presently run to the land of Sumatra, with the lead in your hand, not passing less than five fathom near unto the land, nor above seven fathom to seaward, with your lead never out of hand: for in this country you must rule yourself more by the lead and depths, then by the compass. When you are at the end of this Island of Sabon, than you have another Island, called Pulo Dure, which reacheth to another Island called Pulo Boyon, & then another Island called Pulo Buron, which lie so close to Sumatra, that they seem to be all one land, at the end of this Island Dure, lie 3. islands, one great and two small. This Island Dure lieth with the point of Sabon, (where the two small Cliffs lie) north, northwest, and south southeast, they are in distance about six or seven miles, with 6.7. and 8. fathom water muddy ground, & when you are right over against the Island called Pulo Buron, which lieth close to the coast of Sumatra, then run southeast, and southeast & by south, and following that course, until you come to ten fathom, then run Southeast, until you come by a point of the land of Sumatra called Tanianbaro, from this point to the Island of Pulo Buron are three miles, which is without the channel, and when this point of Tanianbaro lieth westward from you, then run south, and south, and by east, to the 3. islands called Calantigas, whereof the first hath an Island lying by it on the south side, the middle Island hath nothing at all, and the third Island that lieth most southward, hath an Island lying by it on the North side. These islands as you pass by them shall lie eastward from you from this point Tanianbaro somewhat further, lieth an other point, called Tanianbaro, which is very even with the sea, between these 2. points lieth the River of Andargyn, and the aforesaid point of Tanianbaro lieth with the islands East and West▪ & between both the points are 9 miles. When you see this point, then from thence forward you shall no more see the land of Sumatra, because there are many créekes, from this point, you make to the islands Calantigas Northwest and Southeast, and is in length about seven miles. These islands lie under 1. degree upon the south side of the Equinoctial, & on the east side of these islands you have many stony cliffs, both above & under the water: therefore you must put off from them to seaward: for that between them & the Island of Linga it is very foul and dangerous, if you will go from the Islands Calantigas, to the Island Varella, then hold your course Southeast and Southeast, and by East, whereby you shall come to it. They are in distance 9 miles, and in this way you shall find seven or eight fathom deep, and close by the land sixteen, and seventeen fathom on the North side, but on the South side it is less. This Island hath fresh water, it lieth right over against a point of the land of Samatra, called Tanianbon, from the which point to the Island are two miles, and you run North Northwest, and South Southeast, and you must pass between this Island and the point, leaving the Island to seaward. On the back board side, in the face of this point, lieth three Islands, whereof the greatest is called jambe, but along by the land of Samatra, you have neither Islands, nor Cliffs. To run from the Island Pulo Varella to the straights of Palimbon, then run Southeast, at seven fathom muddy ground, and with this course you shall see the hill called Monte de Manopyn, which standeth right in the face of the Island Banca. When you see this hill, than you can hardly see the coast of Samatra, because of the créekes, and you shall keep the same course to the said hill running a mile and a half from it towards the coast of Samatra, leaving the hill on the north-east side, not coming any nearer to it, for it hath a great Riffe lying a mile from it, and when you are right against the hill Manopyn, them you are right against the mouths or créekes called as Vocas de Palimbon, lying upon the Coast of Samatra, a mile from the aforesaid point of Palimbon forward, there lieth a small or thin point of land, and on the south side of the same point, there are many cliffs & rocks about a mile into the sea all lying under the water, which make the riffes' aforesaid: wherefore I advise you to keep at the least a mile and a half, or two miles from it, & be not deceived by the great depths that are along by those riffs, for that from many depths, you will at the last fall on ground, as it happened to a ship, which sailing on that side, close to the Island Banca, at fifteen fathom strak with his rudder upon the stones. You must likewise be careful not to keep too near the land called as Bocas de Palimbon, or the mouths of Palimbon, for they are altogether shallows and sands, let your Lead be still in hand, and go no nearer than five fathom and ½, to the land, until you be passed them, nor above eight fathom to seaward, and if you come to eight fathom, then rather keep at less depth (as I said before.) You run from this hill Manopyn) which standeth in the Island Banca) to the mouths or creeks of Palimbon (that lie on the other side of Samatra, north north-east, & south south-west, and is in course five miles. From thence beginneth the strait called Palimbon, which reacheth southeastward, and sometimes eastward, and in other places southward, till you be passed through it, being past the hill of Manopyn, about two miles beyond it, you shall hold your course to the first mouth or creak of Palimbon, with the Lead in hand, keeping a mile from it, at 5. fathom and ½, and go no nearer to it, for they are altogether shallows and sands: wherefore I counsel you not to go nearer than 5. fathom and ½, and towards Banca not nearer than 8. fathom, holding your course in this manner, till you be about a mile beyond the last mouth of Palimbon, & being there, you shall make with the land of Samatra, till you be within half a mile thereof, where th● land about a long mile right out before you, maketh a point, and being by this point, you shall see another point, which is distant from the first point 4. miles, and the course from the one to the other is east southeast, & west northwest, and being at this second point, about a mile beyond it on the same coast lieth a small river, and between this point and the river, you run half a mile of the shore or coast of Samatra, always with your lead in hand. From this river aforesaid, you shall put from the coast, from this River to another point, (lying 5, miles forward) it is altogether banks, and shallows with muddy ground: therefore you shall still sail with your lead in hand, & go no nearer than 5. fathom to the coast of Samatra, for if you do you run on ground, and at this depth you shall run to the aforesaid point that lieth before you, & right against it on the other side of the Island Banca, hath a point or hook of high land, where the channel is at the smallest, and coming by this point aforesaid, you shall presently find more depths. When you come to this point aforesaid, then run south southeast, holding that course till you come to the Island of Lasapara, which lieth right before you, being distant from the said point 9 miles. This Island is small and low land, being round about full of sands and shallows, and when you see it, then run South and South and by east, within two miles of the land, on the south side of Samatra, and six and seven fathom, for it is your right way and course to pass before that Island, and if you find ten or twelve fathom, then turn again to the coast of Samatra, seeking for five fathom, that you may run at six and seven fathom, and being there keep that course, leaving the Island of Lasapara, on the east side, and when you begin to enter therein, then run southward, and being right against the Island, than your depths will begin to lessen to 5. fathom, but be not abashed, for it is the right depths you find in that place, and when the Island is Eastward from you than you are right over against it, from the Island Lasapara twelve miles forward, there is an Island (lying close by the Land of Samatra) that maketh a small creek or bay, and for a mark it hath this token, that the trees thereof are higher than those of the coast, and seem little woods: you run from this Island to Lasapara North North: east, and south south-west, from the which Island there runneth a Riffe, reaching two miles and a half into the sea: therefore if you desire to sail thither, being in the night time, you shall run southward with your lead in hand, at 8. and 9 fathom, and though you come to 11. fathom, yet your course is good, but you shall not run under 7. fathom, and as you think you are passed by the Island, than you shall take your course again towards the land, and there you shall find 8. and 9 fathom, & coming to this Island in the day time, you shall put so far from it into the sea, that you may only see the tops and upper parts of the trees, and when it lieth Northwest from you, than you are passed the Riffe, & then again run in with the land at 8. and 9, fathom deep, as aforesaid: for the right way and course is always along the Coast: beyond this Island forward, there lieth a green creak upon the coast, which you shall shun: for there it is altogether shallows, and the corner thereof towards the south hath a thick point of land, that sticketh further out then all the rest that are there about: within this hook toward the creek lieth a River, from whence there cometh a bank, reaching 2. miles into the sea, and is four fathom deep, all hard sand, in that country where I have passed: therefore I advise you not to leave the depths of 8. & 9 fathom, which is the right course, and you pass from this Island to the aforesaid Riffe, south, south-west, and North, Northeast, being distant ten miles from this point of the creak, to two Islands (lying on the same coast of Samatra forward) you run in the same course of north north-east, and south south-west, and is in course ten miles, in all this way you shall find 9.10. and 11. fathom. These Islands are distant from the land 3. or 4. miles, and coming to these Islands, than the land and coast of Samatra maketh a thick crooked ridge or back, and if it be clear weather you shall see right before you two high lands, whereof one lieth southwestward from you, which is the land of Samatra, and the other southward, which is the land of Sanda, part of the Island java Maior. From the two islands aforesaid, you shall always hold your course along by this crooked thick ridge of the coast of Samatra, & being at the point thereof, than the land beginneth again to be low, and then you begin clearly to see the two foresaid lands. Between those two high lands, there runneth a channel or strait inward to the sea, between the land of Samatra, and java Maior (which is called the strait of Sunda) & being past the great thick ridge of the coast of Samatra, and coming again by the low land, then run no longer by the coast, but if you have a good forewind, then presently cross over, holding your course south southeast to the land of Sunda, to the southeast side of a point or hook of that land, by the which lieth the way to Sunda: therefore I advertise you having a good forewind to cross over, for that if the wind should begin either to be calm in the middle way, the tide being with you, the stream would drive you to the channel, which is no good course, for the least depth of the channel is 40. fathom and more, & the streams and tides therein run very stiff both out and in, and if they should drive you in, as the stream cometh forth, being with a North-east or east wind, you should find the waves of the sea hollow, and full, that no cable would be strong enough to hold against them, & by force would drive you out again, which would be no small labour and pain to you. I say this, because I myself have found it so coming into it, by mine own unadvisedness, in crossing over to the high land, lying on the side of Sunda, and held our course right upon the middle thereof, but the stream drove you overthwart before we perceived it: therefore I advise you that you run southeast to it: for the more you run eastward, the less depth you shall have to anchor in, if the wind should calm: and it is good ground, and being by the land aforesaid, close by it you shall presently see a great & flat Island, full of trees, with many hills, having to seaward from it or toward the north-east, another flat Island, and from thence to the haven of Sunda, it is about 4. miles▪ you shall hold your course to the Haven along by the Island that lieth on the coast, keeping to seaward, or half a mile from it, for it is all fair and good ground, at 6 and 7. fathom deep, and so you shall run along to the end thereof, and being there about a mile southeastward, you shall see a small Island full of trees, which you shall leave on the southeast side, running inward from it, right to a high pointed hill, (that standeth within the land) and when you begin to come near it, than you shall see the houses of the town, which lieth along by the strand, and there you may anchor at 4. and 3. fathom, as you think good, for it is all muddy ground, and if you desire to run into the Haven through a Channel, which passeth between the great Island, and the high land of Sunda, you may well do it, always running along by the land, until you be by the Haven: for you shall leave the Island aforesaid, and six islands more (that are somewhat further) to seaward, but you find but two fathom and ½ stony ground: wherefore the way passing about is the best, as I said before. The 26. Chapter. The course from the Haven of Bantam, to the Haven Calapa, called Sunda Calapa, both lying on the north side of the Island java Maior. Sailing from the Haven of Bantam, to Sunda Calapa, you should hold your course, between the little Island and the Island (lying right over against the crooked point, because the streams run towards the Channel or straits, sailing about the shot of a great piece from all the islands, or along by them, for it is all good way, at five and six fathom deep muddy ground, because that from the hook of the bow or crooked point) there runneth a great bank or sand, and being about this hook, you shall run 6. or 7. fathom deep, till you be a good mile from it, for from this crooked point to another that lieth on the same land, it is altogether bankie & shallow sandy ground, and to seaward from this point lieth a long Island called Pulo Tunda, and three or four miles Eastward from thence there lieth a whole row of islands both great and small, which are all under the same course: at the end of those islands, which are four, one great and three small, they are joined together with riffs, and along by those riffs you shall find twenty four & twenty five fathom deep, and you shall leave all those Islands, standing on a row to seaward from you: from the point aforesaid called the crooked hook. All the coast unto Calapa runneth East, and somewhat East and by south, & you run along by it at 7. and 8. fathom: for if you put further to seaward, than the streams run too stiff towards the strait, or the channel that runneth outwardly between java and Samatra, which is against you, and is of many depths: ●oure miles from the crooked hook or point forward, than the coast hath another point of land, where right over against it about a mile to seaward from it▪ there lieth a round Island, but you must not pass between it, and the land: for it is very shallow & stony ground, only small fusts may pass through it, but you shall run about half a mile to seaward from it, for it is all along nothing but stones, a little mile beyond this Island, there is another Island, and then yet a little further close by, there lieth another little Island: from these two Islands a mile southeastward close by the land, there lieth two other islands, & between the two first islands, and these two islands, there is a channel of 6. or 7. fathom deep, which passing through you shall run nearest to the islands that lie most to seaward, & if you will not pass through, then run about to seaward from them, at 12.13. and 15. fathom deep, from this long Island northward, endeth the islands that lie to seaward, having the Riffs, as I said before, and make a mouth or opening of a channel, of a great mile long: you shall here run nearest to the Islands that lie closest to the land: for that running by to the islands that lie to seaward you shall presently see the riffs, which with a low water are most part uncovered: being past this long Island, & the other that lieth the shot of a great piece from it, as also the two that lie further forward, & the land of the coast that hath the point, than somewhat beyond this point 4. other islands, between the which and the land you may by no means pass, & a small mile further eastward, there lieth other 4. islands, two and two together, at the end whereof to seaward there is a white sand that always lieth uncovered, all these Islands you shall leave on your right hand, on the land side, and being on the south side somewhat past this white sand, you shall see two high hills within the land which lie east & west one from the other, & at the foot of the east hill lieth the haven of Calapa, where you shall anchor, if you will enter into the haven, being past the foresaid sands, & an Island that lieth from thence toward the land, than there will four Islands lie southeastward from you, which teach towards the land, & another close by he land, than you shall take heed of a sand, lying north east close by the haven, which you may always see, and when it is high water it is washed away by the flood, you shall run towards these Islands which lie to seaward from the haven being day time, to shun the droughtes aforesaid. The 27. Chapter. The course from the Island Pulo Timon, to the Haven of Sunda in the Island of java Maior. FRom the Island of Pulo Timon, you run to the Island of Binton, to a point of land that from the same Island runneth almost Eastward into the sea south Southeast, and North Northwest, and hard by this point lieth certain riffs of small rocks and cliffs, and on the north side of this point it hath an opening or mouth, wherein there lieth a great Island with two hills, and a valley in the middle, and along by this point, less than half a mile from the land, there are eight fathom deep of flat and clear sandy ground, and hath no foulness but the stone Cliffs, & Rocks that lie close by the land: from this point aforesaid of the Island of Binton, to the Southeast point of the Island Pulo Panion, which hath an Island lying to seaward from it, you run Southeast, and Northwest, & Southeast and by east, and Northwest and by West: between this Island Pulo Panion, and the Island of Binton lieth an opening, which in the middle way hath two flat small islands, full of trees, and if you cannot pass Pulo Panion on the east side, than you may pass inward between it and the land: it hath five and six fathom deep good ground, and you need fear nothing but that you see before you. This Island of Pulo Panion, lieth close to the land of Binton, and if you fortune to be so near the land, that you may not pass by it on the sea side, than you must run to the northwest point, where there lieth a round Island, which you shall leave on the side of the Island, not running between it and the Island, but round about it close to the land, for it is fair running so inward along by the islands as I said before, on the southeast point of this Island Panion, there lieth many islands and Cliffs, and two miles Southeastward from it lieth a round Island full of trees, you shall pass between these two islands, towards the Island of Linga, which is a fair clear way and sea, and if you chance to be by this aforesaid mouth or opening, than you shall run on your course outward about the Island, for it is good way: from this round Island or two miles southward lieth a stony Riffe, about the length of the shot of a great piece, and hath but one Rock that is uncovered, yet you may see the water break upon them, which you must shun. From this Island to the end of the Islands of the land of Linga, (lying close on the East side of the same Island) you shall hold your course South, and South, and by East, and run Southward outward, always along the Islands, which shall lie Westward from you, and when you have sailed twelve miles you shall see right before you on the South-west side, a small round Island lying to Seaward somewhat distant from the rest, which is almost of form like the Island das jarras, lying by Malacca, and four miles before you come at it, you shall see two other small round islands, lying along by the land, and separated from the rest but not far, and when you are as far as the first round Island, being clear weather, than you shall see the high land of the Island of Linga, lying West, Southwestward from you above, or beyond the Islands (whereby you pass) which are all low hovels and valleys, and in this sort you shall run along by the islands, & coming about three miles beyond the round Island, you shall see a small Island somewhat distant from the land, which at the first showeth like two Cliffs, and there the land hath a point from thence running inwards making a creek (called a Enseada de Linga) and when you are as far as this small Island, than West, Northwestward, you shall see the high land of Linga, which showeth like two high rocks or hills, separated from each other, and reach North and South, that in the North having two tops like a Hare's ears, and Westward you shall see another Land, which maketh a high crooked ridge somewhat steep downward. In all this way to the aforesaid round Island, you shall find seventeen and eighteen fathom deep hard and fair ground, to the point or end of these Islands, and by it you shall have twenty eight fathom, and coming by this point, (where you discover the land lying West Southwest from you) to go to Pulo Pon, (which is an Island distant from Linga 8. miles, on the North side having two small Islands, and when you are on the North-east side, it seemeth to be round, with a sharp hill in the middle, and from the Southeast side it showeth two Hills with a valley in the middle, as in effect it is,) than you must run South Southwest, and being three or four miles forward, you shall see the Island of Pulo Pon lie before you: in it you have fresh water, and round about it is fair ground: when you see it, you shall make towards it: on the West side, and half a mile from it you shall find 15. fathom deep, and being by it run South, and south and by East, with the which course you shall see the hill of Manopijn, lying upon the point of the Island Banca, where the strait of Palimbon beginneth, and the seven islands, called Pulo Tayo, shall lie southeastward from you, which are distant from Pulo Pon 7 miles, and if in this way you find your depths to be above ten fathom, than you are on the East side, and having ten fathom, than you are 6. or seven miles from Banca, and finding 8. fathom, you shall not be long before you see the land of Sumatra, and as soon as you see Manopijn, then run within two miles thereof, before you enter into the strait or channel, in the same manner holding your course to the mouths or créekes of Palimbon towards the coast of Sumatra, shunning a great créek, lying Northwest from the mouths of Palimbon, upon the same coast of Sumatra, which hath a very great haven and entry, whereby many ships have been deceived that entered therein: it hath no shallows, and presently (as you pass along the coast) you shall see the land thereof stretching south south-west: from thence forward you hold your course to Sunda, as in the voyage from Malacca to Sunda and java is already set down, therefore it is not necessary to rehearse it again. The 28. Chapter. The course along the coast of Sumatra, from the outside, beginning at the f●rthest point lying under five degrees, on the North side of the Equinoctial, to the strait of Sunda, and so to the Island java Maior, with the situation of the coasts. BEing by the furthest point or end of the Island of Sumatra, on the out side than you must run south along the coast: it is a very high and pleasant country to behold, with many great créekes, and Bays along by the coast. From this first & further point, (called Achein) 12. miles forward to another point that reacheth into the sea, the coast runneth South, and from thence to the sands called Os Baixos de Tristan de Tayde (that is the sands of Trystan de Tayde,) you must run along the coast Southeast, and southeast and by south: the course is fifty miles: by these Islands of Tristan de Tayde, there are many sands and shallows that lie round about them on the west, Northwest, and North sides, with many Islands and Cliffs on the same sides: these Islands aforesaid are somewhat like the Islands of Pulo, Sambilon, lying on the coast of Malacca to seaward from these islands of Tristan de Tayde, there lieth 2. Islands called Ilhas d'Ouro, that is, the gold Islands, whereof the nearest lieth at the least 10 or 12. miles distant, the other 12. or 13. miles further into the sea: they lie under two degrees, and ½ on the North side of the Equinoctial line: from thence you run to the strait of Sunda, having many Islands all along as you pass, as first three islands lying under a degree and a half, on the southside of the Equinoctial, East and West from these islands lieth a point upon the coast of Sumatra, called Cabo das Correntes, (that is, the point of the stream) because there the stream runneth very strong towards the South-west, wherefore there is no other remedy then only to run close by the shore: if you desire to go to the strait of Sunda, you must be very careful, for there are so many Islands along by the coast, that they are not to be numbered, from the Island of Tristan de Tayde, to the Islands of Manancabo are about 100 miles, and your course is Northwest, and southeast, & somewhat Northwest and by North, and southeast and by south, you must run between the Islands As Ilhas d'Ouro, and the land by which course you shall come to the point O Cabo das Correntes, which is very high, running into the sea further than all the rest of the land, but you must not go too near to the point, for there are certain sands and cliffs sticking out from it: this point lieth under one degree and ⅔. on the South side of the Equinoctial. I set down no other mark to know the country of Sumatra, because the streams drove to seaward, without all these islands. & so I could not take a better course then to put to the Island called Ilha d'Ouro de Manancabo, that is, the gold Island of Manancabo, and I fell on it upon the sea side running for the space of 4. or 5. days, along by it: it is a very high and fair Island to behold, so that you may easily judge & well perceive that it hath Gold: it is altogether of a smooth steep ground, & along by the sea side it is about 10. or 12. miles in length, you run by it North & south, and somewhat north and b● West, and south and by East: it hath on the sea side 5. or 6. Islands, about a mile and a half distant from the land under three degrees, which is the height that I found, but they are distant from the firm land of Sumatra 8. or 9 miles, the River of Manancabo lying on the land of Sumatra right over against this country, I think it to be a very great river: for from thence there runneth a great stream, and much wood and other trash driveth from it at the least 10. or 12. miles into the sea. The best mark we found upon this coast of Sumatra was, that we never left the sight of land, but ran along by it, for by that course you come to the Island Ilha de Ouro, scarce to 3. and 3. degrees and ½. I writ this because you shall not trust to the running of the stream, that draweth Southwestward, as I said before: from the Island Ilha de Ouro you run to the strait of S●nda southeast, and Southeast and by south, and being past Ilha de Ouro there lieth two Islands, which reach North and south one from the other, in the same course with the Island of Gold about 5. or 6. miles: now to run to the mouth or entry of the strait of Sunda, you must not leave the coast of the firm land, having good respect to the Islands and cliffs, whereof there are very many lying by it, that you can hardly know where to find the mouth of the strait, but only by the knowledge of the Island, which is very high, lying right over against a point of the Island of Sumatra, on the north side: this firm land of Sumatra endeth there, where with the Island of java Maior, it maketh the strait: it hath on the Northwest side of this strait two or three islands, lying about a mile from the land, and upon the Islands that lie nearest to the land there was once a ship taken with French men, the great shot being kept by the kings of the Island of Banda, and Cal●pa, and a● mile southward from the land lieth the Island that hath a high sharp pointed hill, as I said before, and on the North side of this high sharp hill or Island, are 4. islands, whereof one is very high, reaching North-east and south-west: they lie somewhat further from it, that is by the aforesaid islands close by the point on the North-east side: between all these islands & the land there is a great creek, of man● hidden cliffs lying under the water, whereof some are uncovered, and think not to enter into this creek, unless it be with a Fuste, or a very small ship, for it is better to run towards the Island lying on the south side thereof, along by the point, which you need not fear, for it hath nothing that can hurt you, and then you shall presently see lying before you on the North-east side a point of land, which showeth to have 2. or 3. islands at the end thereof: along by this point lieth the mouth or entry of the strait of Sunda, where you must pass through: this point reacheth North and south, having in the North a high hovel, the south side being the end of the same land: close by the mouth of the strait, for a better mark Northeastward from you, you see a long Island, and on the southeast part a high land, which land lieth above Bantam, a haven in the Island of java, where the Portugal's lade Pepper, which groweth & is gathered in that Island, and behind the aforesaid high land lieth the town of Bantam, and before you come to the said land that lieth above Bantam, you shall in the East Northeast perceive two or three islands, and if you desire to go to Bantam, you may pass between these islands, but I once again advise you of the Island lying in the mouth or channel or strait of Sunda aforesaid, which is for a mark of the said strait, being very high, and deep withal, and hath this token, that when you are past or about the first point or hook, you may then anchor at 20. and 25. fathom deep as you have occasion, unless it be close to the land, where there lieth many white stones, and rocks, and further to seaward it is altogether muddy ground, at 20. and 25. fathom, but it is best for you to anchor as near the land as you may for your best security, for there are many stiff blasts that come out of the land: this high Island or pointed hill lieth under five degrees and ½. for there I have often taken the height of the sun as I lay at anchor, and the mouth or entry of the strait of Sunda lieth under the same height: to sea ward you have these Islands as you pass to the mouth or entry of the strait, the first Islands lying West to seaward, from the aforesaid pointed high hill, or Island, and West Southwest, or seven miles from thence there is a row of Islands, with certain Cliffs lying about them, and Southward other six or seven miles there lieth other high and great islands, and also Southwestward from thence there are other Islands, between all these Islands there are many channels, which are so narrow, that men can hardly get out of them: the best channel to run through I found by the aforesaid high pointed hill or Island on the Southeast side, reaching North-east and south-west: in all these channels you need fear nothing but that which lieth before your eyes. The 29. Chapter. To sail from Calapa in the Island java Maior to China, with the courses and situations of the coasts particularly set down. Sailing out of the haven of Calapa, you shall run to an Island lying by the point of Caravon, that lieth nearest to the land, whereby you shall presently see two points of sandy downs, which reach towards the islands that reach to seaward: when they are on your right hand, than you must put in between the Islands, through the channel where the wind giveth you best way, for it is all fair and good ground: being past these Islands, you shall run along by the coast to the point of Caravon, which lieth Eastward about two and a half, or three miles in length, from thence to take your course cross over to the Island of Lusepara, and from this point of Caravon, lying on the coast of java, you run North and South to the Island of Lusepara or Lasapara, and somewhat North and by West, and South and by East: the course being fifty miles the course is holden in this manner, because the East and East Southeast winds as then begin to blow in those countries, that is as soon as the month of May cometh on, and likewise as then the waters and streams begin to run with the Monson of the year, (which is the conjunction and time of the certain winds) towards the strait of Sunda, the channel of Lampon, which beginneth from the mouth, & reacheth to a thick point and créeke with a Riffe, lying on the coast of Sumatra, about 18. or 19 miles from Lusepara, in the Country aforesaid: by the point Caravon (which lieth three miles from the haven of Calapa) you shall take your course North Northeast for 8. or 9 miles, whereby you shall see a round Island, which will lie on the side of the land of Sunda or java, and being past this Island, Westward from thence you shall see a row of Islands, that do all reach North and south, passing by the country of the mouth or strait of Sunda, by this aforesaid round Island you shall find ground at 20. fathom, at the which depth you shall take your course North, & North and by West, whereby you shall always be within the sight of the above named islands, to the end of them, with the aforesaid depth of 20. fathom: when you begin to lose the sight of these Islands, being past them you shall presently come to 14. and 13. fathom, and being at 13. fathom, you shall run the same course of North, and North and by east, until as you think you are within 15. or 16 miles near the Island of Lusepara, and being there, then run North, and there the depths will begin to lessen to 11. fathom, which is a good course, for that running at more depth you should go outward at Lusepara, & thus sailing North, and at 1●. fathom, as I said before, you are in your right course till you come to 9 fathom, and being there then look about you, for you shall not run long, but you shall see the Island of L●separa, which will open like two small hovelles, lying East and west one from the other, that in the east being greater than the other: in all this w●y in the Month of May I found East & east southeast winds, as I said before, and according to the times of the waters, winds, and streams, you shall govern yourself in such manner, that in your course you always run Northward, for it is your right course, & best way from the point Caravon to the Island Lusepara, and if you go later to sail, having a full wind, without any abatement or cutting off, you shall hold your course right North, for it is very dangerous to sail without the Island Lusepara, therefore you shall take your course in such manner, that the Island may lie Eastward from you, because Lusepara lieth twelve miles Eastward from the other Island, which is called Lusepara falsa, that is, false or wrong Lusepara, because many ships have been deceived by it, thinking it had been the right Lusepara, when they came from the Island of java, and therefore they have given it the name of Lusepara falsa: you must take heed of it, for that northward from it, it hath a great creek lying in the Island of Banca, and such as put into it, can hardly get out again the right way, for there the winds are very scant, whereby you might endure great pain and danger to get into the straight, as it hath happened to some ships, that were deceived by Lusepara falsa: therefore I advise all men when they sail to Lusepara, that they put not in above eleven fathom, letting the Island of Lusepara lie on the East side, so assure them of their way. And when you see Lusepara, being within 3. miles thereof, you shall take heed you go not right North and south towards it, for that on the North side, as also on the south, for more than two miles and a half: it is altogether banks and sands, that are very dangerous, therefore you shall hold on the South-west side, in such manner that you shall keep two miles from it towards the land of Sumatra, I have passed within less than a mile from it, whereby I discovered the whole strand, and a white strand, which bank lieth on the North side, and in this course I found five fathom and ½. muddy ground, but as soon as the Island was southeast from us, we had but four fathom and ½. and 4. fathom, and strake twice on ground without rother but very softly: we found all over sandy ground, but as soon as we put to the land of Sumatra, we had presently deep ground, therefore I wish you to keep two miles from the Island towards Sumatra, and when you begin to come near it, you shall hardly find five fathom muddy ground: and when it lieth Eastward from you, than you are right over against it, and then you shall presently see a point of the land of Sumatra, whereunto you shall run, and there you shall find more depths, and running towards the coast you may go within half a mile near the said point of land, where you shall find ten fathom deep of hard flat ground, until you be a good way from the point, you run from the coast of Sumatra, from the strait of Sunda to this point, North Northeast, and South southwest: from this first point three miles further there is another point upon the said coast of Sumatra, and you shall make thither, keeping half a mile from the coast, always with the lead in your hand, where you shall find the same depths of 9 or 10. fathom, hard ground, & as you begin to go near to the aforesaid 2. point them you shall find muddy ground, & right over against it in the Island of Banca, there lieth an other hook or point of land, where the channel is at the narrowest, it is from the one land to the other about three miles: from the first point to the second the course is North and South: from the second point six miles forward, there is another point upon the coast of Sumatra, which you must run with the other point North Northwest, and South southeast, and between them both it is altogether bankie and very shallow muddy ground, which reacheth also about by the middle way of the channel, being above four miles in length, along by the coast of Sumatra to a River, which you shall see, and being as far as the aforesaid point, be not negligent in casting forth your lead, and there you shall come to five fathom muddy ground, but run no lower, for than you should presently be at four fathom, you must rule yourself according to your depths, always holding your course on the coast of Sumatra not passing above seven fathom, and when you see the aforesaid River, and begin to be near it, than your depths will presently begin to increase, running close by it, until you be right against it, being within half a mile of the point: four miles from this third point lieth yet an other point, which lieth with the third point East Southeast, and West Northwest, holding your course along by the coast, within half a mile of the land, at seven and eight fathom deep, it is altogether to the fourth point muddy ground: from this fourth point to the first mouth or creek of Palimbon (called A Premeira Boca de Palimbon) is about two miles, and you run East and West, and East and by South, and West and by North, and being about a mile beyond this fourth point aforesaid, you shall keep off from the coast to seaward to shun the mouth of Palimbon aforesaid, running two miles from it (because of many sands and shallows that are thereabout) always with the lead in hand, not running above six fathom near the land, to be the more assured: for from 5. fathom you come presently to four, and then on ground, and run not too near towards the side of the Island Banca, for there you find stones and rocks, whereupon the junco (that is the ship) of Antam de Payva, did run, which was at fifteen fathom, and strake with his rother upon stones & cliffs: therefore I advise you not to run above 8. fathom, nor under six or five fathom and ½. from the second mouth or creak, called A Secunda Boca de Palumbon, close by the third mouth: for when the hill of Manopi●n (that is, the point of the Island Banca) lieth full Eastward from you, than you shall cross over, keeping your course two miles from it, to avoid a Riffe that lieth southeast from it, & being in this part whereby the hill of Manopi●n lieth southeastward from you, than you shall run North and North-east & by east, by the which course you shall see 7 islands, lying altogether, by the country people called Pulo Taye, which lie about 15. miles from Manopi●n: these islands shall lie on the southeast side from you, & being right against these islands, you shall see a little Island lying in the North-east, which hath 2. hovelles in form like two men: it lieth about seven miles from the aforesaid Islands, & is called Pulo Pon. From these islands aforesaid than your course lieth along by this Island, and if it be clear wether, beyond this Island you shall perceive the Island of Ling●, which is very great, having two high rocks lying north & south from each other: on the south rock upon the North point thereof, it hath a high sharp point, with two hovels stiking out like hare's ears: in this course you shall find 9 or 10. fathom water, all muddy ground. About 5. or 6. miles Northeastward from these aforesaid islands there lieth an other Island, & hard by the Island of Banca, you shall see 2. or 3. islands, and when you see them, then pass not by them, for they are the Islands of Pulo Tayo, which you seek, being by these islands of Pulo Tayo, as I said before: you shall do your best to run closer to them, then to the Island Pulo Pon, holding your course north, and north & by east, whereby you shall see the Island of Binton and Pulo Panyon, which is hard by, on the East point, making a small channel between them both. From this Island Pulo Panyon, about two miles southeastward, lieth a round Island, full of trees, you may pass between both the Islands, or outward about the round Island, for it is all fair and good ground, shunning a riff lying in the South, about two miles from the round Island, whereupon you shall see the sea break: it is about the length of the shot of a great piece, being beyond this Island: then run North, whereby you shall see Pedra Branca, that is, the white stone or cliff, which in the course from Malacca to China we have oftentimes spoken of, from thence forward you shall hold your course, as I have set it down in the description of the course from Malacca to China, therefore here again needless to rehearse. From the Island Pulo Tayo aforesaid, to the aforesaid Island Pulo Panyon, it may be about 37 miles, little more or less. The 30. Chapter. The course together with the description of the Island of Canton, with all the coasts, havens, and points of the kingdom of China, to Liampo & Nanquin, with the situation and stretchings of the same. IN the description of the navigation from Malacca to China, we have showed the entry of the Channels of the first Islands called Canton, lying under 21. degr. & ●, which is the Island called Ilha de Sanchoan, and the other lying to landward from thence, as also the Island of Valco de Faria: you must understand that from this Island Sanchoan, (which as I said) is the first & furthest to the sea ward, to a point lying 12. miles from the Island Lamon, you run without all those islands eastnortheast, & westsouthwest: these Islands reach about 38. or 39 miles along by the Island of Sanchoan, and from this Island to Lampacon, are 11. miles, and in the haven of Macau eighteen miles, and from Macau to the end of the islands, are twenty one miles: these islands lying from Sanchoan to Macau, from the seaward upon the row, are many and close one to the other, which far off seem to be all one land, & from thence forward they begin to lessen, and to separate one from the other, whereby they may easily be perceived to be islands: all this way to the end of them, to seaward from them, you need not fear any thing, but that you see before your eyes, only that you have 10. or 12. Islands or stony cliffs, lying 10. miles from Macau forward, to seaward from an Island, between the which Island and cliff you may well pass, running along by the Island, for it is a fair and great Channel: or if you will, you may pass to seaward without the cliffs if you desire not to run between them, you shall hold the course as I here set down. Through the Channel that is between these Islands called As Ilhas de Sanchoan, or of Canton, and fourteen miles North-northwestward: from the Island Sanchoan there lieth a point of land, which reacheth from thence to the haven of Comaye: also from thence the land runneth East, for the space of five miles, where it maketh an end, reaching from thence four miles inward towards the North, from whence again it putteth outward to the East, to Macau: in this land that stretcheth North, there is a small creak, from whence you run Eastward to Comaye: it is much sailed by the Lanteas and Bancoins, which are the barks and Lighters of China, that carry the Merchandise and goods aboard the juncos or ships that come thither from Sian to take in lading: this land maketh an Island called Taaquinton: three miles beyond the aforesaid small creak lieth one of the mouths or entries of the River of Canton, which is called Camon: it is a very good entry, for that through it the great Bancoins or Chinish Lighters do pass to the Town of Canton. Beyond this mouth or entry of Camon lieth the Haven of Pinhal, to the seaward, and close by the entry thereof lieth a sand, which you must shun, and 2. miles beyond this haven of Pinhal: there is the other mouth or entry, where you put into Canton with small Lanteas and Bancoins, which by the Portugese's is called As Orelhas de Lebre, that is, the Hare's ears, because that inward to the land it hath two high and sharp points of land like a Hare's ears: a little within this entry lieth a riff, which may easily be seen: from thence to the Haven of Macau are about three miles: you run along by the land, through a small & shallow Channel, which is but a fathom and a half deep, at high water: the West point of Taaquinton aforesaid lieth North and South, with the middle of the Channel, from the entry of Sanchoan and the Island of Vasco de Faria. This Island of Vasco de Faria reacheth Eastward, like Taaquinton, and they lie north and South from each other. This entry or Channel which both these Islands make, is fair and good muddy ground, therein to anchor, and you anchor close by the Island of Faria, in the mid way, where it is good fresh water: from the East point or hook of this Island aforesaid, to the point of Taaquinton, there is a Bank of three fathom deep muddy ground: the deepest part thereof is by the Island of Faria aforesaid, and being past that, you have more depths: if you desire to sail from the Island of Sanchoan to Macau, you have two ways, whereof the safest is outward: through the mouth or Channel between the Island of Vasco de Faria, running to seaward along by the Islands, like those that come outward from the sea: the other way is East, through the Channel of Taaquinton and Vasco de Faria, and being at the end thereof, about four miles Northeastward, you shall see the haven of Lampacon, which is two great and high Islands, with many trees lying East and West. The mouth or entry of this haven, which is between the Islands aforesaid, hath within four or five fathom deep, of very soft muddy ground, therefore it is hard ankering there, and beside there runneth a great stream: at the entry on the west side it hath a great Island or stony cliff, right in the middle of the mouth: such as desire to enter on the west side of this Haven, must run between this great Cliff and 3. islands: there you find a bank of 8. spans of water, muddy ground: on the South part of these 2. islands, there is an other great & high Island, which reacheth north-east & south-west: between this Island and Lampacon you may pass through: on the east side of the mouth or entry of the haven of Lampacon, lieth a great and high Island reaching north and south: the south point of this Island lieth East and west, with the East point of the North Island of Lampacon, and the channel that runneth between these 2. islands, which reach Northward: it is deep and fair, having about the length of the shot of a great piece in breadth: right on the East point of the south Island of Lampacon, lieth a round stony cliff, and somewhat eastward lieth a great and high Island, reaching on the north side east and west, and on the west side, northwest & southeast: the channel which this stony cliff maketh is fair and deep: from this stony cliff South-eastward there is an issue or going forth reaching inward to sea, all sandy ground, with 3 fathom deep, through the which all the ships do pass that come from Lampacon, and desire to be outward, what way soever they go, for on the west side it is shallow, as I said before. Fron Lampacon 7. miles eastward lieth Macau, and there is a row of islands in the same course of Macau: all these Islands lie on your south side, and from thence to the firm land are 5. or 6. miles: this gulf or space between the islands & the firm land, as also from Lampacon to Macau is altogether an open sea, & hath no more but 2. or 3. Islands, yet it is all over bankie ground, for the deepest part thereof is but 2. fathom, which reacheth about a mile near the firm land, and the Channel which runneth from the sea to the mouth or entry of the river of Canton (called the hare's ears) runneth along by the islands of the haven of Macau: but returning back again to the Island of Vasco de Faria, coming right over against the end thereof, there you have an other high round Island, and between these 2. islands you run through to sea ward, and beyond this Island there is a row of other islands, which reach to the mouth or Channel, (where you pass through, when you come out of the sea to Macau, and lie Eastnortheast: all this Channel or passage that runneth between them out of the sea, is fair and good way, and there is nothing to be feared, but that you see before your eyes: you must run along by these Islands, leaving them on the south side, on the north side having the islands of Lampacon, and when you are right against them northeastward, you shall see an Island that hath a point of land, of very white sand, to the which point you shall go, for from thence to the Island of Lampacon there is a sandy bank, the deepest part thereof being along by this point, by the which you shall run along, within the length of a shot of a great piece: and when you are passed this point, run North-east, and then on the Northwest side: there will be a great high Island, which lieth east & west, with the south Island of Lampacon: and between it & Lampacon there is no other hindrance, but only the great stony cliff aforesaid: you shall run by the southeast point of this Island, leaving it on the Northwest side, passing through the channel that runneth between it and another Island that lieth westward, and being through it, then you are in the channel, which coming from the sea, runneth to the mouth or entry (called the Hare's ears) northward, and from the channel westward lieth the way to Macau. I set not down this course, for that I have showed it in an other place, in the Navigation from Malacca to China: if you pass between these islands, you must always run with the lead in your hand, to find the depths. From Macau ● miles northeastward lieth a very great and high Island, with a very high sharp point, which lieth in the greatest mouth or entry of the river of Canton, through the which the great Iunco● (that is the Spanish ships for merchandise do pass) where our ships (I mean the Portugeses) may likewise pass through, and on the West point of this Island, half a mile southward, lieth certain stone Cliffs, between the which and the Island, it is all deep & fair ground, as also along by the Island on the south side, beyond these stony cliffs to seaward, there lieth certain small islands, and beyond these islands, somewhat further to seaward, there lieth other great islands: but you must not pass between the aforesaid stony cliffs and the small islands, but between the small & the great islands you may freely pass without fear. From Macau 4. miles southeastward, lieth a great and high Island, being divided in ●. parts, by a small running water out of the sea, & a far off showeth like a ship, having neither trees nor bushes, and half a mile from thence towards the land, there is an other long Island, with trees in the middle of the channel: between these 2. islands, in the entry thereof, on the side of Macau, lieth a rock or cliff, which the water washeth over, which you must shun, for all the rest is fair and good way. From this great Island that divideth itself in 2. parts, 6. miles Eastsouth east, lieth an other long high Island (with a very black shining wood of trees) called Tonquion, and from thence half a mile to seaward, lieth a row of 10. or 12. islands or cliffs: you must run between them and the land, where it is fair ground, or if you will you may pass outward to sea from all the islands: from this Island aforesaid, to the land, about a mile or thereabouts distant from it, lieth an other low & long Island with trees in the middle of the channel: between these 2. islands, there lieth an Island or cliff, and an other by the Island that lieth by the land: between this cliff in the middle of the channel & the Island that lieth to seaward, it is deep & fair, and on the Eastnortheast point of the Island to seaward, on the land side, there is a small creek or bay, where there is a good harbar for the Monson of the south winds: and there is likewise good fresh water round about this Island Tonquion, it is all fair ground: but turning again to the great Island with the sharp pointed top, lying in the mouth of the River of Canton, from the west point of the same Island ●. or 8 mile's eastsoutheast lieth a great high long Island, which reacheth northwest & Southeast, & is altogether without trees or bushes: from the Southeast point of the same Island, half a mile to seaward, lieth an other round & high Island, and the channel that runneth between them is fair and good: on the north-east side of this great Island, from the middle thereof to the land there lieth 2. or 3. long cloven islands or rocks, close by, of a reddish earth, without any trees: between the Northwest end of the aforesaid Island & the land, runneth a small channel, through the which the small Bancoins (which are the Chinish barks or lighters) do pass. From Canton to the aforesaid Island the water maketh a gulf or créeke: through this Country you pass when you come from japon. From this round Island, from the mouth that is between both 7. miles Eastnortheast, the land hath a point, with a high and even land upon it full of black shining bushes, having on the Westsouthwest side a still steep land, and on the Eastnortheast side, it is all Valleys. From this land there runneth a point into the sea, and right against this point, about the length of a arquebus shot, there lieth a great long Island, reaching as the coast doth. The channel between this point and the Island aforesaid, is scarce 3. fathom deep: within the point towards the land, on the Westsouthwest side, there are many and good roads to anchor for the Monson of China, at 7. & 8. fathom deep, muddy ground. I have lain there at anchor coming from the Island of japon, & came through the aforesaid small channel: here all the islands called As Ilhas de Canton, or the islands of Canton do end: this way from the 2. aforesaid islands, to this point or hook of land, maketh a golf, by means of the great creak: all this cross way is fair and good, and when it is any hard wether, than there goeth a very hollow water, specially close by the Channel of the two Islands. From this point of the land aforesaid, and the point of the Island, 6. miles along by the coast lieth a creak with certain islands and cliffs in the mouth thereof, on the eastnortheast side, which are good defence against storms & foul wether: there you have victuals & other necessaries, and being ●. miles to seaward, there lieth a stony rock or cliff▪ that a far off showeth like a ship under sail) lying under 22. degr. & ½, this coast along by the sea is sandy strand, inward being a high land, it reacheth eastnortheastward to a point of land, lying fifteen miles from the point Lamon, you may anchor all over, and is in distance to this point of land 18 miles, you must understand that from the country, lying at the end of the islands of Canton, to the Island Lamon, 18. miles to seaward, there lieth certain sands and riffs, of red sand, which at low water are uncovered, in the which place all the fishermen of that country do meet, all the aforesaid sands and riffs are close without any channel or passage, from the aforesaid point of land, lying fifteen miles from the Island Lamon, to the Enseada does Camoriins, that is the creak of Garnaet, by the Chinaes' called Cai●to, lying full under 25, degrees and ½ you run along the coast north-east and south-west, and north-east and by north, and south-west and by south, without all the points and hooks, it is in course 86. miles, and turning again to the point from thence to Lamon, are 15. miles, and 10 miles from the aforesaid point lieth a river called Rio do Sal, that is the river of Salt, from whence the salt is carried to Canton, it is a great haven and entry, being past this river of Salt, four miles forward, there is an other river lying by an other point or hook, which river by the Chinaes', is called Chaochen, and by the Portugese's Por●o de Pecas, that is the haven of Pieces, for there are made the good pieces of Chinish silks, and other costly wares. This river is very great, and hath many places and villages to land ware, that are inhabited lying along by the water, it lieth with the south-west point, of this Island Lamon, east south-west, and west northwest, the land of Lamon, lieth under 23 degrees, and ¼ it is great and very high, covered with bushes & trees, it reacheth as the coast doth, about a mile from the firm land, as you come from Macau sailing along on the west south-west side, it showeth like 2 islands although it is but one, it hath on the south-west, or the land side, some stony cliffs, close by it, which at low water are uncovered, and at high water the sea breaketh upon them, but all the rest of the channel, between the Island and the firm land is fair and deep enough, yet you may not pass through, for it is full of bushes and other stuff that driveth, although I have passed through it by compulsion, but with great pain, therefore I counsel no man to pass through it, unless it be with a Soma, that is a Chinish Carvel, wherewith they sail along the coast, for the traffic, on this aforesaid south-west point of the Island, to seaward there lieth certain small flat Islands, and other rocks, between the which and the Island you may not pass, and on the north-east point: on the land side a very great creak, where there is a very good harbour and low road, for all winds, where likewise our ships may enter, if occasion serveth, it is three fathom and ½ deep, ground muddy and to enter in you go near on the south-west side, for I have been in it. From this south-west point of the Island aforesaid, a mile and a half inward to sea, there is a riff that showeth above the water, being of some black stones, that reach all on a row Eastward, about three miles, and on the side thereof three flat long Cliffs also in a row, whereof that outward is the greatest: you may by no means pass over, nor between this riff, and cliffs, but between the riff and the Island: there is a very good channel, for I have passed through it, it is 20 fathom deep, small thin flat sandy ground, and you have nothing there to care for, then only to keep by the Island: and the aforesaid Riffe: it is good for those that come from japon, to pass through it, for if you pass outward by the sea, to avoid the Riffe, it happeneth oft times that there you find the wind sharp, and therefore can hardly reach the Coast, whereby (if it chance) you must endure great pain, before you can get it. From this Island Lamon 6. or 7. miles Eastnortheast, lieth the Haven of Chabaquon, which is an arm of the sea, that runneth north-east, very déepé to landward: at the entry thereof, on the southeast side, there lieth a thick and great point of land, which from thence riseth very high, and on the Northwest side it is a low land of sandy strands. From the aforesaid point of land, in the same course, about the length of the shot of a great piece, lieth a Ryffe of sand, whereupon the water breaketh: if you desire to enter into this haven, you must put to the Southeast side, running along by the point of the entry, where it is two fathom and ½ deep, half a mile above the aforesaid point of land, on the Southeast part of the land, there lieth a small Créeke or bay of muddy ground, which is a good harbour in foul wether, and for more security, you may run so close to the land, that you may run into the mud, & so leap on shore, on the northwest side, which is by an Island, where there lieth a town or village where you find much provision of victuals & other things. This course is done with juncos & Somas, which are Chinish ships & boats, & this haven lieth under 23. deg. & ½: behind this créek on the sea side, lieth another créek, by that which forward about the length of the shot of a great piece, lieth 4 or 5 islands, between the which & the land you may pass: this creek of the Island is a barber for the Monson of Malacca, that is for the winds that blow when you sail from Malacca to China,) within it is very good and fair ground: the land lying between these two aforesaid créekes, is a high and green country without bushes or trees, & the aforesaid islands are round and high, stretching along all in a row. Fron this Haven of Chambaqueo to Chinchon, the coast runneth North-east, and North-east and by East, and is in distance 22. miles: it is all high land, and close by the land it is sixteen fathom deep, and there runneth many hard and great streams. From Chabaqueo six or seven miles forward lieth Enseada Pretta, that is, the Black creek, by the country people called Lauho, above the which there lieth a high land with very black shining bushes, and in the mouth of the entry it hath two Islands, within it is very good and fair ground, being a harbour or defence against certain winds, wherein Ruij Lobo with his ship, & another junco or Chinish ship did winter. Two miles to seaward from it lie two Islands of white stony cliffs close together, between the which & the Firm land it is all fair & good ground. From this Enseada Pretta or Bla●ke creak, seven miles forward there lieth two high and small Islands (some what longer than round) without either bushes or trees, close by each other, reaching Northwest & southeast, between both having three or four stone cliffs: These islands and cliffs lie distant from the Firm land about half a mile, & right over against them lieth a small Créeke, from a very low hook or point of land along by the sea, and on the Island that lieth nearest to the land on the South-west side, lieth a Sand bay, which is a good Haven or Road of seven or eight fathom deep, where (the Cliffs lying to Seaward on you, make a defence) you may go close to the land of the Sand bay, for I have lain in it, because I put into it with a storm as I came from japon: the japoners have many times wintered therein with their ships. The entry thereof lieth on the North-east side, close along by the point of the Island that lieth towards the land: and when you enter in you shall hold towards the Island not to miss the Haven, and you may always go out and in as well on the North-east as on the South-west side: in this Island you have fresh water. These Islands are called Chiocon▪ it is all over very fair clear ground, only one stony Cliff, whereupon you see the water break, lying a shot of a great piece Westward from the row. From these Islands of Chiocon three miles forward, lieth the Haven of Chinchon, and two miles from the land lieth two Islands of white stony Cliffs, between the which and the land, as also outward to Seaward, it is all fair ground: from these Islands two miles forward, and half a mile from the land, there lieth a high round island, from whence there runneth a risse about half a mile into the Sea, whereon you see the water break, which you must shun. Between the land and this island it is altogether shallows, and between this island and the hook of the mouth of Chinchon, lieth a small Créeke, where the ships (in the monson of China) do anchor. All this coast from Chabaquon to Chinchon is high land, with deep and fair ground, only the aforesaid riff of the island. The Haven of Chinchon on the South-west side hath lying above it a very high land, with a stony rock upon it like a pillar (as the Varella in the coast of Champa hath.) This high land or hill descendeth downwards to a hook or point of land, and coming to the North-east side from the sea, it hath a great opening, with certain islands in the mouth thereof, from the aforesaid point the land reacheth North about a mile and a half, and from thence it runneth West Northwest, having an arm of the sea that runneth a great way inward to the land: in the same course on this land (that reacheth from the point of the sea, where the land lieth West Northwest) there is a long high island without trees or bushes stretching like the same land, and is a small half mile distant from the land, and on the land side it hath a good Sandie bay: in the middle way from the same island the shot of a great piece Westward, lieth a hidden Cliff or stony place of eighteen spans water, going a little way all the rest is fair and good ground to anchor in. In this island is good fresh water: herein Diego Pereira wintered with his ship: you run not on the South side of this island, but about by the East side, coming into the Haven on the North side. From this island a quarter of a mile further on, there lieth three islands stretching East and West one with the other: from thence to the West part of the land there is a channel of about half a mile broad fair and deep, you may likewise if you will easily pass between the first and the other two Islands. The Island that lieth Eastward is the longest and greatest of all the three, these Islands are distant from the Northland, about a great mile, which land is very high ground. The shot of a great piece from the East Island Northward, lieth a great and high Island reaching North and South, which on the West side hath a sandy bay, and under this sandy Bay close by the land, there is a good Road to anchor in, with very good ground, where oftentimes the Portugese's ships have lain to lad their wares and merchandises, such as are there to be had. The shot of a great piece from this creek Southwestward, and the like shot of a great piece from the aforesaid Islands, lieth a flat sand of twelve Spans of Water, all the rest is fair and good ground by the Road, and along by the Islands there runneth a great stream: the best place to anchor and to lie safest, is close by the South point, to lie out of the stream you must not pass by the point of the strand (by the Créeke that lieth Northward) for it is shallow. Those that come from Liampo and japon, put into this Haven by the channel that is between this Island and the three Islands, which is fair, at five or six fathom water, which you likewise find along by the Islands, as well on the land side as the Sea side, only at the sandy place aforesaid. This Island by the C●mais is called Tantaa. Two miles to seaward from this Island lieth a small cloven Island called Tantheaa, from the Island Tantaa to the Northland it is about a mile, which is altogether shallow ground, so that you can by no means pass, nor a great way from thence to Sea ward. From this Island Tantaa, a mile Westward lieth the Mouths or entry of the arm of the Sea, which may be half a mile broad: on the South part it hath a point of land, against the which on the other land Northward, lieth a Créeke or Bay with a great harbour, thereabouts the King of Chinaes' Ships do lie, and a mile from the aforesaid point of land, inwards of the River, there lieth an Island (by the South side) with certain red downs. In the middle way from this Island on the South side of the land there reacheth a point, and somewhat beyond this point Westward there lieth a Bay in the same Island, wherein the Ships anchor, and there you lie out of all the streams, under the defence of the aforesaided point of land. It happeneth oftentimes, that the Ships by negligence lie dry, because they run close to the land, yet it hurteth them not, for it is soft muddy ground. From this point aforesaid to the East point of the same Island there is a very good place to lay the Ships on land to new rig them, where the Portugese's have often dressed their Ships. Likewise there you have great store of victuals and other provisions, and the ships that lie by the Island Tantaa, do not stay there if it be foul weather, but as soon as they perceive any hard weather coming, they presently hoist up anchor, and come to anchor by this Island, in the mouth of the aforesaid small Bay, close by the South land all this way is fair. This Haven of Chinchon lieth under four and twenty degrees and ¼. from the Island Tantaa, and the Island of this haven of Chinchon, five mile's East Northeast lieth a point of land, in the which there is a good Créeke (against foul weather and the Monson of China,) called Lialoo. The Road of this Créeke is close by the aforesaid point of land, for all the land from this Créeke to the Island Tantaa, is altogether (there along) of a bankey and shallow ground, and so continueth to the Island, for that between the said Island and the land, it is altogether dry and shallow as aforesaid. From this Créeke of Lialoo forward, the land beginneth to be lower, without any high hills (as the aforesaid land) and hath but few bushes, in many places none at all. It is a very fair coast, so that you need fear nothing there, but that you see before your eyes. From Chinchon to the Haven of Foquyen are forty miles▪ and you run Northeast and North-east and by East. From the point of Lialoo two miles forward, lieth a flat Island about half a mile distant from the land, and another half mile further forward, lieth two Islands by each other, somewhat closer to the land, and hard by them is a River, at the mouth thereof having a sandy strand with low land, into this River runneth the Somas or Chinish Ships, that go to the Town of Enon, which lieth within the same, where you have much Merchandises of China on the coast seven or eight miles further. There lieth the point of Chencheu, which is a high and bare land, of white and reddish colour, reaching somewhat inward to sea, on the North-east side it hath a small Bay, and above it a very high steep land, in this Créeke lieth a great Island, between the which and the point of land you may put in, from this Island a harquebus shot in length northeastward lieth a stony place of ground half a fathom deep under the Water, and Northwestward from the said Island, between it and the land lieth another stone, and on the land side by this Island you have a good harbour to anchor in. I have lain in this Haven somewhat nearer to the Island then to the land, with two juncos, which are great Chinish Ships, each of them being of five hundred or six hundred Bhares, Indian weight, which is above a hundred and eighty tons, and ran in along by the point. Beyond this point of land at the upper part lieth a great Town, and North Northeast from this Island, there lieth two long cloven Islands of red colour, but they have no fair ground, nor any harbour: two miles before you come to this point of Chencheu, inward to land towards Chencheu, there is a hill like to Monte Fermoso, or the fair hill, this Hill lieth distant from Chencheu thirteen miles: in this country six or seven miles from the land you have certain boys lying with coloured feathers and flags, which serve for the country fishermen, where they cast their Nets, and the Sums of that Country, which are the Chinish Carvels, have ●un over it with one sail only, without any other furniture. From the point of Chencheu seven miles further, on the South-west end of the Island (by the Portugese's called Ilha does cavallos) that is the Island of Horses, and by the Chinares called Tachoo, having the name of a great Town so called, not far from thence about two miles along the river within the land, this Island lieth in the coast, compassed about with an arm of the Sea like the Island of Goa in India: which arm of the Sea issueth out again about five miles further in the same coast, which issue or mouth is called Puysu. The first mouth from the South-west may be about half a mile broad, and from the point of the Island inward, about half a mile, there is good anchor ground against the winds of the Monson of China, at ten and eleven fathom fair ground: you must shun the South-west land, which is low and sandy strands, and is all over blackish and shallow ground, for I have run inward round about this Island, it hath many shallows, and there is a channel the deepest part whereof is but two fathom, if you desire to put in there, it were good to have one of the Countrymen for a Pilot, I entered the mouth thereof from the North-east, which is the narrowest and shallowest place, and hath a hidden stony cliff lying under the water, close by the side of the Island, about the shot of a great piece inward towards the point. From this stony cliff to the point, many Ships may anchor, and both these Havens are without droughts or shallows, and the coast between them both from the one mouth unto the other, hath some red downs and bare land, but is all along fair ground. A mile from this mouth Northeastward, to Seaward lieth a small Island, and from the month of April to September, there are many beasts pastured in this Island, as horses and such like, whereupon the Portugese's called it the Island of Horses, as aforesaid, from the mouth of Puysu, of the said Island of Horses eight miles forward by the coast, there is a great thick point of land, with many bushes upon it: Close by this point lieth a great round Island, whereof the channel between them is small, yet very clear, where if need be you may pass through from the point aforesaid to the South-west, it is a high land with bushes, and from thence to the Sea, it hath a great green field or plain, and along by this green field it is very good ankering against the winds of the monson of China, another ground upon the aforesaided point of land, there is a great Town called Pinhay. From this point of Pinhay, five miles along the coast, lieth the Haven of Foquyen, which hath a great Rode, and is all thick land with bushes, and inward on the South-west part it hath a great round Island with black shining bushes, and beyond this Island inward, lieth the mouth of the river, on the which lieth a very great town compassed with mighty walls and towers, and hath a Bridge running out from the land, whereunto the ships that stay there are commonly tied: the entry is fair and clear. From this Haven of Foqueyen five miles, lieth a Créeke, by the Portugese's called Enseada does camoroyns, that is, the Créeke of Gannaet: and by the Chinars called Cayto: in this way lieth certain small and high Islands, without any trees or bushes, about three great miles from the land inward to the Sea, and between it and them it is all over full of riffs and stony Cliffs, and in some places it sémeth to have Channels or thoroughfares, for I went through it with a Pilot of the country: you must shun this Island: and from the end of this Island two miles forward, there is a point of great thick land, wholly without any bushes or trees, and at the end of each mile West Northwestward there lieth two Islands: and on the South-west side of this point there is a good harbour for the winds of the monson of China, having fair sandy ground, but it hath the wind very scant to run about without the Islands: for the which cause we ran between them, but it is not good for our ships. On the other side Northeastward from this point aforesaid, close by the land, lieth a small high Island, stretching Northwest and Southeast: the Channel between this Island and the Firm land, being the shot of a great piece in breadth, at three fathom deep, most part stony ground, in such manner, that as soon as you let fall anchor, the ropes and Cables are presently cut in pieces by the sharp stones. This channel can not be seen far off, and this Island hath on the land side a small creek or Bay, and if you come thither by hard fortune as I did, you shall put in there close by the Island, and so near it, that you shall touch the strand with the keel of your ship, to anchor in the depths of the hard ground, for if you anchor in the Sea, your Cables will presently be cut in pieces, as mine were. This point lieth hidden under a point: from thence North-east, and North-east and by East the land hath another point, lying about a mile and a half distant from the other aforesaid, making between them both a certain Gitte. From this Island and point about half a mile East Northeast lieth a Riffe, whereon you see the water break, reaching Northwest and Southeast, and about half a mile long from this Riffe to the North-east point of the aforesaid Créeke, it is about a mile: all the rest of the Créeke is fair and clear. This is the Créeke called Enseada does Camarovis, the Road thereof is under the harbour of the North-east point aforesaid, for it is good for the time of the winds of the Monson of China, for such ships as come from Liampon & japon, to put in there: you must go near the land before you come at the point, and run along by it till you have gotten about the point, and are ankered within it, there it is very good muddy ground by this North-east point, so that the Riffe will be Southwestward from you: therefore you shall put near the point of the land, not to fall upon the Riffe, from this Créeke forward to the point of Sumbor, lying under 28 degrees and ¼. you run along the coast Northeast, and North-east and by North, without the aforesaid Island, and the point of the said Créeke, and from the creek twelve and thirteen miles, the land hath a point, and from thence it runneth inwards North Northwest, and somewhat further North-east, and North-east and by North out again. Two miles from thence lieth three islands by each other, two great and high, and one small, being all fair ground round about, but wholly without any Road or succour to defend the ships in foul weather. These Islands are called Canton Zion, all this coast of Enseada does camarovis to these Islands and Hooke aforesaid, is altogether low land with hovels and valleys with even bushes: and along by it, it is both fair and calm Sea, and pleasant ground. In this Country in the middle way from Enseada does Camarovis, to the islands of Canton Zion, about three miles to Seawarde, there lieth two Islands by each other, and the Island lying nearest the land, hath a great high hill in the middle, which runneth steep down to the ends of the Island: they have neither Trees nor Bushes within them, being fair and clear round about them. From the Islands of Canton Zion forward the Land and Coast reacheth inwards, & ten miles from thence, that is to say, two miles from the land, lieth 2. high and great Islands nigh adjoining each to other, without Trees or bushes, reaching as the coast doth: whereof the first lying on the South-west side, is very long, and that on the North side is in manner of a triangle, and the Channel separating them is little more in breadth than a man can cast a stone, but deep and fair, for I have passed through it: and hard by the North-east point of the first long Island, which cometh out by the other, there is a sandy Bay, close by the which there is a very good Road, for this Sandie bay hath defence for all winds: and because it is like a Haven, it is by the Chinars called Pudeon, that is, a Sack. From this Sandie Bay about the shot of a great Piece Northwest, lieth a well of very great depth, therefore you must be careful in entering the Créeke, where you have very good ground at five and six fathom deep. In this Créeke or sandy Bay there is very good fresh water, as also right over against it on the other side of the Island, there is a great place of fresh water. The channel between these Islands and the Firm land, is all fair and deep, as also to Seaward from thence on the Northwest part of the land of this Haven aforesaid, there is another Haven called Fuychon, which is a river, but with a small entry, being in breadth about half the length of the shot of a great piece, with clear and deep ground: from the mouth inwards there is good water, running a great way into the land, and all fair. If you desire to go in there and to anchor, you must govern your course by the Lead and the depths. This Bay hath many towns and villages lying along by the river. From the aforesaid first Island five or six miles Southward to Seaward, lieth two small Islands, half a mile distant each from other, they are both without trees or any bushes: the Island on the Land side is flat, and that to Seaward is very high, and hath a Créeke, but very small, and only with a Northwest wind it is harbourless: the entry is very strait, being round within, with good and pleasant ground. This Island in form is like a Horse shoe, for from the inner side of the creak towards the outside to Seaward, it may be the length of a bow shot, in the breadth of the Island both these Islands are small. From this Haven of Pudeon five miles along the coast, there lieth two islands, whereof the first is long, reaching like the coast: the other reacheth from off the land towards the Sea, for between it and the land you can not pass. The point of this Island reacheth beyond the North-east point of the aforesaid long Island that lieth to Seaward: between them both is a small Channel, but fair and deep all along and round about this Island, as well inward as outward. From this Island to the land it is good muddy ground, at four fathom, and is a good Haven for the Monson of China, but wholly open for a South-west wind, with the which wind I there lost two juncos, which are Chinish ships: This Haven is called Guotimony. Before you come within two miles of this Haven, upon the coast there lieth two creeks close together, which run about a mile into the land, and are above the shot of a great Piece in breadth, but are not fit for our ships. The ground thereabout is fair, and inward it hath a village. From this Haven of Guotimony seven or eight miles Eastward, lieth a very great and high Island, on the South side having three or four small islands close to it: it lieth about seven or eight miles from the land, and a good way from the other islands on the Northwest side, it hath two creeks hard by each other, whereof that in the North-east is the safest, with good and fair ground, reaching about half a mile inwards, within it having good fresh water, with a Sandie Bay, where they draw up their ships to mend and dress them when need requireth: it is all fair round about, only you must not run between the small Islands & the Island: This Island is called Lanquyn. From this Island Lanquyn five mile's North, and North and by East, there are many Islands lying together both great and small, with some Trees, but thin and low, reaching along the coast about ten miles forward: the first lie close by each other to Seaward upon a row. The channels between these islands are three fathom deep, some less, muddy ground, if you have occasion to seek for secure in that place, with the winds of the monson of China, you may anchor in the mouths of those Channels, where you may lie safe, but in those Monsons' or conjunctions of times there is no foul weather, in the course of the general winds, you shall not pass (from this first row of Islands lying to Seaward) to the land, for it is all bankie ground full of Sandie places, for the deepest place is but two fathom. On the North-east side inward from these Islands, there are two other Islands lying along by the Land, which reach Northeast and Southwest, whereof the South-west Island is greater and higher than that to Landward. The Channel between them is deep and fair muddy ground: The ground of the issue on the North-east side of this Channel is all Coral and Kesell stone, having many islands and stony cliffs. Here the streams run strongest with the Monsons' of the wind. A mile or more Eastward from these two Islands, there is a good and fair sea, and ground: it is very dangerous to pass with great ships between these islands, for you can not pass. On the Land right against these islands, there is a Haven called Hunchon, and the Islands are called Lion: From this first Island of Lion to the point of Sumbor are about thirteen miles, and you run as aforesaid North-east and Southwest. These islands reach within three miles of the point of Sumbor, but in the middle way they are less, and more distant from each other: and before you come near the point of Sumbor by six miles, there is an Island of Reddish earth, with two hills like two men, and in the middle there is a valley, which reacheth Northwest and Southeast. On the Southeast side it hath a good Haven for the winds of the Monson of China. This Island is a good mark for them that come from japon. The point of Sumbor reacheth a great way into the sea, it is a thick land with a high rising back: it hath on the end of the South-west point, close by, a long and high Island, and from the North-east point of this Island, lieth an Island or cliff making between this Island, and the aforesaid point a very narrow channel, where the country ships do pass through, inwards from the South-west side, and from the Island the land maketh a great Créeke, which in compass is about four great miles: two miles from the point Southwestward, there lieth two or three small Islands. As you come outward to these Islands, there is deep and fair ground, but from thence to the point and all over the Créeke it is all shallow, so that at low water it is dry, and you may see the muddy ground, upon the plain of the aforesaid point, on the south-west side, there is a great town, where they have many great Barks, that are made with Orloopes and nailed, whereof some are 200. Bhares great. On the North-east side of this point, there is a Créeke running inward to the Land: at this point of Sumbor the Land maketh an end or Hook that lieth under 28. degrees and ¼. From this point four miles to Seaward East Northeast, there lieth two great islands without any trees or bushes, whereof the first reacheth East & West: and from the East point of this Island the other beginneth, which reacheth North and South: the Channel between them both may be a shot of a great piece broad, deep and fair. This Island which reacheth East and West, on the East end hath a point sticking out towards the North, in the which point there is a small Créeke of five or six fathom deep fair ground, where you may harbour in all weathers, except it be with a Northwest wind. The North Island on the West point hath two Islands lying on a row, whereof the one is great, the other small and some what long, between the which and the Island you may pass with small ships, and round about these Islands it is fair ground. In this Island you have very good fresh water, and they are called Timbasam. From these Islands a mile and a half or two miles Northward, there lieth two other small Islands which reach East southeast & West Northwest, whereof the one is greater and longer than the other, they lie close together, & the channel between them is fair & deep, with harbour against North Northeast, & South-west winds, for I have lain there at anchor with a great storm: From this point of Sumbor to Liampo, you pass without the Islands North Northeast, and South Southwest, and the coast all high ground, and from this point of Sumbor five or six miles along by the coast, within the land there is a high stony Rock, which showeth like a monkeys cowl, in the Island Seylon, called O Capello de Frade, beyond this friars cowl or stony rock, other six miles forward, lieth the Haven of Chaposy, which is a River of fresh water, and inward it hath a great Town lying upon it, where likewise there is a fleet of the country ships continually kept for the security and safeguard of the coast. The knowledge and right tokens of this Haven are, that when you are hard by Chaposy, the Sea hath some reddish leaves or Flags driving on the water, and some pieces of reeds, like Cassia Fistola, or Spanish reeds, which come out of this River. Two mile's East Southeast from this haven to Seaward, there lieth two small and high Islands close by each other, wholly without trees or bushes, round about them it is twenty fathom deep muddy ground, and from the mouth of the River half a mile from the land Southward lieth a long Island, reaching like the coast, between this and the land it is fair muddy ground of three fathom deep, whereof the entry on the South side is the deepest, and along by the land it is shallow. From Chaposy eighteen miles forward lieth the Island of Liampo, where the Portugese's used to Traffic. These Islands were called Sinogicam, & the Firm land Liampo, which along by the sea side is a high land. The Portugese's ships do not pass along by it, but between the Islands. At the first you have but few and small Islands, but being past them, then upon the row of Islands, lying furthest out into the sea, you have a very great Island with high Trees and Creeks along by the Sea coast, and it is there all over fair and good ground, and on the West side it hath a Créeke, in the middle whereof, there is a great and high Island, between the which and the land you have a Road against the Monsons' of the South and Southwest winds. This entry is of five fathom deep, but it is too narrow for a Ship to wind in it, therefore you must bind it fast, or cast out anchors both before and behind. From this Island two mile's West Northwest lieth another great Island with very high Trees, and from the South Southwest side of the same Island there is a good haven for the Monson of the North and Northeast winds, on the which side it hath very good air and fresh water, and the other Island aforesaid for the Monson of Southwest winds is unwholesome. The channel between them both is 35 fathom deep, but in the Road you have such depths as you would desire. From this north Island to the land are about three miles, having some small Islands in the way. On the firm land West Northwestward, there lieth a small Créeke called Camocon, from thence you run to the Haven lying on the coast, five miles beyond the Island, which is a river called Tinay, at the entry it hath four fathom deep, without any sands or shallows. These two Islands aforesaid, of Synogicam, (where the Portugeses used to traffic) lie under 29 degrees and 2/●, and these islands of Liampo do reach full under one and thirty degrees Northward, and are not as the Islands of Canton, having their Channel fair and clear, without fear of any thing, but that you see before your eyes. But between these Islands, in some places you have stony cliffs and riffs lying under the water. From the Islands of Sinogicam forwards there also the tides run very strong, about a third part of the Water at an Ebb, and a third part at a flood, wherefore you must have good regard to the cross streams that come from the many channels and droughts, which run very strong, and with so great force, that oftentimes they drive a man upon the point and Hooks of the Island, when he would pass by it. Wherefore he that will sail by these Islands, must have a Pilot that knoweth the Country: To Seaward from these Islands, it is all fair and good ground. Putting out of the Island where you may Winter for the South wind, that is (from the Road of the Islands or Cliffs) to Seaward, you must always run close by it, and when the Island beginneth to lie Eastward, than it maketh a point sticking out, and before you come to this Point, there is a small long Island which hath a small Créeke in the middle, being inward of a cloven stony Rock, at the foot whereof it is 20 fathom deep, it is distant from the great Island about the shot of a great piece. The small Island shall lie on the North side, and you shall always keep towards the great Island as much as you can, for this creak aforesaid draweth the water to it, so that if you were close by it, it would draw you in, as it happened unto me: whereby I had great labour and danger before I could get out. From this Island half a mile Northward, there beginneth another great and high Island, which from thence reacheth Eastward, making a Channel between both that runneth in the Sea, which Channel from the Sea to this small Island is all fair and clear: but from thence to the point of the other North Island, and from both these Islands Westward, which is a great space of the Sea, it is altogether riffs and Stony Cliffs under Water, that reach unto the Channel, that runneth from the Island where you may Winter for the North winds) along by the Islands that lie on the land side: Therefore when you come from the South Island to Seaward you must go close by it to the point aforesaid, lying on the same Island. From the Island (where you may Winter for the North winds) there runneth a channel, North Northeastward between the Islands, so that it divideth the Islands, leaving some on the land side, and some to Seaward, which channel oftentimes openeth and showeth itself. From this Island aforesaid (where you may Winter for the North winds) five miles further forward in the same course, there beginneth another great and high Island of five miles long, lying in the same course of North Northeast, and South Southwest. This Island is very populous of evil natured people: from the South point of this great Island, the length of a Cannon shot Eastward, there is a hidden cliff or Rock of stone lying under the water, whereupon a Portugese's Ship was cast away, laden with Pepper and other Spices, which is a good merchandise to be brought out of India and all those countries The riffs and Stones aforesaid reach unto this Stony Rock, therefore if you will sail through this Channel or depth aforesaid, you must run on the West side close by the Island. From the point of this great Island three mile's North-east, there is yet another great and high Island, (and is one of the Islands that lie to Seaward in a row) wherein there standeth a Chinish Temple or Church most curiously built: wherefore by the Portugese's it is called, A Ilha de Varella, that is the Island of the mark or token: and before you come at it, you leave two or three small Islands on the land side, and the great Island of five miles long, reacheth behind these Islands (to land ward) and to Sea ward from these Islands lieth another great Island, reaching from the stony rock to the island of Varella. Between these two Islands there runneth a small Channel: the whole Channel, from these three miles to the entry or passage of Varella, is three fathom deep at full Sea, and that of Varella, as also the month of the channel, (which runneth Eastward through it towards the Sea) is all deep: In the entry of the Channel of this Island (at the foot of Varella) it hath a Créeke with a Sandy bay, which is a good Road. From the South point of this Island of Varella or Chinish Temple to Sea ward, there lieth three Islands all on a row close by each other, reaching East and West, which Islands also are named after the name of Varella, whereby the Channel is known. This Island of Varella or Chinish Temple lieth full under thirty degrees, and is distant from the Islands S●ong●●●m aforesaid eight miles. From the Islands S●ongicam eleven or twelve miles, it is altogether great and high Islands, lying close by each other: but from thence to full one and thirty degrees, they begin to be less and somewhat more separated. At the end of these Islands there lieth two Islands together, whereof the Channel that runneth between them hath a very good harbour, it is called Lepion, they lie close by a great River, which is much inhabited and frequented by Merchants and other people. In this Haven of Lepion the japons do often Traffic: from the end of this Island along by the Sea coast the land is low and bankey ground, for that a mile from the land it is but a fathom and a half deep, being hard stones. The people of the country pass over it with nailed barks, with pitched or loops, two pieces, sails of reeds or mats, & an iron dreg with sharp teeth. This coast reacheth North-east to four and thirty degrees, where there lieth a great river that cometh from Nanquyn, within the mouth or entry hath an Island that is inhabited by many people, both horse and footmen. This Island maketh the River to have two mouths or entries, from thence forward the land reacheth North Northeast, and by East, and coming to that part which lieth Southeast, there the land hath an end or point, and by that means it maketh a great Créeke. From this point forward, the coast runneth North again, after turning again Northwestward: Into the which coast those of japon do ordinarily come to Traffic with the Country people called Cooray, and there you have Havens and harbours, having a kind of small open pieces of woven work, which the japons fetch from thence, whereof I am certainly informed, as also touching the navigation unto that land by Pilots that have sailed and searched clean through it, as followeth. From this point of the creak of Nanquyn twenty miles Southeastward, there lieth certain Islands, at the end whereof on the East side, there lieth a very great and high Island much inhabited, as well by horse as footmen. These Islands by the Portugese's are called, As Ilhas de core, but the great Island Core is called Chausien, on the Northwest side it hath a small Créeke, wherein there lieth an Island, which is the Haven, but it is not very deep. There the lord of the country hath his palace and is continually resident. Five and twenty mile's Southeast from this Island lieth the Island of Goto, one of the Islands of japon, which lieth from the point of the Créeke of Nanquyn East and by North, to Seaward sixty miles, or somewhat more. This instruction I had from a Nobleman of Portugal, called Pero da cunha, that hath seen and traveled through all the Country, having by him all advise serving for the purpose, as being of great experience, having arrived and stayed in the Country aforesaid by tempest and stormy weather against their wills, minding to sail to japon, and from thence again to the aforesaid Island of Goto, the Islands lying from this Island towards the land between them, and close about them all over, are many riffs and stones. The instruction of the Créeke of Nanquyn I had from an expert Pilot borne in the land of Algaine in spain, that lost his Ship upon the Sands that stick out from the River of Nanquyn, having run round about all this Créeke with a Bark, and he said that being within when the Sun rose, it came from over the land, and that from the river of Nanquyn there ran some sands and droughts, reaching southward to two and thirty degrees, and to the middle way of the Gulf of japon. Here endeth the description of the furthest parts that the Portugese's have sailed, along by the Coasts, lands, and Islands of the Kingdom of China, being that part thereof which at this day is known and discovered. The 31. Chapter. The description of a voyage made by a Portugal Pilot from Liampo to japon in a Chinchea Soma, that is a Chinchon ship, with the description of the coast of Bungo, Miaco, Cacay, & the Island Toca, all countries of japon. ON Wednesday the thirty of june being the third day of the new moon, in the morning we set sail out of the north-east channel of the Island Siongicam, with a southeast wind, and being without the Island, we had the wind South Southeast, and ran east, and somewhat East and by North, about evening we had a South Southwest wind, running East, East and by South, and East southeast, with very great billows out of the south, whereby we could hardly keep on our course, sailing with our sails but half up, and in the morning we ran half a strike east and by south, and east southeast, because the wind came some what full to the South west, with showers of rain and great billows that rose very high, by which means the waters and streams in these countries run Northward, we made our account to have sailed, in the course of East and East, and by North 26 miles in one meal tide, which was till thursday at noon, being the first of july. We had always great and mighty waves, because it was a Spring tide, all the night having great lightnings out of the East, and in all the points of the Compass from North to South. On thursday the first of july from noon to night, we had a south-west wind, running East and East and by South, and somewhat East Southeast, with great showers of rain without any high wind: and being two hours within night, the sky closed round about and became close with a great rain, wherewith the wind began to be calm, turning Northward, which the officers of the Soma perceiving (being men of China) they began to be in great fear, for the Chinais do hold for certain, that in the Moon of the month of july until it be 12. days old, all along the coast of China there will follow great storms, and as I think it is till S. james day, till when they always look for storms and foul weather, for that I myself upon the same day have passed two great storms. And touching our North wind the began still to increase, they perceiving it, put presently Westward again towards the Islands, and had sailed from noon to that time about ten miles, in such manner, that as we guessed we were 36. miles from the land of China, and so we held our course in that manner West and West and by North: after that having a close sky with little wind, whereby we made very little way. On Friday the North wind began to blow higher, we running so till noon, and in that Westerly course we sailed about six miles. From Friday at noon we sailed with this North wind all that evening, and by night till Saturday in the morning, & then the wind came North-east, & then East, and so West till noon, whereby we made our account to have sailed eighteen miles, letting the ship go West, and West and by North: and in all that time we had neither Sun nor Star to take the height. On Saturday two or three hours after noon the wind fell South, the weather beginning to clear up, and so we ran one glass, and perceiving the weather to settle, we turned again towards japon, being as then in mine opinion about 12. miles from the coast of China, and so we held our course that evening, and all the next night East, and East and by South, with a small wind and calm Sea. The next day being Sunday at noon, we took the height of the Sun at 30. degrees 1/●. part less, & we set out under 29. degrees and ●. accounting for one mealetide thirteen miles: so that I guessed as then to be 25. miles from China. On Sunday after noon we held our course in the same sort, East and East and by South, for all that evening and the night following till the next day at noon, with a still wind and water, and had no Sun to take the height, but I made my account of eighteen miles for a meal tied at half a strike to the East, and East and by North, the wind being scant South. From Monday at noon we still had a calm South wind, which continued so, that evening, and all night: and about Tuesday morning, the wind was somewhat fuller till noon, when I took the height of the Sun and found us to be under 29. degrees and ¾. running East, and East and by South, for the space of 22. miles. From Tuesday at noon being under the height aforesaid, I willed them to sail east (having the same wind, but somewhat calmer) all that night to Wednesday at noon, and then we began to see driving in the sea some Sea-scumme or Cuttle bones, having sailed fifteen miles, making my account to be yet 30. miles from the Island Tanaxuma, having neither Sun nor Stars to take the heights. From Wednesday at noon the wind began to blow somewhat full South Southwest, and because it was signified unto me that the streams in that country ran towards the Island of Lequeo, and perceiving likewise in some places a certain yellow scum driving upon the water (which appeared unto us like ripe Lemons) I willed them presently to hold East Northeast: and about evening we saw many signs of land, as pieces of reeds, risen, and such like things. At night I bad them run East and East and by North, but the first watch being done when the Chinish Pilot should watch his course, he had gone a great way out of the course: having run Eastward till the morning, when again I willed them to sail East and by North (the wind being as it was) till Thursday at ten of the clock, and then (although it was dark and close weather) we began to see a land that seemed very cloudy, and covered with dampy mists, lying Southeast from us, and were about three miles from it. Along by the same land there lay two Islands, we holding our course in the same sort, until by the first land Eastward, we saw another great high and long land, and at the end of the aforesaid high land Eastward, we saw two other Islands, whereof the one was very great, stretching North-east and Southwest, and the other close by it stretching North and South, being the smallest, with many points. On the North side of this small Island about a mile from thence, there are five small Islands or stony Cliffs upon a row: from the first Island that we saw (which is the last Island of those that are called As seat Irmaas, that is, the seven sisters, lying on the North-east side) to the aforesaid small Island with many points, it may be about six miles Eastward, as we were right against the aforesaid first Island of Stony Cliffs, it might be about five hours after noon, having run as we thought since we had sight of land about twenty and four miles. The Thursday aforesaid in the morning, we took the height of the North Star, being under thirty degrees and ⅙. Coming within two miles of the Island (that we saw first) of the Islands of stony Cliffs, we ran North-east and North-east and by East, and when we were right against it, whereby it lay Southward from us, being about three miles from it, on the North side thereof we saw another great high and long Island with many trees, which (as we learned) is called Icoo: it reacheth East and West, and we were about three miles from it, but by reason of the dark weather and mists we could not discern it: and coming somewhat nearer to it we saw another Island lying close by the West point of the aforesaid Island, being less than the other: and because we were by the aforesaid West point, (between both) we were fully determined to run through the channel, that showed between the said two Islands, but because there was no man in the ship that had any knowledge thereof, fearing riffs and shallows, we durst not adventure, but wound up to the East point, to pass by the wind about the high Island, running as much as we might with a Southerly wind, having great waves that put us to the land, and so we sailed East Southeast, having yet about two miles to pass by the Island, but night came on being very dark, so that we could discern no land, although we were close by it, and to keep from it, we ran the same course till about one of the clock after midnight, than the moon shined, yet we could not see the Island, but made Northward towards it with few Sails to the Island of Tanaxuma, which (according to my account) should lie right before us: wherewith we passed over the rest of the night till the morning, when we saw the Island Tanaxuma, that lay right before us, being about two miles from it, it being very cloudy, and we made Northward towards it to pass by the West side thereof, but we could not do it, by reason that the wind was South-west, and we were by the South point thereof, running along by the East side, about half a mile from it. This Island reacheth North and South, being long and low ground, having white sandy strands, with a very green country of valleys, it hath many Pine trees, but they stand scattering from each other, and very open: it is about seven or eight miles long, having in the middle way on the East side close by the land, an Island or stony Cliff, which far off showeth like a Foist under Sail. This Island lieth under thirty degrees and ½. right in the middle, it is all saire and clear ground. From this Island of Tanaxuma Northward, we saw a very great and high land reaching East and West, about eight miles, making as it seemed on the same coast Northeast, and North-east and by North from Tanaxuma, an opening, which is the mouth of the creak called Xabuxij. This Créeke hath for a mark, that the land on the East side thereof runneth all stéeping to the hook or point of the creak, being a flat ground: and on the West side the land is as high as the first that we saw lying North and South with Tanaxuma. This coast aforesaid may lie distant overthwart from the Island of Tanaxuma about seven or eight miles. From the North point of this Island we made towards the Créeke, and being in the middle of our way, the wind fell West Southwest, whereby we were enforced to lie by it, the weather being calm, so that the water that with the flood ran Eastward, drove us off that we could hardly get the Haven, but the ebb that after ran very stiff into it made us get in, and with the glimpsing of the evening and the light Moon, we entered into a very great gulf, wherein lay the aforesaid Créeke on the North side, and within on the East side it hath a small Island full of trees, lying about the shot of a base from the land. Eastward from this Island the land hath a high hovel, and on the South side of the said hovel, there lieth a great opening, which on the other side hath a point of low land and white sand strands with trees. There is the Haven called Minatto, which is a river better than that of Batecola, lying in the coast of Malabar. On the North side of this hovel about a small mile there is another opening, being in a land that is somewhat lower as the hovel, with some trees. This opening right in the middle hath an Island, wherein is the place of Xibuxij, which is a great village full of people, and is a river of fresh water, but it is shallow, for you can not put into it without a spring tide. From Xibuxij forward the Créeke runneth West, all low land and sandy strands, for the space of two miles from thence it runneth Southward again till it butteth upon a high hill, which is that which we saw coming from the Island Tanaxuma to the foot of the hill, there lieth a small river very shallow: From this river the land runneth East again to the mouth thereof, which may be about half a mile broad. The ground of all this Créeke and entry is sand and bad anchor ground. All this high land aforesaid is called Quimonsiquy. From this Créeke of Xibuxij seven miles East Northeast, lieth the Créeke of Tanora, which is one of the best Havens of japon: you run the coast East and East & by North, in the middle way from Xibuxij to Tanora there is a small Créeke or Bayliff, which at the first show seemeth to have a good harbour, but when you are right against it, than you may very well perceive it, for it hath many stony Cliffs and Rocks, and runneth somewhat to landward. I hear set down the description of this Créeke, that no man should deceive himself thereby, that desireth to go unto Tanora, as we should have done. Being past this small Créeke, you shall presently see that the land maketh an end or point of high land, from the which point forward the coast windeth inward, where you shall see a sandy strand with two Islands full of trees lying along by it: At the end of these Islands you shall see other smaller Islands, that lie off from the land inward to the Sea, with other great stones and rocks. Within these islands and Stones lieth the Haven of Tanora, and to put into this Haven you must run to the point and the end of these Islands and Stones that reach into the Sea, and being past them, then on the North-east side to Seaward there will lie a stony Cliff with an Island without bushes or trees, being steep land, reaching North and South: between this Island and the land there is a great Créeke where you may anchor, for right over against it, it is 25 fathom deep, but there is not the right Haven: but when you are about the point and the end of the aforesaid Islands and Stones that stick outward to Sea, than you shall presently pass along thereby inward towards the land, which you may freely do without danger, for it is fair and clear, holding your course Westward, and a point of land will be upon your right hand: and being past this point, you shall pass close by, shunning the land on the West side, and being there you are within the Haven, which is a long Créeke or Bayliff reaching North till you be in: you may anchor in the middle thereof at four fathom deep, and then you are enclosed with a round bow, it is there altogether muddy ground. Departing from Tanora to Fyunga the coast runneth North to a point of land, lying about five miles from Tanora: between this point of land and Tanora there lieth two Havens, the one called Gico, not far from Tanora, the other further forward (by some stony Cliffs and Islands) called Vmbra. These two Havens are good harbours for East winds that blow much on this coast, from the aforesaid point of land to Fyunga, may be five miles more, from whence the coast & land do turn in again like a Créeke: coming somewhat further Northward out, this Créeke is a low land (along by the Sea coast) with sandy strands, and a mile beyond the aforesaid point of land, the coast hath an opening, and on the South side of this opening there standeth a great round tree close by the Sea side: here is a good Haven, which is called Undo, and further forward there lieth another Haven called Toconosuchy, this land is higher than the other haven: on the Southside it hath some high and great Trees, and on the Northside a low land, the which far off & outward showeth like small Islands with trees. This haven is not good to put in. A mile beyond this haven there is another Haven called Myme, which is a good haven for small ships to enter, and hath two enteries, which you presently see being without, and may well discern them, in the middle having a flat Island full of Trees, these Trees make two openings, and you may see over the Island on the land (which is higher) a great green tree, the land on the South side hath a high land with a valley. From this Haven about two miles and a half lieth another small Island called Tomxyma, beyond this River a mile and a half endeth the low land, and then again it beginneth to be high, from thence two miles further, the land maketh a point or hook of high land, and a far off seemeth to be the point called Cabo de Ramos lying on the coast of India by Goa. Sailing about this point, hard by there is a River Northward called Camyco, which is two fathom deep in the Haven: this is the furthest land of the kingdom of Fiunga. From the point of land aforesaid (five miles distant from Tanora) to this point of Camico, the land is like a Créeke or breech, the water therein making a cross stream, for along by the land the Water runneth always Southward, you run this point with the aforesaid point of land North and South, and North and by east, and South and by West, and are about eight miles distant: along by this Bréech you may anchor at twelve and fifteen fathom deep, fair sandy ground. From this point called Cabo de Camico forward, the coast runneth north northwest, and when you are right against this point, than you shall presently see Northeastward, and North-east and by East the land of Toca, which is an island, and is about forty miles long, and reacheth East and West, and East and by North, and West and by South, it hath on the North side with the land of japon, a strait or narrow passage which runneth to the Haven of Saquay, and the land of Miaco, and from the side of the Island along by it, there are many small Islands. The course you must hold through this strait to the Haven of Saquay or Sacay, is altogether along the coast and the land of japon, which hath many and good Havens. At the end of this strait both these lands have each of them a point of land sticking out, being from the one to the other about a mile: by the point of the land of Toca, it is banky ground, and all the people of this land (on the North side) are not in any sort to be trusted. Likewise, you may pass from the South side of this Island Toca to the land of Myaco, where all along it is good sailing, and there are very good Havens. The first haven whereof lieth on the first point of land, on the West side of the Island, which close by it hath certain Islands and Cliffs: this Haven is called Focora, it hath a good harbour for all winds, but not for Rovers, for there they have many Foists wherewith they rove and steal. At the East end of this Island Toca, lying with the land of japon, right over against it there is another strait or passage like that on the West side, where you run to the Haven and Town of Sacay. In the middle way from the aforesaid East side of Toca lieth a Haven called A●●, which is inhabited by a very fierce and stout people. There is always a great army of Foists prepared for the wars, wherewith they rob and spoil all the Coast along. The Ships and Foists that desire to pass through it, ask leave, they may pass without let or hindrance. On the East side aforesaid, the land of japon reacheth much southward, making a hook or end called Cumano, and the coast that reacheth thither is called Bandol: It hath some Havens that were inhabited by very rich and mighty people, but they are neither secure nor free. The Haven of Sacay lieth from the book or end of the Island of Toca Northeast, about nine or ten miles. This Haven of Sacay with a West wind is harbourless, (which make many great tides) and hath a shallow sandy ground: For the which cause, the Ships that come laden thither, are presently unladen, and the people leap on land, leaving the Ship fast bound, and sometimes draw it on land. From the point O Cabo de Camico, five miles to a point of land, you run along the coast North Northwest, and in the way you have four or five Islands and cliffs along the coast, and right over against the aforesaid point, there lieth two other Islands close by the land, having between them both a small channel, and close by both on the North and southside sides, there are many Islands and Cliffs both great and small. These two Islands with the Islands and Cliffs lie East and West with the Hook and the end of Toca under three and thirty degrees and 1/●. All this coast is high land, with the Islands lying along by it, and hath sixty and seventy fathom deep close by the land. From thence forward beginneth the strait or passage to be narrow between this Island of Toca and the land of Bungo, and if in this country you have need to anchor, then put to the land of Toca, where you shall find muddy ground. When you are about the aforesaid point of two Islands, than the land beginneth Westward to turn in, all high land, having within close on the Southside a small Island, you must take heed of this Créeke that the streams draw you not in: being past this Créeke, you shall (in the middle way of the channel in the strait) see right before you a small round Island, which shall lie on the East side from you, and along by the coast five miles, you shall see another Island lying hard by the land, which to sea ward from it, hath many stony cliffs and Rocks. By this Island Northeastward, about a mile and a half, there lieth two other Islands. Beyond these two Islands another mile and a half, lieth another long Island with a flat plain or field on the top thereof, reaching Northwest and southeast, the Southeast and thereof being the highest. Within this Island towards the West lieth the creak of Vsquy, where the king of Bungo holdeth Court. If you desire to put in there, you shall run towards the first Island, keeping from the aforesaid Island, and the Islands and Cliffs lying by it, holding your course through between it and the other two Islands (that lie further forward) being passed in by this Island and the Islands and stony Cliffs, you shall see Westward within the Créeke a great, round, and a high Island full of Trees, whereunto you shall run, always keeping nearer the two Islands, than the Island of stony Cliffs, for by the Island of Stony Cliffs, you have seventy fathom deep, and within the two Islands Westward, you find but 25 fathom, muddy ground, holding your course in that manner to the aforesaid Islands that lie in the Créeke, keeping on the North side, for there it is fair and clear, and being right against this Island, you shall find twenty fathom deep, where you shall anchor, that from them you may see the havens, which are two, the one lying (a small mile from this Island towards the South-west) by a point of land▪ whereon there standeth six or seven trees, separated one from the other with some bushes, you must put to this point, which within it hath a small Bay or Créeke, at the end whereof standeth a riff of stone reaching from thence into the Sea, in the which lieth the aforesaid small Créeke, which hath a very good harbour, at three fathom deep good and fair ground, where you shall anchor, but it is not for great ships. The other Haven is Northwestward, on the other side of the Créeke, having in it some Islands and stones, it is a great Bay which runneth inward to the land, making a bow with very good harbour: This haven is for great ships. From this Créeke of Vsquy somewhat further Northward, lieth another great creak, which runneth inwards West Northwest. The Land and the point between these two creeks, may be from the one Sea to the other, about the length of the shot of a great Piece in breadth, and half a mile from the end of the point Westward on the South side lieth a small Island close by the Land, between the which and the land runneth a channel of twelve fathom deep, with fair ground of great sand, where I have ankered. Right over against this Island on the Northwest Land, about the length of the shot of a great Piece, lieth a small creak, with a village called Sanganaxeque, where Don Francisco Mascharenhas lay with his ship for the monson: This haven with a northwest wind is harbourless. From this Créeke about half a mile forward, you begin to have low land with sandy strands and Trees all along the Sea coast. By all this coast and the low land, it is all bankey grounds, wherefore you must keep from it about half a mile. In the middle way of this low land, there lieth two mouths or entries of Rivers that are very shallow, whereby you may not enter into them by any means, and at the end of this low land you have a river of fresh water of twelve Spans in the Haven at a Spring tide, and within the River at low Water the Ships lie dry, being sandy ground. Close by the Road or entry of this River lieth a Village called Aquina Fama: Half a mile within the Land upon the River, lieth the greatest and mightiest Town in all the Kingdom of Bungo, where the Kings in time passed held their Courts, where now all the Merchants of the Countries round about it, (who are very rich and abundant in wealth) are resident. From this River upon the other side of the creak lieth a very good Haven, with harbour against all winds, it is a small Bay, for the points or heights thereof do run through each other, wherefore they make a good defence against the South winds. The entry of this haven is fair, you need but run in through the middle of the Channel, where you have four and a half, and five fathom deep, and there you have great furtherance, for you run in before the wind with the South Monson, and you put out again before the wind with the North Monson: to understand it well, you must know that all this Country (as also all China, Malacca, India, and all the oriental places,) do sail with the conjunction of the winds, which for certain months together blow out of one place, as now in the North then in the South, and that at certain times and days in the year without failing: which conjunction is called (as in other places I have said) the Monson, as Monson of the South wind, that is, when the wind bloweth out of the South and monson of the North Winds in like sort, wherewith through all India they make their accounts to pass from the one place to the other. And because in this description there is oftentimes mention made of some Havens, Creeks, Rivers, Bays and Islands, where you have good harbour for the Monson of the North and South Winds when they blow, which is to be understood, (that if they be against you in the way you should hold) you should know which haven is good to stay in for that time, or to winter in: for in the East Countries you must Winter when the wind is against you, so that you cannot hold on your voyage, and of force you must stay for the wind and weather, that is, the Monson which serveth you, and where you have a good harbour to stay for the Monson that you must have, and then to follow on your voyage. Wherefore I thought it necessary to set this down, that you might the better understand the meaning of the Portugal and Indian Pilots, that first set down, noted, and observed these courses and Navigations, using here the same manner and description of the country, not changing the word of Monson, although that in some places before, I have said some thing thereof. But to the matter, you must know that the aforesaid Haven or Bay is called Fingy, but it is not free from Rovers and thieves. From the aforesaid River to this Haven there is about three miles crosseways: In the Road of the River it is twenty fathom deep close by the land, but it is bad ground, and there it is not good to stay for the winds, for there you could not save any thing. From this point you may see the East land, and at the end where this great creak endeth, it is low land, which is called M●ryee, and is all along fair and clear. The aforesaid River and Town lie under 33 degrees and ●. From this point or end of M●ryee, two miles further, there is another point of land which lieth with this point North and South, it is a low land with sandy strands, at the end whereof lieth certain stones and Rocks, from thence forward you run Northward along the coast, and a mile beyond it, there is a Village called Tamboca, and another mile further lieth another place called Tambico, lying both on the Sea side, but they have no Havens with harbours, also the people of the same places are not to be trusted. Being right against this point of Land, you shall along the coast see a long Island, which a far off showeth like two Islands, lying distant from the land about two miles, it is called Fimexima, between this Island and the land it is all shallows from the point of the Créeke of Bungo, to this Island aforesaid. All this coast along for the space of a great mile is bankey ground, riffs, Stones, and other filth. All this way from the beginning of the Kingdom of Bungo, to this Island, you must run on the East side, along by the land of Tocaa. From this Island of Fimexima aforesaid, nine miles Northward there is a very high Land which reacheth East and West, that is the land of Amanguchen, a great mighty and rich country, for therein is one of the mines of silver of the country of japon. In this coast are good Havens, as also the Island of Meagima, which in times past (before the Portugese's traveled to japon) had great Traffic, for there was the staple of all the country of japon, for all kinds of wares and Merchandises. Along by this land of Amaguchen, and the country of the Island Fimexima aforesaid, beginneth the strait or passage to Facunda, of the which as also the other places thereabouts, I will speak in another place, together with the Navigation and situation thereof. To sail from the point of Moryee, in the Créeke of Bungo to the Haven of Caminaxique, (lying in the country of Amanguchen) which is very sure and good for all winds, and of great Traffic: you shall hold your course North-east, and North-east and by East, being about sixteen miles. This Land which you go unto is very great and high, and you run all the aforesaid coast along (to a Hook or point of Land) East and West, and East and by North, and West and by South, and from the Haven of Caminaxique to the aforesaided Point about forty Portugal miles, whereof seventeen and ½. make a degree, as all the miles in this description likewise do, in the which coast lieth the havens hereafter following, that is, from Caminaxique to Toraque, are about two miles and ●. from Toraque, to the Island Meagima are six miles and a half. The Road of this Island is between it and the Firm Land: from Meagima to Camangary are a mile and a half, from thence to the Island of Anooxyma are five miles. From Anooxyma to Toumoo, are also five miles. From thence to Xynaco are five miles. From Xynaco to the Haven of Vxymando are five miles. From Vxymando to the Haven of Muroo are five miles. And this Haven is about five miles more from the Haven aforesaid. Beyond the aforesaid point three or four miles Eastward, lieth the Haven of Fyongo, and from thence six or seven miles further is the Haven and Bay of Sacay. All this coast aforesaid is fair and clear, having all over anchor ground. These are (as I said before) all Portugal miles, and two japon miles make just a Portugal mile: which is found to be true by the Portugal Pilots, that have therein taken the height of the Sun, and made their account after the japon miles. The 32. Chapter. The Navigation from Lampaecon (which lieth by Macon in the coast of China) to the Island of japon, and from thence to the Island Firando, with the description thereof by another Pilot. Sailing from Lampacon to the Island of japon, you must pass through the first issue or Channel of the South Island, which reacheth South-eastward, having a Cliff or Island in the middle thereof, between the which and the point of the Island you must pass, because of the scant wind, making as near as possibly you can to the end of the Island, always with your Lead in hand. And coming to the middle way of the Channel of the Island lying unto Seawarde, you shall find a sandy bank, that in the middle hath not three fathom deep: You shall use all the means you can to pass above a great and high Island, which lieth East Southeast from you. Being about this Island (with the other that lieth to Seaward in the same row,) you shall pass along by the Island that lieth to Seaward. Six miles further from this Island, you shall see a row of Islands, small Islands, & Cliffs, and are nine, reaching further out to seaward then all the rest that you pass by, and lie North Northeast, and South Southwest, you cannot pass on the outside of them, neither is it necessary, but you must run between them and a great high Island full of Trees, that lieth to landward from you, which Island as you come near it, showeth as if it were round, because you go right upon the point: Notwithstanding it is long, reaching as the coast doth. Having passed somewhat beyond it, there is a channel that passeth between it and another Island, lying close by it. Behind this last Island East Northeast, there is a Haven where some Ships come to lad certain Chinish wares, and is not far from the mouth or entry of Canton. This Island aforesaid, is by the Chinars called Tonquion. From thence you shall run East Northeast to see the country that lieth between Chinchon and Chabaquon, which is fair and clear ground, running two miles from it to shun a Riffe that lieth close by Chinchon, which hath a round high Island lying close by the land: you must run the coast of Chaboqueo to Chinchon Northeast and Southwest, and north-east and by East, and South-west and by west, and when you are right against Chinchon, then about two miles into the Sea, you have a high round Island, and within the land a high hill with a stony rock on the top thereof, like Pulo Varella, in the coast of Champa, and the entry is through some Islands, this round Island afore, is by the Chinars called Toanthea. When you are right against Chincheo, as aforesaid, then run East Northeast until you are eight or ten miles from the coast to keep without all the Islands, and being there, then run North-east, in which course, you shall see the Island of Lequeo Pequeno, that little Lequeo lying under five and twenty degrees, it is a very high and long island, about eighteen miles distant from the coast of China, when you are passed Lequeo Pequeno, coming into five and twenty degrees and ½: If you desire to make to the land of Bungo, then run North-east, and North-east and by East, in which course, you shall fall upon the Islands lying on the South side of the Island Tanaxuma, which Islands begin at 29 degrees and ½. and reach to thirty degrees and ½. and are in all seven high and small Islands, which reach one with the other, that is, the three first Islands Northeast and south-west, and North-east and by North, and South-west and by South, the other three East North-east, and West Southwest, and one at the end of them North and South. These seven islands being past, six miles further North north-east you shall see two other islands lying east and west with each other, whereof the East island is the smallest, the East end thereof having a high hovel, which descendeth eastward, making a low point. You may well pass between these two islands, for there is a good channel. The greatest of these two islands which is high and long, is called Icoo, from the east point whereof four or five miles Northward, lieth the island of Tanaxuma, which is a long island reaching North and south of seven or eight miles long. In the middle way of the same island on the East side lieth the Haven, which is a small Créeke within certain stony cliffs, but it is not best to put into it. West Northwestward from this Haven, about a mile and a half there lieth a small flat land that hath a hovel in the middle seven or eight miles Northward from Tanaxuma, you shall see a great high land which reacheth ten mile's east and West, which is the land of japon, and at the end or point of this coast, on the West side lieth the creak of Cangoxuma, and the haven of Amango, above it having a high pointed top, and right against the island of Tanaxuma, North and North and by East, lieth the Créeke of Xebuxy, that is very great, having within it the havens of Minato, Eoxima, and Xaboxy, all three Rivers for small Ships, And lying on the East side: on the right hand as you come Westward into the Créeke six or seven miles further North North-east along the coast, lieth the Haven of Tanora, which is the least Haven of japon. If you desire to put to the said haven of Tanora, than you shall hold close to the shore, sailing near unto it, for it is fair over all, but you have no anchor ground nor Roads, because it is deep, and when you pass by it, being beyond the Créeke of Xebury, than you shall come to a small Créeke, which at the first sight seemeth to have good harbour, but being right against it, it showeth what it hath, that is, many stones and rocks reaching somewhat inward to land. I note it here, because thereby no man should deceive himself. Being past this small Créeke, you presently see a great thick and high point of land: From this point, the land windeth inward, where you shall see a sandy strand, and two Islands with Trees, lying there along. At the end of the which Islands, there are other smaller Islands and great Rocks reaching from the land to seaward. Within these Islands and stones lieth the Haven of Tanora, and to put into it, you shall take your course towards the end of those Islands and stones that reach to seaward from the land. When you are right against the end thereof, then Northeastward from you to Seaward, there will lie another Island or stony Cliff. You shall run within this Island, and between it and the Land there is a great Créeke, where you may anchor at five and twenty fathom deep if need be, but there is not the right Haven, but when you are about the Islands and stones that lie outward to Sea, than you shall presently run along between a point of Land, (Northward on the right hand,) and the Islands into the Haven that you shall see lie open without fear, and being about this point of land, you shall presently see a creak stretching Northward inwards, and then you shall put to that point of land, which will be on your right hand where you may freely enter, for it is four fathom deep, all muddy ground, and anchor by the East land, shunning the West. From this Créeke of Tanora forward you run Northward along the coast, which is the land of Fiungo and Bungo, all fair and clear ground, having nothing thereon to fear then that you see before your eyes: and eighteen miles further, you shall find a very great Island, that will be on the East side from you, which is the land of Toca, and reacheth East and West, and East and by North, and West and by South, about forty miles long, coming out by Sacay and Miaco. The Southside of this Island is fair and clear, along the which you run to Sacay, between this Island and the coast of Bungo, on the West side thereof there is a strait or passage of four, five, or more miles broad, and such as will go to Bungo, must always keep along by the coast of Tanora and Fiunga, shunning the coast of Toca. But returning to the coast of five and twenty degrees & ½. beyond the Island of Lequeo Pequeno, as aforesaid: If you desire to sail to the Island Firando, you shall run from thence in the aforesaid course of North-east, and North-east and by east, to eight and twenty degrees and ¼. and being there, keep North-east, by the which course you shall see two small, long, bare, and broken Islands, lying North and South with each other, on the South side having two Islands or cliffs half a mile distant from each other. These two Islands aforesaid lie under one and thirty degrees and ¼. Three or four miles Northeastward from these Islands lieth an Island or stony Cliff cloven in the middle, having upon it four or five sharp points or tops, when you are right against the aforesaid Island, than you are yet ten miles from the coast of japon Westward, and running the same coast Northeastward, you shall go right upon a very great high Island called Coiaquijn, which lieth East and West with the haven of Angone, being three or four miles distant from the coast, of three or four miles long: on the East side towards the Land, it hath many Islands and stony Cliffs. If you chance to fall within the Island, finding yourself by the coast of japon, whereby you cannot pass without the Island, then take your course inward between the Land and the Island, without all the Islands and Stones, about the length of the shot of a great Piece from it, but go not near the coast, for that from the North Land there is a Point that reacheth to the other side. Being past the length of the Island along by the Islands and stony Cliffs, as I said before, you shall presently put along by the Island, outward to Seaward, whereby Northward you shall see the Point of Land aforesaid, which hath some Cliffs and riffs: within the which, Northward lieth the Haven of Amacusa. This point of land lieth right over against another point of land that sticketh out from the Island, lying North and South with each other: and when you have passed beyond this point of land, than you shall hold along the coast about a mile from it. You run along by this coast from the one point of land to the other North Northwest and South Southeast, and if you pass without the Island of Coiaquin, you shall take the same way (being past and about it) to come unto the coast, and so run along by it as aforesaid. From the aforesaid point of Amacusa that hath the Cliffs and riffs, three or four miles forward, there is another great and high point of land in the same coast, and being past it, you shall see a great opening or entry of a Channel, which is called O estrechio d'Arima, that is, the Strait of Arima: within this strait lieth two good Havens, the first called Xiquij, which is one of the best Havens of japon: This Haven lieth about half a mile from the entry inward on the South side and the right hand Westward at the end of a great Créeke, which hath a harbour for all winds, with four or five fathom deep muddy ground, but in this Haven three or four Portugese's were slain: I think it happened by their filthy pride and presumptuousness, for in all places they will be Lords and masters, to the contempt and embasing of the inhabitants, which in all places will not be endured, namely in japon, being a stubborn and obstinate people. But to to the matter. On the North side of this creek, on the land lying on the other side, there lieth a high round Island, and hitherto it is all over fair and clear sea and ground. To put into Arima you shall go towards the North Land, for on the South side (as soon as you are passed the creak of Xiquij) you have two stones, and thereabouts it is all over full of riffs and other filth. This strait aforesaid (as you first enter into it) reacheth Eastward, and then turneth Northward, and along by the point (where it turneth northward) there runneth strong streams, and so stiff, that if you be not careful, it will turn the ship about, and put it back again, if you have not a stiff forewind to break the force of the streams. Being about this point aforesaid, on the same land there lieth a very good Haven called Cochinochy, or Cochin●quyn, and then the Haven of Arima, whereof the Strait receiveth the name, and lieth half a mile Northward from Cochinochy, being a creak which is open for an East wind, and without any defence for foul weather. Somewhat further lieth the Haven of Simonbaia, that hath three Islands which make a harbour against the North wind, but at low water the ships lie dry. In this Strait there, are no other Havens that are safe and good for All winds, but only Xiquy and Cochinochy as I said before. From this Strait to the Island of Firando, along the coast there are many Islands and Cliffs, and a great Créeke. At the issue of the Strait of Arima six miles forward, lieth an Island close by the coast called Cambexima, which is a great high land, having on the Sea side close by it four or five Islands or cliffs: and between this Island and the Firm land, there is a good harbour, and in the same Island there is a village with many people, with a good small Créeke or Haven, where many Fisher boats & Foists do lie: from thence begin the Islands of Firando. From this Island Cambexima five or six miles forward, there is a point of land sticking out with many Islands and cliffs that reach from the land into the sea: you must run to the same point northwestward. This way from Cambexima to the aforesaid point of land, is all one créeke, because the land windeth inward, and because that on this coast of japon (commonly at such time as you go thither) it is cloudy & misty weather: therefore you can hardly discern the situation of the land, but if it be clear weather you shall presently see the point sticking out (that hath the Island and Cliffs at the end thereof) but if it be cloudy and misty weather, than you must not sail along the coast, but hold your course half a strike from the Northwest as aforesaid, & when you are hard by it, you shall presently discover all the Islands and cliffs. The furthest to seaward of these Islands & cliffs, are two Islands separated from each other, between high and low, and longer than round, wholly without Trees: and that which lieth furthest to seaward hath two riffs reaching out from it, one lying Eastward, the other West Northwest, about half a mile by the East Island of these aforesaid two Islands, as I was told if is fair and good ground close to it, as it seemeth to be: And upon the North side it hath the harbour for the Monson of the, South winds, and if you have occasion you may anchor there. From these aforesaid two Islands to the land, there lieth two Islands or Cliffs in form like two Pillars: between these Cliffs and another Channel (which the Islands begin to open before you) many juncos or Chinish ships do pass laden with merchandises to F●rando and the Haven of Vmbra, notwithstanding you shall leave all these Islands or Cliffs on the East side or your right hand, running about half a mile to Seaward from them: and being right over-against these Islands, than three or four miles further in the same course of North Northwest, there is another point of an Island stretching right Westward from the Land, being a high and flat land on the top, and in the first appearance it seemeth like three Islands, although it is but one, for it hath two broken parts, and by that means maketh a show of three islands. From the point of this Island three miles Westward to seaward, you shall see a round Island, having close by it a long small Island, and if it be clear weather West Southwest or West, you shall see the Island of Goto, which is very high and great, with many rents and cloven pieces, on the top being all even and flat ground. When you see the Island aforesaid that showeth like three Islands, then run strait upon the point thereof, that sticketh outward, and if the tide chance to be against you with slat●e wind, than the water by this point sticking out of the aforesaid Island) maketh a great roaring, and hath much scum, so that it seemeth to be shallows which the water breaketh upon: notwithstanding it is all over fair and deep, therefore you may freely put towards it without fear, keeping a little from the point: and in this manner passing about the point, than you must sail along, where you have a great and good creak, where you shall put in till you find ten or eleven fathom deep: it is hard ground, where you may anchor at pleasure, it hath a good harbour for the winds of the Monson, and being there you shall presently have Barks and Foists enough aboard your ship, that will bring you to Firando. In the same créeke inward Eastward there is a Road to anchor, with good harbour for all winds. Likewise the length of the shot of a great piece Northeastwarde, lieth another Haven that hath a good harbour for all winds, wherein there may lie more ships then in the East Road aforesaid. If you chance to come into this country at such time as that you fear any foul weather, than you may freely lie in any of these Havens, where you lie safe from rovers and thieves, that may come thither. This Island that seemeth to be three, is called Faquyn, and from thence to the Island Firando are five miles. From this Island Faquyn, if it be clear weather, you may well see the Island of Firando, Northward from it, but because for the most part you there find cloudy and misty weather, there is no certainty, but from the haven where you lie you shall presently see a high and round Island with some stony rocks about it, about half a mile from the road of the aforesaid coast where you lie, which reacheth North Northeast, and North & by West, about two miles and a half from you, you shall see another long, high, and flat Island, cloven in the middle, and so showeth to be two islands, stretching East and West. About half a mile from this island lieth a great round Cliff: between this Cliff and the round Island (that lieth half a mile from the Haven of the aforesaid Island) there is a great creek which maketh a channel, through the which you pass to the Haven of Vmbra, and when you see the Island that showeth like two islands, run right upon it to the Hook or end thereof, lying in the East, to the which you shall go within the shot of an arrow, as also by the great Cliff that lieth Eastward from you, running inward, than you shall see a very long land, which is the coast that maketh the straight or channel between the land and the Island of Firando: you must shun all the land that lieth on the East side, for it is all over foul ground, as you pass about by the aforesaid Island which is called Caroxyma, leaving it on the West side about the length of the shot of an arrow from the end thereof you shall see two Islands, whereof that Westward is long, the other lying right before you being round, having a stony Cliff which you must shun, and then presently you shall see two other Cliffs, which shall all lie Westward from you, and being there you shall see the Island of Firando lying before you, being about two small miles from you, you may freely make towards it, for it is all over fair, and pass above the coast of the Firm land that lieth Eastward. When you are by the Islands and cliffs, than there are certain small Channels, which you shall shun, keeping close by the Island of Firando, which is on your West side, and is a very great and long Island, and showeth (on that side whereunto you sail) with a great high Hovel, in the middle way upon a point sticking out of the same Island: when you are close by the same Island, you shall run along by it, where you shall find an opening, stretching inwards like a river, you shall pass about a mile beyond it, where you shall have a small Créeke or Bayliff called Cochyn, wherein you shall enter until you find twelve fathom deep, and there anchor: and although there you lie open to the South wind, yet the water goeth whole: being there, you shall send either by water or by land to the town where the Haven is, for certain Foists or Barks that may bring you into the Haven, which Haven lieth somewhat further, for the entry thereof is something dangerous, because of the great streams that have their Current therein. If you desire to sail into this Haven when it is almost high water, have care, for the wind is strong at your entering, and when the water beginneth to ebb, than it helpeth to bring you in: than you shall run in such manner along by the Island as I said before: and being past the creek of Cochyn, to the first point of land that you shall come unto, that sticketh out from the same Island (from the which point Northward there jutteth two stony Cliffs) you shall go near the stony Cliffs, the better to get into the Haven, and you shall presently see before you on the side of Firando, a great and high Island, full of trees, & when you see it, take your course right upon the West point of the same Island, until the said Island lieth wholly uncovered to Leeward from you, whereby presently you shall see inward the point or end of the town: and when you begin to see the houses, than put somewhat nearer to it, right over against the aforesaid Island on the South side and the left hand, and there the Island hath a small lo● poin● of land coming from a high h●u●●, and stretcheth into the Sea, from the which point there runneth a Sand or Bank, therefore you shall put towards the side of the houses or end of the town to k●pe out of the stream, and when you are out being in calm water, if the wind be not good, than anchor, and from thence be rowed in, either with Foists, Barks, or your own boat, West & West South-west into the Haven. All this description and course of Navigation, is in brief to conclude, that when you come to the coast of japon, you shall leave all the Islands that lie along upon the coast, on the East side, and upon the right hand, and run without them and the Islands lying to Seaward from thence: whereof the first beginneth from the end of the Island of the row, called Saquyn, and the long Island Caroxyma, that lieth further forward, which reach North, and North and by West, from the end of the row, and the two small Islands with two other small Islands or Cliffs lying further forward, and are seven in all, leaving them all on the left hand or the West side▪ with the which course you shall go directly upon the Island of Firando, as is before mentioned. The 33. Chapter. A voyage made by a Portugal Pilot, (with a Soma, that is, a Chinish ship) from Macau, or out of China, to the Island of japon and the country of Bungo, with the situations of the places along the course. THe ninetéenth of june being Saturday, we departed from the Island called A Ilha das Outeas, (lying on the West side of the issue or channel of Macau) running outward to sea, putting out at the place where the ships of Malacca do usually enter, but because we could not get above the Island, called A Ilha grand dos Ladronis, that is, the great Island of thieves, lying four mile's East Southeast to Seaward from the Island and the Haven of Macau, therefore we ran to Leeward thereof. About the length of the shot of a base from it, there are two Islands lying somewhat distant from each other, with a very small channel running between them, through the which they passed with Banko● or Chinish Barks. From thence about half a mile Northward, lieth another long Island full of trees and bushes, and when you put in there, on the West Southwest side in the middle of the channel, there lieth a stone which is covered with the Sea. Six mile's East Southeastward from these Islands, lieth the Island of Tonquian, which is a high and long Island, full of trees and bushes, and close by it on the sea side it hath nine or ten Islands or Cliffs: and because we could not take the height to pass between the Islands and the Cliffs, (which is a fair & good channel) we passed to Leeward, between it and another Island, about a small mile Northward from thence, which is a great Island, and there lie two islands or cliffs, the greater hard by it, and the other further off, which we left on the left hand, running along by the Island of Tonquian, where it is all fair ground. Which Island on the point that lieth East North-east on the land side hath a sandy Bay, which is a very good Road for the Monson of the South winds. When we were out beyond that Island, than we held our course East Southeast, until we were as far to Seaward as the furthest Island, and being in sight thereof, we took our course East and east and by North for threescore miles, till we were under the height of the Island Lamon, which course we held thereby to shun Rovers and thieves, who at that time and in those countries were continually risident, making war against the Portugese's of Macau) and yet we had the firm Land still in sight, I mean, the tops of the Trees and Bushes that stood upon the low flat Land: and coming to the coast of Lamon (although we saw it not) we presently ran North-east, by the which course we had the sight of the high land of Chabaquon lying on the coast of China, and being there we found much bad water and hard streams: and at the last we espied the Varella or stony Rock, that standeth above the Haven of China, seeing nothing else but high hills: and from thence forward we saw no more of the coast of China, and running in that course of North-east (which from Lamon we always held) we perceived the Island of Lequeo Pequeno, or, Small Lequeo, which was at the fourth mealetide after our departure from Macau, for we espied it on Wednesday in the morning, and ankered eight miles from it towards the coast of China, being on the South-west point thereof. This Island Lequeo Pequeno stretcheth North-east and Southwest and North-east and by North, and South-west and by South, it is a very high Island and about fifteen or sixteen miles long: the furthest point or end Northeastward of the same Island lieth full under 29. degrees ½. for there I took the height of the Sun, with calm weather, being about five or six miles from it, and from this North-east point the coast of the Island runneth Southeast, at the end thereo● having another great and high Island, making a small Channel that runneth between them both: and it seemeth that on the North-east side there is a good Road for the Monson of South and Southwest winds: and along by this coast of Lequeo for the space of three days we had calm weather, and after that we had a good gale of wind of the Monson, and I think we had so great a calm because we kept so close unto the shore. About five and twenty degrees and ● from the point of Lequeo we held our course North-east, and North-east and by East, till we came under nine and twenty degrees. Ten miles from Lequeo forward we saw great store of Cuttle bones driving on the water, and many other shells that were very white, showing far off much like unto Cotton, but it was not long that they drove any thing thick, for in short space after we might perceive them scattered abroad very thin, and but very few, until we came under 26. degrees. Coming under 29. degrees, we held our course half a strike East Northeast for the space of eight or nine miles till the sun-setting, and then we perceived right before us a round and high Island, being about six miles from it, which was the first and furthest Island Westward of the seven Islands, which at this present are called As seat Irmaas, that is, the seven sisters, which lie under 29. degrees and ½. This first Island hath a sharp point on the West side, in the middle at the foot thereof having a stone in form of a Pillar, like the Varella in the strait of Singapura by Malacca: and on the North-east side about half a mile from thence, there lieth a round black Cliff. Being in the sight of this Island we presently ran North and by East, as before, all that night: and in the morning (being right against it) we saw all the rest of the seven Islands, and still held our course North-east, until we were before the last of the said seven Islands: From whence about six miles Northward, lieth two Islands stretching East & West, whereof that in the East is very long and high, full of black shining trees, and that in the West much less and lower: at the East end or point of the lesser Island there is a high hovel that descendeth Westward, making a long and low point. These islands are about a mile distant from each other. Westward from this Island about two miles and a half, there is another island, as great and high as the other aforesaid: the first great high Island aforesaid is called Icoo, and the aforesaid seven Islands shall all lie on the Southeast side from you, and from the first to the last they may be about seven or eight miles: when we were at the end of the seven Islands, we held our course North-east, towards the channel that runneth between the great high Island, and the Island that hath the long low point, where we passed through, coming out again on the North side. This channel is fair and deep without any cliffs or stones. Four miles Northwestward from this Channel, lieth a very high and round Island, which on the West side seemeth to be full of Cliffs. This Island hath a Mine of Brimstone which lieth in the middle thereof. A mile Northward from this fiery Island lieth another small and low Island, and from the aforesaid fiery Island about eight miles Eastward, lieth the Island of Tanaxuma aforesaid: the great high Island of Icoo aforesaid lying on the East side of the Channel, on the North side thereof hath a low Land, and all along by it is very good harbour, being fair and good ground, reaching four or five mile's East and West. Three miles Northward from the East end of this Island of Icoo, lieth the aforesaid Island of Tanaxuma, as it is also declared in the Description of the Course and Navigation to the Island of Ferando. This Island of Tanaxuma stretcheth North and South, being altogether low Land and full of Hovels and Valleys, with Pine trees that stand far distant one from the other, and is about seven or eight miles long: and in the middle thereof on the West side, lieth a Haven within certain Cliffs and Rocks, and a mile and a half West Northwestward from this Haven lieth a very small and low Island, with a little Hovel in the middle. On the North end of this small Island there are some stones & rocks sticking out about the length of the shot of a great piece, all the rest is fair. Likewise between this Island and Tanaxuma it is all over fair and clear. Seven or eight miles Northward from the Island of Tanaxuma, lieth the great and high Land of japon, which coast on the South side stretcheth East and West for the space of ten miles from the channel aforesaid that runneth between the Islands: you can not see Tanaxuma unless it be fair and clear weather: we ran East Northeast, and were about three miles distant from the aforesaid Channel before we discovered Tanaxuma, as likewise the great land of japon, which (as I said before) is very high, stretching East and West about ten miles, and because Tanaxuma stretcheth North and South, being low land, and the land of japon high, therefore in that place where we were, they seemed unto us like one Land, because they reach each through other. Whereupon the Chinish Pilot which we had at that time aboard our ship, thought then to be all one land, but when we put nearer to it, than we began to see the Channel that runneth between them, being distant one from the other cross over, about seven or eight miles: and in that manner we ran half a strike East Northeast towards the land of japon, it being flood, where the tide ran Eastward towards the small Island that lieth by Tanaxuma driving us thither, whereby we had much labour and pain to get above it, passing about the length of the shot of a great piece from it: wherefore it is necessary for a man to run North-east until he be passed that small Island aforesaid. When we had passed about the Island of Tanaxuma, we ran North North-east towards the coast, being three miles distant from it: and right against the creak of Xebuxij we had a calm, being the last of june, having departed from the Island called A Ilha das Outeas, lying on the West side of the mouth or channel of Macau, the nintéenth of the same month, having Sailed toward japon about eleven days, whereof we had three days calm, so that our Sails lay flat to the Masts, being under the Island of Lequeo as aforesaid. The 34. Chapter. Another description of the course from the Haven of Macau along by the Island of China to the Island of Fyrando, and the Islands lying about it, to the Haven of Vmbra in the coast of japon: with a description of other havens lying thereabout, where they ordinarily use to traffic. IF you desire to Sail out of Macau towards japon, in the Monsons' of june and julie, and if in setting out you can not keep to loofeward from a cliff which you may easily perceive lying by Macau, which showeth like a sail, you need not fear it, for that leaving the Island Lanton on the Lée side, you may run whither you will, for it is all fair, and you need not fear any thing: when yea are without the Island, you shall hold your course towards the Island Branco that is, the white Island, or the white Stony Cliffs) running East Northeast, towards the Island of Lamon, and if you have a fair wind, and that you depart about Evening from the said Island, then on the Firm land you shall see a great high Land, on the East side descending somewhat flat, and in the midst thereof having a round hovel like a loof of bread. The depths all along by that coast about two miles from it, is thirty and five and thirty fathom deep, being muddy ground: From Ilha Branco to Lamon there are divers small Islands lying by the coast of the Firm Land. In this place for twelve miles or thereabouts on this side Lamon, and seven or eight miles from the Firm land, there is small black sand with some shells, at seven and twenty and eight and twenty fathoms water, and being there you shall still run East Northeast, although you see no land, for that having the aforesaid depth and ground, you pass freely and safely from the Riffe of the island Lamon, and if it so fall out that you see no land, yet by the depths and ground you may well know where you are, for from the island Lamon to Macau the depths of the aforesaid ground is from 25. to 28. fathom deep, and by Lamon and thereabouts the ground is white, small, and thin, with some black sand, and if you chance to pass by it in close and dark weather, than you shall hold your course as aforesaid East North-east, for it is the best way: and when you make towards the island of Lamon and finding the depths of fifteen or sixteen fathom, it is a sign that you are far to seaward (for in that country the stream runneth very strong East Southeastward) there as then you must run Northeastward, so to hold your right course. And running at the depths of five and twenty or eight and twenty fathom sandy ground, it is a good way, holding your course East Northeast, for in that sort you are in the right way: in the middle way from the channel when you are passed the Island of Lamon towards Chinchon then the stream runneth with you, and having the wind of the Monson: the next day you shall see land on both sides, whereof, that you find on the Stearebord side is the end or point of the Island Lequeo Pequeno, or, small Lequeo: and the beginning of the Island called Ilha Fermosa, that is, the fair Island, and on the lareboord side, the Land lieth in form like a hook, although it is none, but it is the Island of A Ilha does Cavallos, of the Island of Horses, which is very high lying under five and twenty degrees and a third part, on the one side about four or five miles to Seaward from it, having the Island of Baboxyn, and having seen this Land, you must hold your course Northeastward, which is a good way, so to run outward of all the Islands, for that from this Island of Horses forward to the Cape of Sumbor, there are many Islands reaching into the Sea, wherefore this is your best course to go to the Cabo de Sembor, and as you think you are right against the Cape of Sumbor, although you see it not, you need not fear it, for that as than you are about eight or ten miles from it. Being in this country, you shall hold your course North-east, so to see the Island of Puloma, or Meaxuma, or the Island Guoto for it is a good course, for the winds of the Monson, or if you have any storms or contrary wind, whereby you cannot hold your right course, than you must govern yourself in such manner, that you may fall again into your right course, and so to see some of those Islands. This aforesaid Island of Puloma lieth North northeast, and South Southwest, with the Island Guoto, about ten or twelve miles distant from each other, and is divided into four or five parts, with many holes & pieces of ground round about it, yet you need not fear, for close by it, there are many other pieces of ground, which I know, as having seen them all. From this Island aforesaid to the Haven of Vmbra, or the Island of Firando, you must run your course of North-east, wherewith you shall see the land lying beneath Vmbra, which is very high, having along the coast many small Islands, among the which are two Cliffs, that stick out with very hard sharp Points like Diamonds. From thence to Vmbra are six or seven miles, and being there, about a mile from the Land, you shall hold your course North, and so run along by the coast, and being by it, you shall keep close to it to know the Land and marks thereof, which are these: that when you are close by the Land on the right hand, there is a Point of Land, from whence there lieth two Islands to Seaward, which is hard by the entry of Vmbra, for from this Point inward, you run North-east towards it. Upon this Hook or point are three Pine Trees: and being right against this point to Seaward from it on the left hand you shall see a small Island with a round cliff, you must run within this Cliff, whereby right before, you shall see the land of Vmbra. When you perceive a great Island or cliff, which is very plain and descending downward, lying inward to Sea, then on the Land side you shall see great store of weeds driving upon the Water. This Island you must leave on the Lareboord or left hand, running between it and the Land, for it is about half a mile broad: From this Island to the mouth or entry of the channel are two miles, with a North-east course, whereby you shall presently see the entry which is very broad. From this Island or cliff there runneth a stony rock, reaching to the mouth of the River, some part of it lying above water, and part covered, yet you may plainly see it, so that you need not fear any thing, but that you see before your eyes. Between this Rock and the Land on the right hand, in the middle way there is fifteen or 18 fathom deep muddy ground, when you see the mouth of the Channel, you must put right towards it, without fear, for it is a very good way: And being within this strait or channel, whereby you discover the River, than you must hold your course on the right hand, whereby you shall presently see a round Island, having a Cross on the top thereof: and although you see not the entry, yet you must put towards that Island: for when you are right against it, than you shall preently see the Road wherein the ships do lie, as also a Portugal Church standing upon the Land, and being within- you must run Southwarde, about the length of the shot of a great Piece, where you may anchor at ten fathom deep, being very good muddy ground, and there you shall make your Ship fast on the North Northeast, and South southwest sides, and even as the Wind doth blow, you shall wind the Béeke head of the ship, making the anchors fast under the stones, for there it is very narrow: Notwithstanding, you need not fear, although the wind be great. Take heed when you come from Cabo de Sumbor from the coast of China towards the land of japon, although you see not the Islands aforesaid, leave not your course of North-east until you be upon the coast of japon, for although you fall by the Haven of Arima, which is twelve miles from Vmbra, you need not care, for in those places you have very good Havens. By the Haven of Arima aforesaid, there lieth an Island (somewhat nearer the North than the South) called Cabexuma, which on the inside hath a very good Haven, where you may lie and Traffic freely. And if from thence you desire to run further inward, then hold your course North Northeast, and North-east and by North, wherewith you shall come to a Haven called Cochinochy, lying in the Kingdom of Arima, and departing from Cabexuma, you shall run along by the Northpart of the land, about seven or eight miles, whereby you shall come right against Cochinochy, which is a better haven than Vmbra, because therein the Ships may anchor at pleasure, and before you come near this Haven, many Ships and Barks will come aboard you ship, which will freely bring you in, and you need not fear the creak of Arima, for the old Pilots were in doubt thereof, because they knew it not so well as I, for that I have sailed all within and about it with a Foist, with trouble enough. Right against Cochinochy, lieth another very good Haven, called Oxy, belonging to the King of Bungo, where you may freely traffic. You need not fear the entry of Arima for that besides the havens aforesaid wherein you may lie safely, there will many foists and Barks come and board you Ship, that will bring you whether you will, and help you to your desire. You must likewise understand, that along by the coast of China you need not fear any thing, for it is all fair and good ground, keeping without all the Islands, for if you go between them, you should hardly get out again to your desire: therefore it is best for you to keep without them, running along by them, and so there is no fear: for it is all fair way, as well to the Island Firando as to the Haven of Vmbra, only that Firando lieth seven or eight miles Northward from the Hook or Point of Trees, and being there, you shall presently see Firando, and in putting forward to it, you find a Varella, that is a mark of a sharp stony hill: & than you shall govern yourself as aforesaid, for than you may presently perceive it, being a very high land, which stretcheth East Northeast, & West Southwest, in the middle way having many small Islands, with channels between them, thereby to run from the one side to the other: but if you will go from the Island of Cabexuma to Vmbra, you must always keep close to the land, for in the Island of Diamonds, or pointed Island, there is another very good haven, where (as soon as you are in sight thereof) many Barks and Foists will board you, and so bring in your Ship. The havens in those countries, are these that follow as well in the Land of japon, as the Islands lying about it: whereof in this description I have already made mention. First in the Island of Cabexuma, there is a very good Haven, also Cochinochy lying in the Kingdom of Arima is a better Haven. The Haven of Oxy right against Cochinochy, is also a better Haven. In the Island called O Ilha do Diamond, that is, the Island of the Diamond, because of the sharp pointed Rock, there is likewise a very good Haven, which is part of the Land of Vmbra, also the Haven of Vmbra is a good Haven. The 35. Chapter. A short description of the course from Macau in China to japon, and the Island Cabexuma to the Haven of Langasaque or Nangasache, which at this day is most frequented of the Portugese's: with all the courses and situations, by an expert Pilot, with a declaration of the winds called Tuffon. AS soon as you are past the Island of Ilha do Leme, which lieth as you come out from Macau, then hold your course East north-east, whereby you shall pass about the Island of Lamon, and if it be in the night time, you shall cast out your Lead, and find two and twenty and three and twenty fathom deep with shells and black sand on the ground, and then you are right against the Riffe, and when you are passed it, you shall find white and small sand. Then holding your course North-east, and North-east and by East, always keeping from the coast of Chinchon as much as you may, for the best way is to run in the middle of the channel, as far from the Island of fishers as from the coast of Chincheo. And if you go nearer the Island of Fishers called A Ilha does pescadores, you shall find less depth, and therefore you must look to your course, and when you are passed the Island Lamao, cast out your Lead, because of the Island of fishers. And if in those countries you have a storm with the winds called Tuffon, and come from the North-east parts, then hold your course to Seaward as much as you may to shun the coast, for the wind without doubt will be southeast, which is right upon the coast, whereby it lieth right against you: and if it driveth you not upon the coast, than it were best for you to strike all your sails, and take them in, and so lie driving, until the wind come South, and then to follow on your course again. I give you this counsel, because that for the space of two years one after the other, I have been in those countries with storms of the winds called Tuffon, so that one voyage we were almost cast away, by seeking to put unto the coast. Now to understand the meaning of this word Tuffon, it is a Chinish word, which the Portugese's also do hold without altering the same, and signifieth a storm or Tempest, which you commonly find in those voyages from China to japon. If you fail of it at sometime, it is not often, it cometh and beginneth from one point, and so runneth with a continual storm almost about all the points in compass, blowing most stiffly, whereby the poor Sailors have work enough in hand, and in such sort, that not any storms throughout all the oriental Indieses is comparable unto it, wherefore it is necessary to look well to it, and to choose your times, that by calms suddenly you be not unadvisedly overtaken, as every man that hath sailed those ways, can sufficiently show you, and every one or most part of them have found it to be so. When you are right against the Island A Ilha Fermosa, then run North-east, by the which course you shall go right upon the strait of Arima, which is a good way: and as soon as you find ground on the loof side, and have seventy five fathom water, than you shall go right upon the middle of the Island of Meaxuma, and having less depth, than your course is not good, but of force you must seek another course to sail the better, but being too loofeward, it is good, especially when you see the Island Sancta Clare, which is a small Island: on the North-east side thereof having two or three Cliffs: and somewhat farther forward, the Island Co●aquyn which is very great, being divided into three parts. I have passed by the land side thereof, which is a very good way, and there you need not fear any thing, but only certain stones that lie along by the Island, which you may easily perceive, for the Sea breaketh upon them. You must hold your course along by it, leaving the stones on the larboard side, about the length of the shot of a Base from you: and when you are passed them, then keep aloof as much as you may inward to Sea, thereby to shun three Islands or Cliffs which lie on the other side right over against the thick and great Land, for between them and it, it is all full of riffs. And therefore your best course is to run to Seaward from the Island of Coiaquyn, in the middle way from the aforesaid great thick Land (that lieth before the Islands or Cliffs of the riffs) lieth the Haven of Amacusa, which is very great, where the Créeke of Arima beginneth. From thence North North westward from you, you shall presently see the Island of Cabexuma. When you are right against Cabexuma, somewhat beyond it, you shall see six Islands or Cliffs which you shall pass on the Sea side, and then Eastward, and East and by North you shall see the Island called Ilha does Cavallos, or of Horses, which on the Sea side hath a great hovel, and on the other side towards the Island of Firando two Cliffs lying along by the coast, which show like two Ships under sail. Also further forward towards Firando, there is two flat Islands lying along the coast, called the Islands of Resting as, that is, the Islands of riffs. If when you come out of the Sea, you have cause to anchor▪ before you put into the Haven, being by the Islands or Cliffs, than put out new Cables, making them fast, that you lose not your anchors, for there it is very deep and sharp. Being right against the aforesaid six or seven Islands or Cliffs, then run right upon the Island Does Cavallos, and when you are by it, that is, inward of the point. You shall along by the Island see a Sand above the water, all the other Islands and Cliffs that you shall see shall lie on the lareboord side, which is upon the side of the Island Facunda, and so you shall run till you enter into the Haven of Langasaque, having nothing to fear, then that you see before your eyes: for there you have both Sea and ground, as it is upon the coast of Spain. The 36. Chapter. A voyage made from Macau in China to the haven of Langasaque or Nangasache in the Island of japon in the ship called the S. crus, the captain being a Portugal called Francisco Pais, and the Gunner Dericke Geritson of Enchuisen in the year of our Lord 1585. written by the Pilot of the same ship. 1585. THe fift of july Anno 1585. upon a Friday in the morning we set sail from the point that lieth right against the Cloister of S. Francis, minding to run to Loofeward from a round Island or cliff, lying East Southeast from thence: but because the wind was so scant, we could not do it, so that we were forced to drive, so to get through the Channel of Lanton as we did. The depth that we found therein was from five to six fathom water, and that was close by the round Island that lieth to Seaward from the Island of Lanton, and from thence forward it beginneth to be deeper, being eighteen & twenty fathom, and that depth we found till we were without the Island called A Ilha de Leme, that is the Island of the Harquebus. This Island of Lanton, as you make towards it, hath a point, where the wind fell very scarce, in such manner, that we could hardly keep of an Island, lying on the left hand of the channel if the stream had not been so strong, that it drove the ship overthwart to Loofeward, otherwise we had endured great labour and trouble to pass through the channel, because that towards night we were about four miles from the Island Ilha do Leme, the course we held that night was East and East and by South, because we had a sharp wind, having twenty and six and twenty fathom deep muddy ground, about sun rising we saw right before us the Island of Branco, or the white cliff: and because of the depths aforesaid we guessed that we were about half a mile beyond it. The sixth of july being Saturday, we could not take the height of the sun, because it was right over our heads, having a Southeast and South Southeast wind, with very hot weather by day, but by night it was somewhat colder, we held our course East Northeast, East, and east and by North, as the wind blewe, and about noon we found five and twenty and seven & twenty fathom water with small black sandy ground, being in sight of land, and at Sun rising we saw the Land of Lamon, which is a long flat land like a Table or plain field: on the East Northeast side having a thin point of Land reaching inward to the Sea, and on the West south-west side there runneth out another thin point of sand into the sea, and hard by against the thickest part thereof, you see the form of a white place which is the Island of Lamon, to Seaward whereof lieth three Cliffs. Lying at the end of the Riffe of the Island of Lamon, there we call forth our Lead, and found 27 fathom water, with small, white and some black sand with small shells among it, being about seven or eight miles from the land. The seventh of july being sunday, we had a calm, and sometimes (but not much) Southeast and South Southeast winds, holding our course East Northeast, north-east, and North-east and by North, at 24 and 26 fathom water: and as soon as we had past the Island of Lamon, we presently had small thin white sand upon the ground with some shells, being in the morning about seven miles from the land of Chincheo, and saw the Island that is like the Island called Ilha does Lymoins, that is, the Island of lemons, lying by Mallaca, and somewhat further we saw a thin Land, with a sharp point standing upon it, which is said to be a Varella do Chinchon, that is, the mark or Rock of Chinchon being upon the eight day, which was monday, the next night following we had a calm, wherewith the wind came North, being somewhat cold, with some showers of rain: but with a Southeast wind we had no rain, yet in the night time we had two claps of thunder out of the Southeast, with lightning out of the Southeast and North parts. The ninth being Tuesday, we had the height of the sun at 23 degrees and ½. in the night having had the wind East Southeast with a good gale, and all night we lay driving without sails, with an East and East Southeast winds, and a good gale, casting out our Lead, and found twenty and four & twenty fathom deep, once having eighteen fathom, where we found small white Sand with some shells. In the morning very early we had a north wind, wherewith we wound eastward, having nothing but the Foukesaile and the Mizzen up, until evening, and at the depths aforesaid we took in our sails, minding to drive: the next day we saw land, which we had seen the day before, and it lay Northward from us, and half a point North and by West. The eleventh being Thursday we took not the height of the Sun, because we lay driving without sails, with an East, and East Southeast winds, the waves coming Southeast, our Ship winding North-east: this was by night, but by day we had a North-east, and north Northeast wind, in such manner, that sometime we kept on the one side, and sometimes on the other, as wind and weather served, at twenty and four and twenty fathom deep, small white sand, and sometimes eighteen fathom: the night before we had much lightning out of the West and South parts, being the thirteen day of the new moon, and the day before we had the height of the Sun at 23 degrees and ½. The land we saw we could hardly discern, but we supposed it to be the land we had seen the other day. The twelfth day being Friday, we took not the height of the Sun because we lay driving without sails, with an East Southeast wind in the night time, and in the day we had it northeast, at twenty and four and twenty fathom deep, and sometimes eighteen fathom, with small thin white sand, the ground at four and twenty fathom, being somewhat greater sand, with some she is: when it began to be day, we were as we thought about five or six miles from the land, and the night before we had much lightning round about us, and in the morning some showers of rain without wind, the sky being thick and close, whereby it seemed the weather would change. About evening we had a Southeast wind, presently changing South Southeast, whereupon we let fall our sails, holding our course northeast, and North east and by East, and also East Northeast, but most part Northeast, so that the depths began to be greater, and were five and thirty fathom, with small white sand, the Moon as then being at the full, and the waves always running out of the Southeast, and with that wind we sailed for the space of five days together. The thirteenth being Saturday, we took the height of the Sun at four and twenty degrees, that night running East Northeast till morning, then sailing East and East, and by north, and found w● had sailed twenty miles, being eight miles from the coast of China, and in the morning we saw land upon the other side, the ground on that side was white, thin, and some black sand, and about sun setting we cast out out Led, and found five and thirty fathom deep, with very fine black sand. The fourteenth being sunday, we took the height of the sun, being scarce five and twenty degrees, having a south-west wind with very good weather, holding our course North-east, and North-east and by North, all that night at seven and thirty fathom deep, with very thin sand, & some black muddy ground, and at the last watch in the morning we found muddy ground at the same depth of ●7 fathom, mixed with black sand, and when day began to appear, we saw Land, being part of the coast of ●hina, being about four, five, or six miles from it, and we discovered the Lagarto with the two sisters, that is, the cockodril Islands so called, and so we cast out our Lead, and found two and forty fathom deep muddy ground, and somewhat sandy, and the same day also we saw the Island Fermosa lying by Lequeo Pequeno, or little Lequeo, and then the wind seemed as though it would have blown fuller. The fifteenth day being Monday, we took the height of the sun at 25 degrees and 1/●. and in the night we had the wind North, with very good weather, running about to the northwest, and we ran East north-east, North-east & North-east to east, & when it began to be day, we saw land, being the end of the Island Fermosa, or the fair Island, which is a long and low land, broken or rend in the middle, which seemeth to be a breach, but it is nothing else but as I said before: and presently after eastward we saw another higher land, which is jands called Ilhas does Re●s Magos, that is, the Island of the three Kings: we passed along by about 7. or 8. miles from them, and that night we had 34 fathom deep, and desiring to know what depth we found, being in sight of the land aforesaid, we found above 40 fathom, the aforesaid land lying east Southeast from us, being muddy ground▪ that day we had a sharp wind of the Monson, but it held no longer then till evening, and then it was calm again, and so held till morning, and then we had it Northwest, so running about from the West till it came Southwest, and continued till night, and then it was calm, being Tuesday. The sixteenth being in sight of the Islands aforesaid, the same day we had the height of the Sun at 26 degrees, less ½. degree, and the end of the great Island lay east and east and by south from us, and the little Island east southeast. This little Island is higher on the south south-west side, then on the South-west side, and the point or hook of the south-west part, hath a breach or rent, to the which, the nearer you approach, the greater it seemeth. This Island is very high in the middle, and descendeth downward towards the end. The North-east point is lower than the southeast, so that it maketh as it were a tongue sticking out, which is very low. From thence East Northeastward are certain Islands showing like cliffs. The depth in that place is five and twenty fathom muddy ground. Wednesday being the seventeenth, we had a North Northeast wind, and then it came northeast, and began to blow so stiff, that we were forced to strike all our sails, letting the ship drive all that day Southeastward, and by night we willed the man at the helm to steer northwest, and about morning the wind began to blow so stiff with so great waves, that we were forced to go with half our foukesaile, with all our cords well bound & made fast, and the storm or Tuffon was so great, that we were forced to bind all that we had on board, else it was presently stricken in pieces. This Tempest began first North Northeast, and so ran about till it was North Northwest. At the departure whereof it was so boisterous, that the waves seemed to touch the clouds. This was upon Thursday, being the two and twentieth day of the new Moon: the next night following the wind came west, but because as then the Sea ran very high, we let not our sails fall, but in the morning we had the wind south-west, and then we let fall our sails, minding to follow on our course with great joy throughout our ship, thinking certainly we had the winds of the Monson, but towards night it was calm again, and then we had a North wind, holding our course eastward, but not long after it was altogether calm, notwithstanding the waves ran out of the South, so that about two of the clock we had the wind southeast, wherewith we hoist sails, running north-east, and North-east and by North, and when it began to be day, we saw the Island called Does Reys Magos (that is, the three kings) lying South about ten or twelve miles from us, and there I found the height of the sun to be 26 degrees and ⅔. being the one and twenty day of the Moon. The day before we saw the Island Fermosa, which is a very high Land, and seemeth to reach unto the clouds, & there we had five and forty and fifty fathom water muddy ground. On friday at sun rising we cast out our lead, and found one and twenty fathom with black sand. The first token that we had of the aforesaid Tempest, was a small Rainbow close by the Horizon on the Sea side, being a fair russet colour, with two other greater Rainbows: whereof the point or end showed almost like the cloud called Olhos de Bois (that is, Cat's eyes) which are small clouds, which at the first show, seem no greater than a man's fist: about the Cape De bona Speranza, which by the sailors that sail in the East Indian Seas are much marked, for they are tokens of sudden falling Tempests and cruel storms, as in the voyage from India to Portugal is already partly declared: wherefore it is good to be advertised thereof, the better to look unto it, and to watch for them, to the which end I thought it not from the matter to speak of them in this place. But returning unto our matter: I advertise you that when you are come into those countries, as long as the wind cometh out of the North, and so South-west, you are to make no account thereof, for it will presently be North Northeast and East, but when it is calm, than you shall have a Southeast wind, and then South and Southwest, which are the monson and winds of that time, but if it begin again to be calm, it may so fall out that it will be East Southeast, but it will presently be southeast again, with fair weather, which we also found in this Monson of july, Anno 1585. 〈◊〉 Dom. 1585. Monday the two and twenty day, we took the height of the Sun at 27. degrees and 1/●. having a Southeast & Southsoutheast wind, with good weather, and held our course North-east, and as I guessed we had run (after we had fair weather and wind) about two and twenty miles, being from the land of China from the Cape called Sumbor about 12. miles, being yet about an hundred miles from the Island of Meaxuma, and that day we cast out the Lead and found 55. and 57 fathom water, and saw many black and white Sea fowls that held thereabout, the black birds by the Portugese's being called Alcatrases. The three and twenty being Tuesday, we had very good weather, in such manner, that at that mealetide we sailed about fifteen miles, being about twelve miles from the firm land of China. In the morning we cast out the Lead, and found one and fifty fathom, with white and black sand. Wednesday being the four and twenty day, we had the height of the Sun at 29. degrees, with an East Southeast, and Southeast wind and good weather, holding our course North-east, and North-east and by North, and sometimes (but not much) North-east and by East. I made my account to have holden North-east and by North, and so to have sailed 16. miles. being yet from the Island of Meaxuma about 70. miles, lying North-east from us, and there we cast out our Lead and found 49. fathom deep, sandy & muddy ground▪ Thursday the 25. of july, we took not the height of the Sun, because we lay driving without sails with an East wind, winding Southward, and so held till the 26. day, and drove Westward, finding two fathom less in our depth. The 26. we wound Northward without sails, yet not long after we let our foresail fall, (but wholly against my mind) but only at the importunate desire of the Chinish Pilate, saying that the same day we should have the wind larger, which was not so, but clean contrary, so that all the way we made in that sort was more troublesome unto bs: wherefore it is better for such as find themselves in those countries of 29. degrees, to stay for Southeast winds, and then to run North Northeast, Northeast, and North-east and by North, because the waters and streams run very strong towards Liampo, and when you are under 30. and 31. degrees, having a South Southeast wind, than you shall have great labour and much pain to get the Island Meaxuma, for so it happened unto us, because the wind was so strong, that we could bear but our foresail, and half the main topsail, as also because the Sea ran very high and hollow, and put our ship out of course, and that the streams ran Southeast: This is about 25. or 30. miles from the Island Meaxuma. But as soon as the wind came full, whereby we ran East, East and by North, and East Northeast, at 40. and 34. fathom water, the ground being very small sand, holding as much Eastward as possibly we might, and sometimes east and by South, whereby we began to have more depth, yet very slowly, that it would have wearied us if the ship had gone hardly forward, but because the water ran very hollow, whereby the ship was not very well stéered (wherein we only put our trust) at the last we had 50. and 60. fathom deep muddy ground, and then ●0. and 75. fathom with small thin sand, and a little after that we had 80. fathom deep, but I believe that chanced because the Led hung somewhat backward. At that casting, the ground was somewhat greater sand, and because (as we made account) we were near unto the Island Meaxuma, I presently took in the main toy and myssen in, contrary to the opinion of some Pilots, every quarter or ●atch in the night, cast the Lead continually ou●, and presently in the morning we hoist the main topsail up again, & sailing so for a little time, we saw land, which was part of the Island Meaxuma, although other Pilots that were in the ship said it was the Island of Guoto, but therein they were as perfect, as in all the rest of their judgements. This Island of Meaxuma in the first discovery had a high slope land, lying lowest to the South-west, and when you are right against it, at the end thereof you find a Cliff which showeth like a Fortress, it was told us, that not far from that Cliff there lieth a Cliff under the water, whereupon the water breaketh. This Island of Meaxuma showeth like three or four Islands, whereof the first on the South-west side showeth as I said before, having on the top or uttermost part thereof two round Hovels like women's breasts, or like a saddle: the other two Islands or likeness thereof, in the middle way, are like great Cliffs, with many rocks and crags sticking out like Organ pipes, and the other Island or likeness of an Island lying North-east, showeth like a very long, but not over high cliff, we ran along by the Island holding our course North-east, about two miles beyond it, and when we left Meaxuma because the wind ran Southeast, than we ran North-east, Northeast and by East, and East Northeast, and in the morning they said that we had the length of the land of Amacula, and being to Leeward we espied a great thick land, lying close by the Island Cabexuma. This Island Cabex●ma is long flat land, very smooth, on the North side having a Cliff: this was the last of july, and the same day we entered into the Haven of Langas●que, which is the Haven & place where at this day the Portugese's have their most traffic. The 37. Chapter. The right marks of the Island Meaxuma, as well by the depths as by the opening of the land, with an advertisement how you shall put into the Haven, and in the Road of Langasaque or Nangasache in the land of I●pan. FIrst, when you are at seventy five fathom water, you must go right upon the middle of the Island, and seeing Land at that depth, it will be a high plain steep land, but not very great, on the uppermost part thereof having two p●ps, and when you go near it, you shall presently see another long land, being flat and even on the top, between them both having two great cliffs, with many small, lying together, which you sail close by: about two miles from them, this Island on the South-west side hath a Cliff, and a little further to Seaward from it, there lieth another stony Cliff under the water, whereon the Sea breaketh, and at the North-east end it hath another Island or cliff. You must understand, that coming to japon, and finding more depths then aforesaid, and seeing land, than it is not the Island of Meaxuma, but rather the Island called Sancta clara, & if you find less depth than seventy fathom, than it is Meaxuma, but than it will be on the Starrebord side. The Island of Meaxuma lieth under 31. degrees and 2/●. He that desireth to go to Langasaque, passing from this Island about two miles Eastward from it, he must run North-east, and North-east and by East, having a full wind: but if you sail by the wind, you must rather sail East Northeast, & with this course you shall get the Island of Cabexuma, and you shall likewise see the hills of Amacusa, as also some small cliffs lying right over against Cabexuma, which you shall presently see: and if you desire to be put into Langasaque, than you must hold along by the cliffs aforesaid to Seaward from them: and being past those cliffs, you shall presently see the end of the Island does Cavallos, or of Horses, which on the Northwest end hath certain Pine trees: you must put towards that point, and when you are right against it, you shall not presently fall upon it, because of the billows that come from over the Island Caffury, which commonly you find most certainly in that place: and when you find those billows, you shall put forward as much as you think convenient, thereby to put into the middle of the Haven, and when you are in the middle than you may freely put on, for there you have no cause of fear, and when you begin to put in, than you shall presently see the water break upon the stony place, which lieth as far as to the middle way of the Island does Cavallos, so that in the entry of Langasaque there is nothing else to do, then only to run in through the middle thereof, till you be in the Road, where you must anchor, having four fathom, and ½. and five fathom water, which is when a tree that is right against the great and principallest Church is even with the top of the Church, and you over against it, than you are at the right place, and it is a very good place to anchor in: but when you are hard by the point of land that cometh right from the Church, you must take care to keep on the left hand, thereby to shun a Riffe of sand that cometh from the same point, and so anchor as aforesaid. And if you chance by night to pass by the Cliffs aforesaid, and desire to anchor by them at forty fathom, (as some ancient Pilots advise you) in danger of an East wind, than my opinion is, that you were better run between them and the Island Cabexuma, and certain Islands that lie in the rank of the Islands does Cavallos, which is a very broad and good channel of twenty fathom deep, and there you may wind and lavere from one bough to the other as he will, so that you may anchor there at twelve or fifteen fathom which you will, upon a flat and even ground hard by the Island Caffury, whereby you are safe from the north-east to the Southeast and South, being in more safety and better assured in the morning to set fail, between the islands does Cavallos and Caffury till you be in, which is a very good channel of ten fathom deep: you need but pass right through the middle, and to be the better assured, you may send a boat in before you, which shall lie there where the river is narrowest, thereby to serve you for a Bay or Sea-mark. The 38. Chapter. The right course to sail from the Island Meaxuma to the Haven of Cochinochy and to Facunda, with the situation of the Places. WHen you see the Island Meaxuma, go within a mile and a half or two miles near it, or somewhat closer if you will, for there you need fear nothing but what you see before you, and desiring to sail from thence to Cochinochy then you shall hold your course East, and East and by North, still keeping Eastward, whereby you shall come to the Créeke of Arima: and if it be by night, and that you desire to know when you are by the land, than cast your Lead continually out, and being at forty fathom, than you are about two miles and a half or three miles from the land, and being in the mouth of the Créeke, you shall find hard and great Sand: and when you are at forty fathom, you may anchor if the weather be fair: if you think it be falling water, and so stay till it be day, for there the stream runneth very strong into the Sea, your Lead will direct you what you shall do. If it be day, you shall presently see the Land of Cabexuma, to seaward from you, lieth a Cliff which showeth like a Sail. This Cliff you can not see, but when you are close by the point: to Léewarde from this point Northward, lieth certain stony cliffs, but it is not best for you that you see them when you go to Cochinochy, because they lie to Léewarde, as I said before. And when you see land, which is at forty fathom water, than you shall presently discover the Créeke of Arima, as also the point of Cabexuma on the one side, and the land of Amacusa and Xiquy on the other side, which is very high. This land lieth on the South side, and Cabexuma on the North side, when you see the point of Cabexuma, go within a mile of it, because of a stony cliff which lieth in the mouth of the creak, holding your course close by Cabexuma, about a mile and a half from it, or along by the land of Amacusa. If the wind within this Créeke be sharp, then stay until the flood cometh, which shall bring you where you desire to be, and being there you have Cochinochy right before you, where you shall have Barks and Scutes great store to bring you in. He that desireth to go to Facunda, must hold his course East Northeast, and North-east and by east, and when you are close by the land, you shall find the depths aforesaid, and being to Léewarde from Cabexuma, you shall there find hard ground and if it be right over against the mouth of the creak, you shall have sandy ground, as aforesaid: and when you see the point of Cabexuma, then make towards the land, and by the land about a mile distant you shall see certain stony cliffs, by the which you shall hold your course to Seaward from them: by these first stony cliffs lieth a round Island, with a tree in it, and somewhat beyond this Island with one Tree, there is another Island, stretching Northwest and Southeast, called Ilha does Cavallos, that is, the Island of Horses: you must make towards the Island to a point of land that lieth out on the North side of the same Island. This Island on the Northwest side hath for a mark certain Pine trees; when you are close by the aforesaid Northerly point, then from thence hold East Northeast, till you put in where you shall find a creak, and right over against this Island North Northeast, lieth a sharp pointed Hovel, reaching to seaward, which you must shun, for half a mile from thence forward lieth two stones, which you shall presently see when you enter into the creak, going within an Island or cliff which will be East North-east from you: you must put towards it about the length of the shot of a great piece, and so run along by it till you be in, and within on the right hand upon the land you shall see certain downs, and on the left hand a grove, having on the sea side as you pass along many stones like Kefell stones. Right over against this Island on the left hand, lie the two stones aforesaid, which you can not see: then with an ebb of a spring tide, and running in after this manner, you shall see a cross standing upon a point of land: and right over against this cross is the Road, and from this cross Eastward there is a very good Haven, where you must make your ship fast and sure from the South side, that is, the Haven of Facunda. The 39 Chapter. An instruction of the course out of the Haven of Langasaque or Nangasache, to the cape de Sumber, in the coast of China, where the Portugese's are resident. SAiling out of the haven of Lang●saque to China having a North wind, if you have cause to anchor, below by the three Islands or cliffs, being right over against the Island does Cavallos, on the side of Facunda, then anchor there along, for it is deep enough all over, as I with my lead have proved: there you shall stay the first night, that in the morning very early you may have the wind from off the land, wherewith you shall set sail, losing as much as you can until you be gotten about the Island does Cavallos, for because we did it not (being in the ship of Tristan Vaas da Veiga) we were in danger not to have been able to get about the Island. Being past the Island does Cavallos, you must hold your course West, West and by South, and West Southwest, and if the wind be big then put not towards the Island Guoto, for that there at that time you have certain South winds, which I know for certain, because I have been there at other times, in the ship of Manoel Travassos' in great trouble, because it is cross wind right upon the coast, and there you have no ground, as also by night not to fall by the Pannellas (which are called Pots, and by some Cliffs) wherefore your best course is to run to Loofeward from the Island Meaxuma. Along by the South-west side of the Island of Meaxuma lieth a cliff, from thence forward you shall hold your course West Southwest, although you have the wind scant, yet you may hold that course, for that being half way from the gulf to the coast, you shall without doubt find the wind large enough. In this way (keeping well to Loofewarde) about 35. or 40. miles from the Cape de Sumbor, you shall find a Bank of 35.37. and 38. fathom deep, which (by such as knew it not) might be taken for the ground of the land of China. Being past this Bank, you find more depths, but when after that the depths begin to lessen, then look to yourself, for then most certainly you are by the land. When you see the land of Sumbor, then in the night time you mus● run South Southwest, and by day make towards the land, thereby at times to keep somewhat to Seaward from the land, thereby to shun the cliffs called As duas Irmaas, or the two Sisters, which lie far inward to sea, as also the Island called do Baboxyn, which lieth cross over against you, being distant from the firm land to Seaward about four or five miles, stretching Northwest and Southeast, you run along all the coast of Sumbor Northeast and Southwest, and somewhat North-east and by North, and South-west and by South: When you are passed the aforesaid Island of Baboxyn, then run the course aforesaid for the space of three or four miles, and from thence West Southwest, whereby you shall come to the Island of Chinchon, where you shall find sand upon the ground (which in all the coast aforesaid you can not find) with 18. or 20. fathom water. From the Island of Chinchon to the Island of Lamon you shall hold your course South-west, or as you think good, and when you are right against the Islands or Cliffs called Os Ilhas de Ruy Lobo, you shall find upon the ground great sand with shells, and from thence to Lamon, which is twelve miles, you find the like: by the Island of Lamon you find shells, and black sand, with oyster shells among it: if you chance to be in that country by night, run not under 22. fathom water, for that along by the riffs it hath 21. and 22. fathom with shells and black sand upon the ground, and run still South-west, without leaving that course, and if it chance before day or by day to be close air (running South-west) and that you have small thin white sand, than you are by Lamon, and then hold your course west Southwest, and so you shall go right upon the middle of the Island called Ilha Branco, and from thence run West unto the Channel, whereby you go up to Macau. The 40. Chapter. Another voyage made from the Haven of Langasaque to Macau, which is from japon to China, with certain descriptions and accidents which happened by the Island Gu●to, with the description of the havens thereof, accomplished in the year of our Lord 1584. by a Portugal Pilot. DEparting out of the Haven of Langasaque the 25. of February, Anno 1584. 15●●. and passing along by the Island of Facunda, we had a West Northwest wind, so that we ankered: the 26. day it began to blow so stiff, that we were constrained to put for harbour into Tomache. The 27. we hoist anchor, with an East Northeast, and an East wind, and clear weather, and coming to the Island does Cavallos, we had a South wind again, wherewith we made back again to Facunda, from whence we set out. The eight and twenty being Friday, we set sail again from Facunda, it being three days before the new Moon, with a cold East Northeast wind. And being within three miles of the Island does Cavallos, we had a Southeast wind, running on the South-west bough all that day, and the wind began to be somewhat cool, and then we guessed it to be three or four miles beyond the Island of Guoto, but in the morning watch we first espied the point of Guoto, being a hovel lying on the Northwest part thereof, there we had a sharp wind and it began to rise high out of the South Southeast, as much as the ship with all his Sails might hear: we let the main sail up, the better to make way, and not long after the wind came about to the South-west, and West Southwest, with two thunder claps, and much lightning, wherewith we hoped it would have been still weather, but it was not so, whereat we wondered. On Saturday by day light we were right over against the point of Guoto, almost upon the end of the Island that lieth Northwest, being about two miles from the land, having with the West Northwest wind, a cross storm, with the waves of the sea out of the south-west, which were very hollow and mighty high, which tossed the ship monstrously, although the wind was over much, but only the force and power of the waves troubled us most, which fell behind at our stern, for there we found a very strong stream, and because the wind was slack, we doubted we should not get above the point of the Island, neither from the one side nor from the other, for we had the cross upon the Island. At the end of this Island we saw another Island of low land, being about two miles long, and was about a mile and a half distant from Guoto, some of our ship affirmed that there was a very good Haven, running in on the one side and coming out again at the other: wherefore we determined to put in there for our better security, as we did, and we ran in West Northwest. At the entry there of it hath a very great hovel with two cliffs lying on the Southeast side of the point. The Island that lieth without, is on the left hand till you be about a mile from it, between which and the land, it is all fair: you may boldly go as near the Island of Guoto as you will, and need fear nothing but what you see before you: The entry of the Haven reacheth Northwest and Southeast, having within it a great Bay, which is all over very deep from twenty to thirty fathom water, and nothing therein to be feared. From this Island to the land you have all over the depths of thirty and forty fathom, and yet I have tried it from the half way to Guoto, and found eighteen to thirty fathom, with sand and shells on the ground, in some places having good ground: inward in some places you have Sand, and in some places muddy ground: from thence we were brought out again by Scutes about half a mile forward, so that after that the North wind served well to save us, and to drive us forward from the point lying on the South side, which hath certain stony Cliffs, we ran along the land Northeastward, and it fell out well for us, for thereby we had twenty or thirty Scutes of the Island, that for 20. taes Chi●● money holp us well, and pulled out our beat: we likewise gave them 50. taes, and about 20. depesas to have our ship ankered and stayed, but they asked us 30●. whereupon we sent one of our Portugese's on land, whom they held for a p●w●e, although by certain practice we got him out of their hands again: and when after that we seemed to complain, they cried us mercy, and sent him back again, although we understood very well, that they were our friends by force, as perceiving they had no means to hurt us, because we could help ourselves without them: but we marked so much in them, that if they could have hindered us, they would not have failed to do it, or else we must have stopped their mouths with money. There we understood that the Island of Guoto hath six or seven Havens that are very good, running from the one side to the other, but the Haven aforesaid had no issue, but so much pleasure it did us, that there we had the new Moon, which was the first of March, and the third day we set sail again, it being Shrove Tuesday, with a North Northeast wind, and a very clear morning: and being out, we held our course South-west, following on our course, wherewith we saw the Island Meaxuma and the Pannellas, or Pots, lying South Southeast from us, we tell right upon the middle thereof. Those Panellas' are two small stones, and Meaxuma is an Island, and when you are Northeast and Southwest right over against it, it showeth like two or three Islands, whereof that on the North-east side is long, and the greatest, and showeth as if it had a Cliff: This Island is the longest but not very high, and that in the middle is small, having three sharp points like Organ pipes, with a Cliff likewise lying Northeastward: The other Island on the South-west side is round and plain steep land showing higher than all the other, and seemeth to have Cliffs round about it. On the other side lie the Panellas' aforesaid, and although I said before they are but two stones, yet they are three, two standing together, and the other somewhat further from them, and lie with the Island Meaxuma Northwest, and Southeast. From thence forward we held our course to China and Macau, in such manner as I showed in another place, and hereafter once again I will declare. The 41. Chapter. Another voyage made out of the Haven of Langasaque from the Island of japon to Macau in China, in the Santacrus the Gunner being Diricke Geri●son of Enckehus●n in Ann. 1586. THE 20. of March we departed out of the Haven of Langasaque, it being the first day of the new Moon, upon a Thursday with a north-east and North Northeast wind, and by nine of the clock in the morning, we were as far as the Island does Cavallos, running West Southwest, and being two miles beyond the Island Does Cavallos, we had a calm, and then the wind came Northwest, in such sort, that we ran Southwest, and South-west and by west, and sometimes half a strike with a slack wind. The next day in the morning we saw the Islands of Corequyn and Guoto, and about eight of the clock in the forenoon, we saw the Island Meaxum●, so that we saw those three Islands all at once, and about twilight, we were east Southeast, and West Southwest, with the Island of Meaxuma, and so held our course South-west, having a hard North-east wind with rain, the air being very dark and close, yet the Racks came out of the South-west: Upon Sunday we cast out the Lead, and found somewhat more than forty fathom water, muddy ground, and was about forty miles from Meaxuma. This depth is a bank lying in the middle way between the Island Meaxuma and Cabo de Su●●bor, in the firm land of China. Upon monday the four and twentieth day we took not the height of the sun, because we saw it not, having so small a wind, that the ship might steer upright, and because we made little way, we cast out the lead, and found forty fathom muddy ground, this was at noon, and at night about sun setting we cast it out again, and foun● five and fifty fathom, whereby we perceived that we began to pass over a bank, at that time we had all one wind being North-east, and North northeast, with a good blast, and yet the clouds came southwest, and South southwest, so strong that they put us in fear, doubting the wind would be there, but we had certain men in our ship that had seen and found it so in that place, and yet no alteration, whereby they put us in some comfort, in such sort, that we followed on our course with that wind. Upon Tuesday at noon, we took the height of the Sun not full nine and twenty degrees, having not long before as I guessed, marked one point in the Card, and esteemed that we had sailed a hundred miles from the Haven of ●angasaque, but by the Sun it was not so. The six and twenty being Wednesday, we took not the height of the sun, because it was a close day, but we had a good North-east wind, and made good way, so that we seemed to make thirty miles ●n one mealetide, but I made account but of five and twenty miles, because we thought the ship sailed not over fast, that day we saw many Cuttle bones driving upon the water, & held our course South-west till morning, and because the wind began to be stiff, I thought it good to make towards the land to know it, therefore as day appeared we ran West till it was evening without knowing Land, by reason of the mistine●●e of the air, but by the depths & our guessing, we thought we were about 5 or 6 miles from the land, our depth was 37 fathom, and being towards night with cloudy weather, we ran south-west, and south-west and by south, all that night, and when day came being thursday we guessed to be over against the Lagarto or Crocodille (a cliff so called about five or six miles to Seaward from it, but we found it to be somewhat more. Thursday being the seven and twenty, as soon as day appeared, we ran●e West towards the Land, and about four of the clock in the afternoon, we saw the land, being the Islands Does Camaro●s that is, the Islands of Granata) those Islands are not too high: as soon as we saw them, we held our course South Southwest▪ and having sailed a little way, we saw another round Island called Ilha do B●box●●, which lay right before us, as soon as we saw it, we presently ran South to shun it, because we were not above a quarter of a mile from it, there we found so strong a stream and course of water which ran with us, that in short time we were two or three miles from the aforesaid Island, in such manner, that all that night we ran South, and South and by West, and South Southwest, and when the moon rose, we held our course south-west. The eight and twenty being Friday, about morning we began to run West Southwest, west, and west and by South, and at noon or thereabouts, we cast out the Lead, and found nine and twenty fathom muddy ground, and running so with that course for a little time, we saw land, but it was so close and misty, that we could not know it, but about two or three of the clock in the afternoon it began to clear up, and then we knew it to be the Island of Chinchon being North from us, and there we cast out the Lead, and found nineteen fathom water sandy ground, and not long after we saw the whole coast and firm Land of China, and so we ran all night at the depths of nineteen, twenty, and two and twenty fathom with so clear & bright a sky, that almost all the night we saw the coast, and when day began to appear, we were somewhat beyond the Islands called Ruy Lobo, and presently thereupon we saw the Island of Lamon, there we began to have certain storms, as I guess it is from Ilhas de Ruy Lobo, to the Island of Lamon ten miles, by the Island of Lamon we saw the water shin and burn to Seaward, in such sort, that we passed close by the Riffe: those that come from japon, must first pass by the Island, and then by the Riffe, this Riffe lieth North-east, & south-west, and is dangerous, for those that sail from Macau to japon, we ran about three miles from it with a strong north-east, and East Northeast wind, so that we made good way, whereby it seemed we made fifty miles in one meal tide, but the strength of the water and streams against us were so stiff, that we sailed but five and twenty miles in a mealetide. This strong stream and stiff water cometh (as we were informed) out of the River of Tancoan, and continueth till you be past the Island Branco, & being past it, the stream runneth presently towards the Island Ilha de Leme, which lieth close by Macau, from Lamon we ran West south-west, and in truth we found the way from Lamon to Ilha Branco, very short, for by night we struck all our sails, and so lay driving without sails, winding South-west, always at the depths of five and twenty and six and twenty fathom water, and at the midnight watch, we began to hoist up our main sail and our foukesaile, in that manner running West to get to twenty fathom deep, which is the middle of the channel where we must pass through, and in the morning we saw the Island Do Leme, (that is the Island of the harquebus) lying somewhat on the lareboord of us. This Island Do Leme, if you go east and West upon it, seemeth very small, and the deeper you are within the channel, the bigger it showeth, in the entry whereof on the right hand it hath two Islands or Cliffs, and from thence forward, the Islands begin to lie on a row till you come to Macau, as I said in another place. The 42. chapter. An instruction and large declaration of the course from the Island Firando in japon, to the coast of China, & the haven of Macau, with all the courses, situations, and stretchings of the same, done by a Portugal Pilot. HE that desireth to sail from the Island Firando, to Macau or Canton in China, as soon as he is out of the haven of Firando, if he hath time enough to get to the Island Guoto, he must presently sail forward, if not, he must anchor about a mile from Firando, at 28 fathom deep, where he may prepare himself, and make fast his boat, that the next day in the morning he may set sail. As soon as you are set out from Firando to follow on your course, you must run along by the land of Firando, till you be at the end thereof, and as you run south west, until you be by the land, you shall hold somewhat nearer southwest, and then on your West side there will be 3. or 4. Islands, and passing by the foremost of them southward, you shall presently see the channel that runneth between that Island and the Island Guoto, and through it you must pass. By this channel there lieth another Island, between the which and the Island Guoto you must likewise pass: when you are through and out of this Channel, and that the Islands westward from you, than you must run along by Guoto until you are passed it to seaward, so to keep on & further your course: and if in passing through the channel, the wind chanceth to be still, you may boldly anchor therein, close by the land of Guoto. In this Island Guoto are very good Havens, which pass through and through again, therefore it is not one Island, but divided into four parts. When you are two miles from Guoto, you must hold your course West Southwest, until you are passed the two Islands, one called Xuma, the other Meaxuma, which are eight miles distant from the Island of Guoto. Being past those Islands, you must run South-west, & nearer south from the aforesaid Islands, there is another Island called Meaxuma, which you must likewise pass by: by those Islands aforesaid, it is all fair way without any trouble, neither yet by the Island, this Island lieth under 31 degrees and 1/●. You must run between the Island, and the small Islands, and when you are passed them & the Island of Guoto, than you must run South-west, & south-west and to south. When you are passed this and the other Islands, running south-west as aforesaid, you shall go right upon the point of Cabo de Sumbor, which lieth on the coast of China under 28 degrees & ●/●. and if it be clear weather, & that you there desire to know the land, you may well do it, if not, then put not too near the coast, because of the many Islands that lie all along by it, for you must run outward from it, always keeping as far from it, as you think needful, that you may be free from it, and by night not to put in between it, for that all the coast from Cabo de Sumbor to Chinchon, is nothing but Islands. You must likewise see, that you put not too far inward to Sea to keep close to the winds that blow off the Land, and to Seaward you have the Islands of small Lequeo, called Lequeo Pequeno, and the Island of fishers, which are distant from the Firm land about twenty miles: if you have a clear night, you may well pass along by the Islands, yet with great foresight. The most dangerous Island upon that coast, is the Island of Camaroyns, which lieth to Seaward out from all the rest: I have passed twice between it and the Land, it is an Island that is divided in two parts, by a rent or breach that is in it. Four miles forward beyond this Island, lieth a small Island which is flat and even with the Sea, having certain stones lying Northeastward from it, but not many. If you chance to pass by it in the night time, you must be careful to avoid it, for it is flat and little without any trees, you must likewise shun the Island of Baboxyn, which likewise lieth outward into the Sea, in such sort, that when you fall upon it with good advise and warily, you may freely pass by it, for you need fear nothing then what you see before you. And when you are fifteen miles from Cabo de Sumbor, accounting from the point of the firm land, and not from the Islands lying by it, then you must hold your course South-west, and so run without all the Islands, whereby you shall be out of danger of the Island Lequeo Pequeno, also the time and the weather will show you what you should do when you are passed Lequeo Pequeno, or before, if it so fall out, you must seek to know the land, for it is necessary for you to see it, because of the Island Lamon, as also not to keep too far to Seaward. You run along by the coast from Sumbor to Chinchon Northeast and Southwest, and somewhat north-east and by North, and South-west and by South, but not much. And when you are right over against Chinchon, and that by marking the land, or by the height of the sun you know it, being four miles from the land, you must hold your course south-west, so to go without the Island of Lamon, and if you desire to pass within the Islands, you may well do it, for it is fair enough, and you need fear nothing: But if you fear to m●e Lamon, than it is better to run as aforesaid, for than you shall be far enough from the Riffe of Lamon, which is very dangerous. There you must have great foresight, for when you are past Lamon, than you must hold your course to the Island of Lanton. The Islands you see before you come to Lamon, are called, Os Ilhas de Ruy Lobo, that is, the Islands of Ruy Lobo, from the which, that which lieth North-east is the smallest, the other being somewhat greater: Upon the greatest are seen certain Bushes, from thence to Lamon are seven or eight miles, on the Sea side it is twenty fathom deep with shells on the ground, from thence you shall run south-west, and hold a little south-west and by South, and if it be in the day time, you shall presently see the Islands lying at the end of the Riffe of Lamon, from whence the said Riffe hath his issue, reaching a mile and a half or two miles with this course, you shall make good way, but if it be night, you must look well to yourself. And running the aforesaid course of South-west, you must keep to Seaward from the stones of Lamon, and do 〈◊〉 best to pass by in the day time, and 〈◊〉 you are passed the Island of 〈…〉 ●sently make towards the 〈…〉 pass along by it. From 〈…〉 15 miles from thence the co● of 〈…〉 land reacheth North-east and Southwest, and from thence East Northeast, and West southwest to the Island 〈◊〉 Branco, which lieth distant from the co●st about five miles, under 22 degrees and ●. right over against the creak of Fu●●da de Bona Ventura, that is, the creak of good fortune, you may pass close by the Island Branco, both on the sea side, as you think best, and being past that Island, 〈◊〉 the Islands of Canton lie on a raw: From this Island Branco to the Island De Sanchoan▪ are fifty miles. When you are past Ilha Branco, than you must run west Southwest, & from Branco to Macau are four and twenty miles, that is twelve miles before you enter into the channel that runneth between the islands: and twelve miles from thence to Macau, you shall seek to enter by the first channel you find, by the which lieth certain high round Islands, which will be on the North-east side of you, and on the Southside it hath two Islands, whereof one is very high and plain steep ground, on the sea side thereof having a stony cliff, and being over against those high bare Islands, on the Northside thereof you shall see a channel, which I never passed: but leaving the aforesaid Islands on your starboard, and so running South-west, you shall presently see the mouth of the channel which you must pass through, & although it showeth narrow, notwithstanding it is very good, for I have run into it by night: you must as I said before leave the great Island to seaward from you, and run in with the flood west, west and by north, and west Northwest, and so you shall go right to Macau, also the wind and weather will show you what you shall do. And when you come from japon, right over against the cape De Sumbor, being fifteen miles to seaward from it, than cast out your lead, and you shall find forty and five & forty fathom water muddy ground, with many streams of foul water, and when you see the land, than you must run along by it to the last Island of Chinchon, which lie eight miles into the sea, whereby you shall find boys of nets and fuycken with whings and Flags, which the fishermen of that Country have set up for marks. From thence to Chincheon are twelve miles. Right over against those boys with whings and flags upon them, lieth a town called Guara, from that Town forward you must hold towards the land, and to know the Sums, (which are Chinish carnels and Barks) used in those countries, they bear but one sail. Now to make toward the Land as you would, you must run West, you must likewise know that the Varella of Chinchon (that is, the bank or mark of Chinchon) is a high Land, lying along by the entry of Chinchon, on the Southeast side having a high land reaching south-west, stéeping downward, reaching over towards an Island lying three or four miles inward to Sea: along by the point of the Varella lieth an Island about a mile distant from it, from the which runneth a riff of sand, at low water being two fathom deep, reaching about the length of the shot of a great Piece, towards the other Islands abovesaid lying right over against the entry, which in length reacheth East and West, in the middle having a sharp Hill, and Southwestward the aforesaid land of Laylo runneth very low, being there, than you are close by it, and you have nothing else to do but pass about the point, and anchor at four fathom muddy ground: on the North-east side lie certain Islands, close by the Point of Laylo, and two miles to Seaward from it, you have twenty fathom water, the water of that country being very blue: from thence to Lamon, 3. or 4. miles from the land, you pass not above the depth of 18. or 20 fathom, and being past Chinchon towards Lamon, You shall find thin small sand upon the ground with some shells, & being right over against Chinchon, or towards the north-east, pou shall find muddy ground, with the same depth of 18 and 20 fathom, and right over against Lamon, you have some black sand upon the ground. The 43. Chapter. How you shall run in, out, and through the channel between the Islands and cliffs of Macau, with all the marks, signs, and tokens thereof, so to sail into the Haven of Macau. IF you desire to sail out of Macau, you must understand, that as soon as you hoist anchor in the road where the ships lie, which is right over against the Bulwark of Gaspar Borgies, you shall presently see in the North-east a white ulacke standing upon the hill, and presently after towards the East, you have two hovels, which with the Hill of the white ulacke make three. The second hovel which lieth in the middle, is bare & wholly discovered, appearing through the rocks & cliffs that lie upon the top of the field called Does Pa●anas, which is in the middle of the channel, being by the last houses of the town: and when you are right against the aforesaid houses, than you shall presently discover the 3. hovel, so that when you are right against the sandy point (lying close by the Varella) called Does Mandorins, than the said hovel is almost wholly uncovered, where you shall find four fathom and a half deep, with a full sea of a Spring tide, and as soon as you are passed the sandy Point, than you begin to find more depths, that is five and five fathom and a half, and running in that sort, you shall go right upon a broken land lying on the other side over against the Island called Ilha do Bugio, that is, the Island of sea Cats. When you are at the depths aforesaid, then southward from you, you shall see an opening called Enseada de Gonsato vaaz, which within it hath a hill on the east side, which showeth like an Island or cliff, and on the West side it hath two Points sticking out, and when those two Points are right over against each other, than you are in the middle of the channel, and you must be careful to see that they lie one right against the other, for by that mark you shall run in the deepest and best place, which is at 27 Spans of water, with a spring tide, as I have found it, in the time of the Monson, when you sail to japon, having an East wind, for with a North wind, you have less water there. Now to know when you are as far as the bank, you must understand, that Northward towards the Island Do Bugio, there lieth a stony cliff, which showeth like a hovel, which lieth most Northward of all the rest, & along by the strand it hath a cloven Rock with two Points, when you have the aforesaid stony Cliff like a hovel, right over against the middle of the aforesaid cloven rock, than you are upon the aforesaid bank, and when the aforesaid mark standeth uneven, on the one or other side, than you shall presently find more depths, which shall be thus, that as you run Southeast right upon the thickest and greatest land, on the other side until you be at four and five fathom water, which is the point called Varella, and desiring to pass through the east channel, than you must run Southeast and East Southeast, until you have discovered the Island Do Lastro, wholly by the end of the Island Do Bugio, than it is not good for you to run more southward to shun the stone lying right over against the Varella, and when you have discovered the Island Do Lastro as I said before, than you must run along by the aforesaid stone about two cables length from it there you shall have the depth of 28. and nine and twenty spans of water with a spring tide: and to know when you are nearest the stone, it is when you have wholly discovered the first cliff of two that lie on the Northside of the Island Do Lastro, and then you are about a stones cast from the aforesaid-stone, at the depth aforesaid, and when you have wholly discovered the second Cliff, than you are beyond the stone, you may likewise know it by another mark, which is a white ulacke standing upon the Hill which you see over the Town, and hath a stone which showeth like a man's head. When you bring the aforesaid white ulacke in the middle of the top of the house of Don joan d Almeyda, than you are right over against the aforesaid stone, and when you are passed it, it is good to make towards the land on the Southside, in such sort, that you leave the two third parts thereof on the side of the town, and one third part on the Southside, and running in that sort, you shall have more depths then in the middle way, until you be upon the bank which hath no more than six and twenty Spans Water, with high Water of a spring tide. And desiring to know when you begin to be right against it, it is when you have the cross part or door of the great church, right against the top of a house, that standeth on the strand, which cometh upon the same way of the same door right to the strand, so that the door is wholly discovered, there you have seven & twenty or eight and twenty Spans water, which shall be when you see or discover the clock house or top of S. Paul's church, with a hill that standeth behind the same church, and as soon as the said clockhouse is covered, than you shall presently find more depths, as two and thirty spans water, which is four fathom, which is right over against the place where you fetch fresh Water: and going somewhat further forward, you shall find four fathom and a half & five fathom at a spring tide, this was the Road where the ship called S. Crus, of the burden of fourteen or sixteen tons did anchor, and when the said ship did wind with an ebb, than the Island Do Lastro lay uncovered, although it was a good way from the Land. You have a very good token or mark to know when the land on the Southside is nearest to you, than you must make to the Island Do Lastro, and Northward from it, there is two cliffs, and when those two cliffs are one against the other than you are in the deepest of the channel, until you be over the bank. The 44. Chapter. Of the course and streams of the water in the way from Malacca, in the time of the Monson, when they ordinarily travel thither. FRom the Island Pulo Catao (lying on the coast of Champa part of the Land of Camboia) to the Varella, (which is a place lying in the way from Pulo catao, towards Malacca, in the same coast of Champa or Camboia) the streams run very strong towards the south: from the Island Pulo Catao five miles forward, the streams run very strong towards the Island Champello, and the créeke called A Enseada de Cauchinchina. And in the monson of China, when you sail from Mallacca, in the months of October, November, and December, them the streams in that part run Northwest. And from the Month of january forward, they run south-west, that is, towards the sands: therefore such as travel that way must observe certain times, and that with good advise, and as they begin to go near the country where the sands lie, (that are right against the coast of Champa) between them and the entry of the coast, the streams run as swiftly into the south as a stone slayeth out of a man's hand. But I advise you not to go so near the Island Aynao, that you may see it, unless it be with a Northwind, for with an East wind you would be in great danger. The 45. Chapter. Of the tides and increasing of the waters of Malacca. IN the entry of the Haven of Patane, (lying on the East side of the country and coast of Mallacca) to the Island of Bintao, (which lieth by the strait of Singa Pura under the Equinoctial line) the streams do always run Southward in the months of November and December. From the Island Pulo Condor (lying right against the haven and land of Camboia) to the Island Pulo Timao) lying on the East side of the coast of Malacca, at such time as you come from China) holding your course half a strike from the south) the streams run towards the Island Borneo, and being half a strike Southwestward, than the streams run towards the coast of Pan, which lieth on the coast of the East side of Mallacca. From Pulo Condor, to the Island Pulo Sesir (lying right against the coast of Camboia) the streams run Eastward, and by Pulo Sesir in the way towards China, the streams run to the coast of Champa, and from the False Varella (which is distant from the right Varella fifteen miles, lying on the coast of Camboia) the streams run Eastward about five or six miles from the coast, which is at the end of july, and in the month of August. In the Monson of the South winds, when you sail from Mallacca to China, the streams (from the Gulf of Pulo Catao▪ and the Island Aynao) run to the creek of Enseada da Cauchinchina, until the last of December, and from january forward, than the streams (in that Gulf and country) run towards the Sands that lie over against the coast of Champa, in Camboia) from the other side, and the later it is in the year from the Month of january forward, the stronger they run towards the sands. In the Monson of China, when you sail from China to Mallacca, than the streams run very strong from the Island Pulo Catao, to the Island Puto Cambir, both lying on the coast of Camboia or Champa. It happeneth oftentimes, that from the eight and twenty of july to the fourth of August from the Varella to Pulo Catao you have calm sea, and then you have the Terreinhos, which are Winds blowing from the land, out of the West and northwest, and the Viracoins, which are winds that come from the Sea, out of the East, Southeast, and east Northeast, & being in the North, they presently change into the south, whereupon it becometh calm till the Terreinhos or land winds do come again, and thus they hold about two miles from the coast, and not further, for they are winds that do only blow upon the coast, as in other places it is already sufficiently declared, in speaking of the Terreinhos and Viracoins. When you sail by the Island of Lequeo Pequeno, or small Lequeo, towards the land of Bungo, in the Island of japon the streams in that country do run eastward to the Island of Tanaxuma. From 30 degrees Northward, a little further than to the middle way to japon, the streams (from that country to the coast of China) run northward towards the creek A Enseada de Nanguyn, in the monson of the south and south-west winds. In this monson of South and Southwest winds, the streams from the Island Pulo Tayo (lying by the Island Aynao in the coast of China) run Southwestward to the Islands of Sanchoan and Cantao. The 46. Chapter. Of the tides both for ebb and flood by the days and hours of the Moon, in the haven of Macau in China, with the height of the same Haven, found by experience of an expert Pilot. THe 19 of September I marked the course of the Tides of China, within the haven of Macau, it being Full Moon, and I found it to be full sea about half an hour and somewhat more after eight of the clock in the morning, which I tried at the Full moon to see if it would agree with the New Moon. 1585. The 3. of February An. 1585. I took the height of the Sun, which as then was about 13. degrees from the line, and I found that the Haven of Macau lieth full undec 22. degrees, & 1/●. and as than I likewise tried the tides of the same haven and found it to be full Sea a little after 12. of the clock, the moon being three days old, in such sort, that by the same account with a new Moon it is full sea in that haven at ten a clock and 2/●. in the morning, which I also tried by the new Moon. 1585. The 16. of February Anno 1585. I marked the Tides within the Haven of Macau, it being then full moon, and found the first day of the full moon that it was high water at eleven of the clock and a half before noon. 1585. The 2. of june Ann. 1585. I marked the tides in the Haven of Macau, & found it to be full Sea just at 12. of the clock at no●ne, the moon being four days old, so that after the same account it is full sea at nine of the clock in the morning, being new moon: but these Tides of China fall not out justly, unless it be four days before and five days after the changing of the Moon, for then there is as much water as upon the third day, which I affirm to be most true, because I have often and many times tried it to be so. The cause is, for that before it, it is all Islands and Channels, so that when the waters begin to fall, they ebb not above three hours, but with an East wind they ebb with a greater course. The 47. Chapter. Of the signs and tokens of the tides, waters, and winds upon the coast of China and in the way to japon. IN the time of the monson of the South and Southwest winds, it is most certain in the whole coast of China and the way to japon, that when the winds of the monson blow, and from thence run into the East, that they turn not again out of the East into the south, but from thence into the North: and having continued there for a certain time, they turn again into the east, and from thence into the South, & if it be a North-east wind, than it turneth often times into the South-west, and not into the East, but not often, but the surest is as aforesaid. It changeth also often times from North to South, and not into the East, which is very common, and when the Sun setteth and hath some red carnation clouds about it, and that many beams issueth from the Sun, in such manner, that it seemeth to blaze, than it is a sign of great storms and tempests. Likewise in the rising and going down of the Moon, if it showeth in the like manner, it is a sign of storms and tempests. When the Sun riseth so fair and clear, that you may in a manner see into it, and perfectly discern the compass thereof, than it signifieth good weather, The like doth it signify in the setting of the Sun: and when the Sun in the rising or setting is red and of a dead colour, and so dark that you may see it round about, not casting forth any beams, it signifieth calm weather: The like doth the Moon. In the time of the monson when the North-east winds do commonly blow, and that the clouds at the Sunsetting be red, than it signifieth North winds, when in divers places of the sea you see scum driving upon the water as white as Cotton, being about a finger long, than it signifieth tempests and foul weather: This scum proceedeth of the small waves that break, whereof there are many in the place. In the month of july there bloweth other winds in those places then the monson running from one place to the other, till in the end they be north-east, than it is certain it will be tempest & foul weather. If from the Island of Lamao to the Cape of Sumbor, in the manson of the South and Southwest winds, you find an East wind with great heat, and same great drops of water, it signifieth foul weather. The 48. Chapter. In what days and months you find tempests and foul weather in the coast of China. FRom the seventh to the eleventh of june, often and commonly upon the coast of China there are great tempests. From the beginning of july to the 26. of the same month, you are never free nor out of danger of tempests and foul weather, for that all that time you have foul stormy weather, the wind never staying in one place, but running round about the compass. From the 12. of August forward, in the whole Moon of September to the end of October, all that time there is continually foul weather. The 49. Chapter. Of the times of fair weather upon the coast of China. THe whole month of june (except it be from the seventh to the eleventh day) there is very little soul weather, for that unless it be upon the days aforesaid, you have the winds of the monson, with fair and clear weather without storms, to sail from the Island Pulo Cantao to the Islands Cantao and Macau without storms: you must set sail on the 26. of july, and sail till the 12. of August, and all that time you are without tempests. In the middle way from the Island of japon to the coast and land of Liampo, you have always West winds, which blow in japon in the months of November and December. The 50. Chapter. A brief description of the course from Macau in China, to Nova Spaigna, with the situations of the countries. PVtting out of the East channel of the Haven of Macau, than you must hold inward to sea as much as you may, and having a contrary wind, run as long as the wind gives you leave to keep that course, but if the wind be scant, whereby you may not hold your course North-east, or North-east and by North, then turn on the other side as long as the wind serveth, that you may run Southeast for the space of three or four days, for it is better to keep Southeast then to run Northward. This course you shall hold as the wind serveth you, until you think you are 300. miles from the land; and being there, you must run 200. or more miles beyond japon, and although you hold your course North, yet you need not fear any thing, keeping good account of the wracking or winding of your compass towards the West, for it might hinder you much, running as often as you can Southeast, or to Loofeward, as also not leaving the course of North-east, as often as you can, until you be under the height. In the gulf you shall see certain great black birds, which, is a sign that you are far to Seaward, and if you see them about evening, & that they stretch their legs out along by their tails, then look to yourself, for it signifieth foul weather: When you come within 200. miles or more of the other land, than you shall lose the sight of those birds, and if the wind and weather drive you under many heights, and that you see many heaps of weeds driving upon the water, which are commonly seen when you are 100 and 120. miles inward to sea, than you must run on the outside of japon Southeastward, till you be under 31. and 32. degrees, and as then knowing the land, which will lie hard by: when you see it first, you must run without it, and beware you run not upon the Island called Ilha de Sedros', that is, the Island of Cedar trees, and make no account by the course of the Sea or compass, for the Island of Cedars lieth by the Cape of S. Lucas, being very false in the course, because the land (if it lay by it) doth come more and likelier out, than it doth towards the South. The Cape of Saint Lucas, is a high land, and showeth (when you are hard by it) as if it had stony cliffs sticking out of it, the end thereof being very black shining and dark, the Land thereof presently running inwards towards the North, and if you need fresh water, within the cliffs of the said Cape of S. Lucas, there is a great sandy strand, where you have a very good Road to anchor, where close by the sea you find great store of fresh water. From thence you shall cross over to the other side, upon the Southeast bough, without the Maria's, which is a better course then inward: all the coast is fair and good, so that you may well run along by it, until you come to certain cliffs lying by the Haven called El Puerto de la Natividad, where within the créeke you presently find the Haven of Saint jago de Colima, the marks whereof are those: On the East side it hath a round hovel that descendeth downward, if you be forced to put into it, you must understand, that it hath a great mouth or entry above two or three miles wide, wherein you have no cause to fear any thing, but that you see before your eyes: you must run into it till you be clean within the point, where you have a river of fresh water that runneth into the Sea, where you shall find Spanish Fishermen: if you desire to sail further, you must from thence to the haven of Acapulco run for the space of 80. miles along by the shore, for it is very fair and clear till you be at the end of the high land, that is, to the Haven called El Puerto del Marques, which a far off showeth like an Island, but when you go so near it that you may well discern it to be firm land, then on the upper part thereof you shall see some white stones, which show like white Runderens, that go in the way, you may freely run towards it, till you begin to see the mouth thereof, and then put into it. This in brief in my opinion, is the best course that you may bold in this voyage, which I would likewise have holden if I had gone through with the voyage. The 51. Chapter. A true description of the course from the Islands of Los Lucones, or to the Haven of Acapulco in new Spain, and how you should sail thither from Macau in China, with a note of the commodities and profits made by the wares and merchandises of China, with the situation, course, times, and miles of the same countries: all particularly set down for such as desire to travel into those countries. YOu shall put out of the Haven of Manilla lying in the Island of Lucones, under 14. degrees & ½. on the North side of the Equinoctial line, the mouth being South-west, in the months of june and july, as wind & weather serveth to put out, running along the coast of the same Island and between the Island of Mindoro, or by the East point, until you be out of the Channel (where you enter when you come out of the sea, lying 100 miles from Manilla under 13. degrees and 1/●.) between the last and the furthest point of the same Island of Lucones and the point of another Island called Tandaya, between the which the aforesaid channel doth run: and when you are out of the Channel, you must run Eastward as long as the wind serveth: which course you shall always hold, unless the wind let you, because you depart under 13. degrees and ⅓. sailing to the haven of Acapulco, lying under 17. degrees, but because the wind in those countries in Summer (which is the time that men set sail as aforesaid) is very slack, although it be the monson, in such manner, that when it beginneth to rise, you may not hold your course Eastward, & as long as the wind is not Southeast, you must still run North-east as long as you can, but when it is East Southeast, and East, than you must wind Southward, till the wind serveth to run North-east: in this manner you sail 1700. miles, to the coast of the country of Nova Spaigna, still keeping to seaward from the Island of japon as much as possibly you can, because that certain ships that went late to Sail (passing close by japon) had stormy weather, and saw the Island called A Ilha do Fogo, that is, the fiery Island, one of them putting into the Haven of Xaxuma in the Island of japon, there to sane itself, as it did: therefore such as keep 100 miles to Seaward from it, hold a good course, for that running far to Loofeward from those Islands, you fall upon the coast of new Spain under small heights, but when you fall on the coast under 35. degrees, there you hold a good course, but when you come to it under 38. and 40. degrees, which is the furthest land that is discovered or known (called El Cabo de Mendosino) you shall have great labour and pain, because that there you begin to have high and hollow waves, by reason winter is at hand, as also because the ships coming from the Island of Lucones, are but easily provided of their necessaries. When you see the coast and land of Nova Spaigna, than you begin to have Northwest winds, which from thence is a right fore wind, because you run almost all along that coast, although in some places you keep somewhat further off, because of the créekes that are therein, you run along by the coast, which is all fair and clear till you come to the Haven of Acapulco, which is six or seven hundred miles. And if you desire to sail thither from Macau in China, you must be ready to set sail as soon as the wind is South-west, to put out with the conjunction of the Moon in the months of june and july, holding your course towards the furthest point or hook of the Island of Lucones, lying under 20. degrees, called Cabo de Bo●ador, which is ninety miles from the Haven of Macau. From the Islands called Ilhas does Baboranes (lying by the coast of the same land and Cape de Boiadar) to the Island of Ca●agon, that is, (the Island of the Kettle) you run East and West, and when you are passed those Islands, running between them, than you must hold your course as you did from the Haven of Manilla as aforesaid, always keeping it as much as wind and weather will permit, which is the way the Spaniards do now mean to sail, running to the Islands of Maluco, and from thence cross over to Nova Spaigna, which is the same course that Franciscus Gualle (Captain and Pilot of the ship that came out of Nova Spaigna into the Haven of Macau) held: from whence he departed again the 25. of july with a South-west wind, in the time and conjunction of a full moon, with whom at the same time departed the ship of airs Gonsalu●s de Miranda, which captain Gualle is said not to have been longer in his voyage then three months and a half to the coast, and from thence a month and a half more to the Haven of Acapulco, and another ship that the same year set sail from Manilla, was between eight and nine months at sea, and in the end arrived in the Haven of Acapulco, all then being almost dead a● the ships in manner spoiled, and another ship was but five months on the way, but the ordinary voyage is about six months, little more or less. The reason why it is better sailing from Macau then from Manilla, is, because there you have no hindrances nor lets, but you may presently hold on your course as you are for the space of 100L. miles from Manilla along through the channel, till you be out, whereby some ships have consumed so much time, that it was the cause that some of them were constrained to put back again, and could not perform their voyage: but being in the mouth or issue of the channel aforesaid, than it is a better voyage then from Macau, because it lieth 150. miles further to Loofewarde, if it had not the other hindrance of coming out, as I said before. When the ships sail from Nova Spaigna to Manilla or Macau, than they set sail in Lent, always sailing with a forewind, with the winds called Brisas, which are East and East Northeast winds, which do blow there with the monson of the time, and it chanceth often times that many of them sail 50. or 6●. days together without striking any of the sails, still having a full wind, never seeing any land nor till this day ever any ship was cast away in those countries. The ship wherewith you will make this voyage must be very good to sail in a wind, as also very well provided of all necessaries, specially a Spanish Pilot and 12. Sailors, (because that through all the coasts of the Oriental Indies, they use Indian Sailors, as Arabians and such like, that are not used nor can not skill of other voyages, and would be very far to sa●●● if they should be led a new course) among the which it were good to have some Spaniards (such as have sailed that way) to know the land, which you shall alwa●● find at Macau, if you find them no● in ●●dia. For other necessaries concerning to ship, you shall find of all things sufficient in China. The gains and profits of all sorts of wares of China are very great, except raw silk, whereby they have very little gain, for there they rather desire it ready spun: and although there should be much sold there, yet that were no reason or cause why they should carry much thither, because it should not hinder the voyage and traffic of them of japon into the East Indies, for there are many other kinds of wares great store to carry thither, wherein there is much more profit than in silk. Of the common wares and merchandises that the Spaniards in the Islands of Lucones or Phillippinas' do buy, (and yet they buy them much d●●er there then they should buy them in China) in new Spain, they gain but six for one, and in Peru ten for one, whereof they are sure, for that the Portugese's that have gone from hence thither, in the ship that came hither have gained so much by the wares they carried with them, that the time that they stayed for their return, seemed to them a thousand years: and as they repo●t, the Viceroy of Nova Spaigna and all the other governors and gentlemen of the country, have a great desire to use the trade, and do much look after it. Many are of opinion, that to sail that way to Peru, it would be a longer voyage, for that when you are at Acapulco, you must take another way and hold another course of 700. miles long, from Acapulco to the Haven of Callande Lyma, which is the Metropolitan City of Peru, lying under ten degrees on the South side of the Equinoctial, and you should make your voyage in the same year: and further it is a country of great charges and expenses, whereby you should lose and spend all that you should gain, more in that country then in new Spain, because the country of new Spain is more abundant in all kind of necessaries & victuals than Peru, and therefore your charges is less. The 52. Chapter. The true and perfect description of a voyage performed and done by Franciscus de Gualle a Spanish Captain and Pilot, for the Viceroy of new Spain, from the Haven of Acapulco in new Spain, to the Islands of Iu●ones or Phillippinas', in the Haven of Manilla, and from thence to the Haven of Macau in China, and from Macau back again to Acapulco, accomplished in the year of our Lord 1584. THe tenth of March in the year of our Lord 1582. we set sail out of the Haven of Acapulco, lying in the country of new Spain, directing our course to the Islands of Lucones or Philippinas West Southwest, 1582. running in that manner for the space of 25. miles, till we came under 16. degrees, that so we might shun the calms by sailing close by the shore. From thence forward we held our course West for the space of 30. miles, and being there, we ran West, & West and by South, for the space of 1800. miles, to the Island called Ilha d'Engano, which is the furthest Island lying in the South parts of the Islands called de los Ladrones, that is, the Islands of Rovers, or Islas de las Vellas, under 13. degrees and ½. in latitude Septentrional, and 164. degrees in longitude Oriental, upon the fixed Meridional line, which lieth right with the Island of Tercera. From thence we held our course westward for the space of 280. miles, till we came to the point called El capo de Espirito Santo, that is, the point of the Holy Ghost, lying in the Island Tandaya, the first Island of those that are called Philippinas, Lucones, or Manillas, which is a country with few hills, with some mines of brimstone in the middle thereof. From the point aforesaid we sailed West for the space of eighteen miles to the point or entry of the channel, which runneth in between that Island and the Island of Lucon. This point or entry lieth scarce under 12. degrees. All the coast that stretcheth from the entry of the channel to the point El capo deal Spirito Santo, is not very fair. Eight miles from the said point lieth a Haven of indifferent greatness, called Bahya de Lovos, that is, the Bay of Wolves, having a small Island in the mouth thereof: and within the Channel about half a mile from the end of the said Island, lieth an Island or cliff, & when you pass by the point in the middle of the channel, than you have 25. fathom deep, with brown Sand: there we found so great a stream running westward, that it made the water cast a scum as if it had been a sand, whereby it put us in fear, but casting out our Lead, we found 25. fathom deep. From the aforesaid entry of the channel North, and North and by East, about ten miles, lieth the Island of Catanduanes, about a mile distant from the land of Lucon, on the furthest point Eastward, and from the same entry of the channel towards the West and Southwest, lieth the Island Capuli about six miles from thence, stretching West Southwest, and East Northeast, being five miles long and four miles broad, and as we passed by it, it lay Northward from us, under 12. degrees and ¼. and somewhat high land. Four miles from the aforesaid Island of Capuli Northwestward, lieth the three Islands of the Haven of Bollon in the Island of Lucones, stretching North and South about four miles, distant from the firm land about half a mile, whereof the furthest Southward, lieth under 13. degrees: In this channel it is twenty fathom deep, with white Sand, and a great stream, running Southeast, we passed through the middle of the channel. From this Channel we held our course South-west, and South-west and by West, for the space of twenty miles, until we came to the West end of the Island of Tycao, which reacheth East and West 13. miles. This point or hook lieth under 12. degrees and 3/●. In the middle between this Island and the Island Capuli there lieth three Islands called the Faranias', and we ran in the same course on the North side of all the Islands, at the depth of 22. fathom with white sand. From the aforesaid West point of the Island Tycao to the point of Barya●, it is East and West to sail about the length of a mile, or a mile and a half, we put into that channel, hilding our course south and south and by west about three miles, until we were out of the channel at sixteen fathom deep, with half white and re●●sh sand in the Channel, and at the month thereof, whereof the middle lieth under 12. degrees and ●. and there the streams run Northward. The Island of Bayas stretcheth northwest and Southeast, and is low land, whereof the Northwest point is about three mi●es from the coast of Lucon, but you can not pass between them with any P●ppe but with small Foists and Barks of the country. This shallow Channel lieth under 12. degrees, and running through the aforesaid channel between the Islands Tycao and Bu●yas, as I said before, we sailed Southward about 2. miles from the Island of Masbate, which stretcheth East and West eight miles long, being in breadth four miles, and lieth under 12. degrees and 1/●. in the middle thereof, and is somewhat high land. From the said channel between Tycao and Buryas, we held our course West Northwest for thirteen miles, leaving the Island Masbate on the South side, and the Island Buryas on the North side, at the end of thirteen miles we came by an Island called Banton, which is in form like a Hat, under 12. degrees and ⅔. when we had sailed the aforesaid thirteen miles and eight miles more, on the South side we left the Island called Rebuian, which stretcheth Northwest, and Northwest and by North, and Southeast, and Southeast and by South, for the space of eight miles, being high and crooked Land, whereof the North point lieth under 12. degrees and ●. and there you find 35. fathom deep, with white sand. From the aforesaid Island of Banton Southward nine miles, there beginneth and followeth three Islands, one called Bantonsilla, which is a small Island in form of a Sugar loof: the second Crymara, being somewhat great in length, reaching East and West about 2. miles: the third I●aa, or the Isle of Goats, having certain Hovels. By all these Islands aforesaid you may pass with all sorts of Ships, whereof the foremost lieth Southward under 12. degrees and 1/●. from the Island Bantonsilla, or small Banto●, we held our course Northwest, for the space of four miles, to the Channel between the Islands called de Vere●e●, and the Island Marinduque, the Vere●es lying on the South side under 12. degrees and ¼. (which are two small Islands like two Frig●●te●) and the Island Marinduque on the North side under 12. degrees and ●. which is a great Island, stretching West Northwest, and East Southeast, having in length twelve, and in breadth seven miles. On the North side with the Island Lucon it maketh a long and small channel, running somewhat crooked, which is altogether full of shallows and sands, whe●y no ships can pass through it. The ●urth●●● point Westward of the same Island, lieth under 1●. degrees and ¼ it is high land, on the East side having the form of a mi●e of brimstone or fiery hill, and on the west side the land runneth downward, at the point thereof being round like a loaf of bread: in the Channel between it and the Vere●es, there are eighteen fathom deep, with small black sand. From the aforesaid Channel of Vere●es and Marinduque, we held our course West Northwest twelve miles, to the land of Mindoro to the point or Hook called Dumaryn, lying full under thirteen degrees: five miles forward from the said Channel, on the South side we left an Island called Ilha del Maestro del Campo, that is, the Island of the Colonel, lying under twelve degrees and ¼. which is a small and flat Island: In this course we had 45. fathom deep, with white sand. By this point or end of the Island Marinduque, beginneth the Island of Myndoro, which hath in length East and west five and twenty miles, and in breadth twelve miles, whether of the furthest point Southward lieth under thirtéen degrees, and the furthest point Northward under thirteen degrees and 1/●. and the furthest point Westward under thirteen degrees. This Island with the Island of Lucon maketh a Channel of five miles broad, and ten or twelve fathom deep with muddy ground of divers colors, with white sand. Five miles forward from Marinduque, lieth the river of the town of Anagacu, which is so shallow, that no ships may enter into it. From thence 2. miles further, lieth the Islands called Bacco, which are three Islands lying in triangle, two of them being distant from the land about three hundred cubits, and between them and the land you may pass with small ships: and from the land to the other Island are about two hundred cubits, where it is altogether shallows and sands, so that where the ships may pass outward about 150. cubits from the land, you leave both the Islands on the south side, running between the third Island and the river called Rio del Bacco, somewhat more from the middle of the Channel towards the Island, which is about a mile distant from the other: the Channel is ten fathom deep, withstood and shells upon the ground: the river of Bacco is so shallow, that no ships may enter into it. From this Island with the same course two miles forward, you pass by the point called El capo de Rescaseo, where we cast out our Lead, and found that a man may pass close by the land, and there you shall find great strong streams: and half a mile forward with the same course, lieth the town of Myndoro, which hath a good haven for ships of three hundred tons. Three miles Northward from the same Haven, lieth the Island called Cafaa, stretching East and West, being Hill ground. From the said town of Myndoro, we held our course West Northwest eight miles, till we came to the point or hook of the Sands called Tulen, lying upon the Island of Lucon, which Sand or Bank reacheth into the sea half a mile from the coast: you must keep about an hundred cubits from it, where you find eight fathom water, muddy and shelly ground: you run along by those sands North, and North and by West for the space of two miles, till you come to the river called Rio de Anasebo, all the rest of the coast called De los Limbones to the mouth or entry of the Bay called Manilla, (which are four miles) is sailed with the same course. The Limbones (which are Islands so called) are high, in form like a pair of Organs, with good Havens for small ships, running along by the Limbones: and two miles beyond them on the South side, we leave the Islands of Fortan, and four Islands more, but the three Islands of Lubao, which are very low lying under thirteen & 13. degrees and 1/●. and the Limbones lie in the mouth or entry of the Bay of Manilla under 14. degrees and ¼. From thence we ran Northwest for the space of six miles to the Haven of Cabite, keeping along by the land lying on the West side, where it is shallow, and is called Los Baixos del Rio de Cannae, the shallows of the river of reeds; all along this Bay in the same course, there is from ten to four fathom deep. Being by the point or Hook of Cabite, than we kept but an hundred paces from it, running South-west, South Southwest, & South, until we discovered the whole mouth or entry of the bay, where we might anchor at four fathom about two hundred cubits from the ●and, and then the town of Manilla was two miles Northward from us. The 53. Chapter. The course and voyage of the aforesaid Franciscus Gualle out of the Haven or Road of Manilla, to the Haven of Macau in China, with all the courses and situations of the places. Sailing out of the Haven of cubit, lying in the Bay of Manilla, we held our course Westward for the space of eighteen miles, to the point called El Cabo de Samballes, and when we were eight miles on our way, we left the two Islands Maribillas' on the South side, and sailed about a mile from them: the point of Samballes aforesaid, lieth under fourteen degrees, and ⅔. being low land: at the end of the same coast of Lucon, on the West side. Fron the hook or point aforesaid, we ran North, and North and by West, for the space of five and thirty miles (about a mile from the coast of Lucon) to the point called Cabo de Bullinao, all this coast and Cape is high and Hill ground, which Cape lieth under sixteen degrees and ⅔. From this Cape de Bullinao, we held our course North, and North and by east, for five and forty miles to the point called El cabo de Boiador, which is the furthest land Northward from the Island Lucon lying under 19 degrees. The Cape de Bullinao being past the land, maketh a great Créeke or Bough, and from this Créeke the coasts runneth North to the point of Boiador, being a land full of Cliffs and Rocks that reach into the Sea, and the land of the hook or point is high and hilly ground. From the point of Boiador, we held our course West Northwest an hundred and twenty miles, until we came to the Island called O Ilha Branco, or the white Island, which is a small Island, lying in the beginning of the coast and Bay of the river of Canton under two and twenty degrees, having four and twenty fathom brown muddy ground. From the same Island Ilha Branco, we held the aforesaid course of West Northwest, for the space of sixteen miles, to the Island of Macau lying in the mouth of the river of Canton, and maketh the river two mouths or entries, and is a small Island about three miles great. The 54. Chapter. The Navigation or course of the aforesaid Francisco Gualle out of the Haven of Macau to new Spain, with the situation and stretchings of the same, with other notable and memorable things concerning the same voyage. WHen we had prepared ourselves and taken our leaves of our friends in Macau, we set sail upon the four and twenty of july, holding our course Southeast, and Southeast and by East, being in the wane of the Moon, for when the moon increaseth it is hard holding the course between the Islands, because as then the water and streams run very strong to the Northwest, we sailed through many narrow Channels by night, having the depth of eight and ten fathom, with soft muddy ground, until we were about the Island Ilha Branco, yet we saw it not, but by the height we knew we were passed it. Being beyond it, we ran East southeast, an hundred and fifty miles, to get above the sands called Os Baixos does Pescadores, and the beginning of the Islands Lequeos on the East side, which Islands are called As Ilhas Fermosas, that is, the fair Islands. This I understood by a Chinar called Santy of Chinchon, and he said that they lie under 21. degrees and ¾. there it is thirty fathom deep, & although we saw them not, notwithstanding by the height and depth of the water we knew we were past them. Being past the fair Islands, we held our course East, and East and by North, for two hundred and sixty miles, until we were past the length of the Islands Lequeos, sailing about fifty miles from them, the said Chinar told me, that those Islands called Lequeos are very many, and that they have many and very good Havens, and that the people and inhabitants thereof have their faces and bodies painted like the Bysayas of the Islands of Lucon or Philippinas, and are appareled like the Bysayas, and that there also are mines of gold: He said likewise that they did often come with small ships and Barks lade●● with Bucks and Hearts bides, and with gold in grains or very small pieces, to traffic with them of the coast of China, which he assured me to be most true, saying that he had been nine times in the small Island, bringing of the same wares with him to China, which I believed to be true, for that afterward I inquired thereof in Macau and upon the coast of China and found that he said true. The furthest or uttermost of these Islands both Northward and Eastward lie under 29. degrees. Being past these Islands, than you come to the Islands of japon, whereof the first lying West and South is the Island of Firando, where the Portugese's use to traffic, they are in length altogether a hundred and thirty miles, and the furthest Eastward, lieth under two and thirty degrees, we ran still East, and East and by North, until we were past the said a hundred and thirty miles. All this information I had of the aforesaid Chinar, as also that there I should see some mines of Brimstone, or fiery Hills, being seventy miles beyond them, & thirty miles further I should find four Islands lying together, which I likewise found as he had told me: For that being in japon he said he had there seen certain men of a very small stature with great rolls of Linen cloth about their heads, that brought gold in small pieces, and some white Cangas of Algodon, (which are pieces of Cotton, Linen so called by the Chinars) as also salt fish, the Spanish Atun, or Gaberdine, which he said, came out of other Islands Eastward from japon, and by the tokens and marks he showed me, I guessed whereabout those Islands should be, and found them not far from whence he said they lay, he said likewise that all the Islands of japon have good havens and Channels, being a country full of Rice, Corn, Fish, and Flesh, and that they are an indifferent and reasonable people to Traffic with, and that there they have much silver. Running thus East, and East and by North about three hundred miles from japon, we found a very hollow water, with the stream running out of the North and Northwest, with a full and very broad sea, without any hindrance or trouble in the way that we passed, and what wind soever blue, the Sea continued all in one sort, with the same hollow water and stream, until we had passed the seven hundred miles, about two hundred miles from the coast and land of new spain, where we began to lose the said hollow sea and stream, whereby I most assuredly think and believe, that there you shall find a Channel or strait passage, between the Firm land and new spain, and the Countries of Asia and Tartary. Likewise all this way from the aforesayed seven hundred miles, we found a great number of whale fishes, and other fish by the Spaniards Atun, whereof many are found in the coast of Gibraltar in spain, as also Albacoras and Bonitoes, which are all Fishes, which commonly keep in Channels, straits, and running waters, there to disperse their seed when they breed, which maketh me more assuredly believe, that thereabouts is a Channel or Strait to pass through. Being by the same course upon the coast of new spain, under seven and thirty degrees and ½. we passed by a very high and fair land with many Trees, wholly without Snow, and four miles from the land you find thereabouts many drifts of roots, leaves of Trees, reeds, and other leaves like Fig leaves, the like whereof we found in great abundance in the country of japon, which they eat, and some of those that we found, I caused to be sodden with flesh, and being sodden, they eat like Coleworts, there likewise we found great store of Sea wolves, which we call Sea dogs, whereby it is to be presumed and certainly to be believed, that there are many Rivers, Bays, and Havens along by those coasts to the Haven of Acapulco. From thence we ran Southeast, Southeast and by South, and Southeast and by East, as we found the wind, to the point called El Cabo de Saint Lucas, which is the beginning of the land of Califfornia, on the Northwest side, lying under two and twenty degrees, being five hundred miles distant from the Cape De mendosino. In this way of the aforesaid five hundred miles, along by the coast, are many Islands, and although they be but small, yet without doubt there are in them some good Havens, as also in the Firm Land, where you have these havens following, now lately found out, as that of the Island of Saint Augustine, lying under thirty degrees and ¾. and the Island called Ilha de Sedros', scarce under eight and twenty degrees and ¼. and the Island lying beneath the Saint Martin, under three and twenty degrees and ½. all this coast and Country, as I think is inhabited, and showeth to be a very good Country, for there by night we saw fire, and by day smoke, which is a most sure token that they are inhabited. From the Point or hook of Saint Lucas, to the Southeast side of Calliffornia, we held our course East Southeast, for the space of eighty miles, to the point called El cabo de las corrientes, that is, the point of the streams lying under nineteen degrees & ⅔. and running this course Northward about a mile from us, we saw three Islands called las tres Maria's, (that is, the three Maries) running the same course. About four miles from the other Islands, there are other Islands reaching about 2. or three miles: All this way from the mouth or Créeke of California aforesaid for the space of the said 80. miles, there are great streams that run Westward. From the point or Cape de las Corrientes, we ran Southeast, and sometimes Southeast and by East, for the space of an hundred and thirty miles to the haven of Acapulco. In this way of an hundred and thirty miles, being 20. miles on the way, we had the Haven of the Na●iuidade, that is, the birth of the Virgin Mary: and other eight miles further, the Haven of Saint jago, or Saint james: and six miles further, the sea Strand called la Playa de Culyma, that is, the Strand of Culyma. All this coast from California to the Haven of Acapulco is inhabited by people that have peace and traffic with the Spaniards, and are of condition and qualities like the people of the other places of new Spain. The Conclusion of the Author of this last Voyage. ALl this Description and Navigation have I myself seen, proved, and well noted in my Voyage made and ended in the year of our Lord 1584. 1584. from great China out of the Haven and river of Canton, as I will more at large set it down unto your honour, with the Parallel and Meridian thereof, as God shall permit me time and leisure, whom I beseech to send you long and happy days: and the same have I truly translated out of Spanish into low Dutch verbatim out of the Original copy, that was sent unto the Viceroy of the Portugal Indies. The 55. Chapter. The Description of a Voyage made by a Pilot called Nuno da silva for the Viceroy of new Spain, the 20. of May in the year of our Lord 1579. 1579. to the town of Mexico, from whence it was sent to the Viceroy of the Portugal Indies, wherein is set down the course and actions passed in the Voyage of Sir Francis Drake that took the aforesaid Nuno da silva by the Islands of Cabo Verde, and carried him along with him through the straights of Magellanes, to the Haven of Guatulco in new Spain, where he let him go again. NVno damn silva borne in Porto, a Citizen and inhabitant of Guaia, saith, that he departed out of his house in the beginning of November in the year of our Lord 1577. 1577 taking his course to Cabo Verde, or the green point, where he ankered with his ship close by the Haven of the Island of Saint james, one of the Islands of Cabo Verde aforesaid, being the nintéenth of januarie in the year of our Lord 1578. 1578 and lying there, there came six ships, which seemed to be English men, whereof the Admiral boarded his ship, and by force with his men he took him out of his ship, bringing him in the boat aboard the Admiral's ship, leaving some of his best men aboard his ship: and although the fortress of the Island shot four or five times at them, yet they hurt not the English men: who having done, se● sail from thence to the Island of Brava, that is, the wild Island, taking with them the ship of the said Nuno da silva: being there, they filled certain vessels with fresh water, from thence holding their course inward to Sea, having first with a boat set the men of Nuno da Siluas ship on land, only keeping Nuno da silva in his ship, as also his ship with the wines that were therein, and Nuno da silva saith, the cause why they kept him on board was, because they knew him to be a Pilot for the coast of Brasilia, that he might bring them to such places in those countries as had fresh water. Being put off from the Island of Brava, they held their course to the land of Brasilia, which they descried upon the first of April, under the height of 30. degrees: and without landing or taking in fresh water, they held on their course to the river Rio de la Plata, that is, the river of Silver, lying under five and thirty degrees, little more or less, where they went on land, and provided themselves of fresh water. From thence they held on their course till they came under nine and thirty degrees, where they ankered: and being there, they left two of their six ships behind them, and sailed but four in company (that of Nuno da silva being one) till they came to the Bay called Baya de las Islas, that is, the Bay of the Islands, lying under nine and forty degrees, where it is said, that Magellanes lay and wintered there with his Ship when he first discovered the Strait, which now holdeth his name. In this Bay being the twenty of june, they entered, and there ankered so close to the land, that they might send to it with a Harquebus shot, and there they saw the land to be inhabited with Indians, that were appareled with skins, with their legs from the knees downward, and their arms from the elbows downward covered, all the rest of their bodies being naked, with bows and arrows in their hands, being subtle, great, and well form people, and strong and high of stature, where six of the English men went on land to fetch fresh water, and before they leapt on land, four of the Indians came unto their boat, to whom the English men gave bread and wine: and when the Indians had well eaten and drunk, they departed thence: and going somewhat far from them, one of the Indians cried to them, and said: Magallanes, Esta heminha Terra, that is, Magallanes, this is my country: and because the English men followed them, it seemed the Indians fledde-upward into the land, and being somewhat far off, they turned back again, and with their arrows slew two of the English Shippers, one being an English man, the other a Netherlander: the rest came back again and saved themselves in the boat, wherewith they presently put off from the shore, and there they stayed till the seventeenth of August, upon the which day they set sail, running along by the coast about a mile and a half from the land, for there it is all fair and good ground, at twenty, and five and twenty fathom deep, and were about four or five days before they came to the mouth or entry of the straights, but because the wind was contrary, they stayed till the four and twenty of August before they entered. The entry or mouth of the Strait is about a mile broad, on both sides being bare and flat land, on the North side they saw Indians making great fires, but on the South side they saw no people stirring. The four and twenty day aforesaid, they began to enter into the straits, with an East Northeast wind. This Strait may be about an hundred and ten miles long, and in breadth a mile about the entry of the Strait, and half way into it, it runneth right forth without any windings or turnings: and from thence about eight or ten miles towards the end, it hath some boughs and windings, among the which, there is one so great a hook or running in, that it seemeth to run into the other land: and there it is less than a mile broad from one land to the other: and from thence forward it runneth strait out again: And although you find some crookings, yet they are nothing to speak of. The issue of the Strait lieth westward, and about eight or ten miles before you come to the end, than the Strait beginneth to be broader, and it is all high land to the end thereof after you are eight miles within the Strait, for the first eight miles after you enter is low flat land, as I said before: and in the entry of the Strait you find the stream to run from the South sea to the North sea: and after they began to sail in with the East Northeast wind, (being entered) they passed along without any let or hindrance either of wind or weather: and because the high land on both sides lay covered with snow, and that all the Strait is fair and clear, they held their course a Harquebus shot in length from off the North side, having nine and ten fathom deep, with good ground, as I said before, where (if need require) a man may anchor: the hills on both sides being full of trees, some of the hills and trees reaching down to the sea side, in some places having plain and even land, and there they saw not any great riue●s, but some small rivers that issued out of the riffs and Breaches of the land: and in the country where the great Bough or crooking is, on the South side they saw certain Indian Fishermen in their Canoas' or Scutes, being such as they saw first on the North side, but more people they saw not on the South side. Being out of the Strait on the other side, being upon the sixth of September of the aforesaid year, they held their course Northwest for the space of three days, and the third day they had a north-east wind, that by force drove them West Southwest, which course they held for the space of ten or twelve days with few sails up: and because the wind began to be very great, they took in all their sails, and lay driving till the last of September. The four and twenty day of the same month having lost the sight of their pinnace which was about an hundred tun, than again they hoist sail because they came better, holding their course Northeast for the space of seven days, and at the end of the said seven days, they had the sight of certain Islands, which they made towards for to anchor, but the weather would not permit them: and being there, the wind fell Northwest, whereby they sailed West Southwest. The next day they lost the sight of another of their company, which ship was about three hundred and sixty tons, for it was very foul weather, so that in the end the Admiral's ship was left alone, for the Ship of Nuno da silva was left in the Bay where they wintered before they entered into the straits, and with this foul weather they ran till they were under seven & fifty degrees, where they entered into a Haven of an Island and ankered about the length of the shot of a great piece from the land, at twenty fathom deep, where they stayed three or four days, and the wind coming Southward, they hoist anchor, holding their course Northward for the space of two days, and then they espied a small unhabited Island, where being arrived, they struck sails, and hoist out their boat, and there they took many birds and Sea wolves. The next day they set sail again, holding their course North Northeast, and North, to ●nother Island lying five or six miles from the firm land, on the North side of the Strait, where they ankered about a quarter of a mile from the land, at twelve fathom water. This Island is small and low land, and full of Indians, the Island being altogether built and inhabited by them, where they hoist out their boat, wherein the Admiral and twelve English men were entered going to fetch fresh water, and to seek for victuals, and being landed upon the Island, the Indians in exchange of other things, brought two Spanish sheep, and a little Mais or roots whereof they make bread, and because it was late, they returned again unto their ship, without doing any other thing for that day. The next day the said Captain with the aforesaid twelve men being Harquebushers, rowed to land again, and set two of their company on shore with their vessels to fetch fresh water, and by the place where they should fill their water there lay certain Indians secretly hidden, that fell upon the two English men and took them: which they in the boat perceiving, went out to help them, but they were so assailed with stones and arrows, that all or the most part of them were hurt, the Captain himself being wounded with an arrow on the face, and will, another arrow in the head, whereby they were constrained to turn back again, without once hurting any of the Indians, and yet they came so near the boat, that they took four of their oars from them. This done, they set sail again, running along the coast with a South wind, sailing so for the space of six miles, passing by the Haven called Saint jago, or Saint james, where they put into a Haven, and there they took an Indian that lay fishing in a Scute or Canoa, giving him linen and Butcher's chopping knives, with other trifles, and not long after there came an other Indian aboard their ship called Felippe, and he spoke Spanish, he gave the English Captain notice of a certain ship that lay in the Haven of Saint jago, which they had left six miles behind them: with that intelligence the Indian being their guide, the next day they set Sail and put to the aforesaid Haven of Saint jago, and entering therein, they took the said Ship, wherein they found a thousand seven hundred and 70. Bortigas of Spanish pots full of wine, & other things, which having done, they leapt on land, where they took certain sacks with meal, with all whatsoever they could find, they took likewise the ornaments and other Relics out of the Church, wherewith they departed from thence, taking the aforesaid ship, with two men (that they found in her) with them, and so departed from that Haven, which lieth under 32 degrees and ½. running along by the coast till they came under one and thirty and thirty degrees: which was the place where they had appointed to meet, and there to stay for each other, if by tempest or foul weather they chanced to be separated, and so lose each others company. And coming under thirty degrees, they found a very good Haven, wherein they entered, and ankered at six fathom deep, the shot of a great Piece from the Land, which was right over against a River, where they took in six Pipes of fresh water, and to defend them that fetched the water, they set twelve men upon the Land, and being busied in filling of their water, they espied a company of men coming towards them, whereof half of them were Spaniards, being about two hundred and fifty horsemen, and as many footmen, but they had no sooner espied them, but they presently entered into the Boat, and escaped away, losing but one man. The same night they set sail again with both their Ships, running along the coast about ten miles further, where they took in some fresh water, but because they perceived certain horsemen, they departed without lading any more water. Fron thence they followed on their course along the coast for the space of 30. miles, where they entered into a desert or unhabited Haven, yet they went not on Land, for every day they saw people upon the shore, and there they made out a small pinnace, the pieces whereof they brought ready framed out of England, and having prepared it, they launched it into the Water, wherein the Captain with fifteen men entered, with the chief Boatesman called jan de Greicke, (being Master of the ship which they had taken in the Haven of S. jago,) wherewith they went to see if they could find the two Ships that they had lost by stormy weather as I said before, and likewise thinking to go on Land to fill certain vessels with fresh Water, they durst not venture, for they saw people on all side of the shore, so that in the end they returned again without hearing of the other Ships, being there, they took all the Ordinance out of their Ship, and new dressed and rigged her, which done, they put a small piece of Ordinance into the Pinnace, wherewith they set sail again, following on their course. Having sailed thirteen days, they came to an Island lying about the shot of a Base from the Land, where they ankered, and there they found four Indian Fishermen in two Canaos, who told them that on the Firm Land they might have fresh water, but they understanding that there was not much, and that it was somewhat within the Land, they would not spend any time about it, but set sail again, leaving the Fishermen with their Canaos, following on their course along by the shore. The next day being somewhat further, they espied certain Indian Fishermen that were upon the Land in their houses, which the English Captain perceiving, presently entered into the Pinnace, and rowed on Land, where he took three of the said Fishermen, taking with him half of the Fish that lay packed upon the shore ready to be laden, with the which Indians and booty, they came on board again. The next day following, they saw a Bark laden with Fish, that belonged to the Spaniards, with four Indians in it. This Bark with the Indians and the Fish, they took and bound the Spanish Ship to their stern, and so drew it after them, leaving the said Indians within it, who by night unbound the Bark, and secretly made away with Bark and Fish, and were no more seen. The next day the Captain went into the Pinnace, and because he saw certain houses upon the shore, he made thither, and being on Land, he found two men in them, whereof one he took, leaving the other behind, and there he found three thousand Pesoes of silver, (every Peso being the value of a Ryall of eight,) and seven Indian Sheep, Hens, and all whatsoever they found▪ wherewith they departed from thence, following on their course, and two days after they came by the haven called Azijcka, where they found two ships, the one laden with goods and Spanish wares, out of the which, they took only two hundred Bottigas (or Spanish Pots with Wine) and out of the other seven and thirty Bharas of silver, which are pieces of ten or twelve pound each Bharre, and thinking to leap on shore (with two Barks that they found in the said Haven, with about seven and thirty Harquebusses & bows) they perceived on the land certain horsemen coming towards them, whereupon they left off their pretence, and took with them a Moor that they found within the Barks, with whom they returned aboard. The next day in the morning they burned the ship, that was laden with the Spanish wares, and took the other with them, passing forward with it on their course, the Captain sailing along the shore with his Pinnace, and the Ship keeping about a mile from him to Seaward, to seek for a ship whereof they had intelligence, and having in that manner sailed about five and forty miles, they found the ship that lay at anchor in a haven, who about two hours before had been advertised of an English Pirate or Sea-rover, and had discharged eight hundred Bharres of silver out of her, and hidden it on the Land, which silver belonged to the King of Spain, of the which silver the Englishmen had received some intelligence, but they durst not go on land, because there were many Indians and Spaniards that stood to guard it, and they found nothing in the ship but three Pipes of water, the ship they took with them, and being about a mile in the Sea, they hoist up all her sails & let her drive, doing the like with the Ship that they had taken in Azijcka, as also the other of Saint jago, which likewise they let drive, following on their course with their own ship, and the Pinnace. Being seven or eight miles from the Haven of Callan de Lyma, they espied three Ships, and boarding one of them, they took three men out of her, and so held on their course towards Callan de Lyma, where they entered, being about two or three hours within night, sailing in between all the ships that lay there, being seventeen in number, and being among the ships, they asked for the ship that had laden the silver, but when answer was made them, that the silver was laid on land, they cut the cables of the ships, and the masts of two of the greatest ships, and so left them. At the same time there arrived a Ship from Panama laden with wares and Merchandise of spain, that ankered close by the English Ship, which was while the English Captain sought in the other Ships for the silver. As soon as the ship of Panama had ankered, there came a Boat from the shore to search it, but because it was in the night, they let it alone till morning, and coming to the English ship, they asked what ship it was, whereupon one of the Spanish prisoners (by the English Captains commandment) answered and said it was the ship of Michiel Angelo, that came from Chile, which they of the boat hearing, sent a man on board, who climbing up, light upon one of the great Pieces, wherewith he was afraid, and presently stepped back again into the boat (because the Ships that lay there, and that sailed in those Countries, used to carry no great shot) and therewith they were abashed, and made from it, which the ship of Panama hearing, that was newly come in, she judged it to be a Rover, and therewith cutting her Cables, she put to Sea, which the Englishmen perceiving, shipped certain men in their Pinnace, and followed her: and being hard by her, they baddde her strike, which they of the ship refused to do, and with a Harquebus shot, killed one of the Englishmen, wherewith they turned again into their ship and presently set sail, following after the ship, which not long after they overtook: which they of the Ship perceiving, hoist out their Boat, and leaping into it, rowed to Land, leaving the ship with all the goods, which the Englishmen presently took, and with her sailed on their course. The next day they saw a boat with sails making towards them, whereby they presently mistrusted it to be a Spy, and not long after they perceived two great ships coming towards them, which made the English think they came to fight with them, whereupon they let the Ship of Panama drive, therein leaving john de Greicke. With the two that they had taken the same day, they entered into Callan de Lyma, as I said before, and presently hoist all their sails, and sailed forward, not once setting eye again upon the aforesaid ships, for they made towards the ship of Panama, which the Englishmen let drive. From thence they sailed again along the coast, following on their course, and having sailed certain days, they met a Frigate that went towards Lyma, laden with wares and Merchandises of the Country, from whence the Englishmen took a Lamp and a Fountain of silver, and asked the Pilot being a Spaniard, if they met not with a Ship, that they understood should be laden with silver, but the one Pilot said he met her not, and the other said he saw her about three days before. This Frigate came not to the ship, but to the Pinnace, wherein the Captain sailed, for the Pinnace ran close by the shore, and the ship kept a mile and a half from the Land, wherewith they let the Frigate go, following on their course. Two days after they came to the Haven called Payta, where they found a Ship laden with Spanish wares, which the Pinnace boarded, and took it without any resistance▪ for as soon as the Spaniards perceived the Englishmen, they presently made to Land with their Boat, and two of them leapt into the Sea, none staying in the ship, but the Master, Pilot, and some Moors, out of the which ship the Englishmen took the Pilot, and all the Bread, Hens, and a Hog, and so sailed forward with the Ship: but being about two Harquebus shot to Seaward, they let it go again, not taking any thing out of it, and ask after the ship which they sought for, they told them that about two days before she departed from that place, wherewith they followed on their course, and before night they met with a Ship of Panama, which they presently boarded, but took nothing from her but only a Moor, and so left it, holding on their course. The next day being the first of February, they met another Ship that sailed to Panama, laden with Fish and other victuals, & forty Bharres of silver, and some gold, but I know not how much, which they took, and sent the passengers (with two Friars that were in her) in a boat to Land. The next day they hanged a man of the Ship, because he would not confess two plates of gold that he had taken, which after they found about him, which done, they let the Ship drive, following on their course. The first of March towards noon, they espied the ship laden with the silver, being about four miles to Seaward from them, and because the English Ship was somewhat heavy before, whereby it sailed not as they would have it, they took a company of Bottigas or Spanish Pots for Oil, and filling them with water, hung them by ropes at the stern of the Ship to make her sail the better, and the ship that sailed towards Panama, made towards the English Ship to know what she was, thinking it to be one of the ships that used to sail along the coasts, and to traffic in the country, and being hard by her, the English Captain bade them strike, but the other refusing to do it, with a great Piece he shot her mast over board, and having wounded the master with an arrow, the ship presently yielded, which they took, and sailed with her further into the Sea, all that night and the next day, and night making all the way they could. The third day being out of sight of land, they began to search the ships, and to lad the goods out of her into their Ship, which was a thousand three hundred Bharres or pieces of silver, and fourteen chests with Rials of eight, and with gold, but what quantity it was I know not, only that the passengers said that there was great store, and that three hundred Bharres of the silver belonged to the King, the rest belonging to certain Merchants, that done, they let the Ship with the men sail on their course, putting the three Pilots in her that they brought with them▪ so that as than they had none but their own men aboard, being the sixth of March, and from thence they held their course towards the Land of Nicaraga. The thirteenth of March, either the day before or after, in the morning they descried Land, not being very high, being a small Island two miles from the Firm land, and there they found a small Bay, wherein they ankered at five fathom deep close by the Land, and there they stayed till the second day. Upon the which day there passed a Frigate close by the Island, which with their Pinnace they followed, and taking her, brought her to the English Ship, which Frigate was laden with Salsaperilla, or Pocke-root, and Bottigas or Pots with Butter and Honey, and with other things. The English Captain went on board, and cast the Salsaperilla on the Land, leaving all the rest of the wares in the Frigate, and then he put all his Pieces into the Frigate, that so he might lay his ship on shore, to new calke and trim her, which continued till the three and twenty or four and twenty of March, which done, and having made provision of wood & fresh water, they held on their course along by the coast, sailing Westward, taking the said Frigate and her men with them, and having sailed two days, they took their men out of her, and set them in the Pinnace, among the which were two Sailors, that meant to sail to Panama, and from thence to China, whereof one they took with the Letters and sea-cards that he had about him, among the which were the Letters of the King of Spain, sent to the Governor of China, as also the sea-cards wherewith they should make their voyage, and direct themselves in their course. And so sailing on till the sixth of April, about evening they discovered a ship that held two miles to seaward from the land, and before the next day in the morning, they were hard by her, and suddenly fell upon her while her men slept, & presently made the men enter into their ship, among the which was one Don Francisco Caratte, which done, they followed on their course with the said ship, out of the which they took certain packs and other wares, but I know not what it was. They likewise took a Moor out of it, and three days after they both let the Ship and men go whether they would, setting therein the two Sailors that should go for China, which they had taken in the Frigate, keeping only one sailor to show them where they should find fresh water, to the which end they took the empty vessels with them to fill with water, and so kept on their course to the haven of Guatulco, where they put in, being upon monday the thirteenth of April, and having ankered, they stayed there till the six and twenty of April, and being about three or four hours in the night, they set sail, holding their course Westward, and an hour or two before they let Nuno da silva go, putting him into another ship, that lay in the Haven of Guatulco. From thence forward the Englishmen passed on their voyage, to the Islands of Malucos, and from thence they passed by the Cape De Bona Esperanza, and so to England, as it is well known, so that this is only the description of the voyage that they made, while the said Pilot Nuna da silva was with them. Hereafter followeth the Copy of a Letter written by Sir Francis Drake (being in the South Sea of new spain, in his ship called the golden Hart, with the ship of S. john de Anton, which he had taken) to his companions in the other ships that were of his company, and by foul weather separated from him, as I said before, The Contents whereof were these: Master Wouter, if it pleaseth Godthat you should chance to meet with this ship of S. john de Anton, I pray you use him well, according to my word and promise given unto them, and if you want any thing that is in this Ship of S. john de Anton, I pray you pay them double the value for it, which I will satisfy again, and command your men not to do her any hurt: and what composition or agreement we have made, at my return into England I will by Gods help perform, although I am in doubt that this Letter will never come to your hands, notwithstanding, I am the man I have promised to be: Beseeching God, the Saviour of all the world, to have us in his keeping, to whom only I give all honour, praise and glory. This I have written, is not only to you Master Wouter, but also to Master Thomas, Master Charles, Master Caube, and Master Anthony, with all our other good friends, whom I commit to the tuition of him that with his blood redeemed us, and am in good hope, that we shall be in no more trouble, but that he will help us in adversity, desiring you for the Passion of Christ, that if you fall into any danger, that you will not despair of God's mercy, for he will defend you and preserve you from all danger, and bring us to our desired Haven, to whom be all honour, glory, and praise for ever and ever. Amen. Your sorrowful captain, whose heart is heavy for you. Francis Drake. An advertisement to the Reader. ALthough at the first it was my only intent to set down the voyages and courses of the oriental coasts, Islands, and countries of the East parts, with some other Navigations, of the places thereabouts, with the situations thereof, as I have already declared: notwithstanding, for that among other my Record, I have found the Navigations of all the Havens, Rivers, and Points of the coast of Brasilia, and the voyages of the Portugese's unto the same, together with the courses, stretchings, and situations of the Antillas' or fore Islands of new spain, together with all the channels that run between them, and the Havens, as well of the aforesaid Islands as of the Firm Land of new spain, and likewise of the other side of the coast of Angola or Aethiopia, I thought it not unconvenient to set them down in this place, although it be much different, and from the matter taken in hand. Touching the oriental parts, nevertheless, because it is unknown to our countrymen, as also commonly sailed by the Portugese's and Spaniards, whose voyages and travels I have herein only set down, it will not be out of the matter, but rather very necessary to be joined thereunto, and as I think will be well accepted, and esteemed off, insomuch, as that at this time, our country men do use to Traffic and travel into those countries, hoping it will be an occasion of further increasing and augmenting of their travels, to the honour, praise, and glory of the Gospel of Christ, and all Christian Princes, and to the entiching and welfare of the Low countries. The 65. Chapter. The Navigation from the Point of Cabo Verde to Brasilia, with the right course and knowledge of the Land and Havens of Brasilia, to the River called Rio de la Plata, with the situation thereof. Sailing from Cabo Verde (that is, the green point) to Brasilia, you must sail south southeast, Southeast, and Southeast & by South, and being under five or six degrees (or wheresoever you be, you shall take your degrees on the Southside, and lessen them as much as you can, and you must remember, that as soon as you have the general wind, blowing from the Southeast, than you shall run South-west, and West Southwest, and if the wind be South and Southwest, you must run Southeast, but not too far, for it helpeth you not, for that the more you keep that course, the more way you lose, and you shall use all the means you can, not to run under the coast of Guinea nearer than sixty or seventy fathom from the Sands, called Os Baixos de Sant Anna, for the wind will help you, in such manner, that you may sail towards the Point of Brasilia. And if with this course you will sail to Pernanbuco, It being from the month of October forward, and that you fall to Loofeward of the Island of Fernan de Noronha, being under eight & eight degrees, and ½. You must run West towards the Land, and if you see Land under eight degrees, they will be white downs and then you are on the northside, from whence you shall put to the South, that is, from October forward: for as then the North-east and east Northeast winds do blow, and if you be under the degrees aforesaid, you shall see the said downs, and when you see the end of them on the Southside, and from thence not seeing any more, than you are by Capig●aramirini, and from thence to Pernanbuco are five or six miles. And so if you be under eight degrees and a half, than you shall see a flat Land, till you be at ten and twelve fathom deep, and the Land on the Sea side will be even bare, which is called Capiragua, when you are East and West with this Land, being the Country whereof I speak, at twelve fathom deep, it being in the Months of October, or after Februarye, than you need not fear any thing, but take heed you put not southwards, for you must take heed of the Cape of S. Augustine, and Northward you shall see another point called A Punta d Olynda, where the Town of Olynda lieth, and the coast of the same North Point, is sailed North and South. If you be east and West with the cape S. Augustine, than you shall see a Hill inward to the land, which showeth like the back of a Camel, on the Southside having three Hovels along by the Sea side, and the coast will stretch northeast and South-west. From this point of S. Augustine, to the town of Olynda Northward are twelve miles. This point lieth under 8 degrees and ½. and Olynda lieth under 8. degrees and ⅓. & Pernanbuco under eight degrees, this voyage is thus to be sailed, when you set sail from Lisbon in the Months of October and November. But when you sail from Lisbon in February or March, than you shall look for land under nine degrees: for from the month of March forward, than the Southeast and south Southeast winds do blow, and if you chance to be by the land, under the height aforesaid, you need not fear any thing, but shall hold your course at seventeen and eighteen fathom, for it is fair and clear, and you have nothing dangerous but the riffs lying close by the land, whereon you see the water break: & running Northward, if you find certain downs along by the sea side, then fear not to run northward, for thereby you shall see the point of S. Augustine, This point lieth on the sea side, being even steep land, showing like the muzzle of a Whale, in the top having a round Hill, compassed with Trees: and being at the depth aforesaid close by the Land you shall see a small Island called Ilha de S. Alexus, From this Island to Cape S. Augustine, are five or six miles, and lieth under 8 degrees & ¾. The 57 chapter. The course and Navigation to the Haven, called A Bahia de todos os Santos, or of all Saints, in the coast of Brasilia. IF you desire to sail to the Bahia de todos os Santos, that is, the bay of all Saints, then observe the course aforesaid, taking the times of the year: From the Month of March forward, and from October as I said before. This Bay of all Saints, lieth under thirteen degrees, and being from October forward, than you shall look for Land at 12 and 12 degrees and ½. and being in sight thereof, (which will be white sandy strands, which show like linen that lieth too white) than you shall hold your course Southward along by the coast, until you be at the end of the said strands, where you shall see an Island (lying on the Northside within the mouth of the Bay or Haven) called Tapoon, From thence you run along the coast West, and West and South. And coming to this Bay, from the Month of March forward, than you must not pass above 13 degrees and 1/●. Southward, and when you are in sight of Land, if it be not the aforesaid white strand, than you shall use all the means you can to run Northward, and when you see the sandy strand at 12 degrees and ½. Then you shall see a hill standing along by the seaside, and if you chance to be so near the land, that you can find no means to get off from it, than you shall know the Land well, for on the sea side you shall see a round hovel called O Morro de san Paulo, from the which hovel to the bay are twelve miles: along by this hovel on the northwest side, there is a very great river called Tinhare, which is very good to put into if need be, and is six and seven fathom deep, and when you are at the aforesaid Point under 13 degrees & ½. then put not to the Land, for it hath a creek that is very dangerous. And if you desire to sail from the Bay of all Saints, to Pernanbuco or to Portugal, then hold your course Eastward, and if the wind serve you, hold East, and East and by North, for the space of 30 or 40. miles into the sea, and look not for the land of Pernanbuco from ten to nine degrees, for if you be under 11 degrees, you will fall into the Créeke called A Enseada de vaza Bar●ys (that is, the Créeke of emptying of vessels) and likewise when you come from Portugal, having sight of land at eleven degrees, than put not towards it to shorten your way, but rather hold your course Southward from it. From this Bay of all Saints to Pernanbuco is a hundred miles, and you run along the coast north-east and south-west. From thence to the River Rio does Ilhas, or the river of Islands, the coast runneth South-west and Northeast, and South-west and by West, and North-east and by East. The 58. Chapter. The course or Navigation to the river Rio does Ilhas, that is, the river of the Islands, in the coast of Brasilia. IF you desire to sail to the river of the Islands (you must understand that the Islands lie under 14. degrees and ¾.) seeking to find them, from the month of March forward, than you shall run to the height of 15. degrees and ½. and although you be under 15. degrees and 2/●. you need not fear: and seeing the land under these degrees, than you shall see certain high hills, called As Serras does Aymores, when you see those hills, than you shall come along the coast Northward, not fearing any thing, for from thence Northward there are no shallows: As soon as you see the islands (for there are no other) then on the same coast you shall see a round hill standing along by the Sea side, on the North side whereof you put into the River, and if you chance to be there at such time as you can not put in, then hold your course to Seaward from the Islands, keeping from them, and there by the said Islands you may anchor: and if you be in that country when the North-east winds do blow, then look for land under 14. degrees, and if you see a flat land, than it is the Island called Camamu●, by the which you shall run southward, and being at the end of the flat land, than you shall see a high land along by the sea side like the other aforesaid, all along by the sea side. In the place where this land beginneth to show high, there lieth a small river called Rio das Contas, that is, the river of Beads, but it is not to be entered, and hath a white hard stone for a mark. From thence to the Islands are 9 miles Southward, and coming where the aforesaid high land endeth, than you shall find a great Créeke, and being West Southwest, you shall see another high land, at the foot whereof (which is almost in the middle way to the creek) you shall see certain white houses, which are the Ingenies or Sugar houses where the Sugar is prepared: and being there, you shall presently see the Islands. The 59 chapter. How to sail to the Haven of Porto Seguro, that is, the sure Haven, lying in the coast of Brasilia. IF you desire to sail to the Haven of Porto Seguro, in the time of the Southeast winds (which is in March and so forward) you shall not put higher then to 16. degrees & ½. for there it hath a Reddish sand called Os Baixos does Abrolhos, which are very dangerous and run very far into the sea, and when you sail East & West you must not be negligent to throw your Lead out often times, & being by the land & that you see a long high hill like a sharp point, which is called Monte Pasqual, from thence you shall run Northward, & west, the same hill is westward from you, than you must hold towards the land, yet with good regard and foresight. And when you see the land, and that you perceive a round Hovel, then Southward from the said Hovel you shall see a Hill with a great strand, on the North side whereof lieth the Haven of Porto Seguro, and running along by the coast, above in the land you find the town of Porto Seguro. This height is a white stony rock, and on the North side of this stony rock there is a great valley: when you are East and west with this stony rock, then Northward you shall see the water break, which is upon a sand reaching two miles into the Sea, on the South side whereof you are right over against the town of Porto Seguro. If you begin this voyage when the winds are north-east & come to 15. degrees and ⅔. not seeing any hills, then leave not running along the coast, & when you are under 15. degrees, the first high land you shall see, will be with white sandy strands along the sea coast, & if under that height you see a river, then make not towards the land, for there it hath certain dangerous shallows called Os Baixos de Sant Antonio, from thence Southward lieth Porto Seguro, and passing along the coast and seeing the water break upon the other sand lying two miles further inward to sea, than you shall pass by it, keeping to seaward from it, and when you are at the end thereof, than the town will be Westward from you, you may well put to it, always having a care how you go and anchor under the height aforesaid. Departing from the Islands to Porto Seguro, than you must run 10. or 12. miles to Seaward from them to shun the sands, lying by the river called Rio grand, that is, the great River, and when you are past Rio grand, then make towards the land again to know it, as aforesaid. The 60. Chapter. How to sail to the Haven called Bahia d● Espirito Santo, that is, the Bay of the Holy Ghost, lying in the coast of Brasilia. SAiling to the haven of Spirito Santo (being past the Sands called Os Baixos does Abrolhos) under 19 degrees and ½. than you shall see land at 20. degrees, for in this coast you have no monsons, or courses of certain winds. If you chance to see land at 19 degrees and ½. and that it be on the Northwest side from you being flat land, than you are on the North side of the Haven of Spirito Santo, which is the land lying above Criquare, and above the river called Rio Dolce, that is, the river of Sweet or fresh water, you shall hold your course along by the land, until the land beginneth to rise, having some Hills, but trust not to the first that you shall see, but you shall see a high round hill which lieth along by the sea side, and is called La Sierra de Mestre Alvaro. And when you come to this Hill, on the North side you shall see a river called Rio does Reis Magos, that is, the river of the three Kings of Cullen, and on the South side, than the mouth of the Bay will presently open. At the end of the said hill on the South side, there is a point of stony Cliffs called A punto do Tubaron, that is, the point of the Hedge: And on the South side of the Bay there are two or three high hills, being there, you shall put right over to the Bay, and so run Westward. If you should be in the same course under twenty degrees, than you shall see many hills, among the which standeth a high sharp point, called Serra de Guarapari, that is, the hill of Guarapari: it hath likewise another on the North side called A Serra de Pero Can, that is, the Hill of Peterwood: these hills stand on the South side of Spirito Santo. From these Hills southward you shall see a hill standing alone, called Guape, & when you see it, than you shall likewise see three small Islands lying together, on the south side whereof lieth another small, round, & flat Island, and the land lying right against this round flat Island hath a great Bay, where (if need be) you may put in and anchor: if you desire to go into it, than you shall run East and west with the hill, and so run in, and then the round Island will be on the North side. This Island is called Ilha de Repouso, that is, the Island of rest, it lieth very close by the land, and between it and the land you may well anchor. From these three Islands aforesaid to the bay of Spirito Santo are 12. miles, and holding your course Northward to Spirito Santo, you shall see another Island lying alone, which you pass, running to Seaward by it, and being by it, you shall presently see the mouth or Haven of Spirito Santo: this bay or haven lieth under 20. degrees. The 61. Chapter. To sail from the Bay or Haven of Spirito Santo, to the Bay of S. Vincent. Sailing from Spirito Santo to the Bayliff S. Vincent, you must run along the coast about 7. or 8. miles from it, to the point called Cabo Frio, that is, the cold point, until you come to it: in the way you have a great bay called A Bayho de Saluador, the Bay of our Saviour, which is distant from Cabo Frio 12. miles. Before you come to Cabo Frio, there are two Islands, from the which you run to seaward, yet if need be, or if you desire it, you may pass between them and the land. Cabo Frio hath an Island right over against it, which hath a point where you may anchor if need be on the West side, where it is fair and clear. This Cabo Frio lieth under 23. degrees, from thence to the river called Rio de janero, that is, the river of januarie are 18. miles: this river of janero hath three or four Islands in the mouth thereof: If you will enter into this river, you may well go in, taking your way between two of the Islands that lie in the mouth thereof: on the South side of this river there is a Hill that showeth like a man with a Friars Cowl or Cape upon his head. When you are under the height of this river, you shall to Landward see certain high Hills, which show like Organs, which is a good mark to know that you are by the river, and when you begin to go near the land, you shall see a round, high, and bare Island on the South side: the mouth of this river lieth under 23. degrees and ½. From this river to the Road or open Haven by the Portugese's called Angra, are fifteen miles, and there are two rivers in the way, but being in that country, put not to the land, unless you be compelled thereunto. From the mouth of this river West Southwest, and South-west & by West, you shall see a great Island called A Ilha de Sant Sebastian, which on the South-west side hath another small high Island called A Ilha does Alcatrases, that is, the Island of Seamewes': before you come at it, you must hold your course Westward, to shun certain Sands that lie by it, whereby you shall come to the mouth of the bay of Saint Vincent, where you shall see an Island called Ilha da Muda, that is, the Island of the Dumb woman: and to put into the Bay of S. Vincent, you shall leave the Islands on the East side. The Bay of Saint Vincent lieth under 24. degrees, and if you be to leeward from it, than you shall see many Islands, whereof some stretcheth outward, which are the best marks for this Haven, and being there, you are Northwest and Southeast with the mouth of the Bay. The 62. Chapter. How to sail from Cabo Frio, or the cold point, to the river of Rio de Plata, or the river of silver, with all the course thereof. FRom Cabo Frio to the river of janero or januarie, are eighteen miles, and you sail East and West, and lieth under 23. degrees, and hath these marks: First, inward to the land it hath certain high Hills called Organs, but at this time most of them are fallen down: and on the West Southwest side towards the Sea side, it hath the form of the Mass of a ship, and in the mouth of the river lieth four Islands, whereof one is high and round which is a good mark, as also the Sugar loaf, being a hovel that is called so, lying in the Haven, although you can not see it when you are at sea: you may sail along this coast without danger, and you need fear nothing but that you see before your eyes. From thence to Saint Vincent the coast reacheth East Northeast, and West Southwest, and is in length two and forty miles: and all that way there is neither shallows nor Sands, but there you find good Havens for all winds. Twelve miles from the river lieth an Island called Ilha grand, or the great Island, which hath very good Havens as well on the South-west as the East sides, with very good fresh water, and great fishing, it is a high land with many trees, and inward to the land it is very high and sharp pointed: if you desire to put in there, you need not fear to do it, for there is no danger. From this great Island to the Island of S. Sebastian are eighteen miles, and to the Island A Ilha does Porcos, that is, the Island of Hogs, are fourteen miles: the Isles of Hogs hath a very good Haven, but it is too far inward. Fron thence to the Island of Saint Sebastian are four miles, which is a great high Island, full of trees, it hath a very good entry, as well on the one side as on the other, it lieth North-east and Southwest. From thence to the land about half a mile distant lieth the Road: Southwestwarde there lieth another long Island called A Ilha does Alcatrases, or the Island of Seamewes. Close by this Island there lieth three Cliffs, on the South side whereof lieth an Island, which is a very good mark, for the land is sometimes covered with mist and thick weather, whereby you can not know it, but when you see this Island, than you may know where you are. From this Island to S. Vincents are twelve miles, which is a pleasant way, and in that country there are three small Islands called As Ilhas de Boam Sicanga. From these Islands to the Haven called A Berra de Birtioga are six miles, which is a very good & a deep Haven. Between the Islands aforesaid & this Haven lieth another round Island called Monte de Trigo, that is, the hill or heap of wheat, which is a very good mark for such as desire to put into the Haven of Bertioga. From this Haven to the Haven called A Berra d'Esteuao da Costa, that is, the haven of Steven da Costa, are five miles: this is a good Haven for great ships, it hath a very good Bay for ships to lie in: and if you will not put into it, outward close by the land you have an Island called A Ilha da Moela, that is, the Island of Cheese, where you may anchor. From this Haven Southwestward, lieth an Island called A Ilha Queimada, that is, the burnt Island, which is a flat Island all stony, but along by it, it is fair ground, like South southeastward. From the Haven, lieth a Cliff, which of many men is not known: it lieth above the water, and is in the middle way between the Island Does Alcatrases and Ilha Queimada: From thence to the Island called Canaveas, that is, the Island of reeds, are three miles, & you run North Northeast, and South Southwest along by the coast. Canaveia is an Island that hath a very good Haven and fresh water, and lieth under 23. degrees and ½. on the south side it hath two Rocky Islands, whereof the one is somewhat long and round, and right over against it lieth the river called Rio de Canavea, where you may put in with small ships. From Canavea to the Island called A Ilha de Santa Caterina, are 48. miles, and you run along the coast North & South: This is a long Island full of trees, it lieth by the coast which reacheth North and South. On the North side at the entry of the Haven it hath two Islands, and on the South side another Island called A Gall, that is, the Island of the Galley: on the North side thereof you can not enter but only with small Barks and ships: but on the South side it hath a very good entry for great ships, it hath much fresh water, and great store of fish and wild Deer. This Island lieth under 28. degrees and ½. From thence to the Haven called O Porto de Don Rodrygo are five miles, and five miles further forward lieth the Haven called does Patos, that is, the Haven of Geese, by some called La Laguna, that is, the Lake: This Haven serveth for Barks and small ships that traffic in those countries. From thence to the river of Rio de Plata, there is not one haven where you may put in, the coast reaching North Northeast and South Southweast. Sailing from the aforesaid Island of S. Caterina to Rio de Plata, you must hold your course southward to the height of 34. degrees & ⅔. Then you must put to the land, & when you see it, which at the first showeth like an Island called los Castilloes, than you shall run along the coast, which will lie Southwestward, Southwest and by West, and west south-west from you, and make not your account to see the Cape de Sancta Maria, for the land there is so flat, that there you can not discern any sign or token of a point, but there you shall see certain riffs, but you need not fear any thing more than that you see before your eyes: and if you chance not to see any land running towards it, than cast out your Lead, and there you shall find 10.14. and 18. fathom deep, therefore fear not for it is all one kind of ground, and you are in a good way. Being there as aforesaid, then run as long as you can well discern the land, & then you shall see an Island called A Ilha does Lobos, that is, the Island of Wolves, for there you see many wolves: it is a flat Island all full of stones, on the south side it hath an Island and on the east a Riffe, but you need not fear any other then that you see before your eyes. This Island is distant from the Firm land about two miles and ½. towards the northwest, & from this Island of Wolves there lieth a small flat Island, with a low wood close by the land, which hath a good haven to anchor in, if you have any tempest out of the South-west. If you pass along by this Island on the East Southeast side, then go near the point or hook of the firm land, which is a low stony point, and between this point and the Island lieth a sand which you shall presently see by the water that breaketh upon it, and if you enter on the North-east side you need not fear any thing: and to anchor, keep close by the Island, for there you have fresh water, and great store of fish upon the ground. Being there, you must be careful, for there beginneth the first high Land, and from it about eight or ten miles further, lieth a sand that is very dangerous, and is about four miles from the Firm Land, being two miles in length: you must run between it and the Firm land, and when you sail from the high land aforesaid, for the space of a mile and a half or two miles, you must keep hard by the shore, because of the sand aforesaid, and from thence with your Lead in your hand, with good watch and foresight, and if it be not seasonable weather to sail by night, than your best way were to anchor and to stay till it be day, the better to make your voyage. And when you think you are passed this sand, than you shall see a hill called O monte de Santo Sered●o, which is a round high hill, the like whereof is not in those countries to be found: between the which hill and the sands aforesaid, lieth an Island called A Ilha das Flores, that is, the Island of Flowers, which you may pass about without danger. And when you come into the salt or fresh water, which floweth five and twenty miles beneath the river called Rio de Buenos Airs, that is, the River of good air, where the water is very fresh, then hold your course West, and then you shall be eight or ten miles beneath the River of good air, which is the best course you can hold, but I advise you still to have your Lead in hand, and when you are at three or four fathom water, then sail no further if it be by night, but in the day time you may see whither you sail, which must be in sight of land, and so near, that you may easily discern the trees, holding two miles from the land, for you can not pass by the River of good air without seeing the houses that stand upon the same. The most part of the land of the River of good air, is a thick land like a down, about three miles along by the sea side, as soon as you see this land, than you must make right towards the houses, yet somewhat more towards the south side, where there is a place where the ships anchor: but if you desire to run on the North side, than you shall take your course from the Island las Flores, or from Santa Horodio about a mile and a half from the land at three and ½. or four fathom, to the Islands of Saint Gabriel, which are three small Islands, but they have no good Road: and if you chance to anchor there, go not a shore but very warily, because the inhabitants have wars with the Spaniards and Portugese's all along the river, but the best course is on the South side, from the fresh water inwards. The 63. Chapter. How to sail from the Island La Gomera, one of the Islands of Canaria, to the Antillas' or sore Islands of the Spanish Indies, and from thence to the coast of the Firm land to Cartagena and Nombre de Dios, as also the course from thence to the Havana and the channel thereof, and so to the Flemish Islands, and from thence to Spai●ne, with the situation of the places. Sailing from the Island La Gomera to the Island called La Desseada, that is, the Desired Island, being one of the Islands of the Spanish Indies, than you must hold your course South for the space of a mealetide, so to get out of the calm: from thence you must run West Southwest till you be under 20. or 22. degrees, and being there you must run West, and West and by South, till you come under fifteen degrees and 1/●. which is the height of the Island La Desseada: If (when you are there) you have a West wind, then run South-west as far as you think good, thereby to get again under fifteen degrees and ½. running on the wether side West Northwest, to bring all to one point whereby you shall find help, from North and South, East and West, because you are close by the land, holding your course West and west and by north, because the compass windeth a strike into the Northwest, with the which course you shall see the Island la Desseada. This Island lieth East and West, and showeth like a Galley with her tilt up: on the east side it is a low land, in form like a bore-sprit of a ship or galley: from the West side it is high land, showing like the stern of a galley, and on the South side it showeth like half an Island, the hinder part thereof being like a horse shoe. The Island called Ma●galante is a low and flat land, and reacheth East & West, being full of trees, on the East side being highest, and on the South side having certain white downs, & on the West side about half a mile from the Island it hath a black shining cliff. This Island lieth full under fifteen degrees. The Island la Dominica is a great Island and reacheth Northwest and southeast, when you see it first (being on the outside thereof) it showeth like 2. Islands, by reason of a great opening it hath in the middle, but when you are close by it, than you perceive it to be all one Island, it is full of hills, on the Southeast side a low land, having a small or thin point of land with a hovel upon it, on the Northwest side it is thick high Land, having a Hill that seemeth to be separated, and to stand alone by itself, although it is not alone. Upon this hill there is a rock which showeth like a clock house, & without the aforesaid thick high Land, there is a Rock or cliff which runneth off from the thick point. This Island lieth under 15. degrees & ½. The Islands called Los Santos, are four Islands which are not very high, lying in Triangle. Between these Islands and the Island La Dominica, there runneth a good channel to pass through. Sailing from the Island La Dominica to the Point of Coquibocoa, lying from the Firm Land, you shall hold your course West, and West and by South, until you be by the point, and if you see it not, then run southwestward towards it, or Southward, until you see it. This Point of Coquibocoa is a low Land, running into Seaward, and within the land it hath a row of Hills, which are called the Oil hills, which stretch along by Vevansuela, where they end, which upon the coast of the Firm land. From this Point you run along the coast to the Point called Cabo de Vela, and between these two Points there are two havens, whereof one is called Bahya Honda, (that is, the deep Bay. This lieth on the East side, and on both sides where the Sea beateth, it hath downs: The other Haven lying on the West side, within it hath a high Land or Hill, which reacheth North and South. In both these Havens you may enter with Ships of two hundred tons. All this coast to Cabo de la Vela is clear and safe. The point Cabo de la Vela, is a high land like a sugar loaf, and about half a mile from it, there is a cliff, which showeth like a ship under sail, and therefore this Point is called Cabo de la Vela, that is, the point of the sail. This Cliff lieth North-east and Southwest, with the Point aforesaid it is said you may well pass between it and the land, and if you depart from the said Point, to sail to the Cliff and Point called Cabo de la aguia, (that is, the Point of the Needle) than you shall run West southwest, by the which course you shall see it. They are four Cliffs together, which show in form like a Horse shoe, and the Land that is right against it, is a high Land. Being inward to the Land some what higher, which is called Las Sierras Nevadas, that is, the Snow hills, when these hills are Southward from you, than you are right against the four cliffs. And coming to the beginning of the four Cliffs, having past the River De Palomina lying by the last Cliff, than you shall see the Cabo de La aguia. This Cape is a still Land, descending downward to the Sea side, but not very high, on the top having a Dale, which showeth like a saddle. It hath likewise on the out side (close by it) three black shining Cliffs, which the water doth almost flow over: they lie with the Cape aforesaid North and South. The said Cape is bare, & showeth blackish and shining. All this coast reacheth almost East and West. From Cabo de Sancta Marta forward, you must run along by the coast, always looking to your course, because of the Billows and streams that come from the Land, which oftentimes fall upon you. When you discover the land of Charthagena, you shall see two Cliffs, which lie by the Haven of Charthagena, you must run along by the first Cliff, between it and the Land, always with your Lead in hand, and you must not go nearer than ten fathom to the Land, there you shall find white sandy ground, and being at fifteen or sixteen fathom muddy ground, then keep aloof to the Southeast and South, and so run in, for you shall see the hole open before you. Sailing from Carthagena to Nombre de Dios, (that is, the name of God) with the winds called Brisas (which are winds blowing from the East and North parts, generally called Brisas) than you must hold your course West, and somewhat West and by South, till you be under 9 degrees and ½. under the which height lieth the point called Cantina, which are seven Islands, whereof five stretch east and west, the other two North-east and Southwest. Being somewhat past these Islands, you shall see a low point of Land reaching into the Sea, called A Punta de Lambras, which lieth on the West side, and Westward from it, it hath a Hill which is somewhat higher than the Point, which you may well discern when you make to Seawarde from it, and that the Point lieth Southwestwarde from you, the said Hill having on the Southeast side certain low Land, and somewhat more Westward, the Land beginneth to be higher, which endeth at the River of Francisco. At the mouth of this River to Seaward from it, lieth a stony cliff, and from this River to Nombre de Dios, it is all over a flat and red shining Land, to the hovel called Niquea, which is about a mile from Nombre de Dios, you shall likewise see the edifices or buildings of Capira, and if a man should ask you (when those buildings lie North-east from you) where you are, than you may answer him, that you are upon the coast of the land northeast and South-west beneath Nombre de Dios. Sailing from Nombre de Dios to Carthagena, you shall hold your course East Northeast to the point, from thence you must run East, whereby you shall discover the Islands of Saint Barnard, which are low and yet Hill Islands, with very fair ground along by them, and if you should be in a Frigate, than you may pass between them and the land. Five or six miles further you shall see the Islands called Brava which are four small Islands, whereof the furthest outward is the greatest, they are all low, and bare Land, having by them fair and clear ground, and with a Frigate you may pass inward, but with a ship you must not go nearer than six fathom. From thence east Southeastward, you shall see the Galley of Carthagena, with the marks aforesaid, & in the East and East Northeast bough, you shall see the Land Cariscos, which is a high and hill land. From thence you must run along by the coast, until you begin to see the Haven, than you must put in, always shunning the sands of Carys, running along by the east point, being there, if night falleth upon you, than you may anchor between Carys and Baru, in the surest place you can find, to defend you from the winds called Brisas, by the high Land of Carys, and if you put out of the Haven of Nombre de Dios, you shall lavere till you see the buildings that are beyond it, and sailing into the Haven, you shall do as wind serveth. Sailing from Carthagena to the Island of Havana, you shall hold your course Northwest, till you come to thirteen degrees and 1/●. and when you are under thirteen degrees, than you shall let yourself drive South Southeast and South, as the manner is, until you be passed the height, or be out thereof, or in the depth, and when you are upon the ground of the Serrana, than you shall sleep towards it as much as you can, and if it be possible you shall hold Northward, for so you shall the sooner be there. From the point of Cabo de Camaron to Cabo de Roncador, with the Sea strand that stretcheth from the one to the other, as also from Serrana and Serranilla, (being Islands and Cliffs so called) on the west side of all these sands is great sand, with Fish s●ales upon the ground, and the least depth you find there, is fifteen fathom wa●r, being all fair and in this depth you shall run till you be over it, and being over, you shall presently begin to multiply or rise till you be at fifty fathom deep and somewhat more. Serrana lieth under fourteen degrees and ½. and Serranilla under sixteen degrees. If you see Serranilla on the West side, on that side it is a low sandy Island, stretching Northwest and Southeast. Sailing from Serranilla or Cabo de Roncador to the point of S. Anton lying in the Island Cuba, yu● shall hold your course Northwest, and Northwest and by north, wherewith you shall discover the Cape aforesaid, or the Cape de coryentes, (that is, the Point of the streams) which is a cloven Point towards the sea side, being low Land, on it having some Palm Trees. From thence to Cabo de S. A●n, the Land beginneth to be lower, & the coast stretcheth Northwest and southeast. The cape de S. Anton is a low sandy Point upon it having two or three hovels, and lieth under 22. degrees. If in this course you chance to see the Island called Cayman grand, that is, the great Cayman. You must understand that it lieth under nineteen degrees, and is low land full of Trees, stretching east and west, on the southside having some white sandy strands. Sailing from the Point of S. Anton, with the winds called Vendaval, (which are West and South winds, generally called Vendaua●es, as the East and North winds are called B●sas) to the Havana, than you must run North-east to shun the droughtes that run out from this Point, which reach to the beginning of the hills called Los Organoes, (that is, the Organs) and when you are passed the sands, you shall hold your course along by the coast, for there you need fear nothing more than that you see before you. The Organs are certain high Trees, which make many openings and rents, whereof those on the Southside are called the point of Guanico, these Organs or hills reach to the River called Rio de Por● that is, the river of hogs from thence begin the Hills called the Cabinas', which are high and doubled, on the highest of them having a plain or flat Land, there you have a Haven called El Puerto de Cabanas, Eastward from this point to the field of Mariam, it is low flat land full of Trees, where there is another Haven: From thence to Havana it is all low land without any rise, except one Hovel, lying right over against the Havana, which is a cloven hill, upon it having a sharp point, called Atalaya, that is, a guard, and being North and South with the Haven, within the Land you shall see two Hills, which show like two teats of a woman's dugs, and to put into it, you must keep your course along by the hovel. If you depart from the Point aforesaid with the winds called Brisas, than you shall hold your course to the Cliffs called ●ortugas (that is, the Torteaux) as wind serveth, and you must see what depth you find: for if there you find forty fathom water, than you are on the Southside thereof, and finding 30. fathom, than you are East and West right against it, and being at any of these depths, you shall hold your course South southwest until you see the land, which you shall discover from the field or Haven thereof: and if you see a Land that is somewhat high, having some Hills and Dales that show like the fingers of a man's hand, than it is the land ●a●●d Narugo from thence you shall run to H●ea●a, holding your course along by the coast. Sailing out of Havana to the Martyrs, you shall hold your course North-east, by the which course you shall see the Point, which is three small Islands, whereof that in the middle is the greatest, the uttermost being the East coast, and the inwardest the northeast and southwest coast. From thence North-east-ward to the Cape De Canaverales (that is the point of Reeds) the coast stretcheth North and South and North-east-ward you shall see no land, and being under five and twenty degrees, than you are in the mouth of the channel, which to pass through, you must hold your course North-east, and if you see not the Cape de Canaverales being under 28. degrees and ●/2. than you are without the channel. Sailing out of the Havana (with the winds called Brisas) to the channel, you must run outwards till it be noon, and after noon you shall make to Landward, that towards evening you may be by it, and to use the Winds called Terreinhos, (which are Winds that blow by night from off the land) running in this manner along by the coast, until you be North and South with the Hovel called El Pan de Matancas, (that is, the loaf of Matancas being North and South with the same loaf, you must run North-east, if the wind will permit, if not, you must put to the coast of Florida, where the wind will drive you doing your best, in that way to go out of your course as little as you may, for the streams run with great force towards that Land, and when you think it time, than you shall put to the other side, as the wind will lead you, till you see the Land, and when you see it, than wind, in this sort running through, and being under 28. degrees and ½. than you are out of the Channel: hereof I advise that the strikes you make in lavering towards the land of Florida must be short, and those towards the Coast of Minare long, for the streams drive you to the Land of Florida. The Hills of Chupiona come out by the loaf of Matancas (and are certain not too high and even Hills) flat on the top, with certain white shining hovels. The loaf of Matancas is a high Hovel, flat above, stretching north-east and southwest, and on both sides as well Northeastward, as southwestward, it hath two low Points, lower than the said loaf, which show like the heads of Torteaux. On the northeast side the Land stretcheth low, and from thence Northward it maketh a small Point. Behind this Point lieth the Haven of Matancas, and to enter therein you must run North-east and Southwest right against the said loaf, and then the Haven will be South from you, and you must run southward to it, it is a great Bay, and there you have no Road, but close by the Land, coming out you leave the loaf on the Southside, and you must hold your course northeast, till you be out. And being out of the Channel, if it be in Winter, you shall run East, wherewith you shall hold East and by North, by the winding or declining of the compass: By the which course you shall pass on the Southside of the Islands and Cliffs of Bermuda, and this course you shall hold till you be under the height of the Island Fayael, one of the Flemish Islands, which is a great Island, stretching Northwest and Southeast on the Southeast side, having a thick Land, and on the north-east side somewhat lower land. To sail from thence to the Island of Tercera, you shall hold your course outward of the Island of S. George, east, and east & by North. The Island of S. George is a high Land, stretching East and West, as also Tercera, which on the Southside hath a cloven hill, called O Brasil, and a little eastward from thence, there lieth three cliffs. The Island of S. Michael is a great high Island, stretching East and West, on the West side being low, and on the East side high. It hath likewise a cloven hill, lying at the end on the East side. This Island lieth under 38. degrees. The 64. Chapter. The course and right marks from the Island La Desseada, to the land and coast of Carthagena, Nombre de Dios, new Spain, and from the channel of Havana. IF you desire to sail through the Channel that runneth between the Island La Antigua, & La Desleada towards the coast, you must hold your course West to the Island of Montecerratte, running along by the Island of Guadalupe, which is an Island cloven through the middle, & higher on the West then on the East side. The Island La Antigua, (that is, the old Island) you shall find on the Northside of Guadalupe, stretching in length East and West, and hath Hills with outward show like islands, and lieth under 16. degrees and 1/●. The marks of the Island Montecerratte are these. It is round and high like the Island La Gomera in the Canaries, and hath some Hills with certain Water beaks. Sailing from this Island Montecerratte, you must run West Northwest, whereby you shall discover the Island Sancta Crus, but you must not run too close by it, for there it is foul, and no clear ground, it stretcheth East and West, and is Hilly, but not very high, being higher on the West then on the East side, in the middlest hath a rent or partition, and on the East side there is a Road where you may anchor, for there it is fair sandy ground. To sail from Sancta Crus to the Island of Puerto Riquo (that is, the Island of the rich Haven) on the Southside, you must run West Northwest, whereby you shall discover the hill called Sierta de Loquillo, and from thence to Cabo Roxo you shall sail West and West and by North, keeping along by the land until you be by the cape aforesaid, which is the uttermost part of the same Island. This point called Cabo Roxo, (that is, the red point) is a thin and low land, on the sea side having certain red shining downs, and on the Northwest side you see the hills called I as Sierras de S. German, which are very high, but not so high as those of Loquillo. From this point of Cabo Roxo, you must hold your course west, and west and by North, whereby you shall discover the Island called De la mona, that is, the Island of the ape, and you must run along. by the southside thereof. The Island La Mona, is a low land, and reacheth East and West, on the sea side being a plain land descending downward, on the northside it hath a Cliff or small Island called Monica, or the little ape. Between it and the Island you may pass. On the West side of Mona there is a Road of fair and good ground, having likewise such another Road by the Point that lieth Southwest. From the Island De la Mona to the Island De la Sahona, if that it be by day, you shall hold your course South-west, and by night West, and West and by South, and you must understand, that the Point called Cabo de Enganno, that is, the deceitful Point, is altogether like the Point of Sahona, having a cloven hovel on the upper part of the Island, being between the lowest Land thereof that lieth on the Sea side. Between Cabo del Enganno, and Sahona, lieth a small Island called the little S. Catalyna, the reason why you must there run West and South, is because the Streams run towards the Créeke. The marks of the Island Sahona, are these. It is a low Island full of Trees, so that as you come towards it, you first see the Trees before you perceive the land thereof, it stretcheth East Northeast and West Southwest, on the South side it hath certain riffs which run half a mile into the Sea: if you fall upon this land coming out of the Sea, and that over the Islands you see certain hills, than they are the hills of Niquea, which you shall likewise see between great Sancta Catalina and La Sahona: this Island Sahona on the West side hath a Road of eight or ten fathom deep, to sail from Sahona to Santo Domingos, (it being three miles to seaward from Sahona) you shall hold your course Northwest, and Northwest and by West: From thence to Santo Domingos it is altogether low land, on the sea side descending downward, and is the land which in that place reacheth furthest East and West. The marks of Santo Domingos are these, that when you are Northwest and Southeast with the old mines, than you are North and South with the river of Santo Domingos, and over the river you shall see two hovels which show like the teats of a woman's breasts, when those hovels are North, and North and by west from you, than you are to loofeward from the river, so that by those teats you shall know whether you be past or to Loofeward from it. On the East point of the entry of the River standeth a Tower, which serveth for a guard or beacon for the ships that come out of the sea. From this point aforesaid runneth a hidden cliff which you must shun, and so you must run in, but go not to near the All Matadero, that is, the Slaughter house, for there it is shallow: and being within the aforesaid hidden cliff, you have four fathom deep, and so you shall hold your course to the Sandie strand, lying on the East side, shunning the Cliffs of the fortress, and going from the Fortress inward, than you must let fall your anchors, right against the Admiralty in the middle of the river, where the best place and Road is. From Santo Domingo being 4. miles to Seaward, you shall hold your course South-west, and South-west and by west, until you be North and South with the Island of Niqueo, and to go from thence to the haven of Oquoa, leave not the coast, but run close by it with all your sails, till you be past the river, for if you get off from it without touching the Palma, which is a certain bank so called where the ships use to anchor, than you must not anchor: being in the river, you must look well before you, that when you anchor to make your ship fast with an anchor both out to Landward and to Seaward, and then you are safe. Sailing from this Haven and Bay of Oquoa, you shall run outward to the South until you be about the point and three miles into the sea, and then you shall hold your course South-west, and South-west and by South, whereby you shall discover an Island called De la Beata, that is, the blessed Island, which is a low Island stretching East and west. Two miles Westward from Beata, lieth an Island or cliff called Altobello, which by night showeth like a ship: when you are passed Beata and Altobello, than you must run West, and West and by North, to the point called Cabo de Tubaron, that is, the point of the hedge. In this creek are three or four Islands or rocks which are called Los frails, that is, the Friars. Before you come to Cabo de Tubaron there is a Créeke, wherein lieth an Island called jabaque, with more cliffs and riffs lying about it, being foul ground. Behind this Island you see certain hills called Las Sierras de dona Maria, otherwise Las Sierras de Sabana▪ when you are right against jabaque, than you must run West Northwest. The Cabo de Tubaron is a black shining Hovel, on the sea side being cloven, upon it having certain white places like water beaks. Within this point or Cape lieth a river of fresh water, where you have stones for Ballast as you have in the River of Mynijcka. From thence to the point of Cabo de Crus, you must hold your course Northwest until you are passed the Island of Nabassa, running on the North side thereof, and if the streams chance to drive you on the south side, than you must observe certain times (if you be in a great ship) holding a good way into the Northwest from it, to shun the sands that stick out from the point de Morante, and reach between this point and Nabassa, & there in some places you have above four fathom deep, and at the end thereof you may run from 15. to 20. fathom deep. Nabassa is a round and low Island, on the Sea side being all flat and plain land: running on the North side of this Island, you shall hold your course Northwest, and Northwest and by West, and if you desire to pass along by the Cape De Crus, it is a point sticking out, which (as you come toward it out of the sea) showeth as if on the top it were full of Trees, but it is inward to Land. On the East side of this Point lieth the haven of Cabo de Crus. Now to sail to the Island De Pinos, you must run West Northwest, whereby you shall discover the Island. This Island De Pinos is a low land full of Trees, so that as you come out of the Sea, you see the Trees before you see the land, it stretcheth East and West, and in the middle it hath three hovels, whereof that in the middle is the greatest. From this Island De Pinos, to Cabo de Corrientes, you must run West Northwest, by the which course you shall see it, This point on the sea side is a Land running downward, upon it having some palm Trees, and on the West side a sandy strand, where there is a Road where you may lie. Upon this Point of Cabo de Correntes standeth a picked Hill, which stretcheth further out than all other points, when from thence you put in, you shall see on the Land righter over you, a Lake of fresh water, where if need be, you may supply your want. To sail from thence to the Point of S. Anton. Being two or three miles to Seaward, you must run West Northwest. From the Island De Pinos, to Cabo de S. Anton, there are two great créekes: one lying from the Island De pinos to the cape De Corrientes, and the other from the Cape De Corrientes to Cape de S. Anton, and before you come to the Point of Cape de Corrientes, there is a point called La Punta de Guaniguanico, & behind the Land inward, you shall see certain Hills, called Las Sierras Guaniguanico. Cape de S. Anton is a long Point full of trees with some bushes with sandy strands, and from it there runneth a bank or sand, for the space of 4. miles northwestward. Sailing from the Point of S. Anton to new spain, in winter time, that is, from August to March, than you must hold your course without the Islands and Cliffs called Las Alactanes' west northwestward, with that which course having sailed 60. or 70. miles, you shall find ground, which shallbe of shells or great sand. This you shall find till you be under 24. degrees, & if you find ground at less than 40. fathom sailing with the same course, then hold your course north northwest, & northwest & by west, & when therewith you begin to increase in depth, then turn again to your first course of northwest, and when you begin to lose land, then for the space of 20. miles you must sail West, wherewith you shall be north & south with the Island Bermeia. Fron thence you must sail south-west till you be under 20. degrees, & if you see not land, you shall run west, for at that time it is not good to go beneath the height. Under this height & course you shall see La torre Blanca. that is, the white tower, & if you chance to discover the River of S. Petro, & S. Paulo, then beyond the river you shall see certain green hills, but not very high. If you find 35. fathom deep, with muddy ground, with shells in some places, then from thence you shall hold your course South, and South and by East, until you be right against the fields of Almeria: if you come out of the Sea, you shall seek ground lower, and finding 30. or 40. fathom with some muddy ground, than you are East and West with the river of Almeria, about seven miles from the land: and if in the South-west you see the hills called 'las Sierras del Papalo, and that they run one within the other, than you are Northeast and South-west from them. From thence you shall bold your course South, and South and by West, whereby the hills of Papalo will begin to show themselves, which will make two round hills: you shall likewise see Las Sierras de Calaquote, which are certain reddish hills. This row of Hills cometh out to the sea side. If you desire to take the ground by the point of Villa Risa, that is, the rich town, three miles from the land, you shall find 80. and 90. fathom deep, muddy ground. The river of S. Peter and S. Paul lieth under 21. degrees, and los Campos d'Almeria, that is, the fields of Almeria, under 20. degrees. Villa Risa la Vieya, that is, old Villa Risa, lieth under 19 degrees and 2/●. Villa Risa la Vieya is certain hills, whereof the one end reach unto the Sea side: they are not very high, but make many openings or rents, (like the hills of Abano, called Organs) stretching North and South: if you chance to come out of the Sea, and should see the Hills of Villa Risa, than you should see that they stretch North and South, and the hills of S. Martin stretch East and West, you may know them another way, which is, that if you make Westward towards them, coming close to them, they will show to be lower than the Hills of S. Martin, which are greater and higher, as you pass along the Sea coast by them, and being three miles to Seaward from Villa Risa, you shall find ground, which by S. martin's you shall not find, although you were but half a mile from them. Lastly, although you should have no knowledge of Land, yet you might know it by the marks aforesaid. To Léeward from Villa Risa lieth a Cliff, called N. Bernard's, which is in form like a sugar loaf. From Villa Risa la Vieya, or out of Villa Risa, to S. john de Luz, you shall hold your course South, and South and by East, and you shall find ground of shells & muddy ground, at thirty fathom towards the Land. By the River of Vera Crus, you shall find sandy ground, and in some places muddy ground. If you were without, than you must know that from S. Christopher, to S. john de Luz, it is all sandy strands, and being East and west with the point called Punta Gord●, than you are North and South with the Island of S. john de Luz, and being northeast and southwest with the Island at less than forty fathom deep towards the Land, than you shall have reddish ground, and in some places shells, and from forty fathoms forward white muddy ground. If you come out of the sea, and desire to know if you be East and West with the Island, than you must mark a high hovel that runneth out from the hills of Vera Crus. And when you are East and west with this Hovel, so are you likewise East and West with the Island, you must likewise understand, that when the Hill of Sierra Nevada, (that is, the snowy hill) lieth West & west and by south from you, then are you likewise east and west with the Island aforesaid, & then you shall presently see the point called Anton Niquardo, as also Mendano Montuoso, (or the high Hovel aforesaid) and you shall likewise see the sea-coast Medel●n, and on the Northwest side the Point of Punta Gorda, & if you desire with a North wind to be in the haven, then run at 18 & 20 fathom deep, whereby you shall pass to loofeward through the channel, going close to the bulwark, yet shunning it, you shall anchor on the loof side, for to Léeward it hath no great depth. If you depart from the Point of S. Anton in summer time towards new Spain, than you must hold your course westward for 20 or 30 miles, wherewith you shall find ground at 80 fathom, being shells. From thence you shall run west, and west and by South till you be at 30 fathom, and from 30 fathom westward to 30 fathom, with the which course you should sail along this Country. And being a greater depth, you shall run west and west and by south, whereby you shall come again to the former depth. By this course you shall pass through the Islands of Ilha de Sconocida, & Ilha d'Arena, that is, the unknown Island, and the sandy Island. From the Island la de Sconocida to the Island d'Arena, west, & west and by south, you shall descry the Hills Las Sierras de San Martin, which are two high Hills, in the middle having a great opening or cliff. Sailing from these Hills, you shall run West, by the which course you shall see the stony rock, which is a cloven hill, you shall run Northwest, and northwest & by west, wherewith you shall see the River of Medelyn, which is a low land, & somewhat more to Loofeward lieth the Island called Ilha Blanca, or the white Island, as also the Island Rio Riffias, which a far off showeth like a ship under sail▪ & then presently you shall see the Island of S. john de Luz, and from the river called Rio Varado, to the River of Vera Crus. There is no high land, but only one black shining hill, lying above the aforesaid Haven. The 65. Chapter. How to sail from the Island La Desseada to the Island of Porto Riso through the channel called De Passagie. Sailing from the Island La Desseada to the Island Puerto Riso, that is, the rich Haven: Desiring to pass through the channel of De Passagie, that is, the thorough fair, you must use all the means you can to run between the Islands of Moncerrate & Redonda, or to Loofeward, that is, between the Island of S. Christopher, and the Islands d'Estacio, and from thence you shall hold your course Northwest, & somewhat more to loofeward from the Islands of Estacio, which are 2. Islands, one greater than the other, showing almost like 2. loaves of bread, when you are by them you shall find 10.12. and 25. fathom deep, at the depths of 10. & 12. fathom, you have white sandy ground, and at 25. fathom black sand, to sail from this Bank to the Islands las Virgins (that is the maids) you shall hold your course northwest (for there the streams draw Southwestward) to shun S. Crus, which stretcheth almost Northwest and Southeast, and when you see 'las Virgins, the first point is the greatest, and therefore it is called lafoy Virgin Gorga, or the fat maid: and presently after follow the rest, which are long & full of Hovels, they stretch East and West, and run one within the other, having certain Cliffs and Rocks hard by them, running on the South side: in the middle way from them you shall see a great Cliff, two miles into the sea. This Cliff hath for a mark, a grayish colour, and besides these there are many other cliffs, and to know when you are in the passage, running along by it to Porto Riso, as aforesaid: than you shall see white cliffs, that a far off show like a ship under sail: the whiteness of these cliffs proceedeth of birds filings, when you see them you must make towards them, and desiring to run through the passage, you shall hold your course between these islands & the islands las Virgins, & when you are by them then you must run northwest to a small Island, which lieth two miles further forward called Ilha Verde, that is, the green Island, and being right against this Island, them you are out of the passage, or without the channel, and being there, you shall presently see the land of the Island Puerto Riso, the first point whereof, called lafoy Punto de Loquillo, lieth East & west with the Island Ilha Verde: if you chance to be by the aforesaid cliff, and that the wind scanteth, & that you can not pass to loofeward from it, than you shall pass to léeward of it, for it is also a good channel of 18. & 20. fathom deep, with sand and shells upon the ground, about a mile to léeward from it, to know when you are out of the Channel with this course then this cliff must lie Southeast from you, and being at 30. fathom deep, with white sandy ground, you shall presently (as I said) pass by the Island of Ilha Verde, running by the point of Loquillo, along by the land of Puerto Riso, Westnorthwest, and if you desire to be in the haven of Puerto Riso, and that you cannot get thither, than you shall lavere, or lie driving to léeward, with the point of Loquillo, Southeastward from you, and from midnight forward you shall follow your course, because the streams draw Southeastward: the marks you have there are these that is over the haven of Puerto Riso, standeth an hermitage, upon a high hill, which is called Santa Barbara, and showeth like a white patch upon a hill, and passing along by it, you shall see the Cloister or Convent of Dominican Friars, which is about a quarter of a mile from the hermitage, and then you shall presently see the hill, that showeth like a cloven Island: these are the right marks of this Haven, and to put into it, you must go near the hill, but not too near, to shun a shallow place that lieth within the said hill: after that you must loof as much as you can, until you comés where you must anchor, which is right against the houses that stand on the East side of the haven. The 66. Chapter. The grounds and depths by the coast and country of New spain. BY the islands called Alaclanes, lying between the Island Cuba and the coast of New spain right over against the point called Punta de S. Anton. the ground is shelly: by the Island called Ilha de Robos it is muddy slime ground: by the River of S. Pedro & S. Paulo, from 40. fathom to the land, it is shelly ground, by the fields or plains of Almeria called Los Islano● de Almeria, at 40. fathom it is sandy ground▪ & from thence outwards shelly ground: by Vilila Rica, or the rich stone, at 16 fathom, it is; muddy ground, East & west with the cliffs & sands the Tortugas, of Torteaux, it is white sand: North-east and south-west with the same Tortugas, it is black sand, and eastward from it, reddish sand, by the river of Panuco, from 40. fathom outwards it is white and red sand, and towards the land, muddy ground, by the river called Rio Hermoso, or the fair river, from 30. fathom towardrs the land, it is white sand, ● outward towards the sea, muddy ground: by the river called Rio de Palmase de Montanas, that is, the river of palm trees & of hills: from 40. fathom towards the land you have sand, but most white, and outwards muddy ground mixed with grey sand. The 67. Chapter. The course & right mark of the navigation from the point called Cabo de Lopo Gonsalues, to the river of Co●go in Angola, southwards in the coasts of Guinea and Ethiopia, with the situation of the countries. Sailing from the point called Cabo de Lopo Gonsalues, which lieth full under 1. deg. on the south side of the Equinoctial line: in the Coast of Guinea or Ethiopia: the coast from thence forward stretcheth northwest & southeast, being a flat long land: you have the depths of 10. and 9 fathom deep water, towards the land, being all ground like sand of sand lopers, all through the country, except it be by the point Cabo de Catarina, where you have great sand & some stones: if you will make any haste being upon this coast and voyage, than every night you must anchor, till you have the Terreintios (which are the winds blowing from off the land) holding your course in that manner, till you have the Viracoins (which are the winds out of the sea) therewith again to make towards the land, until it be calm, or that the are at 10. fathom deep, them you must anchor till the coming of the land winds, which come daily at their times, as aforesaid: if the streams run with the wind, then you may wind from the one bough to the other, holding to léeward as aforesaid: the conjunction or time when the streams run with the winds, is with a new Moon, about 2. days before or after, and 3. days before it is full: if you desire to run from one bough to the other, that must rule yourself in such manner, that you be every morning by the coast, to get before the winds that as then blow off the land: the marks of the long land are these, it hath certain great thick hovels, called As Sierras de santo Espirito, that is, the hills of the holy Ghost, and somewhat further you have 2 other hovels, which are very easy to be known: in this country you have muddy ground, & further forward you shall see a high hill within the créek, called Palmella, for that it is like to Palmela, the which lieth between Lisbon and Setuval: you shall likewise see somewhat further in the creek, a land which stretcheth North & south, as you pass along by it: close by the strand it hath a thick flat hovel, which is called Cascars, because it is like Cascais by Lisbon: you must understand, that before you hoist up anchor in that country, you must let fall your sails, to see if the ship may get out, and if it cannot get out, then lie still till you have the Viracoins that blow out of the sea, for in those countries the streams run very strongly out of the river of Congo into the sea, whereby the ship can hardly get out, when you are so far as the place called a Palmeirin●a, that is the woods of Palm trees, then let your best anchor fall, for the grounds in this cross way is stiff muddy ground, whereby the anchors oftentimes will hardly hold fast but ship out again. And when you are in the river of Congo, being at the depth of 30. or 40 fathom: than you shall loof the ground, & then you shall turn your howreglasse, and when it is run out then cast out your lead, and you shall find 10 or 12 fathom water on the other side of the river of Congo and you shall sail about the length of a stone cast from the land and the best course is close by the land, for otherwise you could not get into the river, by means of the great force of the streams, whereby many men are much troubled, as being the greatest & strongest streams, that are found in any place, and run above 12. miles into the sea. Sailing from Congo to Angola in manner aforesaid, and being 35. miles on your way, you shall see a high hill, by the which there lieth an Island called A Ilha de Loanda, but if you be not very close by the land, you shall not see the Island, for it is very low & flat: if you chance to be by the land at 6. & 7. deg. than you shall be at the mouth of the river of Congo: and 10. miles to seaward from it, you shall see many tokens & signs thereof, as great streams, thick reeds, herbs, with many cutle bones, and when you are by the land, at 7. & 8. degr. & ½, than you shall see a flat land with trees all over it: and in this country in every place at 18. & 20. fathom, you shall have good ground, from 2. to two miles and a half from the land, & on the sea side you have white downs, which show like sandy strands, & the ground by it is sandy with some stones, that is from 7. to 8. deg. and you must understand that the land from 5 deg. southward, is altogether high, all the ground being muddy, and a mile from it, it is 30. and 35 fathom deep, good ground, being a clear and fair coast, with cause of fear of more than is seen before your days, that is from 7 to 9 deg. and the land from 8. degrees southward, is very high, if you come out of the sea, to the land, under 7. degr. and ½, than you shall see 7. hills or Hovels, which stretch Northwest and southeast, called As seat serras, that is, the 7. hills: if you come to the land under 8. degr. & ¼, than you shall see a high land, lying eastward from you, this point in show hath the form of cape S. Vincent in the coast of Spain, & coming to the land not full under 9 degrees then north or north-east, you shall see the aforesaid point, having under it some whit downs that strike somewhat out into the sea, but you need not fear them, for it is fair and clear: and therefore you may freely go near the land, them better to know it, being under the height aforesaid of scarce 9 deg. then eastward to land, you shall see a round hill called monte Pasqual, when the point aforesaid is north-east from you, than the other land shall stretch south-west, which is the furthest land lying without the Island of Loanda, the land that lieth southward from you is a great thick land, at the foot thereof having some red and white downs, with certain small trees, upon it, which show like fig trees of Algaruen in Spain: now to run within the land of Lo●nd● you must hold your course right upon the land, that lieth southward: so you may go close co●t, about half a mile from it & being there southwestward, from the Island you shall discover the Island which is very flat and of white sand, whereby you can hardly see it, but when you are close by it, that is the haven of Angola. This Island of Loanda, is like an Island called A Ilha das Caruns, lying by the cape called Cabo de santa Maria, in the land of Algaruen, upon the coast of Spain, and from the same flat land it is higher, for it is 7. miles long, now to put into this Island you must hold your course on the north-east point, & being close by it within a stones cast, you need not fear, for there it is 15. fathom deep, and within it is all fair ground, this is the road on the side of the Island, close by if from this Island to the firm land there is no more but a quarter of a mile, and you cannot see the entry, till you be hard by it, and if there be any ships within the haven, you shall see them before you can discern or know the Island, which showeth as if it were trees, that stand upon the land the farthest point outward on the north-east side of this Island lieth under 9 deg. therefore deceive not yourself by the card, for some of them have it under 9 deg. and others under 9 deg. and a half therefore believe none but such as have it under 9 deg. at the north-east end of the aforesaid Island. Hereafter followeth the degrees and hightes of all the principal havens, rivers, points, islands, & places of the Navigations of the Portugeses & Spaniards, in the countries by them discovered, and part inhabited, each place with their right names and surnames, as they are by them called, and ordinarily named in their Seacardes. First from the furthest point outward of Portugal, called Cabo de Finisterra, following along by the coast of Portugal, Spain & Barbary, to the line of Tropicus Caveri, and from thence along the Coast of Guinea to the Equinoctial line. The degrees on the north side of the line. CAbo de Finisterra, that is the point of the lands end, lieth under degrees 43 The Islands of Bayona lie under 42. Porto de Portug. that is port port lie un. 41 As Berlengas, that is the Barles, lie under 40. Lisboa or Lisbon & that Island of tercera, un. 29. Perseveira and the Island of S. Michael, lieth under 38. Cabo de san Vincente, and the Island santa Maria, lie under 37. Trastalgar lying on the coast, is under 36 Larache lieth under 35 Soneia lieth under 34. Cabo de Canty & Porto santo, that is the holy haven lying by the Island of Madera are un. 33 Rio does saveis that is the river of fairies is vn. 32 The Island of Madera or the Island of wood, is under the same heights of 32 Taffatama lieth under 31 Mecca and Ilha does Saluaes', that is the Island of the wild men lieth under. 30 Cabo de non, and the Islands Palma and Lancarotte, being of the islands of Canary lieth under. 29 A Ilha, or the Island de Forte Ventura lieth under. 28 Cabo de Bo●ador and the Islands of great Canary and also A Ilha de Hierro, or Island of Iron lieth under. 27 Angra does Cavallos, that is the Haven of horses lieth under 25 Rio d'Ouro or the river of Gold lieth vnd. 24 The line or Tropicus Cancri. Angra or the open haven of Goncalo de Sintra lieth under 23 Cabo das Barbas, or the point of Baerden, lieth under 22 Cabo Branco or the white point lieth un. 21 Rio de Sao Io●o, or the river of S. john lieth under 20 Furna de Santa Maria, or the cave of S. Marie lieth under 19 Sete monte or seven hills under & the islands of S. Anna, S. Vincent, S. Lucia, and S. Nicolas lieth under 18 Ant Rot, and Ilha de Sal. or the Island of Salt under. 17 Rio or the River of Canaga and the Island Ilha de Ma●a, under 16 Cabo verde, or the green point, & the islands of S. jago, and Ilha do Fogo or of fire under 15 Rio or the river of Gambia, under 14 Rio das Ostras or the river of oysters vn. 13 Cabo Roxo under 12 Buguba under 11 Rio do Pichel or the river of the Can vnd. 10 Rio or the river of Cachecache, under 9 Rio de Serra Lioa, or the river of the Lion's hill, under 8 Rio das Palmas or the river of Palms, un. 7 Cabo de monte or the point of the hill un. 6 Cabo does Baixos, or the point of sands and the mine of S. George under 5 A Ilha or the Island of Fernando Poa & Cavo dàs Palmas or point of Palms, under 4 Rio de Campo or the river of the field un. 3 Rio de Princepe or the river of the prince vnd. 2 The Island of S. Thomas. under. 1 From the Equinoctial line to the south side following the coast of Congo, Angola, and Ethiopia, to the cape de Bona Speranza. The degrees of the south side of the Equinoctial line. CAbo, or the point of Lopo Gonsalues under deg. 1 Cabo, or the point of Catharina under 2. Angra da judia, or the haven of the jew, under 5. Praya de San Domingos, or the strand of S. Dominico under 6. Rio or the river of Congo under. 7 A Ilha d' ascension, or the ascension vnd. 8. Rio or the river of Angola, and the Island of Loanda under 9 Cabo Ledo under 10. Rio, or the river of S. Lazaro under 11. Cabo de Loubos, or the river of wolves vn. 12 Monte Negro, or the black hill under 14 Serra Parda or the grey hill under 15 Angra das Aldeas, or the open haven of the villages, & the Island of S. Helena vnd. 16. Manga das Areas, or the sandy sleeve un. 17. Cabo Negro, or the black point under 18. Os Mendoins under 19 A Serra de S. Lazaro or Hill S. of Lazaro under 20. Praya or the strait of Ruy Pires vnd. 21. Cabo do Padrao or the point of Colosso or Column under 22. Praia Fria, or the cold strand under 23. The line or Tropicus Cancri. Ponta da concepsao, or the conception un. 24 Praya das Ala-goas under 25. Feiaco da Boca, or the manner of the mouth under 26. Angra, or the haven of S. Anthony vnd. 27 Angra, or haven of S. Thomas under 28. Angra or the haven of S. Christopher un. 29 Rio do infant, or the River of the kings son under 32. Angra, or haven of S. Helena under 33. As Ilhas, or Island of Tristan de Cunha v. 34. Cabo de Bona Speranza, or point of good hope under 34. ½. From the cape de Bona Speranza northwards, along the coast to Soffala, Mosambique and Melinde, to the Equinoctial line, all being on the south side of the same line. CAbo das Agulhas, or the point of the Compass full under 35. Cabo de infant, or point of the king's son under 34. ½. Cabo Talhado. or the cloven point vnd. 34. Cabo das Vaccas, or point of cows, & Baya Fermosa, or the fair bay under 34. Cabo de Areciffe, or the point of the Cliff under 33. Rio de infant or point of the kings son v. 32. Ponta Primeira, or the first point under. 32. Terra do Natal under 31. Ponta or the point of S. Lucia under 28. Terra dos fumos or the land of smoke v. 27. ½. Rio d' Alagoa or river of the lake, and the Island of joan de Lisboa, & uttermost south point of the Island of S. Laurence vnd. 26. Agoa de Boam Pas or the river of peace vnd. 25 Cabo das correntes, or point of the stream under 24. ½. Rio, or river of Mataca or monument, & the Island A Ilha do Mascharenhas un. 21. ½. Os Baixos da judia, or the Iewes sands un. 22 Cabo, or the point of S. Sebastian vnd. 21. Rio, or the River of Quiloan or Quiloane, under 20. ½. Soffala and the Island of Diego Rodrigues under 20. Porto, or the haven of Bango under 19 ½. Rio, or the river of Cuama under 18. ¼. Os Baixas does Gara●aus or sands of Seamewes under 18. Rio does bons sinais, or of good tokens v. 17 ¼ A Ilha, or Island of Brandao under 17. The Island A Ilha Primeira, or the first Island under 17. ½. A Ilha or Island of john de Nova vnd. 16. ½. Rio or river of Angoxa under 16. Mosambique under 15. Rio de S. Antonio under 14. Rio dereito, or the strait line under 12. Ilha do Comoro under 11. Cabo del Gado, or thin point under 10. The town of Quiloa under 9 A Ilha de Monfia under 7. Ilha de Sansibar under 6. Ilha de Pemba under 5. A Ilha does tres Irmaos, or Island of three brethren under 4. A Ilha do Almirante, or the Island of the Admiral under 3. ½. Mombassa, or river of Tacharigo under 3. The howne and haven of Melinde under 2. The town and haven of Pate under 1. The Equinoctial line. The height and degrees of the Havens, points, and rivers, of the Equinoctial line, to the straits of Mecca, otherwise called the red sea, on the North side of the Equinoctial. The degrees on the north side. Barra Boam, or the good haven under 1. The town and haven of Braba under 2 The town & haven of Magadoxa under 2. ½. Zarzella under 6. Cabo, or point of Guardafu, and the Island a Ilha de Sacotora under 12. From the point of Guardafu, inwards to the red sea, on the south coast. MIte or Barbora under 11. Zeila under 12. Ilha Dalaca under 15. Ilha Soaquen under 18. From the North side of the red sea or the strait of Mecca. TOor under 27. Gida and the haven of Mecca, where Mahomet lieth buried, whereof the strait taketh the name under 20. A Ilha de Zeyban under 15. A Ilha Camaram under 15. Adem a fortress of the Portugese's, which in times past they held but not at this time under 13. The coast of Arabia to the straights or Sinus Persicus, and the Island of Ormus. FArtaque lieth under 15. degrees. Diufar under 16. The Island of Curia, Muria, under 17. The Island a Ilha de Maeira under 22. Cabo de Rosalgate under 22. Curiata and Masquata under 23. Hoard under 24. Cabo Mocandao under 27. The Island and town of Ormus under 27. From Ormus or Persia along the coast to to the cape de Comoriin. CAbo de jasque under 25 & ½. Rio do Sinde or Indo under 24. The town and Island of Diu under 21. Goga and the Town within the Créeke of Cambaia under 33. The town and haven of Chaul under 19 The town and haven of Dabul under 18. The Island and town of Goa & the Islands of os Ilhas Queimadoes under 16. The fortress of Honour and the Islands of Angediva under 14. Baricala and the sands of Baixios de Pandua under 13. The fortress of Mangalor and Monte de Ly under. 12. Cananor and calicut under 11. Cranganor and Çochiin under 10. The fortress of Cay Coulao under 9 Cavo de Comoriin being the uttermost point of the coast called India under 7. From the Island Seylon on the East and south side about to the West. TRincanamalle under 9 O. Capello de Frade or the Monks cowl under 8. Rio de Matacalou under 7 ●/3. Ponta de Gualle under 6. Cloumbo a fortress of the Portugese's under 7. From the Cape de Gomerin along the coast of Coramandel, Orixa, Bengala, Pegu, & Malacca, to the point of Singapura. CAbo Negapatan under 11. degrees. Povoacao de Saint Thomas, or town of Saint Thomas under 13. 1/ ●. The town and haven of Muselepatao under 16. 1/ ●. The point of Guadovariin under 17. O Pagode de jorganate, or Idol of jurganate under 20. ¼. Rio de Puacota under 19 Rio Palura or Calavor under 19 ⅓. A Derradiera terra alta or the last high land under 19 ⅔. Rio Cayegare under 21. Rio de Ganges otherwise Porto Pequeno or the small haven under 22 The haven and town of Aracan under 20. The haven and town of Martaban under 16. ¼. The uttermost end on the north side of the Island Andeman under 16. The uttermost end on the south side of the same Island under 11. The haven and Town of Tanasseriin under 11 The haven and town of Gonsalan under 8. ½. The Island Pulo Cuto under 6 ⅔. The town and haven of Queda under 6 ½. The Island of Gomespola, and the Island Pulo Batum under 6. The Island Pulo Pera under 5 ⅔ The Pulo Pinon under 5, 2/4. The haven and town of Pera under 4. ½. Pulo Sambillao under 4. Pulo Parcelar & the Island as Ilhas d'Aru under 3. Cabo Rachado, or cloven point under 2. ½. The town and fortress of Malacca under 2. ½. Cabo de Singapura under 1. From the Island of Samatra on the North side of the Equinoctial line. THe haven of Achein under 4. ½. The haven of ●eder under 4. The point of Taniamburo under 5. The place on the south side of the Equinoctial in the same Island & else where. Terra d'Arruen or land of Arruen under 2. Ilha d'Ouro de Manancabo, or the gold land of Manancabo 3 The haven of Campar under 4. The strait between the Island Sumatra and jana Mayor under 5. ½ A Ilha java Maior in the middle way vnd. 6 A Ilha do jogo or Fire Island under 7. A Ilha Solitaria, or the solitary Island under 7 A Ilha Banda under 5 The Islands of Cloves of Maluco are under the Equinoctial line. From Cabo de Singapura following the coast to Zion, Camboia, Champa, and China, to the river of Liampo, & Nanquyn, with some Islands all upon the North side of the Equinoctial line, THe Island Pulo Timao under 2. ½ The haven and town of Pan. under 3. 1/ ● The haven and town of Patana under 7. ⅔ The Haven and town of Zion under 14, ½ The point of Guy under 12. ⅔ Enseada de Lion, or creak of Lion under 12 ½ The haven of Varella under 13 The Island Pulo Condor under 8 ⅔. The town and Haven of Camboia under 10. The Island Pulo Seci● from the land under 10. ⅓ The Island Pulo Caton under 15. ⅔. The Island Pulo Champello under 16 ⅔. The uttermost South point of the Island Aynon under 18. ½. The North-east end of the same Island under 19 ½. The islands of Sanchoan under 21. ⅓. The town & Island of Macau under 22. ⅓. The town of Canton under 24. ½. Ilha Branco or white Island under 22. ½. Ilha Fermosa, or fair Island under 21. ¼. Ilha de Lamon under 23. ¼. The haven of Chabaquea under 23. ½. The haven of Chincheo under 24. ½. Enseada does Camaroins or Créeke of Granaet otherwise called Cayto under 25. ½. The Island Lequeo Pequeno under 25. A Ilha does Cavallos or Island of horses under 25. ⅓. Ponto or Cabo de Sumbor under 28. ¼. The islands as Sere Irmaas or seven fift as lying in the way to japan under 29. ⅓. The Islands of Sionglean lying on the coast under 29. ⅔. The Islands called Liampo lying on the coast under 31. The middle of the Island Meaxuma under. 30. ●/2. The Island of Tanaxuma under 31, ⅔. The river of Nanquiyn under 34. The islands of japan in all having in Longitude 130. miles, and the furthest eastward lieth under 32. From the Islands of Phillippinas', otherwise the Lusons', or Manillas on the North side of the Equinoctial line. THe entry of the channel between the Island Luson, and the Island Tandaia under 12. The Island Capuly, and the Island Ticao under 12. ¼. The Island Masbate under 12. ¼. The Island of Banton under 12. ⅔. The Island Rebuian on the north side under 12. ½. The Island de Vireys under 12. ¾. The Island Marinduque under 12. ¼. Cabo de Dumarijn in the Island Mindoro and the Islands of Luban under 13. The mouth or entry of the bay of Manilla the chief town of the Island of Lucon under 14. ¼. The town of Manilla under 14, ½. The cape of Samballes in the Island Lucon under 14. ⅔. The Cape Bullinao in the same Island under 16. ⅔. The Cape de Boiador, which is the furthest point on the northside of the Island Luson under 19 The furthest Island east and north from the Island Lequeos under 29. The Island a Illas de las Velas otherwise de los Ladrones under 13. The country of new Spain lying over against the Islands of japon. THe Island of Saint Agustine lying on the coast under degrees 30. ¼. The Island de Sedros', or of Ceaders under 28. ¼. Cabo de saint Lucas, the beginning of the land of California under 22. Cabo de las Corrientes or point of streams under 19 ⅔. The haven of Acapulco under 17. From the straights of Magellanes along the coast of Brasilia to the Equinoctial line on the south side. The degrees of the south side of the Equinoctial. THe strait or passage of Magellanes under 15. ⅛ degrees. Basy● de las Islas, or the bay of the Islands under 49. Rio de la Plata, or river of Silver under 34. ⅔. Arreciffe or the Cliff under 34. Bahia Aparcellada, or the bankie bay under 33. Cabo da Ponta under 32. Rio does negroes or the river of the Moors under 31. Angra Onde Sevio oh battle, that is the haven where the boat was seen under 30 Ilha da Bahya, or Island of the bay under 29. Ilha de Santa Caterina under 28. ½. Bahia do Repairo, or bay of defence under 28. Rio do Estremo, or river beyond measure under 27. Rio does Dragos, or river of Dragons under 26. Ilha de Cananea, or islands of reeds under 25. ½. Ilha Doropica under 25. Bay of Saint Vincent under 24. The river of Canane under 24 The Rio or river d● janero under 23. ⅓. Cabo Frio or cold point under 23. Bahia do Saluador, or bay of our Saviour under 22. The sands called os Baixos does Pargos under 21. A Bahia do Espirito Santo, or the Bay of the holy Ghost under 120. The Island of saint Barbara under the same height of 20. The river of S. Luci● under 19 The river of Saint George under. 18. Porto S●guro or the safe haven under 17. Rio das Santos Cosmos the river of Saint Cosmos and Da●ian under 16. The Island of S. Helena also under 16. Rio damn Praia under 15. Rio does Ilhas the river of small islands under 14. ½. Porto Real, or kingly haven under 14. Bahya de Todos os Santos under 13. Rio Real or kingly river under 12. The river of Saint ●●ancis under 11. The river of Saint Michael under 10. Santo Alexo under 9 Cabo or point of S. Augustine under 8. ¾. The town of Olinda under 8. 3/ ●. Pernanbuco, and the Island of the Ascension under 8. Saint Domingo under 7. Artapica under 6. Santo Roque, & Santa Maria d' Arribada under 5. The bay of Saint Lucas under 4. The bay of das Tartarugas under 3. Rio de Arreciffe under 2. From the Antillas' or sore Islands of the Spanish Indies, & some places lying in the Firm Land, all upon the north side of the Equinoctial line. Isla lafoy deceada, or desired Island under 15. 1/ ● The Island Marigalante under 15 The Island la Dominica under 15. ½. The Island la Antigua or old Island under 16. ¼. Cabo de Cantina upon the Firm land under 9 ½. The Island la Serrana under 14. ½. The Serranilla or little Serrana under 16. Cayman grand, or the great Crocodile under 19 Cabo de S. Anton in the Island of Cuba, under 22. The river of S. Peter & S. Paul under 21. Los Cambos d'Almeria under 20. Villa Rica la vicia, or old rich town under 19 ⅔. The havens and places lying upon the coast called India, with the distance & situation of the same, beginning from the North side along the coast southwestward, as the country stretcheth. And first you must understand that the coast called India hath his beginning from the creak called a Enseada de jaquetta, at a place called Espero, etc. FRom Espero to Mangalor are 8. miles. From Mangalor to Patana are 8 From Patana to the point called Punta de Diu are 12. Fron Diu to the Island a Ilha do Bet are 9 From the Ilha do Bet to Goa a town lying in the creak of Cambaia are 20. From Ilha do Bet to the town of Daman are 26. From Daman to Surratte a town lying in the creak of Cambaia are ●. From Daman to Danu on the outward part of the coast are 7. From Danu to as Ilhas das Vacas are 7. From as Ilhas das Vacas to the town of Baccain are 3. Fron Baccain to the town of Chaul are 12 From Chaul to Danda are 5. From Danda to the creak called a Enserda de Pero Soars are 3. From Enseada de Pero Soars to Siffardao are 3. From Siffardao to Dabul are 10. From Dabul to Sanguiserra are 6. Fron Sanguiserra to the river Be●cele are From the river of Bettele to Seyta Por are 3. From Seyta Por to Carapam are 11. From Carapam to the chief town of Goa are 14. From Goa to Angediva are 12. From this place forward beginneth the coast of Malabar, which is contained within the coast of India. FRom Angediva to Batecala are miles 12. From Batecala to the fortress of Barcelar, are 5. From Barcelar to the islands called Primeiro are 6. From Primeiro Islands to the fortress of Mangalor are 6. From Mangalor to Monte Fermoso are 4 From Monte Fermoso to Monte de Lin are 10. From Monte de Lin to the fortress of Cananor are 6. From Cananor to calicut are 8. From calicut to Coulette are 2. From Coulette to Chale and Parangale are 7. From Parangale to Tanor are 3. From Tanor to Panane are 6. From Panane to Cochiin are 15. From Cochiin to a place called Arbore de Porca, or the tree of the Sow or Hog are 9 From Arbore de Porca to Caule Coulao are 9 From Caule Coulao to the fortress Coulao, are 6. From Coulao to the Barreiras are 4. From the Barreiras to Briniao are 8. From Briniao to the Islands called Ilha de Taravancor are 6. From Taravancor to the Cape de Comoryn are 6. There endeth the coast commonly called (in the Oriental coast) the Country of India wherein is contained the coast of Malabar as aforesaid, all the rest of the Oriental coasts have their particular names several from India, as I have sufficiently declared, and all the miles aforesaid, as also all those in the description of the voyage to and from India, are all Spanish miles, whereof 17 and ½ are one degree, which are fifteen Dutch miles. Hereafter followeth an Instruction & memory of the yielding or declining of the compass, in the Navigations and courses of the Portugese's into the East Indies both outward and homeward, & in what places, and how much they yield northwest, & north-east, that is, how much the needle of the compass windeth or turneth, towards the east or west, all perfectly set down, and truly marked by the Portugal Pilots that sail ordinarily. Sailing from Lisbon almost to the point of Cabo Verde, them the needles or lines of the compass do yield northeastward, that is towards the east) two 3. parts of a strike and more. From thence about 4, or 5. degrees further, on the north side of the Equinoctial being 70. or 80. miles from the coast, than the needle of the comtesse windeth Eastward, that is, northeastward half a strike, & if you be 100 or 120. miles from the land, than it windeth northeastward ⅓ part of a strike. Running along by the coast of Brasilia to 7.8. & 10. degrees, on the south side of the Equinoctial, than the compass will wind Northeastward, or to the east ⅓ part of a strike, that is when you sail close by the coast of Brasilia: from 17. & 18. degrees, under which height lieth the sands called os Baixos does Abrolhos, than the compass will wind Northeastward ¼ or ⅔ parts of a strike, that is when you run not above 100 or 120. miles from the coast of Brasilia. Running along by the Island of Martin Vaaz, them the compass windeth northeastward a strike or more. From thence forward till you be under 33. degrees, the compass windeth northeastward a strike and a half, to seventy or eighty miles beyond the Island of Tristan da Cunha. From thence to the Cabo de Bona Speranza, than the compass beginneth again to wind less, and if you mark the compass well, & that it windeth half a strike, to the north-east than you are hard by the Cape de bona Speranza, not above 30. or 40. miles at the furthest from it, for when you are north & south with the cape, than the compass will wind northeastward ⅓. part of a strike. Sailing from thence forward, if you mark the compass, & find it even, than you are 80. miles eastward from the cape das Agulhas. Sailing the Compass, if it windeth Northwestward ⅔. parts of a strike, that is towards the west, than you are North & South with the point called Cabo das Correntes, and being under 25. and 26. deg. till you come under 20. degrees, and that the Compass yieldeth ¼. of a strike, and more Northwestward, then look out for the Island called S. Laurence, for you shall presently see it, & when you are right over against Mosambique, than the Compass yieldeth a strike or somewhat less towards the northwest, & hath the same difference till you come to the Equinoctial line, towards India. Being 200. miles East and West with the haven of Goa, or the coast of India, to Cabo de Comorijn, than the Compass, windeth Northwestward a strike and a half, and upon the coast of India a strike and ⅓. Sailing from Cochiin to Portugal, until you have passed the islands Maldiva, south and southwestward, than the Compass will wind Northwestward a strike and a half, till you be under 8. and 10. degrees on the south side of the Equinoctial line, and if you find it less than a strike & a half, than you are on the west side of the sands called A Saya de Malha, that is the doublet of Iron rings, because they are like it. And when you are under 27. or 30. degrees, holding your course west, than you shall find that the Compass yieldeth a strike and ¼. Northwestward, and when you find it so, them you are North & south with the point of S. Roman, lying on the furthest end southeastward from the Island of S. Laurence. Being north and south with the sands called Os Baixos de judia, making towards the land called Terra do Natal, till you be under 30. and 31. deg. than the Compass will yield Northwestward ¾. of a strike, or somewhat less, & then you shall be North & south with the point called Cabo das Correntes. Coming under 32. & 33. degr. forward, and finding the Compass even, not winding Eastward nor westward, than you are right under the Meridian, you must understand that to mark the Compass well, that it saileth not any thing at all, you must always have your eye upon if in the Peylen the better to look unto it, for if you sail therein, you shall hardly guess right, nor make any good account. Having past the Cape de bona Speranza, sailing to the Island of S. Helena, than the Compass windeth Northeastward 1/●. part of a strike, & in the Island of S. Helena, half a strike, and from the Island of S. Helena to the Island of Ascension, than the Compass windeth Northeastward ⅔. parts of a strike. When you sail from Portugal to Brasilia till you be under the height of the point of Cabo de S. Augustin, & this Island of Ascension, than you must understand that the more the Compass windeth northeastward or eastward, the further eastward you are from the said point, therefore you must have great regard thereunto, for that if you be coming in Peylen you shall find it there to be even as I said before. From the Island of Ascension to the cliff called Penedo de S. Pedro, about 20. or 30. miles eastward from it, than the compass is scarce half a strike Northeastward. From thence 17. or 18. degrees further, you shall find the Compass even and alike, by North and South with the Island of S. Marry. From thence forward if you have a large wind, so that you see the Island of Flores, northwestward from you, them the Compass will yield ½. strike. And when you are 70. or 80. miles beyond the Island of Flores, them the Compass is even. In the Island of Fayael, and from thence to the Island of Tercera, one of the Flemish islands, the Compass will yield ⅓. part of a strike Northeastward and, from Tercera to Lisbon from ⅔. to ¾. parts of a strike. Now to know the wreaking, winding or declining of the Compass, you must understand, that when you are under the Meridian, that is under the line or strike, which is placed in the compass of the firmament from the one Pole to the other, that is right in the middle cross wise over the Equinoctial line, than every Compass (that is true and good) will be even, without declining either East or west, and being upon the one or the other side thereof, than the needle of the Compass declineth on the one or the other side, that is when you are on the East side, than the needle windeth Westward, which we call Northwestward, & when you are on the West side of the Meridian, than the Compass declineth Eastward, which we name Northeastwarde, which shall suffice to let you know what it meaneth, & how to govern yourself therein. Certain questions & answers very profitable & necessary to be known by all Sailors. IF a man should ask you how many degrees are in the Compass of the whole world: you may answer, there are 360. degrees, each degree being 15. Dutch miles, and 17. Spanish miles and a half. Question. What are the Poles of the world? Answer. Two points that are imagined or thought that the world is born or hangeth upon. Q. What is the Equinoctial line? A. A strike or line placed from East to west, about the compass or roundness of the world, which is the separation or middle between both the Poles, and when the Sun is upon it, which is the 21. of March, and the 23. of September, (stilo novo) then the day & night are of a length, and therefore it is called the Equinoctial line. Q. What is the Meridian? A. A strike or line placed in the Compass of the world, from the one Pole to the other, and when the shadow is in the middle of this line, than it is your Meridian. Q. What is the Parallel? A. All things or places that lie right east and West from you are Parallel. Q. What is Tropicus? A. A strike or line imagined or placed in the compass of the firmament, which is the fixed place, how near the Sun goeth to the line, & turneth back again, which is the 21. of june (stilo novo) it cometh upon the north side of the Equinoctial, to 23. degrees and ½. which place is called Tropicus Canc●i, and the 21. of Decemb. it cometh on the south side of the Equinoctial, to the like height of degrees, which place is called Tropicus Capricorni. Q. How far is it between the Equinoctial line, and any of the two Poles? A. 90. degrees, which is the fourth part of the compass of the whole world or firmament. Q. What is the Horizon? A. It is the compass you can see round about you, as far as till that you think the earth and sky meeteth together, which is 90. degrees from you and that is the Horizon. Q. What is the Zenith? A. All that part of the sky that standeth right over your head, is the Zenith. Q. What is the longitude & the latitude? A. Longitude is the length, and Latitude the breadth of the way you make. Q. If you be under the Pole Articus or the North star, whether as then your Compass can show you & guide you right in the course you are to hold? A. No, for being in that country the needle of the Compass where it is lined, will be drawn upwards towards the glass, whereby it cannot work or show his nature, but being somewhat from it, in such manner that the Pole hath no more place or power over it, to draw it upwards, than the Compass will presently work and show her effect, whereby you hold on your course. Q. If upon the 2●. of june (stilo novo) you be by the haven of Havana, in the coast of Florida, & new Spain, how much height shall you find in the Astrolabe, in taking of the Sun. A. That upon that day you shall have the Sun for your Zenith, that is right over your head, and then you shall find no shadow on either side, than you must look upon the declination of the day, and all that you find from the declination, so much you are distant from the Equinoctial line towards the sun, and that is your height. Q. If you be in the same place upon the 23. of December (stilo novo) what heght of the Sun shall you then have in the Astrolabe. A. At that day the Sun is distant from the Equinoctial line 23. degrees and ½. whereunto adding other 23. degrees and ½. they make 47. degrees, and then there wanteth 43. deg. to make up 90. degr. these 43. degrees shall you take in the Astrolabe, for the height of the Sun. Q. What is a degree? A. Of 360. degrees or parts, wherewith the world is divided & measured, a degree is one part, so that one degree is 360. parts of the world. Q. If two men were distànt North and South from each other in equal proportion, whether as then should they have equal declination of the sun? A. I, but they must be one upon the North side, & the other upon the South side, of the Equinoctial line, which is to be understood upon the 22. of March, and the 23. of September (stilo novo) when the Sun is in the same line. Q. If you were under the height of 10. degrees, having 5. degrees of declination, the Sun and shadow being gone, how much shall you take in the Astrolabe? A. 75. degrees and five for of declination are 80. degrees, than there wanteth 10. degrees, to make the 90. degr. & that is the Equinoctial line between you and the Sun. Q. If you have the Sun and shadow upon one side, being under 20. degrees, and have 10. degr. for declination, what shall you then take by the Astrolabe? A. 80. then there wanteth 10, to make up 90. and 10. for declination are 20. which is the height that you are under. Q. If you chance to take the height of the sun for 4.5. days or more together at 90. degrees, how many miles shall you have sailed all that time? A. All that the sun hath gone forward, so that all the degrees & minutes that you find yourself upon the same days to be distant from the declination, those are the miles and the way that you have sailed, that is, if the Sun be risen or descended 6. degrees more or less, so have you likewise so much furthered or gone on your way. Q. If you were by the land in any place, under one degree, on the Coast lying East & West, holding your course 89. miles from thence West, & west & by North, under what height and how far shall you as then be from the land? A. Under the height of two degrees and 15. Dutch, & 17. Spanish miles and a half from the land. Q. If the Sun were in the one Tropicus, & you in the other, what height should you then make in taking of the Sun? A. The sun is as then distant from the Equinoctial line 23. deg. & ½. with 23. deg. and ●. more that you are distant from it, which make 47. degrees, than there wanteth three 43. degrees to make up 90. deg. those you must take by the Astrolabe, those you shall compare or add to the declination which is 23. deg. and ½. it maketh 66. ½. then there wanteth 23. 1/ ●. degr. to make 90. and that is your height. Q. If you were in a place, & knew the height thereof, but not the declination of the day, how would you know it without your book? A. Take the height of the Sun by your Astrolabe, and that you find you must add to the height that the place lieth under, and whatsoever it amounteth unto above 90. degrees, or that it wanteth of 90. degrees, is the declination of the day. Q. Which are the places of the world, wherein it is 6. months day, & 6. months night? A. Under the Poles of the world. Q. What is the height? A. All that the Sun riseth from morning to noon, likewise the height is the degrees, that you have from the Pole to the Horizon: also the height is all the distance you have from the Equinoctial line. Q. How shall you know the declination of the Sun? A. You shall take the height of the Sun upon the 21. of june Stilo novo, and then stayed till the 23. of December after, upon the which day again you shall take the height of the Sun, which done, you must subtract the least number out of the greatest, and that which resteth you shall divide in the middle, & in this sort you shall find the declination. Q. What is the greatest declination that the sun maketh in one day? A. Four and twenty minutes. Q. How many degrees do account for a strike or line of the Compass? A. Eleven & ●. for 32. times, 11. ¼ maketh 360. degrees, which is the Compass of the world. Q. How far is the southstarre distant from the Pole? A. Thirty degrees keeping neither nearer nor further off. Q. What doth the Compass signify? A. The Horizon with the Compass of the world divided into 32. degrees. Q. What is the Sea Card? A. The land and the Sea. Q. What is the Astrolabe? A. The 4. part of the world, which is 90. deg. Q. Wherefore are the lines of the Compass, or in the navigation even and alike, and pass altogether through the Centre of one length, without difference in greatness, or compass of roundness, & wherefore then do you reckon more miles upon one degree and line, then upon the other, for that by order they should have as many miles as the other. A. The great circles, or compassing lines, which the Equinoctial naturally hath, that is, the 32. deg. are altogether even & alike, each being 15. Dutch, & 17. Spanish miles, and ½. but the small circles or comparing lines have some more, some less, according to the elevation of the Pole, in such manner, that the nearer you be to the Equinoctial line, so much longer your way will be, & the nearer you go to the Poles the shorter will be your way, for the Pole riseth or descendeth one degree, & running along by the line, it neither riseth nor declineth. Q. How shall you at noon time know, how much the sun declineth North-east in Northwest, in any place of the world, whatsoever you shall be. A. You shall make a round circle or Ring upon the ground, & set a needle, or any other thing in the middle thereof, & so stay the rising of the Sun, & in the first coming out thereof you may mark where the shadow lieth, which having marked, you shall stay till evening, until the Sun goeth down, & then look where the shadow of the needle is, & mark it as before, whereby you shall make your account in this sort: you shall measure how much there is from the one mark to the other, & so divide it cross wise in equal distance, which shall be your North & south: now when the shadow of the Sun cometh upon those lines or strikes, than it is noon, now to know how much the needle of the Compas lieth north-east or northwest, set the Compass by, & then you shall presently see where the needle declineth, whether it be eastward or westward, and how much, whereupon you may make your account. Q. Where is the needle of the Compass even and alike? A. Under the Meridian, or at noon time? The end of the 3 Book THE FOURTH BOOK. A most true and certain Extract and Summarie of all the Rents, Demaines, Tolles, Taxes, Impostes, Tributes, tenths, third-pennies, & incommings of the King of Spain, throughout all his Kingdoms, lands, Provinces, and Lordships, as they are collected out of the original Registers of his Chamber of accounts. Together with a brief and clear description of the government, power, and pedigree of the Kings of Portugal. Translated out of Spanish into Low-Dutch by john Hughen of Linschoten. And out of Dutch into English by W. P. HISPANIA map of Spain LONDON Imprinted by John Wolf. 1598. The fourth Book. A most true and certain extract & summary of all the Rents, Demaines, Tolles, Taxes, Impostes, Tributes, tenths, third-pennies, and incommings of the King of Spain throughout all his kingdoms, lands, provinces & Lord ships, as they are collected out of the original Registers of his several Chambers of accounts: together with a brief and clear description of the government, power and pedigree of the Kings of Portugal. To the Reader. FOrasmuch as this mine itinerario or navigation, is only a Treatise of the lands and coasts of the East-Indies & Oriental Countries, all which are at this day under the Government and command of the king of Spain: so do I think it not impertinent, nor from the purpose to join herewithal an Extract, and Summarie of all the Rents, Demaynes, and Revenues of the same king in all his Kingdoms, Lands, Provinces, and Lordships, even as I have drawn them all out of the Original Registers of his several Chambers of accounts, and translated out of Spanish into the Low-Dutch tongue: wherein there are declared not only the revenues of every Province, and jurisdiction by themselves, but also of all the Cities and countries of the whole kingdom of Spain in particular, with their proper names and bynames: so that a man may thereby both shape unto himself a representation and memorial of those rents, as well in gross as in several: and also understand the number of Cities and countries throughout all Spain. Hoping that it will be accepted in as courteous sort, as it will be delectable to all those that are desirous of novelties. A note or instruction what sorts of moneys are used in Spain, wherewith they make their accounts. FIrst you must understand, for the better explanation of the matter ensuing, that in Spain they use to reckon by Maravedies as well in great sums, is in little: and when they pass above a hundred thousand in number, that is to say, ten times a hundredth thousand, they call it a Quento, which is properly a million of Maravedies. Under which two names, and divisions the said rents, revenues, &c. shallbe set down and declared, according to the ordinances and customs used in the kings Chambers of accounts, throughout the whole Country of Spain: and you must know that 34. Maranedies are a Spanish Ryall of silver (being vi. d. English money) and 11. Spanish Rials are a Ducat, (which is five shillings & vi. d. English money) and every Quento or million of Maravedies is 2673. Ducats, 8. Rials, and 26. Maravedies, (which is 735. l. v. s. x. d. ½. English money.) These Maravedies shallbe written and set down after the Spanish manner, that is when the sum amounteth above hundreths of Maravedies than they set this mark V before, beginning from the thousands upwards, so that thereby you may the better and more easily know them at the first sight, which for your more ease and better intelligence, I have set down as hereafter followeth, and this I trust shall suffice for instruction herein. The 1. Chapter. The rents, domains and revenues of the King in his kingdoms of Spain, Naples, Sicily, Arragon, etc. and in all his Lordships, except the kingdom & jurisdiction of the Crown of Portugal, which we will hereafter report by themselves. THe Salinas (that is, Salinas. the salt lands) belonging to the Crown of Spain, are yearly taxed to pay unto the King ninety three Quentoes. 93. Quentoes. For the tenths of the sea, Biscay. Guipiscoa. Four ●ill towns. for merchandises that come out of Biscay and the Provinces of Guipiscoa, with the 4. hilly towns lying on the sea coast, they pay for all wares sent from thence by land into Castilia, after the rate of one in every ten, and is paid in the custom houses of Victoria, Horduna, and Valmas Ceda, amounting yearly for the King unto the sum of seventy Quentoes. ●0. Quentoes. The tenth of the sea for wares that pass through the kingdom of Leon, by the havens of Sanabria, Leon. and Villa Franca yield yearly the sum of one Quento. 1. Quento. The tenth of the sea for wares that pass out of the principality of Asturias, Asturia. by the town of Ouieda, pay yearly the sum of Q. 375 V 000. The rents of the Provostes office, Bilbau. within the town of Bilbau which is for things that come into the town pay yearly for the King Q. 490 V 000. The 2. Chapter. A declaration of the Alcavales and third-pennies which are paid in Spain. TLl the Alcavales, thirds and other rents, which the king of Spain hath in all the Provinces, Towns, villages and Countries of all his kingdoms and Lordships, as also what every town with their territory; and precincts do severally pay, that you may the plainelier see and understand, you must first learn what these rents of Alcavales are, and what they do signify: namely of all goods, merchandises, houses, lands, and of all other things whatsoever they may be (none excepted) it is the custom in Spain, to pay the tenth penny to the king: and that at every time and as often as such goods, wares, houses lands or whatsoever else, are sold from one to another: & this tenth penny is called Alcaval: likewise all handy craft's men, Mercers, Haberdashers, and other trades, that buy and sell in their said trades, as also Butchers, Fishmongers. Inkéepers, or any other trade, occupation, victualling, or hand work whatsoever, must every man pay a tenth penny of all things whatsoever, they sell, and as oftentimes as they do sell any thing, where upon every City, town etc. doth compound and agree with the king for a yearly some to be paid into his coffers, so that there are certain which do farm the same of the king, & pay it yearly accordingly, which sums are received clearly into the king's coffers, all costs and charges deducted. To the same end there are in every chief town and province of the country, divers receivers appointed to take all accounts and sums of money in the king's behalf, that arise of the said Alcavalaos, and again to pay out of the same the juros, that is, such sums of money as the king by warrant appointeth to be paid unto certain persons, as also other assignations, appointed likewise to be paid, which payments the said receivers do set down in account for their own discharge, and thereof as also of their receipts, do make a yearly and general account into the king's Exchequer. Now to understand what the third penny is, it is thus, that many years past the Clergy of Spain did of their own free wills, give and grant unto the King the third penny of all spiritual livings, rents, and revenues, which they did towards the aid, maintenance, and defence of the Catholic and Romish religion, which is likewise received by the said receivers, and officers of the Alcaval, and as I said, is called Tercias', and are likewise rent out and farmed by the said receivers, in every several City and jurisdiction: some of these Alcavals the King hath sold, and others he hath bestowed upon some men for rewards, whereof mention shall be made as time and place requireth. THe town of Burgos, Burgos. which the jurisdiction thereof payeth yearly for Alcavala and Tertias the sum of 17 Q. 329 V 880 The bailiwick of Burgos, which is called Bureba, and lieth close by Burgos, payeth yearly the sum of 2 Q. Oca. 646 V 000 The hill of Oca payeth yearly the sum of 34 V 000 The bailiwick of the Province of Rioxa Rioxa. payeth yearly 3. Q. Hebro 757 V 000 The bailiwick of Hebro payeth yearly 2 Q. Hebrohooke. 346 V 000 The Bayliwick called the Hook of Hebro payeth yearly 1 Q 402 V 000 The town of Victoria payeth yearly 269 V 000 Victoria The Province of Guipiscoa payeth yearly 1 Q 181 V 000 Guipiscoa The Iron of the same Province of Guispiscoa payeth yearly custom 150 V 000. The seven Bayliwickes' which are of old Castilia on the hills pay yearly 942 V 000 The valley of Mena, Mena. which is in the same old Castilia payeth yearly the sum of 229 V 000 The Province of the town of Logronno payeth yearly 7 Q. Logronno 746 V 000 The town of jangas and her jurisdiction payeth yearly 151 V 000 jangas The town of S. Domingo payeth yearly 4 Q. Sancta Domingo. 812 V 000 The bailiwick of the town of Diego payeth yearly 1 Q. Diego. 545 V 000 The bailiwick of Cande Munnon payeth yearly 4 Q. Cande Munnon 612 V 000 The bailiwick of Castro Xeres payeth yearly 8 Q. 485 V 000 Serrato. The bailiwick of Serrato payeth yearly 1 Q. 965 V 000 Monson The bailiwick of Monson payeth yearly 2 Q. 276 V 000 You must understand that all the Bayliwickes' that are named of old Castilia, are one Spanish Province. Placentia The Town of Placentia and Province of Campos pay yearly 16 Q 940 V 000 carrion. The town of carrion payeth yearly 4 Q 945 V 000 The bailiwick of carrion payeth yearly 2 Q 910 V 000 The villages of Pedro Aluares de Vega pay yearly 655 V 000 Sahagun The town of Sahagun payeth yearly the sum of 2 Q 125 V 000 Saldana The Town of Saldana payeth yearly 1 Q 013 V 000 Perina The bailiwick of Perina payeth yearly 178 V 000 Campo The bailiwick of Campo which are hills pay yearly 1 Q 730 V 000 Miranda The valley of Miranda, lying by the hills payeth yearly 557 V 000 The four towns, called the sea coast, Laredo, S. Ander, Castra de Vrdiales, and S. Vincent pay yearly 3 Q 616 V 000 Asturias. The principality of Asturias, and the town of Ouiedo pay yearly 12 Q 345 V 000 Lugo. The town of Lugo lying the kingdom of Galicia, with the place of his Bishopric pay yearly 4 Q 137 V 000 Modonedo The town of Modonedo in the same kingdom pay yearly 1 Q 732 V 000 Orenso The town of Orenso and her jurisdiction in Galicia payeth yearly 6 Q 505 V 000 S. jeames in Galitia. The town of Saint jeames in Galicia, in Latin called Compostella, and the jurisdiction of the archbishopric pay yearly 18 Q 212 V 000 Tuy The town of Tuy and the jurisdiction of his Bishopric in Galicia pay yearly 5 Q 825 V 000 Ponto Ferrara. The Town of Ponto Ferrara in Galicia pay yearly 6 Q 350 V 000 Leon. The town of Leon and her jurisdiction and Bishopric pay yearly 6 Q 350 V 000 Astorga The circuit of the town and Bishopric Astorga u● Leon pay yearly 2 Q 455 V 000 The villages of the Abbay of Leon and Astorga in the kingdom of Leon pay yearly the sum of 797 V 000 Salas. The parishes of Salas in the principality of Asturia pay yearly 231 V 000 Samora. The town of Samora and her jurisdiction payeth yearly 15 Q 525 V 000 The town of Toro and her jurisdiction payeth yearly 11 Q 112 V 000 Toro. The town of Vienna to the Duke of Ofsuna payeth yearly 062 V 000 Vienna The valley of Guirena payeth yearly Guirena. 2 Q 3●5 V 000 The town of Barisal de la Coina payeth yearly 250 V 000 Barisal de la Coma. The town of Salamanca and her jurisdiction payeth yearly 24 Q 300 V 000 Salamanca. The town of Rodrigo and her jurisdiction payeth yearly 14 Q 345 V 000 Rodrigo The jurisdiction of Trigeros payeth yearly Trigeros, 417 V 000 The town of Olmillo payeth yearly Olmillo 047 V 000 The town of Torde Silla's and her jurisdiction payeth yearly 2 Q 600 V 000 Torde Silla's. The town of Valla Dolid and her jurisdiction payeth yearly 29 Q 730 V 000 Valla Dolid. The town of Torde Humos payeth yearly 827 V 000 Torde Humos. The town of Medina deal Camp and her jurisdiction payeth yearly 31 Q 375 V 000 Medina del Campo The town of Olmeda and her jurisdiction payeth yearly 2 Q 149 V 000 Olmeda The town of Nava and seven Churches pay yearly 333 V 000 Nava The town of Madrigal payeth yearly Madrigal 802 V 000 The town of Arenalo and her jurisdiction payeth yearly 5 Q 31● V 000 Arenalo The town of Auila and her jurisdiction payeth yearly 19 Q 365 V 000 Auila. The town of Segovia and her jurisdiction payeth yearly 12 Q 480 V 000 Segovia The town of Aranda de Duero & her jurisdiction payeth yearly 3 Q 350 V 000 Aranda de Duero The town of Roa payeth yearly 1 Q 515 V ●●● Roa The town of Cunnel de Y●an belonging to the Duke of O●luna payeth yearly 154 V 000 Gunnel de Y●an The town of Sepulueda and her jurisdiction payeth yearly Q 540 V 000 Sepulueda The town of Soria and her jurisdiction payeth yearly 10 Q 282 V 000 Soria The jurisdiction of the town & bishopric of Osina pay yearly 4 Q 000 V 000 Osina. The towns of Agreda & Tarasona & their jurisdiction pay yearly 2 Q 083 V 000 Agreda Tarasona The town of Molina and her jurisdiction pay yearly 5 Q 792 V 000 Molina The town of Siguenca and her jurisdiction payeth yearly 3 Q 662 V 000 Siguenca The town of Cuenca and her jurisdiction payeth yearly 24 Q 645 V 000 Cuenca The town of Huete and her jurisdiction pay yearly 17 Q 916 V 000 Huete Villa Rexo de Fuentes, etc. The town of Villa Rexo de Fuentes payeth yearly 2 Q 512 V 000 The Province called the Marquisat of Villena, which are the towns of Tinabilla Albaslette, la Roda, S. Clement, and the town of Villena and her jurisdiction payeth yearly 31 Q 503 V 100LS Belmonte The town of Belmonte payeth yearly in Terceras only for the Alcavala belonging to the Marquis 476 V 000 Murcia The town of Murcia and her jurisdiction payeth yearly 14 Q 820 V 000 Lorca The town of Lorca & her jurisdiction payeth yearly 5 Q 000 V 000 Cartagena The town of Cartagena and her iurisdictiion payeth yearly 2 Q 000 V 000 Alcaras The town of Alcaras and her jurisdiction payeth yearly 16 Q 984 V 000 Segura de la Sierra The town of Segura de la Sierra, and her province and jurisdiction, which is of the mastership of S. jacob payeth yearly 11 Q ●91 V 000 Villa Nueva de los infants The town of Villa nueva de ●os infants and her Province, which is called El campo de Motye●, which is of the mastership of Saint jacob, payeth yearly 8 Q 664 V 000 Ocanna & Castillia The town of Ocanna, and the province named Castillia, which is of the mastership of Saint jacob payeth yearly 2● Q 000 V 000 Guadalaxara The town of Guadalaxara and her jurisdiction payeth yearly 11 Q 264 V 000 Pios & 〈◊〉 The town of Pios and Poso pay yearly 160 V 000 The town of Almonasid and province of 〈◊〉, which are of the mastership of S. jacob pay yearly 1 Q 188 V 000 V●●da, 〈…〉 The towns of Vzeda, Talamanca, Tordelaguna, and their jurisdictions which are of the archbishopric of Toledo pay yearly 18 Q 250 V 000 jepas The Town of jepas payeth yearly 423 V 000 Alcala de Henares Birivega The town of Alcala de Henares and her jurisdiction, with the town of Birivega belonging to the Archibishopricke of Toledo payeth yearly 16 Q 250 V 000 Madril The town of Madril and her jurisdiction payeth yearly 23 Q 250 V 000 Puno en Rostro The Eareledome of Puno en Rostro, that is, a fist on the face yearly 1 Q 262 V 000 Cubas & Grennon The towns of Cubas and Grennon which belong to Don Alvaro de Mendoça, who receiveth the Alcavala, payeth one-onely in Tertias 117 V 000 Galapagar The town of Galapagar belonging to the Duke of Infantadgo payeth yearly 16● V 000 Ilescas The town of Ilescas and her jurisdiction payeth yearly 2 Q 297 V 000 The town of Toledo and her jurisdiction payeth yearly ●3 Q 000 V 000 Toledo The rent of the hills which is paid for pasturing of cattle which goeth to the country of 〈◊〉 emadura to be fed, amounteth yearly to the king 19 Q 503 V 000 The villages of the priory of S. john pay yearly 7 Q ●55 V 000 The town of Almagro and her province Almagro which is called the Campo de Cala trava and is of the mastership of Calatrava payeth yearly 7 Q 120 V 000 The Alcavala of the Herbage and Pasturage in the said mastership is yearly to the king 3 Q 4●8 V 000 The town Cuidad Real payeth yearly 4 Q 150 V 000 Cuidad Real. The villages lying in the country called the Archdeaconship of Talavera de la Reyna pay yearly 14 Q 326 V 000 Talevera de la Reyna The town of Placentia & her jurisdiction & the Placentia villages that are accounted of the Archdeaconshippe pay yearly 18 Q 475 V 000 The town of Truxillo and her jurisdiction payeth yearly 12 Q 224 V 000 Truxillo The town of Caceres and her jurisdiction payeth yearly 7 Q 850 V 000 Caceres The town of Badaios and her province and Badaios jurisdiction pay yearly 9 Q 972 V 000 The town of Alcantara, Alcantara her jurisdiction & province, and is of the mastership of Alcantara payeth yearly 9 Q 403 V 000 The Herbage of the same country whereon beasts do pasture are yearly to the King 3 Q 481 V 000 The province of Serna of the mastership of Alcantara payeth yearly ● Q 570 V 000 Serna The town of Merida and her jurisdiction Merida which is in the province of Leon being of the mastership of S. jacob payeth yearly 21 Q 234. Fuento el Maestro V 000 The town of Fuente el Maestro, & her jurisdiction, being in the province of Leon, and of the mastership of S. jacob payeth yearly 6 Q 973 V 000 The town of Guadalcana and her jurisdiction of the mastership of S. jacob payeth yearly 3 Q 305 V 000 Guadalcana The town of Xeres de Badaios of the mastership of S. jacob payeth yearly 7 Q 100 V 000 Xeres de Badaios The town of Sivillia her jurisdiction & partition payeth yearly 182 Q 38● V 000 Sivillia The rents of the Lordship of the same town payeth yearly 2 Q 000 V 000 The towns of Palma and Guelues belonging Palma and Guelues. to the Earls of Palma and Guelues pay yearly 235 V 000 The towns of Tevar and Ardales', Tevar and Ardales'. belonging to the marquess of Ardales' pay yearly 235 V 000 Ilerena The town of Ilerena and her jurisdiction which is in the Province of Leon and of the mastership of Saint jacob payeth yearly 3 Q 125 V 000 Cadiz The Town of Cadiz payeth yearly 8 Q 452 V 000 The rent of Cadiz called the Almadravas which is the fishing called Atun are worth yearly 3 Q 035 V 000 Gibraltar The town of Gibraltar payeth only the third penny for they are free of Alcavalen by the kings licence payeth yearly 1 Q 500 V 000 Xeres. The town of Xeres de la Frontera and her jurisdiction yearly 21 Q 050 V 000 Catmona The town of Catmona and her jurisdiction yearly 9 Q 450 V 000 Lora and Set Filla. The towns of Lora and Sete Filla pay yearly 680 V 000 Egija The town of Egija with the suburbs payeth 15 Q 500 V 000 Cordona The town of Cordona and her jurisdiction payeth yearly 48 V 995 V 000 The country called Rea lengos of Cordova pay yearly 17 Q 316 V 000 Anduxar The town of Anduxar and jurisdiction pay yearly 4 Q 800 V 000 Wieda The town of Wieda and jurisdiction payeth yearly 11 Q 640 V 000 Baesa The town of Baesa and jurisdiction payeth yearly 17 Q 316 V 000 Quexada The town of Quexada payeth yearly 1 Q 415 V 000 Carcola The gentility of Carcola payeth yearly 6 Q 885 V 000 S. Esteven The earldom of S. Esteven payeth yearly 1 Q 340 V 000 Martos. The town of Martos and her jurisdiction, being of the mastership of Calatrava part of Andolosia payeth yearly 11 Q 436 V 000 jaen. The town of jaen and her jurisdiction payeth yearly 15 Q 909 V 000 Granada The town of Granada and her jurisdiction payeth yearly 42 Q 910 V 000 The silk of the kingdom of Granada was wont to be worth (before the moors were driven out of the country) 42 Quentoes, it is now but 22 Q 000 V 000 The rent which is called Aguella & Auilles of Granada payeth yearly ● Q ●50 V 000 Loxa & Albama The towns of Loxa and Alhama in the kingdom of Granada pay yearly 3 Q 650 V 000 Baca The town of Baca in Granado, & her jurisdiction payeth yearly 10 Q 626 V 000 Guadix The town of Guadix in Granado and her jurisdiction payeth yearly 6 Q 395 V 000 The town of Almena in Granado and her jurisdiction payeth yearly 3 Q 080 V 000 Almena The towns of Almunecar, Almunecar Mutril, Salabrena. Mutril and Salabrena in Granado pay yearly 2 Q 643 V 000 The town of Malaga in Granado pay yearly 16 Q 269 V 000 Malaga The town of Veles Malaga in Granada pay yearly 5 Q 519 V 000 Veles Malaga The town of Pulchena payeth yearly 410 V 000 Pulchena The town of Ronda and her jurisdiction pay yearly 5 Q 334 V 000 Ronda. The Island of Carnaria payeth yearly 4 Q 850 V 000 Canary The Island of Teneriffe payeth yearly 3 Q ●00 V 000 Teneriffe. The Island of La Palma payeth yearly 2 Q 400 V 000 La Palma. The daily contribution that the kingdoms or countries of Spain do pay yearly unto the King, are worth 104. Quentoes, 305 V 000 Maravedies, which contribution is gathered throughout all his Provinces lands and towns of Spain among the common sort of people, or subjects, that are every man taxed to pay according to their abilities, and give yearly a certain sum as their goods do amount unto in value, which doth rise unto as I said before yearly 104 Q 305 V 000 The custom of the tenth penny for dry havens which are passages within the land of the kingdoms of Valencia, Artagon and Navarre, which men pay upon all goods that are carried out of Spain into the said countries, and for such as are brought into the same countries out of Spain, paid one with the other the tenth penny, which tolle amounteth to in the year the sum of 49 Q 035 V 000 The dry havens or passages within the land coming in or going out, which border on the kingdom of Portugal, and lie in part of Spain called Ca●hlia, pay yearly for the tenth penny of all such goods passing to and fro 34 Q 155 V 000. The wols that are yearly carried out of Spain into other countries, pay for every sack weighing about ten Aroben, each Arobe bein 25. pound two ducats: for such as are natural all borne subjects of the land, but a stranger payeth 4. ducats, which amount unto, the year with the other 53 Q 586. V 000 The chief Almoxariffchay of Cola is larmed of the king for 10● Q. 00 V 000. Maravedies yearly, and is for the tenth penny of all wares & Merchandises of the Neatherlandes, France, England, Portugal, Italy, etc. coming into Spain, and there to be discharged, which one year with the other amount unto 154 Q 309 V 000. The Almoxarif●hap of the Spanish Indies by the town of Civillia hath farmed of the King, which ariseth of all the wares that are laden in Civillia and sent into the Indies and are rated to pay the twentieth penny, & arriving in India, the same wares do pay yet a twentieth penny more, and it is farmed out of the twentieth penny due in Civillia, yearly for the sum of 67 Q 000 V 000. The rent which the King receiveth by the mint in Spain, which is of every mark of Silver that is coined in the said Mint, each mark accounted six ducats in silver, one Rial of plate. This rent is called El Senno reaxo de la moneda, and the mint of Civil only riseth to as much as all the others, this is yearly to the king 22 Q 000 V 000 The King hath farmed out the Master ships of Saint jacob, Calatrava, & Alcantara to the suckers of Ausburge, and is the customs of corn, wine oil & other things, that are rated at a tenth penny, which in times past the said Masters used to have. In these customs are not comprehended neither Tercias', nor Alcavalas, but are received apart, as I said before. These Mastership's are the cheiefe knights of the Cross belonging to those three orders, which used to have chief rulers over them, which were called Masters, like the knights of Rhodes & Malta, or as in Cloisters, and religious houses, which were sworn to be true and obedient subjects, and to observe certain orders prescribed, as it is yet at this day, which Mastership's were in times past (being offices of great estimation and account) only given unto the blood Royal, or else to some of the Kings own children, having certain lands appointed to them, and absolute commandment over them but of late years the kings of Spain have taken the same offices into their hands, serving, or at the least presenting their places as Masters and commanders over all knights of the Cross, of what order soever, the farm whereof amounteth yearly unto the sum of 98 Q 000 V 000. The king hath likewise rent out the pasturage of the lands of the said masterships yearly for the sum of 37 Q 000 V 000. He hath likewise found out the Quicksilver of Almalen in the hill of Sierra Morena, in the fields of Calatrava for yearly rend of 73 Q 000 V 000. The Bulls of the Popes of Rome, which are called the Santa Crusada, yield yearly to the king 200 Q 000 V 000. Which being reduced into English money amounteth unto the sum of one hundredth forty seven thousand fifty and eight pounds and fifteen shillings. The rent called subsicy, which is thus, all Priests and spiritual persons, that have any benefices or spiritual rents of Churches, Cloisters, Chapels, and such like, must every man pay a certain sum for a confirmation of his place, or an entrance into his Stipendio Sallarus, benefices and qualities, which is like our first fruits.) This is given to maintain wars against Infidels, & Heretics: for the which most Churches & Cloisters have agreed for a certain sum yearly, which clear of all charges they must pay unto the king, & this subsicy is worth yearly 65 Q 000 V 000. Also all Bishops & Churches of Spain, give yearly unto the king a certain sum of money towards his wars against Heretics and Infidels, which amounteth yearly 110 Q 000 V 000. These rents are called El Excusado, whereunto the Pope hath consented by his letters or Patent Apostolica Romana, so that the king may choose a receiver out of every Chapel and Church to receive the tenths o● the spiritualty, as of Corn, Barley, Wine, Oil▪ etc. and of all other things that are gathered of the ground, and do amount unto as before. The mine of Guadalcana lying in the country of Estremadura, in the hills of Sierra Morena, were wont to be worth in silver yearly gotten out of the same 187 Q. 000 V 000 but what it now amounteth unto, it is not known, as being of late years much diminished. All the countries of Spain give unto the king yearly a certain rent called Excercitio towards the keeping of Slaves, & maintenance and making of new Galleys the sum of 7 Q 750 V 000. The rent called de la Moneda Forera, which is a rent raising of every Heertsteede that payeth 7. Meruedies yearly, of what quality or condition soever it be, doth amount yearly to 6 Q 656 V 000. The rent or profit that cometh yearly out of the Indies to the kings own coffers is the sum of 300 Q 000 V 000 The kingdoms of Valencia, Arragon, and Catalonia, give yearly unto the King, (besides other payments) the sum of 75 Q 000 V 000. The Islands of Sardinia, Maiorca, and Minorca yield the king no profit, for that the rents and revenues of the same, are always employed to the defence and maintenance of the same islands against the enemy, and sometimes more than is received. The kingdom of Cicilia payeth yearly unto the king 375 Q 000 V 000. The kingdom of Naples with the countries of Pullia and Calabria, do yield yearly to the king 450 Q 000 V 000. The Dukedom of Milan payeth yearly 300 Q 000 V 000. The Provinces of the Neatherlanders, or Low countries, with Burgundy, used yearly to pay unto the King the sum of 700 Q 000 V 000. But now in these wars and troublesome times, there is no account thereof to be made. The farm of Cards in Spain is yearly worth unto the king 20 Q 000 V 000. for that every pair of cards sold there, payeth unto the king half a rial, and amounteth to as it is farmed 20 Q 000 V 000. The Rash's and clothes of Florence, that are brought into Spain, are worth yearly 10 Q 000 V 000. for that every piece of Rash payeth six ducats custom to the king. 10 Q 000 V 000. ALl these accounts tolles, customs, Alcavalas, tenths, and third pennies, impostes, contributions, rents, demaynes, and revenues of the King of Spain, are gathered & truly collected out of his exchequers of account in his said kingdoms, and without any augmentation or diminishing, set down and recorded herein, as they were farmed, received, and paid in the year of our Lord 1578. before the said king of Spain had any right in the kingdom of Portugal: for the which cause it is not here set down, but shall hereafter follow particularly by itself, together with the pettigrée of the kings of Portugal, briefly and truly described, by copies received from the officers of those countries: the whole sum of all the rents, revenues, etc. afore specified and set down, do amount unto yearly, the sum of 47 31, Q. 329. V 880. Spanish money, which amounteth in English money, to the sum of three millions, four hundredth threescore, and nintéene thousand, nine hundredth and seventeen pounds, five shillings and nine pence, which is the full sum of all his receipt, Portugal excepted, which now is in the said kings hands, as hereafter followeth. The kingdoms that are comprehended under the name of Spain or Castillia are these: Leon, Arragon, Castillia, Navarre, Granado, Toledo Valencia, Sevillia, Cordova, Murcien, jaen, Gallicia, Gibraltar, and Catalonia, which are 14. in number and in times past were every one a Kingdom apart, & yet hold the name: the Kingdoms, Provinces, and Towns, which are called to any counsel or assembly in the Court of Spain, and therein do give their voices, are the Kingdoms of Leon, Sevillia, Toledo, Granado, Cordoma, Murcien, and jaen. The towns called chief towns, or Cities which are bishoprics, are Burgos, Sa●amanca, Segovia, Soria, Auila, Cuenca, Toro, Zamora, & Guadalaxara, & the towns that are no chief towns nor bishoprics, and are called towns whether they lie walled or not: of these but two of them have any voices, which are Valla Dolid, and Madrid, the other kingdoms as Arragon Navarre, Valencia, and Catalonia, etc. have their Viceroys, & Governors apart, holding Parlements or Courts by themselves, always referred to the King of Spain's order and direction, as the kingdoms of Naples and Cicilia, with the Dukedom of Milan, etc. The 3. Chapter. A brief discourse of the notablest and memorablest things, situation, government, and revenues of the kingdom of Portugal, called Lusitanea. THe kingdom of Portugal is in compass 285. miles, that is, on the sea coast 135 miles, and by land 150. miles. There are 1●. Towns in Portugal that are called Cities, which title no Town may bear, but such as are bishoprics, unless it be by special licence from the King himself: all the rest are called Towns whether they have walls or not: whereof there are many of these towns and Castles. There are in Portugal 4●0. beside villages, it hath 3. principal havens or rivers, which are Lisbon, Porto, and Serwal, and other three in the land of Algarue, (which is also under the Crown of Portugal, which are Tavilla, Lag●s, and Villa Nova, the key or defence of the river and town of Lisbon, is the Castle of Saint julian, by the Neatherlanders called Saint giles, which lieth on the first entrance of the river called Tegio, in latin Tagus, one of the most famous rivers of all Europe. The 4. Chapter. Of the justice and government in Lisbon, and throughout all Portugal. FIrst there is the Tribunale, called the civil Court or Law, whereof the chief judge is the Regidoer, that is the ruler in the kings behalf, with two other judges, than the Tribunale or Court for criminal causes with two judges, an Auditor or receiver of the kings customs, called the Alfandega, a judge of Equity for every man's proprieties, or own revenues, eight judges of the Weesen, a judge of the Hospitals, (a chief judge called Correcteur) of the things and causes of India, Guinea, Capo verde, Saint Thomas, and Brasilia, from all these Courts, they may appeal to the civil law, the Tribunale or Court of requests, whose judges are called Desembargadores, which is as much to say as dischargers: these are of great authority and credit, as the chief States, and Precedents are in the Low Countries. To this Court are brought the appellations that are made unto the civil law, their chief judge is called Correcteur of the requests, two judges that are called Desembargadores da Fazenda, which is as much to say, as Auditors and judges of the kings causes and revenues, these are they that minister justice, between the King and particular men, and from them there is no appeal, the council of orders Tribunale Supremo or highest Court, which are called Desembargadores of the palace: Tribunale or Court of Consciences, Tribunale or Court of Veedores da Fazenda, that is visitors and overseers of the kings revenues, Tribunale or Court of the kings Exchequer, which is under the courts of Veedores da Fazenda, the kings Council, two Dukes, one Marquis, ten Earldoms. The fortresses which the Portugese's hold in Africa or Barbaria, are these. Tanger, Zepta, Arzilla, the Island of Madera, the Flemish Islands called as Ilhas does Acores, in those are comprehended Tercera, S. Michael, Santa Maria, Saint jorgie, Pico, Fayael, Gratiosa, the Islands of Flores, and Coruo, the islands of Cabo verde are S. jacob, O fogo, Mayo, Boam Vista, S. Antonio, and Saint Nicolaes', Arguyn a fortress in the Country of Guinea, the Mine of Saint jorgie & the Castle lying on the same side of Aethiopia, & also on the same coast the Island del Principe, Saint Thomas, At●b●n, the Kingdom of Congo, and Angola, on the same Coast of Aethiopia lieth under tribute of the Portugal, the Island Santa Helena, on the other side of the cape de Bona Speranza, the fortress of Soffala, the Island of Mosambique, the Island of Ormus lying between Persia and Arabia, the town and fortress of Diu, the town and fortresses of Daman, Bacayn, Chaul, Goa, where the Viceroy is resident, all lying on the Coast of India, the towns and fortresses of Honour, Barcelor, Mangalor, Cananor, Cranganor, Cochin, and Coulan, all lying on the same Coast of India called Malabar, a fortress in the Island of Seylon, called Columbo, the towns Negapatan, and S. Thomas on the coast of Choramandel, the town and fortress of Malacca, the jands of Maluco, which are Tarnate, Tydor Banda, and Amboyna, the land and coast of Brasilia, stretching 500 miles in length, and divided into eight Captaineships, or governments, from whence every year is brought into Portugal about 150. thousand Arroben of sugar, each Arroben weighing 32. pound, the Haven called de Todos os Santos, or of all Saints, where the Governor of Brasilia is resident. The ordinary rents of the Crown of Portugal, are yearly one million of gold, & 100000. ducats the rents & revenues of the Mastership of the knights of the Cross, the king being always Master, to whom belong the islands of Acores (or Flemish islands) Madera, those of Cabo verde, Saint Thomas, and the Princepe are yearly 200000. Ducats, the rent of the Mine belonging to the Knight of the Cross of Christ, is yearly worth 100000. ducats, Brasilia yieldeth yearly 150000. Ducats, the customs of spices and other goods received out of the East Indies is yearly 600000. Ducats, the other rents, profits, and revenues of the Indies, and their towns are spent and disbursed in defence & maintenance of the said Countries and places, so that the rents and revenues of the Crown of Portugal do amount unto the sum of 220000 Ducats, at 5. shillings 6. pence the Ducat amounteth unto in English money, to the sum of six hundredth and five thousand pounds. The 5. Chapter. Of the yearly charges disbursed by the Kings of Portugal. THe fees and payments due to the ministers & justices of the laws and ordinances of the country of Portugal, for the executing of their offices, doth amount unto yearly the sum of 100000 ducats. The rents which the King bestoweth yearly, as gifts and rewards unto such as have done him service, which being dead, returneth unto him again, do yearly amount unto the sum of 300000 ducats. The juros which are bought for money, and fee farm or continual rents to be paid out of the kings revenues, customs, and other demaynes yearly, and are never released, but remain from heir to heir, are yearly 150000 Ducats. The charges of Maintaining the castles and forts in Africa and Barbary, do yearly amount unto the sum of 300000. ducats. The charges of maintaining five Galleys yearly 50●00 Ducats. The charges of the army that doth yearly convey the Indian ships thither, & fetcheth them back again amount unto 300000. Ducats. The Moradien, that is the wages which the king payeth to his servants called Mocos da Camara, Caualhe●, Fidalgos, and other titles, as an honour to such as he will show favour unto, or else in reward of any former services, or in respect their Ancestors were true and faithful servitors to the king, with those titles they are called servants of the kings house, which is a great honour, & they do receive a yearly stipend (although not much, towards their charges of finding provision for their horses, although they can hardly save a pair of shoes, and yet never come on horses back all their life time, but it is only a token of the kings favour and good will, wherein the Portugese's do more glory and vaunt themselves, then of any thing in the world, yet is it not of much importance, and very little pay, it amounteth yearly to 80000. Ducats. The charge of the king of Portugese's house is yearly the sum of 200000. Duc. which was wont to be farmed, as at this day it is: for the charge of household of Don Alberto, Cardinal of Austria, Governor of Portugal, for the defence and maintenance of the Castles and Forts of Portugal the sum of 200000. Ducats. So that the charges aforesaid do amount unto in all, the sum of 1680000. ducats, at five shillings six pence the ducat is in English money the sum of four hundredth sixty and two thousand pounds, which being deducted out of the receates of Portugal aforesaid, that amount unto 605000. pounds English money there resteth yearly for the king of Spain, Coffers, one hundredth forty and three thousand pounds English money. The 6. Chapter Of the Town of Lisbon. THe town of Lisbon hath ●2. parish Churches, and above eleven thousand houses, wherein there are above ●0 thousand dwelling places, accounting the Court and the place thereunto belonging, it hath in people, above 120000. whereof 10000 of them at the least are Slaves and Moors, which estimation is made according to the church books, which the Parsons, Vicars and Curates are bound to do once every year, every one in his parish, among these are not accounted such as follow the Court, neither Cloisters, Cobents, Hospitals, nor any other houses of religion: for that in all they would amount unto as much as the houses of the city: also of other Churches▪ Cloisters, and Chapels of the virgin Marie, and other Saints which are no parishes, there are so many, that they can not be numbered. The Town hath above 350. streets, besides cross ways and lanes, that have no thorough fare, which are likewise a great number. The 7. Chapter A short discourse of the pettigrees of kings of Portugal, until Philip now King of Spain and Portugal Son of Charles the fift Emperor of Rome. THe first king of Portugal was named Don Alfonso Henriques, son of Earl Henry, who (as the Chronicles rehearse) was son of the Duke of Lorraine others think he was son of the king of Hungary: but the truest Histories do report him to be of Lorrane, and that he came into the King of Spain's Court, being desirous to employ himself in the wars of the Christians against the Moors, which as then held the most part of the country of Spain, and the whole land of Lusitania or Portugal, warring continually on the King of Spain, and other Christians bordering on the same: in the which wars he behaved himself so well, and did so valiantly, that the King knew not how, or in what sort to recompense him better, then by giving him his daughter in marriage, & with her for a dowry gave him the country of Portugal, that was as much as he had conquered, and brought under his subjection, with all the rest if he could win it, with the name and title of Earl of Portugal, his son aforesaid called Don Alfonzo, was borne in Anno 1094. ●●9●. who won the most part of the country of Portugal from the Moors, & after his father's death was called Prince of Portugal, which name and title he enjoyed for the space of 27. years, which title in Spain no man may bear but the King's eldest son, and heir unto the Crown, and being of the age of 45. years, was crowned king of Portugal, by the favour & special privilege of the Pope of Rome as then being, & by that means Portugal became a kingdom. This first King married when he was 52. years of age, and had one son and 3. daughters, and besides them one bastard son, and a bastard daughter, he reigned 46. years, and died in the town of Coyinbra, his body being buried in the Cloister of Santa Crus, erected by him▪ as also the Cloisters of Alcobaca and Saint Vincent without Lisbon called Saint Vincent de Fora. This King first won the Town of Lisbon from the Moors, by the aid & help of the Flemings, and Low countrymen, which came thither with a Fleet of Ships, (being by stormy weather forced to put into the river) that were sailing to the holy land, whether for the furtherance of Christian religion, they as then traveled, which as I suppose was about the time that the Christians won the great City of Damyate in the country of Palestina, where those of Harlame did most valiantly defend themselves, and showed great valour, as the Sword & Arms as yet extant do well bare witness, which Fleet being come thither at such time as the said king besieged the said town of Lisbon, he understanding that only cause of coming was to employ their forces against the Infidels and unbelieving Christians, friendly desired them, seeing it was Gods will they should arrive there at so convenient a time, to aid him against his enemies, showing them that they might as well employ their forces there, (as in the holy land,) to increase the faith of Christ, and overthrow the enemies of the same, whom if it pleased God to prosper, (as he doubted not but by their helps to have the victory) they might as then fulfil their pretended voyage, both to the glory of God, & their own honours, which in the end they agreed unto, in the which service they so well employed themselves, that they not only holp him to win Lisbon, but many other places, thereby placing the king in his kingly seat: for which their good service the king acknowledging himself much bound and beholding unto them, in recompense thereof he endowed them with many privileges and freedoms more than his natural subjects ●nioyed, which he bond both him and his successors kings of that country to keep & observe, one whereof was, that all Dutchmen that would dwell within his Country, or traffic with in the same, should be free of all impostes, and excises for all things that they should use, and have in their own houses, and for themselves and their family, that they might wear what sort of apparel and jewels they would, and of what stuff soever, with their wives and families, although they were Portugal women, which is forbidden to the natural Portugese's: for that they have a law concerning apparel, what kind of stuff every man according to his estate and quality shall wear, also to go by night and at unaccustomed hours when occasion served them, in all places with five or six servants with light or without▪ and with what arms or weapons they would, which is not permitted to the inhabitants themselves▪ that no justice should have power to atach or arrest any man in their house, or execute any justice upon them, for what cause soever it were (treason only excepted) but only by their own law, by the king himself ordained & appointed, called juis dos-Alemaines or the Dutch law, also that their houses might not be taken (whether they were hired or their own fee simples) for the kings service or any of his Court, as all other his subjects houses are, as need requireth, that they might not be compelled to use or serve any office in the country, or for the king, as the Portugese's do, neither yet rated to pay any contribution for the common profit of the country, & traveling through the Country, should for their money be served before any other man, with many other such like privileges, which for brevity I omit, only I have set down the principallest of them, thereby to show (as their own Chronicles declare) through whom, and by whose help the Portugese's, at this day do possess and enjoy that which they hold in the said Country of Portugal, which privileges are yet (as they have always been) without any denial firmly holden and maintained, and by all the kings successively confirmed from time to time, with daily increasing of the same, by means of the continual pleasures done unto the said kings of Portugal by the said Nation, as it is well known. 2 Don Sancho. Don Sancho Son of: the aforesaid king was the second king of Portugal, he was borne in Anno 1154. and crowned king at the age of 31. years, he had issue 15. children, Sons, and Daughters, and reigned twenty seven years, he died in the town of Coymbra in the year of our Lord 1212. being 58. years of age, and lieth buried in the Cloister of Santa Crus by his Father. 3 Don Afonzo. Don Afonso the second of that name, & the third king of Portugal, was crowned at the age of 25. years, he had issue two sons, in his time lived Saint Dominick, Saint Francis and Saint Anthony, he died in anno 1223. & lieth buried in the Cloister of Alcobassa. 4 Don Sancho Capello Don Sancho Capello, his son fourth king of Portugal, was crowned at the age of 16. years, and died in the town of Toledo, in the year of our Lord 1247, and is buried in the great Church of Toledo. After his death was chose King, his brother the Earl of Bolonhien, 5 The Earl of Bologien. and was the fifth king of Portugal, he reigned 31. years, and died in Lisbon, in the year of our Lord 1279. and is buried in the Cloister of Alcobassa. 6 Don Deniis. Don Deniis his son was Crowned in Lisbon, the sixth king of Portugal, being of the age of 18. years, he reigned 46. years and died in the town of Saint Arein, in the year of our Lord 1325. the 20. of january being 64. years of age, and lieth buried in the Cloister of Olivellas, which is about 2. miles from Lisbon, which he in his life time had erected, he married with Donna Isabel, daughter to Don Pedro king of Arragon, she was cannonised for a Saint, her Sepulchre is in the town of Coymbra which she builded: where her body doth many miracles. 7 Don Afonzo O Bravo. After him reigned his son Don Afonso oh Bravo, which is the valiant, he was crowned in the town of Arem at the age of 35. years, and was the seventh king of Portugal, he died in Lisbon in the month of May Anno 1356. he lieth buried in the high choir of the great Church, he overcame the Moors in Salado, fight in aid of the king of Castille. His Son Don Pedro was the eight king of Portugal, 8 Don Pedro. and ruled the land with great justice, temperante, and peace, & died in the year of our Lord 1366. and lieth buried in the Cloister of Alcobassa, he had issue one son, called Don Ferdinand, and before he married, he had two bastard sons by Dona Ines or Agnes de Castro, called Don joan and Don Denniis. 9 Don Ferdinand. After the death of the aforesaid king, Don Ferdinand his son was crowned king, and was the ninth king of Portugal, he married Dona Lianor Gonsalues Tells, whom he took by force from her husband called Larenca Vaaz da Cunha, to whom she was married, and banished him the land, nevertheless he was very loving to his subjects, and punished all offenders, and vagabonds, he reigned 17. years, and died without issue, in the year of our Lord 1383. being of the age of 43 years, and lieth buried in the quire of S. Francis Church in the town of S. Arein. After this king's death, 10 Don joan. Don joan king of Castillia, with his wife Dona Beatrix, came into Portugal by force to possess the Crown of Portugal, but Don joan bastard son of the aforesaid king Don Pedro, & bastard brother to Don Ferdinand the last king withstood him, and fought with the said king of Castille, whom he overcame in the field, called S. joris, where for a perpetual memory of his victory, he erected a great & rich Cloister, which he called the Cloister of the battle or victory, because he won the field in the same place against the Castilians. This bastard Don joan was Crowned king of Portugal, being of the age of 31. years, & was the tenth king, he lived 76 years, and died in Anno 1433. the 14. of August, and lieth buried in the same Cloister of the battle by him erected, he won the Castle and town of Septa from the Moors, in Barbaria or Africa, and was Father to the Infant Don Ferdinand, that is Canonised for a Saint. 11 Don Duarte or Eduart, After him reigned his son Don Duarte, or Eduart, and was the 11. king of Portugal, he lived 42. years, whereof he reigned 5. years king, he died in the Palace of the covent of Thomar, in Anno 1438. he lieth buried in the Cloister of the battle. Don Alfonso his son was borne in S. Arein in the year of our Lord 1432. 12 Don Afonzo. and because he was but 6. years of age when his Father died, his uncle the Infant Don Pedro reigned in his place, until the year of our Lord 1448. Then the said Don Afonso was himself crowned king, & was the 12 king of Portugal, he died in S. Arein in the same chamber where he was borne the 28 of August 1481. and lieth buried by his Ancestors in the Cloister of the battle. 1● Don joan: After his death reigned his son Don joan the great, called the second of that name, being the 13. King of Portugal: he was borne in Lisbon the 4. of May, anno 1455. he did openly himself being present, cause Don Fernando Duke of Be●ganca, upon the market place of the town of Euora to be beheaded, on the 22. of june in An. 1483. & with his own hand with a Poniard slew Don Domingos Duke of Begia, brother to his wife Dona Lianor, presently calling Don Manoel, the said Duke's brother▪ & gave him the same Dukedom, with all that belonged thereunto he lived 40. years, and died at Aluor in the bath the 25. of October An. 1495. & lieth buried in the Cloister of the battle by his Ancestors, & died without issue. 14 Don Manoell. By his last Will and Testament, he gave the Crown of Portugal unto Don Manoel Duke of Viseu, who was crowned king of Portugal, & was the 14. king, he was crowned in Alcacer do Sal, the 27. of October, An. 1495. he caused all the jews in his land, either willingly, or by force (to such as refused it) to be christened, in the year of our Lord 1499. and caused all the Moors that dwelled at Lisbon without the gate of Moreria to be banished, whereof the gate to this day holdeth the name. In the ●●me of this king, there happened an insurrection of Portugese's in Lisbon, against the new Christened jews, whereby they slew certain hundereths of them, both men, women, and children, burning some of them, with a thousand other mischiefs, robbing their houses, shops, and goods: for the which the king did great justice, and finding out the principal beginners of the same caused them to be punished. This king did first discover, and by his captains & soldiers, conquered the Countries and passages into the East Indies, and the oriental countries for spices, & also the havens & passages in Prester john's land, he likewise conquered the towns & fortresses of Saff●in & Azamor in Africa, he died in an. 1521. upon S. Luce's day, & lieth buried in the Cloister of Bethlehem, by the dutchmen called Roisters. 1● Don joan 3. After his death reigned his son Don joan the 3. & was the 15. king of Portugal, he was borne in the month of june in Anno 1502. in the city of Lisbon, where he was crowned in anno 1521. he was simple, courteous, & mild, and a great friend unto all religious persons, as also to all students, he founded the university of Coymbra, and other colleges, & died the 11. of june An. 1557. & lieth buried in the Cloister of Bethelem, or Roisters. After his death was crowned Don Sebastian, and was the 16. king of Portugal, 16. Don Sebastian, he was son to the Prince of Portugal, eldest son to the aforesaid Don joan, that married with Dona joana daughter to the Emperor Charles the fift, and Sister to Philip king of Spain, which Prince dying before his father, left his wife great with child of this Don Sebastian, who after the death of his Grandfather was Crowned king of Portugal, he was born on Sebastian's day, in the year of our Lord 1553. he passed with a great army into Africa to conquer the country, in the year 1578. where he with most of his Army was slain, the rest taken prisoners, and so died without issue. After this overthrow and death of the said king Don Sabastian, 17. Don Henrick. was Crowned Don Henrick a Cardinal, uncle unto the said Don Sabastian, and was the 17. King of Portugal, and died without issue, in Anno 1580. leaving by his last will and testament for heir of the Crown of Portugal Don Philip king of Spain, as lawful successor unto the same: for that his Father Charles the 5. married the eldest daughter of the king Don Manoel, which was mother to Don Philip king of Spain, and sister to the grandfather of Don Sebastian, and of the aforesaid Don Henrick, although there had been another brother of the said done Henrick, named Don Luiis, who dying left a son called Don Antonio, that was Prior de Ocrato, of the order of the knights of the Cross of S. john's, whom the Portugese's chose for their king, but by means of the great power and might of the king of Spain, who by money had gotten the greatest part of the nobility of Portugal, to hold with him, partly by money, and partly by force, he got the kingdom into his hands and subjection, driving Don Antonio out of the country, 18. Don philip king of Spain. & so in anno 1581. he came into Portugal, & in Lisbon was crowned king in the cloister of Thomar, by all the 3 estates of the country, that is the nobility, spirituality, and commons, & is the 18. king of Portugal, who as yet liveth, & reigneth over the same country: whereby the Crown of Portugal is now fallen into the hands of the kings of Spain, having continued in the hands of the kings of Portugese's for the space of 442. years, which their successors till then enjoyed, being of the race and progeny of the house of Lorraine. Thus endeth the fourth Book. FINIS. TYPUS ORBIS TERRARUM QVID EI POTEST VIDERI MAGNUM IN REBUS HUMANIS, CVI AETERNITAS OMNIS, TOTIUSQVE MUNDI NOTA SIT MAGNI TV DO CICERO: Exacta & acurata deliucatio cum orarum maritimarum tum etiam sororum terrestrium quae in regionibus China, Cauchinchin●, Cambojn sive C●ampa, Syao, Malaca, Aracan & Pegu, una cum omnium vicinarum iusu: latum descriptione ut sunt Samatra, Java utraque, Timora, Molucca, Philippin●, Luconja & de Leqveos dicta, nec non insulae Japan & Corece, reliquaeque omnes adsacentes, ubj etiam adnotavimus scopulos ●revi●i, omniaque Vadosa loca & siquce alia a quibus periculum navigantibus. Qvemadmodum singula hoc ae●o à Lusitanis navium gubernatoribus còmperta, ina●●gitata, & in tobula● rela●a fuere. Equo●um recentibus ac emen da●is tabulis perqàm studiose haec destribi ex primi● curavimus in eorum hominum commodum quibus ista usvi voluptatia esse consueverunrit The true description of all the Coasts of China, Cauchinchina Camboyn, Syao, Malacia, Arraacan, and Pegu, together with all the Islands there abowts, both great and small, with the Cliffs, Breathes, Sands, Droughts and Shallowed, all perfectly drawn and examined with the most expert Cards of the Portugese's Pilots. The description of the Islands. and Castle of Mozambique, lying upon the borders of Melinde, rich of Ebon wood, fine Gold, and Ambergrize fronwhence many Slaves are carried into India. Defineatiò Orarum maritimarum Ter●re ●vulgo indigitatae Terra do Natal●tem Sofal● Mozambica & Melindae, Insulaeque Sancti Laurentij, Insularum Maldivicarum, Seylon Jnsulae, & Promontorij Comorini, ad. Jndiam siti una cum Jnsulie, Scopulis, Pulinnis, Vadis, veci s Ventorum tractibus, Vgenuino singulorum loco: rum situ, ad exactissimas Jchno: graphicas Jndicarum tabulas recognita atque emendata The description or Caerd of the Coasts of the countries following call● Terra do Natal, all the Const of Sofal●. Mozambique, Melind●, and the Jland of Saint Laurence, wi●h all their Jslands, Cliffs, Drougthes, and Shallows, also the Jslandes of Maldiwia, to the Jslande Seylon, and the Cape de Comori, lying on the Coast of Jndia with the true situation and covers of the same, according to the ●ewest and last Ca●●des made for the same Coasts Diliniatur in hac tabula, Orce maritimae Abexia, freti Mecani al Maris— Rubri Arabiae, Ormi, Persiae, suprà Sindam usque, Flwinis Indj, Cambaice Jndi● & Malabari●, Insulae, Ceylon, Choromandelice, & Orixae, stinij Gangis, & Regni Bengale sinus item Sinum, Insularum, Scopulorum, Puluinorum, Vadorum, profunditatumque, dictis oris adiacentium, cum genuimis singulorum sororum. Nominibus, prout ab expretiseimis navium Gubernatoribus Lusitanicis, iniligetatur magno studio ex optimis tabulis Indias recognita omnia atque emendata The description of the coast of Abex, The straits of Mecca, otherwise called the Red Sea, the coasts of Arabia, Orinus, and Persia, to the River of Sinde of the River Indus, of Cambain, India, and Malabar, The islands of Ceilon, Chora●andel, and Orixa, The River Ganges, and the kingdom of Bengala, As also the situation of the Creeks, Cliffs, Banks, Shallows, and deptilies upon or along by the said Coasts, with the right name of every place, as they are called by the Portugal Pilots, all truly described Typus orarum maritimarum Guinae Manicongo & Angolae ultra promontorium Bonae spei usque cum omnibus portubus Insulis Scopulis puluinis & Vadis veraque latitudine Oceani Aethiopici ab ortu in occasum ad Fermambucum & promont S Augustini in ora Brasiliensi vergentis una cum eiusdem oceani Insulis praecipue vero S'Thomae S Helena Insula Ascensionis multisque aliis earumque genuino tractu accurate omnia ex optimis Indicis tabulis hydrographicis decerpta & emend The description of the Coast of Guinea, Manicongo, and Angola, and so proceeding forwards beyond the Cape de Bona Speranza, with all the Havens, islands, Cliffs, Drougthes, and Shallows, with the whole breadth of the Ethiopian Ocean Seas which reacheth from East to west to Pernambuco, and Cape S. Augustine, lying on the Coast of Brasilia, together with all the Islands, namely S. Thomas, S. Helena, the Island of the Ascension, and others, with their true courses. Imprinted at London by john Wolf. R.E. sculpsir. Delinentio omnium o●arum totius Aus●●●ti● partis Americae, dictae Peru ●ianae a Risola Plata, Brasiliam, Pariam, & Cas●ellam auream, una cum omnibus Insulis An●ilus dict●●, Hispaniolam item & Cubam comprehen ●se●●s 〈◊〉 promonat floridae, vulgo cabo de la flori 〈◊〉 s●●n Ist●● 〈◊〉 Panamam & Nombre de dios 〈◊〉 Peru cur ●erae cum ●n● metrapoli Cusco, & Com●●●ssimo portu L●nae Orarum etiam Chilae f●eti interi ●●im Pata●onem & cervam del fuego vulgo Este echo ●s Fernando Magallanes Et omnium● portuum, Jasularum, scopulorum, pusianorum, & vadorum tractusque ventorum ex optimus Lus●tanitis cartis hydrographicia delineatio atque emendata The description of the whole coast lying in the South seas of Americae, called Peru, beginning at Rio de Plata, along the coast of Brasilia, Paria, and the gos●eli Castle, with all the Islands called Antilas, Hispaniola, and Cuba, to the Cape of Florida, together with the straits and lands between Panama and Nombre de Dios, all the coasts and land of Golden Peru, with the chief town of Cosi●, and Haven of Lyma, also the coast from Chile, and the channel, or narrow strait of Paragonen, and terra del Fuego, with all the Havens, Islands, Cliffs, sands, depths, and shallows, with the true situation of them INSULAE MOLUCCAE celeberrimae sunt ob. Maximam aromatum copiam quam to tum terrarum orbem mittunt: harum precipuè sunt Ternate, Tidoris, Motir Machion et Bachion, his quidam adiungunt Gilolum, Celebiam, Borneonem, Amboinum et Bandam, Ex Insula Timore in Europam advehuntur Santala reuben & albu, Ex Banda Nuces myristicae, cum Flore, vulgo dicto Macis Et ex Moluccis Cariophilli: quorum icones in pede hujus tabellce ad vivum expressas poni curavinrus map of the Molucca Islands